ANDREWS’  SERIES  OF  LATIN  SCHOOL  ROOKS. 

PUBLISHED  BY  CROCKER  &  BREWSTER, 

47  WASHINGTON  STREET,  BOSTON. 


The  Latin  School  Books  prepared  by  Prof.  E.  A.  Andrews,  exclusive  of  his 
Latin-English  Lexicon,  founded  on  the  Latin-German  Lexicon  of  Dr.  Freund, 
constitute  two  distinct  series,  adapted  to  different  and  distinct  purposes.  The 
basis  of  the  First  Series  is  Andrews’  First  Latin  Book ;  of  the  Second,  An¬ 
drews  and  Stoddard’s  Latin  Grammar. 

FIRST  SERIES. 

This  Series  is  designed  expressly  for  those  who  commence  the  study  of 
Latin  at  a  very  early  age,  and  for  such  as  intend  to  pursue  it  to  a  limited  ex¬ 
tent  only,  or  merely  as  subsidiary  to  the  acquisition  of  a  good  English  educa¬ 
tion.  It  consists  of  the  following  works,  viz. :  — 

1.  Andrews’ First  Latin  Book;  or  Progressive  Les¬ 
sons  in  Reading  and  Writing  Latin.  This  small  volume  contains  most  of  the 
leading  principles  and  grammatical  forms  of  the  Latin  language,  and,  by  the 
logical  precision  of  its  rules  and  definitions,  is  admirably  fitted  to  serve  as  an 
introduction  to  the  study  of  general  grammar.  The  work  is  divided  into  les¬ 
sons  of  convenient  length,  which  are  so  arranged  that  the  student  will,  in  all 
cases,  be  prepared  to  enter  upon  the  study  of  each  successive  lesson,  by  pos¬ 
sessing  a  thorough  knowledge  of  those  which  preceded  it.  The  lessons  gen¬ 
erally  consist  of  three  parts :  —  1st.  The  statement  of  important  principles  in 
the  form  of  rules  or  definitions,  or  the  exhibition  of  orthographical  or  etymo¬ 
logical  forms  ;  2d.  Exercises,  designed  to  illustrate  such  principles  or  forms  ; 
and  3d.  Questions,  intended  to  assist  the  student  in  preparing  his  lesson.  In 
addition  to  the  grammatical  lessons  contained  in  this  volume,  a  few  pages  of 
Reading  Lessons  are  annexed,  and  these  are  followed  by  a  Dictionary  com¬ 
prising  all  the  Latin  words  contained  in  the  work.  This  book  is  adapted  to 
the  use  of  all  schools  above  the  grade  of  primary  schools,  including  also 
Academies  and  Female  Seminaries.  It  is  prepared  in  such  a  manner  that  it 
can  be  used  with  little  difficulty  by  any  intelligent  parent  or  teacher,  with  no 
previous  knowledge  of  the  language. 

2.  The  Latin  Reader,  with  a  Dictionary  and  Notes, 

containing  explanations  of  difficult  idioms,  and  numerous  references  to  the 
Lessons  contained  in  the  First  Latin  Book. 

3.  The  Viri  Romae,  with  a  Dictionary  and  Notes,  re¬ 
ferring,  like  those  of  the  Reader,  to  the  First  Latin  Book.  This  series  of 
three  small  volumes,  if  faithfully  studied  according  to  the  directions  contained 
in  them,  will  not  only  render  the  student  a  very  tolerable  proficient  in  the 
principles  of  the  Latin  language  and  in  the  knowledge  of  its  roots,  from 
which  so  many  words  of  the  English  language  are  derived,  but  will  constitute 
the  best  preparation  for  a  thorough  study  of  English  grammar. 

SECOW©  SERIES. 

This  Series  is  designed  more  especially  for  those  who  are  intending  to  be¬ 
come  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  Latin  language,  and  with  the  principal 
classical  authors  of  that  language.  It  consists  of  the  following  works:  — 

1-  Latin  Lessons.  This  small  volume  is  designed  for 

the  younger  classes  of  Latin  students,  who  intend  ultimately  to  take  up  the 
larger  Grammar,  but  to  whom  that  work  would,  at  first,  appear  too  formida¬ 
ble.  It  contains  the  prominent  principles  of  Latin  grammar,  expressed  in 
the  same  language  as  in  the  larger  Grammar,  and  likewise  Reading  and 
Writing  Lessons,  with  a  Dictionary  of  the  Latin  words  and  phrases  occurring 
in  the  Lessons. 


New  Series  of  Latin  School  Books 


2.  Latin  Grammar.  A  Grammar  of  the  Latin  Lan- 

guage,  for  the  use  of  Schools  and  Colleges.  By  Professors  E.  A.  Andrews 
and  S.  Stoddard.  This  work,  which  for  many  years  has  been  the  text-book 
in  the  department  of  Latin  Grammar  in  a  large  portion  of  American  schools 
and  colleges,  and  which  claims  the  merit  of  having  first  introduced  into  the 
schools  of  this  country  the  subject  of  grammatical  analysis,  which  now  occu¬ 
pies  a  conspicuous  place  in  so  many  grammars  of  the  English  language,  has 
been  recently  revised  and  carefully  corrected  in  every  part. 

3.  Questions  on  the  Grammar.  This  little  volume 

is  intended  to  aid  the  student  in  preparing  his  lessons,  and  the  teacher  in 
conducting  his  recitations. 

4.  A  Synopsis  of  Latin  Grammar,  comprising  the 

Latin  Paradigms,  and  the  Principal  Rules  of  Latin  Etymology  and  Syntax. 
The  few  pages  composing  this  work  contain  those  portions  of  the  Grammar 
to  which  the  student  has  occasion  to  refer  most  frequently  in  the  preparation 
of  his  daily  lessons. 

5.  Latin  Reader.  The  Reader,  by  means  of  two  sepa¬ 
rate  and  distinct  sets  of  notes,  is  equally  adapted  for  use  in  connection  either 
with  the  First  Latin  Book  or  the  Latin  Grammar. 

6.  Viri  Romae.  This  volume,  like  the  Reader,  is  fur¬ 
nished  with  notes  and  references,  both  to  the  First  Latin  Book  and  to  the 
Latin  Grammar.  The  principal  difference  in  the  two  sets  of  notes  found  in 
each  of  these  volumes  consists  in  the  somewhat  greater  fulness  of  those 
which  belong  to  the  smaller  series. 

7.  Latin  Exercises.  This  work  contains  exercises  in 

every  department  of  the  Latin  Grammar,  and  is  so  arranged  that  it  may  be 
studied  in  connection  with  the  Grammar  through  every  stage  of  the  prepara¬ 
tory  course.  It  is  designed  to  prepare  the  way  for  original  composition  in  the 
Latin  language,  both  in  prose  and  verse. 

8.  A  Key  to  Latin  Exercises.  This  Key,  in  which 

all  the  exercises  in  the  preceding  volume  are  fully  corrected,  is  intended  for 
the  use  of  teachers  only. 

9.  Cassar’s  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War,  with  a 

Dictionary  and  Notes.  The  text  of  this  edition  of  Caesar  has  been  formed  by 
reference  to  the  best  German  editions.  The  Notes  are  principally  grammati¬ 
cal.  The  Dictionary,  which,  like  all  the  others  in  the  series,  was  prepared 
with  great  labor,  contains  the  usual  significations  of  the  words,  together  with 
an  explanation  of  all  such  phrases  as  might  otherwise  perplex  the  student. 

10.  Sallust.  Sallust’s  Jugurthine  War  and  Conspiracy  of 

Catiline,  with  a  Dictionary  and  Notes.  The  text  of  this  work,  which  was 
based  upon  that  of  Cortius,  has  been  modified  by  reference  to  the  best  modern 
editions,  especially  by  those  of  Kritz  and  Geriach ;  and  its  orthography  is,  in 
general,  conformed  to  that  of  Pottier  and  Planche.  The  Dictionaries  of 
Caesar  and  Sallust  connected  with  this  series  are  original  works,  and,  in  con 
nection  with  the  Notes  in  each  volume,  furnish  a  very  complete  and  satisfac 
tory  apparatus  for  the  study  of  these  two  authors. 

11.  Ovid.  Selections  from  the  Metamorphoses  and  Hero 

ides  of  Ovid,  with  Notes,  Grammatical  References,  and  Exercises  in  Scanning 
These  selections  from  Ovid  are  designed  as  an  introduction  to  Latin  poetry. 
They  are  accompanied  with  numerous  brief  notes  explanatory  of  difficult 
phrases,  of  obscure  historical  or  mythological  allusions,  and  especially  of 
grammatical  difficulties.  To  these  are  added  such  Exercises  in  Scanning  as 
Rerve  fully  to  introduce  the  student  t6  a  knowledge  of  Latin  prosody,  and 
especially  of  the  structure  and  laws  of  hexameter  and  pentameter  verse. 


New  Series  of  Latin  School  Books. 


Andrews  and  Stoddard’s  Latin  Grammar  has  long  since  been  intro¬ 
duced  into  the  Latin  School  of  the  City  of  Boston,  and  into  most 
of  the  other  principal  Classical  Schools  in  this  country.  It  is  adopted  by 
all  the  Colleges  in  New  England,  viz.,  Harvard,  Yale,  Dartmouth, 
Amherst,  Williams,  Bowdoin,  Waterville,  Middlebury,  Burling¬ 
ton,  Brown  University  at  Providence,  Wesleyan  University  at  Mid¬ 
dletown,  and  Washington  College  at  Hartford;  also  at  Hamilton  Col¬ 
lege,  New  York,  New  York  University,  city  of  New  York,  Cincinnati 
College  and  Marietta  College,  Ohio,  Randolph  Macon  College, 
Virginia,  Mount  Hope  College,  near  Baltimore,  Maryland  Institute 
of  Instruction  and  St.  Mary’s  College,  Baltimore,  and  the  Univer¬ 
sities  of  Michigan  and  Alabama  ;  and  has  been  highly  recommended 
by  Professors  Kingsley,  Woolsey,  Olmstead,  and  Gibbs,  of  Yale  College; 
Professor  Beck,  of  Harvard  College ;  President  Penney  and  Professor  North, 
of  Hamilton  College;  Professor  Packard,  of  Bowdoin  College;  Professor 
Holland,  of  Washington  College ;  Professor  Fisk,  of  Amherst  College,  and 
by  Professor  Hackett,  of  Brown  University;  —  also  by  Messrs.  #)iilaway 
and  Gardner,  of  the  Boston  Latin  School ,  Rev.  Lyman  Colman,  of  the 
English  High  School,  Andover;  Hon.  John  Hall,  Principal  of  the  Elling¬ 
ton  School,  Conn. ;  Mr.  Shaler,  Principal  of  the  Connecticut  Literary 
Institution,  at  Suffield  ;  Simeon  Hart,  Esq.,  Farmington,  Conn. ;  Pro¬ 
fessor  Cogswell,  of  Round  Hill  School,  Northampton ;  President  Shan 
non,  of  Louisiana  College,  and  by  various  periodicals. 

As  a  specimen  of  the  communications  received  from  the  above  sources, 
the  following  extracts  are  given  :  — 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  bear  my  testimony  to  the  superior  merits  of  the 
Latin  Grammar  lately  edited  by  Professor  Andrews  and  Mr.  Stoddard.  I  express 
most  cheerfully,  unhesitatingly,  and  decidedly,  my  preference  of  this  Grammar 
to  that  of  Adam,  which  has,  for  so  long  a  time,  kept  almost  undisputed  sway 
in  our  schools.  —  Dr.  C.  Beck ,  Professor  of  Latin  in  Harvard  University. 

I  know  of  no  grammar  published  in  this  country,  which  promises  to  answer  so 
well  the  purposes  of  elementary  classical  instruction,  and  shall  be  glad  to  see  it 
introduced  into  our  best  schools.  —  Mr.  Charles  K.  Dillaway,  Master  of  the 
Public  Latin  School,  Boston. 

Your  new  Latin  Grammar  appears  to  me  much  better  suited  to  the  use  of 
students  than  any  other  grammar  I  am  acquainted  with.  —  Professor  William 
M.  Holland,  Washington  College,  Hartford,  Conn. 

I  can  with  much  pleasure  say  that  your  Grammar  seems  to  me  much  better 
adapted  to  the  present  condition  and  wants  of  our  schools  than  any  one  with  which 
I  am  acquainted,  and  to  supply  that  which  has  long  been  wanted  —  a  good  Latin 
grammar  for  common  use.  —  Mr.  F.  Gardner,  one  of  the  Masters  Boston  Lat.  Sch. 

The  Latin  Grammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  is  deserving,  in  my  opinion,  of 
the  approbation  which  so  many  of  our  ablest  teachers  have  bestowed  upon  it. 
It  is  believed  that,  of  all  the  grammars  at  present  before  the  public,  this  has 
greatly  the  advantage,  in  regard  both  to  the  excellence  of  its  arrangement,  and 
the  accuracy  and  copiousness  of  its  information;  and  it  is  earnestly  hoped  that 
its  merits  will  procure  for  it  that  general  favor  and  use  to  which  it  is  entitled. 
—  H.  B.  Hackett ,  Professor  of  Biblical  Literature  in  Newton  Theol.  Sem. 

The  universal  favor  with  which  this  Grammar  is  received  was  not  unexpected. 
It  will  bear  a  thorough  and  discriminating  examination.  In  the  use  of  well- 
oefined  and  expressive  terms,  especially  in  the  syntax,  we  know  of  no  Latin  or 
Greek  grammar  which  is  to  be  compared  to  tjiis.  —  Amer.  Quarterly  Register. 

The  Latin  Grammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  I  consider  a  woik  of  great 
merit.  I  have  found  in  it  several  principles  of  the  Latin  language  correctly  ex¬ 
plained  which  I  had  myself  learned  from  a  twenty  years’  study  of  that  language, 
but  had  never  seen  illustrated  in  anv  grammar  Andrews’s  First  Lessons  l  coo 


New  Series  of  Latin  School  Books. 


aider  a  valuable  work  for  beginners,  and  in  the  sphere  which  it  is  designed  to 
occupy,  I  know  not  that  I  have  met  its  equal.  —  Rev.  James  Shannon ,  President 
of  College  of  Louisiana. 

These  works  will  furnish  a  series  of  elementary  publications  for  the  study  of 
Latin  altogether  in  advance  of  any  thing  which  has  hitherto  appeared,  either  in 
this  country  or  in  England.  —  American  Biblical  Repository. 

We  have  made  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  the  subject  both  of 
reference  and  recitation  daily  for  several  months,  and  I  cheerfully  and  decidedly 
bear  testimony  to  its  superior  excellence  to  any  manual  of  the  kind  with  which 
1  am  acquainted.  Every  part  bears  the  impress  of  a  careful  compiler.  The 
principles  of  syntax  are  happily  developed  in  the  rules,  whilst  those  relating  to 
the  moods  and  tenses  supply  an  important  deficiency  in  our  former  grammars. 
The  rules  of  prosody  are  also  clearly  and  fully  exhibited.  —  Rev.  Lyman  Cole¬ 
man,  Principal  of  Burr  Seminary ,  Manchester ,  Vt. 

1  have  examined  Andrews  and  Stoddard’s  Latin  Grammar,  and  regard  it  as 
superior  to  any  thing  of  the  kind  now  in  use.  It  is  what  has  long  been  needed, 
and  will  undoubtedly  be  welcomed  by  every  one  interested  in  the  philology  of 
the  Latin  language.  We  shall  hereafter  use  it  as  a  text-book  in  this  institution 
—  Mr.  Wm.  H.  Shaler,  Principal  of  the  Connecticut  Lit.  Institution  at  Sujffield. 

This  work  bears  evident  marks  of  great  care  and  skill,  and  ripe  and  accurate 
scholarship  in  the  authors.  It  excels  most  grammars  in  this  particular,  that, 
while  by  its  plainness  it  is  suited  to  the  necessities  of  most  beginners,  by  its 
fulness  and  detail  it  will  satisfy  the  inquiries  of  the  advanced  scholar,  and  will 
be  a  suitable  companion  at  all  stages  of  his  progress.  We  cordially  commend 
it  to  the  student  and  teacher.  —  Biblical  Repository. 

Your  Grammar  is  what  I  expected  it  would  be  —  an  excellent  book,  and  just  the 
thing  w’hich  was  needed.  We  cannot  hesitate  a  moment  in  laying  aside  the 
books  now  in  use,  and  introducing  this.  —  Rev.  J.  Penney ,  D.  D .,  President  of 
Hamilton  College,  New  York. 

Your  Grammar  bears  throughout  evidence  of  original  and  thorough  investiga¬ 
tion  and  sound  criticism.  1  hope,  and  doubt  not,  it  will  be  adopted  in  our  schools 
and  colleges,  it  being,  in  my  apprehension,  so  far  as  simplicity  is  concerned,  on 
the  one  hand,  and  philosophical  views  and  sound  scholarship  on  the  other,  far 
preferable  to  other  grammars:;  a  work  at  the  same  time  highly  creditable  to  your¬ 
selves  and  to  our  country.  —  Professor  A.  Packard ,  Bowdoin  College,  Maine. 

This  Grammar  appears  to  me  to  be  accommodated  alike  to  the  wants  of  the 
new  beginner  and  the  experienced  scholar,  and.  as  such,  well  fitted  to  supply 
what  has  long  been  felt  to  he  a  great  desideratum  in  the  department  of  classical 
learning.  —  Professor  S.  North ,  Hamilton  College,  New  York. 

From  such  an  examination  of  this  Grammar  as  I  have  been  able  to  give  it,  1 
do  not  hesitate  to  pronounce  it  superior  to  any  other  with  which  I  am  acquainted. 
I  have  never  seen,  any  where,  a  greater  amount  of  valuable  matter  compressed 
within  limits  equally  narrow.  —  Hon.  John  Hall,  Prin.  of  Ellington  School,  Conn. 

We  have  no  hesitation  in  pronouncing  this  Grammar  decidedly  superior  to 
any  now  in  use.  —  Boston  Recorder. 

I  am  ready  to  express  mv  great  satisfaction  with  your  Grammar,  and  do  not 
hesitate  to  say,  that  1  am  better  pleased  with  such  portions  of  the  syntax  as  1 
have  perused,  than  with  the  corresponding  portions  in  any  other  grammar  with 
which  I  am  acquainted. —  Professor  N.  IV.  Fiske,  Amherst  College,  Mass. 

I  know  of  no  grammar  in  the  Latin  language  so  well  adapted  to  answer  the 
purpose  for  which  it  was  designed  as  this.  The  book  of  Questions  is  a  valuable 
attendant  of  the  Grammar.  —  Simeon  Hart,  Esq.,  Farmington,  Conn. 

This  Grammar  has  received  the  labor  of  years,  and  is  the  result  of  much  re 
flection  and  experience,  and  mature  scholarship.  As  such,  it  claims  the  atten 
tion  of  all  who  are  interested  in  the  promotion  of  sound  learning.  —  N.  Y.  Obs. 

This  Grammar  is  an  original  work.  Its  arrangement  is  philosophical,  and  it* 
rules  clear  and  precise,  beyond  those  of  any  other  grammar  we  have  seen  — 
Por  tland  Christian  Mirror 


A 


GRAMMAR 

OP  THB 

LATIN  LANGUAGE; 

FOR  THU 

USE  OF  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES. 


E.  A.  ANDREWS  AND  S.  STODDARD. 


THE  SIXTY-FIFTH  EDITION. 

REVISED  WITH  CORRECTIONS  AND  ADDITIONS, 

BY  E.  A.  ANDREWS,  LL.  D. 


BOSTON: 

PUBLISHED  BY  CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER, 

47  Washington  Street. 

1857. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1857, 
BY  CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER, 

In  the  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


^  v  <a  c:  ^  $ 


PREFACE. 


cr 

d 


P* 


4*3 

•  i — i 

ty 


t-» 


rH 


03 


As  more  than  twenty  years  have  elapsed,  since  the  first  publication  of  thi3 
Grammar,  it  can  scarcely  be  necessary,  in  offering  to  the  public  a  revised 
edition  of  the  work,  to  make  more  than  a  passing  allusion  to  its  original  plan 
or  to  the  circumstances  to  which  it  owed  its  origin. 

For  some  years  previous  to  the  date  of  its  publication,  the  progress  of  classi¬ 
cal  learning  in  Europe,  and  particularly  in  Germany,  had  been  such,  as  plainly 
to  indicate  the  necessity  of  a  corresponding  advance  in  the  manuals  of  Latin 
grammar  employed  in  the  schools  of  this  country.  Their  deficiencies  had 
indeed  become  so  apparent,  that  various  attempts  had  already  been  made  to 
furnish  a  remedy  by  means  of  translations  of  German  grammars ;  but  none  of 
these,  however  excellent  in  many  respects,  had  seemed  to  be  fully  adapted  to 
the  purpose  for  which  they  were  intended. 

To  unite  the  acknowledged  excellencies  of  the  older  English  manuals  and  of 
the  more  recent  German  grammars  was  the  special  aim  of  the  authors  of  this 
work;  and  to  this  end  their  attention  was  directed,  first  to  the  preparation  of 
more  extended  rules  for  the  pronunciation  of  the  language,  secondly  to  a  clearer 
exposition  of  its  inflectional  changes,  thirdly  to  the  proper  basis  of  its  syntax, 
and  fourthly  to  greater  precision  in  its  rules  and  definitions. 

The  system  of  rules  for  the  division  and  accentuation  of  Latin  words,  pre¬ 
pared  in  pursuance  of  the  plan  which  has  just  been  specified,  was  accordingly 
more  copious  than  any  previously  found  in  the  Latin  grammars  in  common 
use  in  this  country.  For  the  purpose  also  of  preventing  the  formation  of  erro¬ 
neous  habits  of  pronunciation  in  the  early  part  of  the  student’s  course,  the  pe¬ 
nultimate  quantities  of  all  Latin  words  occurring  in  the  Grammar  were  care¬ 
fully  marked,  unless  determinable  by  some  general  rule,  and  the  paradigms 
were  divided  and  accented  in  such  a  manner  as  to  indicate  their  true  pro¬ 
nunciation. 

In  their  treatment  of  Latin  etymology,  the  authors  aimed  to  render  its  study 
less  a  mere  exercise  of  memory,  and  in  a  greater  degree  an  efficient  aid  in  the 
general  cultivation  of  the  mental  powers.  The  principal  means  adopted  for  this 
purpose  consisted  in  the  practical  distinction,  every  where  made  in  treating 
inflected  words,  between  the  root,  or  ground-form,  and  the  termination. 


4 


PREFACE. 


The  third  prominent  peculiarity  of  the  original  work  was  its  direct  derivation 
of  the  rules  of  Syntax  from  the  logical  analysis  of  sentences,  and  its  distinct 
specification  of  the  particular  use  of  each  of  the  several  words  of  which  a  sen¬ 
tence  is  composed.  This  method  of  treating  syntax — a  method  previously  un¬ 
known  in  the  schools  of  this  country — has,  since  that  period,  been  extensively 
adopted,  and  in  some  instances  greatly  extended,  particularly  in  a  portion  of 
the  English  grammars  recently  published  in  this  country,  and  has  probably 
contributed  more  to  the  advancement  of  grammatical  science,  than  any  other 
innovation  of  modern  times. 

The  errors  noticed  in  the  original  work  have  been  corrected,  as  successive 
editions  have  issued  from  the  press,  but  no  opportunity  has  occurred,  until  the 
present,  of  thoroughly  revising  it  in  every  part.  Two  years  of  continuous 
labor  have  now  been  devoted  to  its  revision,  and  to  the  purpose  of  rendering 
it  conformable  in  all  respects  to  the  advanced  position  which  it  originally 
aspired  to  occupy. 

In  all  the  modifications  which  have  now  been  made,  I  have  aimed  to  accom¬ 
plish  these  two  purposes — to  preserve,  as  far  as  possible,  the  identity  of  the 
work,  and  at  the  same  time  to  bring  it  as  near,  as  should  be  practicable,  to  the 
present  state  of  philological  science.  Hence,  while  I  have  made  no  changes 
either  in  language  or  arrangement,  but  such  as  appeared  to  me  quite  neces¬ 
sary,  I  have  omitted  none  which  logical  accuracy  or  requisite  fulness  of  ex¬ 
planation  seemed  to  demand.  In  doing  even  this  it  soon  became  evident,  that 
the  changes  and  additions  must  be  more  numerous,  than  would  well  consist 
with  the  convenient  use  of  the  old  and  the  new  editions  in  the  same  classes. 
Though  not  insensible  of  the  trouble  occasioned  to  the  teacher  by  altera¬ 
tions  in  a  familiar  text-book,  I  could  not  but  suppose,  that  such  modifications 
as  the  progress  of  the  last  twenty  years  had  rendered  necessary,  would  still  be 
welcomed  by  him,  notwithstanding  the  personal  inconvenience  arising  from 
the  disturbance  of  his  previous  associations.  To  his  pupils,  who  will  have 
known  no  other  form  of  the  Grammar,  than  that  in  which  it  now  appears,  the 
work,  it  is  believed,  will  not  only  be  as  easy  of  comprehension  in  its  new,  as 
in  its  old  form,  but  in  its  practical  application  far  more  satisfactory. 

Of  the  minor  changes  and  additions  occurring  on  almost  every  page,  and 
even  of  the  occasional  rearrangement  of  small  portions  of  the  materials,  it  is 
unnecessary  to  speak  particularly.  The  student  familiar  with  former  editions 
will  at  once  detect  these  slight  modifications,  and  note  them  in  his  memory 
for  future  use ;  and  though  he  may  fail  to  find  a  rule,  exception,  or  remark  on 
the  page  where  he  has  been  wont  to  see  it,  he  will  still  meet  with  it  in  the 
same  relative  position, — in  the  same  section  and  subdivision  of  the  section  in 
which  it  formerly  appeared. 

In  the  department  of  Orthoepy  will  now  be  found  some  account  of  the  Con¬ 
tinental  mode  of  pronouncing  Latin;  and,  by  means  of  the  joint  exhibition  of 


PREFACE. 


5 


this  and  of  the  English  methods,  the  student  will  be  able  to  use  the  Grammar 
with  equal  facility,  whether  choosing  to  adhere  to  the  usual  pronunciation  of 
English  and  American  scholars,  or  preferring  that  of  the  continental  schools. 

In  the  Etymology  of  nouns,  no  other  alteration  need  be  specified,  except  the 
introduction,  in  the  third  declension,  of  “  Rules  for  forming  the  nominative 
singular  from  the  root.”  These  are  copied,  in  a  modified  form,  from  the  edi¬ 
tor’s  First  Latin  Book.  In  themselves  they  are  of  considerable  utility  in 
showing  the  mutual  relations  between  the  sounds  of  certain  letters,  and  they 
are  also  closely  connected  with  corresponding  changes  in  some  of  the  verbal 
roots.  In  the  Etymology  of  adjectives,  besides  the  minor  modifications  already 
alluded  to,  a  few  changes  in  arrangement  have  been  made  in  those  sections 
which  relate  to  Comparison.  To  pronouns  have  been  added  some  remarks  on 
Pronominal  Adjectives,  which  seemed  to  require  a  more  particular  notice, 
than  they  had  heretofore  received,  both  in  their  relation  to  each  other  and 
to  the  Adverbial  Correlatives.  The  Etymology  of  particles  has  been  treated 
somewhat  more  fully  than  in  former  editions — a  fulness  especially  observable 
in  relation  to  adverbs  and  conjunctions,  and  which  was  rendered  necessary 
by  the  more  extended  treatment  of  those  particles  in  the  revised  Syntax. 

In  almost  every  section  of  the  Syntax  the  student  will  meet  with  modifica¬ 
tions  and  especially  with  additions,  which,  as  in  other  parts  of  the  work,  are 
introduced  in  such  a  manner  as  seldom  to  interfere  with  the  references  made 
to  former  editions  in  the  series  based  upon  this  Grammar.  The  principal  ex¬ 
ception  to  the  latter  remark  is  to  be  found  in  sections  247 — 251,  which  relate 
to  certain  uses  of  the  ablative. 

A  comparison  of  the  Prosody  in  the  present  and  former  editions  will  show, 
that  it  has  been  revised  with  minute  care  in  every  part.  Similar  attention  has 
also  been  given  to  the  Appendix,  in  which  will  be  found  some  additions  relat¬ 
ing  to  Roman  Money,  Weights  and  Measures.  For  the  greater  convenience  of 
the  student  the  Index  in  this  edition  has  been  much  enlarged. 

In  conclusion,  I  would  briefly  indicate  the  principal  sources  from  which 
have  been  derived  the  various  additions  and  corrections,  to  which  allusion  has 
been  made.  In  preparing  the  original  work,  the  earlier  editions  of  Zumpt’s 
Grammar  were  consulted  at  almost  every  step,  and  while  frequent  use  was 
made  of  the  grammars  of  Scheller,  Grant,  Adam,  Ruddiman,  Hickie  and 
others,  the  treatises  of  Zumpt  were  even  then  regarded  as  the  most  valuable 
embodiment  of  the  principles  of  Latin  philology.  It  was  therefore  natural 
and  almost  unavoidable,  in  revising  a  work  which  had  in  so  many  points  re¬ 
ceived  both  its  form  and  its  substance  from  the  earlier  labors  of  that  distin¬ 
guished  grammarian,  to  look  to  his  maturer  works  for  many  of  the  materials 
by  means  of  which  our  original  sketch  should  be  made  more  complete. 
Accordingly  I  have  constantly  consulted  the  last  edition  of  his  Grammar, 
translated  by  Dr.  Schmitz,  and  have  freely  incorporated  in  this  edition  such 
1* 


6 


PREFACE. 


of  its  materials,  as  were  suited  to  my  purpose.  In  most  cases  his  ideas  have 
been  either  expressed  in  my  own  language,  or  in  language  so  modified  as  to 
suit  the  general  plan  of  my  work.  In  the  Etymology,  and  not  unfrequently  in 
the  Syntax  also,  the  copious  Grammar  of  Ramshorn  has  furnished  valuable 
materials ;  and  the  Grammars  of  Key  and  of  Ktihner,  the  latter  translated  by 
Prof.  Champlin,  have  been  consulted  with  profit  and  satisfaction.  In  the 
sections  comprising  conjunctions,  and  especially  in  those  relating  to  gram¬ 
matical  analysis,  I  am  happy  to  acknowledge  my  indebtedness  to  Prof.  S.  S. 
Greene  of  Brown  University.  To  the  sources  already  specified  I  must  add  the 
Latin  Lexicon  of  Dr.  Freund,  in  editing  a  translation  of  which  I  had  frequent 
occasion  to  note  such  matters  as  promised  to  be  of  utility  in  the  revision  of  this 
Grammar.  The  additions  in  the  Appendix  relating  to  Roman  money,  etc., 
are  taken  principally  from  Dr.  Riddle’s  translation  of  Dr.  Freund’s  School 
Dictionary.  To  these  references  I  will  only  add,  that  such  other  notes  re¬ 
lating  to  Latin  philology,  as  I  have  made  during  the  past  twenty  years,  so 
far  as  they  were  adapted  to  my  purpose,  have  either  been  used  in  my  former 
occasional  corrections,  or  are  incorporated  in  the  present  edition. 

In  taking  a  final  leave  of  the  earliest  of  the  elementary  Latin  works  with 
which  my  name  has  been  associated,  and  with  which,  in  my  own  mind,  must 
ever  be  connected  the  pleasant  memory  of  my  early  friend  and  associate, 
Prof.  Stoddard,  I  trust  I  shall  be  pardoned  in  commending  it  once  more  to 
the  kind  indulgence  of  the  teachers  of  this  country,  and  in  expressing  the 
hope  that,  in  its  present  form,  it  will  be  deemed  not  altogether  unworthy  of  a 
continuance  of  the  favor  which  it  has  so  long  received.  I  cannot  indeed  ven¬ 
ture  to  indulge  the  hope,  that  all  the  imperfections  of  the  work  have  even  now 
been  removed,  or  that,  in  my  attempts  to  render  it  more  perfect,  I  may  not 
sometimes  have  fallen  into  new  errors ;  but  this  I  can  truly  say,  that  since  its 
first  publication  I  have  devoted  much  time  to  its  revision,  and  have  sought  to 
manifest  my  sense  of  the  kindness  with  which  it  has  been  received,  by  doing 
all  in  my  power  to  render  it  less  unworthy  of  public  favor. 

E.  A.  ANDREWS. 


New  Britain ,  Conn.y  Oct .,  1857. 


CONTENTS 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


Letters .  9 

Division  of  letters .  10 

Diphthongs .  10 

Punctuation .  10 

ORTHOEPY. 

Continental  pronunciation .  11 

English  pronunciation .  11 

Sounds  of  the  letters .  11 

-  of  the  vowels .  11 

-  of  the  diphthongs .  12 

-  of  the  consonants .  13 

Quantity  of  syllables .  14 

Accentuation .  15 

Latin  accents .  15 

English  accents .  16 


Division  of  words  into  syllables. ...  16 


ETYMOLOGY. 

Nouns .  19 

Gender .  20 

Number .  22 

Cases .  23 

Declensions .  23 

First  declension .  25 

Greek  nouns .  26 

Second  declension .  26 

Greek  nouns .  29 

Third  declension .  29 

Formation  of  nom.  sing .  30 

Rules  for  the  gender .  33 

- oblique  cases. ...  36 

Greek  nouns .  45 

Fourth  declension .  45 

Fifth  declension .  47 

Declension  of  compound  nouns . .  47 

Irregular  nouns .  48 

Variable  nouns .  48 

Defective  nouns .  49 

Redundant  nouns .  54 

Derivation  of  nouns .  56 

Composition  of  nouns .  60 

Abjectives..  . . .  61 

Adjectives  of  the  first  and  second 

declensions .  62 

Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  64 
Rules  for  the  oblique  cases. ...  67 


Page. 


Irregular  adjectives .  69 

Defective  adjectives .  69 

Redundant  adjectives .  69 

Numeral  adjectives .  70 

Comparison  of  adjectives .  74 

Irregular  comparison .  75 

Defective  comparison .  76 

Derivation  of  adjectives .  78 

Composition  of  adjectives .  81 

Pronouns .  82 

Substantive  pronouns .  82 

Adjective  pronouns .  83 

Demonstrative  pronouns .  83 

Intensive  pronouns .  85 

Relative  pronouns .  86 

Interrogative  pronouns .  87 

Indefinite  pronouns. . .  88 

Possessive  pronouns .  89 

Patrial  pronouns .  90 

Pronominal  adjectives .  90 

Verbs .  91 

Voices . 91 

Moods .  92 

Tenses .  93 

Numbers .  95 

Persons .  95 

Participles,  gerunds,  and  supines  95 

Conjugation .  96 

Table  of  terminations .  98 

Sum .  100 

Prosum ,  Possum ,  etc .  102 

First  conjugation .  103 

Second  conjugation .  108 

Third  conjugation .  Ill 

Fourth  conjugation .  116 

Deponent  verbs .  120 

Remarks  on  the  conjugations. . .  121 

Periphrastic  conjugations .  123 

General  rules  of  conjugation  . . .  124 
Formation  of  second  and  third 

roots .  125 

First  conjugation .  125 

Second  conjugation .  129 

Third  conjugation .  131 

Fourth  conjugation .  139 

Irregular  verbs .  140 

Defective  verbs .  145 

Impersonal  verbs .  147 


8 


CONTENTS, 


Page. 


Redundant  verbs .  150 

Derivation  of  verbs .  152 

Composition  of  verbs .  154 

Particles .  155 

Adverbs .  155 

Derivation  of  adverbs .  160 

Composition  of  adverbs .  162 

Comparison  of  adverbs .  163 

Prepositions .  163 

Prepositions  in  composition. . . .  167 

Conjunctions .  170 

Interjections .  176 

SYNTAX. 

Sentences  and  Propositions .  177 

Subject .  178 

Predicate .  181 

Apposition .  183 

Adjectives .  184 

Relatives .  189 

Demonstratives*,  etc .  193 

Reflexives .  198 

Nominative .  200 

Subject-nominative  and  verb.. .  200 

Predicate-nominative .  205 

Genitive .  206 

Genitive  after  nouns .  206 

- after  partitives .  211 

- after  adjectives .  214 

- after  verbs .  216 

- of  place .  221 

- after  particles .  222 

Dative.... . .  222 

Dative  after  adjectives .  222 

- after  verbs .  225 

- after  particles .  230 

Accusative .  231 

Accusative  after  verbs .  231 

- after  prepositions . . .  237 

- of  time  and  space  . .  239 

- of  place .  240 

- after  adjectives,  ad¬ 
verbs  and  interjections .  241 

Subject-accusative .  242 

Vocative .  243 

Ablative .  243 

Ablative  after  prepositions . 243 

- - after  certain  nouns, 

adjectives  and  verbs .  244 

- -  of  cause,  etc .  246 

- - of  price .  252 

- - -  of  time .  252 

- of  place .  254 

- *  after  comparatives .  255 

- -  absolute .  258 

Connection  of  tenses .  261 

Indicative  mood .  263 

Subjunctive  mood .  265 


Page. 


Protasis  and  apodosis .  268 

Subjunctive  after  particles .  269 

- after  qui .  275 

- in  indirect  questions  278 

- in  inserted  clauses..  279 

Imperative  mood .  281 

Infinitive  mood .  282 

Participles .  292 

Gerunds  and  gerundives .  296 

Supines . 299 

Adverbs .  300 

Prepositions .  303 

Conjunctions .  304 

Interjections... . : .  306 

Arrangement .  306 

Arrangement  of  words .  306 

- of  clauses .  310 

Analysis . 312 

Parsing .  313 

PROSODY. 

Quantity .  319 

General  rules .  319 

Special  rules .  322 

First  and  middle  syllables .. . .  322 

Derivative  words .  322 

Compound  words .  324 

Increment  of  nouns .  325 

Increment  of  verbs .  329 

Penults  and  antepenults.. . .  331 

Final  syllables .  336 

Versification .  341 

Feet .  341 

Metre .  342 

Verses .  342 

Figures  of  prosody .  343 

Arsis  and  thesis .  346 

Caesura .  347 

Different  kinds  of  metre .  347 

Dactylic  metre .  347 

Anapaestic  metre .  350 

Iambic  metre .  351 

Trochaic  metre .  353 

Choriambic  metre .  354 

Ionic  metre . 355 

Compound  metres .  356 

Combination  of  verses .  356 

Horatian  metres .  357 

Key  to  the  odes  of  Horace .  359 

APPENDIX. 

Grammatical  figures . 361 

Tropes  and  figures  of  rhetoric ....  363 
Roman  mode  of  reckoning  time. . .  367 

- money,  weight,  etc.  370 

Abbreviations .  374 

Different  ages  of  Roman  literature^B74 
Writers  of  the  different  ages .  375 

INDEX .  378 


,6  i’ 

\  •*<? 


LATIN  GRAMMAR. 


§  1.  The  Latin  language  is  the  language  spoken  by  the  an¬ 
cient  Romans.  Latin  Grammar  teaches  the  principles  of  the 
Latin  language.  These  relate, 

1.  To  its  written  characters ; 

2.  To  its  pronunciation  ; 

3.  To  the  classification  and  derivation  of  its  words ; 

4.  To  the  construction  of  its  sentences  ; 

5.  To  the  quantity  of  its  syllables,  and  its  versification. 

The  first  part  is  called  Orthography  ;  the  second,  Orthoepy ;  the 
third,  Etymology  ;  the  fourth,  Syntax  ;  and  the  fifth,  Prosody. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


§  2.  Orthography  treats  of  the  letters,  and  other  characters 
of  written  language,  and  the  proper  mode  of  spelling  words. 

1.  The  Latin  alphabet  consists  of  twenty-five  letters.  They  have 
the  same  names  as  the  corresponding  characters  in  English.  They 
are  A,  a  ;  B,  b ;  C,  c  ;  D,  d  ;  E,  e  ;  F,  f ;  G,  g  ;  H,  h  ;  I,  i ;  J,  j  ; 
K,  k  ;  L,  1 ;  M,  m ;  N,  n ;  O,  o  ;  P,  p ;  Q,  q  ;  R,  r ;  S,  s ;  T,  t ;  U,  u ; 
V,  v;  X,  X  ;  Y,  y;  Z,  z: 

2.  The  Romans  used  only  the  capital  letters. 

3.  I  and  j  were  anciently  but  one  character,  as  were  likewise  u  and  v. 

4.  W  is  not  found  in  Latin  words,  and  k  occurs  only  at  the  beginning  of  a 
few  words  before  a,  and  even  in  these  c  is  commonly  used,  except  in  their  ab¬ 
breviated  form ;  as,  K  or  Kal.  for  Kalendce  or  Calencke,  the  Calends. 

5.  Y  and  z  are  found  only  in  words  derived  from  the  Greek. 

6.  27,  though  called  a  letter,  only  denotes  a  breathing,  or  aspiration. 


10 


DIPHTHONGS. - PUNCTUATION. 


§3—5. 


DIVISION  OF  LETTERS. 

§  3«  Letters  are  divided  into  vowels  and  consonants . 


1.  The  vowels  are . a,  e,  t,  o,  w,  y. 

"Liquids, . ...  I,  m,  n,  r. 

( Labials, . p,  b,  /,  v. 

The  consonants  are  Mutes,  <  Palatals, . c,  g,  k,  q,  j. 

divided  into  <  ( Linguals,  .  ...  t,  d. 

Sibilant, . s.  C  , 

Double  consonants, .  ...  x,  z. 

w  Aspirate, . h. 


2.  X  is  equivalent  to  cs  or  gs;  z  to  ts  or  ds;  and,  except  in  com¬ 
pound  words,  the  double  consonant  is  always  written,  instead  of  the 
letters  which  it  represents.  In  some  Greek  words  x  is  equivalent 
to  chs. 


Diphthongs. 

« 

§  4L.  Two  vowels,  in  immediate  succession,  in  the  same  syl¬ 
lable,  are  called  a  diphthong. 

The  diphthongs  are  ae ,  ai,  at/,  ei,  eu ,  oe ,  oi ,  ua,  we,  ui,  wo,  ww,  and  yi. 
Ae  and  oe  are  frequently  written  together,  ce,  ce . 

PUNCTUATION. 

§5.  The  only  mark  of  punctuation  used  by  the  ancients  was  a  point, 
which  denoted  pauses  of  different  length,  according  as  it  was  placed  at  the  top, 
the  middle,  or  the  bottom  of  the  line.  The  moderns  use  the  same  marks  of 
punctuation,  in  writing  and  printing  Latin,  as  in  their  own  languages,  and  as¬ 
sign  to  them  the  same  power. 

Marks  of  quantity  and  of  accent  are  sometimes  found  in  Latin  authors,  espe¬ 
cially  in  elementary  works : — 

1.  There  are  three  marks  of  quantity,  viz.  v,  -,  the  first  de¬ 
notes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  is  short ;  the  second,  that  it 
is  long ;  the  third,  that  it  is  doubtful,  that  is,  sometimes  long  and 
sometimes  short. 

2.  There  are  also  three  written  accents — the  acute  (  '),  the  grave 
(  '),  and  the  circumflex  (^).  These  were  used  by  the  old  gramma¬ 
rians  to  denote  the  rising  and  sinking  of  the  voice  in  the  Roman  mode 
of  pronouncing  words.  (See  §§  14  and  15.)  In  modern  elementary 
Latin  works,  the  acute  marks  the  emphatic  syllable  of  a  word,  (§  16), 
the  grave  distinguishes  certain  particles  from  other  words  spelled  in 
the  same  manner ;  as,  quod,  because  ;  quod ,  which  ;  and  the  circum¬ 
flex  is  placed  over  certain  penultimate  and  final  syllables  that  are 
formed  by  contraction. 

The  diaeresis  ( ")  denotes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  does 
not  form  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel ;  as,  a'tr ,  the  air.  It 
is  used  principally  with  ae,  ai,  and  oe. 


§6,7. 


11 


ORTHOEPY. - SOUNDS  OF  THE  VOWELS. 


ORTHOEPY. 

§  6.  Orthoepy  treats  of  the  right  pronunciation  of  words. 

The  ancient  pronunciation  of  the  Latin  language  being  in  a  great  measure 
lost,  the  learned,  in  modern  times,  have  applied  to  it  those  principles  which 
regulate  the  pronunciation  of  their  own  languages;  and  hence  has  arisen,  in 
different  countries,  a  great  diversity  of  practice. 

The  various  systems  now  prevalent  in  Europe,  may,  however,  he  reduced  to 
two — the  Continental  and  the  English — the  former  prevailing,  with  only  slight 
diversities,  in  most  of  the  countries  of  continental  Europe,  and  the  latter  in 
England.  Their  principal  difference  is  found  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  vowels 
and  diphthongs,  since,  in  both  methods,  the  consonants  are  pronounced  in 
nearly  the  same  manner. 


The  Continental  Method. 


[According  to  this  system,  each  of  the  vowels,  when  standing  at 
the  end  of  a  syllable,  is  considered  as  having  but  one  sound,  which, 
however,  may  be  either  short  or  long.  Thus, 


Short  a,  as  in  hat. 
Long  a,  as  in  father. 
Short  e,  as  in  met. 
Long  e,  as  in  there. 
Short  l,  as  in  sit. 

Long  i,  as  in  machine. 
Short  o,  as  in  not. 


Long  o,  as  in  no. 
Short  u,  as  in  tub. 
Long  u,  as  in  full, 
ae  or  ce,  as  e  in  there, 
au,  as  ou  in  our. 
eu,  as  in  feudal, 
ei,  as  i  in  ice. 


Remark.  These  sounds  are  sometimes  slightly  modified  when 
followed  by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable.] 

The  English  Method. 


In  the  following  rules  for  dividing  and  pronouncing  Latin  words,  regard  has 
been  had  both  to  English  analogy  and  to  the  laws  of  Latin  accentuation.  See 
$  14  and  15.  The  basis  of  this  system  is  that  which  is  exhibited  by  Walker  in 
his  “  Pronunciation  of  Greek  and  Latin  Proper  Names.”  To  pronounce  cor¬ 
rectly,  according  to  this  method,  a  knowledge  of  the  following  particulars  is 
requisite : — 

1.  Of  the  sounds  of  the  letters  in  all  their  combinations. 

2.  Of  the  quantities  of  the  penultimate  and  final  syllables. 

3.  Of  the  place  of  the  accent ,  both  primary  and  secondary. 

4.  Of  the  mode  of  dividing  words  into  syllables. 


OF  THE  SOUNDS  OF  THE  LETTERS. 

I.  Of  the  Vowels. 

§  7.  A  vowel,  when  ending  an  accented  syllable,  has  al¬ 
ways  its  long  English  sound ;  as, 

pa'-ter ,  de'-dit ,  vi'-vus,  Uf-tus ,  tu'-ba,  Tf-rus ;  in  which  the  accented  vowels 
are  pronounced  as  in  fatal ,  metre,  vital ,  total,  tutor,  tyrant. 


12 


SOUNDS  OF  THE  DIPHTHONGS. 


§8,  9. 


1.  Ay  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  has  nearly  the  sound 
of  a  in  father  or  in  ah ,  but  less  distinct  or  prolonged  ;  as,  mu-sa , 
e-pis' -to-lay  a-cer'-buSy  Pal-a-me  -des  ;  pronounced  mu-zahy  etc. 

2.  Ey  Oy  and  w,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  have  nearly 
the  same  sound  as  when  accented,  but  shorter  and  less  distinct;  as, 
re'-tey  vo'-lo ,  u-su-i. 

3.  (a.)  I  final  has  always  its  long  sound ;  as,  qui ,  an' -di ,  le-ga-ti . 

Rem.  1.  The  final  i  of  tibi  and  sibi  has  its  short  sound. 

(&.)  Iy  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable  not  final,  has  an  indis¬ 
tinct  sound  like  short  g;  as,  Fa  -bi-us  (fa'-be-us),  phi-los  -d-phus  (phe- 
los'-o-phus). 

Exc.  I  has  its  long  sound  in  the  first  syllable  of  a  word  the  second  of  which 
is  accented,  when  it  either  stands  alone  before  a  consonant,  as  in  i-do'-ne^uSy  or 
ends  a  syllable  before  a  vowel,  as  in  fi-e'-bam. 

Rem.  2.  Y  is  always  pronounced  like  i  in  the  same  situation. 

§  8.  A  vowel  has  always  its  short  English  sound,  when  fol¬ 
lowed  by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable  ;  as, 

mag'-nuSy  reg'-num ,  fin'-gOy  hoCy  fus'-tis ,  cyg'nus ,  in  which  the  vowels  are  pro¬ 
nounced  as  in  inagnety  seldomy  finish,  copyy  lustrey  symbol. 

Exception  1.  A,  when  it  follows  qu  before  dr  and  rt ,  has  the 
sounds  of  a  in  quadrant  and  in  quart ;  as,  qua-drOy  quad-ra-gin  -ta, 
quar'-tus.  In  other  connections  a  before  r  has  the  sound  of  a  in 
part ;  as,  par-ti-ceps,  ar'-ma ;  except  when  followed  by  another  r,  a3 
in  par-ri-ci  -da. 

Exc.  2.  Es,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  is  pronounced  like  the  English 
word  ease  ;  as,  ig-neSy  au-des. 

Exc.  3.  Osy  at  the  end  of  plural  cases,  is  pronounced  like  ose  in 
dose  ;  as,  nos,  il'-loSy  dom'-i-nos. 

Exc.  4.  Post  is  pronounced  like  the  same  word  in  English ;  so 
also  are  its  compounds  ;  as,  post'-quarriy  post'-e-a  ;  but  not  its  deriva¬ 
tives  ;  as,  pos-tre  -mus. 

Exc.  5.  Ey  i  and  y  before  final  r,  or  before  r  in  a  syllable  not  final,  when 
followed  in  the  next  syllable  by  any  other  consonant,  except  r,  have  the  sound 
of  e  and  i  in  the  English  words  her  and  fir  ;  as,  fer ,  fevty  feFti-lis ;  hir,  hiP- 
cuSy  myr'-tus. 


II.  Of  the  Diphthongs. 

§  9.  Ae  and  oe  are  always  diphthongs  unless  separated  by  diae¬ 
resis.  They  are  pronounced  as  e  would  be  in  the  same  situation  ;  as, 
ce-taSy  ces-iaSy  poe-na ,  oes-trum. 

1.  Aiy  eiy  oiy  and  yiy  usually  have  the  vowels  pronounced  separately. 
When  they  are  accented,  and  followed  by  another  vowel,  the  i  is 
pronounced  like  initial  y,  and  the  vowel  before  it  has  its  long  sound ; 
as,  Malay  Pompeius ,  Troia ,  Harpyia ;  pronounced  Ala -y ay  Pom^pe- 
yusy  Tro-yay  Har-py'-ya. 


§  10,  11. 


SOUNDS  OF  THE  CONSONANTS. 


13 


Remark  1.  J Ei,  when  a  diphthong  and  not  followed  by  another  vowel,  is 
pronounced  like  i ;  as  in  hei ,  om'-neis. 

2.  Au ,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  aw  ;  as,  laus ,  au-rum , 
pronounced  laics ,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  the  letters  au  are  pro¬ 
nounced  separately ;  as,  Men-e-la-us. 

3.  Eu,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  long  u  ;  as,  heu ,  Or¬ 
pheus  (or'-phuse),  Eu-phrd-tes. 

Rem.  3.  The  letters  eu  are  pronounced  separately  in  the  terminations  eus 
and  eum  of  Latin  nouns,  and  of  all  adjectives,  whether  Greek  or  Latin,  Except 
3BNM0r*;  as,  ur'-ce-us ,  me'-us,  me'-um,  e' -um.  In  other  situations  they  form  a 
diphthong;  as,  Eu-rd'-pa,  The1 -sens,  e' -heu. 

4.  Z7a,  ue ,  tit,  wo,  ww,  when  diphthongs,  are  pronounced  like  wa} 
toe,  etc. ;  as,  lin-gua ,  que-ror,  sua'-de-o,  quo'-tus,  e'-quus.  They  are 
always  diphthongs  after  <7,  usually  also  after  g ,  and  often  after  s. 

5.  Ui  in  cui  and  huic,  when  monosyllables,  is  pronounced  like  ivi,  and  by 
some  like  long  i. 

III.  Of  the  Consonants. 

r§10.  The  consonants  have,  in  general,  the  same  power  in 
Latin  as  in  English  words. 

The  following  cases,  however,  require  particular  attention. 

c. 

C  has  the  sound  of  s  before  e,  i,  and  y ,  and  the  diphthongs  ee,  ce , 
andew;  as ,  ce'-do,  ci'-bus,  Cce'-sar ,  cce'-lum ,  ceuy  Cy'-rus.  In  other 
situations,  it  has  the  sound  of  k ;  as,  Ca'-to ,  cru-dus ,  Zac. 

1.  Ch  has  always  the  sound  of  k;  as,  charta  (kar'-tah),  machina 
(mak'-e-nah). 

Exc.  C,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  i  followed  by  a 
vowel,  and  also  before  eu  and  yo ,  has  the  sound  of  sh;  as,  socia  (so^she-ah), 
caduceus  (ca-du'she-us),  Sicyon  (sish -e-on). 

Remark.  In  the  pronunciation  of  the  ancient  Romans,  the  hard  sound  of  c  and  g  seems 
to  have  been  retained  in  all  their  combinations. 

Cr. 

G  has  its  soft  sound,  like  /,  before  c,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diphthongs 
ce  and  oe  ;  as  ge'-nus ,  ag'-i-lis ,  Gy-ges ,  Gce-tu-li.  In  other  situations, 
it  has  its  hard  sound,  as  in  bag ,  go. 

Exc.  When  g  comes  before  g  soft,  it  coalesces  with  it  in  sound ;  as,  agger 
(aj'-er),  exaggeratio  (ex-aj-e-ra'-she-o). 


§  ii.  S  has  generally  its  hissing  sound,  as  in  so ,  thus. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  When  si  followed  by  a  vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  a 
consonant  in  an  accented  syllable,  the  s  has  the  sound  of  sh ;  as,  Per'-si-a 

(per'-she-a). 


2 


14  QUANTITIES  OF  PENULTIMATE  AND  FINAL  SYLLABLES. 


(A)  But  when  si  or  zi  followed  by  a  vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  an 
accented  vowel,  the  s  or  z  has  the  sound  of  zh;  as,  As-pa'-si-a  (as-pa'-zhe-ah), 
S a-ba'-zi-a  (sa-ba'-zhe-ah). 

Note.  In  a  few  proper  names,  s  preceded  by  a  vowel  in  an  accented  syllable  and  follow¬ 
ed  by  i  before  another  vowel,  has  the  sound,  not  of  zh,  but  of  sh ;  as,  A'-si-a  (a'-she-a) :  so 
Sosia ,  Theodosia ,  Lysias. 

Exc.  2.  S ,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  after  e,  ce ,  aw,  &,  m,  n,  and  r,  has 
the  sound  of  z  ;  as,  res ,  ces ,  laus ,  trabs ,  hi'-ems ,  Zens,  Mars. 

English  analogy  has  also  occasioned  the  $  in  Gx'-sar ,  em-su'-ra,  mi'-ser ,  mw'- 
sa,  re-sid' - u-um ,  cau'-sa ,  ro'-sa,  and  their  derivatives,'  and  in  some  other  words, 
to  take  the  sound  of  z.  Cces-a-re'-a,  and  the  oblique  cases  of  Ccesar ,  retain  the 
hissing  sound;  so  likewise  the  compounds  of  trans  ;  as,  trans'-e-o. 

T. 

§  12.  1.  T,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable  before  i 

followed  by  a  vowel,  has  the  sound  of  sh  ;  as,  ratio  (ra'-she-o),  Sulpi- 
tius  (sul-pish'-e-us). 

Exc.  T7,  in  such  case,  retains  its  hard  sound  ( a  J  after  s,  £,  or  x ;  as,  Sal-lus 
ti-us,  Brut'-ti-i ,  Sex'-ti-us:  ( b )  in  proper  names  in  tion  and  tyon ;  as,  Eu-ryt'-i-on , 
Am-phic' -ty-on ;  and  ( c)  in  old  infinitives  in  er ;  as,  fleet -ti-er,  for  flec'-ti. 

x. 

2.  X,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  has  the  sound  of  z;  at  the  end, 
that  of  ks ;  as,  Xenophon  (zen'-o-phon)  ;  axis  (ak'-sis). 

Exc.  1.  When  ex  or  ux  is  followed  by  a  vowel  in  an  accented  syllable,  x 
has  the  sound  of  gz;  as,  exemplum  (eg-zem'-plum),  ux-o'-ri-us  (ug-zo/-re-us), 
inexhaustus  ( in-eg-zaus '-tus ) . 

Exc.  2.  X,  ending  an  accented  syllable  before  i  followed  by  a  vowel,  and 
before  u  ending  a  syllable,  has  the  power  of  Tcsh ;  as,  noxius  (nok'-she-us), 
pexui  (pek'-shu-i). 

Remark.  Ch  and  ph,  before  in  the  beginning  of  a  word,  are  silent;  as,  Chthonia 
(tho'-ni-a).  Phthia  (thF-a).  Also  in  the  following  combinations  of  consonants,  in  the  be¬ 
ginning  of  words  of  Greek  origin,  the  first  letter  is  not  sounded: — mne-mon' -l-ca,  gna/- 
vuSj  tme'-sis ,  Cte'-si-as,  Ptol-e-mce' -us ,  psal'-lo. 

OF  THE  QUANTITIES  OF  THE  PENULTIMATE  AND 
FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

§  13.  1.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  oc¬ 

cupied  in  pronouncing  it. 

2.  A  short  syllable  requires,  in  pronunciation,  half  the  time  of  a 
long  one. 

Rem.  The  penultimate  syllable,  or  penult ,  is  the  last  syllable  but  one.  The  antepenult 
is  the  last  syllable  but  two. 

The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  generally  to  be  learned  from  the  rules  of  prosody,  §§  282 — 
301;  but  for  the  convenience  of  the  student,  the  following  general  rules  are  here  in¬ 
serted  : — 

3.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel  or  h  is  short. 

4.  Diphthongs,  not  beginning  with  w,  are  long- 


§  14,  15 


ACCENTUATION. 


15 


5.  A  vowel  before  x ,  z ,  j,  or  any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute 
followed  by  a  liquid,  is  long  by  position ,  as  it  is  called. 

6.  A  vowel  naturally  short  before  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  is 
common,  i.  e.  either  long  or  short. 

In  this  Grammar,  when  the  quantity  of  a  penult  is  determined  by  one  of  the  preceding 
rules,  it  is  not  marked;  in  other  cases,  except  in  dissyllables,  the  proper  mark  is  written 
over  its  vowel. 

To  pronounce  Latin  words  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  ascertain  the  quantities  of  their 
last  two  syllables  only ;  and  the  rules  for  the  quantities  of  final  syllables  would,  for  this 
purpose,  be  unnecessary,  but  for  the  occasional  addition  of  enclitics.  As  these  are  gen¬ 
erally  monosyllables,  and,  for  the  purpose  of  accentuation,  are  considered  as  parts  of  the 
words  to  which  they  are  annexed,  they  cause  the  final  syllable  of  the  original  word  to 
become  the  penult  of  the  compound.  But  as  the  enclitics  begin  with  a  consonant,  the 
final  vowels  of  all  Words  ending  with  a  consonant,  if  previously  short,  are,  by  the  addi¬ 
tion  of  an  enclitic,  made  long  by  position.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  learn  the  quan¬ 
tities  of  those  final  syllables  only  which  end  with  a  vowel . 

OF  ACCENTUATION. 

I.  Of  Latin  Accents. 


§14.  1.  Accent,  in  Latin,  signifies  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  voice  in 

pronouncing  the  syllables  of  a  Latin  word.  It  is  a  general  rule  of  the  Latin 
language,  that  every  word  has  its  accent.  The  enclitics,  however,  have  no  ac¬ 
cent  of  their  own,  but  they  modify  the  accent  of  the  words  to  which  they  are 
annexed,  and  prepositions  lose  their  accent,  when  they  precede  the  cases  which 
they  govern. 

2.  The  Latin  language  has  three  accents,  the  acute  (/),  or  rising  tone,  the 
grave  ( ' ),  or  falling  tone,  and  the  circumflex  (A ),  composed  of  the  acute  and  the 
grave,  i.  e.  of  the  rising  and  the  falling  tone. 

3.  A  monosyllable,  when  short  by  nature,  takes  the  acute,  when  long  by  nature,  the 
circumflex  accent ;  as,  pix ,  et ,  pars ;  dos ,  jhs,  spes. 

4.  In  words  of  two  syllables,  the  penult  is  always  accented ; 
as,  pd'ter ,  ma'-ter ,  pen'-na . 

Rem.  1.  Words  of  two  syllables  have  the  circumflex  accent,  when  the  vowel  of  the  pe¬ 
nult  is  naturally  long  and  that  of  the  last  syllable  short ;  as,  Rd-ma,  mti-sa,  lh-c2,  jti-rts  ; 
if  otherwise,  they  have  the  acute;  as,  hd'-md,  dc/as ,  Ro'^ma  (abl.),  and  ar'-tt,  in  which 
a  is  long  only  by  position. 

5.  In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  if  the  penult  is  long, 
it  is  accented  ;  but  if  it  is  short ,  the  accent  is  on  the  antepenult ; 
as,  a-mi'-cus ,  dom'-i-nus, 

Rem.  2.  When  the  accent  of  a  word  of  more  than  two  syllables  falls  upon  the  penult, 
it  may  be  either  the  circumflex  or  the  acute  according  as  the  last  syllable  is  short  or  long 
The  antepenult  can  take  no  accent  except  the  acute,  and  in  no  case  can  the  accent  be 
drawn  farther  back  than  to  the  antepenult. 

Exc.  Vocatives  of  the  second  declension  in  t,  instead  of  ie,  from  nominatives 
in  ius,  and  genitives  in  i,  instead  of  ii;  are  accented  as  they  would  be,  if  the  re¬ 
jected  letters  were  annexed,  i.  e.  with  the  acute  upon  the  penult,  even  when 
it  is  short;  as,  Vir-gi  l-i ;  Va-lef-ri,  in-ge'-ni.  So,  also,  the  compounds  of  facio 
with  words  which  are  not  prepositions;  as,  cal-e-ja'-cit ,  tep-e-fd'-cit . 

§  15.  If  the  penult  is  common,  the  accent,  in  prose,  is  upon 
the  antepenult;  as,  vol'-n-cris,  phar'-e-tra,  ib'-i-que :  but  genitives 
in  ius,  in  which  i  is  common,  accent  their  penult  in  prose ;  as, 
u-ni'-us,  is-ti'-us. 


DIVISION  OF  WORDS. 


§  16-18, 


16 


Rem.  3.  All  the  syllables  of  a  Latin  word,  except  that  on  which  the  acute  or  circum¬ 
flex  accent  falls,  are  supposed  to  have  the  grave  accent,  and  were  pronounced  with  the 
lower  tone. 

1.  The  rules  for  the  accentuation  of  compound  and  simple  words 
are  the  same  ;  as,  se-cum ,  sub'-e-o. 

2.  In  accentuation,  the  enclitics  que ,  ne ,  ve ,  and  also  those  which 
are  annexed  to  pronouns,*  are  accounted  constituent  parts  of  the  words 
to  which  they  are  subjoined  ;  as,  i'-ta,  it'-d-que  ;  vi'-rum ,  vi-runi  -que. 

II.  Of  English  Accents. 


§  16.  Accent,  in  English,  is  a  particular  stress  of  voice  upon 
certain  syllables  of  words.  Cf.  §  5,  2. 


According  to  the  English  method  of  pronouncing  Latin,  a  word  may  have 
two,  three,  or  even  four  accents.  That  accent  which  is  nearest  to  the  termina¬ 
tion  of  the  word,  and  which  always  corresponds  in  position  with  the  Latin  ac¬ 
cent,  is  called  the  primary  or  principal  accent,  and  the  secondary  accent  is  that 
which  next  precedes  the  primary.  The  third  and  fourth  accents,  in  like  man¬ 
ner,  precede  the  secondary,  and  are  subject  in  all  respects  to  the  same  rules; 
as,  pa' -ter,  ma'-ter ,  ser-mo'-nes ,  dom'-i-ms  ;  pe-ric' -u-lum ,  con"  -ju-ra' -ti-o ,  op"'- 
por-tu" -ni-ta'-tes,  ex-er""-ci-ta'"-ti-on"-i-bu$'-que. 


1.  If  only  two  syllables  precede  the  primary  accent,  the  secondary 
accent  is  on  the  first ;  as,  mod" -e-ra  -tus,  tol"-e-rab'-i-lis. 

2.  If  three  or  four  syllables  stand  before  the  primary  accent,  the 
secondary  accent  is  placed,  sometimes  on  the  first,  and  sometimes  on 
the  second  syllable;  as,  de-mon" -stra-han  -tur ,  ad" -o-les-cen  -ti-a. 

3.  Some  words  which  have  only  four  syllables  before  the  primary 
accent,  and  all  which  have  more  than  four,  have  three  accents ;  as, 
mod" '-e-ra" -ti-o -nis,  tol'" -e-ra-bil" -i-o  -rem,  ex-er" ' -ci-ta" -ti-o  -nis. 


DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES. 


VOWELS. 

§  17.  Every  Latin  word  is  to  be  divided  into  as  many  syllables, 
as  it  has  separate  vowels  and  diphthongs. 

Remark.  In  the  following  rules,  the  term  vowel  includes  not  only  single 
vowels,  but  diphthongs ;  and  when  a  particular  vowel  is  mentioned,  a  diph¬ 
thong,  also,  ending  with  that  vowel  is  intended. 


CONS  ON  ANT  S. 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

§  18.  Remark.  The  following  special  rules,  relating  to  particular  letters 
or  to  particular  combinations  of  letters,  are  in  all  cases  to  be  regarded  rather 
than  the  general  rules,  §.§  19 — 23,  when  the  latter  are  inconsistent  with  the 
former. 

1.  H,  when  standing  alone  between  two  vowels,  is  always  joined 
to  the  vowel  that  follows  it. 

Thus,  mi' -hi,  tra'-he-re ,  co'-hors ,  co" -hor-ta' -ti-o. 


*  These  are  te,  met ,  pte,  ce,  cine ,  and  dem;  as,  tute,  egdmet ,  meapte ,  hicce,  hicdne ,  idem. 


§  19-21.  DIVISION  OF  WORDS. - SIMPLE  WORDS. 


17 


2.  Ch,  ph ,  and  th ,  in  the  division  of  words  into  syllables,  are  con¬ 
sidered,  not  as  separate  letters,  but  as  single  aspirated  mutes,  and 
hence  are  never  separated. 

Thus,  A-chil'-les ,  Ach" -ra-dl' -na,  Neph'-e-le ,  Te'-thys. 

3.  Gl ,  tl,  and  thl ,  when  standing  alone  between  any  two  vowels, 
unless  the  first  be  u,  and  bl  after  u  are  always  separated. 

Thus,  yEg'-le,  Ag-lau'-rus ,  At' -las,  ath-let' -i-cus ; — Pub'-li-us ,  Pub-lie' -6-la,  res- 
pub'-li-ca. 

4.  In  writing  syllables,  x,  when  standing  alone  between  two  vowels, 
is  united  to  the  vowel  before  it,  but,  in  pronouncing  such  syllables, 
its  elementary  sounds  are  separated. 

Thus,  sax'-uin  (sak'-sum) ;  ax-il'-la  (ak-sil'-lah) ;  ex-em'-plum  (eg-zem'-plum) ; 
ux-o'-ri-us  (ug-zo/-re-us). 

GENERAL  RULES. 

I.  Simple  Words. 

§19.  A. — A  single  Consonant  between  two  Vowels . 

1.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  l  or  r,  between  the  last  two 
vowels  of  a  word,  or  between  the  vowels  of  any  two  unaccented  syl¬ 
lables,  must  be  joined  to  the  latter  vowel. 

Thus,  t  m  pa' -ter  and  au'-tem ;  th  in  cs'-ther  ;  cl  i n  Hi-er'-d-cles  ;  q  in  a' -qua; 
cr  in  a'-cris  and  vol'-u-cris  ;  chr  in  a'-chras  ;  r  in  tol"-e-ra-bil'-i-us  ;  m  in  et"-y- 
mo-h'-gi-a ;  l  in  am" -bu-ld-td' -ri-us ;  and  gr  in  per" -e-gri-na' -ti-o.  Respecting 
ch  and  th  cf.  §  18,  2. 

Exc.  Tib'-i  and  sib'-i  are  commonly  excepted. 

§  "2®.  2.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  l  or  r,  before  the 

vowel  of  an  accented  syllable,  must  be  joined  to  the  accented  vowel. 

Thus,  t  in  lutin' -e-r a  ;  d  in  vi-de'-to;  th  in  ce-the' -ri-us  ;  cl  in  Eu-cll'-des  and 
IleP'-a-cle'-a  ;  gr  in  a-gres'-tis  and  a-gric'-d-la ;  pr  in  ca-pre'-6-lus  ;  q  in  a-qua'- 
ri-us  ;  and  phr  in  Eu-phrd'tes. 

§»1.  3.  A  single  consonant  after  the  vowel  of  any  accented 

syllable,  except  a  penult,  must  be  joined  to  the  accented  vowel. 

Thus,  m  in  dom'-l-nus  and  dom"-i-na'-ti-o ;  t  in  pat'-e-ra ;  th  in  Scyth'-i-a  ; 
and  q  in  af-ui-la  (ak^we-lah),  and  Aq"-ui-ta'-ni-a  ( ak//-we-ta/-ne-ah ). 

4.  When  a  mute  with  l  or  r  follows  the  vowel  of  any  accented 
syllable,  except  the  penult,  the  mute  is  to  be  joined  to  the  accented 
vowel. 

Thus,  cr  in  ac'-rl-ter ,  acf'-ri-nuf -ni-a  ;  tr  in  det" -ri-men' -turn  ;  pr  in  cajA-ri- 
pes,  cap" -ri-muV -gus,  phi  in  Paph" -la-go' -ni-a ;  and  phr  in  Aph" -ro-dis' -i-a. 
Respecting  phi  and  phr  cf.  §  18,  2. 

Exceptions  to  the  3d  and  4th  Rules. 

Exc.  1.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  l  or  r,  after  an  accent¬ 
ed  a ,  e,  or  o,  and  before  two  vowels  the  first  of  which  is  e ,  i,  or  y , 
must  be  joined  to  the  syllable  following  the  accent. 

2* 


18 


COMPOUND  WORDS. - ETYMOLOGY. 


§  22-24. 


Thus,  d  in  ra'-di-us ,  tce'-di-um,  me" -di-a' -tor ;  r  in  hce'-re-o,  Ca"-ry-a'-tes ; 
ch  in  bra'-chi-um  ;  q  in  re'-qui-es ,  ref'-qui-e&'-co  ;  tr  in  pa' -tri-us ,  (E-n</-tri-a  ; 
and  r  and  l  in  ce" -re-a' -li-a. 

Exc.  2.  A  single  consonant  or  a  mute  with  l  or  r,  after  an  accent¬ 
ed  u,  must  be  joined  to  the  vowel  following  it. 

Thus,  r  in  lu'-ri-dus ,  au' -re-us  ;  cr  in  Eu'-cri-tus  ;  gl  in  ju' -glans ;  and  pi  in 
Nau'-pli-us,  du'-pli-co ,  and  du" -pli-ca' -ti-o .  Cf.  §  18,  3. 

§  22.  B. —  Two  Consonants  between  two  Vowels . 

Any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute  followed  by  l  or  r  in  the  cases 
before  mentioned,  when  standing  between  two  vowels,  must  be  sepa¬ 
rated. 

Thus,  rp  in  cor* -pus,  rm  in  for'-ma,  and  qer-ma'nus ;  rv  in  ca-ter'-va ;  sc  in 
ad-o-les'-cens  ;  nn  in  an'-nus  ;  phth  in  aph'-iha  ;  cch  in  Bac'-chus  and  Bacf'-cha- 
na'-li-a ;  and  thl  in  ath-le'-ta. 

C. —  Three  or  four  Consonants  between  two  Vow  eh. 

1.  When  three  consonants  stand  between  any  two  vowels,  the  last, 
or,  if  that  be  l  or  r  after  a  mute,  the  two  last,  are  joined  to  the  latter 
vowel. 

Thus,  mpt  in  emp' -tor,  ad-emp'-ti-o ;  str  in  fe-nes/-tra;  mpl  in  ex-em'-plum; 
rthr  in  ar-thri  -tis. 

2.  When  four  consonants  stand  between  two  vowels,  two  are  joined 
to  each  vowel ;  as,  nstr  in  trans-trum. 

II.  Compound  Words. 

§23.  1.  In  dividing  a  compound  word  into  syllables  the  com¬ 

ponent  parts  are  to  be  separated,  if  the  former  part  ends  with  a  con¬ 
sonant  ;  as,  ab-es'-se ,  in'-ers ,  cir'-cum-er'-ro ,  su-per-est,  sub'-i-tus,  pree- 
ter'-e-a,  trans -i-tur,  sub'-stru-o.  So,  also,  if  a  consonant  is  inserted  to 
prevent  hiatus,  it  is  joined  to  the  preceding  vowel ;  as,  prod'-e-o,  red'- 
e-o,  sed-it'-i-o. 

2.  But  if*  the  former  part  either  ends  with  a  vowel,  or  has  dropped 
its  termination,  it  is  to  be  divided  like  a  simple  word  ;  as,  def'-e-ro , 
dil'-i-gens ,  be-nev'-o-lus,  press' -to ,  eg'-d-met ; — po'-tes,  po-tes'-tis,  an"-i- 
mad-ver'-to ,  ve-ne-o  (from  venum ,  eo ),  mag-nan  -i-mus,  am-ba-ges , 
lon-gce  -vus. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§  241.  1«  Etymology  treats  of  the  different  classes  of  words, 

their  derivation,  and  their  various  inflections. 

2.  The  classes,  into  which  words  are  divided  in  reference  to  their  significa¬ 
tion,  are  called  Parts  of  Speech. 


§  25,  26. 


NOUNS. 


19 


3.  The  parts  of  speech  in  Latin  are  eight — Substantive  or 
Noun ,  Adjective ,  Pronoun ,  Fer&,  Adverb ,  Preposition ,  Conjunc¬ 
tion,  and  Interjection . 

4.  The  first  four  are  inflected;  the  last  four,  which  are  sometimes 
called  Particles ,  are  nctf  inflected ,  except  that  some  adverbs  change 
their  termination  to  express  comparison. 

Rem.  Substantives,  pronouns,  and  adjectives  are  often  included  by  grammarians  un¬ 
der  the  general  term  nouns ;  but,  in  this  Grammar,  the  word  noun  is  used  as  synony¬ 
mous  with  substantive  only. 

§  25.  1.  To  verbs  belong  Participles ,  Gerunds ,  and  Supines , 

which  partake  of  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  and  the  inflection  of  the 
noun. 

2.  Inflection,  in  Latin  grammar,  signifies  a  change  in  the  ter¬ 
mination  of  a  word.  It  is  of  three  kinds — declension,  conjuga¬ 
tion,  and  comparison . 

3.  Nouns,  adjectives,  pronouns,  participles,  gerunds,  and  supines, 
are  declined;  verbs  are  conjugated ,  and  adjectives  and  adverbs  are 
compared . 


NOUNS. 

§  26.  1.  A  substantive  or  noun  is  the  name  of  an  object. 

2.  A  proper  noun  is  the  name  of  an  individual  object ;  as, 
Ccesar  ;  Roma,  Rome  ;  Tiberis,  the  Tiber. 

3.  A  common  or  appellative  noun  is  the  name  of  a  class  of 
objects,  to  each  of  which  it  is  alike  applicable  ;  as,  homo,  man  or 
a  man  ;  avis,  a  bird ;  quercus,  an  oak  ;  leo,  a  lion ;  mendacium, 
a  falsehood. 

4.  A  collective  noun  is  one  which,  in,  the  singular  number,  de¬ 
notes  a  collection  of  individuals  ;  as,  exercitus,  an  army. 

Rem.  1.  The  following  are  examples  of  nouns  used  as  collectives,  viz.  exercitus ,  gens, 
juventus ,  multitudo ,  nobilitas ,  plebs,  populus ,  turba ,  vis,  and  vulgus. 

5.  An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality,  action,  or  other 
attribute ;  as,  bonitas,  goodness  ;  gaudium,  joy ;  festinatio,  haste. 

Rem.  2.  A  concrete ,  in  distinction  from  an  abstract  noun,  is  one  which  denotes  an  ob¬ 
ject  that  has  an  actual  and  independent  existence ;  as,  Roma ,  h&mo ,  populus ,  ferrum. 

6.  A  material  noun  is  the  name  of  a  substance  considered  in 
the  gross  ;  as,  lignum,  wood  ;  ferrum ,  iron  ;  cibus,  food. 

Rem.  3.  Proper,  abstract,  and  material  nouns  become  common,  when  em¬ 
ployed  to  denote  one  or  more  of  a  class  of  objects.  A  verb  in  the  infinitive 
mood  is  often  used  as  an  abstract  noun. 

7.  To  nouns  belong  gender,  number ,  and  case . 

Rem.  4.  Adjectives  and  participles  have  likewise  different  genders,  num¬ 
bers,  and  cases,  corresponding  to  those  of  nouns. 


20 


GENDER, 


§  27-29. 


GENDER, 

§  27.  1.  The  gender  of  a  noun  is  its  distinction  in  regard  to 

sex. 

2.  Nouns  have  three  genders — the  masculine ,  the  feminine ,  and 
the  neuter . 

3.  The  gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  either  natural  or  grammatical. 

4.  Those  nouns  are  naturally  masculine  or  feminine,  which  are  used  to  de¬ 
signate  the  sexes ;  as,  vir,  a  man ;  mulier ,  a  woman. 

5.  Those  are  grammatically  masculine  or  feminine,  which,  though  denoting 
objects  that  are  neither  male  nor  female,  take  adjectives  of  the  form  appropriat¬ 
ed  to  nouns  denoting  the  sexes. 

Thus,  dominus ,  a  lord,  is  naturally  masculine,  because  it  denotes  a  male ;  but  sermo , 
speech,  is  grammatically  masculine,  because,  though  not  indicative  of  sex,  it  takes  an 
adjective  of  that  form  which  is  appropriated  to  nouns  denoting  males. 

6.  The  grammatical  gender  of  Latin  nouns  depends  either  on  their  significa¬ 
tion,  or  on  their  declension  and  termination.  The  following  are  the  general  rules 
of  gender,  in  reference  to  signification.  Many  exceptions  to  them,  on  account 
of  termination,  occur:  these  will  be  specified  under  the  several  declensions. 

§  28.  Masculines.  1.  Names,  proper  and  appellative,  of 
all  male  beings  are  masculine  ;  as,  Homerus ,  Homer ;  pater ,  a 
father ;  consul ,  a  consul ;  equus ,  a  horse. 

As  proper  names  usually  follow  the  gender  of  the  general  name  under  which  they  are 
comprehended;  hence, 

2.  Names  of  rivers,  winds,  and  months,  are  masculine,  because 
fluvius ,  ventus ,  and  mensis ,  are  masculine ;  as,  Tiberis ,  the  Tiber ; 
Aquilo,  the  north  wind ;  Aprilis ,  April. 

Exc.  Styx  and  some  names  of  rivers  in  a  and  eare  feminine.  §§  62,  and  41, 1. 

3.  Names  of  mountains  are  sometimes  masculine,  because  mons  is  mascu¬ 
line  ;  as,  Othrys ,  a  mountain  of  Thessaly ;  but  they  usually  follow  the  gender 
of  their  termination ;  as,  hie*  Atlas,  hcec  Ida ,  hoc  Soracte. 

§  2H.  Feminines.  1.  Names,  proper  and  appellative,  of 
all  female  beings  are  feminine ;  as,  Helena ,  Helen ;  mater ,  a 
mother ;  juvenca,  a  heifer. 

2.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  ships,  islands,  poems, 
and  gems,  are  feminine  ;  because  terra,  urbs ,  arbor,  planta,  navis ,  in¬ 
sula,  fabula,  and  gemma,  are  feminine  ;  as, 

JEgyptus,  Egypt ;  Corinthus ,  Corinth ;  pirus,  a  pear-tree ;  nardus,  spikenard ; 
Centaurus,  the  ship  Centaur;  Samos ,  the  name  of  an  island;  Eunuchus,  the 
Eunuch,  a  comedy  of  Terence;  amethystus,  an  amethyst. 

Exc.  Names  of  countries  and  islands  in  um,  i,  and  (plur.)  a ,  drum,  are  neuter. — Names 
of  towns  in  i,  drum;  four  in  o ,  on/5,  viz.  Trusino ,  Hippo ,  Narbo,  and  Sulmo ,  with  Tunes , 
Taras,  and  Canopus,  are  masculine.  Names  of  towns  in  um  or  on,  i,  and  (plur.)  a,  drum ; 
those  in  e  and  ur  of  the  third  declension,  indeclinable  nouns  in  i  and  y,  and  some  barba¬ 
rous  names,  as  Suthul,  Hispid  and  Gadir  are  neuter. — Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  er  of 
the  third  declension,  (§  60),  with  baccar  and  robur  are  neuter.  A  few  names  in  us,  i,  (§  50), 
with  oleaster,  pinaster ,  Styrax  and  un&do  are  masculiile. — A  few  names  of  gems  in  us,  i, 
are  also  masculine. 


*To  distinguish  the  gender  of  Latin  nouns,  grammarians  write  hie  before  the  mascu¬ 
line,  hcec  before  the  feminine,  and  hoc  before  the  neuter. 


§  30-32. 


COMMON  AND  DOUBTFUL  GENDER. 


21 


§  30.  Common  and  Doubtful  Gender.  Some  words  are 
either  masculine  or  feminine.  These,  if  they  denote  things  animate, 
are  said  to  be  of  the  common  gender ;  if  things  inanimate,  of  the 
doubtf  ul  gender. 

Of  the  former  are  parens ,  a  parent;  bos ,  an  ox  or  cow:  of  the  latter,  fnis ,  an 
end. 


The  following  nouns  are  of  the  common  gender : — 


Adolescens,  a  youth. 
Affinis,  a  relative  by  mar¬ 
riage. 

Ales,  a  bird. 

Antistes,  a  chief  priest. 
Auctor,  an  author. 

Augur,  an  augur. 

Bos,  an  ox  or  cow. 

Canis,  a  dog. 

Clvis,  a  citizen. 

Comes,  a  companion. 
Conjux,  a  spouse. 

Consors,  a  consort. 
Conviva,  a  guest. 

Custos,  a  keeper. 

Dux,  a  leader. 


Exsul,  an  exile. 

Grus,  a  crane. 

Hospes,  a  guest ,  a  host. 
Hostis,  an  enemy. 

Index,  an  informer. 
Infans,  an  infant. 
Interpres,  an  interpreter. 
Judex,  a  judge. 

Juvenis,  a  youth. 

Martyr,  a  martyr. 

Miles,  a  soldier. 
Municeps,  a  burgess. 
Mus,  a  mouse. 

Nemo,  nobody. 

Obses,  a  hostage. 
Patruelis,  a  cousin. 


Palumbes,  a  wood-pigeon. 
Parens,  a  parent. 

Par,  a  mate. 

Praeses,  a  president. 
Praesul,  a  chief  priest. 
Princeps,  a  prince  or 
princess. 

Serpens,  a  serpent. 
Sacerdos,  a  priest  or 
priestess. 

Satelles,  a  life-guard. 
Sus,  a  swine. 

Testis,  a  witness. 

Vates,  a  prophet. 

Verna,  a  slave. 

Vindex,  an  avenger. 


The  following  hexameters  contain  nearly  all  the  above  nouns : — 

Conjux,  atque  parens,  princeps,  patruelis,  et  infans, 

Affinis,  vindex,  judex,  dux,  miles,  et  hostis, 

Augur,  et  antistes,  juvenis,  conviva,  sacerdos, 

Mum-^e-ceps,  vates,  adolescens,  civis,  et  auctor, 

Custos,  nemo,  comes,  testis,  sus,  bSs-^we,  canis-^we, 

Pro  consorte  t6ri  par,  praesul,  verna,  satelles, 

Mus-gwe  obses,  consors,  interpres,  et  exsul,  et  hospes. 

§31.  i.  When  nouns  of  the  common  gender  denote  males, 
they  take  a  masculine  adjective ;  when  they  denote  females,  a  fem¬ 
inine. 

2.  The  following  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense,  but 
masculine  only  in  grammatical  construction : — 

Artifex,  an  artist.  Fur,  a  thief.  Latro,  a  robber. 

Auspex,  a  soothsayer.  Heres,  an  heir.  Liberi,  children. 

Eques,  a  horseman.  Homo,  a  man  or  woman.  Pedes,  a  footman. 

To  these  may  be  added  personal  appellatives  of  the  first  declen¬ 
sion  ;  as,  advena ,  a  stranger ;  and  some  gentile  nouns ;  as,  Persa ,  a 
Persian. 

§32.  1.  The  following,  though  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense, 

are  feminine  only  in  construction  : — 


Copiae,  troops. 
Custodiae,  guards. 
Excubiae,  sentinels. 


Operae,  laborers. 
Subfiles, j  offing- 


Vigiliae,  watchmen. 


22  EPICENES. — NEUTERS. — NUMBER.  §  33-35. 


2.  Some  nouns,  signifying  persons,  are  neuter,  both  in  their  termi¬ 
nation  and  construction ;  as, 


Acroama,  a  buffoon.  Mancipium,  )  » 

Auxilia,  auxiliaries.  Servitium,  j 


Scortum, 

Prostibulum, 


J  a  prostitute. 


3.  (a.)  In  some  personal  appellatives  masculines  and  feminines 
are  distinguished  by  different  terminations  affixed  to  the  same  root. 
The  masculines  end  in  us ,  er ,  o,  tor ,  etc. ;  the  feminines  in  a  or  trix ; 
as,  coquus ,  coqua  ;  magister ,  magistra  ;  leno ,  lena  ;  inventor ,  inventrix  ; 
tibicen ,  tibicina  ;  avus ,  awa  ;  rea:,  regina  ;  poeta ,  poetria. 

(b.)  So  also  in  some  names  of  animals ;  as,  equus,  equa  ;  gallus , 
gallina  ;  leo,  lea  and  lecena .  Sometimes  the  words  are  wholly  differ¬ 
ent  ;  as,  taurus ,  vacca. 

4.  Some  names  of  animals  are  sometimes  masculine  and  sometimes 
feminine  without  regard  to  difference  of  sex  ;  as,  anguis,  serpens,  da¬ 
ma,  talpa ,  tigris,  coluber  and  colubra ,  etc. 


§33.  Epicenes.  Names  of  animals  which  include  both  sexes, 
but  admit  of  an  adjective  of  one  gender  only,  are  called  epicene. 
These  pommonly  follow  the  gender  of  their  terminations. 

Thus,  passer ,  a  sparrow,  corvus,  a  raven,  are  masculine ;  aquila,  an  eagle,  vul¬ 
pes,  a  fox,  are  feminine ;  though  each  of  them  is  used  to  denote  both  sexes. 

Note.  This  class  includes  the  names  of  animals,  in  which  the  distinction  of  sex  is 
Beldom  attended  to.  When  it  is  necessary  to  mark  the  sex,  mas  or  fem'ina  is  usually 
added. 

§  34«  Neuters.  Nouns  which  are  neither  masculine  nor 
feminine,  are  said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender ;  such  are, 

1.  All  indeclinable  nouns  ;  as,  fas,  nefas,  nihil ,  gummi,  pondo. 

2.  Names  of  letters ;  as,  o  longum,  long  o.  But  these  are  some¬ 
times  feminine,  litera  being  understood. 

3.  Words  used  merely  as  such,  without  reference  to  their  meaning ; 
as,  pater  est  dissyllabum;  pater  is  dissyllabic. 

4.  All  infinitives,  imperatives,  clauses  of  sentences,  adverbs,  and 
other  particles,  used  substantively ;  as  scire  tuum,  your  knowledge  ; 
ultimum  vale,  the  last  farewell ;  hoc  diu,  this  (word)  diu. 

Remark.  1.  Words  derived  from  the  Greek  retain  the  gender  which  they 
have  in  that  language. 

Rem.  2.  Some  nouns  have  different  genders  in  the  singular  and  plural,  and 
are  called  heterogeneous  nouns.  See  §  92. 


NUMBER. 

§35.  1.  (a.)  Number,  in  nouns,  is  the  form  by  which  they 

denote  whether  they  represent  one  object  or  more  than  one. 

( b. )  Latin  nouns  have  two  numbers, — the  singular  and  the  plural , 
— which  are  distinguished  by  their  terminations.  The  singular  num¬ 
ber  denotes  one  object ;  the  plural,  more  than  one. 


§  36-39. 


PERSON. - CASES. — DECLENSIONS. 


23 


PERSON. 

2.  The  person  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  is  the  character  sustained 
by  the  object  which  it  represents,  as  being  the  speaker,  the  per¬ 
son  addressed,  or  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of. 

Hence  there  are  three  persons.  The  speaker  is  of  the  first  person, 
the  person  addressed  is  of  the  second  person,  and  the  person  or  thing 
spoken  of  is  of  the  third  person. 

CASES. 

§  3©.  Many  of  the  relations  of  objects,  which,  in  English,  are 
denoted  by  prepositions,  are,  in  Latin,  expressed  by  a  change  of  ter¬ 
mination. 

Cases  are  those  terminations  of  nouns,  which  denote  their  re¬ 
lations  to  other  words.  Latin  nouns  have  six  cases  ;  viz.  Nomi¬ 
native ,  Genitive ,  Dative ,  Accusative ,  Vocative ,  and  Ablative . 

Remark.  Though  there  are  six  cases  in  each  number,  no  noun  has  in  each 
number  so  many  different  terminations.  * 

§37.  1.  The  nominative  denotes  the  relation  of  a  subject  to  a 

finite  verb  ;  as,  ego  scribo ,  I  write.  Cams  dicit,  Cains  says. 

2.  The  genitive  denotes  origin ,  possession ,  and  many  other  rela¬ 
tions,  which,  in  English,  are  expressed  by  the  preposition  of  or  by 
the  possessive  case ;  as,  Vita  Ccesaris ,  the  life  of  Caesar,  or  Caesar's 
fife. 

3.  The  dative  denotes  that  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is,  or  is  done ; 
as,  Ille  mihi  librum  dedit,  He  gave  the  book  to  me. 

4.  The  accusative  is  either  the  object  of  an  active  verb,  or  of  cer¬ 
tain  prepositions,  or  the  subject  of  an  infinitive. 

5.  The  vocative  is  the  form  appropriated  to  the  name  of  any  ob¬ 
ject  which  is  addressed. 

6.  The  ablative  denotes  privation,  and  many  other  relations,  espe¬ 
cially  those  expressed  in  English  by  the  prepositions  with ,  from ,  in, 
or  by. 

Remark.  The  nominative  and  vocative  are  sometimes  called  casus  recti, 
i.  e.  the  uninflected  cases ;  and  the  others,  casus  obliqui  ;  i.  e.  the  oblique  or  in¬ 
flected  cases. 


DECLENSIONS. 

§  38.  The  regular  forming  of  the  several  cases  in  both  numbers, 
by  annexing  the  appropriate  terminations  to  the  root,  is  called  de¬ 
clension. 

The  Latin  language  has  five  declensions  or  modes  of  declining 
nouns,  distinguished  by  the  termination  of  the  genitive  singular, 
which,  in  the  first  declension,  ends  in  ce ,  in  the  second  in  i,  in  the 
third  in  is,  in  the  fourth  in  us,  and  in  the  fifth  in  ei 

§39.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  comparative  view  of  the  termina¬ 
tions  or  case-endings  of  the  five  declensions. 


24 


TERMINATIONS. 


§  40. 


Terminations. 

Singular. 


I. 

H. 

in. 

IV. 

M. 

N. 

M.  N. 

M. 

N. 

Nom. 

a, 

us, 

er, 

um, 

or,  etc.  e,  etc. 

us, 

u, 

Gen . 

®, 

h 

is, 

us, 

Dat. 

®, 

o, 

h 

ui, 

u> 

Acc. 

am, 

um, 

em,(im),  e,etc. 

um, 

u, 

Voc. 

a, 

e, 

er, 

um, 

or,  etc .  e,  etc. 

us, 

h, 

AM. 

a. 

o. 

e,  (i.) 

XL. 

Plural . 


Nom. 

h 

a, 

es,  a,  (ia), 

us, 

ua, 

Gen. 

arum, 

orum, 

um,  (ium), 

uum, 

Dat. 

Is, 

Is, 

ibus, 

ibus, 

(ubus), 

Acc. 

as, 

os, 

a, 

es,  a,  (ia), 

us, 

ua, 

Voc . 

ae, 

h 

a, 

es,  a,  (ia), 

us, 

ua, 

AM. 

Is. 

Is. 

ibus. 

ibus, 

(ubus). 

es, 

ei, 

ei, 

em, 

es, 

e. 


es, 

erum, 

ebus, 

es, 

es, 

ebus. 


Remarks . 


§40.  1.  The  terminations  of  the  nominative,  in  the  third  declension, 

are  very  numerous.  See  §§  55,  58,  62,  66. 

2.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculines  and  feminines,  always 
ends  in  m. 

3.  The  vocative  singular  is  like  the  nominative  in  all  Latin  nouns, 
except  those  in  us  of  the  second  declension. 

4.  The  nominative  and  vocative  plural  always  end  alike. 

5.  The  genitive  plural  always  ends  in  um. 

6.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  always  end  alike ; — in  the  1st 
and  2d  declensions,  in  is ;  in  the  3d,  4th,  and  5th,  in  bus. 

7.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines,  always  ends 
in  s . 

8.  Nouns  of  the  neuter  gender  have  the  accusative  and  vocative 
like  the  nominative,  in  both  numbers ;  and  these  cases,  in  the  plural, 
always  end  in  a. 

9.  The  1st  and  5th  declensions  contain  no  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender,  and 
the  4th  and  5th  contain  no  proper  names. 

10.  Every  inflected  word  consists  of  two  parts — a  root,  and  a  ter¬ 
mination.  The  root  or  crude  form ,  is  the  part  which  is  not  changed 
by  inflection.  The  termination  is  the  part  annexed  to  the  root.  The 
root  of  a  declined  word  may  be  found  by  removing  the  termination  of 
any  of  its  oblique  cases.  The  case  commonly  selected  for  this  pur¬ 
pose  is  the  genitive  singular. 

11.  The  preceding  table  exhibits  terminations  only.  In  the  fifth  declension, 
the  e  of  the  final  syllable,  though  unchanged,  is  considered  as  belonging  to  the 
termination. 


§  41-43. 


FIRST  DECLENSION. - EXCEPTIONS. 


25 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 


§41.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  in  a,  e,  as ,  es.  Those 
in  a  and  e  are  feminine ;  those  in  as  and  es  are  masculine. 


Latin  nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  only  in  a.  They  are  thus  declined:— 


Nom.  mu'-sa, 
Gen.  mu'-sae, 
Dat.  mu'-sae, 
Acc.  mu'-sam, 
Voc.  mu'-sa, 
Abl.  mu'-sa, 


Singular. 

a  muse ; 
of  a  muse ; 
to  a  muse ; 
a  muse ; 
0  muse ; 
with  a  muse . 


Plural. 
Nom.  mu'-sae, 

Gen .  mu-sa-rum, 
Dat .  mu'-sls, 

Acc.  mu'-sas, 

Voc.  mu'-sae, 

Abl.  mu'-sis, 


muses  ; 
of  muses  ; 
to  muses  ; 

muses  ; 
0  muses  ; 
with  muses. 


In  like  manner  decline 


Au'-la,  a  hall.  Lit'-e-ra,  a  letter.  Sa-git'-ta,  an  arrow. 

Cu'-ra,  care.  Lus-cin'-i-a,  a  nightingale .  Stel'-la,  a  star. 

Ga'-le-a,  a  helmet.  Mach'-i-na,  a  machine.  To-ga,  a  gown. 

In'-su-la,  an  island.  Pen'-na,  a  feather ,  a  quill.  Vi'-a,  a  way. 

Note.  As  the  Latin  language  has  no  article,  appellative  nouns  may  be  ren¬ 
dered  either  with  or  without  the  English  articles  a,  an,  or  the ,  according  to  their 
connection. 


Exceptions  in  Gender. 

§42.  1.  Names  proper  and  appellative  of  men,  as,  Sulla,  Cinna ;  poeta , 

a  poet;  nauta ,  a  sailor;  and  names  of  rivers,  though  ending  in  a,  are  mascu¬ 
line  :  §  28, 1  and  2.  But  the  following  names  of  rivers  have  been  used  as  femi¬ 
nine  :  viz.  Albula ,  Allia ,  Druentia ,  Garumna ,  Himera ,  Matrdna ,  Mosella ,  Trebia. 
Lethe  is  always  feminine. 

Ossa  and  (Eta,  names  of  mountains,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  Hadria ,  the  Adriatic  sea,  dama  in  Virgil  and  Statius,  and  talpa  in  Virgil, 
are  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 


§  43.  Genitive  singular.  1.  The  poets  sometimes  formed  the 
genitive  singular  in  ai ;  as,  aula ,  gen.  aulax. 

2.  Familia ,  after  pater ,  mater ,  filius ,  or  filia ,  usually  forms  its  gen¬ 
itive  in  as  ;  as,  mater -familias,  the  mistress  of  a  family ;  gen.  matris - 
familias;  nom.  plur.  matres  familias  or  familiarum.  Some  other 
words  anciently  formed  their  genitive  in  the  same  manner. 

Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  patronymics  in  es,  of  sev¬ 
eral  compounds  in  cola  and  gena,  and  of  some  names  of  nations,  is 
sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  formed  in  um  instead  of  drum ;  as, 
JEneadum,  Ccelicolum,  terrigenum,  Lapithum.  So  amphorum,  drach - 
mum,  for  amphorarum,  drachmarum. 

Dative  and  Ablative  plural.  The  following  nouns  have  sometimes 
abus  instead  of  is,  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,  especially  when 
it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  them  from  the  same  cases  of  masculines 
in  us  of  the  second  declension  having  the  same  root ;  as,  filiis  et  filia¬ 
bus,  to  sons  and  daughters. 

8 


26 


GREEK  NOUNS. — SECOND  DECLENSION.  §  44-46. 


Dea,  a  goddess.  Equa,  a  mare. 

Eilia,  a  daughter.  Mula,  a  she  mule. 

The  use  of  a  similar  termination  in  anima ,  asina,  liberta,  nata,  conserva,  and 
some  other  words,  rests  on  inferior  authority. 


Greek  Nouns. 


§44.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  in  e ,  as,  and  es,  and  some 
also  in  a,  are  Greek.  Greek  nouns  in  d  are  declined  like  musa ,  ex¬ 
cept  that  they  sometimes  have  an  in  the  accusative  singular;  as, 
Ossa;  acc.  Ossam ,  or  Ossan. 


Greek  nouns  in  e,  as,  and  es,  are  thus  declined  in  the  singular  number : — 


N.  Pe-neP-6-pe, 
G.  Pe-neP-5-pes, 
D.  Pe-neP-6-pse, 
Ac.  Pe-neP-6-pen, 
V.  Pe-neP-6-pe, 
Ab.  Pe-neP-o-pe. 


N.  J£-ne'-as, 

G.  JE-ne'-ae, 

D.  iE-ne'-ae, 

Ac.  iE-ne'-am  or  an, 
V.  iE-ne'-a, 

Ab.  iE-ne'-a. 


N.  An-chl'-ses, 

G.  An-chP-sae, 
j D.  An-chi'-sae, 

Ac.  An-chP-sen, 

V.  An-chP-se  or  a, 
Ab.  An-chP-sa  or  e. 


§  45.  In  like  manner  decline 


AP-o-e,  aloes. 

E-pit'-o-me,  an  abridgment. 
This'-be. 

Bo'-re-as,  the  north  wind. 
MP-das. 


Ti-a'-ras,  a  turban. 

Co-me/-tes,  a  comet. 
Dy-nas'-tes,  a  ruler. 
Pri-anP-l-des,  a  son  of  Priam. 
Py-ri'-tes,  a  kind  of  stone. 


1.  Most  proper  names  in  es,  except  patronymics,  follow  the  third  declension ; 
but  in  the  accusative  they  often  have  both  em  and  en,  and  in  the  vocative  both 
es  and  e.  See  §§  80,  iv,  and  81. 

2.  Greek  nouns  of  the  first  declension,  which  admit  of  a  plural,  are  declined 
in  that  number  like  the  plural  of  musa. 


3.  The  Latins  frequently  change  the  terminations  of  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
e  into  d ;  as,  Atrides,  Atrida,  a  son  of  Atreus ;  Perses ,  Persa ,  a  Persian ;  geo¬ 
metres,  geometra,  a  geometrician ;  Circe,  Circa ;  epitome,  epitdma ;  grammatice , 
grammatica,  grammar;  rhetorice,  rhetorica ,  oratory. — So  also  tiaras ,  tiara. 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 

§46.  Nouns  of  the  second  declension  end  in  er,  ir,  us,  um , 
os,  on.  Those  ending  in  um  and  on  are  neuter ;  the  rest  are 
masculine. 

Nouns  in  er,  us,  and  um,  are  thus  declined : — 


Singular. 


A  lord. 

A  son-in-law. 

A  field. 

A  kingdom . 

N.  dom'-i-nus, 

ge'-ner, 

a'-ger, 

reg'-num, 

O.  dom'-I-nl, 

gen'-e-ri, 

a'-gri, 

reg'-nl, 

D.  dom'-i-no, 

gen'-e-ro, 

a'-gro, 

reg'-no, 

Ac.  dom'-i-num, 

gen'-e-rum, 

a'-grum, 

reg'-num, 

V.  dom'-i-ne, 

ge'-ner, 

a'-ger, 

reg'-num, 

Ab.  dom'-i-no. 

gen'-ero. 

a'-gro. 

reg'-no. 

§  47-49, 


SECOND  DECLENSION. - EXCEPTIONS 


27 


Plural. 


N.  dom'-i-nl, 

G.  dom-i-no'-rum, 
D.  dom'-i-nls, 

Ac.  dom'-i-nos, 

V.  dom'-i-ni, 

Ab.  dom'-i-nls. 


gen'-e-ri, 

gen-e-ro'-riim, 

gen'-e-rls, 

gen'-e-ros, 

gen'-e-rl, 

gen'-e-ris. 


a'-gri, 

a-gro'-rum, 

a'-grls, 

a'-gros, 

a'-gri, 

a'-gris. 


reg'-na, 

reg-no'-rum, 

reg'-nis, 

reg'-na, 

reg'-na, 

reg'-nis. 


Like  dominus  decline 

An'-I-mus,  the  mind .  Fo'-cus,  a  hearth .  Nu'-me-rus,  a  number. 
Clip'-e-us,  a  shield.  Gla'-di-us,  a  sword.  O-ce'-a-nus,  the  ocean. 
Cor'-vus,  a  raven .  Lu'-cus,  a  grove.  Tro'-chus,  a  trundling-hoop . 

Note.  Nouns  in  us  of  the  second  declension  are  the  only  Latin  nouns,  whose  nomina¬ 
tive  and  vocative  singular  differ  in  form.  See  §  40,  R.  3. 

§  47.  A  few  nouns  in  er ,  like  gener ,  add  the  terminations  to  the 
nominative  singular,  as  a  root.  They  are  the  compounds  of  gero  and 
fero ;  as,  armiger,  -eri,  an  armor-bearer;  Lucifer,  -eri,  the  morning 
star ;  and  the  following : — 

A-dul'-ter,  an  adulterer.  LF-ber,  Bacchus.  Pu'-er,  a  bou. 

Cel'-ti-ber,  a  Celtiberian.  Lib'-6-ri,  (plur.),  children.  So'-cer,  a  father-in-law. 
F-ber,  a  Spaniard.  Pres'-by-ter,  an  elder.  Ves'-per,  the  evening . 

MuV-dt-ber ,  Vulcan,  sometimes  has  this  form. 


§  48.  1.  All  other  nouns  in  er  reject  the  e  in  adding  the  termi¬ 

nations,  (§  322,  4),  and  are  declined  like  ager ;  thus, 

A'-per,  a  wild  boar.  LP-ber,  a  book.  Al-ex-an'-der. 

AuV-ter,  the  south  wind.  Ma-gis'-ter,  a  master .  Is'-ter. 

Fa'-ber,  a  workman.  OrP-a-ger,  a  wild  ass.  Teu'-cer. 


2.  Vir,  a  man,  with  its  compounds,  and  the  patrial  Trevir ,  (the  only 
nouns  in  ir,)  are  declined  like  gener. 

Like  regnum  decline 

An'-triim,  a  cave.  Ex-em'-plum,  an  example.  Prse-sid'-i-um,  a  defence. 

A'-tri-um,  a  halL  Ne-go'-ti-um,*  a  business.  Sax'-um,  a  rock. 

Bel'-lum,  war.  Ni'-trum,  natron.  Scep'-trum,  a  sceptre. 


Exceptions  in  Gender.  # 

§  49.  1.  The  following  nouns  in  us  and  os  are  feminine: — 

Abyssus,  a  bottomless  pit.  Dialectos,  a  dialect.  Miltos,  vermilion. 

Alvus,  the  belly.  Diphthongus,  a  diphthong.  Pharus(os),  a  light-house. 

Antidotus,  an  antidote.  Domus,  a  house ,  home.  Plinthus,  the  base  of  a 

Arctos(us),  the  Northern  Eremus,  a  desert.  column. 

Bear.  Humus,  the  ground.  Vannus,  a  corn-fan. 

Carbasus,  a  sail. 


2.  Greek  nouns  in  ddus  oSo c),  and  metros,  are  likewise  feminine;  as, 

synddus ,  an  assembly ;  diamHros ,  a  diameter. 


*  Pronounced  ne-go'-she-um.  See  $  12. 


28  SECOND  DECLENSION. — EXCEPTIONS.  §  50-53. 


§50.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  etc.  are  feminine.  See 
§  29,  2. 


Yet  the  following  na 

Acanthus,  bear's-foot. 
Amarantus,  amaranth . 
Asparagus,  asparagus. 
Calamus,  a  reed. 
Carduus,  a  thistle. 
Dumus,  a  bramble. 


\  of  plants  are  masculine 

Ebulus,  an  elder. 
Helleborus,  hellebore. 
Intubus,  endive. 

Juncus,  a  bulrush. 
Raphanus,  a  radish. 
Rhamnos,  buck-thorn. 


Rubus,  a  blackberry-bush. 
Tribulus,  a  caltrops. 

And  sometimes 
Amaracus,  marjoram. 
Cytisus,  snail-clover. 


Oleaster  and  pinaster ,  names  of  trees,  are  also  masculine. 


The  following  names  of  gems  are  also  masculine : — 

Bervllus,  a  beryl.  Chrysoprasus,  chrysoprase.  So  also, 

Carbunculus,  a  carbuncle.  Opalus,  opal.  Pyropus,  gold-bronze. 

Chrysolithus,  chrysolite ,  and  smaragdus,  an  emerald ,  are  doubtful. 

Names  of  females  in  urn  are  feminine:  §  29,  1;  as,  mea  Glycerium ,  Ter. 
Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  «m  are  generally  neuter ;  as,  apium,  parsley; 
aconitum,  wolf’s  bane. 

Canopus ,  Pontus ,  Hellespontus ,  Isthmus,  and  all  plural  names  in  i  of  countries 
and  towns  are  masculine.  Abydus(os)  is  doubtful. 

Names  of  countries  and  towns  ending  in  um,  or,  if  plural,  in  a,  are  neuter 
as,  Ilium  or  Ilion  ;  Ecbatana,  brum. 

§  51.  The  following  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently  masculine : — 


Balanus,  a  date.  Grossus,  an  unripe  jig.  Phaselus,  a  light  vessel. 
Barbitos,  a  lute.  Pampinus,  a  vine-leaf. 

Atdmus,  an  atom,  and  cdlus,  a  distaff,  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently  femi¬ 
nine. 


Pelagus ,  the  sea,  and  virus,  poison,  are  neuter. 

Vulgus ,  the  common  people,  is  neuter,  and  rarely  masculine. 


Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§  5*2.  Genitive  singular.  When  the  genitive  singular  ends  in  it, 
the  poets  frequently  contract  it  into  i ;  as,  ingem,  for  ingenii. 

Vocative  singular .  The  vocative  of  nouns  in  us  is  sometimes  like 
the  nominative,  especially  in  poetry ;  as,  fluvius ,  Latinus ,  in  Virgil. 
So,  audi  tu,  populus  Albanus.  Liv. 

Proper  names  in  ius  omit  e  in  the  vocative  ;  as,  Horatius ,  Horati; 
Virgilius ,  Vingili. 

Filius,  a  son,  and  genius,  a  guardian  angel,  make  abo  fili  and  geni.  Other 
nouns  in  ius,  including  patrials  and  possessives  derived  from  proper  names, 
form  then*  vocative  regularly  in  e ;  as,  Delius,  Delie ;  Tirynthius,  Tirynthie ; 
Laertius,  Laertie. 

§  53.  Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  some  nouns  of 
the  second  declension,  especially  of  those  which  denote  money,  weight 
and  measure,  is  commonly  formed  in  um,  instead  of  Drum:  §  322,  4. 

Such  are  particularly  nummum,  sestertium ,  denarium,  medimnum,  jugerum , 
modium,  talentum.  The  same  form  occurs  in  other  words,  especially  in  poetry; 
as,  deum,  liberum,  Danaum  ;  etc.,  and  sometimes  om  is  found  instead  of  um ; 
as,  Achivom.  Virg.  Cf.  §  322,  8. 


§  54,  55, 


THIRD  DECLENSION- 


29 


Delis,  a  god ,  is  thus  declined : — 


Singular . 
N.  de'-us, 
G.  de'-i, 

D.  de'-o, 
Ac.  de'-um, 
V.  de'-us, 
Ab.  de'-o. 


Plural. 

N.  di'-i,  dl,  or  de'-i, 

G.  de-o'-rum, 

D.  di'-is,  dls,  or  de'-is, 
Ac.  de'-os, 

V.  di'-i,  di,  or  de'-i, 
Ab.  di'-is,  dls,  or  de'-is. 


Jesus ,  or  Iesus ,  the  name  of  the  Savior,  has  um  in  the  accusative,  and  u 
in  all  the  other  oblique  cases. 


Greek  Nouns. 


§54.  1.  Os  and  on,  in  the  second  declension,  are  Greek  ter¬ 

minations,  and  are  commonly  changed,  in  Latin,  into  ns  and  um  ;  but 
sometimes  both  forms  are  in  use  ;  as,  Alpheos ,  and  Alpheus ;  Ilion  and 
Ilium.  Greek  names  in  ros  after  a  consonant  commonly  change  ros 
into  er  ;  as,  Alexandros ,  Alexander  ;  Teucros ,  Teucer.  In  a  few  words 
ros  is  changed  to  rus  ;  as,  Codrus ,  hydrus ,  and  once  in  Yirgil,  Teucrus . 


Greek  nouns  are  thus  declined  in  the  singular  number : — 


Singular. 

N.  De'-los,  Andro'-ge-os, 

G.  De'-ll,  An-dro'-ge-d,  or  I, 

D.  De'-lo,  An-dro/-ge-o, 

Ac.  De'-lon  or  um,  An-dro'-ge-o,  or  on, 
V.  De'-le,  An-dro'-ge-os, 

Ab.  De'-lo.  An-dro'-ge-d. 


Barbiton,  a  lyre. 
N.  bar'-bi-ton, 
G.  bar'-bl-tl, 

D.  bar'-bi-td, 
Ac.  bar'-bi-ton, 
V.  bar'-bi-ton, 
Ab.  bar'-bi-to. 


2.  The  plurals  of  Greek  nouns  in  os  and  on  are  declined  like  those  of  dominus 
and  regnum ;  but  the  nominative  plural  of  nouns  in  os  sometimes  ends  in  as  ; 
as,  canephdroe. 

8.  In  early  writers  some  nouns  in  os  have  a  genitive  in  u  (oi>);  as,  Menandru. 
Ter. 

4.  A  genitive  plural  in  on ,  instead  of  drum,  occurs  in  the  titles  of  books  and 
in  some  names  of  places ;  as,  Georgicon ;  Philenon  arcs,.  Sail. 

5.  Greek  proper  names  in  eus  (see  §  9,  R.  8),  are  declined  like  dominus ,  except 
that  the  vocative  ends  in  eu ;  but  sometimes  in  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accu¬ 
sative  also,  they  retain  the  Greek  form,  viz.  gen.  eds ,  dat.  ei  (contracted  el), 
acc.  ea  or  ea ,  and  are  of  the  third  declension.  See  §§  86,  and  806,  (1.)  So  in 
Lucretius  the  neuter  peldgus  (Greek  7ri\ctyoc,  tog)  has  an  accusative  plural 
pelage  for  pelagea  after  the  third  declension.  §  83, 1. — See  also  respecting  a  geni¬ 
tive  in  i  of  some  proper  nouns  in  es ,  §  73,  Rem. — Panthu  occurs  in  Yirgil,  A.  2, 
822,  as  the  vocative  of  Panthus.  Cf.  \  81. 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 

§  55.  The  number  of  final,  letters,  in  this  declension,  is 
twelve.  Five  are  vowels — a ,  e,  i,  o ,  y ;  and  seven  are  conso¬ 
nants — c,  l ,  n ,  r,  s ,  t ,  x.  The  number  of  its  final  syllables  ex¬ 
ceeds  fifty. 

Rem.  The  following  terminations  belong  exclusively  to  Greek  nouns ;  viz. 
ma ,  i,  y,  an,  in,  On,  yn,  er,  yr,  ys,  eus,  yx,  inx%  ynx,  and  plurals  in  e. 

8* 


30 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 


§  56. 


Mode  of  declining  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension. 

To  decline  a  word  properly,  in  this  declension,  it  is  necessary  to  know  its  gender,  its 
nominative  singular,  and  one  of  its  oblique  cases ;  since  the  root  of  the  cases  is  not  al¬ 
ways  found  entire  and  unchanged  in  the  nominative.  The  case  usually  selected  for  this 
purpose  is  the  genitive  singular.  The  formation  of  the  accusative  singular,  and  of  the 
nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural,  depends  upon  the  gender :  if  it  is  masculine 
or  feminine,  these  cases  have  one  form ;  if  neuter,  another. 

§  56.  The  student  should  first  fix  well  in  his  memory  the  terminations  of  one 
of  these  forms.  He  should  next  learn  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular  of  the  word 
which  is  to  he  declined.  If  is  he  removed  from  the  genitive,  the  remainder  will  always  be 
the  root  of  the  oblique  cases,  and  by  annexing  their  terminations  to  this  root,  the  word  is 
declined;  thus,  rupes ,  genitive  (found  in  the  dictionary)  rwjpis,  root  rup,  dative  rupi,  etc. : 
so  ars ,  gen.  artis,  root  art ,  dat.  arti,  etc. ;  opus ,  gen.  opens,  root  opSr ,  dat.  open,  etc. 


Rules  for  Forming  the  Nominative  Singular  of  the 
Third  Declension  from  the  Root. 

I.  Roots  ending  in  c ,  g ;  b,  m ,  p ;  u ,  t ,  d ,  and  some  in  r,  add  5  to 
form  the  nominative ;  as,  trabis ,  trabs  ;  hiemis ,  hiems  ;  gruis ,  grus. 

Remark  1.  T,  d  and  r  before  s  are  dropped;  as,  nepdti s,  nepos;  laudis ,  laus; 
Jloi'is ,  Jlos.  So  bov is,  bos ,  drops  v. 

Rem.  2.  C  and  g  before  s  form  x ;  as,  vocis,  vox ;  regis,  rex .  So  vs  forms  x 
in  niv is,  nix.  Cf.  §§  3,  2,  and  171,  1. 

Rem.  3.  Short  i  in  the  root  before  c,  b,  p,  t ,  is  commonly  changed  to  e ;  as, 
pollicis,  pollex;  ccelibis,  coelebs ;  principis,  princeps;  comitis ,  comes .  So  u  is 
changed  to  e  in  aucupis,  auceps. 

Rem.  4.  Short  e  or  6  before  r  in  neuters  is  changed  to  u  ;  as,  generis ,  genus  ; 
tempdris,  tempus. 

Rem.  5.  Short  e  before  r  is  changed  to  i  in  the  masculines  cineris,  cinis ; 
cucumeris,  cucumis ;  pulveris,  pulvis ;  vomeris,  vomis. 

Rem.  6.  A  few  and  those  mostly  monosyllabic  roots  of  masculines  and  fem¬ 
inines,  not  increasing  in  the  genitive,  add  es  or  is,  instead  of  s  alone ;  as,  gen. 
rupis,  nom.  rupes ;  gen.  anris,  nom.  auris. 

Rem.  7.  A  few  neuters  add  e  to  the  root  to  form  the  nominative ;  as,  reds, 
rete ;  mar  is,  mare. 

II.  To  roots  ending  in  l  and  n,  to  some  in  r  and  s,  and  to  those  of 
most  neuters  in  t,  no  addition  is  made  in  forming  the  nominative ;  as, 
animalis ,  animal ;  canonis,  canon  ;  honoris,  honor  ;  assis,  as. 

Remark  1.  Final  on  and  in  in  the  roots  of  masculines  and  feminines,  become 
o  in  the  nominative ;  as,  sermonis,  sermo ;  arundinis,  arundo. 

Rem.  2.  Final  in  in  the  roots  of  neuters  becomes  en  in  the  nominative;  as, 
fluminis,  flumen.  So  also  in  the  masculines,  oscen ,  pecten,  tibicen  and  tubicen. 

Rem.  3.  Tr  and  br  at  the  end  of  a  root,  take  e  between  them  in  the  nomina¬ 
tive;  as,  patris,  pater ;  imbris,  imber.  Cf.  §§  108,  48,  and  106. 

Rem.  4.  Short  6  is  changed  to  u  in  eMris,  ebur ;  femdris,  femur ;  jec&r is,  je¬ 
cur  ;  and  robdris,  robur. 

Rem.  5.  In  the  roots  of  neuters  at  drops  t,  and  it  becomes  ut  in  the  nomina¬ 
tive  ;  as,  poemati  s,  poema ;  capitis,  caput. 

Rem.  6.  Roots  of  this  class  ending  in  repeated  consonants  drop  one  of  them 
in  the  nominative ;  as,  felli s,  fel ;  /arris,  far ;  owis,  at ;  bessis,  bet. 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 


31 


§57. 


The  following  are  the  two  forms  of  termination  in  this  declension : — 


Singular . 


Plural 


Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut . 

Masc.  and 

N. 

* 

* 

N. 

es, 

G. 

is, 

is, 

G. 

um,  (i 

D. 

h 

h 

D. 

ibus, 

Ac. 

em,  (im), 

* 

Ac. 

es, 

V. 

* 

* 

V. 

es, 

Ab. 

e,  (i). 

e,  (i). 

Ab. 

ibus. 

Neut. 
a,  (ia), 
um,  (iu: 
ibus, 
a,  (ia), 
a,  (ia), 
ibus. 


§57.  The  following  are  examples  of  the  most  common  forms  of 
nouns  of  this  declension,  declined  through  all  their  cases. 


Honor,  honor  ;  masc. 

Turris,  a  tower ;  fem. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  ho'-nor, 

ho-no'-res, 

N.  tur'-ris, 

tur'-res, 

G.  lio-no'-ris, 

ho-no'-rum, 

G.  tur'-ris, 

tur'-ri-um, 

D.  ho-no'-ri, 

ho-nor'-i-bus, 

D.  tur'-ri, 

tur'-ri-bus, 

Ac.  ho-no'-rem, 

ho-no'-res, 

Ac.  tur'-rim,  rem, 

tur'-res, 

V.  ho'-nor, 

ho-no'-res, 

V.  tur'-ris, 

tur'-res, 

Ab.  ho-no'-re. 

ho-nor'-i-bus. 

Ab.  tur'-ri,  or  re. 

tur'-ri-bus. 

Rupes,  a  rock ;  fem. 

Nox,  night 

fem. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  ru'-pes, 

ru'-pes, 

N.  nox, 

noc'-tes, 

G.  ru'-pi&, 

ru'-pi-um, 

G.  noc'-tis, 

noc'-ti-um,* 

D.  ru'-pi, 

ru'-pi-bus, 

D.  noc'-ti, 

noc'-ti-bus, 

Ac.  ru'-pem, 

ru'-pes, 

Ac.  noc'-tem, 

noc'-tes, 

V.  ru'-pes, 

ru'-pes, 

V.  nox, 

noc'-tes, 

Ab.  ru'-pe. 

ru'-pi-bus. 

Ab.  noc'-te. 

noc'-ti-bus. 

Ars,  art 

;  fem. 

Miles,  a  soldier 

;  com.  gen. 

Singular . 

Plural . 

Singular. 

Plural . 

N.  ars, 

ar'-tes, 

N.  mi'-les, 

mil'-i-tes, 

G.  ar'-tis, 

ar'-ti-um,* 

G.  mil'-i-tis, 

mil'-i-tum, 

D.  ar'-ti, 

ar'-ti-bus, 

D.  mil'-i-ti, 

mi-lit'-i-bus, 

Ac.  ar'-tem, 

ar'-tes, 

Ac.  mil'-i-tem, 

mil'-i-tes, 

V.  ars, 

ar'-tes, 

V.  mi'-les, 

mil'-i-tes, 

Ab.  ar'-te. 

ar'-ti-bus. 

Ab.  mil'-i-te. 

mi-lit'-i-bus. 

Sermo,  speech  ;  masc. 

Pater,  a  father ;  masc. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  ser'-mo, 

ser-mo'-nes, 

N.  pa'-ter, 

pa'-tres, 

G.  ser-mo'-nis, 

ser-mo'-num, 

G.  pa'-tris, 

pa'-trum, 

D.  ser-mo'-ni, 

ser-mon'-i-bus, 

D.  pa'-tri, 

pat'ri-bus, 

Ac.  ser-mo'-nem, 

ser-mo'-nes, 

Ac.  pa'-trem, 

pa'-tres, 

V.  ser'-mo, 

ser-mo'-nes, 

V.  pa'-ter, 

pa'-tres, 

Ab.  ser-mo'-ne. 

ser-mon'-i-bus. 

Ab.  pa'-tre. 

pat'-ri-bus. 

*  Pronounced  ar'-she-um ,  noc'-she-um.  See  §  13. 


32 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 


§  57. 


Sedile,  a  seat;  neut 


Singular. 
N.  se-di'-le, 
G.  se-dl'-lis, 
D.  se-dl'-li, 
Ac.  se-di'-le, 
V.  se-di'-le, 
Ah.  se-dl'-li. 


Plural. 

se-dil'-i-a, 

se-dil'-i-um, 

se-dil'-i-bus, 

se-dil'-i-a, 

se-dil'-i-a, 

se-dil'-i-bus. 


Virgo,  a  virgin;  fem. 


Singular . 

N.  vir'-go, 

G.  vir'-gi-nis, 
D.  vir'-gi-ni, 
Ac.  vir'-gi-nem, 
V.  vir'-go, 

Ab.  vir'-gi-ne. 


Plural. 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vir'-gi-num, 

vir-gin'-i-bus, 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vir-gin'-i-bus. 


Carmen,  a 


Singular. 

N.  car '-men, 
G.  car'-mi-nis, 
D.  car'-mi-ni, 
Aa,  car'-men, 
V.  car'-men, 
Ab.  car'-mi-ne. 


verse;  neut. 

Plural. 

car'-mi-na, 

car'-mi-num, 

car-min'-i-bus, 

car'-mi-na, 

car'-mi-na, 

car-min'-i-bus. 


Animal,  an  animal :  neut. 


Singular. 

N.  an'-i-mal, 

G.  an-i-ma'-lis, 
D.  an-i-ma'-li, 
Ac.  an'-i-mal, 

V.  an'-i-mal, 
Ab.  an-i-ma'-li. 


Plural. 

an-i-ma'-li-a, 

an-i-ma'-li-um, 

an-i-mal'-i-bus. 

an-i-ma'-li-a, 

an-i-ma'-li-a, 

an-i-mal'-i-bus. 


Iter,  a  journey ;  neut. 


Singular. 

N.  i'-ter, 

G.  i-tin'-e-ris, 
D.  i-tin'-e-ri, 
Ac.  i'-ter, 

V.  i'-ter, 

Ab.  i-tin'-e-re. 


Plural. 

i-tin'-e-ra, 

i-tin'-e-rum, 

it-i-ner'-i-bus, 

i-tin'-e-ra, 

i-tin'-e-ra, 

it-i-ner'-i-bus. 


Opus,  work  ;  neut. 


Singular. 
N.  o'-pus, 

G.  op'-e-ris, 
D.  op'-e-ri, 
Ac.  o'-pus, 

V.  o'-pus, 
Ab.  op'-e-re. 


Plural. 

op'-e-ra, 

op'e-rum, 

o-per'-i-bus, 

op'-e-ra, 

op'-e-ra, 

o-per'-i-bus. 


Lapis,  a  stone ;  masc. 

Singular. 

N.  la'-pis, 


G.  lap'-i-dis, 
D.  lap'-i-di, 
Ac.  lap'-I-dem, 
V.  la'-pis, 

Ab.  lap'-i-de. 


Plural. 

lap'-i-des, 

lap'-i-dum, 

la-pid'-i-bus, 

lap'-i-des, 

lap'-i-des, 

la-pidl-bus. 


G.  cap'-i-tis, 
D.  cap'-i-ti, 
Ac.  ca'-put, 
V.  ca'-put, 
Ab.  cap'-i-te. 


Plural. 

cap'-i-ta, 

cap'-i-tum, 

ca-pit'-i-bus, 

cap'-i-ta, 

cap'-i-ta, 

ca-pit'-i-bus. 


Caput,  a  head;  neut. 

Singular. 

N.  ca'-put, 


Poema,  a  poem ;  neut 


Singular. 

N.  po-e'-ma, 

G.  po-em'-a-tis, 
D.  po-em'-a-ti, 
Ac.  po-e'-ina, 

V.  po-e'-ma, 
Ab.  po-em'-a-te. 


Plural. 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-em'-a-tum, 

po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis, 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis. 


S3 


§  58-61.  THIRD  DECLENSION. - GENDER. 

Rules  for  the  Gender  of  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension. 

§  58.  Nouns  whose  gender  is  determined  by  their  signification,  accord¬ 
ing  to  the  general  rules,  §  28 — 34,  are  not  included  in  the  following  rules  and 
exceptions. 


MASCULINES. 

Nouns  ending  in  o,  er ,  or ,  es  increasing  in  the  genitive,  os,  and 
n,  are  masculine;  as, 

sermo ,  speech;  ddlor,  pain flos,  a  flower;  career ,  a  prison;  pes,  a  foot;  - 
canon ,  a  rule. 

Exceptions  in  O. 

§59,  1.  Abstract  and  collective  nouns  in  io  are  feminine ;  as, 

ratio ,  reason ;  legio ,  a  legion. 

Rem.  1.  But  numerals  in  io;  as,  linio,  trinio,  etc.,  except  unio,  unity,  are 
masculine. 

2.  Nouns  in  do  and  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables,  are  feminine ; 
as,  arundo,  a  reed;  imago,  an  image.  So  also  grando,  hail.  But 
comedo,  a  glutton  ;  unedo,  the  arbute  tree  ;  and  harpago,  a  grappling- 
hook,  are  masculine. 

Rem.  2.  Margo ,  the  brink  of  a  river,  is  doubtful.  Cupido,  desire,  is  often 
masculine  in  poetry,  but  in  prose  is  always  feminine. 

3.  Caro,  flesh,  and  Greek  nouns  in  o,  are  feminine ;  as,  echo,  an  echo.  Bubo, 
the  owl,  is  once  feminine,  Virg.  *A.  4,  462. 


Exceptions  in  ER. 

§60-  1.  Laver,  a  water  plant,  and  tuber,  the  tuber  tree,  are  feminine, 

but  when  the  latter  denotes  the  fruit,  it  is  masculine.  Linter,  a  boat,  is  femi¬ 
nine,  and  once,  in  Tibullus,  masculine.  Siser,  skirret,  is  neuter  in  the  singu¬ 
lar,  but  masculine  in  the  plural. 

2.  The  following,  in  er,  are  neuter : — 


Acer,  a  maple-tree. 
Cadaver,  a  dead  body. 
Cicer,  a  vetch. 

Iter,  a  journey. 

Laser,  assafeetida. 


Papaver,  a  poppy. 
Piper,  pepper. 
Siler,  an  osier. 
Spinther,  a  clasp. 
Suber,  a  cork-tree . 


Tuber,  a  swelling. 
Uber,  a  teat. 

Yer,  the  spring. 
Verber,  a  scourge. 
Zingiber,  ginger. 


Exceptions  in  OR. 

§61.  Arbor,  a  tree,  is  feminine :  ador,  spelt ;  cequor,  the  sea ;  marmor , 
marble ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  are  neuter. 


Exceptions  in  ES  increasing  in  the  genitive . 

1.  The  following  are  feminine  : — 

Compes,  a  fetter.  Quies,  and  Requies,  rest.  TSges,  a  mat. 

Merces,  a  reward.  Inquies,  restlessness. 

Merges,  a  sheaf  of  corn.  Seges,  growing  corn. 

2.  Ales,  a  bird ;  edmes,  a  companion ;  hospes,  a  guest ;  interpres ,  an  inter- 
>reter;  miles,  a  soldier;  obses,  a  hostage ;  preeses,  a  president;  and  satelles,  a 
ife-guard,  are  common,  §  30.  jEs,  brass,  is  neuter. 


34 


THIRD  DECLENSION. - GENDER. 


§  62,  63. 


Exceptions  in  OS. 

3.  Arbos ,  a  tree;  cos ,  a  whetstone;  dos ,  a  dowry;  eos,  the  morning;  and 
rarely  nepos ,  a  grandchild,  are  feminine :  sacerdos ,  custos,  and  60s  are  common, 
^  30:  os,  the  mouth,  and  ds,  a  bone,  are  neuter;  as  are  also  the  Greek  words 
epos ,  epic  poetry ;  and  melos ,  melody. 

Exceptions  in  N. 

4.  Nouns  in  mew  with  four  in  n  are  neuter — gluten,  glue;  inguen,  the  groin: 
pollen,  fine  flour ;  and  unguen,  ointment. 

6.  Four  nouns  in  on  are  feminine — aedon,  a  nightingale;  halcyon,  a  king¬ 
fisher;  icon ,  am  image;  and  sindon,  muslin. 


FEMININES. 

§  62*  Nouns  ending  in  as,  es  not  increasing  in  the  geni¬ 
tive,  is,  ys,  aus,  s  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  x,  are  feminine  ; 
as, 

aetas,  age;  nubes,  a  cloud;  avis,  a  bird;  chlamys ,  a  cloak;  laus,  praise;  trabs, 
a  beam;  pax,  peace. 

Exceptions  in  AS. 

1.  Mas,  a  male,  vas,  a  surety,  and  as,  a  piece  of  money,  or  any  unit  divisi¬ 
ble  into  twelve  parts,  are  masculine.  Greek  nouns  in  as^ antis,  are  also  mascu¬ 
line;  as,  adamas ,  adamant.  So  also  Melas,  the  name  of  a  river,  §  28,  2.  Areas 
and  N6mas  are  common. — 2.  Vas,  a  vessel,  the  indeclinable  nouns,  fas  and 
nefas,  and  Greek  nouns  in  as,  diis,  are  neuter ;  as,  artocreas,  a  meat-pie ;  buce¬ 
ras,  a  species  of  herb. 

Exceptions  in  ES  not  increasing  in  the  genitive . 

3.  Acinaces,  a  scimitar,  and  coles  or  colis ,  a  stalk,  are  masculine.  Antistes, 
palumbes ,  vaies,  and  vepres ,  are  masculine  or  feminine.  Cacoethes ,  hippomanes , 
nepenthes,  and  panaces,  Greek  words,  are  neuter. 


Exceptions  in  IS. 

§  1.  Latin  nouns  in  nis  are  masculine  or  doubtful. 


(1.)  Masc.  Crinis,  hair;  ignis,  fire ;  jsdms,  bread;  manes,  (plur.),  departed 
spirits. — (2.)  Masc.  or  fern.  Amnis,  a  river;  cinis ,  ashes;  finis ,  an  end;  clunis, 
the  haunch ;  cams ,  a  dog ;  f  unis,  a  rope.  The  plurals,  cineres,  the  ashes  of  the 
dead,  and  fines,  boundaries,  are  always  masculine. 

2.  The  following  are  common  or  doubtful : — 


Anguis,  a  snake.  Corbis,  a  basket.  Tigris,  a  tiger. 

Callis,  a  path.  Pollis,  fine  four.  Torquis,  a  chain. 

Canalis,  a  conduit  pipe.  Fulvis,  dust. 

Contubernalis,  a  comrade.  Scrobis,  a  ditch. 


3.  The  following  are  masculine : — 


Axis,  an  axle. 
Aqualis,  a  water-pot. 
Cassis,  a  net. 


Caulis,  or 
Colis, 


a  stalk. 


Cenchris,  a  serpent. 
Collis,  a  hill. 
Cucumis,  a  cucumber. 
Ensis,  a  sword. 

Fascis,  a  bundle. 


Follis,  a  pair  of  bellows. 
Fustis,  a  club. 

Glis,  a  dormouse. 

Lapis,  a  stone. 

Lemures,  pi.,  spectres . 


§  64,  65. 


THIRD  DECLENSION. - GENDER. 


35 


Mensis,  a  month . 
Mugilis,  a  mullet. 
Orbis,  a  circle. 
Piscis,  a  Jish, 
Postis,  a  post. 
Quiris,  a  Roman. 
Samnis,  a  Samnite. 


Sanguis,  blood. 

Semis,  or 
Semissis, 

Bessis,  compounds 
Centussis,  of  as. 
Decussis, 

Tressis, 


Sentis,  a  brier. 
Sodalis,  a  companion. 
Torris,  a  firebrand. 
Unguis,  a  nail. 

Vectis,  a  lever. 
Vermis,  a  worm. 
Vbmis,  a  ploughshare. 


4.  Names  of  male  beings,  rivers,  and  months  in  is  are  masculine  ; 
as,  Dis ,  Pluto  ;  Anubis ,  an  Egyptian  deity  ;  Tigris ,  the  river  Tigris ; 
Aprilis ,  April.  See  §  28. 


Exceptions  in  YS. 


Names  of  rivers  and  mountains  in  ys  are  masculine;  as,  Ildlys ,  Othrys.  See 
§  28,  2  and  3. 

Exceptions  in  S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

§  64.  1.  j Dens,  a  tooth;  fons,  a  fountain;  mons ,  a  mountain;  and  pons , 

a  bridge,  are  masculine.  So  also  are  auceps ,  a  bird-catcher;  chalybs,  steel; 
cliens ,  a  client;  ellops ,  a  kind  of  fish;  epops,  a  hoopoe;  gryps ,  a  griffin;  hydrops , 
the  dropsy ;  merops ,  a  kind  of  bird.  Rudens ,  a  rope,  is  masculine  and  very 
rarely  feminine. 

2.  The  following  nouns  also  are  masculine,  viz.  (a.)  these  which  are  properly 
adjectives — confluens  and  torrens ,  scii,  amnis ;  occidens  and  oriens ,  scii,  sol ; 
(6.)  compounds  of  dens — tridens ,  a  trident,  and  Udens ,  a  two-pronged  mattock; — 
but  bidens,  a  sheep,  is  feminine;  (c.)  the  parts  of  as  ending  in  ns;  as,  sextans , 
quadrans ,  triens,  dodrans ,  and  dextans. 

3.  The  following  are  common  or  doubtful : — 

Adeps,  grease.  Seps,  a  kind  of  serpent.  Serpens,  a  serpent. 

Forceps,  pincers.  Scrobs,  a  ditch.  Stirps,  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

Animans  an  animal,  which  is  properly  an  adjective,  is  masculine,  feminine, 
or  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  X. 

§65.  1.  AX.  Anthrax,  cinnabar;  cdrax,  a  raven;  cordax ,  a  kind  of 

dance ;  dropax,  an  ointment ;  styrax,  a  kind  of  tree ;  thorax,  a  breast-plate ;  and 
Atax,  the  river  Aude,  are  masculine ;  Umax ,  a  snail,  is  common. 

2.  EX.  Nouns  in  ex  are  masculine,  except  fcex,  forfex,  lex ,  nex ,  prex , 
(obsolete  in  nom.  and  gen.  sing.),  and  supellex,  which  are  feminine;  to  which 
add  (§  29)  cdrex,  Hex ,  murex ,  pellex,  and  vitex.  Atriplex  is  neuter  and  very 
rarely  masculine  or  feminine.  Alex,  a  fish-pickle ;  cortex,  bark ;  imbrex,  a  gub- 
ter-tile;  6 hex,  a  bolt;  and  silex,  a  flint,  are  doubtful:  senex ,  an  old  person; 
grex,  a  herd;  rumex ,  sorrel;  and  pumex ,  pumice-stone,  are  masculine  and 
very  rarely  feminine. 

8.  IX.  Cdlix,  a  cup ;  fornix ,  an  arch ;  phoenix,  a  kind  of  bird ;  and  spadix . 
a  palm-branch,  are  masculine :  larix,  the  larch-tree ;  perdix ,  a  partridge ;  and 
vdrix,  a  swollen  vein,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

4.  OX.  Box  and  esox,  names  of  fishes,  are  masculine. 

5.  UX.  Tradux ,  a  vine-branch,  is  masculine. 

6.  YX.  Bombyx,  a  silk-worm;  calyx,  the  bud  of  a  flower;  coccyx,  a  cuckoo; 
dryx,  a  wild  goat,  and  names  of  mountains  in  yx,  as  Eryx,  are  masculine. 
Onyx ,  a  box  made  of  the  onyx-stone,  and  sardonyx,  a  precious  stone ;  also, 
calx ,  the  heel,  and  calx,  lime ;  lynx,  a  lynx,  and  sandyx,  a  kind  of  color,  are 
masculine  or  feminine. 

Note.  Bombyx,  when  it  signifies  silk,  is  doubtful. 

7.  Quincunx ,  septunx,  decunx ,  deunx,  parts  of  as,  are  masculine. 


36 


THIRD  DECLENSION. — GENITIVE. 


§  66-69. 


NEUTERS. 

§  66.  Nouns  ending  in  a ,  e,  i,  y ,  c ,  l,  t ,  ar ,  ur ,  us ,  and  men, 

are  neuter ;  as, 

diadtma,  a  crown;  rete,  a  net;  hydromeli,  mead;  foe,  milk;  vectigal ,  revenue; 
caput,  the  head;  calcar ,  a  spur;  guttur ,  the  throat;  pectus ,  the  breast;  and  yfo- 
jnerc,  a  river. 


Exceptions  in  L,  C,  one?  E. 

Mitgil ,  a  mullet,  and  50Z,  the  sun,  are  masculine.  salt,  is  masculine  or  neuter, 

in  the  singular ;  but,  in  the  plural,  it  is  always  masculine.  Lac  is  neuter  and  rarely 
masculine.  Praneste  is  neuter,  and  once  in  Virgil  feminine. 

Exceptions  in  AR.  and  UR. 

§  67.  Furfur ,  bran;  solar ,  a  trout;  turtur ,  a  turtle  dove;  and  vultur ,  a 
vulture,  are  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  US. 

1.  Lepus,  a  hare;  and  Greek  nouns  in  pus  ( srouc ),  are  masculine;  as,  tripus, 
a  tripod ;  but  lagopus ,  a  kind  of  bird,  is  feminine. 

2.  Nouns  in  us,  having  utis ,  or  udis,  in  the  genitive,  are  feminine ; 
as,  juventus,  youth;  incus ,  an  anvil. 

3.  Pecus,  - udis ,  a  brute  animal,  and  tellus,  the  earth,  are  feminine.  Pessinus, 
and  Selinus,  names  of  towns,  are  also  feminine.  See  §  29. 

4.  Grus,  a  crane ;  mus,  a  mouse ;  and  sus,  a  swine,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

6.  Rhus,  sumach,  is  masculine,  and  rarely  feminine. 

Rules  for  the  Oblique  Cases  of  Nouns  of  the  Third 

Declension. 

GENITIVE  SINGULAR. 

§68.  1.  The  genitive  singular  of  the  third  declension  of  Latin 
nouns  always  ends  in  is,  in  Greek  nouns  it  sometimes  ends  in  os 
and  us. 


A. 

2.  Nouns  in  a  form  their  genitive  in  ads;  as,  di-a-de-ma,  di-a- 
dem'-a-tis,  a  crown ;  dog-ma,  dog'-ma-tis,  an  opinion. 

E. 

3.  Nouns  in  e  change  e  into  is;  as,  re-te,  re-tisr  a  net;  se-di'-le, 
se-di-lis,  a  seat. 


I. 

4.  Nouns  in  i  are  of  Greek  origin,  and  are  generally  indeclinable ;  but  Jig- 
drom'-e-li,  mead,  has  hyd-ro-meV-i-tis  in  the  genitive. 

o. 

§69.  Nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  dnis  ;  as,  ser'-mo ,  ser- 
mo-nis,  speech ;  pCt'-vo ,  pa-vo-nis ,  a  peacock. 


§  70,  71 


THIRD  DECLENSION. - GENITIVE. 


37 


Remark.  Patrials  in  o  have  dnis ;  as,  Macddo,  -dnis ;  but  some  have  dnis ; 
as,  Eburones ,  etc.  See  3d  exception  to  increments  in  0,  §  287. 

Exc.  1.  Nouns  in  do  and  go  form  their  genitive  in  mis;  as,  a-ruri - 
do,  a-ruri -di-nis,  a  reed ;  i-ma-go,  i-mag  -i-nis,  an  image. 

But  four  dissyllables — cudo,  udo ,  ligo  and  mango;  and  three  trisyllables — 
comedo ,  unedo,  and  harpago ,  have  dnis. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  nouns,  also,  have  inis : — Apollo ;  hdmo,  a  man ;  nemo, 
nobody ;  and  turbo ,  a  whirlwind. 

Caro ,  flesh,  has,  by  syncope,  camis.  Anio ,  the  name  of  a  river,  has  Anienis  ; 
Neno,  the  wife  of  Mars,  Nerienis ;  from  the  old  nominatives,  Anien ,  and  Ne- 
rienes. 

Exc.  3.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  Us,  and  their  other 
cases  singular,  in  o ;  as,  Dido,  gen.  Didus ,  dat.  Dido,  etc. ;  Argo,  - us ;  but  they 
are  sometimes  declined  regularly ;  as,  Dido,  Didonis. 

Y. 


Greek  nouns  in  y  have  their  genitive  in  yos ;  as,  mlsy,  misyos,  or,  by  contrac¬ 
tion,  misys. 


c. 


_  §70.  The  only  nouns  in  c  are  df-lec,  a-le'-cis,  fish-brine,  and  lac,  lac 
tis,  milk. 

L.  N.  R 


Nouns  in  l,  n ,  and  r,  form  their  genitive  by  adding  is  ;  as,  cori-sul , 
cori-su-lis,  a  consul ;  ca-non,  cari-o-nis ,  a  rule  ;  lio -nor,  ho-no-ris , 
honor. 


So,  An'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-lis,  an  animal \ 
Yi'-gil,  vig'-I-lis,  a  watchman . 
TT-tan,  Ti-ta'-nis,  Titan. 

Sl'-ren,  Si-re'-nis,  a  Siren . 
DeK-phin,  del-phF-nis,  a  dolphin. 


Cal'-car,  cal-ca'-ris,  a  spur. 
Car'-cer,  car^-ce-ris,  a  prison. 
A'-mor,  a-mo'-ris,  love . 
Gut'-tur,  gut'-tu-ris,  the  throat. 
Mar'-tyr,  mar'-ty-ris,  a  martyr. 


Exceptions  in  L. 

Fel,  gall,  and  mel,  honey,  double  l  before  is,  making  fellis  and  mellis. 


Exceptions  in  N. 

§71.  1.  Neuters  in  en  form  their  genitive  in  Xnis ;  as,  flu' -men, 

flu-mi-nis ,  a  river ;  glu-ten,  glu-ti-nis,  glue. 

The  following  masculines,  also,  form  their  genitive  in  inis : — oscen ,  a  bird  which  fore¬ 
boded  by  its  notes;  pecten,  a  comb;  tibicen,  a  piper;  and  tubicen,  a  trumpeter. 

2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  on  form  their  genitive  in  ontis;  as,  Laomedon ,  Lao¬ 
medontis.  Some  in  in  and  yn  add  is  or  os;  as,  Trachin,  or  Trdchyn,  Trachinis 
or  Trachynos . 

Exceptions  in  R. 

1.  Nouns  in  ter  drop  e  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  pa' -ter,  pa'-tris ,  a  father. 
So  also  imber,  a  shower,  and  names  of  months  in  her ;  as,  October , 
Octobris. 


4 


38  THIRD  DECLENSION. - GENITIVE.  §  72-74. 

But  crater ,  a  cup ;  soter ,  a  savior ;  and  later ,  a  brick,  retain  e  in  the  gen¬ 
itive. 

2.  Far ,  a  kind  of  corn,  has  f arris ;  hepar ,  the  liver,  hepatis  ;  Lar  or  Jxirs, 
Lartis;  iter ,  a  journey,  has  itineris  from  the  old  nominative  itiner ;  Jupiter , 
«/<5ws ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  cordis . 

3.  These  four  in  ur  have  (5Ws  in  the  genitive : — ebur,  ivory ;  femur ,  the  thigh ; 
jecur ,  the  liver;  robur,  strength. 

Femur  has  also  feminis ,  and  jecur ,  jecindris ,  and  jocindris. 


AS. 


§  72.  Nouns  in  «5  form  their  genitive  in  ;  as,  ce'-tas,  ce-ta - 
age ;  pi'-e-tas ,  pi-e-ta-tis,  piety. 

Exc.  1.  As  has  assis ,*  mds,  a  male,  mans;  vas ,  a  surety,  rdc?is ;  and  rds,  a 
vessel,  rds*s.  Arcas,  a  duck,  has  andtis. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  according  to  their  gender ; 
the  masculines  in  antis,  the  feminines  in  adis  or  ados ,  and  the  neuters  in  atis  ; 
as,  adamas,  -antis,  adamant ;  lampas,  -ddis,  a  lamp ;  Pallas ,  -adis  or  -ados ;  buce¬ 
ras,  -atis,  a  species  of  herb.  Areas,  an  Arcadian,  and  N6mas,  a  Numidian, 
which  are  of  the  common  gender,  form  their  genitive  in  adis .  Melas ,  the  name 
of  a  river,  has  Melanis. 

ES. 


§  73.  1.  Nouns  in  es  form  their  genitive  by  changing  es  into  is, 
i tis,  etis,  or  etis  ;  as,  ru-pes,  ru-pis,  a  rock ;  mi-les,  mil'-i-tis,  a  soldier ; 
se  - ges ,  seg'-e-tis,  growing  corn  ;  qui'-es,  qui-e-tis ,  rest. 

Remark.  A  few  Greek  proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  form  their 
genitive  in  ei,  or,  by  contraction,  i,  after  the  second  declension ;  as,  Achilles ,  is, 
ei  or  -i :  and  a  few  in  ce  after  the  first  declension ;  as,  Orestes ,  is  or  ce. 


2.  Those  which  make  itis  are, 


Ales,  a  bird. 

Ames,  a  fowler's  staff. 
Antistes,  a  priest. 
Caespes,  a  turf. 

Comes,  a  companion. 
Eques,  a  horseman. 
Fomes,  touchwood. 


Gurges,  a  whirlpool. 
Hospes,  a  guest. 

Limes,  a  limit. 

Merges,  a  sheaf  of  corn. 
Miles,  a  soldier. 

Palmes,  a  vine-branch. 
Pedes,  a  foot-soldier. 


Poples,  the  ham. 

Satelles,  a  lifeguard. 
Stipes,  the  stock  of  a  tree. 
Termes,  an  olive  bough. 
Trames,  a  by-path. 

Veles,  a  skirmisher. 


3.  The  following  have  etis : — abies ,  a  fir-tree ;  aries,  a  ram ;  indiges,  a  man 
deified;  interpres ,  an  interpreter;  paries,  a  wall;  seges,  a  corn-field;  and  teges, 
a  mat. 

4.  The  following  have  etis : — Cebes;  Ores,  a  Cretan ;  lebes,  a  caldron;  mag¬ 
nes,  a  loadstone;  quies  and  requies,  rest ;  inquies,  restlessness;  and  tapes  (used 
only  in  acc.  and  abl.),  tapestry. — Some  Greek  proper  names  have  either  etis  or 
is  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Chremes,  -etis,  or  -is.  Dares,  -etis,  or  -is. 

Exc.  1.  Obses,  a  hostage,  and  presses,  a  president,  have  idis.  Heres,  an  heir, 
and  merces ,  a  reward,  have  edis ;  pes,  a  foot,  and  its  compounds,  have  edis. 

Exc.  2.  Ceres  has  Cereris  ;  bes,  bessis ;  praes ,  praedis ;  and  ces,  ceris. 


IS. 

§74.  Nouns  in  is  have  their  genitive  the  same  as  the  nomina¬ 
tive  ;  as,  au-ris,  au-ris ,  the  ear ;  a -vis,  a -vis,  a  bird. 


THIRD  DECLENSION. - GENITIVE. 


89 


§  75,  76. 


Exc.  1.  The  following  have  the  genitive  in  eris : — cinis,  ashes;  pulvis,  dust; 
vomis  or  vomer,  a  ploughshare.  Cucumis,  a  cucumber,  has  eris  and  rarely  is. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  have  idis : — capis,  a  cup;  cassis,  a  helmet;  cuspis,  a 
point ;  lapis,  a  stone ;  and  prdmulsis,  an  antepast. 

Exc.  3.  Two  have  inis : — -pollis,  fine  flour,  and  sanguis  or  sanguen,  blood. 

Exc.  4.  Four  have  itis  :—Dis,  Pluto;  Us,  strife;  Quiris,  a  Roman;  and 
Samnis,  a  Samnite. 

Exc.  5.  Glis,  a  dormouse,  has  gliris. 

GREEK  NOUNS. 

1.  Greek  nouns  in  is,  whose  genitive  ends  in  ios  or  eos,  ( io ;  or  ea>c),  form  their  genitive 
in  Latin  inis;  as  (a.)  verbals  in  sis  ;  as,  basis,  mathesis,  etc.  (b.)  compounds  of  polis 
(7roA/c);  as,  metropolis,  NeapOlis ,  etc.;  and  (c.)  a  few  other  proper  names,  as  Charybdis, 
Lachesis,  Syrtis ,  etc.  In  some  nouns  of  this  class  the  Greek  genitive  is  sometimes  found ; 

as,  Nemesis,  Nemesios. 

2.  Greek  nouns  in  is,  whose  Greek  genitive  is  in  tdos  (iSoc),  form  their  Latin  genitive 
in  tdis ;  as,  cegis ,  aspis,  ephemZris,  pyramis,  tyrannis ,  JEnZis,  Iris,  NerSis,  etc.  Tigris 
has  both  is  and  tdis;  and  in  some  other  words  of  this  class  later  writers  use  is  instead 
of  tdis . 

3.  Charis  has  Charitis ;  Salamis,  Salaminis,  and  Simtiis,  Simoentis. 

os. 

§  75.  Nouns  in  os  form  their  genitive  in  oris  or  dtis ;  as,  Jlos, 
jlo-ris,  a  flower;  ne-pos,  ne-po-tis ,  a  grandchild. 

The  following  have  oris : — 

Flos,  a  flower.  Labos  or  labor,  labor.  Os,  the  mouth. 

Glos,  a  husband's  sister.  Lepos  or  lepor,  wit.  Ros,  dew. 

Honos  or  honor,  honor.  Mos,  a  custom. 

Arbos  or  arbor,  a  tree,  has  dris. 

The  following  have  dtis : — 

Cos,  a  whetstone.  Monoceros,  a  unicorn.  Nepos ,  a  grandchild. 

Dos,  a  dowry.  Rhinoceros,  a  rhinoceros.  Sacerdos,  a  priest. 

Exc.  1.  Custos,  a  keeper,  has  custodis  ;  bos,  an  ox,  bdvis ;  and  ds,  a  bone,  ossis. 

Exc.  2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  os  have  ois  in  the  genitive;  as,  heros,  a  hero; 
Minos;  Tros,  a  Trojan ;  and  some  Greek  neuters  in  os  are  used  in  the  third 
declension  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  only ;  as,  Argos,  cetos,  epos,  melos. 

US. 

§  76.  1.  Nouns  in  us  form  their  genitive  in  eris  or  oris ;  as,  ge¬ 

nus,  gen-e-ris ,  a  kind ;  tem-pus,  tem-pS-ris ,  time. 

2.  Those  which  make  eris  are,  acus ,  (chaff ),  foedus,  funus,  genus,  gldmus ,  la¬ 
tus,  munus,  olus,  dnus,  6pus,  pondus,  rudus,  scelus,  sidus,  ulcus,  vellus,  viscus  and 
vulnus.  In  early  writers  pignus  has  sometimes  pigneris. 

3.  Those  which  make  dris  are,  corpus,  decus,  dedecus,  facinus ,  fenus,  frigus, 
lepus,  litus,  nemus,  pectus,  pecus,  penus,  pignus,  stercus,  tempus,  and  tergus. 

Exc.  1.  These  three  .in  us  have  udis incus,  an  anvil;  palus,  a  morass;  and 
subscus,  a  dove-tail.  Penis,  a  brute  animal,  has  pecudis. 

Exc.  2.  These  five  have  utis juventus,  youth;  salus ,  safety;  senectus,  old 
age ;  servitus,  slavery ;  virtus,  virtue. 


40 


THIRD  DECLENSION. — GENITIVE. 


§  77,  78, 


Exc.  3.  Monosyllables  in  us  have  uris ;  as,  crus,  the  leg ;  jus,  right ;  jus,  broth ; 
mus ,  a  mouse ;  pus,  matter ;  rus ,  the  country ;  tus,  frankincense ;  except  prus, 
and  sus,  which  have  gruis ,  and  suis ;  and  rhus,  which  has  rhois  or  roris.  Tellus, 
the  earth,  has  telluris ;  and  Lxgus  or  Ligur,  a  Ligurian,  has  Liguris. 

Exc.  4.  Fraus,  fraud,  and  laus ,  praise,  have  fraudis,  laudis. 

Exc.  5.  Greek  nouns  in  pus  (irai/s)  have  ddis  ;  as,  tripus,  tripddis,  a  tripod; 
(Edipus,  -ddis;  but  this  is  sometimes  of  the  second  declension. 

Exc.  6.  Some  Greek  names  of  cities  in  us  have  untis ;  as,  Amathus,  Amathun¬ 
tis*  So  Trapezus ,  Opus,  Pessinus,  and  Selinus. 

Exc.  7.  Greek  nouns  ending  in  eus  are  all  proper  names,  and  have  their 
genitive  in  eos ;  as,  Orpheus }  -eos.  But  these  noun9  are  found  also  in  the  second 
declension ;  as,  Orpheus,  -ei  or -i.  Cf.  §  64,  5. 

YS. 

§77.  1.  Nouns  in  ys  are  Greek,  and  make  their  genitive  in 

pis  (contracted  gs),  or,  as  in  Greek,  yos  (i/o?)  ;  as, 

C6tys,  gen.  Cotyis  or  Cotys ;  Tethys,  -yis  or  yos.  So  Atys,  Capys ,  Erinnys , 
Ealys,  Othrys.  A  few  have  ydis  ;  as,  chlamys,  chlamydis. 

S  preceded  by  a  consonant . 

2.  Nouns  in  s,  with  a  consonant  before  it,  form  their  genitive  by 
changing  s  into  is  or  tis  ;  as,  trabs ,  tra-bis,  a  beam ;  hi'-ems,  hi'-e-mis, 
winter ;  pars ,  pardis,  a  part ;  frons,  frondis,  the  forehead. 

(1.)  Those  in  Is,  ms,  and  ps ;  as,  scrobs,  hiems ,  stirps,  change  s  into  is;  except 
gryps ,  a  griffin,  which  has  gryphis . 

Remark.  Compounds  in  ceps  from  cdpio  have  ipis ;  as,  princeps,  principis , 
a  prince.  But  auceps  has  aucupis. 

(2.)  Those  in  Is,  ns,  and  rs,  as,  puls,  gens,  ars,  change  s  into  tis. 

Exc.  1.  The  following  in  ns  change  s  into  dis frons,  foliage :  glans,  an 
acorn;  juglans,  a  walnut;  lens,  a  nit;  and  libripens ,  a  weigher. 

Exc.  2.  Tiryns,  a  town  of  Argolis,  has  Tirynthis  in  the  genitive. 

T. 

§  78.  1.  Nouns  in  t  form  their  genitive  in  Ktis.  They  are,  caput , 

the  head,  gen.  cap'-i-tis  ;  and  its  compounds,  occiput  and  sinciput . 


X. 

2.  Nouns  in  x  form  their  genitive  by  resolving  x  into  cs  or  gs ,  and 
inserting  i  before  s  ;  as,  vox  (vocs)  vo-cis,  the  voice ;  lex  (legs)  le-gis, 

a  law. 

(1.)  Latin  nouns  in  ax  have  ads;  as,  fomax,  fornacis,  except  fax,  fads. 
Most  Greek  nouns  in  ax  have  ads ;  as,  thorax ,  thoracis;  a  few  have  dcis ;  as, 
cdrax,  corads ;  and  Greek  names  of  men  in  nax  have  nactis ;  as,  Astyanax, 
Astyanactis. 

(2.)  Nouns  in  ex  have  ids ;  as,  index,  Judids :  dbex  Ms  obids  or  objicis  ;  and 
vibex,  vibids.  Nex,  prex,  (nom.  obs.),  resex  and  fenisex  have  ids;  alex,  nar¬ 
thex,  and  vervex  have  eds,  and  fex,  feeds.  Lex  and  rex  have  egis ;  aquilex 
and  grex  have  igis ;  remex  has  remigis ;  senex,  sinis ;  and  supellex,  supellectilis . 


§79,80.  THIRD  DECLENSION. - DATIYE  AND  ACCUSATIVE.  41 


(3.)  Nouns  in  ix  have  ids ;  as,  cervix ,  cervicis;  and  less  frequently  ids;  as, 
calix ,  calicis.  But  nix  has  nivis ;  strix ,  foreign  names  of  men,  and  gentile  nouns 
in  rix  have  igis;  as,  Biturix ,  Dumnorix ,  etc. 

(4.)  Nouns  in  ox  have  ocis;  as,  vox,  vocis;  but  Cappadox  has  Cappadocis; 
Alldbrox ,  Allobrogis ;  and  nox,  noctis. 

(5.)  Of  nouns  in  ux ,  crux ,  dux,  tradux ,  and  m/a?  have  was;  lux  and  Pollux , 
was. —  Conjux  has  conjugis ,  /rwa?  (nom.  obs.)  frugis ,  and  faux,  faucis. 

(6.)  Fa?,  a  Greek  termination,  has  ya‘s,  yas,  or  ygis,  ygis.  Onyx  and  sar- 
ddnyx ,  in  which  a?  is  equivalent  to  c/ts  (§  3,  2)  have  ychis;  as,  owya?,  onychis. 

DATIVE  SINGULAR. 

§  79.  The  dative  singular  ends  in  i ;  as,  sermo ,  dat.  sermoni . 

Anciently  it  also  ended  in  e;  as,  morte  datus.  Varro  in  Gellius.  So  cere  for 
ceri,  Cic.  and  Liv. ;  and  jure  for  juri.  Liv. 


ACCUSATIVE  SINGULAR. 

(a.)  The  accusative  singular  of  all  neuter  nouns  is  like  the  nomi¬ 
native. 


( b .)  The  accusative  singular  of  masculines  and  feminines,  ends  in 
em.  Yet  some  Latin  nouns  in  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  geni¬ 
tive,  have  im ,  and  some  Greek  nouns  have  im,  in,  or  a. 

1.  Many  proper  names  in  is,  denoting  places,  rivers,  or  gods?  have  the  accus¬ 
ative  singular  in  im ;  as,  Hispalis ,  Tiberis ,  Anubis ;  so  also  Albis,  Athesis,  Beetis , 
Arar  or  Araris ,  Bilbilis,  Apis,  Osiris,  Syrtis,  etc.  These  sometimes,  also,  make 
the  accusative  in  in ;  as,  Albin.  Scaldis  has  in  and  em,  and  Liris,  im,  in,  and  em. 
Liger  has  Ligerim. 


2.  The  following  also  have  the  accusative  in  im : — 
Amussis,  a  mason's  rule.  Mephitis,  foul  air. 

Buris,  a  plough-tail.  Pelvis,  a  basin. 

Cannabis,  hemp.  Ravis,  hoarseness. 

Cucumis,  {gen.  -is),  a  cucumber.  Securis,  an  axe. 


Sinapis,  mustard. 
Sitis,  thirst. 
Tussis,  a  cough. 
Vis,  strength. 


3.  These  have  im,  and  sometimes  em : — 

Febris,  a  fever.  Puppis,  the  stern.  Restis,  a  rope.  Turris,  a  tower . 


But  these  have  em,  and  rarely  im : — 

Bipennis,  a  battle-axe.  Navis,  a  ship.  Sementis,  a  sowing. 

Clavis,  a  key.  Praisepis,  a  stall.  Strigilis,  a  flesh-brush. 

Messis,  a  harvest. 

4.  Lens  and  pars  have  rarely  lentim  and  partim ;  and  cratim  from  crates,  is 
found  in  Plautus. 

6.  Early  writers  formed  the  accusative  of  some  other  nouns  in  im. 


Accusative  of  Greek  Nouns . 

§80.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculine  and  feminine  Greek 
nouns  sometimes  retains  the  Greek  terminations  in  and  a,  but  often 
ends,  as  in  Latin,  in  em  or  im. 

I.  Masculine  and  feminine  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os, 
impure,  that  is,  with  a  consonant  going  before,  have  their  accusative  in  em  or  a  ; 
as,  lampas,  lampadis  (Greek  -  Joe),  lampada;  chlamys,  chlamydis,  chlamydem ,  or 
- yda ;  Helicon,  Heliconis ,  Helicona . 

4* 


42  THIRD  DECLENSION. - VOCATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE.  §  81,  82. 


Remark.  In  like  manner  these  three,  which  have  is  pure  in  the  genitive — 
Tros,  Trois ,  Troem,  and  Troa,  a  Trojan;  heros ,  a  hero;  and  Minos ,  a  king  of 
Crete. — Aer,  the  air;  cether,  the  sky;  delphin ,  a  dolphin;  and  poean ,  a  hymn, 
have  usually  a ;  as,  aera ,  aethera ,  delphina ,  paeana.  Pan ,  a  god,  has  only  a. 

Exc.  1.  Masculines  in  is,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os  impure,  have 
their  accusative  in  im  or  in;  sometimes  in  idem;  Paris,  Paridis ;  Parim ,  or 
Paridem. 

Exc.  2.  Feminines  in  is,  increasing  impurely  in  the  genitive,  though  they 
usually  follow  the  rule,  have  sometimes  im  or  in ;  as,  j£7is,  Elidis ;  Adi»  or  JEft- 
dem.  So  tigris ,  gen.  is  or  idis  ;  acc.  tigrim  or  tigrin. 

II.  Masculine  and  feminine  Greek  nouns  in  is  not  increasing,  and  in  ys,  gen. 
yos ,  form  their  accusative  by  changing  the  s  of  the  nominative  into  morn;  as, 
Charybdis ,  (gen.  Lat.  -is,  Gr.  sa?),  acc.  Charybdim  or  -in ;  Dalys,  -yis  or  -yos, 
Halym  or  -yn.  So  7‘hus ,  gen.  r/tois,  has  rhun  or  rhum. 

HI.  Proper  names  ending  in  the  diphthong  eus,  gen.  ei  and  eos ,  have  the  ac¬ 
cusative  in  ea;  as,  Theseus,  Thesea;  Tydeus ,  Tydea.  See  §  54,  5. 

IV.  Some  Greek  proper  names  in  es,  whose  genitive  is  in  is,  have  in  Latin, 
along  with  the  accusative  in  em,  the  termination  en,  as  if  of  the  first  declension ; 
as,  Achilles ,  Achillen ;  Xerxes ,  Xerxen ;  Sophocles ,  Sophdclen.  Cf.  §  45,  1.  Some 
also,  which  have  either  efo’s  or  is  in  the  genitive,  have,  besides  stem,  eta,  or  em, 
the  termination  era ;  as,  Chremes,  Thales. 

VOCATIVE  SINGULAR. 

§81.  The  vocative  is  like  the  nominative. 

Remark.  Many  Greek  nouns,  however,  particularly  proper  names,  drop  s  of  the 
nominative  to  form  the  vocative;  as,  Daphnis ,  Daphni;  Tcthys ,  Tethy ;  Melampus , 
Melampu;  Orpheus ,  Orpheu.  Proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  have  a  vocative 
in  5,  after  the  first  declension;  as,  Socrates ,  Socrate.  §  45,  1. 

ABLATIVE  SINGULAR. 

§82.  The  ablative  singular  commonly  ends  in  e . 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  Neuters  in  e,  al,  and  ar,  have  the  ablative  in  i ;  as, 
sedile ,  sedili ;  animal ,  animali ;  calcar ,  calcari. 

(b.)  But  names  of  towns  in  e,  and  the  following  neuters  in  ar,  have  e  in  the 
ablative ;  viz.  baccar,  an  herb ;  far,  corn ;  hepar,  the  liver ;  jubar ,  a  sunbeam ; 
nectar,  nectar;  par,  a  pair;  sal ,  salt.  Pete,  a  net,  has  either  e  or  i;  and  mare , 
the  sea,  has  sometimes  in  poetry  mare  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  Nouns  which  have  im  alone,  or  both  im  and  in  in  the 
accusative,  and  names  of  months  in  er  or  is,  have  i  in  the  ablative ; 
as,  vis,  vim,  vi;  Tiberis ,  -im,  i ;  December,  Decembri ;  Aprilis,  Aprili. 

^  (5.)  But  Boetis,  cannabis,  and  sinapis ,  have  e  or  i.  Tigris,  the  tiger,  has 
tigride ;  as  a  river  it  has  both  TigHde  and  Tigri. 

Exc.  3.  (a.^)  Nouns  which  have  em  or  im  in  the  accusative,  have 
their  ablative  m  e  or  i;  as,  turris,  turre  or  turri . 

(b.)  So  Elis,  acc.  Elidem  and  E I'm,  has  Elide  or  Eli.  But  restis ,  and  most 
Greek  nouns  with  t dis  in  the  genitive,  have  e  only ;  as,  Paris,  -idis,  -ide. 

Exc.  4.  (a.)  Adjectives  in  is,  used  as  nouns,  have  commonly  i  in  the  abla¬ 
tive,  but  sometimes  e ;  as,  familiaris,  a  friend ;  natalis,  a  birthday ;  sodalis,  a 
companion ;  triremis,  a  trireme. — Participles  in  ns,  used  as  nouns,  have  com¬ 
monly  e  in  the  ablative,  but  contlmns  has  i. 


§83. 


THIRD  DECLENSION. - PLURAL  CASES. 


43 


(A)  When  adjectives  in  is  become  proper  names,  they  always  have  e  /  as, 
Juvenalis,  Juvenale.  Affinis  and  cedllis  have  generally  e ;  as  have  always  juve¬ 
nis,  a  youth ;  rudis,  a  rod ;  and  volucris ,  a  bird. 

Exc.  5.  (a.)  The  following,  though  they  have  only  em  in  the  accusative, 
have  e  or  i  in  the  ablative,  but  most  of  them  have  oftener  e  than  i : — 


Amnis, 

Collis, 

Ignis, 

Pars, 

Supellex, 

Anguis, 

Convallis, 

Imber, 

Mugilis, 

Postis, 

Pugil, 

Tridens, 

Unguis, 

Avis, 

Corbis, 

Bilis, 

Finis, 

Orbis, 

Sordes, 

Vectis, 

Civis, 

Classis, 

Fustis, 

Ovis, 

Sors, 

Vesper. 

(A)  Occiput  has  only  i,  and  rus  has  either  e  or  i;  but  rure  commonly  signifies 
from  the  country,  and  ruri ,  in  the  country.  Mel  has  rarely  i. 

(c.)  So  also  names  of  towns,  when  denoting  the  place  where  any  thing  is 
said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  have  the  ablative  in  i ;  as,  Carthagini,  at  Carthage; 
so,  Anxuri  and  Lacedaemoni,  and,  in  the  most  ancient  writers,  many  other  nouns 
occur  with  this  termination  in  the  ablative.  Canalis  has  i,  and  very  rarely  e. 

Exc.  6.  Nouns  in  ys,  which  have  ym  or  yn  in  the  accusative,  have  their  ab¬ 
lative  in  ye  or  y ;  as,  Atys,  Atye,  or  Aty. 

NOMINATIVE  PLURAL. 

§83.  I.  The  nominative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines 
ends  in  es ;  as,  sermones ,  rupes: — but  neuters  have  a ,  and  those 
whose  ablative  singular  ends  in  i  only,  or  in  e  and  i,  have  ia  ;  as, 
caput ,  capita  ;  sedile,  sedilia  ;  rete,  retia.  Aplustre  has  both  a  and  ia. 

I.  Some  Greek  neuters  in  os  have  e  in  the  nominative  plural;  as,  melos ; 

nom.  plural,  mele;  (in  Greek  by  contraction  jue?oi).  So  Tempe. 

GENITIVE  PLURAL. 

II.  The  genitive  plural  commonly  ends  in  um  ;  sometimes  in  ium. 

1.  Nouns  which,  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  i  only,  or  both  e 
and  i,  make  the  genitive  plural  in  ium  ;  as,  sedile ,  sedili ,  sedilium ; 
turris ,  turre  or  turri,  turrium. 

2.  Nouns  in  es  and  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  genitive  singu¬ 
lar,  have  ium ;  as,  nubes,  nubium  ;  hostis,  hostium. 

Exc.  Canis ,  juvenis ,  fdris,  mugilis,  proles,  strues ,  and  vates,  have  um;  so  oftener 
have  apis ,  strigilis ,  and  volucris ;  less  frequently  mensis,  sedes,  and,  in  the  poets 
only,  ambages,  caedes,  clades,  vepres,  and  coelestis. 

3.  Monosyllables  ending  in  two  consonants  have  ium  in  the  geni¬ 
tive  plural ;  as,  urbs,  urbium  ;  gens ,  gentium  ;  arx,  arcium. 

Exc.  Lynx ,  sphinx ,  and  ops  (nom.  obsolete)  have  um. 

Most  monosyllables  in  s  and  x  pure  have  um,  but  the  following  have  ium ; 
dos,  mas,  glis,  lis,  os  (ossis),  faux,  (nom.  obs.)  nix,  nox,  strix,  vis ,  generally 
fraus  and  mus ;  so  also  fur  and  ren,  and  sometimes  lav. 

4.  Nouns  of  two  or  more  syllables,  in  ns  or  rs,  and  names  of  na¬ 
tions  in  as,  have  commonly  ium,  but  sometimes  um;  as,  cliens,  clien¬ 
tium  or  clientum ;  Arpinas,  Arpinatium. 


44  THIRD  DECLENSION. - PLURAL  CASES.  §  84,  85. 

(1.)  Other  nouns  in  as  generally  have  wm,  but  sometimes  ium;  as,  aetas,  ceta - 
turn  or  cetatium.  Penates  and  optimates  have  usually  ium. 

5.  The  following  have  ium: — caro ,  compes,  linter,  imber ,  uter,  venter,  Samnis , 
Quiris,  and  usually  Insuber.  Fornax  and  palus  have  sometimes  ium. 

6.  Greek  nouns  have  generally  urn ;  as,  gigas,  gigantum ;  Arabs,  Arabum; 
Thrax,  Thracum ; — but  a  few,  used  as  titles  of  books,  have  sometimes  on;  as, 
Epigramma ,  epigrammaton;  Metamorphosis ,  -eon.  The  patrial  Maleon  also  is 
found  in  Curtius,  4,  13. 

Remark  1.  Eos  has  bourn  in  the  genitive  plural. 

Rem.  2.  Nouns  which  want  the  singular,  form  the  genitive  plural  as  if  they 
were  complete;  as,  manes,  manium;  caelites,  caelitum ;  ilia,  ilium ;  as  if  from 
mdnis,  cedes,  and  lie.  So  also  names  of  feasts  in  alia ;  as,  Saturnalia,  Saturna¬ 
lium  ;  but  these  have  sometimes  drum  after  the  second  declension.  Ales  has 
sometimes,  by  epenthesis,  alituum.  See  §  322,  3. 

DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE  PLURAL. 

§84.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  end  in  thus. 

Exc.  1.  Bos  has  bobus  and  biibus,  by  contraction,  for  bovtbus ;  sus  has  subus  by 
syncope,  for  suibus.  §  322,  5,  and  4. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  ma  have  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  more  fre¬ 
quently  in  is  than  in  ibus ;  as,  poema ,  poematis ,  or  poematibus. 

Exc.  3.  The  poets  sometimes  form  the  dative  plural  of  Greek  nouns,  that  in¬ 
crease  in  the  genitive,  in  si,  and,  before  a  vowel,  in  sin;  as,  herois ,  heroidis; 
heroisi ,  or  heroisin.  Ovid.  So  in  Quintilian,  Metamorphosesi. 

ACCUSATIVE  PLURAL. 

§  85.  The  accusative  plural  ends,  like  the  nominative,  in 
a,  id. 

Exc.  1.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines,  whose  genitive 
plural  ends  in  ium,  anciently  ended  in  is  or  eis,  instead  of  es ;  as,  partes,  gen. 
partium ,  acc.  parteis  or  partes. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  masculines  and  feminines,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os 
impure,  have  their  accusative  in  as ;  as,  lampas,  lampadis,  lampadas.  So  also 
heros,  herois,  heroas ,  and  some  barbarian  names  of  nations  have  a  similar  form; 
as,  Brigantas,  Allobrdgas. 


Jupiter,  and  vis,  strength,  are  thus  declined  : — 


Singular . 

N.  Ju'-pl-ter, 
G.  Jo'-vis, 

D.  Jo'-vi, 


Ac.  Jo'-vem, 
V.  Ju'-pi-ter, 


Singular. 
N.  vis, 
G.  vis, 
D.  — 
Ac.  vim, 
V.  vis, 


Plural . 
vT-res, 
vir'-i-um, 
vir'-i-bus, 
vi'-res, 
vi'-res, 


§  86-88. 


FOURTH  DECLENSION. 


45 


§86.  The  following  table  exhibits  the  principal  forms  of  Greek 
nouns  of  the  third  declension  : — 


Nom. 


Gen . 


Bat. 


Acc. 


Voc. 


AM. 


S.  Lampas, 
pi  -ades, 


j  -adis, 

(  -ados, 

-adum, 


-adi, 

-adibus, 


S. 


Heros, 


-ois, 


-oi, 


PL 


-oes, 


-oum, 


-oibus, 


Chelys, 

Poesis, 

Achilles, 

Orpheus, 

Aer, 

'Dido, 


f  -yis> 

i  y.os’ 

[  -is,  -ios, 

(  -eos, 
j  -is,  -ei,  -i, 
( -eos, 

-eos, 

-eris, 

-us, 


-ade. 

-adibus. 

-oe. 

-oibus. 

-ye  or  y. 

-i. 

-e  or  -i. 

See  §  54. 
-ere. 

-o. 


FOURTH  DECLENSION. 


§  87.  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  end  in  us  and  u. 
Those  in  us  are  masculine ;  those  in  u  are  neuter,  and,  except  in 
the  genitive,  are  indeclinable  in  the  singular. 


Nouns  of  this  declension  are  thus  declined : — 


Fructus,  fruit. 


Singular. 
N.  fruc'-tus, 
G.  fruc'-tus, 
D.  fruc'-tu-I, 
Ac.  fruc'-tum, 
V.  fruc'-tus, 
Ah.  fruc'-tu. 


Plural. 

fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-tu-um, 

fruc'-ti-bus, 

fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-ti-bus. 


Cornu,  a  horn. 


Singular. 

N.  cor'-nu, 

G.  cor'-nus, 

D.  cor'-nu, 

Ac.  cor'-nu, 

V.  cor'-nu, 

Ah.  cor'-nu.  cor'-ni-bus. 


Plural. 

cor'-nu-a, 

cor'-nu-iim, 

cor'-ni-bus, 

cor'-nu-a. 


cor  -nu-a, 


In  like  manner  decline 

Can'-tus,  a  song.  Fluc'-tus,  a  wave.  Se-na'-tus,  the  senate. 

Cur'-rus,  a  chariot.  Luc'-tus,  grief.  Ge'-lu,  ice.  (in  sing.) 

Ex-eP-ci-tus,  an  army.  Mo'-tus,  motion.  Ve'-ru,  a  spit. 


Exceptions  in  Gender. 

§88.  1.  The  following  are  feminine : — 

Acus,  a  needle.  Ficus,  a  fig.  Porticus,  a  gallery. 

Domus,  a  house.  Manus,  a  hand.  Tribus,  a  tribe. 


46 


FOURTH  DECLENSION. - EXCEPTIONS. 


§  89. 


Cdlus ,  a  distaff,  and  the  plurals  Quinquatrus ,  a  feast  of  Minerva,  and  Idus,  the 
Ides,  are  also  feminine.  So  noctu ,  by  night,  found  only  in  the  ablative  singular. 

Penus ,  a  store  of  provisions,  when  of  the  fourth  declension,  is  masculine  or 
feminine.  Secus ,  sex,  is  neuter;  see  §  94.  Specus ,  a  den,  is  masculine  and 
rarely  feminine  or  neuter. 

2.  Some  personal  appellatives,  and  names  of  trees,  are  feminine  by 
signification ;  as, 

Anus,  nurus ,  socrus ; — cornus ,  laurus ,  and  quercus.  Myrty,s  also  is  feminine 
and  rarely  masculine.  See  §  29,  1  and  2. 


Exceptions  in  Declension. 


§89.  Damus ,  a  house,  is  partly  of  the  fourth  declension,  and 
partly  of  the  second.  It  is  thus  declined : — 


Singular. 

N.  do'-mus, 

G.  do'-mus,  or  do'-nri, 
D.  dom'-u-I,  or  do'-mo, 
,4c.  do'-mum, 

V.  do'-mus, 

Ab.  do'-mo. 


Plural. 

do'-mus, 

donr'-u-um,  or  do-mo'-rum, 

dom'-i-bus, 

do'-mus,  or  do'-mos, 

do'-mus, 

donT-i-bus. 


(a.)  Domus ,  in  the  genitive,  signifies,  of  a  house;  domi  commonly  signifies, 
at  home.  The  ablative  domu  is  found  in  Plautus,  and  in  ancient  inscriptions. 
In  the  genitive  and  accusative  plural  the.  forms  of  the  second  declension  are 
more  used  than  those  of  the  fourth. 

( b .)  Cornus ,  a  cornel-tree ;  ficus,  a  fig,  or  a  fig-tree;  laurus,  a  laurel;  and 
myrtus,  a  myrtle,  are  sometimes  of  the  second  declension.  Penus  is  of  the 
second,  third  or  fourth  declension. 

(c.)  Some  nouns  in  u  have  also  forms  in  us  and  um;  as,  cornu ,  coimus ,  or  cor¬ 
num.  Adjectives,  compounds  of  manus,  are  of  the  first  and  second  declensions. 


Remark  1.  Nouns  of  this  declension  anciently  belonged  to  the  third,  and 
were  formed  by  contraction,  thus: — 


Singular. 

N .  fructus, 

G.  fructuls,  -us, 

D.  fructui,  -u, 

Ac.  fructuem,  -um, 
V.  fructus, 

Ab.  fructu e,  -u. 


Plural. 
frutues,  us, 
fructuum,  -um, 
fructuibus,  -ubus,  or  -ibus, 
fructues,  us, 
fructues,  -us, 

fructuibus,  -ubus,  or  -ibus. 


2.  The  genitive  singular  in  is  is  sometimes  found  in  ancient  authors ;  as, 
anuis,  Ter.  A  genitive  in  i,  after  the  second  declension,  also  occurs;  as,  sena¬ 
tus,  senati ;  tumultus,  tumulti.  Sail. 

3.  The  contracted  form  of  the  dative  in  u  is  not  often  used ;  yet  it  sometimes 
occurs,  especially  in  Caesar,  and  in  the  poets. 

4.  The  contracted  form  of  the  genitive  plural  in  um  rarely  occurs. 

5.  The  following  nouns  have  ubus  in  the  dative  and  ablative 
plural : — 

Acus,  a  needle.  Artus,  a  joint.  Partus,  a  birth.  Sp&cus,  a  den. 

Arcus,  a  bow.  Lacus,  a  lake.  Pecu,  a  flock.  Tribus,  a  tribe . 

Genu ,  a  knee;  portus,  a  harbor;  tonitrus,  thunder;  and  v&ru,  a  spit,  have  ibus 
or  ubus. 


§  90,  91. 


FIFTH  DECLENSION. 


47 


FIFTH  DECLENSION. 


§  90.  Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  end  in  es ,  and  are  of 
the  feminine  gender. 


They  are  thus  declined :  — 

Res,  a  thing . 

Dies, 

a  day . 

Singular . 

Plural . 

Singular . 

Plural . 

N.  res, 

res, 

N.  di'-es, 

di'-es, 

G.  re'-I, 

re'-rum, 

G.  di-e'-i, 

di-e'-rum, 

D.  re-I, 

re'-bus, 

D.  di-e'-l, 

di-e'-bus, 

Ac.  rem, 

res, 

Ac.  di'-em, 

di'-es, 

V.  res, 

res, 

V.  di'-es, 

di'-es, 

Ab.  re. 

re'-bus. 

Ab.  di'-e. 

di-e'-bus. 

Remark.  Nouns  of  this  declension, 

like  those  of  the 

fourth,  seem  to 

belonged  originally  to  the  third  declension. 

Exceptions  in  Gender. 

1.  Dies ,  a  day,  is  masculine  or  feminine  in  the  singular,  and  always 
masculine  in  the  plural ;  meridies ,  mid-day,  is  masculine  only. 

Note.  Dies  is  seldom  feminine,  in  good  prose  writers,  except  when  it  de¬ 
notes  duration  of  time,  or  a  day  fixed  and  determined. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

2.  The  genitive  and  dative  singular  sometimes  end  in  e  or  in  i,  instead  of  ei; 
as,  gen.  die  for  did,  Yirg. ;  fide  for  fidei,  Hor. ;  acie  for  aciei,  Caes. — gen.  plebi 
for  plebei ,  Liv. — dat.  fide  for  fidei ,  Hor.,  pernicie ,  Liv.,  and  pernicii ,  Nep.,  for 
perniciei.  The  genitive  rabies  contracted  for  rabieis ,  after  the  third  declension, 
is  found  in  Lucretius. 

Remark  1.  There  are  only  about  eighty  nouns  of  this  declension,  and  of 
these  only  two,  res  and  dies, -are,  complete  in  the  plural.  Acies,  effigies,  eluvies , 
facies,  glades,  p'i'ogenies,  series,  species,  spes,  want  the  genitive,  dative,  and  ab¬ 
lative  plural,  and  the  rest  want  the  plural  altogether. 

Rem.  2.  All  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  ies,  except  four —fides,  faith ; 
res,  a  thing;  spes,  hope;  and  plebes,  the  common  people; — and  all  nouns  in  ies 
are  of  this  declension,  except  abies,  aries ,  paries,  quies ,  and  requies,  which  are 
of  the  third  declension. 


Declension  of  Compound  Nouns. 

§91.  When  a  compound  noun  consists  of  two  nominatives,  both 
parts  are  declined ;  but  when  one  part  is  a  nominative,  and  the  other 
an  oblique  case,  the  nominative  only  is  declined.  Of  the  former  kind 
are  respublica,  a  commonwealth,  and  jusjurandum,  an  oath ;  of  the 
latter,  mater -familias,  a  mistress  of  a  family.  Cf.  §  43,  2. 


Singular . 

N.  V.  res-pub'-ll-ca, 

G.  D.  re-i-pub'-li-cse, 
Ac.  rem-pub'-ll-cam, 
Ab.  re-pub'-li-ca. 


Plural. 

N.  V.  res-pub'-ll-cse, 

G.  re-rum-pub-li-ca'-rum, 
D.  Ab.  re-bus-pub'-li-cis^ 

Ac.  res-pub'-li-cas. 


48 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 


§  92. 


Singular. 

N.  jus-ju-ran'-dum, 
G.  ju-ris-ju-ran'-di, 
D.  ,j  u-ri-j  u-ran'-do, 
Ac.  jus-ju-ran'-dum, 
V.  jus-ju-ran'-dum, 
Ab.  j  u-re-j  u-ran'-do. 


Plural. 

j  u-ra-j  u-ran'-da, 


j  u-ra-j  u-ran'-da, 
j  u-ra-j  u-ran'-da. 


Singular. 

N.  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 

G.  m  a-tris-fa-m  il'-i-as , 

D.  ma-tri-fa-mil'-i-as, 

Ac.  ma-trem-fa-mil'-i-as, 

V.  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 

Ab.  ma-tre-fa-mil'-i-as,  etc. 


Note.  The  preceding  compounds  are  divided  and  pronounced  like  the  simple  words  of 
which  they  are  compounded. 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 

§  9a.  Irregular  nouns  are  divided  into  three  classes — 

Variable ,  Defective ,  and  Redundant . 

I.  VARIABLE  NOUNS. 

A  noun  is  variable,  which,  in  some  of  its  parts,  changes  either 
its  gender  or  declension  or  both. 

Nouns  which  vary  in  gender  are  called  heterogeneous  ;  those 
which  vary  in  declension  are  called  heteroclites. 

Heterogeneous  Nouns. 

1.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural;  as, 

Avernus.  Dindymus .  Ismarus .  Massicus.  Maenalus,  Panqceus ,  Tartarus.  Tauqe - 
tus;  plur.  Averna,  etc. 

2.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the  plu¬ 
ral  ;  as, 

jocus,  a  jest;  plur.  joci,  or  joca ; — Idcus ,  a  place ;  plur.  loci,  passages  in  books, 
topics,  places;  Idea,  places; — sibilus ,  a  hissing;  plur.  sibila ,  rarely  sibili ; — intubus , 
endive ;  plur.  intubi  or  intuba. 

3.  Feminine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural ;  as, 

carbasus ,  a  species  of  flax ;  plur.  carbasa,  very  rarely  carbasi ,  sails,  etc.,  made 
of  it ; — Hierosolyma ,  -ee,  Jerusalem ;  plur.  Hierosolyma ,  -brum. 

4.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  in  the  plural ;  as, 

ccelum ,  heaven;  plur.  cceli ; — Elysium ;  plur.  Elysii; — Argos;  plur.  Argi. 
So  siser ,  neut.,  plur.  siser es,  masc. 

5.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the  plural ; 
as, 

frenum ,  a  bridle ;  plur.  freni  or  frena ; — rastrum ,  a  rake ;  plur.  rastri ,  or, 
more  rarely,  rastra ;— pugillar,  a  writing  tablet;  plur.  pugillares  or  pugillaria. 

6.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural ;  as, 

epulum ,  a  feast;  plur.  epulas; — balneum ,  a  bath;  plur.  balneas  or  balnea; — 
nundinum ,  a  market-day ;  plur.  nundinae,  a  fair. 

7.  Feminine  or  neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural ; 
as, 

delicia  or  dflicium ,  delight ;  plur.  deliciae. 


§  93,  94. 


DEFECTIVE  NOUNS. 


49 


Heteroclites. 

§93.  1.  Second  or  third  declension  in  the  singular,  and  third 

in  the  plural ;  as, 

nom.  and  acc.  jugerum,  an  acre;  gen.  jugeri  or  jugeris;  M.  jugero  and 
jugere;  plur.,  nom.,  and  acc.  jugera ;  gen.  jugerum;  abl.  jugeris  and  jugeribus . 

2.  Third  declension  in  the  singular,  and  second  in  the  plural;  as, 
vas,  a  vessel ;  plnr.  vasa ,  drum.  Ancile ,  a  shield,  has  sometimes  anciliorum , 
in  the  genitive  plural. 

Note.  Variable  nouns  seem  anciently  to  have  been  redundant,  and  to  have  retained 
a  part  of  each  of  their  original  forms.  Thus,  vasa .  - drum ,  properly  comes  from  vasum, 
-t,  but  the  latter,  together  with  the  plural  of  vas,  vasis,  became  obsolete. 


II.  DEFECTIVE  NOUNS. 


§  94.  Nouns  are  defective  either  in  case  or  in  number. 

1.  Nouns  defective  in  case  may  want  either  one  or  more  cases. 
Some  are  altogether  indeclinable,  and  are  called  aptotes. 

Such  are  pondo ,  a  pound;  most  nouns  in  i;  as,  gummi ,  gum:  foreign  words; 
as,  Aaron,  Jacob :  semis ,  a  half ;  git,  a  kind  of  plant ;  the  singular  of  mille,  a 
thousand ;  words  put  for  nouns ;  as,  velle  suum ,  for  sua  voluntas ,  his  own  inclina¬ 
tion  ;  and  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet. 

A  noun  which  is  found  in  one  case  only,  is  called  a  Monoptote ; 
if  found  in  two  cases,  a  Diptote  ;  if  in  three,  a  Triptote ;  if  in  four,  a 
Tetraptote ;  and  if  in  five,  a  Pentaptote. 

The  following  list  contains  most  nouns  defective  in  case.  Those 
which  occur  but  once  in  Latin  authors  are  distinguished  by  an  as¬ 
terisk  : — 


*  Abactus,  acc.  pi. ;  a  driving  away. 

Accitu,  abl. ;  a  calling  for. 

Admissu,  abl. ;  admission. 

Admonitu,  abl. ;  admonition. 

jEs,  not  used  in  gen.  pi. 

Affatu,  abl. ;  an  addressing  ;—pl.  affa¬ 
tus,  -ibus. 

Algus,  nom. ;  algum,  acc. ;  algu,  abl. ; 
cold. 

Ambage,  abl.;  a  going  around;— pi. 
entire. 

*  Amissum,  acc. ;  a  loss. 

Aplustre,  nom.  and  acc. ;  the  flag  of  a 
ship  ;—pl.  aplustria,  or  aplustra. 

Arbitratus,  nom. ;  -um,  acc.;  -u,  abl. ; 
judgment. 

Arcessitu,  abl. ;  a  sending  for. 

Astu,  nom.,  acc. ;  a  city. 

Astus,  nom. ;  astu,  abl. ;  craft ; — astus, 
acc.  pi. 

Cacoethes,  nom.,  acc. ;  an  evil  cus¬ 
tom; — cacoethe,  nom.  pi.;  -e,  and 
-es,  acc.  pi. 

Canities,  nom. ;  -em,  acc. ;  -e,  abl. 


Cetos,  acc. ;  a  whale ; — cete,  nom.  and 
acc.  pi. ;  cetis,  dat. 

Chaos,  nom.  acc.;  chao,  abl.;  chaos. 

Cassem,  acc. ;  c^isse,  abl. ;  a  net  ;—pl. 
entire. 

Circumspectus,  nom. ;  -um ;  -u ;  a  look¬ 
ing  around. 

Coactu,  abl. ;  constraint. 

Coelite,  abl. ;  pi.  entire ;  inhabitants  of 

heaven. 

*  Commutatum,  acc. ;  an  alteration. 

Compedis,  gen. ;  compede,  abl. ;  a  fet¬ 
ter  pi.  compedes,  -ium,  -ibus. 

Concessu,  abl. ;  permission. 

Condiscipulatu,  abl. ;  companionship  at 
school. 

Cratim,  or  -em,  acc. ;  -e,  abl. ;  a  hur¬ 
dle  ;—pl.  crates,  -ium,  -ibus. 

Cupressu,  abl. ;  a  cypress. 

Daps,  nom.,  scarcely  used;  dapis,  gen. 
etc.  pi.  dapes,  -ibus ;  a  feast. 

*Datu,  abl. ;  a  giving. 

Derisus,  -ui,  dat. ;  -um,  acc. ;  -u,  abl. ; 
ridicule. 


5C  DEFECTIVE  NOUNS.  §  94. 


Despicatui,  dat. ;  contempt. 

Dica,  nom. ;  dicam,  acc. ;  a  legal  pro¬ 
cess; — dicas,  acc.  pi. 

Dicis,  gen. ;  as ,  dicis  gratia,  for  form's 
sake. 

Ditionis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  acc. ;  -e, 
abl. ;  power. 

Diu,  abl. ;  in  the  dag  time. 

Divisui,  dat. ;  a  dividing. 

Ebur,  ivory ; — -not  used  in  the  plural. 

^Efflagitatu,  abl. ;  importunity. 

*  Ejectus,  nom. ;  a  throwing  out. 

Epos,  nom.  and  acc. ;  an  epic  poem. 

Ergo,  abl.  (or  adv.) ;  for  the  sake. 

Essedas,  aca  pi. ;  war  chariots. 

Evectus,  nom. ;  a  carrying  out. 

Faex,  dregs ,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Fame,  abl. ;  hunger. 

Far,  corn ,  not  used  in  the  gen.,  dat ., 
and  abl.  pi. 

Fas ,  nom. ;  acc.;  right. 

Fauce,  abl. ;  the  throat  ;—pl.  entire. 

Fax,  a  torch ,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Fel,  gall ,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Feminis,'  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -e,  abl. ;  the 
thigh ; — pi.  femina,  -ibus. 

Flictu,  abl. ;  a  striking. 

Foris,  nom.  and  gen.;  -em,  acc;  -e, 
abl. ;  a  door  ;—pl.  entire. 

Fors,  nom.;  -tis,  gen. ;  -tern,  acc.;  -te, 
abl. ;  chance. 

^Frustratui,  abl.  ;  a  deceiving. 

Frux,  fruit ,  nom.  scarcely  used; — 
frugis,  gen.,  etc. 

Fulgetras,  acc.  pi.;  lightning. 

Gausape,  nom.,  acc.,  abl. ;  a  rough  gar¬ 
ment; — gausapa,  acc.  pi. 

Glos,  nom. ;  a  husband's  sister. 

Grates,  acc.  pi. ; — gratibus,  abl.;  thanks. 

Hebdomadam,  acc. ;  a  week. 

Hiems,  winter,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat., 
and  abl.  pi. 

Hippomanes,  nom.  and  acc. 

*Hir,  nom. ;  the  palm  of  the  hand. 

Hortatu,  abl. ;  an  exhorting  ;—pl.  hor¬ 
tatibus. 

Impetis,  gen. ;  -e,  abl. ;  a  shock  ;—pl. 
impetibus. 

Incitas,  07'  -a,  acc.  pi. ;  as,  ad  incitas 
redactus,  reduced  to  a  strait. 

^Inconsultu,  abl. ;  without  advice. 

^Indultu,  abl. ;  indulgence. 

Inferias,  nom.  pi. ;  -as,  acc. ;  -is,  abl. ; 
sacrifices  to  the  dead. 

Infitias,  acc.pl.;  a  denial;  as,  ire  infit- 
ias,  to  deny. 

Ingratiis,  abl.  pi. ,  (used  adverbially); 
against  one's  will. 

Injussu,  abl. ;  without  command. 

Inquies,  nom. ;  restlessness. 

Instar,  nom.,  acc. :  a  likeness. 


Interdiu,  abl.  (or  adv.);  in  the  day  time. 

^Invitatu,  abl. ;  an  inmtation. 

Irrisui,  dat. ;  -um,  acc. ;  -u,  abl. ;  de¬ 
rision. 

Jovis,  nom.,  rarely  used;—/?/.  Joves. 

Jugeris,  gen.;  -e,  abl. ;  an  acre;— pi. 
jugera,  -um,  -ibus. 

Jussu,  abl. ;  command. 

Labes,  a  spot,  wants  gen .  pi. 

Lucu,  abl. ;  day-light. 

^Ludificatui,  dat. ;  a  mockery. 

Lux,  light ,  wants  the  gen.  pi. 

Mandatu,  abL  ;  a  command. 

Mane,  nom.,  acc. ;  mane,  or  rarely  -i, 
abl. ;  the  morning. 

Mel,  honey,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat.,  and 
abl.  pi. 

Melos,  nom.,  acc.;  melo,  dat. ;  melody; 
— mele,  nom.,  acc.  pi. 

Metus,  fear,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat.,  and 
abl.  pi. 

Missu,  abl. ;  a  sending  ;—pl.  missus, 
-ibus. 

Monitu,  abl. ;  admonition ; — pi.  mon¬ 
itus. 

Natu,  abl. ;  by  bb'ih. 

Nauci,  gen.,  with  non;  as,  homo  non 
nauci,  a  man  of  no  account. 

Nefas,  nom.,  acc. ;  wickedness. 

Nemo,  nobody,  wants  the  voc.  and 
the  pi. 

Nepenthes,  nom.,  acc. ;  an  herb. 

Nex,  death,  wants  the  voc.; — neces, 
nom.,  acc.  pi. 

Nihil,  or  nihilum,  nom.  and  acc. ;  -i, 
gen. ;  -o,  abl. ;  nothing. 

Noctu,  abl. ;  by  night. 

Nuptui,  dat. ;  -um,  acc. ;  -u,  abl. ; 
marriage. 

Obex,  nom. ;  -icem,  acc. ;  -ice,  or  -jice, 
abl. ;  a  bolt;— pi.  obices,  -jicibus. 

Objectum,  acc. ;  -u,  abl. ;  an  interposi¬ 
tion;— pi.  objectus. 

Obtentui,  dat. ;  -um,  acc. ;  -u,  abl. ;  a 
pretext. 

Opis,  gen. ;  opem,  acc. ;  ope,  abl. ; 
help;— pi.  entire. 

Oppositu,  abl. ;  an  opposing ;— pi.  op¬ 
positus,  acc. 

Opus,  nom.,  acc. ;  need. 

Os,  the  mouth ,  wants  the  gen.  pi. 

Panaces,  nom. ;  -is,  gen. ;  -e,  abl. ;  an 
herb. 

Pax,  peace,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Peccatu,  abl. ;  a  fault. 

Peciidis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  acc. ;  -e, 
abl.  ;—pl.  entire. 

Pelage,  acc.  pi.  of  pelagus;  the  sea. 

Permissu,  abl. ;  -um,  acc. ;  pei'mission. 

Piscatus,  nom. ;  -i,  gen. ;  -um,  acc. ; 
-u,  abl. ;  a  fishing. 


§  95. 


DEFECTIVE  NOUNS. 


51 


Pix,  pitch ;  pices,  acc.  pi. 

Pondo,  abl. ;  in  weight.  Cf.  §  94, 1. 

Preci, dat. ;  -em,  acc. ;  -e,  abl. ; prayer; 
— pi.  entire. 

Procer ;  nom. ;  -em,  acc. ;  a  peer  ;—pl. 
entire. 

Promptu,  abl.,  readiness. 

Pus  wants  gen.  dat.  and  abl.  pi. 

Relatum,  acc. ; — u,  abl. ;  a  recital. 

Repetundarum,  gen.  pi.  ;  -is,  abl.  ; 
■money  taken  by  extortion . 

Rogatu,  abl.  ;  a  request. 

Ros,  dew ,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Rus,  the  country ,  wants  gen.,  dat.,  and 
abl.  pi. 

Satias,  nom. ;  -atem,  acc. ;  ate,  abl. ; 
satiety. 

Secus,  nom.,  acc. ;  sex. 

Situs,  nom. ;  -um,  acc. ;  -u,  abl. ;  situa¬ 
tion  ; — situs,  nom.  and  acc.  pi. 

Situs,  nom. ;  — us,  gen. ;  -um,  acc.  ;  -u, 
abl. ;  rust; — situs,  acc.pl. 

Sol,  the  sun,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Sordis,  gen.  ;  -em,  acc. ;  -e  and  -i,  abl; 
filth  ;—pl.  sordes, -ium,  etc. 

Spontis,  gen. ;  -e,  abl. ;  of  one's  own 
accord. 

Suboles,  offspring,  wants  gen.pl. 


Suppetise,  nom.  pi.;  -as,  acc.;  sup¬ 
plies. 

Tabum,  nom. ;  -i,  gen. ;  -o,  abl. ;  cor¬ 
rupt  matter. 

Tempe,  nom.  acc.  voc.  pi. ;  a  vale  in 
Thessaly. 

Tus  wants  gen.,  dat.,  and  abl.  pi. 

Venui  and  -o,  dat. ;  um,  acc.;  -o,  abl. ; 
sale. 

Veprem,  acc.;  -e,  abl. ;  a  brier ;— pi. 
entire. 

Verberis,  gen. ;  -e,  abl. ;  a  stripe;— pi. 
verbera,  um,  ibus. 

Vesper,  nom.;  -um,  acc-;  -e,  -i,  or-o, 
abl. ;  the  evening. 

Vespera,  nom. ;  -am,  acc. ;  -a,  abl. ;  the 
evening. 

Vicis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  acc. ;  -e, 
abl. ;  change  ;—pl.  entire,  except  gen. 

Virus,  nom. ;  -i,  gen, ;  -us,  acc. ;  - o ,  abl. ; 
poison. 

Vis,  gen.  and  dal.  rare  ;  strength ;  pi. 
vires,  -ium,  etc.  See  §  85. 

Viscus,  nom. ;  -eris,  gen. ;  -Sre,  abl. ; 
an  internal  organ,  pi.  viscera,  etc. 

Vocatu,  abl. ;  a  calling ; — vocatus,  acc. 
pi. 


Remark  1.  To  these  may  be  added  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension,  which 
either  want  the  plural,  as  most  of  them  are  abstract  nouns,  or  have  in  that 
number  only  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative.  Res  and  dies,  however, 
have  the  plural  entire.  Cf.  \  90,  R.  1. 

Rem.  2.  For  the  use  of  the  vocative,  also,  of  many  nouns,  no  classical  au¬ 
thority  can  be  found. 

§  95.  2.  Nouns  defective  in  number,  want  either  the  plural  or 

the  singular. 

(a)  Many  nouns  want  the  plural  from  the  nature  of  the  things 
which  they  express.  Such  are  generally  names  of  persons,  most  names 
of  places  (except  those  which  have  only  the  plural),  the  names  of 
herbs,  of  the  arts,  most  material  and  abstract  nouns ;  but  these  may 
have  a  plural  when  used  as  common  nouns,  (§  26,  R.  3.),  and  many 
others. 


Rem.  In  Latin  the  plural  of  abstract  nouns  is  often  used  to  denote  the  exist¬ 
ence  of  the  quality,  attribute,  etc.  in  different  objects,  or  the  repetition  of  an 
action  ;  and  in  poetry  such  plurals  are  used  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  metre. 
See  §  98. 

The  following  list  contains  many  of  the  nouns  which  want  the  plural, 
and  also  some,  marked  p,  which  are  included  in  the  above  classes,  but 
are  sometimes  used  in  the  plural. 


Aconitum,  wolfsbane ,  p. 
Adorea,  a  military  re¬ 
ward. 

A£r,  the  air,  p. 

Ms,  brass,  money ,  p. 
iEther,  the  sky. 


JEvum,  age,  lifetime,  p. 
Album,  an  album. 
Allium,  garlic,  p. 
Amicitia,  friendship,  p. 
Argilla,  white  clay. 
Avena,  oats,  p. 


Balaustium,  the  fioicer  of 
the  pomegranate. 
Balsamum,  balsam,  p. 
Barathrum,  a  gulf. 
Callum,  hardened  skin,  p. 
Calor,  heat,  p. 


52 


DEFECTIVE  NOUNS. 


§  96. 


Carduus,  a  thistle ,  p. 
Caro ,  flesh,  p. 

Cera,  wax ,  p. 

Cestus,  a  girdle. 

Cicuta,  hemlock ,  p, 

C oenum,  mud. 
Contagium,  contagion ,  p. 
Crocum,  saffron. 

Crocus,  saffron ,  p. 

Cruor,  Wood,  p. 

Cutis,  the  skin ,  p. 
Diluculum,  the  dawn . 
Ebur,  ivor?/. 

Electrum,  amber ,  p. 

Far,  cor»,  p. 

Fel,  p. 

Fervor,  heat ,  p. 

Fides,  faith. 

Fimus,  dm <7. 
Fuga,j%W,  p. 

Fumus,  smoke ,  p. 

Furor,  madness ,  p. 

Galla,  a»  oak-apple ,  p. 
Gelu,  jfrostf. 

Glarea,  gravel. 

Gloria,  glory ,  p. 
Glastum,  woaa. 

Gluten,  or 
Glutinum,  ote. 

Gypsum,  white  plaster. 
Hepar,  me  fo’rer. 
Hesperus,  the  evening 
star. 

Hllum,  a  dn»y. 
Hordeum,  barley ,  p. 
Humus,  the  ground. 
Indoles,  native  quality ,  p. 
Ira,  anger ,  p. 

Jiibar,  radiance. 

Jus,  justice,  law ,  p. 
Justitium,  a  law  vacation. 


Lac, 

Laetitia,  ^’0«,  p. 

Languor,  faintness,  p. 
Lardum,  bacon,  p. 

Latex,  liquor,  p. 

Letum,  death. 

Lignum,  wood,  p. 

Limus,  mud. 

Liquor,  liquor ,  p. 

Lues,  a  plague. 

Lutum,  clay,  p. 

Lux,  light,  p. 

Macellum,  the  shambles. 
Mane,  the  morning. 
Marmor,  marble ,  p. 

Mel,  honey,  p. 

Meridies,  mid-day. 

Mors,  death ,  p. 

Munditia,  neatness ,  p. 
Mundus,  female  orna¬ 
ments. 

Muscus,  moss. 

Nectar,  nectar. 

Nemo,  no  man. 

Nequitia,  wickedness,  p. 
Nidulum,  nihil,  or  nil,  no¬ 
thing. 

Nitrum,  natron. 

Oblivio,  forgetfulness,  p. 
Omasum,  bullock's  tripe. 
Opium,  opium. 

Palea,  chaff,  p. 

Pax,  peace,  p. 

Penum,  and 
P  enus,  provisions,  p. 
Piper,  pepper. 

Pix,  pitch,  p. 

Pontus,  the  sea. 
Prolubium,  desire. 

Pubes,  the  youth. 

Pulvis,  dust,  p. 


Purpura,  purple,  p. 
Quies,  rest,  p. 

Ros,  dew,  p. 

Rubor,  redness,  p. 

Sabulo  and 
Sabulum,  gravel. 

Sal,  salt. 

Salum,  the  sea. 

Salus,  safety. 

Sanguis,  blood. 
Scrupulum,  a  scruple,  p. 
Senium,  old  age. 

Siler,  an  osier. 

Sinapi,  mustard. 

Siser,  skirret ,  p. 

Sitis,  thirst. 

Sol,  the  sun,  p. 

Sopor,  sleep,  p. 
Specimen,  an  example. 
Spuma,  foam,  p. 

Sulfur,  sulphur,  p. 
Supellex,  furniture. 
Tabes,  a  consumption. 
Tabum,  corrupt  matter. 
Tellus,  the  earth. 

Terror,  terror,  p. 
Thymum,  thyme,  p. 
Tribulus,  a  thistle ,  p. 
Tristitia^  sadness. 

Ver,  spmng. 

Vespera,  the  evening. 
Veternus,  lethargy. 
Vigor,  strength,  p. 

Vinum,  wine,  p. 

Virus,  poison. 

Viscum,  and 
Viscus,  bird-lime . 
Vitrum,  woad. 

Vulgus,  the  common  pea- 
pie. 

Zingiber,  ginger. 


§  96.  (b).  The  names  of  festivals  and  games,  and  several  names 

of  places  and  books,  want  the  singular ;  as,  Bacchanalia,  a  festival  of 
Bacchus ;  Olympia ,  the  Olympic  games  ;  Bucolica,  a  book  of  pastorals ; 
and  the  following  names  of  places : — 


Acroceraunia,  Baiae, 
Amyclas,  Ceraunia, 

Artaxata,  Ecbatana, 

Athenae,  Esquiliae, 


Fundi, 

Gabii, 

Gades, 

Gemoniae, 


Locri, 

Parisii, 

Philippi, 

Puteoli, 


Susa, 

Syracusae, 

Thermopylae, 

Veii. 


Note.  Some  of  those  in  i  properly  signify  the  people. 

The  following  list  contains  most  other  nouns  which  want  the  singular, 
and  also  some,  marked  s,  which  are  rarely  used  in  that  number : — 

Acta,  records.  Alpes,  the  Alps ,  s.  Apinae,  trifles. 

Adversaria,  a  memoran-  Annales,  annals,  s.  Argutiae,  witticisms ,  s. 


dum-book. 
iEstiva,  sc.  castra,  sum¬ 
mer  quarters. 


Antae,  door-posts. 
Antes,  rows. 
Antiae,  a foreloc':. 


Anna,  arms. 

Artus,  the  joints,  s. 
Bellaria,  sweetmeats. 


DEFECTIVE  NOUNS. 


53 


§  97. 


Bigae,  a  tivo-horse  char¬ 
iot ,  s. 

Braccae,  breeches. 
Branchiae,  the  gills  of 
fshes. 

Brevia,  shallow  places. 
Calendae,  the  Calends. 
Cancelli,  balustrades. 
Cani,  gray  hairs. 

Casses,  a  hunter's  net ,  s. 
Caulae,  sheep-folds. 
Celeres,  the  body-guard 
of  the  Roman  kings. 
Cibaria,  victuals,  s. 
Clitellae,  a  pack-saddle. 
Codicilli,  a  writing. 
Coelites,  the  gods ,  s. 
Crepundia,  a  rattle. 
Cunabula,  and 
Cunae,  a  cradle. 
Cyclades,  the  Cyclades ,  s. 
Decimae,  tithes ,  s. 

Dlrae,  the  Furies ,  s. 
Divitiae,  riches. 

Druides,  the  Druids. 
Dryades,  the  Dryads ,  s. 
Epulae,  a  banquet ,  s. 
Eumemdes,  the  Furies ,  s. 
Excubiae,  watches. 
Exsequiae,  funeral  rites. 
Exta,  entrails. 

Exuviae,  spoils. 

Facetiae,  pleasantry,  s. 
Feriae,  holidays,  s. 

Fides,  a  stringed  instru¬ 
ment,  s. 

Flabra,  blasts. 

Fraces,  the  lees  of  oil. 
Fraga,  strawberries ,  s. 
Gemini,  twins,  s. 

Genae,  cheeks,  s. 

Gerrae,  trifles. 

Grates,  thanks. 

Habenae,  reins,  s. 
Hibema,  sc.  castra,  win¬ 
ter  quarters. 

Hyades,  the  Hyades,  s. 
Idus,  the  ides  of  a  month. 
Ilia,  the  flank. 
Incunabula,  a  cradle . 
Indutiae,  a  truce . 


Induviae,  clothes. 

Ineptiae,  fooleries,  s. 
Inferi,  the  dead. 

Inf eriae, sacrifices  in  honor 
of  the  dead. 

Insecta,  insects. 

Insidiae,  an  ambuscade ,  s. 
Justa,  funeral  rites. 
Lactes,  small  entrails,  s. 
Lamenta,  lamentations. 
Lapicidinae,  a  stone  quar¬ 
ry. 

Latebrae,  a  hiding  place, 

s. 

Laurices,  young  rabbits. 
Lautia,  presents  to  for¬ 
eign  ambassadors. 
Lemures,  hobgoblins. 
Lendes,  nits 
Liberi,  children,  s. 
Luceres,  a  division  of  the 
Roman  cavalry. 
Magalia,  cottages. 
Majores,  ancestors. 
Manes,  the  shades,  s. 
Manubiae,  spoils  of  war. 
Mapalia,  huts,  s. 

Minaciae,  and 
Mlnae,  threats. 

Minores,  posterity. 
Moenia,  the  walls  of  a 
city ,  s. 

Multitia,  garments  finely 
wrought. 

Munia,  official  duties. 
Naiades,  water-nymphs,  s. 
Nares,  the  nostrils ,  s. 
Natales,  parentaae. 
Nates,  the  haunches,  s. 
Nomae,  corroding  sores  or 
ulcers .,  s. 

Nonae,  the  nones  of  a 
month.  §  326,  1. 

Nugae,  jests,  nonsense. 
Nundinae,  the  weekly  mar¬ 
ket. 

Nuptiae,  a  marriage. 
Oblivia,  forgetfulness,  s. 
Offuciae,  cheats,  s. 
Optimates,  the  aristo¬ 
cratic  party,  s. 


Palearia,  the  dewlap,  s. 
Pandectae,  the  pandects. 
Parietinae,  old  walls. 
Partes,  a  party,  s. 
Pascua,  pastures,  s. 
Penates,  household  gods , 
s. 

Phalerae,  trappings. 
Philtra,  love  potions. 
Pleiades,  the  Pleiads  or 
seven  stars,  s. 

Posteri,  posterity. 

Praebia,  an  amulet. 
Praecordia,  the  dia¬ 
phragm,  the  entrails. 
Primitiae,  first  f  ruits. 
Proceres,  nobles,  s. 
Pugillaria,  or  -ares, 
writing-tablets ,  s. 
Quadrigae,  a  team  of  four 
horses,  s. 

Quirites,  Roman  citizens , 
s. 

Quisquiliae,  refuse. 
Reliquiae,  the  remains,  s. 
Salebrae,  rugged  roads,  s. 
Salinae,  salt  pits. 

Scalae,  a  ladder,  s. 
Scatebrae,  a  spring,  s. 
Scopae,  a  broom. 

Scruta,  old  stuff". 

Sentes,  thorns,  s. 
Sponsalia,  espousals. 
Stativa,  sc.  castra,  a 
stationary  camp. 
Superi,  the  gods  above . 
Talaria,  winged  shoes. 
Tenebrae,  darkness,  s. 
Tesca,  rough  places. 
Thermae,  warm  baths. 
Tormina,  colic-pains. 
Transtra,  seats  for  row¬ 
ers,  s. 

Tricae,  trifles ,  toys. 
Utensilia,  utensils. 

Valvae,  folding  doors,  s. 
Vepres,  brambles,  s. 
Vergiliae,  the  seven  stars. 
Vindiciae,  a  legal  claim,  s. 
Virgulta,  bushes. 


§97.  The  following  usually  differ  in  meaning  in  the  different 
numbers. 


-Edes,  -is,  a  temple. 
jEdes,  -ium,  a  house. 
Aqua,  water. 

Aquae,  medicinal  springs. 
Auxilium,  aid. 

Auxilia,  auxiliary  troops. 

6* 


Bonum,  a  good  thing. 
Bona,  property. 

Career,  a  prison. 
Carceres,  the  barriers  of 
a  race-course. 
Castrum,  a  castle. 


Castra,  a  camp. 
Comitium,  a  part  of  the 
Roman  forum. 

Comitia,  an  assembly  for 
election. 

Copia,  plenty. 


54 


REDUNDANT  NOUNS. 


§  98,  99, 


Copiae,  troops,  forces. 
Cupedia,  -ae,  daintiness. 
Cupedise,  -arum,  and 
Cupedia,  -orum,  dainties. 
Facultas,  ability.  . 
Facultates,  property. 
Fastus,  -us,  pride. 
Fastus,  -uum,  and 
Fasti,  -orum,  a  calendar . 
Fortuna,  Fortune. 
Fortunae,  wealth. 

Furfur,  bran. 

Furfures,  dandruff. 
Gratia,  favor. 

Gratiae,  thanks. 


Impedimentum,  a  hinder - 
ance. 

Impedimenta,  baggage. 

Litera,  a  letter  of  the  al¬ 
phabet. 

Literae,  an  epistle. 

Ludus,  pastime. 

Ludi,  public  games. 

Lustrum,  a  morass. 

Lustra,  a  haunt  or  den  of 
wild  beasts . 

Mos,  custom. 

Mores,  manners. 

Naris,  a  nostril. 

Nares,  the  nose. 


Natalis,  a  birthday. 
Natales,  birth ,  lineage* 
Opera,  work ,  labor. 
Operae,  workmen. 

Opis,  gen.  power. 

Opes,  -um,  means ,  wealth. 
Plaga,  a  region ,  tract. 
Plagae,  nets ,  toils. 
Principium,  a  beginning. 
Principia,  the  general's 
quarters. 

Rostrum,  a  beak ,  prow. 
Rostra,  the  Rostra. 

Sal,  salt. 

Sales,  witticisms. 


§  98.  The  following  plurals,  with  a  few  others,  are  sometimes 
used  in  poetry,  especially  in  the  nominative  and  accusative,  instead 
of  the  singular,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  metre. 


iEquora,  the  sea . 
Alta,  the  sea. 

Animi,  courage. 
Aurae,  the  air. 
Carinae,  a  keel. 
Cervices ,  the  neck. 
Colla,  the  neck. 
Comae,  the  hair.. 
Connubia,  marriage. 
Corda,  the  heart. 
Corpora,  a  body. 
Crepuscula,  twilight. 
Currus,  a  chariot. 
Exsilia,  banishment. 
Frigora,  cold. 
Gaudia,  joy. 
Gramina,  grass. 
Guttura,  the  throat. 


Hymenaei,  marriage. 
Ignes,  love. 

Inguina,  the  groin. 

Irae,  anger. 

J  ej  unia,  fasting. 

Jubae,  a  mane. 

Limina,  a  threshold. 
Litora,  a  shore. 

Mensae,  a  service  or  course 
of  dishes. 

Neniae,  a  funeral  dirge. 
Numina,  the  divinity. 
Odia,  hatred. 

Ora,  the  mouth ,  the  coun¬ 
tenance. 

Orae,  confines. 

Ortus,  a  rising ,  the  east. 
Otia,  ease ,  leisure . 


Pectora,  the  breast. 
Reditus,  a  return. 

Regna,  a  kingdom . 
Rictus,  the  jaws. 

Robora,  strength. 

Silentia,  silence. 

Sinus,  trie  bosom  of  a  Ro¬ 
man  garment. 

Taedae,  a  torch. 

Tempora,  time. 

Terga,  the  back. 

Thalami,  marriage  or 
marriage-bed. 

Tori,  a  bed ,  a  couch. 
Tura,  frankincense. 

Viae,  a  journey. 

Vultus,  the  countenance. 


III.  REDUNDANT  NOUNS. 

§  99.  Nouns  are  redundant  either  in  termination,  in  declension, 
in  gender,  or  in  two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

1.  In  termination  :  (a.)  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  arbor ,  and  arbos ,  a  tree:  (J.) 
of  the  oblique  cases ;  as,  tigris , ;  gen.  tigris ,  or  -idis ;  a  tiger. 

2.  In  declension ;  as,  laurus ;  gen.  -i,  or  -us ;  a  laurel. 

3.  In  gender;  as,  vulgus ,  masc.  or  neut. ;  the  common  people. 

4.  In  termination  and  declension;  as,  senecta ,  -ce ,  and  senectus ,  -utis  ;  old 
age. 

6.  In  termination  and  gender;  as  pileus ,  masc.,  and  pileum,  neut.;  a  hat, 

6.  In  declension  and  gender;  as  penus ,  -i  or  us,  masc.  or  fem.,  and  penus, 
-oris,  neut. ;  a  store  of  provisions.  Specus ,  -us  or  -i,  masc.  fem.  or  neut. ;  a  cave. 

7.  In  termination,  declension,  and  gender;  as,  menda,  -ce ,  fem.  and  mendum , 
4,  neut. ;  a  fault. 


KEDUNDANT  NOUNS. 


55 


§  99. 


The  following  list  contains  most  Redundant  Nouns  of  the  above  classes : — 


Acinus,  -um,  and  -a,  a  berry . 
Adagium,  arid  -io,  a  proverb. 
Admonitio,  -um,  and  -us,  us,  a  remind¬ 
ing. 

iEthra,  and  aether,  the  clear  sky. 
Affectio,  and  -us,  us,  affection. 
Agamemno,  and  -on,  Agamemnon. 
Alabaster,  tri,  and  pi.  -tra,  drum,  an 
alabaster  box. 

Alimonia,  and  -um,  aliment. 

Alluvio,  and  -es,  a  flood. 

Alvearium,  and  -are,  a  bee-hive. 
Amaracus,  and  -um,  marjoram. 
Amygdala,  and  -um,  an  almond. 
Anfractum,  and  -us,  us,  a  winding. 
Angiportum,  and  -us,  us,  a  narrow  lane 
or  alley. 

Antidotus,  and  -um,  an  antidote . 
Aranea,  and  -us,  i,  a  spider. 

Arar,  and  Araris,  the  river  Arar. 

Arbor,  and  -os,  a  tree. 

Architectus,  and  -on,  an  architect. 
Arcus,  -us,  and  i,  a  bow. 

Attagena,  and  -gen,  a  moor-hen. 
Avaritia,  and  -ies,  avarice. 
Augmentum,  and  -men,  am  increase. 
Baccar,  and  -aris,  a  kind  of  herb. 
Baculus,  and  -um,  a  staff. 

Balteus,  and  -um,  a  belt. 

Barbaria,  and  -ies,  barbarism. 

Barbitus,  and  -on,  a  harp. 

Batillus,  and  -um,  afire-shovel. 
Blanditia,  and  -ies,  flattery. 

Buccina,  and  -um,  a  trumpet. 

Bura,  and  -is,  a  plough-tail. 

Buxus,  and  -um,  the  box-tree . 

Caepa,  and  caepe,  an  onion. 

Calamister,  tri,  and  -trum,  a  crisping - 
pin. 

Callus,  and  -um,  hardened  skin. 

Cancer,  cri,  or  ms,  a  crab. 

Canitia,  and  -ies,  hoariness. 

Capus,  and  capo,  a  capon. 

CaiTus,  and  -um,  a  kind  of  waggon. 
Cassida,  and  -cassis,  a  helmet. 

Catinus,  and  -um,  a  bowl ,  dish. 
Chirographus,  and  -um,  a  hand-writing. 
Cingula,  -us,  and  -um,  a  girdle . 
Clipeus,  and  -um,  a  shield. 
Cochlearium,  -ar,  and  -are,  a  spoon. 
Colluvio,  and  -ies,  filth. 

Commentarius,  and  -um,  a  journal. 
Compages,  and  -go,  a  joining. 

Conatum,  and  -us,  us,  an  attempt. 
Concinnitas,  and  -tudo,  neatness. 
Consortium,  and  -io,  partnership. 
Contagium,  -io,  and  -es,  contact. 
Cornum,  -us,  i,  or  us,  a  cornel  tree. 
Costos,  i,  ana  -um,  a  kind  of  shrub. 


Cratera,  omul  crater,  a  bowl. 

Crocus,  and  -um,  saffron. 

Crystallus,  and  -um,  crystal. 

Cubitus,  and  -um,  the  elbow. 
Cupiditas,  and  -pido,  desire. 
Cupressus,  i,  or  us,  a  cypress-tree . 
Delicia,  and  -um,  delight. 

Delphinus,  and  delphin,  a  dolphin . 
Dictamnus,  and  -um,  dittany. 
Diluvium,  -o,  and  -ies,  a  deluge. 
Domus,  i,  or  us,  a  house. 

Dorsus,  and  -um,  the  back. 

Duritia,  and  -ies,  hardness. 

Effigia,  and  -ies,  an  image. 

Elegia,  and  -on,  i,  an  elegy. 
Elephantus,  and  -phas,  an  elephant. 
Epitoma,  and  -e,  an  abridgment . 
Esseda,  and  -um,  a  chariot. 

Evander,  dm,  and  -drus,  JEvander. 
Eventum,  aiid  -us,  us,  an  event. 
Exemplar,  and  -are,  a  pattern. 

Ficus,  i,  or  us,  a  fig-tree. 

Fimus,  and  -um,  dung. 

Fretum,  and  -us,  us,  a  strait. 
Fulgetra,  and  -um,  lightning. 

Galerus,  and  -um,  a  hat,  cap. 

Ganea,  and  -um,  an  eating-house. 
Gausapa,  -es,  -e,  and  -um ,  frieze. 
Gibba,  -us,  and  -er,  cri,  a  hump. 
Glutinum,  and  -ten,  glue. 

Gobius,  and  -io,  a  gudgeon. 
Grammatica,  and  -e,  grammar. 

Gras,  gruis, and  grais,  is,  a  crane. 
Hebdomada,  ana  -mas,  a  week. 
Helleborus,  and  -um,  hellebore. 
Honor,  and  honos,  honor. 

Hyssopus,  and  -um,  hyssop. 

Ilios,  -um,  and  -on,  Troy. 

Incestum,  and  -us,  us,  incest. 

Intubus,  and  -um,  endive. 

Jugulus,  and  -um,  the  throat. 

Juventa,  -us,  utis,  and  - as,  youth. 
Labor,  and  labos,  labor. 

Lacerta,  and  -us,  a  lizard. 

Lauras,  i,  or  us,  a  laurel. 

Lepor,  and  lepos,  wit. 

Ligur,  and  -us,  mis,  a  Ligurian. 
Lupinus,  and  -um,  a  lupine. 

Luxuria,  and  -ies,  luxury. 

Maeander,  -dros,  and  -drus,  Mceander. 
Margarita,  and  -um,  a  pearl. 

Materia,  and  -ies,  materials. 
Medimnus,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Menda,  and  -um,  a  fault. 

Modius,  and  -um,  a  measure. 

Mollitia,  and  -ies,  softness. 
Momentum,  and  -men,  influence. 
Mugil,  and  -ilis,  a  mullet. 

Mulciber,  eri,  or  iris,  Vulcan. 


56  DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS.  §  100. 


Mulctra,  and  -um,  a  milk-pail. 
Munditia,  and  -ies,  neatness. 

Muria,  and  -ies,  brine  or  pickle. 

Myrtus,  i  or  us,  a  myrtle . 

Nardus,  and -wen,  nard. 

Nasus,  and  -um,  the  nose. 

Necessitas,  and  -udo,  necessity. 
Nequitia,  and  -ies,  worthlessness. 
Notitia,  and  -ies,  knowledge. 

Oblivium,  and  -io,  forgetfulness. 
Obsidium,  and  -io,  a  siege. 

(Edipus,  i,  or  ddis,  (Edipus. 

Ostrea,  and  -um,  an  oyster. 

Palatus,  and  -um,  the  palate. 

Palumba,  -us,  and  -es,  a  pigeon. 
Papyrus,  and  -um, papyrus. 

Paupertas,  and  -ies,  poverty. 

Pavus,  and  pavo,  a  peacock. 

Penus,  i,  -6ris,  or  us,  and  penum,  pro¬ 
visions. 

Peplus,  and  -um,  a  veil. 

Perseus,  ei,  or  eos,  Perseus. 

Piletis,  and  -um,  a  hat. 

Plnus,  i,  or  us,  apine-tree. 

Pistrina,  and  -um,  a  bake-house. 
Planitia,  and  -ies,  a  plain. 

Plato,  and  Platon,  Plato. 

Plebs,  and  plebes,  ei,  the  common 
people. 

Porrus,  and  -um,  a  leek. 

Postulatum,  and  -io,  a  request. 
Praesepia,  -ium,  -es,  or  -is,  and  -e,  a 
stable. 

Praetextum,  and  -us?  Us,  a  pretext. 
Prosapia,  and  -ies,  lineage. 

Rapa,  and  -um,  a  turnip. 

Requies,  etis  or  ei',  rest. 

Rete,  and  retis,  a  net. 

Reticulus,  and  -um,  a  small  net. 


Rictum,  and  -us,  us,  the  open  mouth. 
Saevitia,  -udo  and  -ies ,  ferocity. 

Sagus,  and  -um,  a  military  cloak. 
Sanguis,  and  sanguen,  blood. 

Satrapes,  and  satraps,  a  satrap. 
Scabritia,  and  -ies,  roughness. 

Scorpius,  -os,  and  -io,  a  scorpion. 
Segmentum,  and  -men,  a  piece. 
Segnitia,  and  -ies,  sloth. 

Senecta,  and  -us,  old  age. 

Sequester,  tri,  or  tris,  a  trustee. 
Sesama,  and  -um,  sesame. 

Sibilus,  and  -a,  drum,  a  hissing. 

Sinapi,  and  -is,  mustard. 

Sinus,  and  -um,  a  goblet. 

Spams,  and  -a,  drum,  a  spear. 
Spurcitia,  and  -ies ,  filthiness. 
Stramentum,  and  -men,  straw. 
Suffimentum,  and  -men,  fumigation. 
Suggestus,  and  -um,  a  pulpit,  stage. 
Supparus,  and  -um,  a  linen  garment. 
Supplicium,  -icamentum,  and  -icatio, 
a  public  supplication. 

Tapetum,  -ete,  and  -es,  tapestry. 
Teneritas,  and- ttido,  softness. 

Tergum,  and  -us,  dris,  the  back. 

Tiara,  and  -as,  a  turban. 

Tignus,  and  -um,  a  beam,  timber. 
Tigris,  is,  or  idis,  a  tiger. 

Titanus,  and  Titan,  Titan. 

Tonitruum,  and  -trus,  us,  thunder. 

T orale,  and  -al,  a  bed-covering. 

Trabes,  and  trabs,  a  beam. 

Tribula,  and  -um?  a  threshing  sledge. 
Vespera,  -per,  em  and  eris,  the  evening. 
Vinaceus,  and  -a,  drum ,  a  grape-stone. 
Viscus,  and  -um,  the  mistletoe. 

Vulgus,  masc.  and  neut.,  the  common 
people. 


Remark  1.  To  these  may  be  added  some  other  verbals  in  us  and  io,  and 
Greek  nouns  in  o  and  cm ;  as,  Dio  and  Dion ;  also  some  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
e,  which  have  Latin  forms  in  a;  as,  Atrides  and  Atrida.  See  §  45. 

Rem.  2.  Some  proper  names  of  places  also  are  redundant  in  number ;  as, 
Argos  and  Argi ;  Fidena  and  Fidence ;  Thebe  and  Thebce. 

Note.  The  different  forms  of  most  words  in  the  above  list  are  not  equally  common,  and 
some  are  rarely  used,  or  only  in  particular  cases. 


DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 


§  100.  Nouns  are  derived  from  other  nouns,  from  adjectives, 
and  from  verbs. 


I.  From  Nouns. 


From  nouns  are  derived  the  following  classes  : — 

1.  A.  patronymic  is  the  name  of  a  person,  derived  from  that  of  his 
father  or  other  ancestor,  or  of  the  founder  of  his  nation. 


§  100. 


DERIVATION  OP  NOUNS. 


57 


Note  1.  Patronymics  are  properly  Greek  nouns,  and  have  been  borrowed  from  that  lan¬ 
guage  by  the  Latin  poets. 

( a.)  Masculine  patronymics  end  in  ides ,  ides ,  tides,  and  itides. 

(1.)  Nouns  in  us  of  the  second  declension,  and  those  nouns  of  the  third  de¬ 
clension,  whose  root  ends  in  a  short  syllable,  form  their  patronymics  in  ides ; 
as,  Priamus ,  Priamides  ;  Agamemnon ,  gen.  dnis,  Agamemnonides. 

(2. )  Nouns  in  eus  and  cles  form  their  patronymics  in  ides ;  as,  A-treus,  Atrides ; 
Heracles  (i.  e.  Hercules,)  Heraclides . 

Rem.  1.  AEnides ,  in  Virg.  A.  9,  653,  is  formed  in  like  manner,  as  if  from  uEneus, 
instead  of  AEneas. 

(3.)  Nouns  in  as  and  es  of  the  first  declension  form  their  patronymics  in  ades , 
as  AEneas ,  AEneades ;  Hippotes ,  Hippdtades. 

(4.)  Nouns  in  ius  of  the  second  declension,  and  those  nouns  of  the  third  de¬ 
clension,  whose  root  ends  in  a  long  vowel:  form  their  patronymics  in  iades ;  as, 
Thestius ,  Thestiades;  Amphitryo  (gen.  oms),  Amphitryoniades. 

Rem  2.  A  few  nouns  also  of  the  first  declension  have  patronymics  in  iades ; 
as,  Anchises,  Anchisiades. 

(A.)  Feminine  patronymics  end  in  is,  eis ,  and  ias,  and  correspond 
in  termination  to  the  masculines,  viz.  is  to  ides,  eis  to  ides,  and  ias  to 
itides  ;  as,  Tyndtirus ,  masc.  Tyndarides ,  fern.  Tyndtiris  ;  Nereus,  masc. 
Nereides,  fern.  Nereis ;  Thestius,  masc.  Thestitides,  fern.  Thestias. 

Rem.  3.  A  few  feminines  are  found  in  ine,  or  ibne ;  as,  Nerine ,  Acrisione , 
from  Nereus  and  Acrisius. 

mics  in  des  and  ne  are  of  the  first  declension  ;  those  in  is 


2.  A  patriot  or  gentile  noun  is  derived  from  the  name  of  a  country; 
and  denotes  an  inhabitant  of  that  country ;  as, 

Tros ,  a  Trojan  man  ;  Troas,  a  Troian  woman  :  Macedo ,  a  Macedonian  ; 
Samnis ,  a  Samnite  ;  from  Try  a ,  Macedonia ,  and  Samnium. 

Note  3.  Most  patrials  are  properly  adjectives,  relating  to  a  noun  understood  ; 
as,  homo,  civis,  etc.  See  §  128,  6. 

3.  A  diminutive  signifies  a  small  thing  of  the  kind  denoted  by  the 
primitive  ;  as,  liber,  a  book  ;  libellus ,  a  little  book. 

Diminutives  generally  end  in  ulus,  ula,  ulum ,  or  culus,  cula,  culum , 
according  as  the  primitive  is  masuline,  feminine,  or  neuter. 

A.  1.  If  the  primitive  is  of  the  first  or  second  declension,  or  its  root  ends 
in  c,  g ,  d ,  or  t  after  a  vowel,  the  diminutive  is  formed  by  annexing  ulus ,  a, 
urn  to  the  root  ;  as,  arula,  servulus ,  puerulus ,  scutulum ,  cornicula ,  regulus,  ca¬ 
pitulum,  mercedula ;  from  ara,  servus,  puer,  scutum ,  cornix ,  (-icis),  rex,  (regis), 
caput,  (-itis),  merces,  (-edis.) 

2.  Primitives  of  the  first  or  second  declension  whose  root  ends  in  e  or  i, 
instead  of  ulus,  a,  um ,  add  dlus,  a,  um ;  as,  jilidlus,  glondla,  horredlum  ;  from 
Jilius ,  gloria,  horreum. 

3.  Primitives  of  the  first  or  second  declension  whose  root  ends  in  l,  n,  or  r, 
form  diminutives  by  contraction  in  ellus,  a,  um,  and  some  in  Ulus,  a,  um ;  as, 
ocellus,  asellus,  libellus ,  lucellum ;  from  oculus,  asina,  liber,  lucrum  ;  and  sigillum, 
tigillum,  from  signum,  tignum. 

B.  1.  If  the  primitive  is  of  the  third,  fourth,  or  fifth  declension,  the  diminu¬ 
tive  is  formed  in  cuius ,  (or  iculus),  a,  um. 

2.  Primitives  of  the  third  declension  whose  nominative  ends  in  r,  or  in  os  or 
us  from  roots  ending  in  r,  annex  cuius  to  the  nominative  ;  f  raterculus,  soror - 


58 


DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 


§  101. 


cula,  osculum ,  corpusculum;  from  frater,  sdror ,  ds,  (dris),  corpus,  (-oris). — So  also 
primitives  in  es  and  is ,  but  these  drop  the  s  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  igniculus, 
nubecula,  diechla ;  from  ignis,  nubes,  dies. 

3.  Primitives  of  other  terminations  of  the  third  declension,  and  those  of  the 
fourth,  add  iculus  to  the  root  ;  as,  ponticulus,  coticula,  ossiculum ,  versiculus,  corni¬ 
culum;  from  pons,  cos,  os,  (ossis),  versus,  cornu. 

4.  Primitives  in  o,  (inis  or  onis),  in  adding  cuius,  a,  um,  change  the  final  vowel 
of  the  root  (i  or  o)  into  u ;  as,  homunculus ,  sermunculus  ;  from  hdmo  and  sermo ; 
and  a  few  primitives  of  other  terminations  form  similar  diminutives  ;  as,  avun¬ 
culus,  domuncula ;  from  avus  and  ddmus. 

C.  1.  A  few  diminutives  end  in  uleus ,  as,  equuleus,  aculeus ;  from  equus  and 
dcus ;  and  a  few  also  in  io ;  as,  homuncio ,  senecio,  from  hdmo  and  senex. 

2.  Diminutives  are  sometimes  formed  from  other  diminutives  ;  as,  asellulus, 
from  asellus ;  sometimes  two  or  more  diminutives  with  different  terminations 
are  formed  from  the  same  primitive  ,  as,  homunculus,  homullus,  and  homuncio ; 
from  hdmo ;  and  sometimes  the  primitive  undergoes  euphonic  changes  ;  as  ru¬ 
musculus,  from  rumor. 

Rem.  Some  diminutives  differ  in  gender  from  their  primitives  ;  as  ranun¬ 
culus,  scamillus,  from  rana  and  scamnum . 

4.  ( a .)  An  amplificative  is  a  personal  appellation  denoting  an  ex¬ 
cess  of  that  which  is  expressed  by  its  primitive  ;  as, 

Capito,  one  who  has  a  large  head :  so  naso,  labeo,  bucco,  fronto,  mento,  one  who 
has  a  large  nose,  lips,  or  cheeks,  a  broad  forehead  or  long  chin;  from  caput, 
ndsus,  labia,  bucca,  frons,  and  mentum. 

(b.)  A  few  personal  appellatives  in  io  denote  the  trade  or  profession  to  which 
a  person  belongs  ;  as,  ludio,  an  actor  ;  pellio ,  a  furrier  ;  from  ludus,  and  pellis. 

5.  The  termination  ium  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  indicates  the  office  or 
condition,  and  often,  derivatively,  an  assemblage  of  the  individuals  denoted  by 
the  primitive  ;  as,  collegium,  colleagueship,  and  thence  an  assembly  of  col¬ 
leagues  ;  servitium,  servitude,  and  collectively  the  servants  ;  so  sacerdotium,  and 
ministerium  ;  from  collega ,  servus,  sacerdos ,  and  minister. 

6.  The  termination  imonium  is  added  to  the  root  of  a  few  nouns,  denoting 
something  derived  from  the  primitives,  or  imparting  to  it  its  peculiar  character; 
as,  testimonium ,  testimony  ;  so  vadimonium,  patrimonium ,  matrimonium ;  from 
testis,  vas  (vadis),  pater,  and  mater . 

7.  The  termination  etum,  added  to  the  root  of  names  of  plants,  denotes  a 
place  where  they  grow  in  abundance  ;  as,  quercetum ,  lauretum ,  olivetum,  from 
quercus,  laurus,  and  oliva. 

So,  also,  cesculetum,  dumetum ,  myrtetum,  and  by  analogy  saxetum.  But  some 
drop  e ;  as,  carectum,  salictum,  virgultum,  and  arbustum. 

8.  The  termination  drium ,  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  denotes  a  receptacle 
of  the  things  signified  by  the  primitive ;  as,  aviarium,  an  aviary ;  plantarium,  a 
nursery  ;  from  avis,  a  bird,  and  planta,  a  plant. 

9.  The  termination  lie,  added  to  the  root  of  names  of  animals,  marks  the 
place  where  they  are  kept  ;  as,  bovile,  a  stall  for  oxen ;  so  caprile ,  ovile ;  from 
bos,  an  ox,  caper,  a  goat,  and  dvis,  a  sheep. 

Note  1.  This  class  and  the  preceding  are  properly  neuter  adjectives. 

Note  2.  Abstract  nouns  are  derived  either  from  adjectives  or  from  verbs. 
See  §  26,  5. 


II.  From  Adjectives. 

§101.  l.  Abstract  nouns  are  formed  by  adding  the  termination 
Xtas,  itudo ,  ia,  itia  or  ities,  edo,  and  imonia  to  the  root  of  the  primitive. 


§  102, 


DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 


59 


2.  Abstracts  in  it  as,  (equivalent  to  the  English  ty  or  ity),  are  formed  from 
adjectives  of  each  declension  ;  as,  cupiditas ,  teneritas ,  celeritas ,  crudelitas,  fe7ici- 
tas ;  from  cupidus,  tener ,  celer ,  crudelis,  and  f  elix. 

(1.)  When  the  root  ends  in  i,  the  abstract  is  formed  in  etas ;  as,  pietas,  from 
pius ;  and  when  it  ends  in  t,  as  only  is  added  ;  as,  honestas  from  honestus. 

(2.)  In  a  few  abstracts  i  before  tas  is  dropped;  as,  libertas,  juventas,  from 
liber ,  juvenis.  In  facultas  and  difficultas ,  from  facilis,  difficilis ,  there  is  a  change 
also  in  the  root-vowel  from  i  to  u. 

(3.)  A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  itus  or  tus,  instead  of  itas ;  as,  servitus , 
juventus ,  from  servus  and  juvenis.  See  §  76,  Exc.  2. 

3.  Abstracts  in  itudo  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  us,  and  some  from  adjec¬ 
tives  of  the  third  declension  of  two  or  three  terminations ;  as,  magnitudo,  alti¬ 
tudo,  fortitudo,  acritudo,  from  magnus ,  altus,  fortis,  acer.  Polysyllabic  adjectives 
in  tus,  generally  form  their  abstracts  by  adding  udo  instead  of  itudo  to  their  root; 
as,  consuetudo ,  from  consuetus. 

4.  Abstracts  in  ia  (equivalent  to  the  English  ce  or  cy ,)  are  for  the  most  part 
formed  from  adjectives  of  one  termination  ;  as,  dementia,  constantia ,  impuden¬ 
tia,  from  clemens,  constans,  impudens.  But  some  adjectives  in  us  and  er , including 
verbals  in  cundus,  likewise  form  their  verbals  in  ia;  as,  miseria ,  angustia,  facun¬ 
dia,  from  miser,  angustus,  facundus. 

5.  Abstracts  in  itia  and  ities  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  us  and  is;  as, 
justitia,  tristitia,  duritia,  and  durities,  segnitia  and  segnities,  from  justus,  tristis,  du¬ 
rus,  and  segnis. 

6.  A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  edo,  and  a  few  in  imonia ;  and  sometimes 
two  or  more  abstracts  of  different  terminations  are  formed  from  the  same  adjec¬ 
tive  ;  as,  acritas,  acritudo,  acredo,  and  acrimonia,  from  deer.  In  such  case  those 
in  itudo  and  imonia  seem  to  be  more  intensive  in  signification  than  those  in 
Has. 

Remark.  Adjectives,  as  distinguished  from  the  abstracts  which 
are  formed  from  them,  are  called  concretes. 

III.  From  Verbs. 

§  1©2.  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal  nouns. 

The  following  are  the  principal  classes  : — 

1.  Abstract  nouns  expressing  the  action  or  condition  denoted  by  a  verb,  es¬ 
pecially  by  a  neuter  verb,  are  formed  by  annexing  or  to  their  first  root ;  as, 
amor,  love  ;  favor,  favor  ;  moeror,  grief  ;  splendor,  brightness ;  from  dmo,  fdveo, 
mcereo ,  and  splendeo. 

2.  (a.)  Abstracts  are  also  formed  from  many  verbs  by  annexing  ium  to  the 
first  or  to  the  third  root  ;  as,  colloquium,  a  conference  ;  gaudium,  joy  ;  exor¬ 
dium,  a  beginning  ;  exitium,  destruction  ;  solatium,  consolation  ;  from  colloquor , 
gaudeo,  exordior ,  exeo  and  solor. 

3.  Some  verbal  abstracts  are  formed  by  annexing  ela,  imonia,  or  imonium,  to 
the  first  root  of  the  verb  ;  as,  querela  and  querimonia,  a  complaint ;  suadela , 
persuasion  ;  from  queror  and  suadeo. 

4.  (a.)  The  terminations  men  and  mentum ,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the 
verb,  generally  with  a  connecting  vowel,  denote  the  thing  to  which  the  action 
belongs,  both  actively  and  passively,  or  a  rfieans  for  the  performance  of  the  ac¬ 
tion  ;  as,  fulmen  from  fulgeo,  flumen  from  fluo,  agmen  from  ago,  solamen  from 
solor ,  documentum  from  ddeeo ,  blandimentum  from  blandior. 

(b.)  The  final  consonant  of  the  root  is  often  dropped,  and  the  preceding  and 
connecting  vowels  contracted  into  one  syllable  ;  as,  ago,  ( dqimen ,)  agmen :  foveo . 
(fdvimentum, )  fomentum.  J  ’ 


60 


COMPOSITION  OF  NOUNS. 


§  103. 


(c.)  Some  words  of  this  class  have  no  primitive  verb  in  use  ;  as,  atramentum , 
ink;  but,  in  this  case,  the  connecting  vowel  seems  to  imply  its  reference  to  such 
a  verb  as  atrare ,  to  blacken. 

5.  (a.)  The  terminations  ulum ,  bulum ,  culum;  brum ,  crum ,  trum,  annexed  to 
the  first  root  of  a  verb,  denote  an  instrument  for  performing  the  act  expressed 
by  the  verb,  or  a  place  for  its  performance  ;  as,  cingulum ,  operculum ,  venabulum , 
ventilabrum,  fulcrum,  spectrum,  from  cingo,  operio,  venor,  ventilo,  fulcio,  specio. 

(b.)  Sometimes  culum  is  contracted  into  clum ;  as,  vinclum  for  vinculum . 
Sometimes,  also,  s  is  inserted  before  trum;  as,  rostrum ,  from  rodo,  and  a  con¬ 
necting  vowel  is  placed  before  this  and  some  of  the  other  terminations ;  as, 
aratrum,  stabulum,  cubiculum ,  from  aro,  sto,  and  cubo. 

(c.)  Some  words  of  this  kind  are  formed  from  nouns  ;  as,  acetabulum,  a  vin¬ 
egar  cruet ;  turibulum,  a  censer  ;  from  acetum  and  tus. 

6.  (a.)  Nouns  formed  by  adding  or  and  rix  to  the  third  root  of  the  verb,  de¬ 
note  respectively  the  male  and  female  agent  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb ; 
as,  adjutor,  adjutrix ,  an  assistant  ;  fautor ,  fautrix,  a  favorer;  victor,  victrix,  a 
conqueror  ;  from  adjuvo  (ad/ ut-),  faveo  (faut-),  vinco  (vict-).  They  are  often  like¬ 
wise  used  as  adjectives.  The  feminine  form  is  less  common  than  the  mascu¬ 
line,  and  when  the  third  root  of  the  verb  ends  in  s,  the  feminine  is  sometimes 
formed  in  trix ;  as,  tondeo  (tons-)  tonstrix. 

(b.)  Some  nouns  in  tor  are  formed  immediately  from  other  nouns  ;  as,  viator, 
a  traveller  ;  janitor ,  a  door-keeper;  from  via  nn&janua.  In  meretrix  from  mereo, 
i  of  the  third  root  becomes  e. 

(c.)  The  agent  of  a  few  verbs  is  denoted  by  the  terminations  a  and  o  annexed 
to  the  first  root ;  as,  conviva,  a  guest ;  advena,  a  stranger  ;  scriba,  a  scribe  ; 
erro,  a  vagrant ;  Ubo,  a  drunkard ;  comedo,  a  glutton,  from  convivo,  advenio,  etc. 

7.  Many  abstract  nouns  are  formed  by  annexing  io  and  us  (gen.  ms)  to  the 
third  root  of  a  verb;  as,  actio,  an  action  ;  lectio ,  reading  ;  from  ago  (act-),  lego 
(lect-); — cantus,  singing  ;  visus,  sight ;  msws,  use;  from  edno  (cant-),  video  (vis-), 
utor  (us-). 

Remark  1.  Nouns  of  both  forms,  and  of  like  signification,  are  frequently  de¬ 
rived  from  the  same  verb ;  as,  concursio  and  concursus,  a  running  together ;  motio 
and  motus,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  Nouns  formed  by  adding  the  termination  ura  to  the  third  root  of 
a  verb,  sometimes  have  the  same  signification  as  those  in  io  and  us,  and  some¬ 
times  denote  the  result  of  an  action;  as, positura,  position ;  vinctura,  a  binding 
together  ;  from  pono,  and  vincio ;  and  the  termination  ela  has  sometimes  the 
same  meaning ;  as,  querela ,  complaint ;  loquela,  speech,  from  queror  and  loquor . 

Note.  One  of  these  forms  is  generally  used  to  the  exclusion  of  the  others,  and  when 
two  or  more  are  found,  they  are  usually  employed  in  somewhat  different  senses. 

8.  The  termination  orium,  added  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  the  place 
where  the  action  of  the  verb  is  performed;  as,  auditorium,  a  lecture-room;  con¬ 
ditorium,  a  repository ;  from  audio  and  condo. 


COMPOSITION  OF  NOUNS. 

§  IDS.  Compound  nouns  are  formed  variously : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns ;  as,  rupicapra,  a  wild  goat,  of  rupes  and  capra.  In  some 
words,  compounded  of  two  nouns,  the  former  is  a  genitive;  as,  senatusconsultum, 
a  decree  of  the  senate;  jurisconsultus,  a  lawyer;  in  others,  both  parts  are  de¬ 
clined;  as,  respublica,  jusjurandum.  See  §  91. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb  ;  as,  artifex,  an  artist,  of  ars  and  facio;  fidi¬ 
cen,  a  harper,  of  fides  and  cano;  agricola ,  a  husbandman,  of  dger  and  cdlo. 


§  104. 


ADJECTIVES. 


61 


3.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as,  aequinoctium ,  the  equinox,  of  cequus  and 
nox ;  millepeda ,  a  millepede,  of  mille  and  pes. 

In  duumvir ,  triumvir ,  decemvir ,  centumvir ,  the  numeral  adjective  is  in  the 
genitive  plural. 

Remark  1.  When  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word  is  a  noun  or  an  adjec¬ 
tive,  it  usually  ends  in  i;  as,  artifex,  rupicapra,  agricdla ,  etc.  .  If  the  second 
word  begins  with  a  vowel,  an  elision  takes  place  ;  as,  quinquennium,  of  quinque 
and  annus ;  magnanimus,  of  magnus  and  animus. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun  ;  as,  nefas,  wickedness ;  nemo,  nobody ;  of  ne,fas , 
and  hdmo.  So  biduum,  of  bis  and  dies. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun:  as,  incuria ,  want  of  care,  of  in  and  cur  a.  So 
intervallum,  an  interval ;  praecordia,  the  diaphragm ;  proverbium,  a  proverb ;  sub¬ 
sellium,  a  low  seat ;  superficies,  a  surface. 

Rem.  2.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is  sometimes 
changed, to  adapt  it  to  that  which  follows  it :  as,  ignobilis,  illepidus,  imprudentia, 
irrumpo,  of  in  and  nobilis,  lepidus,  etc.  See  §  196. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§  104.  An  adjective  is  a  word  which  qualifies  or  limits  the 
meaning  of  a  substantive. 

Adjectives  may  be  divided,  according  to  their  signification ,  into 
various  classes ;  as  denoting, 

1.  Character  or  quality  ;  as,  bdnus ,  good ;  albus,  white ;  amicus,  friendly. 

2.  State  or  condition ;  as,  felix,  happy;  dives,  rich. 

3.  Possession;  as,  herilis,  a  master’s;  patrius,  a  father’s. 

4.  Quantity ;  as,  magnus,  great ;  totus,  entire ;  parvus,  small. 

6.  Number ;  as,  unus,  ou^  secundus ,  second ;  tot,  so  many ;  quot,  as  many. 
These  are  called  numerals . 

6.  Time;  as,  annuus,  yearly;  hesternus,  of  yesterday;  bimus,  of  two  years ; 

trimestris,  of  three  months.  ^ 

7.  Place;  as,  ate,  high;  vicinus,  near;  aerius,  aerial;  terrestris,  terrestrial. 

8.  Material ;  as,  aureus,  golden ;  fagineus,  beechen ;  terrenus,  earthen. 

9.  Part ;  as,  nullus ,  no  one ;  aliquis,  some  one.  These  are  called  partitives. 

10.  Country ;  as,  Romanus,  Roman ;  Arpinas  of  Arpinum.  These  are  called 
patriots. 

11.  Diminution;  as,  parvulus,  from  parvus,  small ;  misellus,  from  miser,  miser¬ 
able.  These  are  called  diminutives. 

12.  Amplification ;  as,  vinosus  and  vinolentus,  much  given  to  wine ;  auritus, 
having  long  ears.  These  are  called  amplificatives. 

13.  Relation ;  as,  avidus,  desirous  of ;  memor,  mindful  of ;  insuetus .  These 
are  called  relatives. 

14.  Interrogation ;  as,  quantus  ?  how  great ;  qualis  ?  of  what  kind ;  quot  ?  how 
many?  quotus ?  of  what  number?  These  are  called  interrogates ’,  and,  when 
not  used  interrogatively,  they  are  called  correlatives. 

15.  Specification;  as,  tdlis ,  such;  tantus ,  so  great;  tot,  so  many.  These  are 
called  demonstratives. 


6 


62  ADJECTIVES - FIRST  AND  SECOND  DECLENSIONS.  §  105. 


DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  105.  1.  Adjectives  are  declined  like  substantives,  and  are 

either  of  the  first  and  second  declensions,  or  of  the  third  only. 

ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  FIRST  AND  SECOND  DE¬ 
CLENSIONS. 

2.  The  masculine  of  adjectives  belonging  to  the  first  and  second 
declensions,  ends  either  in  us  or  in  er.  The  feminine  and  neuter  are 
formed  respectively  by  annexing  a  and  um  to  the  root  of  the  mascu¬ 
line.  The  masculine  in  us  is  declined  like  dominus;  that  in  er  like 
gener  or  dger ;  the  feminine  always  like  musa  ;  and  the  neuter  like 
regnum. 

Remark  1.  The  masculine  of  one  adjective,  sdtur}  - ura ,  -urum,  full,  ends  in 
Mr,  and  is  declined  like  gener. 


Bonus,  good. 


Masc. 

Singular. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

bo'-nus, 

bo'-na, 

bo'-num, 

G. 

bo'-nl, 

bo'-nae, 

bo'-ni, 

D. 

bo'-no, 

bo'-nse, 

bo'-no, 

Ac. 

bo'-num, 

bo'-nam, 

bo'-num, 

V. 

bo'-ne, 

bo'-na, 

bo'-num, 

Ab. 

bo'-no. 

bo'-na. 

bo'-n5. 

N. 

bo'-ni, 

Plural.  * 

bo'-nae, 

bo'-na, 

G. 

bo-no'-rum,  bo-na'-rum, 

bo-no'-rum, 

D. 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-nis, 

Ac. 

bo'-nos, 

bo'-nas, 

bo'-na, 

V. 

bo'-ni, 

bo'-nae, 

bo'-na, 

Ab. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

In  like  manner  decline 
Al'-tus,  high.  Fi'-dus,  faithful. 

Lon'-gus,  long. 

A-va'-rus, 

covetous. 

Im'-pro-bus,  wicked. 

Ple'-nus,  full. 

Be-nig'-nus,  kind. 

In-i'-quus,  unjust. 

Tac'-i-tus,  silent. 

Hem.  2.  Like  bonus  are  also  declined  all  participles  in  us  ;  as, 
A-mV-tus.  Am-a-tY-rus.  A-man'-dus. 


Rem.  3.  The  masculine  of  the  vocative  singular  of  adjectives  in  us  is  some¬ 
times  like  the  nominative ;  as,  0  vir  fortis  atque  amicus.  Hor.  Meus  has  both 
mi  and  meus . 

Rem.  4.  The  genitive  plural  of  distributive  numerals  ends  commonly  in  Um 
instead  of  drum ;  as,  crassitudo  bin&m  digitorum.  Plin. 


§  106  ADJECTIVES — FIRST  AND  SECOND  DECLENSIONS.  63 


3.  Tener,  tender . 


Singular . 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N. 

te'-ner, 

ten'-e-ra, 

ten'-e-rum, 

G. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ri, 

D. 

ten'-e-ro, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ro, 

Ac. 

ten'-e-rum, 

ten'-e-ram, 

ten'-e-rum, 

V. 

te'-ner, 

ten'-e-ra, 

ten'-e-rum, 

Ab. 

ten'-e-ro. 

ten'-e-ra. 

Plural. 

ten'-e-ro. 

N. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ra, 

G. 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

ten-e-ra'-rum, 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

D. 

ten'-e-ris, 

ten'-e-ris, 

ten'-e-ris, 

Ac. 

ten'-e-ros, 

ten'-e-ras, 

ten'-e-ra, 

V. 

ten'-e-rl, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ra, 

Ab. 

ten'-e-rls. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

In  like  manner  are  declined 

As'-per,  rough .  La'-cer,  torn .  Pros'-per,  prosperous . 

Ex'-ter,  foreign .  Li'-ber,  /ree.  Sa'-tur,  full . 

Gib'-ber,  crook-backed .  Mi'-ser,  wretched. 

So  also  after,  except  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  (see  §  107),  semifer , 
and  the  compounds  of  gero  and  ero ;  as,  laniger,  opifer. 

Note.  Prosper  is  less  frequent  than  prosperus ,  and  exter  is  scarcely  used 
in  the  nominative  singular  masculine. 


§  106.  The  other  adjectives  in  er  drop  e  in  declension ;  as, 


N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 


N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

v ; 

Ab. 


Piger,  slothful . 
Singular. 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

pi'-ger, 

Pi'-gr'b 

pi'-gro, 

pi'-grum, 

pi'-ger, 

pi'-gro. 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gram, 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-gra. 

pi'-grum, 

Pi'-grb 

pi'-gro, 

pi'-grum, 

pi'-grum, 

pi'-gro. 

Plural. 

P}'-gri; 

pi-orro'-rum, 

pi'-gris, 

pi'-gros, 

pi'-gri, 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-grae, 

pi-gra'-rum, 

pi'-gris, 

pi'-gras, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gra, 

pi-gro'-riim, 

pi'-gris, 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-gris. 

64 


ADJECTIVES — THIRD  DECLENSION.  §  107,  108, 


In  like  manner  decline 


.E'-ger,  sick. 

A'-ter,  black. 
Cre'-ber,  frequent. 
Gla'-ber,  smooth. 

In  '-te-ger,  entire. 


MiV-cer,  lean. 
NF-ger,  black. 
PuT-cher,  fair. 
Ru'-ber,  red. 
Sa'-cer,  sacred. 


Sca'-ber,  rough . 
Si-nis'-ter,  left. 
Te'-ter,  foul. 
Va'-fer,  crafty. 


Dexter ,  right,  has  -tra,  - trum ,  and  less  frequently  -tera,  -terum. 


§  107.  Six  adjectives  in  us,  and  three  in  er ,  have  their  genitive 
singular  in  ius)  and  their  dative  in  i,  in  all  the  genders  : — 

Alins,  another.  Totus,  whole.  Alter,  -tera,  -terum,  the  other. 

Nullus,  no  one.  Ullus,  any.  Uter,  -tra,  -trum,  which  of  the  two. 

S51us,  alone .  Unus,  one.  Neuter,  -tra,  -trum,  neither. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  other  compounds  of  uter , — namely,  uterque ,  each 
of  two ;  utercumque ,  uterlibet ,  and  utervis ,  which  of  the  two  you  please ;  gen. 
utriusque ,  etc. — also,  alteruter ,  one  of  two ;  gen.  alterutrius ,  ana  sometimes  alte¬ 
rius  utrius;  dat.  alterutri.  So  alter  uterque,  and  unusquisque.  See  §  138,  4. 

Nullus ,  solus,  totus,  ullus,  and  unus  are  thus  declined  : — 


Masc. 

Singular. 

Fern . 

Neut. 

N. 

u'-nus, 

u'-na, 

u'-num, 

G. 

u-nl'-us,* 

u-nl'-us, 

u-nl'-us, 

n. 

u'-nl, 

u'-ni, 

u'-nl, 

Ac. 

u'-num, 

u'-nam, 

u'-num, 

V. 

u'-ne, 

u'-na, 

u'-num, 

Ah. 

u'-no. 

u'-na. 

u'-no. 

The  plural  is  regular,  like  that  of  bonus. 

Remark  1.  Alius  has  aliud  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  neu¬ 
ter,  and  in  the  genitive  alius,  contracted  for  aliius. 

Rem.  2.  Except  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular,  alter  is  declined  like  tener , 
and  uter  and  neuter  like  piger. 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  these  adjectives,  in  early  writers,  and  occasionally  even  in 
Cicero,  Caesar,  and  Nepos,  form  their  genitive  and  dative  regularly,  like  bdnus , 
tener,  or  piger. 

ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

§  108.  Some  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  three  termi¬ 
nations  in  the  nominative  singular ;  some  two  ;  and  others  only  one. 

I.  Those  of  three  terminations  end  in  er,  masc. ;  is,  fern. ;  and  e, 
neut. ;  and  are  thus  declined : — • 


Acer,  sharp . 
Singular. 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N. 

a'-cer, 

a-cris, 

a'-cre, 

G. 

a'-cris, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cris, 

D. 

a'-crl, 

a'-crl, 

a'-cri, 

Ac. 

a'-crem, 

a'-crem, 

a'-cre, 

V. 

a'-cer, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cre, 

Ab. 

a'-crl. 

a'-crl. 

a'-cri. 

*  See  §  15. 


§  109,  110.  ADJECTIVES — THIRD  DECLENSION. 


65 


Plural . 


N. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

G. 

a'-cri-um, 

a'-cri-um, 

a'-cri-iim, 

D. 

ac'-ri-bus, 

ac'-ri-bus, 

ac'-ri-bus, 

Ac. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

v ; 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

Ab. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

In  like  manner  are  declined  the  following ; — 

Al'-acer,  cheerful .  Pa-lus'-ter,  marshy .  Sil-ves'-ter,  woody. 

Cam-pes'-ter,  champaign.  Pe-des'-ter,  on  foot.  Ter-res'-ter,  terrestrial. 

CeF-e-ber,  famous.  PfF-ter,  rotten.  VoP-u-cer,  winged. 

E-ques'-ter,  equestrian.  Sa-lu'-ber,  wholesome. 

To  these  add  names  of  months  in  -ber,  used  as  adjectives;  as,  October ,  etc. 
(cf.  §  71),  and  celer,  swift,  which  has  celeris,  celere ;  gen.  celeris ,  etc. 

Remark  1.  The  termination  er  was  anciently  sometimes  feminine ;  as,  volticer 
fama.  Petr.:  and,  on  the  other  hand,  the  masculine  often  ends  in  is;  as, 
collis  silvestris,  Cass. 

Rem.  2,  Volucer  has  um  in  the  genitive  plural. 

§109.  II.  Adjectives  of  two  terminations  end  in  is  for  the  mas¬ 
culine  and  feminine,  and  e  for  the  neuter,  except  comparatives,  which 
end  in  or  and  us. 

Those  in  is,  e,  are  thus  declined  - 


Mitis  mild. 


M.  #  F. 

N.  mi'-tis, 

Singular. 

N. 

mi'-te, 

N. 

Plural. 

M.#F.  ^  N. 

mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a,* 

G.  mi'-tis, 

mi'-tis, 

G. 

mit'-i-um,*  mit'-i-um, 

D.  mi'-tl, 

mi'-ti, 

D. 

mit'-i-bus,  mit'-i-bus, 

Ac.  mi'-tem, 

mi'-te, 

Ac. 

mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a, 

V.  mi'-tis, 

mi'-te, 

V. 

mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a, 

Ab.  mi'-ti. 

mi'-tl. 

Ab. 

mit'-i-bus.  mit'-i-bus. 

Ag'-i-lis,  active. 
Bre'-vis,  short. 
Cru-de'-lis,  cruel. 

In  like  manner  decline 

DuF-cis,  sweet.  In-coF-u-mis,  safe. 

For'-tis,  brave.  Mi-rab'-i-lis,  wonderful. 

Gra'-vis,  heavy.  OnF-nis,  all. 

Tres,  three,  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  mitis. 


Note.  Several  adjectives  of  this  class  have  forms  also  in  us,  a,  um.  See  §  116. 

§  110.  (a.)  All  comparatives,  except  plus,  more,  are  thus  de¬ 
clined  : — 


*  Pronounced  mish'-e-a,  etc.  See  §  12. 
6* 


66 


ADJECTIVES - THIRD  DECLENSION, 


§  111 


Mitior,*  milder . 
Singular . 


M.  f  F. 

N. 

mit'-i-or, 

mit'-i-us, 

0. 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

D. 

mit-i-o'-ri, 

mit-i-o'-ri, 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-rem, 

mit'-i-us, 

V. 

mit'-i-or, 

mit'-i-us, 

Ab. 

mit-i-o'-re,  or  -rl. 

Plural. 

mit-i-o'-re,  or  -rl. 

M.  #  F. 

K 

N. 

mit-i-o'-res, 

mit-i-o'-ra, 

G. 

mit-i-o'-riim, 

mit-i-o'-rum, 

D. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus, 

mit-i-or'-i-bus, 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-res, 

mit-i-o'-ra, 

V. 

mit-i-o'-res, 

mit-i-o'-ra, 

Ab. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

Al'-ti-or,  higher. 
Au-da'-ci-or,  bolder . 
Bre'-vi-or,  shorter. 
Cru-de'-li-or,  more  cruel. 


In  like  manner  decline 

DuF-ci-or,  sweeter. 
Fe-lic'-i-or,  happier . 

F  e-ro'-ci-or,  fiercer . 
For'-ti-or,  braver. 


Gra'-vi-or,  heavier . 
Pru-den'-ti-or,  more  pru¬ 
dent. 

U-be'-ri-or,  more  fertile. 


Singular. 


Plus,  more,  is  thus  declined  : — 
Plural. 


N. 

N.  plus, 

G.  plu'-ris, 

D.  , 

Ac.  plus, 

Ab.  (plu'-re,  obs.) 


M.  #F. 

N.  plu'-res, 

G.  plu'-ri-um, 
D.  plu'-ri-bus, 
Ac.  plu'-res, 

V.  - , 

Ab.  plu'-ri-bus. 


N. 

plu'-ra,  rarely  plu'-ri-a, 

plu'-ri-um, 

plu'-ri-bus, 

plu'-ra, 


plu'ri-bus. 


So,  but  in  the  plural  number  only,  complures ,  a  great  many. 


§  in.  III.  Other  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  but 
one  termination  in  the  nominative  singular  for  all  genders.  They  all 
end  in  Z,  r,  s ,  or  x,  and  increase  in  the  genitive. 

They  are  thus  declined  : — 

Felix,  happy . 


Singular. 


M. 

Sr  F. 

N. 

N. 

fe'-lix, 

fe'-lix, 

G. 

fe-li'-cis, 

fe-li'-cis, 

D. 

fe-li'-ci, 

fe-li'-ci, 

Ac. 

fe-li'-cem, 

fe'-lix, 

V. 

fe'-lix, 

fe'-lix, 

Ab. 

fe-li'-ce,  or  -cl. 

fe-li'-ce,  or  -ci. 

Pronounoed  mish'-e-or ,  etc.  See  §  12. 


§112. 


ADJECTIVES - OBLIQUE  CASES. 


67 


Plural . 

M.frF. 

N. 

N. 

fe-ll'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a,* 

G. 

fe-lic'-i-um,* 

fe-lic'-i-um, 

D. 

fe-lic'-i-bus, 

fe-lic'-i-bus, 

Ac. 

fe-ll'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a, 

F. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a, 

Ah. 

fe-lic'-i-bus. 

fe-lic'-i-bus. 

Praesens,  present . 

Singular. 

M.frF. 

N. 

N. 

prae'-sens, 

prae'-sens, 

G. 

prae-sen'-tis, 

prae-sen'-tis, 

D. 

prae-sen'-ti, 

prae-sen'-ti, 

Ac. 

prae-sen'-tem, 

prae'-sens, 

F. 

prae'-sens, 

prae'-sens, 

Ah. 

prae-sen'-te,  or  -ti. 

prae-sen'-te,  or  -ti. 

N. 

Plural . 
prae-sen'-tes, 

prae-sen'-ti-a, f 

G. 

prae-sen'-ti-um, 

prae-sen'-ti-um, 

D. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus, 

prae-sen'-ti-bus, 

Ac. 

prae-sen'-tes, 

prae-sen'-ti-a, 

F. 

prae-sen'-tes, 

prae-sen'-ti-a, 

Ah. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

In  like  manner  decline 


Au'-dax,  -acis,  bold. 
Com'-pos,  -otis,  master  of. 
FS'-rox,  -ocis, fierce. 
In'-gens,  -tis,  huge. 


ParMi-ceps,  -ipis,  par¬ 
ticipant. 

Prae'-pes,  -etis,  swift. 
Pru'-dens,  -tis,  prudent. 


SoF-lers,  -tis,  shrewd. 
Sos'-pes,  -itis,  safe. 
Sup'-plex,  -icis,  sup¬ 
pliant. 


Remark.  All  present  participles  are  declined  like  prcesens ;  as, 
A'-mans.  Mo'-nens.  Reagens.  Ca'-pi-ens.  Au'-di-ens. 

Note.  A  few  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  redundant  forms  in  us,  a1 
urn;  see  §  116. 


Rules  for  the  Oblique  Cases  of  Adjectives  of  the 

Third  Declension. 

GENITIVE  SINGULAR. 


§112.  Most  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  form  their  geni¬ 
tive  singular  like  nouns  of  the  same  termination. 

The  following  may  here  be  specified : — 

1.  Of  those  in  es  (cf.  §  73)  some  have  -etis ;  as,  hebes ,  perpes ,  prcepes,  and  teres ; 
— inquies  and  locuples  have  -etis  ; — some  have  -Itis ;  as,  dives ,  sospes ,  and  super¬ 
stes  ; — some  have  - idis ;  as2  deses,  and  reses ; — bipes,  and  tripes  have  -pedis pubes 
has  puberis ,  and  impubes ,  impuberis  and  impubis. 


*  Pronounced  fe-lish'-e-um ,  etc.  See  §  10,  Exc.,  and  §  7.,  3,  (6.) 
t  Pronounced  pre-zen' -she-a,  eto. 


68 


ADJECTIVES - OBLIQUE  CASES. 


§  113,114 


2.  Compos  and  impos  have  -6tis,  and  exos ,  exossis. — Exlex  has  exlegis ,  pernox 
has  pernoctis  (§  78),  proecox,  prcecdcis,  and  redux ,  reducis.  —  Coelebs  has  caelxbis , 
(§  77) ;  intercus,  inter  cutis,  and  vetus,  veteris.  Those  in  ceps  which  are  compounds 
of  caput,  have  - cipitis ;  as,  anceps,  praeceps  (§  78, 1);  but  the  compounds  of  ceps 
from  capio  have  Apis ;  as,  particeps,  participis. — Those  in  cors ,  compounds  of 
cor,  have  - cordis ;  as,  concors ,  concordis  (§  71,  Exc.  2). — Memor  and  immemor 
have  -dris. 


ABLATIVE  SINGULAR. 

§113.  1.  Adjectives  which  have  e  in  the  nominative  singular  neu¬ 
ter  have  only  i  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  1.  The  ablatives  bimestre ,  coeleste ,  andperewwe  are  found  in  Ovid,  and 
cognomine  in  Virgil. 

2.  Comparatives  and  participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  participles, 
especially  in  the  ablative  absolute,  have  rather  e  than  i ;  but  parti¬ 
cipial  adjectives  in  ns  have  rather  i  than  e. 

3.  Adjectives  of  one  termination  have  either  e  or  i  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  only  e  in  the  abla¬ 
tive  : — 

Bicorpor,  bipes,  cselebs,  compos,  deses,  discolor,  hospes,  impos,  impubes,  ju¬ 
venis,  locuples,  pauper,  princeps,  puber  or  pubes,  senex,  sospes,  superstes, 
tricorpor,  tricuspis,  and  tripes. 

Exc.  3  .  The  following  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  only  i  in  the  abla¬ 
tive  : — 

Anceps,  concors,  discors,  hebes,  immemor,  iners,  ingens,  inops,  memor,  par, 
prseceps,  recens,  repens,  vigil,  and  most  adjectives  in  x,  especially  those  in 
plex. 

Rem.  1.  Inerte  occurs  in  Ovid,  recente  in  Ovid  and  Catullus,  and  praecipe  in 
Ennius. 

Rem.  2.  Prcesens ,  when  used  of  things,  makes  the  ablative  in  i ;  when  used 
of  persons,  it  has  e . 


NOMINATIVE,  ACCUSATIVE,  AND  GENITIVE  PLURAL. 

§114.  l.  The  neuter  of  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural 
ends  in  ia,  and  the  genitive  plural  of  all  genders  in  ium  ;  but  compar¬ 
atives  in  or,  with  vetus,  old,  and  uber,  fertile,  have  a,  and  um. 

2.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculine  and  feminine  adjectives,  whose  geni¬ 
tive  plural  ends  in  ium,  anciently  ended  in  is  or  eis,  instead  of  es.  Cf.  §  85,  Exc.  1. 

Exc.  1.  Those  adjectives  that  have  only  e  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  um 
in  the  genitive  plural. 

Exc.  2.  Compounds  of facio,  capio,  and  of  such  nouns  as  make  um  in  their 
genitive  plural,  with  celer ,  compar ,  cicur ,  dives,  memor ,  immemor ,  pi'cepes ,  sup¬ 
plex,  and  vigil ,  make  their  genitive  plural  in  um. 

Exc.  3.  Eis,  locuples,  sons,  and  insons  have  either  um  or  ium.  The  poets  and 
the  later  prose  writers  sometimes  form  the  genitive  plural  of  other  adjectives 
and  of  participles  in  ns,  by  syncope,  in  um,  instead  of  ium ;  as,  ccelestum,  Virg. 
Ovid,  etc. 


§  115,  116. 


IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES. 


69 


IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES. 


§  115.  Some  adjectives  are  defective,  others  redundant. 
DEFECTIVE  ADJECTIVES. 


1.  (a.)  Many  adjectives  denoting  personal  qualities  or  attributes 
want  the  neuter  gender,  unless  when  occasionally  joined  to  a  neuter 
substantive  used  figuratively.  Such  are  the  following  : — 

Bicorpor,  bipes,  caslebs,  compos,  consors,  degener,  dives,  impos,  impubes, 
industrius,  inops,  insons,  invitus,  juvenis,  locuples,  memor,  pauper,  particeps, 
princeps,  puber,  or  pubes,  redux,  senex,  sons,  sospes,  superstes,  supplex,  tri¬ 
corpor,  vigil. 

( b .)  Victrix  and  ultrix  are  feminine  in  the  singular,  seldom  neuter;  in  the 
plural,  they  are  feminine  and  neuter.  Such  verbals  partake  of  the  nature  both 
of  substantives  and  adjectives,  and  correspond  to  masculines  in  tor .  See  4 
102,  6,  (a.) 

2.  The  following  want  the  genitive  plural,  and  are  rarely  used 
in  the  neuter  gender : — 

Concolor,  deses,  hebes,  perpes,  reses,  teres,  versicolor. 

3.  The  names  of  months,  which  are  properly  adjectives,  have  only 
the  masculine  and  feminine  genders. 

4.  Some  adjectives  are  wholly  indeclinable. 

Such  ar q  frugi,  temperate;  nequam ,  worthless;  sat  or  satis ,  sufficient;  the 
plurals  aliquot ,  idt,  qudt ,  totidem ,  quotquot ;  and  the  cardinal  numbers  from  quatu- 
or  to  centum  inclusive,  and  also  mille.  Cf.  §  118, 1,  and  6,  ( b .) 

5.  The  following  adjectives  are  used  only  in  certain  cases :  — 

Bilicem,  acc. ;  doubly-tissued.  Cetera,  ceterum,  the  rest ,  wants  the  nom.  sing, 
masc.  Decemplicem,  acc. ;  tenfold.  Exspes,  nom. ;  hopeless.  Inquies,  nom. ; 
-etem,  acc. ;  -ete,  abl. ;  restless.  Mactus,  and  macte,  nom. ;  macte,  acc. ;  honored; 
— macti,  nom.  plur.  Necesse,  and necessum,  nom.,  acc. ;  necessary.  Plus,  nom., 
acc. ;  pluris,  gen. ;  more  ;—pl .  plures,  -a,  nom.  acc. ;  -ium  gen . ;  ibus,  dat.,  abl. 
Cf.  §  110.  Postera,  posterum,  coining  after ,  wants  the  nom.  sing.  masc.  Potis, 
nom.  sing,  and  pi.,  all  genders;  able.  Pote,  nom.  sing.,  for  potest;  possible.  Sep¬ 
templicis,  gen. ;  -ce,  abl. ;  seven-fold.  Siremps,  and  sirempse,  nom.  and  acc. ; 
alike.  Tantundem,  nom.  acc. ;  tantidem,  gen. ;  tantandem,  acc.  ;  so  much. 
Trilicem,  acc. ;  trebly-tissued ;  trilices,  nom.  and  acc.  pi. 


REDUNDANT  ADJECTIVES. 


§  116.  The  following  adjectives  are  redundant  in  termination 
and  declension.  Those  marked  r  are  more  rarely  used. 


Acclivis,  and  -us,  r*,  ascending. 
Auxiliaris,  and  -ius,  auxiliary. 


Inquies,  and  -etus,  restless. 
Jocularis,  and  -ius,  r,  laughable . 


UmOOj  LLI IAJj  “lOj  /  j  to  UI  v#  vdj  IIAJV  1  1  vV^li  V  C M/ICUs  Uo ^  j 

grown  up.  Quadrijugis,  and  -us,  yoked  J 

Inermis,  and  -us,  r,  unarmed.  gether. 

Infrenis,  and  -us,  unbridled.  Semianimis,  and  -us,  half  alive. 


70 


NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES 


§  117. 


Semiermis,  and  -ns,  half  armed.  Sublimis,  and  -ns,  r,  high. 

Semisomnis,  and  -us,  r,  half  asleep.  Unanimis,  r,  and  -us,  unanimous. 
Singularis,  and  -ius,  single.  Violens,  r,  and  -lentus,  violent. 

To  these  may  be  added  some  adjectives  in  er  and  is  ;  as,  saluber  and  - bris , 
celeber  and  - bris .  Cf.  §  108,  R.  1. 

NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 


§  117.  Numeral  adjectives  are  divided  into  three  principal 
classes — Cardinal ,  Ordinal ,  and  Distributive . 


I.  Cardinal  numbers  are  those  which  simply  denote  the  number  of 
things,  in  answer  to  the  question  Quot  ?  ‘  How  many  ?  *  They  are, 


1.  Unus, 

2.  Duo, 

3.  Tres, 

4.  Quatuor, 

5.  Quinque, 

6.  Sex, 

7.  Septem, 

8.  Octo, 

9.  N5vem, 

10.  Decern, 

11.  Undecim, 

12.  Duodecim, 

13.  Tredecim, 

14.  Quatuordecim, 

15.  Quindecim, 

16.  Sedecim,  or  sexdecim, 

17.  Septendecim, 

18.  Octodecim, 

19.  Novendecim, 

20.  Vlginti, 

21.  Viginti  unus,  or  ) 

unus  et  viginti,  \ 

22.  Viginti  duo,  or  ) 

duo  et  viginti,  etc.,  ) 
30.  Triginta, 

40.  Quadraginta, 

60.  Quinquaginta, 

60.  Sexaginta, 

70.  Septuaginta, 

80.  Octoginta,  or  octuaginta, 
90.  Nonaginta, 

100.  Centum, 

101.  Centum  unus,  or 
centum  et  unus,  etc., 

200.  Ducenti,  -se,  a, 

300.  Trecenti,  etc., 

400.  Quadringenti, 

600.  Quingenti, 

600.  Sexcenti, 

700.  Septingenti, 

800.  Octingenti, 

900.  Nongenti, 

1000.  Mille, 

2000.  Duo  millia,  or  ) 
bi3  mille,  J 


one. 

two. 

three . 

four . 

five. 

six. 

seven. 

eight. 

nine. 

ten. 

eleven . 

twelve . 

thirteen. 

fourteen . 

fifteen. 

sixteen. 

seventeen. 

eighteen. 

nineteen. 

twenty. 

twenty-one. 

twenty-two. 

thirty. 

forty. 

fifty- 

sixty, 
seventy, 
eighty, 
ninety, 
a  hundred. 

a  hundred  and  one . 

two  hundred, 
three  hundred, 
four  hundred, 
five  hundred, 
six  hundred, 
seven  hundred, 
eight  hundred, 
nine  hundred, 
a  thousand. 

two  thousand. 


l. 

II. 

m. 

nil.  or  IV. 

V. 

VI. 

VII. 

VIII. 

vnil.  or  IX. 

X. 

XI. 

xn. 

XIII. 

Xini.  or  XIV. 

XV. 

XVI. 

XVII. 

xvm. 

xvnn.  or  xix. 

XX. 

XXI. 


xxn. 

XXX. 

XXXX.  or*  XL. 
L. 

LX. 

LXX. 

LXXX. 

LXXXX.  or  XC. 
C. 

CI. 


CC. 

CCC. 

CCCC,  or  CD. 

ID,  or  D. 

IOC,  or  DC. 
IOCC,  or  DCC. 
IOCCC,  or  DCCC. 
IOCCCC,  or  DCCCC. 
CIO,  or  M. 

CIO  CIO,  or  MM. 


§118.  NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 


71 


6°0°.  >e_  100. 

1000°.  Decern^ millia,  or  J  ten  lhousand,  CCIOO. 

6°°°o.  | My  *  1000- 

100000.  CentammJKorJ  ahundred  thmlsand.  CCCIOOO. 


§  118.  1.  The  first  three  cardinal  numbers  are  declined;  from 
four  to  a  hundred  inclusive  they  are  indeclinable ;  those  denoting 
hundreds  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

For  the  declension  of  unus  and  tres ,  see  §§  107  and  109. 

Duo  is  thus  declined : — 


Plural. 


M. 

jsr.  du'-o, 

G.  du-o'-rum, 

D.  du-o'-bus, 

Ac.  du'-os,  or  du'-o, 
V.  du'-o, 

Ab.  du-o'-bus. 


F. 

du'-se, 

du-a'-rum, 

du-a'-bus, 

du'-as, 

du'-ae, 

du-a'-bus. 


N. 

du'-o, 

du-o'-rum, 

du-o'-bus, 

du'-o, 

du'-o, 

du-o'-bus. 


Remark  1.  Duorumx  duarum ,  are  often  contracted  into  duum,  especially  in 
compounds;  as,  du&mvnr,  and  when  joined  with  millium. — Ambo ,  both,  which 
partakes  of  the  nature  of  a  numeral  and  of  a  pronoun,  is  declined  like  duo. 


2.  The  cardinal  numbers,  except  unus  and  mille ,  are  used  in  the 
plural  only. 

Rem.  2.  The  plural  of  unus  is  used  with  nouns  which  have  no  singular,  or 
whose  singular  has  a  different  sense  from  the  plural;  as,  unce  nuptice ,  one  mar¬ 
riage  ;  una  castra ,  one  camp.  It  is  used  also  with  nouns  denoting  several  things 
considered  as  one  whole ;  as,  una  vestimenta ,  one  suit  of  clothes.  So,  also,  when 
it  takes  the  signification  of  “  alone”  or  “  the  same  as,  uni  Gbii ,  the  Ubians 
alone ;  unis  moribus  vivere , — with  the  same  manners. 

3.  (a.l  Thirteen,  sixteen,  seventeen,  eighteen,  and  nineteen,  are  often  ex¬ 
pressed  by  two  numbers,  the  greater  of  which  usually  precedes,  united  by  et ; 
thus,  decern  et  tres ,  decern  et  ndvem ,  or,  omitting  et,  decem  novem.  Octodecim  has 
no  good  authority.  See  infra,  4. 

(6.)  From  twenty  to  a  hundred,  the  smaller  number  with  et  is  put  first,  or 
the  greater  without  et ;  as,  unus  et  viginti ,  or  viginti  unus.  Above  one  hundred, 
the  greater  precedes,  with  or  without  et ;  as,  centum  et  unus ,  or  centum  unus ; 
trecenti  sexaginta  sex,  or  trecenti  et  sexaginta  sex.  Et  is  never  twice  used,  but 
the  poets  sometimes  take  ac,  atque ,  or  que,  instead  of  et. 

4.  For  eighteen,  twenty-eight,  etc.,  and  for  nineteen,  twenty-nine,  etc.  (ex¬ 
cepting  sixty-eight,  sixty-nine,  and  ninety-eight),  a  subtractive  expression  is 
more  frequent  than  the  additive  form ;  as,  duodeviginti ,  two  from  twenty ;  unde¬ 
viginti,  one  from  twenty;  duodetriginta,  undetriginta ,  etc.  Neither  un  (unus) 
nor  duo  can  be  declined  in  these  combinations.  The  additive  forms  for  thirty- 
eight,  etc.  to  ninety-eight,  and  for  forty-nine,  etc.  to  ninety-nine,  except  those 
for  sixty-nine,  seem  not  to  occur. 

5.  (a.)  Thousands  are  generally  expressed  by  prefixing  the  smaller  cardinal 
numbers  to  millia ;  as,  decem  millia ,  ten  thousand;  ducenta  millia,  two  hundred 
thousand.  As  there  is  in  Latin  no  unit  above  mille ,  a  thousand,  the  higher  units 
of  modem  numeration  are  expressed  by  prefixing  the  numeral  adverbs  to  the 


72 


NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 


§  119. 


combination  centena  millia ;  as,  decies  centena  millia ,  a  million;  centies  centena 
millia ,  ten  millions.  In  such  combinations  centena  millia  is  sometimes  omitted ; 
as,  decies ,  scii,  centena  millia. 

( b .)  The  poets  sometimes  make  use  of  numeral  adverbs  in  expressing  smaller 
numbers ;  as,  bis  sex  for  duodecim ;  bis  centum  for  ducenti ,  etc. 

6.  Mille  is  used  either  as  a  substantive  or  as  an  adjective. 

(a.)  When  taken  substantively,  it  is  indeclinable  in  the  singular  number, 
and,  in  the  plural,  has  millia ,  millium ,  millibus ,  etc. ;  as,  mille  hominum,  a  thou¬ 
sand  men ;  duo  millia  hominum ,  two  thousand  men,  etc.  When  mille  is  a  sub¬ 
stantive,  the  things  numbered  are  put  in  the  genitive,  as  in  the  preceding 
examples,  unless  a  declined  numeral  comes  between;  ns, habuit  tria  millia  tre¬ 
centos  milites. 

(b.)  As  an  adjective,  mille  is  plural  only,  and  indeclinable:  as,  mille  homines 
a  thousand  men ;  cum  bis  mille  hominibus,  with  two  thousand  men. 

7.  Capitals  were  used  by  the  Romans  to  mark  numbers.  The  letters  em¬ 
ployed  for  this  purpose  were  C.  I.  L.  V.  X.,  which  are,  therefore,  called  Nu¬ 
meral  Letters.  I.  denotes  one ;  V.  Jive ;  X.  ten ;  L.  fifty ;  and  C.  a  hundred.  By 
the  various  combinations  of  these  five  letters,  all  the  different  numbers  are  ex¬ 
pressed. 

(a.)  The  repetition  of  a  numeral  letter  repeats  its  value.  Thus,  II.  signifies 
two  ;  III.  three;  XX.  twenty;  XXX.  thirty;  CC.  two  hundred,  etc.  But  V .  and 
L.  are  never  repeated. 

(b.)  When  a  letter  of  a  less  value  is  placed  before  a  letter  of  a  greater  value, 
the  less  takes  away  its  value  from  the  greater;  but  being  placed  after,  it  adds 
its  value  to  the  greater ;  thus, 


IV.  Four. 
IX.  Nine. 
XL.  Forty. 
XC.  Ninety. 


V.  Five.  VI.  Six. 

X.  Ten.  XI.  Eleven. 

L.  Fifty.  LX.  Sixty. 

C.  A  hundred.  CX.  A  hundred  and  ten. 


(c.)  A  thousand  was  marked  thus,  CIO,  which,  in  later  times,  was  contracted 
into  M.  Five  hundred  is  marked  thus,  10,  or,  by  contraction,  D. 

(d.)  The  annexing  of  the  apostrophus  or  inverted  C  (0)  to  10  makes  its  value 
ten  times  greater;  thus,  100  marks  Jive  thousand;  and  1000 ,Jifty  thousand. 

(e.)  The  prefixing  of  C,  together  with  the  annexing  of  0,  to  the  number  CIO, 
makes  its  value  ten  times  greater;  thus,  CCI00  denotes  ten  thousand;  and 
CCCI000,  a  hundred  thousand.  The  Romans,  according  to  Pliny,  proceeded 
no  further  in  this  method  of  notation.  If  they  had  occasion  to  express  a  larger 
number,  they  didit  by  repetition;  thus,  CCCI000,  CCCI000,  signified  two 
hundred  thousand,  etc. 

(f.)  We  sometimes  find  thousands  expressed  by  a  straight  line  drawn  over 
the  top  of  the  numeral  letters.  Thus,  III.  denotes  three  thousand;  X.,  ten 
thousand. 


§  119.  II.  Ordinal  numbers  are  such  as  denote  order  or  rank, 
and  answer  to  the  question,  Quotus  ?  Which  of  the  numbers  ?  They 
all  end  in  us,  and  are  declined  like  bonus ;  as, primus,  first ;  secundus , 
second. 

III.  Distributive  numbers  are  those  which  indicate  an  equal  division 
among  several  persons  or  things,  and  answer  to  the  question,  Quoteni ? 
How  many  apiece  ?  as,  singuli,  one  by  one,  or,  one  to  each ;  bini,  two 
by  two,  or  two  to  each,  etc.  They  are  always  used  in  the  plural,  and 
are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus,  except  that  they  usually  have 
Cm  instead  of  Drum  in  the  genitive  plural.  Cf.  §  105,  R.  4. 


§  120. 


NtJMEKAL  ADJECTIVES. 


73 


The  following  table  contains  the  ordinal  and  distributive  numbers,  and  the 
corresponding  numeral  adverbs,  which  answer  to  the  question,  Quoties  ?  How 
many  times  V  — 


1. 

Ordinal. 

Primus,  Jirst. 

2. 

Secundus,  second. 

3. 

Tertius,  third. 

4. 

Quartus,  fourth. 

6. 

Quintus,  fifth. 

6. 

Sextus,  sixth. 

7. 

Septimus,  seventh. 

8. 

Octavus,  eighth . 

9. 

Nonus,  ninth. 

10. 

Decimus,  tenth ,  etc. 

11. 

Undecimus. 

12. 

Duodecimus. 

13. 

Tertius  decimus. 

14. 

Quartus  decimus. 

15. 

Quintus  decimus. 

16. 

Sextus  decimus. 

17. 

Septimus  decimus. 

18. 

Octavus  decimus. 

19. 

Nonus  decimus. 

20. 1 

[  Vicesimus,  or  ) 

1 

21. 

[  vigesimus.  ) 
Vicesimus  primus. 

22. 

Vicesimus  secundus, 

30.  j 

(  Tricesimus,  or  ) 
j  trigesimus.  J 

40. 

Quadragesimus. 

50. 

Quinquagesimus. 

60. 

Sexagesimus. 

70. 

Septuagesimus. 

80. 

Octogesimus. 

90. 

Nonagesimus. 

100. 

Centesimus. 

200. 

Ducentesimus. 

300. 

Trecentesimus. 

400. 

Quadringentesimus. 

500. 

Quingentesimus. 

600. 

Sexcentesimus. 

700. 

Septingentesimus. 

800. 

Octingentesimus . 

900. 

Nongentesimus. 

1000. 

Millesimus. 

2000. 

Bis  millesimus. 

Distributive. 

Singuli,  one  by  one. 

Blni,  two  by  two. 

Terni,  or  trini. 

Quaterni. 

Quini. 

Seni. 

Septeni. 

Octoni. 

Noveni. 

Deni. 

Undeni. 

Duodeni. 

Terni  deni. 

Quaterni  deni. 

Quini  deni. 

Seni  deni. 

Septeni  deni. 

Octoni  deni. 

Noveni  deni. 

Viceni. 

Viceni  singuli. 

Viceni  bini,  etc. 

Triceni. 

Quadrageni. 
Quinquageni. 

Sexageni. 

Septuageni. 

Octogeni. 

Nonageni. 

Centeni. 

Duceni. 

Treceni,  or  trecenteni 

(  Quadringeni,  or  ) 

{  quadringenteni.  ) 
Quingeni. 

Sexceni,  or  sexcenteni. 
Septingeni. 

Octingeni. 

Nongeni. 

Milleni,  or 
singula  millia. 

Bis  milleni,  or  ) 
bina  millia.  ) 


Numeral  Adverbs. 
Semel,  once. 

Bis,  twice. 

Ter,  thrice. 

Quater,  four  times. 
Quinquies. 

Sexies. 

Septies. 

Octies. 

Novies. 

Decies. 

Undecies. 

Duodecies. 

Terdecies. 

Quatuordecies. 

Quindecies. 

Sedecies. 

Decies  et  septies. 

Duodevicies. 

Undevicies. 

Vicies. 

Semel  et  vicies. 
Bis  et  vicies,  etc. 

Tricies. 

Quadragies. 

Quinquagies. 

Sexagies. 

Septuagies. 

Octogies. 

Nonagies. 

Centies. 

Ducenties. 
Trecenties,  or  ) 
tricenties.  J 

Quadringenties. 

Quingenties. 
Sexcenties. 
Septingenties. 
Octingenties. 
Noningenties. 

Millies. 

Bis  millies. 


§  12©.  1.  In  the  ordinals,  instead  of  primus ,  prior  is  used,  if  only  two 
are  spoken  of.  Alter  is  often  used  for  secundus. 

2.  (a.)  From  thirteenth  to  nineteenth,  the  smaller  number  is  usually  put 
first,  without  et ;  as,  tertius  decimus ,  but  sometimes  the  greater  with  or  without 
et ;  as,  decimus  et  tertius ,  or  decimus  tertius. 

(b.)  Twenty-first,  thirty-first,  etc.,  are  often  expressed  by  unus  et  vicesimus , 
unus  et  tricesimus ,  etc.,  one  and  twentieth,  etc. ;  and  twenty-second,  etc.,  by 
duo ,  or  alter  et  vicesimus ,  etc.,  in  which  duo  is  not  changed.  In  the  other  com¬ 
pound  numbers,  the  larger  precedes  without  et,  or  the  smaller  with  et ;  as,  vicesi¬ 
mus  quartus ,  or  quartus  et  vicesimus. 

*7 


74 


ADJECTIVES — COMPARISON. 


§  121,  122. 


(c.)  For  eighteenth,  etc.,  to  fifty-eighth,  and  for  nineteenth,  etc.  to  fifty-ninth, 
the  subtractive  forms,  duodevicesimus ,  etc.,  and  undevicesimus ,  etc.,  are  often  used. 

3.  In  the  distributives,  eighteen,  thirty-eight,  forty-eight,  and  nineteen  and 
twenty-nine,  are  often  expressed  by  the  sub  tracti  ves  duodeviceni ,  etc.,  undevi¬ 
ceni ,  etc. 

4.  (a.)  Distributives  are  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  for  cardinal  numbers; 
as,  bina  spicula,  two  darts.  Virg.  So  likewise  in  prose,  with  nouns  that  want  the 
singular ;  as,  bines  nuptiae,  two  weddings. 

( b .)  The  singular  of  some  distributives  is  used  in  the  sense  of  multiplica- 
tives ;  as ,  binus ,  twofold.  So  ternus,  quinus,  septenus . 

5.  In  the  numeral  adverbs,  for  the  intermediate  numbers  21,  22,  etc.,  the 
larger  number  also  may  be  put  first,  either  with  or  without  et;  and  for 
twenty-eight  times  and  thirty-nine  times,  duodetricies  and  undequadragies  are 
found. 


§  121.  To  the  preceding  classes  may  be  added  the  following : — 

1.  Mulliplicatives ,  which  denote  how  many  fold,  in  answer  to  the  question, 
quotuplex  ?  They  all  end  in  plex,  and  are  declined  like  felix  ;  as, 

Simplex,  single.  Quincuplex,  fivefold. 

Duplex,  twofold,  or  double.  Septemplex,  sevenfold , 

Triplex,  threefold.  Decemplex,  tenfold. 

Quadruplex,  fourfold.  Centuplex,  a  hundred  fold. 

2.  Proportionals,  which  denote  how  many  times  one  thing  is  greater  than 
another;  as,  duplus,  a,  um,  twice  as  great;  so  triplus,  quadruplus,  octuplus,  de¬ 
cuplus.  They  are  generally  found  only  in  the  neuter. 

3.  Temporals ,  which  denote  time ;  as,  bimus ,  a,  um,  two  years  old ;  so  trimus , 
quadrimus,  etc.  Also,  biennis,  lasting  two  years,  biennial ;  so  quadriennis,  quin¬ 
quennis,  etc.  So  also,  bimestris,  of  two  months’  continuance;  trimestris,  etc., 
biduus,  etc.  To  these  may  be  added  certain  nouns,  compounds  of  annus  and 
dies  with  the  cardinal  numbers;  as,  biennium,  triennium,  etc.,  a  period  of  two, 
etc.  years;  biduum,  triduum ,  etc.,  a  period  of  two,  etc.  days. 

4.  Adjectives  in  arius,  derived  from  the  distributives,  and  denoting  of  how 
many  equal  parts  or  units  a  thing  consists ;  as,  binarius,  of  two  parts ;  ternarius , 
etc. 


5.  Interrogatives ;  as,  quot,  how  many?  qudtus ,  of  what  number?  quoteni , 
how  many  each?  quoties,  how  many  times?  Their  correlatives  are  tot,  totidem, 
so  many;  aliquot,  some;  which,  with  quot,  are  indeclinable;  and  the  adverbs, 
toties ,  so  often ;  aliquoties,  several  times. 

6.  Fractional  expressions,  which  denote  the  parts  of  a  thing.  These  are  ex¬ 
pressed  in  Latin  by  pars  with  dimidia,  tertia,  quarta,  etc.  Thus,  dimidia 
pars;  $,  tertia  pars,  etc.  When  the  number  of  parts  into  which  a  thing  is 
divided  exceeds  by  one  only  the  parts  mentioned,  as  in  2,  etc.  the  fraction  is 
expressed  simply  by  duos,  ires ,  etc.  partes ,  denoting  two  out  of  three,  three  out 
of  four,  etc. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  132.  1.  Adjectives  may  be  divided  into  two  classes — those  which 
denote  a  variable,  and  those  which  denote  an  invariable ,  quality  or 
limitation. 

Thus,  b6nus,  good,  altus,  high,  and  opacus,  dark,  denote  variable  attributes; 
but  ceneus,  brazen,  triplex,  threefold,  and  diurnus,  daily,  do  not  admit  of  different 
degrees  in  their  signification. 

2.  The  comparison  of  an  adjective  is  the  expression  of  its  quality 
in  different  degrees. 


§  123-125.  ADJECTIVES. - IRREGULAR  COMPARISON. 


75 


3.  There  are  three  degrees  of  comparison — the  positive ,  the  com¬ 
parative,  and  the  superlative. 

4.  The  positive  Simply  denotes  a  quality,  without  reference  to  other 
degrees  of  the  same  quality ;  as,  altus ,  high ;  mitis,  mild. 

5.  The  comparative  denotes  that  a  quality  belongs  to  one  of  two 
objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  the  other ;  as, 
altior,  higher ;  mitior,  milder. 

6.  The  superlative  denotes  that  a  quality  belongs  to  one  of  several 
objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  any  of  the  rest; 
as,  altissimus ,  highest  f  mitissimus,  mildest. 

Rem  1.  Sometimes  also  the  comparative  denotes  that  a  quality,  at  different 
times  or  in  other  circumstances,  belongs  in  different  degrees  to  the  same  object; 
as,  est  sapientior  quamfuit ,  he  is  wiser  than  he  was. 

Rem.  2.  The  comparative  sometimes  expresses  the  proportion  between  two 
qualities  of  the  same  object;  as,  est  doctior  quam  sapientior,  he  is  more  learned 
than  wise ;  that  is,  his  learning  is  greater  than  his  wisdom. 

Rem.  3.  The  comparative  is  also  used  elliptically  instead  of  our  4  too  *  or 
4  rather  ’ ;  as,  vivit  liberius,  he  lives  too  freely,  or,  rather  freely.  Cf.  §  256,  R.  9. 

Rem.  4.  The  superlative,  like  the  positive  with^er,  (cf.  §  127,  2),  often  indi¬ 
cates  a  high  degree  of  a  quality  without  direct  comparison  with  the  same  qual¬ 
ity  in  other  objects;  as,  amicus  carissimus,  a  very  dear  friend. 

§  123*  1.  Degrees  of  a  quality  inferior  to  the  positive  may  be  denoted 

by  the  adverbs  minus ,  less;  minime, least,  prefixed  to  the  positive;  &s,  jucundus, 
pleasant;  minus  jucundus,  less  pleasant;  minime  jucundus,  least  pleasant. 

2.  A  small  degree  of  a  quality  is  indicated  by  sub  prefixed  to  the  positive ;  as, 
amarus ,  bitter;  subamarus ,  bitterish,  or,  somewhat  bitter. 

3.  An  equal  degree  of  a  quality  may  be  denoted  by  tarn  followed  by  quam, 
ceque  followed  by  ac,  sic  followed  by  ut,  etc. ;  as,  hebes,  aeque  ac  pecus ,  as  stupid 
as  a  brute. 

§134.  1.  The  comparative  and  superlative  in  Latin,  as  in  Eng¬ 
lish,  are  denoted  either  by  peculiar  terminations,  or  by  certain  ad¬ 
verbs  prefixed  to  the  positive.  Cf.  §  127,  1. 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

2.  The  terminational  comparative  ends  in  ior,  tor ,  tus  ; 

the  terminational  superlative  in  isstmus,  issima,  tssimum. 

3.  These  terminations  are  added  to  the  root  of  the  positive ;  as, 

altus,  altior,  airissimus ;  high,  higher,  highest. 

miti s,  mirior,  mi'rissimus ;  mild,  milder,  mildest. 

felix,  (gen.  felicis,')  felicior,  felicissimus ;  happy,  happier,  happiest. 

In  like  manner  compare 

Arc'-tus,  strait.  Cru-de'-lis,  cruel.  Ca'-pax,  capacious. 

Ca'-rus,  dear.  Fer'-ti-lis,  fertile.  Cle'-mens,  (^erc.-tis)  merciful. 

Doc'-tus,  learned.  Le'-vis,  light.  In'-ers,  {gen.  -tis),  sluggish. 

IRREGULAR  COMPARISON. 

§  13S»  1.  Adjectives  in  er  form  their  superlative  by  adding 

rimus  to  that  termination ;  as,  deer,  active ;  gen.  acris ;  comparative, 
acrior ;  superlative,  acerrimus. 


76 


ADJECTIVES. - DEFECTIVE  COMPARISON. 


§  126. 


In  like  manner,  pauper,  pauperrimus.  Vetus  has  a  similar  superlative,  veter¬ 
rimus,  from  the  old  collateral  form  veter. 

2.  Six  adjectives  in  Us  form  their  superlative  by  adding  limus  to 
the  root : — 


Facilis, 

facilior, 

facillimus, 

easy. 

Difficilis, 

difficilior, 

difficillimus, 

difficult. 

Gracilis, 

gracilior, 

gracillimus, 

slender. 

Humilis, 

humilior, 

humillimus, 

low. 

Similis, 

similior, 

simillimus, 

like. 

Dissimilis, 

dissimilior, 

dissimillimus, 

unlike. 

Imbecillus  or  imbecillis,  weak,  has  two  forms,  imbecillissimus  and  imbecillimus. 

3.  (a.)  Five  adjectives  in  ficus  (from  facio )  derive  their  compar¬ 
atives  and  superlatives  from  supposed  forms  in  ens : — 

Beneficus,  beneficentior,  beneficentissimus,  beneficent. 

Honorificus,  honorificentior,  honorificentissimus,  honorable. 

Magnificus,  magnificentior,  magnificentissimus,  splendid. 

Munificus,  munificentior,  munificentissimus,  liberal. 

Maleficus,  - ,  maleficentissimus,  hurtful. 

(b.)  Adjectives  in  dicens  and  vdlens  form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives 
regularly;  but  instead  of  those  positives,  forms  in  dicus  and  volus  are  more 
common;  as, 

Maledicens  or  dicus,  maledicentior,  maledicentissimus,  slanderous. 

Benevolens,  or -volus,  benevolentior,  benevolentissimus,  benevolent. 

4.  These  five  have  regular  comparatives,  but  irregular  super¬ 
latives  : — 

Dexter,  dexterior,  dextimus,  right. 

Extera,  {fern.)  exterior,  extremus,  or  extimus,  outward. 

Postera,  ( fern .)  posterior,  postremus,  or  postumus,  hind. 

Inferus,  inferior,  infimus,  or  imus,  below. 

Superus,  superior,  supremus,  or  summus,  above. 

Kemark  1.  The  nominative  singular  of  postera  does  not  occur  in  the  mas¬ 
culine,  and  that  of  extera  wants  good  authority. 

5.  The  following  are  very  irregular  in  comparison  : — 


Bonus, 

melior, 

optimus, 

aood, 

bad, 

better, 

best. 

Malus, 

pejor, 

pessimus, 

worse, 

worst. 

Magnus, 

major, 

maximus, 

great , 

greater, 

greatest. 

Parvus, 

minor, 

minimus, 

little , 

less, 

least . 

Multus, 

Multa, 

plurimus,  1 
plurima,  > 

much , 

more , 

most. 

Multum, 

Nequam, 

plus,* 

nequior, 

plurimum,  ) 
nequissimus, 

worthless , 

,  etc. 

Frugi, 

frugalior, 

frugalissimus,  frugal ,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  All  these,  except  magnus ,  whose  regular  forms  are  contracted,  either 
form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives  from  obsolete  adjectives,  or  take  them 
from  other  words  of  similar  signification. 

DEFECTIVE  COMPARISON. 

§126.  l.  Seven  adjectives  wrant  the  positive : — 

Citerior,  citimus, nearer.  Prior,  primus,  former. 


Deterior,  deterrimus,  loorse. 
Interior,  intimus,  inner. 
Ocior,  ocissimus,  swifter. 


Propior,  proximus,  nearer. 
Ulterior,  ultimus,  farther. 


*  See  §  110. 


§  127. 


ADJECTIVES - DEFECTIVE  COMPARISON. 


77 


2.  Eight  want  the  terminational  comparative  : — 


Consultus,  consultissimus,  skilful. 
Inclutus,  inclutissimus,  renowned. 
Invictus,  invictissimus,  invincible. 
Invitus,  invitissimus,  unwilling. 
Meritus,  meritissimus,  (very  rare,) 
deserving. 


Par,  parissimus,  (very  rare),  equal. 
Persuasus,  persuasisslmum  (neuter), 
persuaded. 

Sacer,  sacerrimus,  sacred. 


3.  Eight  have  very  rarely  the  terminational  comparative : — 


Apricus,  apricissimus,  sunny. 
Bellus,  bellissimus,  fine. 

Comis,  comissimus,  courteous. 
Diversus,  diversissimus,  different. 


Falsus,  falsissimus,  false. 
Fidus,  fidissimus,  faithful. 
Novus,  novissimus,  new . 
Vetus,  veterrimus,  old. 


4.  The  following  want  the  terminational  superlative  : — 


Adolescens,  adolescentior,  young. 
Agrestis,  agrestior,  rustic. 

Alacer,  alacrior,  active. 

Ater,  atrior,  black. 

Caecus,  caecior,  blind. 

Deses,  desidior,  inactive. 
Diuturnus,  diuturnior,  lasting. 
Infinitus,  infinitior,  unlimited. 
Ingens,  ingentior,  great. 

Jejunus,  jejunior,  fasting. 
Juvenis,  junior,  young. 

Licens,  licentior,  unrestrained. 
Longinquus,  longinquior,  distant. 
Opimus,  opimior,  rich. 


Proclivis,  proclivior,  sloping. 
Pronus,  pronior,  bending  down. 
Protervus,  protervior,  violent. 

- sequior,  worse. 

Propinquus,  propinquior,  near. 
Salutaris,  salutarior,  salutary. 

Satis,  sufficient ;  satius,  preferable. 
Satur,  saturior,  full. 

Senex,  senior,  old. 

Silvestris,  silvestrior,  woody. 
Sinister,  sinisterior,  left. 

Supinus,  supinior,  lying  on  the  back. 
Surdus,  surdior,  deaf. 

Teres,  teretior,  round. 


Remark  1.  The  superlative  of  juvenis  and  adolescens  is  supplied  by  minimus 
natu ,  youngest ;  and  that  of  senex  by  maximus  natu ,  oldest.  The  comparatives 
minor  natu  and  major  natu  sometimes  also  occur. 

Rem.  2.  Most  adjectives  also  in  ilis,  ilis ,  alls,  and  bilis,  have  no  terminational 
superlative. 

5.  Many  variable  adjectives  have  no  terminational  comparative  or 
superlative.  Such  are, 

(a.)  Adjectives  in  bundus ,  imus,  inus  (except  divinus ),  or  us,  most  in  ivus,  and 
in  us  pure  (except  -quus.)  Yet  arduus ,  assiduus ,  egregius,  exiguus,  industrius, per¬ 
petuus,  pius,  strenuus,  and  vacuus,  have  sometimes  a  terminational  comparison. 
So,  dropping  i,  noxior ,  innoxior,  sobrior. 

{b.)  The  following — almus,  calvus,  canus,  cicur,  claudus ,  degener,  delirus,  dispar , 
egenus,  impar ,  impiger,  invidus,  lacer,  memor,  mirus,  nudus,  praecox,  praeditus, 
rudis,  salvus,  sospes,  superstes,  vulgaris,  and  some  others. 

§  137.  1.  The  comparative  and  superlative  may  also  be 
formed  by  prefixing  to  the  positive  the  adverbs  magis ,  more,  and 
maxime,  most ;  as,  idoneus ,  fit ;  magis  idoneus ,  maxime  idoneus. 

2.  Various  degrees  of  a  quality  above  the  positive  are  expressed 
by  admodum,  aliquanto ,  apprime,  bene,  imprimis,  multum,  oppido,  per¬ 
quam,  and  valde ,  and  also  by  per  compounded  with  the  positive ;  as, 
difficilis,  difficult ;  perdifficilis,  very  difficult.  To  a  few  adjectives  pros, 
is  in  like  manner  prefixed  ;  as,  praedurus ,  very  hard. 

3.  The  force  of  the  comparative  is  increased  by  prefixing  etiam, 
even,  still,  or  yet ;  and  that  of  both  comparative  and  superlative,  by 

7* 


ADJECTIVES - DERIVATION. 


78 


§  128. 


prefixing  longe  or  multo ,  much,  far ;  as,  longe  nobilissimus  ;  longe  melior  ; 
iter  multo  facilius;  multo  maxima  pars . 

4.  Vel,  4  even  ’,  and  quam ,  with  or  without  possum ,  4  as  much  as 
possible',  before  the  superlative,  render  it  more  emphatic;  as,  Cicero 
vel  optimus  oratorum  Romanorum.  Quam  maximum  potest  militum  nu¬ 
merum  colligit;  quam  doctissimus ,  extremely  learned ;  quam  celerrime, 
as  speedily  as  possible. 

Note  1.  Instead  of  quam  with  possum ,  quantus  is  sometimes  used,  in  the  same 
case  as  the  superlative ;  as,  Quantis  maximis  potuit  itineribus  contendit. 

Note  2.  Unus ,  with  or  without  omnium ,  is  sometimes  added  to  superlatives  to 
increase  their  force;  as,  Hoc  ego  uno  omnium  plurimum  utor.  Cic.  Urbem  unam 
mihi  amicissimam  declinavi ,  Id.  It  is  used  in.  like  manner  with  excello. 

5.  All  adjectives  whose  signification  admits  of  different  degrees,  if 
they  have  no  terminational  comparison,  may  be  compared  by  means 
of  adverbs. 

6.  Instead  of  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees,  the  positive  with 
the  prepositions  prce ,  ante,  praeter,  or  supra ,  is  sometimes  used;  as ,proe  nobis 
beatus ,  happier  than  we.  Cic.  Ante  alias  pulchritudine  insignis ,  most  beauti¬ 
ful.  Liv.  Sometimes  the  preposition  is  used  in  connection  with  the  superla¬ 
tive;  as,  Ante  alios  pulcherrimus  omnes.  Virg. 

i.  Among  adjectives  which  denote  an  invariable  quality  or  limitation,  and 
which,  therefore,  cannot  be  compared,  are  those  denoting  matter,  time,  num¬ 
ber,  possession,  country,  part,  interrogation;  also  compounds  of  jugum,  somnus , 
gero ,  and  fero ,  and  many  others. 


DERIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  128.  Derivative  adjectives  are  formed  chiefly  from  nouns, 
from  other  adjectives,  and  from  verbs. 

I.  Those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives  are  called  denomina¬ 
tives.  The  following  are  the  principal  classes : — 

1.  (a.)  The  termination  ei/s ,  added  to  the  root,  denotes  the  material  of  which 
a  thing  is  made,  and  sometimes  similarity;  as,  aureus ,  golden;  argenteus ,  of 
silver;  ligneus ,  wooden;  vitreus,  of  glass ;  virgineus,  maidenly ;  from  aurum,  ar¬ 
gentum,  etc.  See  §  9,  Rem.  3. 

(b.)  Some  adjectives  of  this  kind  have  a  double  form  in  neus  and  nus ;  as, 
eburneus  and  eburnus,  of  ivory. 

(c. )  The  termination  inus  has  the  same  meaning;  as,  adamantinus,  of  ada¬ 
mant;  cedrinus,  of  cedar;  from  addmas  and  cedrus.  So,  also,  enus ;  as,  terrenus, 
of  earth,  from  terra. 

^  (d.)  The  termination  eiis  or  ius  (Greek  no;),  and  also  icus ,  belong  to  adjec¬ 
tives  formed  from  Greek  names  of  men,  and  denote  ‘of’  or  ‘  pertaining  to  ’; 
as,  Achilleus ,  Sophocleus,  Aristotelius,  Platonicus  ;  Pythagoi'eus  and  Pythagoricus; 
Homerius  and  Homericus.  Names  in  ias  make  adjectives  in  iacus;  as,  Archias, 
Archiacus.  Sometimes,  though  rarely  in  the  purest  Latin  authors,  adjectives  in 
eus  or  ius  are  formed  from  Latin  names;  as,  Marcellia  or  -ea,  a  festival  in 
honor  of  the  Marcelli. 

2.  (a.)  The  terminations  alis,  ciris,  arius,  ilis,  atilis,  icius,  icus,  ius,  eus,  and 
Inus,  denote  4  belonging  ’  4  pertaining,’  or  ‘  relating  to  ’ ;  as,  capitalis,  relating 
to  the  life ;  from  caput. 


§  128. 


ADJECTIVES - DERIVATION. 


79 


So  comitialis ,  regalis ;  Apollinaris,  consularis,  popularis ;  argentarius  ;  civilis , 
hostilis,  juvenilis;  aquatilis,  jluviatilis;  tribunicius,  patricius  ;  bellicus,  civicus ,  Ger¬ 
manicus  ;  accusatorius,  imperatorius ,  regius;  Hectoreus ;  caninus ,  equinus ,  ferinus , 
masculinus  ;  from  comitia,  rex,  Apollo,  consul,  populus,  argentum,  civis ,  etc. 

(b.)  The  termination  ilis  sometimes  expresses  character;  as,  hostilis,  hostile ; 
puerilis,  boyish ;  from  hostis  and  puer. 

(c.)  The  termination  inus  belongs  especially  to  derivatives  from  names  of 
animals,  and  other  living  beings. 

3.  The  termination  arius,  as  a  substantive,  scii,  faber,  etc.,  generally  denotes 
profession  or  occupation;  as,  argentarius,  a  silversmith;  from  argentum ; — 
coriarius,  statuarius ;  from  corium  and  statua.  When  added  to  numeral  adjec¬ 
tives,  it  denotes  how  many  equal  parts  a  thing  contains.  See  §  121,  4. 

4.  The  terminations  osus  and  lentus  denote  abundance,  fulness ;  as,  animosus , 
full  of  courage ;  fraudulentus ,  given  to  fraud ;  from  animus  and  fraus.  So  lapi¬ 
dosus,  vinosus,  portuosus,  turbulentus ,  sanguinolentus,  violentus.  Before  lentus ,  a 
connecting  vowel  is  inserted,  which  is  commonly  u,  but  sometimes  6. 

Note. — Adjectives  of  this  class  are  called  amplificatives.  See  §  104,  12. 

5.  From  adjectives  are  formed  diminutives  in  ulus,  cuius,  etc.,  in  the  same 
manner  as  from  nouns ;  as,  dulciculus ,  sweetish ;  from  dulcis.  So  lentulus,  mi¬ 
sellus,  parvulus,  etc.  See  §  100,  3,  and  §  104,  11.  Diminutives  are  sometimes 
formed  from  comparatives ;  as,  majusculus,  duriusculus,  somewhat  great,  some¬ 
what  hard,  etc.  Double  diminutives  are  formed  from  paucus,  viz  pauxillus  and 
pauxillulus;  and  from  bdnus,  (benus)  are  formed  bellus  and  bellulus. 

6.  (a.)  From  the  names  of  places,  and  especially  of  towns,  are  derived  pa- 
trial  adjectives  in  ensis ,  inus,  as,  and  anus,  denoting  of  or  belonging  to  such 
places. 

(6.)  Thus  from  Cannes  is  formed  Cannensis;  from  Sulmo ,  Sulmonensis.  In 
like  manner,  from  castra  and  circus  come  castrensis,  circensis.  But  Athenas 
makes  Atheniensis ;  and  some  Greek  towns  in  ia  and  ea  drop  i  and  e  in  their 
adjectives;  as,  Antiochensis ,  Nicomedensis. 

(c.)  Those  in  inus  are  formed  from  names  of  places  ending  in  ia  and  ium ; 
as,  Aricia,  Aricinus ;  Caudium,  Caudinus ;  Capitolium,  Capitolinus ;  Latium,  La¬ 
tinus.  Some  names  of  towns,  of  Greek  origin,  with  other  terminations,  also 
form  adjectives  in  inus ;  as,  Tarentum ,  Tarentinus. 

(d.)  Most  of  those  in  as  are  formed  from  nouns  in  urn  ;  some  from  nouns  in 
a;  as,  Arpinum,  Arpinas ;  Capena,  Capenas. 

(e.)  Those  in  anus  are  formed  from  names  of  towns  of  the  first  declension, 
or  from  certain  common  nouns ;  as,  Alba,  Albanus ;  Roma ,  Romanus  ;  Cumae, 
Cumanus;  Thebae,  Thebanus;  also  from  some  of  the  second  declension;  as, 
Tusculum,  Tusculanus ;  Fundi,  Fundanus  :—fons,  fontanus ;  mons,  montanus ; 
urbs,  urbanus ;  oppidum ,  oppidanus. 

(/.)  Adjectives  with  the  terminations  anus,  ianus,  and  inus  are  formed  from 
names  of  men ;  as,  Sulla,  Sullanus  ;  Tullius,  Tullianus ;  Jugurtha,  Jugurthinus. 

(g.)  Greek  names  .of  towns  in  pdlis  form  patrial  adjectives  in  politanus;  as, 
Neapdlis,  Neapolitanus. 

( h .)  Greek  names  of  towns  generally  form  patrials  in  ius ;  as,  Rhodus,  Rho¬ 
dius  ;  Lacedaemon,  Lacedaemonius ; — but,  those  in  a  form  them  in  ceus ;  as,  La¬ 
rissa,  Larissaeus  ;  Smyrna,  Smyrnaeus. 

{}.)  From  many  patrials;  as,  Britannus ,  Gallus ,  Afer,  Persa .  Arabs,  etc., 
adjectives  are  formed  in  icus  and  ius ;  as,  Britannicus ,  Gallicus ,  Africus,  Persi¬ 
cus,  Arabicus ;  so  Syrus,  Syrius ;  Thrax,  Thracius. 

7.  A  large  class  of  derivative  adjectives,  though  formed  from 
nouns,  have  the  terminations  of  perfect  participles.  They  generally 
signify  wearing  or  furnished  with ;  as, 

alatus,  winged;  barbatus,  bearded;  galeatus ,  helmeted;  auritus,  long-eared; 
turritus,  turreted ;  cornutus ,  horned ;  from  ala ,  barba,  galecL,  auris,  etc. 


80 


ADJECTIVES - DERIVATION. 


§  129. 


8.  The  termination  aneus ,  annexed  to  the  root  of  an  adjective  or 
participle  in  us ,  expresses  a  resemblance  to  the  quality  denoted  by 
the  primitive ;  as,  supervacaneus ,  of  a  superfluous  nature. 

§  129.  II.  Adjectives  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal  ad¬ 
jectives.  Such  are  the  following  classes : — 

1.  The  termination  bundus ,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the  verb, 
with  a  connecting  vowel,  which  is  commonly  that  of  the  verb,  (see 
§  150,  5,)  has  the  general  meaning  of  the  present  participle ;  as, 

errabundus ,  moribundus,  from  erro ,  morior ,  equivalent  to  errans,  moriens. 

(a.)  In  many  the  meaning  is  somewhat  strengthened;  as,  gratulabundus ,  full 
of  congratulations ;  lacrimabundus ,  weeping  profusely. 

(b.)  Most  verbals  in  bundus  are  from  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  a  few  from 
those  of  the  third,  and  but  one  from  the  second  and  fourth  respectively,  viz. 
pudibundus  and  lascivibundus. 

(c.)  Some  verbal  adjectives  in  cundus  have  a  similar  sense ;  as,  rubicundus , 
verecundus,  from  rubeo  and  vereor. 

2.  The  termination  idus,  added  to  the  root,  especially  of  neuter 
verbs,  denotes  the  quality  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb ;  as, 

algidus ,  cold;  calidus ,  warm;  madidus ,  moist;  rapidus,  rapid;  from  algeo , 
caleo ,  madeo,  rapio. 

3.  The  termination  uus ,  also,  denotes  the  quality  expressed  by  the 
verb  ;  and  adjectives  in  uus  derived  from  active  verbs  take  a  passive 
meaning;  as, 

congruus ,  agreeing,  from  congruo ;  so,  assiduus,  nocuus,  innocuus : — irriguus, 
well  watered ;  conspicuus,  visible ;  from  irrigo,  conspicio. 

4.  (a.)  The  terminations  ilis  and  bilis,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb, 
with  its  connecting  vowel,  denote  passively,  capability,  or  desert ;  as, 

amabilis ,  worthy  to  be  loved ;  credibilis,  deserving  credit ;  placabilis ,  easy  to  be 
appeased ;  agilis,  active ;  ductilis,  ductile ;  from  dmo,  credo,  pldco ;  ago,  duco. 
They  are  rarely  active ;  as,  horribilis,  terribilis,  fertilis ;  aer  per  cuncta  mea¬ 
bilis.  Plin. 

(b.)  In  adjectives  of  these  forms,  derived  from  verbs  of  the  third  conjuga¬ 
tion,  the  connecting  vowel  is  i ;  sometimes,  also,  in  those  from  verbs  of  the 
second  conjugation,  in  these  and  other  forms,  i  is  used  instead  of  e  ;  as,  horri¬ 
bilis,  terribilis,  from  horreo  and  terreo. 

(c.)  These  terminations,  with  the  connecting  vowel,  are  sometimes  added  to 
the  third  root;  as,  flexilis,  flexibilis ;  coctilis,  cociibilis,  from  flecto  (flex- ),  etc. 

5.  The  termination  icius  or  itius,  added  to  the  third  root  of  the 
verb,  has  a  passive  sense ;  as,  fctitius,  feigned ;  conductitius,  to  be 
hired;  from  Jingo  (fict-),  etc. 

6.  The  termination  ax,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  an  in¬ 
clination,  often  one  that  is  faulty ;  as, 

audax,  audacious;  Idquax,  talkative;  rdpax  rapacious;  from  audeo ,  Idguor, 
rdpio. 

7.  The  termination  ivus,  annexed  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  de¬ 
notes  fitness  or  ability  to  produce  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb ; 
as,  disjunctivus ,  disjunctive,  from  disjungo. 


§  130, 131. 


ADJECTIVES — COMPOSITION. 


81 


8.  Verbals  in  tor  and  Irix ,  (see  §  102,  6,  {a.),  are  often  used  as  adjectives,  espe¬ 
cially  in  poetry ;  as,  victor  exercitus ,  victrices  liter ce.  In  the  plural  they  become 
adjectives  of  three  terminations;  as,  victores,  victrices,  victricia .  So  also  hospes, 
especially  by  the  later  poets,  is  u^ed  as  an  adjective,  having  hospita  in  the  femi¬ 
nine  singular  and  also  in  the  neuter  plural. 

§  ISO.  III.  Adjectives  derived  from  participles,  and  retaining 
their  form,  are  called  participial  adjectives ;  as,  amans,  fond  of ;  doc¬ 
tus ,  learned. 

IY.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  adverbs ;  as,  crastinus,  of 
to-morrow ;  hodiernus,  of  this  day ;  from  eras  and  hodie . 

Y.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  prepositions ;  as,  contrarius , 
contrary,  from  contra  ;  posterus,  subsequent,  from  post. 


COMPOSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  131*  Compound  adjectives  are  formed  variously : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns;  as,  capripes ,  goat-footed — of  caper  and  pes;  igniedmus, 
having  fiery  hair — of  ignis  and  coma. 

Note. — See,  respecting  the  connecting  short  i,  in  case  the  first  part  of  the  compound 
is  a  noun  or  an  adjective,  §  103,  Rem.  1. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  an  adjective;  as,  noctivagus,  wandering  in  the  night — 
of  nox  and  vagus .  So  lucif  ugax ,  shunning  the  light — of  lux  and  fugax . 

3.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;  as,  corniger,  bearing  horns — of  cornu  and  gero  ; 
letifer,  bringing  death — of  letum  and  fero.  So  carnivdrus,  causidicus,  ignivd- 
mus,  lucifugus,  particeps . 

4.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as,  aequaevus ,  of  the  same  age — of  aequus  and 
cevum ;  celeripes ,  swift-footed — of  celer  and  pes.  So  centimanus,  decennis,  mag - 
nanimus,  misericors ,  unanimis. 

6.  Of  two  adjectives;  as,  centumgeminus,  a  hundred-fold ;  multicavus,  having 
many  cavities;  quintusdecimus,  the  fifteenth. 

6.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb;  as,  brevildquens,  speaking  briefly — of  brevis 
and  loquor ;  magnificus,  magnificent — of  magnus  and  f  ado. 

7.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  termination;  as,  qualiscumque ,  quotcumque ,  uterque. 

8.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun ;  as,  bicorpor,  two-bodied — of  bis  and  corpus. 

9.  Of  an  adverb  and  an  adjective ;  as,  maledicax ,  slanderous — of  male  and 
dicax.  So  antemeridianus ,  before  mid-day. 

10.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb ;  as,  beneficus,  beneficent — of  bene  and  f ado ; 
malevdlus,  malevolent — of  male  and  vdlo. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun ;  as,  dmens,  mad — of  a  and  mens.  So  con¬ 
sors,  decolor ,  deformis,  implumis,  inermis. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective;  as,  concavus,  concave;  infidus,  un¬ 
faithful.  So  improvidus,  percarus,  praedives,  subalbidus. 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  continuus,  uninterrupted — of  con  and 
teneo ;  insciens,  ignorant — of  in  and  scio.  So  praecipuus,  promiscuus ,  substillus, 
superstes. 

Remark.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is  sometimes 
changed,  to  adapt  it  to  the  consonant  which  follows  it ;  as,  imprudens — of  in  and  prU- 
dens.  See  §  196;  and  cf.  §  103,  R.  2. 


82  PRONOUNS. — SUBSTANTIVE  PRONOUNS.  §  132,  133. 


PRONOUNS. 


§  132.  1.  A  pronoun  is  a  word  which,  supplies  the  place 

of  a  noun. 

2.  There  are  eighteen  simple  pronouns : — 


Ego,  7. 

Tu,  thou . 

Sui,  of  himself  etc. 
Ille,  that ,  the  former. 
Ipse,  himself 
Iste,  that ,  that  of  yours. 


Hie,  this ,  the  latter.  Suus,  his ,  hers ,  ite,  etc. 

Is,  that  or  he.  Cujus  ?  whose  ? 

Quis?  who?  Noster,  our. 

Qui,  who.  Vester,  your. 

Meus,  my.  Nostras,  of  our  country. 

Tuus,  thy.  Cujas  ?  of  what  country  ? 


Cujus?  whose? 


3.  Ego ,  tu,  and  sui,  and  commonly  also  quis  and  its  compounds,  are  substan¬ 
tives:  the  other  pronouns,  both  simple  and  compound,  are  adjectives,  but  are 
often  by  ellipsis  used  as  substantives. 

4.  Ego,  tu,  and .  sui  are  commonly  called  personal  pronouns.  They  are  a 
species  of  appellatives  (§  26,  3,)  of  general  application.  Ego  is  used  by  a 
speaker  to  designate  himself ;  tu,  to  designate  the  person  whom  he  addresses. 
Hence  ego  is  of  the  first  person,  tu  of  the  second.  (§  35,  2.)  Sui  is  of  the  third 
person,  and  has  always  a  reflexive  signification,  referring  to  the  subject  of  the 
sentence.  The  oblique  cases  of  ego  and  tu  are  also  used  reflexively,  when  the 
subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or  second  person. 

5.  The  remaining  pronouns,  except  quis  and  its  compounds,  are  adjectives, 
as  they  serve  to  limit  the  meaning  of  substantives ;  and  they  are  pronouns,  be¬ 
cause,  like  substantive  pronouns,  they  may  designate  any  object  in  certain 
situations  or  circumstances. 

6.  Meus,  tuus,  suus,  noster ,  vester,  and  cujus,  have  the  same  extent  of  signifi¬ 
cation  as  the  pronouns  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  are  equivalent  to  the 
genitive  cases  of  their  primitives. 

7.  Pronouns,  like  substantives  and  adjectives,  are  declined;  but  most  of 
them  want  the  vocative.  Sui,  from  the  nature  of  its  signification,  wants  also 
the  nominative  in  both  numbers. 

8.  The  substantive  pronouns  take  the  gender  of  the  objects  which  they  de¬ 
note.  The  adjective  pronouns,  like  adjectives,  have  three  genders. 


SUBSTANTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


§  133.  The  substantive  pronouns  are  thus  declined  : 


Singular. 


N.  e'-go,  I. 


tu,  thou. 


D.  ml'-hl,  to  me. 
Ac.  me,  me. 


G.  me'-i,  of  me. 


tib'-i,*  to  thee. 
te,  thee. 
tu,  0  thou. 
te,  with  thee. 


sib'-i,*  to  himself,  etc. 
se,  himself  etc. 


V.  - - - 

Ab.  me,  with  me. 


se,  with  himself  etc. 


*  See  §  19, 1,  Exc. 


§134, 


ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


83 


V.  nos,  we. 

s-i  ( nos'-trum  )  /. 

(  or  nos'-tri,  j 
D,  no'-bls,  to  us. 
Ac,  nos,  us, 

V.  — - 

Ab.  no'-bls,  with  us. 


us. 


Plural, 


vos,  ye  or  you 
ves'-trum  or 
ves'-tri, 
vo'-bls,  to  you 


|  of  you. 


VOS, 


you. 


vos,  0  ye  or  you, 
vo'-bis,  with  you. 


su'-I,  of  themselves, 

sib'-i,  to  themselves. 
sey  themselves. 


se,  with  themselves. 


Remark  1.  Me  and  ml  are  ancient  forms  for  mihi.  So  min'1  for  mihine , 
Pers.  1,  2. 

Rem.  2.  The  syllable  met  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  substantive  pronouns, 
in  an  intensive  sense,  either  with  or  without  ipse;  as,  egdmet ,  I  myself;  mihi- 
met  ipsi ,  for  myself.  It  is  not  annexed,  however,  to  the  genitives  plural,  nor  to 
tu  in  the  nominative  or  vocative.  In  these  cases  of  tu ,  tute  or  internet  is  used. 
In  the  accusative  and  ablative  the  reduplicated  forms  meme  and  tete  in  the  sin¬ 
gular,  and  sese  in  both  numbers,  are  employed  intensively.  Mepte ,  intensive, 
med  and  ted,  for  me  and  te,  and  mis  and  tis  for  mei  and  tui,  occur  in  the  comic 
writers. 

3.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  contracted  from  nostrorum ,  nostrarum ,  and  ves¬ 
trorum,  vestrarum.  Respecting  the  difference  in  the  use  of  nostrum  and  nostri , 
vestrum  and  vestri ,  see  §  212,  R.  2,  N.  2. 

4.  The  preposition  cum  is  affixed  to  the  ablative  of  these  pronouns  in  both 
numbers ;  as,  mecum ,  nobiscum ,  etc.  Cf.  §  136,  R.  1. 


ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  134:.  Adjective  pronouns  may  be  divided  into  the  follow¬ 
ing  classes : — demonstrative ,  intensive ,  relative ,  interrogative ,  in¬ 
definite,  possessive ,  and  patrial. 

Note.  Some  pronouns  belong  to  two  of  these  classes. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  are  such  as  specify  what  object  is 
meant. 

They  are  ille ,  isle ,  hie ,  and  is ,  #nd  their  compounds,  and  are  thus 
declined : — 


M. 

Singular. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

Plural . 

F. 

N. 

N.  il'-le, 

il'-la, 

il'-lud, 

il'-li, 

il'-lae, 

il'-la. 

G.  il-li'-us,* 

il-lf-us, 

il'-li, 

il-ll'-us, 

il-lo'-rum, 

il-la'-rum, 

il-lo'-rum, 

D.  il'-li, 

il'-li. 

il'-lls, 

il'-lls, 

il'-lls. 

Ac.  il'-lum, 

il'-lam, 

il'-lud, 

il'-los. 

il'-las, 

il'-la, 

il'-la, 

V.  il'-le, 

il'-la, 

il'-lud, 

il'-li, 

il'-lae, 

Ab.  il-lo. 

il'-la. 

il'-lo. 

il'-lls. 

il'-lls. 

il'-lls. 

*See  §  16, 1. 


84 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


§  134. 


Iste  is  declined  like  ille. 


Singular 

• 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  Me, 

haec, 

hoc, 

hi, 

hse, 

haec, 

G.  hu'-jus, 

hu'-jus, 

hu'-jus, 

ho'-rum, 

ha'-rum, 

ho'-rum, 

D.  huic*, 

huic, 

huic, 

his, 

his, 

his, 

Ac.  hunc, 

hanc, 

hoc, 

hos, 

has, 

haec, 

V.  hie, 

hasc, 

hoc, 

hi, 

hae, 

haec, 

Ab.  hoc. 

hac. 

hoc. 

his. 

his. 

his. 

Singular . 

Plural . 

M. 

F. 

jsr. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  is,  ^ 

e'-a, 

id, 

i 

■i> 

e'-m, 

e'-a, 

G.  e'-jus, 

e-jus, 

e'-jus, 

e-o'-rum, 

e-a'rum, 

e-o'-rum, 

D.  e'-I, 

e'-i, 

e'-i, 

i 

'-is  or  e'-is, 

i'-Is  or  e'-is, 

i'-Is  or  e'-is, 

Ac.  e'-um, 

e'-am, 

id, 

e 

j'-os, 

e'-as, 

e'-a, 

V 

Ab.  e'-o. 

e'-a. 

e'-o. 

i 

-Is  or  e'-Is. 

i'-Is  or  e'-is. 

i'-Is  or  e'-is, 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  ille ,  ollus  was  anciently  used;  whence  olli  masc.  plur. 
in  Virgil.  Jllce  fem.,  for  illius  and  illi,  is  found  in  Lucretius  and  Cato,  as  also 
in  Cato,  hoe  for  huic  fem.;  hice  for  hi,  and  hcec  for  hce  in  Plautus  and  Terence. 
Im  for  eum,  is  found  in  the  Twelve  Tables;  eii  for  ei,  and  ibus  and  iibus  for 
iis,  in  Plautus;  ece,  fem.,  for  ei,  and  eabus  for  Us,  in  Cato. 

Rem.  2.  From  ecce,  lo !  with  ille,  iste,  and  is,  are  formed,  in  colloquial  language, 
nom.,  ecca;  eccilla ,  eccillud;  acc.  sing.,  eccum ,  eccam ;  eccillum  (by  syncope 
ellum),  eccillam  ;  eccistam ;  acc.  plur.,  eccos,  ecca . 

Rem.  3.  Istic  and  illic  are  compounded  of  iste  hie ,  and  ille  hie ;  or,  as  some 
say,  of  iste  ce ,  and  ille  ce.  The  former  sometimes  retains  the  aspirate,  as  isthic. 
They  are  more  emphatic  than  ille  and  iste . 


Istic  is  thus  declined: — 

Singular . 


M. 

N.  is'-tlc, 
Ac.  is'-tunc, 
Ab. is'-toc. 


F. 

is'-taec, 

is'-tanc, 

is'-tac. 


N. 


is'-toc,’  or  is'-tuc, 
is'-toc,  or  is'-tuc, 
is'toc. 


N. 

Ac. 


Plural. 

M.  F. 
-  is'-taec, 


N. 


is'-taec. 


lllic  is  declined  in  the  same  manner. 


Rem.  4.  Ce,  intensive,  is  sometimes  added  to  the  several  cases  of  hie,  and 
rarely  to  some  cases  of  the  other  demonstrative  pronouns ;  as,  hujusce,  huncce , 
hancce,  hocce ,  hice ,  hceee  or  hcec,  horunc ,  harumce ,  harunce,  or  harunc ,  hosce, 
haste,  hisce;  illiusce,  illace,  illosce,  illasce ,  illisce ;  istace,  istisce ;  ejusce,  Usee. 
When  ne,  interrogative,  is  also  annexed,  ce  becomes  ci;  as,  hceccine,  hoscine , 
hisdne ;  istuccine,  istaccine,  istoscine ;  illiccine,  illanccine. 

Rem.  5.  Modi,  the  genitive  of  mddus,  annexed  to  the  genitive  singular  of  de¬ 
monstrative  and  relative  pronouns,  imparts  to  them  the  signification  of  adjec¬ 
tives  of  quality;  as,  hujusmodi  or  hujuscemddi,  like  talis,  of  this  sort,  such; 
illiusmddi  and  istiusniddi,  of  that  sort;  cujusmddi,  of  what  sort,  like  qualis ;  cw- 


*  See  §  9,  5. 


INTENSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


85 


§  135. 


juscemddi,  cujusquemddi ,  cujusmodicumque ,  of  what  kind  soever;  cujusdammddi , 
of  some  kind.  So  also  istimddi ,  cuimddi  and  cuicuimodi,  instead  of  istiusmddi , 
cujusmddi ,  etc. 

Rem.  6.  The  suffix  dem  is  annexed  to  is,  forming  i<?m,  “  the  same,”  which 
is  thus  declined : — 

Singular. 


M. 

N.  I'-dem, 

G.  e-jus'-dem, 
D.  e-i'-dem, 
Ac.  e-un'-dem, 

V.  - 

Ab.  e-5'-dem. 


F. 

e'-a-dem, 

e-jus'-dem, 

e-i'-dem, 

e-an'-dem, 

e-a'-dem. 


N. 

I'-dem, 

e-jus'-dem, 

e-T-dem, 

I'-dem, 


e-o'-dem. 


M. 

N.  i-I'-dem, 

G.  e-o-run'-dem, 

D.  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem, 
Ac.  e-os'-dem, 

V.  - 

Ab.  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem. 


Plural. 

F. 

e-se'-dem, 
e-a-run'-dem, 
e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem, 
e-as'-dem, 

e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem. 


N. 

e'-a-dem, 
e-o-run'-dem, 
e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem, 
e'-a-dem, 


e-is'dem,  or  i-is'-dem. 


Note  1.  In  compound  pronouns,  m  before  d  is  changed  into  n ;  as,  eundem , 
eorundem ,  etc. 

Note  2.  In  Sallust  isdem,  and  in  Palladius  hisdem  occur  for  iisdem ;  and  En¬ 
nius  in  Cicero  has  eademmet  for  eadem.  ( 


INTENSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


§  133.  Intensive  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to  render  an 
object  emphatic. 

To  this  class  belong  ipse ,  and  the  intensive  compounds  already 
mentioned.  See  §§  133,  R.  2,  and  134,  R.  4. 

Ipse  is  compounded  of  is  and  the  suffix  pse ,  and  is  thus  declined:- — 


M. 

Singular . 

F. 

N. 

M. 

Plural. 

F. 

N. 

N.  ip'-se, 

ip'-sa, 

ip'-sum, 

ip'-si, 

ip'-sse, 

ip'-sa, 

G.  ip-sl'-us, 

ip-sl'-us, 

ip-sl'-us, 

ip-so'-rum,  ip-sa'-rum, 

ip-so'-rum, 

D.  ip'-sl, 

ip'-si, 

ip'-si, 

ip'-sls, 

ip'-sls, 

ip'-sls, 

Ac.  ip '-sum, 

ip'-sam, 

ip'-sum, 

ip'-sos, 

ip'-sas, 

ip'-sa, 

V.  ip'-se, 

ip'-sa, 

ip'-sum, 

ip'-si, 

ip'-sa3, 

ip'-sa, 

■Ab,  ip '-so. 

ip'-sa. 

ip'-so. 

ip'-sls. 

ip'-sls. 

ip'-sls. 

Remark  1.  Ipse  is  commonly  subjoined  to  nouns  or  pronouns;  as,  Jupiter 
ipse ,  tu  ipse ,  Jupiter  himself,  etc. ;  and  hence  is  sometimes  called  the  adjunctive 
pronoun. 

Rem.  2.  A  nominative  ipsus,  occurs  in  early  writers,  and  a  superlative  ipsis - 
simus,  his  very  self,  is  found  in  Plautus. 

Rem.  3.  In  old  writers  the  is  of  ipse  is  declined,  while  pse  remains  unde¬ 
clined;  as,  eapse,  (nom.  and  abl.),  eampse ,  and  eopse,  instead  of  ipsa ,  ipsam, 
and  ipso.  So  also  reapse,  i.  e.  re  eapse,  “in  fact.” 

8 


86 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


§  136, 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


§  136.  Relative  pronouns  are  such  as  relate  to  a  preceding 
noun  or  pronoun. 

1.  They  are  qui ,  who,  and  the  compounds  quicumque  and  quisquis , 
whoever.  The  latter  are  called  general  relatives. 

2.  In  a  general  sense,  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  often  relatives ;  but 
the  name  is  commonly  appropriated  to  those  above  specified.  They  serve  to 
introduce  a  proposition,  limiting  or  explaining  a  preceding  noun  or  pronoun,  to 
which  they  relate,  and  which  is  called  the  antecedent . 

Qui  is  thus  declined : — 


Singular .  Plural . 


M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  qui, 

quae, 

quod, 

qui, 

quae, 

quae, 

G.  cu'-jus, 

cu'-jus, 

cu'-jus, 

quo'-rum, 

qua'-rum, 

quo'-rum, 

D.  cui,* 

cui, 

cui, 

quod, 

qui'-bus, 

qui'-bus, 

qui'-bus, 

Ac.  quem, 

V. 

quam, 

quos, 

quas, 

quae, 

Ab.  quo. 

qua. 

quo. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

Remark  1.  Qui  is  sometimes  used  for  the  ablative  singular,  in  all  genders, 
and  rarely  also  for  the  ablative  plural.  To  the  ablatives  quo ,  qua,  qui ,  and  qui¬ 
bus,  cum  is  commonly  annexed,  cf.  §  133,  4.  Cicero  uses  qulcum  for  quocum , 
when  an  indefinite  person  is  meant. 

Rem.  2.  Queis  (monosyllabic,  §  9,  R.  1),  and  quls  are  sometimes  used  in  the 
dative  and  ablative  plural  for  quibus.  Cujus  and  cui  were  anciently  written 
quojus  and  quoi :  and,  instead  of  the  genitive  cujus,  a  relative  adjective  cujus , 
a ,  um,  very  rarely  occurs. 


3.  Quicumque ,  (or  quicunque ),  is  declined  like  qui. 

Rem.  3.  Qui  is  sometimes  separated  from  cumque  by  the  interposition  of 
one  or  more  words ;  as,  qua  me  cumque  vocant  terra.  Yirg.  A  similar  separa¬ 
tion  sometimes  occurs  in  the  other  compounds  of  cumque. 

4.  Quisquis  is  thus  declined : — 


Singular. 

M.  F.  N. 

N.  quis'-quis,  quis'-quis, f  quid'-quid, 

Ac.  quem'-quem,  -  quid'-quid, 

Ah.  quo'-quo.  qua'-qua.  quo'-quo. 


Plural. 

M. 

N.  qui'-qul, 

D .  qui-bus'-qui-bus. 


Rem.  4.  Quicquid  is  sometimes  used  for  quidquid.  Qulqul  for  quisquis  occurs 
in  Plautus;  and  quidquid  is  used  adjectively  in  Cato  R.  R.  48. 


*  See  §  9,  5;  and  cf.  §  306,  (1.) 


t  Cf.  §  137,  R.  (1.) 


§137. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


87 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


§  137.  Interrogative  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to  inquire 
which  of  a  number  of  objects  is  intended. 


They  are 


9u.i?  ,  i  which?  what? 

Quinam  (  ) 


Ecquis  ? 
Ecquisnam  ? 
Numquis? 
Numquisnam, 


>is  any  one  ? 


Cujus  ?  ivJiose  ? 
Cujas?  of  what 
country ? 


1.  Quis  is  commonly  used  substantively;  qui ,  adjectively.  The 
interrogative  qui  is  declined  like  qui  the  relative. 


Quis  is  thus  declined : — 
Singular . 


M. 

F. 

N. 

N. 

quis, 

quae, 

quid, 

G. 

cu'-jus, 

cu'-jus, 

cu'-jus, 

D. 

cui, 

cui, 

cui, 

Ac. 

quern, 

quam, 

quid, 

V. 

— 

— 

Ah. 

quo. 

qua. 

quo. 

Plural . 


M. 

F. 

IV. 

qui, 

quae, 

quae, 

quo'-rum, 

qua'-rum, 

quo'-rum, 

qui'-bus, 

qui'-bus, 

qui'-bus, 

quos, 

quas, 

quae, 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

Remark  (1.)  Quis  is  sometimes  used  by  comic  writers  in  the  feminine,  and 
even  in  the  neuter.  Quisnam ,  quisque  and  quisquam  also  occur  as  feminine. 

Rem.  (2.)  Qui  is  used  for  the  ablative  of  quis  in  all  genders,  as  it  is  for  that 
of  the  relative  qui.  Cf.  §  136,  R.  1. 


Rem.  (3.)  Quis  and  qui  have  sometimes  the  signification  of  the  indefinite 
pronoun  aliquis  (some  one,  any  one),  especially  after  the  conjunctions  ec  (for 
en),  si ,  ne ,  neu,  nisi ,  num ;  and  after  relatives,  as  quo ,  quanto ,  etc.  Sometimes 
quis  and  qui  are  used  in  the  sense  of  qualis  t  what  sort  ? 

2.  The  compounds  quisnam  and  qulnam  have  respectively  the  sig¬ 
nification  and  declension  of  the  interrogatives  quis  and  qui.  In  the 
poets  nam  sometimes  stands  before  quis .  Virg.  G.  4,  445. 

3.  Ecquis  and  numquis  are  declined  and  used  like  quis ;  but  are 
sometimes  adjectives.  Virg.  Eel.  10,  28:  Cic.  Att.  13,  8. 


Rem.  (4.)  Ecqua  is  sometimes  found  in  the  nominative  singular  feminine ; 
and  the  neuter  plural  of  numquis  is  numqua. 

Rem.  (5.)  Ecqui  and  numqui  also  occur,  declined  like  the  interrogative  qui, 
and,  like  that,  used  adjectively. 

4.  Ecquisnam  and  numquisnam  are  declined  like  ecquis ;  but  are 
found  only  in  the  singular ; — the  former  in  the  nominative  in  all  gen¬ 
ders,  and  in  the  ablative  masculine ;  the  latter  in  the  nominative 
masculine  and  accusative  neuter.  In  the  nominative  feminine  and 
in  the  ablative,  the  former  is  used  adjectively. 


88 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


§  138. 


The  interrogative  cujus  is  also  defective 
Singular . 


M. ; 

N.  cu'-jus, 
Ac.  cu'-jum, 
Ab. - 


cu-ja, 

cu'-jam, 

cu'-ja. 


N 

cu'-jum, 


Plural . 

F. 

N.  cu'-jse, 
Ac.  cu'-jas. 


6.  Cujas  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  one  termination  ;  cujas , 
cujatis.  See.  §  139,  4. 

Note.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  used  not  only  in  direct  questions  but 
in  such  dependent  clauses  also,  as  contain  only  an  indirect  question;  as,  e.  g. 
in  the  direct  question,  quis  est  ?  who  is  he  ?  in  the  indirect,  nescio  quis  sit ,  I  know 
not  who  he  is.  Qui ,  in  this  sense,  is  found  for  quis ;  as,  qui  sit  aperit ,  he  dis¬ 
closes  who  he  is.  Cf.  §  265,  N. 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


§  138.  Indefinite  pronouns  are  such  as  denote  an  object 
in  a  general  manner,  without  indicating  a  particular  individual. 
They  are 

Aliquis,  some  one.  Quisquam,  any  one . 

Slquis,  if  any.  Quispiam,  some  one. 

Nequis,  lest  any.  Unusquisque,  each. 

Quisque,  every  one.  Aliquipiam,  any ,  some. 

Quidam,  a  certain  one. 
Quilibet,  )  any  one  you 

Quivis,  )  please. 

Quis  and  qui,  §  137,  R.  (3.) 

Note.  Siquis  and  nequis  \ 
quis :  so  also  unus  quisque. 

are  commonly  written  separately,  si  quis  and  ne 

1.  Aliquis  is  thus  declined : — 

Singular. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V 

al'-i-quis, 

al-i-cu'-jus, 

al'-i-cui, 

al'-i-quem, 

al'-i-qua, 

al-i-cu'-jus, 

al'-i-cui, 

al'-i-quam, 

al'-i-quod,  or  -quid, 

al-i-cu'-jus, 

al'-i-cui, 

al'-i-quod,  or  -quid, 

Ab. 

al'-i-quo. 

al'-i-qua. 

al'-i-quo. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N. 

•  G. 

D. 
Ac. 
V. 
Ab. 

al'-i-qui, 

al-i-quo'-rum, 

a-liq'-ui-bus,* 

al'-i-quos, 

al'-i-quae, 

al-i-qua'-rum, 

a-liq'-ui-bus, 

al'-i-quas, 

al'-i-qua, 

al-i-quo'-rum, 

a-liq'-ui-bus, 

al'-i-qua, 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 

*  Pronounced  a-liJy-wS-bus.  See  §§  9,  4,  and  21,  3. 


§  139. 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


89 


2.  Siquis  and  nequis  are  declined  in  the  same  manner ;  but  they 
sometimes  have  quce  in  the  fern,  singular  and  neut.  phiral. 

(a.)  Aliquis ,  in  the  nominative  singular  masculine,  is  used  both  as  a  sub¬ 
stantive  and  as  an  adjective; — aliqui ,  as  an  adjective,  but  is  nearly  obsolete. 
Aliquae,  in  the  fern.  sing,  occurs  as  an  adjective  in  Lucretius,  4,  2,  64.  Siqui , 
and  nequi,  which  are  properly  adjectives,  are  used  also  substantively  for  siquis 
and  nequis ,  and  in  the  nominative  singular  masculine  these  two  forms  are 
equivalent.  The  ablatives  aliqui  and  siqui  also  occur. 

(6.)  Aliquid,  siquid,  and  nequid,  like  quid,  are  used  substantively;  aliquod, 
etc.,  like  quod,  are  used  adjectively. 

3.  Quisque ,  quisquam ,  and  quispiam ,  are  declined  like  quis. 

(a.)  In  the  neuter  singular,  however,  quisque  has  quodque,  quidque ,  or  quicque  ; 
quisquam  has  quidquam  or  quicquam ;  and  quispiam  has  quodpiam,  quidpiam ,  or 
quippiam.  The  forms  quidque  or  quicque,  quidpiam  or  quippiam  are  used  sub¬ 
stantively. 

(6.)  Quisquam  wants  the  feminine  (except  quamquam,  Plaut.  Mil.  4,  2,  68), 
and  also  the  plural,  and,  with  a  few  exceptions  in  Plautus,  it  is  always  used 
substantively,  its  place  as  an  adjective  being  supplied  by  ullus.  Quispiam  is 
scarcely  used  in  the  plural,  except  in  the  nominative  feminine,  quaepiam. 

4.  Jjnusquisque  is  compounded  of  unus  and  quisque ,  which  are 
often  written  separately,  and  both  words  are  declined. 

Thus  unusquisque,  uniuscujusque,  unicuique ,  unumquemque,  etc.  The  neuter 
is  unumquodque,  or  unumquidque.  It  has  no  plural.  Unumquidquid  for  unurn- 
quidque  occurs  in  Plautus  and  Lucretius. 

5.  Quidam,  quilibet ,  and  quivis ,  are  declined  like  qui,  except  that 
they  have  both  quod  and  quid  in  the  neuter,  the  dormer  used  adjec¬ 
tively,  the  latter  substantively. 

Note.  Quidam  has  usually  n  before  d  in  the  accusative  singular  and  geni¬ 
tive  plural;  as,  quendam,  quorundam ,  etc.  Cf.  §  134,  Note  1. 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§139.  1.  The  possessive  are  derived  from  the  genitives  of 

the  substantive  pronouns,  and  of  quis ,  and  designate  something 
belonging  to  their  primitives. 

They  are  meus,  tuus,  suus ,  noster,  vester,  and  cujus.  Meus ,  tuus , 
and  suus ,  are  declined  like  bonus ;  but  meus  has  in  the  vocative  sin¬ 
gular  masculine  mi,  and  very  rarely  meus.  Cf.  §  105,  R.  3.  In  late 
writers  mi  occurs  also  in  the  feminine  and  neuter. 

2.  Cujus  also  is  declined  like  bonus ;  but  is  defective.  See  §  137, 5. 
It  occurs  only  in  early  Latin  and  in  legal  phraseology. 

3.  Noster  and  vester  are  declined  like  piger.  See  §  106. 

Remark  1.  The  terminations  pte  and  met  intensive  are  sometimes  annexed 
to  possessive  pronouns,  especially  to  the  ablative  singular;  as,  suopte  pondere, 
by  its  own  weight;  suapte  manu,  by  his  own  hand.  So  nostrapte  culpa;  su- 
umpte  amicum  ;  meamet  culpa.  The  suffix  met  is  usually  followed  by  ipse  ;  as, 
Hannibal  suamet  ipse  fraude  captus  abiit.  Liv. ;  but  Sallust  has  meamet  facta 
dicere. 

Rem.  2.  Suus,  like  its  primitive  sui,  has  always  a  reflexive  signification,  re¬ 
ferring  to  the  subject  of  the  sentence.  Meus,  tuus,  noster,  and  vester,  are  also 
used  reflexively,  when  the  subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or  second 
person.  See  $  132,  4. 

8* 


90  PATRIAL  PRONOUNS. — PRONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES.  §  139. 


P ATRIAL  PRONOUNS. 

4.  (a.)  These  are  nostras  and  cujas .  See  §§  100,  2,  and  128,  6. 
They  are  declined  like  adjectives  of  one  termination;  as,  nostras , 
nostratis,  but  both  are  defective. 

( b .)  Nostras  is  found  in  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular,  in 
the  nominative  plural,  (masc.  and  fern.,  nostrates ,  neut.  nostratia ), 
and  in  the  ablative,  (nostratibus ).  Cujas  or  quojas  occurs  in  the 
nominative,  genitive  and  accusative  (cujatem  masc.)  singular,  and  in 
the  nominative  plural,  masc.  (cujates').  Cf.  §  137,  6. — Nostratis  and 
cujatis  (or  quojatis)  also  occur  in  the  nominative. 

PRONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES. 

5.  To  the  adjective  pronouns  may  be  added  certain  adjectives 
of  so  general  a  meaning,  that  they  partake,  in  some  degree,  of 
the  character  of  pronouns.  Of  this  kind  are : — 

(1.)  (a.)  Alius ,  ullus ,  nullus ,  and  nonnullus ,  which  answer  to  the 
question,  who? 

(b.)  Alter,  neuter,  alteruter ,  utervis,  and  uterlibet,  which  answer  to 
the  question,  uter  ?  which  of  two  ? 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  quality,  size,  or  number,  in  a  general 
way.  These  stand  in  relation  to  one  another,  and  are  hence  called 

correlatives . 

Remark.  The  relatives  and  interrogatives  of  this  class  begin  with  qu ,  and 
are  alike  in  form.  The  indefinites  are  formed  from  the  relatives  by  prefixing 
ali.  The  demonstratives  begin  with  t,  and  are  sometimes  strengthened  by  dem. 
A  general  relative,  having  a  meaning  more  general  than  the  relative,  is  formed 
by  doubling  the  simple  relative,  or  by  affixing  to  it  the  termination  cumque. 
A  general  indefinite  is  formed  by  annexing  libet  or  vis  to  the  relative. 

(3.)  Their  mutual  relation  is  denoted  by  the  following  table,  with 
which  may  be  compared  the  adverbial  correlatives,  §  191,  K.  1. 

Interrog.  Demonstr .  Relat.  Relat.  general.  Indefin.  Inde/  general. 

qualis?  talis,  qualis,  { ^"aliscumque,  } -  qualislibet, 

quautus?  {  £“£ndem,  }  quantus,  j  ^“lusramque,8’  }  Quantus,  quantuslibet, 

quot?  tot,  totidem,  quot,  {quotcumque,  J  aliquot,  quotlibet, 

quotus?  totus,  quotus,  quotuscumque,  (aliquotus),  - . 

Diminutives. 

quantulus?  tantulus.  - .  quantuluscumque.  aliquantulum. -  ■ .. 

Note  1.  The  suffix  cumque,  which  is  used  in  forming  general  relatives,  is 
composed  of  the  relative  adverb  cum  (quum )  and  the  suffix  que,  expressive  of 
universality,  as  in  quisque  and  in  adverbs,  (see  §  191).  Cumque,  therefore,  ori¬ 
ginally  signified  1  whenever.’  When  attached  to  a  relative,  whether  a  pro¬ 
noun,  adjective,  or  adverb,  it  renders  the  relative  meaning  more  general;  as, 
qui,  who ;  quicumque ,  whoever ;  or,  every  one  who. 

Note  2.  Cujusmddi  is  sometimes  used  for  qualis,  and  hujusmddi ,  istiusmddi, 
ejusmddi,  and  ejusdemmddi  for  tails.  Cf.  §  134,  R.  6. 


§  140, 141. 


VERBS. — VOICES. 


91 


VERBS. 

§  140.  A  verb  is  a  word  by  which  something  is  affirmed 
of  a  person  or  thing. 

1.  That  of  which  any  thing  is  affirmed  is  called  the  subject  of  the 
verb.  (2.)  That  which  is  affirmed  of  the  subject  is  called  the  predi¬ 
cate .  Cf.  §  201. 

3.  A  verb  either  expresses  an  action  or  state ;  as,  puer  legit,  the 
boy  reads  ;  aqua  calet,-  the  water  is  warm ; — or  it  connects  an  attri¬ 
bute  with  a  subject;  as,  terra  est  rotunda ,  the  earth  is  round. 

4.  All  verbs  belong  to  the  former  of  these  classes,  except  sum ,  I  am,  the 
most  common  use  of  which  is,  to  connect  an  attribute  with  a  subject.  When 
so  used,  it  is  called  the  copula. 

§  141.  Verbs  are  either  active  or  neuter . 

Note.  Active  and  neuter  verbs  are  sometimes  called  transitive  and  intransi¬ 
tive  ;  and  verbs  of  motion  are  by  some  grammarians  divided  into  active-transi¬ 
tive  and  active-intransitive ,  according  as  they  require,  or  do  not  require,  an  ob¬ 
ject  after  them. 

I.  An  active  or  transitive  verb  expresses  such  an  action  as 
requires  the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete  the  sense ;  as, 
amo  te ,  I  love  thee  ;  sequitur  consulem ,  he  follows  the  consul. 

II.  A  neuter  or  intransitive  verb  expresses  such  an  action  or 
state,  as  does  not  require  the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete 
the  sense ;  as,  equus  currit ,  the  horse  runs  ;  gradior ,  I  walk. 

Remark  1.  Many  verbs,  in  Latin,  are  considered  as  neuter,  which  are 
usually  translated  into  English  by  active  verbs.  Thus  indulgeo ,  I  indulge, 
noceo,  I  hurt,  pareo ,  I  obey,  are  reckoned  among  neuter  verbs.  In  strictness, 
such  Latin  verbs  denote  rather  a  state  than  an  action,  and  their  sense  would 
be  more  exactly  expressed  by  the  verb  to  be  with  an  adjective;  as,  1 1  am  in¬ 
dulgent,  I  am  hurtful,’  etc.  Some  verbs  in  Latin,  which  do  not  usually  take 
an  object  after  them,  are  yet  active,  since  the  object  is  omitted  by  ellipsis. 
Thus  credo  properly  signifies  to  intrust ,  and,  in  this  sense,  takes  an  object;  as, 
credo  tibi  salutem  meam ,  I  intrust  my  safety  to  you ;  but  by  ellipsis  it  usually 
means  to  believe ;  as,  crede  mihi ,  believe  me. 

To  verbs  belong  voices ,  moods ,  tenses ,  numbers ,  and  persons . 

VOICES. 

(a.)  Voice,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  they  denote  the  re¬ 
lation  of  the  agent  to  the  action  of  the  verb. 

( b .)  Most  active  Latin  verbs  have,  for  this  purpose,  two  forms, 

which  are  called  the  active  and  passive  voices. 

* 

1.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  represents  the  agent  as  acting 
upon  some  person  or  thing,  called  the  object ;  as,  puer  legit  li¬ 
brum,  the  boy  is  reading  a  book. 


92 


VERBS. — MOODS. 


§  142,  143. 


2.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice  represents  the  object  as  acted 
upon  by  the  agent ;  as,  liber  legitur  a  puero,  a  book  is  read  by 
the  boy. 

Rem.  2.  By  comparing  the  two  preceding  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  they 
have  the  same  meaning.  The  passive  voice  may  thus  be  substituted  at  plea¬ 
sure  for  the  active,  by  making  the  object  of  the  active  the  subject  of  the  pas¬ 
sive,  and  placing  the  subject  of  the  active  in  the  ablative  case,  with  or  without 
the  preposition  a  or  ab ,  according  as  it  is  a  voluntary  or  involuntary  agent. 
The  active  form  is  used  to  direct  the  attention  especially  to  the  agent  as  act-, 
ing;  the  passive,  chiefly  to  exhibit  the  object  as  acted  upon.  In  the  one  case 
the  object,  in  the  other  the  agent,  is  frequently  omitted,  and  left  indefinite;  as, 
puer  legit,  the  boy  is  reading,  scii,  librum ,  literas,  etc.,  a  book,  a  letter,  etc. ; . 
virtus  laudatur ,  virtue  is  praised,  scii,  ab  hominibus ,  by  men. 

The  two  voices  are  distinguished  from  each  other  by  peculiar  terminations. 
Cf.  §  152. 

§  142.  1.  Neuter  verbs  have,  in  general,  only  the  form  of  the 

active  voice.  They  are,  however,  sometimes  used  impersonally  in 
the  passive  voice.  See  §  184,  2. 

2.  The  neuter  verbs  audeo ,  I  dare,  fido ,  I  trust,  gaudeo ,  I  rejoice,  and  soleo , 
I  am  wont,  have  the  passive  form  in  the  perfect  and  its  cognate  tenses ;  as, 
ausus  sum ,  I  dared.  Hence  these  verbs  are  called  neuter  passives ,  or  semi¬ 
deponents. 

3.  The  neuter  verbs  vapulo ,  I  am  beaten,  and  veneo ,  I  am  sold,  have  an  ac¬ 
tive  form,  but  a  passive  meaning,  and  are  hence  called  neutral  passives. 

4.  (a.)  Deponent  verbs  have  a  transitive  or  intransitive  significa¬ 
tion  with  only  the  passive  form.  They  are  called  deponent  verbs , 
from  depono ,  to  lay  aside,  as  having  laid  aside  their  active  form,  and 
their  passive  signification;  as,  sequor,  I  follow;  matior,  I  die. 

(5.)  Some  deponent  verbs  have  both  an  active  and  a  passive  signification, 
especially  in  the  perfect  participle.  These  are  sometimes  called  common  verbs. 
Cf.  $  162,  17. 


MOODS. 

§  148.  (a.)  Moods  (or  modes)  are  forms  of  the  verb,  which 
denote  the  relation  of  the  action  or  state,  expressed  by  the  verb, 
to  the  mind  of  the  speaker  or  to  some  other  action. 

( b .)  Latin  verbs  have  four  moods — the  indicative ,  the  subjunctive , 
the  imperative ,  and  the  infinitive. 

1.  The  indicative  mood  is  used  in  independent  and  absolute 
assertions  and  inquiries ;  as,  amo ,  I  love ;  audisne  ?  dost  thou 
hear? 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action  or  state 
simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind ;  as,  si  me  obsecret,  redibo  ;  if 
he  entreat  me,  I  will  return. 

3.  The  imperative  mood  is  used  in  commanding,  exhorting, 
or  entreating ;  as,  ama,  love  thou  ;  amanto,  they  shall  love. 


§  144,  145. 


VERBS. - TENSES. 


93 


4.  The  infinitive  mood  is  used  to  denote  an  action  or  state  in¬ 
definitely,  without  limiting  it  to  any  person  or  thing  as  its  sub¬ 
ject  ;  as,  virtus  est  vitium  fugere,  to  shun  vice  is  a  virtue. 

TENSES. 

§  144.  Tenses  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the  time  of 
the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb. 

1.  Time  admits  of  a  threefold  division,  into  present,  past,  and  future ;  and, 
in  each  of  these  times,  an  action  may  be  represented  either  as  going  on,  or  as 
completed.  From  these  two  divisions  arise  the  six  tenses  of  a  Latin  verb, 
each  of  which  is  distinguished  by  its  peculiar  terminations. 

2.  They  are  called  the  present ,  imperfect ,  future ,  perfect ,  pluper¬ 
fect,  and  future  perfect  tenses. 

Present  (  action  }  amo ,  I  love,  or  am  loving;  Present  tense. 

Past  <  not  com-  >  amabam ,  I  was  loving;  Imperfect  tense. 

Future  (  pleted;  )  amabo ,  I  shall  love,  or  be  loving;  Future  tense. 

Present  (  action  1  amavi,  I  have  loved ;  Perfect  tense. 

Past  <  com-  >  amaveram ,  I  had  loved ;  Pluperfect  tense. 

Future  (  pleted;  )  amavero,  I  shall  have  loved;  Future  perfect  tense. 

3.  There  is  the  same  number  of  tenses  in  the  passive  voice,  in 
which  actions  not  completed  are  represented  by  simple  forms  of  the 
verb,  and  those  which  are  completed  by  compound  forms. 

Present  C  action  amor ,  I  am  loved ;  Present  tense. 

Past  <  not  com-  >  amabar,  I  was  loved ;  Imperfect  tense. 

Future  (  pleted ;  )  amabor ,  I  shall  be  loved ;  Future  tense. 

Present  C  action  }  amdtus  sum ,  or  fui,  I  have  been  loved;  Perfect  tense. 

Past  <  com-  >  auatus  eram,  or  fueram ,  I  had  been  loved ;  Pluperfect. 
Future  (  pleted;  )  amdtus  ero,  or  fuero,  I  shall  have  been  loved ;  Future  Perfect. 

§  145.  I.  The  present  tense  represents  an  action  as  now 
going  on,  and  not  completed ;  as,  amo,  I  love,  or  am  loving. 

1.  Any  existing  custom,  or  general  truth,  may  be  expressed  by  this  tense ; 
as,  apud  Parthos ,  signum  datur  tympano ;  among  the  Parthians,  the  signal  is 
given  by  a  drum.  A  general  truth  is  sometimes  also  expressed  by  the  perfect. 

2.  The  present  tense  may  also  denote  an  action  which  has  existed  for  some 
time,  and  which  still  exists ;  as,  tot  annos  bella  gero ;  for  so  many  years  I  have 
waged,  and  am  still  waging  war. 

3.  The  present  tense  is  often  in  narration  used  for  the  perfect  indefinite.  It 
is  then  called  the  historical  present ;  as,  desiliunt  ex  equis,  provdlant  in  pi'imum ; 
they  dismout,  they  fly  forward  to  the  front. 

II.  The  imperfect  tense  represents  an  action  as  going  on  at 
some  past  time,  but  not  then  completed;  as,  amabam,  I  was 
loving. 

1.  The  imperfect  sometimes  denotes  repeated  or  customary  past  action;  as, 
legebam ,  I  was  wont  to  read. 

2.  It  may  also  denote  an  action  which  had  existed  for  some  time,  and  which 
was  still  existing  at  a  certain  past  time;  as,  audiebat  jamdudum  verba ;  he  had 
long  heard,  and  was  still  hearing  the  words. 


94 


VERBS. - TENSES. 


§145. 


3.  In  letters,  and  with  reference  not  to  the  time  of  their  being  written,  bnt 
to  that  of  their  being  read,  the  imperfect  is  sometimes  used  for  the  present 
as,  expectdbam ,  I  was  expecting,  (i.  e.  when  I  wrote). 

4.  The  imperfect  also  sometimes  denotes  the  intending ,  preparing ,  or  attempts 
ing  to  act  at  a  definite  past  time. 

III.  The  future  tense  denotes  that  an  action  will  be  going  on 
hereafter,  but  without  reference  to  its  completion ;  as,  amdbo, 
I  shall  love,  or  shall  be  loving. 

IV.  The  perfect  tense  represents  an  action  either  as  just  com¬ 
pleted,  or  as  completed  in  some  indefinite  past  time ;  as,  amavi, 
I  have  loved,  or  I  loved. 

Remark.  In  the  former  sense,  it  is  called  the  perfect  definite  ;  in 
the  latter,  the  perfect  indefinite ,  historical  perfect ,  or  aorist. 

V.  The  pluperfect  tense  represents  a  past  action  as  completed, 
at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  past  action  or  event ;  as,  lit¬ 
teras  scripseram,  quum  nuncius  venit ;  I  had  written  the  letter, 
when  the  messenger  arrived. 

VI.  The  future  perfect  tense  denotes  that  an  action  will  be 
completed,  at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  future  action  or 
event ;  as,  quum  ccenavero,  proficiscar  ;  when  I  shall  have  supped, 
I  will  go. 

Note  1.  This  tense  is  often,  but  improperly,  called  the  f  uture  subjunctive. 
It  has  the  signification  of  the  indicative  mood,  and  corresponds  to  the  second 
future  in  English. 

Note  2.  The  imperfect,  historical  perfect,  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  some¬ 
times  called  preterites  or  the  preterite  tenses. 

Note  3.  The  present,  imperfect,  and  future  tenses  passive,  in  English,  do 
not  express  the  exact  sense  of  those  tenses  in  Latin,  as  denoting  an  action 
which  is,  was,  or  will  be,  going  on  at  a  certain  time.  Thus  laudor  signifies,  not 
4 1  am  praised,’  but 4 1  am  in  the  act  of  being  praised,’  or,  if  such  an  expression 
is  admissible,  4 1  am  being  praised.’ 

Remark  1.  The  six  tenses  above  enumerated  are  found  only  in 
the  indicative  mood. 

Rem.  2.  The  subjunctive  mood,  in  the  regular  conjugation,  has 
the  present  and  past,  but  no  future  tenses. 

Note  4.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  have  less  definiteness  of  meaning,  in  re¬ 
gard  to  time,  than  those  of  the  indicative.  Thus  the  present  and  perfect,  besides  their 
common  signs,  may  or  can ,  may  have  or  can  have ,  must,  in  certain  connections,  be 
translated  by  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should ;  might  have,  could  have ,  etc.  The  tenses 
of  this  mood  must  often,  also,  be  translated  by  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indica¬ 
tive.  For  a  more  particular  account  of  the  signification  of  each  of  the  tenses  of  the  sub¬ 
junctive  mood,  see  §  260. 

Rem.  3.  The  imperative  mood  has  two  tenses — a  present  and  a 
future ;  the  former  for  that  which  is  to  be  done  at  once,  and  the  latter 
for  that  which  is  to  be  done  in  future. 

Rem.  4.  The  infinitive  mood  has  three  tenses — the  present,  the 
perfect,  and  the  future ;  the  first  of  which  denotes  an  incomplete,  the 
second  a  completed  action,  and  the  last  an  action  to  be  performed. 


§  146-148. 


VERBS. — NUMBERS — PERSONS. 


95 


NUMBERS. 

§  146«  Number,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  the  unity  or 
plurality  of  their  subject  is  denoted.  Hence  verbs,  like  nouns, 
have  two  numbers — the  singular  and  the  plural.  Cf.  §  35,  1. 


PERSONS. 


§147-  Person,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  they  denote 
the  person  of  their  subject.  Hence  in  each  number  there  are 
three  persons — the  first,  second,  and  third.  Cf.  §  35,  2. 


1.  The  imperative  present  has  only  the  second  person  in  both 
numbers.  The  imperative  future  has  in  each  number  the  second 
and  third  persons,  but  in  the  singular  they  have  both  the  same  form, 
-to  in  the  active,  and  -tor  in  the  passive  voice. 

2.  As  the  signification  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  not  limited  to  any 
subject,  it  admits  no  change  to  express  either  number  or  person. 

3.  The  following  are  the  terminations  of  the  different  persons  of 
each  number,  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods,  in  both 
voices : — 

Active.  Passive. 


Person. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Singular .  o,  i,  or  m, 

?’ 

t; 

Plural. 

mus, 

tis, 

nt. 

1.  2.  3. 

r,  ris,  tur; 
mur,  mini,  ntur. 


These  may  be  called  personal  terminations. 

Remark  1.  The  perfect  indicative  active  is  irregular  in  the  second  person 
singular  and  plural,  which  end  in  sti  and  stis ,  and  in  one  of  the  forms  of  the 
third  person  plural,  which  ends  in  re. 

Rem.  2.  The  passive  form  above  given  belongs  to  the  simple  tenses  only. 

Rem.  3.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons,  ego,  nos ;  tu  and  vos , 
are  seldom  expressed  in  Latin  as  subjects  of  a  finite  verb,  the  several  persons 
being  sufficiently  distinguished  by  the  terminations  of  the  verb. 


PARTICIPLES,  GERUNDS,  AND  SUPINES. 

§  148.  1.  A  participle  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb,  and 

partaking  of  its  meaning,  but  having  the  form  of  an  adjective. 

(1.)  Like  a  verb,  it  has  different  voices  and  tenses;  like  an  ad¬ 
jective,  it  has  declension *  and  gender ;  and  like  both,  it  has  two 
numbers. 

(2.)  Active  verbs  have  usually  four  participles— two  in  the  active 
voice,  a  present  and  a  future  ;  as,  amans,  loving ;  amaturus ,  about  to 
love ; — and  two  in  the  passive  voice,  a  perfect  and  a  future  ;  as,  ama¬ 
tus,  loved,  or  having  been  loved ;  amandus,  to  be  loved. 


*See§§  105,  R.  2:  and  111,  R. 


96  VERBS. - CONJUGATION.  §  149,  150. 

(3.)  Neuter  verbs  have  usually  only  the  participles  of  the  active 
voice. 

(4.)  Deponent  verbs,  both  active  and  neuter,  may  have  the  par¬ 
ticiples  of  both  voices. 

2.  (a.)  Gerunds  are  verbal  nouns,  used  only  in  the  oblique 
cases,  and  expressing  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb ;  as,  amandi , 
of  loving,  etc. 

( b .)  Like  other  abstract  nouns,  they  are  found  only  in  the  singular 
number,  and  by  their  cases  supply  the  place  of  a  declinable  present 
infinitive  active. 

3.  Supines  also  are  verbal  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension 
in  the  accusative  and  ablative  singular ;  as,  amatum,  to  love ; 
amdtu ,  to  be  loved. 

Remark.  These  also  serve  in  certain  connections  to  supply  the 
place  of  the  infinitive  present  both  active  and  passive.  The  supine 
in  um  is  called  the  former  supine  ;  that  in  u,  the  latter .  The  former 
is  commonly  used  in  an  active,  the  latter  in  a  passive  sense. 

CONJUGATION. 

§149.  1.  The  conjugation  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  for- 

'  mation  and  arrangement  of  its  several  parts,  according  to  their 
voices,  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and  persons. 

2.  There  are  four  conjugations,  which  are  characterized  by 
the  vowel  before  re  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive  active. 

In  the  first  conjugation,  it  is  d  long ; 


In  the  second, . e  long ; 

In  the  third, . e  short ; 

In  the  fourth, . I  long. 


Exception.  Do,  dare ,  to  give,  and  such  of  its  compounds  as  are  of  the  first 
conjugation,  have  a  short  before  re. 

§150.  A  verb,  like  a  noun,  consists  of  two  parts — the  root , 
and  the  termination.  Cf.  §  40,  R.  10. 

1.  The  first  or  general  root  of  a  verb  consists  of  those  letters  that 
are  found  in  every  part.  This  root  may  always  be  found  by  remov¬ 
ing  the  termination  of  the  present  infinitive. 

2.  There  are  also  two  special  roots,  the  first  of  which  is  found  in 
the  perfect,  and  is  called  the  second  root ;  the  other,  found  in  the  su¬ 
pine  or  perfect  participle,  is  called  the  third  root. 

3.  In  regular  verbs  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjuga¬ 
tions,  the  second  root  is  formed  by  adding,  respectively,  dv ,  u , 
and  iv,  to  the  general  root ;  and  the  third  root  by  a  similar  ad¬ 
dition  of  at,  it,  and  it. 

Remark.  Many  verbs,  in  each  of  the  conjugations,  form  their  second  and 
third  roots  irregularly. 


/ 


§  151,  152.  VERBS. — CONJUGATION.  97 

4.  In  the  third  conjugation,  the  second  root  either  is  the  same 
as  the  first,  or  is  formed  from  it  by  adding  s  ;  the  third  root  is 
formed  by  adding  t.  See  §  171. 

Note.  In  the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  e  and  i  before  o  are  considered 
as  belonging  not  to  the  root,  but  to  the  termination.  In  verbs  whose  second 
or  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  general  root  often  undergoes  some 
change  in  the  parts  derived  from  them. 

5.  The  vowel  which  unites  the  general  root  with  the  remaining 
letters  of  the  verb,  is  called  the  connecting  vowel.  Each  conjugation, 
except  the  third,  is,  in  a  great  degree,  distinguished  by  a  peculiar 
connecting  vowel,  which  is  the  same  as  characterizes  the  infinitives. 
See  §  149,  2. 

(a.)  In  the  third  conjugation,  the  connecting  vowel  is  generally  e  or  i.  In 
the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  in  verbs  in  io  of  the  third,  a  second 
connecting  vowel  is  sometimes  added  to  that  which  characterizes  the  conjuga¬ 
tion  ;  as,  a  in  doceant ,  u  in  capiunt ,  etc. 

( b .)  In  verbs  whose  second  and  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  con¬ 
necting  vowel  often  disappears,  or  is  changed  in  the  parts  derived  from  those 
roots ;  but  it  is  almost  always  found  in  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root. 

§  151.  1.  From  the  first  root  are  derived,  in  each  voice,  the 

present,  imperfect,  and*  future  indicative ;  the  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive ;  the  imperative,  and  the  present  infinitive.  From  this 
root  are  derived  also  the  present  participle,  the  gerund,  and  the  fu¬ 
ture  participle  passive. 

2.  From  the  second  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the  per¬ 
fect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  indicative ;  the  perfect  and  plu¬ 
perfect  subjunctive,  and  the  perfect  infinitive. 

3.  (a.)  From  the  third  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the 
supine  in  um ,  and  the  future  participle  ;  the  latter  of  which,  with  the 
verb  esse ,  constitutes  the  future  infinitive  active. 

( h .)  From  this  root  are  derived,  in  the  passive  voice,  the  supine  in 
if,  and  the  perfect  participle ;  from  the  latter  of  which,  with  the  verb 
sum ,  are  formed  all  the  tenses  which  in  the  active  are  derived  from 
the  second  root.  The  future  infinitive  passive  is  formed  from  the 
supine  in  wm,  and  m,  the  present  infinitive  passive  of  the  verb  eo, 
to  go. 

4.  The  present  and  perfect  indicative,  the  supine  in  um ,  and  the 
present  infinitive,  are  called  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb,  because 
from  the  first  three  the  several  roots  are  ascertained,  and  from  the 
last,  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  conjugation.  In  the  passive  voice, 
the  principal  parts  are  the  present  indicative  and  infinitive,  and  the 
perfect  participle. 

Note.  As  the  supine  in  um  is  wanting  in  most  verbs,  the  third  root  must 
often  be  determined  from  the  perfect  participle,  or  the  future  participle  active. 

§  152.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  connected  view  of  the 
verbal  terminations,  in  all  the  conjugations.  By  annexing  these  to 
the  several  roots,  all  the  parts  of  a  verb  may  be  formed. 

9 

> 


Terminations  added  to  the  First  Foot 


98 


VERBS. — TERMINATIONS. 


§  152, 


W 

o 

I— I 

o 

> 

w 

> 

HH 

tZ 5 
05 
< 
pH 


W 

o 

KH 

O 

> 

w 

> 


►3  «O 

◄  s 
W  S 
§  £ 
J  <» 

a  a, 


<N 


Q 

O 

O 

w 

l-H 

o 

>— I 

ft 

525 


«  . 
3  1 
g  I 

W  ft. 

GQ  ^ 


v  »i  2  >p 
2 

1  «1  ^ 


'S  '2  'B'B 

IP  a 

7  “-T  'T 


V  V  U 
>2  >2  ft 


ft 


»h 

.  >2  >2  >s  >s 

w  ,|  |  s  s 

*?  '?  'T  V 


J— <  S— <  I_,  T. 

.  >3  >2  >3  >2 

CO  +2  ±J  -M  -2 

ft  ft  >rH  Irjl 


>©  >©  >©  ,rtr 

Jh  v  u 
ft  10)  >©  ,JjJ 


CO  CO  CO  rn 

>g >c  ’£  *8 

1C*  ll>  >&>  »JjS 


5h  vs  tj 


e3  c3  o3_£ 

f  V  <V*v 


V  V  V  .2 
«3  ft  ft  5 

§  g  a  9 

ft  ft  ft  *2 
ft  ft  ft  t) 

C3  ©  ®.h 


183 


u  u  u 
ft  ft  >3 
-*->  -h; 
ic3  io3  ft 

.Q.DrQ'® 

<?<*><?•? 

jaTjaTjaT^ 

.3  .2  ,sg 

•s-s-sl 

I  I  I  I 


#-«  P-« 

§  §2! 

ft  ,0  ff  § 
*?  ?  ?*? 


C  fl 

.9111 

’f'f  f  .2 

V*  V* 

ft  ft  -  V 
£  £ft>§ 

§3  £  ,§ 

c3  a)  1© .2 

1  1  1  1 


V  V  •  »« 
ft  >3  u 

-•->  -*-3  H  >2 

ft  ft  I3J 
C3  ©  IO>  .2 


>0)  x» 

>0)  >a>  >aT  u 

ft  ,£5  V  |Aj 
c3  ©  ia>  '2 

I  I  I  I 


£  £  &  ©  ©  ©  £  £  ©  & 


to  CO  CO  iri 

SSISl 

ftft  ft  © 


>0  ro; 


rH  c4  CO  ^  ft  H  N  CO  ^ 


?  ?” 


ft  ft  ft  *2 
ft  1©  1®  J2 

I  I  I  I 


?  2  *  * 
2  >2 )=5  ft 

g  s  s  a 

"f  ■?  ’T  V 


-4_>  . 

§§§J 

co  to  to  >2 

■i-i-sl 

1  1  1  1 


CO  CO  to  .r-< 

ft  >3  >3  2 

I  .1  I  g 

1111 


CO  to 

C  V  co 
JO)  JO)  «Jr* 
o  <->  >rl  H 


v  v 

>o  >0  ^  ^ 
ft  ci  co  ^5 


C  C3  ,  • 
S3  F3  4i  fl 
rQ^2  C  § 

'f  ■?  ?  *r 


g  g  oT  >2 


>J3  -  to' 

a  s  >S  >3 

*"*  )fH  c  fa 

'§^11 


ft 

o 

o 

S 

w 

> 

l-H 

ft 

Q 

jz; 

ft 

ft 

cq 

ft 

C/5 


.  Jj  /  ^ 

1§1§ 

<U  ©  C3.h 

T  •  •  * 


>5  ‘g"|g 

1 1  £  I 

io»  ®  ic:  .2 


^  i*  ^  iS* 

ft  >3  u  ft 
)3C)3g 
£  i£  £  ft. 


2  ^  2  >3 

)3  +3  >S  +> 

-*->  iis  ^  icj 

.o  0  .2 


~*o>  ^,-r 

>a> 


V  ic3 


?3  tc3 


10  0>  io3  m 


CO  co 

co  ft  *  ft 

slsS 

ili* 


>1  >83  V  ft 
X»  ©>83  .ft 

I  I  I  I 


H  N  C3  ^ 


1111 


JT  ™ 

>H  ^  )ft  4-i 

-M  IC3  1^ 
I©  ©  183  i2 

I  I  I  I 


ft  2  ft 

ft  C  ft  2 

£  ft  £  ft 

I©  ©  183  ft 


H 

O 

< 


•  •  4^  i  •>  1  i 

<;  «0  1  1  1  1 

5  •  CO  CO  rtT'  »/v 

g  g  (M  ft  '©  ft 

o-  ^ 

w  ^  o  ©  <f  .2 

rH  c4  CO  tJ? 

muoijv6 

-nfiwQ 


ft  ft  "2 
>83  ft  ft  ,<r> 

ft  .©  ft. 2 

ft  ft  ft  g 
ft  ft  ft.T 


£  g  g  i 

83  c2  c3  _q 

ft  1©  ft  .5 

till 

rH  ©i  CO 


_Q  £1  -V  >rt> 
ft  ft  ft  '2 

1  1  1  1 


>fH  ^  aj 

^  IQ) 

ft  .©  ft -2 


0  0  cf£ 
,0,0  E  § 

ft  I®  83  .2 

rH  ei  CO  ^ 


H-5  >83  +J  yH 
>©  ©  >83  ?2 

I  I  I  I 


CO  ft  CO  >rH 

1©  ©  ft  12 

1  T  1  1 


§152. 


VERBS. - TERMINATIONS. 


99 


*-«  J-l  J-4 

>3  >3  >3  £ 

§  £  £  § 
ci  O  ®.H 
I  I  I  I 


In  m  in  ,_T* 

>2  >S  B 
SSS^ 
g  2  2  £ 

d  <D  OJ  .2 

I  I  I  I 


>d  >d  >§  ,jf 

a  a  af 
'2  '2  '2  •§ 
?  <?  ?•?? 


»■4  5-1 

ggg>3 

Id)  103  10)  S 

^  ^  ^  tj 

f  V  ?•? 


>a>  >o>  >a>  >0) 

S_,  «,  . 

103  103  103  |<3 

???•* 

CO  «3  CO  05 
>£  >£  ,2 
103  103  103  ,5 

c3  03  <3  M 


\  >o 


>2  HI* 

Id  Id)  X»  .SjJ 
rH  c4  CO  t£ 


d  d  a  d 

2  2  2  | 

Id  103  >03  id 

lilt 


103  103  103  jnj 
5— <  %-t  5— <  *  . 
d  03  03  .d 

till 


>d  >d  >d  >g 

a  a  a  | 

103  103  103  |S 

S— I  J-j  J— .  ; _ . 

d  ffl  oi.H 


4>  4>  ^ 

>2  >2  >2 

id  id)  >i)  iJjJ 


CO  M3  CO  •* 

'2  '2  *2  'g 

id  id) 


a  a  a  g" 

g  2  2  § 

id  id>  >a>  iSjl 
r4  CO  CO 


5-1  5-< 

>o  >o  >o 

+J  +J  43  'r, 

ass! 

i  iii 


(— I  1—4  ,  ''  ^ 

>2  £  ^Ir-T 

|  s  3  >| 
a  a 

d  03  03  .2 

till 


>©  >o  >o  >3 


5-i  5h  iT  •  ** 

>3  >o  >o  £ 

4-<  4-3 
105  Id)  >-4  1-4 


•dun^nj^ 


*rj  'C  'C 

.d  .d)  lrf% 


TH  (M  CO  ^  g 


^  «* 
H- 1  S 

PH> 


as  3  -a 


a  iii 

C3  0)  *rH 

l  i  T  T 


q  >2>2>2*f 

Q  Id  Id)  303  ,~| 

O  .  .  .  . 

g  HNCO^ 

g  'iudsddj 
r* 

H-l 

H 

M  - 

W 

S 

d  a  2  3 
*?  ?  ?•? 


*g  >03* )03 

12 12  io  i  o 

d  ® 


r-J  W 

2  a  ag  .2 
*  ?  ?■?  5 
....  | 
rH  CO  00  ^  g 


•TS  >X3  nd 


M  ®  S 

S3  fl  d  § 

d  d>  a>.2 


r  H  CO  CO  ^ 


BSoo 

Id 

iiss 


•dunjnj; 


12 12  >®  x» 

id  id)  ^ 


Id  103  >03  irt 

I  I  I  I 


rH  CO  CO  ^ 


^UdSdJLJ 


w  i 

25* 


’2’2’2’g 

id  id)  >d)  iJjJ 
H  CO  CO  ^ 


B  si 

Ph> 

53^ 


d 

f 

o 

o  . 

*d  5 
.So 


5. 

£.3 

£§ 

5 


© 

.V. 

s 

e 

8 

J 

<03 

•H 


*8 

<43 

e 

03 

a 

o 

*1 

.8 


£ 


CO 

C5  • 

•2  ^ 
43  O 

d  O 

b0  03 

r§ 

«  B 

£  H 

*3  • 
•s  o 

2  KH 

1  $ 

03  f> 

03 

6  w 

2  > 

d  i-H 

CO 


TS 

I 

T3 

§ 

§ 

tc 

03 

J 

d> 

a 

.o 


C3 

.a 


3-2  o 
•S  *  ® 

Irf  Id  }5!f 

.22  >03  ,§ 

2 .3  .s3 


«4— I  <4—1  CK 

Jb  S* 
o  o 


^  I- 


-«■H 

>03  >03  >03 

CO  GO  GO 

>d  >d 

a' . 

^.2  8 

s  lrT>d>  >03 

^cHcHcH 

d  a 

s  d  O 


co  co  to 

>d  >d  >d 


I  «J 

o 

O 


H 
O 
© 
Ph 

© 

iz? 
O 

03  w 
53  w 

d  cO 

^  I 

s  H 

^  O 

CO  ■  ■ 

03 
in 
S3 

d) 

5  H 

^  > 

<4-1  ^ 

o  ^ 

co  E”1 

§  O 


o 

s 

w 

> 

l—l 

H 

<1 

o 

)-H 

Q 

5^ 


| 

OiSIfe, 


>03 

S-i 

10) 

I 

■4J 

C 

2 


e  in 

s  J§ig.-s 

>0)  >03 


co  r* 

r>2>§ 


^|.S 

£  5-1  U 

>d  >d>  id) 


o 

> 


%, 

rS 

3 

I 

CQ 


^2  ^ 
©J  >03  >03 

I  I  I 


.22  '03 

5h  JO 

>0)  .23 

£<H 

o  S 


CO  CO 

*?’? 


§1 
*C  <o 

>03 .22 

<2  <2 
fefc 


d  ° 
d  W 
.S3  CO 
co  0) 
co  co 
*? 


Q 
O 
O 

> 

HH 

H 
O 

•*-  -M  •  S 

111  g 

•®  >®  >d)  p 

CO 


<»  rS 

Gift* 


^  CO 

53 
53  io3 

5| 


co  ,3 

%  a 

d  id» 


4J  >® 
>C  CO 
>§  .2 

i  i 


03 

W  S 

'i  a 

%  =? 

03 

co  .3 
co  t, 
03  ^ 

§  P=M 

‘ 


w 

^  5? 

H 

P5 

-< 

Ph 


®  . 
CO  r. 
M3  “ 

*T  W 

DPh 

<53 

03 

CO 


*5  © 

►— I  CO 

Ph  >3 

szi  a 

t-t  i 


53  '2  >2 
.2  >®  >® 

tJ  2 

>03  .2 

Si 

i  i  i 

1  1 

Ph 

a~ . 

2  2 

a'l 

•c  c/} 

a 

lf>d)>® 

>®  .2 

H 

/~\ 

W 

o 

Ph 

03 

'&>§< 

© 

s 

i?»; 

H 

100 


VERBS. — SUM. 


§153. 


Remark  1.  In  analyzing  a  verb,  the  voice,  person,  and  number,  are  ascer¬ 
tained  by  the  personal  terminations.  See  §  147,  3.  The  conjugation,  mood, 
and  tense,  are,  in  general,  determined  by  the  letter  or  letters  which  intervene 
between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  personal  terminations.  Thus  in  amaba¬ 
mus,  mus  denotes  that  the  verb  is  of  the  active  voice,  plural  number,  and  first 
person ;  ba  denotes  that  it  is  of  the  indicative  mood,  imperfect  tense ;  and  the 
connecting  vowel  a  determines  it  to  be  of  the  first  conjugation.  So  in  amarem¬ 
ini,  mini  denotes  the  passive  voice,  plural  number,  and  second  person ;  re,  the 
subjunctive  mood,  imperfect  tense ;  and  a,  as  before,  the  first  conjugation. 

Rem.  2.  Sometimes,  the  part  between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  personal 
termination,  does  not  precisely  determine  the  conjugation,  mood,  and  tense, 
but  only  within  certain  limits.  In  such  cases,  the  conjugation  may  be  learned, 
by  finding  the  present  tense  in  the  dictionary,  and  if  two  forms  are  alike  in  the 
same  conjugation,  they  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the  sense.  Thus  amemus 
and  docemus  have  the  same  termination ;  but,  as  amo  is  of  the  first,  and  doceo 
of  the  second  conjugation,  the  former  is  determined  to  be  the  subjunctive,  the 
latter  the  indicative,  present.  Regar  may  be  either  the  future  indicative,  or 
the  present  subjunctive — bibimus  either  tne  present  or  the  perfect  indicative. 

§  153.  Sum,  I  am,  is  called  an  auxiliary  verb,  because  it  is 
used,  in  conjunction  with  participles,  to  supply  the  want  of  simple 
forms  in  other  verbs.  From  its  denoting  existence,  it  is  sometimes 
called  the  substantive  verb. 

Remark.  Sum  is  very  irregular  in  those  parts  which,  in  other  verbs,  are  formed 
from  the  first  root.  Its  imperfect  and  future  tenses,  except  in  the  third  person 
plural  of  the  latter,  have  the  form  of  a  pluperfect  and  future  perfect.  It  is 
thus  conjugated: — 


PRINCIPAL 

PARTS. 

Pres.  Indie .  Pres.  Injin. 

Perf.  Indie.  Put.  Part . 

Sum,  es'-se, 

fu'-I,  fu'-tu'-rus. 

INDICATIVE 

;  MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

|  C  1.  sum,  I  am, 

su'-mus,  we  are, 

£  -j  2.  es,  thou  art,* 

es'-tis,  ye f  are, 

(3.  est,  he  is ; 

sunt,  they  are . 

Imperfect. 

1.  e'-ram,  I  was, 

g-ra'-mus,  we  were, 

2.  e'-ras,  thou  wast, 

e-ra'-tis,  ye  were, 

3.  e'-rat,  he  was; 

e'-rant,  they  were. 

Future,  shall,  or  will. 

1.  e'-ro,  I  shall  be, 

er'-i-mus,  we  shall  be, 

2.  e'-ris,  thou  wilt  be, 

er'-i-tis,  ye  will  be. 

3.  e'-rlt,  he  will  be  ; 

e'-runt,  they  will  be. 

*  In  the  second  person  singular  in  English,  the  plural  form  you  is  commonly  used, 
except  in  solemn  discourse ;  as,  tu  es ,  you  are. 

t  The  plural  pronoun  of  the  second  person  is  either  ye  or  you. 


§m 


VERBS. — SUM. 


101 


Perfect,  have  been,  or  was. 


1.  fu'-I,  I  have  been , 

2.  fu-is'-ti,  thou  hast  been , 

3.  fu'-it,  he  has  been; 


1.  fu'-e-ram,  I  had  been, 

2.  fu'-e-ras,  thou  hadst  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rat,  he  had  been  ; 

Future  Perfect. 

1.  fu'-e-ro,  I  shall  have  been, 

2.  fu'-e-rls,  thou  wilt  have  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rit,  he  will  have  been  ; 


fu'-i-mus,  we  have  been , 
fu-is'-tis,  ye  have  been, 
fu-e'-runt  or  re,  they  have  been. 

Pluperfect. 

fu-e-ra'-mus,  we  had  been, 
fu-e-ra'-tis,  ye  had  been, 
fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been. 

shall  or  will  have. 

fu-er'-l-mus,  we  shall  have  been, 
fu-er'-l-tis,  ye  will  have  been, 
fu'-e-rint,  they  will  have  been. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present,  may,  or  can. 

1.  sim,  I  may  be,  si'-mus,  we  may  be, 

2.  sis,  thou  mayst  be,  si'-tis,  ye  may  be, 

3.  sit,  he  may  be  ;  sint,  they  may  be. 

Imperfect,  might,  could,  would,  or  should. 

1.  es'-sem,  I  would  be,  es-se'-mus,  we  would  be, 

2.  es'-ses,  thou  wouldst  be,  es-se'-tis,  ye  would  be, 

3.  es'-set,  he  would  be  ;  es'-sent,  they  would  be. 

Perfect. 

1.  fu'-e-rim,  I  may  have  been,  fu-er-i-mus,  we  may  have  been, 

2.  fu'-e-rls,  thou  mayst  have  been,  fu-er'-I-tis,  ye  may  have  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rit,  he  may  have  been  ;  fu'-e-rint,  they  may  have  been. 

Pluperfect,  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

1.  fu-is'-sem,  I  would  have  been,  fu-is-se'-mus,  we  would  have  been , 

2.  fu-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  been,  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  been, 

3.  fu-is'-set,  he  would  have  been ;  fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  been. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres .  1.  es,  be  thou,  es'-te,  be  ye. 

Fut.  2.  es'-to,  thou  shalt  be,  es-to'-te,  ye  shall  be, 

3.  es'-to,  let  him  be  ;  sun'-t5,  let  them  be. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present,  es'-se,  to  be. 

Perfect,  fu-is'-se,  to  have  been. 

Future,  fu-tu'-rus  (a,  um),  es'-se,  or  fo'-re,  to  be  about  to  be. 
9* 


102 


VERBS. - POSSUM. 


§154 


PARTICIPLE. 

Future,  fu-tu'-rus,  a,  urn,  about  to  be. 

§  154.  Remark  1.  A  present  participle  ens  seems  to  have  been  an¬ 
ciently  in  use,  and  is  still  found  in  the  compounds  absens ,  prcesens ,  and  pdtens. 

Rem.  2.  The  perfect  fui ,  and  its  derivative  tenses,  are  formed  from  an  obso¬ 
lete  fuo,  whence  come  also  the  participle  futurus ,  an  old  subjunctive  present 

fuam ,  fuas,  fuat ;  - ,  — — ,  fuant ,  and  the  forms  fuvimus ,  perf.  ind.,  fuve- 

rint ,  perf.  subj.,  and  fuvisset,  plup.  subj. 

Rem.  3.  From  fuo  appear  also  to  be  derived  the  following : — 

Subj.  imperf.  fo7-rem,  fo'-res,  fo'-ret;  - ,  - ,  fo'-rent. 

Inf.  pres .  fo7-re.  % 

These  forms  seem  to  have  been  contracted  from  fuerem,  etc.,  and  fuere. 
Fdrem  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to  essem ,  but  the  infinitive  fdre  has,  in  most 
cases,  acquired  a  future  signification,  equivalent  to  futurus  esse. 

Rem.  4.  Siem ,  sies ,  siet ,  sient,  for  sm,  sis ,  sit ,  sint,  are  found  in  ancient 
writers,  as  are  also  escit  for  erit ,  escunt  for  erunt,  ese ,  esetis,  and  esent,  for  esse, 
essetis ,  and  essent. 

Rem.  5.  Like  sum  are  conjugated  its  compounds,  absum ,  adsum , 
desum ,  insum ,  intersum ,  obsum ,  prcesum ,  subsum ,  and  supersum. 

Rem.  6.  Prosum,  from  the  old  form  joroc?  for  />rd,  and  sum,  has  c? 
after  jsro,  when  the  simple  verb  begins  with  e  ;  as, 

/wd.  j^res.  pro'-sum,  prod'-es,  prod7-est,  etc. 

-  imperf.  prod7- e-ram,  prod7-e-ras,  etc. 

Rem.  7.  (a.)  Possum  is  compounded  of  able,  and 

They  are  sometimes  written  separately,  and  then  jsoHs  is  the  same  in 
all  genders  and  numbers. 

(b.)  In  composition,  is  is  omitted  in  pdtis ,  and  t ,  as  in  other  cases,  coming  be¬ 
fore  s,  is  changed  into  s.  In  the  infinitive,  and  imperfect  subjunctive,  es  of  the 
simple  verb  is  dropped,  as  is  also  f  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  root.  In 
every  other  respect  possum  is  conjugated  like  sum ,  wherever  it  is  found;  but 
the  imperative,  and  the  parts  derived  from  the  third  root,  are  wanting. 

Pres.  Indie.  Pres.  Infin.  Perf.  Indie. 

Pos7-sum,  pos7-se,  pot7-u-I,  I  can,  or  /  am  able. 

indicative.  subjunctive. 

Present. 

pos'-sum,  po7-tes,  po7-test;  pos'-sim,  pos7-sis,  pos7-sIt; 

pos7-su-mus,  po-tes7-tIs,  pos7-sunt.  pos-si7-mus,  pos-sl'-tis,  pos7-sint. 

Imperfect. 

p6t7-8-ram,  pot'-e-ras,  pot7-S-rat ;  pos'-sem,  pos'-ses,  pos7-set; 

p6t-6-ra7-mus,  -e-ra7-tls,  -e-rant.  pos-se7-mus,  -se7-tis,  pos7-sent. 

Future. 

pot7-e-ro,  pot7-e-ris,  pot'-e-rit; 
po-ter'-i-mus,  po-ter'-I-tls,  pot7-e-runt. 

Perfect. 

pot7-u-I,  pot-u-is'tl,  pot7-u-Tt;  po-tu'-e-rim,  -e-rfs,  -g-rit ; 

pd-tu7-I-mus,  -is7-tls,  -e7-runt  or  -e7r&.  pot-u-er'-i-mds,  -I-tls,  -€-rint 


§155. 


VERBS. - FIRST  CONJUGATION,  ACTIVE. 


103 


Pluperfect . 

pS-tu'-S-ram,  -g-ras,  -e-rat;  pot-u-is'-sem,  -is'-ses,  -is'-sgt; 

pot-u-e-ra'-mus,  -e-ra'-tls,  -e-rant.  pot-u-is-se'-mus,  -is-se'-tls,  -is'-sent. 

Future  Perfect . 

po-tu'-e-ro,  po-tu'-e-rfs,  po-tu'-e-rlt ; 
pot-u-eP-I-mus,  pot-u-er'-i-tis,  po-tu'-g-rint. 

(No  Imperative.) 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPIAL  ADJECTIVE. 

Pres,  pos'-se.  Perf.  pot-u-is'-sg.  po'-tens,  able. 

Note.  The  following  forms  are  also  found ;  potissum  for  possum ,  potessunt  for 
possunt,  potessim  and  possiem  for  possim,  possies,  possiet  and  potessit  for  possis 
and  possit,  potessem  for  possem,  potesse  for  posse,  and  before  a  passive  infinitive 
the  passive  forms  potesiur  for  potest,  poteratur  for  poterat ,  and  possetur  for 
posset. — Potis  and  pote  without  est  are  sometimes  used  for  potest . 

•  §  155.  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE  VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

Pres .  Ind .  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind.  Supine . 

A'-rno,  a-ma'-re,  a-ma'-vl,  a-ma'-tum. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 

Sing .  a -mo, 
a-mas, 
a'-mat, 

Plur.  a-ma-mus, 
a-ma'-tis, 
a-mant, 


love,  do  love ,  am  loving . 
I  love , 
thou  lovest , 
he  loves  ; 
we  love , 
ye  love , 
they  love. 


Imperfect,  was  loving ,  loved,  did  love . 


Sing,  a-ma'-bam, 
a-ma'-bas, 
a-ma'-bat, 

Plur.  am-a-ba -mus, 
am-a-ba'-tis, 
a-ma'-bant, 


I  was  loving , 
thou  wast  loving , 
he  was  loving  ; 
we  were  loving , 
ye  were  loving , 
they  were  loving. 


Future,  shall ,  or  will. 


Sing,  a-ma'-bo, 
a-ma'-bis, 
a-ma'-bit, 

Plur.  a-mab'-i-mus, 
a-mab'-i-tis, 
a-ma'-bunt, 


I  shall  love, 
thou  wilt  love, 
he  will  love  ; 
we  shall  love, 
ye  will  love, 
they  will  love. 


104 


§155, 


VERBS. - FIRST  CONJUGATION,  ACTIVE. 


Perfect,  loved ,  or  have  loved . 


Sing,  a-ma'-vl, 

am-a-vis'-ti, 

a-ma'-vit, 

Plur .  a-mav'-i-mus, 
am-a-vis'-tis, 
am-a-ve'-runt  or  -re, 


/  have  lovedy 
thou  hast  loved , 
he  has  loved; 
we  have  lovedy 
ye  have  loved , 
they  have  loved . 


Pluperfect. 
iSimjr.  a-mav'-e-ram, 
a-mav'-e-ras, 
a-mav'-e-rat, 

Plur .  a-mav-e-ra'-mus, 
a-mav-e-ra'-tis, 
a-may '-e-rant, 


had. 

I  had  loved, 
thou  hadst  loved , 
he  had  loved  ; 
we  had  lovedy 
ye  had  lovedy 
they  had  loved. 


Future  Perfect,  shall ,  or  will  have. 


Sing,  a-mav'-e-ro, 
a-mav'-e-ris, 
a-mav'-e-rit, 
Plur.  am-a-yer'-l-mus, 
am-a-yer'-i-tis, 
a-mav'-e-rint, 


I  shall  have  lovedy 
thou  wilt  have  lovedy 
he  will  have  loved ; 
we  shall  have  lovedy 
ye  will  have  lovedy 
they  will  have  loved. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD, 


Present. 

Sing,  a'-mem, 
a'-mes, 
a'-met, 

Plur.  a-me'-mus, 
a-me'-tis, 
a'-ment, 


mayy  or  can. 

I  may  love , 
thou  mayst  lovey 
he  may  love  ; 
we  may  love , 
ye  may  love , 
they  may  love. 


Imperfect,  mighty  could ,  would ,  or  should. 


Sing,  a-ma'-rem, 
a-ma'-res, 
a-ma'-ret, 

Plur.  am-a-re'-mus, 
am-a-re'-tis, 
a-ma'-rent, 


I  would  love , 
thou  wouldst  lovey 
he  would  love  ; 
we  would  love, 
ye  would  love , 
they  would  love. 


mayy  or  can  have. 


Perfect. 
Sing,  a-mav'-e-rim, 
a-mav'-e-rls, 
a-mav'-e-rxt, 
Plur.  am-a-ver'-l-mus, 
am-a-ver'-l-txs, 
a-mav'-e-rint, 


I  may  have  loved , 
thou  mayst  have  lovedy 
he  may  have  loved; 
we  may  have  lovedy 
ye  may  have  lovedy 
they  may  have  loved. 


§156 


VERBS. - FIRST  CONJUGATION,  PASSIVE. 

Pluperfect,  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should  have. 


Sing,  am-a-vis'-sem, 
am-a-vis'-ses, 
am-a-vis'-set, 
Plur .  am-a-vis-se'-mus, 
am-a-vis-se'-tls, 
am-a-vis'-sent, 


I  would  have  loved, 
thou  wouldst  have  loved, 
he  would  have  loved; 
we  would  have  loved , 
ye  would  have  loved , 
they  would  have  loved. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  Sing,  a'-ma, 
Plur.  a-ma'-te, 
Put.  Sing,  a-ma'-to, 
a-ma'-to, 

Plur.  am-a-to'-te, 
a-man'-to, 


love  thou  ; 
love  ye. 

thou  shalt  love , 
he  shall  love; 
ye  shall  love , 
they  shall  love. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Present,  a-ma'-re, 

Perfect,  am-a-vis'-se, 

Future,  am-a-tu'-rus,  (a,  um,)  es'-se, 


to  love, 
to  have  loved, 
to  he  about  to  love. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present,  a'-mans, 

Future,  am-a-tu'-rus,  um, 


loving. 

about  to  love. 


GERUND. 


G.  S-man'-dl, 
D.  a-man'-do, 
Ac.  a-man'-dum, 
Ab.  a-man'-do, 


of  loving, 
for  loving , 
loving , 
by  loving. 


SUPINE. 

Former.  &-ma'-tum,  to  love. 


§156.  PASSIVE  VOICE. 
PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

Pres.  Indie.  Pres.  Infin.  Perf.  Part . 
A'-mor,  ft-ma'-rl,  a-ma'-tus. 


105 


§  156, 


106  VERBS. — FIRST  CONJUGATION,  PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present,  am . 


Sing .  a'-mor, 

I  am  loved , 

a-ma'-ris  or  -re, 

thou  art  loved , 

a-ma'-tur, 

he  is  loved  ; 

Plur.  a-ma'-mur, 

we  are  loved , 

a-mam'-i-nl, 

ye  are  loved , 

a-man'-tur, 

they  are  loved. 

Imperfect,  was. 

Sing,  a-ma'-bar, 

I  was  loved , 

am-a-ba'-rfs  or  -re, 

thou  wast  loved , 

am-a-ba'-tur, 

he  was  loved; 

Plur.  am-a-ba'-mur, 

we  were  loved , 

am-a-bam'-i-nl, 

ye  were  loved , 

am-a-ban'-tur, 

they  were  loved. 

Future,  shall ,  or 

will  be. 

Sing,  a-ma'-bor, 

I  shall  be  loved , 

a-mab'-e-ris  or  -re, 

thou  wilt  be  loved , 

a-mab'-I-tur, 

he  will  be  loved; 

Plur.  a-mab'-i-mur, 

we  shall  be  loved , 

am-a-bim'-i-ni, 

ye  will  be  loved , 

am-a-bun'-tur, 

they  will  be  loved. 

Perfect,  have  been, 

or  was. 

Sing,  a-ma'-tus  sum  or  fu'-I, 

I  have  been  loved , 

a-ma'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 

thou  hast  been  loved \ 

a-ma'-tus  est  or  fu'-it, 

he  has  been  loved; 

Plur.  a-ma'-tl  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 

we  have  been  lovedy 

a-ma'-tl  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 

ye  have  been  loved , 

a-ma'-tl  sunt,  fu'e'-runt  or  -re, 

they  have  been  loved. 

Pluperfect,  had  been. 

Sing,  a-ma'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 

I  had  been  loved , 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 

thou  hadst  been  lovedy 

S-ma'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat, 

he  had  been  loved; 

Plur .  a-ma-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus,  we  had  been  loved. 

a-ma'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 

ye  had  been  lovedy 

a-ma'-tl  e'-rant  or  fu '-e-rant, 

they  had  been  loved. 

Future  Perfect,  shall  have  been. 

Sing,  a-ma'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 

I  shall  have  been  lovedy 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-rls, 

thou  wilt  have  been  lovedy 

a-ma'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit, 

he  will  have  been  loved; 

Plur.  S-ma'-tl  er-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus. 

,  we  shall  have  been  lovedy 

a-ma'-tl  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 

ye  will  have  been  loved , 

S-ma'-ta  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint, 

they  will  have  been  loved. 

§156, 


VERBS. — FIRST  CONJUGATION,  PASSIVE, 
SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


107 


Present,  may ,  or  can  be. 


Sing .  a'-mer, 

a-me'-ris  or  -re, 
a-me'-tur, 

Plur.  a-me-mur, 
a-mem'-i-nl, 
a-men'-tur, 


I  may  be  loved , 
thou  mayst  be  loved , 
he  may  be  loved ; 
we  may  be  loved , 
ye  may  be  loved , 
they  may  be  loved . 


Imperfect,  might ,  could. 

Sing,  a-ma'-rer, 

am-a-re'-ns  or  -re, 
am-a-re'-tiir, 

Plur.  am-a-re'-mur, 
am-a-rem'-i-nl, 
am-a-ren'-tur, 


would ,  or  should  be. 

I  would  be  loved , 
thou  wouldst  be  loved, 
he  would  be  loved ; 
we  would  be  loved , 
ye  would  be  loved , 
they  would  be  loved. 


Perfect,  may  have  been. 


Sing,  a-ma'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
a-ma'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 
a-ma'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit, 

Plur.  a-ma'-tl  sl'-mus  or  fu-er'-l-mus, 
a-ma'-tl  sl'-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 
a-ma'-tl  sint  or  fu'-e-rint, 


I  may  have  been  loved , 
thou  mayst  have  been  loved, 
he  may  have  been  loved; 
we  may  have  been  loved, 
ye  may  have  been  loved , 
they  may  have  been  loved. 


Pluperfect,  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should  have  been. 

Sing,  a-ma'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,  I  would  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set,  he  would  have  been  loved  ; 

Plur.  a-ma'-tl  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus,  we  would  have  been  loved, 
a-ma'-tl  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  been  loved, 
a-ma'-tl  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  been  loved. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  Sing,  a-ma'-re, 

Plur.  a-mam'-i-nl, 
Fut.  Sing,  a-ma'-tor, 
a-ma'-tor, 

Plur.  (am-a-blm-i-nl, 
a-man'-tor, 


be  thou  loved; 
be  ye  loved, 
thou  shalt  be  loved, 
he  shall  be  loved; 
ye  shall  be  loved), 
they  shall  be  loved. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Present,  a-ma'-ri,  to  be  loved. 

Perfect,  a-ma'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se,  to  have  been  loved. 
Future,  a-ma -turn  I'-rl,  to  be  about  to  be  loved. 


108 


VERBS. - SECOND  CONJUGATION, 


§157, 


PARTICIPLES. 

Perfect .  a-ma'-tus,  loved,  or  having  been  loved. 

Future,  a-man'-dus,  to  be  loved. 


SUPINE. 

Latter,  a-ma'-tu,  to  be  loved. 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  am,  are  de¬ 
rived 

Active.  Passive. 
Ind.  pres.  amo,  amor. 

-  imperf.  amabam,  amabar. 

-  fut.  amabo,  amabor. 

Subj.  pres.  amem,  amer. 

- imperf.  am  arem,  amdrer. 

Imperat,  pres,  am  a,  a mare. 

- fut.  am ato,  am ator. 

Inf.  pres.  am  are,  am  dri. 

Part.  pres,  amcms, 

-  fut.  amandus. 

Gerund.  amandi. 


From  the  second  root,  From  the  third  root, 
amav,  are  derived  amat,  are  derived 
Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.  amavi,  amatus  sum,  etc. 

-  plup.  ama  veram,  amatus  eram,  etc. 

-  fut.  perf.  amavero,  amatus  ero,  etc. 

Subj.  perf.  amaverim,  amatus  sim,  etc. 

-  plup.  amavissem,  amatus  essem,  etc. 

Inf.  perf.  amavisse,  amatus  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root, 

Inf.  fut.  amat  urns  esse,  amat  urn  iri. 

Part.  fut.  amaturus. 

-  pzrf.  amat  us. 

Form.  sup.  amatum.  Lot.  sup.  amatu. 


§  157.  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE  VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 
PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pres.  Inf. 
Perf.  Ind. 
Supine. 


mo-ne-o. 

mo-ne'-re. 

mon'-u-I. 

mon'-i-tum. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pres.  Inf. 
Perf.  Part. 


mo'-ne-or. 

mo-ne'-ri. 

mon'-i-tus. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


I  advise. 

Sing,  mo-ne-o, 
mo'-nes, 
mo'-net ; 

Plur.  mo-ne-mus, 
mo-ne'-tis, 
mo'-nent. 


Present. 

I  am  advised . 

Sing,  mo'-ne-or, 

mo-ne'-ris  or  -re, 
mo-ne'-tur ; 

Plur.  mo-ne-mur, 
mo-nem'-i-ni, 
mo-nen'-tur. 


I  was  advising. 

S.  mo-ne'-bam, 
mo-ne'-bas, 
mo-ne'-bat ; 

P.  m5n-e-ba -mus, 
mon-e-ba-tis, 
m5-ne'-bant. 


Imperfect. 

/  was  advised. 

S.  mo-ne'-bar, 

mon-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
mon-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  mon-e-ba'-mur, 
mon-e-bam'-i-nl, 
mon-e-ban'-tur. 


§157, 


VERBS. — SECOND  CONJUGATION, 


109 


ACTIVE. 

I  shall  or  will  advise . 

S.  mo-ne'-bo, 
mo-ne'-bis, 
mo-ne'-blt ; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mus, 
mo-neb'-i-tis, 
mo-ne'-bunt. 


PASSIVE. 

Future. 

I  shall  or  will  he  advised . 

S.  mo-ne'-bor, 

mo-neb'-e-ris  or  -re, 
mo-neb'-i-tur ; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mur, 
mon-e-bim'-i-ni, 
mon-e-bun'-tur. 


I  advised  or  have  advised . 

S.  mon'-u-i, 
mon-u-is'-tl, 
mon'-u-it ; 

P.  mo-nu'-i-mus, 
mon-u-is'-tis, 
mtn-u-e'-runt  or  -re. 


Perfect. 

I  was  or  have  been  advised . 

S.  mon'-l-tiis  sum  or  fu'-I, 
mon'-i-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
mon'-i-tus  est  or  fu'-it ; 

P.  mon'-i-tl  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
mon'-i-tl  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 


I  had  advised . 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ram, 
mo-nu'-e-ras, 
mo-nu'-e-rat ; 

P.  mon-u-e-ra'-miis, 
mon-u-e-ra'-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rant. 


Pluperfect 

I  had  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 

P.  mon'i-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


I  shall  have  advised . 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ro, 
mo-nu'-e-rls, 
mo-nu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon-u-er'-I-mus, 
mon-u-er'-l-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-rls, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-l-mus, 
m5n'-i-tl  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 


I  may  or  can  advise . 

S.  mo'-ne-am, 
mo'-ne-as, 
mo'-ne-at ; 

P.  mo-ne-a'-mus, 
mo-ne-a'-tis, 
mo'-ne-ant. 

10 


I  may  or  can  be  advised . 

S.  mo'-ne-ar, 

mo-ne-a'-ris  or  -re, 
mo-ne-a'-tur ; 

P.  mo-ne-a'-murj 
mo-ne-am'-i-ni, 
mo-ne-an'-tur. 


110 


VERBS. — SECOND  CONJUGATION, 


§157, 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or 
advise . 

&  mo-ne'-rem, 
mo-ne'-res, 
mo-ne'-ret ; 

P.  mon-e-re'-mus, 
mon-e-re'-tis, 
mo-ne'-rent. 


Imperfect. 


should 


I  mighty  could ,  would ,  or  should 
he  advised . 


&  mo-ne'-rer, 

mon-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 
mon-e-re'-tur ; 

P.  mon-e-re'-mur, 
mon-e-rem'-i-ni, 
mon-e-ren'-tur. 


J  may  have  advised, 
S.  mo-nu'-e-rim, 
mo-nu'-e-rls, 
mo-nu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon-u-er'-I-mus, 
mon-u-er'-l-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


/  mighty  could ,  would ,  or 
should  have  advised, 

S.  mon-u-is'-sem, 
mon-u-is'-ses, 
mon-u-is'-set ; 

P.  mon-u-is-se'-mus, 
mon-u-is-se'-tis, 
mon-u-is'-sent. 


Perfect. 

/  may  have  been  advised, 

S.  mon'-i-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
mon'-i-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-rls, 
mon'-i-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tls* 
mon'-i-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 

I  mighty  couldy  wouldy  or  should  have 
been  advised, 

S,  mon'-i-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
mon'-i-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
mon'-i-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  S.  mo'-ne,  advise  thou; 

P.  mo-ne'-te,  advise  ye. 

Fut.  S.  mo-ne'-t5,  thou  shalt  ad¬ 
vise y 

mo-ne'-to,  he  shall  advise; 

P.  mon-e-to'-te,  ye  shall  ad¬ 
vise y 

mo-nen'-to,  they  shall  ad¬ 
vise. 


Pres,  mo-ne'-re,  to  advise. 

Perf.  mon-u-is'-se,  to  have  advised. 
Fut.  mon-i-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be 
about  to  advise. 


Pres.  S.  mo-ne'-re,  be  thou  advised; 
P.  mo-nem'-i-ni,  be  ye  ad¬ 
vised. 

Fut.  S.  mo-ne'-tor,  thou  shalt  be 
advised , 

mo-ne'-tor,  he  shall  be 

advised ; 

P.  (mon-e-bim'-i-m,  ye  shall 

be  advised,) 

mo-nen'-tor,  they  shall  be 
advised. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres,  mo-ne'-ri,  to  be  advised. 
Perf.  mon'-i-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se, 
to  have  been  advised. 

Fut.  mon'-i-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about 
to  be  advised. 


§158, 


VERBS. — THIRD  CONJUGATION, 


111 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres,  mo'-nens,  advising.  j  Perf.  mon'-i-tus,  advised. 

Fut.  mon-i-tu'-rus,  about  to  advise.  |  Fut .  mo-nen'-dus,  to  be  advised. 

GERUND. 

G.  mo-nen'-dl,  of  advising , 

D.  mo-nen'-do,  etc. 

Ac.  mo-nen'-dum, 

Ab.  mo-nen'-do. 


SUPINES. 

Former.  mon'-Utum,  to  advise.  |  Latter,  mon'-i-tu,  to  be  advised . 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  mow,  are  de¬ 
rived, 


Active .  Passive. 
Ind.  pres.  moneo,  moneor. 

-  imperf.  monebam, monebar. 

-  fut.  monebo ,  monebor. 

Subj.  pres.  moneam ,  monear. 

-  imperf.  monerem,  monerer. 

Imperat,  pres.  mone,  monere. 

- fut.  moneto,  monetor. 

Inf.  pres.  monere,  moneri. 
Part.  pres.  monews, 

-  fut.  monendus. 

Gerund.  monendi. 


From  the  second  root,  From  the  third  root, 
monu,  are  derived,  monit ,  are  derived, 

Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.  monui,  monltws  sum,  etc. 

-  plup.  monueram,  monltws  eram,  etc. 

- fut.  perf .  monuero,  monltws  ero,  etc. 

Subj.  perf.  monuerim,  monltws  sim,  etc. 

-  plup.  monu  issem,  monltws  essem, etc. 

Inf.  perf.  monuisse,  monltws  esse,  etc. 
From  the  third  root, 

Inf.  fut.  moniturws  esse,  monitwm  iri. 
Part.  fut.  monitwrws, 

-  Perf  monltws. 

Foi'm.  Sup.  monitwm.  Lat.  Sup.  monitw. 


§  158.  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  re'-go. 
Pres.  Inf.  reg'-e-r6. 
Perf.  Ind .  rex'-I. 
Supine.  rec'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  re'-gor. 
Pres.  Inf.  re'-gi. 
Perf.  Part,  rec'-tus. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


I  rule. 

Sing,  re'-go, 
re'-gls, 
re -git ; 

Plur.  reg'-i-mus, 
reg'-i-tis, 
re'-gunt. 


Present. 

I  am  ruled. 

Sing,  re'-gor, 

•  reg'-e-ris  or  -re, 

reg'-i-tur ; 

Plur.  reg'-i-mur, 
re-gim'-I-ni, 
re-gun'-tur. 


112 


VERBS. — THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


§158. 


ACTIVE. 


S. 


P. 


I  was  ruling . 
re-ge'-bam, 
re-ge'-bas, 
re-ge'-bat ; 
reg-e-ba'-mus, 
reg-e-ba'-tis, 
re-ge'-bant. 


I  shall  or  will  rule . 

S .  re'-gam, 
re'-ges, 
re'-get ; 

P.  re-ge'-miis, 
re-ge'-tis, 
re -gent. 


PASSIVE. 

Imperfect. 

I  was  ruled. 

S.  re-ge'-bar, 

reg-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
reg-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  reg-e-ba'-mur, 
reg-e-bam'-i-m, 
reg-e-ban'-tur. 

Future. 

I  shall  or  will  he  ruled. 

S.  re'-gar, 

re-ge'-ris  or  -re, 
re-ge'-tur ; 

P.  re-ge'-mur, 
re-gem'-i-ni, 
re-gen'-tur. 


Perfect. 


I  ruled  or  have  ruled. 

S.  rex'-I, 
rex-is'-ti, 
rex'-it ; 

P.  rex'-l-mus, 
rex-is'-tis, 
rex-e'-runt  or  -re. 


I  was  or  have  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
rec'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-tl, 
rec'-tus  est  or  fu'-it; 

P.  rec'-tl  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
rec'-tl  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 


I  had  ruled. 

S.  rex'-e-ram, 
rex'-e-ras, 
rex'-e-rat ; 

P.  rex-e-ra'-mus, 
rex-e-ra'-tls, 
rex'-e-rant. 


I  shall  have  ruled. 

S .  rex'-e-ro, 
rex'-e-ris, 
rex'-e-rit ; 

P.  rex-er -l-mus, 
rex-er'-l-tis, 
rex'-e-rint. 


Pluperfect. 

I  had  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
rec'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
rec'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 

P.  rec'-tl  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus, 
rec'-tl  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
rec'-tl  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
rec'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
rec'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'  e-rit ; 

P.  rec'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-l-mus, 
rec'-tl  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
rec'-tl  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


t 


§158, 


VERBS. - THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


113 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 


I  may  or  can  rule . 
S.  re'-gam, 
re'-gas, 
re-gat;  ^ 

P.  re-ga'-mus, 
re-ga'-tis, 
re'-gant. 


I  may  or  can  be  ruled . 

S.  re'-gar, 

re-ga'-ris  or  -re, 
re-ga'-tur ; 

P.  re-ga'-mur, 
re-gam'-i-ni, 
re-gan'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should 
rule. 

S.  reg'-e-rem, 
reg'-e-res, 
reg'-e-ret; 

P.  reg-e-re'-mus, 
reg-e-re'-tis, 
reg'-e-rent. 


I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should 
be  ruled. 

S.  reg'-e-rer, 

reg-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 
reg-e-re'-tur ; 

P.  reg-e-re'-mur, 
reg-e-rem'-i-nl, 
reg-e-ren'-tur. 


I  may  have  ruled. 

S.  rex'-e-rim, 
rex'-e-ris, 
rex'-e-rit ; 

P.  rex-er'-i-mus, 
rex-er'-l-tis, 
rex'-e-rint. 


Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
rec'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-rls, 
rec'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  rec'-tl  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-I-mus, 
rec'-tl  sl'-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 
rec'-tl  sint  or  fu'-e-rint. 


I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or 
should  have  ruled. 

S.  rex-is'-sem, 
rex-is'-ses, 
rex-is'-set ; 

P.  rex-is-se'-mus, 
rex-is-se'-tis, 
rex-is'-sent. 


Pluperfect. 

I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should  have 
been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
rec'-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
rec'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set; 

P.  rec'-tl  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
rec'-tl  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tls, 
rec'-tl  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pr€5.  5^.  re'-gfr,  rule  thou , 

P.  reg'-i-te,  rule  ye. 

Fut.  S.  reg'-i-to,  thou  shalt  rule , 
reg'-l-to,  he  shall  rule  ; 

P.  reg-i-to'-te,  rule , 

re-gun'-to,  they  shall  rule. 
10* 


Pres.  &  reg'-e-re,  be  thou  ruled ; 

P.  re-gim'-i-nl,  be  ye  ruled. 
Fut.  S.  reg'-i-tor ,  thou  shalt  be  ruled, 
reg'-i-tor,  he  shall  be  ruled; 
P.  (re-gim'-i-nl,  ye  shall,  etc.) 
re-gun '-tor,  they  shall ,  etc. 


114 


VERBS. — THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


§159, 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres .  reg'-e-re,  to  rule . 

Perf.  rex-is'-se,  to  have  ruled. 

Fut.  rec-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  he  about 
to  rule. 


Pres,  re'-gi,  to  he  ruled. 

Perf.  rec'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se,  to 
have  been  ruled. 

Fut.  rec'-tum  I'-rl,  to  be  about  to 
be  ruled . 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres,  re'-gens,  ruling .  |  Perf.  rec'-tus,  ruled. 

Fut.  rec-tu'-rus,  about  to  rule.  I  Fut .  r£-gen'-dus,  to  be  ruled. 

GERUND. 

G.  re-gen'-di,  of  ruling. 

D.  re-gen'-d5,  etc. 

Ac.  re-gen'-dum, 

Ab.  re-gen'-do. 

SUPINES. 

Former,  rec'-tum,  to  rule.  |  Latter .  rec'-tu,  to  be  ruled . 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  reg ,  are  de¬ 
rived, 

Active.  Passive, 
lnd.  pres.  rego,  regor . 

-  nnperf.  regebam ,  regebar. 

-  fut.  regam,  reg ar. 

Subj.  pres.  regam ,  regar, 
imperf.  r egerem,  regerer . 

regere. 


Imperat,  pres,  rege, 
fut.  regito , 


Inf.  pres. 
Part.  pres. 

-  fut. 

Gerund. 


regere, 

regeras, 

regendi. 


regitor . 
regi. 

regendus. 


From  the  second  root,  From  the  third  root, 
rex,  are  derived,  red.  are  derived, 

Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.  r ext,  rectws  sum,  etc. 

-  plup.  rexeram ,  rectws  eram,  etc. 

-  fut.  perf.  rexero ,  rectws  ero,  etc. 

Subj.  perf.  rexerim ,  rectras  sim,  etc. 

-  plup.  r  exissem,  rectus  essem,  etc. 

Inf.  perf.  rexisse,  rectws  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root, 

Inf.  fut.  recturus  esse,  rectum  iri. 

Part.  fut.  recturus. 

- j perf.  rectws. 

Form .  Sup.  rectum.  Lat.  Sup.  rectw. 


§  159.  Verbs  in  10  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 

Verbs  in  io  of  the  third  conjugation,  in  tenses  formed  from  the 
first  root,  have,  as  connecting  vowels,  ia,  ie,  io ,  or  in,  wherever 
the  same  occur  in  the  fourth  conjugation ;  but  where  they  have 
only  a  single  connecting  vowel,  it  is  the  same  which  character¬ 
izes  other  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation.  They  are  all  conju¬ 
gated  like  capio . 


§159. 


VERBS. - THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


115 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 


Pres .  Ind.  ca'-pi-o,  to  take. 
Pres .  Inf.  cap '-e-re. 

Perf  Ind.  ce'-pl. 

Supine .  cap'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  ca'-pi-or,  to  be  taken . 
Pres.  Inf.  ca'-pl. 

Perf.  Part,  cap'-tus. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


Cl  v/  •  ^ 

o.  ca-pi-o, 
ca'-pis, 
ca'-pit ; 

P.  cap'-i-mus, 
cap'-i-tis, 
ca-pi-unt. 


S.  ca'-pi-or, 

cap'-e-ris  or  -r8, 
cap'-I-tur ; 

P.  cap'-i-mur, 
ca-pim'-i-ni, 
ca-pi-un'-tur. 

Imperfect 


ca-pi-e'-bam, 

ca-pi-e'-bas, 

ca-pi-e'-bat ; 

ca-pi-e-ba'-mus, 

ca-pi-e-ba'-tis, 

ca-pi-e'-bant. 


S.  ca-pi-e'-bar, 

ca-pi-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tiir ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba'-mur, 
c  a-pi-e-bam'-i-m , 
ca-pi-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


S.  ca'-pi-am, 
ca'-pi-es, 
ca'-pi-et ; 

P.  ca-pi-e'-mus, 
ca-pi-e'-tis, 
ca -pi-ent. 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-e'-ris  or  -re, 
ca-pi-e'-tur ; 

P.  ca-pi-e'-miir, 
ca-pi-em'-i-ni, 
ca-pi-en'-tur. 


The  parts  formed  from  the  second  and  third  roots  being  entirely* 
regular,  only  a  synopsis  of  them  is  given. 


Perf.  ce'-pl. 

Plup.  cep'-e-ram. 

Fut.perf.  cep'-e-ro. 


Perf.  cap'-tus  sum  or  fu'-I. 

Plup.  cap'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram. 

Put.  perf.  cap'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-6-r5. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


S.  ca'-pi-am, 
ca'-pi-as, 
ca'-pi-at ; 

P.  ca-pi-a'-mus, 
ca-pi-a'-tis, 


Present. 

S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-a'-ris  or  -re, 
ca-pi-a'-tur; 

P.  ca-pi-a'-mury 
ca-pi-am'-i-ni, 


116 


VERBS. - FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


§160. 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

Imperfect. 


S.  cap'-e-rem, 
cap'-£-res, 
cap'-e-ret ; 

P.  eap-e-re'-mus, 
cap-e-re'-tis, 
cap'-e-rent. 


S .  cap'-e-rer, 

cap-e-re'-ris  or  -r6, 
cap-e-re'-tur ; 

P.  cap-e-re'-mur, 
cap-e-rem'-i-ni, 
cap-e-ren'-tur. 


Perf  cep'-6-rim.  I  Perf.  cap'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 

Plup.  ce-pis'-sem.  |  Plup.  cap'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  2.  S.  ca'-pe ;  P.  2.  cap'-i-te. 
Fut.  2.  cap'-i-to,  cap-i-to-te, 
- 3.  cap'-i-t5;  ca-pi-un'-to. 


S.  cap'-e-re ;  P.  ca-pim'-i-ni. 
cap'-i-tor,  (ca-pi-em'-i-ni,) 
cap'-i-tor ;  ca-pi-un'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres,  cap'-e-re. 

Perf.  ce-pis'-se. 

Fut.  cap-tu'-rus  es'-se. 


Pres,  ca'-pl. 

Perf.  cap'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 
Fut.  cap'-tum  I'-rl. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres,  ca'-pi-ens.  Perf  cap'-tus. 

Fut.  cap-tu'-rus.  Fut.  ca-pi-en'-dus. 


GERUND. 

G .  ca-pi-en'-dl,  etc. 

SUPINES. 

Former,  cap'-tum.  |  Latter,  cap'-tu. 


§  16®.  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 
PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  au'-di-o. 
Pres.  Inf.  au-dl'-re. 
Perf.  Ind.  au-dl'-vl. 
Supine.  au-dl'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  au'-di-or. 
Pres.  Inf.  au-dl'-ri. 
Perf.  Part,  au-dl'-tus. 


§160. 


VERBS. — FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


117 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


I  hear. 

I  am  heard. 

S.  au'-di-5, 

S.  au'-di-or, 

au'-dis, 

au-di'-ris  or  -re, 

au'dit ; 

au-dl'-tur ; 

P.  au-dl'-miis, 

P.  au-dl'-mur, 

au'-dl'-tis, 

au-dlm'-i-nl, 

au'-di-unt. 

au-di-un'-tur. 

Imperfect. 

I  was  hearing . 

I  was  heard. 

S.  au-di-e'-bam, 

S.  au-di-e'-bar, 

au-di-e'-bas, 

au-di-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 

au-di-e'-bat ; 

au-di-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  au-di-e-ba'-mus, 

P.  au-di-e-ba'-mur, 

au-di-e-ba'-tis, 

au-di-e-bam'-i-ni, 

au-di-e'-bant. 

au-di-e-ban'-tiir. 

I  shall  or  will  hear. 

S.  au'-di-am, 
au'-di-es, 
au'-di-et ; 

P.  au-di-e'-mus, 
au-di-e'-tis, 
au'-di-ent. 


Future. 

I  shall  or  will  he  heard. 

S.  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-e'-ris  or  -rS, 
au-di-e'-tur ; 

P.  au-di-e'-mur, 
au-di-em'-i-nl, 
au-di-en'-tur. 


I  heard  or  have  heard . 

S.  au-dl'-vi, 
au-dl-vis'-ti, 
au-di'-vit ; 

P.  au-dlv'-i-mus, 
au-dl-vis'-tis, 
au-dl-ve'-runt  or  -re. 


Perfect. 

I  have  been  or  was  heard. 

S.  au-dl'-tus  sum  or  fu'-I, 
au-dl'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-tl, 
au-dl'-tus  est  or  fu'-it; 

P.  au-dl'-tl  su'-miis  or  fu'-i-mus, 
au-dl'-tl  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
au-di'-tl  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 


I  had  heard. 

S.  au-dlv'-e-ram, 
au-div'-e-ras, 
au-dlv'-e-rat ; 

P.  au-dlv-e-ra-mus, 
au-div-e-ra'-tis, 
au-dlv'-e-rant. 


Pluperfect. 

I  had  been  heard. 

S.  au-dl'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
au-dl'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
au-dl'-tiis  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 

P.  au-dl'-tl  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus, 
au-dl'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
au-di'-tl  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


118 


VERBS. — FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


§160. 


ACTIVE. 

I  shall  have  heard , 

S,  au-div'-e-ro, 
au-div'-e-ris, 
au-div'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-I-mus, 
au-di-ver'-i-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


PASSIVE. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  heard , 

S.  au-dl'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
au-dl'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-rls, 
au-di'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit; 

P.  au-di'-tl  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
au-di'-tl  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-l-tis, 
au-di'-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


I  may  or  can  hear , 
S.  au'-di-am, 
au'-di-as, 
au'-di-at ; 

P.  au-di-a'-mus, 
au-di-a'-tis, 
au'-di-ant. 


Present. 

I  may  or  can  be  heard, 

S .  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-a'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-a'-tur ; 

P.  au-di-a'-mur, 
au-di-am'-i-ni, 
au-di-an'-tur. 


I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should 
hear, 

S,  au-di'-rem, 
au-di'-res, 
au-di'-ret ; 

P.  au-di-re'-mus, 
au-di-re'-tis, 
au-di'-rent. 


Imperfect. 

I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should 
be  heard . 

S',  au-di'-rer, 

au-di-re'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-re'-tur ; 

P.  au-di-re'-mur, 
au-dl-rem'-i-ni, 
au-di-ren'-tur. 


I  may  have  heard, 
S,  au-div'-e-rim, 
au-div'-e-rls, 
au-div'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-I-mus, 
au-di-ver'-i-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or 
should  have  heard, 

S,  au-di-vis'-sem, 
au-di-vis'-ses, 
au-di-vis'-set ; 

P.  au-di-vis-se'-mus, 
au-di-vis-se'-tis, 
au-di-vis'-sent. 


Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  heard, 

S,  au-dl'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
au-dl'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-rls, 
au-dl'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit; 

P.  au-di'-tl  sl'-mus  or  fu-er'-l-mus, 
au-di'-tl  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-l-tis, 
au-di'-tl  sint  or  fu'-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 

I  might ,  could ,  would ,  or  should 
have  been  heard, 

S.  au-dl'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
au-dl'-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
au-dl'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set; 

P.  au-di'-tl  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
au-di'-tl  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tls, 
au-di'-tl  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent 


§160, 


VERBS. — FOURTH  CONJUGATION, 


119 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres .  S.  au'-di,  hear  thou ; 

P.  au-dl'-te,  hear  ye . 

Fut .  S.  au-dl'-to,  thou  shalt  hear , 
au-dl'-to,  he  shall  hear ; 

P.  au-dl-to'-te,  ye  shall  hear , 
au-di-un'-to,  they  shall 
hear . 


Pres.  S.  au-di'-re,  he  thou  heard  ; 

P.  au-dlm'-i-ni,  be  ye  heard . 

Fut .  5.  au-dl'-tor,  thou  shalt  he 
heard , 

au-dl'-tor,  sAaiZ 
heard; 

P.  (au-di-em'-i-ni,  ye  shall 
he  heard ,) 

au-di-un'-tor,  they  shall 
he  heard. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres,  au-di'-re,  to  hear . 

Per/,  au-dl-vis'-se,  to  have  heard. 
Fut.  au-dl-tu'-rus  es-se,  to  he 
about  to  hear. 


Pres,  au-dl'-ri,  to  he  heard. 

Perf.  au-dl'-tus  es'-se  or  fu— is'- 
se,  to  have  been  heard. 
Fut.  au-dl'-tum  I'-rl,  to  he  about 
to  he  heard. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres,  au'-di-ens,  hearing .  I  Perf.  au-dl'-tus,  heard. 

Fut.  au-dl-tu'-rus,  about  to  hear.  I  Fut.  au-di-en'-dus,  to  he  heard. 

GERUND. 

G.  au-di-en'-di,  of  hearing. 

D.  au-di-en'-d6,  etc. 

Ac.  au-di-en'-dum, 

Ah.  au-di-en'-do. 


SUPINES. 

Former,  au-dl'-tum,  to  hear.  |  Latter,  au-dl'-tu,  to  he  heard . 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  aud ,  are  de¬ 
rived 


Active. 

Passive. 

Ind.  pres. 

audio. 

audior. 

-  imperf. 

audiebam,  audiefiar. 

- ,fuL 

audiam, 

audiar. 

Subj.  pres. 

audiam, 

audiar. 

- imperf. 

audirem. 

audirer. 

Imperat,  pres,  audi, 

audire. 

- fut. 

audito, 

auditor. 

Inf.  pres. 

audire, 

audiri. 

Part.  pres. 

audieas, 

-  fut. 

audiendus. 

Gerund. 

audieodi. 

From  the  second  root,  From  the  third  root, 
audiv,  are  derived,  audit,  are  derived, 
Active.  Passive . 

Ind.  perf.  audivi,  auditas  sum,  etc. 

-  plup.  audiveram,  auditas  eram,  etc. 

- fut.  perf.  audivero,  auditas  ero,  etc. 

Subj.  perf.  audiverim,  auditas  sim,  etc. 

-  plup.  audivissem,  auditas  essem, etc. 

Inf.  perf.  audivisse,  auditas  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root, 

Inf.  fut.  auditaras  esse,  auditam  iri. 

Part.  fut.  auditaras. 

- Perf  auditas. 

Form.  sup.  auditam.  Lat.  sup.  audita. 


120 


DEPONENT  VERBS. 


§161 


DEPONENT  VERBS. 

§  161.  Deponent  verbs  are  conjugated  like  the  passive 
voice,  and  have  also  all  the  participles  and  participial  formations 
of  the  active  voice.  Neuter  deponent  verbs,  however,  want  the 
future  passive  participle,  except  that  the  neuter  in  dum  is  some¬ 
times  used  impersonally.  See  §  184,  3. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  an  active  deponent  verb  of  the  first 
conjugation : — 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

Mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-ri,  mi-ra'-tus,  to  admire . 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres .  mi'-ror,  ml-ra'-ris,  etc. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-bar,  etc. 

Fut .  mi-ra'-bor, 

Perf  ml-ra'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 

Plup.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 

Fut.  Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 


I  admire ,  etc. 

I  was  admiring. 

I  shall  admire. 

I  have  admired. 

I  had  admired. 

I  shall  have  admired. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  mi'-rer,  mi-re'-ris,  etc.  I  may  admire ,  etc. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-rer,  I  would  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim,  I  may  have  admired. 

Plup.  ml-ra'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,  I  would  have  admired. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  S.  mi-ra'-re,  admire  thou  ; 

Fut.  S.  mi-ra'-tor,  thou  shalt  admire , 
ml-ra'-tor,  he  shall  admire  ; 


P.  mi-ram'-i-nl,  admire  ye. 

P.  (mir-a-bim'-i-ni,  ye  shall ,  etc.) 
ml-ran'-tor,  they  shall ,  etc. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  ml-ra'-rl,  to  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se,  to  have  admired. 

Fut.  Act.  mir-a-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  he  about  to  admire. 

Fut.  Pass,  mi-ra'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  admired 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  mi'-rans,  admiring. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus,  having  admired. 

Fut.  Act.  mlr-a-tu'-rus,  about  to  admire. 

Fut.  Pass .  mi-ran'-dus,  to  be  admired. 


GERUND. 

G.  mi-ran'-di,  of  admiring ,  etc. 

SUPINES. 

Former,  mi-ra'-tum,  to  admire.  |  Latter,  mi-ra'-tu,  to  be  admired. 


§162, 


VERBS. — REMARKS  ON  THE  CONJUGATIONS. 


121 


Remarks  on  the  Conjugations. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  First  Boot. 

§162.  i.  A  few  words  in  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  first  and 
third  conjugations,  in  the  earlier  writers  and  in  the  poets,  end  in  im,  is ,  it,  etc. ; 
as,  edim ,  eais,  edit ,  edimus ;  comedim ,  comedis ,  comedint ;  for  edam ,  etc.  come - 
dam ,  etc. ;  duim ,  duis,  duit ,  ;  and  perduim ,  perduis ,  perduit ,  perduint  ;  for 

c?ew,  etc.  perdam ,  etc.  from  old  forms  dwo  and  per  duo,  for  eio  and  perdo :  so  ere¬ 
cte,  creduit,  and  also  creduam,  creduas,  creduat ,  for  credam,  etc.  from  the  old 
form  creduo,  for  credo.  The  form  in  im,  etc.  was  retained  as  the  regular  form 
in  sim  and  velim ,  from  sum  and  volo,  and  in  their  compounds. 

2.  The  imperfect  indicative  in  the  fourth  conjugation,  sometimes,  especially 
in  the  more  ancient  writers,  ends  in  ibam  and  ibar,  for  iebam  and  iebar,  and 
the  future  in  ibo  and  ibor ,  for  iam  and  iar ;  as,  vestibat,  Virg.,  largibar ,  Propert., 
for  vestiebat,  largiebar ;  scibo ,  opperibor,  for  sciam,  opperiar.  Ibam  and  ibo  were 
retained  as  the  regular  forms  of  eo,  queo,  and  nequeo.  Cf.  §  182. 

3.  The  termination  re,  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  passive  voice,  is 
rare  in  the  present,  but  common  in  the  other  simple  tenses. 

4.  The  imperatives  of  dico ,  duco,fdcio ,  and  fero,  are  usually  written  die,  due , 
fac j  and  fer ;  in  like  manner  their  compounds,  except  those  compounds  of 
facio  which  change  a  into  i;  as,  effice,  confice ;  but  calf  ace  also  is  found  in 
Cicero ;  and  in  old  writers  dice,  edice,  addice,  indice,  duce ,  abduce,  reduce,  traduce, 
and  face.  Inger  for  ingere  is  rare.  Scio  has  not  sci,  but  its  place  is  supplied 
by  scito,  and  scitote  is  preferred  to  scite. 

5.  In  the  imperative  future  of  the  passive  voice,  but  especially  of  deponents, 
early  writers  and  their  imitators  sometimes  used  the  active  instead  of  the  pas¬ 
sive  form ;  as,  arbitrato,  amplexato,  utito,  nitito ;  for  arbitrator,  etc. ;  and  cen¬ 
sento,  utunto,  tuento,  etc.  for  censentor,  etc. — In  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular  occur,  also,  forms  in  -mino ;  as,  hortamino ,  veremino,  fruimxno ;  for 
hortator,  etc. 

6.  The  syllable  er  was  often  added  to  the  present  infinitive  passive  by  early 
writers  and  especially  by  the  poets ;  as,  amarier  for  amdri ,  dieter  for  diet. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Second  Root . 

7.  (a.)  When  the  second  root  ends  in  v,  a  syncopation  and  contraction  often 
occur  in  the  tenses  formed  from  it,  by  omitting  v,  and  sinking  the  first  vowel 
of  the  termination  in  the  final  vowel  of  the  root,  when  followed,  in  the  fourth 
conjugation,  by  s,  and  in  the  other  conjugations,  by  s  or  r ;  as,  audissem  for 
audivissem,  amasti  for  amavisti,  implerunt  for  impleverunt,  noram  and  nosse  for 
noveram  and  novisse. 

(6.)  When  the  second  root  ends  in  iv,  v  is  often  omitted  without  contraction; 
as,  audiero  for  audivero ;  audiisse  for  audivisse. 

(c.)  When  this  root  ends  in  s  or  x,  especially  in  the  third  conjugation,  the 
syllables  is,  iss,  and  sis,  are  sometimes  omitted  in  the  termination  of  tenses  de¬ 
rived  from  it;  as,  evasti  for  evasisti,  extinxti  for  extinxlsti,  divisse  for  divisisse ; 
extinxem  for  extinxlssem^  surrexe  for  sur rexisse ;  accestis  for  accessistis,  justi  for 
jusslsti ;  dixti  for  dixisti.  So  faxem  for  ( facslssem ,  i.  e.)  fecissem. 

(d.)  In  the  perfect  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations,  a  syncope 
sometimes  occurs  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  root  and  the  following  syllable  of 
the  termination,  especially  in  the  third  person  singular ;  as,  fumdt,  audit,  cupit ; 
for  fumavit,  audivit,  cupivit.  So,  also,  but  rarely,  in  the  first  person ;  as,  sepeli, 
enarramus ;  for  sepelivi ,  enarravimus. 

8.  In  the  third  person  plural  of  the  perfect  indicative  active,  the  form  in  ere 
is  less  common  than  that  in  erunt ,  especially  in  prose. 

11 


122 


VERBS. - REMARKS  ON  THE  CONJUGATIONS.  §  162. 


9.  Ancient  forms  of  a  future  perfect  in  so,  a  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunc¬ 
tive  in  sim  and  sem ,  and  a  perfect  infinitive  in  se  sometimes  occur.  They  may, 
in  general,  be  formed  by  adding  these  terminations  to  the  second  root  of  the 
verb ;  as,  recepso ,  emissim ,  ausim  from  the  obsolete  perfect,  ausi ,  from  audeo , 
confexim  and  promissem :  divisse  and  promisse.  But  when  the  root  ends  in  x, 
and  frequently  when  it  ends  in  s,  only  o,  im,  em,  and  e,  etc.  are  added ;  as, 
jusso ,  dixis ;  intellexes,  percepset ;  surrexe,  sumse.  V,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  in 
the  first  conjugation,  is  changed  into  s ;  as,  levasso ,  locassim.  U.  at  the  end  of 
the  root,  in  the  second  conjugation,  is  changed  into  es;  sis,  habesso,  licessit. 
Sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  present  is  retained  in  these  forms,  though  changed 
in  the  other  parts  derived  from  the  second  root;  as,  capso ,  faxo  ( facso ), 
faxim  (facsim). 

Note.  Faxo  expresses  determination,  1 1  will,’  or,  ‘  I  am  resolved,  to  make, 
cause,’  etc.  The  subjunctive  faxit ,  etc.,  expresses  a  solemn  wish;  as,  dii 
immortales  faxint.  Ausim ,  etc.  express  doubt  or  hesitation,  ‘  I  might  ven¬ 
ture,’  etc.  The  perfect  in  sim  is  used  also  in  connection  with  the  present  sub¬ 
junctive;  as,  quceso  uti  tu  calamitates  prohibessis ,  defendas ,  averruncesque.  Cat o. 

10.  In  the  ancient  Latin  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  future  passive  of  simi¬ 
lar  form ;  as,  turbassitur ,  jussitur ,  instead  of  turbatum  fuerit ,  and  jussus  fue¬ 
rit. — A  future  infinitive  active  in  sere  is  also  found,  in  the  first  conjugation, 
which  is  formed  by  adding  that  termination  to  the  second  root,  changing,  as 
before,  v  into  s ;  as,  expugnassere ,  impetr assere ,  for  expugnaturum  esse,  etc. 


Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Third  Root. 

11.  The  supine  in  um,  though  called  one  of  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb, 
belongs  in  fact  to  very  few  verbs,  the  whole  number  which  have  this  supine 
not  amounting  to  three  hundred.  The  part  called  in  dictionaries  the  supine 
in  um  must  therefore,  in  most  cases,  be  considered  as  the  neuter  gender  of  the 
perfect  participle. 

12.  In  the  compound  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods,  the 
participle  is  always  in  the  nominative  case,  but  it  is  used  in  both  numbers,  and 
in  all  genders,  to  correspond  with  the  number  and  gender  of  the  subject  of  the 
verb ;  as,  amatus ,  -a,  -w,  est ;  amdti ,  -ce ,  -a,  sunt ,  etc. 

(1.)  Fui,  fueram ,  fuerim,  fuissem ,  and  fuisse ,  are  seldom  used  in  the  com¬ 
pound  tenses  of  deponent  verbs,  and  not  so  often  as  sum ,  etc.,  in  those  of  other 
verbs,  but  when  used  they  have  generally  the  same  sense.  It  is  to  be  remark¬ 
ed,  however,  that  fui  with  the  perfect  participle  usually  denotes  that  which 
has  been,  but  which  no  longer  exists.  In  the  pluperfect  subjunctive,  forem , 
etc.,  for  essem ,  etc.,  are  sometimes  found. 

(2.)  But  as  the  perfect  participle  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  an  adjective, 
expressing  a  permanent  state,  (see  §  162,  22),  if  then  connected  with  the  tenses 
of  sum  its  meaning  is  different  from  that  of  the  participle  in  the  same  connec¬ 
tion;  ejnstola  scripta  est,  when  scripta  is  a  participle,  signifies,  the  letter  has 
been  written,  but  if  scripta  is  an  adjective,  the  meaning  of  the  expression  is,  the 
letter  is  written,  and  epistola  scripta  fuit,  in  this  case,  would  signify,  the  letter 
has  been  written,  or,  has  existed  as  a  written  one,  implying  that  it  no  longer 
exists. 

13.  The  participles  in  the  perfect  and  future  infinitive,  are  used  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative,  but  in  all  genders  and  in  both  numbers ;  as,  amatus , 
-a,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse ;  amatum,  -am,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse ;  amdti ,  -ce,  -a,  esse  or 
fuisse  ;  amatos,  -as,  -a,  esse  or  fuisse ;  and  so  of  the  others.  With  the  infini¬ 
tive  fuisse ,  amatus,  etc.  are  generally  to  be  considered  as  participial  adjectives. 

(1.)  These  participles  in  combination  with  esse  are  sometimes  used  as  inde¬ 
clinable  ;  as,  cohortes  ad  me  missum  facias.  Cic.  Ad  me,  mea  Terentia ,  scidbis , 
te  vicum  venditurum.  Id. 


§162. 


VERBS. - PERIPHRASTIC  CONJUGATIONS. 


123 


Periphrastic  Conjugations . 

14.  The  participle  in  rus ,  joined  to  the  tenses  of  the  verb 
sum ,  denotes  either  intention ,  or  being  upon  the  point  of  doing 
something.  This  form  of  the  verb  is  called  the  active  periphras¬ 
tic  conjugation . 

Remark  1.  As  the  performance  of  the  act  depends  either  on  the  will  of  the 
subject,  on  that  of  others,  or  upon  circumstances,  we  may  say,  in  English,  in 
the  first  case,  1 1  intend,’  and  in  the  others,  4 1  am  to,’  or  4 1  am  about  to  ’  (be  or 
do  any  thing). 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres .  amaturus  sum,  I  am  about  to  love . 

Imperf.  amaturus  eram,  I  was  about  to  love . 

Fut .  amaturus  ero,  I  shall  be  about  to  love . 

Perf  amaturus  fui,  I  was  or  have  been  about  to  love . 

Plup .  amaturus  fueram,  I  had  been  about  to  love. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  amaturus  sim,  I  may  be  about  to  love. 

Imperf.  amaturus  essem,  I  would  be  about  to  love. 

Perf.  amaturus  fuerim,  I  may  have  been  about  to  love. 

Plup.  amaturus  fuissem,  I  would  have  been  about  to  love. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  amaturus  esse,  to  be  about  to  love. 

Perf.  amaturus  fuisse,  to  have  been  about  to  love. 

Rem.  2.  Fuero  is  scarcely  used  in  connection  with  the  participle  in  rus. 

Rem.  3.  Amaturus  sim  and  amaturus  essem  serve  also  as  subjunctives  to  the 
future  amabo.  The  infinitive  amaturus  fuisse  answers  to  the  English,  ‘  I  should 
have  loved,’  so  that  in  hypothetical  sentences  it  supplies  the  place  of  an  infini¬ 
tive  of  the  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Rem.  4.  In  the  passive,  the  fact  that  an  act  is  about  to  be  performed  is  ex¬ 
pressed  by  a  longer  circumlocution ;  as,  in  eo  est ,  or  futurum  est ,  ut  epistdla 
scribatur,  a  letter  is  about  to  be  written.  So  in  eo  erat,  etc.,  through  all  the 
tenses. 

15.  The  participle  in  dus ,  with  the  verb  sum ,  expresses  neces¬ 
sity  or  propriety ;  as,  amandus  sum ,  I  must  be  loved,  or  deserve 
to  be  loved.  With  the  various  moods  and  tenses  of  sum ,  it  forms 
a  passive  periphrastic  conjugation ; — thus  : 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres .  amandus  sim, 

Imperf.  amandus  essem, 

Perf.  amandus  fuerim, 

Plup.  amandus  fuissem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  amandus  esse, 

Perf  amandus  fuisse. 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  amandus  sum, 

Imperf.  amandus  eram, 

Fut.  amandus,  ero, 

Perf.  amandus  fui, 

Plup.  amandus  fueram, 

Fut.  Perf  amandus  fuero. 


124 


VERBS. — RULES  OF  CONJUGATION. 


§163. 


Rem.  5.  The  neuter  of  the  participle  in  dus  with  est  and  the  dative  of  a  per¬ 
son,  expresses  the  necessity  of  performing  the  action  on  the  part  of  that  person ; 
as,  mihi  scribendum  est ,  I  must  write,  etc.,  and  so  through  all  the  tenses. 

Participles . 

16.  The  following  perfect  participles  of  neuter  verbs,  like  those  of  active 
deponents,  are  translated  by  active  participles : — cxnatus,  having  supped ;  potus , 
having  drunk ;  pransus,  having  dined;  and  sometimes  juratus,  having  sworn. 
So  also  adultus ,  coalitus ,  conspiratus ,  interitus ,  occasus ,  obsoletus ,  and  cretus. 

For  the  active  meaning  of  osus  and  its  compounds,  see  §  183,  1. 

1 7.  (a.)  The  perfect  participles  of  some  deponent  verbs  have  both 
an  active  and  a  passive  sense ;  as,  adeptus  libertatem,  having  obtain¬ 
ed  liberty,  or  adepta  libertate ,  liberty  having  been  obtained.  Cf. 
§  142,  4,  (6.) 

So  abominatus,  comitatus,  commentatus ,  complexus,  confessus,  contestatus,  de¬ 
testatus,  dignatus ,  dimensus,  effatus,  emensus ,  ementitus,  emeritus ,  expertus,  exse¬ 
cratus,  interpretatus,  largitus ,  machinatus,  meditatus ,  mercatus,  metatus,  oblitus , 
opinatus,  orsus,  pactus,  partitus ,  perfunctus ,  periclitatus ,  pollicitus ,  populatus, 
depopulatus,  stipulatus,  testatus ,  ultus,  veneratus. 

( b .)  The  participle  in  dus ,  of  deponent  verbs,  is  commonly  pas¬ 
sive. 

18.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  passive  verbs  have  the  signi¬ 
fication  of  the  active  voice ;  as,  gavisus ,  having  rejoiced.  But  ausus 
is  used  both  in  an  active  and  a  passive  sense. 

19.  The  genitive  plural  of  participles  in  rus  is  seldom  used,  ex¬ 
cept  that  of  futurus .  Venturorum  is  found  in  Ovid,  exiturarum ,  trans¬ 
iturarum  and  periturorum  in  Seneca,  and  moriturorum  in  Augus¬ 
tine. 

20.  In  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations,  the  gerund  and  future 
passive  participle  (including  deponents)  sometimes  end  in  undum 
and  undus,  instead  of  endum  and  endus ,  especially  when  i  precedes ; 
as,  faciundum ,  audiundum,  scribundus .  Potior  has  usually  potiundus . 

21.  Many  present  and  perfect  participles  are  compounded  with  in,  signifying 
not,  whose  verbs  do  not  admit  of  such  composition;  they  thus  become  adjec¬ 
tives  ;  as,  insciens ,  ignorant ;  imparatus,  unprepared. 

22.  Participles,  when  they  do  not  express  distinctions  of  time,  become  adjec¬ 
tives,  and  as  such  are  compared;  as,  amans ,  loving;  amantior,  amantissimus. 
They  sometimes  also  become  substantives;  as,  pi'cefectus,  a  commander;  au¬ 
sum,  an  attempt;  commissum,  an  offence. 

Note.  Many  words  derived  from  substantives,  with  the  terminations  of  par¬ 
ticiples,  dtus,  itus ,  and  utus,  are  yet  adjectives;  as,  aldtus ,  winged;  turritus , 
turreted,  etc.  See  §  128,  7. 

General  Bules  of  Conjugation. 

§  163.  1.  Verbs  which  have  a  in  the  first  root  have  it  also  in 

the  third,  even  when  it  is  changed  in  the  second  ;  as,  facio,  factum ; 
habeo,  habitum. 


§164. 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


125 


2.  The  connecting  vowel  is  often  omitted  in  the  second  root,  and 
in  such  cases,  if  v  follows,  it  is  changed  into  u.  This  happens  in  most 
verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

Remark.  Some  verbs  of  the  first,  second,  and  third  conjugations 
prefix  to  the  second  root  their  initial  consonant  with  the  vowel  which 
follows  it,  or  with  e;  as,  curro ,  cucurri ;  fallo ,  fefelli .  This  prefix  is 
called  a  reduplication . 

Note  1.  Spondeo  and  sto  lose  s  in  the  second  syllable,  making  spdpondi  and  steti. 
For  the  verbs  that  take  a  reduplication,  see  §§  165,  R.  2 ;  168,  N.  2 ;  171,  Exc.  1,(6.) 

3.  Verbs  which  want  the  second  root  commonly  want  the  third 
root  also. 

4.  Compound  verbs  form  their  second  and  third  roots  like  the  sim¬ 
ple  verbs  of  which  they  are  compounded ;  as,  audio ,  audivi ,  auditum; 
exaudio ,  exaudivi ,  exauditum. 

Note  2.  Some  compound  verbs,  however,  are  defective,  whose  simples  are 
complete,  and  some  are  complete,  whose  simples  are  defective. 

Exc.  1.  Compound  verbs  omit  the  reduplication;  but  the  com¬ 
pounds  of  do,  sto ,  disco ,  posco ,  and  some  of  those  of  curro,  retain  it. 

Exc.  2.  Verbs  which,  in  composition,  change  a  into  e  in  the  first 
root,  (see  §  189,  1,)  retain  e  in  the  second  and  third  roots  of  the  com¬ 
pound  ;  as,  scando,  scandi,  scansum ;  descendo,  descendi,  descensum . 

Exc.  3.  (a.)  When  a,  ce,  or  e,  in  the  first  root  of  the  simple  verb, 
is  changed  in  the  compound  into  i,  (see  §  189,  2,)  the  same  is  retained 
in  the  second  and  third  roots,  in  case  the  third  root  of  the  simple  verb  is 
a  dissyllable ;  as,  habeo,  habui ,  habitum  ;  prohibeo,  prohibui,  prohibitum. 

( 'b .)  But  if  the  third  root  is  a  monosyllable,  the  second  root  of  the 
compound  has  usually  the  same  vowel  as  that  of  the  simple,  but 
sometimes  changes  a  or  e  into  i,  and  the  third  root  has  e  ;  as,  fdcio, 
feci ,  factum;  conficio,  confeci,  confectum;  teneo,  tenui ,  tentum;  reti¬ 
neo,  retinui,  retentum;  rapio,  rapui,  raptum;  abripio,  abripui,  abreptum. 

Note  3.  The  compounds  of  cado,  ago ,  frango,  pango ,  and  tango,  retain  a 
in  the  thud  root.  See  §  172. 

Exc.  4.  The  compounds  of pdrio,  {ere),  and  some  of  the  compounds  of  do 
and  cubo,  are  of  different  conjugations  from  their  simple  verbs.  See  do,  cubo  and 
paiio  in  §§  165  and  172. 

A  few  other  exceptions  will  be  noticed  in  the  following  lists. 

Formation  of  Second  and  Third  Roots. 

FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

§  164.  In  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  the  second  root 
ends  in  av,  and  the  third  in  at ;  as,  amo,  amavf,  amat um. 

The  following  fist  contains  such  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation 
as  are  of  most  frequent  occurrence. 

11* 


126 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


§164. 


Note.  In  this  and  subsequent  lists,  those  verbs  which  are  marked  *  are  said  to  have 
no  perfect  participle ;  those  marked  t  to  have  no  present  participle.  A  dash( — )  after 
the  present,  denotes  that  there  is  no  second  root.  The  participles  in  rus  and  dus ,  and 
the  supines  in  um  and  u  which  are  in  use,  are  indicated  respectively  by  the  letters  r.,  rf., 
m.:  and  u.  Abundo ,  for  example,  has  no  perfect  participle,  no  supine,  no  participle  in 
dus ;  but  it  has  a  present  participle,  and  a  participle  in  rus . 

In  the  lists  of  irregular  verbs,  those  compounds  only  are  given,  whose  conjugation  dif¬ 
fers  from  that  of  their  simples. 

When  p.  is  subjoined  to  a  deponent  verb,  it  denotes  that  some  of  the  parts  which  have 
commonly  an  active  meaning,  are  used  either  actively  and  passively,  or  passively  alone. 
Such  verbs  are  by  some  grammarians  called  common.  Cf.  §  142,  4,  (6.) 


*  Abundo,  r.  to  overflow. 
Accuso,  m.r.  d.  to  accuse. 
f  Adumbro,  to  delineate . 
jEdifico,  r.  d.  to  build. 
iEquo,  r.  d.  to  level. 
iEstimo,  r.  d.  to  value. 
*Ambulo,  m.  d.  to  walk. 
Amo,  r.  d.  to  love. 
f  Amplio,  d.  to  enlarge. 
Appello,  d.  to  call . 

Apto,  d.  to  Jit. 

Aro,  r.  d.  to  plough. 
Ausculto,  to  listen. 
Autumo,  to  assert. 
t  Basio,  — ,  d.  to  kiss. 
*Bello,  m.  r.  d.  to  wage 
war. 

fBeo,  to  bless. 

*Boo,  to  bellow. 
t  Brevio,  to  shorten. 
f  Cseco,  to  blind. 
fCselo,  to  carve. 
t  Calceo,  d.  to  shoe. 

*f  Calcitro,  to  kick. 
Canto,  m.  to  sing. 

Capto,  m.  r.  d.  to  seize. 
f  Castigo,  m.  d.  to  chastise. 
Celebro,  d.  to  celebrate. 
Celo,  d.  to  conceal. 

Cesso,  d.  to  cease. 

Certo,  r.  d.  to  strive . 
Clamo,  to  shout. 

Cogito,  d.  to  think. 
Concilio,  r.  d.  to  conciliate . 
Considero,  r.  d.  to  con¬ 
sider. 

Cremo,  d.  to  burn. — con¬ 
cremo,  r. 

fCreo,  r.  d.  to  create. 
Crucio,  d.  to  torment. 
Culpo,  r.  d.  to  blame. 
t  Cuneo,  d.  to  wedge  in. 
Curo,  r.  d.  to  care  for. 
Damno,  m.  r.  d.  to  con¬ 
demn. 

Decoro,  d.  to  adorn. 

Delineo,  to  delineate. 
Desidero,  r.  d.  to  desire . 


Destino,  d.  to  design. 
Dico,  m.  r.  d.  to  dedicate. 
Dicto,  to  dictate. 
fDolo,  to  hew. 

Dono,  r.  d.  to  bestow. 
Duplico,  r.  d.  to  double. 
Duro,  r.  to  harden. 
f  Effigio,  to  portray. 
t  Enucleo,  to  explain. 
Equito,  to  ride. 

Erro,  to  wander. 
Existimo,  u.  r.  d.  to  think. 
Exploro,  m.  d.  to  search. 
Exsulo,  m.  r.  to  be  ban¬ 
ished. 

Fabrico,  d.  to  frame. 
f  Fatigo,  r.  d.  to  weary. 

F estino,  r.  to  hasten. 
Firmo,  r.  d.  to  strengthen. 
Flagito,  m.  d.  to  demand. 
^Flagro,  r.  to  be  onflre. — 
conflagro,  r. — deflagro. 
Flo,  d.  to  blow. 

Formo,  r.  d.  to  form. 

F oro,  d.  to  bore. 
f  Fraudo,  d.  to  defraud. 
f  Freno,  to  bridle. 
f  Frio,  — ,  to  crumble. 

F  ugo,  r.  d.  to  put  to  flight. 
f  Fundo,  r.  to  found. 
t  Furio,  — ,  to  madden. 
("Galeo,  — ,  to  put  on  a 
helmet. 

Gesto,  d.  to  bear. 

Glacio,  — ,  to  congeal. 
Gravo,  d.  to  weigh  down. 
Gusto,  d.  to  taste. 

Habito,  m.  d.  to  dwell. 
*Halo,  — ,  to  breathe. 
Hiemo,  m.  to  winter. 
*Hio,  d.  to  gape. 
fHumo,  r.  d.  to  bury. 
Ignoro,  r.  d.  to  be  igno¬ 
rant  of. 

Impero,  r.  d.  to  command. 
t  Impetro,  r.  d.  to  obtain. 
Inchoo,  r.  to  begin. 
Indago,  r.  d.  to  trace  out. 


Indico,  m.  r.  d.  to  show. 
f  Inebrio, — ,  to  inebriate. 
Initio,  to  initiate. 
Inquino,  to  pollute. 
Instauro,  d.  to  renew. 
Intro,  r.  d.  to  enter. 
Invito,  d.  to  invite. 

Irrito,  r.  d.  to  irritate. 
Itero,  u.  d.  to  do  again. 
Jacto,  r.  d.  to  throw. 
Judico,  r.  d.  to  judge. 
Jugo,  d.  to  couple. 
Jugulo,  m.  d.  to  butcher. 
Juro,  d.  to  swear. 

Laboro,  r.  d.  to  labor. 
Lacero,  d.  to  tear. 

*  Lacto,  to  suckle. 
t  Lanio,  d.  to  tear  in  pieces. 
Latro,  to  bark. 

Laudo,  r.  d.  to  praise. 
Laxo,  d.  to  loose. 
fLego,  to  depute. 

Levo,  r.  d.  to  lighten. 
Libero,  r.  d.  to  free. 
Libo,  d.  to  pour  out. 

Ligo,  to  bind. 
f  Liquo,  d.  to  ifielt. 

Lito,  to  appease. 

Loco,  r.  d.  to  place. 
Lustro,  d.  to  survey. 
Luxurio,  to  be  luxuriant. 
Macto,  d.  to  sacrifice. 
Maculo,  to  spot ,  stain. 
Mando,  r.  d.  to  command. 
Manduco,  to  chew. 
*Mano,  to  flow. 

Maturo,  d.  to  ripen. 
Memoro,  u.  d.  to  tell. 
#Meo,  to  go. 

*Migro,  u.  r.  d.  to  depart. 
^Milito,  m.r.  to  serve  as 
a  soldier. 

f  Minio,  d.  to  paint  red. 
Ministro,  d.  to  serve. 
Mitigo,  d.  to  pacify. 
Monstro,  r.  to  show. — 
t  demonstro,  d. 

Muto,  r.  d.  to  change. 


§165. 


VERBS.- 


SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


127 


Narro,  r.  d.  to  tell. 

Nato,  m.  r.  to  swim. 
^Nauseo,  to  be  sea-sick. 
f  Navigo,  r.  d.  to  sail. 
Navo,  r.  d.  to  perform. 
Nego,  m.  r.  d.  to  deny. 
*No,  to  swim. 

Nomino,  r.  d.  to  name. 
Noto,  d.  to  mark. 

Novo,  r.  d.  to  renew. 
Nudo,  d.  to  make  bare. 
Nuncupo,  r.  d.  to  name. 
Nuntio,  m.  r.  to  tell. — 
renuntio,  d. 

*Nuto,  r.  to  nod. 

Obsecro,  m.  r.  d.  to  be¬ 
seech. 

Obtrunco,  r.  to  kill. 
Onero,  r.  d.  to  load. 

Opto,  d.  to  wish. 
f  Orbo,  r.  to  bereave. 

Orno,  r.  d.  to  adorn. 

Oro,  m.  r.  d.  to  beg. 

Paco,  d.  to  subdue. 

Paro,  r.  d.  to  prepare. 

comparo,  d.  to  compare. 
Patro,  r.  d.  to  perform. 
*Pecco,  r.  d.  to  sm. 
fPio,  d.  to  propitiate. 
Placo,  r.  d.  to  appease. 
Ploro,  m.  d.  to  bewail. 
Porto,  u.  r.  d.  to  carry. 
Postulo,  m.  r.  d.  to  de¬ 
mand. 

Piivo,  d.  to  deprive. 
Probo,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ap¬ 
prove. — comprobo,  m. 
Profligo,  d.  to  rout. 
Propero,  d.  to  hasten. 

Propino,  to  drink  to. 
Propitio,  d.  to  appease. 
Pugno,  r.  d.  to  fght. 
Pulso,  d.  to  beat. 

Purgo,  u.  r.  d.  to  cleanse. 


Puto,  d.  to  reckon. 
Quasso,  d.  to  shake. 
Radio,  to  emit  rays. 
Rapto,  d.  to  drag  away. 
Recupero,  m.  r.  d.  to  re¬ 
cover. 

Recuso,  r.  d.  to  refuse. 
Redundo,  to  overfiow. 
Regno,  r.  d.  to  rule. 
f  Repudio,  r.  d.  to  reject. 
Resero,  d.  to  unlock. 
^fRetalio, — ,  to  retaliate. 
Rigo,  to  water. 

Rogo,  m.  r.  d.  to  ask. 
Roto,  to  whirl  around. 
Sacrifico,  m.  to  sacrifice. 
Sacro,  d.  to  consecrate. 
f  Sagino,  d.  to  fatten. 
Salto,  r.  to  dance. 

Saluto,  m.  r.  d.  to  salute. 
Sano,  r.  d.  to  heal. 

Satio,  to  satiate. 
f  Saturo,  to  fill. 

Saucio,  d.  to  wound. 

*  Secundo,  to  prosper. 
Sedo,  m.  d.  to  allay. 
Servo,  r.  d.  to  keep. 

Sibilo,  to  hiss. 

Sicco,  d.  to  dry. 

Signo,  r.  d.  to  mark  out. — 
assigno,  m. 

Simulo,  r.  d.  to  pretend. 
Socio,  d.  to  associate. 

*  Somnio,  to  dream. 
Specto,  m.  r.  d.  to  behold. 
Spero,  r.  d.  to  hope. 

*  Spiro,  to  breathe. — con¬ 
spiro.  —  exspiro,  r.  — 
suspiro,  d. 

Spolio,  m.  d.  to  rob. 
Spumo,  to  foam. 

Stillo,  to  drop. 

Stimulo,  to  goad. 

Stipo,  to  stuff. 


Sudo,  to  sweat. 

Suffoco,  to  strangle. 
Sugillo,  d.  to  taunt. 
Supero,  r.  d.  to  overcome. 
Suppedito,  to  afford. 

*  Supplico,  m.  to  suppli¬ 
cate. 

*  Susurro,  to  whisper. 
Tardo,  to  delay. 

Taxo,  d.  to  rate. 

Temero,  d.  to  defile. 
Tempero,  r.  d.  to  temper. 

— obtempero,  r.  to  obey. 
Tento,  m.  r.  d.  to  try. 
Terebro,  to  bore. 
Termino,  r.  d.  to  limit. 
Titubo,  to  stagger. 
Tolero,  u.  r.  d.  to  bear. 
Tracto,  u.  d.  to  handle. 

Tripudio,  to  dance. 
Triumpho,  r.  to  triumph. 
Trucido,  r.  d.  to  kill. 
Turbo,  d.  to  disturb. 
*Vaco,  to  be  at  leisure. 

*  Vapulo,  m.  d.  to  be  beat¬ 
en.  Cf.  §  142,  3. 

Vario,  to  diversify. 

Vasto,  d.  to  lay  waste. 
Vellico,  to  pluck. 
Verbero,  r.  d.  to  beat. 

Vestigo,  to  search  for. 
Vexo,  d.  to  tease. 

Vibro,  d.  to  brandish. 
Vigilo,  to  watch. 

Violo,  m.  r.  d.  to  violate. 
Vitio,  d.  to  vitiate. 

Vito,  u.  d.  to  shun. 

Ululo,  to  howl. 

Umbro,  r.  to  shade. 

Voco,  r.  d.  to  call. 

*Volo,  to  fiy. 

Voro,  r.  to  devour. 

Vulgo,  r.  d.  to  publish. 
Vulnero,  d.  to  wound . 


§169.  The  following  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  are  either 
irregular  or  defective. 

*Crepo,  crepui,  to  make  a  noise*  ^dis-  venumdo;  the  other  compounds  of  do 

crepo,  -ui,  or  -avi.  increpo,  -ui  or  are  of  the  third  conjugation.  See 

-avi,-itum  or  -atum.  ^fpercrepo, — .  §  163,  Exc.  1. 

*|recrepo,  — .  Domo,  domui,  domitum,  r.  d.  to  tame. 

*  Cubo,  cubui,  {perf.  subj.  cubaris ;  inf.  Frico,  fricui,  frictum  or  fricatum,  d. 
cubasse),  cubitum  (sup.),  to  recline.  torub.  confrico, — , -atum.  So  infri- 
incubo,  -ui  or  avi,  d.  Those  com-  co.  defrico,  — ,  -atum  or  -ctum. 
pounds  of  cubo  which  take  m  before  Juvo,  juvi,  jutum,  r.  d.,  also  juvatu- 

b,  are  of  the  third  conjugation.  rus,  to  help,  adjuvo,  -juvi,  -jutum, 

Do,  dedi,  datum,  m.  r.  d.  to  give. —  m.  r.  d.  also  adjuvaturus, 

So  circumdo,  pessumdo,  satisdo,  and  *Labo,  labasse,,  to  totter. 


128 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS, 


§166, 


Lavo,  lavi,  rar.  lavavi,  lavatum,  lautum 
or  lotum;  (sup.)  lautum  or  lavatum, 
lavaturus,  d.  to  wash •  Lavo  is  also 
sometimes  of  the  third  conjugation. 

*Mico,  micui,  d.  to  glitter,  dimico, 
-avi  or  -ui,  -aturus.  Semico,  -ui, 
-aturus.  ^intermico,  — .  *promi- 
co,  — ,  d. 

Neco,  necavi  or  necui,  necatum,  r.  d. 
to  kill,  eneco,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum,  or 
-ctum,  d.  finterneco,  — ,  -atum. 

*fNexo,  — ,  to  tie. 

Plico,  — ,  plicatum,  to  fold,  duplico, 
-avi,  -atum,  r.  d.  multiplico  and  re¬ 
plico  have  -avi,  -atum.  ^supplico, 
-avi,  m.  r.  applico,  -avi  or  -ui, 
-atum  or  -itum,  -iturus.  So  implico. 
— complico,  -ui,  -itum  or  atum. 
explico,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum  or  -itum, 
-aturus  or  -iturus. 

Poto,  potavi,  potatum  or  p5tum,  r.  r. 
m.  m.  d.  to  drink,  f  epoto,  -avi,  -um. 
— ^perpoto,  -avi. 

Seco,  secui,  sectum,  secaturus,  d.  to 


cut. — ^circumseco,  — .  ^interseco, 
— ,  d.  ^perseco, -ui.  praeseco, -ui, 
-tum  or  -atum.  So  reseco,  d. 

*Sono,  sonui,  -aturus,  d.  to  sound. 
'^consono,  -ui.  So  ex-,  in-,  per-, 
prae-sono.  ^resono,  -avi.  =*assono, 
— .  So  circumsono  and  dissono. 

*Sto,  steti,  staturus,  to  stand,  *an- 
testo,  -steti.  So  circumsto,  intersto, 
supersto. — Its  compounds  with  mo¬ 
nosyllabic  prepositions  have  stiti; 
as,  *consto,  -stiti,  -staturus.  So  ex¬ 
sto,  insto,  obsto,  persto,  ^praesto, 
-stiti,  -staturus,  d.  *adsto  or  asto, 
-stiti,  -stiturus.  ^prosto,  -stiti.  So 
resto,  restiti:  butsubj.  perf.  restave- 
rit,  Propert,  2,  34,  53.  *disto,  — . 
So  substo  and  supersto. 

^Tono,  tonui,  to  thunder.  So  circum¬ 
tono.  attono,  -ui,  -itum,  intono, 
-ui,  -atum.  ^retono,  — . 

Veto,  vetui,  rarely  avi,  vetitum,  to 
forbid. 


Remark  1.  The  principal  irregularity,  in  verbs  of  the  first  and  second  con¬ 
jugations,  consists  in  the  omission  of  the  connecting  vowel  in  the  second  root, 
and  the  change  of  the  long  vowels  a  and  e  in  the  third  root  into  t.  The  v  re¬ 
maining  at  the  end  of  the  second  root,  when  it  follows  a  consonant,  is  pro¬ 
nounced  as  u  ;  as,  cubo ,  ( cubavi ,  by  syncope  cubvi),  i.  e.  cubui;  ( cubatum ,  by 
change  of  the  connecting  vowel,)  cubitum.  Sometimes  in  the  first  conjugation, 
and  very  frequently  in  the  second,  the  connecting  vowel  is  omitted  in  the  third 
root  also;  as,  juvo,  (are)  juvi ,  jutum ;  teneo ,  (ere)  tenui ,  tentum.  In  the  second 
conjugation  several  verbs  whose  general  root  ends  in  d  and  g ,  and  a  few  others 
of  different  terminations,  form  either  their  second  or  third  root  or  both,  like 
verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  by  adding  s  ;  as,  rideo ,  risi,  risum. 

Rem.  2.  The  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  whose  perfects  take  a  redu 
plication  are  do,  sto,  and  their  compounds. 

Rem.  3.  The  following  verbs  in  eo  are  of  the  first  conjugation,  viz.  beo,  calceo , 
creo,  cuneo ,  enucleo ,  illaqueo ,  collineo,  delineo,  meo,  nauseo,  screo;  eo  and  its  com¬ 
pounds  are  of  the  fourth. 


§  166.  All  deponent  verbs,  of  the  first  conjugation,  are  regular, 
and  are  conjugated  like  miror,  §  161 ;  as, 


Abominor,  d.  to  abhor. 

Adulor,  d.  to  flatter. 

JEmulor,  d.  to  rival. 

Ancillor,  to  be  a  handmaid. 

*  Apricor,  to  bask  in  the 
sun. 

Arbitror,  r.  d.  to  think. 

Aspernor,  d.  p.  to  despise. 

Aucupor,  r.  p.  to  hunt 
after. 

Auxilior,  p.  to  help. 

Aversor,  d.  to  dislike. 

Bacchor,  p.  to  revel. 

Calumnior,  to  censure  un¬ 
fairly. 


Causor,  to  allege. 

*  Comissor,  m.  to  revel. 

Comitor,  p.  to  accompany, 

Concionor,  to  harangue. 

^Confabulor,  m.  to  con¬ 
verse  together. 

Conor,  d.  to  endeavor. 

f  Conspicor,  to  see. 

Contemplor,  d.  p.  to  view 
attentively. 

Criminor,  m.  p.  to  com¬ 
plain  of. 

Cunctor,  d.  p.  to  delay. 

Deprecor,  m.  r.  d.  p,  to 
deprecate. 


Digladior,  to  fence. 

Dignor,  d.  p.  to  deem  wor¬ 
thy. 

Dominor,  p.  to  rule. 

Epulor,  r.  d.  to  feast. 

*  Famulor,  m.  to  wait  on. 

Fatur,  (defect.)  u.  d.  p. 
to  speak.  See  §  183,  6. 

f  Ferior,  r.  to  keep  holiday. 

^Frumentor,  m.  to  for¬ 
age. 

Furor,  m.  to  steal. 

Glorior,  r.  d.  to  boast. 

Gratulor,  m.  d.  to  con¬ 
gratulate. 


§167, 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS, 


129 


Hariolor,  to  practise  sooth¬ 
saying. 

Hortor,  d.  to  encourage. 
Imitor,  u.  r.  d.  to  imitate. 
Indignor,  d.  to  disdain. 
Infitior,  d.  to  deny. 
Insector,  to  pursue. 
Insidior,  r.  d.  to  lie  in 
wait  for. 

Interpretor,  p.  to  explain. 
Jaculor,  p;  to  hurl. 

Jocor,  to  jest. 

Laetor,  r.  d.  p.  to  rejoice. 
Lamentor,  d.  p.  to  bewail. 
Lignor,  m.  to  gather 
wood. 

Luctor,  d.  to  wrestle. 
Medicor,  r.  d.  p.  to  heal. 
Meditor,  p.  to  meditate. 
Mercor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to  buy. 
Minor,  to  threaten. 

Miror,  u.  r.  d.  to  admire. 
Miseror,  d.  to  pity. 
Moderor,  u.  d.  to  govern. 


Modulor,  d.  p.  to  modulate. 
Moror,  r.  d.  to  delay. 
t  Mutuor,  p.  to  borrow. 
Negotior,  r.  to  traffic. 

Nugor,  to  trifle. 
Obsonor,  m.  to  cater. 
Obtestor,  p.  to  beseech. 
Operor,  to  work. 

Opinor,  u.  r.  d.  to  think. 
Opitulor,  m.  to  help. 
t  Otior,  to  be  at  leisure. 
Pabulor,  m.  d  .to  graze. 
Palor,  to  wander  about. 
Percontor,  m.  to  inquire. 
Periclitor,  d.  p.  to  try. 
t  Piscor,  m.  to  flsh. 
Populor,  r.  d.  p.  to  lay 
waste. 

Praedor,  m.  p.  to  plunder. 
Precor,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  pray. 
Proelior,  to  fight. 
Recordor,  d.  to  recollect. 
Rimor,  d.  to  search. 
Rixor,  to  quarrel. 


^Rusticor,  to  live  in  the 
country. 

Sciscitor,  m.  p.  to  inquire . 

*  Scitor,  m.  to  ask. 

Scrutor,  p.  to  search . 

Solor,  d.  to  comfort . 

Spatior,  to  walk  about. 

Speculor,  m.  r.  d.  to  spy 
out. 

t  Stipulor,  p.  to  bargain , 
stipulate. 

f  Suavior,  d.  to  kiss. 

Suspicor,  to  suspect. 

Testificor,  p.  to  testify. 

Testor,  d.p.  to  testify.  So 
detestor. 

Tutor,  to  defend. 

Vagor,  to  wander. 

Veneror,  d.p.  toveneratey 
worship. 

Venor,  m.  p.  to  hunt. 

Versor,  to  be  employed. 

Vociferor,  to  bawl. 


Note.  Some  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation  are  derived  from  nouns, 
and  signify  being  or  practising  that  which  the  noun  denotes ;  as,  ancillari ,  to  be 
a  handmaid ;  hariolari ,  to  practise  soothsaying ;  from  ancilla  and  haridlus. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

§  167.  Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  end  in  eo ,  and  form 
their  second  and  third  roots  in  u  and  it;  as,  moneo,  monui, 
monrt  um. 


The  following  list  contains  most  of  the  regular  verbs  of  this  conju¬ 
gation,  and  many  also  which  want  the  second  and  third  roots : — 


*Aceo,  to  be  sour. 

*iEgreo,  — ,  to  be  sick. 

*  Albeo,  — ,  to  be  white. 

^ Arceo,  d.  to  drive  away; 
part.  adj.  arctus  or  ar¬ 
tus.  The  compounds 
change  a  into  e;  as, 
coerceo,  d.  to  restrain. 
exerceo,  r.  d.  to  exer¬ 
cise. 

*Areo,  to  be  dry. 

*Aveo,  — ,  to  covet. 

*  Caleo,  r.  to  be  warm. 

*  Calleo,  — ,  to  be  harden¬ 
ed.  *percalleo,  to  know 
well. 

*  Calveo,  — ,  to  be  bald. 

*  Candeo,  to  be  white. 

*  Caneo,  to  be  hoary. 

*Careo,  r.  d.  to  want. 

*Ceveo,  — ,  to  fawn. 


^Clareo,  — ,  to  be  bright. 

*  Clueo,  — ,  to  be  famous. 

*Denseo,  — ,  to  thicken. 

^Diribeo,  — ,  to  sort  the 
voting  tablets. 

=*Doleo,  r.  d.  to  grieve. 

*Egeo,  r.  to  want. 

^Emineo,  to  rise  above. 

^Flacceo,  to  droop. 

^Flaveo,  — ,  to  be  yellow. 

*Floreo,  to  blossom. 

*Foeteo,  — ,  to  be  fetid. 

^Frigeo,  — ,  to  be  cold. 

^Frondeo,  — ,  to  bear 
leaves. 

Habeo,  r.  d.  to  have.  The 
compounds ,  except  post¬ 
habeo,  change  a  into  i ; 
as,  ad-,  ex-,  pro-hibeo. 
cohibeo,  d.  to  restrain. 
inhibeo,  d.  to  hinder. 


* f  perhibeo,  d.  to  report. 
f  posthabeo,  to  postpone. 
praebeo,  (for  praehib¬ 
eo),  r.  d.  to  afford. 
^praehibeo,  — .  debeo, 
(for  dehabeo),  r.  d.  io 
owe. 

*Hebeo,  — ,  to  be  dull. 

^Horreo,  d.  to  be  rough . 

*Humeo,  ■ — .  to  be  moist. 

*  Jaceo,  r.  to  lie. 

*Lacteo,  — ,  to  suck. 

^Langueo,  — ,  to  be  faint. 

*Lateo,  to  lie  hid. 

^Lenteo,  — ,  to  be  slow. 

*  Liceo,  to  be  valued. 

*Llveo,  — ,  to  be  livid. 

=*Maceo,  — ,  to  be  lean. 

*Madeo,  to  be  wet. 

^Maereo,  — ,  to  grieve. 

Mereo,  r.  to  deserve. 


130 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS 


§168. 


f  commereo,  to  fully  de¬ 
serve.  f  demereo,  d.  to 
earn,  f emereo,  to  serve 
out  one's  time.  *fper- 
mSreo,  — ,  to  go  through 
service,  promereo,  to 
deserve. 

Moneo,  r.  d.  to  advise. 
admoneo,  m.  r.  d.  to  re¬ 
mind.  commoneo,  to 
impress  upon,  praemo¬ 
neo,  to  forewarn. 

=*Muceo,  — ,  to  he  mouldy . 

*Nigreo,  — ,  to  he  hlacJc. 

*Niteo,  to  shine. 

Noceo,  m.  r.  to  hurl. 

=*01eo,  to  smell. 

*Palleo,  to  he  pale. 


^Pareo,  m.  r.  d.  to  obey. 

*  Pateo,  to  he  open . 
Placeo,  to  please. 
^Polleo,  — ,  to  he  able. 

*  Puteo,  to  stink. 
^Putreo,  to  he  putrid. 

*  Renideo,  — ,  to  glitter. 
*Rigeo,  to  he  stiff. 
*Rubeo,  to  be  red. 
^Scateo,  — ,  to  gush  forth. 

*  Seneo,  — ,  to  be  old. 
*Sileo,  d.  to  he  silent. 
^Sordeo,  — ,  to  be  filthy. 

*  Splendeo,  — ,  to  shine. 

*  Squaleo,  — ,  to  he  foul. 

*  Strideo,  — ,  to  creak. 

*  Studeo,  d.  to  study. 
^Stupeo,  to  he  amazed. 


*Sueo,  — ,  to  he  wont. 

Taceo,  r.  d.  to  he  silent. 

*T epeo,  to  be  warm. 

Terreo,  d.  to  terrify.  So 
deterreo,  to  deter,  f  ab¬ 
sterreo,  to  deter.  f con¬ 
terreo,  fexterreo,  fper- 
terreo,  to  frighten. 

*Tlmeo,  d.  to  fear. 

^Torpeo,  — ,  to  be  stiff. 

=*Tumeo,  to  swell. 

Valeo,  r.  to  be  able. 

*  Vegeo,  — ,  to  arouse. 

=*Vieo,  — ,  to  plait.  Pa. 
vietus,  shriveled. 

^  Vi  geo,  to  flourish. 

*Vireo,  to  be  green. 

*Uveo,  — ,  to  he  moist. 


§  168.  The  following  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  are  ir¬ 
regular  in  their  second  or  third  roots  or  in  both. 


Note  1.  As  the  proper  form  of  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  is,  o,  avi,  atum , 
of  the  fourth  io,  ivi ,  itum,  so  that  of  the  second  would  be  eo,  evi,  etum.  Very 
few  of  the  latter  conjugation,  however,  retain  this  form,  but  most  of  them,  as 
noticed  in  §  165,  Rem.  1,  drop  in  the  second  root  the  connecting  vowel,  e ,  and 
those  in  veo  drop  ve ;  as,  cdveo ,  ( cdvHvi)  cam ,  (cavetum  or  cavitum)  cautum. 
Others,  imitating  the  form  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  whose  gen¬ 
eral  root  ends  in  a  consonant,  add  s  to  form  the  second  and  third  roots.  Cf. 
§  165,  Rem.  1,  and  §171. 

Note  2.  Four  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  take  a  reduplication  in  the 
parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  viz.  mordeo ,  pendeo,  spondeo ,  and  tondeo. 
See  $  163.  Rem. 


Aboleo,  -evi,  -itum,  r.  d.  to  efface . 

*  Algeo,  alsi,  to  he  cold. 

Ardeo,  arsi,  arsum,  r.  to  burn. 

Audeo,  ausus  sum,  (rarely  vaisi,  whence 

ausim,  §  183,  R.  1,)  r.  d.  to  dare. 
Augeo,  auxi,  auctum,  r.  d.  to  increase. 
Caveo,  cavi,  cautum,  m.  d.  to  beware. 
Censeo,  censui,  censum,  d.  to  think. 
recenseo,  -ui,  -um  or  -Itum.  *per- 
censeo,  -ui.  ^succenseo,  -ui,  d. 
Cieo,  civi,  citum,  to  excite.  There  is 
a  cognate  form,  cio,  of  the  fourth 
conjugation ,  both  of  the  simple  verb 
and  of  its  compounds.  The  penult  of 
the  participles  excitus  and  concitus 
is  common ,  and  that  of  accitus  is  al¬ 
ways  long. 

^Connlveo,  -nlvi,  to  wink  at. 

Deleo,  -evi,  -etum,  d.  to  blot  out. 

Doceo,  docui,  doctum,  d.  to  teach. 

*  Faveo,  favi,  fiiuturus,  to  favor. 
*Ferveo,  ferbui,  to  boil.  Sometimes 

fervo,  vi,  of  the  third  conjugation. 
Fleo,  flevi,  fletum,  r.  d.  to  weep. 

Foveo,  fovi,  fotum,  d.  to  cherish. 


^Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shine.  Fulgo,  of  the 
third  conjugation ,  is  also  in  use. 

Gaudeo,  gavisus  sum,  r.  to  rejoice. 
§  142,  2. 

*Haereo,  haesi,  haesurus, .  to  stick.  So 
ad-,  co-,  in-,  ob-  haereo ;  but  ^subhae¬ 
reo,  — . 

Indulgeo,  indulsi,  indultum,  r.  d.  to  in¬ 
dulge. 

Jubeo,  jussi,  jussum,  r.  d.  to  order. 

*  Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine,  polluceo,  -luxi, 
-luctum. 

*Lugeo,  luxi,  d.  to  mourn. 

*Maneo,  mansi,  mansum,  m.  r.  d.  to 
remain. 

Misceo,  miscui,  mistum  or  mixtum, 
misturus,  d.  to  mix. 

Mordeo,  momordi,  morsum,  d.  to  bite. 
remordeo,  -di,  -morsum,  r. 

Moveo,  movi,  motum,  r.  d.  to  move. 

Mulceo,  mulsi,  mulsum,  d.  to  soothe. 
permulceo,  permulsi,  permulsum  and 
permulctum,  to  rub  gently. 

*Mulgeo,  mulsi  or  mulxi,  to  milk. 
emulgeo,  — ,  emulsum,  to  milk  out. 


§  169-171.  VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS 


131 


Neo,  nevi,  netum,  to  spin. 

*Paveo,  pavi,  d.  to  fear. 

=*Pendeo,  pependi,  to  hang.  *impen- 
deo,  — .  propendeo,  — ,  propensum. 

Pleo,  (obsolete),  compleo,  -e vi,  -e tum, 
to  Jill.  So  the  other  compounds. 

Prandeo,  prandi,  pransum,  r.  to  dine. 

Kldeo,  risi,  risum,  m.  r.  d.  to  laugh. 

*Sedeo,  sedi,  sessum,  m.  r.  to  sit. 
The  compounds  icith  monosyllabic  pre¬ 
positions  change  e  into  1,  in  the  Jirst 
root ;  as ,  insideo,  insedi,  insessum, 
^dissideo,  -sedi.  So  praesideo,  and 
rarely  circumsideo. 

Soleo,  solitus  sum  and  rarely  solui,  to 
be  accustomed.  \  142,  2. 

*Sorbeo,  sorbui,  to  suck  in.  So  ^ex¬ 
sorbeo:  but  ^resorbeo,  — .  *absor- 
beo,  -sorbui  or  -sorpsi. 


Spondeo,  spopondi,  sponsum,  to  pro - 
raise.  See  §  163,  Rem. 

*  Strideo,  idi,  to  whiz. 

Suadeo,  suasi,  suasum,  r.  d.  to  advise. 

Tepeo,  tenui,  tentum,  r.  d.  to  hold.  The 
compounds  ( hange  e  into  i  in  the  Jirst 
and  second  roots ;  as ,  detineo,  deti¬ 
nui,  detentum,  ^attineo,  -tinui.  So 
pertineo. 

Tergeo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe.  Tergo, 
of  the  third  conjugation ,  is  also  in  use. 

Tondeo,  totondi,  tonsum,  to  shear.  The 
compounds  have  the  perfect  tondi. 

Torqueo,  torsi,  tortum,  d.  to  twist. 

Torreo,  torrui,  tostum,  to  roast. 

^Turgeo,  tursi,  to  swell. 

*Urgeo  or  urgueo,  ursi,  d.  to  urge . 

Video,  vidi,  visum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  see . 

Voveo,  vovi,  votum,  d.  to  vow. 


§  16®.  Impersonal  Verbs 

Decet,  decuit,  it  becomes. 

Libet,  libuit  or  libitum  est,  it  pleases , 
is  agreeable. 

Licet,  licuit  or  licitum  est,  it  is  lawful , 
or  permitted. 

Liquet,  liquit,  it  is  clear ,  evident. 

Miseret,  miseruit  or  miseritum  est, 
it  moves  to  pity ;  miseret  me,  I  pity. 

Oportet,  oportuit,  it  behooves. 


of  the  Second  Conjugation . 

Piget,  piguit  or  pigitum  est,  d.  it  trou¬ 
bles,  grieves. 

Poenitet,  poenituit,  poeniturus,  d.  it  re¬ 
pents  ;  poenitet  me,  I  regret. 

Pudet,  puduit  or  puditum  est,  d. ;  it 
shames ;  pudet  me,  I  am  ashamed. 

Taedet,  taeduit  or  taesum  est,  it  disgusts 
or  wearies,  pertaedet,  pertaesum  est. 


Note.  Lubet  is  sometimes  written  for  libet,  especially  in  the  comic  writers. 
§  l1?®#  Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 


Fateor,  fassus,  r.  d.  p.  to  confess.  The  ^Medeor,  d.  to  cure. 

compounds  change  a  into  i  in  the  first  Mereor,  meritus,  to  deserve. 

root,  and  into  e  in  the  third ;  as,  con-  Misereor,  miseritus  or  misertus,  to  pity. 

fiteor,  confessus,  d.  p.  to  aclcnowl-  Polliceor,  pollicitus,  p.  to  promise. 

edge,  diffiteor,  to  deny,  profi-  Reor,  ratus,  to  think,  suppose. 

teor,  professus,  d.  p.  to  declare.  Tueor,  tuitus,  d.  p.  to  protect. 

Liceor,  licitus,  to  bid  a  price.  Vereor,  veritus,  d.  p.  to  fear. 


THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

§  171.  In  the  third  conjugation,  when  the  first  root  ends 
with  a  consonant,  the  second  root  is  regularly  formed  by  adding 
s  ;  when  it  ends  with  a  vowel,  the  first  and  second  roots  are  the 
same :  the  third  root  is  formed  by  adding  t ;  as,  carpo,  carpsf, 
carptam ;  arguo,  argu?’,  argutam. 

In  annexing  s  and  t,  certain  changes  occur  in  the  final  consonant 
of  the  root : — 


1.  The  palatals  c,  g,  qu ,  and  also  h,  at  the  end  of  the  first  root,  form  with  s 
the  double  letter  x  in  the  second  root ;  in  the  third  root,  c  remains,  and  the 
others  are  changed  into  c  before  t ;  as,  dico,  (dicsi,  i.  e.),  dixi,  dictum;  rego, 
( regsi ,  i.  e.),  rexi,  rectum;  veho ,  vexi,  vectum;  coquo ,  coxi,  coctum. 


132  VERBS. — SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.  §  171. 


Note.  Fluo  and  struo  form  their  second  and  third  roots  after  the  analogy  of 
verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  a  palatal  or  h. 


2.  B  is  changed  into  p  before  s  and  t ;  as,  scribo ,  scripsi ,  scriptum. 

3.  D  and  t ,  before  s,  are  either  dropped,  or  changed  into  s ;  as,  claudo,  clausi ; 
cedo ,  cessi;  mitto ,  misi.  Cf.  §  56, 1,  Rem.  1.  After  m,  p  is  sometimes  inserted 
before  s  and  t ;  as,  sumo ,  sumpsi ,  sumptum.  R  is  changed  to  s  before  s  and  t  in 
gero  and  uro. 

4.  Some  other  consonants  are  dropped,  or  changed  into  s,  in  certain  verbs. 

Exc.  1.  Many  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  a  consonant,  do  not 
add  s  to  form  the  second  root. 


(a.)  Of  these,  some  have  the  second  root  the  same  as  the  first,  but  the  vowel 
of  the  second  root,  if  a  monosyllable,  is  long ;  as, 

Bibo,  Excudo,  Ico,  Mando,  Scabo,  Solvo,  Verro, 

Edo,  Fodio,  Lambo,  Prehendo,  Scando,  Strido,  Verto, 

Emo,  Fugio,  Lego,  Psallo,  Sido,  Tollo,  Volvo; 

to  which  add  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete  cando,  fendo ,  and  nuo. 

( b .)  Some  make  a  change  in  the  first  root.  Of  these,  some  change  a  vowel, 
some  drop  a  consonant,  some  prefix  a  reduplication,  others  admit  two  or  more 
of  these  changes ;  as, 


Ago,  egi. 
Findo,  tidi. 
Jacio,  jeci. 
Scindo,  scidi. 


Capio,  cepi. 
Frango,  fregi. 
Linquo,  liqui. 
Sisto,  stiti. 


Facio,  feci. 
Fundo,  fudi. 
Rumpo,  rupi. 
Vinco,  vici. 


Those  which  have  a  reduplication  are 

Cado,  cecidi.  Caedo,  cecidi. 

Curro,  cucurri.  Disco,  didici. 

Pago,  ( obs .)  pepigi  Parco,  peperci. 

and  pegi.  Pedo,  pepedi. 

Pendo,  pependi.  Posco,  poposci. 

Tango,  tetigi.  Tendo,  tetendi. 


Cano,  cecini. 
Fallo,  fefelli. 
Pario,  peperi. 
Pello,  pepuli. 
Pungo,  pupugi. 
Tundo,  tutudi. 


Exc.  2.  Some,  after  the  analogy  of  the  second  conjugation,  add  u 
to  the  first  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 

Alo,  alui,  etc.  Consulo,  Gemo,  Rapio,  Tremo, 

Colo,  Depso,  Geno,  {obs.)  Strepo,  Volo, 

Compesco,  Fremo,  Molo,  Texo,  Vomo. 

Meto,  messui ;  and  pono,  posui ;  add  su,  with  a  change  in  the  root. 

Exc.  3.  The  following,  after  the  analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation, 
add  w  to  the  first  root : — 

Arcesso,  Cupio,  Lacesso,  Rudo,  Tero,  dropping  g. 

Capesso,  Incesso,  Peto,  Quasro,  with  a  change  of  r  into  s. 

Exc.  4.  The  following  add  v,  with  a  change  in  the  root;  those  in 
no  and  sco  dropping  n  and  sc,  and  those  having  er  before  n  changing 
it  to  re  or  ra : — 


Cresco,  Pasco,  Scisco,  Sperno,  Lino,  Sero, 

Nosco,  Quiesco,  Cerno,  Sterno,  Sino,  to  sow. 

Exc.  5.  (a.)  The  third  root  of  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  d  or  t , 
and  some  in  g ,  add  s,  instead  of  t ,  to  the  root,  either  dropping  the  d ,  t , 
and  g,  or  changing  them  into  s ;  as,  claudo ,  clausum ;  gl efendo ,  de¬ 
fensum  ;  cedo ,  cessum ;  flecto ,  flexum ;  figo ,  fixum .  But  the  com¬ 
pounds  of  do  add  it ;  as,  perdo,  perditum. 


§172, 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


133 


( b .)  The  following,  also,  add  s ,  with  a  change  of  the  root : — 

Excello,  Fallo,  Pello,  Spargo,  Verro. 

Percello,  Mergo,  Premo,  Vello, 

Exc.  6.  The  following  add  /,  with  a  change  of  the  root ;  those 
having  n ,  nc,  ng ,  nqu ,  or  mp  at  the  end  of  the  first  root  dropping  n 
and  m  in  the  third : — 

•Cerno,  Fingo,  Gero,  Sero,  Sperno,  Stringo,  Uro, 

Colo,  Frango,  Rumpo,  Sisto,  Sterno,  Tero,  Vinco; 

to  which  add  the  compounds  of  linquo,  and  verbs  in  sco  with  the  second  root 
in  v ;  the  latter  drop  sc  before  t;  as,  nosco,  novi ,  notum;  except  pasco ,  which 
drops  c  only. 

Exc.  7.  (a.)  The  following  have  it : — 

Bibo,  Elicio,  Molo,  Pono,  with  a  change  of  on  into  os. 

Geno,  ( obs .  form  of  gigno,)  Vomo,  Sino,  dropping  n. 

(6.)  The  following,  like  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  add  it  to 
the  first  root : — 

Arcesso,  Cupio,  Peto,  Tero,  dropping  e. 

Facesso,  Lacesso,  Quaero,  ivith  a  change  of  r  into  s. 

For  other  irregularities  occurring  in  this  conjugation,  see  §  172-174. 

§172.  The  following  list  contains  most  of  the  simple  verbs, 
both  regular  and  irregular,  in  the  third  conjugation,  with  such  of 
their  compounds  as  require  particular  notice : — 


Acuo,  acui,  acutum,  d.  to  sharpen. 

Ago,  egi,  actum,  r.  d.  to  drive.  So  cir¬ 
cumago,  cogo,  and  p&rago.  ^ambi¬ 
go,  — ,  to  doubt.  So  satago.  The 
other  compounds  change  a  into  !,  in 
the  first  root ;  as,  exigo,  exegi,  ex¬ 
actum,  to  drive  out.  ^prodigo,  -egi, 
to  squander.  See  §  189,  2. 

Alo,  alui,  altum,  and  later  alitum,  d. 
to  nourish. 

*Ango,  anxi,  to  strangle. 

Arguo,  argui,  argutum,  d.  to  convict. 

Arcesso,  -cesslvi,  -cessitum,  r.  d.  to 
call  for.  Pass.  inf.  arcessiri  or  ar¬ 
cessi. 

^Batuo,  batui,  d.  to  beat. 

Bibo,  bibi,  bibitum,  d.  to  drink. 

*Cado,  cecidi,  casurus,  to  fall.  The 
compounds  change  a  into  5,  in  the  first 
root ,  and  drop  the  reduplication ;  as, 
occido,  -eidi,  -casum,  r.  to  set. 

Caedo,  cecidi,  caesum,  r.  d.  to  cut.  The 
compounds  change  ae  into  I,  and  drop 
the  reduplication ;  as,  occido,  -cldi, 
-clsum. 

Can  do,  {obsolete,)  synonymous  with  can¬ 
deo  of  the  second  conjugation.  Hence 
accendo,  -cendi,  -censum,  d.  to  kindle . 
So  incendo,  succendo. 

*Cano,  cecini,  d.  to  sing.  The  com¬ 
pounds  change  a  into  I ;  as,  ^concino, 
12 


-clnui.  So  occino,  praecino.  Nacci¬ 
no,  — .  So  incino,  intercino,  succi¬ 
no,  recino. 

^Capesso,  -Ivi,  r.  d.  to  undertake. 

Capio,  cepi,  captum,  r.  d.  to  take.  So 
antecapio.  The  other  compounds 
change  a  into  i,  in  the  first  root,  and 
into  e  in  the  third;  as,  decipio,  dece¬ 
pi,  deceptum. 

Carpo,  carpsi,  carptum,  d.  to  pluck. 
The  compounds  change  a  into  e ;  as, 
decerpo,  decerpsi,  decerptum. 

Cedo,  cessi,  cessum,  r.  to  yield. 

Cello,  {obsolete.)  excello,  -cellui,  -cel¬ 
sum,  to  excel.  =*ant6cello,  — .  So 
praecello,  r£cello.  percello,  -culi, 
-culsum,  to  strike. 

Cemo,  crevi,  cretum,  d.  to  decree. 

*  Cerno,  — ,  to  see. 

Cingo,  cinxi,  cinctum,  d.  to  gird. 

*  Clango,  — ,  to  clang. 

Claudo,  clausi,  clausum,  r.  d.  to  shut. 

The  compounds  change  au  into  u ;  as, 
occludo,  occlusi,  occlusum,  to  shut 
up. 

Claudo,  — ,  to  limp. 

*f  Clepo,  clepsi,  rarely  clepi,  to  steal. 

Colo,  colui,  cultum,  d.  to  till,  focculo, 
-cului,  -cultum,  d.  to  hide. 

Como,  compsi,  comptum,  to  deck. 

*  Compesco,  -pescui,  to  restrain. 


134 


VERBS. — SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


§172. 


Consulo,  -sului,  -sultum,  m.  r.  d.  to 
consult. 

Coquo,  coxi,  coctum,  m.  d.  to  cook. 

Credo,  credidi,  creditum,  r.  d.  to  be¬ 
lieve. 

*  Cresco,  crevi,  to  grow,  concresco, 
-crevi,  -cretum. 

Cubo  is  of  the  frst  conjugation.  Cf. 
§  165.  ^accumbo,  -cubui;  to  lie  down . 
So  the  other  compounds  which  insert  m. 

*Cudo,  — ,  to  forge,  excudo,  -cudi, 
-cusum,  d.  to  stamp. 

CupiOj  cupivi,  cupitum,  d.  to  desire . 
Subj.  imperf.  cupiret.  Lucr.  1,  72. 

*Curro,  cucurri,  cursurus,  to  run. 
concurro,  succurro,  and  transcurro, 
drop  the  reduplication ;  the  other  com¬ 
pounds  sometimes  drop ,  and  sometimes 
retain  it ;  as ,  decurro,  decurri,  and 
decucurri,  decursum,  ^antecurro, 
— .  So  circumcurro. 

*Dego,  degi,  d.  to  live. 

Demo,  dempsi,  demptum,  r.  d.  to  take 
away. 

t Depso,  depsui,  depstum,  to  knead. 

Dico,  dixi,  dictum,  u.  r.  d.  to  say. 

**Disco,  didici,  disciturus,  d.  to  learn. 

^Dispesco,  — ,  to  separate. 

Divido,  divisi,  divisum,  r.  d.  to  divide . 

Do  is  of  the  frst  conjugation,  abdo, 
-didi,  -ditum,  d.  to  hide.  So  condo, 
indo,  addo,  -didi,  -ditum,  r.  d.  to 
add.  So  dedo,  edo,  prodo,  reddo, 
trado,  vendo,  fdldo,  -didi,  -ditum, 
to  distribute.  So  abdo,  subdo,  perdo, 
-didi,  -ditum,  m.  r.  d.  abscondo,  -di 
or  -didi,  -ditum  or  -sum. 

Duco,  duxi,  ductum,  m.  r.  d.  to  lead. 

Edo,  edi,  esum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  eat. 

Exuo,  exui,  exutum,  d.  to  strip  off. 

Emo,  emi,  emptum,  r.  d.  to  buy.  So 
coemo.  The  other  compounds  change 
e  to  i  /  as,  eximo,  -emi,  -emptum. 

Facesso,  -cessi,  -cessltum,  to  execute. 

Facio,  feci,  factum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  do. 
Compounded  with  a  preposition ,  it 
changes  a  into  i  in  the  frst  root ,  and 
into  e  in  the  third ,  makes  -fice  in  the 
imperative ,  and  has  a  regular  passive. 
Compounded  with  other  words ,  it  re¬ 
tains  a  when  of  this  conjugation ,  makes 
fac  in  the  imperative ,  and  has  the  pas¬ 
sive,  fio,  factum.  See  §  180. 

Fallo,  fefelli,  falsum,  d.  to  deceive. 
*refello,  -felli,  d.  to  refute. 

Fendo,  ( obsolete . )  defendo,  -fendi,  -fen- 
sum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  defend,  offendo, 
-fendi,  -fensum,  d.  to  offend. 

Fero,  tuli,  latum,  r.  d.  to  bear.  See 
§  179.  A  perfect  tetuli  is  rare.  Its 
compounds  are  affero,  attiili,  allatum ; 


aufero,  abstuli,  ablatum;  differo, 
distuli,  dilatum ;  confero,  contuli, 
collatum;  infero,  intuli,  illatum; 
offero,  obtuli,  oblatum;  effero,  ex¬ 
tuli,  elatum ;  suffero,  sustuli,  subla¬ 
tum  ;  and  circum-,  per-,  trans-,  de-, 
pro-,  antS-,  praef  ero,  -tuli,  -latum. 

*Fervo,  vi,  to  ooil.  Cf.  ferveo,  2d  conj. 

Fido,  — ,  fisus,  to  trust.  See  §  162,  18. 
confido,  confisus  sum  or  confidi,  to 
rely  on.  diffido,  diffisus  sum,  to 
distrust. 

Figo,  fixi,  fixum,  r.  rarely  fictum,  tofx. 

Findo,  fidi,  fissum,  d.  to  cleave. 

Fingo,  finxi,  fictum,  d.  to  feign. 

Flecto,  flexi,  flexum,  r.  d.  to  bend. 

*Fligo,  flixi,  to  dash.  So  confligo, 
affligo,  -flixi,  -flictum,  to  afflict.  So 
infligo,  profligo  is  of  the  frst  conju¬ 
gation. 

Fluo,  fluxi,  fluxum,  (fluctum,  obs .)  r. 
to  flow. 

Fodio,  fodi,  fossum,  d.  to  dig.  Old 
pres.  inf.  pass,  fodiri:  so  also  ef- 
fodiri. 

Frango,  fregi,  fractum,  r.  d.  to  break. 
The  compounds  change  a  into  i,  in  the 
frst  root;  as,  infringo,  infregi,  in¬ 
fractum,  to  break  in  upon. 

*Fremo,  fremui,  d.  to  roar,  howl. 

Frendo,  — ,  fresum  or  fressum,  to  gnash. 

Frigo,  frixi,  frictum,  rarely  frixum,  to 
roast. 

*Fugio,  fugi,  fugiturus,  d.  to  flee. 

*Fulgo,  —,to  flash. 

Fundo,  fudi,  fusum,  r.  d.  to  pour. 

*Furo,  — ,  to  rage. 

*Gcmo,  gemui,  d.  to  groan. 

Gero,  gessi,  gestum,  r.  d.  to  bear. 

Gigno,  (obsolete geno,)  genui,  genitum, 
r.  d.  to  beget. 

*  Glisco,  — ,  to  grow. 

*  Glubo,  — ,  to  peel,  deglubo,  — , 
-gluptum. 

Gruo,  (obsolete.)  ^congruo,  -grui,  to 
agree.  So  ingruo. 

Ico,  ici,  ictum,  r.  to  strike. 

Imbuo,  imbui,  imbutum,  d.  to  imbue. 

^Incesso,  -cessivi  or  -cessi,  to  attack. 

f  Induo,  indui,  indutum,  to  put  on. 

Jacio,  jeci,  jactum,  d.  to  cast.  The 
compounds,  change  a  into  I  in  the  first 
7'oot,  and  into  e  in  the  third.  (§  163, 
Exc.  3);  as,  rejicio,  rejeci,  rejectum. 

Jungo,  j’unxi,  junctum,  r.  d.  to  join. 

Lacesso,  -cesslvi,  -cessltum,  r.  d,  to  pro¬ 
voke. 

Lacio,  ( obsolete. )  The  compounds  change 
a  into  i ;  as,  allicio,  -lexi,  -lectum,  d. 
to  allure.  So  illicio,  pellicio,  elicio, 
-licui,  -licitum,  to  draw  out. 


§172. 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS, 


135 


Laedo,  laesi,  laesum,  m.  r.  to  hurt.  The 
compounds  change  ae  into  I ;  as ,  illido, 
illisi,  illisum,  to  dash  against. 

=*Lambo,  Iambi,  to  lick . 

Lego,  legi,  lectum,  r.  d.  to  read.  So 
allego,  perlego,  praelego,  relego,  sub¬ 
lego,  and  translego;  the  other  com¬ 
pounds  change  e  into  1 ;  as,  colligo, 
collegi,  collectum,  to  collect .  But  the 
following  add  s  to  form  the  second 
root ;  §  171,  1 ;  diligo,  -lexi,  -lectum, 
to  love,  intelligo,  -lexi,  -lectum,  u. 
r.  d.  to  understand,  negligo,  -lexi, 
-lectum,  r.  d.  to  neglect. 

Lingo,  — ,  linctum,  d.  to  lick.  *delin- 
go,  — ,  to  lick  up. 

Lino,  livi  or  levi,  litum,  d.  to  daub. 

*Linquo,  liqui,  d.  to  leave,  relinquo, 
-liqui,  -lictum,  r.  d.  delinquo,  -liqui, 
-lictum.  So  derelinquo. 

Ludo,  lusi,  lusum,  m.  r.  to  play. 

*Luo,  lui,  luiturus,  d.  to  atone,  abluo, 
-lui,  -lutum,  r.  d.  diluo,  -lui,  -lu¬ 
tum,  d.  So  eluo. 

Mando,  mandi,  mansum,  d.  to  chew. 

Mergo,  mersi,  mersum,  r.  d.  to  dip.  So 
immergo;  but  pres.  inf.  pass,  im- 
mergeri,  Col.  5,  9,  3. 

Mjeto,  messui,  messum,  d.  to  reap. 

Metuo,  metui,  metutum,  d.  to  fear. 

*Mingo,  minxi,  mictum,  ( sup .)  to  make 
water. 

Minuo,  minui,  minutum,  d.  to  lessen. 

Mitto,  misi,  missum,  r.  d.  to  send. 

Molo,  molui,  molitum,  to  grind. 

Mungo,  (obsolete.)  emungo,  -munxi, 
-munctum,  to  wipe  the  nose. 

Necto,  nexi,  nexum,  d.  to  knit,  innec¬ 
to,  -nexui,  -nexum.  So  annecto, 
connecto. 

*Ningo  or  -guo,  ninxi,  to  snow. 

Nosco,  novi,  notum,  d.  to  learn,  ag¬ 
nosco,  -novi,  -ni tum,  d.  to  recognize. 
cognosco,  -novi,  -nitum,  u.  r.  d.  to 
know.  So  recognosco,  ^internosco, 
novi,  to  distinguish  between,  praecog¬ 
nosco,  — ,  praecognitum,  to  fore-know. 
^dignosco,  — .  So  praenosco,  ignos¬ 
co,  -novi,  -notum,  d.  to  pardon. 

Nubo,  nupsi,  or  nupta  sum,  nuptum, 
m.  r.  to  marry. 

Nuo,  ( obsolete ,)  to  nod.  *abnuo,  -nui, 
-nuiturus,  d.  to  refuse.  *annuo,  -nui. 
So  innuo,  renuo. 

*01o,  olui,  to  smell. 

Pando,  — ,  passum  or  pansum,  to  open. 
So  expando,  dispando,  — ,  -pansum. 

Pago,  (obs.  the  same  as  paco  whence  pa¬ 
ciscor,)  pepigi,  pactum,  to  bargain: 
hence 

Pango,  panxi  or  pegi,  pactum,  panctu¬ 


rus,  d.  to  drive  in.  compingo,  -pggi, 
-pactum.  So  impingo.  =*oppango, 
-pegi,  ^depango,  — .  So  repango, 
suppingo. 

*Parco,  peperci  rarely  parsi,  parsurus, 
to  spare.  Some  of  the  compounds 
change  a  toe;  as,  ^comparco  or  com- 
perco.  ^imperco,  — . 

Pario,  pejperi,  partum,  pariturus,  d.  to 
bring  forth.  The  compounds  are  of 
the  fourth  conjugation. 

Pasco,  pavi,  pastum,  m.  r.  d.  to  feed. 

Pecto,  — ,  pexum,  and  pectitum,  d.  to 
comb.  So  depecto,  repecto. 

*Pedo,  pepedi,  ^oppedo,  — . 

Pello,  pepuli,  pulsum,  d.  to  drive.  Its 
compounds  are  not  reduplicated. 

Pendo,  pependi,  pensum,  r.  to  weigh. 
The  compounds  drop  the  reduplication. 
See  §  163?  Exc.  1. 

Peto,  petivi,  petitum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ask. 

Pingo,  pinxi,  pictum,  to  paint. 

Pinso,  pinsi,  pinsitum,  pinsum  or  pis- 
tum,  to  pound. 

^Plango,  planxi,  plancturus,  io  lament . 

Plaudo,  plausi,  plausum,  d.  to  clap ,  ap¬ 
plaud.  So  applaudo.  circum¬ 
plaudo,  — .  The  other  compounds 
change  au  into  6. 

Plecto,  — ,  plexum,  d.  to  twine. 

*Pluo,  plui  or  pluvi,  to  rain. 

Pono,  posui,  (anciently  posivi),  posi¬ 
tum,  r.  d.  to  place. 

*f  Porricio,  — ,  to  offer  sacrifice. 

*Posco,  poposci,  d.  to  demand. 

Prendof0'  j  "sum>  r-  d.  *  seize. 

Premo,  pressi,  pressum,  r.  d.  to  press . 
The  compounds  change  e  into  i,  in  the 
first  root;  as,  imprimo,  impressi, 
impressum,  to  impress. 

Promo,  prompsi,  promptum,  r.  d.  to 
bring  out. 

^Psallo,  psalli,  to  play  on  a  stringed  in¬ 
strument. 

Pungo,  pupugi,  punctum,  to  prick. 
compungo,  -punxi,  -punctum.  So 
dispungo,  expungo,  interpungo,  — , 
-punctum,  ^repungo,  — . 

Quaero,  quaesivi,  quaesitum,  m.  r.  d.  to 
seek.  The  compounds  change  ae  into 
i;  as,  requiro,  requisivi,  requisitum, 
to  seek  again. 

Quatio,  — ,  quassum,  to  shake.  The 
compounds  change  qua  into  cu;  as, 
concutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  d.  dis¬ 
cutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  r.  d. 

Quiesco,  quievi,  quietum,  r.  d.  to  rest. 

Rado,  rasi,  rasum,  d.  to  shave. 

Rapio,  rapui,  raptum,  r.  d.  to  snatch. 
The  compounds  change  a  into  i  in  the 


136 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


§172. 


Jirst  and  second  roots ,  and  into  e  in 
the  third;  as ,  diripio,  -ripui,  -reptum, 
m.  r.  So  eripio  and  praeripio. 

Rego,  rexi,  rectum,  r.  d.  to  rule.  The 
compounds  change  e  into  !,  in  the  first 
root ;  as ,  dirigo,  direxi,  directum. 
Spergo,  ( for  perrigo),  perrexi,  r.  to 
go  forward .  surgo  (for  surrigo), 
surrexi,  surrectum,  r.  d.  to  rise.  So 
porrigo  ( for  prorigo),  to  stretch  out . 

=*Repo,  repsi,  to  creep. 

Rodo,  rosi,  rosum,  r.  to  gnaw,  ab-,  ar-, 
e-,  ob-,  prae-rodo,  want  the  perfect. 

*Rudo,  rudivi,  to  bray. 

Rumpo,  rupi,  ruptum,  r.  d.  to  break. 

Ruo,  rui,  rutum,  ruiturus,  to  fall. 
diruo,  -rui,  -rutum,  d.  So  obruo, 
^corruo,  -rui.  So  irruo. 

*Sapio,  sapivi,  to  be  wise.  The  com¬ 
pounds  change  a  into  i ;  as ,  ^resipio, 
-siplvi  or  -srpui.  *desipio,  — ,  to  be 
silly.  • 

Scabo,  scabi,  to  scratch. 

Scalpo,  scalpsi,  scalptum,  to  engrave. 

Salo  or  sallo,  —  salsum,  to  salt. 

^Scando,  — ,  d.  to  climb.  The  compounds 
change  a  into  e ;  as,  ascendo,  ascendi, 
ascensum,  r.  d.  descendo,  descendi, 
(anciently  descendidi,)  descensum. 

Scindo,  scidi,  ( anciently  sciscidi),  scis¬ 
sum,  d.  to  cut. 

Scisco,  scivi,  scitum,  d.  to  ordain. 

Scribo,  scripsi,  scriptum,  r.  d.  to  write. 

Sculpo,  sculpsi,  sculptum,  d.  to  carve. 

Sero,  sevi,  satum,  r.  d.  to  sow.  conse¬ 
ro,  -sevi,  -situm.  So  insSro,  r.,  and 
obsero. 

Sero,  — ,  sertum,  to  entwine.  Its  com- 
poundshave  -serui;  as,  assero,  -serui, 
-sertum,  r.  d. 

*Serpo,  serpsi,  to  creep. 

*Sldo,  sidi,  to  settle.  Its  compounds  have 
generally  sedi,  sessum,  from  sedeo. 

*Sino,  sivi,  siturus,  to  permit,  desino, 
desivi,  desitum,  r.  §  284,  R.  3,  Exc.  2. 

Sisto,  stiti,  statum,  to  stop,  ^absisto, 
-stiti.  So  the  other  compounds;  but 
circumsisto  wants  the  perfect. 

Solvo,  solvi,  solutum,  r.  d.  to  loose. 

Spargo,  sparsi,  sparsum,  r.  d.  to  spread. 
The  compounds  change  a  intoe;  as, 
respergo,  -spersi,  -spersum ;  but  with 
circum  and  in,  a  sometimes  remains. 

Specio,  (obsolete.)  The  compounds 
change  e  into  i,  in  the  first  root ;  as. 
aspicio,  aspexi,  aspectum,  d.  to  look 
at.  inspicio,  inspexi,  inspectum, 
r.  d. 

Sperno,  sprgvi,  spretum,  d.  to  despise. 

*fSpuo,  spui,  to  spit,  ^respuo,  res¬ 
pui,  df 


Statuo,  statui,  statutum,  d.  to  place. 
The  compounds  change  %,  into  i;  as, 
instituo,  institui,  institutum,  to  in¬ 
stitute. 

Sterno,  stravi,  stratum,  d.  to  strew . 

^Sternuo,  sternui,  to  sneeze. 

*  Sterto,  — ,  to  snore.  desterto,  de- 
stertui. 

^Stinguo,  — ,  to  extinguish,  distinguo, 
distinxi,  distinctum.  So  exstinguo, 

r.  d. 

^Strepo,  strepui,  to  make  a  noise. 

^Strido,  stridi,  to  creak. 

Stringo,  strinxi,  strictum,  r.  d.  to  bind 
or  tie  tight. 

Struo,  struxi,  structum,  d.  to  build. 

Sugo,  suxi,  suctum,  to  suck. 

Sumo,  sumpsi,  sumptum,  r.  d.  to  take. 

Suo,  — ,  sutum,  d.  to  sew.  So  consuo, 
dissuo,  insuo,  -sui,  sutum.  *as- 
suo,  — . 

Tago,  (very  rare),  to  touch.  Hence 

Tango,  tetigi,  tactum,  r.  d.  to  touch. 
The  compounds  change  a  into  i  in  the 
first  root ,  and  drop  the  reduplication  ; 
as,  contingo,  contigi,  contactum,  r. 

Tego,  texi,  tectum,  r.  d.  to  cover. 

=*Temno,  — ,  d.  to  despise,  contemno, 
-tempsi,  -temptum,  d. 

Tendo,  tetendi,  tentum  or  tensum,  to 
stretch.  The  compounds  drop  the  re¬ 
duplication  ;  as,  extendo,  -tendi,  -ten- 
turn  or  -tensum.  So  in-,  os-,  and  re¬ 
tendo.  detendo  has  tensum.  The 
other  compounds  have  tentum. 

Tergo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe.  Ter¬ 
geo,  of  the  second  conjugation  has  the 
same  second  and  third  roots. 

Tero,  trivi,  tritum,  d.  to  rub. 

Texo,  texui,  textum,  d.  to  weave. 

Tingo  or  tinguo,  tinxi,  tinctum,  r.  d. 
to  moisten,  tinge. 

=*Tollo,  anciently  tetuli,  rarely  tolli,  d. 
to  raise.  The  perfect  and  supine  sus¬ 
tuli  and  sublatum  from  suffero  take 
the  place  of  the  perfect  and  supine  of 
tollo  and  sustollo,  ^sustollo,  — ,  r. 
to  raise  up,  to  take  away,  ^attollo, 
— .  So  extollo. 

Traho,  traxi,  tractum,  r.  d.  to  draw. 

*Tremo,  tremui,  d.  to  tremble. 

Tribuo,  tribui,  tributum,  r.  d.  to  as¬ 
cribe. 

Trudo,  trusi,  trusum,  to  thrust. 

Tundo,  tutudi,  tunsum  or  tusum,  to 
beat.  The  compounds  drop  the  redu¬ 
plication,  and  have  tusum.  Yet  con¬ 
tunsum,  detunsum,  obtunsum,  and 
retunsum,  are  also  found. 

Ungo,  (or  -guo),  unxi,  unctura,  d.  to 
anoint . 


§  173. 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS, 


137 


Uro,  ussi,  ustum,  d.  to  burn. 

*Vado,  — ,  to  go.  So  supervado.  The 
other  compounds  have  vasi;  as,  ^eva¬ 
do,  evasi,  r.  So  pervado ;  also  inva¬ 
do,  r.  d. 

Veho,  vexi,  vectum,  r.  to  carry. 

Vello,  velli  or  vulsi,  vulsum,  d.  to  pluck. 
So  avello,  d.,  divello,  evello,  d.,  re¬ 
vello,  revelli,  revulsum.  The  other 
compounds  have  velli  only,  except  in¬ 
tervello,  which  has  vulsi. 


* Vergo,  versi,  to  incline . 

Verro,  — ,  versum,  d.  to  brush. 

Verto,  verti,  versum,  r.  d.  to  turn.  See 
§  174,  Note. 

Vinco,  vici,  victum,  r.  d.  to  conquer . 
*Vlso,  — ,  d.  to  visit. 

*Vlvo,  vixi,  victurus,  d.  to  live. 

*Volo,  volui,  velle  ( fbr  volere),  to  be 
willing .  See  §  178. 

Volvo,  volvi,  volutum,  d.  to  roll. 

Vomo,  vomui,  vomitum,  r.  d.  to  vomit. 


Remark.  Those  verbs  in  io  (and  deponents  in  ior ),  of  the  third  conjugation, 
which  are  conjugated  like  capio  (page  115)  are,  capio ,  cupio,  facio,  fddio,  fugio , 
jacio ,  pario ,  quatio ,  rapio ,  sapio ,  compounds  of  lacio  and  specio ,  and  gradior ,  mo¬ 
lior,  patior ,  and  mdrior:  but  compare  mdrior  in  §  174,  and  drior ,  and  potior 
in  §  177. 


Inceptive  Verbs. 


§  173.  Inceptive  verbs  in  general  either  want  the  third  root, 
or  adopt  that  of  their  primitives:  (see  §  187,  II,  2).  Of  those  derived 
from  nouns  and  adjectives,  some  want  the  second  root,  and  some  form 
it  by  adding  u  to  the  root  of  the  primitive. 

In  the  following  list,  those  verbs  to  which  s  is  added,  have  a  simple  verb  in 
use  from  which  they  are  formed : — 


*Acesco,  acui,  s.  to  grow  sour. 
*iEgresco,  to  grow  sick. 

*  Albesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  white . 

*  Alesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow,  coalesco,  -alui, 
-alitum,  to  grow  together. 

*  Ardesco,  arsi,  s.  to  take  fire. 

*  Aresco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  dry.  *exares- 
co,  -arui.  So  inaresco,  peraresco. 

*  Augesco,  auxi,  s.  to  increase. 
*Calesco,  calui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 

*  Calvesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  bald. 
*Candesco,  candui,  s.  to  grow  white. 
*Canesco,  canui,  s.  to  become  hoary. 
*Claresco,  clarui,  s.  to  become  bright. 

*  Condormisco,  -dormivi,  s.  to  go  to 
sleep. 

*  Conticesco,  -tlcui,  to  become  silent. 

*  Crebresco,  crebui  and  crebrui,  to  in¬ 
crease. 

*  Crudesco,  crudui,  to  become  violent. 

*  Ditesco,  — ,  to  grow  rich. 

*Dulcesco,  — ,  to  grow  sweet. 

*Duresco,  durui,  to  grow  hard. 

*E  vilesco,  evilui,  to  become  worthless. 
*Extlmesco,  -timui,  to  fear  greatly. 
*Fatisco,  — ,  to  gape. 

*Flaccesco,  flaccui,  s.  to  wilt. 
^Fervesco,  ferbui,  s.  to  grow  hot. 
*F16resco,  florui,  s.  to  begin  to  flourish. 
*Fracesco,  fracui,  to  grow  rancid. 
*Frigesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  cold,  ^per¬ 
frigesco,  -frixi.  So  refrigesco. 

12* 


*Frondesco,  — ,  s.  to  put  forth  leaves. 
*Frutlcesco,  — ,  to  put  forth  shoots. 
*Gelasco,  — ,  s.  to  freeze.  So  *conge- 
la&co,  s.  to  congeal. 

*Gemisco,  — ,  s.  to  begin  to  sigh. 

*  Gemmasco,  — ,  to  begin  to  bud. 

*  Generasco,  — ,  s.  to  be  produced. 

*  Grandesco,  — ,  to  grow  large. 

*  Gravesco,  — ,  to  grow  heavy. 
*Haeresco,  — ,  s.  to  adhere. 

*  Hebesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  dull. 
*Horresco,  horrui,  s.  to  grow  rough. 
*Humesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  moist. 
*Ignesco,  — ,  to  become  inflamed. 
*Indolesco,  -dolui,  d.  to  be  grieved. 
*Insolesco,  — ,  to  become  haughty. 
*Integrasco,  — ,  to  be  renewed. 

*  Juvenesco,  — ,  to  grow  young. 
*Languesco,  langui,  s.  to  grow  languid. 
*Lapidesco,  — ,  to  become  stone. 
*Latesco,  — ,  to  grow  broad. 

*Latesco,  to  be  concealed,  s.  *delitesco, 

-Htui ;  *oblitesco,  -lltui. 

*Lentesco,  — ,  to  become  soft. 

*  Liquesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  liquid. 
*del!quesco,  -licui. 

*  Lucesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  light,  to  dawn . 
*Lutesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  muddy. 

*remacresoo,  -ipacrui. 

*Madesco,  m&dui,  s.  to  grow  mpisU 


138 


VERBS. - SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.  §  174. 


*Marcesco,  — ,  s  .to  pine  away. 
^Maturesco,  maturui,  to  ripen. 
^Miseresco,  miserui,  s.  to  pity. 
^Mitesco,  — ,  to  grow  mild. 

^Mollesco,  — ,  to  grow  soft. 

^Mutesco,  — ,  to  become  dumb,  ^ob¬ 
mutesco,  obmutui. 

^Nigresco,  nigrui,  s.  to  grow  black . 
^Nitesco,  nTtui,  s.  to  grow  bright. 
^Notesco,  notui,  to  become  known. 

*  Obbrutesco,  — ,  to  become  brutish . 
^Obdormisco,  — ,  s.  to  fall  asleep. 

=* Obsurdesco,  -surdui,  to  grow  deaf. 

*  Occallesco,  -callui,  to  become  callous. 
^Olesco,  ( scarcely  used.)  ^abolesco, 

-olevi,  s.  to  cease,  adolesco,  -olevi, 
-ultum,  s.  to  grow  up.  exolesco, 
-olevi,  -oletum,  to  grow  out  of  date. 
So  obsolesco,  inolesco,  -olevi,  -oli- 
tum,  d.  to  grow  in  or  on. 

^Pallesco,  pallui,  s.  to  grow  pale. 
^Patesco,  patui,  s.  to  be  opened. 
^Pavesco,  pavi,  s.  to  grow  fearful. 
^Pertimesco,  -timui,  d.  to  fear  greatly. 
^Pinguesco,  — ,  to  grow  fat. 

^Pubesco,  — ,  to  come  to  maturity. 
^Puerasco,  — ,  to  become  a  boy. 

♦Putresco, j  to  become 
^Raresco,  — ,  to  become  thin. 
^Resipisco,  -sipui,  s.  to  recover  one's 
senses. 

^Rigesco,  rigui,  s.  to  grow  cold. 
*Rubesco,  rubui,  s.  to  grow  red.  *eru- 
besco,  -rubui,  d. 


§  174:«  Deponent  Verbs 

Apiscor,  aptus,  to  get.  The  compounds 
change  a  into  i  in  the  frst  root ,  and 
into  e  in  the  third;  as,  adipiscor, 
adeptus.  So  indipiscor. 

Expergiscor,  experrectus,  to  awake. 

^Fatiscor,  to  gape  or  crack  open.  The 
• compounds  change  a  into  e;  as,  defe- 
tiscor,  -fessus. 

Fruor,  fruitus  or  fructus,  fruiturus,  d. 
to  enjoy. 

Fungor,  functus,  r.d.  to  perform. 

Gradior,  gressus,  to  walk.  The  com¬ 
pounds  change  a  into  e ;  as,  aggredior, 
aggressus,  r.  d.  Inf.  pres,  aggredi 
araaaggredlri ;  so,  progredi  and  progre- 
diri ;  and  pres.  ind.  egreditur,  Plaut. 

^Irascor,  to  be  angry. 

Labor,  lapsus,  r.  to  fall. 

^Liquor,  to  melt ,  flow. 

Loquor,  locutus,  r.  d.  to  speak. 

Miniscor,  ( obsolete . )  comminiscor,  com¬ 
mentus,  p.  to  invent,  ^reminiscor, 
to  remember. 


to  become  sound.  *con- 


So 


*Sanesco, 
sanesco,  -sanui. 

^Senesco,  senui,  s.  d.  to  grow  old. 
consenesco. 

*Sentisco,  — ,  s.  to  perceive. 

*  Siccesco,  — ,  to  become  dry. 

*Silesco,  sllui,  s.  to  grow  silent. 

*  Solidesco,  — ,  to  become  solid. 

*  Sordesco,  sordui,  s.  to  become  filthy. 
#Splendesco,  splendui,  s.  to  become 

bright. 

*  Spumesco,  — ,  to  begin  to  foam. 

*  Sterilesco,  — ,  to  become  barren. 
^Stupesco,  stupui,  s.  to  become  aston¬ 
ished. 

Suesco,  suevi,  suetum,  s.  to  become  ac¬ 
customed. 

*  Tabesco,  tabui,  s.  to  waste  away. 
*Teneresco  and  -asco, 

tender. 

^Tepesco,  tepui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 
^Torpesco,  torpui,  s.  to  grow  torpid. 
^Tremisco,  — ,  s.  to  begin  to  tremble. 
^Tumesco,  tumui,  s.  )  .  7  •  .  n 

♦Turgesco!  »■'  \  !9  '° 

^Uvesco,  — ,  to  become  moist. 

*Valesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  strong. 

*  Vanesco,  — ,  to  vanish,  ^evanesco, 
evanui. 

* Veterasco,  veteravi,  to  grow  old. 
^Viresco,  virui,  s.  to  grow  green. 
^Vivesco,  vixi,  s.  to  come  to  life.  *r£- 
vivisco,  -vixi. 


— ,  'to  become 


of  the  Third  Conjugation. 

Morior,  (mori,  rarely  moriri,)  mortuus, 
moriturus,  d.  to  die.  So  emoriri,  Plaut. 
for  emori. 

Nanciscor,  nactus  or  nanctus  to  obtain. 
Nascor,  natus,  nasciturus,  u.  to  be  born. 
Nitor,  nixus  or  nisus,  nisurus,  to  lean 
upon. 

Obliviscor,  oblitus,  d.  p.  to  forget. 
Paciscor,  pactus,  d.  to  bargain.  So 
depaciscor. 

Patior,  passus,  r.  d.  to  suffer,  perpetior, 
-pessus. 

From  plecto,  to  twine ,  come,  amplec¬ 
tor,  amplexus,  d.  p.  complector,  com¬ 
plexus,  p.  So  circumplector. 
Proficiscor,  profectus,  r.  to  depart. 
Queror,  questus,  m.  u.  d.  to  complain. 
*Ringor,  to  snarl. 

Sequor,  secutus,  r.  d.  to  follow. 

Tuor,  tutus,  to  protect. 

Vescor,  d.  to  eat. 

Ulciscor,  ultus,  m.  d.  p.  to  avenge. 
Utor,  usus,  r.  d.  to  use. 


§  175,  176.  VERBS.— SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS, 


139 


Note.  Devertor,  prcevertor ,  revertor,  compounds  of  verto,  are  used  as  depo¬ 
nents  in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses;  revertor  also,  sometimes,  in  the 
perfect. 

FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


§  175.  Verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  regularly  form  their 
second  root  in  w,  and  their  third  in  it ;  as,  audio,  audm,  au- 
dit  um. 

The  following  list  contains  most  regular  verbs  of  this  conjuga¬ 
tion  : — 


Audio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  hear . 
*Cio,  clvi,  to  excite.  Cf.  cieo,  §  168. 
Condio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  season. 

Custodio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  guard. 
*Dormio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  sleep. 
Erudio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  instruct. 
Expedio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  disentangle. 
Flnio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  finish. 

Gestio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  exult ;  desire. 
Impedio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  entangle. 
Insanio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  he  mad. 

Irretio,  -Ivi  or  ii,  to  ensnare. 

Lenio,  -Ivi  or  ii,  d.  to  mitigate. 

Mcllio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  soften. 


^Mugio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  hellcno. 
Munio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  fortify . 
Mutio,  -Ivi,  to  mutter. 

Nutrio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  nourish. 
Partio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  divide. 
Polio,  -Ivi,  d.  to  polish. 

Punio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  punish. 
Redimio,  -Ivi,  to  crown. 

Scio,  -Ivi,  u.  r.  to  know. 

Servio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  serve. 
Sopio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  lull  asleep. 
Stabilio,  -Ivi  or  -Ii,  to  establish. 
Tinnio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  tinkle. 
Vestio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  clothe . 


§  176.  The  following  list  contains  those  verbs  of  the  fourth  con¬ 
jugation  which  form  their  second  and  third  roots  irregularly,  and 
those  which  want  either  or  both  of  them. 

Remark.  The  principal  irregularity  m  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation 
arises  from  following  the  analogy  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  whose 
first  root  ends  in  a  consonant;  as,  sepio ,  sepsi,  septum.  A  few  become  irregular 


by  syncope ;  as,  venio,  veni,  ventum. 

Amicio,  -ui  or  -xi,  amictum,  d.  to  clothe. 

^Balbutio,  — ,  to  stammer. 

Bullio,  ii,  Itum,  to  bubble. 

*Csecutio,  — ,  to  be  dim-sighted. 

*  Cambio,  — ,  to  exchange. 

*  Dementio,  — ,  to  be  mad. 

Effutio,  — ,  to  babble. 

Eo,  Ivi  or  ii,  Itum,  r.  d.  to  go.  The 
compounds  have  only  ii  in  the  perfect, 
except  obeo,  praeeo,  and  subeo,  which 
have  Ivi  or  ii.  All  the  compounds  want 
the  supine  and  perfect  participles , 
except  adeo;  ambio,  ineo,  obeo,  prae¬ 
tereo,  subeo,  circumeo  or  circueo, 
redeo,  transeo,  and  veneo,  venii, 
r.  ( from  venum  eo),  to  be  sola. 

Farcio,  farsi,  fartum  or  farctum,  to 
cram.  The  compounds  generally 
change  a  to  e;  as,  refercio,  -fersi, 
-fertum,  but  con-  and  ef-,  -farcio  and 
-fercio. 

Fastidio,  -ii,  -Itum,  d.  to  loathe. 

*F£rio,  — ,  d.  to  strike. 


*Fer5cio,  — ,  to  be  fierce. 

Fulcio,  fulsi,  fultum,  d.  to  prep  up. 

*  Gannio,  — ,  to  yelp ,  bark. 

*G15cio,  — ,  to  cluck  as  a  hen. 

*Glutio,  Ivi,  or  glutii,  to  swallow . 

Grandio,  — ,  to  make  great. 

*  Grunnio,  grunnii,  to  grunt. 

Haurio,  hausi,  rar.  haurii,  haustum, 

rar.  hausltum,  hausturus,  hausurus, 
u.  d.  to  draw. 

^Hinnio,  — ,  to  neigh. 

*Ineptio,  — ,  to  trifle . 

^Lascivio,  lascivii,  to  be  wanton. 

*  Ligurio,  ligurii,  to  feed  delicately. 

*  Lippio,  — ,  r.  to  be  blear-eyed. 

^Obedio,  obedii,  r.  to  obey. 

Pario  is  of  the  third  conjugation,  but  its 
compounds  are  of  the  fourth,  changing 
a  toe;  as,  aperio,  aperui,  apertum, 
r.  d.  to  open.  Cooperio,  d.  comperio, 
comperi,  compertum,  rarely  dep. 
comperior,  to  find  out.  So  reperio, 
r.  d. 


140 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


177,  178. 


Pavio,  — ,  pavitum,  to  beat . 

*  Prurio,  — ,  to  itch. 

Queo,  qulvi  or  quii,  quitum,  to  be  able. 
So  *nequeo. 

^Raucio,  — ,  r.  to  be  hoarse. 

*Rugio,  — ,  to  roar  as  a  lion. 

Saevio,  saevii,  Itum,  r.  to  rage. 

*  Sagio,  — ,  to  perceive  keenly. 

*Salio,  salui  or  salii,  to  leap.  The 

compounds  change  a  into  I ;  as,  ^absi¬ 
lio,  — .  So  circumsilio.  *assilio,  -ui. 
So  dissilio,  insilio,  ^desilio,  -ui  or  -ii. 
So  exsilio,  resilio,  subsilio.  *transll- 
io,  -ui  or  -Ivi,  d.  So  prosilio. 

Salio,  — ,  Itum,  r.  d.  to  salt. 

Sancio,  sanxi,  sancitum  or  sanctum,  d. 
to  ratify ,  sanction. 


Sarcio,  sarsi,  sartum,  d.  to  patch. 
Sarrio,  -Ivi  or  -ui,  sarritum,  d.  to  weed , 
hoe. 

^Scaturio,  — ,  to  gush  out. 

Sentio,  sensi,  sensum,  r.  to  feel. 
Sepelio,  sepelivi  or  -ii,  rar.  sepbli,  se- 
pultum,  r.  d.  to  bury. 

Sepio,  sepsi,  septum,  d.  to  hedge  in. 

*  Singultio,  — ,  to  sob,  hiccup. 

*  Sitio,  sitii,  to  thirst. 

Suffio,  -ii,  -Itum,  d.  to  fumigate. 
^Tussio,  — ,  to  c&ugh. 

*  Vagio,  vagii,  to  cry. 

Venio,  veni,  ventum,  r.  to  come. 
Vincio,  vinxi,  vinctum,  r.  d.  to  bind. 


Note.  Desiderative  verbs  want  both  the  second  and  third  roots,  except 
these  three ; — *  esurio,  — }  esuritus ,  r.  to  desire  to  eat ;  * nupturio ,  -ivi,  to  desire 
to  marry;  # parturio ,  -ivi,  to  be  in  travail.  See  §  187,  II.  3. 


§  177.  Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation. 


Assentior,  assensus,  r.  d.  p.  to  assent. 

Blandior,  blanditus,  to  flatter. 

Largior,  largitus,  p.  to  give,  bestow. 

Mentior,  mentitus,  r.  p.  to  lie. 

Metior,  mensus  or  metltus,  d.  p.  to 
measure. 

Molior,  molitus,  d.  to  strive,  toil. 

Ordior,  orsus,  d.  p.  to  begin. 

Orior,  ortus,  oriturus,  d.  to  spring  up. 
Except  in  the  present  infinitive,  this 
verb  £eems  to  be  of  the  third  conjuga¬ 
tion. 


Perior,  ( obs .  whence  peritus.)  ex¬ 
perior,  expertus,  r.  d.  to  try.  oppe¬ 
rior,  oppertus  or  opperitus,  d.  to 
wait  for. 

Partior,  partitus,  d.  to  divide. 

Potior,  potitus,  r.  d.  to  obtain ,  enjoy. 
In  the  poets  the  present  indicative  and 
imperfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes 
of  the  third  conjugation. 

Sortior,  sortitus,  r.  to  cast  lots. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§  178.  Irregular  verbs  are  such  as  deviate  from  the  com¬ 
mon  forms  in  some  of  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root. 

They  are  sum,  volo,  fero ,  edo,  fio ,  eo,  queo,  and  their  compounds. 

Sum  and  its  compounds  have  already  been  conjugated.  See  §  153.  In  the 
conjugation  of  the  rest,  the  parts  which  are  irregular  are  fully  exhibited,  but 
a  synopsis  only,  of  the  other  parts  is,  in  general,  given.  Some  parts  of  volo 
and  of  its  compounds  are  wanting. 

1.  Volo  is  irregular  only  in  the  present  of  the  indicative  and  infin¬ 
itive,  and  in  the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive. 

Remark.  It  is  made  irregular  partly  by  syncope,  and  partly  by  a  change  in 
the  vowel  of  the  root.  In  the  present  infinitive  also  and  in  the  imperfect  sub¬ 
junctive,  after  e  was  dropped,  r  following  l  was  changed  into  /;  as,  velere 
(velre)  velle;  velerem  (velrem)  vellem. 

Pres.  Indie.  Pres.  Infln.  Perf.  Indie. 

vo'-lo,  vel'-le,  vol'-u-I,  to  be  willing ,  to  wish. 


§178. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


141 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  vo'-15,  vis,  vult; 

P.  voT-u-mus,  vul'-tis,  vo'-lunt. 

Imperf.  vo-le'-bam,  vo-le'-bas,  etc. 

Put.  vo'-lam,  vo'-les,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  S.  ve'-lim,  ve'-lls,  ve'-lit; 

P.  v£-ll'-mus,  ve-ll'-tis,  ve'-lint. 

Imperf.  S.  vel'-lem,  vel'-les,  vel'-let; 

P.  vel-le'-mus,  vel-le'-tis,  vel'-lent. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres,  vel'-le**  Pres,  vo'-lens. 

Perf.  vol-u-is'-se. 

Note.  Volt  and  voltis ,  for  vult  and  vultis,  and  vm\  for  visne  are  found  in  Plau¬ 
tus  and  other  ancient  authors. 


Perf.  vol'-u-I. 

Plup.  vo-lu'-e-ram. 

Fut.  perf.  vo-lu'-e-ro. 


Perf.  vo-lu'-e-rim. 
Plup.  vol-u-is'-sem. 


2.  Nolo  is  compounded  of  the  obsolete  ne  (for  non )  and  volo.  The 
v  of  volo  after  ne  is  dropped,  and  the  vowels  ( e  o )  are  contracted 
into  o. 

Pres.  Indie.  Pres.  Infin.  Perf.  Indie. 
no'-lo,  nol'-le,  nol'-u-I,  to  be  unwilling. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  no'-lo,  non'-vls,  non'-vult;  Perf.  nol'-u-I. 

P.  nol'-u-mus,  non-vul'-tis,  no'-lunt.  Plup.  no-lu'-e-ram. 

Imperf.  no-le'-bam,  -bas,  -bat,  etc.  Fut.  perf.  no-lu'-e-ro. 

Fut.  no'-lam,  -les,  -let,  etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  S.  no'-lim,  no'-lls,  no'-lit; 

P.  no-lf-mus,  no-li'-tis,  no'-lint. 
Imperf.  S .  nol'-lem,  nol'-les,  nol'-let ; 

P.  nol-le'-mus,  nol-le'-tis,  nol'-lent. 


Perf.  no-lu'-e-rim. 
Plup.  nol-u-is'-sem. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Present.  Future. 

Sing.  2.  no'-li ;  Plur.  no-li-tS.  Sing.  2.  no-ll-to,  Plur .  nol-I-to'-te, 

3.  no-lT-to ;  no-lun'-to. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres,  nol'-le.  Pres,  no'-lens. 

Perf.  nol-u-is'-se. 


Note.  In  rwn-vis ,  rum-vult ,  etc.  of  the  present,  non  takes  the  place  of  we,  but 
nSvis  and  nevolt  also  occur  in  Plautus. 


t 


142 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


§179. 


3.  M alo  is  compounded  of  magis  and  volo.  In  composition  magis 
drops  its  final  syllable,  and  volo  its  v .  The  vowels  (d  d)  are  then 
contracted  into  d. 


Pres.  Indie .  Pres .  Injin.  Perf.  Indie. 

ma'-lo,  mal'-le,  mal'-u-I,  to  prefer. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  ma'-lo,  ma'-vis,  ma'-vult;  Perf.  mal'-u-i. 

P.  mal'-u-mus,  ma-vul'-tis,  ma'-lunt.  Plup.  ma-lu'-e-ram. 

Imperf.  ma-le'-bam,  -bas,  etc.  Fut.  perf  ma-lu'-e-ro. 

Fut.  ma'-lam,  -les,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.  S.  ma'-lim,  ma'-lis,  ma'-lit;  Perf.  ma-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  ma-lT-mus,  ma-ll'-tis,  ma'-lint.  Plup.  mal-u-is'-sem. 
Imperf.  S.  mal'-lem,  mal'-les,  mal'-let; 

P.  mal-le'-mus,  mal-le'-tis,  mal'-lent. 


INFINITIVE. 


Pres,  mal'-le.  Perf  mal-u-is'-se. 

Note.  Mavdlo ,  mavolunt ;  mavolet ;  mavelim ,  mavelis ,  mavelit ;  and  mavellem ; 
for  malo,  malunt,  etc.,  occur  in  Plautus. 


§  17 9.  Fero  is  irregular  in  two  respects : — 1.  Its  second  and 
third  roots  are  not  derived  from  the  first,  but  from  otherwise  obsolete 
verbs,  viz.  tulo  for  tollo ,  and  tlao ,  sup.  datum ,  by  aphaeresis,  latum : — 
2.  In  the  present  infinitive  active,  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and 
in  certain  parts  of  the  present  indicative  and  imperative,  of  both 
voices,  the  connecting  vowel  is  omitted.  In  the  present  infinitive 
passive,  r  is  doubled. 


ACTIVE  VOICE. 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 


Pres.  Indie,  fe'-ro,  ( [to  bear.')  Pres.  Indie,  fe'-ror,  (to  be  borne.) 

Pres.  Infin.  fer'-re,  Pres.  Infin.  fer'-rl, 

Perf.  Indie,  tu'-li,  Perf.  Part,  la'-tus. 

Supine.  la'-tum. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

S.  fe'-ro,  fers,  fert ;  fe'-ror,  fer'-ris  or  -re,  fer'-tur ; 

P.  fer'-i-mus,  fer'-tis,  fe'-runt.  fer'-i-mur,  fe-rim'-i-ni,  fe-run'-tur. 


Imperf.  fe-re'-bam. 

Fut.  fe'-rani,  -res,  etc. 

Perf.  tu'-li. 

Plup.  tu'le-ram. 

Fut.  perf.  tu'-le-ro. 


Imperf.  fe-re'-bar. 

Fut.  fe'-rar,  -re'-ris  or  -re'-re,  etc. 

Perf.  la'-tus  sum  or  fu'-I. 

Plup.  la'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram. 

Fut.  perf.  la'-tus  e'-r5  or  fu'-e-ro. 


§  180.  IRREGULAR  VERBS.  143 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres .  fe'-ram,  -ras,  etc .  Pres.  fe'-rar,  -ra'-ris  or  -ra-re,  etc. 

Imperf.  fer'-rem,  -res,  etc.  Imperf.  fer'-rer,  -re'-ris,  etc. 

Per/ \  tu'-le-rim.  Per/.  la'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 

Plup.  tu-lis'-sem.  Plup.  la'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  fer,  P.  fer'-te.  Pres.  S.  fer'-re,  P.  fe-rim'-i-ni. 
Put.  S.  fer'-to,  P.  fer-to'-te, 

fer'-to;  fe-run'-to.  Fut.  S.  fer'-tor,  P.  (fe-rem'-i-nl.) 

fer'-tor.  fe-run'-tor. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres,  fer'-re.  Pres,  fer'-rl. 

Per/,  tu-lis'-se.  Per/,  la-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 

Fut.  la-tu'-rus  es'-se.  Fut.  la'-tum  T-rl. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres,  fe'-rens.  Per/  la'-tus. 

Fut .  la-tu'-rus.  Fut.  fe-ren'-dus. 


GERUND, 
fe-ren'-dl,  etc . 

SUPINES. 

Former,  la'-tum.  Latter,  la'-tu. 

Note.  In  the  comic  writers  the  following  reduplicated  forms  are  found  in 
parts  derived  from  the  second  root,  viz.  tetuli ,  tetulisti ,  tetulit ,  tetulerunt;  tetulero , 
tetulerit;  tetulissem ,  and  telulisse. 

§  180.  Fio ,  ‘to  become/  is  properly  a  neuter  verb  of  the  third 
conjugation,  having  only  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root;  but  it 
is  used  also  as  a  passive  of  /ado,  from  which  it  takes  those  parts  of 
the  passive  which  are  derived  from  the  third  root,  together  with  the 
participle  in  dus.  The  infinitive  present  has  been  changed  from  the 
regular  form  /ere  to  /eri. 

Pres.  Indie.  Pres.  In/n.  Per/  Part. 

fi'-o,  fi'-e-rl,  fac'-tus,  to  be  made  or  to  become. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  fi'-o,  fis,  fit ;  Per/  fac'-tus  sum  or  fu'-I. 

P.  fl-mus,  fl'-tis,  fi'-unt.  Plup.  fac'-tus  e  -ram  or  fu'-e-ram. 

Imper f.  fl-e'-bam,  fl-e'-bas,  etc.  Fut.  per/A&c-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro. 
Fut.  fl'-am,  fi'-es,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres,  fl'-am,  fl'-as,  etc.  Perf.  fac'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 

Imp.  fi'-e-rem,  -e'-res,  etc.  Plup.  fac'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 


144 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


§181 


IMPERATIVE. 

Pres .  Sing,  fl ;  Plur.  fl'-te. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Per f.  fac'-tus. 

Fut.  fa-ci-en'-dus. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  fi'-e-ri. 

Perf.  fac'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 
Fut.  fac'-tum  i'-rl. 

SUPINE. 

Latter,  fac'-tu. 


Note.  The  compounds  of f  ado  which  retain  a,  have  also  flo  in  the  passive ; 
as,  calefacio ,  to  warm;  passive,  calefio ;  but  those  which  cnange  a  into  i  form 
the  passive  regularly.  (Cf.  facio  in  the  list,  §  172.)  Yet  confit ,  defit ,  and  infit, 
occur.  See  §  183,  12,  13,  14. 


§  181.-  Edo ,  to  eat,  is  conjugated  regularly  as  a  verb  of  the 
third  conjugation  ;  but  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  imperative, 
and  infinitive  moods,  and  in  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive,  it  has 
also  forms  similar  to  those  of  the  corresponding  tenses  of  sum : — 
Thus. 


INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

S.  e -do,  e'-dis, 

(or  es, 

P.  ed'-i-mus,  ed'-i-tis, 
(or  es'-tis), 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Imperfect. 

S.  ed'-e-rem,  ed'-e-res, 

(or  es'-sem,  es'-ses, 

P.  ed-e-re'-mus,  ed-e-re'-tls, 
(or  es-se'-mus,  es-se'-tis, 

IMPERATIVE. 


e'-dit, 
est) ; 
e'-dunt. 


ed'-e-ret, 
es'-set) ; 
ed'-e-rent, 
es'-sent). 


Pres ,  S.  e'-de, 
(or  es; 

Fut.  S.  ed'-i-to, 
(or  es'-to, 


P.  ed'-I-te, 
es'-te). 

P.  ed-i-to'-te,  e-dun'-t5. 
es-to'-te). 


INFINITIVE. 


Pres .  ed'-e-re,  (or  es'-se). 
PASSIVE. 

Pres.  ed'-i-tur,  (or  es'-tur). 

Imperfi  ed-e-re'-tur,  (or  es-se'-tur). 


Note,  (a.)  In  the  present  subjunctive,  edim,  edis ,  etc.,  are  found,  for  edam, 
edas,  etc. 

(b.)  In  the  compounds  of  edo ,  also,  forms  resembling  those  of  sum  occur. 
Ambedo  has  the  participles  ambens  and  ambesus ;  comedo  has  comesus}  comesurus, 
and  rarely  comestus ;  and  adedo  and  exedo  have  adesus  and  exesus. 


§  182, 183. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


145 


§  182.  Eo  is  irregular  in  the  parts  which,  in  other  verbs,  are 
formed  from  the  first  root,  except  the  imperfect  subjunctive  and  the 
present  infinitive.  In  these,  and  in  the  parts  formed  from  the  second 
and  third  roots,  it  is  a  regular  verb  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

Note.  Eo  has  no  first  root,  and  the  parts  usually  derived  from  that  root, 
consist,  in  this  verb,  of  terminations  only. 


Pres .  Indie .  Pre$.  Injin .  Perf.  Indie.  Per f  Part. 

e'-o,  I'-re,  I'-vi,  l'-tum,  to  go. 


Pres.  S.  e'-o,  is,  it; 

P.  I'-mus,  I'-tls,  e'-unt. 
Imperf.  S.  i'-bam,  I'-bas,  I'-bat; 
P.  I-ba'-mus,  etc. 


Pres . 


INDICATIVE. 

Fut. 


e-am,  e-as, 

Imperf.  i'-rem,  I'-res,  I'-ret,  etc 


l'-bo,  I'-bis,  I'-bit,  etc. 
Perf.  i'-vi,  i-vis'-ti,  i'-vit,  etc. 

Plup.  Iv'-e-ram,  Iv'-e-ras,  etc. 

Fut. perf.  Iv'-e-ro,  Iv'-e-rls,  etc . 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

e'-at,  etc .  Perf.  Iv'-e-rim,  iv'-e-ris,  etc. 

Plup.  I-vis'-sem,  I-vis'-ses,  etc. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  i,  P.  i'-te. 
Fut.  2.  I'-to,  l-to'-te, 

3.  i'-to ;  e-un'-to. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres,  i'-re. 

Perf.  i-vis'-se. 

Fut.  I-tu'-rus  es'-se. 


PARTICIPLES. 


GERUND. 


Pres,  i'-ens,  (pen.  e-un'-tis.)  e-un'-di, 

Fut.  l-tu'-rus,  a,  um.  e-un'-do,  etc. 

Remark  1.  In  some  of  the  compounds  the  forms  earn,  ies ,  iet  occur,  though 
rarely,  in  the  future ;  as,  redeam ,  redies ,  abiet,  exiet,  prodient.  Istis ,  issem ,  and 
isse ,  are  formed  by  contraction  for  ivistis,  ivissem,  and  ivisse.  See  §  162,  7. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  passive  voice  are  found  the  infinitive  iri,  and  the  third  per¬ 
sons  singular  Itur,  ibdtur,  ibitur,  itum  est,  etc. ;  edtur,  iretur ,  eundum  est,  etc., 
which  are  used  impersonally.  See  §  184,  2,  (a.) 

Rem.  3.  The  compounds  of  eo,  including  veneo,  are  conjugated  like  the  sim¬ 
ple  verb,  but  most  of  them  have  ti  in  the  perfect  rather  than  Ivi.  See  under  eo 
in  §  176.  Adeo,  anteeo,  ineo,  praetereo,  subeo ,  and  transeo,  being  used  actively, 
are  found  in  the  passive  voice.  Inietur  occurs  as  a  future  passive  of  ineo. 
Ambio  is  regular,  like  audio,  but  has  either  ambibat  or  ambiebat. 

Note.  Queo,  I  can,  and  nequeo,  I  cannot,  are  conjugated  like  eo,  but  they 
want  the  imperative  mood  and  the  gerund,  and  their  participles  rarely  occur. 
They  are  sometimes  found  in  the  passive  voice,  before  an  infinitive  passive. 

DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


§183.  (1.)  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  used 

in  certain  tenses,  numbers,  or  persons. 

Remark.  There  are  many  verbs  which  are  not  found  in  all  the  tenses,  numbers,  and 
persons,  exhibited  in  the  paradigms.  Some,  not  originally  defective,  are  accounted  so, 
because  they  do  not  occur  in  the  classics  now  extant.  Others  are  in  their  nature  defec¬ 
tive.  Thus,  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  passive  voice  must  be  wanting  in  many 
verbs,  from  the  nature  of  their  signification. 

13 


146 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


§183. 


(2.^)  The  following  list  contains  such  verbs  as  are  remarkable  for 
wanting  many  of  their  parts : — 


1.  Odi,  I  hate. 

2.  Coepi,  I  have  begun. 

3.  Memini,  I  remember. 

4.  Aio, 

5.  Inquam 


?  |  I  say. 


6.  Fari,  to  speak. 

7.  Quaeso,  1  pray. 

8.  Ave,  j  hail,  or 

9.  Salve,  j  farewell. 
10.  Apage,  begone. 


11.  Cedo,  tell,  or  give  me. 

12.  Confit,  it  is  done. 

13.  Defit,  it  is  wanting. 

14.  Infit,  he  begins. 

15.  Ovat,  he  rejoices. 


1.  Odi ,  coepi,  and  memini  are  used  chiefly  in  the  perfect  and  in 
the  other  parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  and  are  thence  called 
preteritive  verbs.  Odi  has  also  a  deponent  form  in  the  perfect : — 
Thus, 

Ind.  perf.  o'-di  or  o'-sus  sum ;  plup.  od'-e-ram ;  fut.  perf.  od'-e-ro. 

Subj.  perf.  od'-e-rim ;  plup.  o-dis'-sem. 

Inf.  perf.  o-dis'-se ;  fut.  o-su'-rum  es'-se. 

Part.  fut.  o-su'-rus;  perf.  o'-sus. 


Note  1.  Exosus  and  perosus,  like  dsus,  are  used  actively.  Odivit ,  for  odit,  oc¬ 
curs,  M.  Anton,  in  Cic.  Phil.  13,  19:  and  odiendi  in  Appuleius. 


2.  Ind.  perf.  coe'-pi ;  plup.  coep'-e-ram ;  fut.  perf.  coep'-e-ro. 

Subj.  perf.  ccep'-e-rim;  plup.  coe-pis'-sem. 

Inf.  perf.  coe-pis'-se ;  fut.  coep-tiF-rum  es'-se. 

Part.  fut.  coep-tu'-rus ;  perf.  ccep'-tus. 

Note  2.  In  Plautus  are  found  a  present,  ccepio,  present  subjunctive,  coepiam , 
and  infinitive,  coepere.  Before  an  infinitive  passive,  coeptus  est,  etc.,  rather  than 
coepi,  etc.,  are  commonly  used. 


3.  Ind.  perf.  mem'-i-ni ;  plup.  me-min'-e-ram ;  fut.  perf.  me-mln'-e-ro. 

Subj.  perf.  me-min'-e-rim ;  plup.  mem-i-nis'-sem. 

Inf.  perf.  mem-i-nis'-se. 

Imperat.  2  pers.  S.  me-men'-to;  P.  mem-en-to'-te. 

Note  3.  Odi  and  memini  have,  in  the  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  present,  and, 
in  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  imperfect  and  future ;  as, 
fugiet  atque  oderit.  Cic.  In  this  respect,  novi,  I  know,  the  perfect  of  nosco ,  to 
learn,  and  consuevi,  I  am  wont,  the  perfect  of  consuesco ,  I  accustom  myself,  agree 
with  odi  and  memini. 


4.  Ind.  pi'es.  ai'-o,*  a'-is,  a'-it;  - , - ,  ai'-unt.* 

- imp.  ai-e'-bam,  ai-e'-bas,  ai-e'-bat ;  ai-e-ba'-mus,  ai-e-ba'-tis,  ai-e'-bant. 

Subj.  pres. - ,  aF-as,  aF-at ;  - , - ,  aF-ant. 

Imperat,  pres.  a'-I.  Part.  pres.  aF-ens. 

Note  4.  Ais  with  ne  is  contracted  to  airi  like  videri*,  abiri :  for  videsne , 
abisne.  The  comic  writers  use  the  imperfect  albas,  albat  and  albant,  which  are 
dissyllabic. 


6.  Ind.  pres,  in'-quam,  in'-quls,  in'-quit;  in'-qui-mus,  in'-qul-tls,  in'-qui-unt. 

- imp. - , - ,  in-qui-e'-bat,  arcdin-qul  -bat; - , - , in-qui-e'-bant. 

- fut. - j  in'-qui-es,  in'-qui-et;  - , - , - . 

- J pe,rf. - ,  in-quis'-tl,  in-quit;  - , - , - . 

Subj.  pres. - ,  iiF-qui-as,  in'-qui-at;  - ,  in-qui-a'-tls,  iiF-qui-ant. 

Imperat,  in'-que,  in'-qui-to. 

6.  Ind.  pres. - , - ,  fa'-tur;  fut.  fa'-bor, - ,  fab'-i-tur. 

- Perf  fatus  est;  plup.  fatus  eram. 

Imperat,  fa/-re.  Part.  pres,  fans;  perf.  fa'-tus;  fut.  fan'-dus. 

Infin  .pres,  fa'-ri  or  fa'-ri-er.  Gerund,  gen.  fan'-dl;  abl.  faiF-do. 
Supine,  fa'-tu. 


*  Pronounced  a'-yo,  a'-yunt,  etc.,  wherever  the  diphthong  ai  is  followed  by  a  vowel. 
See  §  9, 1. 


§184. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


147 


Interf  ari  has  the  forms  interf  atur ,  interf  dta  est ,  interf  dri,  interf  ms ,  and 
interf atus.—Eff dri  has  e  fabor,  effabere,  effatus  est ,  effati  sunt;  imperat. 
effdre ;  effdri,  effatus,  effandus ,  effando ;  effdtu. — Praefari  occurs  in 
the  following  forms,  praefatur,  praefamur;  profabantur ;  praefarer; 
praefarentur ;  praef  dti  sumus  ;  profatus  fuero ;  imperat,  praef  dto,  praef  d- 
mino  ;  prcefans,  praef  atus,  praefandus  ;  praef  indo. — Prdf  dri  has  prof  dturt 
prof  dta  est ,  pi'of  dta  sunt,  prof  atus  and  prdfans. 

7.  Ind.  pres.  quae'-so, - ,  quse'-sit ;  quses'-u-mus, - , - . 

Inf.  pres,  quses'-e-re. 

8.  Imperat,  a'-ve,  a-ve'-te ;  a-ve'-to.  Inf.  a-ve'-re. 

Note.  Avere  and  salvere  are  often  used  with  jubeo. 

9.  Ind.  pres.  sal'-ve-o ;  fut.  sal-ve'-bis.  Inf.  pres,  sal-ve'-re. 

Imperat,  sal'-ve,  sal-ve'-te;  sal-ve'-to. 

10.  Imperat,  ap'-a-ge.  So  age  with  a  subject  either  singular  or  plural. 

11.  Imperat,  sing,  ce'-do;  pi.  cet'-te  for  ced'-i-te.  Hence  cedodum. 

12.  Ind.  pres,  con'-f  it ;  fut.  con-fF-et. 

Subj.  pres,  con-f  F-at ;  imperf.  con-fF-e-ret.  Inf.  pres.  con-fF-S-rt. 

13.  Ind.  pres,  de'-fit;  pi.  de-fF-unt;  fut.  de-fF-et.  Subj.  pres.  de-fF-&.t. 

Inf.  pres,  de-fi'-e-ri.  So  ef-fF-e-rl,  and  in-ter-f  F-e-ri.  Plant. ;  and  in-ter- 

fF-at.  Lucr. 

14.  Ind.  pres,  in'-fit;  pi.  in-fF-unt. 

15.  Ind.  pres,  o'-vat.  Subj.  pres.  6r-vet;  imperf.  o-va'-ret. 

Part.  pres,  o'- vans ;  perf.  o-va'-tus ;  fut.  ov-a-tu'-rus.  Gerund,  o-van'-dl. 

Remark  1.  Among  defective  verbs  are  sometimes,  also,  included  the  follow¬ 
ing: — Forem ,  fores,  etc.,  fore ,  (see  §  154,  R.  3. )  Ausim,  ausis ,  ausit ;  ausint .  Faxo 
and  faxim,  faxis,faxit;  faximus,  faxltis,  faxint.  Faxem.  The  form  in  o  is 
an  old  future  perfect ;  that  in  im  a  perfect,  and  that  in  em  a  pluperfect  sub¬ 
junctive.  See  §  162,  7,  (c.),  and  9. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  present  tense,  the  first  person  singular,  furo,  to  be  mad,  and 
dor  and  der,  from  do,  to  give,  are  not  used.  So  in  the  imperative  sci ,  cupe  and 
polle,  from  scio,  cupio ,  and  polleo ,  do  not  occur. 

Rem.  3.  A  few  words,  sometimes  classed  with  defectives,  are  formed  bjr 
contraction  from  a  verb  and  the  conjunction  si;  as,  sis  for  si  vis,  sultis  for  si 
vultis ,  sodes  for  si  audes  (for  audies .) 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

§  18  4r.  (a.)  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  are  used 

only  in  the  third  person  singular,  and  do  not  admit  of  a  personal 
subject. 

(6.)  The  subject  of  an  impersonal  verb  in  the  active  voice  is,  for  the  most 
part,  either  an  infinitive,  or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause ;  but  in  English 
the  neuter  pronoun,  it,  commonly  stands  before  the  verb,  and  represents  such 
clause;  as,  me  delectat  scribere,  it  delights  me  to  write.  Sometimes  an  accusa¬ 
tive  depending  on  an  impersonal  verb  takes,  in  English,  the  place  of  a  sub¬ 
ject;  as,  me  miseret  tui,  I  pity  thee. 

1.  Impersonal  verbs  in  the  active  voice  are  conjugated  in  the  sev¬ 
eral  conjugations  like  delectat,  it  delights ;  decet ,  it  becomes ;  contingit , 
it  happens ;  evenit ,  it  happens ;  thus  : — 


148 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

§184. 

Ind.  Pres. 

Imp. 

Fut. 

Perf. 

Plup. 

Fut.  perf. 

lstf  Conj. 

delectat, 

delectabat, 

delectabit, 

delectavit, 

delectaverat, 

delectaverit. 

2  d  Conj. 
decet, 
decebat, 
decebit, 
decuit, 
decuerat, 
decuerit. 

3  d  Conj. 

contingit, 

contingebat, 

continget, 

contigit, 

contigerat, 

contigerit. 

4  th  Conj. 
evenit, 
eveniebat, 
eveniet, 
evenit, 
evenerat, 
evenerit. 

Sub.  Pres. 

Imp. 

Perf. 

Plup. 

delectet, 

delectaret, 

delectaverit, 

delectavisset. 

deceat, 

deceret, 

decuerit, 

decuisset. 

contingat, 

contingeret, 

contigerit, 

contigisset. 

eveniat, 

eveniret, 

evenerit, 

evenisset. 

Inf.  Pres. 
Perf. 

delectare, 

delectavisse. 

decere, 

decuisse. 

contingere, 

contigisse. 

evenire, 

evenisse. 

2.  (a.)  Most  neuter  and  many  active  verbs  may  be  used  imperson¬ 
ally  in  the  passive  voice,  by  changing  the  personal  subject  of  the  ac¬ 
tive  voice  into  an  ablative  with  the  preposition  a  or  ab ;  as, 

Illi  pugnant ;  ox  pugnatur  ab  illis,  they  fight.  Illi  qucerunt,  or  quceritur  ab 
illis,  they  ask.  Cf.  §  141,  Rem.  2. 

(&.)  In  the  passive  form,  the  subject  in  English  is,  commonly,  either 
the  agent ,  expressed  or  understood,  or  an  abstract  noun  formed  from 
the  verb ;  as, 

Pugnatum  est,  we,  they ,  etc.  fought;  or,  the  battle  was  fought.  Concurritur, 
the  people  run  together;  or,  there  is  a  concourse . 

(c.)  Sometimes  the  English  subject  in  the  passive  form  is,  in  Latin,  an  ob¬ 
lique  case  dependent  on  the  verb ;  as,  .favetur  tibi,  thou  art  favored. 

The  following  are  the  forms  of  impersonal  verbs  in  the  several  conjugations 
of  the  passive  voice : — 


Pres .  pugnatur, 

Imp.  pugnabatur, 

Fut.  pugnabitur, 

Perf.  pugnatum  est  or 
fuit, 

Plup.  pugnatum  erat  or 
fuerat, 

Fut.  p.  pugnatum  erit  or 


Pres,  pugnetur, 

Imp.  pugnaretur, 

Perf.  pugnatum  sit  or 
merit, 

Plup.  pugnatum  esset  or 
fuisset. 


Pres,  pugnari, 

Perf.  pugnatum  esse  or 
fuisse, 

Fut.  pugnatum  iri. 


Indicative  Mood, 


favetur, 
favebatur, 
favebitur, 
fautum  est  or 
fuit, 

fautum  erat  or 
fuerat, 

fautum  erit  or 
fuerit. 

Subjunctive 

faveatur, 
faveretur, 
fautum  sit  or 
fuerit, 

fautum  esset  or 
fuisset. 


curritur, 
currebatur, 
curretur, 
cursum  est  or 
fuit, 

cursum  erat  or 
fuerat, 

cursum  erit  or 
fuerit. 

Mood. 

curratur, 
curreretur, 
cursum  sit  or 
fuerit, 

cursum  esset  or 
fuisset. 


venitur, 
veniebatur, 
venietur, 
ventum  est  or 
fuit, 

ventum  erat  or 
fuerat, 

ventum  erit  or 
fuerit. 


veniatur, 
veniretur, 
ventum  sit  or 
fuerit, 

ventum  esset  or 
fuisset. 


veniri, 

ventum  esse  or 
fuisse, 
ventum  iri. 


Infinitive  Mood. 

faveri,  curri, 

fautum  esse  or  cursum  esse  or 
fuisse,  fuisse, 

fautum  iri.  cursum  iri. 


§184. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


149 


3.  In  like  manner,  in  the  periphrastic  conjugation,  the  neuter  gen¬ 
der  of  the  participle  in  dus ,  both  of  active  and  neuter  verbs,  is  used 
impersonally  with  est ,  etc.,  and  the  dative  of  the  person ;  as,  mihi 
scribendum  fuit ,  I  have  been  obliged  to  write ;  moriendum  est  omnibus , 
all  must  die.  See  §  162,  15,  R.  5. 

Remark  1.  Grammarians  usually  reckon  only  ten  real  impersonal  verbs,  all 
of  which  are  of  the  second  conjugation,  viz.  decet ,  libet ,  licet,  liquet ,  miseret , 
oportet ,  piget ,  pcenitet ,  pudet,  and  taedet .  (See  §  169.)  Four  of  these,  decetf,  ZZ&eZ, 
ZiccZ,  and  occur  also  in  the  third  person  plural,  but  without  personal  sub¬ 
jects.  There  seems,  however,  to  be  no  good  reason  for  distinguishing  the 
verbs  above  enumerated  from  other  impersonal  verbs.  The  following  are  such 
other  verbs  as  are  most  commonly  used  impersonally : — 


(a.)  In  the  first  conjugation : — 


Constat,  it  is  evident . 
Juvat,  it  delights. 
Praestat,  it  is  better . 
Restat,  it  remains. 
Stat,  it  is  resolved. 


Vacat,  there  is  leisure. 
Certatur,  there  is  a  con¬ 
tention. 

Peccatur,  a  fault  is  com¬ 
mitted. 


(b.)  In  the  second  conjugation : — 


Pugnatur,  a  battle  is 
fought. 

Statur,  they  stand  frm. 


Apparet,  it  appears. 
Attinet,  it  belongs  to. 
Displicet,  it  displeases. 
Dolet,  it  grieves. 
Miseretur,  it  distresses. 
Patet,  it  is  plain. 


Pertinet;  it  pertains. 
Placet,  it  pleases. 

Fletur,  we,  etc.  weep,  or, 
there  is  weeping. 
Nocetur,  injury  is  in¬ 
flicted. 


Persuadetur,  he,  they,  etc 
are  persuaded. 

Pertaesum  est,  he,  they , 
etc.  are  disgusted  with. 

Siletur,  silence  is  main¬ 
tained. 


Desinitur,  there  is  an  end. 
Scribitur,  it  is  written. 
Vivitur,  we,  etc.  live. 


Scitur.  it  is  known . 

Itur,  they,  etc.  go. 
Venitur,  they ,  etc.  come. 


Refert,  it  concerns. 
Subit,  it  occurs. 
Superest,  it  remains. 


(c.)  In  the  third  conjugation  : — 

Accidit,  it  happens.  Miserescit,  it  distresses. 

Conducit,  it  is  useful.  Sufficit,  it  suffices. 
Contingit,  it  happens.  Creditur,  it  is  believed. 
Fallit,  or  j  it  escapes  me  ;  Curritur,  people  run. 
Fugit  me, )  I  do  not  know. 

(d.)  In  the  fourth  conjugation : — 

Convenit,  it  is  agreed  Expedit,  it  is  expedient. 

upon ;  it  is  flt.  Dormitur,  we,  they ,  etc. 

Evenit,  it  happens.  sleep. 

( e .)  Among  irregular  verbs : — 

Fit,  it  happens.  Praeterit  me,  it  is  un- 

Interest,  it  concerns.  known  to  me. 

Obest,  it  is  hurtful.  Prodest,  it  avails. 


(/.)  To  these  may  be  added  verbs  signifying  the  state  of  the  weather,  or  the 
operations  of  nature.  The  subject  of  these  may  be  Jupiter,  deus,  or  coelum, 
which  are  sometimes  expressed.  Of  this  kind  are  the  following : — 


Fulget,  ) 

Fulgurat,  >  it  lightens. 
Fulminat,  ) 

Gelat,  it  freezes. 
Grandinat,  it  hails. 


Lapidat,  it  rains  stones. 

mucescit, ! U  3rows  Usht 
Ningit,  it  snows. 

Pluit,  it  rains. 


Tonat,  it  thunders. 
Vesperascit,  1  evening 
Advesperascit,  >  ap- 
Invesperascit,  j  proaches. 


Lapidat ,  ningit,  and  pluit  are  also  used  impersonally  in  the  passive  voice. 
13* 


150 


REDUNDANT  VERBS. 


§185. 


Rem.  2.  Impersonal  verbs,  not  being  used  in  the  imperative,  take  the  sub¬ 
junctive  in  its  stead ;  as,  delectet ,  let  it  delight.  In  the  passive  voice,  their 
perfect  participles  are  used  only  in  the  neuter. 

Rem.  3.  Most  of  the  impersonal  verbs  want  participles,  gerunds,  and  su¬ 
pines  ;  but  pcenitet  has  a  present  participle,  futures  in  rus  and  dus ,  and  the  ge¬ 
rund.  Pudet  and  piget  have  also  the  gerund  and  future  passive  participle. 

Rem.  4.  Most  of  the  above  verbs  are  also  used  personally,  but  frequently  in 
a  somewhat  different  sense ;  as,  ut  Tiberis  inter  eos  et  pons  inter  esset,  so  that 
the  Tiber  and  bridge  were  between  them. 

REDUNDANT  VERBS. 


§  185.  Redundant  verbs  are  those  which  have  different 
forms  to  express  the  same  meaning. 

Verbs  may  be  redundant  in  termination  ;  as,  fabrico  and  fabricor , 
to  frame  ; — in  conjugation  ;  as,  lavo ,  -are,  and  lavo ,  -ere,  to  wash 
or  in  certain  tenses ;  as,  odi  and  osus  sum,  I  hate. 

1.  The  following  deponent  verbs,  besides  their  passive  form,  have 
an  active  form  in  o,  of  the  same  meaning,  but  which  is,  in  general, 
rarely  used.  A  few,  however,  which  are  marked  r.,  occur  more  rare¬ 
ly  than  the  corresponding  forms  in  o. 


Abominor,  to  abhor. 
Adulor,  to  fatter. 
Altercor,  to  dispute. 
Amplexor,  to  embrace. 
Arbitror,  to  suppose. 
Argutor,  to  prate. 
Assentior,  to  assent. 
Aucupor,  to  hunt  after. 
Auguror,  to  foretell. 
Aurigor,  to  five  a  chaiiot. 
Auspicor,  to  take  the  au¬ 
spices. 

Cachinnor,  r.  to  laugh 
aloud. 

Comitor,  to  accompany. 
Commentor,  to  deliberate. 
Convivor,  to  feast  together. 
Cunctor,  (cont.),  to  delay. 
Dignor,  to  deem  worthy. 
Depascor,  to  feed  upon. 
Elucubror,  to  elaborate. 


Fabricor,  to  frame. 
Feneror,  to  lend  on  in¬ 
terest. 

Fluctuor,  to  fluctuate. 
Frustror,  to  disappoint. 
Fruticor,  to  sprout. 
Impertior,  r.  to  impart. 
Jurgor,  to  quarrel. 
Lacrimor,  r.  to  weep. 
Ludificor,  to  ridicule. 
Luxurior,  r,  to  be  rank. 
Medicor,  to  heal. 

Mereor,  to  deserve. 

Metor,  to  measure. 
Misereor,  to  commiserate. 
Moderor,  to  moderate. 
Muneror,  r.  to  bestow. 
Nictor,  r.  to  wink. 
Nutrior,  r.  to  nourish. 
Obsonor,  to  cater. 

Opinor,  to  suppose. 


Oscitor,  to  gape. 
Pacificor,  r.  to  make  a 
peace. 

Palpor,  to  caress. 

Partior,  to  divide. 
Populor,  to  lay  waste. 
Punior,  to  punish. 
Ruminor,  to  ruminate. 
Sciscitor,  to  inquire. 
Sortior,  to  cast  lots. 
Stabulor,  to  stable. 

Tueor,  to  defend. 
Tumultuor,  to  be  in  con¬ 
fusion. 

Tutor,  to  defend. 

Utor,  to  use. 

Urinor,  to  dive. 

Velificor,  to  set  sail. 
Veneror,  to  reverence . 
Vociferor,  to  bawl. 


2.  The  following  verbs  are  redundant  in  conjugation  : — 


Boo,  -are,  ) 
Boo,  -ere,  r.  J 
Bullo,  -are,  ) 
Bullio,  -ire,  j 
Cieo,  -ere,  ) 
Cio,  -ire,  r.  j 
Denso,  -are, 
Denseo,  -ere, 
Ferveo,  -ere, 
Fervo,  -ere, 
Fodio,  -ere, 
Fodio,  -ire,  r. 


to  roar, 
to  boil, 
to  excite. 

|  to  thicken. 
|  to  boil. 

!  to  dig. 


Fulgeo,  -ere, 
Fulgo,  -ere,  r. 
Lavo,  -are, 
Lavo,  -ere,  r. 
Lino,  -ere 
Linio 


to  shine, 
to  wash, 
to  anoint. 


-ere,  } 

,  -ire,  r.  j 

Nieto,  -{-re,  j  t0  wmk' 


Salo,  -ere, 
Salio,  -ire, 


to  salt. 


Scateo, -ere,  \toaboumJ_ 
Scato,  -ere,  r.  J 


Sono,  -are, 
Sono,  -ere, 
Strideo,  -ere, 
Strido,  -ere, 
Tergeo,  -ere,  j 
Tergo,  -ere,  ) 
Tueor,  -eri,  ' 
Tuor,  -i,  r. 


to  sound, 
to  creak. 


to  ivipe. 
to  protect. 


Those  marked  r.  are  rare¬ 
ly  used. 


§186, 


REDUNDANT  VERBS. 


151 


Morior ,  orior,  and  pdtior ,  also,  are  redundant  in  conjugation  in  certain  parts. 
See  in  lists  §§  174  and  177. 


§  186.  1.  Some  verbs  are  spelled  alike,  or  nearly  alike,  but 

differ  in  conjugation,  quantity,  pronunciation,  or  signification,  or  in 
two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

Such  are  the  following : — 


Abdico,  -are,  to  abdicate. 
Abdlco,  -ere,  to  refuse. 
Accido,  -ere,  to  fall  upon. 
Accido,  -ere,  to  cut  down. 
Addo,  -ere,  to  add. 

Adeo,  -ire,  to  go  to. 
Aggero,  -are,  to  heap  up. 
Aggero,  -ere,  toheapupon. 
Allego,  -are,  to  depute. 
Allego,  -ere,  to  choose. 
Appello,  -are,  to  call. 
Appello,  -ere,  to  drive  to. 
Cado,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Caedo,  -ere,  to  cut. 

Cedo,  -ere,  to  yield. 

Caleo,  -ere,  to  be  hot. 
Calleo,  -ere,  to  be  hard. 
Cano,  -ere,  to  sing. 

Caneo,  -ere,  to  be  gray. 
Careo,  -ere,  to  want. 

Caro,  -ere,  to  card  wool. 
Celo,  -are,  to  conceal. 
Caelo,  -are,  to  carve. 
Censeo,  -ere,  to  think. 
Sentio,  -ire,  to  feel. 
Claudo,  -ere,  to  shut. 
Claudo,  -ere,  to  be  lame. 
Colligo,  -are,  to  bind  to¬ 
gether. 

Colligo,  -ere,  to  collect. 
Colo,  -are,  to  strain. 

Colo,  -ere,  to  cultivate. 
Compello,  are,  to  accost. 
Compello,  -ere,  to  force. 
Concido,  -ere,  to  cut  to 
pieces. 

Concido,  -ere,  to  fall. 
Conscendo,  -ere,  to  em¬ 
bark. 

Conscindo,  -ere,  to  tear 
to  pieces. 

Consterno,  -are,  to  terrify. 
Consterno,  -ere,  to  strew 
over. 

Decido,  -ere,  to  fall  down. 
Decido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 
Decipio,  -ere,  to  deceive. 
Desipio,  -ere,  to  dote. 
Deligo,  -are,  to  tie  up. 
Deligo,  -ere,  to  choose. 
Diligo,  -ere,  to  love. 

Dico,  -ere,  to  say. 

Dico,  -are,  to  dedicate. 


£do,  -ere,  to  eat. 

Edo,  -ere,  to  publish. 
Educo,  -are,  to  educate. 
Educo,  -ere,  to  draw  out. 
Eff  ero,  -are,  to  make  wild. 
Effero,  -re,  to  carry  out. 
Excido,  -ere,  to  fall  out. 
Excido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 
Ferio,  -ire,  to  strike. 

Fero,  -re,  to  bear. 

Ferior, -ari,  to  keep  holiday. 
Frigeo,  -ere,  to  be  cold. 
Frigo,  -ere,  to  fry. 

Fugo,  -are,  to  put  to  flight. 
Fugio, -ere,  to  fly. 

Fundo,  -are,  to  found. 
Fundo,  -ere,  to  pour  out. 
Incido,  -ere,  to  fall  into. 
Incido,  ere,  to  cut  into. 
Indico,  -are,  to  show. 
Indico,  ere,  to  proclaim. 
Inficio,  -ere,  to  stain. 
Infitior,  -ari,  to  deny. 
Intercido,  -ere,  to  happen. 
Intercido,  -ere,  to  cut 
asunder. 

Jaceo,  -ere,  to  lie. 

Jacio,  -ere,  to  throw. 
Labo,  -are,  to  totter. 
Labor,  -i,  to  glide. 

Lacto,  -are,  to  suckle. 
Lacto,  -are,  to  deceive . 
Lego,  -are,  to  depute. 
Lego,  -ere,  to  read. 

Liceo,  -ere,  to  be  lawful. 
Liceor,  -eri,  to  bid  for. 
Liquo,  -are,  to  melt. 
Liqueo,  -ere,  to  be  mani¬ 
fest. 

Liquor,  -i,  to  melt. 

Mano,  -are,  to  flaw. 
Maneo,  -ere,  to  stay. 
Mando,  -are,  to  command. 
Mando,  -ere,  to  eat. 

Meto,  -ere,  to  reap. 

Metor,  -ari,  to  measure. 
Metior,  -iri,  to  measure. 
Metuo,  -ere,  to  fear . 
Miseror,  -ari,  to  pity. 
Misereor,  -eri,  to  pity. 
Moror,  -ari,  to  delay. 
Morior,  -i,  to  die. 

Niteo,  -ere,  to  glitter. 


Nitor,  -i,  to  strive. 

Obsero,  -are,  to  lock  up. 
Obsero,  -ere,  to  sow. 
Occido,  -ere,  to  fall. 
Occido,  -ere,  to  kill. 
Operio,  -ire,  to  cover. 
Operor,  -ari,  to  work. 
Opperior,  -iri,  to  wait  for. 
Pando,  -are,  to  bend. 
Pando,  -ere,  to  extend. 
Paro,  -are,  to  prepare. 
Pareo,  -ere,  to  appear. 
Pario,  -ere,  to  bring  forth. 
Pario,  -are,  to  balance. 
Pendeo,  -ere,  to  hang. 
Pendo,  -ere,  to  weigh. 
Percolo,  -are,  to  filter. 
Percolo,  -ere,  to  adorn. 
Permaneo,  -ere,  to  re¬ 
main. 

Permano,  -are,  to  flow 
through. 

Praedico,  -are,  to  publish. 
Praedico,  -ere,  to  foretell. 
Prodo,  -ere,  to  betray. 
Prodeo,  -ire,  to  come  forth. 
Recedo,  -ere,  to  retire. 
Recido,  -ere,  to  fall  back. 
Recido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 
Reddo,  -ere,  to  restch'e. 
Redeo,  -ire,  to  return. 
Refero,  -re,  to  bring  back. 
Referio,  -ire,  to  strike  back. 
Relego,  -are,  to  remove. 
Relego,  -ere,  to  read  over. 
Sedo,  -are,  to  allay. 
Sedeo,  -ere,  to  sit.  " 
Sido,  -ere,  to  sink. 

Sero,  -ere,  to  sow. 

Sero,  -ere,  to  entwine. 
Succido,  -ere,  to  fall  un¬ 
der. 

Succido,  -ere,  to  cut  down. 
Vado,  -ere,  to  go.. 

Vador,  -ari,  to  bind  over 
by  bail. 

Veneo,  -ire,  to  be  sold. 
Venio,  -ire,  to  come. 
Venor,  -ari,  to  hunt. 
Vincio,  -ire,  to  bind. 
Vinco,  ere,  to  conquer. 
Volo,  -are,  to  fly. 

Volo,  velle,  to  be  willing. 


152 


DERIVATION  OF  VERBS. 


§187. 


2.  Different  verbs  have  sometimes  the  same  perfect ;  as, 


Aceo,  acui,  to  be  sour. 
Acuo,  acui,  to  sharpen. 
Cresco,  crevi,  to  arow. 
Cerno,  crevi,  to  decree. 
Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shine. 


Fulcio,  fulsi,  to  prop. 
Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine. 
Lugeo,  luxi,  to  mourn. 
Mulceo,  mulsi,  to  soothe. 
Mulgeo,  mulsi,  to  milk. 


Paveo,  pavi,  to  fear. 
Pasco,  pavi,  to  feed. 
Pendeo,  pependi,  to  hang. 
Pendo,  pependi,  to  weigh. 


To  these  add  some  of  the  compounds  of  sto  and  sisto. 


3.  Different  verbs  have  sometimes,  also,  the  same  supine  or  perfect 
participle;  as, 

Frico,  frictum,  to  rub.  Pango,  pactum,  to  drive  Patior,  passus,  to  suffer. 

Frigo,  frictum,  to  roast.  in.  Teneo,  tentum,  to  hold. 

Maneo,  mansum,  to  re -  Paciscor,  pactus,  to  bar -  Tendo,  tentum,  to  stretch. 

main.  gain.  Verro,  versum,  to  brush. 

Mando,  mansum,  to  chew.  Pando,  passum,  to  extend.  Verto,  versum,  to  turn. 


DERIVATION  OF  VERBS. 


§187.  Verbs  are  derived  either  from  nouns,  from  adjec¬ 
tives,  or  from  other  verbs. 


I.  Verbs  derived  from  nouns  or  adjectives  are  called  denomina¬ 
tives. 


1.  (a.)  Active  denominatives  are  generally  of  the  first  conjuga¬ 
tion  ;  those  which  are  neuter,  of  the  second.  They  are  usually  formed 
by  adding  respectively  o  and  eo  to  the  root ;  as, 


Actives. 


From  Nouns. 

Neuters. 


Armo,  to  arm ,  (arma.) 

Fraudo,  to  defraud,  (fraus.) 
Nomino,  to  name ,  (nomen.) 
Numero,  to  number ,  (numerus.) 


Floreo,  to  bloom ,  (flos.) 

Frondeo,  to  produce  leaves,  (frons.) 
Luceo,  to  shine,  (lux.) 

Vlreo,  to  flourish,  (vis.) 


From  Adjectives. 

Albo,  to  whiten,  (albus.)  Albeo,  to  be  white,  (albus.) 

Celebro,  to  frequent,  (celeber.)  Calveo,  to  be  bald,  (calvus.) 
Libero,  to  free,  (liber.)  Flaveo,  to  be  yellow ,  (flavus.) 


( h .)  Sometimes  a  preposition  is  prefixed  in  forming  the  deriva¬ 
tive  ;  as, 

Coacervo,  to  heap  together,  (acervus.)  Exstirpo,  to  extirpate,  (stirps.) 

Excavo,  to  excavate ,  (cavus.)  Illaqueo,  to  insnare,  (laqueus.) 

2.  Many  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation,  derived  from  nouns,  express 
the  exercise  of  the  character,  office,  etc.,  denoted  by  the  primitive;  as,  archi¬ 
tector,  to  build;  comitor,  to  accompany;  furor ,  to  steal;  from  architectus, 
cdmes,  and  fur. 

3.  Such  as  denote  resemblance  or  imitation  are  called  imitatives ;  as,  corni¬ 
cor,  to  imitate  a  crow,  from  cornix ;  Grcecor,  to  imitate  the  Greeks.  Some  of 
these  end  in  isso ;  as,  patrisso,  to  imitate  a  father. 


II.  Verbs  derived  from  other  verbs  are  either  frequentatives ,  tn- 
ceptives ,  desideratives ,  diminutives ,  or  intensives . 


§187. 


DERIVATION  OF  VERBS. 


153 


1.  Frequentatives  express  a  repetition,  or  an  increase  of  the  action 
expressed  by  the  primitive. 

(a.)  They  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  are  formed  by  adding 
o  to  the  third  root ;  as,  domo ,  (domit-)  domito .  So  adjuvo ,  adjuto  ; 
dico ,  dicto ;  gero ,  gesto.  In  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  at  of  the 
root  is  often  changed  into  fr;  as,  cldmo ,  to  cry,  (clamat-)  clamito ,  to 
cry  frequently. 

(b.)  A  few  frequentatives  are  formed  by  adding  fro  to  the  first 
root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  ago  (ag-)  dgito .  So  lateo,  latito  ;  nosco , 
noscito;  quaero ,  quaerito. 

(c.)  Frequentatives,  from  primitives  of  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  conju¬ 
gations,  sometimes  serve  again  as  primitives,  from  which  new  frequentatives 
are  formed ;  as,  dico ,  dicto ,  dictito ;  curro ,  curso ,  cursito ;  venio ,  rewfo,  ventito. 
Sometimes  the  second  or  intermediate  form  is  not  in  use. 

(d.)  Some  frequentatives  are  deponent;  as,  minitor ,  from  mmor  ( mined -); 
versor ,  from  rerfo  {vers-).  So  amplexor ,  sector ,  Idquitor ,  from  amplector ,  sequor , 
and  l6quor. 

(e.)  When  verbs  of  this  class  express  simply  an  increase  of  the  action  de¬ 
noted  by  the  primitive,  they  are,  by  some  grammarians,  called  intensives. 

2.  Inceptives ,  or  inchoatives  mark  the  beginning  of  the  action  or 
state  expressed  by  the  primitive. 

(a.)  They  all  end  in  sco,  and  are  formed  by  adding  that  termina¬ 
tion  to  the  root  of  the  primitive,  with  its  connecting  vowel,  which,  in 
the  third  conjugation,  is  i;  as,  caleo,  to  be  hot;  calesco ,  to  grow  hot. 

So  labo,  (are),  labasco;  ingemo ,  (ere),  ingemisco;  obdormio,  (ire),  obdormisco . 
Hisco  is  contracted  for  hiasco,  from  hio,  ( are). 

( b .)  Most  inceptives  are  formed  from  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

(c.)  Some  inceptives  are  formed  from  nouns  and  adjectives  by  adding  asco  ■ 
or  esco  to  the  root ;  as,  puerasco,  from  puer ;  juvenesco,  from  juvenis. 

Note.  Inceptives  are  all  neuter,  and  of  the  third  conjugation.  See  §  173. 

Some  verbs  in  sco,  which  are  not  inceptives,  are  active ;  as,  disco,  posco. 

3.  Desideratives  express  a  desire  of  doing  the  act  denoted  by  the 
primitive. 

(a.)  They  are  formed  from  the  third  root,  by  adding  urio ;  as, 
cce.no,  to  sup,  (ccenat,)  ccendturio,  to  desire  to  sup. 

( b .)  Desideratives  are  all  of  the  fourth  conjugation.  See  §  176,  Note. 

(c.)  Verbs  in  urio ,  having  u  long,  are  not  desideratives;  as,  prurio,  ligurio. 

4.  Diminutives  denote  a  feeble  or  trifling  action.  They  are  formed 
by  adding  illo  to  the  root  of  the  primitive  ;  as,  conscribillo ,  to  scribble, 
from  conscribo. 

They  are  few  in  number,  and  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation. 

5.  Intensives  denote  eager  action.  They  are  usually  formed  by 
adding  so,  esso,  or  isso  to  the  root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  facesso,  to  act 
earnestly — from  fdcio. 

So  capesso ,  incesso,  from  capio  and  incedo.  Concupisco,  to  desire  greatly,  though 
in  form  an  inceptive,  is,  in  its  signification,  an  intensive. 

Note.  Verbs  of  all  these  classes  have  sometimes  simply  the  meaning  of  their 
primitives. 


154 


COMPOSITION  OF  VERBS. 


§  188, 189. 


COMPOSITION  OF  VERBS. 

§  188.  Verbs  are  compounded  variously : — 

1.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb;  as,  aedifico ,  belligero ,  lucrifacio.  See  §  103,  R.  1. 

2.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb ;  as,  amplifico ,  multiplico. 

3.  Of  two  verbs ;  as,  calefacio ,  madef ado ,  patef  acio. 

Rem.  In  verbs  of  this  class,  the  first  part,  which  is  a  verb  of  the  second  con¬ 
jugation,  loses  its  final  o;  the  second  part  is  always  the  verb  fado. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb;  as,  benefado ,  maledico ,  sdtdgo ,  nolo,  negligo. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  adduco ,  excdlo ,  prodo ,  subrepo ,  discerno , 
sejungo. 

6.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun ;  as,  pernocto ,  irretio. 

§  189.  In  composition  with  particles,  the  vowels  a  and  e  and 
the  diphthong  ce  in  the  radical  syllable  of  the  simple  verb  are  often 
changed  in  the  compound. 

1.  The  following  simple  verbs  in  composition  change  a  into  e : — 

Arceo,  Carpo,  Farcio,  Jacto,  Pario,  Patro,  Spargo, 

Candeo,  Damno,  Fatiscor,  Lacto,  Partio,  Sacro,  Tracto. 

Capto,  Fallo,  Gradior,  Mando,  Patior,  Scando, 

Exc.  A  is  retained  in  amando ,  praemando ,  desacro ,  and  retracto ;  praedamno , 
and  pertracto  sometimes  also  occur.  A  is  also  changed  into  e  in  occento  from 
canto ,  and  anhelo  from  halo ;  comperco  also  is  found. 

2.  The  following,  in  the  first  root,  change  a  and  e  into  i ;  viz. 

&go,  c&do,  egeo,  emo,  frango,  pango,  premo,  rego,  sedeo,  specio,  tango. 

3.  These  change  d  and  e,  in  the  first  and  second  roots,  into  i;  viz. 

salio,  to  leap ,  sapio,  taceo,  and  teneo. 

4.  These  change  a  into  i ,  and  ce  into  i ,  in  all  the  roots ;  viz. 

habeo,  lacio,  lateo,  placeo,  statuo;  caedo,  laedo,  and  quaero. 

5.  The  following  change  d,  in  the  first  root,  into  i,  and  in  the  third 
root  into  e  ;  viz. 

cano,  capio,  fateor,  jacio,  rapio,  and  apiscor. 

Exc.  (a.)  A  is  retained  in  circumago ,  perago ,  satago ;  antehabeo ,  posthabeo , 
depango ,  repango ,  complaceo ,  and  perplaceo.  Occano  and  recano  also  sometimes 
occur.  E  is  retained  in  coemo ,  circumsedeo ,  and  supersedeo.  Antecapio  and  aa- 
tfdpo  are  both  used ;  so  also  are  superjacio  and  superjicio. 

(6.)  Cdgo  and  dego  are  formed,  by  contraction,  from  con,  de,  and  ago ;  demo , 
promo  and  sumo ,  from  de,  pro ,  sw6,  and  emo ;  praebeo ,  and  perhaps  de^eo,  from 
prce,  de,  and  habeo ;  pergo  and  surgo,  from  per,  swJ,  and  re</o. 

Note  1.  Fado ,  compounded  with  a  preposition,  changes  d  into  i  in  the  first 
rootj  and  into  e  in  the  third;  as,  afficio ,  affeci,  affectum.  Someyompounds  of 
fdcio  with  nouns  and  adjectives,  change  a  into  i,  and  also  drop  i  before  o,  and 
are  of  the  first  conjugation ;  as,  significo ,  laetifico ,  magnifico.  Specio  forms 
some  compounds  in  the  same  manner;  as,  conspicor  and  suspicor. 

Note  2.  Lego ,  compounded  with  con,  de,  di,  e,  inter ,  nec,  and  se,  changes  & 
into  i,  in  the  first  root;  as,  colligo,  negligo,  etc.;  but  with  ad,  proe,  per,  re,  sub, 
and  trans,  it  retains  e ;  as,  allego. 

Note  3.  Calco  and  salto,  in  composition,  change  a  into  u ;  as,  inculco ,  insulto. 
Plaudo  changes  au  into  6 ;  as,  explodo ;  except  applaudo.  Audio  changes  au 
into  e  in  obedio.  Causo,  claudo,  and  qudtio,  drop  a ;  as,  accuso,  recludo,  percutio. 
Juro  changes  u  into  d  in  dejfrro  and  pej&ro,  but  dejuro,  also,  is  in  use. 


§190,  191. 


ADVERBS. 


155 


Note  4.  In  the  compounds  of  caveo ,  maneo ,  and  traho ,  d  remains  unchanged, 
and  so  also  does  ce  in  the  compounds  of  hazreo. 


Note  5.  The  simple  verbs  with  which  the  following  are  com¬ 
pounded  are  not  used : — 


Defendo,  Impedio, 

Offendo,  Imbuo, 

Experior,  Compello,  (-are,) 
Expedio,  Appello,  (-are,) 


Confuto,  Instigo, 
Refuto,  Impleo, 
Ingruo,  Compleo, 
Congruo,  Renideo, 


Conmveo, 

Percello, 

Induo,  and  some 
Exuo,  others. 


For  the  changes  produced  in  prepositions  by  composition  with  verbs  see 
§  196. 


PARTICLES. 


§  190.  1.  Particles  are  those  parts  of  speech  which  are 

neither  declined  nor  conjugated.  They  are  divided  into  four 
classes — adverbs ,  prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections . 

Note.  A  word  may  sometimes  belong  to  two  or  more  of  these  classes,  ac¬ 
cording  to  its  connection. 


ADVERBS. 


2.  An  adverb  is  a  particle  used  to  modify  or  limit  the  mean¬ 
ing  of  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  another  adverb ;  as, 

Bene  et  sapienter  dixit,  he  spoke  well  and  wisely ;  Canis  egregie  fidelis ,  a  re¬ 
markably  faithful  dog;  Nimis  valde  laudare ,  to  praise  too  much.  Compare 

§  277,  R.  1. 

3.  Adverbs,  in  regard  to  their  signification,  are  divided  into  va¬ 
rious  classes ;  as,  adverbs  of  place,  time,  manner,  etc.,  and  some  be¬ 
long  to  either  class  according  to  their  connection. 

4.  In  regard  to  their  etymology,  adverbs  are  either  primitive  or 
derivative . 

Remark.  Among  primitive  adverbs  are  here  classed  not  only  such  as  can¬ 
not  be  traced  to  any  more  remote  root,  but  also  all  which  are  not  included  in 
the  regular  classes  of  derivative  adverbs  hereafter  mentioned. 

PRIMITIVE  ADVERBS. 

§  191.  The  primitive  adverbs  are  few  in  number,  when  com¬ 
pared  with  the  derivatives,  and  most  of  them  are  contained  in  the 
following  lists  marked  I,  II,  and  III. 

I.  Adverbs  of  Place  and  Order. 

adeo,  so  far}  as  far.  alicubi,  somewhere.  aliquoversum,  toward 

adhuc,  to  this  place.  alicunde,  from  some  some  place. 

adversus,  "j  opposite,  place.  aliunde,  from  another 

adversum,  >  over  against,  alio,  to  another  place.  place. 

exadversus, — um, )  toward.  aliqua,  in  some  way.  circa,  )  ? 

alia,  by  another  way.  aliorsum,  toward  anoth-  circum, ]  arounc  • 

alias,  m  another  place .  er  place.  circiter,  on  every  side. 

alibi,  elsewhere.  aliquo ,  to  some  place,  circumcirca,  all  around. 


156 


ADVERBS. 


§  191. 


infra,  below ,  beneath. 
Inibi,  in  that  place. 
intrinsecus,  f  rom  within. 
intra,  intro,  i 
introrsum,  >  within. 
intus,  ) 
istac,  that  way. 
istlc,  there. 
istinc,  thence. 
isto,  istuc,  thither, 
the  juxta,  near,  alike. 


necubi,  lest  any  where. 
neutro,  to  neither  side. 
neutrubi,  to  neither  place ,  turn, 
to  neither  side. 

nullIbi’  j  nowhere. 
nusquam,  j 

penitus,  within. 
p5ne,  post,  behind,  back. 
porro,  onward. 
procul,  far. 
pr5pe,  propter,  near. 
prorsum,  forward, 
onward. 


quorsum?  whitherward t 
ft  j  <0  every  plate. 

rursum,  )  ac ** 
slcubi,  if  any  where. 
sicunde,  if from  any  place. 
sinistrorsum,  toward  the 
left. 

subter,  beneath. 
super,  supra,  above ,  on  top. 
suasum,  upward. 

then ,  in  the  newt 


citra,  on  this  side. 
citro,  hither. 
contra,  over  against. 
coram,  before. 
dehinc,  henceforth. 
deinceps,  successively 
deinde,  after  that. 
denique,  finally. 
denuo,  again. 
deorsum,  downward. 
dextrorsum,  toward 
right. 

ea,  that  way. 
eadem,  the  same  way. 
eo,  to  that  place ,  thither. 
eodem,  to  the  same  place. 
exinde,  after  that. 
extra,  without. 
extrinsecus, from  without. 
f  oras,  out  of  doors. 
f  oris,  without. 
hac,  this  way. 
hactenus,  thus  far. 
hie,  here. 
hinc,  hence. 
hue,  hither. 
hucusque,  thus  far. 
horsum,  hitherward. 
ibi,  there. 

ibidem,  in  the  someplace. 
iliac,  that  way. 
illlc,  there. 
illinc,  thence. 
illo,  thither. 
illorsum,  thitherward. 
illuc,  thither. 
inde,  thence. 

indidem,  from  the  same 
place. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The 
whence  ?  quo  ?  whither  ?  and  qua  ?  in  what  way  ?  have  relation  to  other  ad 
verbs  formed  in  a  similar  manner,  thus  constituting  a  system  of  adverbial  cor¬ 
relatives  similar  to  that  of  the  pronominal  adjectives.  See  §  139,  5,  (3.) 

(b.)  As  in  the  case  of  the  pronominal  correlatives,  the  interrogative  and 
relative  forms  are  alike,  beginning  with  u  or  qu.  The  demonstratives  are  formed 
from  is,  which  is  strengthened  by  dem,  and  the  indefinite  from  aliquis.  The 
general  relatives  and  the  general  indefinites  or  universals,  like  those  of  the  pro¬ 
nominal  adjectives,  are  made,  the  former  by  doubling  the  simple  relatives  or 
by  appending  to  them  the  termination  cumque ,  ‘  soever,’  and  the  latter  by  ad¬ 
ding  que,  vis,  or  libet.  Thus  : 


protinus, 
qua  ?  in  which  way  ? 
quaqua,  )  what  way 
quacumque,  j  soever. 
quaque,  wheresoever. 

gX\)  in  every  day. 
quo?  whither? 

1uoad’  |  how  far. 


place. 
ubi?  where? 
ubicumque,  )  wherever, 
ubiubi,  )  wheresoever. 
ubilibet,)  anvu.here 

ubique,  >  J  where 
ubivis,  )  y  e' 
ultra,  ultro,  beyond. 
unde?  whence? 
undelibet, )  -  ^ 

",  Yrz:::y 

undique,  ) 

undeunde,  )  whence- 
undecumque,  j  soever. 
uspiam,  )  somewhere , 
usquam,  j  any  where. 
usque,  all  the  way. 
usquequaque,  in  all  ways, 
on  both  sides. 


quousque,  )  ^  ’  *  utrimque, 

quopiam,  j  somepiace,  “Jro?  which  way? 

quoquam,  j  r  utrobi  t  m  which  place  ? 

qu5quo,  )  whither-  utroblque,  in  both  places. 
quocumque,  j  soever.  utroque,  to  both  sides. 
quoquoversus,  toward  utroqueversum,  toward 
every  side.  both  sides. 

interrogative  adverbs  of  place,  ubi?  where?  unde? 


Interrog. 

Demonstr . 

jRelat. 

Gen.  Relat. 

Indefin. 

Gen.  Ind 

ubi? 

ibi, 

Ibidem, 

ubi, 

ubiubi, 

ubicumque, 

alicubi, 

ubique, 

ubivis, 

ubilibet. 

unde? 

inde, 

indidem, 

unde, 

undeunde, 

undecumque, 

alicunde, 

undique, 

undevls, 

undelibet, 

quo? 

eo, 

eodem, 

que, 

quoqud, 

quocumque, 

aliquo, 

quovis, 

quolibet, 

qua? 

ea, 

eadem. 

qua. 

quaqua, 

quacumque. 

aliqua. 

quavis, 

qualibet. 

§191 


ADVERBS. 


157 


(c.)  To  those  answering  to  ubi  ?  maybe  added  alibi,  nullibi ,  and  inibi,  the 
latter  being  a  strengthened  form  of  tin.  In  like  manner  aliunde ,  utrimque ,  in¬ 
trinsecus,  and  extrinsecus  may  be  added  to  those  answering  to  unde ?  and  alio  to 
those  answering  to  quo  ?  So  also  to  utro  ?  answer  utroque  and  neutro. 

(d.)  The  demonstratives  ibi,  inde ,  and  eo  are  used  only  in  reference  to  rela¬ 
tive  sentences  which  precede;  but  more  definite  demonstratives  are  formed 
from  the  pronouns  Me,  iste,  and  ille,  answering  in  like  manner  to  ubi  ?  unde  ? 
and  quo  ?  These  together  with  the  preceding  correlatives  are,  in  the  following 
table,  arranged  respectively  under  their  several  interrogatives  ubi?  unde?  quo  f 
qua  ?  and  quorsum  ? — Thus  : 


ubi? 

unde  ? 

quo? 

qua? 

quorsum  ? 

hie, 

hinc, 

huc, 

hac, 

horsum, 

istic, 

istinc, 

istuc, 

istac, 

istorsum, 

illic, 

illinc, 

illuc, 

illae, 

illorsum, 

ibi, 

inde, 

eo, 

ea, 

? 

ibidem, 

indidem, 

eodem, 

eadem, 

J 

alibi, 

aliunde, 

ali5, 

aliquS. 

alia, 

aliqua. 

aliorsum, 

aliquoversum. 

alicubi. 

alicunde. 

(e.)  Hic,  hinc ,  hue,  refer  to  the  place  of  the  speaker;  istic,  istinc ,  istuc,  to  the 
place  of  the  second  person  or  person  addressed ;  and  illic,  illinc ,  illuc ,  to  that  of 
the  third  person  or  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of.  Cf.  §  207,  R.  23,  (a.)  and  (c?.) 

(f.)  The  interrogative  adverbs  ubi,  unde,  quo,  qua,  etc.  are  often  used  with¬ 
out  a  question,  simply  as  adverbs  of  place ;  as,  In  earn  partem  ituros,  atque  ibi 
futuros  Helvetios,  ubi  eos  Ccesar  constituisset. 

(g.)  In  consequence  of  a  transfer  of  their  meaning,  some  of  the  adverbs  of 
place,  as,  hie ,  tin,  ubi,  hinc,  inde,  hactenus,  etc.,  become  also  adverbs  of  time, 
and  some  of  them  are  used  also  as  conjunctions. 


actutum,  immediately. 
abhinc,  from  this  time. 
ade5,  so  long  (as ). 
adhuc,  until  now,  still. 
alias,  at  another  time 
aliquamdiu,  for  awhile. 
aliquando,  at  some  time. 
aliquoties,  several  times. 
ante,  )  before, 
antea,  j  previously. 
antehac,  formerly. 
bis,  twice,  (see  §  119). 
circiter,  about,  near . 
eras,  tomorrow. 
cum  or  quum,  when. 
deinceps,  in  succession. 
deinde  or  dein,  )  thereupon, 
exinde  or  exin,  )  afterward. 
dehinc,  from  this  time. 
demum,  at  length. 
denique,  lastly. 
diu,  long. 

dudum,  previously. 
eousque,  so  long. 
here  or  her!,  yesterday. 
hie,  here,  hereupon. 
hinc,  from  this  time ,  since. 
hodie,  to-day. 
ibi,  then,  thereupon. 
Identidem,  now  and  then , 
repeatedly. 

14 


II.  Adverbs  of  Time. 

illico,  immediately. 
inde,  after  that,  then. 
interdum,  sometimes. 
interim,  meanwhile. 
iterum,  again. 
jam,  now,  already. 

JSKIu,  I  *"*■»* 

jamjam,  presently. 
jampridem,  long  since. 
modo,  just  now. 
mox,  soon  after. 
nondum,  not  yet. 
nonnumquam,  sometimes. 
nudius  tertius,  three  days 
ago. 

nunc,  now. 
numquam,  never . 
nuper,  lately. 
olim,  formerly. 
parumper,  )for  a  short 
paulisper,  j  time. 
perendie,  two  days  hence. 
porro,  hereafter ,  in  fu¬ 
ture. 

post,  postea,  afterwards. 
posthac,  hereafter. 
postridie,  the  day  after. 
pridem,  long  since. 
pridie,  the  day  before. 
protinus,  instantly. 


quamdiu  ?  how  long  ? 
quando?  when? 
quandocumque,  when¬ 
ever. 

quandoque,  at  some  time. 
quater,  four  times. 
quoad?  j  ^  long  f 
quousque  ?  j  * 

quondam,  formerly. 
quotidie,  daily. 
quoties  ?  how  often  ? 
quum  or  cum,  when. 
rursus,  again. 
ssepe,  often. 
semel,  once. 
semper,  always. 
statim,  immediately. 
subinde,  immediately,  now 
and  then. 
tamdiu,  so  long. 
tandem,  at  length. 
tantisper,  for  so  long. 
ter,  thrice. 
toties,  so  often. 
turn,  tunc,  then. 
ubi,  when ,  as  soon  as. 
umquam,  ever. 
usque,  until,  ever. 
ut  or  uti,  as,  as  soon  as 
when. 


158 


ADVERBS. 


§191 


m.  Adverbs  of  Manner,  Quality,  Degree,  etc, 


adeo,  so,  to  that  degree. 
admodum,  very  much. 
aliter,  otherwise. 
ceu,  os,  like  as. 
cur?  whyt 

duntaxat,  only ,  at  least. 
etiam,  a/so,  truly,  yes. 
etiamnunc,  j  ,  ,  , , 

etiamtum,  \  ls0> oestaes- 

ferme  )  almost’  nearly. 
fortasse,  perhaps. 
frustra,  in  vain. 
gratis,  freely. 
haud,  not. 

haudquaquam,  by  no 
means. 

hucusque,  so  far. 
identidem,  constantly. 
immo,  nay ,  on  the  con¬ 
trary. 

Ita,  so. 

Item,  just  so,  also. 

Itidem,  in  like  manner. 
juxta,  equally,  alike. 
magis,  more. 
modo,  only. 
nae  or  ne,  truly,  verily. 
ne,  not. 

nedum,  much  less. 
nempe,  truly,  forsooth. 
nequaquam,  )  by  no 
neutiquam,  j  means. 
nimirum,  certainly ,  to  be 
sure. 


nlmls,  )  .  7 

nimium.  (  t0°  much- 


omnino,  altogether ,  only . 
paene,  ajmost. 
palam,  openly. 
pariter,  equally. 
parum,  too  little. 
paulatim,  by  degrees. 
penitiis,  wholly. 
perinde,  )  just  as, 
proinde,  j  as  though. 
perquam,  veru  much. 
plerumque,  for  the  most 
part,  commonly. 
potius,  rather. 
porro,  moreover,  then . 
praeter,  beyond,  except. 
praesertim,  particularly. 
profecto,  truly. 
prope,  almost,  near. 
propemodum,  almost. 
prorsus,  wholly. 
quam,  hoio  much,  as. 
quamobrem,  wherefore. 
quare?  why?  wherefoi'e? 
quasi-,  as  if,  as  it  were. 
quemadmodum,  as. 
quidem,  j  ;  J  J 
equidem,  j  maeea- 
quomodo  ?  how  ?  in  what 
manner  ? 
quoque,  also. 
rite,  duly. 
saltem,  at  least. 


sane,  truly. 
sat,  )  7 

satis,  (  enm9h- 
sati&s,  rather. 
scilicet,  truly,  to  wit. 
secus,  otherwise. 
seorsum,  )  .  , 

seorsus,’  j 
sic,  so. 
slcut,  ) 

sicuti,  | s0  as>  “»• 
simul,  together. 
singillatim,  one  by  one. 
solum,  only,  alone. 
tam,  so,  so  much. 
tamquam,  like,  as  if. 
tantopere,  so  greatly. 
tantum,  so  much,  only. 
tantummodo,  only. 
temere,  at  random. 
una,  together. 
usquequaque,  in  allpoints , 
m  all  ways. 
ut, 
utl, 

utique,  at  any  rate,  cer¬ 
tainly. 

utpote,  as,  inasmuch  as. 
valde,  very  much. 
vel,  even. 

velut,  )  as,  like  as,  for 
velutl,  j  example. 
vicissim,  in  turn,  again. 
videlicet,  clearly,  to  wit. 
vix,  scarcely. 


as. 


Rem.  2.  Adverbs  denoting  quality,  manner,  etc.,  are  sometimes  divided  into 
those  of,  1.  Quality;  as,  bene,  male.  2.  Certainty;  as,  certe,  plane.  3.  Con- 
tingence;  as,  forte.  4.  Negation;  as,  haud,  non,  ne,  immo.  5.  Affirmation;  as, 
nee,  quidem ,  utique,  nempe.  6.  Swearing;  as,  hercle.  7.  Explaining;  as,  videli¬ 
cet,  utpote.  8.  Separation;  as,  seorsum.  9.  Joining  together;  as,  simul,  una. 
10.  Interrogation;  as,  cur  ?  quaref  11.  Quantity  or  degree;  as,  satis,  adeo. 
12.  Excess;  as,  perquam,  maxime.  13.  Defect;  as,  parum,  pcene.  14.  Prefer¬ 
ence;  as ,  potius,  satius.  15.  Likeness;  as,  ita,  sic.  16.  Unlikeness;  as,  aliter. 
17.  Exclusion;  as,  tantum,  solum. 

Rem.  3.  Non  is  the  ordinary  Latin  negation.  Haud  signifies  either  ‘  not  at 
all,’  or  ‘  not  exactly.’  It  is  used  by  the  comic  and  later  writers  in  all  combina¬ 
tions,  but  in  the  authors  of  the  best  age  its  use  is  more  especially  limited  to  its 
connection  with  adjectives  and  adverbs  denoting  a  measure;  as,  haud  multum , 
haud  magnum,  h.aud  parvus,  haud  mediocris,  haud  paulo,  haud  procul,  haud  longe , 
especially  baud  sane  in  connection  with  other  words;  as,  haud  sane  facile,  res 
haud  sane  difficilis ,  haud  sane  intelligo  ;  also  haud  quisquam,  haud  umquam ,  haud 
qudquam.  With  verbs  haud  is  scarcely  used  until  Livy  and  Tacitus,  except  in 
the  common  phrase  haud  scio  an,  which  is  equivalent  to  nescio  an. — Ne  ,  (or  n  i ) 
is  the  primitive  Latin  negative  particle,  signifying  no  or  not.  It  is  used  in  this 
sense  and  as  an  adverb,  (o)  with  quidem  to  make  an  emphatic  negation  of  the 
word  standing  between  them ;  as,  ne  in  oppidis  quidem,  not  even  in  the  towns ; 
(6)  in  composition  as  in  nescio,  nefas,  neuter,  etc.;  (c)  with  imperatives  and 


§191 


ADVERBS. 


159 


subjunctives  used  as  imperatives ;  as,  Ne  pueri ,  ne  tanta  animis  assuescite  bella . 
Virg.  So,  also,  in  wishes  and  asseverations;  as,  Ne  id  Jupiter  sineret,  may  Ju¬ 
piter  forbid  it.  Liv.  Ne  vivam ,  si  scio ,  may  I  die,  if  I  know.  Cic. ;  and  in  con¬ 
cessive  and  restrictive  clauses ;  as,  Ne  fuerit ,  suppose  there  was  not.  Cic. 
Sint  misericordes  in  f  uribus  cerarii ,  ne  illis  sanguinem  nostram  largiantur ,  only 
let  them  not,  etc.  Cic.  So  dum  ne,  dummddo  ne,  mddo  ne,  dum  quidem  ne  ;  and  in 
intentional  clauses  with  ut. — Immo ,  as  a  negative,  substitutes  something 
stronger  in  the  place  of  the  preceding  statement,  which  is  denied ;  as,  Causa 
igitur  non  bona  est  ?  Immo  optima ,  sed,  etc.  Cic.  It  may  often  be  translated  by 
4  nay,’  or  4  nay  even.’ 

Rem.  4.  Quidem  gives  particular  emphasis  to  a  word  or  an  idea,  and  then 
answers  to  our  4  certainly  ’  or  4  indeed,’  but  frequently,  especially  with  a  pro¬ 
noun,  it  merely  adds  emphasis.  Equidem,  which  is  considered  as  a  com¬ 
pound  of  ego  and  quidem ,  is  used  exclusively  in  this  sense  by  Cicero,  Virgil,  and 
Horace,  but  by  other  and  particularly  by  later  writers  it  is  used  like  quidem. — 
N e  mp  e,  4  surely,’  is  often  used  ironically,  when  we  refute  a  person  by  con¬ 
cessions  which  he  is  obliged  to  make,  or  by  deductions.  In  other  connections 
it  may  be  translated  ‘  namely.’ 

Rem.  5.  Sic ,  it  a ,  tam,  as  also  tantopere,  and  adeo  signify  4  so.’ 
Sic  is  more  particularly  the  demonstrative  4 so,’  or  ‘thus’;  as,  sic  se  res  habet. 
Ita  defines  or  limits  more  accurately,  and  is  equivalent  to  our  4  in  such  a  man¬ 
ner,’  or  4  only  in  so  far  ’ ;  as,  ita  defendito ,  ut  neminem  Icedas.  Frequently,  how¬ 
ever,  ita  has  the  signification  of  sic,  but  sic  has  not  the  limiting  sense  of  ita. — 
Tam ,  4 so  much,’  generally  stands  before  adjectives  and  adverbs,  and  in¬ 
creases  the  degree ;  before  vowels  tantopere  is  generally  used  instead  of  tam. — 
Adeo,  4 to  that  degree ’  or  4 point,’  increases  the  expression  to  a  certain  end  or 
result.  Hence  it  forms  the  transition  to  the  conclusion  of  an  argument  or  to 
the  essential  part  of  a  thing;  and  Cicero  employs  it  to  introduce  the  proofs  of 
what  he  has  previously  alleged ;  as,  Id  adeo  ex  ipso  senatus  consulto  cognoscite, 
and  always  in  such  case  puts  adeo  after  a  pronoun. 

Rem.  6.  Umquam,  ‘ever,’  and  '•usquam ,  ‘somewhere,’  like  quisquam, 
require  a  negation  in  the  sentence,  and  thus  become  equivalent  to  numquam 
and  nusquam.  A  negative  question,  however,  may  supply  the  place  of  a  nega¬ 
tive  proposition ;  as ,  num  tu  eum  umquam  vidisti? — Uspiam,  like  quispiam ,  is 
not  negative,  but  is  the  same  as  alicubi ,  but  strengthened,  just  as  quispiam  is 
the  same  as  aliquis.  So,  also,  quopiam  is  used  affirmatively,  and  quoquam  nega¬ 
tively. — Jam ,  with  a  negative,  answers  to  our  ‘longer’;  as,  Nihil  jam  spero , 
I  no  longer  hope  for  any  thing.  When  used  to  connect  sentences  it  signifies 
‘further,’  or  ‘now.’ — Usque  is  commonly  accompanied  by  the  prepositions 
ad,  in,  ab ,  or  ex.  It  rarely  signifies  4  ever  and  anon  ’ ;  as,  Naturam  expellas 
furca ,  tamen  usque  recurret.  Hor. — Nuper,  mddo,  and  mox  are  relative 
and  indefinite. — Dudum,  4  previously,’ or  4  before,’  in  relation  to  a  time  which 
has  just  passed  away,  may  often  be"  translated  ‘just  before.’ — Jamdudum 
signifies  ‘long  before,’  or  ‘long  since.’  With  the  poets  jamdudum  contains  the 
idea  of  impatience,  and  signifies  4  without  delay,’  4  forthwith  ’ ;  as,  Jamdudum 
sumite  poenas.  Virg. —  Tandem,  ‘at  length,’  also  expresses  the  impatience 
with  which  a  question  is  put. 

Rem.  7.  Tunc  is  ‘then,’  ‘at  that  time,’  in  opposition  to  nunc,  ‘now’: 
Tu  m  is  ‘then,’  as  the  correlative  of  quum,  4  when  ;’  as,  quum  omnes  adessent, 
tum  ille  exorsus  est  dicere ,  when  all  were  present,  then  he  began  to  speak. 
Without  a  relative  sentence  turn  signifies  ‘hereupon,’  or  ‘thereupon’;  but  a 
relative  sentence  may  always  be  supplied.  The  same  difference  exists  between 
etiam  nunc  and  etiam  tum,  4  still,’  or  4  yet  ’ ;  and  between  nunc  ipsum  and  tum  ip- 
sum;  quummaxime  and  tummaxime ,  ‘just,’  or  ‘even  then’;  for  etiam  nunc,  nunc 
ipsum  and  quum  maxime  refer  to  the  present ;  but  etiamtum,  tum  ipsum,  and 
tummaxime,  to  the  past. 


160 


DERIVATION  OF  ADVERBS. 


§  192, 


DERIVATION  OF  ADVERBS. 

§  192.  Adverbs  are  derived  from  nouns,  adjectives,  pro¬ 
nouns,  and  participles. 

I.  From  Nouns. 

1.  Of  these  a  few  end  in  im  (generally  atim ),  and  denote  manner; 
as, 

gregatim ,  in  herds ;  membrdtim,  limb  by  limb ;  vicissatim ,  or  more  frequently, 
vicissim,  by  turns ;  from  grex ,  membrum ,  and  vicis. 

2.  Some  end  in  itus ,  and  denote  origin  or  manner ;  as, 

caelitus,  from  heaven ;  funditus ,  from  the  bottom ;  rddidtus,  by  the  roots ;  from 
caelum,  fundus,  and  radix. 

3.  Some  are  merely  the  different  cases  of  nouns  used  adverbially ; 
as, 

(a.)  Some  adverbs  of  time ;  as,  mane,  noctu,  diu ,  tempdre  or  tempori ,  initio, 
principio ,  modo. — ( b .)  Adverbs  of  place;  as,  foris,  fords. — (c.)  Adverbs  of 
manner;  as,  sponte,  forte,  gratis  or  gratiis,  ingratiis ,  vulgo ,  partim. 

II.  From  Adjectives  and  Participles. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  derivative  adverbs  come  from  adjec¬ 
tives  and  participles  (present  and  perfect),  and  end  in  e  and  ter. 

1.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  second 
declension,  are  formed  by  adding  e  to  the  root ;  as, 

aegre,  scarcely ;  cite,  high ;  libere,  freely ;  longe,  far ;  misere,  miserably ;  plene , 
fully;  docte,  learnedly;  ornate,  elegantly;  from  aeger,  altus,  liber,  longus,  miser, 
plenus ,  doctus,  and  ornatus.  Bene,  well,  is  from  bonus ,  or  an  older  form  benus. 

Remark.  A  few  adverbs  in  e  differ  in  meaning  from  their  adjectives;  as,. 
sane,  certainly ;  valde,  very ;  from  sands,  sound,  well ;  and  validus,  strong. 

Exc.  1.  A  few  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of 
the  second  declension,  add  iter ,  itus,  im,  or  atim  to  the  root ;  as, 

naviter,  actively;  antiquitus,  anciently;  divinitus,  divinely;  privdtim,  privately; 
tudtim ,  after  your  manner ;  singulatim,  singillatim,  sigillatim,  or  singultim ,  sever¬ 
ally  ;  caesim,  carptim ,  sensim,  stdtim,  etc.  from  navus,  antiquus,  divinus,  pr'ivdtus, 
tuus,  singuli,  caesus,  carptus,  etc. 

Exc.  2.  Some  adverbs  are  formed  with  two  or  more  of  the  above  termina¬ 
tions  with  the  same  meaning;  as,  dure,  duriter ;  firme,  firmiter ;  nave,  naviter ; 
large,  largiter ;  luculente,  luculenter ;  turbulente,  turbulenter:  so  caute  and  cavtim ; 
humane,  hdmdniter,  and  humanitus  ;  publice  and  publicitus. 

2.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  third  de¬ 
clension,  are  formed  by  adding  iter  to  the  root,  except  when  it  ends 
in  i,  in  which  case  er  only  is  added ;  as, 

acriter,  sharply ;  feliciter,  happily;  turpiter,  basely; — eleganter ,  elegantly; 
prudenter ,  prudently;  amanter,  lovingly;  prdperanter,  hastily;  from  deer,  felix, 
turpis,  elegans,  prudens,  amans,  and  prdperans.  So  also  from  the  obsolete  alls 
for  alids,  and  prdpis,  (neuter  prdpe),  come  aliter  and  propter  for  pr'dpiter. 

Exc.  From  audax  comes  by  svneope  audacter  ;  from  fortis  comes  fortit&r ; 
from  omnis ,  omnino  ;  from  uber ,  ubertim ;  and  from  nequam,  nequiter. 


§  192- 


derivation  OF  ADVERBS. 


161 


3.  From  the  cardinal  numerals  are  formed  numeral  adverbs  in 
tes ;  as, 

quinquies ,  decies ,  from  quinque  and  decem.  So  toties  and  quOties ,  from  tot  and 
quot.  See  §  119. 

4.  Some  adverbs  are  merely  certain  cases  of  adjectives.  Such 

are, 

(a.)  Ablatives  in  o,  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  second  declension; 
as,  did,  quickly;  continuo ,  immediately;  falso ,  falsely;  crebro ,  frequently; 
merito ,  deservedly;  necdpinato ,  unexpectedly ;  fortuito,  by  chance;  auspicato , 
auspiciously;  consulto ,  designedly;  and  a  few  in  a  from  adjectives  of  the  first 
declension;  as,  recta ,  straight  on;  und,  together.  In  like  manner,  repente,  sud¬ 
denly,  from  repens;  and  peregre  or  per egri,  from  pereger. 

(b.)  Nominatives  or  accusatives  of  the  third  declension  in  the  neuter  singu¬ 
lar;  as,  facile,  difficile,  recens ,  sublime ,  and  impune ;  and  some  also  of  the 
second  declension ;  as,  ceterum ,  plerumque,  multum,  plurimum,  potissimum,  pau¬ 
lum,  nimium,  parum,  and  the  numeral  adverbs,  primum,  iterum,  tertium,  quar¬ 
tum,  etc.  which  have  also  the  termination  in  6,  and  so  also  postremum  ( 6),  and 
ultimum  (o).  The  neuter  plural  sometimes  occurs  also,  especially  in  poetry;  as, 
multa  gemere ;  tristia  ululare  ;  crebra  ferire. 

( c .)  Accusatives  of  the  first  declension;  as,  bifariam,  trifariam ,  multifariam , 
omnifariam ,  etc.  scii,  partem. 

Note  1.  The  forms  in  e  and  6  from  adjectives  of  the  second  declension  have 
generally  the  same  meaning,  but  vere  and  vero  have  a  somewhat  different 
sense.  Vere,  truly,  is  the  regular  adverb  of  verus,  true;  but  vero  is  used  in 
answers,  in  the  sense  of 4  in  truth,’  or  ‘  certainly.’  In  this  use  it  is  added  to  the 
verb  used  in  the  question ;  as,  adfuistine  heri  in  convivio  ?  The  affirmative  an¬ 
swer  is  ego  vero  adfui,  or  without  the  verb,  ego  vero,  and  negatively,  minime 
vero ;  and  as  vero  thus  merely  indicates  a  reply,  it  is  often  untranslatable  into 
English. —  Certo,  on  the  other  hand,  usually  takes  the  meaning  of  the  adjective 
certus,  while  certe  often  signifies  4  at  least  ’ ;  as,  victi  sumus,  aut,  si  dignitas  vinci 
non  potest,  fracti  certe ;  but  certe  is  frequently  used  in  the  sense  of  4  certainly,’ 
especially  in  the  phrase  certe  scio. 

Note  2.  Some  adjectives,  from  the  nature  of  their  signification,  have  no 
corresponding  adverbs.  Of  some  others,  also,  none  occur  in  the  classics.  Such 
are  amens,  dirus,  discors,  gnarus,  rudis ,  trux,  imbellis,  immobilis,  and  similar  com¬ 
pounds.  In  place  of  the  adverbs  formed  from  vetus  and  fidus ,  vetuste  and  an¬ 
tique  are  used  for  the  former,  and  fideliter  for  the  latter,  from  vetustus ,  antiquus , 
and  fidelis. 

III.  From  the  adjective  pronouns  are  derived  adverbs  of  place, 
etc.  (See  §  191,  Rem.  1.) 

Remark.  The  terminations  6  and  uc  denote  the  place  whither,  instead  of  the 
accusative  of  the  pronoun  with  a  preposition ;  as,  eo  for  ad  eum  locum ;  hue  for 
ad  hunc  Idcum ;  the  terminations  ae  and  inc  denote  the  place  from  ivhich ; 
i  and  ic,  the  place  in  which ;  and  a  and  ac,  the  place  by  or  through  which ;  as, 
ea ;  via  or  parte  being  understood. 

IV.  (a.)  A  few  adverbs  are  derived  from  prepositions ;  as,  subtus,  beneath ;  from 
sub;  propter,  near;  from  prdpe.  ( b .)  Mordicus  and  versus  are  derived  from  the 
verbs  mordeo  and  verto. 

Remark.  Diminutives  are  formed  from  a  few  adverbs;  as,  clam ,  clanculum; 
primum,  primulum ;  celerius,  celeriuscule ;  scepius,  scepiuscule ;  bene  belle  bellis¬ 
sime. 


14* 


162 


COMPOSITION  OF  ADVERBS. 


§193, 


COMPOSITION  OF  ADVEEBS. 

§  103.  Adverbs  are  compounded  variously : — 

1.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as,  postridie,  qudtidie,  magndpere ,  maximflperS, 
summdpere ,  guantdpere ,  tantdpere ,  tcintummddo ,  solummddo ,  multimOdls ,  qudtannis — 
of  postero  die ,  magno  opere,  etc. 

2.  Of  a  pronoun  and  a  noun ;  as,  hddie,  quare ,  qudmddd ■ — of  hoc  die ,  qua  re,  etc. 

3.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun ;  as,  nudius ,  scepenumerd — of  nunc  dies,  etc. 

4.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun ;  as,  comminus,  eminus ,  i7/fco,  dbiter,  extemplo , 
obviam ,  postmodo,  admddum,  prdpediem — of  cow,  e,  and  mdnus ;  in  and  Ztfcws ;  etc. 

5.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  pronoun;  as,  dlioqui  or  alioquin,  ceteroqui  or  cetero - 

quin — of  o/iws  and  i.  e.  «Zid  <?wd  (modo),  etc. 

6.  Of  a  pronoun  and  an  adverb ;  as,  aliquamdiu ,  alicubi — of  aliquis ,  diu,  and 
ubi ;  nequaquam  and  nequicquam — of  ne  and  quisquam. 

7.  Of  two  verbs ;  as,  ilicet,  scilicet  videlicet  of  ire,  scire ,  videre,  and  licet. 

8.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb ;  as,  quolibet,  ubivis,  undelibet.  So  deinceps — from 
dein  and  cdpio ;  duntaxat — from  dum  and  taxo. 

9.  Of  a  participle  with  various  parts  of  speech;  as,  deorsum,  dextrorsum, 
horsum,  retrorsum ,  sursum — of  de,  dexter,  hic,  retro,  super,  and  vorsus  or  versus. 

10.  Of  two  adverbs;  as,  jamdudum,  quamdiu,  tamdiu,  cummaxime,  tummaxime, 
quousque,  sicut . 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective;  as,  denuo,  imprimis,  cumprimis,  ap¬ 
prime,  incassum — of  de  novo,  in  primis ,  etc. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  pronoun;  as,  quapropter,  posted,  interea,  praeterea 
hactenus,  quatenus,  aliquatenus,  edtenus — of  propter  qua,  post  ea  or  earn,  etc. 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adverb ;  as,  abhinc,  adhuc,  derepente ,  interibi,  in - 
terdiu,  interdum,  persaepe. 

14.  Of  two  or  three  prepositions;  as,  insuper ,  protinus,  inde,  dein,  deinde, 
perinde. 

15.  Of  a  conjunction  and  an  adverb;  as,  necubi,  sicubi — of  ne,  si,  and  alicubi . 

16.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  termination  scarcely  used  except  in  composition; 
as,  ibidem ,  parumper,  quandbcumque,  ubique,  utcumque. 

17.  Of  three  different  parts  of  speech ;  as,  forsitan — of  fors ,  sit,  an,  quemad- 
mddum ,  quamobrem ,  etc. 

18.  Of  an  adverb  and  an  adjective;  as,  nimirum,  utpote. 

19.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb;  as,  quantumvis,  quantumlibet. 

Signification  of  certain  Compound  and  Derivative  Adverbs . 

1.  The  adverbs  continuo,  protinus ,  stdtim,  confestim ,  subito,  repente  and  dere¬ 
pente,  actutum ,  illico ,  ilicet,  extemplo,  signify  in  general  ‘  directly  ’  or  ‘  imme¬ 
diately  ’ ;  but,  strictly,  continuo  means,  1  immediately  after  ’ ;  stdtim ,  1  without 
delay  ’ ;  confestim,  1  directly  ’ ;  subito,  ‘  suddenly,  unexpectedly  ’ ;  protinus ,  ‘  far¬ 
ther,’  viz.  in  the  same  direction,  and  hence,  1  without  interruption  ’ ;  repente 
and  derepente,  ‘at  once,’  opposed  to  sensim,  ‘gradually,’  (see  Cic.  Off.  1,  33); 
actutum ,  ‘  instantaneously,’  i.  q.  eodem  actu ;  illico,  and  more  rarely  ilicet,  1  forth¬ 
with,  the  instant,’  (Virg.  iEn.  2,  424,  Cic.  Mur.  10) ;  so  also  extemplo,  (Liv.  41, 1). 

2.  Praesertim ,  praecipue ,  imprimis,  cumprimis,  appinme,  are  generally  trans¬ 
lated  ‘principally,’  but,  properly,  praesertim  is  ‘particularly,’  and  sets  forth  a 
particular  circumstance  with  emphasis ;  praecipue,  from  praecapio,  has  reference 
to  privilege,  and  signifies  ‘  especially  ’ ;  imprimis  and  cumprimis ,  signify  ‘  prin¬ 
cipally,  ’  or  ‘  in  preference  to  others  ’ ;  and  apprime,  ‘  before  all,’  ‘  very,’  is  used 


§  194,  195.  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS. - PREPOSITIONS.  163 


in  pure  Latin  to  qualify  and  strengthen  only  adjectives.  Admfidum  properly 
signifies  ‘  according  to  measure,’  that  is,  ‘in  as  great  a  measure  as  can  be,’ 
‘very,  exceedingly.’  With  numerals  it  denotes  approximation,  ‘about.’  Ad¬ 
modum,  nihil  and  admodum  nullus  signify  ‘  nothing  at  all  ’  and  ‘  no  one  at  all.’ 

3.  Modo  is  the  usual  equivalent  for  ‘  only.’  Solum ,  ‘  alone,’  ‘  merely,’  points 
to  something  higher  or  greater.  Tantum ,  ‘  only,’  ‘  merely,’  intimates  that  some¬ 
thing  else  was  expected.  The  significations  of  solum  and  tantum  are  strength¬ 
ened  by  modo ,  forming  solummodo  and  tantummddo.  Duntaxat ,  ‘  only,  solely,’  is 
not  joined  with  verbs.  It  also  signifies  ‘  at  least,’  denoting  a  limitation  to  a 
particular  point.  Saltern  also  signifies  ‘  at  least,’  but  denotes  the  reduction  of  a 
demand  to  a  minimum ;  as,  Eripe  mihi  hunc  dolorem ,  aut  minue  saltem. 

4.  Frustra  implies  a  disappointed  expectation ;  as  in  f  rustra  suscipere  labores. 
Nequicquam  denotes  the  absence  of  success,  as  in  Hor.  Carm.  1,  3,  21.  Incas¬ 
sum,  composed  of  in  and  cassum ,  ‘  hollow  ’  or  ‘  empty,’  signifies  ‘  to  no  purpose  ’ ; 
as,  tela  incassum  jacere . 

COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS. 

§  194«  1.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  with  the  termi¬ 

nations  e  and  ter ,  and  most  of  those  in  o ,  are  compared  like  their 
primitives. 

2.  The  comparative,  like  the  neuter  comparative  of  the  adjective, 
ends  in  ius ;  the  superlative  is  formed  from  the  superlative  of  the  ad¬ 
jective  by  changing  us  into  e  ;  as, 

dure ,  durius ,  durissime ;  facile ,  facilius ,  f  dcillime ;  acriter,  acrius,  acerrime ; 
raro ,  rarius,  rarissime ;  mature,  maturius ,  maturissime  or  maturrime. 

3.  Some  adverbs  have  superlatives  in  6  or  um ;  as,  meritissimo,  plurimum , 
primo  or  primum,  pdtissimum. 

4.  If  the  comparison  of  the  adjective  is  irregular  or  defective,  (see 
§§  125,  126),  that  of  the  adverb  is  so  likewise ;  as, 

bene,  melius ,  optime ;  male,  pejus,  pessime;  parum,  minus,  minime;  multum , 
plus,  plurimum  ;  — ,  prius,  primo  or  primum ;  — ,  ocius ,  ocissime  ;  — ,  deterius, 
deterrime ;  — ,  potius,  potissime  or  potissimum ;  merito,  — ,  meritissimo  ;  satis,  sa¬ 
tius,  — .  Magis,  maxime,  (from  magnus ,)  has  no  positive;  nuper,  nuperrime ,  has 
no  comparative.  Prope,  propius,  proxime :  the  adjective  prdpidr  has  no  posi¬ 
tive  in  use.  The  regular  adverb  in  the  positive  degree  from  uber  is  wanting, 
its  place  being  supplied  by  ubertim ,  but  uberius  and  uberrime  are  used.  So  in¬ 
stead  of  tristiter,  triste,  the  neuter  of  tristis,  is  used,  but  the  comparative  tristius 
is  regular;  and  from  socors  only  socordius,  the  comparative,  is  in  use. 

5.  Diu  and  scepe,  though  not  derive <j  from  adjectives,  are  yet  compared; — 
diu,  diutius,  diutissime ;  scepe,  scepius,  scepissime.  A  comparative  temperius,  from 
temperi  or  tempori,  also  sometimes  occurs.  So  secus,  secius. 

6.  Adverbs,  like  adjectives,  are  sometimes  compared  by  prefixing 
mdgis  and  maxime  ;  as,  magis  aperte ,  maxime  accommodate. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

§  19*$,  1.  A^preposition  is  a  particle  which  expresses  the 

relation  between  a  noun  or  pronoun  and  some  preceding  word. 

2.  Prepositions  express  the  relations  of  persons  or  things,  either  to  one 
another,  or  to  actions  and  conditions ;  as,  amor  meus  erga  te,  my  love  toward 
thee ;  eo  ad  te,  I  go  to  thee. 


164 


PREPOSITIONS. 


§195. 


3.  Some  prepositions  have  the  noun  or  pronoun  which  follows 
them  in  the  accusative,  some,  in  the  ablative,  and  some,  in  either  the 
accusative  or  the  ablative. 


4.  Twenty-six  prepositions  have  an  accusative  after  them : — 


ad,  to,  towards ,  at ,  for . 
adversus,  )  against , 
adversum,  j  towards. 
ante,  before, . 

apud,  at,  with,  near,  be¬ 
fore,  in  presence  of. 

circum,  |  armmd’  abouL 
circiter,  about ,  near. 

citra  }  071  ^l7S  s^e’  Wl^n* 
contra,  against,  opposite. 
erga,  towards,  opposite. 


extra,  without ,  beyond. 
infra,  under ,  beneath. 
inter,  between ,  among , 

during. 
intra,  within. 
juxta,  near  to,  next  to. 
ob,  for,  on  account  of, 
before. 

p§nes,  in  the  power  of, 
with. 

per,  through,  throughout , 
by,  during. 
pone,  behind. 


post,  after ,  since ,  behind. 
praeter,  past,  before, 
against ,  beyond,  besides. 
prope,  near  by,  nigh. 
propter,  near,  on  account 
of 

secundum,  after,  behind, 
along,  next  to,  accoi'd- 
ing  to. 

supra,  above,  over. 
trans,  over,  beyond. 
ultra,  beyond. 


5.  Eleven  prepositions  have  after  them  an  ablative : — 

a,  1  de,  from,  down  from,  af-  prae,  before,  for,  on  ac - 

ab,  \from,  after,  by.  ter,  of,  concerning.  count  of,  in  comparison 

abs,  )  e,  )  out  of,  from,  of,  by,  with. 

absque,  without,  but  for.  ex,  j  after.  pro,  before ,  for,  instead 

coram,  before,  in  pres -  palam,  before,  in  pres-  of  according  to. 

ence  of.  ence  of.  sine,  without. 

cum,  with.  tenus,  as  far  as,  up  to. 

6.  Five  prepositions  take  after  them  sometimes  an  accusative, 
and  sometimes  an  ablative  : — 

clam,  without  the  knowl-  sub,  under,  about ,  near.  super,  above,  over ;  upon, 

edge  of.  subter,  under ,  beneath.  concerning. 

in,  in,  on ;  to,  into,  against. 

Remark  1.  Prepositions  are-so  called,  because  they  are  generally  placed  be¬ 
fore  the  noun  or  pronoun  whose  relation  they  express.  They  sometimes,  how¬ 
ever,  stand  after  it.  Cf.  §  279,  10. 

Rem.  2.  A  is  used  only  before  consonants ;  ab  before  vowels,  and  frequently 
before  consonants,  though  rarely  before  labials :  abs  is  obsolete,  except  in  the 
phrase  abs  te. 

E  is  used  only  before  consonants,  ex  before  both  vowels  and  consonants. 

Rem.  3.  Versus ,  which  follows  its  noun,  (cf.  §  235,  R.  3),  usque,  and  exad¬ 
versus  (-um),  sometimes  take  an  accusative,  simul  and  procul,  an  ablative,  and 
are  then  by  some  called  prepositions.  Secus,  with  an  accusative,  occurs  in 
Pliny  and  Cato. 

Rem.  4.  Many  of  the  prepositions,  especially  those  which  denote  place,  are 
also  used  as  adverbs.  Cf.  §  191. 


Signification  and  Use  of  certain  Prepositions. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  Ad  denotes  direction,  and  answers  to  the  questions  Whither? 
and  Till  when?  as,  Venio  ad  te.  Sqphocles  dd  summam  senectutem  tragoedias 
fecit.  Cic.  It  also  denotes  a  fixed  time;  as,  dd  horam,  at  the  hour;  dd  tempus 
aliquid  facere, — at  the  right  time.  But  sometimes  dd  ternpus  denotes  ‘  for  a 
time.’  Sometimes,  also,  dd  denotes  the  approach  of  time ;  as,  dd  lucem,  dd  ves¬ 
peram,  dd  extremum,  towards  day-break,  etc. ;  and  also  the  actual  arrival  of  a 
time ;  as,  dd  prima  signa  veris  profectus,  at  the  first  sign  of  Spring. 


§  195. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


165 


( b .)  In  answer  to  the  question  Where?  ad  signifies  ‘near’  a  place;  as,  ad 
urbem  esse ;  ad  portas  urbis ;  pugna  navalis  ad  Tenedum.  It  is  used  like  in ,  4  at,’ 
in  such  phrases  as  ad  cedem  Bellonce ,  or,  without  csdem,  ad  Opis ;  negotium  habere 
ad  portum . — With  numerals  it  may  be  rendered  ‘  to  the  amount  of  ’  or  4  nearly  ’ ; 
as,  ad  ducentos .  It  is  also  used  like  circiter  without  any  case ;  as,  Occisis  ad 
hominum  millibus  quatuor. — The  phrase  omnes  ad  unum  signifies,  4  all  without 
exception,’  ‘  every  one.’ 

(c.)  Ad  often  denotes  an  object  or  purpose,  and  hence  comes  its  signification 
of  ‘  in  respect  to  ’ ;  as,  homo  ad  labores  belli  impiger .  It  is  also  used  in  figura¬ 
tive  relations  to  denote  a  model,  standard,  or  object  of  comparison,  where  we 
say  4  according  to,’  or  ‘  in  comparison  with  ’ ;  as,  ad  modum ,  ad  effigiem ,  ad  simil¬ 
itudinem ,  ad  speciem  alicujus  rei ;  ad  normam ,  etc.  ad  voluntatem  alicujus  facere 
aliquid.  Ad  verbum  signifies,  ‘  word  for  word  ’ ;  nihil  ad  hanc  rem ,  ‘  nothing  in 
comparison  with  this  thing.’ 

Rem.  6.  A p  u  d  expresses  nearness  to,  and  was  primarily  used  of  persons  as 
ad  was  applied  to  things.  Apud  also  denotes  rest,  and  dd  direction,  motion,  etc. 
Hence  it  signifies  4  with,’  both  literally  and  figuratively.  With  names  of  places 
it  signifies  ‘near,’  like  dd;  as,  Male  pugnatum  est  apud  Caudium.  But  in  early 
writers,  dpud  is  used  for  in;  as,  Augustus  apud  urbem  Nolam  extinctus  est , — at 
Nola. — With  me ,  te,  se,  or  the  name  of  a  person,  it  signifies  4  at  the  house  ’  or 
4  dwelling  of’ ;  as,  Fuisti  dpud  Lcecam  ilia  node. — Before  appellatives  of  persons 
having  authority  in  regard  to  any  matter,  it  is  translated  4  before,’  4  in  the  pres¬ 
ence  of’;  as,  dpud  judices,  dpud  praetorem,  dpud  populum. — It  is  also  used  with 
names  of  authors,  instead  of  in  with  the  name  of  their  works ;  as,  Apud  Xeno¬ 
phontem,  but  we  cannot  say  in  Xenophonte. 

Rem.  7.  Adversus,  contra,  and  er g a  signify  4 opposite  to.’  Contra  de¬ 
notes  hostility,  like  our  4  against  ’ ;  ergd,  a  friendly  disposition,  4  towards  ’ ;  and 
adversus  is  used  in  either  sense.  But  ergd  sometimes  occurs  in  a  hostile  sense. 

Rem.  8.  Intrd  signifies  4  within,’  in  regard  both  to  time  and  place.  In  re¬ 
gard  to  place  it  is  used  in  answer  to  both  questions  Where  ?  and  Whither  ?  It 
denotes  time  either  as  an  entire  period,  when  it  is  equivalent  to  4  during,’  or  as 
4  unfinished,’  when  it  corresponds  with  4  under,’  or  4  before  the  expiration  of.’ 

Rem.  9.  Per ,  denoting  place,  signifies,  4  through,’  and  also  4  in,’  in  the  sense 
of 4  throughout.’ — With  the  accusative  of  persons  it  signifies  4  through,’  4  by  the 
instrumentality  of.’  It  often  expresses  the  manner;  as ,  per  liter  as,  by  letter; 
per  injuriam,  per  scelus,  with  injustice,  criminally;  per  Iram,  from  or  in  an¬ 
ger;  per  simulationem,  per  speciem,  per  causam ,  under  the  pretext;  per  occa¬ 
sionem,  on  the  occasion ;  per  ridiculum,  in  a  ridiculous  manner. — It  sometimes 
signifies  4  on  account  of  ’ ;  as,  per  valetudinem,  on  account  of  illness.-— Per  me 
licet, — so  far  as  I  am  concerned. 

Rem.  10.  A  or  ab,  denoting  time,  is  used  with  nouns,  both  abstract  and 
concrete,  with  the  same  general  meaning ;  as,  a  primd  estate ,  ab  ineunte  estate, 
ab  initio  cetdtis ,  ab  infantia,  a  pueritia,  ab  adolescentia  ;  and,  a  puero,  a  pueris, 
ab  adolescentulo,  ab  infante,  all  of  which  signify  4  from  an  early  age.’  So  also, 
a  parvis,  a  parvulo,  a  tenero,  d  teneris  unguiculis,  which  expressions  are  of 
Greek  origin. — Ab  initio,  a  principio ,  d  primo,  properly  denote  the  space  of  time 
from  the  beginning  down  to  a  certain  point ;  as,  urbem  Romam  d  principio  re¬ 
ges  habuere,  i.  e.  for  a  certain  period  after  its  foundation.  But  frequently  ab 
initio  is  equivalent  to  initio,  in  the  beginning. — The  adherents  or  followers  of  a 
school  are  often  named  from  its  head ;  as,  d  Platone ,  ab  Aristotele,  etc. — In  comic 
writers  ab  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  genitive ;  as,  ancilla  ab  Andria. — 
In  a  figurative  sense  it  signifies  4  with  regard  to  ’ ;  as,  ab  equitatu  firmus. — With 
names  of  persons  it  also  denotes  relationship,  and  signifies  4  on  the  side  of  ’ ; 
as,  Augustus  d  matre  Magnum  Pompeium  artissimo  contingebat  gradu, — on  his 
mother’s  side. — Stdtim ,  confestim ,  recens  db  aliqud  re,  4  immediately  after.’ — 
Ab  itinere  aliquid  facere,  to  do  a  thing  while  on  a  journey. 

Rem.  11.  Cu  m  is  used  not  only  to  designate  accompanying  persons  but  also 
accompanying  circumstances ;  as,  cum  aliquo  ire ;  hostes  cum  detrimento  sunt 


166 


PREPOSITIONS. 


§195. 


depulsi.  It  signifies  also  ‘  in,’  i.  e.  ‘  dressed  in  ’ ;  as,  cum  tunica  pulla  sedere. 
With  verbs  implying  hostility,  it  signifies  ‘with,’  in  the  sense  of  ‘  against’;  as, 
cum  aliquo  bellum  y  ever  e ;  cum  aliquo  queri,  to  complain  of  or  against. 

Rem.  12.  D  e  commonly  signifies  ‘  concerning,’ ‘  about.’  Hence  traditur  de 
Homero  is  very  different  from  traditur  db  Homero  ;  in  the  former,  Homer  is  the 
object,  in  the  "latter  the  agent. — In  the  epistolary  style,  when  a  new  subject 
is  touched  upon,  de  signifies  ‘  in  regard  to,’  ‘  as  respects  ’ ;  as,  de  fratre ,  confido 
ita  esse ,  ut  semper  volui. — It  often  signifies  ‘  down  from  ’ ;  and  also  ‘  of,’  in  a 
partitive  sense;  as,  homo  de  plebe ,  unus  de  populo. — From  its  partitive  significa¬ 
tion  arises  its  use  in  denoting  time ;  as,  in  comitium  de  node  venire ,  i.  e.  even  by 
night,  or  spending  a  part  of  the  night  in  coming;  hence  rnulta  de  node ,  media 
de  nocte ,  ‘  in  the  depth  of  night,’  ‘  in  the  middle  of  the  night.’ — In  other  cases, 
also,  it  is  used  for  ex  or  db;  as,  Audivi  hocde  parente  meo  puer.  Cic. ;  especially 
in  connection  with  emere ,  mercari ,  conducere.  Triumphum  agere  de  Gallis  and 
ex  Gallis  are  used  indiscriminately — Sometimes,  like  secundum ,  it  signifies  4  in 
accordance  with,’  4  after  ’ ;  as,  de  consilio  meo : — sometimes  it  denotes  the  man¬ 
ner  of  an  action ;  as,  denuo ,  de  integro ,  afresh ;  de  improviso ,  unexpectedly ;  de 
industria ,  purposely : — qua  de  re,  qua  de  causa,  quibus  de  causis,  for  which  reason 
or  reasons. 

Rem.  13.  Ex,  ‘from,’  4 out  of.’  Ex  equo  pugnare,  to  fight  on  horseback; 
so  ex  itinere  scribere :  ex  adverso,  e  regime,  opposite ;  ex  omni  parte,  in  or  from 
all  parts. — Ex  vino  or  ex  aqua  coquere  or  bibere,  i.  e.  4  with  wine,’  etc.  are  medi¬ 
cal  expressions. — It  sometimes  denotes  manner ;  as,  ex  animo  laudare,  to  praise 
heartily;  ex  sententia  and  ex  voluntate,  according  to  one’s  wish. — It  is  also,  like 
de,  used  in  a  partitive  sense ;  as,  unus  e  plebe ,  unus  e  multis. 

Rem.  14.  In ,  with  the  accusative,  signifying  4  to  ’  or  4  into,’  denotes  the 
point  towards  which  motion  proceeds;  as,  in  cedem  ire;  or  the  direction  in 
which  a  thing  extends ;  as,  decern  pedes  in  altitudinem,  in  height ;  so,  also,  it 
denotes  figuratively  the  object  towards  which  an  action  is  directed,  either 
with  a  friendly  or  a  hostile  design;  as,  amor  in  patriam ,  odium  in  malos  cives , 
in  milites  liberalis  ;  oratio  in  aliquem,  a  speech  against  some  one. — It  also  de¬ 
notes  a  purpose ;  as,  pecunia  data  est  in  rem  militarem.  Pax  data  Philippo  in 
has  leges  est,  on  these  conditions. — With  words  denoting  time,  it  expresses  a 
predetermination  of  that  time,  like  4  for  ’ ;  as,  invitare  aliquem  in  posterum  diem , 
for  the  following  day.  In  diem  vivere,  to  live  only  for  the  day ;  in  futurum , 
in  posterum,  in  reliquum ,  for  the  future ;  in  ceternum,  in  perpetuum ,  forever ; 
in  prcesens,  for  the  present:  with  all  these  adjectives  tempus  may  be  supplied. 
In  with  singuli,  expressed  or  understood,  denotes  a  distribution,  and  may  be 
translated  4 to,’  ‘for,’  ‘on,’  ‘over.’ — In  singulos  dies ,  or  simply  in  dies ,  with 
comparatives  and  verbs  denoting  increase,  signifies  ‘from  day  to  day.’ — 
In  some  phrases  it  denotes  the  manner  of  an  action ;  as,  servilem  in  rnddum, 
mirum  in  modum ;  so  in  universum,  in  general ;  in  commune,  in  common ; 
in  vicem,  alternately,  or,  instead  of ;  in  alicujus  locum  aliquid  petere,  in  the 
place,  or,  instead  of. 

Rem.  15.  In ,  with  the  ablative,  signifies  4  in,’  4  on,’  4  upon,’  and  answers  to 
the  question,  Where?  When  a  number  or  quantity  is  indicated,  it  signifies 
4  among,’  and  is  equivalent  to  inter.  It  may  sometimes  be  translated  4  with,’ 
or  4  notwithstanding  ’ ;  as,  In  summa  copia  oratorum,  nemo  tamen  Ciceronis 
laudem  aequavit.— With  nouns  which  by  themselves  denote  time,  such  as 
seculum,  annus,  mensis ,  dies,  nox,  vesper,  etc.,  the  time,  in  answer  to  the  ques¬ 
tion  When?  is  expressed  by  the  simple  ablative;  but  in  is  used  with  words 
which  acquire  the  signification  of  time  only  by  such  connection;  as,  in  con¬ 
sulatu,  in  principio ,  in  bello ;  but  even  with  these  in  is  sometimes  omitted,  but 
is  usually  retained  in  connection  with  the  gerund  or  gerundive;  as,  in  legendo, 
in  legendis  libns.  In  prcesenti,  or  in  praesentia,  signifies  4  at  the  present  mo¬ 
ment,’  4  for  the  present.’ — Est  in  eo,  ut  aliquid  fat  signifies  that  something  is  on 
the  point  of  happening. 


§196. 


PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 


167 


PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 

§  196.  Most  of  the  prepositions  are  used  also  in  forming  com¬ 
pound  words.  In  composition,  they  may  be  considered  either  in 
reference  to  their  form,  or  their  force. 

I.  (a.)  Prepositions  in  composition  sometimes  retain  their  final 
consonants,  and  sometimes  change  them,  to  adapt  them  to  the  sounds 
of  the  initial  consonants  of  the  words  with  which  they  are  compound¬ 
ed.  In  some  words,  both  forms  are  in  use ;  in  others,  the  final  con¬ 
sonant  or  consonants  are  omitted. 

1.  A,  in  composition,  is  used  before  m  and  v;  as,  amdveo ,  avello ,  and  some¬ 
times  before/ in  afui  and  afore ,  for  abfui  and  abfore.  Ab  is  used  before 
vowels,  and  before  d,f  h,  j,  l,  n,  r,  and  s;  as,  abjuro ,  abrogo,  etc.  Abs  occurs 
only  before  c ,  q,  and  t ;  as,  abscondo ,  absque ,  abstineo.  In  aspello ,  aspernor ,  and 
asporto ,  the  b  of  abs  is  dropped ;  in  auf  ero  and  aufugio ,  it  is  changed  into  u. 

2.  Ad  remains  unchanged  before  vowels  and  before  b,  d,  h ,  m,  v.  It  often 
changes  d  into  c,f  g,  l,  n,  p,  r,  s ,  t,  before  those  letters  respectively;  as,  ac¬ 
cedo,  affero,  aggfedior ,  allego,  annitor,  appono,  arrigo,  assequor,  attollo.  Its  d  is 
usually  omitted  before  s  followed  by  a  consonant,  and  before  gn ;  as,  aspergo , 
aspicio ,  agnosco,  agnatus.  Before  q,  the  d  is  changed  into  c ;  as,  acquiro. 

3.  Ante  remains  unchanged,  except  in  anticipo  and  antisto,  where  it  changes 
e  to  i;  but  antesto  also  occurs. 

4.  Circum  in  composition  remains  unchanged,  only  in  circumeo  and  its  de¬ 
rivatives  the  m  is  often  dropped ;  as,  circueo,  circuitus,  etc. 

5.  Cum  (in  composition,  com),  retains  m  before  b,  m,  p;  as,  combibo ,  com¬ 
mitto,  compono :  before  l,  n}  r,  its  m  is  changed  into  those  letters  respectively ; 
as,  colligo,  connitor ,  corripio:  before  other  consonants,  it  becomes  n;  as,  con¬ 
duco,  conjungo.  Before  a  vowel,  gn  or  h,  m  is  commonly  omitted ;  as,  coe'o , 
coopto ,  cognosco,  cohabito ;  but  it  is  sometimes  retained;  as,  comedo ,  comes,  comi¬ 
tor.  In  cogo  and  cogito  a  contraction  also  takes  place ;  as,  cddgo,  cogo,  etc.  In 
comburo ,  b  is  inserted. 

6.  Ex  is  prefixed  to  vowels,  and  to  c,  h,  p,  q,  s,  t ;  as,  exeo,  exigo,  excurro,  ex¬ 
hibeo,  expedio.  Before  f  x  is  assimilated,  and  also  rarely  becomes  ec ;  as,  eff  e- 
ro,  or  ecfero.  S  after  x  is  often  omitted;  as,  exequor,  for  exsequor ;  in  excidium 
(from  exscindo ),  s  is  regularly  dropped.  E  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants ; 
as,  ebibo ,  edico,  except  in  eclex.  Before  these  however,  with  the  exception  of  n 
and  r,  ex  is  sometimes  used;  as,  exmoveo.  E  is  sometimes  used  before  p ;  as, 
epoto. 

7.  In  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel.  Before  b,  m,  p,  it  changes  n  into 
m;  as,  imbuo,  immitto,  impono :  before  I  and  r,  n  is  assimilated;  as,  illigo,  irretio: 
before  gn,  n  is  omitted;  as,  ignarus.  Before  the  other  consonants  in  is  un¬ 
changed.  In  some  compounds,  in  retains  d  before  a  vowel,  from  an  ancient 
form  indu;  as,  indigena,  indigeo,  indolesco.  So  anciently  induperator ,  for  im¬ 
perator. 

8.  Inter  remains  unchanged,  except  in  intelUgo  and  its  derivatives,  in  which 
r  before  l  is  assimilated. 

9.  Ob  remains  unchanged  before  vowels  and  generally  before  consonants. 
Its  b  is  assimilated  before  c,  f,  g,  p ;  as,  occurro,  officio ,  oggannio ,  oppeto.  In 
omitto,  b  is  dropped.  An  ancient  form  obs,  analagous  to  abs  for  ab,  is  implied 
in  obsolesco,  from  the  simple  verb  oleo ,  and  in  ostendo ,  for  obstendo. 

10.  Per  is  unchanged  in  composition,  except  in  pellicio  and  sometimes  in 
pelluceo,  in  which  r  is  assimilated  before  l.  In  pejero,  r  is  dropped. 

11.  Post  remains  unchanged,  except  in  pomoerium  and  pomeridianus ,  in 
which  st  is  dropped. 


168  PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION.  §  197. 

12.  Prce  and  prater  in  composition  remain  unchanged,  except  that  pros  is 
shortened  before  a  vowel.  Cf.  §  283,  II.  Exc.  1. 

13.  Pro  has  sometimes  its  vowel  shortened,  (cf.  §  285, 2,  Exc.  5)  and,  to  avoid 
hiatus,  it  sometimes  takes  d  before  a  vowel;  as ,  prodeo,  prodesse,  prodigo. 
Before  verbs  beginning  with  r  and  l,  pro  sometimes  becomes  por  and  poi ;  as, 
porrigo ,  polliceor. 

14.  Sub  in  composition  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel  and  before  5,  d,  Y, 
l ,  n,  s,  t ,  v.  Before  c,  f  g ,  m,  r,  its  6  is  regularly  assimilated ;  as,  succedo, 
suffero,  suggero,  summoveo,  supplico,  surripio.  Before  c,  p,  and  t,  it  sometimes 
takes  the  form  sus  from  subs,  analogous  to  abs  and  obs ;  as,  suscipio ,  suspendo , 
sustollo :  b  is  omitted  before  s,  followed  by  a  consonant ;  as,  suspicio . 

15.  Subter  and  super  in  composition  remain  unchanged. 

16.  Trans  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel.  It  omits  s  before  s;  as, 
transcendo :  in  trado,  traduco ,  trajicio ,  and  trano ,  «s  is  commonly  omitted. 

(6.)  The  following  words  are  called  inseparable  prepositions ,  be¬ 
cause  they  are  found  only  in  composition  : — 

Ambi  or  amb,  (Greek  around ,  Red  or  re,  again,  bach.  Yq,  not. 

Dis  or  dl,  asunder.  Se,  apart ,  osic?e. 

1.  is  always  used  before  a  vowel;  as,  ambages ,  ambarvdlis ,  ambedo,  am¬ 
bigo,  ambio,  amburo :  except  ampulla,  amicio,  and  anhelo.  Before  consonants  it 
has  the  forms  ambi;  as,  ambidens,  ambifariam,  ambivium:  am;  as,  amplector, 
amputo :  or  an ;  as,  anceps,  anfractus,  anquiro. 

2.  Dis  is  prefixed  to  words  beginning  with  c,  p,  q,  s  before  a  vowel,  t ,  and  h ; 
as,  discutio ,  dispono ,  disquiro,  distendo,  dishiasco :  but  disertus  is  formed  from  dis¬ 
sero;  before  f  s  is  changed  into  f ;  as,  differo:  in  dirimo,  and  diribeo  (from 
dis  habeo),  s  becomes  r.  Di  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants,  and  to  s  when 
followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  diduco,  dimitto,  distinguo,  dispicio.  But  both  dis 
and  di  are  used  before  j ;  as,  disjungo,  dijudico,  and  before  r  in  rumpo. 

3.  Red  is  used  before  a  vowel  or  h ;  re  before  a  consonant;  as,  redamo,  redeo, 
redhibeo,  redigo,  redoleo ,  redundo ; — rejicio,  repono,  revertor.  But  red  is  used-.be- 
fore  do ;  as,  reddo.  The  connecting  vowel  i  is  found  in  redivivus ;  and  in  the 
poetical  forms  relligio,  relliquice,  and  sometimes  in  reccido  the  d  is  assimilated. 
In  later  writers  re  is  sometimes  found  before  a  vowel  or  h. 

4.  Se  and  ve  are  prefixed  without  change ;  as,  secedo,  securus ;  vegrandis, 
vecors. 

§  197.  II.  Prepositions  in  composition  usually  add  their  own 
signification  to  that  of  the  word  with  which  they  are  united ;  but 
sometimes  they  give  to  the  compound  a  meaning  different  from  that 
of  its  simples.  The  following  are  their  most  common  significations : — 

1.  A,  or  ab,  away,  from,  down;  entirely;  un-.  With  verbs  it  denotes  re¬ 
moval,  disappearance,  absence;  as,  aufero,  abutor,  absum.  With  adjectives  it 
denotes  absence,  privation ;  as,  amens ,  absonus. 

2.  Ad,  to,  toward;  at,  by.  In  composition  with  verbs  ad  denotes  (a)  motion 
to,  (not  into),  as,  accedo;  ( b )  addition,  as,  ascribo;  (c)  nearness ,  as,  assideo; 
(a)  assent,  favor,  as,  annuo,  arrideo;  (e)  repetition  and  hence  intensity,  as,  acci¬ 
do  ;  (/)  at,  in  consequence  of,  as,  arrigo.  It  is  sometimes  augmentative,  rarely 
inchoative. 

3.  Ambi,  around,  about,  on  both  sides. 

4.  Circum ,  around,  about,  on  all  sides. 

5.  Com  or  c6n,  together,  entirely.  In  composition  with  verbs  it  denotes  (a) 
union,  as,  concurro,  consulo;  (b)  completeness,  as,  comburo,  conficio;  (c)  with 
effort,  as,  conjicio,  conclamo;  ( d )  in  harmony,  as,  consono,  consentio;  (e)  on  or 
over,  like  the  English  be-,  as,  collino,  to  besmear. 


§197. 


PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 


169 


6.  Contra ,  against,  opposite. 

7.  De,  off,  away,  through,  over,  down;  entirely;  very,  extremely.  With 
verbs  de  denotes  (a)  down ;  as, demitto;  ( b )  removal;  as, detondeo;  (c)  absence; 
as,  desum,  dehabeo;  (d)  prevention;  as,  dehortor;  (e)  unfriendly  feeling ;  as, 
despicio,  derideo.— With  adjectives  de  denotes  (a)  down;  as,  declivis ;  ( b )  without ; 
as,  demens. 

8.  Dis,  asunder,  apart,  in  pieces,  in  two;  dis-,  un-;  very  greatly.  With 
verbs  dis  denotes  (a)  division;  as,  divido,  dilabor  ;  (b)  difference ;  as,  discrepo, 
dissentio;  (c)  the  reverse  of  the  simple  notion ;  as,  displiceo,  diffido;  ( d )  intensity; 
as,  dilaudo. — With  adjectives  dis  denotes  difference;  as,  discolor,  discors. 

9.  E,  or  ex,  out,  forth,  away,  upward,  without,  -less,  un-;  utterly,  com¬ 
pletely,  very.  With  verbs  it  denotes  (a)  out;  as,  exeo,  eximo,  elaboro;  (b)  re - 
mocalof  something;  as,  edormio;  (c)  publicity ;  as,  edico;  (d)  ascent;  as,  exsisto; 
(e)  completeness;  as,  edisco,  exuro;  (/)  with  denominative  verbs,  change  of 
character;  as,  expio,  effero  (are);  ( g )  removal  of  what  is  expressed  by  the  noun 
whence  the  verb  is  derived;  as  enodo;  (h)  the  reversal  of  the  fundamental  idea  ; 
as,  explico;  (i)  distance;  as,  exaudio. — With  adjectives  formed  from  substan¬ 
tives  it  denotes  absence ;  as,  exsomnis. 

10.  In ,  with  verbs,  signifies  in,  on,  at ;  into,  against ;  as,  inhabito ,  induo ,  inge¬ 
mo,  ineo ,  illido.  With  adjectives,  un-,  in-,  im-,  S-,  ir-,  not;  as,  ignotus ,  inhospi¬ 
talis,  immortalis.  Some  Of  its  compounds  have  contrary  significations,  accord¬ 
ing  as  they  are  participles  or  adjectives;  as,  intectus,  part.,  covered,  adj.,  un¬ 
covered. 

11.  Inter,  between,  among,  at  intervals. 

12.  Ob,  with  verbs,  signifies  to,  towards;  as,  dbeo,  ostendo ;  against;  as,  obluc¬ 
tor,  obnuntio  ;  at,  before ;  as,  obambulo,  obversor ;  upon ;  as,  occulco ;  over ;  as, 
obduco. 

13.  Per ,  with  verbs,  denotes,  through,  thoroughly,  perfectly,  quite ;  as,  per¬ 
duco,  perficio,  perdo :  with  adjectives,  through,  very;  as,  pernox ,  perlevis. 

14.  Post,  after,  behind. 

15.  Prce  in  composition  with  verbs  denotes  (a)  before  in  place;  as,  praemitto ; 
(b)  by  or  past;  as,  prsefluo;  (c)  in  command ;  as,  praesum,  praeficio;  (d)  superior¬ 
ity;  as,  praesto;  (e)  before  in  time ;  as,  praedico,  praecerpo;  at  the  extremity;  as, 
praeuro. — With  adjectives,  (a)  before  in  place  or  time;  as,  praeceps,  praescius; 
(b)  very ;  as,  praealtus,  praeclarus. 

16.  Procter ,  past,  by,  beyond,  besides. 

17.  Pro,  before,  forward,  forth,  away,  down;  for;  openly;  as,  proludo,  por- 
mg°,  proterreo,  protero,  procuro,  profiteor. 

18.  Re,  again,  against,  back,  re-,  un-,  away;  greatly;  as,  refloresco,  rependo , 
referio,  refigo,  recondo. 

19.  Se,  without,  aside,  apart;  as,  securo,  sepono,  secedo,  securus. 

20.  Sub,  up,  from  below  upwards,  under.  With  verbs  sub  also  signifies  (a) 
assistance ;  as,  subvenio;  ( b )  succession;  as,  succino;  (c)  in  place  of;  as,  sufficio; 
( d )  near ;  as,  subsum ;  (e)  secretly,  clandestinely ;  as,  surripio,  subauco;  ( f )  some - 
ivhat,  a  little;  as,  subrideo,  subaccuso. — With  adjectives  it  signifies,  slightly, 
rather ;  as,  subobscurus,  subabsurdus,  subacidus. 

21.  Subter,  beneath,  under,  from  under,  secretly,  privately. 

22.  Super,  above,  over,  left  over,  remaining,  super-;  as,  supersedeo,  supersum , 
superstes,  supervacaneus. 

23.  Trans,  over,  across,  through;  beyond;  as,  trado,  transeo ,  transfigo, 
transalpinus. 

24.  Ve,  not,  without ;  very ;  as,  vegrandis,  vecors ;  vepallidus . 

m  Remark.  In  composition  the  preposition  seems  often  to  add  nothing  to  tho 
signification  of  the  word  with  which  it  is  compounded. 

15 


170 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


§198 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


§  198«  A  conjunction  is  a  particle  which  connects  words  or 
propositions. 

The  most  usual  conjunctions  are, 


atque, 


ac. 


ac  si,  as 
adeo,  so 


J  and ,  ds;  than. 

if- 

that, 


an. 


so. 


whether. 


anne, 

annon,  whether  or  not. 
antequam,  before. 
at,  ast,  but. 
at  enim,  but  indeed. 
atqui,  but. 
attamen,  but  yet. 
aut,  either ,  or. 
aut...aut,  either... or. 
autem,  but. 

ceterum,  but,  however . 
ceu,  as,  like  as,  as  if. 
cum  or  quum,  since. 
donee,  as  long  as,  until. 
dum»  provided ,  while,  as 
long  as,  until. 
dummodo,  if  but,  if  only. 
enimvero,  in  very  deed. 

>  1-^° 
eo,  therefore. 
equidem,  indeed, 
ergo,  therefore. 
et,  and. 

et...et  )  both... and; 
et...que,  j  as  well.. .as. 
et... neque  or  nec,  on  the 
one  hand,  but  not  on  the 
other. 

etiam,  also. 
etiamsi,  )  although, 
etsl,  J  though. 
iccirco, 

Igltfir,  therefore. 
itaque,  ^ 

licet,  though ,  although. 
modo,  provided. 
nam,  namque,  for. 


Smm,  >  tor 
etenrm  ‘  ' 


ne,  lest,  that  not. 

-ne,  whether. 
neque  or  nec,  neither,  nor. 
neque.. .neque, ' 
nec.. .nec,  neither , 

neque.. .nec,  ...nor. 

nec.. .neque, 
necne,  or  not. 
neque,  neither,  nor. 
neque  or  nec... et,  I  not 
neque  or  nec. .. que,  j  on 
the  one  hand,  but  on  the 
other. 

neve  or  neu,  nor,  and  not. 
neve.. .neve,  {  neither... 
neu. ..neu,  j  nor. 
ni,  nisi,  unless. 
num,  whether. 
praeut,  in  comparison  with. 
prout,  according  as,  just 
as,  as. 

proinde,  hence,  therefore. 
propterea,  therefore,  for 
that  reason. 

postquam,  after,  since. 
priusquam,  before. 


quam,  as, 


than. 


quare, 
quamobrem, 
quocirca, 
quantumvis, 
quamlibet, 
quasi,  as  if,  just  as. 
-que,  and. 

-que...et,  \  both.. .and; 


wherefore. 

although, 

however. 


-que.. .-que, 


as  well...as. 


quia,  because. 
quin,  but  that ,  that  not. 
quippe,  because. 


quamvis,  although. 
quando,  quandoquidem, 
whereas,  since. 
quamquam,  although.  . 
quapropter, 


quo,  in  order  that. 
quoad,  as  long  as,  until. 
quod,  because,  but. 
quodsi,  but  if. 
quominus,  mat  not. 
quoniam,  since,  because. 
quoque,  also. 
quum  or  cum,  when,  since , 
because. 

quum. ..turn,  both. ..and. 
sed,  but. 

2%  | «°  «>>*<“.  «• 

si,  if. 

si  modo,  if  only. 
simul,  )  as  soon 

simulae  (-atque)  j  as. 
sin,  but  if,  if  however. 
sive  or  seu,  or  if. 

!  whether. ..or. 
seu.. .seu,  J 

siquidem,  if  indeed,  since. 
tamen,  however,  still. 
tametsi,  although. 
tamquam,  as  if. 
turn. ..turn,  both.. .and. 
unde,  whence. 
ut,  j  that ,  as  that,  so  that, 
uti,  |  to  the  end  that. 
ut  si,  as  if. 
utrum,  whether. 

v£j’  ]  either,  or. 

vel...vel,  either. ..or. 
veliit,  j  even  as,  just  as, 
veluti,  )  like  as. 
vero,  truly,  but  indeed. 
verum,  but. 

veruntamen,  yet,  notwith¬ 
standing. 

verum-enim  vero,  but  in¬ 
deed. 


Conjunctions,  according  to  their  different  uses,  are  divided  into 
two  general  classes, — coordinate  and  subordinate. 

I.  Coordinate  conjunctions,  are  such  as  join  coordinate  or  similar 
constructions;  as, 

Luna  et  stellce  fulgebant ,  The  moon  and  the  stars  were  shining.  Condidunt 
venti,  fugiuntque  nubes,  The  winds  subside,  and  the  clouds  disperse.  Difficile 
factu  est,  sed  conabor  tamen,  It  is  difficult  to  accomplish,  but  still  I  will  try. 


§198. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


171 


Coordinate  conjunctions  include  the  following  subdivisions,  viz.  copulative , 
disjunctive ,  adversative ,  illative ,  and  most  of  the  causal  conjunctions. 

II.  Subordinate  conjunctions  are  such  as  join  dissimilar  construc¬ 
tions;  as, 

Edo,  ut  vivam ,  I  eat  that  I  may  live.  Pyrrhus  rex  in  itinere  incidit  in  canem, 
qui  interfecti  hominis  corpus  custodiebat .  Mergi  pullos  in  aquam  jussit ,  ut  bibe¬ 
rent,  quoniain,  esse  nollent. 

Subordinate  conjunctions  include  all  those  connectives  which  unite  sub¬ 
ordinate  or  dependent  clauses.  These  are  the  concessive ,  illative ,  final ,  condi¬ 
tional,  interrogative ,  and  temporal  conjunctions,  and  the  causals  quod,  quum,  quo¬ 
niam,  etc.  To  these  may  be  added  also  the  relatives  whether  pronouns,  adjec¬ 
tives,  or  adverbs. 

The  following  paragraphs  contain  a  specification  of  the  several  conjunctions  comprised 
in  each  of  the  preceding  subdivisions,  and  remarks  respecting  their  particular  import 
and  use  as  connectives. 

1.  Copulative  conjunctions  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered  joint¬ 
ly;  as ,  et ,  dc,  atque ,  the  enclitic  que ,  which,  combined  with  the  negation 
belonging  to  the  verb,  becomes  neque  or  nec,  and,  the  negation  being  doubled, 
nec  non  or  neque  non ,  it  becomes  again  affirmative  and  equivalent  to  e  t . 
To  these  are  to  be  added  etiam  and  qudque ,  with  the  adverb ials  item  and 
itidem. 

Remark,  (a.)  Et  and  que  differ  in  this,  et  connects  things  which  are  con¬ 
ceived  as  different,  and  que  adds  what  belongs  to,  or  naturally  flows  from  them. 
Et,  therefore,  is  copulative  and  que  adjunctive.  Hence,  in  an  enumeration  of 
words,  que  frequently  connects  the  last  of  the  series,  and  by  its  means  the  pre¬ 
ceding  idea  is  extended  without  the  addition  of  any  thing  which  is  generically 
different.  In  connecting  propositions  que  denotes  a  consequence,  and  is  equiv¬ 
alent  to  4  and  therefore.’ 

( b .)  .dc  never  stands  before  vowels,  atque  chiefly  before  vowels,  but  also  be¬ 
fore  consonants. — Atque,  being  formed  of  ad  and  que ,  properly  signifies  4  and 
also,’  ‘  and  in  addition,’  thus  putting  things  on  an  equality,  but  giving  emphasis 
to  the  latter.  In  the  beginning  of  a  proposition,  which  is  explanatory  of  that 
which  precedes,  atque  or  dc  introduces  a  thing  with  great  weight,  and  may  be 
rendered  4  now  ’ ;  and  in  answers ;  as,  Cognostine  hos  versus  ?  Ac  memoriter ,  it 
is  rendered  ‘  yes,  and  that.’  Ac  being  an  abridged  form  of  atque  loses  some¬ 
what  of  its  power  in  connecting  single  words,  and  its  use  alternates  with  that 
of  et ;  it  is  preferred  in  subdivisions,  whereas  the  main  propositions  are  con¬ 
nected  by  et. 

(c.)  Neque,  compounded  of  the  ancient  ne  for  non  and  que,  is  used  for  et  non. 
Et  non  itself  is  used,  when  only  one  idea  or  one  word  of  a  proposition  is  to  be 
negatived ;  as,  patior  et  non  moleste  fero ;  and  also  when  our  ‘  and  not  ’  is 
used  for  ‘  and  not  rather  ’  to  correct  an  improper  supposition ;  as,  Si  quam  Ru¬ 
brius  injuriam  suo  nomine  ac  non  impulsu  tuo  fecisset.  Cic.  Et  non  is  commonly 
found  also  in  the  second  clause  of  a  sentence  when  et  precedes,  but  neque , 
also,  is  often  used  in  this  case.  Nec  non  or  neque  non ,  in  classical  prose,  is  not 
used  like  et  to  connect  nouns,  but  only  to  join  propositions,  and  the  two  words 
are  separated.  In  later  writers,  however,  they  are  not  separated  and  are 
equivalent  to  et. 

(d.)  Etiam  has  a  wider  extent  than  qudque ,  for  it  contains  the  idea  of  our 
4  even,’  and  it  also  adds  a  new  circumstance,  whereas  qudque  denotes  the  ad¬ 
dition  of  a  thing  of  a  similar  kind.  Hence  etiam  is  properly  used  to  connect 
sentences,  while  qudque  refers  to  a  single  word.  Etiam  signifies  4  and  further,’ 
qudque,  4  and  so,’  4  also.’  Qudque  always  follows  the  word  to  which  it  refers, 
etiam  in  similar  cases  is  usually  placed  before  it,  but  when  it  connects  proposi¬ 
tions  its  place  is  arbitrary.  Et,  too,  in  classical  prose,  is  sometimes  used  in 
the  sense  of 4  also.’  So  often  is  ndn  mddo — sed  et,  4  not  only — but  also.’  or  4  but 
even.’  J  ’ 


172 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


§198. 


(e.)  Copulative  conjunctions  are  often  repeated  in  the  sense  of ‘both — and,’ 
‘as  well — as,’  ‘not  only — but  also  ’  Et — et  is  of  common  occurrence;  so.  in 
later  writers,  but  rarely  in  Cicero,  et — que  ;  que — et  connect  single  words,  but 
not  in  Cicero;  que — que ,  occur  for  the  most  part  only  in  poetry,  or  in  connec¬ 
tion  with  the  relative. — Negative  propositions  are  connected  in  English  by 
‘  neither — nor,’  and  in  Latin  by  neque — neque,  nec — nec ,  neque — nec,  and  rarely 
by  nec — neque.  Propositions,  one  of  which  is  negative  and  the  other  affirma¬ 
tive  ‘  on  the  one  hand — but  not  on  the  other,’  or,  ‘  not  on  the  one  hand — but  on 
the  other,’  are  connected  by  et — neque  or  nec,  neque  or  nec — et,  and  occasionally 
by  nec  or  neque — que . 

2.  Disjunctive  conjunctions  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered  sepa¬ 
rately;  as,  aut,  vel,  the  enclitic  ve,  and  sive  or  seu. 

Remark,  (a.)  Aut  and  vel  differ  in  this;  aut  indicates  a  difference  of  the 
object,  vel ,  a  difference  of  expression,  i.  e.  aut  is  objective,  vel,  subjective. 
Vel  is  connected  with  the  verb  velle,  and  is  generally  repeated,  vel — vel,  ‘  choose 
this  or  choose  this,’  and  the  single  vel  is  used  by  Cicero  only  to  correct  a  pre¬ 
ceding  expression,  and  commonly  combined  with  dicam ,  potius ,  or  etiam. — 
Hence  by  ellipsis  vel  has  acquired  the  signification  of  the  adverb,  ‘  even,’  and 
so  enhances  the  signification  of  the  word  modified  by  it;  as,  Quum  Sophocles 
vel  optime  scripserit  Electram ,  where  bene  is  to  be  supplied  before  vel ,  and  the 
latter  is  used  for  the  purpose  of  correcting  the  preceding  expression.  Cf.  §  127,  4. 
By  means  of  its  derivation  from  velle  it  has,  also,  the  signification  of  ‘  for  ex¬ 
ample’  or  ‘to  take  a  case,’  for  which  velut  is  more  frequently  used. — ( b .)  Ve, 
the  apocopated  vel,  leaves  the  choice  free  between  two  or  more  things,  and  in 
later  but  good  prose  vel  is  used  in  the  same  manner. 

(c.)  Sive  commonly  retains  the  meaning  of  si,  and  is  then  the  same  as  vel  si, 
but  sometimes  loses  it,  and  is  then  equivalent  to  vel,  denoting  a  difference  of 
name ;  as,  Vocabulum  sive  appellatio.  Quint.  The  form  seu  is  rarely  used  by 
Cicero  except  in  the  combination  seu  potius. — ( d .)  Aut  and  ve  serve  to  continue 
the  negation  in  negative  sentences,  where  we  use  ‘nor’;  as,  non — aut,  where 
non — neque  also  may  be  used.  They  are  used  also  in  negative  questions ;  as, 
Num  leges  nostras  moresve  nbvit?  Cic. ;  and  after  comparatives;  as,  Doctrina 
paulo  asperior,  quam  veritas  aut  natura  patiatur.  Cic.  It  is  only  when  both 
ideas  are  to  be  united  into  one  that  a  copulative  is  used  instead  of  aut  and  ve. — 
(e.)  ‘  Either — or’  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  aut — aut,  denoting  an  opposition  be¬ 
tween  two  things,  one  of  which  excludes  the  other,  or  by  vel — vel,  denoting 
that  the  opposition  is  immaterial  in  respect  to  the  result,  so  that  the  one  need 
not  exclude  the  other;  as,  Vel  imperatore  vel  milite  me  utimini.  Sail. — Sive — 
sive  is  the  same  as  vel  si — vel  si,  and  retains  the  meaning  of  vel — vel.  If  nouns 
only  are  opposed  to  each  other,  an  uncertainty  is  expressed  as  to  how  a  thing 
is  to  be  called;  as,  Cretum  leges ,  quas  sive  Jupiter  sive  Minos  sanxit;  i.  e.  I  do 
not  know  whether  I  am  to  say  Jupiter  or  Minos. 

3.  Comparative  conjunctions  express  a  comparison.  These  are,  ut  or  uti, 
sicut,  velut ,  pr  oiit ,  praeut,  the  poetical  ceu,  quam,  tamquam ,  ( with 
and  without  si),  quasi,  ut  si,  dc  s i ,  with  d c  and  atque,  "when  they  sig¬ 
nify  ‘  as.’ 

Remark.  Ac  and  atque Signify  ‘  as  ’  or  ‘  than  ’  after  adverbs  and  adjectives 
which  denote  similarity  or  dissimilarity;  as,  ceque,  juxtd,  par  and  pariter, 
pervade  and  proinde,  pro  eo,  similis  and  similiter,  dissimilis ,  talis,  tdtidem,  alius 
and  aliter ,  contra,  secus ,  contrarius. —  Quam  is  rarely  used  after  these  words, 
except  when  a  negative  particle  is  joined  with  alius;  as,  Virtus  nihil  aliud  est, 
quam,  etc. ;  and  et  and  que  do  not  occur  in  this  connection. — Ac  is  used  for 
quam ,  after  comparatives,  in  poetry  and  occasionally  by  late  prose  writers;  as, 
Artius  atque  hedera.  Hor.  Insanius  ac  si.  Id. 

4.  Concessive  conjunctions  express  a  concession,  with  the  general  signifi¬ 
cation  ‘  although.’  These  are  et  si,  etiamsi,  tametsi ,  or  tame  n  et  si , 
quamquam ,  quamvis ,  quantumvis ,  quamlibet ,  licet,  ut  in  the 
sense  of ‘even  if’  or  ‘  although,’  and  quum  when  it  signifies  ‘although.’ 

Remark.  Tamen  and  other  particles  signifying  ‘yet,’  ‘still,’  are  the  correl¬ 
atives  of  the  concessive  conjunctions;  as,  Vtdesint  vires ,  tamen  est  laudanda 


§198. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


173 


voluntas.  Ovid.  The  adverb  quidem  becomes  a  concessive  conjunction,  when  it 
is  used  to  connect  propositions  and  is  followed  by  sed. —  Quamquam ,  in  absolute 
sentences,  sometimes  refers  to  something  preceding,  which  it  limits  and  partly 
nullifies;  as,  Quamquam  quid  loquor  ?  Yet  why  do  I  speak? 

5.  Conditional  conjunctions  express  a  condition,  their  fundamental  signi¬ 
fication  being  ‘if.’  These  are  si,  sin,  nisi  or  ni ,  si  modo ,  dummodd , 
‘if  only,’  ‘if  but, ’(for  which  dum  and  modo  are  also  used  alone),  dum - 
mddd  ne,  or  simply  mo  do  ne  or  dumne . 

Remark.  («.)  In  order  to  indicate  the  connection  with  a  preceding  proposi¬ 
tion,  the  relative  qu6d,  which  in  such  case  loses  its  signification  as  a  pronoun, 
and  may  be  rendered,  ‘  nay,’  4  now,’  *  and,’  or  ‘  then,’  is  frequently  put  before 
si  and  sometimes  before  nisi  and  etsi,  so  that  quodsi  may  be  regarded  as  one 
word,  signifying  ‘  now  if,’  ‘  but  if,’  or  ‘  if  then.’  It  serves  especially  to  intro¬ 
duce  something  assumed  as  true,  from  which  further  inferences  may  be  drawn. 
It  sometimes  signifies  ‘  although.’  Quodnisi  signifies  ‘  if  then — not,’  and  quod- 
etsi,  ‘  nay,  even  if.’  Quod  is  found  also  before  quum ,  ubi ,  quid,  quoniam ,  ne,  uti - 
nam,  and  even  before  the  relative  pronoun. 

( b .)  Ni  and  nisi  limit  a  statement  by  introducing  an  exception,  and  thus  dif¬ 
fer  from  si  non,  which  introduces  a  negative  case.  It  is  often  immaterial 
whether  nisi  or  si  non  is  used,  but  the  difference  is  still  essential.  Si  non  is 
used  when  single  words  are  opposed  to  one  another,  and  in  this  case  si  mimis 
may  be  used  instead  of  si  non. — If  after  an  affirmative  proposition  its  negative 
opposite  is  added  without  a  verb,  our  ‘  but  if  not  ’  is  commonly  expressed  in 
prose  by  si  minus  or  sin  minus  or  sin  aliter ;  as,  Educ  tecum  etiam  omnes  tuos ; 
si  minus,  quam  plurimos.  Cic. ;  rarely  by  si  non. 

6.  Illative  conjunctions  express  an  inference  or  conclusion,  with  the  gen¬ 
eral  signification  of  ‘  therefore,’  ‘consequently.’  These  are  ergo,  igitur , 
itaque,  eo,  ideo,  iccirco ,  proinde ,  propter  ed,  and  the  relative  con¬ 
junctions,  quapropter ,  quare,  quamobrem ,  quocirca, unde, k  where¬ 
fore.’ 

Remark.  Ergo  and  igitur  denote  a  logical  inference. — Itdque,  ‘  and  thus,’ 
expresses  the  relation  of  cause  in  facts. — Ideo,  iccirco,  and  proptered,  ‘  on  this 
account,’  express  the  agreement  between  intention  and  action. — Ed,  ‘  on  this 
account,’  or  ‘  for  this  purpose,’  is  more  frequently  an  adverb  of  place. — 
Proinde ,  4  consequently,’  implies  an  exhortation. —  Unde,  4  whence,’  is  properly 
an  adverb  of  place. — Adeo,  ‘  so  that,’  or  simply  ‘  so,’  is  also  properly  an  adverb. 
Hinc,  ‘  hence,’  and  inde,  ‘  thence,’  continue  to  be  adverbs. 

7.  Causal  conjunctions  express  a  cause  or  reason,  with  the  general  signifi¬ 
cation  of  ‘  for  ’  and  ‘because.’  These  are  nam,  namque,  enim,  etenim, 
quid,  quod,  qudniam ,  quippe,  quum,  quando,  quandoquidem, 
siquidem ;  and  the  adverbs  nimirum,  nempe,  scilicet,  and  videlicet. 

Remark,  (a.)  Nam  is  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposition,  enim,  after  the 
first  or  second  word.  Nam  introduces  an  objective  reason,  and  enim  merelv  a 
subjective  one.  There  is  the  same  difference  between  namque  and  etenim. 
Namque ,  however,  though  constantly  standing  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposi¬ 
tion  in  Cicero,  Cassar,  and  Nepos,  is  in  later  writers  often  put  after  the  begin¬ 
ning.  Enim  in  the  sense  of  at  enim  or  sed  enim  is  sometimes,  by  comic  writers, 
put  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposition.— Nam,  enim,  and  etenim  are  often  used 
in  the  sense  of  ‘  namely,’  or  ‘  to  wit,’  to  introduce  an  explanation  of  some¬ 
thing  going  before.  Nimirum,  videlicet ,  and  scilicet  likewise  answer  to  our 
4  namely  ’  or  ‘  viz.’  Nimirum,  compounded  of  ni  and  mirum ,  and  signifying 
4  a  wonder  if  not,’  is  used  as  a -connective  in  the  sense  of  ‘undoubtedly’  or 
4  surely,’  and  implies  strong  confidence  in  the  truth  of  the  proposition  with 
which  it  is  connected. —  Videlicet  and  scilicet  introduce  an  explanation,  with 
this  difference  that  videlicet  generally  indicates  the  true,  and  scilicet  a  wrong 
explanation.  Sometimes,  however,  nam,  enim,  etenim,  nimirum,  and  videlicet 
are  used  in  an  ironical  sense,  and  scilicet  introduces  a  true  reason. — Nempe, 
4  surely,’  often  assumes  a  sarcastic  meaning  when  another  person’s  concession 
is  taken  for  the  purpose  of  refuting  him. — (b.)  Quid  and  qudd  indicate  a  defi- 
16* 


174 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


§198, 


nite  and  conclusive  reason,  qudniam ,  (i.  e.  quum  jam),  a  motive. — Ideo,  iccirco , 
proptered  qudd,  and  quid ,  are  used  without  any  essential  difference,  except  that 
quid  introduces  a  more  strict  and  logical  reason,  whereas  qudniam ,  signifying 
‘now  as,’  introduces  important  circumstances. —  Quando ,  quandoquidem ,  and 
siquidem  approach  nearer  to  quoniam  than  to  quid,  as  they  introduce  only  sub¬ 
jective  reasons.  Quanddquidem  denotes  a  reason  implied  in  a  circumstance 
previously  mentioned ;  siquidem,  a  reason  implied  in  a  concession.  In  siquidem 
the  meaning  of  si  is  generally  dropped,  but  it  sometimes  remains,  and  then  si 
and  quidem  should  be  written  as  separate  words ;  as,  0  fortunatam  rempvbli- 
cam,  si  quidem  hanc  sentinam  ejecerit .  Cic. —  Quippe,  with  the  relative  pronoun 
or  with  quum,  introduces  a  subjective  reason.  When  used  elliptically  without 
a  verb  it  signifies  ‘  forsooth  ’  or  ‘  indeed.’  Sometimes  it  is  followed  by  a  sen¬ 
tence  with  enim,  and  in  this  way  gradually  acquires  the  signification  or  nam. 

8.  Final  conjunctions  express  a  purpose,  object,  or  result,  with  the  signifi¬ 
cation  of  ‘  in  order  that,’  or  4  in  order  that  not.’  These  are  ut  or  uti,  quo, 
ne  or  ut  ne,  neve  or  neu,  quin  and  quominus . 

Remark.  Ut,  as  a  conjunction,  indicates  either  a  result  or  a  purpose,  ‘  so 
that,’  and  4  in  order  that.’  When  indicating  a  result,  if  a  negative  is  added  to 
it,  it  becomes  ut  non ;  when  indicating  a  purpose,  if  the  negative  is  added,  it, 
becomes  ne  or  ut  ne,  but  ut  non  also  is  very  rarely  used  for  ne. — Neve  (i.  e.  vel  ne) 
signifies  either  4  or  in  order  that  not,’  or  4  and  in  order  that  not.’  Ut  ne  is  a 
pleonasm,  not  differing  perceptibly  from  ne.  It  is  used  more  frequently  by 
Cicero  than  by  other  writers.  Quo  ne  for  ne  occurs  once  in  Horace. 

9.  Adversative  conjunctions,  express  opposition,  with  the  signification  of 
‘but.’  These  are  sed,  autem,  verum ,  vero,  at  (poetical  ast),  at 
enim,  atqui,  tamen ,  attamen ,  sedtamen,  veruntamen,  at  vero, 
(enimvero ),  v  erumenim ,  verum,  vero,  ceterum. 

Remark,  (a.)  Sed  denotes  a  direct  opposition,  and  interrupts  the  narrative  or 
argument ;  autem  marks  a  transition,  and  denotes  at  once  a  connection  and  an 
opposition.  Porro ,  4  further,’  denotes  progression  and  transition  but  not  oppo¬ 
sition,  except  in  later  authors. —  Verum  has  a  similar  relation  to  vero  as  sea  to 
autem.  Verum,  while  it  denotes  opposition,  contains  also  an  explanation.  Vero 
connects  things  which  are  different,  but  denotes  the  point  in  favor  of  which  the 
decision  should  be.  It  thus  forms  the  transition  to  something  more  important, 
as  in  the  phrase,  Illud  vero  plane  non  est  ferendum,  i.  e.  that  which  I  am  about 
to  mention.  In  affirmative  answers  vero  is  often  added  to  the  verb ;  as,  Dasne  t 
Do  vero.  Hence,  when  the  protasis  supplies  the  place  of  a  question,  it  is  some¬ 
times  introduced  into  the  apodosis  merely  to  show  that  it  contains  an  answer. 
Hence  also  vero  alone  signifies  4  yes,’  like  sane,  ita,  and  etiam. — Enimvero,  4  yes, 
truly,’  4  in  truth,’  does  not  denote  opposition.  It  sometimes,  like  vero,  forms 
the  transition  to  that  which  is  most  important.  The  compound  verum  enbn- 
vero  denotes  the  most  emphatic  opposition. 

( b .)  denotes  that  that  which  is  opposed  is  equivalent  to  that  which  pre¬ 
cedes.  It  frequently  follows  si,  in  the  sense  of  4  yet,’  or  4  at  least  ’ ;  as,  etsi  non 
sapientissimus,  at  amicissimus.  It  is  especially  used  to  denote  objections  whether 
of  the  speaker  himself  or  of  others.  At  enim  introduces  a  reason  for  the  objec¬ 
tion  implied  in  at. — By  atqui,  4  but  still,’  4  but  yet,’  or  4  nevertheless,’  we  admit 
what  precedes,  but  oppose  something  else  to  it ;  as,  Magnum  narras,  vix  credi¬ 
bile.  Atqui  sic  liabet.  Hor.  So,  also,  when  that  which  is  admitted,  is  made 
use  of  to  prove  the  contrary.  Finally,  atqui  is  used  in  syllogisms,  when  a  thing 
is  assumed  which  had  before  been  left  undecided ;  in  this  case  it  does  not  de¬ 
note  a  direct  opposition  of  facts,  and  may  be  translated  by  4  now,’  4  but,’  4  but 
now.’ —  Ceterum ,  properly  4  as  for  the  rest,’  is  often  used  by  later  writers  for 
sed. —  Contra  ea,  in  the  sense  of 4  on  the  other  hand,’  is  used"  as  a  conjunction. 
So  ddeo  with  a  pronoun,  when  it  may  be  translated  4  just,’  4  precisely,’  4  even,’ 
4  indeed,’  or  an  intensive  4  and.’ 

10.  Temporal  conjunctions,  express  time.  These  are  quum,  quum  pri¬ 
mum,  ut ,  ut  primum,  ubi,  postquam ,  antequam ,  and  prius¬ 
quam,  quando,  simulae  or  simulatque,  or  simul  alone,  dum , 
usquS  dum,  donec ,  quoad . 


§198. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


175 


Remark.  Ut  and  ubl ,  as  particles  of  time,  signify  ‘  when.’  Bum,  donee ,  and 
quoad  signify  either  4  as  long  as,’  or  4  until.’  Bum  often  precedes  interea  or  in¬ 
terim,  and  both  dum  and  donee  are  often  preceded  by  the  adverbs  usque ,  usque 
eo  or  usque  adeo. 

11.  Interrogative  conjunctions  indicate  a  question.  These  are,  num, 
utrum ,  an,  and  the  enclitic  ne.  This,  when  attached  to  the  three  preced¬ 
ing  particles,  forming  numne ,  utrumne,  and  anne,  does  not  affect  their 
meaning.  With  non  it  forms  a  special  interrogative  particle  nonne.  To 
these  add  e c  and  en,  as  they  appear  in  ecquis ,  ec quando ,  and  enu in¬ 
quam,  and  num  quid  and  ecquid ,  when  used  simply  as  interrogative 
particles. 

Remark,  (a.)  The  interrogative  particles  have  no  distinct  meaning  by 
themselves  in  direct  questions,  but  only  serve  to  give  to  a  proposition  the  form 
of  a  question.  In  direct  speech  the  interrogative  particles  are  sometimes 
omitted,  but  in  indirect  questions  they  are  indispensable,  except  in  the  case  of 
a  double  question,  where  the  first  particle  is  sometimes  omitted. — Ecquid  and 
numquid,  as  interrogative  particles,  have  the  meaning  of  num,  quid  in  this  case 
having  no  meaning,  but  they  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  inter¬ 
rogative  pronouns  ecquid  and  numquid.  En,  or  when  followed  by  a  q,  ec  is, 
like  num,  ne,  and  an,  an  interrogative  particle,  but  is  always  prefixed  to  some 
other  interrogative  word. 

(b.)  In  direct  questions,  num  and  its  compounds  numne,  numnam,  numquid, 
numquidnam ,  and  the  compounds  with  en  or  ec  suppose  that  the  answer  will  be 
‘no’;  as,  Num  putas  me  tam  dementem  fuisse  ?  But  ecquid  is  sometimes  used 
in  an  affirmative  sense.  In  general  the  negative  sense  of  these  particles  does 
not  appear  in  indirect  questions. 

(c.)  Ne  properly  denotes  simply  a  question,  but  it  is  used  sometimes  affirma¬ 
tively  and  sometimes  negatively.  When  ne  is  attached,  not  to  the  principal 
verb  but  to  some  other  word,  a  negative  sense  is  produced ;  as,  mene  istud  potu¬ 
isse  facere  putas  f  Do  you  believe  that  I  would  have  done  that?  The  answer 
expected  is  4  no.’  When  attached  to  the  principal  verb  ne  often  gives  the  af¬ 
firmative  meaning,  and  the  answer  expected  is  4  yes.’ — Nonne  is  the  sign  of  an 
affirmative  question ;  as,  Canis  nonne  lupo  similis  est  ? —  Utrum,  in  accordance 
with  its  derivation  from  uter,  which  of  two,  is  used  only  in  double  questions 
whether  consisting  of  two  or  more.  It  is  sometimes  accompanied  by  ne,  which 
is  usually  separated  from  it  by  one  or  more  words ;  as,  Utrum,  taceamne  an 
praedicem  ?  In  later  writers,  however,  utrumne  is  united  into  one  word.  Ne  is 
rarely  appended  to  interrogative  adjectives,  but  examples  of  such  use  are  some¬ 
times  found  ?n  poetry;  as,  uterne ;  quone  malo ;  quantane.  In  a  few  passages  it 
is  even  attached  to  the  relative  pronoun. 

(d.)  An  is  not  used  as  a  sign  of  an  indirect  question  before  the  silver  age; 
when  so  used  it  answers  to  ‘  whether.’  It  is  used  by  Cicero  exclusively  in  a 
second  or  opposite  question,  where  we  use  ‘  or  ’ ;  as,  Si  sitis,  nihil  interest  utrum 
aqua  sit,  an  vinum ;  nec  refert ,  utrum  sit  aureum  poculum,  an  vitreum,  an  manus 
concava.  Sen.  In  direct  interrogations,  when  no  interrogative  clause  precedes, 
an,  anne,  an  vero  are  likewise  used  in  the  sense  of 4  or,’  that  is  in  such  a  man¬ 
ner  that  a  preceding  interrogation  is  supplied  by  the  mind ;  as,  Invitus  te  offendi, 
an  putas  me  delectari  laedendis  hominibus ?  Here  we  may  supply  before  an 
putas ,  etc.  the  sentence,  4  Do  you  believe  this  ?  ’ — An,  after  a  preceding  ques¬ 
tion,  is  rendered  by  4  not,’  and  it  then  indicates  that  the  answer  cannot  be 
doubtful ;  as,  A  rebus  gerendis  senectus  abstrahit.  Quibus  ?  An  his ,  quae  geruntur 
juventute  ac  viribus  ?  Is  it  not  from  those  kinds  of  business,  which  ?  etc.  Here 
we  may  suppose  aliisne  ?  to  be  supplied  before  an  his  ?  Is  it  from  other  kinds 
of  business,  or  from  those?  etc.  Such  questions  may  be  introduced  by  nonne, 
but  without  allusion  to  an  opposite  question,  which  is  implied  in  an. 

(e.)  To  the  rule  that  an,  in  indirect  questions,  is  used  exclusively  to  indicate 
a  second  or  opposite  question,  there  is  one  great  exception,  for  it  is  employed 
in  single  indirect  questions  after  such  expressions  as  dubito,  dubium  est ,  incertum 
est ;  delibero,  hcesito,  and  especially  after  nescio  or  haud  scio,  all  of  which  denote 
uncertainty,  but  with  an  inclination  to  the  affirmative ;  as,  Si  per  se  virtus  sin$ 


176 


INTERJECTIONS. 


§199, 


fortuna  ponderanda  sit ,  dubito  an  hunc  primum  omnium  ponam ,  If  virtue  is  to 
be  estimated  without  reference  to  its  success,  I  am  not  certain  whether  I  should 
not  prefer  this  man  to  all  others..  Nep.  It  is  not  Latin  to  say  dubito  annon  for 
dubito  an. — Nescio  an,  or  haud  scio  an  are  used  quite  in  the  sense  of  ‘  perhaps,* 
so  that  they  are  followed  by  the  negatives  nullus ,  nemo,  numquam,  instead  of 
ullus,  quisquam  and  umquam.  When  the  principal  verb  is  omitted,  an  is  often 
used  in  the  sense  of  aut ;  as,  Themistocles,  quum  ei  Simonides,  an  quis  alius , 
artem  memories  polliceretur ,  etc.  In  such  cases  incertum  est  is  understood,  and 
in  Tacitus  is  often  supplied. — The  conjunction  si  is  sometimes  used  in  indirect 
interrogations  instead  of  num,  like  the  Greek  tl ,  and  it  is  so  used  by  Cicero 
after  the  verb  experior . 

Note  1.  The  conjunctions  -ne,  - que ,  -we,  are  not  used  alone,  but  are  always 
affixed  to  some  other  word,  and  are  hence  called  enclitics. 

Note  2.  Some  words  here  classed  with  conjunctions  are  also  used  as  ad¬ 
verbs,  and  many  classed  as  adverbs  are  likewise  conjunctions ;  that  is,  they  at 
the  same  time  qualify  verbs,  etc.,  and  connect  propositions;  as,  Ceteris  in  rebus, 
quum  venit  calamitas,  tum  detrimentum  accipitur ,  In  other  concerns,  when  mis¬ 
fortune  comes,  then  damage  is  received. 

Note  3.  Conjunctions,  like  adverbs,  are  variously  compounded  with  other 
parts  of  speech,  and  with  each  other;  as,  atque ,  (i.  e.  adque),  iccirco  or  idcirco , 
(i.  e.  id-circa ),  ideo,  namque,  etc.  In  some,  compounded  of  an  adverb  and  a 
conjunction,  each  of  the  simple  words  retains  its  meaning,  and  properly  belongs 
to  its  own  class;  as,  etiam  ( et  jam)  and  now;  itdque,  and  so;  neque  or  nec ,  and 
not. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

§  100.  An  interjection  is  a  particle  used  in  exclamation, 
and  expressing  some  emotion  of  the  mind. 

The  most  usual  interjections  are, 

ah!  ah!  alas! 
aha!  aha!  ah!  haha! 
apage !  away  !  begone  ! 
atat !  or  atatte !  oh  /  ah  !  alas  !  lo! 
au!  07*  hau!  oh!  ah! 
ecce !  lo!  see!  behold! 
ehem!  ha!  what! 
eheu!  ah!  alas! 
eho !  ehodum!  ho!  soho! 
eia!  or  heia!  ah!  ah  ha!  indeed! 
en!  lo!  see!  behold! 
eu !  well  done  !  bravo  ! 
euge !  well  done  !  good  ! 

!  htizzah!  hurrah! 

ha!  hold!  ho! 
ha!  ha!  he!  ha!  ha! 
hei!  ah!  wo!  alas! 

Remark  1.  An  interjection  sometimes  denotes  several  different  emotions. 
Thus  vah  is  used  to  express  wonder,  grief,  joy,  and  anger. 

Rem.  2.  Other  parts  of  speech  may  sometimes  be  regarded  as  interiections; 
as,  pax!  be  still!  So  indignum,  infandum,  malum,  miserum,  miserabile,  nefas, 
when  used  as  expressions  of  astonishment,  grief,  or  horror;  and  macte  and 
macti,  as  expressions  of  approbation.  In  like  manner  the  adverbs  nos,  profecto, 
cito ,  bene,  belle ;  the  verbs  quosso,  precor,  OrOj  obsecro,  amabo,  age,  agite,  cedo, 
sddes,  (for  si  audes),  sis,  sultis,  (for  si  vis  and  si  mdtis),  agesis,  dgeaum ,  and  dgite 
dum,  and  the  interrogative  quid?  what?  used  as  exclamations. 


hem !  oho  !  indeed!  well !  hah  !  alas  !  alack  ! 

heu!  oh!  ah!  alas! 

heus !  ho  !  ho  there  !  hark  !  halloa  ! 

hui !  hah  !  ho  !  oh  ! 

io !  ho!  hurrah!  huzzah! 

o!  o!  oh!  ah! 

oh!  oh!  o!  ah! 

ohe !  ho  /  halloa  !  ho  there  ! 

oho!  oho!  aha! 

oi !  hou  !  alas  ! 

papae!  strange!  wonderful! 

phui !  foh  !  fugh  ! 

phy !  pish  !  tush  ! 

pro!  or  proh!  oh!  ah! 

st!  hist!  whist!  hush! 

tatae!  so!  strange! 

vae!  ah!  alas!  woe! 

vah !  vaha !  ah  !  alas  !  oh  / 


§  200,  201. 


SYNTAX. - PROPOSITIONS. 


177 


Rem.  3.  With  the  interjections  may  also  be  classed  the  following  invoca- 
tions  of  the  gods  :  hercules ,  hercule ,  hercle ;  or  mehercules,  meherchle ,  mehercle ; 
medius  fidius ,  mecastor ,  ecastor ,  ecere,  poZ,  edepol ,  equirine,  per  deum,  per 
deum  immortalem,  per  deos ,  i?er  Jovem,  pro  (or  ^>ro/i)  Jupiter •  ^ro.  dw  imnwr- 
tdles,  pro  deum  fidem ,  pro  deum  atque  hominum  fidem ,  deum  immortalium 

(scii,  fidem),  etc. 


SYNTAX. 

§  200.  1.  Syntax  treats  of  the  construction  of  sentences. 

2.  A  sentence  is  a  thought  expressed  in  words ;  as,  Canes 
latrant ,  The  dogs  bark. 

3.  All  sentences  are  either 

(1.)  Declarative;  as,  Venti  spirant,  The  winds  blow: — 

(2.)  Interrogative;  as ,  Spirantne  venti  f  Do  the  winds  blow  ? — 

(3.)  Exclamatory;  as,  Quam  vehementer  spirant  venti l  How 
fiercely  the  winds  blow ! — or 

(4.)  Imperative  ;  as,  Venti ,  spirate ,  Blow,  winds. 

4.  The  mood  of  the  verb  in  the  first  three  classes  of  sentences  is  either  the 
indicative  or  the  subjunctive ;  in  imperative  sentences  it  is  either  the  impera¬ 
tive  or  the  subjunctive. 

5.  A  sentence  may  consist  either  of  one  proposition  or  of  two  or 
more  propositions  connected  together. 

PROPOSITIONS. 

§  2©1.  1.  A  proposition  consists  of  a  subject  and  a  pre¬ 

dicate . 

2.  The  subject  of  a  proposition  is  that  of  which  something  is 
affirmed. 

3.  The  predicate  is  that  which  is  affirmed  of  the  subject. 

Thus,  in  the  proposition,  Equus  currit ,  The  horse  runs,  equus  is  the 
subject  and  currit  is  the  predicate. 

Note.  The  word  affirm,  as  here  used,  includes  all  the  various  significations  of  the 
verb,  as  expressed  in  the  several  moods. 

4.  Propositions  are  either  principal  or  subordinate . 

5.  A  principal  proposition  is  one  which  makes  complete  sense  by 
itself ;  as, 

P  hod  ion  fuit  perpetuo  pauper,  quum  ditissimus  esse  posset,  Phocion  was  always 
poor,  though  he  might  have  been  very  rich. 


178 


SYNTAX.- — SUBJECT. 


§202. 


6.  A  subordinate  proposition  is  one  which,  by  means  of  a  subordi¬ 
nate  conjunction,  is  made  to  depend  upon  or  limit  some  part  of 
another  proposition ;  as, 

Phocion  fuit' perpetuo  pauper ,  quum  ditissimus  esse  posset,  Phocion  was  al¬ 
ways  poor,  though  he  might  have  been  very  rich. 

7.  Subordinate  propositions  are  used  either  as  substantives ,  adjec¬ 
tives,  or  adverbs ,  and  are  accordingly  called  substantive ,  adjective  or 
adverbial  propositions  or  clauses. 

8.  Substantive  clauses  are  connected  with  the  propositions  on  which  they 
depend  by  means  of  the  final  conjunctions  ut ,  ne ,  quo ,  quin ,  etc.,  sometimes  by 
quod ,  and,  in  clauses  containing  an  indirect  question,  by  interrogative  pronouns, 
adjectives,  adverbs  and  conjunctions.  See  §§  262  and  265. 

v*  Remark.  A  dependent  substantive  clause  often  takes  the  form  of  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive,  and  in  that  case  has  no  connective ;  as,  Gaudeo  te  valere. 

9.  Adjective  clauses  are  connected  by  means  of  relatives,  both  pronouns  and 
pronominal  adjectives;  as;  qui ,  qualis ,  quanius,  etc.  Adverbial  clauses  are  con¬ 
nected  either  by  relative  adverbs  of  place  and  time,  (§  191,  R.  1,  ( b .),  or  by 
temporal,  conditional,  concessive^  comparative,  and  sometimes  by  causal  con¬ 
junctions. 

10.  A  sentence  consisting  of  one  proposition  is  called  a  simple  sen¬ 
tence;  as, 

Cddunt  fdlia ,  The  leaves  fall.  Semiramis  Babylonem  condidit. 

11.  A  sentence  consisting  of  a  principal  and  one  or  more  subordi¬ 
nate  propositions  is  called  a  complex  sentence ;  as, 

Qui  ft,  ut  nemo  contentus  vivat  ?  How  happens  it,  that  no  one  lives  content? 
Quis  ego  sim ,  me  rogitas,  You  ask  me,  who  I  am. 

12.  A  sentence  consisting  of  two  or  more  principal  propositions, 
either  alone  or  in  connection  with  one  or  more  subordinate  proposi¬ 
tions,  is  called  a  compound  sentence ;  as, 

Spirant  venti  et  cadunt  fdlia,  The  winds  blow,  and  the  leaves  fall. 

13.  The  propositions  composing  a  complex  or  a  compound  sen¬ 
tence  are  called  its  members  or  clauses ;  the  principal  proposition  is 
called  the  leading  clause,  its  subject,  the  leading  subject,  and  its  verb, 
the  leading  \erb. 


SUBJECT. 

§  202.  1.  The  subject  also  is  either  simple,  complex,  or 

compound . 

2.  The  simple  subject,  which  is  also  called  the  grammatical  sub¬ 
ject,  is  either  a  noun  or  some  word  standing  for  a  noun ;  as, 

Aves  vdlant ,  Birds  fly.  Tu  legis ,  Thou  readest.  A  est  vocalis ,  A  is  a  vowel. 
Mentiri  est  turpe,  To  lie  is  base. 

3.  The  complex  subject,  called  also  the  logical  subject,  consists  of 
the  simple  subject  with  its  modifications  ;  as, 

Conscientia  bene  actae  vitae  est  jucundissima ,  The  consciousness  of  a  well  spent 
life  is  very  pleasant.  Here  conscientia  is  the  grammatical,  and  conscientia  bene 
actos  vitos  the  complex,  subject. 


§202. 


SYNTAX. — SUBJECT. 


179 


4.  The  compound  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  or  com¬ 
plex  subjects  to  which  a  single  predicate  belongs ;  as, 

Luna  et  stellas  fulgebant,  The  moon  and  stars  were  shining.  Grammatice  nr 
musicas  junctos  fuerunt,  Grammar  and  music  were  united.  Semper  honos  no- 
men^we  tuum  laudes^we  manebunt. 

Remark.  Words  are  said  to  modify  or  limit  other  words,  when  they  serve 
to  explain,  describe,  define,  enlarge,  restrict,  or  otherwise  qualify  their  mean¬ 
ing. 

5.  Every  sentence  must  contain  a  subject  and  a  predicate,  called 
its  principal  or  essential  parts :  any  sentence  may  also  receive  addi¬ 
tions  to  these,  called  its  subordinate  parts. 

Complex  or  Modified  Subject . 

6.  The  complex  subject  is  formed  by  adding  other  words  to  the 
simple  subject.  All  additions  to  the  subject,  like  the  subject  itself, 
are  either  simple ,  complex,  or  compound. 

I.  Simple  additions .  The  subject  may  be  modified  by  adding : — 

1 .  A  single  word : — 

(1.)  A  noun  in  the  same  case ;  as, 

Nos  consules  desumus ,  We  consuls  are  remiss.  Mucius  augur  multa  narravit , 
Mucius  the  augur  related  many  things. 

(2.)  A  noun  or  pronoun  in  an  oblique  case,  modifying  or  limiting 
the  subject ;  as, 

Amor  multitudinis  commdvetur,  The  love  of  the  multitude  is  excited.  Cura  mei, 
Care  for  me.  Viribus  usus,  Need  of  strength. 

(3.)  An  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle  ;  as, 

Fugit  invida  cetas ,  Envious  time  flies.  Mea  mater  est  benigna.  Ducit  agmina 
Penthesilea  furens.  Litera  scripta  manet. 

2.  A  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case  ;  as, 

Sdpor  in  gramine.  Oppida  sine  praesidio.  Receptio  ad  te. 

3.  A  dependent  adjective  clause  introduced  by  qui,  qualis ,  quan¬ 
tus,  etc. ;  as, 

Leve  ft,  quod  bene  fertur,  onus ,  The  burden,  which  is  borne  well,  becomes 
light.  Literce,  quas  scripsisti,  acceptae,  sunt.  Ut,  qualis  (ille)  haberi  vellet, 
talis  esset.  Tanta  est  inter  eos ,  quanta  maxima  esse  potest,  morum  distantia. 

II.  Complex,  additions.  The  subject  may  be  modified  : — 

1.  By  a  wo?rd  to  which  other  words  are  added. 

(1.)  When  the  word  to  which  other  words  are  added  is  a  noun  or 
pronoun,  it  may  be  modified  in  any  of  the  ways  above  mentioned. 

(2.)  When  it  is  an  adjective  it  may  be  modified : — 

(a.)  By  an  adverb  either  simple  or  modified ;  as, 

Erat  exspectatio  valde  magna.  'Prcesidium  non  nimis  firmum. 

(/>.)  By  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Major  pietate,  Superior  in  piety.  Contentionis  cupidus,  Fond  of  contention. 
Patri  similis,  Like  his  father.  Nudus  membra.  Juvenes  patre  digni. 


180 


SYNTAX.— SUBJECT. 


§202. 


(c.)  By  an  infinitive,  a  gerund,  or  a  supine  ;  as, 

Insuetus  vinci.  Not  accustomed  to  be  conquered.  Venandi  studiosus,  Fond  of 
hunting.  Mirabile  dictu,  Wonderful  to  tell. 

(d.)  By  a  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case ;  as, 

Iluais  in  republica,  Unskilled  in  civil  affairs.  Ab  equitatu  firmus.  Celer  in 
pugnam.  Pronus  ad  fidem. 

(e.)  By  a  subordinate  clause ;  as, 

Melior  est  certa  pax,  quam  sperata  victoria,  A  certain  peace  is  better  than  an 
expected  victory.  Dubius  sum ,  quid  faciam. 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  participle,  it  may  be  modified  like  a  verb.  See 
§  203. 

2.  By  a  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case  to  which 
other  words  are  added ;  as, 

De  victSria  Caesaris  fama  perfertur ,  A  report  concerning  Caesar's  victory  is 
brought. 

Remark  1.  As  the  case  following  the  preposition  is  that  of  a  noun  or  pro¬ 
noun,  it  may  be  modified  like  the  subject  in  any  of  the  foregoing  ways. 

Rem.  2.  The  preposition  itself  may  be  modified  by  an  adverb,  or 
by  a  noun  or  adjective  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Longe  ultra,  Far  beyond.  Multo  ante  noctem,  Long  before  night.  Sexennio 
post  Veios  captos ,  Six  years  after  the  capture  of  Veii. 

3.  By  a  subordinate  clause ,  to  whose  subject  or  predicate  other 
words  are  added. 

Remark.  These  additions  may  be  of  the  same  form  as  those  added  to  the 
principal  subject  or  predicate  of  the  sentence. 

III.  Compound  additions.  The  subject  may  be  modified : — 

1.  By  two  or  more  nouns  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  connect¬ 
ed  by  a  coordinate  conjunction  ;  as, 

Consules ,  Brutus  et  Collatinus,  The  consuls,  Brutus  and  Collatinus. 

2.  By  two  or  more  oblique  cases  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  connected 
coordinately;  as, 

Vitsejwe  necis^we  pdtestas.  Periculorum  et  laborum  incitamentum. 

3.  By  two  or  more  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  or  participles, 
connected  coordinately ;  as, 

Grave  bellum  perdiuturnum^we.  Animi  teneri  atque  molles. 

4.  By  two  or  more  adjective  clauses  connected  coordinately ;  as, 

Ft  qui  fecere,  et  qui  facta  aliorum  scripsere,  multi  laudantur.  Sail. 

5.  By  two  or  more  of  the  preceding  modifications  connected  coor- 
dinately;  as, 

Genus  hominum  agreste,  sine  legibus,  sine  imperio,  liberum,  atque  solutum. 

Rem.  1.  A  modified  grammatical  subject,  considered  as  one  com¬ 
plex  idea,  may  itself  be  modified ;  as, 

Omnia  tua  consilia ,  All  thy  counsels.  Here  omnia  modifies,  not  consilia ,  but 
the  complex  idea  expressed  by  tua  consilia.  So  Triginta  naves  longa.  Praepo¬ 
tens  finitimus  rex. 


§  203. 


SYNTAX. — PREDICATE. 


181 


Rem.  2.  An  infinitive,  with  the  words  connected  with  it,  may  bo 
the  logical  subject  of  a  proposition  ;  as, 

Virtus  est  vitium  fugere,  To  shun  vice  is  a  virtue. 

Rem.  3.  A  clause,  or  any  member  consisting  of  two  or  more  clauses, 
may  be  the  logical  subject  of  a  proposition ;  as, 

E  coelo  descendit  ‘  Nosce  te  ipsum.’  AEquum  est ,  ut  hoc  facias. 

Rem.  4.  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of  a  proposi¬ 
tion  is  put  in  the  nominative,  when  the  verb  of  the  predicate  is  a 
finite  verb ;  but  when  the  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  the  subject  is  put 
in  the  accusative. 

Note  1.  A  verb  in  any  mood,  except  the  infinitive,  is  called  a  finite  verb. 

Note  2.  In  the  following  pages,  when  the  term  subject  or  predicate  is  used  alone,  the 
grammatical  subject  or  predicate  is  intended. 

PREDICATE. 

§  SOS.  1.  The  predicate,  like  the  subject,  is  either  simple, 
complex ,  or  compound . 

2.  The  simple  predicate,  which  is  also  called  the  grammatical  pre¬ 
dicate,  is  either  a  single  finite  verb,  or  the  copula  sum  with  a  noun, 
adjective,  and  rarely  with  an  adverb ;  as, 

Sol  lucet,  The  sun  shines.  Multa  animalia  repunt,  Many  animals  creep . 
Brevis  est  vdluptas ,  Pleasure  is  brief.  Europa  est  peninsula,  Europe  is  a  pe¬ 
ninsula.  Rectissime  sunt  apud  te  omnia. 

3.  The  complex  predicate,  called  also  the  logical  predicate,  con¬ 
sists  of  the  simple  predicate  with  its  modifications ;  as, 

Scipio  fudit  Annibalis  copias,  Scipio  routed  the  forces  of  Hannibal.  Here 
fudit  is  the  grammatical,  and  fudit  Annibalis  copias  the  logical  predicate.— 
So,  Romulus  Romanae  conditor  urbis  fuit. 

4.  The  compound  predicate  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  or  com¬ 
plex  predicates  belonging  to  the  same  subject ;  as, 

Probitas  laudatur  et  alget,  Honesty  is  praised  and  neglected.  Leti  vis  rapuit, 
rapietque  gentes.  Lucius  Catilina  fuit  magna  vi  et  ammi  et  corporis,  sed  in¬ 
genio  malo  pravoque. 

Complex  or  Modified  Precncate . 

5.  The  complex  predicate  is  formed  by  adding  other  words  to  the 
simple  predicate.  All  additions  to  the  predicate,  like  the  predicate 
itself,  are  either  simple,  complex,  or  compound. 

I.  Simple  additions.  The  predicate  may  be  modified  by  adding : — 

1.  A  single  word ; — 

(1.)  A  noun  or  adjective  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject.  This 
occurs  after  certain  neuter  verbs  and  passive  verbs  of  naming,  call¬ 
ing,  etc.  (See  §  210,  R.  3.)  ;  as, 

Servus  ft  libertinus.  The  slave  becomes  a  freedman.  Servius  Tullius  rex  e*» 
declaratus.  Aristides  justus  est  appellatus.  Incedo  regina. 

(2.)  A  noun  or  pronoun  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Spe  vivimus ,  We  live  by  hope.  JDeus  r&git  mundum,  God  rules  the  world. 
lb 


182 


SYNTAX. - PREDICATE. 


§203. 


(3.)  An  adverb  either  simple  or  modified ;  as, 

Saepe  venit,  He  came  often.  Festina  lente,  Hasten  slowly .  Llterce  facile  dis - 
cuntur.  Chremes  nimis  graviter  cruciat  dddlescentulum. 

(4.)  An  infinitive  mood ;  as, 

Cupit  discere,  He  desires  to  learn.  Audeo  dicere.  Ver  esse  coeperat. 

2.  A  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case ;  as,  Venit  ad 
urbem,  He  came  to  the  city. 

3.  A  dependent  substantive  or  adverbial  clause ;  as, 

Vereor  ne  reprehendar,  I  fear  that  I  shall  he  blamed.  Zenonem ,  quum  Athenis 
essem,  audiebam  f  requenter.  Fac  cogites. 

H.  Complex  additions.  The  predicate  may  be  modified  : — 

I.  By  a  word  to  which  other  words  are  added. 

Remark.  These  words  are  the  same  as  in  the  corresponding  cases  of  com¬ 
plex  additions  to  the  subject.  See  §  202,  II. 

2.  By  a  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case,  to  which 
other  words  are  added.  See  complex  additions  to  the  subject,  §  202. 

3.  By  a  subordinate  clause ,  to  whose  subject  or  predicate  other 
words  are  added.  See  complex  subject,  §  202,  H,  3. 

Rem.  2.  Each  of  the  words  constituting  a  proposition  may  be  modified  by 
two  or  more  additions  not  dependent  on,  nor  connected  with  each  other,  and 
consisting  either  of  single  words,  phrases,  or  dependent  clauses;  as,  Agamem¬ 
nonis  belli  gloria.  Paternum  ddium  erga  Romanos.  Mens  sibi  conscia  recti. 
Mea  maxime  interest,  te  vdlere.  Ago  tibi  gratias.  Me  ipsum  Inertias  condemno. 
Eos  hoc  mdneo.  In  quo  te  accuso.  Monet  eum,  ut  suspiciones  vitet. 

HI.  Compound  additions.  1.  The  predicate  may  be  modified  by 
two  or  more  words,  phrases,  or  clauses,  joined  together  by  a  coordi¬ 
nate  conjunction.  See  Compound  additions  to  the  subject,  §  202,  III. 

2.  The  leading  verb  is  usually  either  in  the  indicative  or  impera¬ 
tive  mood,  but  sometimes  in  the  subjunctive  or  the  historical  infin¬ 
itive. 

3.  The  members  of  a  compound  sentence  are  connected  by  coordi¬ 
nate  conjunctions;  those  of  a  complex  sentence  by  some  relative 
word,  or  by  a  subordinate  conjunction. 

4.  Instead  of  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  a  conjunction,  a 
noun  and  participle,  or  two  nouns,  sometimes  stand  as  an  abridged 
proposition ;  as, 

Bello  confecto  discessit ,  i.  e.  quum  bellum  confectum  esset,  discessit,  The  war 
being  finished,  or  when  the  war  was  finished,  he  departed.  Nil  desperandum , 
Teucro  duce. 

5.  An  infinitive  may  be  modified  like  the  verb  of  a  predicate. 

6.  Agreement  is  the  correspondence  of  one  word  with  another  in 
gender,  number,  case,  or  person. 

7.  A  word  is  said  to  govern  another,  when  it  requires  it  to  be  put 
in  a  certain  case  or  mood. 

8.  A  word  is  said  to  depend  on  another,  when  its  case,  gender, 
number,  mood,  tense,  or  person,  is  determined  by  that  word. 

9.  A  word  is  said  to  follow  another,  when  it  depends  upon  it  in 
construction,  whatever  may  be  its  position  in  the  sentence. 


§204. 


SYNTAX. — APPOSITION. 


183 


APPOSITION. 

§  2© 4.  A  noun,  annexed  to  another  noun  or  to  a  pronoun, 
and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  same  case ; 
as, 

Urbs  Roma,  The  city  Rome.  Nos  consules,  We  consuls.  So  Apud  Reroddtum, 
patrem  histdrice ,  sunt  innumerabiles  fabulae,  In  Herodotus,  the  father  of  history, 
etc.  Cic.  Lapides  silices,  flint  stones.  Liv.  Ante  me  consulem,  Before  I  was 
consul.  Fons  cui  nomen  Arethusa  est.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (u.)  A  noun,  thus  annexed  to  another,  is  said  to  be  in  apposition 
to  it.  It  is  generally  added  for  the  sake  of  explanation,  identification,  or  de¬ 
scription;  sometimes  it  denotes  character  or  purpose;  as,  Ejus  fugae  comitem 
me  adjunxi,  I  added  myself,  as  a  companion  of  his  flight ;  and  sometimes  the 
time,  cause,  reason,  etc.,  of  an  action ;  as,  Alexander  puer,  Alexander  when  a 
boy.  Cato  senex  scribere  histdriam  instituit.  Suet. 

(b.)  A  noun  in  apposition,  like  an  adjective  used  as  an  epithet,  (§  205,  N.  2,) 
assumes  the  attribute  denoted  by  it  as  belonging  to  the  noun  which  it  limits, 
while  the  predicate-nominative  affirms  it.  Hence  both  nouns  belong  to  the 
same  part  of  the  sentence,  whether  subject  or  predicate.  In  cases  of  apposi¬ 
tion,  there  seems  to  be  an  ellipsis  of  the  ancient  participle  ens ,  being;  qui  esty 
who  is ;  qui  vocatur ,  who  is  called ;  or  the  like. 

Rem.  2.  If  the  annexed  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the  other 
noun,  it  takes  that  form;  as,  Usus  magister  egregius.  Plin.  Philosdphia  magis¬ 
tra  vitee.  Cic.  If  the  annexed  noun  is  of  the  common  gender,  the  adjective 
qualifying  it  takes  the  gender  of  the  preceding  noun ;  as,  Laurus  fidissima 
custos. 

Rem.  3.  The  annexed  noun  sometimes  differs  from  the  other  in  gender  or  in 
number;  as,  Duo  fulmina  belli ,  Scipiadas ,  cladem  Libyce.  Yirg.  Mitylenae ,  urbs 
nobilis.  Cic.  Tullidla,  deliciae  nostree.  Id.; — and  sometimes  in  both;  as,  Nate, 
meae  vires.  Virg.  Nos,  animae  viles,  inhumata  infletaque  turba.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  substantive  pronoun  is  sometimes  omitted  before  the  word  in 
apposition  to  it;  as,  Consul  dixi ,  scii,  ego;  (I)  the  consul  said.  And  instead  of 
the  substantive  pronoun,  a  possessive  adjective  pronoun  is  sometimes  used;  as, 
Tua  domus ,  talis  viri.  Cic.  See  §  211,  R.  3,  (b.) 

Rem.  5.  A  noun  may  be  in  apposition  to  two  or  more  nouns,  and,  in  such 
case,  is  usually  put  in  the  plural ;  as,  M.  Antonius ,  C.  Cassius ,  tribuni  plebis , 
M.  Antonius,  C.  Cassius,  tribunes  of  the  people.  Cses.  Publius  et  Servius  Sullae, 
Servi  filii.  Sali.  Tib.  et  Gains  Gracchi.  Cic.  Orationes  L.  et  C.  Aureliorum 
Orestarum.  Id.  But  sometimes  in  the  singular;  as,  Cn.  et  L.  Domitius.  Cic. 

(1.)  So  when  the  nouns  are  connected  by  cum ,  the  annexed  noun  taking 
the  case  of  the  former;  as,  Dicaearchum  vero  cum  Aristoxeno ,  dodos  sane  hom¬ 
ines,  omittamus.  Cic. 

(2.)  If  the  nouns  are  proper  names  of  different  genders,  a  masculine  noun  is 
annexed  rather  than  a  feminine,  when  both  forms  exist ;  as,  Ad  Ptolemaeum 
Cleopatramque  reges  legati  missi  sunt.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  The  annexed  noun  is  sometimes  in  the  genitive;  as,  Urbem  Patavt 
locavit,  The  city  of  Patavium.  Yirg.  Plurimus  Eridani  amnis.  Id.  Arbdrem 
fici  numquam  viderat.  Cic.  In  oppido  Antiochiae.  Id.  Rupili  et  Persi  par.  Hor. 

Rem.  7.  The  name  of  a  town  in  the  genitive  occurs  with  an  ablative  in  ap¬ 
position  to  it;  as,  Corinthi  Achaice  urbe;  At  Corinth,  a  city  of  Achaia.  Tac. 
Antiochiae,  celebri  urbe.  Cic.  See  §  221,  Note,  and  §  254,  Rem.  3. 

Rem.  8.  (a.)  A  proper  name,  after  nomen  or  cognomen ,  with  a  verb  followed 
by  a  dative,  is  put  in  apposition  either  to  nomen ,  etc.,  or  to  the  dative,  the  latter 
by  a  species  of  attraction ;  as,  Fons,  cui  nomen  Arethusa  est.  Cic.  Stirps  virilis , 
cui  Ascanium  parentes  dixere  nomen.  Liv.  Nomen  Arcturo  est  mihi ,  I  have  the 


184 


SYNTAX. - ADJECTIVES. 


§205. 


name  Arcturus.  Plaut.  Cui  nunc  cognomen  Iulo  additur.  Yirg.  Cui  Egerio  indi¬ 
tum  nomen.  Liv. — (6.)  The  name  may  also  be  put  in  the  genitive;  as,  Nomen 
Mercurii  est  mihi.  Plaut.  Q.  Metellus ,  cui  Macedonici  nomen  inditum  erat.  Veli. 
Cf.  R.  6. — (c.)  In  Illa  aetas ,  cui  fecimus  Aurea  nomen ,  Ov.  Met.  15,  96,  Aurea 
is  used  as  an  indeclinable  noun,  instead  of  Auream  (scii,  aetatem) ;  or  Aureae, 
dat.  (scii,  aetati.) 

Rem.  9.  A  clause  may  supply  the  place  of  one  of  the  nouns ;  as,  Cogitet  ora¬ 
torem  institui — rem  arduam ,  Let  him  reflect  that  an  orator  is  training — a  diffi¬ 
cult  thing.  Quint. — So  also  a  neuter  adjective  used  substantively;  as,  Triste 
lupus  stabulis,  The  wolf,  a  sad  thing  to  the  folds.  Virg.  Varium  et  mutabile 
semper  femina.  Id. 

Rem.  10.  Sometimes  the  former  noun  denotes  a  whole,  and  its  parts  are  ex¬ 
pressed  by  nouns  in  apposition  to  it ;  as,  Onerariae ,  pars  maxima  ad  jEgimurum , 
— aliae  adversus  urbem  ipsam  delatae  sunt ,  The  ships  of  burden  were  carried,  the 
greatest  part,  to  iEgimurus, — others  opposite  to  the  city  itself.  Liv.  Pictores 
et  poetce  suum  quisque  dpus  a  mdgo  considerari  vult.  Cic.  In  the  construction 
of  the  ablative  absolute,  quisque  remains  in  the  nominative,  though  the  word 
to  which  it  is  in  apposition  is  in  the  ablative ;  as,  Multis  sibi  quisque  imperium 
petentibus.  Sali.  J.  18.  So  also,  in  Liv.  26,  29,  quisque  remains  in  the  nomina¬ 
tive  although  the  word  to  which  it  is  in  apposition  is  in  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive. 

To  this  rule  may  be  subjoined  that  which  relates  to  the  agreement  of  inter¬ 
rogative  and  responsive  words. 

Rem.  11.  The  principal  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  answer  to  a  ques¬ 
tion,  must  be  in  the  same  case  as  the  corresponding  interrogative 
word;  as, 

Quis  herus  est  tibi  ?  Amphitruo,  scii.  est.  Who  is  vour  master  ?  Amphitruo 
(is.)  Plaut.  Quid  quaeris?  Librum,  scii,  quaero.  What  are  you  looking  for? 
A  book.  Quota  hora  venisti  ?  Sexta.  At  what  hour  did  you  come  ?  At  the 
sixth. 

Note  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  substantive  pronoun,  the  corresponding 
possessive  pronoun  is  often  used,  agreeing  with  its  noun;  as,  Cujus  est  liber  f 
Meus,  (not  Mei.)  (See  §  211,  Rem.  3,  (5.)  So  cujum  for  genitive  cujus  ?  Cujum 
pecus  f  an  Meliboei  f  Non ;  verum  PEgonis.  Virg. 

Note  2.  Sometimes  the  rules  of  syntax  require  the  responsive  to  be  in  a 
different  case  from  that  of  the  interrogative ;  as,  Quanti  emisti  ?  Viginii  minis. 
Damnatusne  es  furti?  Imo  alio  crimine.  See  §§  214,  R.  1,  and  217,  R.  2. 

ADJECTIVES. 


§  2© 5*  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
agree  with  their  nouns,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as, 


Bdnus  vir ,  A  good  man.  B6nos  viros ,  Good  men. 

Benigna  mater ,  A  kind  mother.  Vance  leges ,  Useless  laws. 

Triste  bellum ,  A  sad  war.  Minacia  verba ,  Threatening  words. 

Spe  amissd ,  Hope  being  lost.  Hcec  res,  This  thing. 

So,  Mea  mater  est  benigna . 

Hcec  leges  vdnce  sunt. 


Note  1.  Adjectives,  according  to  their  meaning,  (§  104),  are  divided  into 
two  classes — qualifying  and  limiting — the  former  denoting  some  property  or 
quality  of  a  noun;  as,  a  wise  man,  lead  is  heavy;  the  latter  aefning  or  restricting 
its  meaning;  as,  this  man,  ten  cities.  To  the  former  class  belong  such  adjec¬ 
tives  as  denote  a  property  or  quality,  including  all  participles  and  participial 
adjectives;  to  the  latter,  the  adjective  pronouns,  pronominal  adjectives,  and 
numerals. 


§205. 


SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES. 


185 


Note  2.  An  adjective,  participle,  or  pronoun,  may  either  be  used  as  an  epi¬ 
thet  to  modify  a  noun,  or,  with  the  copula  sum,  may  constitute  a  predicate. 
In  the  former  case  the  quality  is  assumed,  in  the  latter  it  is  asserted.  In  both 
cases,  the  rule  for  their  agreement  is,  in  general,  the  same.  See  §  210,  R.  1. 

Note  3.  Any  word  or  combination  of  words  added  to  a  noun  to  modify  or 
limit  its  meaning  is  of  the  nature  of  an  adjective. 

Note  4.  In  the  following  remarks,  the  word  adjective  is  to  be  considered  as  including 
participles,  either  alone  or  combined  with  the  auxiliary  sum ,  and  also  adjective  pro¬ 
nouns,  unless  the  contrary  is  intimated. 

Remark  1.  An  adjective  agrees  also  with  a  substantive  pronoun,  taking  its 
gender  from  that  of  the  noun  for  which  the  pronoun  stands ;  as,  Ipse  capellas 
aeger  ago ,  scii,  ego ,  Meliboeus ;  Virg.  Fortunate  puer,  tu  nunc  eris  alter  ab  illo.  Id. 
Ut  se  totum  ei  traderet.  Nep.  0  me  miserum  (spoken  by  a  man),  miseram  me 
(spoken  by  a  woman).  So  salvi  sumus,  salvce  sumus,  scii,  nos,  masculine  or 
feminine.— In  general  propositions  which  include  both  sexes,  the  pronouns  are 
considered  masculine ;  as,  Nos  fruges  consumere  nati.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  An  adjective  may  belong  to  each  of  two  or  more  nouns, 
and  in  such  case  is  put  in  the  plural.  If  the  nouns  are  of  the  same 
gender,  the  adjective  agrees  with  them  in  gender,  as  well  as  in  num¬ 
ber;  as, 

Lupus  et  agnus  siti  compulsi,  A  wolf  and  a  lamb,  constrained  by  thirst.  Phsed. 
Sicilia  Sardinidque  amissae.  Liv. 

When  the  nouns  are  of  different  genders, 

(1.)  If  they  denote  living  things,  the  adjective  is  masculine  rather 
than  feminine ;  as, 

Pater  mihi  et  mater  mortui  sunt,  My  father  and  mother  are  dead.  Ter.  So 
also  uterque  in  the  singular.  Procumbit  uterque,  scil.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha . 

(2.)  If  they  denote  things  without  life,  the  adjective  is  generally 
neuter;  as, 

His  genus ,  cetas,  eloquentia  pr6pe  aequalia  fuere,  Their  family,  age,  and  elo¬ 
quence,  were  nearly  equal.  Sali.  Regna,  imperia,  nobilitates ,  honores,  divitiae  in 
casu  sita  sunt.  Cic.  Huic  bella,  rapinae,  discordia  civilis,  grata  fuere.  Sali. 
Anima  atque  animus,  quamvis  integra  recens  in  corpus  eunt.  Lucr. 

Note.  When  nouns  denoting  things  without  life  are  of  the  same  gender 
(either  masculine  or  feminine),  but  of  different  numbers,  the  adjective  is  some¬ 
times  neuter;  as,  Croeso  etvita  et  patrimonii  partes,  et  urbs  Barce  concessa 
sunt.  Just. ;  sometimes  also  when  both  nouns  are  in  the  singular  number ;  as, 
Plerosque  velocitas  et  regio  hostibus  ignara  tutata  sunt.  Sali.  Nox  atque  praeda 
remorata  sunt.  Id. 

(3.)  If  one  of  the  nouns  denotes  an  animate,  and  another  an  inan¬ 
imate  thing,  the  adjective  is  sometimes  neuter,  and  sometimes  takes 
the  gender  of  that  whiqh  has  life  ;  as, 

Numidce  atque  signa  militaria  obscurati  sunt,  The  Numidians  and  the  military 
standards  were  concealed.  Sail.  Romani  regem  regnumque  Maceddnice  sua 
futura  sciunt.  Liv.  Jane ,  f  dc  aeternos  pacem  pacisque  ministros.  Ovid. 

Exc.  to  Rem.  2.  The  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  nearest  noun, 
and  is  understood  with  the  rest ;  as, 

Sdciis  et  rege  recepto,  Our  companions  and  king  having  been  recovered. 
Virg.  Agri  omnes  et  maria.  Cic.  Cognitum  est  salutem ,  liberos ,  famam,  for - 
tunas  esse  carissimas.  Cic. 

16* 


186 


SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES. 


§205. 


Note.  A  noun  in  the  singular,  followed  by  an  ablative  with  cum,  has  some¬ 
times  a  plural  adjective,  the  gender  being  the  same  as  if  the  nouns  were  con¬ 
nected  by  et;  as,  Filiam  cum  filio  accitos.  Liv.  Ilia  cum  Lauso  de  Numitore 
sati.  Ovid.  Filium  Alexandri  cum  matre  in  arcem  custodiendos  mittit.  Just. 

Rem.  3.  (1.)  An  adjective  qualifying  a  collective  noun  is  often 
put  in  the  plural,  taking  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  the  noun 
denotes ;  as, 

Pars  certare  parati,  A  part,  prepared  to  contend.  Virg.  Pars  per  agros 

dilapsi . suam  quisque  spem  exsequentes.  Liv.  Supplex  turba  erant  sine  judice 

tuti.  Ovid.  This  construction  always  occurs  when  the  collective  noun  is  the 
•ubject  of  a  plural  verb.  See  §  209,  K.  11. 

(2.)  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  adjective  in  the  singular  takes  the  gender 
of  the  individuals;  as,  Pars  arduus  altis  pulverulentus  equis  f  uiit.  Virg.  Pars 
una  ducum — fractus  morbo.  Ovid. 

(3.)  Sometimes  other  nouns,  which  only  in  a  figurative  sense  denote  human 
beings,  have  by  synesis  an  adjective  of  a  different  gender  from  their  ov^i,  refer¬ 
ring  to  the  words  which  they  include ;  as,  Latium  Cdpudque  agro  mulctati, 
Latium  and  Capua  were  deprived  of  their  land.  Liv.  Capita  conjurationis  vir¬ 
gis  caesi  ac  securi  percussi  sunt.  Id.  Auxilia  Irati.  Id.  So  after  millia ;  as, 
Duo  millia  Tyriorum ,  crucibus  affixi.  Curt.  Cf.  §  323,  3,  (4.) 

Rem.  4.  Two  adjectives  in  the  singular  are  sometimes  joined  to  a  plural 
noun;  as,  Maria  Tyrrhenum  atque  Adriaticum,  The  Tuscan  and  Adriatic  seas. 
Liv.  Cum  legionibus  secunda  et  tertia.  Liv.  Circa  portas  Collinam  Esqulll- 
namque.  Id.  But  sometimes  the  noun  is  in  the  singular ;  as,  Inter  Esquilinam 
(Mlinamque  portam.  Id.  Legio  Martia  et  quarta.  In  comic  writers,  an  adjec¬ 
tive  or  participle  in  the  singular  is  sometimes  used  with  a  plural  pronoun ;  as, 
Nobis  praesente.  Plaut.  Absente  nobis.  Ter. 

Rem.  5.  A  participle  which  should  regularly  agree  with  the  subject  of  a 
proposition,  when  placed  after  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  (a)  sometimes  takes 
the  gender  and  number  of  the  latter;  as,  Non  omnis  err oi' stultitia  est  dicenda, 
Not  every  error  is  to  be  called  folly.  Cic.  Gens  universa.  Veneti  appellati.  Liv. 
(b.)  Sometimes  also  it  agrees  with  a  noun  following  the  subject  and  in  apposi¬ 
tion  to  it;  as,  Cdrinthum,  patres  vestri ,  totius  Grcecice  lumen,  exstinctum  esse 
vdluerunt.  Cic.;  or  (c)  with  the  noun  of  a  subordinate  sentence;  as,  Jllbrum 
urbem  ut  propugnaculum  oppositum  esse  bai‘bdris.  Nep. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  subject  of  an  infinitive  is  omitted  after  a  dative  of  the 
same  signification,  (§  239,  R.  1,)  an  adjective  in  the  predicate,  belonging  to 
that  subject,  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative;  as,  Mild  negligent!  esse  non  licuit , 
i.  e.  me  negligentem  esse  mini  non  licuit.  Cic.  Da  mihi  justo  sanctore  videri. 
Hor.  A  noun  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  adjective;  as,  Vobis  necesse  est 
fortibus  esse  viris.  Liv.  But  the  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  omitted  sub¬ 
ject;  as,  Expedit  bonas  esse  vobis ,  scii.  vos.  Ter.  Si  civi  Romano  licet  esse 
Gaditanum.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  (1.)  An  adjective  is  often  used  alone,  especially  in  the 
plural,  the  noun,  with  which  it  agrees,  being  understood ;  as, 

Boni  sunt  rdri ,  scil.  hdmines ,  Good  (men)  are  rare.  Cesar  suos  misit,  scil. 
milites ,  Caesar  sent  his  (soldiers).  Dextra ,  scil.  manus ,  The  right  (hand).  Im¬ 
plentur  pinguis  ferinae,  scil.  carnis.  Virg.  Hiberna ,  scil.  castra.  Altum ,  scil. 
mare.  Quartana ,  scil.  febris.  ImmortCiles ,  scil.  Dii.  Lucr.  Amantium ,  scil.  h 6 mi¬ 
num.  Ter.  Illum  indignanti  similem ,  similemque  minanti  aspiceres ,  scil.  homini. 
Virg.  Tibi  primas  defero,  scil.  partes.  Cic.  Respice  praiteritum,  scil.  tempus^ 
which  is  often  omitted,  as  in  ex  quo,  ex  eo,  and  ex  illo,  scil.  tempdre.  C)gnovi 
ex  meorum  omnium  literis ,  scil.  amicorum .  Cic.  So  patrial  adjectives;  as, 
Missi  ad  Parthum  Armtmiumque  legdti,  scil.  regem.  In  Tusculano f  scil. 
jpradio. 


§205. 


SYNTAX. - ADJECTIVES. 


187 


Note  1.  The  noun  to  be  supplied  with  masculine  adjectives  is  commonly 
hdniines ,  but  when  they  are  posessives,  it  is  oftener  amici,  milites ,  cives ,  or  pro¬ 
pinqui. 

Note  2,  The  noun  to  be  supplied  is  often  contained  in  a  preceding  clause. 

(2.)  An  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender,  without  a  noun,  is  often 
used  substantively,  where,  in  English,  the  word  thing  or  things  is  to 
be  supplied ;  as, 

B6num ,  a  good  thing;  malum ,  a  bad  thing,  or,  an  evil.  So  hdnestum ,  verum , 
turpe ;  and  in  the  plural,  bona ,  mala ,  turpia ,  levia ,  coelestia ,  etc.  Labor  omnia 
vincit,  Labor  overcomes  all  things.  Virg. 

Note  1.  The  Latins  generaliy  preferred  adding  res  to  an  adjective,  to  using 
its  neuter  as  a  substantive.  But  sometimes,  when  res  is  used,  an  adjective  or 
pronoun  referring  to  it  is  put  in  the  neuter  instead  of  the  feminine ;  as,  Earum 
rerum  utrumque.  Cic.  Humanarum  rerum  fortuna  pleraque  regit.  Sail.  Illud 
te  rogo ,  sumptui  ne  parcas  ulla  in  re,  quod  ad  valetudinem  dpus  sit.  Cic.  Omnium 
rerum  mors  est  extremum.  Cic. 

Note  2.  Instead  of  thing  or  things ,  other  words  may  sometimes  be  supplied, 
as  the  sense  requires.  With  a  preposition,  neuter  adjectives  form  adverbial 

Ehrases;  as,  A  prlmo ,  At  first.  Plaut.  Per  mutua,  Mutually.  Virg.  In  primis, 
a  the  first  place.  Ad  hoc ,  or  Ad  hcec,  Moreover,  besides. 

(3.)  Adjectives  used  substantively  often  have  other  adjectives  agreeing  with 
them;  as,  Alia  omnia,  All  other  (things.)  Plin.  Iniquissumi  mei,  Mv  greatest 
enemies.  Familiaris  meus.  Cic.  Iniquus  noster.  Id.  Justa  funebria.  Liv. 
Jovis  omnia  plena,  scii.  sunt.  Virg. 

Rem.  8.  (a.)  Imperatives,  infinitives,  adverbs,  clauses,  and  words  considered 
merely  as  such,  may  be  used  substantively,  and  take  a  neuter  adjective  in  the 
singular  number;  as,  Supremum  vale  dixit,  He  pronounced  a  last  farewell. 
Ovid.  Dulce  et  decorum  est  pro  patria  mori.  Hor.  Velle  suum  cuique  est.  Pers. 
Cras  istud  quando  venit  ?  Mart.  J.  Redibo  actutum.  A.  Id  actutum  diu  est. 
Plaut.  Excepto  quod  non  simul  esses,  cetera  laetus.  Hor.  ( b .)  In  the  poets  and 
later  prose  writers  the  adjective,  as  in  Greek,  is  sometimes  in  the  neuter  plural ; 
as,  Ut  AEneas  pelago  jactetur — nota  tibi.  Virg. 

Rem.  9.  (a.)  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  instead  of  agreeing  with  their 
nouns,  are  sometimes  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  with  a  partitive  signification, 
and  their  nouns  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Multum  tempdiis,  for  multum  tempus  ;  much 
time.  Id  rei,  for  ea  res ;  that  thing.  So,  plus  eldquentice ,  the  other  form  not 
being  admissible  with  plus.  (See  §  110,  ( b .)  Neuter  adjectives  are  used  in 
like  manner  in  the  plural;  as,  Vana  rerum ,  for  vdnae  res.  Hor.  Pleraque  huma¬ 
narum  rerum.  Sali.  Cf.  §  212,  R.  3,  N.  4.  But  in  some  such  examples,  the  ad¬ 
jective  seems  to  be  used  substantively,  according  to  Rem.  7,(2);  as,  Acuta 
belli.  Hor.  Telluris  operta.  Virg.  Summa  pectdris. 

Note.  The  adjectives  thus  used  parti tively  in  the  singular,  for  the  most 
part,  signify  quantity.  See  §  212,  Rem.  3,  Note  1. 

Rem.  10.  A  neuter  adjective  is  sometimes  used  adverbially  in  the  nomina¬ 
tive  or  accusative,  both  singular  and  plural ;  as,  Dulce  ridentem  Lalagen  amabo, 
dulce  loquentem.  Hor.  Magnum  stridens.  Virg.  Arma  horrendum  sdnuere.  Id. 
Multa  deos  venerati  sunt.  Cic.  Hodie  aut  summum  cras.  Id.  See  §  192,  II.  4,  (b.) 

Rem.  11.  (a.)  A  noun  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Nemo  miles 
Romanus,  No  Roman  soldier.  Liv.  Nemo  f  ere  adolescens.  Cic.  Vir  nemo  bdnus. 
Id.  Cf.  §  207,  R.  31,  (c. )  Tiberim  accolis  fuviis  orbatum.  Tac.  Incola  turba. 
Ovid.  ^  The  poets  use  in  this  manner  the  Greek  patronymics  in  as  and  is ; 
as,  Pelias  hasta.  Ovid.  Laurus  Parnasis.  Id.  Ursa  Libystis.  Virg.  Cf.  also 
$  129,  8. 

( b .)'  An  adverb  is  also  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Neque  enim 
ignari  sumus  ante  malorum ;  i.  e.  antiquorum  or  praeteritorum.  Virg.  Nuno 
htiminum  mores.  Plaut.. 


188 


SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES. 


§  205, 


Rem.  12.  (a.)  An  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  used  partitively*  stands 
alone,  and  commonly  takes  the  gender  of  the  genitive  plural,  which  depends 
upon  it;  but  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  noun  of  a  different  gender,  to  which  it 
refers,  it  usually  takes  that  gender,  but  sometimes  that  of  the  genitive ;  as, 
Elephanto  belluarum  nulla  est  prudentior ,  No  beast  is  wiser  than  the  elephant. 
Cic.  Indus ,  qui  est  omnium  fluminum  maximus.  Cic.  Velocissimum  omnium 
animalium  est  delphinus.  Plin.  See  §  212,  Rem.  2. — ( b .)  So  also  with  de ,  ex ,  in , 
dpud,  inter ,  etc.,  with  the  ablative  or  accusative  instead  of  the  partitive  geni¬ 
tive.  See  §  212,  R.  2,  N.  4. 

(c.)  When  a  .collective  noun  follows  in  the  genitive  singular,  (§  212,  R.  2.)  the 
adjective  takes  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  compose  it;  as,  Vir  for¬ 
tissimus  nostrae  civitatis,  The  bravest  man  of  our  state.  Cic.  Maximus  stirpis. 
Liv. 

Rem.  13.  (a.)  When  a  possessive  pronoun  or  adjective  is  used  instead  of  the 
genitive  of  its  primitive  or  of  its  corresponding  noun  (see  §  211,  R.  3,  (b.)  and 
(c.)  and  R.  4),  an  adjective  agreeing  with  that  genitive  is  sometimes  joined 
with  such  possessive ;  as,  Solius  meum  peccatum  corrigi  non  potest ,  The  fault 
of  me  alone  cannot  be  corrected.  Cic.  Noster  duorum  eventus.  Liv.  Tuum 
ipsius  studium.  Cic.  Pugna  Romana  stabilis  suo  pondere  incumbentium  in  hos¬ 
tem.  Liv. 

(6.)  Sometimes  a  noun  in  the  genitive  is  expressed,  in  apposition  to  the  sub¬ 
stantive  pronoun  for  which  the  possessive  stands ;  as,  Pectus  tuum,  hominis 
simplicis.  Cic. 

Rem.  14.  An  adjective,  properly  belonging  to  the  genitive,  is  sometimes 
made  to  agree  with  the  noun  on  which  the  genitive  depends,  and  vice  versa ; 
as,  AEdifi c a tidnis  tuae  consilium  for  tuum,  Your  design  of  building.  Cic.  Accu¬ 
santes  violati  hospitii  foedus ,  for  vidldtum.  Liv.  Ad  majora  initia  rerum  ducentibus 
fatis,  for  majorum.  Id.  Iis  nominibus  civitatum,  quibus  ex  civitatibus,  etc.,  for 
earum  civitatum.  Caes. 

Rem.  15.  (a.)  An  adjective  agreeing  with  a  noun  is  sometimes  used,  instead 
of  an  adverb  qualifying  a  verb,  especially  in  poetry;  as,  Ecce  venit  Tebimon 
properus,  Lo,  Telamon  comes  in  haste.  Ovid.  Laeti  pacem  agitabamus ,  for  laete. 
Sali.  AEneas  se  matutinus  agebat ,  for  mane.  Yirg.  Nec  lupus  gregibus  noctur¬ 
nus  6 bambulat,  i.  e.  by  night.  Id. 

(b.)  So  nullus  is  used  for  non;  as,  Memini  tametsi  nullus  mdneas.  Though 
you  do  not  suggest  it.  Ter.  Sextus  ab  armis  nullus  discedit.  Cic.  Prior,  pri¬ 
mus,  princeps,  prdpior,  proximus,  solus ,  unus,  ultimus,  midtus,  totus ,  and  some 
others,  are  used  instead  of  their  neuters,  adverbially ;  as,  Priori  Remo  augurium 
venisse  fertur.  Liv.  Hispania  postrema  omnium  provinciarum  perdomita  est. 
Liv.  Scaevola  solos  ndvem  menses  Asiae  praefuit,  Only  nine  months.  Cic.  Unum 
hoc  dico,  This  only  I  say.  Id.  This  is  sometimes  *  done,  for  want  of  an  {id- 
verb  of  appropriate  meaning;  as,  Pronus  cecidit.  Ovid.  Frequentes  convene¬ 
rant.  Sail. 

(c.)  In  such  expressions,  tu,  in  the  nominative,  sometimes  takes  an  adjec¬ 
tive  in  the  vocative,  and  vice  versa ;  as,  Sic  venias  hodierne.  Tibuli.  Salve, 
primus  omnium  parens  patriae  appellate.  Plin. 

Rem.  16.  (a.)  A  noun  is  often  qualified  by  two  or  more  adjectives;  and 
sometimes  the  complex  idea,  formed  by  a  noun  with  one  or  more  adjectives,  is 
itself  qualified  by  other  adjectives,  which  agree  in  gender,  etc.  with  the  noun. 

(b.)  When  several  adjectives,  each  independently  of  the  other,  qualify  a 
noun,  if  they  precede  it,  they  are  almost  always  connected  by  one  or  more  con¬ 
junctions;  as,  Multa  et  varia  et  copiosa  oratione.  Cic.  If  they  follow  it,  the 
conjunctionis  sometimes  expressed,  and  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Vir  altus  et 
excellens.  Cic.  Actio,  varia ,  vehemens ,  plena  veritatis.  Id. 

(c.)  But  when  one  of  the  adjectives  qualifies  the  noun,  and  another  the 
complex  idea  formed  by  the  first  with  the  noun,  the  conjunction  is  always 
omitted;  as,  Periculosissimum  civile  bellum,  A  most  dangerous  civil  war.  Cic. 
Malam  ddmestXcam  disciplinam.  Id.  So  with  three  or  more  adjectives;  Externos 
multos  claros  viros  nominarem.  Cic.  Cf.  §  202,  III.,  R.  1. 


§  206. 


SYNTAX. — PRONOUNS — RELATIVES. 


189 


Rem.  17.  The  first  part,  last  part,  middle  part,  etc.,  of  anyplace 
or  time  are  generally  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  adjectives  primus , 
medius,  ultimus ,  extremus,  intimus,  infimus,  imus,  summus,  supremus, 
reliquus,  and  cetera ;  as, 

Media  nox ,  The  middle  of  the  night.  Summa  arbor,  The  top  of  a  tree. 
Supremos  montes,  The  summits  of  the  mountains.  But  these  adjectives  fre¬ 
quently  occur  without  this  signification ;  as,  Ab  extremo  complexu,  From  the 
last  embrace.  Cic.  Infimo  loco  ndtus ,  Of  the  lowest  rank.  Id. 

Rem.  18.  The  participle  of  the  compound  tenses  of  verbs,  used  impersonally 
in  the  passive  voice,  is  neuter;  as,  Ventum  est  Cic.  Itum  est  in  viscera  terree. 
Ovid.  Scribendum  est  mihi.  See  §  184,  2  and  3. 

RELATIVES. 

§  S©6.  Rem.  19.  (a.)  Relatives  agree  with  their  antece¬ 
dents  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  but  their  case  depends  on 
the  construction  of  the  clause  to  which  they  belong ;  as, 

Puer  qui  legit,  The  boy  who  reads.  JEdificium  quod  exstruxit,  The  house 
which  he  built.  Literce  quas  dedi,  The  letter  which  I  gave.  Non  sum  qualis 
eram,  I  am  not  such  as  I  was.  Hor.  So  Deus  cujus  munere  vivimus ,  cui  nullus 
est  similis,  quem  cdlimus,  a  quo  facta  sunt  omnia,  est  ceternus.  Addictus  Her- 
mippo,  et  ab  hoc  ductus  est.  Aquilo ,  quantus  frangit  ilices.  Hor. 

Note  1.  This  rule  includes  all  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns  which  re¬ 
late  to  a  noun  in  a  preceding  clause.  Its  more  common  application,  however, 
is  to  the  construction  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  and  the  relative  qui. 

Note  2.  When  a  pronoun  refers  to  the  mere  words  of  a  sentence,  it  is  said  to 
be  used  logically.  Qui  and  is  are  so  used,  and  sometimes  also  hie  and  ille. 

(6.)  The  relative  may  be  considered  as  placed  between  two  cases 
of  the  same  noun,  either  expressed  or  understood,  with  the  former  of 
which  it  agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  and  with  the  latter  in 
gender,  number,  and  case. 

(1.)  Sometimes  both  nouns  are  expressed;  as, 

Erant  omnino  duo  itinera,  quibus  itineribus  ddmo  exire  possent,  There  were 
only  two  routes,  by  which  routes  they  could  leave  home.  Cses.  Crudelissimo 
bello,  quale  bellum  nulla  umquam  barbaria  gessit.  Cic.  But  it  is  most  frequent 
with  the  word  dies ;  as,  Fdre  in  armis  certo  die,  qui  dies  f  liturus  erat,  etc.  Cic. 
The  repetition  of  the  substantive  is  necessary,  when,  for  any  reason,  it  becomes 
doubtful  to  which  of  two  or  more  preceding  substantives  the  relative  refers. 

(2.)  Usually  the  antecedent  noun  only  is  expressed  ;  as, 

Animum  rege,  qui,  nisi  paret,  imperat,  Govern  your  passions,  which  rule, 
unless  they  obey.  Hor.  Tantce  multitudinis,  quantam  capit  urbs  nostra,  con¬ 
cursus  est  ad  me  factus.  Cic.  Quot  cdpitum  vivunt,  tdtidem  studiorum  millia. 

Hor. 

(3.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  especially  when 
the  relative  clause,  as  is  frequently  the  case,  precedes  that  of  the  an¬ 
tecedent;  as, 

Quibus  de  rebus  ad  me  scripsisti,  coram  videbimus ;  scii,  de  rebus,  In  regard  to 
the  things  of  which  you  wrote  to  me,  we  will  consider  when  we  meet.  Cic. 
In  quem  primum  ear essi  sunt  locum,  Troja  vdcatur ;  scil,  Idcus.  Liv.  Quanta 
vi  expetunt,  tanta  defendunt.  Qualesgwe  visus  eram  vidisse  viros,  ex  ordine  tales 
aspicio.  Ovid. 


190 


SYNTAX. — PRONOUNS — RELATIVES. 


§206. 


(a.)  The  place  of  the  antecedent  is  sometimes  supplied  by  a  demonstrative 
pronoun ;  as,  Ad  quas  res  aptissimi  erimus ,  in  iis  pdtissimum  elaborabimus.  Cic. 
But  the  demonstrative  is  often  omitted  when  its  case  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
relative,  and  not  un frequently,  also,  when  the  cases  are  different.  When  the 
relative  clause  precedes  that  of  the  antecedent,  is  is  expressed  only  for  the  sake 
of  emphasis.  Hence  we  find  such  sentences  as,  Maximum  ornamentum  amici¬ 
tiae  tollit ,  qui  ex  ea  tollit  verecundiam.  Cic.  Terra  quod  accepit ,  numquam  sine 
usura  reddit.  Id. — The  demonstrative  adjectives  and  adverbs  are  in  like  manner 
often  omitted  before  their  corresponding  relatives ;  tdlis  before  qualis,  tantus  be¬ 
fore  quantus ,  inde  before  unde ,  ibi  before  ubi,  etc. 

(b.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  even  wTien  the  relative 
clause  does  not  precede ;  as,  Quis  non  malarum  quas  amoi‘  curas  habet,  haec  inter 
obliviscitur  ?  Hor. 

(4.)  Sometimes  neither  noun  is  expressed ;  this  happens  especially 
when  the  antecedent  is  designedly  left  indefinite,  or  when  it  is  a  sub¬ 
stantive  pronoun ;  as, 

Qui  bene  latuit ,  bene  vixit ,  scil.  hdmo ,  (He)  who  has  well  Escaped  notice.,  has 
lived  well.  Ovid.  Sunt  quos  curriculo  pulverem  Olympicum  collegisse  juvat , 
scii,  homines ,  There  are  whom  it  delights,  i.  e.  Some  delight.  Hor.  Non  habeo 
quod  te  accusem,  scii,  id  propter  quod.  Cic.  Non  solum  sapiens  videris ,  qui  hinc 
absis,  sed  etiam  beatus ,  scii.  tu.  Cic. 

(5.)  The  relative  is  sometimes  either  entirely  omitted;  as,  Urbs  antiqua  fuit; 
Tyrii  tenuere  cdloni ,  scii,  quam  or  eam,  There  was  an  ancient  city  (which) 
Tyrian  colonists  possessed,  Virg. ;  or,  if  once  expressed,  is  afterwards  omitted, 
even  when,  if  supplied,  its  case  would  be  different ;  as,  Bocchus  cum  peditibus, 
quos  filius  ejus  adduxerat,  neque  in  priore  pugna  adfuerant ,  Romanos  invadunt , 
for  et  qui  non  in  priore,  etc.  Sali. 

(6.)  (a.)  The  relative  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  antecedent,  instead  of 
its  own  proper  case ;  as,  Quum  scribas  et  aliquid  agas  eorum,  quorum  consuesti, 
for  quce.  Cic.  Raptim  quibus  quisque  pdterat  elatis,  exibant ,  for  iis,  quos  quisque 
efferre  pdterat ,  elatis.  Liv. 

(b.)  The  antecedent  likewise  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  relative,  the 
substantive  either  preceding  or  following  the  pronoun ;  as,  Urbem  quam  statuo 
vestra  est ,  for  urbs.  Virg.  Eunuchum  quem  dedisti  nobis,  quas  turbas  dedit!  for 
Eunuchus.  Ter.  Naucratem  quem  convenire  vdlui ,  in  navi  non  erat.  Plaut. 
Atque  alii,  quorum  comoedia  prisca  virorum  est,  for  atque  alii  viri ,  quorum  est. 
Hor.  Illi,  scripta  quibus  comoedia  prisca  viris  est,  for  illi  viri ,  quibus.  Id.  Quos 
pueros  miseram,  epistolam  milii  attulerunt.  Cic. 

These  constructions  are  said  to  occur  by  attraction . 

(7.)  (a.)  An  adjective,  which  properly  belongs  to  the  antecedent,  is  some¬ 
times  placed  in  the  relative  clause,  and  agrees  with  the  relative;  as,  Inter 
jdcos,  quos  inconditos  jaciunt,  for  jdcos  inconditos ,  quos,  etc.  Amidst  the  rude 
jests  which  they  utter.  Liv.  Verbis,  quae  magna  vdlant.  Virg.  Cdlore,  quern 
multum  habet.  Cic. 

(b.)  This  is  the  common  position  of  the  adjective,  when  it  is  a  numeral ,  a 
comparative ,  or  a  superlative ;  as,  Nocte  quam  in  terms  ultimam  egit,  The  last 
night  which  he  spent  upon  earth.  JEsculdpius ,  qui  primus  vulnus  obligavisse 
dicitur.  Cic.  Consiliis  pare,  quae  nunc  pulcherrima  Nautes  dat  senior,  Listen  to 
the  excellent  advice,  which,  etc.  Virg.  Some  instances  occur  in  which  an 
adjective  belonging  to  the  relative  clause,  is  placed  in  that  of  the  antecedent; 
as,  Quum  venissent  ad  vada  Volaterrana,  quae  nominantur,  Which  are  called 
Volaterran.  Cic. 

(8.)  When  to  the  relative  or  demonstrative  is  joined  a  noun  ex¬ 
planatory  of  its  antecedent,  but  of  a  different  gender  or  number,  the 
relative  or  demonstrative  usually  agrees  with  that  noun ;  as, 


§  206. 


SYNTAX. — PRONOUNS - RELATIVES. 


191 


Santones  non  longe  a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt ,  quae  civitas  est  in  provincia , 
The  Santones  are  not  far  distant  from  the  borders  of  the  Tolosates,  which 
state  is  in  the  province.  Cses.  Ante  comitia ,  quod  tempus  haud  longe  aberat . 
Sali.  Romce  fanum  Didnce  pdpuli  Latini  cum  populo  Romano  fecerunt :  ea  erat 
confessio  caput  rerum  Romam  esse;  i.  e.  that  thing  or  that  act.  Liv.  Si  omnia 
f  acienda  sunt ,  quce  amici  velint ,  non  amlcitice  tales,  sed  conjurationes  putandce 
sunt ;  i.  e.  such  things  or  such  connections.  Cic.  So,  Ista  quidem  vis,  Surely 
this  is  force.  Ea  ipsa  causa  belli  fuit,  for  id  ipsum.  Hither  also  may  be  refer¬ 
red  such  explanatory  sentences  as,  Qui  mens  amor  in  te  est ,  Such  is  my  love 
for  you.  Cic. 

(9.)  If  the  relative  refers  to  one  of  two  nouns,  denoting  the  same 
object,  but  of  different  genders,  it  agrees  with  either;  as, 

Flumen  est  Arar  quod  in  Rhddanum  influit.  Cses.  Ad  flumen  Oxum  perventum 
est ,  qui  turbidus  semper  est.  Curt. 

(10.)  When,  in  a  relative  clause  containing  the  verb  sum  or  a  verb 
of  naming,  esteeming,  etc.,  a  predicate-noun  occurs  of  a  different 
gender  from  the  antecedent,  the  relative  commonly  agrees  with  the 
latter  ;  but  when  the  preceding  noun  is  to  be  explained  and  distin¬ 
guished  from  another,  the  relative  agrees  with  the  former ;  as, 

Naturae  vultus  quem  dixere  Chaos ,  The  appearance  of  nature  which  they 
called  chaos.  Ovid.  Genus  hdminum  quod  Helotes  vdcatur.  Nep.  Animal , 
quem  vdcamus  hominem,  The  animal  whom  we  call  man.  Cic.  Locus  in  car- 
cere ,  quod  Tullianum  appellatur.  Sali.  Pecuniarum  conquisitio;  eos  esse  belli 
civilis  nervos  dictitans  Mucianus.  Tac. 

(11.)  The  relative  sometimes  agrees  with  a  noun,  either  equiva¬ 
lent  in  sense  to  the  antecedent,  or  only  implied  in  the  preceding 
clause ;  as, 

Abundantia  earum  rerum ,  quse  mortales  prima  putant,  An  abundance  of  those 
things,  which  mortals  esteem  most  important.  Sail.  Cf.  §  205,  R.  7,  (2.)  N.  1. 
But  sometimes  when  a  neuter  adjective  used  substantively  has  preceded,  res 
with  a  relative  follows  ;  as,  Permulta  sunt ,  quce  dici  possunt ,  qua  re  vntelligdtur. 
Cic.  Fatale  monstrum ,  quce,  etc.,  scil.  Cledpatra.  Hor.  Cf.  §  323,  3,  (4.) 

(a.)  A  relative  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  referring  to  a  collective  noun,  or 
to  a  noun  wdiich  only  in  a  figurative  sense  denotes  a  human  being,  sometimes 
takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  individuals  which  the  noun  implies ;  as, 
Equitatum ,  quos.  Sail.  Genus,  qui  premuntur.  Cic.  Senatus — ii.  Sail. 

(b.)  A  pronoun  in  the  plural  often  follows  a  noun  in  the  singular,  referring 
not  only  to  the  noun  but  to  the  class  of  persons  or  things  to  wdiich  it  belongs ; 
as,  Democritum  omittamus ;  nihil  est  enim  apud  istos,  quod,  etc.  i.  e.  with  Demo¬ 
critus  and  his  followers.  Cic.  Dionysius  negavit  se  jure  illo  nigro  quod  ccence 
caput  erat,  delectatum.  Tum  is,  qui  illa  coxerat,  etc.  Id. 

(12.)  The  antecedent  is  sometimes  implied  in  a  possessive  pronoun;  as, 
Omnes  laudare  fortunas  meas,  qui  natum  tali  ingenio  praeditum  haberem;  scii. 
mei,  All  were  extolling  my  fortune,  who,  etc.  Ter.  Id  mea  minime  refert,  qui 
sum  natu  m  iximus.  Id.  Nostrum  consilium  laudandum  est,  qui  noluerim ,  etc.  Cic. ; 
or  in  a  possessive  adjective;  as,  Servili  tumultu,  quos,  etc.  Cces. 

(13.)  (a.)  Sometimes  the  antecedent  is  a  proposition;  the  relative  then  is 
commonly  neuter;  as,  Postremo ,  quod  difficillimum  inter  mortales ,  gloria  in¬ 
vidiam  vicisti,  Finally,  you  have  overcome  envy  with  glory,  which,  among  men, 
is  most  difficult.  Sail.  Equidem  exspectabam  jam  tuas  liter  as,  id  que  cum  multis. 
Cic. 

(b.)  In  such  instances,  id  is  generally  placed  before  the  relative  pronoun, 
refering  to  the  idea  in  the  antecedent  clause;  as,  Slve,  id  quod  constat,  Platonis 
studiosus  audiendi  fuit.  Cic.  Diem  consumi  volebant,  id  quod  fecerunt.  Id. 

(c.)  Sometimes  is,  referring  to  a  clause,  agrees  with  a  noun  following;  as, 
Idem  velle  atque  idem  nolle ,  ea  demum  flrma  amicitia  est.  Sail. 


192 


SYNTAX. - PRONOUNS — RELATIVES. 


§  206. 


(14.)  Quod ,  relating  to  a  preceding  statement,  and  serving  the  purpose  of 
transition,  is  often  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  after  a  period,  where 
it  may  be  translated  by  ‘  nay,’  ‘  now,’  or  ‘  and.’  It  is  thus  used  especially  be¬ 
fore  si  i  etsi ,  and  nisi ;  as,  Quodsi  illinc  inanis  prof  ugisses ,  tamen  ista  tua  fuga 
nef  ana  judicaretur ,  i.  e.  and  even  if  you  had  fled  without  taking  any  thing 
with  you,  still,  etc.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  14.  Quodsi ,  ‘  if  then,’  is  especially  used  in  in¬ 
troducing  something  assumed  as  true,  from  which  further  inferences  may  be 
drawn.  Sometimes  also  it  is  equivalent  to  ‘  although.’  Quodnisi  signifies  ‘  if 
then — not  ’ ;  as,  Quodnisi  ego  meo  adventu  illius  conatus  aliquantulum  repressis¬ 
sem ,  tam  multos ,  etc.  Quoaetsi  is  ‘  nay,  even  if’ ;  as,  Qudaetsi  ingeniis  magnis 
prcediti  quidam  dicendi  copiam  sine  ratione  consequentur ,  ars  tamen  est  dux  cer¬ 
tior. —  Quod  is  found  also  before  'quum,  ubi,  quia,  quoniam,  ne  and  utinam,  where 
the  conjunction  alone  would  seem  to  be  sufficient;  as,  Quod  utinam  illum,  cujus 
impio  f  acindre  in  has  miserias  projectus  sum ,  eadem  hcec  simulantem  videam.  Sali. 
It  is  so  used  even  before  a  relative  in  Cic.  Phil.  10,  4,  fn. —  Quod,  in  such  ex¬ 
amples,  seems  to  be  an  accusative,  with  propter  or  ad  understood. 

(15.)  (a.)  A  relative  is  always  plural,  when  referring  to  two  or  more  nouns 
in  the  singular.  If  the  nouns  are  of  different  genders,  the  gender  of  the  relative 
is  determined  by  Rem.  2,  page  185;  as,  Ninus  et  Semiramis,  qui  Babylona  condi¬ 
derant,  Ninus  and  Semiramis,  who  had  founded  Babylon.  Veli.  Crebro  funali 
et  tibicine,  quae  sibi  sumpserat.  Cic.  Ex  summa  Icetitia  atque  lascivia ,  quae  diu¬ 
turna  quies  pepererat.  Sali.  Naves  et  captivos  quae  ad  Clnum  capta  erant.  Liv. 

(b.)  If  the  antecedents  are  of  different  persons,  the  relative  follows  the  first 
person  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and  the  second  rather  than  the  third ; 
as,  Tu  et  pater,  qui  in  convivio  eratis.  Ego  et  tu,  quieramus.  Cf.  §  209,  R.  12,  (7.) 

(16.)  The  relative  adjectives  quot,  quantus ,  qualis,  are  construed  like  the 
relative  qui.  They  have  generally,  in  the  antecedent  clause,  the  corresponding 
demonstrative  words,  tot,  tantus,  talis ;  but  these  are  also  often  omitted.  Fre¬ 
quently  also  the  order  of  the  clauses  is  reversed,  so  that  the  relative  clause 
precedes  the  demonstrative. 

(17.)  Qui,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  .is  often  translated  like  a  demon¬ 
strative;  as,  Quse  quum  ita  sint ,  Since  these  (things)  are  so.  Cic. 

(18.)  The  relative  qui  with  sum  and  either  a  nominative  or  the  ablative  of 
quality,  is  used  in  explanatory  clauses,  instead  of  pro ,  ‘  in  accordance  with,’ 
or  ‘  according  to  ’ ;  thus,  instead  of  Tu,  pro  tua  prudentia ,  quid  optimum  factu 
sit ,  videbis.  Cic.,  we  may  say,  qwz  tua  est  prudentia ,  or,  qua  prudentia  es.  So, 
Velis  tantummodo ,  quae  tua  virtus,  expugnabis.  Hor.  Qua  prudentia  es,  nihil  te 
fugiet.  Cic. 

(19.)  A  relative  clause  is  sometimes  used  for  the  purpose  of  denoting  by 
circumlocution  the  person  of  the  agent  in  a  definite  but  not  permanent  con¬ 
dition  ;  as,  Ei,  qui  audiunt,  or  qui  adsunt,  i.  e.  the  hearers,  the  persons  present. 
So,  also,  a  relative  clause  is  used  for  the  English  expression  ‘above  men¬ 
tioned’;  as,  Ex  libris  quos  dixi  or  quos  ante  (supra)  laudavi:  and  the  English 
‘  so  called,’  or  ‘  what  is  called,’  is  expressed  by  quern,  guam,  quod  vocant ,  or  by 
qui,  quce ,  quod  vdcatur,  dicitur ,  etc. ;  as,  Nec  Hermas  hos,  quos  vdcant ,  imponi 
(Athenis)  licebat.  Cic.  Vestra ,  quce  dicitur,  vita,  mors  est.  Id. 

(20.)  Relative  and  demonstrative  adverbs  (see  §  191,  R.  1),  are  frequently 
used  instead  of  relative  and  demonstrative  pronouns  with  prepositions ;  as,  fs, 
unde  te  audisse  dicis,  i.  e.  a  quo.  Cic.  Divitice  apud  illos  sunt,  aut  ubi  illi  vdlunt, 
i.  e.  apud  quos.  Sail.  Iluic  ab  addlescentia  bella  intestina ,  ccedes,  rapinae,  dis¬ 
cordia  civilis,  grata  fuere,  ibique  juventutem  exercuit,  i.  e.  in  iis ,  in  these  things. 
Sali. 

(21.)  #  With  quam  qui  and  the  superlative  after  tam  the  verb  of  the  relative 
clause  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Tam  mihi  grdtum  id  erit,  quam  quod  gratissi¬ 
mum.  Cic.  Tam  enim  sum  amicus  reipublicce ,  quam  qui  maxime.  Id.  Tam  sum 
mitis ,  quam  qui  lenissimus.  Id.  So  also  with  ut  qui  without  tarn ;  as,  Te  semper 
sic  cdlam  et  tuebor ,  ut  quem  diligentissime.  Id. 


§207. 


SYNTAX. - PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 


193 


DEMONSTRATIVES. 

§207.  Rem.  20.  The  oblique  cases  of  the  personal  pronoun  of  the 
third  person  (him,  her,  etc.)  are  commonly  expressed  in  prose  by  the  oblique 
cases  of  is,  ea,  id.  Hie  and  ille ,  however,  being  more  emphatic,  take  the  place 
of  is,  ea,  id,  in  lyric  poetry,  and  occasionally  in  prose  also,  when  particular 
emphasis  is  intended.  The  cases  of  ipse,  ipsa ,  ipsum ,  also,  are  employed  for 
this  purpose,  when  the  individuality  of  the  person  is  to  be  distinctly  expressed. 
In  reflexive  sentences,  the  oblique  cases  of  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  are 
regularly  supplied  by  sui,  sibi,  se ;  and  it  is  only  when  the  person  of  the  lead¬ 
ing  subject  is  to  be  referred  to  with  particular  emphasis,  that  ipse  is  used  in¬ 
stead  of  sui. 

Rem.  21.  The  demonstrative  pronouns,  is  and  ille,  are  sometimes  used,  espe¬ 
cially  with  quidem,  where  a  corresponding  word  in  English  is  unnecessary; 
as,  Sapientiae  studium  vetus  id  quidem  in  nostris,  sed  tamen,  etc.  Cic.  0  hdminem 
semper  illum  quidem  mihi  aptum,  nunc  vero  etiam  suavem.  Id.  Quem  neque  fides, 
neque  jusjurandum,  neque  illum  misericordia,  repressit,  Whom  neither  fidelity, 
nor  an  oath,  nor  pity,  has  restrained.  Ter.  Is  when  used  for  the  sake  of  em¬ 
phasis  seems  sometimes  in  English  to  be  superfluous ;  as,  Male  se  res  habet , 
quum,  quod  virtute  effici  debet ,  id  tentatur  pecunia.  Cic. 

Rem.  22.  Sic,  ita,  id,  hoc,  illud,  are  often  used  redundantly  as  a  preliminary 
announcement  of  a  subsequent  proposition,  and  are  added  to  the  verb  on  which 
this  proposition  depends ;  as,  Sic  a  majoribus  suis  acceperant,  tanta  populi  Ro¬ 
mam  esse  beneficia,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Te  illud  admoneo,  ut  quotidie  meditere ,  resist¬ 
endum  esse  iracundiae.  Id.  Hoc  tibi  persuadeas  velim,  me  nihil  omisisse,  I  wish 
you  to  be  persuaded  of  this — that  I  have  omitted  nothing.  These  pleonastic 
additions  have  generally  no  influence  on  the  construction  of  propositions,  but 
in  a  few  instances  they"  are  followed  by  ut ;  as,  De  cujus  dicendi  copia  sic  accepi¬ 
mus,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Ita  enim  definit,  ut  perturbatio  sit,  etc.  Id.  In  the  phrase  hoc, 
illud,  or  id  agere  ut,  the  pronoun  is  established  by  custom  and  is  necessary. 
See  §  273,  1,  (a.) 

Rem.  23.  (a.)  Hie  ‘this  ’  refers  to  what  is  near  to  the  speaker  either  in  place 
or  time, ille  ‘ that ’  to  what  is  more  remote.  Hence  hie  sometimes  refers  to  the 
speaker  himself,  and  hie  homo  is  then  the  same  as  ego.  On  this  account  hie  is 
sometimes  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  first  person.  When  reference  is 
made  to  two  things  previously  mentioned,  hie  commonly  refers  to  the  latter, 
ille  to  the  former,  and  the  pronouns  are  arranged  in  the  same  order,  as  the  ob¬ 
jects  to  which  they  relate;  as ,  Igndvia  corpus  hebetat,  labor  firmat ;  illa  maturam 
senectutem,  hic  longam  adolescendam  reddit,  Sloth  enervates  the  body,  labor 
strengthens  it;  the  former  produces  premature  old  age,  the  latter  protracted 
youth.  Cels. 

(b.)  But  the  order  is  often  reversed,  so  that  hie  refers  to  the  object  first  men¬ 
tioned,  and  ille  to  the  one  mentioned  last ;  as,  Sic  deus  et  virgo  est ;  hic  spe  celer , 
illa  timore.  Ovid.  So  when  alter... alter,  ‘  the  one. ..the  other,’  refer  to  two  things 
mentioned  before,  the  previous  order  is  sometimes  observed  and  sometimes  re¬ 
versed  ;  but  wherever  there  is  ambiguity  the  order  is  reversed,  so  that  the  first 
alter  refers  to  the  last  object.  Sometimes  hie.. .hie  are  used  instead  of  hic...ille . 
So  ille.. .ille  sometimes  denote  ‘  the  one.. .the  other.’ 

(c.)  Hie  and  ille  have  the  same  relation  to  time  present  and  past  as  nunc  and 
tunc,  see  $  277 ;  and  hence  whatever,  in  speaking  of  present  time,  is  expressed 
by  hie  and  its  derivative  adverbs,  hic ,  hinc,  hue,  and  adhuc,  is  expressed  by  ille 
and  its  derivatives,  when  it  is  spoken  of  as  belonging  to  past  time. 

Rem.  24.  Ille,  when  not  in  opposition  to  hie ,  is  often  used  to  denote  that 
which  is  of  general  notoriety  ;  as,  Magno  illi  Alexandro  simillimus,  Very  like 
Alexander  the  Great.  Yell.  Medea  ilia,  The  celebrated  Medea.  Cic.  Hence 
ille  is  sometimes  added  to  other  pronouns,  to  refer  to  something  discussed  be¬ 
fore  ;  as.  Avebant  visere,  quis  ille  tot  per  annos  dpes  nostras  sprevisset.  Tac.  Ille 
is  sometimes  translated  this ;  as,  Unum  illud  dico ,  This  only  I  say.  Cic.  Ille 
17 


194 


SYNTAX. - PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES. 


§207. 


sometimes  marks  a  change  of  persons,  and  may  then  be  translated  ‘the  other’; 
as,  Vercingetdrix  obviam  Caesari  prdficiscitur.  Ille  (scil.  Caesar)  oppidum  Novio - 
dunum  oppugnare  instituerat.  Caes. 

Rem.  25.  Iste  properly  refers  to  the  person  addressed,  and  for  this  reason  is 
called  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person. — llle  refers  to  the  person  spoken 
of,  and  is  hence  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  third  person.  Thus  iste  liber  is 
thy  book,  but  ille  liber  is  the  book  of  which  we  are  speaking.  Hence,  in  let¬ 
ters,  hie  and  its  derivatives  are  used  of  the  writer;  iste  and  its  derivatives  of  the 
person  addressed ;  ille,  etc.,  of  some  other  person  or  thing.  See$  191,  R.  l,(e.) 
Iste  from  its  frequent  forensic  use,  and  its  application  to  the  opponent,  often 
denotes  contempt. 

Rem.  26.  (a.)  Is  does  not,  like  hie,  ille ,  and  isle ,  denote  the  place  or  order  of 
the  object  to  which  it  relates,  but  either  refers  without  particular  emphasis  to 
something  already  mentioned  or  to  something  which  is  to  be  defined  by  the 
relative  qui.  Hie ,  is ,  or  ille ,  may  be  used  in  this  way  before  the  relative,  but 
only  hie  or  is  after  it ;  as,  Qui  docet ,  is  discit ,  or  hic  discit ,  but  not  ille  discit ,  un¬ 
less  some  individual  is  referred  to. 

(b.)  Is  before  a  relative  or  ut  has  sometimes  the  sense  of  talis,  such,  denoting 
a  class ;  as,  Neque  enim  tu  is  es,  qui  quid  sis  nescias ,  Nor  are  you  such  a  person, 
as  not  to  know  what  you  are.  Cic. ;  sometimes  it  has  the  force  of  idem ;  as,  vos 
— ii.  Cic.  Manil.  12. 

(c.)  If  the  noun  to  which  is  refers  is  to  receive  some  additional  predicate, 
we  must  use  et  is,  atque  is,  isque,  et  is  quidem ,  and  with  a  negative  nec  is;  as, 
Vincula  vero,  et  ea  sempiterna ,  etc.  Cic.  Una  in  domo,  et  ea  quidem  angusta, 
etc.  Id.  Adolescentes  aliquot,  nec  ii  tenui  loco  orti ,  etc.  Liv.  Sed  is  is  used 
when  the  additional  predicate  is  opposed  to  the  preceding;  as,  Severitatem  in 
senectute  probo,  sed  eam,  sicut  alia,  modicam.  Cic.  The  neuter  et  id,  or  idque , 
serves  to  introduce  an  addition  to  the  preceding  proposition;  as,  Quamquam  te , 
Marce  fili,  annum  jam  audientem  Cratippum ,  idque  Athenis,  etc. 

(d.)  Is  is  not  expressed  when  it  would  be  in  the  same  oblique  case  as  the 
preceding  noun  to  which  it  refers ;  as,  Pater  amat  liberos  et  tamen  castigat. 
Multos  illustrat  fortuna,  dum  vexat. 

(e.)  When  in  English  ‘that’  or  ‘those’  is  used  instead  of  the  repetition  of 
the  preceding  substantive,  is  is  never  used  in  Latin,  and  ille  only  in  later  au¬ 
thors.  In  such  cases  the  noun  is  commonly  not  repeated  in  Latin,  and  no  pro¬ 
noun  is  used  in  its  place ;  as,  Philippus  hostium  manus  saepe  vitavit,  suorum  eff  fi¬ 
gere  non  valuit,  those  of  his  own  subjects.  Curt.  Sometimes  the  substantive  is 
repeated;  as,  Judicia  civitatis  cum  judiciis  principis  certant.  Veil.  Sometimes 
a  possessive  adjective  is  used  instead  of  the  genitive  depending  on  the  omitted 
substantive;  as,  Terentii  fabulas  studiose  lego,  Plautinis  minus  delector:  and 
sometimes  instead  of  the  genitive  or  a  possessive  adjective  the  name  of  the  per¬ 
son  itself  is  put  in  the  case  which  the  verb  governs ;  as,  Si  cum  Lycurgo  et 
Dracone  et  Solone  nostras  leges  conferre  volueritis.  Cic. — In  Cicero  hie  and  ille, 
when  the  preceding  substantive  is  understood,  retain  their  demonstrative  sig¬ 
nification,  and  therefore  do  not  merely  supply  the  place  of  the  omitted  sub¬ 
stantive  ;  as,  Nullam  enim  virtus  aliam  mercedem  desiderat,  praeter  hanc,  i.  e.  the 
one  of  which  I  am  speaking.  Cic. 

Rem.  27.  (a.)  Idem,  as  denoting  a  subject  wdiich  stands  in  equal  relations  to 
two  different  predicates,  often  supplies  the  place  of  item  or  etiam,  ‘  also,’  ‘  at  the 
same  time,’ or  of  tamen,  ‘  yet,’  if  the  things  are  apparently  inconsistent;  as, 
Musici ,  qui  erant  quondam  ildem  poetae,  Musicians,  who  formerly  were  poets 
also.  Cic.  Euphrates  et  Tigris  magno  aquarum  divortio  iter  percurrunt;  ildem 
(and  yet)  paulatim  in  arctius  coeunt. 

(b.)  Et  ipse,  on  the  other  hand,  denotes  that  the  same  predicate  belongs  to 
two  subjects.  It  is  rendered  by  ‘  too  ’  or  ‘  also  ’ ;  as,  Antoninus  Commodus  nihil 
paternum  habuit,  nisi  quod  contra  Germanas  feliciter  et  ipse  pugnavit,  for  item 
or  ipse  qudque.  Eutr. — So,  also,  nec  ipse  is  used  in  the  sense  of  ‘  neither  ’ ;  as, 
Primis  repulsis  Maharbal  cum  majore  robore  virorum  missus  nec  ipse  eruptionum 
cohortium  sustinuit.  Liv. 


§207. 


SYNTAX. — PRONOUNS — INTENSIVE,  ETC. 


195 


(c.)  Idem  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the  sense  of 4  at  once,’  denoting  the  union 
of  qualities  which  might  be  thought  incompatible ;  as,  Fuere  quidam  qui  iidem 
ornate  iidem  versute  dicerent ,  There  have  been  some  who  could  speak  at  once 
elegantly  and  artfully.  Cic.  ..... 

( d .)  ‘"The  same  as*’  is  variously  expressed  in  Latin,  by  idem  with  qui,  ac  or 
atque,  quam ,  quasi ,  ut  or  cum ;  as,  Verres  Idem  est  qui  fuit  semper,  Verres  is  the 
same  as  he  has  always  been.  Cic.  Vita  est  eadem  ac  fuit.  Liv.  Disputationem 
exponimus  iisdem  fere  verbis  ut  actum  est.  Cic.  Eandem  constituit  potestatem 
quam  si,  etc.  Cic.  Eodem  Ideo  res  est,  quasi  ea  pecunia  legata  non  esseZ.  Id. 
JIunc  eqo  eodem  mecum  patre  genitum ,  etc.  So  also  poetically  with  the  dative ; 
as,  Eadem  aliis  sopitu ’  quiete  est.  Lucr.  Cf.  §  222,  R.  7. 

IPSE,  Intensive  or  Adjunctive. 

Rem.  28.  (a.)  Jpse ,  when  used  with  a  substantive  pronoun  taken  reflexively, 
agrees  either  with  such  pronoun  or  with  the  subject  of  the  proposition,  accord¬ 
ing  as  either  is  emphatic;  as,  Agam  per  me  ipse,  I  will  do  it  myself.  Cic.  Non 
egeo  medicina  (i.  e.  ut  alii  me  consolentur);  me  ipse  consolor.  Cic.  Accusando 
eum,  a  cujus  crudelitate  vosmet  ipsi  armis  vindicastis .  Liv. —  Cn.  Pompeium  omni¬ 
bus,  Lentulum  mihi  ipsi  antepono.  Cic.  Fac  ut  te  ipsum  custodias.  Id.  Deforme 
est  de  se  ipsum  praedicare.  Id. — But  Cicero  often  construes  ipse  as  the  subject, 
even  where  the  emphasis  belongs  to  the  object;  as,  Quid  est  negotii  continere 
eos,  quibus  praesis,  si  te  ipse  contineas  ? 

(b.)  When  ipse  is  joined  with  a  possessive  pronoun  used  reflexively,  it  usually 
takes  the  case  of  the  subject;  as,  Meam  ipse  legem  negligo ;  not  meam  ipsius, 
according  to  §  211,  R.  3,  (a).  So,  Si  ex  scriptis  cognosci  ipsi  suis  pdtuissent.  Cic. 
Eam  fraudem  vestra  ipsi  virtute  vitastis.  Liv.  But  the  genitive  is  necessary  when 
the  possessive  does  not  refer  to  the  subject;  as,  Tud  ipsius  causa  hoc  feci.  And 
it  is  sometimes  found  where  the  case  of  the  subject  should  be  used;  as,  Conjec¬ 
turam  de  tuo  ipsius  studio  ceperis,  instead  of  ipse. — r(c.)  Ipse  is  sometimes  used 
as  reflexive  without  sui ;  as,  Omnes  bdni ,  quantum  in  ipsis  fuit,  Caesarem  occide¬ 
runt.  Cic. 

( d .)  Ipse,  with  nouns  denoting  time  or  number,  expresses  exactness,  and 
may  be  rendered, 4 just,’  ‘precisely’;  or  4  very,’  ‘only’;  as,  Dyrrhachio  sum 
prdfectus  ipso  illo  die,  quo  lex  est  data  de  nobis,  on  the  very  day.  Cic.  Triginta 
dies  erant  ipsi,  quum  has  dabam  liter  as,  per  quos  nullas  a  vobis  acceperam ,  just 
thirty  days.  Id.  Et  quisquam  dubitabit, — quam  facile  impeHo  atque  exercitu 
sdcios  et  vectigalia  conservaturus  sit,  qui  ipso  nomine  ac  rumore  defenderit,  by  his 
very  name,  or,  by  his  name  only.  Id. 

General  Relatives. 

Rem.  29.  Qui  cumque,  quisquis,  and  the  other  general  relatives  (see  §  139, 5, 
R.,  are,  in  classical  prose,  always  connected  with  a  verb,  and  form  the  protasis. 
Qulcumque  is  commonly  used  as  an  adjective,  and  quisquis  as  a  substantive ; 
but  the  neuter  quodcumque  is  used  as  a  substantive  with  a  following  genitive ; 
as,  Quodcumque  militum ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  quisquis  is  rarely  an  adjec¬ 
tive;  as,  Quisquis  erit  vitee  cdlor.  Hor. ;  and  even  the  neuter  quidquid  is  used  in 
the  same  manner;  as,  Quisquis  hdnos  tumuli,  quidquid  solamen  humandi  est.  Virg. 
Qulcumque  seems  sometimes  even  in  Cicero  equivalent  to  omnis  or  gulvis;  as, 
Quce  sanari  pbterunt,  quacumque  ratione  sanabo ,  What  can  be  cured,  I  will  cure 
by  every  possible  means.  Cic.  Yet  possum  is  rather  to  be  supplied; — >in 
whatever  way  I  can.’  But  in  later  writers  qulcumque  is  frequently  used  in  the 
absolute  sense  for  quivis  or  quilibet ;  as,  Ciceronem  cuicumque  eorum  fortiter 
oppdsuerim.  Quint.  Qudliscumque  and  quanbuscumque  are  likewise  used  in  an 
absolute  sense  by  ellipsis ;  as,  Tu  non  concupisces  quantlcumque  ad  libertatem 
pervHire  f  At  any  price,  be  it  ever  so  high.  Sen.  So  quisquis  is  occasionally 
used,  not  as  a  relative,  but  as  an  indefinite  pronoun. — Slquis  often  seems  to 
stand  as  a  relative,  like  the  Greek  dne  for  dcnc,  4  whoever  ’ ;  but  it  always 
contains  the  idea  of 4  perhaps  ’ ;  as,  Nuda  fere  Alpium  cacumina  sunt,  et  si  quid 
est  pabuli,  obruunt  nives.  Liv. 


196 


SYNTAX. - INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


§207. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 

Rem.  30.  (a.)  Aliquis  and  quispiam  are  particular  and  affirmative,  corres¬ 
ponding  to  the  English  someone;  as,  Hereditas  est  pecunia ,  quce  morte  alicujus 
ad  quempiam  pervbnit  jure ,  An  inhqritance  is  property  which,  at  the  death  of 
some  one,  falls  to  some  (other)  one  by  law.  Cic.  Multi  sine  doctrina  allquid 
omnium  generum  et  artium  consdquuntilr .  Id. 

(A)  Aliquis  is  more  emphatic  than  the  indefinite  pronoun  guis.  (See  §  137,  (3.) 
Hence  aliquis  stands  by  itself,  but  quis  is  commonly  connected  with  certain 
conjunctions  or  relative  words,  but  these  are  sometimes  separated  from  it  by 
one  or  more  words.  Sometimes,  however,  quis  is  used  without  such  conjunc¬ 
tions  or  relatives;  as,  Morbus  aut  egestas  aut  quid  ejusmddi.  Cic.  Detrahere 
quid  de  aliquo.  Id.  Injuriam  cui  facere.  Id.  So,  Dixerit  quis,  Some  one  might 
say.  But  even  after  those  conjunctions  which  usually  require  quis ,  aliquis  is 
used  when  employed  antithetically  and  of  course  emphatically ;  as,  T imebat 
Pompeius  omnia ,  ne  aliquid  vos  timeretis.  Cic.  In  English  the  emphasis  of  aliquis 
is  sometimes  expressed  by  ‘  really  ’ ;  as,  Sensus  mdriendi ,  si  aliquis  esse  pdtest ,  is 
ad  exiguum  tempus  durat.  Cic. —  Quispiam ,  also,  is  sometimes  used  like  quis 
after  si,  etc.,  and  sometimes  stands  alone ;  as,  Qucerei  fortasse  quispiam . 

Rem.  31.  (a.)  Qui  s qu a  wi,‘any  one, ’andw/Z-Ms/any,’  are  universal.  Likewra- 
quam  and  usquam  they  are  used  in  propositions  which  involve  a  universal  nega¬ 
tive,  or  which  express  an  interrogation  with  a  negative  force,  or  a  condition 
(usually  with  si  or  quasi)',  also,  after  comparatives,  after  the  adverb  vix,  and 
the  preposition  sine;  as,  Neque  ex  castris  Catiline e  quisquam  omnium  discesserat , 
Nor  had  any  one  departed  from  the  camp  of  Catiline.  Sail.  Nec  ullo  casu  pd¬ 
test  contingere ,  ut  ulla  intermissio  fiat  officii.  Cic.  An  quisquam  pdtest  sine  per¬ 
turbatione  mentis  irasci  ?  Id.  Tetrior  hic  tyrannus  Syracusanis  fuit ,  quam  quis¬ 
quam  superiorum.  Id.  Vix  quidquam  spei  est.  Sen.  But  after  the  dependent 
negative  particles  ne ,  neve ,  and  the  negative  interrogative  particle  num,  quis  and 
not  quisquam  is  used. 

(b.)  But  quisquam  and  ullus  after  si  are  often  used  not  in  a  negative  sense, 
but  instead  of  aliquis  or  quis ,  serving  only  to  increase  the  indefiniteness  which 
would  be  implied  in  the  latter  pronouns ;  as,  Aut  enim  nemo ,  quod  quidem  magis 
credo ,  aut ,  si  quisquam,  Me  sapiens  fuit,  if  any  man.  Cic.  Hence,  ultimately, 
even  without  si,  where  the  indefiniteness  is  to  be  made  emphatic,  quisquam, 
ullus,  umquarn  and  usquam  were  used ;  as,  Quamdiu  quisquam  erit,  qui  te  de¬ 
fendere  audeat,  vives.  Cic.  Bellum  maxime  omnium  membrabile ,  quce  umquam 
gesta  sunt,  scripturus  sum.  Tac. 

(c.)  Ullus  is  properly  an  adjective,  but  quisquam  is  commonly  used  without 
a  noun,  except  it  is  a  word  denoting  a  person;  as,  Cuiquam  civi ,  To  any  citizen. 
Cujusquam  oratoris  eldquentiam.  Hence  quisquam  corresponds  to  the  substan¬ 
tive  nemo  and  ullus  to  the  adjective  nullus.  Nemo  is  often  used  with  other 
substantives  denoting  male  persons  so  as  to  become  equivalent  to  the  adjective 
nullus ;  as,  nemo  pictor ,  nemo  dddlescens,  and  even  hdmo  nemo.  Cic.  Quisquam 
is  sometimes  used  in  a  similar  manner;  as,  quisquam  hdmo ,  quisquam  civis.  On 
the  other  hand  nullus  and  ullus  are  used  as  substantives  instead  of  nemo  and 
quisquam,  especially  the  genitive  nullius  and  the  ablative  nullo. 

Rem.  32.  (a.)  Alius,  like  ullus,  though  properly  an  adjective,  is  sometimes 
used  like  a  pronoun.  It  is  often  repeated,  or  joined  with  an  adverb  derived 
from  it,  in  the  same  proposition,  which  may  be  translated  by  two  separate 
propositions,  commencing  respectively  with  1  one.. .another  ’ ;  as,  Aliud  aliis 
videtur  optimum,  One  thing  seems  best  to  one,  another  to  another.  Cic.  Aliis 
aliunde  periculum  est,  Danger  threatens  one  from  one  source,  another  from 
another;  or,  Danger  threatens  different  persons  from  different  sources.  Ter. 
Didnysium  aliter  cum  aliis  de  nobis  Idcutum  audiebam.  Cic. — Alter  is  used  in  the 
same  manner  when  only  two  persons  are  spoken  of,  but  there  are  no  adverbs  de¬ 
rived  from  it;  as,  Alter  in  alterum  causam  conferunt,  They  accuse  each  other. 

(A)  Alius,  repeated  in  different  propositions,  is  also  translated  4  one.. .another  ’ ; 
as,  Aliud  agitur,  aliud  simulatur,  One  thing  is  done,  another  pretended.  Cic. 
Aliter  Idquitur,  aliter  scribit,  like  aliter  ac  or  atque ,  He  speaks  otherwise  than 
he  writes.  So  Aliud  Idquitur ,  aliud  scribit . 


§207, 


SYNTAX. — POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS, 


197 


(c.)  Uterque ,  ‘  each  of  two,’  is  always  used  by  Cicero  in  the  singular  num¬ 
ber,  when  only  two  individuals  are  spoken  of.  Its  plural,  utrlque ,  is  used  only 
when  each  of  two  parties  consists  of  several  individuals ;  as,  Macedones —  Tyrii , 
utrique.  But  in  other  good  prose  writers  the  plural  utrlque  is  occasionally  used 
in  speaking  of  only  two;  as,  Utrlque  Didnysii.  Nep.  Cf.  §  209,  R.  11,  (4.) 

Rem.  33.  (a.)  Quid  am  differs  from  aliquis  by  implying  that  a  personor 
thing,  though  indefinitely  described,  is  definitely  known ;  as,  Quidam  de  colle¬ 
gis  nostris ,  A  certain  one  of  our  colleagues.  Cic.  Scis  me  quodam  tempore  Met¬ 
apontum  venisse  tecum.  Id. 

( b .)  Quidam  is  sometimes  used  for  some,  as  opposed  to  the  whole ,  or  to  others ; 
as,  Excesserunt  urbe  quidam,  alii  mortem  sibi  consciverunt ,  Some  departed  from 
the  city,  others  destroyed  themselves.  Liv.  Hence  it  is  used  to  soften  an  ex¬ 
pression,  where  in  English  we  say  ‘so  to  speak,1  etc.;  as,  Milvo  est  quoddam 
bellum  naturale  cum  corvo ,  A  kind  of  natural  warfare.  Cic.  Fuit  enim  illud  quod¬ 
dam  ccecum  tempus  servitutis.  Id.  Etenim  omnes  artes  quce  ad  humanitatem  perti¬ 
nent,  habent  quoddam  commune  vinculum  et  quasi  cognatione  quadam  inter  se  con¬ 
tinentur.  Id. —  Tamquam  is  used  for  the  same  purpose,  and  also  ut  ita  dlcam. 

Rem.  34.  Qulvis  and  quilibet,  ‘any  one,’  and  unusquisque,  ‘each,’  are  uni¬ 
versal  and  absolute ;  as,  Omnia  sunt  ejusmddi  quivis  ut  perspicere  possit,  All  are 
of  such  a  nature  that  any  one  can  perceive.  Cic.  Hic  apud  majores  nostros  adhib¬ 
ebatur  peritus,  nunc  quilibet.  Id.  Natura  unumquemque  trahit  ad  discendum. 
A  negative  joined  with  them  denies  only  the  universality  which  they  imply; 
as,  Non  cuivis  homini  contingit  adire  Corinthum ,  i.  e.  not  to  every  man  without 
distinction.  Hor.  Cuiquam  would  have  made  the  negation  universal. 

Rem.  35.  {a.)  Quisque  signifies  each,  every  one ,  distributively  or  relatively, 
and  generally  stands  without  a  noun ;  as,  Quod  cuique  obtigit,  id  quisque  teneat , 
Let  each  one  keep  what  has  fallen  to  each.  Cic.  Hence  it  is  used  particularly 
after  relative  and  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs ;  as,  Scipio  pollicetur  sibi 
magnee  curce  fore ,  ut  omnia  civitatibus,  quae  cuj  usque  fuissent,  restituerentur. 
Cic.  Ut  prcedlci  posset,  quid  cuique  eventurum,  et  quo  quisque  fato  natus  esset. 
Id.  Cur  flat  quidque  queeris :  recte  omnino.  Id.  Quo  quisque  est  sollertior , 
hoc  docet  laboriosius.  Id.  Ut  quisque  optime  dicit,  ita  maxime  dicendi  difficultatem 
Umet.  Id.  And  hence  the  expression  quotusquisque  in  the  sense  of  ‘  how  few 
among  all.’  It  is  also  used  distributively  after  numerals;  as,  Decimus  quisque 
sorte  lectus,  Every  tenth  man.  Quinto  quoque  anno,  In  every  fifth  year.  So 
also  after suus ;  as,  Sui  cuique  liberi  carissimi:  suum  cuique  placet.  (Respect¬ 
ing  the  order  of  the  words,  cf.  §  279,  14:  and  respecting  quisque  in  the  nomina¬ 
tive  in  apposition  to  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  ablative  absolute  or  in  the  ac¬ 
cusative  with  the  infinitive,  see  §  204,  R.  10.) 

(b.)  Quisque  with  a  superlative,  either  in  the  singular  or  the  plural,  denotes 
universality,  and  is  generally  equivalent  to  omnes  with  the  positive ;  as,  doctis¬ 
simus  quisque,  Every  learned  man,  i.  e.  all  the  learned ;  but  often,  also,  in  con¬ 
nection  with  the  verb,  it  retains  the  idea  of  a  reciprocal  comparison,  and  is  to 
be  rendered  by  the  superlative ;  as,  In  omni  arte  optimum  quidque  rarissimum , 
The  best  is  the  rarest.  Cic.  Altissima  quaeque  flumina  minimo  sono  labuntur , 
The  deepest  rivers  flow  with  the  least  sound.  Curt.  With  primus,  it  denotes 
the  first  possible ;  as,  Primo  quoque  tempdre,  As  soon  as  possible.  Cic. 

Possessiyes. 

Rem.  36.  (a.)  The  possessive  pronouns  meus ,  tuus,  suus,  noster,  and  vester 
are  joined  to  nouns,  to  indicate  an  action  or  possession  of  the  persons  denoted 
by  their  primitives ;  as,  Tutus  amor  meus  est  tibi,  My  love  is  secure  to  you. 
Ovid.  Tuam  vicem  ddlere  sdleo.  Cic. — These  pronouns,  as  in  English,  when 
belonging  to  two  substantives,  are  generally  expressed  but  once,  even  when 
the  substantives  are  of  different  genders ;  as,  amor  tuus  ac  judicium  de  me. 

(b.)  But  these  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  when  the  persons  to  which  they 
refer  are  the  objects  of  an  action,  feeling,  etc. ;  as,  Nam  neque  tua  ne glig entia, 
nSque  ddio  id  fecit  tuo,  For  he  did  it  neither  through  neglect  nor  hatred  of  you. 
Ter.  See  §  211,  R.  3. 

17* 


198 


SYNTAX. — PRONOUNS — REFLEXIVES. 


§208, 


(c.)  The  possessive  pronouns,  especially  when  used  as  reflexives,  are  often 
omitted;  as,  Quo  revertar  ?  in  patriam?  scii,  meam ,  Whither  shall  I  return? 
to  (my)  country  ?  Ovid.  D extra  munera  porrexit,  scii.  sud.  Id.  But  they  are 
expressed  when  emphasis  or  contrast  is  intended,  where  in  English  ‘  own  ’ 
might  be  added  to  the  pronoun ;  as,  Ego  non  dicam ,  tdmen  id  pdteritis  cum  ani¬ 
mis  vestris  cogitare.  Cic. 

(d.)  When  besides  the  person  of  the  subject,  that  of  a  remote  object  also 
occurs  in  the  proposition,  the  possessive  pronoun  will  refer  to  the  latter;  as, 
Patris  animum  mihi  reconciliasti ,  i.  e.  patris  mei  animum  rather  than  tui. 

(e.)  As  reflexives,  meus ,  etc.,  are  translated  my,  thy,  his,  her,  its,  our,  your, 
their;  or  my  own,  thy  own,  his  own,  etc. 

THE  REFLEXIVES  SUI  AND  SUUS. 

§  9©8.  Rem.  37.  ( a .)  Sui  and  suus  properly  refer  to  the 
subject  of  the  proposition  in  which  they  stand ;  as, 

Oppidani  facinus  in  se  ac  suos  foedum  consciscunt ,  The  citizens  decide  on  a 
foul  crime  against  themselves  and  their  friends.  Liv. 

( h .)  They  continue  to  be  used  in  successive  clauses,  if  the  subject 
remains  the  same ;  as, 

Ipse  se  quisque  diligit,  non  ut  aliquam  a  se  ipse  mercedem  exigat  caritatis  suae, 
sed  quod  per  se  sibi  quisque  carus  est.  Cic. 

(1.)  In  dependent  clauses,  in  which  the  subject  does  not  remain 
the  same,  the  reflexives  are  commonly  used  in  references  to  the  lead¬ 
ing  subject,  when  the  thoughts,  language,  purposes,  etc.,  of  that  sub¬ 
ject  are  stated ;  as, 

Aridvistus  praedicavit ,  non  sese  Gallis ,  sed  Gallos  sibi  helium  intulisse,  Ariovistus 
declared  that  he  had  not  made  war  upon  the  Gauls,  but  the  Gauls  upon  him. 
Caes.  Homerum  Colophonii  civem  esse  dicunt  suum,  The  Colophonians  say  that 
Homer  is  their  citizen.  Cic.  Tyrannus  petivit  ut  se  ad  amicitiam  tertium  ascribe¬ 
rent.  Id.  But  sometimes,  to  avoid  ambiguity,  the  cases  of  is  or  ille  are  used  in 
such  clauses  in  references  to  the  leading  subject;  as,  Helvetii  sese  Allobrdges  vi 
coacturos  existimabant,  ut  per  suos  fines  eos  ire  paterentur.  Caes.  Here  suos 
refers  to  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause,  and  eos  to  Helvetii,  the  subject  of 
the  leading  clause.  And  sometimes,  even  in  the  same  dependent  clause,  two 
reflexive  pronouns  are  used,  referring  to  different  persons ;  as,  Scythce  petebant , 
ut  regis  sui  filiam  matrimonio  sibi  jungeret.  Curt. 

(2.)  If,  however,  the  leading  subject,  whose  thoughts,  etc.,  are  ex¬ 
pressed,  is  indefinite,  the  reflexives  relate  to  the  subject  of  a  depend¬ 
ent  clause ;  as, 

Medeam  praedicant  (scil.  homines)  in  fuga  fratris  sui  membra  in  Us  Idcis,  qua 
se  parens  persequeretur ,  dissipavisse.  Cic.  Ipsum  regem  tradunt  operatum  his 
sacris  se  abdidisse.  Liv. 

(3.)  (a.)  When  the  leading  verb  is  in  the  passive  voice,  the  re¬ 
flexive  often  refers  not  to  its  subject,  but  to  that  which  would  be  its 
subject  in  the  active  voice ;  as, 

A  Ccesdre  invitor  ut  sim  sibi  legatus ,  i.  e.  Caesar  me  invitat ,  I  am  invited  by 
Caesar  to  become  his  lieutenant.  Cic. 

( b .)  So  when  the  subject  is  a  thing  without  life,  the  reflexive  may 
relate  to  some  other  word  in  the  sentence,  which  denotes  a  thing  hav¬ 
ing  life ;  as, 

Canum  tam  fida  custodia  quid  significat  aliud ,  nisi  se  ad  hdminum  commtidt- 
tates  esse  generatos  ?  Cic. 


§  208. 


SYNTAX. - PRONOUNS - REFLEXIVES. 


199 


(4.)  Instead  of  sui  and  suus ,  whether  referring  to  a  leading  or  a 
subordinate  subject,  ipse  is  sometimes  used,  to  avoid  ambiguity  from 
the  similarity  of  both  numbers  of  sui ,  and  also  to  mark  more  emphat¬ 
ically  than  suus,  the  person  to  whom  it  relates;  as, 

Jugurtha  legatos  misit ,  qui  ipsi  liberisque  vitam  peterent ,  Jugurtha  sent  ambas¬ 
sadors  to  ask  life  for  himself  and  his  children.  Sail.  Ea  molestissime  ferre 
homines  debent ,  quce  ipsorum  culpa  contracta  sunt. 

(5.)  In  the  plural  number,  with  inter ,  se  only  is  used,  if  the  person 
or  thing  referred  to  is  in  the  nominative  or  accusative ;  se  or  ipse ,  if 
in  any  other  case ;  as, 

Fratres  inter  se  quum  forma,  tum  moribus  similes,  Brothers  resembling  each 
other  both  in  person  and  character.  Cic.  Feras  inter  sese  conciliat  natura.  Cic. 
Incidunt  aliqua  a  doctis  etiam  inter  ipsos  mutuo  reprehensa.  Quint. 

(6.)  (a.)  When  reference  is  made  not  to  the  subject  of  the  propo¬ 
sition,  but  to  some  other  person  or  thing,  hie,  is,  or  ille,  is  generally 
used,  except  in  the  cases  above  specified ;  as, 

Themistdcles  servum  ad  Xerxem  misit ,  ut  ei  nuntiaret,  suis  verbis ,  adversarios 
ejus  in  fuga  esse,  Themistocles  sent  his  servant  to  Xerxes,  to  inform  him 
(Xerxes),  in  his  (Themistocles’)  name,  that  his  (Xerxes’)  enemies  were  upon 
the  point  of  flight.  Nep. 

(&.)  But  when  no  ambiguity  would  arise,  and  especially  when  the 
verb  is  of  the  first  or  second  person,  sui  and  suus  sometimes  take  the 
place  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns ;  as, 

Suam  rem  sibi  salvam  sistam,  I  will  restore  his  property  entire  to  him.  Plaut. 

(c.)  On  the  contrary,  the  demonstratives  are  sometimes  used  for 
the  reflexives ;  as, 

Helvetii  persuadent  Rauracis,  ut  una  cum  iis  prdficiscantur ,  The  Helvetii  per¬ 
suade  the  Rauraci  to  go  with  them.  Caes. — In  some  instances,  a  reflexive  and 
a  demonstrative  are  used  in  reference  to  the  same  person;  as,  Ita  se  gessit 
(scii.  Ligarius )  ut  ei  pdeern  esse  expediret.  Cic.  C.  Claudii  orantis  per  sui  fra¬ 
tris  parentisque  ejus  manes.  Liv. — Sometimes  the  reflexives  refer  to  different 
subjects  in  the  same  sentence;  as,  Ariovistus  respondit,  neminem  secum  sine 
sua  pernicie  contendisse  (Caes.);  where  se  refers  to  Ariovistus,  and  sud  to 
neminem . 

(7.)  ( a .)  Suus  often  refers  to  a  word  in  the  predicate  of  a  sentence, 
and  is  then  usually  placed  after  it ;  as, 

Hunc  cives  sui  ex  urbe  ejecerunt ,  Him  his  fellow -citizens  banished  from  the 
city.  Cic.  Titurius  quum  procul  Ambiorigem,  suos  cdhortantem,  conspexisset.  Caes. 

(6.)  Suus,  and  not  hujus ,  is  used  when  a  noun  is  omitted ;  as, 

Octavius  quem  sui  (scil.  amici)  Ccesarem  salutabant ,  Octavius,  whom  his  fol¬ 
lowers  saluted  as  Caesar. 

(c.)  Suus  is  also  commonly  used  when  two  nouns  are  coupled  by 
cum  but  not  when  they  are  connected  by  a  conjunction  ;  as, 

Ptdlemceus  amicos  Demetrii  cum  suis  rebus  dimisit ,  Ptolemy  dismissed  the 
friends  of  Demetrius  with  their  effects.  Just. 

(8.)  Suus  sometimes  denotes  fit,  favorable  ;  as, 

Sunt  et  sua  dona  parenti,  There  are  likewise  for  my  father  suitable  presents. 
Virg.  Ut  liberator  ille  pdpiili  Romani  opperiretur  tempdra  sua.  Liv.  Alphenus 
utebatur  pbpulo  sane  suo.  Cic.  Sometimes  it  signifies  peculiar ;  as,  Molles  sua 
tura  Sabcei,  scii,  mittunt,  i.  e.  the  frankincense  for  which  their  country  was  fa¬ 
mous.  Yirg.  Fessosque  sdpor  suus  occupat  artus.  Id. 


200 


SYNTAX. - SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 


§  209. 


NOMINATIVE. 

SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE  AND  VERB. 

§  209.  (a.)  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of 

a  finite  verb  is  put  in  the  nominative. 

Note  1.  (a.)  A  verb  in  any  mood  except  the  infinitive  is  called  a  finite  verb.  ( b .)  In 
historical  writing  the  nominative  is  sometimes  .joined  with  the  present  infinitive  instead 
of  the  imperfect  indicative.  Cf.  It.  5. 

(b.)  A  verb  agrees  with  its  subject-nominative,  in  number 
and  person ;  as, 

Ego  lego,  I  read.  Nos  legimus,  We  read. 

Tu  scribis,  Thou  writest.  Vos  scribitis,  You  write. 

Equus  currit,  The  horse  runs.  Equi  currunt,  Horses  run. 

Note  2.  The  imperative  singular  is  sometimes  used  in  addressing  several 
persons;  as,  Huc  natas  adjice  septem,  scii,  vos ,  Thebaides.  Ovid.  Met.  6,  182. 
So  Adde  defectionem  Italice,  scii,  vos,  milites.  Liv.  26,  41. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The  nominatives  ego,  tu,  nos,  vos,  are  seldom  ex¬ 
pressed,  the  termination  of  the  verb  sufficiently  marking  the  person ; 
as, 

Cupio,  I  desire;  vivis,  thou  livest;  habemus,  we  have.  See  §  147,  3. 

( b .)  But  when  emphasis  or  opposition  is  intended,  the  nominatives  of  the 
first  and  second  persons  are  expressed ;  as,  Ego  reges  ejeci ,  vos  tyrannos  intro¬ 
ducitis,  I  banished  kings,  you  introduce  tyrants.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Nos,  nos,  dico 
aperte,  consules  desumus.  Cic.  Tu  es  patronus ,  tu  pater.  Ter.  In  indignant 
questions  and  addresses  tu  is  expressed;  as,  Tu  in  forum  prodire,  tu  lucem 
conspicere,  tu  in  horum  conspectum  venire  conaris  ?  Auct.  ad  Her. 

Rem.  2.  The  nominative  of  the  third  person  is  often  omitted  : — 
(1.)  When  it  has  been  expressed  in  a  preceding  proposition  : — 

(a.)  As  nominative;  as,  Mosa  profluit  ex  monte  Vosego,  et  in  Oceanum  influit. 
Caes. ;  or  ( b )  in  an  oblique  case ;  as,  Cursorem  miserunt,  ut  id  nuntiaret,  scii. 
cursor.  Nep. :  or  (c)  in  a  possessive  adjective;  as,  Et  vereor  quo  se  Junonia 
vertant  Hospitia ;  haud  tanto  cessabit  cardine  rerum ,  scii,  illa ,  i.  e.  Juno.  Virg 
JEn.  I.  672. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  for  person  or  thing : — 

Thus  homines  is  often  omitted  before  aiunt,  dicunt,  ferunt,  etc.;  as,  Ut  aiunt, 
As  they  sav.  Cic.  Maxime  admirantur  eum,  qui  pecunia  non  movetur.  Id. — 
So  bene  est,  bene  habet  or  bene  agitur,  It  is  well;  as,  Si  vales,  bene  est,  ego  valeo. 
Cic.  Quum  melius  est,  gratulor  dis.  Afran.  Optume  habet,  Nothing  can  be 
better.  Plaut.  Bene  habet:  jacta  sunt  fundamenta  defensionis.  Cic.  Bene  agi¬ 
tur  pro  noxia.  Plaut. 

Note  3.  This  omission  of  the  nominative  is  common  in  the  clause  preced¬ 
ing  a  relative ;  as,  Qui  Bavium  non  odit,  amet  tua  carmina,  Mcevi,  scil.  hdmo,  Let 
him  who  hates  not  Bavius,  love  your  verses,  Maevius.  Virg.  Vastatur  agri  quod 
inter  urbem  ac  Fidenas  est,  scil.  id  spatium.  Liv.  Sunt  quos  juvat... scii,  hdmines, 
There  are  (those)  whom  it  delights.  Hor.  Est  qui  nec  veteris  pocula  Massici 
spernit,  scil.  hdmo.  Hor.  Here  sunt  quos  and  est  qui  are  equivalent  to  quidam, 
aliquis,  or  aliqui.  So,  Est  quod  gaudeas,  There  is  (reason)  why  you  should  re¬ 
joice.  Cic.  Neque  erat  cur  fallere  vellent.  Ovid.  Est  ubi  id  valeat.  Cic.  Est, 
quum  non  est  satius,  etc.  Auct.  ad  Her.  In  the  latter  cases,  the  adverbs  are 
equivalent  to  in  quo ,  scil.  Idco ,  tempdre. 


§  209. 


SYNTAX. — SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 


201 


Rem.  3.  (1.)  The  nominative  is  wanting  before  verbs  denoting  the 
state  of  the  weather,  or  the  operations  of  nature  ;  as, 

Fulgurat ,  It  lightens.  Plin.  Ningit ,  It  snows.  Virg.  Lucescebat ,  It  was 
growing  light.  Liv.  Jam  advesperascit.  Cic. 

(2.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  the  third  person  singu¬ 
lar  of  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs,  and  of  active  verbs  used  imper¬ 
sonally  ;  as, 

Favetur  tibi  a  me,  Thou  art  favored  by  me.  Ejus  orationi  vehementer  ab  omni¬ 
bus  reclamatum  est.  Cic.  Proinde  ut  bene  vivitur ,  diu  vivitur.  Plaut.  Ad  exi¬ 
tum  ventum  est.  Sen.  Actum  est  de  imperio.  See  §  184,  2 :  and  cf.  §  229, 
R.  5,  (b.) 

Note  4.  A  nominative,  however,  is  expressed  before  the  passive  of  some 
neuter  verbs,  which,  in  the  active  voice,  are  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as, 
Pugna  pugnata  est.  Cic.  See  §  232,  (1.) 

(3.)  It  is  wanting  also  before  the  neuter  of  the  future  passive  parti¬ 
ciple  with  est;  as, 

Si  vis  me  flere  dolendum  est  primum  ipsi  tibi ,  If  you  wish  me  to  weep,  you 
yourself  must  first  grieve.  Hor.  Orandum  est,  ut  sit  mens  sana  in  corpdre  sano. 
Juv.  Ad  villam  revertendum  est.  Cic. 

(4.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  the  impersonal  verbs 
miseret ,  poenitet ,  pudet ,  taedet,  and  piget ;  as, 

Eos  ineptiarum  poenitet,  They  repent  of  their  follies.  Cic.  Miseret  te  aliorum , 
tui  te  nec  miseret  nec  pudet.  Plaut.  Me  civitatis  morum  piget  tcedetque.  Sali. — 
In  such  examples,  the  sense  will  sometimes  permit  us  to  supply  fortuna ,  condi¬ 
tio,  memdria,  etc.  So ‘in  the  expression,  Venit  in  mentem ,  It  came  into  mind; 
as,  In  mentem  venit  de  speculo ,  scii,  cogitatio ,  etc.  Plaut. — An  infinitive  or  a  sub¬ 
junctive  clause  sometimes  forms  the  subject  of  these  verbs;  as,  Te  id  nullo 
mddo  puduit  facere,  To  do  that  by  no  means  shamed  you.  Ter.  Non  poenitet 
me,  quantum  profecerim.  Cic. 

(5.)  The  subject  of  the  verb  is  sometimes  an  infinitive  or  a  neuter 
participle  (either  alone  or  with  other  words),  one  or  more  proposi¬ 
tions,  or  an  adverb.  (Cf.  §  202,  R.  2  and  3  :  and  §  274,  R.  5,  (6.)  The 
verb  is  then  in  the  third  person  singular ;  as, 

Vacare  culpa  magnum  est  solatium,  To  be  free  from  fault  is  a  great  consola¬ 
tion.  Neque  est  te  fallere  quidquam,  To  deceive  you  in  any  thing  is  not  (possi¬ 
ble.)  Virg.  Mentiri  non  est  meum.  Plaut.  Te  non  istud  audivisse  mirum  est, 
That  you  have  not  heard  that  is  wonderful.  Cic.  ‘  Summum  jus,  summa  in¬ 
juria,’  factum  est  jam.  tritum  sermone  proverbium.  Id.  Ni  degeneratum  in  aliis 
huic  qudque  decori  offecisset.  Liv.  (Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (b.)  Sin  est  ut  velis  manere 
illam  apud  te.  Ter.  Nec  profuit  Eydrce  crescere  per  damnum,  geminasque 
resumere  vires.  Ovid.  Dic  mihi,  cras  istud,  Postume,  quando  venit  f  Tell  me, 
Postumus,  when  does  that  to-morrow  come?  Mart.  Parum  we  campis  atque 
Neptuno  super  f  usum  est  Latini  sanguinis  ?  Hor. 

_{a.)  This  construction  is  especially  common  with  impersonal  verbs;  as,  Ora¬ 
torem  Irasci  non  decet,  That  an  orator  should  be  angry,  is  not  becoming.  Cic. 
Hoc  fieri  et  dportet  et  dpus  est.  Id.  Me  pedibus  delectat  claudere  verba,  Hor. 
Interest  omnium  recte  facere.  Cic.  Casu  accidit,  ut,  id  quod  Romae  audierat, 
piimus  nuntiaret.  Id.  Sometimes  a  neuter  pronoun  is  interposed  between  a 
proposition  and  its  verb ;  as,  Impune  f  acere  quos  libet,  id  est  reqem  esse.  Sail. 
Cf.  §  206,  (13,)  (a.) 

(6.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  potest ,  coepit  or  coeptum 
est ,  incipit ,  desinit,  debet,  solet,  and  videtur ,  when  followed  by  the  in¬ 
finitive  of  an  impersonal  verb ;  as, 


202 


SYNTAX. - SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 


§  209. 


Pigere  eum  facti  coepit ,  It  began  to  repent  him  (i.  e.  he  began  to  repent)  of 
his  conduct.  Just.  Sapientia  est  una,  qua  praeceptrice ,  in  tranquillitate  vivi  po¬ 
test.  Cic.  Taedere  sdlet  avaros  impendii.  Quint. 

Rem.  4.  The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as, 

Di  meliora  piis ,  scii,  dent  or  velint,  May  the  gods  grant  better  things  to  the 
pious.  Virg.  Verum  hcec  hactenus ,  scii,  diximus.  Cic.  Pertineo  is  understood  in 
such  expressions  as  nihil  ad  me,  nihil  ad  rem ;  Quid  hoc  ad  Epicurum  ?  What 
does  this  concern  Epicurus  ?  Quorsus  hcec  ?  i.  e.  quorsus  ha>c  pertinent  ?  What 
is  that  for  ? — Parabo  is  to  be  supplied,  in  Quo  mihi  hanc  rem  ?  Of  what  use 
is  this  to  me.?  and,  Unde  mihi  aliquam  rem  ?  Whence  am  I  to  get  any  thing? 
as,  Quo  mihi  bibliothecas  ?  Sen.  Unde  mihi  lapidem  ?  Hor.  A  tense  of  f  acio  is 
often  to  be  supplied,  as  in  Recte  ille ,  melius  hi ;  Bene  Chrysippus,  qui  docet.  Cic. 
Nihil  per  vim  umquam  Clodius ,  omnia  per  vim  Milo.  Id.  Quae  quum  dixisset , 
Cotta  finem.  Id.  So,  also  in  the  phrases  nihil  aliud  quam ;  quid  aliud  quam ; 
nihil  praeterquam ,  which  signify  4  merely  ’ ;  as,  Tisaphernes  nihil  dliua  quam 
bellum  comparavit.  Nep.  This  verb  is  in  like  manner  omitted  with  nihil  amplius 
quam ;  nihil  minus  quam,  and  in  the  phrase  si  nihil  aliud. — Ait  or  inquit  is  some¬ 
times  omitted  in  introducing  the  direct  words  of  another,  and  more  frequently 
in  relating  a  connected  conversation ;  as,  Tum  ille ;  hic  ego ;  huic  ego.  Dicit  is 
sometimes  omitted  in  quoting  a  person’s  words;  as,  Scite  Chrysippus  :  ut  gladii 
causa  vaginam,  sic  preeter  mundum  cetera  omnia  aliorum  causa  esse  generata.  Cic. 
— After  per  in  adjurations  oro ,  rdgo  or  precor  is  often  omitted;  as,  Per  ego  vos 
deos  patrios,  vindicate  ab  ultimo  dedecdre  nomen  gentemque  Persarum ;  i.  e.  per 
deos  patrios  vos  oro,  vindicate.  Curt.  This  omission  is  most  common  with  the 
copula  sum;  as,  Nam  Pdlyddrus  ego ,  scil.  sum,  For  I  am  Polydorus.  Virg.  And 
so  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted  with  predicate  adjectives,  and  especially  in 
proverbial  phrases ;  as,  Quot  homines  tot  sententiae .  Ter.  Omnia  praeclara  rara, 
scil.  sunt.  Cic.  So  also  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted  in  the  compound  tenses 
of  the  passive  voice;  as,  Agro  mulctdti ,  scil.  sunt.  Liv.  Cf.  §  270,  R.  3. 

Note  5.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  a  verb  is  often  joined  to  one  of  two  con¬ 
nected  nominatives  and  understood  with  the  other,  and  that  even  when  the 
persons  are  different;  as,  rnagis  ego  te  amo,  quam  tu  me,  scil.  amas.  After  a 
negative  verb  a  corresponding  positive  verb  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied ;  as, 
after  nego,  dUco ,  after  veto,  jubeo ,  and  in  this  case  et  takes  the  signification  of 
sed.  Cf.  §  323,  1,  (2.),  ( b .) 

Note  6.  Sometimes,  when  the  verb  of  an  appended  proposition  is  omitted, 
its  subject  is  attracted  to  the  case  of  a  noun  in  the  leading  proposition  with 
which  is  joined  a  participle  of  the  omitted  verb ;  as,  Hannibal  M inucium ,  ma¬ 
gistrum  equitum ,  pari  ac  dictatorem  ddlo  productum  in  proelium,  f  ugavit ,  i.  e. 
pari  ac  dictator  dblo  productus  fuerat.  Nep.  Hann.  5.  So  Liv.  34,  32. 

Rem.  5.  In  the  historic  style  the  nominative  is  sometimes  found 
with  the  present  infinitive ;  as, 

Interim  qudtidie  Ccesar  JE duos  frumentum  flagitare,  Meanwhile  Caesar  was 
daily  demanding  com  of  the  Aului.  Caes.  Nos  pavidi  trepidare  metu.  Virg. 
Id  horrendum  ferri.  Id. 

Note  7.  The  infinitive  in  this  construction  is  called  the  historical  infinitive , 
and  is  used  instead  of  the  imperfect  indicative  to  express  in  a  lively  manner  a 
continued  or  repeated  action  or  condition. 

Rem.  6.  The  relative  qui  may  refer  to  an  antecedent  either  of  the 
first,  second,  or  third  person ;  and  its  verb  takes  the  person  of  the 
antecedent ;  as, 

Ego  qui  lego,  I  who  read.  Tu  qui  scribis,  Thou  who  writest.  Equus  qui  cur¬ 
rit,  The  horse  which  runs.  Vos  qui  quaeritis,  You  who  ask. 

Rem.  7.  (a.).  Verbs  in  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  second  per¬ 
son  singular,  are  sometimes  used  to  express  general  truths ;  as, 


§  209. 


SYNTAX. - SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 


203 


Quam  multa  facimus  causa  amicorum  !  How  many  things  we  do  (i.  e.  men  do) 
for  the  sake  of  friends !  Cic.  Si  vis  me  fere ,  dolendum  est  primum  ipsi  tibi , 
Whoever  wishes  me,  etc.  Hor. 

( b .)  Nos  is  often  used  for  ego ,  and  rwster  for  meus ;  and  even  when  the  pro¬ 
noun  is  not  expressed,  the  verb  is  frequently  put  in  the  first  person  plural  in¬ 
stead  of  the  first  person  singular.  The  genitive  nostri  is  used  for  met ,  but  nos¬ 
trum  always  expresses  a  real  plurality. 

Rem.  8.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  nominative  by  attraction. 
See  §  206,  (6.)  ( b .) 

Rem.  9.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  the  predicate-nominative,  especially 
if  it  precedes  the  verb ;  as,  Amantium  irce  amoris  integratio  est,  The  quarrels 
of  lovers  are  a  renewal  of  love.  Ter.  Loca,  quce  proxima  Carthaginem ,  Numid¬ 
ia  appellatur.  Sali.  And  sometimes  it  agrees  with  the  nearest  subject  of  a  sub¬ 
ordinate  sentence ;  as,  Sed  ei  cariora  semper  omnia ,  quam  decus  atque  pudicitia 
fuit.  Sail.  Cat.  25. 

Rem.  10.  In  cases  of  apposition,  the  verb  commonly  agrees  with  the  noun 
which  is  to  be  explained;  as,  Tulliola ,  deliciae  nostrce,  flagitat.  Cic.  But  some¬ 
times  the  verb  agrees,  not  with  the  principal  nominative,  but  with  a  nearer 
noun  in  apposition  to  it;  as,  Tungri,  civitas  Gallice,  fontem  habet  insignem , 
The  Tungri,  a  state  of  Gaul,  has  a  remarkable  fountain.  Plin.  Corioli  oppidum 
captum  (est).  Liv. 

Rem.  11.  A  collective  noun  has  sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  a 
plural  verb ;  as, 

Pars  epulis  onerant  mensas ,  Part  load  the  tables  with  food.  Virg.  Turba 
ruunt.  Ovid.  Atria  turba  tenent;  veniunt  leve  vulgus  euntywe.  Id. 

(1.)  {a.)  A  plural  verb,  joined  to  a  collective  noun,  usually  expresses  the 
action,  etc.,  of  the  individuals  which  that  noun  denotes.  In  Cicero,  Sallust, 
and  Caesar,  this  construction  scarcely  occurs  in  simple  sentences;  but  it  is 
often  used,  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  expressed  not  in  its  own,  but  in  a 

E receding  clause;  as,  Hoc  idem  generi  humano  even'd ,  quod  in  terra  collocati  sint, 
ecause  they  (scil.  homines)  live  on  earth.  Cic.  In  Livy  it  occurs  more  fre¬ 
quently  ;  as,*  Locros  omnis  multitudo  abeunt. 

( b .)  Abstract  nouns  are  sometimes  used  collectively,  instead  of  their  con¬ 
cretes;  as,  nobilitas  for  nobiles,  juventus  for  juvenes,  vicinia  for  vicini,  servitium 
for  servi,  levis  armatura  for  leviter  armiiti,  e tc.  (c.)  Miles,  eques,  pedes,  and 
similar  words  are  sometimes  used  collectively  for  the  soldiery,  the  cavalry,  etc. 

(2.)  When  two  or  more  clauses  have  the  same  collective  noun  as  their  sub¬ 
ject,  the  verb  is  frequently  singular  in  the  former,  and  plural  in  the  latter;  as, 
Jam  ne  nocte  quidem  turba  ex  eo  loco  dllabebatur,  refracturosque  carcerem  mina¬ 
bantur.  Liv.  Gens  eadem,  quce  te  crudeli  Daunia  bello  insequitur,  nos  si  pellant, 
nihil  abfore  credunt.  Virg. 

(3.)  Tantum,  followed  by  a  genitive  plural,  has  sometimes  a  plural  verb,  like 
a  collective  noun ;  as,  Quid  huc  tantum  hdminum  incedunt  ?  Why  are  so  many 
men  coming  hither?  Plaut. 

(4.)  A  plural  verb  is  sometimes  used,  though  not  by  Cicero,  after  uterque 
and  quisque,  pars.. .pars,  alius. ..dlium,  and  alter. ..alterum,  on  account  of  the 
idea  of  plurality  which  they  involve;  as,  Uterque  eorum  ex  castris  exercitum 
educunt,  Each  of  them  leads  his  army  from  the  camp.  Cses.  Intimus  quisque 
libertorum  vincti  abrepttywe  (sunt.)  Tac.  Alius  cilium,  ut  proelium  incipiant, 
circumspectant.  Liv.  Cf.  §  207,  R.  32,  (c.) 

Note  8.  This  construction  may  be  explained  by  passages  like  the  following, 
in  which  the  plural  is  placed  first,  and  then  the  singular,  denoting  its  parts; 
Celeri ,  suo  quisque  tempore,  aderunt.  Liv.  Decemviri  perturbati  alius  in  aliam 
partem  castrorum  discurrunt.  Id.  See  §  204,  R.  10. 


204  SYNTAX. - SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  §  209. 

Rem.  12.  Two  or  more  nominatives  singular,  not  in  apposition, 
generally  have  a  plural  verb  ;  as, 

Furor  Ira  que  mentem  praecipitant,  Fury  and  rage  hurry  on  (my)  mind.  Virg. 
Dum  astas,  metus ,  magister ,  prohibebant.  Ter. 

(1.)  If  the  predicate  belongs  to  the  several  nominatives  jointly,  the  verb  is 
always  plural;  as,  Grammatice  quondam  ac  musice  junctae  fuerunt.  Quint. 

(2.)  A  verb  in  the  singular  is  often  used  after  several  nominatives 
singular,  especially  if  they  denote  things  without  life ;  as, 

Mens  enim,-  et  ratio  et  consilium  in  senibus  est.  Cic.  Beneficentia,  liberdlitas , 
bonitas ,  justitia  funditus  tollitur.  Id. 

Note  9.  This  construction  is  most  common  when  the  several  nominatives, 
as  in  the  preceding  examples,  constitute,  as  it  were,  but  one  idea.  So  also  the 
compound  subject  Senatus  populusque  Romanus  has  always  a  predicate  in  the 
singular.  The  same  construction  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets,  occurs 
with  names  of  persons ;  as,  Gorgias,  Thrasymachus,  Protdgdras,  Prddicus,  Hip¬ 
pias  in  hdnore  fuit.  Cic.  Quin  et  Prometheus  et  Pelopis  parens  dulci  laborum 
decipitur  sono.  Hor.  When  the  nominatives  denote  both  persons  and  things, 
the  verb  is  commonly  plural ;  as,  Coitio  consulum  et  Pompeius  obsunt.  Liv. 

(3.)  When  one  of  the  nouns  is  plural,  the  verb  is  generally  so;  but  some¬ 
times  it  is  singula^  when  the  plural  noun  does  not  immediately  precede  it;  as, 
Dii  te  penates  patnique,  et  patris  Imago,  et  domus  regia ,  et  in  domo  regale  so¬ 
lium,  et  nomen  Tarquinium  creat  vocat^we  regem.  Liv. 

(4.)  When  each  of  the  nominatives  is  preceded  by  et  or  turn,  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  last;  as,  Hoc  et  ratio  doctis,  et  necessitas  barbaris,  et  mos  gentibus,  et 
feris  natura  ipsa  prsescripsit,  This,  reason  has  dictated  to  the  learned,  and  ne¬ 
cessity  to  barbarians,  and  custom  to  nations,  and  nature  itself  to  wild  beasts. 
Cic.  Et  ego,  et  Cicero  meus  flagitabit.  Id.  Tum  aetas  viresce,  turn  delta  gloria 
animum  stimulabat.  Liv.  So  when  the  subject  consists  of  two  infinitives ;  as, 
Et  facere,  et  pati  fortia,  Romanum  est.  Cic.  TJnuset  alter  always  takes  a  singu¬ 
lar  verb ;  as,  Dicit  unus  et  alter  breviter.  Cic.  Unus  et  alter  assuitur  pannus. 
Hor. 

(5.)  When  the  nominatives  are  connected  by  aut,  sometimes  the 
plural,  but  commonly  the  singular,  is  used ;  as, 

Si  Socrates  aut  Antisthenes  diceret,  If  Socrates  or  Antisthenes  should  say.  Cic. 
Ut  quosque  studium  prlvatim  aut  gratia  occupaverunt.  Liv. 

(a.)  The  plural  is  necessary  with  disjunctives,  if  the  subject  includes  the 
first  or  second  person ;  as,  Quod  in  Decemviris  neque  ego  neque  Ccesar  habiti  es¬ 
semus.  Cic. — ( o .)  With  aut.. .aut  and  nec...nec  the  singular  is  preferred,  but 
with  seu...seu  and  tam...quam  the  verb  is  in  the  plural. 

(6.)  A  nominative  singular,  joined  to  an  ablative  by  the  preposition  cum , 
sometimes  has  a  singular  but  more  frequently  a  plural  verb ;  as,  Domitius  cum 
Messala  certus  esse  videbatur.  Cic.  Bocchus,  cum  peditibus,  postremam  Ro¬ 
manorum  aciem  invadunt,  Bocchus,  with  his  foot-soldiers,  attacks  the  rear  of 
the  Roman  army.  Sail.  Ipse  dux,  cum  aliquot  principibus,  capiuntur.  Liv. 

(7.)  If  the  nominatives  are  of  different  persons,  the  verb  is  of  the 
first  person  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and  of  the  second  rather 
than  the  third ;  as, 

Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus,  If  vou  and  Tullia  are  well, 
Cicero  and  I  are  well.  Cic.  Hcec  neque  ego  neque  tu  fecimus.  Ter.  Ego  pdpu- 
lusque  Romanus  bellum  judico  facio^we.  Liv. 

(a.)  Yet  sometimes  the  verb  agrees  in  number  and  person  with  the  nearest 
nominative,  and  is  understood  with  the  other;  as,  Vos  ipsi  et  senatus  frequens 
restitit.  This  is  always  the  case  when  the  action  of  the  verb  is  qualified  with 
reference  to  each  nominative  separately;  as,  Ego  misere  tu  feliciter  vivis. 


§210. 


SYNTAX. - PREDICATE-NOMINATIVE. 


205 


Rem.  13.  The  interjections  en ,  ecce ,  and  0,  are  sometimes  followed 
by  the  nominative ;  as, 

En  Priamus!  Lo  Priam!  Virg.  En  ego.  vester  Ascanius.  Id.  Ecce  hdmo 
Catienus!  Cic.  Ecce  tuce  literce.  fa.  0  vir  fortis  atque  amicus!  Ter. 

PREDICAT  E-NOMINATIVE. 

§210.  A  noun  in  the  predicate,  after  a  verb  neuter  or  pas¬ 
sive,  is  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  when  it  denotes  the 
same  person  or  thing ;  as, 

(a.)  When  the  subject  is  in  the  nominative;  Ira  furor  brevis  est ,  Anger  is  a 
short  madness.  Hor.  Ego  v6cor  Lyconides,  I  am  called  Lyconides.  Plaut. 
Ego  incedo  regina,  I  walk  a  queen.  Virg.  Caius  et  Lucius  fratres  fuerunt.  Cic. — 
So  ( b .)  when  the  subject  is  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive;  Judicem  me 
esse  vdlo.  Cic. 

(c.)  Sometimes  also  a  dative,  denoting  the  same  object,  both  precedes  and 
follows  a  verb  neuter  or  passive.  See  §  227,  N. — And  (a.)  a  predicate  abla¬ 
tive  sometimes  follows  passive  participles  of  choosing ,  naming ,  etc. ;  as,  Consuli¬ 
bus  certioribus  factis.  Liv.  See  §  257,  R.  11. 

(e.)  If  the  predicate  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the  subject,  it 
takes  that  form;  as,  Licentia  corruptrix  est  morum.  Cf.  §  204,  R.  2. — (f.)  But 
if  the  subject  is  neuter,  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  if  it  has  both  a  masculine 
and  a  feminine  form,  takes  the  former;  as,  Tempus  vitee  magister  est. 

(g.)  An  infinitive  may  supply  the  place  of  a  predicate  nominative.  See  §  269, 
R.  4. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
standing  in  the  predicate,  after  verbs  neuter  or  passive,  and  relating 
to  the  subject,  agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

( b .)  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  nouns,  the  gender  and  num¬ 
ber  of  such  predicate  adjectives  are  determined  by  §  205,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  noun  in  the  predicate  sometimes  differs  in  gender  and 
'number  from  the  subject;  as,  Sanguis  erant  lacrimae ,  Her  tears  were  blood. 
Ovid.  Captivi  militum  praeda  fuerunt.  Liv. 

( b .)  So  when  a  subject  in  the  singular  is  followed  by  an  ablative  with  cum , 
the  predicate  is  plural;  as,  Exsules  esse  jubet  L.  Tarquinium  cum  conjuge  et 
libens.  Liv. 

Rem.  3.  The  verbs  which  most  frequently  have  a  noun,  etc.,  in  the 
predicate  agreeing  in  case,  etc.,  with  their  subject,  are : — 

(1.)  The  copula  sum;  as,  Ego  Jovis  sum  illius,.  Plaut.  Disce  esse  pater. 
Ter.  The  predicate  with  sum  maybe  an  adverb  of  place,  manner,  etc. ;  as, 
Quod  est  longe  aliter.  Cic.  Rectissime  sunt  dpud  te  omnia ,  Every  thing  with 
you  is  in  a  very  good  condition.  Id. ;  or  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case ;  as,  Numen 
sine  ture  est.  Ovid.  Sunt  nobis  mitia,  poma.  Virg. 

(2.)  Certain  neuter  verbs  denoting  exi st  ence,  position ,  motio n ,  etc. ; 
as,  vivo,  exsisto,  appareo,  cado,  eo,  evado,  fugio,  incedo,  jaceo,  maneo,  sedeo,  sto , 
venio ,  etc.  Thus,  Rex  circulbat  pedes,  The  king  went  round  on  foot.  Plin. 
Quos  judicabat  non  posse  oratores  evadere .  Cic.  Ego  huic  causce  patronus  exstiti, 
Cic.  Qui  ft,  ut  nemo  contentus  vivat  f 

(3.)  The  passive  of  verbs  denoting, 

(a.)  To  name  or  call ;  as,  appellor ,  dicor,  nominor,  nuncupor,  perhibeor, 
salutayr,  scribor ,  inscribor ,  vocor.  Thus,  Cognomine  Justus  est  appellatus,  He  was 
called  by  the  surname  Just.  Nep.  Aristaeus  olivae  dicitur  inventor.  Cic. 

18 


206 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  NOUNS. 


§211. 


(b.)  To  choose ,  render ,  appoint,  or  constitute ;  as,  constituor,  creor, 
declaror,  designor ,  eligor,  fio,  reddor,  renuncior.  Thus,  Dux  a  Romanis  electus 
est  Q.  Fabius.  Postquam ' ephebus  factus  est.  Nep.  Certior  factus  sum. 

(c.)  To  esteem  or  reckon;  as,  censeor,  cognoscor,  credor,  deprehendor , 
existimor ,  ducor ,  f  eror,  habeor ,  judicor,  memdror,  numeror,  putor ,  reperior,  videor. 
Thus,  Credebar  sanguinis  auctor  ego.  Ovid.  Malim  videri  timidus  quam  parum 
prudens.  Cic. 

Note  1.  With  several  passives  of  the  last  class,  when  followed  by  a  predi¬ 
cate-nominative,  etc.,  an  infinitive  of  sum  is  expressed  or  understood;  as, 
Amens  mihi  fuisse  videor,  I  think  I  was  beside  myself.  Cic.  But  the  dative 
of  the  first  person  is  sometimes  omitted  after  videor ;  as,  Satis  docuisse  videor. 
Id. — Atilius  prudens  esse  putabatur.  Id.  So  with  dicor  (to  be  said),  and  perhi¬ 
beor ;  as,  Verus  patrice  diceris  esse  pater.  Mart.  Hoc  ne  locutus  sine  mercede 
existimer.  Phsed. 

Note  2.  Audio  is  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  like  appellor;  as,  Tu  rexque 
paterywe  audisti  coram.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  A  predicate-nominative  is  used  after  many  other  verbs  to  denote  a 
purpose,  time,  or  circumstance  of  the  action ;  as,  Comes  additus  AE6- 
lules ,  bolides  was  added  as  a  companion.  Virg.  Lupus  obambulat  noctur¬ 
nus.  Id.  Apparet  liquido  sublimis  in  cethere  Nisus.  Id.  So  with  an  active 
verb;  Audivi  hoc  puer.  Cic.  Sapiens  nil  facit  invitus.  Id.  Rempublicam  de¬ 
fendi  adolescens.  Id.  Cf.  §  204,  R.  1. 

Note  3.  Instead  of  the  predicate-nominative,  a  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose 
sometimes  occurs  (see  §  227);  sometimes  an  ablative  with  pro ;  as,  audacia 
pro  muro  est ;  and  sometimes  the  ablatives  Idco  or  in  numero  with  a  genitive ; 
as,  ille  est  mihi  parentis  loco;  in  hostium  numero  habetur. 

Rem.  5.  The  noun  dpus,  signifying  4  need,’  is  often  used  as  a  predicate  after 
sum.  It  is,  in  such  cases,  translated  by  the  adjectives  needful ,  necessary ,  etc.; 
as,  Dux  nobis  et  auctor  opus  est.  Cic.  Multi  opus  sunt  boves.  Varr.  {Dixit) 
aurum  et  ancillas  opus  esse.  Ter.  Usus  also  is  occasionally  so  construed. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  pronoun,  which  is  the  subject  of  an  infinitive,  is  omitted, 
the  case  of  the  predicate  is  sometimes,  in  the  poets,  attracted  into  that  of  the 
subject  of  the  verb  on  which  the  infinitive  depends;  as,  Uxor  invicti  Jovis  esse 
nescis,  i.  e.  te  esse  uxorem.  Hor.  Retulit  Ajax  esse  Jovis  pronepos.  Ovid. 

GENITIVE. 

GENITIVE  AFTER  NOUNS. 

§  an.  a  noun  which  limits  the  meaning  of  another  noun, 
denoting  a  different  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Amor  glorice,  Love  of  glory ;  Arma  Achillis ,  The  arms  of  Achilles ;  Pater  pa- 
trice,  The  father  of  the  country;  Vitium  irce,  The  vice  of  anger;  Nemorum  cus¬ 
tos ,  The  guardian  of  the  groves ;  Amor  habendi,  Love  of  possessing. 

Note  1.  In  the  first  example,  firaor  denotes  love  in  general;  gloria  limits  the  affection 
to  the  particular  object,  glory.  Such  universally  is  the  effect  of  the  genitive,  depending 
upon  a  noun.  Hence  the  limitation  of  a  noun  by  a  genitive  resembles  that  which  is 
effected  by  an  adjective.  In  each  the  noun  limited  constitutes  with  its  limitation  only 
a  single  idea. 

Remark  1.  The  genitive  denotes  various  relations,  the  most  common  of 
which  are  those  of  Source;  as,  Radii  solis,  The  rays  of  the  sun ; —  Ca  u  s  e ;  as, 
Dolor  pddagrce,  The  pain  of  the  gout; — Effect;  as,  Artifex  mundi ,  The  Cre¬ 
ator  of  the  world; — Connection:  as,  Pater  consulis,  The  father  of  the  con¬ 
sul; — Possession;  as ,  Ddmus  Ccesaris,  The  house  of  Cassar; — Object ;  as, 
Cogitatio  alicujus  rei,  A  thought  of  something; — Purpose;  as,  Apparatus 
triumphi ,  Preparation  for  a  triumph ; —  A  whole ;  as,  Pars  hdminum,  A  part 


§211. 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  NOUNS. 


207 


of  men;  this  is  called  the  partitive  genitive; — Character  or  Quality ;  as, 
Adolescens  summae  audaciae,  A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness; — Material  or 
Component  Parts ;  as,  Montes  auri,  Mountains  of  gold;  Acervus  scutorum, 
A  heap  of  shields ; —  Ti  m  e :  as,  Frumentum  dierum  decem ,  Corn  for  ten  days. 
Sail. 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive  is  called  subjective  or  active,  when  it  denotes 
either  that  to  which  a  thing  belongs,  or  the  subject  of  the  action,  feel¬ 
ing,  etc.,  implied  in  the  noun  which  it  limits.  It  is  called  objective  or 
passive,  when  it  denotes  the  object  affected  by  such  action,  or  towards 
which  such  feeling  is  directed ;  as, 

Subjective .  Objective. 

Facta  virorum ,  Deeds  of  men.  Odium  vitii ,  Hatred  of  vice. 

Ddlor  dnimi,  Grief  of  mind.  Amor  virtutis ,  Love  of  virtue. 

Junonis  ira ,  The  anger  of  Juno.  Desiderium  otii ,  Desire  of  leisure. 

(a.)  Whether  a  genitive  is  subjective  or  objective,  is  to  be  determined  by 
the  meaning  of  the  words,  and  by  their  connection.  Thus,  providentia  Dei 
signifies  God’s  providence,  or  that  exercised  by  him;  timor  Dei ,  the  fear  of 
God,  or  that  exercised  towards  him.  The  same  or  similar  words,  in  different 
connections,  may  express  both  significations.  Thus,  metus  hostium ,  fear  of  the 
enemy,  may  mean,  either  the  fear  felt  by  the  enemy,  or  that  felt  by  their  oppo¬ 
nents.  So  vulnus  Ulixis  (Virg.  JEn.  2,  486.)  denotes  the  wound  which  Ulysses 
had  given;  vulnus  FEnece,  (Id.  Am.  12,  323.)  that  which  Alneas  had  received. 

(b.)  The  relation  expressed  by  the  English  possessive  case  is  subjective,  while 
that  denoted  by  of  with  its  case  is  either  subjective  or  objective. 

(c.)  The  objective  genitive  is  of  very  extensive  use  in  Latin  in  the  limitation 
of  verbal  nouns  and  adjectives,  whatever  may  be  the  construction  of  the  verbs 
from  which  such  nouns  and  adjectives  are  derived,  whether  they  take  an  ac¬ 
cusative  or  some  other  case  or  even  a  preposition. 

( d .)  When  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  use  of  the  objective  genitive,  a 
preposition  with  an  accusative  or  ablative  is  commonly  used ;  as,  Amor  in 
rempublicam,  for  reijniblicce,  Love  to  the  state.  Cic.  Odium  erga  Romanos ,  for 
Romanorum.  Nep.  Cura  de  salute  patrice ,  for  salutis.  Cic.  Praedator  ex  sOciis , 
for  sOciorum.  Sail.  Sometimes  both  constructions  are  combined ;  as,  Reverentia 
adversus  homines  et  optimi  cujusque  et  reliquorum.  Cic.  Off.  1,  28. 

Note.  A  limiting  genitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  a  noun  in  apposition, 
especially  with  vox ,  nomen ,  verbum ,  etc.;  as,  vox  voluptatis,  the  word  pleasure; 
nomen  amicitiae,  the  word  amicitia ;  domini  appellatio.  This  is  usual  when  the 
genus  is  defined  by  the  species ;  as,  arbor  fid ,  a  fig-tree ;  flos  violce ,  a  violet ; 
virtus  continentiae,  the  virtue  of  abstinence :  and  in  geographical  names ;  as, 
oppidum  Antiochiae.  Cf.  §  204,  R.  6. — Cicero  frequently  uses  a  genitive  in  this 
manner  with  genus  and  causa ;  as,  Unum  genus  est  eorum,  qui ,  etc.  Duae  sunt 
causes ,  una  pudoris,  altera  sceleris. — So,  also,  the  genitive  of  gerunds;  as,  Triste 
est  nomen  ipsum  carendi,  The  very  word  to  ivant  is  sad.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  A  substantive  pronoun  in  the  genitive,  limiting  the 
meaning  of  a  noun,  is  commonly  objective  ;  as, 

Cura  mei ,  Care  for  me.  Ovid.  Pars  tui ,  Part  of  thee.  Id.  Vestri  curam  agite. 
Curt.  This  genitive  is  used  especially  with  verbal  substantives  in  or,  ix  and  io ; 
as,  Accusator  mei.  Cic.  Nimia  cesUmatio  sui.  Id.  Rationem  et  sui  et  aliorum 
habere.  Id. 

( b .)  Instead  of  the  subjective  or  possessive  genitive  of  a  substantive 
pronoun,  the  corresponding  adjective  pronoun  is  commonly  used ;  as, 

Liber  mens,  not  liber  mei ,  my  book.  Cura  mea ,  My  care,  i.  e.  the  care  exer¬ 
cised  by  me.  Cic.  Tuas  literas  exspecto.  Id.  Yet  the  subjective  genitive  of  a 
substantive  pronoun  sometimes  occurs ;  as,  Tui  unius  studio ,  By  the  zeal  of 
yourself  alone.  Cic. 


208 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  NOUNS. 


§211. 


(c.)  And  not  unfrequently,  also,  an  adjective  pronoun  occurs  instead  of  the 
objective  genitive;  as,  Mea  injuria,  Injury  to  me.  Sail.  So,  Invidia  tua,  Envy 
or  thee.  Fiducia  tua,  Confidence  in  thee.  Plaut.  Spes  mea ,  The  hope  placed 
in  me.  With  causa  the  adjective  pronoun,  and  never  the  genitive,  is  used; 
as,  Med  causa ,  For  my  sake.  Plaut. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  Instead,  also,  of  the  subjective  genitive  of  a  noun,  a  possessive 
adjective  is  often  used;  as,  Causa  regia,  for  causa  regis.  Cic.  Herilis  filius,  for 
heri  filius .  Id.  Evandrius  ensis,  for  Evandri.  Virg.  Herculeus  labor,  for  Her¬ 
culis.  Hor.  Civilis  furor,  for  civium.  Hor.  So,  also,  for  the  objective  genitive, 
Metus  hostilis.,  Fear  of  the  enemy.  Sail. 

(b.)  The  genitive  of  the  person  implied  in  the  adjective  pronoun  or  possessive 
adjective,  or  an  adjective  agreeing  with  such  genitive,  is  sometimes  added  as 
an  apposition;  as,  Vestra  ipsorum  causa  hoc  feci.  In  the  poets  and  later  prose 
writers  a  participle  also  is  found  agreeing  with  such  implied  genitive;  as,  Mea 
scripta  vulgo  recitare  timentis.  Hor.  Cf.  $  204,  R.  4,  and  §  205,  R.  13. 

Rem.  5.  In  the  predicate  after  sum ,  and  sometimes  after  other 
verbs,  the  dative  is  used  like  the  objective  genitive ;  as, 

Idem  amor  exitium  pecori  (est),  pecbrisque  magistro.  Virg.  Vitis  ut  arboribus 
decdri  est,  ut  vitibus  uvae — Tu  decus  omne  tuis.  Virg.  In  this  passage  the  dative 
decori  and  the  nominative  decus  are  used  with  no  difference  of  meaning. 
Cf.  §  227,  R.  4.  Auctor  fui  senatui.  Cic.  Murcena  legatus  Lucullo  fuit.  Id. 
Erit  ille  mihi  semper  deus.  Virg.  Huic  causae  patronus  exstiti.  Cic.  Huic  ego 
me  bello  ducem  profiteor.  Id.  Se  tertium  (esse)  cui  fatum  foret  ui'bis  potiri. 
Id. —  Cum  P.  Africano  senatus  egit,  ut  legatus  fratri  proficisceretur.  Id.  Caesar 
tegimenta  galeis  milites  ex  viminibus  facere  jubet.  Caes.  Trinobantibus  Caesar 
imperat —frumentum  exercitui.  Id.  Quod  neque  insidiae  consuli  prdcedebant. 
Sali.  Quem  exitum  tantis  malis  sperarent?  Id.  Sanctus  vir  et  ex  sententia 
ambobus ,  scii,  qui  fuit.  Id.  See  §  227,  R.  4. 

Note.  The  dative  in  the  preceding  examples  has  been  thought  by  some  grammarians 
to  depend  on  the  nouns  connected  with  it ;  as,  exitium,  decus ,  auctor ,  legatus,  deus, 
patronus,  etc. ;  by  others  it  has  been  held  to  depend  on  these  nouns  in  connection  with 
the  verbs,  and  not  upon  either  separately ;  but  the  better  opinion  seems  to  be  that,  which 
makes  such  datives  grammatically  dependent  upon  the  verbs  only,  though  logically  con¬ 
nected  also  with  the  nouns. 

(1.)  Instead,  also,  of  the  possessive  genitive,  a  dative  of  the  person 
may  follow  a  verb,  when  its  act  has  relation  to  the  body  or  possessions 
of  such  person ;  as, 

Sese  omnes  flentes  Caesari  ad  pedes  projecerunt,  They  all,  weeping,  cast 
themselves  at  the  feet  of  Caesar.  Caes.  Cui  corpus  pcn'rigitur,  For  whom  the 
body,  i.  e.  whose  body,  is  extended.  Virg.  Tumvero  exarsit  juveni  dolor  ossibus 
ingens.  Id.  Transfigitur  scutum  Pulfioni.  Caes. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  limiting  noun  denotes  a  property ,  charac¬ 
ter ,  or  quality ,  it  has  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  and  is  put 
either  in  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  ;  as, 

Vir  exempli  recti,  A  man  of  correct  example.  Liv.  Addlescens  summae  audaciae , 
A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness.  Sail.  Fossa  pedum  vlginti,  A  ditch  of  twenty 
feet,  (i.  e.  in  width).  Caes.  Hamilcar  secum  duxit  f  Ilium  Hannibalem  annorum 
novem.  Nep.  Athenienses  deligunt  Periclem,  spectatae  virtutis  virum.  Just. 
Quinquaginta  annorum  imperium.  Id.  Iter  unius  diei.  Cic.  Pulchritudine  ex¬ 
imia  femina,  A  woman  of  exquisite  beauty.  Cic.  Maximo  natu  filius,  The 
eldest  son.  Nep.  L.  Catilina  fuit  magna  vi  et  animi  et  corp&ns,  sed  ingenio 
malo  pravoque.  Sail.  Spelunca  infinita  altitudine.  Cic. — Sometimes  both  con¬ 
structions  occur  in  the  same  proposition;  as,  Lentulum  nostrum,  eximia  spe, 
summae  virtutis  dddlescentern.  Cic. 


§211. 


SYNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  NOUNS. 


209 


(1.)  A  genitive  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  adjective;  and  the  noun 
denoting  the  property,  etc.,  is  then  always  put  in  the  ablative;  as,  Est  bos 
cervi  figura, ...of  the  form  of  a  stag.  Caes.  TJri  specie  et  colore  tauri.  Id. 
Frutex  palmi  altitudine.  Plin.  Clavi  digiti  pollicis  crassitudine.  Caes. 

(2.)  All  the  qualities  and  attributes  of  persons  and  things,  whether  inherent 
or  accidental,  may  be  thus  expressed  by  the  genitive  and  ablative^  of  quality, 
provided  the  substantives  are  immediately  connected ;  as,  fossa  quindecim  pedum; 
hdmo  antiqua  virtute.  It  hence  follows  that  such  genitives  and  ablatives,  when 
used  to  express  duration  of  time  or  extent  of  space,  are  distinguished  from  the 
cases  in  which  the  accusative  is  required,  since  the  latter  case  always  follows 
adjectives  or  verbs;  as,  fossa  quindecim  pedes  lata:  puer  decem  annos  natus. 
Cl  §  236. 

(3.)  Whether  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  of  quality  is  preferable  in  particu¬ 
lar  cases,  can  frequently  be  determined  only  by  reference  to  classical  authority ; 
but,  in  general,  the  genitive  is  used  more  frequently  to  express  inherent  quali¬ 
ties  than  such  as  are  merely  accidental,  while  the  ablative  is  used  indifferently 
for  either  purpose.  In  speaking  of  transitory  qualities  or  conditions  the  abla¬ 
tive  is  always  used ;  as,  Magno  timore  sum ,  I  am  in  great  fear.  Cic.  B6no  animo 
sum.  Id.  Cluanto  fuerim  dolore  meministi.  Id.  Maximo  honore  Servius  Tullius 
erat.  Liv.  With  plural  substantives  the  genitive  is  rare;  while  in  expressions 
of  measure  it  is  used  rather  than  the  ablative. 

(4.)  An  accusative  instead  of  a  genitive  of  quality  is  used  with  secus  (sex), 
genus  and  pondo;  as,  Liberorum  capitum  virile  secus  ad  decem  millia  capta ,  i.  e. 
of  the  male  sex,  instead  of  sexus  virilis.  Liv.  So  genus ,  when  joined  with  a 
pronoun,  as  hoc ,  id,  illud ,  quod,  or  with  omne,  is  used  for  hujus ,  ejus ,  omnis,  etc., 
generis ;  as,  Orationes  aut  aliquid  id  genus  scribere, — of  that  kind.  Cic.  Concre¬ 
dere  nugas  hoc  genus.  Hor.  So  pondo  is  joined  as  an  indeclinable  word  to  the 
accusatives  libram  and  libras ;  as,  Dictator  cdronam  auream  libram  pondo  in 
Capitolio  Jdvi  donum  pdsuit,... a  pound  in  weight.  Liv.  Cf.  §  236,  R.  7. 

(5.)  The  genitive  modi  with  an  adjective  pronoun  supplies  the  place  of  a 
pronoun  of  quality;  as,  cujusmddi  libn,  the  same  as  quales  libri,  what  kind  of 
books;  hujusmddi  libri,  i.  e.  tales  libri,  such  books.  So,  also,  generis  is  used, 
but  less  frequently. 

(6.)  With  the  genitive  of  measure  are  often  connected  such  ablatives  as 
longitudine ,  latitudine,  etc.,  or  in  longitudinem,  etc. ;  as,  fossa  decem  pedum  lati¬ 
tudine  ;  but  the  genitive  does  not  depend  on  these  words. 

(7.)  Sum  may  be  followed  by  either  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  of  quality 
with  an  ellipsis  of  the  word  limited,  which,  with  the  genitive,  is  homo,  res,  nego¬ 
tium,  prdprium  or  proprius,  etc.,  and  with  the  ablative,  praeditus,  instructus , 
ornatus,  etc.  Cf.  Rem.  8,  and  §§  244,  and  249,  L. 

Rem.  7.  (1.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  0  miserae  sortis! 
scil .homines;  0  (men)  of  wretched  fortune!  Lucan.  Ad  Dianae,  scii,  aedem. 
Ter.  Hectoris  Andromache,  scii.  uxor.  Yirg.  Suspicionis  vitandae,  scii,  causa.  Tac. 
So  filius  or  filia ;  as,  Hannibal  Gisgonis. 

(2.)  The  omitted  noun  may  sometimes  be  supplied  from  the  preceding  words ; 
as,  Cujum  pecus  ?  an  Meliboei  ?  Non  ;  verum  EEgonis ,  scii,  pecus.  Virg.  An 
adjective  is  often  expressed  referring  to  the  noun  omitted;  as,  Nullam  virtus 
aliam  mercedem  desiderat,  praeter  hanc  (scii,  mercedem)  laudis.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  The  limited  noun  is  often  wanting  in  the  predicate  of  a 
sentence  after  sum.  This  usually  happens, 

(1.)  When  it  has  been  previously  expressed  ;  as, 

Haec  ddmus  est  Caesaris ,  This  house  is  Caesar’s.  Nomen  aurae  tam  scope  vdca- 
tum  esse  putans  Nymphae.  Ovid.  Naves  dner arias,  quorum  minor  nulla  erat  duum 
millium  amphdrum ,  i.  e.  quarum  minor  nulla  erat  quam  navis  duum ,  etc.  Cic. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  a  person,  an  animal, 
etc. :  as, 


18* 


210 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  NOUNS. 


§211. 


Thucydides ,  qui  ejusdem  cetdtis  fuit ,  scil.  homo,  Thucydides,  who  was  of  the 
same  age.  Nep.  Multum  ei  detraxit ,  quod  alienee  erat  civitatis ,  scil.  homo  or  civis. 
Id.  Primum  stipendium  meruit  annorum  decem  septemque ,  scil.  adolescens.  Id. 
Summi  ut  sint  laboris  efficiunt ,  scil.  animalia.  Caes.  (  Claudius )  somni  brevissimi 
erat.  Suet.  Mira  sum  alacritate.  Cic.  Vulgus  ingenio  mobili  erat.  Sali.  Non 
est  juris  sui ,  He  is  not  his  own  master.  Lucan.  Pdtestatis  suce  esse.  Liv. 
Suarumque  rerum  erant.  Id.  Cf.  Rem.  6,  (7.) 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  thing,  for  which,  in  Eng¬ 
lish,  the  words  part ,  property ,  duty ,  office ,  business ,  characteristic ,  etc., 
are  commonly  supplied ;  as, 

Temeritas  est  florentis  cetdtis ,  prudentia  senectutis ,  Rashness  is  (the  character¬ 
istic)  of  youth,  prudence  of  old  age.  Cic.  Pst  hoc  Gallicce  consuetudinis.  Caes. 
So,  stultitiae  est ;  est  levitatis ,  etc.,  which  are  equivalent  to  stultitia  est ,  levitas  est. 
Omnia  hostium  erant.  A  paucis  emi ,  quod  multorum  esset.  Sali. 

(a.)  This  happens  especially  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive,  or 
an  entire  clause,  in  which  case,  instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pronouns, 
mei ,  tui,  etc.,  the  neuters  of  the  possessives,  meum,  tuum ,  etc.,  are  used;  as, 
Adolescentis  est  majores  natu  revereri ,  It  is  (the  duty)  of  a  youth  to  reverence 
the  aged.  Ovid.  Cujusvis  hdminis  est  errare,  nullius  nisi  insipientis  in  emvre 
per  sexier  are.  Cic.  Pauperis  est  numerare  pecus.  Ovid.  So  especially  moms  est ; 
as,  Negavit  moris  esse  Graecorum,  ut  in  convivio  virorum  accumberent  mulieres,  the 
same  as  morem  esse  Graecorum.  Cic.  Nihil  tam  aequandae  libertatis  esse.  Liv. 
So  when  the  verb  is  omitted;  T amen  officii  duxit ,  exorare  patrem,  scil,  esse. 
Suet.  Non  est  mentiri  meum.  Ter.  Tuum  est,  M.  Cato,  videre  quid  agatur. 

( b .)  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  substantive,  also,  the  neuter  of  a  possessive 
adjective  derived  from  it  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Humanum  est  err  are,  To  err 
is  human.  Ter.  Et  facer  e  et  pati  fortia  Romanum  est.  Liv. 

(4.)  The  same  construction  sometimes  occurs  after  fdcio,  and  some  other 
verbs  mentioned  in  §  230,  esse  being  understood ;  as,  Asia  Romanorum  facta  est, 
Asia  became  (a  possession)  of  the  Romans.  Just.  Agrum  suae  ditionis  fecisse. 
Liv. 

(5.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  wanting,  when  it  is  a  general  word, 
though  not  in  the  predicate  after  sum ;  as,  Magni  formica  laboris,  scil.  animal , 
The  ant  (an  animal)  of  great  labor.  Hor.  So  Pi  venit  in  mentem  potestatis  tuae, 
scil.  memoria,  or  the  like.  Cic. 

Note.  When  the  noun  which  is  wanting  denotes  a  thing ,  grammarians  sometimes  sup¬ 
ply  nZgotium ,  officium,  mimus,  opus ,  res,  causa,  etc.  It  is  an  instance  of  a  construc¬ 
tion  common  in  Latin,  to  omit  a  noun  when  a  general  idea  is  intended.  See  §  205, 
Rem.  7,  (2.) 

Rem.  9.  The  limiting  noun  also  is  sometimes  omitted;  as, 

Tria  millia,  scil.  passuum.  In  most  cases  of  this  kind,  an  adjective,  adjec¬ 
tive  pronoun,  or  participle,  is  expressed  in  the  genitive. 

Rem.  10.  Two  genitives  sometimes  limit  the  same  noun,  one  of 
which  is  commonly  subjective,  and  the  other  objective ;  as, 

Agamemnonis  belli  gloria,  Agamemnon’s  glory  in  war.  Nep.  Illius  adminis¬ 
tratio  provincias.  Cic.  Eoi'um  dierum  consuetudine  itineris  nostri  exercitus  per¬ 
specta.  Caes.  Orbitas  reipublicae  talium  virorum.  Cic.  Pro  veteribus  Helvetio¬ 
rum  injuriis  populi  Romani.  Caes. 

Rem.  11.  Opus  and  usus  are  rarely  limited  by  a  genitive  or  accusa¬ 
tive,  but  generally  by  an  ablative,  of  the  thing  needed ;  as, 

Argenti  dpus  fuit,  There  was  need  of  money.  Liv.  Ad  consilium  pensandum 
temporis  6 pus  esse.  Id.  Prooemii  non  semper  usus  est.  Quint.  Si  quo  operae 
eorum  usus  est.  Liv.  Puero  dpus  est  cibum.  Plaut.  Usus  est  hominem  astutum . 
Id.  See  $  243. 


§212. 


SYNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  PARTITIVES. 


211 


Rem.  12.  The  relation  denoted  by  the  genitive  in  Latin,  is  gener¬ 
ally  expressed,  in  English,  by  of,  or  by  the  possessive  case.  Cf.  R.  2,  (6.) 
The  objective  genitive  may  often  be  rendered  by  some  other  prepo¬ 
sition  ;  as, 

Remedium  ddloris ,  A  remedy  for  pain.  Injuria  patris ,  Injury  to  a  father. 
Descensus  Averni ,  The  descent  to  Avernus.  Ira  belli ,  Anger  on  account  of  the 
war.  Pdtestas  rei,  Power  in  or  over  a  thing. 

Note.  Certain  limitations  of  nouns  are  made  by  the  accusative  with  a  preposition, 
and  by  the  ablative,  either  with  or  without  a  preposition.  Cf.  §  202,  6,  I.  and  II. 

GENITIVE  AFTER  PARTITIVES. 

§  SIS.  Nouns,  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  adverbs, 
denoting  a  part,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  the  whole ; 
as, 

Pars  civitatis ,  A  part  of  the  state.  Nulla  sororum ,  No  one  of  the  sisters. 
Aliquis  philOsOphorum ,  Some  one  of  the  philosophers.  Quis  mortalium  ?  Who  of 
mortals  V  Major  juvenum ,  The  elder  of  the  youths.  Doctissimus  Romanorum , 
The  most  learned  of  the  Romans.  Multum  pecuniae,  Much  (of)  money.  Satis 
eloquentiae ,  Enough  of  eloquence.  JJbinam  gentium  sumus  ?  Where  on  earth 
are  we  ? 

Note.  The  genitive  thus  governed  denotes  either  a  number,  of  which  the  partitive  de¬ 
signates  one  or  more  individuals ;  or  a  whole,  of  which  the  partitive  designates  a  portion. 
In  the  latter  sense,  the  genitive  of  common  and  abstract  nouns  commonly  follows  either 
the  neuter  of  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  or  adverbs ;  and  that  of  material  nouns 
depends  on  substantives  signifying  quantity,  weight  or  measure ;  as,  mZdimnum  tritici , 
a  bushel  of  wheat ;  libra  f arris  ;  jugZrum  agri ;  magna  vis  auri . 

Remark  1.  Nouns  denoting  a  part  are  pars ,  nemo ,  nihil,  etc.,  and 
also  nouns  denoting  measure,  weight,  etc. ;  as,  modius ,  medimnum , 
and  libra ;  as, 

Nemo  nostrum,  No  one  of  us.  Maxima  pars  hominum.  Nihil  humanarun 
rerum.  Cic.  Dimidium  militum.  Liv.  Medimnum  tritici.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  denoting  a  part  of  a 
number,  including  partitives  and  words  used  partitively,  compara¬ 
tives,  superlatives,  and  numerals,  are  followed  by  the  genitive  plural, 
or  by  the  genitive  singular  of  a  collective  noun. 

(1.)  Partitives  (§104,  9,);  as,  ullus,  nullus ,  solus,  alius ,  uter,  Uterpie,  utercum - 
que,  utervis,  uterlibet ,  neuter ,  alter ,  alteruter,  aliquis ,  quidam,  quispiam,  quisquis , 
quisque,  quisquam,  quicumque,  unusquisque,  quis  f  qui  ?  quot  ?  quotus  ?  quotusquis - 
que  i  tot,  aliquot,  nonnulli,  plerique,  mutti,  pauci,  medius.  Thus,  Quisqiiis  dearum, 
Whoever  of  the  gods.  Ovid.  Consulum  alter,  One  of  the  consuls.  Liv.  Multi 
hominum ,  Many  men.  Plin.  Et  medius  juvenum  ibat ;  i.  e.  between.  Ovid.  For 
the  gender  of  adjectives  used  partitively,  see  §  205,  R.  12. 

(2.)  Words  used  partitively;  as,  Expediti  militum,  The  light-armed  (of  the) 
soldiers.  Liv.  Delecti  equitum  .  Id.  Veteres  Romanorum  ducum.  Yell.  Superi 
deorum,  The  gods  above.  Hor.  Sancte  deorum .  Virg.  Degeneres  canum .  Plin. 
Piscium  feminee.  Id. 

(3.)  Comparatives  and  superlatives;  as,  Doctior  juvenum.  Oratorum  prees- 
tantissimus.  E  Idquentissimus  Romanorum.  Optimus  omnium. 

(4.)  Numerals,  both  cardinal  and  ordinal;  also  the  distributive  singuli;  as, 
Equitum  centum  quinquaginta  interfecti ,  A  hundred  and  fifty  of  the  horsemen 
were  killed.  Curt.  Sapientum  octavus .  Hor.  Singulos  vestrum .  Curt. 


212 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  PARTITIVES. 


§212. 


(5.)  The  meaning  is  often  nearly  the  same,  whether  the  partitive  adjective  agrees  in 
case  and  number  with  a  noun,  or  takes  such  noun  after  it  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Doctissi¬ 
mus  RDmanOrum ,  or,  doctissimus  Romanus :  Alter  consulum ,  or  alter  consul.  But  the 
genitive  cannot  be  used,  when  the  adjective  includes  the  same  number  of  things  as  that 
of  which  the  whole  consists;  as,  VZniamus  ad  vivos ,  qui  duo  supersunt;  not  quorum 
duo ,  since  these  are  all,  though  we  say  in  English,  ‘  of  whom  two  survive.’ 

Note  1.  (a.)  The  comparative  with  the  genitive  denotes  one  of  two  individ¬ 
uals  or  classes;  the  superlative  denotes  a  part  of  a  number  greater  than  two; 
as,  Major  fratrum ,  The  elder  of  two  brothers.  Maximus  fratrum,  The  eldest 
of  three  or  more. 

( b .)  In  like  manner,  uier,  alter ,  and  neuter,  generally  refer  to  two;  quiz,  alius , 
and  nullus,  to  a  whole  consisting  of  more  than  two;  as,  Uter  nostrum  ?  Which 
of  us  (two  ?)  Quis  vestrum  ?  Which  of  you  (three  or  more  ?) 

Note  2.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  as  partitive  genitives,  in  preference 
to  nostri  and  vestri ,  and  are  always  joined  with  omnium  even  when  the  genitive 
is  a  subjective  one;  as,  Patria,  quce  communis  est  omnium  nostrum  parens.  Cic. 
But  vestrum  sometimes  occurs  in  other  connections  also  without  a  partitive 
meaning;  as,  Quis  erit  tam  cupidus  vestrum.  Cic. 

Note  3.  The  partitive  word  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Fies  nobilium  in  qud- 
que  fontium,  scii.  unus.  Hor.  Centies  sestertium ,  scii,  centena  millia. 

Note  4.  The  noun  denoting  the  whole,  after  a  partitive  word,  is  often  put 
in  the  ablative,  with  the  prepositions  de,  e,  ex,  or  in,  or  in  the  accusative,  with 
apud  or  inter ;  as,  Nemo  de  iis.  Alter  ex  censoribus.  Liv.  Unus  ex  multis.  Cic. 
Acerrimus  ex  sensibus.  Id.  Thales,  qui  sapientissimus  in  septem  fuit.  Id. 
Primus  inter  omnes.  Yirg.  Croesus  inter  reges  Opulentissimus.  Sen.  Apud  Hel¬ 
vetios  nobilissimus. 

Note  5.  The  whole  and  its  parts  are  frequently  placed  in  apposition,  dis- 
tributively;  as,  Interfectores,  pars  in  forum,  pars  Syracusas  pergunt.  Liv. 
See  §  204,  R.  10. 

Note  6.  Cuncti  and  omnes,  like  partitives,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  gen¬ 
itive  plural;  as,  Attalus  Macedonum  f  ere  omnibus  persuasit,  Attalus  persuaded 
almost  all  the  Macedonians.  Liv.  Cunctos  hominum.  Ovid.  Cunctas  provinci¬ 
arum.  Plin. 

Note  7.  In  the  following  passage,  the  genitive  singular  seems  to  be  used  like 
that  of  a  collective  noun:  Totius  autem  injustitise  nulla  cdjntalior  est,  etc.  Cic. 
Off.  1,  13.  The  phrase  Rem  nullo  mddo  probabilem  omnium  (Cic.  Nat.  Deor.  1, 
27,)  seems  to  be  used  for  Rem  nullo  omnium  modorum  probabilem. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitive  denoting  a  whole,  may  depend  on  a  neuter 
adjective  or  adjective  pronoun.  With  these  the  genitive  singular  is 
commonly  used ;  as, 

Plus  eldquentice.  More  (of)  eloquence.  Tantum  fidei,  So  much  fidelity.  Id 
tempdris,  That  time.  Ad  hoc  aitatis.  Sometimes  the  genitive  plural ;  as,  Id 
miseriarum.  Ter.  Armorum  quantum.  Caes. 

Note  1.  (a.)  Most  neuter  adjectives  used  partitively  denote  quantity;  as, 
tantum,  quantum,  aliquantum,  plus,  minus,  minimum ,  dimidium,  multum ,  nimium, 
paulum,  plurimum,  reliquum ;  with  the  compounds  and  diminutives,  tantulum , 
tantundem ,  quantulum,  quantulumcumque ,  etc. ;  to  which  add  medium ,  summum, 
ultimum ,  aliud,  etc.  The  pronouns  thus  used  are  hoc,  id,  illud,  istud,  idem,  quod, 
and  quid,  with  their  compounds,  aliquid,  quidquid,  quippiam,  quidquam,  quod - 
cumque. 

( b .)  Most  of  these  adjectives  and  pronouns  may  either  agree  with  their 
nouns,  or  take  a  genitive ;  but  the  latter  is  more  common.  Tantum,  quantum , 
dliquantum ,  and  plus,  when  they  denote  quantity,  are  used  with  a  genitive  only, 
as  are  also  quid  and  its  compounds,  when  they  denote  a  part,  sort,  etc.,  and 
qudd  in  the  sense  of  quantum.  Thus,  Quantum  crevit  Nilus,  tantum  spei  in 
annum  est.  Sen.  Quid  mulieris  uxorem  habes  ?  What  kind  of  a  woman...  Ter. 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  PARTITIVES. 


§212. 


213 


Aliquid  formae.  Cic.  Quid  hoc  rei  est  ?  What  does  this  mean?  Ter.  Quod  auri, 
quod  argenti,  quod  ornamentorum  fuit ,  id  Verres  abstulit. 

Note  2.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns,  when  followed  by  a  genitive,  are 
to  be  accounted  substantives,  and  in  this  construction  are  found  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative. 

Note  3.  Sometimes  the  genitive  after  these  adjectives  and  pronouns  is  a 
neuter  adjective,  of  the  second  declension,  without  a  noun;  as,  Tantum  bdni , 
So  much  good.  Si  quid  habes  novi,  If  you  have  any  thing  new.  Cic._  Quid 
reliqui  est?  Ter.  Nihil  is  also  used  with  such  a  genitive;  as,  Nihil  sinceri ,  No 
sincerity.  Cic.  This  construction  occurs  very  rarely  with  neuter  adjectives  in 
e  of  the  third  declension,  and  only  in  connection  with  neuters  of  the  second 
declension;  as,  Si  quidquam  non  dico  civilis  sed  humani  esset.  Liv. 

Note  4.  In  the  poets  and  in  the  prose  writers  later  than  Cicero,  neuter  ad¬ 
jectives  in  the  plural  number  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive,  either  sin¬ 
gular  or  plural,  with  a  partitive  signification ;  as,  Extrema  imperii ,  The  fron¬ 
tiers  of  the  empire.  Tac.  Pontes  et  viarum  angusta,  The  bridges  and  the  nar¬ 
row  parts  of  the  roads.  Id.  Opdca  Idcorum.  Virg.  Antiqua  foederum.  Liv. 
Cuncta  camporum.  Tac.  Exercent  colles ,  atque  hdrum  asperrima  pascunt.  Virg. 
Cf.  §  205,  R.  9. 

Rem.  4.  The  adverbs  sat ,  satis,  parum,  nimis ,  abunde,  largiter , 
affatim,  and  partim ,  used  partitively,  are  often  followed  by  a  geni¬ 
tive;  as, 

Sat  rationis ,  Enough  of  reason.  Virg.  Satis  eldquentice ,  parum  sapientiae, 
Enough  of  eloquence,  (yet)  but  little  wisdom.  Sali.  Nimis  insidiarum ..  Cic. 
Terroris  et  f  raudis  abunde  est.  Virg.  Auri  et  argenti  largiter.  Plaut.  Copiarum 
affatim.  Liv.  Quum  partim  illorum  mihi  f  amiliarissimi  essent.  Cic. 

Note  1.  The  above  words,  though  generally  adverbs,  seem,  in  this  use,  rather 
to  be  nouns  or  adjectives. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  genitives  gentium ,  terrarum ,  I6ci,  and  Idcorum ,  with  certain 
adverbs  of  place,  strengthen  their  meaning ;  as,  Usquam  terrarum.  Just.  Usquam 
gentium ,  Any  where  whatever.  Plaut.  Ubi  terrarum  sumus  ?  Where  in  the 
world  are  we  ?  Cic.  Abire  quo  terrarum  possent.  Liv.  Ubi  sit  Idci.  Plin.  Eo 
loci ,  equivalent  to  eo  Idco ,  In  that  place.  Tac.  Eodem  Idci  res  est.  Cic.  Nescire 
quo  loci  esset.  Id.  But  the  last  three  examples  might  perhaps  more  properly 
be  referred  to  Rem.  3. 

(5.)  The  adverbs  of  place  thus  used  are  ubi,  ubinam ,  ubicumque ,  ubiubi ,  ubivis , 
ubique ,  unde ,  usquam ,  nusquam ,  quo ,  quocumque ,  quovis ,  quoquo ,  aliquo ,  hic,  huc, 
eo,  eodem.  Loci  also  occurs  after  ibi  and  ibidem;  gentium  after  longe;  as,  Ibi 
Idci,  In  that  place.  Plin.  Abes  longe  gentium.  Cic.  So,  minime  gentium,  By  no 
means.  Ter.  Vicinice  in  the  genitive  is  used  by  the  comic  writers  after  hie  and 
hue;  as,  Hie  proximee  vicinice.  Plant.  Hue  vicinice.  Ter.  Cf.  §  221,  R.  3,  (4.) 

Note  3.  Hue,  eo,  quo,  when  used  figuratively  to  express  a  degree,  are  joined 
also  with  other  genitives ;  as,  Ah  insolentiae  f  urorisy ue  processit,  He  advanced 
to  such  a  degree  of  insolence  and  madness.  Plin.  Huc  enim  malorum  ventum 
est.  Curt.  Huccine  rerum  venimus?  Have  we  come  to  this?  Pers.  Eo  miseria¬ 
rum  venire,  To  such  a  pitch  of  misery.  Sail.  Quo  amentiae  progressi  sitis.  Liv. 

Note  4.  The  genitives  Idci,  Idcorum ,  and  tempdris ,  appear  to  be  redundant 
after  the  adverbs  adhuc,  inde,  interea,  postea ,  tum ,  and  tunc,  in  expressions  de^ 
noting  time;  as,  Adhuc  Idcorum,  Till  now.  Plaut.  Inde  Idci,  After  that.  Lucr. 
Interea  Idci,  In  the  mean  time.  Ter.  Postea  Idci,  Afterwards.  Sali.  Tum  tem¬ 
pdris,  and  tunc  tempdris,  At  that  time.  Just.  Locorum  also  occurs  after  id, 
denoting  time;  as,  Ad  id  locorum,  Up  to  that  time.  Sail.  Cf.  R.  3. 

Note  5.  When  the  genitive  ejus  occurs  after  quoad,  in  such  connections  as 
the  following:  Quoad  ejus  facere  pdteris.  Cic.;  or  passively,  Quoad  ejus  feri 
possit,  As  far  as  may  be.  Cic.;  the  .je ‘jus  refers  to  the  preceding  clause;  literally, 
as  much  of  it  as  possible. 


214 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES. 


§  213. 


Note  6.  Prldie  and  postridie ,  though  reckoned  adverbs,  are  followed  by  a 
genitive,  depending  on  ihe  noun  dies  contained  in  them ;  as,  Prldie  ejus  diei , 
jit.  On  the  day  before  that  day,  i.  e.  The  day  before.  Cic.  Prldie  insidiarum , 
The  day  before  the  ambush.  Tac.  Postridie  ejus  diei ,  The  next  day.  Caes. 
When  they  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  ante  or  post  is  understood.  Cf. 
h  238,  1,  (6.) 

Note  7.  Adverbs  in  the  superlative  degree,  like  their  adjectives,  are  follow¬ 
ed  by  a  genitive ;  as,  Optime  omnium ,  Best  of  all.  Cic. 

GENITIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES. 

§213.  A  noun,  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective,  is  put 
in  the  objective  genitive,  to  denote  the  relation  expressed  in 
English  by  of  in,  or  in  respect  to  ;  as, 

Avidus  laudis,  Desirous  of  praise.  '  Plena  timoris,  Full  of  fear. 

Appetens  gloriae,  Eager  for  glory.  Egenus  aquae,  Destitute  of  water. 

Memor  virtutis,  Mindful  of  virtue.  Doctus  fandi,  Skilful  in  speaking. 

So,  Nescia  mens  fati,  The  mind  ignorant  in  regard  to  fate.  Virg.  Impdtens 
Irae,  lit.  Powerless  in  respect  to  anger ,  i.  e.  unable  to  control  it.  Liv.  Homines 
expertes  veritatis,  Men  destitute  of  truth.  Cic.  Lactis  abundans,  Abounding 
in  milk.  Virg.  Terra  ferax  arborum,  Land  productive  of  trees.  Plin.  Tenax 
propositi  vir,  A  man  tenacious  of  his  purpose.  Hor.  AEger  animi,  Sick  in  mind. 
Liv.  Ldcus  medius  juguli  summique  lacerti,  i.  e.  between.  Ovid.  Morum  di¬ 
versus.  Tac.  Operum  solutus.  Hor.  Liber  laborum.  Id.  Integer  vitae  sceleris^we 
purus ,  Upright  in  life ,  and  free  from  wickedness.  Hor.  Vini  pollens  Liber.  Plaut. 

From  the  above  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  genitive  after  an  adjective  is  some¬ 
times  translated  by  other  words  besides  of,  in ,  or  in  respect  to,  though  the  relation  which 
it  denotes  remains  the  same.  Cf.  211,  R.  12. 

Remark  1.  The  following  classes  of  adjectives,  which,  as  denoting  a  relation 
to  a  thing,  are  called  relative  adjectives  (§  104,  13),  are  frequently  limited  by  a 
genitive;  viz.  (1.)  Verbals  in  ax;  as,  capax,  edax,  ferax,  fugax,  pervicax, 
tinax,  etc. — (2.)  P  arti  dpi  ais  in  ns,  and  a  few  in  tus,  with  their  com¬ 
pounds;  as,  amans,  appetens,  cupiens,  efficiens ,  patiens ,  impatiens ,  sitiens; — con¬ 
sultus,  doctus,  sdlutus. — (3.)  Adjectives  denoting  desire  or  aversion ;  as, 
avarus,  avidus ,  cupidus ,  studiosus ;  fastidiosus : — p articipation ;  as,  particeps, 
affinis,  consors,  exsors ,  expers,  inops : — k  nowledg  e ,  experience ,  capac¬ 
ity ,  and  their  contraries ;  as,  callidus,  compos,  conscius ,  gnarus,  ignarus,  peri¬ 
tus,  imperitus,  impos,  potens,  impdtens,  prudens,  imprudens,  expertus,  inexpertus , 
conscius,  inscius,  nescius,  insblens ,  insdlitus,  insuetus ,  rudis,  sollers : — m e  mory 
and  forgetfulness ;  as,  memor,  immemor,  etc. : — c ertainty  and  doubt; 
as,  certus,  incertus,  ambiguus ,  dubius,  suspensus : — c  are  and  negligence;  as, 
anxius,  sollicitus,  providus ,  improvidus,  securus  :—f  e  a  r  and  confidence; 
as,  pavidus,  timidus ,  trepidus,  impavidus,  fidens,  interlitus: — guilt  and  inno¬ 
cence;  as,  noxius ,  reus ,  suspectus,  compertus,  manifestus,  innoxius,  innocens, 
insons: — plenty  and  want;  as,  abundans,  plenus,  dives,  satus,  largus ,  inops , 
egenus,  incinis,  pauper,  parcus,  solutus ,  vacuus. 

(a.)  In  the  poets  and  later  prose  writers,  many  other  adjectives,  particularly 
those  which  express  mental  emotions,  are  in  like  manner  liijciited  by  a  genitive, 
especially  by  dnimi,  ingdnii ,  mentis,  irce,  militiae,  belli,  laboris,  rerum,  cevi ,  f  utun, 
%  '\rurn,  and  fidei. 

Rem.  2.  The  limiting  genitive,  by  a  Greek  construction,  sometimes  denotes 
a  cause  or  source,  especially  in  the  poets;  as,  Lassus  maris,  et  viarum,  mllltias- 
que.  Hor.  Fessus  vice.  Stat.  Fessus  mans.  Hor.  Attdnitus  serpentis.  Sil.  Mens 
interrita  leti.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  Participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  such,  take  after  them  the  same  case 
as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived ;  as,  Se  dmans,  Loving  himself.  Cic. 
Mare  terram  appUens.  Id. 


§213. 


SYNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES. 


215 


Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  denoting  of \  in,  or  in  respect  to,  a 
different  construction  is  sometimes  used  after  many  of  these  adjec¬ 
tives;  as, 

(1.)  An  infinitive  or  a  subjunctive  clause;  as,  Certus  ire,  Determined  to  go . 
Ovid.  Cantare  periti.  Virg.  Felicior  unguere  tela.  Id.  Anxius  quid  facto 
opus  sit.  Sail.  Vive  memor  quam  sis  aevi  brevis.  Hor. — So  alienus,  avidus , 
callidus,  cupidus,  firmus,  frequens,  gnarus,  impotens,  inops,  Icetus,  largus ,  liber, 
pollens,  memor,  dubius,  etc. 

(2.)  An  accusative  with  a  preposition ;  as,  Ad  rem  avidior.  Ter.  Avidus  in 
direptiones.  Liv.  Animus  capax  ad  praecepta.  Ovid.  Ad  casum  fortunam^we 
felix.  Cic.  Ad  fraudem  callidus.  Id.  Diligens  ad  custodiendum.  Id.  Negli- 
gentior  in  patrem.  Just.  Vir  ad  disciplinam  peritus.  Cic.  Ad  bella  rudis.  Liv. 
Potens  in  res  bellicas.  Id.  Alacer  ad  maleficia.  Cic.  Inter  bellum  et  pacem 
nihil  medium  est.  Id. — So  with  ad,  fertilis ,  firmus ,  infirmus,  pdtens ,  sterilis,  etc. — 
with  in,  cupidus,  parcus,  pdtens,  prodigus,  etc. 

(3.)  An  accusative  without  a  preposition,  chiefly  in  the  poets;  as ,  Nudus 
membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os,  humeros^we  deo  similis  Id.  Cetera 
fulvus.  Hor.  Cuncta  pollens.  Sen.  Ag.  See  §234,  II. 

(4.)  An  ablative  with  a  preposition;  as,  Avidus  m  pecuniis,  Eager  in  re¬ 
gard  to  money.  Cic.  Anxius  de  fama.  Quint.  Rudis  in  jure  civili.  Cic.  Peri¬ 
tus  de  agricultura  Varr.  Prudens  in  jure  civili.  Cic.  Reus  de  vi.  Id.  Purus 
ab  cultu  humano.  Liv.  Certior  factus  de  re.  Cic.  Sollicitus  de  re.  Id.  Super 
seed  e  re  suspectus.  Sali.  Inops  ab  amicis.  Cic.  Pauper  in  sere.  Hor.  Modicus 
in  cultu.  Plin.  Ab  aquis  sterilis.  Apul.  Copiosus  a  frumento.  Cic.  Ab  equitatu 
firmus.  Id.  So  with  in,  immddicus ,  parcus,  uber : — with  ab,  alienus ,  beatus,  ex¬ 
torris,  immunis ,  inops ,  liber,  nudus ,  orbus ,  vacuus. 

(5.)  An  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Arte  rudis,  Rude  in  art.  Ovid. 
Regni  crimine  insons.  Liv.  Compos  mente.  Virg.  Prudens  consilio.  Just.  Alger 
pedibus.  Sali.  Praestans  ingenio.  Cic.  Modicus  severitate.  Tac.  Nihil  insi¬ 
diis  vacuum.  Cic.  Amor  et  meile  et  felle  est  fecundissimus.  Plaut.  Medius  Pol¬ 
luce  et  Castore.  Ovid.  Cf.  Rem.  5. 

In  many  instances,  the  signification  of  the  accusative  and  ablative  after  adjectives  dif¬ 
fers,  in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  from  that  of  the  genitive. 

Rem.  5.  As  many  of  the  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  a  genitive,  admit  of  other 
constructions,  the  most  common  use  of  each,  with  particular  nouns,  can,  in  general,  be 
determined  only  by  recourse  to  the  dictionary,  or  to  the  classics.  Some  have, 

(1.)  The  genitive  only;  as,  benignus,  capax,  exsors,  impos,  impotens,  insatia¬ 
bilis,  irritus ,  liberalis,  modicus,  munificus,  praelargus,  and  many  others. 

(2.)  The  genitive  more  frequently;  as,  compos,  consors,  egenus,  exheres , 
expers,  fertilis,  indigus,  inops ,  parcus,  particeps,  pauper,  prddigus,  prosper , 
sterilis. 

(3.)  The  genitive  or  ablative  indifferently;  as,  dives,  fecundus,  ferax,  im¬ 
munis,  inanis,  immddicus,  jejunus,  largus,  nimius,  dpulenius ,  peritus,  plenus,  po¬ 
tens,  purus,  refertus,  sdtur ,  uber,  vacuus. 

(4.)  The  ablative  more  frequently;  as,  abundans,  alienus,  cassus ,  copiosus , 
extorris,  firmus,  fetus,  frequens,  gravidus,  gravis,  infirmus,  liber,  locuples,  Icetus , 
mactus,  nudus,  onustus,  orbus,  pollens ,  satiatus,  truncus,  validus ,  viduus. 

(5.)  The  ablative  only;  as,  beatus,  creber,  densus,  mutilus,  tumidus,  turgidus . 

For  the  ablative  after  many  of  the  preceding  adjectives,  see  §  250. 

Rem.  6.  Some  adjectives  usually  limited  by  a  dative,  sometimes  take  a  gen¬ 
itive  instead  of  the  dative ;  as,  similis,  dissimilis ,  etc.  See  §  222,  R.  2. 

Rem.  7.  Many  adjectives  in  addition  to  the  genitive  or  ablative  denoting  of 
or  in  respect  to,  lake  also  another  case  to  express  a  different  relation ;  as,  Mens 
sibi  conscia  recti.  Cf.  §  222,  R.  3.  Conscius  has  also  sometimes  the  dative  in¬ 
stead  of  the  genitive  of  the  thing ;  as,  conscius  huic  facinori.  Cic. 


216 


SYNTAX, — GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


§214. 


GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 

§  S814L  Sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing ,  are  followed  by  a  geni¬ 
tive,  denoting  degree  of  estimation  ;  as, 

A  me  argentum ,  quanti  est ,  sumito ,  Take  of  me  so  much  money  as  (he)  is 
worth.  Ter.  Magni  cestimabat  pecuniam ,  He  valued  money  greatly.  Cic.  Ager 
nunc  pluris  est ,  quam  tunc  fuit.  Id.  Tanti  est,  It  is  worth  so  much;  and,  abso¬ 
lutely,  It  is  worth  while.  Cic.  Hujus  non  facio ,  I  don’t  care  that  for  it. 

Remark  1.  ( a .)  Verbs  of  valuing  are  joined  with  the  genitive, 
when  the  value  is  expressed  in  a  general  or  indefinite  manner  by  : — 

(1.)  A  neuter  adjective  of  quantity ;  as,  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris,  magni, 
permagni ,  plurimi,  maximi,  minimi,  parvi ,  tantidem ,  quanticumque,  quantivis , 
quantiUbet ,  but  only  very  rarely  multi  and  majoris. 

(2.)  The  nouns  assis,  flocci,  nauci ,  nihili,  pili,  teruncii ,  and  also  pensi  and 
hujus. 

(5.)  But  if  the  price  or  value  of  a  thing  is  a  definite  sum,  or  is  ex¬ 
pressed  by  a  substantive,  other  than  assis,  flocci,  etc.,  it  is  put  in  the 
ablative.  Cf.  §  252. 

Rem.  2.  The  verbs  of  valuing  are  cestimo,  existimo,  duco,  f  ado,  fio,  hdbeo, 
pendo,  puto,  deputo,  taxo.  Thus,  Ut  quanti  quisque  se  ipse  faciat,  tanti  fiat  ao 
amicis,  That  as  much  as  each  one  values  himself,  so  much  he  should  be  valued 
by  his  friends.  Cic.  Sed  quia  parvi  id  duceret.  Id.  Honores  si  magni  non  pute¬ 
mus.  Id.  Non  assis  facis ?  Catuli.  Neque  quod  dixi,  flocci  existimat.  Plaut. 

Note  1.  (a.)  The  phrase  cequi  boni,  or  cequi  bonique  f  ado,  or  consulo ,  I  take 
a  thing  in  good  part,  am  satisfied  with  it,  may  be  classed  with  genitives  of  value ; 
as,  Nos  sequi  bon!  que  facimus.  Liv.  So,  Boni  consuluit  Plin. — (b.)  A  genitive 
of  price  is  joined  also  to  cceno,  habito,  ddceo,  etc. ;  as,  quanti  habitas  ?  what  rent 
do  you  pay  for  your  house  or  lodging  ?  quanti  docet  f  what  are  his  terms  in 
teaching? 

Note  2.  After  cestimo,  the  ablatives  magno,  permagno,  parvo,  nihilo,  are 
sometimes  used  instead  of  the  genitive;  as,  Data  magno  cesttmas,  accepta 
parvo.  Sen.  Pro  nihilo,  also,  occurs  after  duco,  hdbeo,  and  puto ;  and  nihil  with 
cestimo  and  moror.  Cf.  §  231,  R.  5. 

Note  3.  The  neuter  adjectives  above  enumerated,  and  hujus ,  may  be  refer¬ 
red  to  a  noun  understood,  as  pretii,  ceris,  ponderis,  momenti ;  and  may  be  con¬ 
sidered  as  limiting  a  preceding  noun,  also  understood,  and  denoting  some  per¬ 
son  or  thing;  as,  JEstimo  te  magni,  i.  e.  hominem  magni  pretii.  Scio  ejus  ordinis 
auctoritatem  semper  apud  te  magni  f  uisse,  i.  e.  rem  magni  momenti.  The  words 
assis,  etc.,  may  also  be  considered  as  depending  on  an  omitted  noun;  as,  pretio, 
rem,  etc. 

Rem.  3.  Statements  of  price,  also,  when  general  or  indefinite ,  are 
put  in  the  genitive  after  verbs  of  buying ,  selling ,  letting ,  and  hiring  ; 
as, 

Mercatores  non  tantidem  vendunt,  quanti  emerunt.  Cic.  Nulla  pestis  humano 
generi  pluris  stetit,  quam  ira.  Sen. 

Note  1.  Verbs  of  buying,  selling,  etc.,  are  emo,  vendo ,  the  neutral  passive, 
veneo,  consto,  prosto,  and  liceo,  to  be  exposed  for  sale. 

Note  2.  With  verbs  of  buying,  selling,  etc.,  the  ablatives  magno,  permagno , 
plurimo,  parvo,  minimo,  and  nihilo  are  often  used  instead  of  the  genitive :  as, 
Non  potest  parvo  res  magna  constare.  Sen.  Quanti  emere  possum  minimo  ?  What 
is, the  lowest  price  I  can  buy  at?  Plaut.  Sometimes  also  the  adverbs  care, 
bene,  and  male  take  the  place  of  the  genitive  or  ablative  of  price. 


§215,216. 


SYNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


217 


§  215.  (1.)  Misereor,  miseresco,  and  the  impersonals  mise¬ 

ret,  pcenitet,  pudet,  tcedet,  and  piget,  are  followed  by  a  genitive 
of  the  object  in  respect  to  which  the  feeling  is  exercised ;  as, 

Miseremini  sociorum ,  Pity  the  allies.  Cic.  Miserescite  regis ,  Pity  the  king. 
Virg.  Mea  mater ,  tui  me  miseret,  mei  piget,  I  pity  you,  and  am  dissatisfied 
with  myself.  Acc.  Eos  ineptiarum,  pcenitet.  Cic.  Fratris  me  pudet  pigetque. 
Ter.  Me  civitatis  morum  piget  tcedetque.  Sail.  So  the  compound  distaedet;  Hand 
quad  tui  me,  neque  domi  distaedeat .  Plaut.;  and  the  passive;  Numquam  suscepti 
negotii  eum  pertaesum  est.  Nep.  Lentitudinis  eorum  pertersa.  Tac.  Miseri¬ 
tum  est  me  tuarum  fortunarum.  Ter.  Care  te  fratrum  misereatur.  Cic.  Pudet 
(me)  deorum  hominumque,  I  am  filled  with  shame  in  reference  both  to  gods 
and  men.  Liv. 

Note  1.  Miserescit  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same  manner  as  miseret ;  as, 
Nunc  te  miserescat  mei.  Ter.  Misereo ,  as  a  personal  verb,  also,  occurs  with  a 
genitive ;  as,  Ipse  sui  miseret .  Lucr. 

Remark.  The  genitive  after  the  above  impersonals  seems  to  depend  on  some 
general  word  constituting  the  grammatical  subject  of  such  verbs,  and  signify¬ 
ing,  matter ,  business,  fact,  case,  circumstances ,  conduct,  character,  etc.,  cf  §  211, 
R.  8,  (3);  and  §  209, ‘R.  3,  (4.)  Instead  of  the  genitive  with  its  omitted  noun, 
an  infinitive  or  clause  with  quod  or  with  an  interrogative  particle  is  sometimes 
used  as  a  subject;  as,  Non  me  hoc  jam  dicere  pudebit.  Cic.  Non  pcenitet  me 
quantum  profecerim,  I  am  not  dissatisfied  with  my  progress.  Id.  These  verbs 
have  also  sometimes  a  nominative  ;  as,  Me  quidem  hcec  conditio  non  pcenitet . 
Plaut.  Non  te  hsec  pudenti  Ter. 

Note  2.  Miseret  occurs  with  an  accusative  of  the  object,  instead  of  a  geni¬ 
tive;  as,  Menedemi  vicem  miseret  me.  Ter.  So,  also,  Pertcesus  ignaviam  suam. 
Suet. 

Note  3.  (a.)  These  impersonals,  as  active  verbs,  take  also  an  accusative  of 
the  person  exercising  the  feeling  which  they  express.  See  §  229,  R.  6.-— 
(b.)  And  sometimes  also  the  accusative  of  the  neuter  pronouns  and  of  nihil , 
denoting  to  what  degree  the  feelings  are  exercised;  as,  Sequitur  ut  nihil  (sapien¬ 
tem,)  pceniteat.  Cic.  Cf.  §  232,  (3.) 

(2.)  Satdgo  is  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  in 
what  respect ;  as, 

Is  satagit  rerum  marum ,  He  is  busily  occupied  with  his  own  affairs.  Ter. 
This  compound  is  often  written  separately,  and  in  either  case  the  genitive 
seems  to  depend  upon  sat.  See  §  212,  R.  4.  Agito,  with  sat ,  in  like  manner,  is 
followed  by  a  genitive ;  as,  Nunc  dgitas  sat  tide  tuarum  rerum.  Plaut. 

§  21®.  Recordor,  memini,  reminiscor,  and  obliviscor,  are 
followed  by  a  genitive  or  accusative  of  the  object  remembered 
or  forgotten ;  as, 

Flagitiorum  suorum  recordabitur.  Cic.  Omnes  gradus  crtdtis  recordor  tuce , 
I  call  to  mind  all  the  periods  of  your  life.  Id.  Memini  vivorum,  I  am  mindful 
of  the  living.  Id.  Numeros  memini ,  I  remember  the  measure.  Virg.  Reminisci 
veteris  famas.  Nep.  Dulces  moriens  reminiscitur  Argos.  Yirg.  Reminisci  ami¬ 
cos.  Ovid..  Oblitus  sui.  Yirg.  Injuriarum  obliviscitur.  Nep.  Obliviscor  injurias. 
Cic.  Obliviscere  Graios.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  When  the  thing  remembered  or  forgotten  is  expressed  by 
a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective,  it  is  always  put  in  the  accusative.  An  accusa¬ 
tive  of  the  person  with  these  verbs  is  unusual,  except  that  memini ,  when  re¬ 
ferring  to  a  contemporary,  always  takes  an  accusative  of  the  person;  as,  Cin¬ 
nam  memini.  Cic. 


19 


218 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


§217. 


(J.)  An  infinitive  or  a  dependent  clause  sometimes  follows  these  verbs;  as, 
Memento  mihi  suppetias  ferre.  Plaut.  Esse  qudque  in  fatis  reminiscitur ,  affore 
tempus,  quo  mare ,  etc.  Ovid.  Obliti  quid  deceat.  Hor.  Memini  te  scribere. 
Cic.  Quse  sum  passura  recordor .  Ovid. 

Rem.  fi.  Recordor  and  gemini,  to  remember ,  are  sometimes  followed  by  an 
ablative  with  de;  as,  Petimus  ut  de  suis  liberis  recordentur.  Cic.  De  palla  me¬ 
mento.  Plaut. 

Rem.  3.  Memini,  signifying  to  make  mention  of,  has  a  genitive,  or  an  abla¬ 
tive  with  de ;  as,  Neque  hujus  rei  meminit, poeta.  Quint.  M  eministi  de  exsuli¬ 
bus.  Cic.  With  venit  mihi  in  mentem,  the  person  or  thing  may  be  made  the 
subject  of  venit;  as,  Miser  ce  ubi  venit  in  mentem  mortis  metus.  Plaut.  Venit  hoc 
mihi  in  mentem ;  or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause  may  supply  the  place 
of  the  subject: — for  the  genitive  with  this  phrase,  as  in  Sdlet  mini  in  mentem 
venire  illius  tempdris,  see  §  211,  R.  8,  (5.)  The  genitive  with  recordor  is  very 
rare. 

§  217.  Verbs  of  accusing ,  convicting ,  condemning,  and  ac¬ 
quitting,  with  the  accusative  of  the  person,  are  followed  by  a 
genitive  denoting  the  crime  ;  as, 

Arguit  me  furti,  He  charges  me  with  theft.  Alterum  accusat  probri,  He  ac¬ 
cuses  another  of  villany.  Meipsum  inertiae  condemno.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  To  this  rule  belong  the  verbs  of 

Accusing;  accuso ,  ago,  arcesso ,  arguo ,  cito ,  defero,  increpo,  incuso,  insimulo , 
postulo,  and  more  rarely  alligo,  anquiro ,  astringo,  capto ,  increpito,  urgeo,  inter - 
rdgo,  reum  ago  or  f  acio,  alicui  diem  dico,  cum  aliquo  ago. — C  o  n  v  i  c  t  i  n  g  ;  con¬ 
vinco,  coarguo,  prehendo,  teneor,  obstringor,  obligor.— G  ondemning  ;  damno,  con¬ 
demno,  infamo,  and  more  rarely  judico,  noto,  plector. — A  c  q  u  i  1 1  i  n  g  ;  absolvo , 
libero,  purgo,  and  rarely  solvo.  To  the  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  may  be  added 
the  adjectives  denoting  guilt  and  innocence,  which  likewise  take  a  genitive. 
Cf.  §  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

(b.)  The  genitives  which  follow  these  verbs  are,  audaciae,  avdritice,  ccedis , 
falsi,  furti,  iqndvice ,  impietatis ,  injuriarum,  levitatis,  majestatis ,  maleficii,  menda¬ 
cii,  parricidii,  peccati,  peculatus,  probri,  proditionis,  rei  capitalis,  repetundarum, 
sceleris,  stultitiae,  temeritatis ,  timoris,  vanitatis,  veneficii,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  ablative  with  de  is  often  used  after 
accuso,  defero,  anquiro,  arguo,  postulo,  damno ,  condemno,  absolvo ,  and  purgo ;  as, 
Accusare  de  negllgentia.  Cic.  De  vi  condemnati  sunt.  Id.  De  repetundis  est 
* postulatus .  Id.  Sometimes  with  in,  after  accuso,  coarguo,  convinco,  teneoi',  and 
deprehendor;  as,  In  quo  te  accuso  (Cic.);  and  after  libero,  with  a  or  ab;  as, 
A  scelere  liberati  sumus.  Cic.  Accuso  and  damno  with  inter  occur  in  the 
phrases  inter  sicarios  accusare,  etc.,  to  charge  with  assassination. 

( b .)  With  some  of  the  above  verbs,  an  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  often 
used;  as,  Liberare  culpa.  Cic.  Crimen  quo  argui  posset.  Nep.  Proconsulem 
postulaverat  repetundis.  Tac.  This  happens  especially  with  general  words  de¬ 
noting  crime ;  as,  scelus,  maleficium,  peccatum,  etc.;  as,  Me  peccato  solvo.  Liv. 
The  ablatives  crimine  and  nomine,  without  a  preposition,  are  often  inserted  be¬ 
fore  the  genitive;  as,  Arcessere  aliquem  crimine  ambitus.  Liv.  Nomine  scelens 
conjurationisque  damnati.  Cic. ;  and  when  not  so  inserted  they  are  to  be  under¬ 
stood. 

(c.)  Sometimes  a  clause  takes  the  place  of  the  genitive;  as,  Eum  accusabant 
quod  societatem  fecisset.  Nep.  So  the  infinitive  with  the  accusative.  Quid  t 
quod  me — arguit  serum  accessisse  ?  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  punishment  is  commonly  expressed  by  the  genitive;  as, 
capitis,  mortis,  multee,  pecuniae,  quadrupli,  octupli ;  but  sometimes  by  the  abla¬ 
tive  ;  as,  capite ,  morte,  multa,  pecunia :  and  always  by  this  case  when  a  definite 
sum  is  mentioned;  as,  quindecim  millibus  ceris :  or  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in; 


§  218,  219. 


SYNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


219 


as,  ad  poenam ,  ad  bestias ,  ad  metalla ,  in  metallum ,  expensas ; — sometimes, 
though  rarely,  in  the  poets,  by  the  dative;  as,  Damnatus  morti.  Lucr.— 
( b .)  Voti  or  votorum,  and  less  frequently  voto  or  votis  damnari ,  signifies  ‘to  be 
condemned  to  fulfil  one’s  vow,’  and  is  consequently  equivalent  to  ‘to  obtain 
what  one  wishes.’  So  also  in  the  active  voice,  Damnabis^  tu  qudque  votis.  Virg. 
Perdo  is  used  by  Plautus  as  a  verb  of  accusing,  with  capitis ;  Quern  ego  capitis 
perdam ,  will  charge  with  a  capital  offence.  So  capite  or  capitis  periclitari, 
Plaut.,  signifies  ‘  to  be  in  peril  of  one’s  life.’  With  plecto  and  plector ,  caput  is 
used  in  the  ablative  only.— ( c.)  Damni  infecti  is  put  in  the  genitive  (depend¬ 
ing  upon  nomine  understood)  after  satisdo ,  promitto,  stipulari,  repromitto ,  and 
caveo  ;  as,  Si  quis  in  pariete  demoliendo  damni  infecti  promiserit.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  Accuso,  incuso ,  and  insimulo,  instead  of  the  genitive,  sometimes  take 
the  accusative,  especially  of  a  neuter  pronoun;  as,  Si  id  me  non  accusas.  Plaut. 
Quod  me  incusaveras.  Ter.  Sic  me  insimulare  falsum  facinus.  Plaut.  See  §  231, 
Rem.  5. 

Rem.  5.  ( a .)  The  following  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  are  not  followed  by  a 
genitive  of  the  crime,  but,  as  active  verbs,  by  an  accusative : — calumnior ,  carpo , 
corripio ,  criminor,  culpo ,  excuso,  multo ,  punio ,  reprehendo,  sugillo ,  taxo ,  traduco , 
vitupero ;  as,  Culpare  infecunditatem  agrorum .  Colum.  Excusare  errorem  et 
adolescentiam.  Liv. 

(b.)  This  construction  also  sometimes  occurs  with  accuso,  incuso,  arguo ,  and 
inarguo;  as,  Ejus  avaritiam  perfidiamque  accusar  at.  Nep.  Culpam  arguo.  Liv. 
With  multo,  the  punishment  is  put  in  the  ablative  ohly,  without  a  preposition; 
as,  Exsiliis,  morte  multantur .  Cic. 

§  218*  Verbs  of  admonishing,  with  the  accusative  of  the 
person,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the  person  or  thing  respect¬ 
ing  which  the  admonition  is  given  ;  as, 

Milites  temporis  mdnet,  He  admonishes  the  soldiers  of  the  occasion.  Tac. 
Admdnebat  alium  egestatis,  alium  cupiditatis  suce.  Sali. 

Note.  The  verbs  of  admonishing  are  moneo,  admdneo,  commdneo ,  and  commd - 
nef  acio. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  verbs  of  admonishing  sometimes  have 
an  ablative  with  de ;  as,  De  sede  Telluris  me  admdnes.  Cic. — sometimes  an  ac¬ 
cusative  of  a  pronoun  or  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender ;  as,  Eos  hoc  moneo  Cic. 
Illud  me  admdneo.  Id. ;  and  in  the  passive,  Multa  admdnemur.  Id. — rarely  also 
a  noun  in  the  accusative ;  as,  Earn  rem  nos  locus  admdnuit.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  verbs  of  admonishing  are  also  often  followed 
by  an  infinitive  or  clause;  as,  Soror  alma  mdnet  succedere  Lauso  Turnum,  His 
sister  admonishes  Turnus  to  take  the  place  of  Lausus.  Virg.  Monet ,  'iit  suspic¬ 
iones  vitet.  Cses.  Sed  eos  hoc  moneo,  desinant  furere.  Cic.  Mdnet  rationem  fru¬ 
menti  esse  habendam.  Hirt.  Immortalia  ne  speres  mdnet  annus.  Hor.  Discipulos 
id  unum  moneo ,  ut,  etc.  Quint.  Mdneo  quid  facto  opus  sit.  Ter.  See  §  273,  2. 

§  21®.  Refert  and  interest  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the 
person  or  thing  whose  concern  or  interest  they  denote ;  as, 

Humanitatis  refert ,  It  concerns  human  nature.  Plin.  Refert  omnium  ani¬ 
madverti  in  malos.  Tac.  Interest  omnium  recte  facere,  It  concerns  all  to  do 
right.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  substantive  pronouns, 
the  adjective  pronouns  mea ,  tua,  sua ,  nostra,  and  vestra,  are  used;  as, 

Mea  nihil  refert ,  It  does  not  concern  me.  Ter.  Illud  mea  magni  interest. 
That  greatly  concerns  me.  Cic.  Tua  et  mea  maxime  interest ,  te  valere.  Cic. 
Magis  reipubllcse  interest  quam  mea.  Id.  Magni  interest  Ciceronis,  vel  mea 
pdtius ,  vel  mehercule  u triusque,  me  intervenire  dicenti.  Id. 


220 


8TNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


§220, 


Note.  Referi  rarely  occurs  with  the  genitive,  but  often  with  the  pronouns 
mea ,  tua ,  etc.,  and  most  frequently  without  either  such  pronoun  or  a  genitive; 
as,  quid  refert  ?  magni  or  magnOpere  refert. 

Rem.  2.  In  regard  to  the  case  of  these  adjective  pronouns,  grammarians  dif¬ 
fer.  Some  suppose  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  plural  neuter,  agreeing 
with  commdda  or  the  like  understood ;  as,  Interest  mea.  i.  e.  est  inter  mea ,  It 
is  among  my  concerns.  Refert  tua ,  i.  e.  refert  se  ad  tua ,  It  refers  itself  to 
your  concerns.  Others  think  that  they  are  in  the  ablative  singular  femi¬ 
nine,  agreeing  with  re,  causa,  etc.,  understood,  or  in  the  dative.  The  better 
opinion  seems  to  be,  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  feminine  for  meam ,  tuarn , 
«warn,  etc.,  that  refert  was  originally  rem  fert ,  and  that  hence  the  e  of  refert 
is  long. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  accusative  with  nd  is  sometimes  used; 
as,  Ad  honorem  meum  interest  quam  primum  urbem  me  venire.  Cic.  Quid  id  ad 
me  aut  ad  meam  rem  refert.  Plaut. — sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  accusative 
without  a  preposition ;  as,  Quid  te  igitur  retulit  ?  Plaut — or  a  dative ;  as,  Die 
quid  ref  erat  intra  naturae,  fines  viventi.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  The  subject  of  these  verbs,  or  the  thing  which  is  of  interest  or  im¬ 
portance,  is  sometimes  expressed  by  a  neuter  pronoun;  as,  Id  mea  minime 
refert.  Ter.  Hoc  vehementer  interest  reipublicce.  Cic.;  and  sometimes  by  an  in¬ 
finitive  with  its  accusative,  or  ut ,  or  an  interrogative  particle  with  a  sub¬ 
junctive  clause ;  as,  muHum  mea  interest  te  esse  diligentem ,  or  ut  diligens  sis , 
or  utrum  diligens  sis  nec  ne.  When  the  infinitive  alone  is  used  with  refert 
or  interest ,  the  preceding  subject  is  understood;  as,  omnium  interest  recte  fa¬ 
cere,  scii.  se. 

Rem.  5.  The  degree  of  interest  or  importance  is  expressed  by  adverbs  or  by 
neuter  adjectives,  etc.,  in  the  accusative  or  genitive;  as,  magis ,  magnopere ,  ve¬ 
hementer,  parum ,  minime ,  etc.;  multum ,  plus ,  plurimum ,  nihil ,  aliquid ,  etc.; 
tanti ,  quanti ,  magni ,  permagni ,  pluris.  But  minimo  discrimine  refert  is  found 
in  Juv.  5,  123. 

§  220.  Many  verbs  which  are  usually  otherwise  construed, 
are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive.  This  rule  includes 

1.  Certain  verbs  denoting  an  affection  of  the  mind ;  ango ,  discrucior ,  excru¬ 
cio,  fallo ,  pendeo,  which  are  followed  by  animi ;  decipior,  desipio ,  fallor ,  fastidio , 
invideo,  miror,  vereor ;  as,  Absurde  f  acis,  qui  angas  te  animi.  Plaut.  Me  animi 
fallit.  Lucr.  Decipitur  laborum.  Hor.  Desipiebam  mentis.  Plaut.  Justitisene 
prius  mirer  belline  laborum.  Virg. 

2.  The  following,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom;  abstineo,  desino,  purgo. 
Hor.;  desisto.  Virg. ;  laudo,  pi'dhibeo.  Sil.;  levo,  participo.  Plaut.;  libero.  Liv. ; 
dissolvo.  Tibuli.:  compare  liber  laborum;  Operum  vacuus ;  purus  sceleris.  §213. 

3.  Some  verbs  denoting  to  fill ,  to  abound,  to  want  or  need,  to  free ,  which  are 
commonly  followed  by  an  ablative.  Such  are  abundo,  edreo,  compleo,  expleo, 
impleo ,  egeo,  indigeo ,  saturo,  obsaturo ,  scateo;  as,  Adolescentem  suce  temeritatis 
implet,  He  fills  the  youth  with  his  own  rashness.  Liv.  Animum  explesse  flam¬ 
ma*.  Virg.  Egeo  consilii.  Cic.  Non  tam  artis  indigent  quam  laboris.  Id.  See 
§§249  and  250,  (2.) 

4.  POtior ,  which  also  is  usually  followed  by  an  ablative;  as.  Urbis  pOiiri, 
To  make  oneself  master  of  the  city.  Sail.  Potiri  regni  { Cic.),  hostium  (Sail.), 
rerum,  To  make  oneself  master  of  the  world.  Cic.  POtio  (active)  occurs  in 
Plautus ;  as,  Eum  nunc  pOtivit  servitutis,  He  has  made  him  partaker  of  slavery. 
In  the  same  writer,  pdtitus  est  hostium  signifies,  4  he  fell  into  the  hands  of  the 
enemy.*  So,  also,  Aliquem  compotire  praedas  or  voti.  App.  So,  Rerum  adeptus 
est.  Tao.  Dominationis  apisci.  Id.  Regnavit  populorum.  Hor. 


§221. 


SYNTAX. - GENITIVE  OF  PLACE. 


221 


GENITIVE  OF  PLACE. 

§221.  1.  The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is  said 

to  be,  or  to  be  done,  if  of  the  first  or  second  declension  and  sin¬ 
gular  number,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Habitat  Mileti ,  He  lives  at  Miletus.  Ter.  Quid  Roma  fdciam  ?  What  can  I 
do  at  Rome  ?  Juv.  Hercules  Tyri  maxime  cdlitur.  Cic. 

Note.  For  the  construction  of  nouns  of  the  third  declension  or  plural  num¬ 
ber,  see  §  254.  The  following  appears  to  be  the  best  explanation  that  has 
been  given  of  this  diversity  of  construction,  depending  solely  on  the  number 
or  declension  of  the  noun.  The  name  of  the  town  ‘  where  ’  or  ‘  in  which  ’  is 
probably  neither  in  the  genitive  nor  the  ablative,  but  always,  as  in  Greek,  in  the 
dative.  Since  the  genitive  and  dative  are  alike  in  the  singular  of  the  first  de¬ 
clension  and  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  are  the  same  in  all  declensions, 
such  examples  as  Roma  and  Athenis  present  no  difficulty.  In  the  third  de¬ 
clension  the  dative  and  ablative  singular  were  anciently  alike,  and  in  such  ab¬ 
latives  as  Anxuri ,  Carthagini,  Ldcedamdni ,  the  old  form  remains,  see  §  82, 
Exc.  5,  (c.)  In  the  second  declension  there  was  an  old  dative  in  oi ,  as  in  Greek, 
which  was  commonly  changed  to  o ,  but  sometimes  to  i:  and  the  latter  is  still 
found  in  nulli,  uni ,  etc.,  see  §  107,  and  in  the  adjective  pronouns ;  as,  illi,  etc. 

Remark  1.  Names  of  islands  and  countries  are  sometimes  put  in  the  geni¬ 
tive,  like  names  of  towns;  as ,  Ithaca  vivere,  To  live  in  Ithaca.  Cic.  Corcyra 
fuimus .  Id.  Conon  plurimum  Cypri  vixit,  Timotheus  Lesbi.  Nep.  Quum  Miltiades 
ddmum  Chersonesi  habuit.  Id.  Creta  jussit  considere  Apollo.  Virg.  Roma  Numid- 
iaque  fdcindr a  ejus  memorat.  Sali. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  genitive,  the  ablative  of  names  of  towns  of  the 
first  and  second  declension  and  singular  number,  is  sometimes,  though  rarely, 
used;  as,  Rex  Tyro  decedit,  The  king  dies  at  Tyre.  Just.  Et  Corintho  et  Athenis 
et  Lacedamdne  nunciata  est  victoria.  Id.  Pons  quem  ille  Abydo  fecerat.  Id. 
Hujus  exemplar  Roma  nullum  habemus.  Yitruv.  Non  Libya ,  non  ante  Tyro. 
Yirg.  For  the  explanation  of  this  apparent  anomaly,  see  the  preceding  note; 
in  accordance  with  which  it  may  be  remarked,  that  the  adverbs  of  place,  ubi , 
ibi ,  ibidem ,  alibi,  alicubi,  hic,  illic,  istic,  etc.,  appear  from  their  form  to  be  ancient 
datives. — ( b .)  When  the  noun  is  qualified  by  an  adjective,  it  is  put,  not  in  the 
genitive,  but  in  the  ablative  with  m;  as,  In  ipsa  Alexandria.  Cic.  And  poeti¬ 
cally  without  in,  Genus  Longa  nostrum  dominabitur  Alba.  Virg. — (c.)  When 
urbs,  oppidum,  Idcus,  etc.,  follow  the  genitive  of  place  as  appositions,  they  are 
put  in  the  ablative  either  with,  or,  more  rarely,  without,  in ;  as,  Archias  Aniid- 
chia  natus  est,  celebri  quondam  urbe.  Cic.  Cives  Romanos  Neapoli,  in  cele¬ 
berrimo  oppido  sape  vidimus.  Id.  But  when  in  urbe,  etc.,  precede  the  name  of 
a  town,  the  latter  also  is  put  in  the  ablative ;  as,  In  oppido  Citio.  Nep. ;  and 
but  very  rarely  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Cassius  in  oppido  Antiochia  est, — in  the 
town  of  Antioch.  Cic.,  where  the  genitive  depends  on  oppido. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitives  domi ,  militice ,  belli,  and  humi,  are  construed 
like  names  of  towns ;  as, 

Tenuit  se  domi,  He  staid  at  home.  Cic.  Vir  domi  clarus.  Liv.  Spargit  humi 
jussos  dentes, — on  the  ground.  Ovid.  Militia  and  belli  are  thus  used,  especially 
when  opposed  to  domi ;  as,  Una  semper  militia  et  domi  fuimus , — both  at  home 
and  in  the  camp.  Ter.  So  Domi  mlUtiaque.  Cic.  Et  domi  et  militia.  Id.  Militia 
ddmique.  Liv.  Militia  et  domi.  Ter.  Belli  ddmique,  in  war  and  in  peace.  Hor. 

(1.)  Ddmi  is  thus  used  with  the  possessives  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  vestra, 
and  aliena;  as,  Domi  nostra  vixit,  He  lived  at  my  house.  Cic.  Apud  eum  sic 
fui  tamquam  mea  domi.  Id.  Sacrificium ,  quod  aliena  domi  feret  invisere.  Id. 
But  with  other  adjectives,  an  ablative,  generally  with  a  preposition,  is  used;  as, 
In  vidua  domo.  Ovid.  Paterna  domo.  Id.  Sometimes  also  with  the  possessives ; 
as,  Med  in  domo.  Hor.  In  domo  sua.  Nep.  So,  instead  of  humi, 1  upon  the  ground/ 
19* 


222  SYNTAX. - DATIYE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES.  §  222. 

humo  is  sometimes  used,  with  or  without  a  preposition ;  as,  In  humo  arenosa . 
Ovid.  Sedere  humo  nudd.  Id. 

(2.)  When  a  genitive  denoting  the  possessor  follows,  either  domi  or  in  d6mo 
is  used;  as,  Dqrrehensus  domi  Casaris.  Cic.  Domi  illius  fuisti.  Id.  In  domo 
Casdins.  Id.  In  domo  ejus.  Nep. 

(3.)  The  ablative  domo  for  domi  also  occurs,  but  not  in  Cicero;  as,  Ego  id 
nunc  experior  domo.  Plaut.  Domo  se  tenere.  Nep.  Domo  abditus.  Suet. 
Bello  for  belli  is  found  in  Livy — Domi  belloque.  So,  also,  humo  for  humi  ;  Stratus 
humo.  Stat.  Figit  humo  plantas.  Virg. :  and  in  humo  lumen  figit.  Ovid. 

(4.)  Terrce  is  sometimes  used  like  humi ;  as,  Sacra  terrse  celavimus.  Liv. 
Projectus  terrse.  Virg.  Ignes  terrce  condit.  Luc.  So,  also,  arena ;  Truncum 
reliquit  are  use.  Virg. :  and  vicinice ;  Proxima  viclnise  habitat.  Plaut. 

(5.)  The  genitive  of  names  of  towns,  d6mi,  militia ,  etc.,  is  supposed  by  some 
to  depend  on  a  noun  understood ;  as,  urbe,  oppido ,  adibus ,  solo ,  l6co ,  tempore , 
etc.,  but  see  a  different  explanation  above  in  Note. 

GENITIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES. 

It.  Certain  adverbs  are  followed  by  the  genitive.  See  §  212,  R.  4. 

HI.  The  genitive  plural  sometimes  depends  on  the  preposition 
tenus;  as, 

Cumarum  tenus ,  As  far  as  Cumae.  Coei.  Crurum  tenus.  Virg.  Laterum  ti¬ 
nus.  Id.  Urbium  Corcyra  tenus.  Liv. — For  the  ablative  after  tinus,  and  for  the 
place  of  the  preposition,  see  §  241,  and  R.  1. 

DATIVE. 

§  222.  1.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  reference,  as  it  denotes 

the  object  with  reference  to  which  the  subject  acts,  or  in  reference  to 
which  it  possesses  any  specified  quality  ;  or,  in  other  words,  the  ob¬ 
ject  for  which,  to  the  benefit  or  loss  of  which,  any  thing  is  or  is  done . 
Hence,  in  distinction  from  the  dative  of  the  end  (§  227)  the  dative  of 
reference  is  called  dativus  commodi  et  incommodi ,  the  dative  of  ad¬ 
vantage  and  disadvantage ;  as, 

Scribo  vobis  hunc  librum ,  I  write  this  book  for  you .  Prosum  tlbi,  or  Tibi 
utilis  sum ,  I  am  useful  to  you . 

2.  Hence  the  dative  of  advantage  and  disadvantage  may  be  used 

(a)  with  adjectives  and  particles  whose  meaning  is  incomplete  unless 
the  object  is  mentioned  in  reference  to  which  the  quality  exists. 

( b )  With  verbs  both  transitive  and  intransitive.  If  transitive  they 
take  an  accusative  of  the  nearer  and  a  dative  of  the  remoter  object, 
if  intransitive  they  take  a  dative  only,  (c)  With  certain  verbs  com¬ 
pounded  with  prepositions,  after  which  the  dative  is  used  instead  of 
the  case  which  the  preposition,  if  separate,  would  govern,  (d)  After 
a  few  verbal  substantives  derived  from  verbs  which  govern  a  dative. 

DATIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES. 

3.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective,  is  put 
in  the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  to  which  the  quality  is  di¬ 
rected ;  as, 


§222. 


SYNTAX. - DATIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES. 


223 


Utilis  agris ,  Useful  to  the  fields  Juv.  Jucundus  amicis ,  Agreeable  to  his 
friends.  Mart.  Inimicus  quieti ,  Unfriendly  to  rest.  Id.  Charta  inutilis  scribendo , 
Paper  not  useful  for  writing.  Plin. 

Note.  The  dative  is  commonly  translated  by  the  prepositions  to  or  for ;  but  some¬ 
times  by  other  prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition. 

Remark  1.  Adjectives  signifying  useful,  pleasant,  friendly,  fit, 
like,  inclined,  ready ,  easy,  clear,  equal,  and  their  opposites,  also  those 
signifying  n$ar,  many  compounded  with  con,  and  verbals  in  bilis,  are 
followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

Felix  tuis,  Propitious  to  your  friends.  Virg.  Oratio  ingrata  Gallis,  A  speech 
displeasing  to  the  Gauls.  Caes.  Amicus  tyrannidi,  Friendly  to  tyranny.  Nep. 
Labori  inhabilis,  Unsuited  to  labor.  Colum.  Patri  similis,  Like  his  father.  Cic. 
Nihil  tam  est  Lysiae  diversum ,  quam  Isocrates.  Aptum  tempori.  Id.  Malo  pro¬ 
nus.  Sen.  Promptus  seditioni.  Tac.  Cuivis  facile  est.  Ter.  Mihi  certum  est. 
Cic.  Par  fratri  tuo.  Id.  Falsa  veris  finitima  sunt.  Id.  Oculi  concolores  corpori. 
Colum.  Multis  bonis  flebilis.  Hor.  Mors  est  terribilis  iis,  quorum,  etc.  Cic. 

(a.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  adjectives  included  in  Rem.  1,  viz.  gratus , 
acceptus,  dulcis ,  jucundus ,  laetus,  suavis ;  ingratus ,  insuavis ,  injucundus,  molestus , 
gravis,  acerbus,  odiosus ,  tristis ; — utilis,  inutilis ,  bdnus,  saluber,  salutaris,  fructuosus  ; 
calamitosus,  damnosus,  funestus,  noxius,  pestifer,  perniciosus ,  exitiosus: — amicus , 
benevolus,  carus,  f  amiliaris,  cequus,  fidus,  fidelis,  prdpitius,  secundus;  inimicus, 
adversus,  cernulus,  alienus,  contrarius,  infestus,  infidus,  iniquus,  iratus ; — aptus , 
accommddatus ,  appdsitus,  habilis,  idoneus,  opportunus;  ineptus,  inhabilis ,  impor¬ 
tunus,  inconveniens; — aequalis,  par,  impar,  dispar ,  similis ,  dissimilis ,  absimilis , 
discdlor pronus,  proclivis ,  pi'dpensus,  promptus ,  paratus  :—f  acilis,  difficilis : — 
apertus,  conspicuus,  manifestus ,  perspicuus,  obscurus,  certus,  compertus,  notus, 
ambiguus,  dubius,  ignotus,  incertus,  insolitus ; — vicinus ,  finitimus ,  confinis,  con¬ 
terminus,  prdpior ,  proximus,  cognatus,  concdlor,  concors,  congruus,  consanguineus, 
consentaneus,  consonus,  conveniens ,  contiguus,  continuus,  continens. 

(b.)  Many  adjectives  of  other  significations,  including  some  compounds  of 
ob,  sub ,  and  super ,  as  obnoxius,  obvius,  subjectus ,  supplex,  and  superstes,  are  also 
followed  by  a  dative  of  the  object. 

(c.)  After  verbals  in  bilis,  the  dative  is  usually  rendered  by  the  preposition 
by ;  as,  Tibi  credibilis  sermo,  A  speech  credible  to  you,  i.  e.  worthy  to  be  be¬ 
lieved  by  you.  Ovid. 

( d .)  The  expression  dicto  audiens,  signifying  obedient,  is  followed  by  the  da¬ 
tive;  as,  Syracusani  nobis  dicto  audientes  sunt.  Cic.  Audiens  dicto  fuit  jussis 
magistratuum.  Nep.  In  this  phrase,  dicto  is  a  dative  limiting  audiens,  and  the 
words  dicto  audiens  seem  to  form  a  compound  equivalent  to  6 bediens,  and,  like 
that,  followed  by  a  dative ;  thus,  Nec  plebs  nobis  dicto  audiens  atque  obecliens 
sit.  Liv.  So  dicto  dbediens ;  as,  Futura  es  dicto  dbediens,  annon,  patri  V  Plaut. 

*Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  adjectives  aequalis ,  affinis ,  alienus ,  cognominis,  communis, 
contrarius,  fidus ,  insuetus,  par,  dispar,  peculiaris,  proprius,  prdpinquus,  sacer , 
similis,  assimilis ,  consimilis,  dissimilis ,  socius,  vicinus,  superstes ,  supplex ,  and  some 
others,  instead  of  a  dative  of  the  object,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive; 
as,  Par  hujus ,  Equal  to  him.  Lucan.  Proprium  est  oratoris  ornate  dicere.  Cic. 
But  most  of  these  words,  when  thus  used,  seem  rather  to  be  taken  substan¬ 
tively;  as,  xE qualis  ejus,  His  contemporary.  Cic. 

(b.)  Similis,  assimilis,  consimilis,  dissimilis,  par  and  dispar,  take  the  genitive, 
when  an  internal  resemblance,  or  a  resemblance  in  character  or  disposition,  is 
to  be  expressed,  and  hence  we  always  find  mei,  tui,  sui ,  nostri ,  vestri ,  similis ; 
as,  Piares  reges  Romuli  quam  Numse  similes.  Liv. 

.  ( c .)  Amicus,  inimicus,  and  familiaris,  owing  to  their  character  as  substan¬ 
tives,  take  a  genitive  even  in  the  superlative ;  as,  Homo  amicissimus  nostrorum 
hdminum, — very  friendly  to  our  countrymen.  Cic.  On  the  other  hand,  hostis, 
though  a  substantive,  is  sometimes  used  like  an  adjective,  being  modified  by 


224 


SYNTAX. - DATIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES. 


§  222. 


an  adverb,  and  taking  an  object  in  the  dative;  as,  Exspectantibus  omnibus 
quisnam  esset  tam  impius,  tam  demens ,  tam  diis  hominibusowe  hostis,  qui.  etc. 
Cf.  §  277,  R.  1. 

Rem.  3.  Some  adjectives  with  the  dative  are  followed  by  another  case  de¬ 
noting  a  different  relation ;  as,  Mens  sibi  conscia  recti,  A  mind  conscious  to  it¬ 
self  of  rectitude.  Virg.  See  §  213,  R.  7. 

Rem.  4.  Many  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative  of  the  object,  are 
often  followed  by  an  accusative  with  a  preposition. 

(1.)  Adjectives  signifying  useful,  fit,  and  the  opposite,  take  an  accusative  of 
the  thing  with  ad ,  but  only  a  dative  of  the  person;  as,  Homo  ad  nullam  rem 
utilis.  Cic.  Locus  aptus  ad  insidias.  Id. 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  motion  or  tendency,  take  an  accusative  with  ad 
more  frequently  than  a  dative ;  as,  Piger  ad  poenas,  ad  praemia  velox ,  Ovid  ; 
Ad  aliquem  morbum  proclivior ,  Cic. ;  Ad  omne  facinus  paratus ,  Id. ;  Pronus  ad 
fidem,  Liv. ; — sometimes  with  in ;  as,  Celer  in  pugnam.  Sil. 

(3.)  Many  adjectives,  signifying  an  affection  of  the  mind,  may  have  an  ac¬ 
cusative  of  the  object  with  in,  erga ,  or  adversus, - instead  of  the  dative;  as, 
Fidelis  in  filios.  Just.  Mater  acerba  in  suos  partus.  Ovid.  Grdtus  erga  me. 
Cic.  Gratum  adversus  te.  Id.  So  Dissimilis  in  dominum.  Tac. 

(4.)  Adjectives  signifying  like,  equal,  common,  etc.,  when  plural,  are  often 
followed  by  the  accusative  with  inter ;  as,  Inter  se  similes .  Cic.  Haec  sunt  in¬ 
ter  eos  communia.  Id.  Inter  se  diversi .  Id. 

Rem.  5.  Propior  and  proximus,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  sometimes,  like 
their  primitive  prope,  an  accusative;  as,  Quod  vitium  propius  virtutem  erat. 
Sali.  P.  Crassus  proximus  mare  Oceanum  hiemarat.  Caes.  Ager,  qui  proximus 
finem  Megdlopolitdrum  est.  Liv.  Cf.  §  238,  1. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  Some  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  at  times  an  abla¬ 
tive  with  a  preposition.  Thus,  par,  communis ,  consentaneus,  discors,  with  cum ; 
as,  Quem  parem  cum  liberis fecisti.  Sail.  Consentaneum  cum  iis  literis.  Cic. 
Civitas  secum  discors.  Liv.  So  alienus  and  diversus  with  a  or  ab  ;  as,  Alienus 
a  me,  Ter.;  A  ratione  diversus ,  Cic.;  or  without  a  preposition;  as,  Alienum 
nostra  amicitia.  Id. — ( b .)  Fretus,  which  regularly  takes  the  ablative,  is  in  Livy 
construed  with  the  dative;  as,  fortunae  fretus-,  nulli  rei  fretus,  etc.  Cf.  §  244. — 
(c.)  The  participial  adjectives  junctus  and  conjunctus,  instead  of  the  dative, 
take  sometimes  the  ablative  eithei  with  or  without  cum. 

Rem.  7.  Idem  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  chiefly  in  the  poets ;  as, 
Jupiter  omnibus  idem.  Virg.  Invitum  qui  servat,  idem  f  acit  occidenti.  Hor. 
In  the  first  example,  omnibus  is  a  dative  of  the  object;  in  the  second,  the 
dative  follows  idem,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  construction  with  cd>T6e,  and  is 
equivalent  to  quod  occidens,  or  quod  f  acit  is,  qui  occidit.  Similis  is  construed 
in  the  same  manner  in  Hor.  Sat.  1,  3,  122.  Idem  is  generally  followed  not  by 
a  case,  but  by  qui,  ac,  atque ,  ut,  quasi ,  or  quam ;  sometimes  by  the  preposition 
cum.  Cf.  §  207,  R.  27,  {d.)  Similis  and  par  are  sometimes,  like  idem,  followed 
by  ac  and  atque. 

Rem.  8.  Some  verbal  substantives  are  followed  by  the  dative,  when  derived 
from  verbs  governing  the  dative ;  as,  Justitia  est  obtemperatio  scriptis  legibus 
institutisque  populorum.  Cic.  Traditio  alicujus  rei  alteri.  Id.  Exprobratio 
cuiquam  veteris  fortunae.  Liv. 

Note.  A  dative  of  the  object  often  follows  esse  and  other  verbs,  in  connection  with  a 
predicate  nominative  or  accusative,  but  such  dative  is  dependent,  not  on  the  noun,  but 
on  the  verb.  Cf.  §  227,  R.  4. 


§  223. 


SYNTAX. - DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS, 


225 


DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 

§223.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  a  verb,  is  put  in 
the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is,  or 
is  done ;  as., 

Mea  ddmus  tibi  patet ,  My  house  is  open  to  you.  Cic.  Pars  optare  Iticum  tecto, 
A  part  choose  a  site  for  a  building.  Virg.  Tibi  seris,  tibi  metis,  You  sow  for 
yourself  you  reap  for  yourself.  Plaut.  Licet  nemini  contra  patinam  ducere  ex¬ 
ercitum ,  It  is  not  lawful  for  any  one  to  lead  an  army  against  his  country.  Cic. 
Hoc  tibi  promitto,  I  promise  you  this.  Id.  Hceret  lateri  letalis  arundo.  Virg. 
Surdo  fabulam  narras.  Hor.  Mihi  responsum  dedit.  Virg.  Sic  vos  non  vobis 
fertis  aratra,  bdves.  Id.  Omnibus  bonis  expedit  salvam  esse  rempublicam.  Cic. 
Aptat  habendo  ensem.  Virg. 

Note.  The  dative  is  thus  used  after  all  verbs,  whether  transitive  or  intransitive,  per¬ 
sonal  or  impersonal,  and  in  both  voices,  provided  their  signification  admits  a  reference  to 
a  remoter  object,  for  whom  or  to  whose  benefit  or  injury  any  thing  is  done.  In  the  pas¬ 
sive  voice,  from  their  nature,  neuter  verbs  can  only  be  so  construed  impersonally.  Of. 
§  142,  1,  and  §  222,  2. 

Remark  1.  The  dative  after  many  verbs  is  rendered  not  by  to  or  for ,  but  by  other 
prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition.  Many  intransitive  Latin  verbs  are  translated 
into  English  by  verbs  transitive,  and  the  dative  after  them  is  usually  rendered  like  the 
object  of  a  transitive  verb. — Most  verbs  after  which  the  signs  to  and  for  are  not  used 
with  the  dative,  are  enumerated  in  this  and  the  following  sections. 

Rem.  2.  Many  verbs  signifying  to  favor,  please,  trust,  assist,  and 
their  contraries,  also  to  command,  obey,  serve,  resist,  threaten,  and 
be  angry,  take  a  dative  of  the  object. 

Note.  The  neuter  verbs  comprehended  in  this  rule  generally  express  in  the 
verbal  form  the  meaning  of  those  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  the  dative, 
(cf.  §  222,  R.  1,)  Thus,  (a.)  Illa  tibi  favet,  She  favors  you ,  or  is  favorable  to 
you.  Ovid.  Mihi  placebat  Pomponius,  minime  displicebat.  Cic.  - Qui  sibi  fidit. 
Hor.  Non  licet  sui  commddi  causa  ndcere  alteri.  Cic.  Non  invidetur  illi  aetati 
sed  etiam  favetur.  Id.  Desperat  saluti  suce.  Id.  Neque  milii  vestra  decreta  aux¬ 
iliantur.  Sali.  Imperat  aut  servit  collecta  pecunia  cuique.  Hor.  Obedire  et  parere 
voluntati.  Cic.  Qudniam  factioni  inimicorum  resistere  nequiverit.  Sali.  Mihi 
minabatur.  Cic.  Irasci  inimicis.  Caes. 

( b .)  So  Adulor ,  assentior,  blandior ,  commSdo,  faveo ,  gratificor,  grator,  gratulor,  and 
its  verbal  gratulabundus ,  ignosco,  indulgeo,  l&ndcinor ,  palpor ,  parco,  plaudo,  respondeo, 
Studeo,  supparasitor;  cernulor,  incomm&do,  invideo,  ndeeo,  obsum,  officio; — arrideo , 
placeo;  displiceo; — crMo,  fido,  confido;  despSro,  diffido; — adminiculor,  auxilior , 
mZdeor,  mZdicor,  opitulor,  patrocinor,  prosum,  subvZnio,  succurro  ;  desum,  insidior ; — 
impero,  mando,  mbdtror,  prcedpio ,  tempero;  ausculto,  morigeror,  dbedio,  obsecundo , 
obsequor,  obtempero,  pareo,  dicto  audiens  sum ; — ancillor ,  famulor,  ministro,  servio, 
inservio ,  prcestolor ; — adversor,  refragor,  obsto,  obtrecto,  reluctor,  renitor ,  repugno,  re¬ 
sisto,  and,  chiefly  in  the  poets,  bello,  certo,  luctor,  pugno ; — minor,  comminor,  inter¬ 
minor; — irascor,  succenseo,  stdmdchor. — To  these  maybe  added  cequo,  adeequo .  convicior , 
degenero,  excello,  nubo,  suppedito,  praevaricor,  recipio  (to  promise),  renuncio,  suadeo, 
persuadeo,  dissuadeo ,  supplico,  vaco,  videor ,  and  sometimes  misceo  and  lateo also  the 
impersonals  accidit,  convenit,  conducit,  contingit,  decet,  ddlet,  expedit ,  licet,  libet,  or 
lubet,  liquet,  placet,  etc. — (c.)  Intransitive  verbs  governing  a  dative  are  often  used  imper¬ 
sonally  in  the  passive  with  the  same  case ;  as,  mi! ii  invidetur,  I  am  envied.  Mihi  male¬ 
dicitur,  I  am  reviled.  Mihi  parcitur,  I  am  spared.  Hor.  Hoc  persuadetur  mihi,  I  am 
persuaded  of  this. 

(1,)  (a.)  Many  of  the  above  verbs,  which,  as  intransitive,  take  the  dative, 
sometimes  become  transitive  and  are  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as,  ddulor 
ausculto,  blandior,  degenero,  despero,  indidgeo,  lateo,  mMeor ,  medicor,  mdderor, 
obtrecto,  prcestolor,  provideo,  etc. ;  as,  Adulari  aliquem.  Cic.  Hanc  cave  degene¬ 
res.  Ovid.  Indulgeo  me.  Ter.  Hujus  adventum  praestolans.  Caes.  Providere 
rem  frumentariam.  Id. — Sometimes  also  by  a  preposition  and  the  ablative  or 
accusative ;  as,  A  Stoicis  degeneravit  Panaetius.  Cic.  De  republica  desperare. 
Id.  Obtrectarunt  inter  se.  Nep. — or  by  a  dependent  clause  j  as,  Quae  desperat 
tractata  nitescere  posse,  relinquit.  Hor. 


226 


SYNTAX. - DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS, 


§224 


(6.)  Others,  as  transitive  verbs,  have,  with  the  dative,  an  accusative,  ex¬ 
pressed  or  understood;  as,  impero ,  mando,  ministro ,  minor ,  comminar,  interminar , 
praecipio ,  recipio ,  renuncio ,  etc. ;  as,  Equites  imperat  civitatibus ;  where  coyen - 
dos  is  perhaps  to  be  supplied,  He  enjoins  upon  the  states  the  providing  of  cav¬ 
alry.  Caes.  See  §  274,  K.  5.  Ministrare  victum  alicui.  Varr.  Deflagrationem 
wrfo*  e£  Italice  toti  minabatur.  Cic. 

(c.)  FEquo  and  adaequo  are  construed  with  the  accusative  and  either  the  da¬ 
tive  or  cum  with  the  ablative. — Invideo  takes  either  a  single  dative  of  the  per¬ 
son  or  thing,  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative  of  the  thing;  as,  Ildnb - 
rem  milii  invident.  Hor. ;  or,  when  invidere  is  used  in  the  sense  of  privare,  a  da¬ 
tive  of  the  person  and  an  ablative  of  the  thing ;  as,  Non  inviderunt  laude  sua 
mulieribus.  Liv.  In  Horaee,  by  a  Greek  construction,  the  genitive  is  once  used 
instead  of  the  accusative  or  ablative  of  the  thing;  as,  Neque  ille  sepdinti  ciceris 
nec  longae  invidet  avenae. 

( d .)  Cedo,  used  transitively,  takes  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative 
of  the  thing;  but  sometimes’the  thing  is  expressed  by  the  ablative;  as,  cedere 
alicui  possessione  hortorum.  So,  also,  concedo  tibi  locum ,  or  concedo  tibi  loco. 

(2.)  Many  verbs  which,  from  their  significations,  might  be  included  in  the 
above  classes,  are,  as  transitive  verbs,  only  followed  by  an  accusative;  as, 
delecto,  juvo,  adjuvo,  adjuto,  laedo,  offendo,  etc. — Jubeo  is  followed  by  the  accusa¬ 
tive  with  an  infinitive,  and  sometimes  by  the  accusative  alone,  or  the  da¬ 
tive  with  the  infinitive  or  subjunctive;  as,  Jubeo  te  bene  sperare.  Cic.  Lex 
jubet  ea  quee  f  acienda  sunt.  Id.  Ubi  Britannico  jussit  exsurgere.  Tae.  Quibus 
jusserat,  ut  instantibus  resisterent.  Id. — Fido  and  confido  are  often  followed  by 
the  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Fidere  cursu.  Ovid.  Cf.  §  245. 

§  224:.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  these  eleven  prepo¬ 
sitions,  ad,  ante ,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  pree,  pro,  sub,  and  super , 
are  followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

Annue  coeptis,  Be  favorable  to  our  undertakings.  Virg.  Romanis  equitibus 
liter  ce  afferuntur,  Letters  are  brought  to  the  Roman  knights.  Cic.  Antecellere 
omnibus,  To  excel  all.  Id.  Antetulit  irae  religionem.  Nep.  Audetque  viris  con¬ 
currere*  vir  go.  Yirg.  Exercitum  exercitui,  duces  ducibus  comparare.  Liv.  Lumi¬ 
net  his  aer.  Ovid.  Pecori  signum  impressit.  Virg.  Nox  praelio  intervenit.  Liv. 
Interdixit  histrionibus  scenam.  Suet.  Meis  commodis  officis  et  obstas.  Cic. 
Cum  se  hostium  telis  objecissent.  Id.  Posthabui  mea  seria  ludo.  Virg.  Certa¬ 
mini  praesedit.  Suet.  Hibernis  Labienum  prospdsuit.  Caes.  Genibus  procum¬ 
bere.  Ovid.  Miseris  succurrere  disco.  Virg.  Iis  subsidia  submittebat.  Caes. 
Timidis  supervenit  JEgle.  Virg. 

Note  1.  This  rule  implies  that  the  compound  retains  the  meaning  of  the 
preposition;  and  the  dative  following  such  compound  is  then  used  instead  of 
the  case  governed  by  the  preposition.  When  such  compounds  are  transitive 
they  have  with  the  dative  an  accusative  also,  like  other  transitive  verbs. 

1.  Accedo,  accresco ,  accumbo,  acquiesco,  adZqulto,  adherreo,  adjaceo,  adno ,  adnato ,  ad- 
sto,  adstlpulor ,  adsum ,  adversor,  affulgeo,  allabor ,  alludo,  annuo,  appareo,  applaudo, 
appropinquo,  arrSpo,  arrideo,  aspiro,  assentior,  assideo,  assisto ,  assuesco,  assurgo ; — 
addo,  adhibeo,  adjicio,  adjungo,  admoveo,  adverto,  advolvo ,  affOro,  affigo ,  alligo,  ap¬ 
pono,  applico,  aspergo. 

2.  AntScedo,  antScello ,  anteeo,  antesto,  antSvVnio,  antSverto ; — anttfSro,  antthabeo, 
antcpOno. 

3.  COhcp.reo,  colludo,  concino,  congruo,  consentio ,  consSno,  consuesco,  convivo,  and, 
chiefly  in  the  poets,  coco,  concumbo,  concurro,  contendo  ; — eonf&ro,  conjungo,  comparo y 
compono. 

4.  Incido,  incubo,  incumbo,  indormio,  ingemisco,  Inhcr.reo,  Inhio ,  innascor,  innitor , 
insideo,  insisto,  insto,  insudo ,  insulto,  invado,  invigilo,  illacrimo,  illudo,  immineo,  im¬ 
morior,  immoror ,  impendeo,  insum; — immisceo,  impertio,  impono ,  imprimo,  incido,  in¬ 
cludo,  induo ,  inftro ,  ingSro,  injicio ,  insero,  inspergo,  insuesco ,  Inuro. 

5.  In  tercedo,  intercido ,  intercludo ,  interjaceo ,  intermico,  intersum,  intervenio ; — inter¬ 
dico,  interjicio,  interpOno. 


§225 


SYNTAX. - DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


227 


6.  Obambulo ,  5berro:  obtqulto,  obluctor ,  obmurmuro,  obrGpo ,  ofotfo,  obsisto ,  obstrSpo , 
obsum ,  obtrecto ,  obv&nio ,  obversor ,  occumbo ,  occurro ,  occurso ,  officio ; — obduco ,  objicio , 
off  Uro,  offundo,  oppono . 

7  Post/Sro ,  posthabeo,  postpdno,  postputo,  postscribo. 

8.  Praecedo,  praecurro,  praeeo,  praeluceo,  prcemlneo ,  praeniteo ,  praesideo,  praesum ,  prae¬ 
valeo,  praevertor  ; — praefSro,  praeficio,  praepono. 

9.  Procumbo ,  proficio ,  propugno ,  prospicio ,  provideo . 

10.  Succedo,  succresco,  succumbo,  succurro,  sufficio,  suffragor,  silbdleo,  subjdcco, 
subrepo,  subsum,  subvgnio ; — subdo,  subjicio ,  subjugo,  submitto,  suppono,  substerno. 

11.  Supercurro,  supersto,  sTipersum,  supervenio,  supervivo. 

Note  2.  In  some  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  the  meaning  of  the 
preposition  is  lost.  Such  compounds  are  either  not  followed  by  a  dative,  or 
the  case  depends,  not  on  the  preposition,  but  on  the  signification  of  the  verb, 
according  to  §  223. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Some  verbs,  compounded  with  ab,  de,  ex,  circum,  and  con¬ 
tra,  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  dative ;  as,  absum,  desum,  delabor,  despero , 
excido,  circumdo ,  circumfundo ,  circumjaceo ,  circumjicio ,  contradico,  contraeo;  as, 
Serta  capiti  delapsa,  The  garlands  having  fallen  from  his  head.  Yirg.  Numqui 
nummi  exciderunt  tibi  ?  Plaut.  Tigris  urbi  circumfunditur.  Plin.  Sibi  desperans. 
Caes. — (b.)  Circumdo  and  circumfundo  take  either  an  accusative  of  the  thing  with 
a  dative  of  the  person,  or  an  ablative  of  the  thing  with  an  accusative  of  the  per¬ 
son  ;  as,  circumdo  alicui  custodias,  or  circumdo  aliquem  custodiis.  Aspergo,  in¬ 
spergo,  dono,  impertio,  exuo,  and  induo,  are  construed  in  the  same  manner. 
Cf.  \  251,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  Some  verbs  of  repelling  and  taking  away  (most  of  which  are  com¬ 
pounds  of  ab,  de,  or  ex),  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  though  more 
commonly  by  the  ablative ;  as,  abigo ,  abrogo ,  abscindo ,  auf  ero,  adimo,  arceo , 
defendo,  demo,  depello,  derogo,  detraho,  eripio,  eruo,  excutio,  eximo ,  extorqueo,  ex¬ 
traho,  exuo,  prohibeo,  surripio.  Thus,  Nec  mihi  te  eripient,  Nor  shall  they  take 
you  from  me.  Ovid.  Solstitium  pecori  defendite.  Yirg.  Hunc  arcebis  pecori.  Id. 
So  rarely  abrumpo ,  alieno,  f  uror,  and  rapio. 

Rem.  3.  Some  verbs  of  differing  (compounds  of  di  or  dis)  likewise  occur 
with  the  dative,  instead  of  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  ab,  or  poetically 
with  the  ablative  alone;  as,  differo,  discrepo,  discordo,  dissentio,  dissideo,  disto  ; 
as,  Quantum  simplex  hilarisque  nepoti  discrepet,  et  quantum  discordet,  parcus 
avaro.  Hor.  Distabit  infido  scurrae  amicus.  Hor.  Graecis  Tuscanica  statua  dif¬ 
ferunt.  Quint.  Comoedia  differt  sermoni.  Hor.  So  likewise  misceo;  as,  Mista 
modestiae  gravitas.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  especially  with  ad,  con, 
and  in,  instead  of  the  dative,  either  constantly  or  occasionally  take  the  case 
of  the  preposition,  which  is  frequently  repeated.  Sometimes,  also,  a  preposi¬ 
tion  of  similar  signification  is  used ;  as,  Ad  primam  vocem  timidas  advertitis 
aures.  Ovid.  Nemo  eum  antecessit.  Nep.  Saxa  vides  solei  coalescere  calce.  Lucr. 
Inferunt  omnia  in  ignem.  Caes.  Silex  incumbebat  ad  amnem.  Virg.  Innixus 
moderamine  navis.  Chid.  In  Pansam  fratrem  innixus.  Plin.  Conferte  hane 
parem  cum  illo  bello.  Cic.»  In  this  substitution  of  one  preposition  for  another, 
ad  is  used  for  in,  and  in  for  ad;  ab  for  ex  ;  ad,  ante,  contra,  and  in,  for  ob;  ad 
and  ante,  for  pro. 

Rem.  5.  Neuter  verbs  of  motion  or  of  rest  in  a  place,  when  compounded 
with  the  prepositions,  ad,  ante,  con ,  in,  etc.,  either  take  the  dative,  or,  acquir¬ 
ing  an  active  signification,  are  followed  by  the  accusative ;  as,  Helvetii  reliquos 
Gallos  virtute  proecedunt,  The  Helvetii  surpass  the  other  Gauls  in  valor.  Caes. 
Uterque ,  Isocratem  addle  praecurrit.  Cic.  So  praeeo ,  praesto,  preeverto,  praecello. 
See  §  233,  (3.) 

§  2'25.  I.  Verbs  compounded  with  satis ,  bene ,  and  male ,  are 
followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 


228 


SYNTAX. - DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS, 


§225 


Et  naturae  et  legibus  satisfecit ,  He  satisfied  both  nature  and  the  laws.  Cic. 
Tibi  dii  benefaciant  omnes ,  May  all  the  gods  bless  you.  Plaut.  But  also,  Ami¬ 
cum  erga  bene  feci.  Id.  Maledicit  utrique.  Hor.  So  satisdo ,  benedico ,  mdlef  dcio. 

Notk.  These  compounds  are  often  written  separately;  and  the  dative  always  depends 
not  on  satis.  bine,  and  male ,  but  on  the  simple  verb.  So,  also,  bUne  and  male  alicui 
vulo ;  as,  Tibi  bene  ex  animo  volo.  Ter.  Illi  Sgo  ex  omnibus  optime  volo.  Plaut.  Non 
slbi  male  vult.  Petron.  In  like  manner  valere  dico ,  and  vale  dico ;  as,  Augustus  disce¬ 
dens  ( e  curia)  sidentibus  singulis  valSre  dicSbat.  Suet.  Tibi  valSdicSre  non  ticet  gratis. 
Sen. — In  late  writers  btnZdico  and  maledico  sometimes  take  the  accusative. 

II.  Verbs  in  the  passive  voice  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  dative  of  the 
agent,  chiefly  in  the  poets  and  the  later  prose  writers ;  as,  Quidquid  in  hac 
causa  ml  hi  susceptum  est.  Cic.  Neque  cernitur  ulli,  Nor  is  he  seen  by  any  one. 
Virg.  Nulla  tudrum  audita  mihi  neque  visa  sororum.  Id.  Barbdi'us  hie  ego  sum , 
quia  non  intelligor  ulli.  Ovid.  But  the  agent  after  passives  is  usually  in  the 
ablative  with  a  or  ab.  See  §  248,  1. 

III.  The  participle  in  dus  is  followed  by  a  dative  of  the  agent ; 
as, 

Undot  omnibus  enaviganda ,  The  wave  over  which  (we)  all  must  pass.  Hor. 
Nobis,  cum  semel  occidit  brevis  lux ,  Nox  est  peipetua  una  dormienda.  Catuli. 
Adhibenda  est  nobis  diligentia ,  We  must  use  diligence.  Cic.  Vestigia  summorum 
hominum  sibi  tuenda  esse  dicit.  Id.  Si  vis  me  flere ,  dblendum  est  primum  ipsi 
tibi.  Hor.  Faciendum  mihi  putavi ,  ut  responderem.  Id. 

Remark  1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  wanting  when  the  agent  is  indefinite ; 
as,  Orandum  est ,  ut  sit  mens  sana  in  ccnpdre  sano.  Juv.  Hic  vincendum  aut  mb- 
riendum ,  milites ,  est.  Liv.  In  such  examples,  tibi,  vobis ,  nobis,  hominibus,  etc., 
may  be  supplied.  Cf.  §  141,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  The  participle  in  dus  sometimes,  though  rarely,  has,  instead  of  the 
dative  of  the  agent,  an  ablative  with  a  or  ab ;  as,  Non  eos  in  deorum  immortalium 
numero  venerandos  a  vobis  et  colendos  putatos ?  Cic.  Haec  a  me  indicendo  prae¬ 
tereunda  non  sunt.  Id. — The  dative  after  participles  in  dus  is  by  some  referred 
to  §  226. 

TV.  Verbs  signifying  motion  or  tendency  are  followed  by  an  ac¬ 
cusative  with  dd  or  in  ;  as, 

Ad  templum  Palladis  ibant.  Virg.  Ad  praetorem  hdminem  traxit.  Cic.  Vergit 
ad  septemtriones.  Caes.  In  conspectum  venire.  Nep. 

So  curro,  duco,  fero ,  festino,  fugio ,  inclino ,  lego,  mitto,  pergo,  pendo,  praecipi¬ 
to,  propero,  tendo,  tollo,  vado,  verto. 

Remark  1.  So  likewise  verbs  of  calling,  exciting,  etc. ;  as,  Eurum  ad  se 
vocat .  Virg.  Provocasse  ad  pugnam.  Cic.  So  animo ,  hortor,  incito,  invito,  la¬ 
cesso,  stimulo,  suscito ;  to  which  may  be  added  attineo ,  conformo,  pertineo,  and 
specio. 

Rem.  2.  But  the  dative  is  sometimes  used  after  these  verbs ;  as,  Clamor  it 
coelo.  Virg.  Dum  tibi  literas,  meas  veniant.  Cic.  Gregem  viridi  compellere  hibis¬ 
co.  Virg.  Sedibus  hunc  refer  ante  suis.  Id.  After  venio  both  constructions 
are  used  at  the  same  time;  as,  Venit  mihi  in  mentem.  Cic.  Venit  mihi  in  sus¬ 
picionem.  Nep.  Eum  venisse  Germanis  in  amicitiam  cognoverat.  Caes.  Prb- 
pinquo  (to  approach)  takes  the  dative  only. 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes  also  verbs  signifying  motion  are  followed  by  an  accusa¬ 
tive  of  place  without  a  preposition,  a  supine  in  um,  an  infinitive,  or  an  adverb 
of  place ;  as,  Romam  prdfectus  est .  Ite  domum.  Rus  ibam.  Lavinia  venit  ll- 
tora.  Virg.  Neque  ego  te  derisum  venio.  Plaut.  Non  nos  Libycos  populare 
penates  venimus.  Virg.  Huc  venit.  Plaut.  See  §§  237,  276,  II.  271,  N.  2. 

Rem.  4.  After  do,  scribo,  or  mitto  literas,  the  person  for  whom  they  are  writ¬ 
ten  or  to  whom  they  are  sent,  is  put  either  in  the  dative  or  in  the  accusative 
with  ad;  as,  Ex  eo  l6co  tibi  literas  ante  dederamus.  Cic.  Vultur  cius  literas  sibi 


229 


§  226,  227.  syntax. — dative  after  verbs. 

ad  Catilinam  datas  esse ,  dicebat .  Id.  Qesar  scribit  Labieno  cum,  etc.  Caes.  Ad 
me  Curius  de  te  scripsit.  Cic.  But  to  give  one  a  letter  to  deliver  is  also  ex¬ 
pressed  by  dare  literas  dlicui,  and  also  the  delivery  of  the  letter  by  the  bearer. 

§  226.  Est  is  followed  by  a  dative  denoting  a  possessor  ; — 
the  thing  possessed  being  the  subject  of  the  verb. 

Est  thus  used  may  generally  be  translated  by  the  verb  to  have  with  the 
dative  as  its  subject;  as,  Est  mihi  domi  pater ,  I  have  a  father  at  home.  Virg. 
Sunt  nobis  mitia  poma ,  We  have  mellow  apples.  Id.  Gratia  nobis  dpus  est  tua , 
We  have  need  of  your  favor.  Cic.  Innocentiae  plus  periculi  quam  honoris  est. 
Sail.  An  nescis  longas  regibus  esse  manus  ?  Ovid.  So  with  an  infinitive  as  the 
subject,  Nec  tibi  sit  diiros  acuisse  in  prcelia  dentes.  Tib.  4,  3,  3.  The  first  and 
second  persons  of  sum  are  not  thus  construed. 

Remark  1.  Hence  mihi  est  nomen  signifies,  I  have  the  name,  my  name  is,  or 
I  am  called.  The  proper  name  is  put  either  in  the  nominative,  the  dative,  or 
the  genitive.  See  §  204,  R.  8.  So  also  cognomen ,  cognomentum ,  and,  in  Taci¬ 
tus,  vdcabulum,  est  mihi. — Sometimes,  also/a  possessive  adjective. agreeing  with 
nomen ,  etc.,  supplies  the  place  of  the  proper  name;  as,  Est  mihi  nomen  Tar¬ 
quinium.  Geli.  Mercuriale  imposuere  mihi  cognomen.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  is  used  with  a  similar  signification  after  /ore,  suppetit , 
abest ,  deest,  and  defit ;  as,  Pauper  enim  non  est ,  cui  rerum  suppetit  usus.  Hor. 
Si  mihi  cauda  foret,  cercdpithecus  eram.  Mart.  Defuit  ars  vobis.  Ovid.  Non 
dlfore  Arsacidis  virtutem.  Tac.  Lac  mihi  non  defit .  Virg.  Hoc  unum  illi  ab¬ 
fuit.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  With  the  dative  of  the  person  after  est  Sallust  and  Tacitus  some¬ 
times  join,  by  a  Greek  idiom,  volens ,  cupiens ,  and  invitus ;  as,  Quia  neque  plebi 
militia  volenti  (esse)  putabatur ,  Because  the  common  people  were  not  thought 
to  like  the  war.  Sail.  Ut  quibusque  bellum  invitis  aut  cupientibus  erat ,  Accord¬ 
ing  as  each  liked  or  disliked  the  war.  Tac. 

Dative  of  the  End  or  Purpose. 

§  Sum ,  and  several  other  verbs,  are  followed  by  two 

datives,  one  of  which  denotes  the  object  to  which ,  the  other  the 
end  for  which ,  any  thing  is,  or  is  done  ;  as, 

Mihi  maximce  est  curse,  It  is  a  very  great  care  to  me.  Cic.  Spero  nobis  hanc 
conjunctionem  voluptati  fore ,  I  hope  this  union  will  afford  us  pleasure.  Id. 
Matri  puellam  dono  dedit.  Ter.  Fabio  laudi  datum  est.  Cic.  Vitio  id  tibi  ver¬ 
tunt.  Plaut.  Id  tibi  honori  habetur.  Cic.  Maturavit  collegae  venire  auxilio.  Liv. 
Cui  bono  fuit?  To  whom  was  it  an  advantage?  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  verbs  after  which  two  datives  occur,  are  sum,  fore ,  /io,  do,  dono, 
duco ,  habeo ,  rZlinquo ,  tribuo,  verto ;  also  curro,  eo,  mitto,  proficiscor,  vSnio,  appono,  as¬ 
signo,  cedo,  comparo,  pateo,  suppSdito ,  Smo,  and  some  others. 

Hem.  2.  The  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose  is  often  used  after  these 
verbs,  without  the  dative  of  the  object;  as, 

Exemplo  est  formica,  The  ant  is  (serves  for)  an  example.  Hor.  Absentium 
bona  divisui  fuere.  Liv.  Reliquit  pignori  putamina.  Plaut.  Quce  esui  et  pStui 
sunt.  Geli.  Esse  derisui,  To  be  a  subject  of  ridicule.  Tac.  Receptui  canere , 
To  sound  a  retreat.  Caes.  Aliquid  doti  dicare ,  To  set  out  as  dowry.  Cic. 

.  Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  verb  sum,  with  a  dative  of  the  end,  may  be  va¬ 
riously  rendered  ;  as  by  the  words  brings ,  affords ,  serves ,  does ,  etc. 
The  sign  for  is  often  omitted  with  this  dative,  especially  after  sum ; 
instead  of  it,  as,  or  some  other  particle,  may  at  times  be  used ;  as, 

20 


230 


SYNTAX. - DATIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES. 


§228. 


Ignavia  erit  tibi  magno  dedecori,  Cowardice  will  bring  great  disgrace  to  you. 
Cic.  Ilazc  res  est  argumento,  This  thing  is  an  argument,  or  serves  as  an  argu¬ 
ment.  Id.  Hoc  vitio  mihi  dant ,  This  they  set  down  as  a  fault  in  me.  Uni- 

versos  curae  habuit.  Suet.  Una  res  erat  magno  usui . was  of  great  use. 

Lucii.  Quod  tibi  magndpere  cordi  est ,  mihi  vehementer  displicet ,  What  is  a  great 
pleasure,  an  object  of  peculiar  interest  to  you,  etc.  Id. 

(b.)  Sometimes  the  words  Jit ,  able ,  ready ,  etc.,  must  be  supplied,  especially 
before  a  gerund  or  a  gerundive;  as,  Quum  solvendo  civitates  non  essent ,  ....  not 
able  to  pay.  Cic.  Divites ,  qui  dneri  ferendo  essent.  Liv.  Quae  restinguendo 
igni  f orent.  Liv..  Radix  ejus  est  vescendo.  Plin. 


Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  dative  of  the  end,  a  predicate  nominative  or  accusa¬ 
tive  is  sometimes  used ;  as,  Natura  tu  illi  pater  es,  By  nature  you  are  his 
father.  Amor  est  exitium  pecori  :  or  the  purpose  is  expressed  by"  the  accusa¬ 
tive  with  ad  or  in ;  as,  Alicui  comes  est  ad  bellum.  Cic.  Se  Remis  in  clientelam 
dicabant.  Caes. :  or  by  the  ablative  with  pro ;  as,  Inndcentia  pro  malivolentia 
duci  coepit.  Sail.  Alcibus  sunt  arbores  pro  cubilibus.  Cses. 


Rem.  5.  Instead^  also,  of  the  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose,  quo  ?  to  what  end? 
for  what  purpose  r  why  ?  sometimes  occurs,  with  an  accusative,  which  gen¬ 
erally  depends  on  a  verb  understood,  or  with  an  infinitive  or  a  clause ;  as,  Quo 
mihi  fortunam,  si  non  conceditur  uti  f  Hor.  Quo  tibi,  Pasiphae ,  pretiosas  sumere 
vestes?  Ovid. 


Rem.  6.  After  do  and  other  similar  active  verbs  an  accusative  of  the  purpose 
is  found  in  apposition;  as,  Latini  coronam  auream  Jovi  donum  in  Cdjnidlium 
mittunt.  Liv.  Alicui  comitem  esse  datum.  Cic.  Cf.  §  204,  R.  1 ;  and  §  230,  R.  2. 


Note.  The  dative,  instead  of  the  accusative,  is  sometimes  used  after  the 
infinitive,  when  a  dative  precedes,  and  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted; 
as,  Vobis  necesse  est  fortibus  esse  viris.  Liv.  Maximo  tibi  et  civi  et  duci  evadere 
contigit.  Val.  Max.  See  §§  205,  R.  6,  and  239,  R.  1. 


DATIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES. 

§  228.  Some  particles  are  followed  by  the  dative  of  the 
object;  as, 

1.  Some  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives;  as, 

Proqnus  Tiberi  quam  Thermopylis.  Nep.  Proxime  castris,  Very  near  to  the 
camp.  Cses.  Propius  stabulis  armenta  tenerent.  Vir g.  Congruenter  naturas, 
convenienter  que  vivere ,  Agreeably  to  nature.  Cic.  Epicurus  quam  sibi  constan¬ 
ter  convenient  er  que  dicat ,  non  laborat .  Id.  Nemini  nimium  bene  est.  Afran.  Mihi 
numquam  in  vita  fuit  melius.  Hor.  Vivere  vitas  hominum  amice.  Cic.  Bene 
mihi,  bene  vobis.  Plaut.  So,  Mihi  obviam  venisti.  Cic.  In  certamina  saevo  com¬ 
minus  ire  viro.  Sil.  Quaestores  provinciae  mihi  praesto  fuerunt.  Cic.  Samos  est 
exadversum  Mileto.  App. 

Remark.  Propius  and  proxime ,  like  their  primitive  prope,  are  sometimes 
construed  with  a  and  the  ablative;  as,  Prope  a  meis  asdibus.  Cic.  Stellce 
errantes  propius  a  terris.  Id.  A  Sura  proxime  est  Philiscum ,  oppidum  P arthd - 
rum.  Plin. 

2.  Certain  prepositions,  especially  in  comic  writers ;  as,  Mihi  clam  est ,  It  is 
unknown  to  me.  Plaut.  Contra  nobis.  Id.  But  in  such  instances  they  seem 
rather  to  be  used  like  adjectives. 

3.  Certain  interjections;  as,  Heimihi!  Ah  me!  Virg.  Vce  mihi!  V  o  is  me! 
Ter.  Vce  victis  esse  !  Liv.  Vce  misero  mihi.  Plaut.  Hem  tibi.  Id.  Ecce  tibi.  Cic. 

Note,  (a.)  The  dative  of  the  substantive  pronouns  seems  sometimes  nearly 
redundant,  but  it  always  conveys  the  expression  of  a  lively  feeling,  and  is 
therefore  termed  dativus  ethicus ;  as, 


§  229. 


SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


231 


Fur  mihi  es ,  ....  in  my  opinion.  Plaut.  An  ille  mihi  liber,  cui  mulier  imp&rat  ? 
Cic.  Tongilium  mihi  'eduxit.  Id.  Ubi  nunc  nobis  deus  ille  magister  ?  Vira. 
Ecce  tibi  Sebosus  !  Cic.  Hem  tibi  talentum  argenti  !  Philippicum  est.  Plaut.  Sibi 
is  sometimes  subjoined  quite  pleonastically  to  suus;  as,  Suo  sibi  gladio  hunc 
jugulo.  Plaut.  Ignorans  suo  sibi  servit  patri.  Id.  Sibi  suo  tempore. 

(b. )  The  following  phrases  also  occur  with  volo  and  a  reflexive  pronoun : 
quid  tibi  vis?  what  do  you  want?  quid  sibi  iste  vult?  what  does  he  want?  quid 
vult  sibi  hcec  oratio  ?  what  does  this  speech  mean  ?  quid  hcec  sibi  dona  volunt  ? 
what  is  the  meaning  of  these  presents?  or,  what  is  their  object? 

ACCUSATIVE. 

ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 

§39®.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the  accusa¬ 
tive  ;  as, 

Legatos  mittunt ,  They  send  ambassadors.  Cass.  Animus  mdvet  corpus,  The 
mind  moves  the  body.  Cic.  JDa  veniam  hanc,  Grant  this  favor.  Ter.  Eum 
imitati  sunt ,  They  imitated  him.  Cic.  Piscem  Syri  venerantur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  A  transitive  verb,  with  the  accusative,  often  takes  a 
genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  to  express  some  additional  relation ;  as, 

Te  convinco  amentiae,  I  convict  you  of  madness.  Cic.  Da  Idcum  melibribus. 
Give  place  to  your  betters.  Ter.  Solvit  se  Teucria  luctu,  Troy  frees  herself 
from  grief.  Virg.  See  those  cases  respectively. 

Rem.  2.  Such  is  the  difference  of  idiom  between  the  Latin  and  English  languages,  that 
many  verbs  considered  transitive  in  one,  are  used  as  intransitive  in  the  other.  Hence, 
in  translating  transitive  Latin  verbs,  a  preposition  must  often  be  supplied  in  English ; 
as,  Ut  me  caveret ,  That  he  should  beware  of  me.  Cic.  On  the  other  hand,  many  verbs, 
which  in  Latin  are  intransitive,  and  do  not  take  an  accusative,  are  rendered  into  English 
by  transitive  verbs ;  as,  Ille  mVii  favet ,  He  favors  me :  and  many  verbs  originally  in¬ 
transitive  acquire  a  transitive  signification. 

Rem.  3.  The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted : — 

1.  To  avoid  its  repetition ;  as,  Eventum  senatus ,  quem  (scii,  dare)  videbitur , 
dabit.  Ljy. 

2.  The  interrogative  interjection  quid?  what?  depends  on  ais  or  censes.  So 
also  quid  vero  ?  quid  igitur  f  quid  ergo  ?  quid  enim  ?  which  are  always  followed 
by  another  question,  and  both  questions  may  be  united  into  one  proposition, 
the  first  serving  merely  to  introduce  the  interrogation.  With  quid  postea? 
quid  turn?  supply  sequitur.  With  quid  quod,  occurring  in  transitions,  dicam  de 
eo  is  omitted,  but  it  may  be  rendered  *  nay,’  ‘  nay  even,’  ‘  but  now,’  ‘  more¬ 
over,’  etc.,  without  an  interrogation. — Dicam  is  also  to  be  supplied  with  quid 
multa  ?  quid  plura  ?  ne  multa ;  ne  multis ;  ne  plura.  The  infinitive  dicere  is  also 
sometimes  omitted;  as,  Nimis  multa  videor  de  me.  Cic.  Ferge  reliqua.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  accusative  is  often  omitted : — 

1.  When  it  is  a  reflexive  pronoun;  as,  Nox  praecipitat ,  scil.se.  Yirg.  Turn 
prora  avertit.  Id.  Eo  lavatum ,  scil.  me.  Hor. 

The  reflexives  are  usually  wanting  after  abdleo,  abstineo ,  accingo,  adcequo ,  cequo ,  ag- 
gldmtro,  augeo ,  cSlero ,  congZmino,  continuo,  declino ,  dccHquo ,  desino,  difftro,  duro , 
Irumpo,  flecto ,  deflecto,  facesso,  incipio ,  inclino,  insinuo ,  irrumpo,  jungo,  lavo,  laxo , 
linio,  m&turo,  mollio,  moveo,  muto ,  pono,  prcrcipVo,  prorumpo ,  quatio,  remitto,  retracto , 
sedo,  sisto,  stabulo,  suppedito,  tardo,  tineo,  tendo,  trajicio ,  transmitto,  turbo ,  vario,  vergo, 
verto ,  diverto,  riverto,  vestio ,  vibro;  and  more  rarely  after  many  others. 

2.  When  it  is  something  indefinite,  has  been  previously  expressed  in  any 
case,  or  is  easily  supplied;  as,  Ego ,  ad  quos  scribam,  nescio,  scii,  literas.  Cic. 
De  quo  et  tecum  egi  diligenter,  et  scripsi  ad  te.  Id.  Bene  fecit  Silius.  Id.  Ducit 
in  hostem ,  scii,  exercitum.  Liv. 


232  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS.  §  230. 

Rem.  5.  An  infinitive,  or  one  or  more  substantive  clauses,  may 
supply  the  place  of  the  accusative  after  an  active  v.erb ;  as, 

Da  mihi  fallere.  Hor.  Reddes  dulce  loqui,  reddes  ridere  decorum.  Id.  Cupio 
me  esse  clementem.  Cic.  Athenienses  statuerunt  ut  naves  conscenderent.  Id. 
Vtreor  ne  a  doctis  reprehendar.  Id. Euoe,  Bacche,  sonat.  Ovid.  Sometimes 
both  constructions  are  united ;  as,  Di  iram  miserantur  inanem  amborum ,  et  tan¬ 
tos  mortalibus  esse  labores.  Virg. — Respecting  the  infinitive  with  and  without 
a  subject-accusative  after  an  active  verb,  see  $  270-273;  and  for  the  subjunc¬ 
tive  after  such  verbs,  see  §  273. 

(a.)  In  such  constructions,  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause  is  sometimes 
put  in  the  accusative  as  the  object  of  the  leading  verb;  as,  Nosti  Marcellum, 
quam  tardus  sit ,  for  Nosti  quam  tardus  sit  Marcellus.  Cic.  Illum,  ut  vivat , 
optant.  Ter.  At  te  ego  faciam ,  ut  minus  valeas.  Plaut. 

(A)  An  ablative  with  de  may  also  supply  the  place  of  the  accusative,  by  the 
ellipsis  of  some  general  word  denoting  things ,  facts ,  etc.,  modified  by  such  ab¬ 
lative;  as ,  De  republica  vestra  paucis  accipe.  Sali.  Compare  a  similar  omission 
of  a  subject  modified  by  de  and  the  ablative,  $  209,  R.  3,  (2.) 

Rem.  6.  The  impersonal  verbs  of  feeling,  miseret ,  poenitet ,  pudet, 
taedet ,  piget ,  miserescit ,  miseretur ,  and  pertaesum  est ,  are  followed  by 
an  accusative  of  the  person  exercising  the  feeling,  and  a  genitive  of 
the  object  in  respect  to  which  it  is  exercised.  Cf.  §  215,  (1.) ;  as, 

Eorum  nos  miseret ,  We  pity  them.  Cic.  The  impersonal  Veritum  est  also 
occurs  with  such  an  accusative ;  Quos  non  est  veritum  ponere ,  etc.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  Juvat ,  delectat ,  fallit ,  fugit ,  praeterit ,  and  decet ,  with  their 
compounds,  take  an  accusative  of  the  person ;  as, 

Te  hilari  animo  esse  valde  me  juvat,  That  you  are  in  good  spirits  greatly 
delights  me.  Cic.  Fugit  me  ad  te  scribere.  Cic.  Illud  alterum  quam  sit  difficile, 
te  non  fugit.  Id.  Nec  vero  Caesarem  fefellit.  Caes.  Facis ,  ut  te  decet.  Ter. 

50  also  when  used  personally;  as,  Parvum  parva  decent.  Hor.;  but  decet  often 
takes  the  accusative  of  the  person  with  the  infinitive ;  as,  Hanc  maculam  nos 
decet  effugere.  Ter.;  and  in  comic  writers  a  dative;  as,  Vobis  decet.  Ter. 

For  mea ,  tua,  sua ,  nostra ,  vestra ,  after  refert  and  interest,  see  §  219,  R.  1 :  and  for  the 
accusative  by  attraction,  instead  of  the  nominative,  see  §  206,  (6,)  ( b .) 

§  330.  Verbs  signifying  to  name  or  call ;  to  choose,  render 
or  constitute ;  to  esteem  or  reckon,  which  in  the  passive  voice 
have  two  nominatives,  are  followed  in  the  active  voice  by  two 
accusatives,  one  of  the  object  and  the  other  of  the  predicate . 
Cf.  §  210,  R.  3,  (3.)  ;  as, 

Urbem  ex  Antiochi  patiis  nomine  Antiochiam  vdcavit.  He  called  the  city  An¬ 
tioch,  etc.  Just.  Ludos  facis  me,  You  make  game  of  me.  Plaut.  Me  consu¬ 
lem  fecistis.  Cic.  Iram  bene  Ennius  Initium  dixit  insaniae.  Id.  Ancum  Mar¬ 
cium  regem  pdpulus  creavit.  Liv.  Sulpicium  accusatorem  suum  numerabat, 
non  competitorem.  Cic.  Quum  vos  testes  habeam.  Nep. 

Note  1.  The  following  are  among  the  verbs  included  in  this  rule,  viz.  appello ,  dlco , 
nomino ,  nuncupo ,  pZrhibeo ,  saluto ,  scribo  and  inscribo ,  vi ico ;  capio ,  constituo ,  creo ,  dS- 
cl&ro ,  dettgo,  designo ,  dico ,  Sligo ,  facio ,  efficio ,  instituo ,  ISgo,  prddo ,  reddo.  rSnuncio  ; 
duco ,  dignor ,  existimo ,  habeo ,  judico ,  numero ,  puto ,  rSphrio ,  intelligo ,  invZnio ,  se  pree- 
bSre  or  praestare ,  etc. 

Note  2.  An  ablative  with  ex  occurs,  though  rarely,  instead  of  the  accusa¬ 
tive  of  the  object;  as,  Fortuna  me,  qui  liber  fueram,  sei'vum  fecit ,  e  summo 
infimum.  Plaut.  Cf.  Qui  recta  prava  faciunt.  Ter. 

Note  3.  An  infinitive  may  supply  the  place  of  the  objective  accusative;  as, 

51  simulasse  v6cat  crimen.  Ovid. : — and  sometimes  of  the  predicate  accusative 


§231. 


SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


233 


also;  as,  Si  reperlre  vdcas  amittere  certius;  aut  si  sc!re  ubi  sit  reperire  vdcas.  Id. 
So  also  an  adjective  may  supply  the  place  of  the  predicate  accusative;  as, 
Praebuit  se  dignum  suis  majoribus.  Cic.  Ccesdrem  certiorem  Jaciunt.  Caes. 

Remark  1.  After  verbs  signifying  to  esteem  or  reckon,  one  of  the 
accusatives  is  often  the  subject,  and  the  other  the  predicate,  of  esse 
expressed  or  understood ;  as, 

Eum  avarum  possumus  existimare.  Cic.  Talem  se  imperatorem  prwbuit.  Nep. 
Praesta  te  eum,  qui  mihi  es  cognitus.  Cic.  Mercurium  omnium  inventorem  artium 
f  erunt ;  hunc  viarum  atque  itinerum  ducem  arbitrantur.  Cies. ;  or  an  adjective 
supplies  the  place  of  the  predicate  accusative ;  as,  Ne  me  existimaris  ad  manen¬ 
dum  esse  propensiorem.  Cic. 

Note  4.  Instead  of  the  predicate  accusative,  (1)  pro  with  the  ablative  some¬ 
times  follows  puto ,  duco ,  and  habeo ,  but  denotes  only  an  approximation ;  as, 
Aliquid  pro  certo  habere  or  putare.  Ea  pro  falsis  ducit.  Sali.  Aliquem  pro  hoste 
habere.  Caes. — So  also  in  with  the  ablative ;  as,  Nihil  prceter  virtutem  in  b£nis 
habere.  Cic.  Aliquem  in  numero  hostium  ducere.  Cic. — and  the  ablative  with¬ 
out  in;  as,  Uti  vos  affinium  loco  ducerem.  Sail. — So  also  e  or  ex  with  the  abla¬ 
tive;  as,  (  Ut)  faceret  quod  e  republica  fldegwe  sua  duceret.  Liv. — Sometimes 
(2)  the  genitive;  as,  Officii  duxit  exorare  filice  patrem.  Suet.  (See  §  211,  R.  8,  (3.) 
So  with  a  genitive  or'  an  ablative  of  price  or  value;  as,  Putare  aliquem  nihilo. 
Cic.  Non  habeo  nauci  Marsum  augurem.  Enn — and  sometimes  (3)  a  dative;  as. 
Quando  tu  me  habes  despicatui.  Plaut. : — or  an  adverb ;  as,  Mgre  habuit,  filium  id 
pro  parente  ausum.  Liv.  And  (4)  ad  or  in  with  the  accusative;  as,  Loca  ad 
hibernacula  legere.  Liv.  Aliquem  in  Patres  legere.  Id.:  or  (5)  the  genitive 
depending  on  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  etc.;  as,  Qui  servitutem  deditionis 
nomine  appellant.  Caes. 

Rem.  2.  Many  other  verbs,  besides  their  proper  accusative,  take  a 
second,  denoting  a  purpose,  time,  character,  etc. 

Such  are  do,  tribuo ,  sumo ,  peto,  pono,  adjungo ,  ascribo ,  cognosco ,  accio ,  fingo , 
significo,  etc.;  as, 

Quare  ejus  fugae,  comitem  me  adjungerem.  Cic..  Hominum  opinio  socium  me 
ascribit  tuis  laudibus.  Id.  Quos  ego  sim  toties  jam  dedignata  maritos.  Virg. 
Hunc  igitur  regem  agnoscimus,  qui  'Philippum  dedignatur  patrem  ?  Curt.  Filiam 
tuam  mihi  uxorem  posco.  Plaut.  Petit  hanc  Saturnia  munus.  Ovid.  Such 
constructions  may  often  be  referred  to  apposition,  or  to  an  ellipsis  of  esse. 

§  231.  Verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  and  celo 
(to  conceal),  are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person, 
the  other  of  the  thing ;  as, 

Hoc  te  vehementer  rogo.  Cic.  Illud  te  oro,  ut,  etc.  Id.  Rogo  te  nummos, 
I  ask  you  for  money.  Mart.  Posce  deos  veniam,  Ask  favor  of  the  gods.  Virg. 
Quum  legent  quis  musicam  ddcuerit  Epamlnondam,  When  they  shall  read  who 
taught  Epaminondas  music.  Nep.  Antigonus  iter  omnes  celat,  Antigonus  con¬ 
ceals  his  route  from  all.  Id.  Deprecari  deos  mala.  Sen.  Quotidie  Ccesar 
JEduos  frumentum  flagitare.  Caes.  Multa  deos  brans.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  This  rule  includes  the  verbs  of  asking  and  demanding,  flagito,  efflagito , 
obsecro,  oro ,  exoro,  contendo ,  percontor ,  posco ,  r&posco,  consulo,  pr£cor,  deprecor ,  rogo, 
and  interrdgo ,  which,  with  the  accusative  of  the  person,  take  the  accusative  of  the  neuter 
pronouns  hoc,  id,  illud,  quod,  quid,  more  frequently  than  that  of  a  substantive ;  of  teach¬ 
ing,  doceo,  Udoceo,  dedoceo,  and  erudio,  which  last  has  two  accusatives  only  in  the  poets. 
Admoneo  and  consulo  are  rarely  found  with  two  accusatives ;  as,  Consulam  hanc  rem 
amicos.  Plaut.  Eam  rem  nos  Idcus  admonuit.  Sali. 

Rem.  2.  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  person,  verbs  of  asking  and  de¬ 
manding  often  take  the  ablative  with  ab  or  ex ;  as,  Non  debebam  abs  te  has  litb- 
ras  poscere.  Cic.  Veniam  ai'emus  ab  ipso.  Virg.  Istud  vblebam  ex  te  percontari. 

Plaut. 


20* 


234 


SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


§  232, 


Rem.  3.  ( a .)  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  thing,  the  ablative  with  de  is 
sometimes  used ;  as,  Sic  ego  te  eisdem  de  rebus  interrogem.  Cic.  De  itinere 
hostium  senatum  eddcet.  Sali.  Bassus  noster  me  de  hoc  libro  celavit.  Cic.  Cf.  $  229, 
R.  5,  ( h .) — ( b .)  Sometimes  also  instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  thing  an  infini¬ 
tive,  or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause  is  used ;  as,  Deos  precari  debetis ,  ut 
urbem  defendant.  Cic.  Ut  ddceam  Rullum  posthac  tacere.  Id.  Docui  id  non 
fieri  posse.  Id.  Ddceant  eum  qui  vir  Sex.  Roscius  fuerit.  Id. — (c.)  With  verbs 
of  teaching,  the  instrument  by  means  of  which  the  art  is  practised  is  put  in 
the  ablative;  as,  Aliquem  fidibus  ddcere.  Cic.  *  Docere  aliquem  armis.  Liv. 
Literce  may  be  used  either  in  the  accusative  or  in  the  ablative;  as,  Te  literas 
doceo.  Cic.  Doctus  Greeds  liteds.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  Some  verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  are  not  followed  by  two  ac¬ 
cusatives;  as,  exigo ,  pSto,  postulo ,  queero ,  scitor ,  sciscitor ,  which,  with  the  accusative  of 
the  thing,  take  an  ablative  of  the  person  with  the  preposition  o&,  or  ex;  imbuo ,  in¬ 
stituo ,  instruo ,  etc.,  which  are  sometimes  used  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  generally 
without  a  preposition,  and  are  sometimes  otherwise  construed  ;  as;  InstituSre  aliquem 
ad  dicendum.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  Many  active  verbs  with  the  accusative  of  the  person, 
take  also  an  accusative  denoting  in  what  respect  or  to  what  degree 
the  action  of  the  verb  is  exerted. 

(b.)  The  accusative  of  degree,  etc.,  is  commonly  nihil ,  a  neuter  pronoun,  or 
a  neuter  adjective  of  quantity;  as,  Non  quo  me  aliquid  juvare  posses.  Cic. 
Pauca  pro  tempore  milites  hortatus .  Sail.  Id  adjuta  me.  Ter.  Neque  est  te  fal¬ 
lere  quidquam.  Virg.  Cf.  §  232,  (3.) 

Rem.  6.  By  a  similar  construction,  genus  and  secus ,  ‘  sex,’  are  sometimes  used 
in  the  accusative,  instead  of  the  genitive  of  quality;  as,  Nullas  hoc  genus  vigi¬ 
lias  vigilarunt .  Gell.  So,  Omnes  muliebre  secus.  Suet.  Cf.  211,  R.  6,  (4.) 

§  232.  (1.)  Some  neuter  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accusa¬ 

tive  of  kindred  signification  to  their  own  ;  as, 

Vitam  jucundam  vivere ,  To  live  a  pleasant  life.  Plaut.  Mirum  somniavi 
somnium,  I  have  dreamed  a  wonderful  dream.  Id.  Furere  hunc  furorem. 
Virg.  Istam  pugnam  pugnabo.  Plaut.  Pugnare  dicenda  Musis  proelia.  Hor. 
Lusum  insdlentem  ludere.  Id.  Si  non  servitutem  serviat.  Plaut.  Queror  haud 
faciles  questus.  Stat.  Juravi  verissimum  jusjurandum.  Cic.  Ignotas  jubet  ire 
vias.  Val.  Flacc.  So,  also,  Ire  exsequias,  To  go  to  a  funeral.  Ter.  Ire  suppe¬ 
tias,  To  go  to  one’s  assistance.  Ire  infitias,  To  deny.  This  expression  is 
equivalent  to  infitior ,  and  may  like  that  take  an  accusative ;  as,  Si  hoc  unum 
adjunxero ,  quod  nemo  eat  infitias.  Nep. :  or  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive; 
as,  Neque  infitias  imus  Siciliam  nostram  provinciam  esse.  Liv.  Ut  suum  gau¬ 
dium  gauderemus.  Coei,  ad  Cic.  Proficisci  magnum  iter.  Cic.  Pollux  itque 
reditque  viam.  Virg.  This  accusative  is  usually  qualified  by  an  adjective. 

(2.)  Verbs  commonly  neuter  are  sometimes  used  transitively, 
and  are  then  followed  by  an  accusative. 

Accusatives  are  thus  used  with  6leo  and  sdpio ,  and  their  compounds,  reddleo , 
resipio;  as,  Olet  unguenta,  He  smells  of  perfumes.  Ter.  Olere  peregrinum, 
To  have  a  foreign  smell.  Cic.  Orationes  reddlentes  antiquitatem.  Id.  Mella 
herbam  eam  sapiunt ,  The  honey  tastes  of  that  herb.  Plin.  Uva  picem  resipiens. 
Id.  So,  Sitio  honores.  Cic.  -Carnem  pluit.  Liv.  Claudius  aleam  studiosissime 
lusit.  Suet.  Erumpere  diu  coercitam  iram  in  hostes.  Liv.  Libros  evigilare.  Ovid. 
Praeire  verba.  Liv.  Nec  vox  hominem  sdnat.  Virg.  Sudare  mella.  Id.  Morien- 
tem  nomine  clamat.  Id.  Quis  post  vina  gravem  militiam  aut  pauperiem  crepat  f 
Hor.  Omnes  una  manet  nox.  Id.  Ingrati  animi  crimen  horreo.  Cic.  Ego  meas 
queror  fortunas.  Plaut.  Vivere  Bacchanalia.  Juv.  Pastorem  saltaret  uti  Cy- 
clopa,  rdgdbat.  Hor.  So  the  passive;  Nunc  agrestem  Cyclbpa  mdvetur.  Id. 
Xerxes  quum  mare  ambulavisset ,  terram  navigasset.  Cic.  Qui  stadium  currit.  Id. 
Communia  jura  migrare .  Id.  Te  vdlo  colldqui.  Plaut.  Ea  disserere  malui.  Cic. 


§233. 


SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


235 


Cory  don  ardebat  Alexin.  Virg.  Stygias  juravimus  undas.  Ovid.  N dvigat  aequor. 
Virg.  Currimus  sequor.  Id.  Pascuntur  sylvas.  Id. 

Note  1,-  Accusatives  are  found  in  like  manner  after  amoxilo ,  calleo ,  dbleo ,  Equito ,  fleo, 
gaudeo ,  gximo,  glorior ,  horreo ,  laetor ,  latro,  nato ,  palleo ,  paveo ,  p&reo,  dcp&reo ,  procedo , 
qu&ror ,  rideo,  sileo,  sibilo,  taceo ,  trZmo,  trepido ,  vado,  vinio,  etc. 

(3.)  Neuter  verbs  and  sometimes  adjectives  also  may  be  fol¬ 
lowed  by  an  accusative  denoting  respect ,  or  <fe- 

the  feeling,  condition,  etc.,  is  manifested ;  as, 

JVW/  ?a5oro.  Cic.  iVwwi  id  lacrimat  virgo  ?  Does  the  maid  weep  on  that  ac¬ 
count?  Ter.  Jfwfta  alia  peccat.  Cic.  Quicquid  delirant  reges,  plectuntur 
Achivi.  Hor.  JVec  tu  id  indignari  posses.  Liv.  Illud  mi/ii  laetandum  video.  Cic. 
Illud  m/de  assentior.  Id.  Idem  gloriari.  Id.  Hsec  glorians.  Liv.  Hoc 
unum.  Hor. — So,  Id  dperam  do,  I  strive  for  this.  Ter.  Consilium  petis , 
quid  tibi  sim  auctor.  Cic.  Quod  quidam  auctores  sunt,  Which  is  attested  by 
some  authors.  Liv.  Nil  nostri  misereret  Virg. — Nihil  Romance  plebis  similis. 
Liv.  Senatus  nihil  sane  intentus.  Sail.  These  limiting  accusatives  have  com¬ 
monly  the  force  of  adverbs,  particularly  nihil,  which  is  used  like  an  emphatic 
non  in  the  sense  of  ‘  in  no  way,’  1  in  no  respect.’  So  non  nihil,  1  to  some  extent,’ 

1  in  some  measure.’ 

Note  2.  In  the  above  and  similar  examples,  the  prepositions  ob ,  propter,  per,  ad,  etc., 
may  often  be  supplied.  This  construction  of  neuter  verbs  is  most  common  with  the 
neuter  accusatives  id,  quid,  quidquam ,  aliquid,  quicquid,  quod,  nihil,  nonnihil ,  Idem, 
illud ,  tantum,  quantum ,  unum ,  multa,  pauca,  alia,  cetera,  omnia ,  etc.  Cf.  §  256,  R.  16,  N. 

§  333«  Many  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accusative  depend¬ 
ing  upon  a  preposition  with  which  they  are  compounded. 

(1.)  Active  verbs  compounded  with  trans ,  ad,  and  circum,  have 
sometimes  two  accusatives,  one  depending  upon  the  verb,  the  other 
upon  the  preposition  ;  as, 

Omnem  equitatum  pontem  transducit,  He  leads  all  the  cavalry  over  the  bridge. 
Cses.  Agesilaus  Hellespontum  copias  trajecit.  Nep.  Petr  eius  jusjurandum  ad¬ 
igit  Afranium.  Cses.  Roscillum  Pompeius  omnia  sua  praesidia  circumduxit.  Id. 
So,  Pontus  scopulos  superjacit  undam.  Virg.  So,  also,  adverto  and  induco  with 
animum ;  as,  Id  animum  advertit.  Cses.  Id  quod  animum  induxerat  paulisper 
non  tenuit.  Cic.  So,  also,  injicio  in  Plautus — Ego  te  manum  injiciam. 

(2.)  Some  other  active  verbs  take  an  accusative  in  the  passive 
voice  depending  upon  their  prepositions ;  as, 

Magicas  accingier  artes,  To  prepare  oneself  for  magic  arts.  Virg.  In  prose 
writers  the  ad  is  in  such  cases  repeated;  as,  accingi  ad  consulatum.  Liv. 
Classis  circumvehitur  arcem.  Id.  Quod' anguis  ddmi  vectem  circumjectus  fuisset, 
Cic.  Locum  prcetervectus  sum.  Id. 

(3.)  Many  neuter  verbs,  especially  verbs  of  motion,  or  of  rest  in  a 
place,  when  compounded  with  prepositions  which  govern  an  accusa¬ 
tive,  become  transitive,  and  accordingly  take  an  accusative ;  as, 

Gentes  quae  mare  illud  adjacent,  The  nations  which  border  upon  that  sea.  Nep 
Obequitare  agmen.  Curt.  Incedunt  mcestos  locos.  Tac.  Transilui  flammas.  Ovid. 
Succedere  tecta.  Cic.  Ludorum  diebus,  qui  cognitionem  intervenerant.  Tac. 
Adire  provinciam.  _  Suet.  Caveat  ne  proelium  ineat.  Cic.  Ingredi  iter  pedibus, 
Cic.  Epicuri  horti  quos  modo  praeteribamus.  Id. 

Note.  To  this  rule  belong  many  of  the  compounds  of  ambulo,  cedo,  curro,  eo,  Zqulto, 
fluo,  gradior,  labor,  no  and  nato,  repo ,  salio ,  scando,  vado ,  vShor ,  vSnio ,  volo  ; — cubo, 
jaceo ,  sideo,  sisto,  sto ,  etc.,  with  the  prepositions  included  in  §  224,  and  with  ex. 


236 


SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


§234 


Remark  1.  Some  neuter  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions 
which  govern  an  ablative,  in  like  manner  become  transitive,  and  are 
followed  by  an  accusative ;  as, 

Neminem  conveni ,  I  met .  with  no  one.  Cic.  Qui  societatem  coieris.  Id. 
Aversari  honores.  Ovid.  Ursi  arborem  aversi  derepunt.  Plin.  Edormi  crapulam. 
Cic.  Egressus  exsilium.  Tac.  Evaditque  celer  ripam.  Virg.  Excedere  nume¬ 
rum.  Tac.  Exire  limen.  Ter.  Tibur  aquae  fertile  prcejluunt.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  After  verbs  both  active  and  neuter,  compounded  with 
prepositions  which  take  an  accusative,  the  preposition  is  often  repeat¬ 
ed,  or  one  of  similar  signification  is  used ;  as, 

Caesar  se  ad  neminem  adjunxit.  Cic.  Multitudinem  trans  Rhenum  in  Galliam 
transducer  e.  Caes. — In  Galliam  invasit  Antonius.  Cic.  Ad  me  adire  quosdam 
memini.  Id.  Orator  peragrat  per  animos  hdminum.  Id.  Ne  in  senatum  accede¬ 
rem.  Id.  Regina  ad  templum  incessit.  Virg.  Juxta  genitorem  adstat  Lavinia.  Id. 
Fines  extra  quos  egredi  non  possim.  Cic.  A  dative  instead  of  the  accusative 
often  follows  such  compounds,  according  to  §  224.  Circum  is  not  repeated. 

Note.  Some  verbal  nouns  and  verbal  adjectives  in  bundus  are 
followed  by  an  accusative,  like  the  transitive  verbs  from  which  they 
are  derived ;  as, 

Quid  tibi  huc  receptio  ad  te  est  meum  virum  ?  Wherefore  do  you  receive  my 
husband  hither  to  you?  Plaut.  Quid  tibi,  malum,  me,  aut  quid  egoagam,  curatio 
’st?  Id.  Quid  tibi  hanc  aditio  est  ?  Id.  Quid  tibi  hanc  notio  est ,  inquam ,  amicam 
meam?  Quid  tibi  hanc  digito  tactio  ’st?  Id.  Hanno  vitabundus  castra  hostium 
consiilesque.  Liv.  Mithridates  Romanum  meditabundus  bellum.  Just.  Mira¬ 
bundi  vjmam  speciem.  Liv,  Populabundus  agros.  Sisenn.  Carnificem  imagina¬ 
bundus.  App. 

§  234.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice  has  the  same  govern¬ 
ment  as  in  the  active,  except  that  the  accusative  of  the  active 
voice  becomes  the  nominative  of  the  passive. 

Note  1.  The  accusative  of  the  person  with  the  infinitive,  after  verbs  of  saying 
and  commanding ,  may  become  the  subject  of  the  passive  voice;  as,  Active, 
Pico  regem  esse  justum ; — Passive,  Rex  dicitur  justus  esse.  Act.  Jubeo  te  re- 
dire  ; — Pass.  Juberis  redire :  the  construction  in  the  passive  being  the  same  as 
though  re  gem  and  te  had  depended  immediately  upon  dico  and  jubeo.— dSo,  also, 
when  the  accusative  of  the  person  is  the  object  of  the  verb  and  the  infinitive 
stands  as  the  accusative  of  the  thing.  Cf.  §  270,  N. 

I.  When  a  verb,  which  in  the  active  voice  takes  an  accusative 
both  of  the  person  and  of  the  thing,  is  changed  to  the  passive  form, 
the  accusative  of  the  person  becomes  the  nominative,  and  the  accusa¬ 
tive  of  the  thing  is  retained  ;  as, 

Rogatus  est  sententiam,  He  was  asked  his  opinion.  Liv.  Interrogatus  causam. 
Tac.  Segetes  ali  mentale  debita  dives  poscebatur  humus.  Ovid.  Motus  ddceH 
gaudet  Ionicos  matura  virgo.  Hor.  Omnes  belli  artes  edoctus.  Liv.  Nosne  hoc 
celatos  tam  diu  f  Ter.  Multa  in  extis  mdnemur.  Cic. 

Note  2.  The  accusative  of  the  thing  after  doctus  and  edoctus  is  rare ;  and 
after  celari  it  is  generally  a  neuter  pronoun ;  as  hoc  or  id  celabar ;  of  this  I  was 
kept  in  ignorance ;  but  it  is  found  also  with  the  person  in  the  dative ;  as,  Id 
Alcibiadi  diutius  celari  non  potuit.  Nep.  Alcib.  5.  Celo ,  and  especially  its  pas¬ 
sive,  generally  takes  de  with  the  ablative. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Induo  and  exuo,  though  they  do  not  take  two  accusatives 
in  the  active  voice,  are  sometimes  followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  thing  in 


§  235.  SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  PREPOSITIONS.  237 

the  passive;  as,  Induitur  atras  vestes,  She  puts  on  sable  garments.  Ovid. 
Thoraca  indutus.  Virg.  Exuta  est  Roma  senectam.  Mart.  So  inducor  and  cin¬ 
gor ;  as,  Ferrum  cingitur.  Virg.  So  recingitur  anguem.  Ovid. 

(b.)  When  two  accusatives  follow  an  active  verb  compounded  with  trans , 
the  passive  retains  that  which  depends  upon  the  preposition ;  as,  Belgae  Rhenum 
antiquitus  transducti.  Cajs. 

Rem.  2.  The  future  passive  participle  in  the  neuter  gender  with  est ,  is  some¬ 
times,  though  rarely,  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as,  Multa  ndvis  rebus  quum  sit 
agendum.  Lucr.  Quam  (viam)  nobis  ingrediendum  est.  Cic. 

II.  Adjectives,  verbs,  and  perfect  participles,  are  sometimes  fol¬ 
lowed  by  an  accusative  denoting  the  part  to  which  their  signification 
relates;  as, 

Nudus  membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os  humeros^e  deo  similis.  Id. 
Cldri  genus.  Tac.  Tribuni  suam  vicem  anxii.  Liv.  Tremit  artus.  Virg.  Cetera 
parce  puer  bello.  Id.  Sibila,  colla  tumentem.  Id.  Expleri  mentem  nequit.  Id. 
Gryneus  eruitur  oculos.  Ovid.  Picti  scuta  Labici.  Virg.  Collis  frontem  leniter 
fastigatus.  Caes.  Animum  incensus.  Liv.  Oblitus  faciem  suo  cruore.  Tac. 

Remark  1.  In  this  construction  an  ablative  is  often  joined  with  the  perfect 
participle;  as,  Miles  fractus  membra  labore.  Hor.  Dexterum  genu  lapide 
ictus.  Suet.  Adversum  femur  tragula  graviter  ictus.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  This  is  a  Greek  construction,  and  is  usually  called  the  limiting  or 
Greek  accusative.  It  is  used  instead  of  an  ablative  of  limitation,  (§  250,)  and 
occurs  most  frequently  in  poetry. 

Rem.  3.  A  limiting  accusative  instead  of  the  ablative  is  found  also  in  a  few 
ordinary  expressions,  as  in  partim  (for  partem ),  vicem,  magnam  and  maximam 
partem ,  instead  of  magnd  or  maxima  ex  parte ,  or  the  adverb  fere ;  as,  Maxi- 
mam  partem  lacte  vivunt.  Cass.  Magnam  partem  ex  iambis  nostra  constat  oratio . 
Cic.  Livy  has  magna  pars ,  viz.  Numidae,  magna  pars  agrestes. — So  cetera  and 
reliqua  are  joined  to  adjectives  in  the  sense  of  ceteris ,  ‘for  the  rest,’  ‘in  other 
respects  ’ ;  as,  Proximum  regnum ,  cetera  egregium ,  ab  una  parte  haud  satis 
prosperum  fuit.  Liv.  So  cetera  similis ,  cetera  bdnus.  A  te  bis  terve  summum 
literas  accepi.  Cic. — So,  also,  in  the  expressions  id  tempdris ;  id,  hoc  or  idem 
cetatis ,  illud  horce ,  for  eo  tempdre ,  ea  cetate ,  etc. ;  id  genus ,  omne  genus ,  quod  genus . 

HI.  Some  neuter  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  are 
used  in  the  passive  voice,  the  accusative  becoming  the  subject,  ac¬ 
cording  to  the  general  rule  of  active  verbs;  as, 

Tertia  vivitur  cetas.  Ovid.  Bellum  militabitur.  Hor.  Dormitur  hiems.  Mart. 
Multa  peccantur.  Cic.  Aditur  Gnossius  Minos.  Sen.  Ne  ab  omnibus  circumsis¬ 
teretur \  Caes.  Hostes  invadi  posse.  Sail.  Campus  dbitur  aqua.  Ovid.  Plures  in- 
euntur  gratiae.  Cic.  Ea  res  siletur.  Id. 

ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  335.  (1.)  Twenty-six  prepositions  are  followed  by  the 

accusative. 

These  are  ad,  adversus  or  adversum ,  ant's,  apud ,  circd,  or  circum ,  circiter ,  c'is  or  citra, , 
contra ,  ergS. ,  extra,  infra,  intSr,  intra ,  juxta ,  Ob,  pSnSs,  pSr ,  post ,  pbnS,  prcetSr,  prOpS, 
proptSr ,  sScundum,  supra ,  trans,  ultra ;  as, 

Ad  templum  non  ceguce  Palladis  ibant, — to  the  temple.  Virg.  Adversus  hostes , 
Against  the  enemy.  Liv.  Germani  qui  cis  Rhenum  incdlunt, — this  side  the  Rhine. 
Caes.  Quum  tantum  resideat  intra  muros  mdli.  Cic.  Principio  rerum  imperium 
pines  reges  Irat.  Just.  Templum  pOnam  propter  aquam.  Virg.  Inter  agendum. 
Id.  Ante  ddmandum.  Id.  Respecting  the  signification  of  some  of  the  preced¬ 
ing  prepositions  see  §  195,  R.  6,  etc. 


238  SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  PREPOSITIONS.  §  235. 


Remark  1.  Cis  is  generally  used  with  names  of  places;  citra  with  other 
words  also;  as,  Cis  Taurum.  Cic.  Cis  Padum.  Liv.  Paucos  cis  menses.  Plaut. 
Citra  Veliam.  Cic.  Citra  satietatem ,  Not  to  satiety.  Col.  Citra  f dtigdtionem. 
Cels.  Citra  Trojana  tempdra.  Ovid. 

Rem.  2.  Inter ,  signifying  between, .  applies  to  two  accusatives  jointly,  and 
sometimes  to  a  single  plural  accusative;  as,  Inter  me  et  Scipionem.  Cic/  Inter 
natos  et  parentes.  Id.  Inter  nos ,  Among  ourselves.  Id.  Inter  falcarios ,  Among 
the  scythe-makers.  Cic.  When  it  denotes  time  it  signifies  during ,  and  more 
rarely  at ;  as,  Inter  ipsum  pugnas  tempus.  Liv.  Inter  ccenam.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Ante  and  post  are  commonly  joined  with  concrete  official  titles, 
when  used  to  indicate  time,  rather  than  with  the  corresponding  abstract  nouns ; 
as,  ante  or  post  Ciceronem  consulem,  rather  than  ante  or  post  consulatum  Cice¬ 
ronis. 

(2.)  In  and  sub ,  denoting  motion  or  tendency ,  are  followed  by  the 
accusative ;  denoting  situation ,  they  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Via  ducit  in  urbem,  The  way  conducts  into  the  city.  Virg.  Noster  in  te  amor. 
Cic.  Callimachi  epigramma  in  Cleombrotum  est — on  or  concerning  Cleombrotus. 
Id.  Exercitus  sub  jugum  missus  est ,  The  army  was  sent  under  the  yoke.  Caes. 
Magna  mei  sub  terras  ibii  imago.  Virg.  Media  in  urbe,  In  the  midst  of  the 
city.  Ovid.  In  his  fuit  Ariovistus.  Caes.  Bella  sub  Iliads  moenibus  gerere , 
To  wage  war  under  the  Trojan  walls.  Ovid.  Sub  nocte  silenti.  Virg. 

Rem.  4.  The  most  common  .significations  of  in,  with  the  accusative,  are, 
into ,  to,  towards ,  until ,  for,  against ,  about,  concerning, — with  the  ablative,  in,  on, 
upon,  among.  In  some  instances,  in  and  sub ,  denoting  tendency,  are  followed 
by  the  ablative,  and,  denoting  situation,  by  the  accusative ;  as,  In  conspectu 
meo  audet  venire.  Phaed.  Nationes  quos  in  amicitiam  populi  Romani ,  dltionem- 
que  essent.  Id.  Sub  jugo  dictator  hostes  misit.  Liv.  Hostes  sub  montem  conse¬ 
disse.  Caes. 

Rem.  5.  In  and  sub ,  in  different  significations,  denoting  neither  tendency  nor 
situation,  are  followed  sometimes  by  the  accusative,  and  sometimes  by  the 
ablative ;  as,  Amor  crescit  in  horas.  .Ovid.  Hostilem  in  modum.  Cic.  Quod  in 
bdno  servo  did  posset.  Id.  Sub  ed  conditione.  Ter.  Sub  poena  mortis.  Suet. 

Rem.  6.  In  expressions  relating  to  time,  sub,  denoting  at  or  in,  usually  takes 
the  ablative ;  as,  Sub  adventu  Romanorum.  Liv.  Sub  luce.  Ovid.  Sub  tempore. 
Lucan.  Denoting  near ,  about ,  just  before  or  just  after,  it  takes  the  accusative; 
as,  Sub  lucem.  Virg.  Sub  lumina  prima.  Hor.  Sub  hoc  herus  inquit.  Id. 

Rem.  i.  In  is  used  with  neuter  adjectives  in  the  accusative  in  forming  ad¬ 
verbial  phrases ;  as,  In  universum,  In  general.  In  totum ,  Wholly.  So,  in  plenum ; 
in  incertum;  in  tantum;  in  quantum;  in  majus;  in  melius;  in  omnia,  in  all  re¬ 
spects,  etc. 

(3.)  Super,  when  denoting  place  or  time,  is  followed  by  the  accusa¬ 
tive,  and  sometimes  poetically  by  the  ablative  ;  but  when  it  signifies 
on,  about,  or  concerning ,  it  takes  the  ablative.  With  the  accusative 
super  signifies  over ,  above ,  besides  or  in  addition  to ;  with  numerals, 
more  than ;  as, 

Super  Idbentem  culmina  tecti,  -Gliding  over  the  top  of  the  house.  Virg.  Super 
tres  modios.  Liv.  Super  morbum  etiam  fames  affecit  exercitum.  Id.  Super 
tenero  prosternit  gramme  corpus ,  He  stretches  his  body  on  the  tender  grass. 
Virg.  Multa  super  Priamo  rdgitans  super  Hectore  multa,  ....  concerning  Priam, 
etc.  Id. 

Rem.  8.  The  compound  desuper  is  found  with  the  accusative,  and  insuper 
with  the  accusative  and  the  ablative. 

(4.)  Subter  generally  takes  the  accusative,  but  sometimes,  in 
poetry,  the  ablative ;  as, 

Subter  terras,  Under  the  earth.  Liv.  Subter  densa  testudine.  Virg. 


§  236.  SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  AND  SPACE. 


239 


(5.)  Clam  is  followed  by  either  the  accusative  or  the  ablative ;  as, 

Clamv os,  Without  your  knowledge.  Cic.  'Clam  patrem.  Ter.  Clam  matrem 
suam.  Plaut.  Clam  vobis.  Cass.  Neque  potest  clam  me  esse.  Plaut.  Clam 
uxore  mea.  Id.  Its  diminutive  clanculum  is  once  followed  by  the  accusative, 
clanculum  patres.  Ter. 

Rem.  9.  The  adverbs  versus  or  versum  and  usque  are  sometimes  annexed 
to  an  accusative,  principally  of  place,  which  depends  on  ad  or  in,  and  sometimes 
the  preposition  is  omitted;  as,  Ad  Oceanum  versus  proficisci.  Caes.  Fugam 
ad  se  versum.  Sail.  In  Galliam  versus  castra  movere .  Id. —  Usque  ad  Numan¬ 
tiam.  Cic.  Usque  in  Pamphyliam.  Id.  Ad  noctem  usque.  Plaut. — Brundusium 
versus.  Cic.  Terminos  usque  Libyce.  Just.  Usque  Ennam  profecti.  Cic.  Versus 
is  always  placed  after  the  accusative. —  Usque  occurs  more  rarely  with  sub  and 
irans  with  the  accusative;  as,  Trans  Alpes  usque  transfertur.  Cic.  Usque 
sub  extremum  brumae  imbrem. —  Versus  also  rarely  follows  ab ,  and  usque 
either  ab  or  ex  with  the  ablative;  as,  Ab  septemtrione  versus.  Varr.  A  funda¬ 
mento  usque  movisti  mare.  Plaut.  Usque  ex  ultima  Syria.  Cic.  Usque  a  pueritia. 
Ter.  Usque  a  Romulo.  Cic.  Usque  a  mane  ad  vesperum.  Plaut. 

%  Rem.  10.  Prepositions  are  often  used  without  a  noun  depending  upon  them, 
but  such  noun  may  usually  be  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  Multis  post  annis, 
i.  e.  post  id  tempus.  Cic.  Circum  Concordiae ,  scii,  aedem.  Sali. 

Rem.  11.  The  accusative,  in  many  constructions,  is  supposed  to  depend  on  a 
preposition  understood;  as,  Quid  opus  est  plura ?  i.  e.  propter  quid ?  why?  i.  q. 
cur  ?  or  quare  ?  Cic.  So,  Quid  me  ostentem  ?  Id.  But  it  is  not  easy,  in  every 
case,  to  say  what  preposition  should  be  supplied.  For  the  accusative  without 
a  preposition  after  neuter  verbs,  see  §  232.  For  the  accusative  of  limitation, 
see  §  234,  II. 

ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  AND  SPACE. 

§  336.  Nouns  denoting  duration  of  time,  or  extent  of  space, 
are  put,  after  adjectives  and  verbs,  in  the  accusative,  and  some¬ 
times  after  verbs  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Acc.  Appius  caecus  multos  annos  fuit,  Appius  was  blind  many  years.  Cic. 
Biduum  Laodiceae  fui.  Id.  Dies  totos  de  virtute  disserunt.  Id.  Te  jam  annum 
audientem  Cratippum.  Id. — Decreverunt  intercalarium  quinque  et  quadraginta 
dies  longum.  Id. —  Quum  abessem  ab  Amano  iter  unius  diei.  Id.  Tres  pateat  coeli 
spatium  non  amplius  ulnas.  Virg.  (Cf.  §  256,  R.  6.)  A  portu  stadia  centum  et 
vlginti  processimus.  Cic. — Duas  fossas  quindecim  pedes  latas  perduxit, — two 
ditches  fifteen  feet  broad.  Cass.  Fossae  quinos  pedes  altxe.  Id.  Foramina  longa 
pedes  tres  semis.  Cato.  Orbem  olearium  crassum  digitos  sex  facito.  Id. — 
Abl.  Vixit  annis  undetriginta.  Suet.  Quatuordecim  annis  exsilium  toleravit. 
Tac.  Triginta  annis  vixit  Panaetius.  Cic. — Exercitus  Romanus  tridui  itinere  ab¬ 
fuit  ab  amne  Tanai.  Tac.  AEsculapii  templum  quinque  millibus  passuum  dis¬ 
tans.  Liv. 

Note  1.  The  ablative  denoting  extent  of  time  and  space  is  rarely  used  by 
Cicero,  and  less  frequently  than  the  accusative  by  other  writers. 

Note  2.  The  accusative  denoting  extent  of  space  sometimes  follows  the  ab- 
verbs  longe,  alte,  etc.;  as.  Campestris  locus  alte  duos  pedes  et  semissem  inf 6- 
diendus  est.  Colum.  Vercingetorix  locum  castris  deligit  ab  Avarico  longe  millia 
passuum  sedecim.  Caes. 

Note  3.  (a.)  Old,  in  reference  to  the  time  which  a  person  has  lived,  is 
expressed  in  Latin  by  ndius,  with  an  accusative  of  the  time;  as,  Decessit 
Alexander  mensem  unam,  annos  tres  et  triginta  natus.  Just.  (5.)  A  person’s 
age  may  also  be  expressed  without  ndtus  by  a  genitive  of  the  time  closely 
connected  with  his  name,  according  to  §  2il,  R.  6;  as,  Alexander  annorum 
trium  et  triginta  decessit,  (c.)  Older  or  younger  than  a  certain  age  is  ex¬ 
pressed  by  prefixing  to  the  accusative  or  genitive  of  the  definite  age  the  ad- 


240 


SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  OF  PLACE. 


§237, 


verbs  plus  or  minus ,  or  the  adjectives  major  or  minor,  either  with  or  without 
quam.  See  §  256,  R.  6  and  7. — Sometimes,  also,  the  ablative  depends  on  the 
comparative;  as,  Minor  viginti  quinque  annis  natus.  Nep.  Minor  triginta  annis 
natu.  Cic.  Biennio  quam  nos  major.  Id.  Cf.  §  256,  R.  16.  (1.) 

Remark  1.  Nouns  denoting  time  or  space,  used  to  limit  other  nouns ,  are  put 
in  the  genitive  or  ablative.  See  §  211,  R.  6. 

Rem.  2.  A  term  of  time  not  yet  completed  may  be  expressed  by  an  ordinal 
number;  as,  Nos  vicesimum  jam  diem  patimur  hebescere  aciem  horum  auctori¬ 
tatis.  Cic.  Punico  bello  duodecimum  annum  Italia  urebatur.  Liv.  Hence  in 
the  passive,  Nunc  tertia  vivitur  setas.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  or  ablative  of  space  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  a 
genitive  depending  on  it  remains;  as,  Castra  qua  aberant  bidui,  scii,  spatium  or 
spatio.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  To  denote  a  place  by  its  distance  from  another,  the  ablative  is 
commonly  used;  as,  Millibus  passuum  sex  a  Casaris  castris  consedit.  Caes.;  but 
sometimes  the  accusative;  as,  Tria  passuum  millia  ab  ipsa  urbe  castra  pdsuit. 
Liv.  The  only  words  used  for  this  purpose  in  the  ablative  alone  are  spdtio  and* 
intervallo ;  as,  Quindecim  ferme  millium  spatio  castra  ab  Tarento  posuit.  Id. 

Note  4.  For  abhinc  and  a  cardinal  number,  with  the  accusative  or  ablative 
of  past  time,  see  §  253,  R.  2.  For  the  ablative  denoting  difference  of  time  or 
space,  see  §  256,  R.  16. 

Rem.  5.  A  preposition  is  sometimes  expressed  before  an  accusative  of  time 
or  space,  but  it  generally  modifies  the  meaning;  as,  Quern  per  decem  annos 
aluimus ,  ....  during  ten  years.  Cic. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  place  from  which  the  distance  is  reckoned  is  not  men¬ 
tioned,  ab  is  sometimes  placed  before  the  ablative  of  distance,  as  if  this  de¬ 
pended  on  the  preposition ;  as,  A  millibus  passuum  duobus  castra  posuerunt ,  Two 
miles  from  the  place,  or,  Two  miles  off.  Caes. 

Rem.  7.  An  accusative  of  weight  also  occurs  when  expressed  by  libram  or 
libras  in  connection  with  pondo.  Cf.  §  211,  R.  6.  (4.) 

ACCUSATIVE  OF  PLACE. 

§  237.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 
name  of  the  town  in  which  the  motion  ends  is  put  in  the  accusa¬ 
tive  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Regulus  Carthaginem  rediit,  Regulus  returned  to  Carthage.  Cic.  Capuam 
flectit  iter,  He  turns  his  course  to  Capua.  Liv.  Calpurnius  Romam  proficisci¬ 
tur.  Sail.  Romam  erat  nuncidtum.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  accusative,  in  like  manner,  is  used  after  iter  with  sum,  ha¬ 
beo,  etc. ;  as,  Iter  est  mihi  Lanuvium.  Cic.  Casarem  iter  habere  Capuam.  Id. 
And  even  after  sum  alone;  as,  Omnia  illa  municipia ,  qua  sunt  a  Vibone  Brundi¬ 
sium.  Cic.  So  with  a  verbal  noun;  as,  Adventus  Romam.  Liv.  Reditus  Ro¬ 
mam.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  preposition  to  be  supplied  is  in,  denoting  to  or  into ,  which 
is  sometimes  expressed ;  as,  In  Ephesum  dbii.  Plaut.  Ad,  before  the  name 
of  a  town,  denotes  direction  towards  it;  as,  Iter  dirigere  ad  Mutinam.  Cic.  ;  and 
also  its  vicinity;  as,  Addlescentulus  miles  profectus  sum  ad  Cdpuam;  i.  e.  in. cas¬ 
tra  ad  Cdpuam.  Id.  So,  Lalius  cum  classe  ad  Brundisium  venit.  Caes.  Casar 
ad  Genevam  pervenit.  Id.  Quum  ego  ad  Heracleam  accederem.  Cic. 

(b.)  When  urbs,  oppidum,  locus ,  etc.,  follow  the  names  of  towns  as  apposi¬ 
tions,  they  generally  take  a  preposition ;  as,  Demaratus  se  contulit  Tarquinios ,  in 
urbem  Etruria  florentissimam.  Cic.  Ad  Cirtam  oppidum  iter  constituunt.  Sali. — 
So  also  when  the  name  of  the  town  is  qualified  by  an  adjective ;  as,  Magnum 


§  238.  SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES,  ETC.  241 


iter  ad  doctas  proficisci  cogor  Athenas.  Prop.  But  the  poets  and  later  prose 
writers  sometimes  omit  the  preposition ;  as,  Ovid,  Her.  2,  83. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  accusative,  a  dative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely, 
used;  as,  Carthagini  nuncios  mittam.  Hor.  Cf.  §  225,  IV.  and  R.  2. 

Rem.  4.  Domus  in  both  numbers,  and  rus  in  the  singular,  are  put 
in  the  accusative,  like  names  of  towns ;  as, 

Ite  domum,  Go  home.  Virg.  Galli  domos  abierant, — had  gone  home.  Liv.  Rus 
ibo ,  I  will  go  into  the  country.  Ter. 

Note,  (u.)  When  domus  is  limited  by  a  genitive  or  a  possessive  adjective 
pronoun,  it  sometimes  takes  a  preposition:  with  other  adjectives,  the  preposi¬ 
tion  is  generally  expressed ;  as,  Non  introeo  in  nostram  domum.  Plaut.  Venisse 
in  domum  Leccae.  Cic.  Ad  eam  domum  profecti  sunt.  Id.  In  domos  superas 
scandere  cura  fuit.  Ovid.  Rarely,  also,  when  not  limited ;  as,  Socrates  philoso¬ 
phiam  in  domos  introduxit.  Cic.  So,  larem  suum.  App.,  or  ad  larem  suum.  Cic. 
Caricas  in  Albense  rus  inferre.  Plin.  Quum  in  sua  rura  venerunt.  Cic.  With 
the  possessor’s  name  in  the  genitive,  either  ddmum  or  in  domum  is  used ;  as, 
Pomponii  domum  venisse.  Cic.  In  domum  Medii  tela  inferuntur.  Liv. 

( b .)  Domus  is  sometimes  used  in  the  accusative  after  a  verbal  noun;  as, 
Domum  reditionis  spe  sublata.  Caes.  So,  Itio  domum.  Cic.  Concursus  domum . 
Caes.  Cf.  R.  1. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  Before  the  names  of  countries  and  of  all  other  places  in  which 
the  motion  ends,  except  those  of  towns,  and  domus  and  rus,  the  preposition  is 
commonly  used;  as,  Ex  Asia  transis  in  Europam.  Curt.  Te  in  Epirum  venisse 
gaudeo.  Cic.  But  it  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Deveniunt  speluncam.  Virg. 
Devenere  locos.  Id.  Tumulum  antiquae  Cereris  sedemque  sacratam  venimus.  Id. 
Ibis  Cecropios  portus.  Ovid.  So,  also,  before  names  of  countries,  especially 
those  ending  in  us ;  as,  ^Egyptus,  Bosporus,  Chersdnesus,  Epirus,  Peloponnesus , 
etc.  So,  also,  Illyricum  profectus.  Cass.  Macedoniam  pervenit.  Liv.  Africam 
transiturus.  Id.  So,  Tacitus  construes  even  names  of  nations,  when  used,  as 
they  often  are,  for  those  of  countries;  as,  Ductus  inde  Cangos  exercitus.  Iberos 
ad  patrium  regnum  pervadit.  So,  Virgil,  Nos  ibimus  Afros. — Pliny  has,  Insulas 
Rubri  Maris  navigant. 

(5.)  Before  the  names  of  small  islands  the  preposition  is  frequently  omitted; 
as,  Pausaniam  cum  classe  Cyprum  miserunt.  Nep. :  but  rarely  before  "the  names 
of  the  larger  islands ;  as,  Sardinia ,  Britannia,  Creta,  Euboea,  Sicilia. 

(c.)  Before  accusatives  of  any  words  denoting  locality  after  verbs  of  motion, 
the  poets  omit  the  preposition;  as,  Italiam — Ldvinidque  venit  lltora.  Virg. — 
The  old  accusative  foras  is  used,  like  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place 
whither,  while  foris  denotes  the  place  where ;  as,  Vade  fbras.  Mart.  Exit  fo¬ 
ras.  Plaut. 

ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES,  ADVERBS, 
AND  INTERJECTIONS. 

§288.  1.  (a.)  The  adjectives  propior  and  proximus ,  with 
their  adverbs  propius  and  proxime ,  like  their  primitive  prope , 
are  often  joined  with  the  accusative ;  as, 

Ipse  propior  montem  'suos  collocat.  Sali.  Crassus  proximus  mare  Oceanum 
Memarat.  Caes. — Libyes  propius  mare  Africum  agitabant.  Sali.  Proxime  His¬ 
paniam  Mauri  sunt.  Id. 

(b.)  The  adverbs  pridie  and  postridie  are  also  often  followed  by  the  accusa¬ 
tive;  as,  Pridie  eum  diem.  Cic.  Pridie  idus.  Id.  Postridie  ludos.  Id. — (c.)  An 
accusative  sometimes  follows  intus  and  edminus;  as,  Intus  domum.  Plaut. 
Agrestes  edminus  ire  sues,  scil.  in.  Prop. 

21 


242 


SYNTAX. - SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE. 


§  239. 


Remark  1.  The  accusative  with  pridie  and  postridie  is  by  some  referred  to 
ante  and  post  understood.  For  the  genitive  after  these  words,  see  §  212,  R.  4, 
N.  6. — Respecting  versus ,  usque ,  exadversus  (-um )  and  secus  with  the  accusative, 
see  §  195,  R.  3:  and  §  235,  R.  3. 

Rem.  2.  The  adverb  bene,  by  the  elipsis  of  valere  jubeo,  is  sometimes  followed 
by  the  accusative  in  forms  of  drinking  health;  as,  Bene  vos,  bene  nos,  bene  te, 
bene  me,  bene  nostram  etiam  Stephanium !  Plaut.  Bene  Messalam,  a  health  to 
Messala.  Tibuli.  It  is  also  construed  with  the  dative.  See  §  228,  1. 

2.  In  exclamations,  the  noun  or  pronoun  which  marks  the  object 
of  the  feeling  is  put  in  the  accusative  either  with  or  without  the  inter¬ 
jections,  0  !  ah  !  heu  !  eheu  !  ecce  !  en  !  hem  !  pro  !  or  vce  /as, 

En  quatuor  aras !  ecce  duas  tibi  Daphni !  Behold  four  altars !  lo,  two  for 
thee,  Daphnis!  Virg.  Eccum!  eccos!  eccillum!  for  ecce  eum !  ecce  eos !  ecce 
ilium!  Plaut.  0  praeclarum  custodem  !  Cic.  Heu  me  inf  elicem  !  Ter.  Pro  Deum 
hdminumque  f idem !  Cic.  Ah  me,  me!  Oatull.  Eheu  me  miserum !  Ter.  Hem 
astutias  !  Id.  Vce  te  !  Plaut.  Vce  me!  Sen.  Miseram  me!  Ter.  Hominem  gra¬ 
vem  et  civem  egregium  !  Cic.  Cf.  §  228,  3. 

Note.  The  accusative  after  interjections  is  supposed  to  depend  on  some 
verb  of  emotion  to  be  supplied. 


SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE. 

§  S33.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  put  in  the  ac¬ 
cusative  ;  as, 

Moleste  Pompeium  id  ferre  constabat ,  That  Pompey  took  that  ill,  was  evident. 
Cic.  Eos  hoc  nomine  appellari  fas  est.  Id.  Miror  te  ad  me  nihil  scribere , 
I  wonder  that  you  do  not  write  to  me.  Cn.  Mag.  in  Cic.  Campos  jubet  esse 
patentes:  Virg. 

Note  1.  In  historical  writing  the  present  infinitive  has  sometimes  its  subject  in  the 
nominative.  Cf.  §  209,  It.  5. 

Remark  1.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted  when  it  precedes  in  the 
genitive  or  dative  case;  as,  Est  adSlescentis  majores  natu  vereri ,  scii.  eum.  Cic. 
Expedit  bonas  esse  vobis ,  scii.  vos.  Ter.;  and  rarely  when  it  precedes  in  the 
accusative ;  as,  Ea  populus  laetari  et  merito  dicere  fern ;  and  also  when  its  place 
is  supplied  by  a  possessive  pronoun  expressed  or  understood;  as,  Non  fuit  con¬ 
silium  (meum) — servilibus  officiis  intentum  aetatem  agere  (scii.  me).  Sali. 

Rem.  2.  A  substantive  pronoun  is  also  sometimes  omitted  before  the  infini¬ 
tive,  when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  preceding  verb;  as,  Pollicitus  sum  suscepturum 
(esse),  scil.  me,  I  promised  (that  I)  would  undertake.  Ter.  Sed  reddere  posse 
negabat ,  scil.  se.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  often  omitted,  when  it  is  a  general 
word  for  person  or  thing;  as,  Est  aliud  iracundum  esse ,  aliud  iratum ,  scil.  homi¬ 
nem.  Cic.  See  §  269,  R.  1. 

Rem.  4.  The  subject-accusative,  like  the  nominative,  is  often  wanting.  See 
$  209,  R.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  may  be  an  infinitive  or  a  clause. 
See  §  269,  R.  3. 

Note  2.  For  the  verbs  after  which  the  subject-accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  used, 
see  §  272.  For  the  accusative  in  the  predicate  after  infinitives  neuter  and  passive,  see 
§210. 


§  240,  241 


SYNTAX. — VOCATIVE — ABLATIVE, 


243 


VOCATIVE. 

§  24®.  The  vocative  is  used,  either  with  or  without  an  in¬ 
terjection,  in  addressing  a  person  or  thing. 

Remark  1.  The  interjections  0,  heu ,  and  pro  (proh),  also  ah,  au 
( hau ),  ehem,  eho,  ehodum,  eia  ( heia ),  hem,  heus,  hui,  io,  and  ohe,  are 
followed  by  the  vocative  ;  as, 

0  formose  puer  !  0  beautiful  boy !  Virg.  Heu  virgo  !  Id.  Pro  sancte  Jupiter  ! 
Cic.  Ah  stulte !  Ter.  Heus  Syre !  Id.  Ohe  libelle !  Mart.  Ehodum  bone  vir. 
Ter.— Urbem,  mi  Rufe,  cole.  Cic.  Quinctlli  Vare,  legiones  redde.  Suet.  Quo 
moriture  ruis  ?  Hor.  Macte  virtute  esto.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  vocative  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  a  genitive  depending  upon 
it  remains ;  as,  0  miserce  sortis  !  scil.  hdmines.  Lucan. 

Note.  The  vocative  forms  no  part  of  a  proposition,  but  serves  to  designate  the  person 
to  whom  the  proposition  is  addressed. 

ABLATIVE. 

The  ablative  denotes  certain  relations  of  nouns  and  pronouns,  all  of  which  are  express¬ 
ed  in  English  by  means  of  prepositions.  In  Latin  this  case  is  sometimes  accompanied  by 
a  preposition,  and  sometimes  stands  alone.  Cf.  §  37,  6. 

ABLATIVE  AFTER  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  241*  Eleven  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  ablative. 

These  are  a,  ("or  ah,  ahs),  absque,  de ;  coram ,  palam ,  cum,  ex,  (e); 
sine,  tenus,  pro,  and  prce  ;  as, 

Ab  illo  tempore,  From  that  time.  Liv.  A  scribendo,  From  writing.  Cic. 
Cum  exercitu,  With  the  army.  Sali.  Certis  de  causis ,  For  certain  reasons.  Cic. 
Ex  fugd,  From  flight.  Id.  Palam  populo.  Liv.  Sine  labore.  Cic.  Capulo  tenus. 
Virg.  Cantabit  vacuus  coram  latrone  viator.  Juv.  cf.  §  195,  5. 

Note.  Of  the  prepositions  followed  by  the  ablative,  five  signify  removal  or  separation, 
viz.  a  ( ab  or  abs),  de,  e  (or  ex),  absque  and  sing. 

Remark  1.  Tenus  is  always  placed  after  its  case.  It  sometimes  takes  the 
genitive  plural.  See  §  221,  III. —  Cum  is  always  appended  to  the  ablative  of  the 
personal  pronouns  me,  te ,  se,  nobis,  and  vobis,  and  commonly  to  the  ablatives 
of  the  relative  pronoun,  quo,  qua,  quibus ,  and  qui.  Cf.  §  133,  4,  and  §  136,  R.  1. 

Rem.  2.  The  adverbs  prdcul  and  simul  are  sometimes  used  with  an  ablative, 
which  depends  on  the  prepositions  a  or  ab,  and  cum  understood ;  as,  Prdcul 
mari,  Far  from  the  sea.  Liv.  Simul  nobis  habitat.  Ovid.  Prdcul  dubio.  Suet. 
The  prepositions  are  frequently  expressed;  as,  Prdcul  a  terra.  Cic.  Prdcul  a 
patria.  Virg.  Tecum  simul.  Plaut.  Vdbiscum  simul.  Cic. — So,  rarely,  ceque. 
Qui  me  in  terra  ceque  fortunatus  erit.  Plaut.  Cf.  Novi  ceque  omnia  tecum.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  the  above  prepositions,  like  those  followed  by  the  accusa¬ 
tive,  are  occasionally  Used  without  a  noun  expressed;  as,  Quum  coram  sumus. 
Cic.  Cum  fratre  an  sine.  Id.  Cf.  §  235,  R.  10. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  follows  also  the  prepositions  in  and  sub,  when  they 
answrer  to  the  question  ‘  where  ?  ’  super,  when  it  signifies  ‘  on  ’  or  ‘  concerning  ’ ; 
and  sometimes  clam  and  subter.  Cf.  §  235,  (2.) — (5.) 

Rem.  5.  In  is  generally  joined  with  the  ablative  after  verbs  of  placing,  as, 
pono,  Idco ,  colldco,  statuo,  constituo ,  and  consido;  as,  Et  sale  tabentes  artus  in 
Store  pdnunt.  Virg. — So,  also,  after  verbs  signifying  to  have ,  hold,  or  regard , 


244  6YNTAX. — ABLATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN  NOUNS.  §  242,  243 


as,  habeo ,  duco,  numero ,  etc. — After  verbs  of  assembling ,  concealing ,  and  includ¬ 
ing,  in  is  followed  by  either  the  accusative  or  the  ablative. — After  defigo ,  in¬ 
scribo ,  insculpo,  incido,  and  insero,  in  is  usually  joined  with  the  ablative. 

§  242.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de ,  ex,  and  super, 
are  followed  by  an  ablative  depending  upon  the  preposition ;  as, 

Abesse  urbe,  To  be  absent  from  the  city.  Cic.  Abire  sedibus ,  To  depart  from 
their  habitations.  Tac.  Ut  se  maledictis  non  abstineant.  Cic.  Detrudunt  naves 
scdpulo,  They  push  the  ships  from  the  rock.  Virg.  Navi  egressus  est.  Nep. 
Excedere  finibus.  Liv.  Caesar  proelio  supersedere  statuit.  Caes.  Tributo  ac  de¬ 
lectu  supersessum  est.  Cic.  So  the  adjective  extorris ;  as,  Extorris  patria ,  ddmo. 
Sali.  And  so  the  verbal  eruptio ;  as,  Mutina  eruptio.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  preposition  is  often  repeated,  or  one  of  similar  signification 
is  used ;  as,  Detrahere  de  tud  fama  numquam  cogitavi.  Cic.  Ex  dculis  abierunt . 
Liv.  Exire  a  patria.  Cic.  Exire  de  vita.  Id.  Cf.  §  224,  R.  4. 

Rem.  2.  These  compound  verbs  are  often  used  without  a  noun;  but,  in 
many  cases,  it  maybe  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  Equites  degressi  ad  pedes, 
scii,  equis.  Liv.  Abire  ad  Deos,  scil.  vita.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Some  verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de,  and  ex,  instead  of  the  abla¬ 
tive,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative.  See  §  224,  R.  1  and  2.  Some  com¬ 
pounds,  also,  of  neuter  verbs,  occur  with  the  accusative.  See  §  233,  R.  1. 

ABLATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES, 

AND  VERBS. 

§  243.  Opus  and  usus ,  signifying  need,  usually  take  the  ab¬ 
lative  of  the  thing  needed ;  as, 

Auctoritate  tud  nobis  dpus  est,  We  need  your  authority.  Cic.  Nunc  animis 
dpus,  nunc  pectore  frrno.  Virg.  Naves ,  quibus  consuli  usus  non  esset,  Ships,  for 
which  the  consul  had  no  occasion.  Liv.  Nunc  viribus  usus,  nunc  manibus  rapi¬ 
dis.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Opus  and  usus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  ablative  of  a 
perfect  participle ;  as,  Maturato  dpus  est,  There  is  need  of  haste.  Liv.  Usus  facto 
est  mihi.  Ter.  Ubi  summus  imperator  non  adest  ad  exercitum ,  citius,  quod  non 
facto  esi  usus,  fit,  quam  quod  facto  est  dpus.  Plaut.  After  dpus ,  a  noun  is  some¬ 
times  expressed  with  the  participle ;  as,  Opus  fuit  Hirtio  convento, — of  meeting, 
or,  to  meet,  §  274,  R.  5.  Cic.  Opus  sibi  esse  domino  ejus  invento.  Liv. — or  a  su¬ 
pine  is  used;  as,  Ita  dictu  dpus  est ,v  It  is  necessary  to  say,  I  must  say.  Ter. — 
Instead  of  the  ablative  with  dpus  est,  an  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  a  sub¬ 
ject  accusative,  or  ut  with  a  subjunctive  clause,  sometimes  occurs ;  as,  Opus 
est  te  animo  valere.  Cic.  Mihi  dpus  est ,  ut  lavem.  Id. 

(b.)  Opus  and  usus ,  though  nouns,  are  seldom  limited  by  the  genitive.  In  a 
few  passages  they  are  construed  with  the  accusative.  See  §  211,  R.  11. 

Rem.  2.  Opus  is  sometimes  the  subject  and  sometimes  the  predicate  of  est; 
usus,  which  seldom  occurs  except  in  ante-classic  poets,  is,  with  only  rare  ex¬ 
ceptions,  the  subject  only.  The  person  to  whom  the  thing  is  needful  is  put  in 
the  dative;  (§  226.)  With  opus  the  thing  needed  may  either  be  the  subject  of 
the  verb  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  or  follow  it  in  the  ablative ;  as,  Dux 
nobis  dpus  est.  Cic.  Verres  multa  sibi  dpus  esse  aiebat.  Id.;  or,  Duce  nobis 
opus  est.  The  former  construction  is  most  common  with  neuter  adjectives  and 
pronouns;  as,  Quod  non  opus  est,  asse  carum  est.  Cato  apud  Sen. — In  the 
predicate  opus  and  usus  are  commonly  translated  ‘  needful  ’  or  1  necessary/ 
Cf.  §  210,  R.  5. 

Note.  For  the  ablative  of  character,  quality,  etc.,  limiting  a  noun,  see  §  211,  R.  6. 


§  244,  245.  syntax. — ablative  after  certain  nouns.  245 

§  244.  Dignus ,  indignus ,  contentus ,  prceditus ,  and  fretus , 

are  followed  by  the  ablative  of  the  object ;  as, 

Dignus  laude,  Worthy  of  praise.  Hor.  Vox  populi  majestate  indigna ,  A  speech 
unbecoming  the  dignity  of  the  people.  Cass.  Bestice  eo  contentos  non  qucerunt 
amplius.  Cic.  Hdmo  scelere  prceditus.  Id.  Plerique  ingenio  freti.  Id. — So, 
AEquum  est  me  atque  illo.  Plaut. 

Remark  1.  The  adverb  digne ,  in  one  passage,  takes  the  ablative;  Pec- 
cat  uter  nostrum  cruce  dignius.  Hor. — Dignor ,  also,  both  as  the  passive  of  the 
obsolete  digno,  and  as  a  deponent  verb,  is  followed  by  an  ablative  of  the  thing. 
As  a  deponent  it  takes  also  an  accusative  of  the  person ;  as,  Haud  equidem  tali 
me  honore  dignor.  Virg. — Pass.  Qui  tali  honore  dignati  sunt.  Cic.  Conjugio, 
Anchisa ,  Veneris  dignate  superbo.  Virg. — Sometimes  as  a  deponent,  instead  of 
the  ablative  of  the  thing,  it  is  followed  by  an  infinitive  clause;  as,  Non  ego 
grammaticas  ambire  tribus  et  pulpita  dignor.  Hor.  And  both  dignor  and  dedignor 
are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  object  the  other  of  the  predicate. 
See  §  230,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Dignus  and  indignus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  genitive; 
as,  Suscipe  cogitationem  dignissimam  tuas  virtutis.  Cic.  Indignus  avorum.  Virg.; 
and  dignus  sometimes  takes  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective  in  the  accusative ; 
as,  Non  me  censes  scire  quid  dignus  siem  ?  Plaut.  Fretus  is  in  Livy  construed 
with  the  dative.  Cf.  §  222,  R.  6,  ( b .) 

(b.)  Instead  of  an  ablative,  dignus  and  indignus  often  take  an  infinitive, 
especially  in  the  passive;  as,  Erat  dignus  amari.  Virg.;  or  a  subjunctive 
clause,  with  qui  or  ut ;  as,  Dignus  qui  imperet.  Cic.  Non  sum  dignus ,  ut  figam 
palum  in  parietem.  Plaut. ;  or  the  supine  in  u ;  as,  Digna  atque  indigna  relatu 
vociferans.  Virg.  Contentus  is  likewise  joined  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Nonhcec 
artes  contenta  paternas  edidicisse  fuit.  Ovid. — So,  Naves  pontum  irrumpere 
fretas.  Stat. 

§  245.  I.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor ,  potior ,  vescor ,  and  their 
compounds,  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Ad  quem  tum  Juno  supplex  his  vocibus  usa  est , — addressed  these  words.  Virg. 
Frui  voluptate,  To  enjoy  pleasure.  Cic.  Fungitur  officio,  He  performs  his 
duty.  Id.  Oppido  potiti  sunt.  Liv.  Vescitur  aura.  Virg.  His  rebus  perfruor. 
Cic.  Legibus  abuti.  Id.  Defuncti  imperio.  Liv.  Gravi  opere  perfungimur.  Cic. 
0  tandem  magnis  pelagi  def  uncte  periclis.  Virg. 

The  compounds  are  abutor ,  deutor ,  perfruor ,  defungor,  and  perfungor. 

Note.  Utor  may  take  a  second  ablative,  as  an  apposition  or  a  predicate, 
like  the  predicate  accusative,  (§  230,  R.  2),  and  may  then  be  translated  by 
the  verb  to  have ;  as,  Ille  f  acili  me  utetur  patre,  He  shall  have  in  me  an  indul¬ 
gent  father.  Ter. 

Remark.  In  early  writers  these  verbs  sometimes  take  an  accusative ;  as. 
Quam  rem  medici  utuntur.  Varr.  Ingenium  f  rui.  Ter.  Datames  militare  mu¬ 
nus  fungens.  Nep.  Gentem  aliquam  urbem  nostram  potituram  putem.  Cic.  Sa¬ 
cras  lauros  vescar.  Tibuli.  In  prologis  scribendis  operam  abutitur .  Ter. — Potior 
is^also,  found  with  the  genitive.  See  §  220,  4. 

II.  1.  Nitor ,  innitor,  fido  and  confido,  may  be  followed  by  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition;  as,  Hasta  innixus.  Liv.  Fidere  cursu.  Ovid.  Natura 
loci  confidebant.  Caes. 

2.  Misceo  with  its  compounds  takes,  with  the  accusative  of  the  object,  the 
ablative  of  the  thing  mingled  with ;  as,  Miscere  pabula  sale.  Coll.  Aquas  nec¬ 
tare.  Ovid.  Aer  multo  calore  admixtus.  Cic. 

3.  Assuesco,  assuefacio,  consuesco ,  insuesco,  and  sometimes  acquiesco,  take 
either  the  dative  or  the  ablative  of  the  thing ;  as,  Aves  sanguine  et  praeda  as - 
vuetce .  Hor.  Nullo  officio  aut  disciplina  assuefactus.  Caes.  Cf.  §  224. 

21* 


246 


SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  ETC.  §  246,  247. 


4.  Vivo  and  epulor ,  ‘  to  live  or  feast  upon,’  are  followed  by  the  ablative;  as, 
Dapibus  epulamur  dpimis.  Virg.  Lacte  atque  pecore  vivunt.  Cses. 

5.  Sio  signifying  ‘to  be  filled  or  covered  with,’  and  also  when  signifying  ‘to 
cost,’  is  followed  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  when  signifying  ‘  to 
persevere  in,  stick  to,  abide  by,|  ‘  to  rest  or  be  fixed  on,’  it  is  followed  by  the 
ablative  either  with  or  without  in ;  as,  Jam  pulvere  coelum  stare  vident.  Virg. — 
Multo  sanguine  ac  vulneribus  ea  Poenis  victoria  stetit.  Liv.  Stare  conditionibus. 
Cic.  Omnis  in  Ascanio  stat  cura  parentis.  Virg. —  Consto ,  ‘to  consist  of’  or  ‘to 
rest  upon,’  is  followed  by  the  ablative  either  alone  or  with  ex,  de,  or  in ;  as, 
Constat  materies  solido  corpore.  Lucr.  Homo  ex  animo  constat  et  corpore.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  Fido,  confido ,  misceo ,  admisceo ,  permisceo ,  and  assuesco  often 
take  the  dative. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  preposition  is  expressed  after  the  above  verbs,  sto ,  fido , 
confido ,  nitor ,  innitor ,  and  assuesco  take  in  or  ad;  acquiesco ,  in;  and  misceo 
with  its  compounds,  cum. 

§  24:6.  Perfect  participles  denoting  origin  are  often  fol¬ 
lowed  by  the  ablative  of  the  source ,  without  a  preposition. 

Such  are  natus ,  prognatus ,  sQtus ,  creatus ,  crZtus ,  editus ,  gSnltus,  gUnSrdtus ,  ortus;  to 
which  may  be  added  oriundus ,  descended  from. 

Thus,  Nate  deal  0  son  of  a,  goddess!  Virg.  Tantalo  prognatus,  Descended 
from  Tantalus.  Cic.  Satus  Nereide ,  Sprung  from  a  Nereid.  Ovid.  Creatus 
rege.  Id.  Alcdnore  creti.  Virg.  Edite  regibus.  Hor.  Diis  genite.  Virg.  Argdl- 
ico  generatus  Alemdne.  Ovid.  Ortus  nullis  majoribus.  Hor.  Coelesti  semine 
driundi.  Lucr. 

Remark  1.  The  preposition  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  the  verbs  creo,  genero , 
and  nascor;  as,  Ut  patre  certo  nascerere.  Oie.  Fortes  creantur  fortibus.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  After  participles  denoting  origin,  the  preposition  ex  or  de  is  usually 
joined  to  the  name  of  the  mother;  and  in  a  few  passages  ex  or  ab  is  joined  to 
the  name  of  the  father;  as,  Prognati  ab  Dite  patre.  Caes.  In  speaking  of  one’s 
ancestors  ab  is  frequently  used ;  as,  Plerosque  Belgas  esse  ortos  a  Germanis.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  Origin  from  a  place  or  country  is  generally  expressed  by  a  patrial 
adjective;  as,  Thrasybulus  Atheniensis,  Thrasybulus  of  Athens.  Livy  often 
uses  ab ;  as,  Turnus  Herdonius  ab  Aricia.  Caesar  prefers  the  ablative  alone ; 
as,  Cn.  Magius  Cremona;  and  in  this  manner' is  expressed  the  tribe  to  which  a 
person  belongs ;  as,  Q.  Verres  Romilia, — of  the  Romilian  tribe. 

ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  Etc. 

§  24:7.  Nouns  denoting  the  cause ,  manner ,  means ,  and  in¬ 
strument,  after  adjectives  and  verbs,  are  put  in  the  ablative  with¬ 
out  a  preposition. 

Note.  The  English  prepositions  with  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  means, 
and  instrument  are  by,  with ,  in,  etc. 

1.  The  cause .  (1.)  Adjectives  which  have  a  passive  significa¬ 
tion,  as  denoting  a  state  or  condition  produced  by  some  external 
cause,  may  take  such  cause  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Campani  fuerunt  superbi  bonitate  agrorum.  Cic.  Animal  pabulo  Iodum.  Se». 
P  rasi  io  fessi  lassique,  Weary  and  faint  with  the  battle.  Sail.  Homines  cegri 
gravi  morbo.  Cic. 

(2.)  Neuter  verbs  expressing  an  action,  state  or  feeling  of  the 
subject  originating  in  some  external  cause,  may  take  that  cause  ia 
the  ablative ;  as, 


§  247. 


SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  ETC. 


247 


Interiit  fame,  He  perished  with  hunger.  Laude  aliena  dolet.  Cic.  Laetor 
tua  dignitate.  Id.  Gaude  tuo  bono.  Id.  Sua  victoria  gloriari.  Cses.  Aquiloni¬ 
bus  laborant  querceta.  Hor. — So  with  bene  est  and  the  dative ;  as,  Mihi  bene  erat 
non  piscibus  urbe  petitis ,  sed  pullo  atque  haedo.  Hor.  Ubi  illi  bene  sit  ligno, 
aqua  calida,  cibo,  vestimentis,  etc.  Plaut. 

Note  1.  After  such  adjectives  and  neuter  verbs,  a  preposition  with  its  case 
often  supplies  the  place  of  the  simple  ablative. 

Note  2.  In  exclamations  of  encouragement  or  approbation,  the  defective 
adjective  macte ,  macti,  either  with  or  without  the  imperative  of  esse  ( esto ,  este, 
estote ,)  is  joined  with  an  ablative  of  cause,  especially  with  virtute. 

Note  3.  After  neuter  verbs  and  adjectives  denoting  emotions,  especially 
those  of  care ,  grief  \  and  sorrow ,  the  accusative  vicem,  with  a  genitive  or  a  pos¬ 
sessive  pronoun,  is  used,  instead  of  the  ablative  vice,  to  signify  *  for  ’  or  1  on 
account  of’ ;  as,  Remittimus  hoc  tibi ,  ne  nostram  vicem  irascaris ,  That  you  may 
not  be  angry  on  our  account.  Liv.  Tuam  vicem  scepe  doleo ,  quod ,  etc.  Cic. 
Suam  vicem  magis  anxius ^  quam  ejus,  cui  auxilium  ab  se  petebatur.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  When  the  cause  is  a  voluntary  agent,  it  is  put  in  the  accusative 
with  the  preposition  ob ,  propter,  or  per ;  as,  Non  est  cequum  me  propter  vos 
decipi.  Ter.  These  prepositions,  and  a,  or  ab,  de,  e  or  e#,'and  prce ,  are  also 
sometimes  used  when  the  cause  is  not  a  voluntary  agent ;  as,  Ob  adulterium 
ccesi.  Virg.  Nec  Idqui  prse  moerore  potuit.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  {a.)  After  active  verbs,  the  cause,'  unless  expressed  by  an  ablative 
in  u  from  substantives  having  no  other  case;  as,  Jussu ,  rdgdtu  and  admonitu, 
is  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple  ablative,  but  either  by  a  preposition,  or  by 
causa,  gratia ,  ergo ,  etc.,  with  a  genitive ;  as,  Legibus  propter  metum  paret. 
Cic.  Ne  ob  eam  rem  ipsos  despiceret.  Id.  Donari  virtutis  ergo.  Id.  Si  hoc 
honoris  mei  causa  susceperis.  Id.  But  with  causa ,  etc.,  the  adjective  pronoun 
is  commonly  used  for  the  corresponding  substantive  pronoun;  as,  Te  dbesse 
mea  causa,  moleste  fero.  Cic.  Cf.  §  211,  R.  3,  (b.) 

(6.)  When  the  cause  is  a  state  of  feeling,  a  circumlocution  is  often  used  with 
a  perfect  participle  of  some  verb  signifying  ‘  to  induce  ’ ;  as,  Cupiditate  ductus, 
inductus ,  incitatus ,  incensus, inflammatus, impulsus, motus,  captus,  etc.  Mihi  bene¬ 
volentia  ductus  tribuebat  omnia.  Cic.  Livy  frequently  uses  ab  in  this  sense ; 
as,  Ab  ira,  a  spe,  ab  odio,  from  anger,  hope,  hatred. 

2.  The  manner .  Cum  is  regularly  joined  with  the  ablative  of 
manner,  when  expressed  simply  by  a  noun,  not  modified  by  any 
other  word ;  and  also  when  an  adjective  is  joined  with  the  noun, 
provided  an  additional  circumstance,  and  not  merely  an  essential 
character  of  the  action,  is  to  be  expressed.  Thus : 

Cum  voluptate  aliquem  audire.  Verres  Lampsacum  venit  cum  magna  calami¬ 
tate  civitatis.  Cic.  Hence  also  when  the  connection  between  the  subject  and 
the  noun  denoting  the  attribute  is  only  external ;  as,  Procedere  cum  veste  pur¬ 
purea:  in  distinction  from  Nudis  pedibus  incedere ;  Aperto  capite  sedere,  etc., 
which  express  circumstances  or  attributes  essential  to  the  subject. 

But  modus,  ratio,  mos,  ritus ,  etc.,  signifying  manner,  never  take  cum,  and  it  is 
omitted  in  some  expressions  with  other  substantives ;  as,  Hoc  modo  scripsi ; 
Constituerunt  qua  ratione  ageretur ;  More  bestiarum  vagari ;  Latronum  ritu  vivere  ; 
iEquo  animo  fero ;  Maxima  fide  amicitias  coluit.  Summa  aequitate  res  consti¬ 
tuit  j  Viam  incredibili  celeritate  confecit;  Librum  magna  cura  diligenti  ague 
scripsit ;  the  action  of  the  verb  being  intimately  connected  with  the  circum¬ 
stance  expressed  by  the  ablative.  So  in  some  expressions  with  substantives 
alone;  as,  Silentio  praeterire  or  facere  aliquid;  Logo  agere;  Jure  and  injuria 
facere ;  Magistratus  vitio  creatus  ;  Recte  et  ordine  Jit. 

m  Rem.  3.  The  manner  is  also  sometimes  denoted  by  de  or  ex  with  the  abla¬ 
tive  ;  as,  De  or  ex  industria ,  On  purpose.  Liv.  Ex  integro,  Anew.  Quint. 


248 


SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  ETC. 


§248. 


3.  The  means  and  instrument .  An  ablative  is  joined  with 
verbs  of  every  kind,  and  also  with  adjectives  of  a  passive  significa¬ 
tion,  to  express  the  means  or  instrument ;  as, 

Amicos  observantia,  rem  parsimonia  retinuit ,  He  retained  his  friends  by  at¬ 
tention,  his  property  by  frugality.  Cic.  Auro  ostro^we  decori.  Virg.  JEgrescit 
medendo.  Id.  Cornibus  tauri ,  apri  dentibus,  morsu  leones  se  tutantur.  Cic. 
Ccesus  est  virgis.  Id.  Trabs  saucia  securi.  Ovid.  For  the  ablative  of  the  means 
after  verbs  of  filling,  etc.,  see  §  249,  1. 

Rem.  4.  When  the  means  is  a  person,  it  is  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple 
ablative,  but  either  by  per,  or  by  the  ablative  Opera  with  a  genitive  or  a  pos¬ 
sessive  pronoun ;  as,  mea,  tua,  sua ,  Opera,  which  are  equivalent  to  per  me,  per 
te ,  per  se ,  and  denote  both  good  and  bad  services.  Beneficio  meo,  etc.,  is  used 
of  good  results  only ;  as,  Beneficio  meo  patres  sunt.  Sail.  But  persons  are  some¬ 
times  considered  as  involuntary  agents,  and  as  such  expressed  by  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition;  as,  Servos,  quibus  silvas  publicas  depopuldJus  erat.  Cic. — 
When  per  is  used  to  express  the  means,  it  is  connected  with  external  concur¬ 
ring  circumstances,  rather  than  with  the  real  means  or  instrument.  Hence 
we  always  say  vi  oppidum  cepit,  but  per  vim  ei  bOna  eripuit. 

Rem.  5.  The  material  instrument  is  always  expressed  by  the  ablative  with¬ 
out  a  preposition ;  as,  Conficere  cervum  sagittis ;  gladio  aliquem  vulnerare ;  tra¬ 
jicere  pectus  ferro . 

§248.  The  ablative  is  used  with  passive  verbs  to  denote 
the  means  or  agent  by  which  any  thing  is  effected,  and  which  in 
the  active  voice  is  expressed  by  the  nominative.  This  ablative 
is  used  either  with  ab  or  without  it,  according  as  it  is  a  person 
or  a  thing. 

I.  The  voluntary  agent  of  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice  is  put  in 
the  ablative  with  a  or  ab ;  as, 

(In  the  active  voice,)  Clodius  me  diligit,  Clodius  loves  me  (Cic.);  (in  the  pas¬ 
sive,)  A  Clodio  diligor,  I  am  loved  by  Clodius.  Laudatur  ab  his,  culpatur  ab 
illis.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  (1.)  The  general  word  for  persons,  after  verbs  in  the  passive 
voice,  is  often  understood;  as,  PrObitas  laudatur ,  scil.  ab  hOmimbus.  Juv.  So 
after  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs;  as,  Discurritur.  Virg.  Toto  certatum  est  cor- 
pOre  regni.  Id.  Cf.  §  141,  R.  2. 

(2.)  The  agent  is  likewise  often  understood,  when  it  is  the  same  as  the  sub¬ 
ject  of  the  verb,  and  the  expression  is  then  equivalent  to  the  active  voice 
with  a  reflexive  pronoun,  or  to  the  middle  voice  in  Greek;  as,  Quum  omnes  in 
omni  genere  scelerum  vOlutentur,  scil.  a  se.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  Neuter  verbs,  also,  are  sometimes  followed  by  an  ablative 
of  the  voluntary  agent  with  a  or  ab ;  as, 

M.  Marcellus  periit  ab  Annibale,  M.  Marcellus  was  killed  by  Hannibal.  Plin. 
Ne  vir  ab  hoste  cadat.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Nec  conj,uge  captus. 
Ovid.  COlitur  linigera  turba.  Id.  Pereat  meis  excisus  Argivis.  Hor. 

For  the  dative  of  the  agent  after  verbi-  in  the  passive  voice,  and  participles  in  dus ,  see 
$  225,  II.  and  HI. 

II.  The  involuntary  agent  of  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice,  or  of  a  neuter  verb, 
is  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition,  as  the  cause,  means,  or  instrument ; 
as,  Maximo  dolore  conficior.  Cic.  Frangi  cupiditate.  Id.  LEdtidce  telo  jacet 
Hectw,  Y7irg, 


§  249. 


SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  ETC. 


249 


Note.  The  involuntary  agent  is  sometimes  personified,  and  takes  a  or  ab  ; 
as,  A  voluptatibus  deseri.  Cic.  A  natura  datum  homini  vivendi  curriculum.  Id. 
Vinci  a  voluptate.  Id.  Victus  a  labore.  Id. 

§  249.  I.  A  noun  denoting  the  means,  by  which  the  action 
of  a  verb  is  performed,  is  put  in  the  ablative  after  verbs  signify- 
ing  to  affect  in  any  way,  to  Jill,  furnish,  load ,  array ,  equip ,  en¬ 
dow,  adorn ,  reward,  enrich ,  and  many  others. 

Remark  1.  This  rule  includes  such  verbs  as  afficio ,  aspergo,  conspergo ,  inspergo ,  re¬ 
spergo.  compleo ,  expleo ,  impleo ,  oppleo ,  repleo ,  suppleo ,  cumulo,  farcio,  rZfercio,  satio , 
exsatio,  saturo ,  stipo,  constipo,  Qbruo ,  dnZro,  augeo,  induo,  vestio,  armo,  orno ,  circumdo , 
circumfundo,  macto,  locupleto ,  instruo ,  imbuo,  dono ,  impertio ,  rgmunSror,  honesto , 
hdnoro,  etc. ;  as, 

Terrore  impletur  Africa ,  Africa  is  filled  with  terror.  Sil.  Instruxere  epulis 
mensas,  They  furnished  the  tables  with  food.  Ovid.  Ut  ejus  animum  his  opin¬ 
ionibus  imbuas ,  .That  you  should  imbue  his  mind  with  these  sentiments.  Cic. 
Naves  dnerant  auro,  They  load  the  ships  with  gold.  Virg.  Cumulat  altaria  donis, 
He  heaps  the  altars  with  gifts.  Id.  Terra  se  gramme  vestit ,  The  earth  clothes 
itself  with  grass.  Id.  Mollibus  ornabat  cornua  sertis.  Id.  Multo  cibo  et  potione 
completi.  Cic.  Libros  puerilibus  fabulis  refercire.  Id.  Satiari  delectatione  non 
possum.  Id.  Homines  saturati  honoribus.  Id.  Senectus  stipata  studiis  juven¬ 
tutis.  Id.  Me  tanto  honore  honestas.  Plaut.  Equis  Africam  Idcupletavit.  Colum. 
Studium  tuum  nulla  me  nova  voluptate  affecit.  Cic.  Terram  nox  obruit  umbris. 
Lucr. 

Rem.  2.  Several  verbs  denoting  to  fill,  instead  of  the  ablative,  sometimes 
take  a  genitive.  See  §  220,  3. 

Rem.  3.  The  active  verbs  induo ,  dono,  impertio ,  aspergo ,  inspergo ,  circumdo, 
and  circumfundo ,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  the  thing  with  the  accusative  of 
the  person,  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  the  thing,  and  a  dative  of  the 
person ;  as,  Cui  quum  Deianira  tunicam  induisset.  Cic.  Donare  munera  civibus. 
In  the  earliest  writers  dono ,  like  condono ,  has  sometimes  two  accusatives  or  an 
accusative  of  the  person  with  the  infinitive. 

II.  A  noun  denoting  that  in  accordance  with  which  any  thing  is, 
or  is  done,  is  often  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  as, 

Nostro  more,  According  to  our  custom.  Cic.  Instituto  suo  Caesar  copias  suas 
eduxit,  According  to  his  practice.  Cses.  Id  factum  consilio  meo, — by  my  ad¬ 
vice.  Ter.  Pacern  fecit  Ms  conditionibus, — on  these  conditions.  Nep. 

Note.  The  prepositions  de,  ex,  pro,  and  secundum  are  often  expressed  with 
such  nouns;  as,  Neque  est  facturus  quidquam  nisi  de  meo  consilio.  Cic.  Ex 
consuetudine  aliquid  f  acere.  Plin.  Ep.  Decet  quidquid  dyas,  agere  pro  viribus. 
Cic.  Secundum  naturam  vivere.  Id. 

III.  The  ablative  denoting  accompaniment ,  is  usually  joined  with 
cum;  as, 

Vagamur  egentes  cum  conjiigibus  et  liberis,  Needy,  we  wander  with  our 
wives  and  children.  Cic.  Saepe  admirari  sdleo  cum  hoc  C.  Laelio.  Id.  Julium 
cum  his  ad  te  llteris  mist.  Id.  Ingressus  est  cum  gladio.  Id.  Romam  veni  cum 
febri.  Cum  occasu  solis  copias  educere , — as  soon  as  the  sun  set. 

Remark.  But  cum  is  sometimes  omitted  before  words  denoting  military 
and  naval  forces,  when  limited  by  an  adjective;  as,  Ad  castra  Caesaris  omnibus 
copiis  contenderunt.  Caes.  Inde  toto  exercitu  prdfectus.  Liv.  Eodem  decem 
navibus  C.  Furius  venit.  Liv.  And  sometimes  in  military  language  cum  is  omit¬ 
ted,  when  accompanying  circumstances  are  mentioned,  and  not  persons;  as, 
Castra  clamore  invadunt. 


250 


SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  ETC.  §  250,  251 


§  250.  1.  A  noun,  adjective,  or  verb,  may  be  followed  by 

the  ablative,  denoting  in  what  respect  their  signification  is  taken ; 
as, 

Pietate  filius,  consiliis  parens ?  In  affection  a  son,  in  counsel  a  parent.  Cic. 
Peges  nomine  magis  quam  impeno,  Kings  in  name  rather  than  in  authority.  Nep. 
Oppidum  nomine  Bibrax.  Caes. — Jure  peritus,  Skilled  in  law.  Cic.  Anxius  ani¬ 
mo,  Anxious  in  mind.  Tac.  Pedibus  ceger,  Lame  in  his  feet.  Sail.  Crine  ruber , 
niger  ore.  Mart.  Fronte  laetus.  Tac.  Major  natu.  Cic.  Prudentia  noninfenor , 
usu  vero  etiam  superior.  Id.  Maximus  ndtu.  Liv. — Animo  angi ,  To  be  troubled 
in  mind.  Cic.  •  Contremisco  tota  mente  et  omnibus  artubus,  I  am  agitated  in  my 
whole  mind  and  in  every  limb.  Id.  Captus  mente,  Affected  in  mind,  i.  e.  de¬ 
prived  of  reason.  Id.  Altero  oculo  capitur.  Liv.  Ingenii  laude  floniit.  Cic. 
Pollere  nobilitate.  Tac.  Animoque  et  corpdre  torpet.  Hor. 

Remark.  This  may  be  called  the  ablative  of  limitation,  and  denotes  the  rela¬ 
tion  expressed  in  English  by  4  in  respect  of,’  4  in  regard  to,’  4  as  to,’  or  4  in.’ — 
Respecting  the  genitive  of  limitation  after  adjectives,  see  §213; — after  verbs, 
§  220,  1:  and  respecting  the  accusative  of  limitation,  see  §  231,  R.  5;  §  232,  (3.); 
and  §  234,  II. 

2.  (1.)  Adjectives  of  plenty  or  want  are  sometimes  limited  by  the 
ablative ;  as, 

Pdmus  plena  servis,  A  house  full  of  servants.  Juv.  Fives  agris,  Rich  in 
land.  Hor.  Ferax  saeculum  bdnis  artibus.  Plin. — Inops  verbis ,  Deficient  in  words. 
Cic.  Orba  fratribus,  Destitute  of  brothers.  Ovid.  Viduum  arboribus  s6lum . 
Colum.  Nudus  agris.  Hor.  For  the  genitive  after  adjectives  of  plenty  and 
want,  see  §  213,  R.  3-5. 

(2.)  Verbs  signifying  to  abound,  and  to  be  destitute,  are  followed 
by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Scatentem  belluis  pontum ,  The  sea  abounding  in  monsters.  Hor.  Urbs  redundat 
militibus,  The  city  is  full  of  soldiers.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Villa  abundat  porco ,  haedo, 
agno,  gallina ,  lacte,  caseo,  meile.  Cic. —  Virum  qui  pdcunia  egeat,  A  man  who  is 
in  want  of  money.  Id.  Carer e  culpa,  To  be  free  from  fault.  Id.  Mea  addles - 
centia  indiget  illorum  bdnd  existimatione.  Id.  Abundat  audacia,  consilio  et  ra¬ 
tione  deficitur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  To  this  rule  belong  abundo,  exutero,  redundo ,  scateo,  afluo,  cir¬ 
cumfluo,  diffluo ,  superfluo ,  suppedito ,  valeo,  vigeo ; — careo ,  egeo,  indigeo,  vaco ,  de¬ 
ficior,  destituor,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive,  instead  of  the  ablative,  sometimes  'follows  certain 
verbs  signifying  to  abound  or  to  want.  See  §  220,  3. 

Rem.  3.  To  do  any  thing  with  a  person  or  thing,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by 
facere  with  de  ;  as,  Quid  de  Tulliola  med  fiet  ?  Cic. ;  and  more  frequently  by 
the  simple  ablative,  or  the  dative;  as,  Quid  hoc  homine  or  huic  homini  faciatis  ? 
What  can  you  do  with  this  man  ?  Cic.  Nescit  quid  faciat  auro, — what  he  shall 
do  with  the  gold.  Plaut.  Quid  me  flat  parvi  pendis,  You  care  little  what  be¬ 
comes  of  me.  Ter. — Sum  is  occasionally  used  in  the  same  manner ;  as,  Metum 
ceperunt  quidnam  se  futurum  esset, — what  would  become  of  them.  Liv. 

§  251.  A  noun  denoting  that  of  which  any  thing  is  de¬ 
prived,  or  from  which  it  is  freed,  removed,  or  separated,  is  often 
put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition. 

This  construction  occurs  after  verbs  signifying  to  deprive ,  free,  de* 
bar,  drive  away ,  remove ,  depart,  and  others  which  imply  separation. 


§  251. 


SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  ETC. 


251 


Note.  The  principal  verbs  of  this  class  are  arceo ,  pello ,  depello ,  expello,  ab¬ 
dico,  interdico ,  defendo,  deturbo,  dejicio,  ejicio,  absterreo,  deterreo,  mdveo,  amoveo , 
demoveo,  removeo,  secerno,  prdhibeo,  separo,  excludo ,  intercludo,  abeo,  exeo,  sedo, 
decedo,  discedo,  desisto,  evado,  abstineo ,  spolio,  privo,  orbo,  libero,  expedio,  laxo, 
nudo ,  solvo,  exsolvo,  exdnero ,  levo,  purgo,  to  which  may  be  added  the  adjec¬ 
tives  liber,  immunis,  purus,  vacuus ,  and  alienus ;  as, 

Nudantur  arbores  foliis,  The  trees  are  stripped  of  leaves.  Plin.  Hoc  me  libera 
metu,  Free  me  from  this  fear.  Ter.  Tune  eam  philosophiam  sequere,  quas  spdliat 
nos  judicio,  privat  approbatione,  orbat  sensibus?  Cic.  Solvit  se  Teucria  luctu. 
Virg.  Te  illis  sedibus  arcebit.  Cic.  Q.  Varium  pellere  possessionibus  conatus, 
est.  Id.  Omnes  tribu  remoti.  Liv.  Levare  se  aere  alieno.  Cic.  Me  leves  chdri 
secernunt  populo.  Hor.  Animus  omni  liber  cura  et  angore.  Cic.  Vtrumque 
homine  alienissimum.  Id.  When  alienus  signifies  ‘  averse  ’  or  ‘  hostile  to,’  it  takes 
the  ablative  with  ab,  or  rarely  the  dative ;  as,  Id  dicit ,  quod  illi  causae  maxime 
est  alienum.  Id.  In  the  sense  of  ‘  unsuited,’  it  may  also  be  joined  with  the  gen¬ 
itive;  as,  Quis  alienum  putet  ejus  esse  dignitatis?  Id. — Alius  too,  in  analogy 
with  adjectives  and  verbs  of  separation,  sometimes  takes  an  ablative;  as,  Neve 
putes  alium  sapiente  bono^we  beatum.  Hor. ;  but  this  may  also  be  referred  to  the 
ablative  after  comparatives.  Cf.  §  256,  R.  14. 

Remark  1.  Most  verbs  of'  depriving  and  separating  are  more  or  less  fre¬ 
quently  followed  by  ah ,  de,  or  ex,  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  and  always  by 
ab  with  the  ablative  of  the  person ;  as,  Tu  Jupiter,  hunc  a  tuis'  aris  arcebis.  Cic. 
Praesidium  ex  arce  pepulerunt.  Nep.  Aquam  de  agro  pellere.  Plin.  Ex  ingrata 
civitate  cedere.  Cic.  Arcem  ab  incendio  liberavit.  Id.  Solvere  belluam  ex  ca¬ 
tenis.  Auct.  ad  Her. — Sedes  remotas  a  Germanis.  Caes.  Se  ab  Etruscis  secer¬ 
nere.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  Arceo,  in  the  poets,  sometimes  takes  the  dative,  see  §  224,  R.  2., 
and  sometimes  an  infinitive;  as,  Pldgamque  sedere  cedendo  arcebat,.  Ovid. — 
Prdhibeo  and  defendo  take  either  the  accusative  of  the  person  or  thing  to  be 
defended,  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing  to  be  warded  off — or  the  reverse — 
aliquem  or  aliquid  a  periculo,  or  periculum  ab  aliquo.  They  are  also  sometimes 
construed  with  the  dative,  see  §  224,  R.  2,  and  sometimes  with  infinitive  or 
subjunctive  clauses.  Prohibeo  has  rarely  two  accusatives;  as,  Id  te  Jupiter 
prdhibessil.  Plaut. ;  or  poetically  the  accusative  and  genitive ;  as,  Captce  prdhi- 
bcre  Poenos  aquilae.  Sil. — Interdico  takes  the  person  either  in  the  accusative  or 
the  dative,  and  the  thing  in  the  ablative,  aliquem  or  alicui  aliqua  re;  as2  Quibus 
quum  aqua  et  igni  interdixissent.  Cses. — Instead  of  the  ablative,  a  subjunctive 
clause  with  ne,  and  more  rarely  with  ut,  sometimes  follows  interdico. — Absum, 
in  like  manner,  takes  the  ablative  with  ab,  and  sometimes  the  dative;  as, 
Curtce  nescio  quid  semper  dbest  rei.  Hor.  Cf.  §  224,  R.  1. — Abdico  takes  some¬ 
times  an  ablative,  and  sometimes  an  accusative  of  the  thing  renounced ;  as, 
Abdirdre  se  magistratu.  Cic.  Abdicare  magistratum.  Sail.  In  Plautus,  cir¬ 
cumduco ,  to  cheat,  takes  the  ablative  of  the  thing.  Intercludo,  instead  of  an 
ablative  of  the  thing  with  an  accusative  of  the  person,  sometimes  takes  an 
accusative  of  the  thing  and  a  dative  of  the  person ;  as,  Itinerum  angustiae  mul¬ 
titudini  fugam  intercluserant.  Caes.:  and,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  the  thing, 
a  subjunctive  clause  with  quominus  occurs:  Intercludor  dolore ,  quominus  ad  te 
plura  scribam.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Verbs  which  signify  to  distinguish,  to  differ,  and  to  disagree,  are 
generally  construed  with  ab,  but  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets,  with  the 
ablative  alone. 

Note.  Verbs  signifying  to  distinguish,  etc.,  are  distinguo,  discerno  secerno, 
differo,  discrepo,  dissideo,  disto,  dissentio,  discordo,  abhorreo,  alieno,  and  abalieno. — 
Dissentio,  dissideo,  discrepo,  and  discordo  are  construed  also  with  cum. — The 
verbs  which  signify  to  differ  are  sometimes  construed  with  the  dative;  as, 
Distat  infido  scurrae  amicus.  Hor.,  and  in  like  manner  the  adjective  diversus; 
as,  Nihil  est  tam  Lysiae  diversum,  quam  Isocrates.  Quint. 


252  SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  OF  PRICE  AND  TIME.  §  252,  253. 


ABLATIVE  OF  PRICE. 

§  252.  The  'price  or  value  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  ablative, 
when  it  is  a  definite  sum,  or  is  expressed  by  a  substantive ;  as, 

Quum  te  trecentis  talentis  r$gi  Cotto  vendidisses,  When  you  had  sold  yourself 
to  king  Cottus  for  three  hundred  talents.  Cic.  Vendidit  hic  auro  patriam ,  This 
one  sold  his  country  for  gold.  Virg.  Cibus  uno  asse  venalis.  Pjin.  Constitit  quad¬ 
ringentis  millibus.  Varr.  Denis  in  diem  assibus  animum  et  corpus  ( militum ) 
aestimari.  Tac..  Levi  momento  cestimare.  Caes.  Istuc  verbum  vile  est  viginti  mi¬ 
nis.  Plaut.  Asse  carum  est.  Sen.  Ep. 

Remark  1.  The  verbs  which  take  an  ablative  of  price  or  value  are  (1)  cesti- 
mo,  duco,  facio,  fio,  habeo,  pendo,  puto,  deputo,  taxo:  (2)  emo,  mercor ,  vendo,  do, 
veneo,  sto,  consto,  prosto,  conduco,  Ideo,  valeo,  luo,  and  liceo. — To  these  must  be 
added  others,  which  express  some  act  or  enjoyment  for  which  a  certain  price 
is  paid;  as,  Lavor  quadrante.  Triginta  millibus  Coelius  habitat.  Cic.  Vix  drachmis 
est  obsonatus  decem.  Ter.  Doceo  talento,  etc.  So  esse  in  the  sense  4  to  be  worth  ’ ; 
as,  Sextante  sal  in  Italia  erat. 

Rem.  2.  Respecting  the  genitive  of  price  or  value,  when  expressed  in  a  gen¬ 
eral  or  indefinite  manner,  see  §  214. 

Rem.  3.  The  price  of  a  thing,  contrary  to  the  general  rule,  is  often  expressed 
indefinitely  by  a  neuter  adjective;  as,  magno,  permagno ,  parvo,  tantulo,  plure , 
minimo,  plurimo ,  vili,  viliori ,  vilissimo,  nimio ,  etc. ;  as,  Plure  venit.  Cic.  Conduxit 
non  magno  domum.  Id.  These  adjectives  refer  to  some  noun  understood,  as 
pretio,  cere ,  and  the  like,  which  are  sometimes  expressed ;  as,  Parvo  pretio  ea 
vendidisse.  Cic. — The  adverbs  bene,  pulchre,  recte,  male,  care,  etc.,  sometimes 
take  the  place  of  the  genitive  or  ablative  of  price ;  as,  Bene  emere ;  recte  ven¬ 
dere  ;  optime  vendere,  etc. 

Rem.  4.  Varro  has  used  valeo  with  the  accusative;  as,  Denarii  dicti,  quod 
denos  ceris  valebant. 

Rem.  5.  Muto  and  its  compounds,  commuto  and  permuto,  are  commonly  con¬ 
strued  like  verbs  of  selling,  the  thing  parted  with  being  put  in  the  accusative, 
and  the  thing  received  in  exchange  for  it,  in  the  ablative;  as,  Chaoniam  glan¬ 
dem  pingui  mutavit  arista.  Virg.  But  these  cases  are  often  reversed,  so  that  the 
thing  received  is  put  in  the  accusative  and  the  thing  given  for  it  ift  the  abla¬ 
tive  ;  as,  Cur  valle  permutem  Sabina  divitias  Operosiores  ?  Why  should  I  ex¬ 
change  my  Sabine  valley  for  more  wearisome  riches?  Hor. — Sometimes  in  this 
construction  cum  is  joined  with  the  ablative. 

ABLATIVE  OF  TIME. 

§353.  A  noun  denoting  the  time  at  or  within  which  any 
thing  is  said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  is  put  in  the  ablative  without 
a  preposition ;  as, 

Die  quinto  decessit,  He  died  on  the  fifth  day.  Nep.  Hoc  tempore,  At  this 
time.  Cic.  Tertia  vigilia  eruptionem  fecerunt ,  They  made  a  sally  at  the  third 
watch.  Caes.  Ut  hieme  naviges,  That  you  should  sail  in  the  winter.  Cic.  Prox¬ 
imo  triennio  omnes  gentes  subegit.  Nep.  Agamemnon  cum  universa  Grcecia  vix 
decem  annis  unam  cepit  urbem.  Nep. 

Note  1.  The  English  expression  ‘  by  day 1  is  rendered  in  Latin  either  by 
interdiu  or  die ;  4  by  night,’  by  noctu  or  nocte ;  and  4  in  the  evening,’  by  vespOre 
or  vesperi;  see  §  82,  Exc.  5,  (a.)  Ludis  is  used  for  in  tempdre  ludorum;  and 
Saturnalibus ,  Latinis ,  gladiatoribus,  for  ludis  Saturnalibus,  etc.  Other  nouns  not 
properly  expressing  time  are  used  in  that  sense  in  the  ablative  either  with  or 
without  in,  as  initio,  principio,  adventu  and  discessu  dlicujus ,  comitiis,  tumultu, 
bello,  pace ,  etc. ;  or  in  initio ,  etc.  But  bello  is  more  common  without  in,  if  it  is 


§253. 


SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  OF  TIME. 


253 


joined  with  an  adjective  or  a  genitive;  as,  Bello  Punico  secundo ,  bello  Latino¬ 
rum;  and  so,  also,  pugna  Cannensi.  So  we  say  in  pueritia ,  but  omit  in  with 
an  adjective;  as,  extrema  pueritia.  In  is  very  rarely  used  with  nouns  express¬ 
ing  a  certain  space  of  time^  as,  annus ,  dies ,  hora,  etc.,  for  the  purpose  of  de¬ 
noting  the  time  of  an  event.  In  tempdre  signifies  either  ‘  in  distress,’  or  4  in 
time,’  i.  e.  ‘  at  the  right  time  ’ ;  but  in  both  cases  tempdre  alone  is  used,  and 
tempdre  in  the  sense  of  4  early  ’  has  even  become  an  adverb,  an  earlier  form  of 
which  was  tempori  or  temperi,  whose  comparative  is  temperius. 

Remark  1.  When  a  period  is  marked  by  its  distance  before  or  after  another 
fixed  time,  it  may  be  expressed  by  ante  or  post  with  either  the  accusative  or 
the  ablative.— (a  )  The  preposition  is  regularly  placed  before  the  accusative, 
but  after  the  ablative.  If  an  adjective  is  used,  the  preposition  is  often  placed 
between  the  adjective  and  the  noun.  In  this  connection  the  ordinal  as  well  as 
the  cardinal  numbers  may  be  used.  Hence  the  English  phrase  4  after  three 
years,’  or  ‘  three  years  after,’  may  be  expressed  in  these  eight  ways ;  post  tres 
annos,  tribus  annis  post ;  post  tertium  annum ,  tertio  anno  post ;  tres  post  annos , 
tribus  post  annis ;  tertium  post  annum ,  tertio  post  anno. 

(6.)  When  ante  or  post  stands  last,  an  accusative  maybe  added  to  denote 
the  time  before  or  after  which  any  thing  took  place ;  as,  Multis  annis  post  de¬ 
cemviros.  Cic.  So  Consul  factus  est  annis  post  Romam  conditam  trecentis  dud - 
denonaginta. 

Note  2.  Post  and  ante  sometimes  precede  the  ablatives,  as  ante  annis  octo; 
post  paucis  diebus ;  and  also  before  such  ablatives  as  are  used  adverbially,  as 
post  aliquanto ;  ante  paulo. 

Note  3.  Quam  and  a  verb  are  sometimes  added  to  post  and  ante  in  all  the 
forms  above  specified ;  e.  g.  tribus  annis  postquam  venerat ;  post  tres  annos  quam 
venerat ;  tertio  anno  postquam  venerat ;  post  annum  tertium  quam  venerat ,  etc. ; 
all  of  which  expressions  signify  ‘  three  years  after  he  had  come.’  Sometimes 
post  is  omitted ;  as,  tertio  anno  quam  venerat. 

Note  4.  Instead  of  postquam ,  ‘  after,’  we  may  use  ex  quo ,  quum ,  or  a  relative 
agreeing  with  the*  preceding  ablative;  as,  Ipse  octo  diebus ,  quibus  has  Viter  as  da¬ 
bam ,  cum  Lepidi  copias  me  conjungam ;  i.  e.  in  eight  days  after  the  date  of  this 
letter.  Plane,  in  Cic.  Fam.  Mors  Sex.  Bosch  quatriduo ,  quo  is  occisus  est , 
Chrysogono  nuntiatur , — four  days  after  he  had  been  killed.  Cic.  Quem  triduo , 
quum  has  ddbam  liter  as,  exspectabam, — three  days  after  the  date  of  this  letter. 
Plane.  iifcCic.  In  such  cases  in  is  sometimes  joined  with  the  ablative;  as,  In 
diebus  paucis,  quibus  heee  acta  sunt,  moritur.  Ter. 

Rem.  2.  The  length  of  time  before  the  present  moment  may  be  expressed  by 
dbhinc  with  the  accusative,  and,  less  frequently,  the  ablative ;  as,  Quceslor  fuisti 
abhinc  annos  quatuordecim.  Cic.  Comitiis  jam  abhinc  triginta  diebus  habitis.  Id. 
The  same  is  also  expressed  by  ante  with  the  pronoun  hie ;  as,  ante  hos  sex 
menses  maledixisti  mihi, — six  months  ago.  Phsed.  Ante  is  sometimes  used  in¬ 
stead  of  dbhinc :  and  the  length  of  time  before  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the 
ablative  joined  with  hic  oville;  as,  Paucis  his  diebus ,  or  paucis  illis  diebus, — 
a  few  days  ago. 

Rem.  3.  The  time  at  which  anything  is  done,  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the 
neuter  accusative  id,  with  a  genitive ;  as,  Venit  id  temporis.  Cic.  So  with  a 
preposition;  Adiddiei.  Gell.  See  §  212,  R.  3. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  The  time  at  or  within  which  any  thing  is  done,  is  sometimes, 
with  personal  subjects,  expressed  by  de,  with  the  ablative;  as,  De  tertia  vigilia 
ad  hostes  contendit, — in  the  third  watch.  Cass.  Ut  jugulent  homines  surgunt  de 
nocte  latrones.  Hor.  So,  also,  with  sub ;  as,  Ne  sub  ipsa  prdfectidne  milites  oppi¬ 
dum  irrumperent, — at  the  very  time  of  his  departure.  Cass.  Sub  adventu  Roman¬ 
orum,  While  the  Romans  were  arriving.  Id. 

lb.)  The  time  within  which  any  thing  occurs,  is  also  sometimes  expressed  by 
intra  with  the  accusative ;  as,  Dimidiam  partem  nationum  subegit  intra  viginti 
dies.  Plaut.  Intra  decimum  diem,  quam  Pheras  venerat ,  In  less  than  ten  days 
after...  Liv. 


22 


254 


SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  OF  PLACE. 


§  254,  255. 


Rem.  5.  The  time  within  which  a  thing  happens,  is  often  expressed  by  the 
ablative  with  in;  especially  (a)  in  connection  with  numerals;  as,  Bis  in  die 
saturum  Jieri;  vix  ter  in  anno  nuntium  audire;  and  (6),  as  in  the  use  of  intra , 
to  denote  that  the  event  happened  before  the  time  specified  had  fully  expired. 

Rem.  6.  Instead  of  in  pueritia ,  dddlescentia ,  juventute ,  senectute,  etc.,  in  stat¬ 
ing  the  age  at  which  a  person  performed  any  action,  the  concretes  puer,  add - 
lescens ,  juvenis ,  senex,  etc.,  are  commonly  joined  to  the  verb ;  as,  On.  Pompeius , 
adolescens  se  et  patrem  consilio  servavit. — So,  also,  adjectives  ending  in  enarim 
are  sometimes  used  in  stating  the  number  of  years  a  person  has  lived;  as, 
Cicero  sexagenarius. 

For  the  ablative  denoting  duration  of  time,  see  §  236. 

ABLATIVE  OF  PLACE. 

§  254L  The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is  said  to 
he ,  or  to  be  done ,  if  of , the  third  declension  or  plural  number,  is 
put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Alexander  Babylone  est  mortuus ,  Alexander  died  at  Babylon.  Cic.  Intererit 
multum — Thebis  nutritus  an  Argis, — whether  brought  up  at  Thebes  or  at  Argos. 
Hor.  Natus  Tibure  vel  Gabiis.  Id. 

Remark  1.  ‘  In  the  country  *  is  expressed  by  rure,  or  more  commonly  by 
ruri,  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Pater  filium  ruri  habitare  jussit.  Cic.  With  an 
adjective  only  rure  is  used;  as,  Interdum  nugaris  rure  paterno.  Hor.  Cf. 
\  221,  N. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  preposition  in  is  sometimes  expressed  with  names  of 
towns ;  as,  In  Philippis  quidam  nunciavit.  Suet. 

(b.)  Names  of  towns  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  and  singular  number, 
and  also  ddmus  and  humus ,  are  in  like  manner  sometimes  put  in  the  ablative 
without  in.  See  §  221,  R.  2  and  R.  3. — So,  also,  terra  marique,  by  land  and  by 
sea.  In  is  also  frequently  omitted  with  Idco  and  locis ,  especially  when  joined 
with  an  adjective  and  having  the  meaning  of  ‘occasion’;  as,  Hoc  loco,  multis 
Ideis,  etc. — Libro  joined  with  an  adjective,  as  hoc ,  primo ,  etc.,  is  used  without 
in  when  the  whole  book  is  meant,  and  with  in  when  only  a  portion  is  referred 
to.  An  ablative  of  place  joined  with  toto,  tota,  totis,  is  generally  used  without 
in ;  as,  XJrbe  tota  gemitus  jit.  Cic.  Tola  Asia  vdgdtur.  Id.  Toto  mari.  Id.  But 
in  such  cases  in  is  sometimes  used.  So  cunctd  Asia.  Liv. 

Rem.  3.  Before  the  names  of  countries,  of  nations  used  for  those  of  countries, 
and  of  all  other  places  in  which  any  thing  is  said  to  be  or  to  be  done,  except 
those  of  towns,  and  excepting  also  the  phrases  specified  in  the  first  and  second 
remarks,  the  preposition  in  is  commonly  used;  as,  Iphicrates  in  Thracia  vixit , 
Chares  in  Sigeo.  Nep.  Rure  ego  viventem,  tu  dicis  in  urbe  bedtum.  Hor.  Aio  hoc 
feri  in  Graecia.  Plaut.  In  Bactrianis  Sogdianis^i/e  urbes  condidit.  Lucus  i-n 
urbe  fuit.  Virg.  But  it  is  sometimes  omitted  by  WTiters  of  every  class  and 
period;  as,  Milites  stativis  castris  habebat.  Sali.  Magnis  in  laudibus  fuit  tota 
Graecia.  Nep.  Populi  sensus  maxime  theatro  et  spectaculis  perspectus  est.  Cic. 
Pompeius  se  oppido  tenet.  Id.  In  the  poets  and  later  prose  writers  this  omis¬ 
sion  is  of  very  frequent  occtfrrence  not  only  with  names  of  towns  but  with 
ablatives  of  all  nouns  answering  to  the  question,  where?  as,  Ndvita  puppe 
sedens..  Ovid.  I  bam  forte  Yin,  Sacra.  Hor.  Silvisque  agrisque  viisq  ne  corpdra 
foeda  jacent.  Ovid.  Medio  alveo  concursum  est.  Liv. — Fdris,  out  at  the  door, 
abroad,  is  properly  an  ablative  of  place  ;  as,  Foris  coenat.  Cic.  Cf.  §  237, 
R.  5,  (c.) 

§  f&55*  1.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 

name  of  a  town  whence  the  motion  proceeds,  is  put  in  the  abla¬ 
tive,  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 


§  256.  SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES.  255 


Brundisio  prdfecti  sumus ,  We  departed  from  Brundisium.^  Cic.  Didnysius 
tyrannus  Syracusis  expulsus  Corinthi  pueros  docebat.  Id.  Demaratus  Tarquinios 
Corintho  jugit.  Id.  Accepi  tuas  literas  datas  Placentia.  Id.  Interim  Roma  per 
llteras  certior  jit;  scii,  datas  or  missas.  Sali.  J.  82.  So,  also,  after  a  verbal 
noun;  as,  Narbone  reditus.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  ablatives  domo ,  humo,  and  rure  or  ruri,  are  used, 
like  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place  whence  motion  proceeds ; 
as, 

Domo  prdfectus,  Having  set  out  from  home.  Nep.  Surgit  humo  juvenis , 
The  youth  rises  from  the  ground.  Ovid.  Rure  huc  advenit.  Ter.  Si  ruri  veniet. 
Id.  Virgil  uses  domo  with  unde ;  as,  Qui  genus  ?  unde  d6mo  ?  and  Livy,  in¬ 
stead  of  domo  dbesse,  has  esse  ab  ddmo.  With  an  adjective,  rure,  and  not  ruri , 
must  be  used. 

Rem.  2.  With  names  of  towns  and  ddmus*  and  humus,  when  answering  the 
question  ‘whence?’  ab,  ex ,  or  de ,  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Ab  Alexandria  prd¬ 
fectus.  Cic.  Ex  domo.  Id.  De  vitifera  venisse  Vienna.  Mart.  Abhumo.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  With  other  names  of  places  whence  motion  proceeds,  ab,  ex, 
or  de,  is  commonly  expressed;  as,  Me  a  portu  preemisit.  Plaut.  Ex  Asia 
transis  in  Europam.  Curt.  Ex  castris  prdficiscuntur.  Cass.  De  Pomptino, 
scii,  praedio.  Cic. — So,  also,  before  names  of  nations  used  for  those  of  coun¬ 
tries  ;  as,  Ex  Medis  ad  adversariorum  hibernacula  pervenit.  Nep. 

(A)  But  the  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Literal  Macedonia  alldtce. 
Liv.  Classis  Cypro  advenit.  Curt.  Cessissent  loco.  Liv.  Ni  cite  vicis  et  castellis 
proximis  subventum  f  6ret.  Id.  Ite  sacris,  prdperdte  sacris,  laurumque  capillis 
ponite.  Ovid.  Finibus  omnes  prosiluere  suis.  Virg.  Advolvunt  ingentes  monti¬ 
bus  ornos.  Id.  This  omission  of  the  preposition  is  most  common  in  the  poets 
and  later  prose  writers. 

2.  The  place  by,  through,  or  over  which,  after  verbs  of  motion,  com¬ 
monly  follows  per ;  but  frequently  also  it  is  put  in  the  ablative  with¬ 
out  a  preposition ;  as, 

Per  Thebas  iter  fecit.  Nep.  Exercitum  vado  transducit.  Caes.  His  pontibus 
pabulatum  mittebat.  Id.  Tribuni  militum  porta  Collina  urbem  intravere  sub  signis, 
mediate  urbe  agmine  in  Aventinum  pergunt.  Liv.  Legiones  Penninis  Cottianis- 
que ^  Alpibus,  pars  monte  Graio,  traducuntur.  Tac.  Equites  via  breviore  prae¬ 
misi.  Cic. 


ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES. 

§  956.  1.  When  two  objects  are  compared  by  means  of  the  comparative 
degree,  a  conjunction,  as  quam,  atque ,  etc.,  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  some¬ 
times  omitted. 

2.  The  comparative  degree,  when  quam  is  omitted,  is  followed 
by  the  ablative  of  that  with  which  the  comparison  is  made ;  as, 

Nihil  est  virtute  formosius,  Nothing  is  more  beautiful  than  virtue.  Cic.  Quis 
C.  Laelio  comior  ?  Who  is  more  courteous  than  C.  Laelius  ?  Id. 

Remark  1.  The  person  or  thing  with  which  the  subject  of  a  pro¬ 
position  is  compared,  is  usually  put  in  the  ablative;  as , 

Sidere  pulchrior  ille  est,  tu  levior  cortice.  Hor.  Vilius  argentum  est  auro,  vir¬ 
tutibus  aurum.  Id.  Tullus  Hostilius  ferocior  Romulo  fuit.  Liv.  Lacrima  nihil 
citius  arescit.  Cic.  Quid  magis  est  durum  saxo,  quid  mollius  unda?  Ovid.  Hoc 
nemo  fuit  minus  ineptus.  Ter.  Albanum ,  Maecenas,  sive  Falernum  te  magis  ap¬ 
positis  delectat.  Hor. 


256  SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES.  §  256. 


Rem.  2.  An  object  with  which  a  person  or  thing  addressed  is  compared,  is 
also  put  in  the  ablative ;  as,  0  fons  Bandusice  splendidior  vitro  I  Hor. 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes  the  person  or  thing  with  which  the  subject  of  a  proposi¬ 
tion  is  compared,  instead  of  following  it  in  the  ablative,  is  connected  with  it  by 
quam ,  and  it  is  then  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  whether  in  the  nomi¬ 
native  or  the  accusative;  as,  Oratio  quam  habitus  fuit  miserabilior.  Cic. 
Affirmo  nullam  esse  laudem  ampliorem  quam  eam.  Id.  So,  also,  when  an  abla¬ 
tive  in  the  case  absolute  takes  the  place  of  the  subject;  as,  Eodem  (scii,  duce) 
plura ,  quam  gregario  milite,  idler  ante.  Tac. 

Rem.  4.  If  the  person  or  thing  which  is  compared  with  any  object  is  neither 
the  subject  of  the  sentence  nor  the  person  addressed,  quam  is  commonly  used, 
and  the  object  which  follows  it  is  then  put  in  the  nominative  with  sum,  and 
sometimes  in  an  oblique  case  to  agree  with  the  object  with  which  it  is  com¬ 
pared;  as,  Meliorem,  quam  ego  sum,  suppono  tibi.  Plaut.  Ego  hominem  calli¬ 
diorem  vidi  neminem  quam  Phormionem.  Ter.  Adventus  hostium  fuit  agris, 
quam  urbi  terribilior.  Liv.  Omn&  fontes  sestate,  quam  hieme,  sunt  gelidiores. 
Plin.  Themistoclis  nomen ,  quam  Solonis,  est  illustrius.  Cic. — The  following 
example  illustrates  both  the  preceding  constructions: — Ut  tibi  multo  majori , 
quam  Africanus  fuit,  me  non  multo  minbi'em  quam  Laelium  f  dcile  et  in  repultlicd 
et  in  amicitia  adjunctum  esse  pdtiare.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  person  or  thing  with  which  the  object  of  an  active  verb  is 
compared,  though  usually  connected  with  it  by  quam ,  (R.  4,)  is  sometimes  put 
in  the  ablative,  especially  in  the  poets,  and  frequently  also  even  in  prose,  if  the 
object  is  a  pronoun,  particularly  a  relative  pronoun ;  as,  Attalo,  quo  graviorem 
inimicum  non  habui ,  sdrbrem  dedit ,  He  gave  his  sister  to  Attalus,  than  whom}  etc. 
Curt.  Hoc  nihil  gratius  facere  p6tes.  Cic.  Causam  enim  suscepisti  antiquiorem 
memoria  tua.  Id.  Exegi  monumentum  aere  perennius.  Hor.  Cur  dlivum  san¬ 
guine  viperino  cautius  vitat  ?  Id.  Quid  prius  dicam  solitis  parentis  laudibus  ?  Id. 
Majora  viribus  audes.  Virg.  Nullam  sacra  vite  prius  severis  arbdrem.  Hor. 
Nullos  his  mallem  ludos  spectasse.  Id.  §  178,  3. 

(6.)  The  ablative  instead  of  quam  is  never  used  with  any  other  oblique  case 
except  the  accusative,  but  quam  is  sometimes  found,  even  where  the  ablative 
might  have  been  used ;  as,  Melior  tutiorque  est  certa  pax  quam  sperata  victbna. 
Liv.  After  quam ,  if  the  verb  cannot  be  supplied  from  the  preceding  sentence, 
est,  fuit ,  etc.,  must  be  added;  as,  Hcec  verba  sunt  M.  Varronis ,  quam  fuit 
Claudius ,  doctioris.  Geli.  Drusum  Germanicum  minorem  natu ,  quam  ipse  erat, 
fratrem  amisit.  Sen. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  Minus,  plus ,  and  amplius  with  numerals,  and  with  other  words 
denoting  a  certain  measure  or  a  certain  portion  of  a  thing,  are  used  either  with 
or  without  quam,  generally  as  indeclinable  words,  without  influence  upon  the 
construction,  but  merely  to  modify  the  number;  as,  Non  plus  quam  quatuor 
millia  effugerunt,  not  effugit.  Liv.  Pictores  antiqui  non  sunt  usi  plus  quam  qua- 
tuor  coloribus ,  not  pluribus.  Cic. 

(b.)  Quam  is  frequently  omitted  with  all  cases;  as,  Minus  duo  millia  homi¬ 
num  ex  tanto  exercitu  effugerunt.  Liv.  Milites  Romani  scepe  plus  dimidiati  men¬ 
sis  cibaria  ferebant.  Cic.  Quum  plus  annum  ceg  er  fuisset.  Liv.  Sedecim  non 
amplius  eo  anno  legionibus  defensum  imperium  est.  Id. 

(c.)  These  comparatives,  as  in  the  preceding  example,  are  sometimes  in¬ 
serted  between  the  numeral  and  its  substantive,  and  sometimes,  when  joined 
with  a  negative,  they  follow  both,  as  a  sort  of  apposition ;  as,  Quinque  millia 
armatorum ,  non  amplius ,  relictum  erat  prcesidium, — a  garrison  of  five  thousand 
soldiers,  not  more.  Liv.  So,  also,  longius ;  Ccesar  certior  est  factus ,  magnas 
Gallorum  copias  non  longius  millia  passuum  octo  ab  hibernis  suis  abfuisse.  Cses. 

(d.)  The  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with  these  as  with  other  comparatives; 
as,  Dies  triginta  aut  plus  eo  in  navi  fui.  Ter.  Triennio  amplius.  Cic.  Hora 
amplius  moliebantur.  Id.  Ne  longius  triduo  ab  castris  absit.  Cses.  Apud  Suevos 
non  longius  anno  remanere  uno  in  loco  incolendi  causa  licet .  Id.  Quum  initio  non 
amplius  duobus  millibus  habuisset.  Sali. 


§  256.  SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES, 


257 


Rem.  7.  Quam  is  in  like  manner  sometimes  omitted,  without  a  change  of 
case,  after  major ,  minor ,  and  some  other  comparatives;  as,  Obsides  ne  minores 
octonum  denum  annorum  neu  majores  quinum  quadragenum,....  of  not  less 
than  eighteen,  nor  more  than  forty-five  years  of  age.  Liv.  Ex  wrbdm  exercitu , 
qui  minores  quinque  et  triginta  annis  erant ,  in  naves  impositi  sunt.  The  genitive 
and  ablative,  in  these  and  similar  examples,  are  to  be  referred  to  §  211,  R.  6. 
Longius  ab  urbe  mille  passuum .  Liv.  Annos  natas  magis  quadraginta.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  When  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  is  an  infinitive  or  a 
clause,  quam  is  always  expressed;  as,  Nihil  est  in  dicendo  majus  quam  ut  faveat 
oratori  auditor.  Cic. 

Rem.  9.  Certain  nouns,  participles,  and  adjectives, — as  6pinione:  spe ,  ex¬ 
spectatione ,  fide , — dicto  r  sdlito , — aequo ,  credibili ,  necessario ,  vero ,  and  justo , — are 
used  in  a  peculiar  manner  in  the  ablative  after  comparatives ;  as,  Opinione 
celerius  venturus  esse  dicitur , — sooner  than  is  expected.  Caes.  Dicto  citius  tumi¬ 
da  aequora  jjldcat,  'Quicker  than  the  word  was  spoken.  Virg.  Injurias  gravius 
aequo  habere.  Sail. 

(a.)  These  ablatives  supply  the  place  of  a  clause;  thus,  gravius  aequo  is 
equivalent  to  gi'dvius  quam  quod  aequum  est.  '  They  are  often  omitted;  as,  The¬ 
mistocles  liberius  vivebat ,  scii,  aequo.  Nep.  In  such  cases,  the  comparative  may 
be  translated  by  the  positive  degree,  with  too ,  quite ,  or  rather ,  as  in  the  above 
example — ‘  He  lived  too  freely,’  or  ‘  rather  freely.’  Vdluptas  quum  major  est 
atque  longior,  omne  animi  lumen  exstinguit , — when  it  is  too  great,  and  of  too  long 
continuance.  Cic.  So  tristior ,  scil.  sdlito,  rather  sad. 

{ b .)  The  English  word  ‘still,’ joined  with  comparatives,  is  expressed  by 
etiam  or  vel,  and  only  in  later  prose  writers  by  ddhuc ;  as,  Ut  in  corporibus  mag¬ 
nae  dissimilitudines  sunt ,  sic  in  animis  exsistunt  majores  etiam  varietates.  Cic. 

Rem.  10.  (a.)  With  inferior ,  the  dative  is  sometimes  used,  instead  of  the 
ablative;  as,  Vir  nulla  arte  cuiquam  inferior.  Sail.  The  ablative  is  also  found; 
as,  Ut  humanos  casus  virtute  inferiores  putes.  Cic.  But  usually  inferior  is  fol¬ 
lowed  by  quam ;  as,  Timdtheus  belli  laude  non  inferiorfuil,  quam  pater.  Cic. 
Gratia  non  inferior,  quam  qui  umquam  fuerunt  amplissimi.  Id. 

(b.)  Qualis ,  ‘  such  as,’  with  a  comparative,  occurs  poetically  instead  of  the 
relative  pronoun  in  the  ablative ;  as,  Nardo  perunctum ,  quale  non  perfectius 
meae  Idbdrdririt  manus ;  instead  of  quo.  Hor.  Epod.  5,  59.  Animae  quales  neque 
candidiores  terra  tulit ;  for  quibus.  Id.  Sat.  1,  5,  41. 

Rem.  11.  Quam  pro  is  used  after  comparatives,  to  express  disproportion;  as, 
Proelium  atrocius  quam  pro  numero  pugnantium ,  The  battle  was  more  severe 
than  was  proportionate  to  the  number  of  the  combatants.  Liv.  Minor ,  quam 
pro  tumultu,  caedes.  Tac. 

Rem.  12.  When  two  adjectives  or  adverbs  are  compared  with  each  other, 
both  are  put  in  the  comparative ;  as,  Triumphus  clarior  quam  gratior,  A  tri¬ 
umph  more  famous  than  acceptable.  Liv.  Fortius  quam  felicius  bellum  gesse¬ 
runt.  So,  also,  when  the  comparative  is  formed  by  means  of  rnagis ;  as,  Magis 
audacter  quam  parate  ad  dicendum  veniebat.  Cic. — Tacitus  uses  the  positive  in 
one  part  of  the  proposition;  as,  Speciem  excelsae  gloriae  vehementius  quam  caute 
appetebat ;  or  even  in  both;  as,  Claris  majoribus  quam  vetustis. 

Rem.  13.  (a.)  Pdtius  and  rnagis  are  sometimes  joined  pleonastically  with 
malle  and  praestare,  and  also  with  comparatives ;  as,  Ab  omnibus  se  desertos  po¬ 
tius  quam  abs  te  defensos  esse  malunt.  Cic.  Qui  magis  vere  vincere  quam  diu 
imperare  malit.  Liv.  Ut  emori  potius  quam  servire  praestaret.  Cic.  Mihi  quaevis 
fuga  potius  quam  ulla  provincia  esset  optatior.  Id.  Quis  magis  queat  esse  bea¬ 
tior?  Virg. 

(b.)  So,  also,  the  prepositions  prae,  ante ,  praeter,  and  supra ,  are  sometimes 
used  with  a  comparative ;  as,  Unus  prae  ceteris  fortior  exsurgit,  Apul.  Scelere 
ante  alios  immanior  omnes .  Virg.  They  also  occur  with  a  superlative;  as, 
Ante  alios  carissimus.  Nep.  As  these  prepositions,  when  joined  with  the 
positive,  denote  comparison,  they  seem  in  such  examples  to  be  redundant. 
See  §  127. 


22* 


258 


SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


§257. 


Rem.  14.  Alius  is  sometimes  in  poetry  treated  as  a  comparative,  and  con¬ 
strued  with  the  ablative  instead  of  atque  with  the  nominative  or  accusative; 
as,  Neve  putes  alium  sapiente  honbque  beatum.  Hor.  Alius  Lysippo.  Id.  But 
compare  §  251,  N. 

Rem.  15.  By  the  poets  ac  and  atque  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  quam 
after  comparatives ;  as,  Quanto  constantior  idem  in  vitiis ,  tanto  levius  miser  ac 
prior  ille ,  qui,  etc.  Hor.  Arctius  atque  hedera  procera  adstringitur  ilex.  Id. 

Rem.  16.  The  degree  of  difference  between  objects  compared  is 
expressed  by  the  ablative : — 

(1.)  Of  substantives;  as,  Minor  uno  mense,  Younger  by  one  month.  Hor. 
Sesquipede  quam  tu  longior ,  Taller  than  you  by  a  foot  and  a  half.  Plaut. 
Hibernia  dimidio  minor  quam  Britannia.  Caes.  Dimidio  minans  constabit ,  It 
will  cost  less  by  half.  Cic.  Quam  mdlestum  est  uno  digito  plus  habere  /....to  have 
one  finger  more,  i.  e.  than  we  have,  to  have  six  fingers.  Id. — but  the  expression 
is  ambiguous,  as  it  might  mean  4  to  have  more  than  one  finger.’  Superat  capite 
et  cervicibus  altis.  Virg. 

(2.)  Of  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity  and  neuter  pronouns,  in  the  singular 
number.  Such  are  tanto ,  quanto ,  quo ,  eo,  hoc ,  multo ,  parvo ,  paulo ,  nimio ,  ali¬ 
quanto,  tantulo ,  altero  tanto  (twice  as  much);  as,  Multo  doctior  es  patre,  Thou 
art  (by)  much  more  learned  than  thy  father.  The  relative  and  demonstrative 
words,  quanto — tanto ,  quo — eo,  or  quo — hoc,  signifying  4  by  how  much — by  so 
much,’  are  often  to  be  translated  bv  an  emphatic  the ;  as,  Quanto  sumus  superi¬ 
ores,  tanto  nos  submissius  geramus,  ^The  more  eminent  we  are,  the  more  humbly 
let  us  conduct  ourselves :  lit.  by  how  much— by  so  much — .  Cic.  Eo  gravior 
est  dolor,  quo  culpa  est  majoi\  Id.  But  the  relative  word  generally  precedes 
the  demonstrative;  as,  Quo  difficilius ,  hoc  praeclarius.  Id.  Poetically,  also, 
quam  magis — tam  magis  are  used  instead  of  quanto  rnagis — tanto  magis.  Virg. 
jEn.  7,  787:  and  quam  magis — tanto  magis.  Lucr.  6,  459. — Iter  multo  facilius, — 
much  easier.  Caes.  Parvo  brevius,  A  little  shorter.  Plin.  Eo  rnagis ,  The  more. 
Cic.  Eo  minus.  Id.  Istoc  magis  vapulabis ,  So  much  the  more.  Plaut.  Via  altero 
tanto  longior, — as  long  again.  Nep.  Multo  id  maximum  fuit.  Liv. 

(3.)  The  ablative  of  degree  is  joined  not  only  with  comparatives  but  with 
verbs  which  contain  the  idea  of  comparison ;  as,  malo,  prcesto ,  supero ,  excello, 
antecello,  antecedo ,  and  others  compounded  with  ante ;  and  also  with  ante  and 
post,  in  the  sense  of 4  earlier  ’  and  4  later  ’ ;  as,  Multo  prcestat.  Sail.  Post  paulo , 
A  little  after.  Id.  Multo  ante  lucis  adventum,  Long  before — .  Id.  Multis  parti¬ 
bus  is  equivalent  to  multo;  as,  Numero  multis  partibus  esset  inferior.  Caes. 

Note.  The  accusatives  multum,  tantum ,  quantum ,  and  aliquantum,  are  some¬ 
times  used  instead  of  the  corresponding  ablatives ;  as,  Aliquantum  est  ad  ran 
avidior.  Ter.  Multum  improbiores  sunt.  Plaut.  Quantum  domo  inferior,  tan¬ 
tum  gloria  superior  evdsit.  Val.  Max.  Cf.  §  232,  (3.) — So  longe,  4  far,’  is  fre¬ 
quently  used  for  multo  ;  as,  Longe  melior.  Virg.  Longe  et  rtiultum  antecellere. 
Cic.  So,  pars  pedis  sesqui  mdjoi', — longer  by  one  half.  Id. 

ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

§  257.  A  noun  and  a  participle  are  put  in  the  ablative, 
called  absolute ,  to  denote  the  time,  cause,  means,  or  concomitant 
of  an  action,  or  the  condition  on  which  it  depends ;  as, 

Pythdgdras,  Tarquinio  regnante,  in  Italiam  venit ,  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy, 
in  the  reign  of  Tarquin.  Cic.  Lupus,  stimulante  fame,  captat  frvile,  Hunger  in¬ 
citing,  the  wolf  seeks  the  fold.  Ovid.  Milites ,  pecore  e  longinquioribus  vicis 
adacto,  extremam  famem  sustentabant.  Caes.  Hac  oratibne  habita,  concilium 
dimisit.  Id.  Galli,  re  cognita,  obsidionem  relinquunt .  Id.  Virtute  excepta,  nihil 
amicitia  praestabilius  putetis.  Cic. 


§257, 


SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


259 


Note  1.  The  Latin  ablative  absolute  may  be  expressed  in  English  by  a  sim¬ 
ilar  construction,  but  it  is  commonly  better  to  translate  it  by  a  clause  connect¬ 
ed  by  when ,  since,  while,  although ,  after,  as,  etc.,  or  by  a  verbal  substantive ; 
as,  Te  adjuvante,  With  thy  assistance.  Non — nisi  te  adjuvante,  Only  with  thy 
assistance,  or  not  without  thy  assistance.  Te  non  adjuvante,  Without  thy  as¬ 
sistance.  Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (c.) 

Remark  1.  This  construction  is  an  abridged  form  of  expression, 
equivalent  to  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  quum,  si,  etsi,  quam¬ 
quam,  quamvis,  etc. 

Thus,  for  Tarquinio  regnante,  the  expression  dum  Tarquinius  regnabat  might 
be  used;  for  hac  oratione  kabitd ; — quum  hanc  orationem  habuisset,  or  quum  haec 
oratio  habita  esset, — concilium  dimisit.  The  ablative  absolute  may  always  be 
resolved  into  a  proposition,  by  making  the  noun  or  pronoun  the  subject,  and 
the  participle  the  predicate. 

Rem.  2.  This  construction  is  common  only  with  present  and  per¬ 
fect  participles.  Instances  of  its  use  with  participles  in  rus  and  dus 
are  comparatively  rare ;  as, 

Csesare  venturo,  Phosphore,  redde  diem.  Mart.  Irrupturis  tam  infestis  na¬ 
tionibus.  Liv.  Quum  concio  plausum,  meo  nomine  recitando,  dedisset, — when  my 
name  was  pronounced.  Cic.  Quum  immolanda  Iphigenia  tristis  Calchas  esset. 
Id.  Quis  est  enim,  qui,  nullis  officii  praeceptis  tradendis,  philosophum  se  audeat 
dicere — without  propounding  any  rules  of  duty.  Cic.  Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (c.)  and 
R.  9. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  A  noun  is  put  in  the  ablative  absolute,  only  when  it 
denotes  a  different  person  or  thing  from  any  in  the  leading  clause. 
Cf.  §  274,  3,  (a.) 

{b.)  Yet  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  deviation  from  this  principle,  especially 
with  a  substantive  pronoun  referring  to  some  word  in  the  leading  clause ;  as, 
Se  audiente,  scribit  Thucydides.  Cic.  Legio  ex  castris  Varronis ,  adstante  et  in¬ 
spectante  ipso,  signa  sustulit.  Caes.  Me  duce,  ad  hunc  voti  finern,  me  milite, 
veni.  Ovid.  So  M.  Porcius  Cato,  vivo  qudque  Scipione,  allatrare  ejus  magnitudi¬ 
nem  solitus  erat.  Liv. 

Note  2.  Two  participles  must  not  be  put  together  in  the  ablative  absolute 
agreeing  with  the  same  noun.  Thus,  we  may  say  Porcia,  saepe  maritum  cogi¬ 
tantem  invenerat,  but  not,  Porcia  marito  cogitante  invento. 

Note  3.  Instead  of  the  ablative  absolute  denoting  a  cause ,  an  accusative 
with  ob  or  propter  occurs  in  Livy  and  in  later  writers ;  as,  Canopum  condidere 
Spartani ,  ob  sepultum  illic  rectorem  navis  Canopum.  Tac.  Decemviri  libros 
Sibyllinos  inspicere  jussi  sunt  propter  territos  homines  novis  prodigiis.  Liv. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  absolute  serves  to  mark  the  time  of  an  ac¬ 
tion,  by  reference  to  that  of  another  action.  If  the  present  participle 
is  used,  the  time  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  participle,  is  the  same 
as  that  of  the  principal  verb.  The  perfect  participle  and  the  future 
in  rus,  denote  respectively  an  action  as  prior  or  subsequent  to  that 
expressed  by  the  principal  verb. 

Thus  in  the  preceding  examples — Pythagdras,  Tarquinio  regnante,  in  Italiam 
venit,  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy  during  the  reign  of  Tarquinius.  Galli,  re  cog¬ 
nita,  obsidionem  relinquunt,  The  Gauls,  having  learned  the  fact ,  abandon  the 
siege.  So,  Rex  apum  non  nisi  migraturo  examine  f  or  as  procedit,  The  king-bee 
does  not  go  abroad,  except  when  a  swarm  is  about  to  emigrate.  Plin. 


260 


SYNTAX. - ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


257. 


Note  4.  Non  prius  quam ,  non  nisi,  ut ,  velut ,  and  tamquam,  are  sometimes 
joined  with  the  participle;  as,  Tiberius  excessum  Augusti  non  prius  palam  fecit, 
quam  Agrippa  juvene  interempto, — not  until.  Suet.  Galli  Iceti,  ut  explorata,  vic¬ 
toria,  ad  castra  Romanorum  pergunt.  Caes.  Antiochus ,  tamquam  non  transituris 
in  Asiam  Romanis,  etc.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  (ad)  The  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute  with  the 
perfect  passive  participle,  arises  frequently  from  the  want  of  a  par¬ 
ticiple  of  that  tense  in  the  active  voice. 

Thus,  for  ‘  Caesar,  having  sent  forward  the  cavalry,  was  following  with  all  his 
forces,’  we  find,  ‘  Ccesar,  equitatu  praemisso,  subsequebatur  omnibus  copiis .’ 

( b .)  As  the  perfect  participle  in  Latin  maybe  used  for  both  the  perfect 
active  and  the  perfect  passive  participles  in  English,  its  meaning  can,  in  many 
instances,  be  determined  only  by  the  connection,  since  the  agent  with  a  or  ab 
is  generally  not  expressed  with  this  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute,  as  it  is 
with  other  parts  of  the  passive  voice.  Thus,  Ccesar,  his  dictis,  concilium  dimisit, 
might  be  rendered,  ‘  Caesar,  having  said  this,  or  this  having  been  said  (by  some 
other  person),  dismissed  the  assembly.’ 

(c.)  As  the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs  correspond  to  perfect  active 
participles  in  English,  no  such  necessity  exists  for  the  use  of  the  ablative  ab¬ 
solute  with  them ;  as,  Ccesar,  haec  locutus,  concilium  dimisit.  In  the  following 
example,  both  constructions  are  united:  Itaque... .agros  Remorum  depopulati, 
omnibus  vicis,  cedificiisque  incensis.  Cses. 

Rem.  6.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  and  some  also  of 
active  deponents,  which  admit  of  both  an  active  and  a  passive  sense,  are  used 
in  the  ablative  absolute ;  as,  Orta  luce.  Caes.  Vel  exstincto  vel  elapso  animo, 
nullum  residere  sensum.  Cic.  Tam  multis  gloriam  ejus  adeptis.  Plin.  Literas 
ad  exercitus,  tamquam  adepto  principatu,  misit.  Tac. 

Rem.  7.  (a.)  As  the  verb  sum  has  no  present  participle,  two 
nouns,  or  a  noun  and  an  adjective,  which  might  be  the  subject  and 
predicate  of  a  dependent  clause,  are  put  in  the  ablative  absolute 
without  a  participle ;  as, 

Quid,  adolescentulo  duce,  efficere  possent,  What  they  could  do  under  the 
guidance  of  a  youth.  Caes.  Me  suasore  atque  impulsore,  hoc  factum ,  By  my 
advice  and  instigation.  Plaut.  Hannibale  vivo,  While  Hannibal  was  living.  Nep. 
Invito,  Miner-vd,  in  opposition  to  one’s  genius.  Cic.  Coelo  sereno ,  when  the 
weather  is  clear.  Virg.  Me  igndro,  without  my  knowledge.  Cic.  With  names 
of  office,  the  concrete  noun  is  commonly  used  in  the  ablative  absolute,  rather 
than  the  corresponding  abstract  with  in  to  denote  the  time  of  an  event;  as, 
Romam  venit  Mario  consule,  He  came  to  Rome  in  the  consulship  of  Marius.  Cic. 

( b .)  The  nouns  so  used  as  predicates  are  by  some  grammarians  considered 
as  supplying  the  place  of  participles  by  expressing  in  themselves  the  action  of 
a  verb.  Such  are  dux,  comes ,  adjutor  and  adjutrix ,  auctor ,  testis,  judex,  inter¬ 
pres,  magister  and  magistra,  praeceptor  and  prceceptHx ;  as,  duce  natura,  in  the 
sense  of  ducente  natura,  under  the  guidance  of  nature ;  j udice  Polybio,  according 
to  the  judgment  of  Polybius. 

Rem.  8.  A  clause  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  noun ;  as,  Nondum  ■ 
comperto  quam  in  regionem  venisset  rex.  Liv.  Audito  venisse  nuncium.  Tac. 
Vale  dicto.  Ovid.  This  construction,  however,  is  confined  to  a  few  participles; 
as,  audito,  cognito,  comperto,  explorato,  desqierato,  nuncidto,  dicto,  edicto.  But  the 

fdace  of  such  participle  is  sometimes  supplied  by  a  neuter  adjective  in  the  ab- 
ative;  as,  Incerto  pros  tenebris  quid  peterent.  Liv.  Cf.  R.  7,  {a.)  Haud  cuiquam 
dubio  quin  hostium  essent.  Id.  Juxta  periculoso  vera  an  ficta  promeret.  Tac. 

Rem.  9.  (1.)  The  noun  in  the  ablative,  like  the  subject  nominative,  is  some¬ 
times  wanting;  (a)  when  it  is  contained  in  a  preceding  clause;  as,  Atticus  Seind- 
liam ,  Bruti  matrem,  non  minus  post  mortem  ejus,  quam  florente,  diluit,  scii,  eo, 


§  258. 


SYNTAX. - CONNECTION  OF  TENSES. 


261 


i.  e.  Bruto.  Nep.  ( b )  When  it  is  the  general  word  for  person  or_  persons  fol¬ 
lowed  by  a  descriptive  relative  clause;  as,  Hannibal  Iberum  copias  trajecit , 
praemissis,  qui  Alpium  transitus  specularentur.  Liv.  (c)  When  the  participle  in 
the  neuter  singular  corresponds  to  the  impersonal  construction  of  neuter  verbs 
in  the  passive  voice ;  as,  In  amnis  transgressu ,  multum  certato,  Bardesdnes  vicit. 
Tac.  Mihi ,  errato,  nulla  venia ,  recte  facto,  exigua  laus  proponitur.  Cic.  Quum , 
nondum  palam  facto,  vivi  mortulque  promiscue  complorarentur .  Liv.  Nam  jam 
aetate  ea  sum ,  ut  non  siet ,  peccato,  mi  ignosci  aequum ;  i.  e.  si  peccatum  fuerit.  Ter. 
Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (b.)  .  ,  .  , 

(2.)  So  in  descriptions  of  the  weather;  as,  Tranquillo ,  scil.  man ,  the  sea 
being  tranquil.  Liv.  Sereno,  scii,  coelo ,  the  sky  being  clear.  Id.  Aranei  sereno 
texunt ,  nubilo  texunt,— in  clear  and  in  cloudy  weather.  Plin.  Substantives 
when  used  thus  are  to  be  considered  as  ablatives  of  time ;  as,  Comitiis,  ludis , 
Circensibus.  Suetonius  has  used  proscriptione  in  the  sense  of  ‘  during  the  pro¬ 
scription.’  So  pace  et  Principe.  Tac.  Imperio  populi  Romani.  Caes. 

Rem.  10.  This  ablative  is  sometimes  connected  to  the  preceding  clause  by  a 
conjunction;  as,  Caesar,  quamquam  obsidione  Massilice  retardante,  brevi  tamen 
omnia  subegit.  Suet.  Decemviri  non  ante,  quam  perlatis  legibus,  depdsituros  im¬ 
perium  esse  aiebant.  Liv. 

Rem.  11.  A  predicate  ablative  is  sometimes  added  to  passive  participles  of 
naming ,  choosing ,  etc.  §  210,  (3.);  as,  Hasdrubale  imperatore  suffecto .  Liv. 


CONNECTION  OF  TENSES. 


§  258.  Tenses,  in  regard  to  their  connection,  are  divided 
into  two  classes — principal  and  historical . 

A.  The  principal  tenses  are,  the  present ,  the  perfect  definite , 
and  the  two  futures . 

B.  The  historical,  which  are  likewise  called  the  preterite 
tenses  (§  145,  N.  2.),  are  the  imperfect ,  the  historical  perfect , 
and  the  pluperfect. 

I.  In  the  connection  of  leading  and  dependent  clauses,  only 
tenses  of  the  same  class  can,  in  general,  be  united  with  each  other. 
Hence : — 

1.  A  principal  tense  is  followed  by  the  present  and  perfect  defi¬ 
nite,  and  by  the  periphrastic  form  with  sim.  And : — 

2.  A  preterite  tense  is  followed  by  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect , 
and  by  the  periphrastic  form  with  essem. 

Note.  The  periphrastic  forms  in  each  class  supply  the  want  of  subjunctive 
futures  in  the  regular  conjugation. 

The  following  examples  will  illustrate  the  preceding  rules : — 

(a.)  In  the  first  class.  Scio  quid  agas.  Scio  quid  egeris.  Scio  quid  acturus 
sis. — Audivi  quid  agas,  I  have  heard  what  you  are  doing.  Audlvi  quid  egeris. 
Audivi  quid  acturus  sis. — Audiam  quid  agas,  etc. — Audivero  quid  agas,  etc. 

(b. )  In  the  second  class.  Sciebam  quid  ageres.  Sciebam  quid  egisses.  Sciebam 
quid  acturus  esses. — Audlvi  quid  ageres ,  I  heard  what  you  were  doing.  Audlvi 
quid  egisses.  Audlvi  quid  acturus  esses. — Audiveram  quid  ageres ,  etc. 

The  following  may  serve  as  additional  examples  in  the  first  class ;  viz.  of  principal 
tenses  depending  on, 

(1.)  The  Present;  as,  Non  sum  Ita  hebes,  ut  istuc  dicam.  Cic.  Quantum 
ddlorem  acceperim,  iu  existimare  potes.  Id.  Nec  dubito  quin  reditus  ejus  reipub - 
licce  salutaris  futurus  sit.  Id. 


262 


SYNTAX. — CONNECTION  OP  TENSES. 


§258. 


(2.)  The  Perfect  Definite;  as,  Satis  provisum  est,  ut  ne  quid  agere  pos¬ 
sint.  Id.  Quis  musicis ,  quis  huic  studio  literarum  se  dedidit,  quin  omnem  illarum 
artium  vim  comprehenderit.  Id.  Defectiones  solis  praedictae  sunt,  quae,  quantos, , 
quando  futurae  sint.  Id. 

(3.)  The  Futures;  as,  Sic  facillime,  quanta  oratorum  sit,  semperque  fuerit 
paucitas,  judicabit.  Id.  Ad  quos  dies  rediturus  sim,  scribam  ad  te.  Id.  Si 
scieris  aspidem  latere  uspiam,  et  velle  aliquem  imprudentem  super  eam  assidere , 
cujus  mat's  tibi  emdlumentum  factura  sit,  imprdbe  feceris,  nisi  monueris,  ne  assi¬ 
deat.  Id. 

The  following,  also,  are  additional  examples  in  the  second  class,  viz.  of  preterite  tenses 
depending  on, 

(1.)  The  Imperfect;  as,  Unum  illud  extimescebam,  ne  quid  turpiter  face¬ 
rem,  vel  jam  effecissem.  Cic.  Non  enim  dubitabam,  quin  eas  libenter  lecturus 
esses.  Id. 

(2.)  The  Historical  Perfect;  as,  Veni  in  ejus  villam  ut  libros  inde  prome¬ 
rem.  Id.  Haec  quum  essent  nuntiata,  Valerius  classem  extemplo  ad  ostium  flumi¬ 
nis  duxit.  Liv. 

(3.)  The  Pluperfect;  as,  Pavor  ceperat  milites,  ne  mortiferum  esset  vul¬ 
nus.  Liv.  Ego  ex  ipso  audieram,  quam  a  te  libSrdliter  esset  tractatus.  Cic.  Non. 
satis  mihi  constiterat,  cum  dliquane  animi  mei  mdlestia,  an  pdtius  libenter  te  Athe¬ 
nis  visurus  essem.  Id. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  When  the  present  is  used  in  narration  for  the  historical 
perfect,  it  may,  like  the  latter,  be  followed  by  the  imperfect;  as,  Legatos  mit¬ 
tunt,  ut  pacem  impetrarent.  Caes. 

( b .)  The  present  is  also  sometimes  followed  by  the  perfect  subjunctive  in  its 
historical  sense ;  as,  Pandite  nunc  Helicona ,  dece ,  cantusque  movete,  Qui  bello 
exciti  reges ,  quoe  quemque  secutae  Complerint  campos  acies.  Virg. 

Rem.  2.  The  perfect  definite  is  often  followed  by  the  imperfect,  even  when 
a  present  action  or  state  is  spoken  of,  if  it  is  possible  to  conceive  of  it  in  its  pro- 

gress,  and  not  merely  in  its  conclusion  or  result;  and  especially  when  the  agent 
ad  an  intention  accompanying  him  from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the 
action;  as,  Feci  hoc,  ut  intelllgeres,  I  have  done  this  that  you  might  under¬ 
stand;  i.  e.  such  was  my  intention  from  the  beginning.  Sunt  phildsophi  et  fue¬ 
runt,  qui  omnino  nullam  habere  censerent  humanarum  rerum  procurationem 
deos.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  historical  perfect  is  not  regularly  followed  by  the  perfect 
subjunctive,  as  the  latter  is  not,  in  general,  used  in  reference  to  past  action  in¬ 
definite. 

(6.)  These  tenses  are,  however,  sometimes  used  in  connection,  in  the  narra¬ 
tive  of  a  past  event,  especially  in  Livy  and  Cornelius  Nepos;  as,  Factum  est, 
ut  plus  quam  collegae  Miltiades  valuerit.  Nep. 

(c.)  The  imperfect  and  perfect  are  even  found  together  after  the  historical 
perfect,  when  one  action  is  represented  as  permanent  or  repeated,  and  the 
other  simply  as  a  fact;  as,  Adeo  nihil  miseriti  sunt,  ut  incursiones  facerent  et 
Veios  in  animo  habuerint  oppugnare.  Liv. 

( d .)  The  historical  perfect  may  even  be  followed  by  the  present,  when  a 
general  truth  is  to  be  expressed,  and  not  merely  one  which  is  valid  for  the  time 
indicated  by  the  leading  verb;  as,  Antidcho  pacem  petenti  ad  priores  conditiones 
nihil  additum,  Africano  praedicante,  neque  Romanis,  si  vincantur,  animos  minui , 
neque,  si  vincant,  secundis  rebus  insdlescere.  Just. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  As  present  infinitives  and  present  participles  depend  for  their 
time  upon  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected,  they  are  followed  by  such 
tenses  as  those  verbs  may  require;  as,  Apelles  pictores  qudque  eos  peccare 
dicebat,  qui  non  sentirent,  quid  esset  satis.  Cic.  Ad  te  scripsi,  te  leviter  accusans 
in  eo,  quod  de  me  cito  credidisses.  Id. 


§259. 


SYNTAX. — INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


263 


(b.)  In  like  manner  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive  following  the  infinitive 
future  is  determined  by  the  verb  on  which  such  infinitive  depends  ^  as,  Sol 
Phaethonti  filio  facturum  se  esse  dixit  quicquid  optasset.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  perfect  infinitive  follows  the  general  rule,  and  takes  after 
it  a  principal  or  a  preterite  tense,  according  as  it  is  used  in  the  definite  or  in 
the  historical  sense;  as,  Arbitramur  nos  ea  prsesKf:sse,  quce  ratio  et  doctrina 
prsescripserit.  Cic.  Est  quod  y audeas  te  in  ista  Idea  venisse,  ubi  aliquid  sdpere 
vlderere.  Id. 

( b .)  But  it  may  sometimes  take  a  different  tense,  according  to  Rem.  2;  as, 
Ita  mihi  videor  et  esse  Deos ,  et  quales  essent  satis  ostendisse.  Cic. 

II.  Tenses  belonging  to  different  classes  may  be  made  dependent 
on  each  other,  when  the  sense  requires  it. 

(a.)  Hence  a  present  or  perfect  definite  may  follow  a  preterite,  when  the  re¬ 
sult  of  a  past  action  extends  to  the  present  time ;  as,  Ardebat  autem  Hortensius 
cupiditate  dicendi  sic ,  ut  in  nullo  umquarn  flagrantius  studium  viderim;  i.  e.  that 
up  to  this  time  I  have  never  seen.  Cic.  And,  on  the  other  hand,  a  preterite 
may  follow  a  present  to  express  a  continuing  action  in  the  past;  as,  Scitote 
oppidum  esse  in  Sicilia  nullum ,  quo  in  oppido  non  isti  delecta  mulier  ad  libidinem 
esset:  ( esset  here  alludes  to  the  whole  period  of  Verres’  prsetorship. )  Cic. 

( b .)  But  without  violating  the  rule  which  requires  similar  tenses  to  depend 
upon  each  other,  the  hypothetical  imperfect  subjunctive,  may  be  followed  by 
the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive,  since  the  imperfect  subjunctive  refers  to  the 
present  time;  as,  Memorare  possem  quibus  in  locis  maximas  hostium  copias 
populus  Romanus  parva  manu  fuderit.  Sali.  Possem  here  differs  from  possum 
only  by  the  hypothetical  form  of  the  expression. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

§  259.  The  indicative  is  used  in  every  proposition  in  which 
the  thing  asserted  is  represented  as  a  reality. 

Note.  Hence  it  is  used  even  in  the  expression  of  conditions  and  suppositions 
with  si,  nisi,  etsi,  and  etiamsi ,  when  the  writer,  without  intimating  his  own 
opinion,  supposes  a  thing  as  actual,  or,  with  nisi,  makes  an  exception,  which, 
only  for  the  sake  of  the  inference,  he  regards  as  actual ;  as,  Mors  aut  plane 
negligenda  est ,  si  omnino  exstinguit  animum,  aut  etiam  optanda ,  si  aliquo  eum 
deducit,  ubi  sit  f  uturus  aeternus.  Cic.  Adhuc  certe ,  nisi  ego  insanio,  stulte  omnia 
et  incaute  fiunt.  Id. — It  is  likewise  used  in  interrogations. 

Remark  1.  The  several  tenses  have  already  been  defined,  and  their  usual  significations 
have  been  given  in  the  paradigms.  They  are,  however,  sometimes  otherwise  rendered, 
one  tense  being  apparently  used  with  the  meaning  of  another,  either  in  the  same  or  in  a 
different  mood.  Thus, 

(1.)  (a.)  The  present  is  often  used  for  the  historical  perfect  in  narration,  see 
§  145,  I.  3. — (6.)  It  is  sometimes  used  also  for  the  future  to  denote  the  certainty 
of  an  event,  or  to  indicate  passionate  emotion.  So2  also,  when  the  leading  sen¬ 
tence  contains  the  present  imperative,  si  is  often  joined  with  the  present  in¬ 
stead  of  the  future;  as,  defende  si  potes. — (c.)  The  present  is  also  used  for  the 
imperfect  or  perfect,  when  it  is  joined  with  dum  ‘  while  ’ ;  as,  Hum  ego  in  Sici¬ 
lia  sum,  nulla  stdtua  dejecta  est.  Cic.  It  is  even  so  used  by  Livy  in  transitions 
from  one  event  to  another;  as,  Dum  in  Asia  bellum  geritur,  ne  in  AS  tolis  quidem 
quietae  res  fuerant.  But  the  preterites  are  sometimes  used  with  dum  ‘  while  ’ ; 
and  dum  ‘  as  long  as  ’  is  regularly  joined  with  the  imperfect. 

(2.)  (a.)  The  perfect,  in  its  proper  signification,  i.  e.  as  a  perfect  deflnite , 
denotes  an  act  or  state  terminated  at  the  present  time.  Thus  Horace,  at  the 
close  of  a  work,  says,  Exegi  monumentum  aere  perennius ;  and  Ovid,  in  like  cir¬ 
cumstances,  Jamque  opus  exegi.  So,  also,  Panthus  in  Virgil,  in  order  to  de- 


264 


SYNTAX. — INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


§  259. 


note  the  utter  ruin  of  Troy,  exclaims,  Fu!mus7Voes,  fuit  Ilium,  i.  e.  we  are  no 
longer  Trojans,  Ilium  is  no  more. — ( b .)  The  perfect  indefinite  or  historical  per¬ 
fect  is  used  in  relating  past  events,  when  no  reference  is  to  be  made  to  the 
time  of  other  events ;  as,  Caesar  Rubiconem  transiit,  Caesar  crossed  the  Rubicon, 
(c.)  As  in  the  epistolary  style  the  imperfect  is  used  instead  of  the  present, 
when  an  incomplete  action  is  spoken  of  (§  145,  II.  3),  so  the  historical  perfect 
is  in  like  circumstances  employed  instead  of  the  present,  when  speaking  of  a 
completed  action.  With  both  the  imperfect  and  perfect,  when  so  used,  however, 
the  adverbs  nunc  and  etiamnunc  may  be  used  instead  of  tunc  and  etiamtum. 

( d .)  The  historical  perfect  is  sometimes  used  for  the  pluperfect  in  narration; 
as,  Sed  postquam  aspexi,  illico  cognovi ,  But  after  I  (had)  looked  at  it,  I  recog¬ 
nized  it  immediately.  Ter. — This  is  the  usual  construction  after  postquam  or 
postedquam ,  ubi,  ubi  primum ,  ut,  ut  primum,  quum  primum,  simul ,  simul  ut,  simul 
ac,  or  simul  atque,  all  of  which  have  the  signification  of  ‘  as  soon  as,’  and  some¬ 
times  after  priusquam.  But  when  several  conditions  are  to  be  expressed  in  past 
time,  the  pluperfect  is  retained  after  these  particles ;  as,  Idem  simulae  se  remis¬ 
erat,  neque  causa  suberat,  quare  animi  laborem  perferret,  luxuriosus  repemebdtur. 
Nep.  So,  also,  postquam  is  joined  with  the  pluperfect,  when  a  definite  time 
intervenes  between  events,  so  that  there  is  no  connection  between  them;  as, 
Hannibal  anno  tertio,  postquam  domo  profugerat,  cum  quinque  navibus  Af  ricam 
accessit.  Id. — In  a  very  few  passages  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subj unctive 
are  joined  with  postquam. 

(3.)  The  pluperfect  sometimes  occurs,  where  in  English  we  use  the  historical 

Eerfect;  as,  Dixerat,  et  spissis  noctis  se  condidit  umbris,  She  (had)  said,  and  hid 
erself  in  the  thick  shades  of  night.  Virg.  Sometimes,  also,  it  is  used  for  the 
historical  perfect  to  express  the  rapidity  with  which  events  succeed  each  other ; 
so,  also,  for  the  imperfect,  to  denote  what  had  been  and  still  was. 

(4.)  The  future  indicative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  imperative;  as,  Valebis , 
Farewell.  Cic.  And : — 

(5.)  The  future  perfect  for  the  future;  as,  Alio  l6co  de  oratorum  animo  et  in¬ 
juriis  videro,  I  shall  see  (have  seen)....  Cic.  This  use  seems  to  result  from 
viewing  a  future  action  as  if  already  done,  and  intimates  the  rapidity  with 
which  it  will  be  completed. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  future  action  is  spoken  of  either  in  the  future,  or  in  the  im¬ 
perative,  or  the  subjunctive  used  imperatively,  and  another  future  action  is 
connected  with  it,  the  latter  is  expressed  by  the  future  tense,  if  the  actions 
relate  to  the  same  time;  as,  Naturam  si  sequemur  ducem,  numquam  aberrabi¬ 
mus.  Cic. ;  but  by  the  future  perfect,  if  the  one  must  be  completed  before  the 
other  is  performed ;  as,  De  Carthagine  vereri  non  ante  desinam,  quam  illam  ex¬ 
cisam  esse  cognovero.  Cic.  In  English  the  present  is  often  used  instead  of  the 
future  perfect;  as,  Faciam  si  potero,  I  will  do  it,  if  I  can.  Ut  sementem  feceris, 
Ua  metes,  As  you  sow,  so  you  will  reap.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  In  expressions  denoting  the  propriety,  practicability  or  advantage 
of  an  action  not  performed,  the  indicative  of  the  preterites  (§  145,  N.  2.)  is  used, 
where  the  English  idiom  would  have  led  us  to  expect  the  imperfect  or  pluper¬ 
fect  subjunctive. 

(a.)  This  construction  occurs  with  the  verbs  oportet,  necesse  est,  debeo,  conve¬ 
nit,  possum,  decet,  licet,  reor,  puto ;  and  with  par,  fas,  copia ,  aequum,  justum, 
consentaneum ,  satis,  satius ,  aequius,  melius ,  utilius ,  optabilius,  and  optimum — est, 
erat,  etc. 

( b .)  In  this  connection  the  imperfect  indicative  expresses  things  which  are 
not,  but  the  time  for  which  is  not  yet  past;  the  historical  perfect  and  the 
pluperfect  indicative,  things  which  have  not  been,  but  the  time  for  which  is 
past;  as,  Ad  mortem  te  diici  jam  pridem  oportebat,  i.  e.  thy  execution  was 
necessary  and  is  still  so;  hence  it  ought  to  take  place.  Cic. — Longe  utilius  fuit 
angustias  aditus  occupare,  It  would  have  been  much  better  to  occupy  the  pass. 
Curt.  Catilina  erupit  e  senatu  triumphans  gaudio ,  quem  omnino  vivum  illinc  exire 
non  oportuerat.  Cic. 


§260. 


SYNTAX. — SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


265 


(c.)  In  both  the  periphrastic  conjugations,  also,  the  preterites  of  the  indica¬ 
tive  have  frequently  the  meaning  of  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Tam.  bona  constanter 
prceda  tenenda  fuit, — ought  to  have  been  kept.  Ovid.  This  is  more  common  in 
hypothetical  sentences  than  in  such  as  are  independent. 

(d.)  The  indicative  in  such  connections  is  retained,  even  when  a  hypotheti¬ 
cal  clause  with  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  added,  and  it  is  here 
in  particular  that  the  indicative  preterites  of  the  periphrastic  conjugations  are 
employed ;  as,  Quce  si  dubia  aut  procul  essent ,  tamen  omnes  bonos  reipublicce  con¬ 
sulere  decebat.  Sali.  Quodsi  Cn.  Pompeius  privatus  esset  hoc  tempore ,  tamen 
erat  mittendus.  Cic. — Deleri  totus  exercitus  potuit,  si  fugientes  persecuti  victores 
essent .  Liv.  Quas  nisi  manumisisset ,  tormentis  etiam  dedendi  fuerunt.  Cic.  Si  te 
non  invenissem ,  periturus  per  praecipitia  fui.  Petr.  But  the  subjunctive  also  is 
admissible  in  such  cases  in  the  periphrastic  conjugations. 

Rem.  4.  (1.)  The  preterites  of  the  indicative  are  often  used  for  the  pluper¬ 
fect  subjunctive,  in  the  conclusion  of  a  conditional  clause^  in  order  to  render  a 
description  more  animated.  They  are  so  used, 

(a.)  When  the  inference  has  already  partly  come  to  pass,  and  would  have 
been  completely  realized,  if  something  else  had  or  had  not  occurred,  whence 
the  adverb  jam  is  frequently  added ;  as,  Jam  f  ames  quam  pestilentia  tristior 
erat;  ni  annonae  foret  subventum, — would  have  been  worse.  Liv.  The  same  is 
expressed  by  the  verb  coepi  instead  of  jam;  as,  Britanni  circumire  terga  vincen¬ 
tium  coeperant,  m,  etc.  Tac.  And  without  jam ;  Effigies  Pisonis  traxerant  in 
Gemonias  ac  divellebant  (would  have  entirely  destroyed  them)  ni,  etc.  Id. 

( b .)  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  are  likewise  used  in  this  sense,  and  a  thing 
which  was  never  accomplished  is  thus,  in  a  lively  manner,  described  as  com¬ 
pleted;  as,  Et  peractum  erat  bellum  sine  sanguine ,  si  Pompeium  opprimere 
Brundisii  (Csesar)  potuisset.  Hor.— The  imperfect  indicative  is  rarely  used, 
also,  for  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  when  this  tense  is  found  in  the  hypotheti¬ 
cal  clause;  as,  Stultum  erat  monere ,  nisi  fieret.  Quint. — Sometimes,  also,  the 
preterites  of  the  indicative  are  thus  used  in  the  condition ;  as,  At  fuerat  melius , 
si  te  puer  iste  tenebat.  Ovid.  See  §  261,  R.  1. 

(2.)  ‘I  ought  ’  or  ‘  I  should,’  is  expressed  by  the  indicative  of  debeo ,  and  pos¬ 
sum  is  in  like  manner  often  used  for  possem ;  as,  Possum  persequi  multa  oblecta¬ 
menta  rerum  rusticarum ,  sec?,  etc.,  I  might  speak  of  the  many  pleasures  of  hus¬ 
bandry,  but,  etc. ;  and  it  is  usual  in  like  manner  to  say,  difficile  est ,  longum  est , 
infinitum  est ,  e.  g.  narrare ,  etc.,  for,  ‘it  would  be  difficult,’  ‘it  would  lead  too 
far,’  ‘  there  would  be  no  end,’  etc. 

(3.)  The  indicative  is  used  in  like  manner  after  many  general  and  relative 
expressions,  especially  after  the  pronouns  and  relative  adverbs  which  are 
either  doubled  or  have  the  suffix  cumque;  as,  quisquis ,  quotquot,  quicumque , 
utut,  utcumque ,  etc.,  see  §§  139, 5,  (3.)  and  191,1.  R.  1,  (6.);  as,  Quidquid  id  est , 
timeo  Danaos  et  dona  f  erentes.  Yirg.  Quem  sors  cumque  dabit,  lucro  appone.  Hor. 
Sed  quoquo  modo  sese  illud  habet,  But  however  that  may  be.  Cic. — In  like  man¬ 
ner  sentences  connected  by  sive — slve  commonly  have  the  verb  in  the  indica¬ 
tive,  unless  there  is  a  special  reason  for  using  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Sive  verum 
est,  sive  falsum,  mihi  quidem  ita  venundatum  est.  Later  writers  however  use 
the  subjunctive  both  with  general  relatives,  etc.,  and  with  slve — slve. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

§  260.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  state  simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind. 

Note.  The  subjunctive  character  of  a  proposition  depends,  not  upon  its  sub¬ 
stance,  but  upon  its  form.  ‘  I  believe,’  ‘  I  suppose,’  are  only  conceptions,  but 
my  believing  and  supposing  are  stated  as  facts,  and,  of  course,  are  expressed 
by  means  of  the  indicative.  When,  on  the  other  hand,  I  say,  ‘  I  should  be- 
23 


266 


SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


§260. 


lieve,’  *1  should  suppose,’  the  aots  of  believing  and  supposing  are  represented 
not  as  facts,  but  as  mere  conceptions.  Hence  the  verb  that  expresses  the  pur¬ 
pose  or  intention  for  which  another  act  is  performed,  is  put  in  the  subjunctive, 
since  it  expresses  only  a  conception;  as,  Edo  ut  vivam,  I  eat  that  I  may  live! 
This  mood  takes  its  name  from  its  being  commonly  used  in  subjoined  or  de¬ 
pendent  clauses  attached  to  the  main  clause  of  a  sentence  by  a  subordinate 
connective.  In  some  cases,  however,  it  is  found  in  independent  clauses,  or  in 
such,  at  least,  as  have  no  obvious  dependence. 

I.  The  subjunctive,  in  some  of  its  connections,  is  to  be  translated 
by  the  indicative,  particularly  in  indirect  questions ,  in  clauses  expres¬ 
sing  a  result ,  and  after  adverbs  of  time  ;  as, 

Ed  gas  me  quid  tristis  sim, — why  I  am  sad.  Tac.  Stellarum  tanta  est  multi¬ 
tudo,  ut  numerari  non  possint, — that  they  cannot  be  counted.  Quum  Caesar  esset 
in  Gallia ,  When  Caesar  was  in  Gaul.  Caes. 

II.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  what  is  contingent  or  hy¬ 
pothetical,  including  possibility ,  power ,  liberty ,  will,  duty ,  and  desire. 

Remark  1.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  thus  used,  have  the  significations  which 
have  been  given  in  the  paradigms,  and  are,  in  general,  not  limited,  in  regard  to  time, 
like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative.  Thus, 

(1.)  The  present  may  refer  either  to  present  or  future  time;  as,  Mediocribus 
et  quis  ignoscas  vitiis  teneor ,  I  am  subject  to  moderate  faults,  and  such  as  you 
may  excuse.  Hor.  Orat  a  Caesare  ut  det  sibi  veniam,  He  begs  of  Caesar  that  he 
would  give  him  leave.  Caes. 

(2.)  The  imperfect  may  relate  either  to  past,  present,  or  future  time;  as, 
Si  f  dta  fuissent  ut  caderem,  If  it  had  been  my  fate  that  I  should  fall.  Virg. 
Si  possem ,  sanior  essem,  I  would  be  wiser,  if  I  could.  Ovid.  Ceteros  raperem 
et  prosternerem,  The  rest  I  would  seize  and  prostrate.  Ter. 

(3.)  The  perfect  subjunctive  has  always  a  reference  to  present  time,  and  is 
equivalent  to  the  indicative  present  or  perfect  definite;  as,  Errarim  foi'tasse, 
Perhaps  I  may  have  erred.  Plin. — When  it  has  a  future  signification  it  is  not 
to  be  accounted  a  perfect,  but  the  subjunctive  of  the  future  perfect.  See  Rem. 
4  and  7,  (1.)  But  compare  §  258,  R.  1,  ( b .)  and  R.  3,  (5.) 

(4.)  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  relates  to  past  time,  expressing  a  contin¬ 
gency,  which  is  usually  future  with  respect  to  some  past  time  mentioned  in 
connection  with  it;  as,  Id  responderunt  se  facturos  esse,  quum  ille  vento  Aquilone 
venisset  Lemnum....  when  he  should  have  come....  Nep. 

Rem.  2.  The  imperfects  vellem,  nollem,  and  mallem,  in  the  first  person,  ex- 

fress  a  wish,  the  non-reality  and  impossibility  of  which  are  known;  as,  vellem , 
should  have  wished. — In  the  second  person,  where  it  implies  an  indefinite 
person,  and  also  in  the  third  when  the  subject  is  an  indefinite  person,  the  im¬ 
perfect  subjunctive  is  used  in  the  sense  of  the  pluperfect,  and  the  condition  is 
to  be  supplied  by  the  mind.  This  is  the  case  especially  with  the  verbs,  dico, 
puto,  arbitror,  credo  ;  also  with  video,  cerno,  and  discerno;  as,  Mcestique  (crede¬ 
res  victos)  redeunt  in  castra , — one  might  have  thought  that  they  were  defeated. 
Liv.  Pecuniae  an  fdmae  minus  parceret,  haud  Jacite  discerneres.  Sali.  Qui 
videret  equum  Trojanum  introductum,  urbem  captam  diceret.  Cic.  Quis  umquam 
crederet?  Id.  Quis  putaret?  Id. — The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  frequently 
used,  also,  for  the  pluperfect  in  interrogative  expressions;  as,  Socrates  quum 
rogaretur  cujatem  se  esse  diceret ,  Mundanum ,  inquit.  Id.  Quod  si  quis  deus  dice¬ 
ret,  numquam  putarem  me  in  Academia  tamquam  phildsdphum  disputaturum,  If 
any  god  had  said.. ..I  never  should  have  supposed.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  subjunctive  in  all  its  tenses  may  denote  a  supposition  or 
concession;  as,  Vendat  cedes  vir  bonus ,  Suppose  an  honest  man  is  selling  a 
house.  Cic.  Dixerit  Epicurus,  Grant  that  Epicurus  could  have  said.  Id. 
Verum  anceps  pugnae  fuerat  fortuna. — Fuisset,  Grant  that  it  might  have  been. 
Virg.  Malus  civis  On.  Carbo  fuit.  Fuerit  aliis,  He  may  have  been  to  others. 
Cic. — This  concessive  subjunctive  is  equivalent  to  esto  ut. 


§260. 


SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


267 


Rem.  4.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  independent  pro¬ 
positions  to  soften  an  assertion.  When  so  used,  they  do  not  differ  essentially 
from  the  present  and  future  indicative;  as,  Forsitan  quaeratis,  You  may  per¬ 
haps  ask.  V elim  sic  existimes ,  I  would  wish  you  to  think  so.  Nemo  istud  tibi 
concedat,  or  concesserit,  No  one  will  grant  you  that.  Hoc  sine  ulla  dubitatione 
confirmaverim,  eldquentiam  rem  esse  omnium  difficillimam ,  This  I  will  unhesi¬ 
tatingly  affirm.  Cic.  Nil  ego  contulerim  jucundo  sanus  amico.  Hor.  The  form 
which  is  called  the  perfect  subjunctive,  when  thus  used  for  the  future,  seems 
to  be  rather  the  subjunctive  of  the  future  perfect:'  see  Rem.  7,  (1.)  Vdlo  and 
its  compounds  are  often  so  used  in  the  present;  as,  Velim  obvias  mihi  literas 
crebro  mittas ,  I  wish  that  you  would  frequently  send,  etc.  Cic.  The  perfect 
subjunctive  is  also  rarely  used  in  the  sense  of  a  softened  perfect  indicative;  as, 
Forsitan  temere  fecerim,  I  may  have  acted  inconsiderately. 

Rem.  5.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  all  its  tenses,  in  independent  sentences, 
to  express  a  doubtful  question  implying  a  negative  answer;  as,  Quo  earn? 
Whither  shall  I  go?  Quoirem?  Whither  should  I  go?  Quo  iverim?  Whither 
was  I  to  have  gone?  Quo  ivissem ?  Whither  should  I  have  gone?  The  answer 
implied  in  all  these  cases  is,  ‘  nowhere.’  So,  Quis  dubitet  quin  in  virtute  divitice 
sint?  Who  can  doubt  that  riches  consist  in  virtue?  Cic.  Quisquam  numen  Juno¬ 
nis  adoret  prceterea?  Virg.  Quidni,  inquit,  meminerim?  Cic.  Quis  vellet  tanti 
nuntius  esse  mali  ?  Ovid. 

Rem.  6.  The  present  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  express  a  wish, 
an  exhortation,  asseveration,  request,  command,  or  permission ;  as, 

Moriar,  si,  etc.  May  I  die,  if,  etc.  Cic.  Peream,  si  non ,  etc.  May  I  perish,  if, 
etc.  Ovid.  So,  Ne  sim  salvus.  Cic.  In  media  arma  ruamus,  Let  us  rush.... 
Virg.  Ne  me  attingas,  sceleste !  Do  not  touch  me,  villain!  Ter.  Faciat  quod 
lubet ,  Let  him  do  what  he  pleases.  Id.  The  perfect  is  often  so  used;  as.  Ipse 
viderit,  Let  him  see  to  it  himself.  Cic.  Quam  id  recte  faciam ,  viderint  sapientes. 
Id.  Meminerimus,  etiam  adversus  infimos  justitiam  esse  servandam.  Id.  Nihil 
incommddo  valetudinis  tuce  feceris.  Id.  Emas,  non  quod  opus  est ,  sed  quod  necesse 
est.  Sen.  Donis  impii  ne  placare  audeant  deos ;  Platonem  audiant.  Cic.  Natu¬ 
ram  expellas  furca ,  tamen  usque  recurret.  Hor. 

(a.)  The  examples  show  that  the  present  subjunctive,  in  the  first  person 
singular,  is  used  in  asseverations ;  in  the  first  person  plural,  in  requests  and  ex¬ 
hortations  ;  in  the  second  and  third  persons  of  the  present  and  sometimes  of 
the  perfect,  in  commands  and  permissions,  thus  supplying  the  place  of  the  im¬ 
perative,  especially  when  the  person  is  indefinite. 

(b.)  With  these  subjunctives,  as  with  the  imperative,  the  negative  is  usually 
not  non  but  ne;  as,  ne  dicas  ;  ne  dicat ;  ne  dixeris.  So,  also,  ne  fuerit ,  for  licet 
ne  fuerit. 

(c.)  The  subjunctive  for  the  imperative  occurs  most  frequently  in  the  third 
person.  In  the  second  person  it  is  used  principally  with  ne ;  as,  ne  dicas.  In 
the  latter  case  the  perfect  very  frequently  takes  the  place  of  the  present ;  as, 
ne  dix&ris.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  in  the  second  person,  instead  of  the 
inoperative,  when  the  person  is  indefinite: 

(d.)  In  precepts  relating  to  past  time,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect,  also,  are 
used  for  the  imperative;  as,  Forsitan  non  nemo  vir  f ortis  dixerit ,  restitisses, 
mortem  pugnans  oppetisses, — you  should  have  resisted.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  In  the  regular  paradigms  of  the  verb,  no  future  subjunctive  was 
exhibited  either  in  the  active  or  passive  voice. 

(1.)  When  the  expression  of  futurity  is  contained  in  another  part  of  the  sen¬ 
tence,  the  future  of  the  subjunctive  Is  supplied  by  the  other  tenses  of  that 
mood,  viz.  the  future  subjunctive  by  the  present  and  imperfect,  and  the  future 
perfect  by  the  perfect  and  pluperfect.  Which  of  these  four  tenses  is  to  be  used 
depends  on  the  leading  verb  and  on  the  completeness  or  incompleteness  of  the 
action  to  be  expressed.  The  perfect  subjunctive  appears  to  be  also  tire  sub¬ 
junctive  of  the  future  perfect,  and  might  not  improperly  be  so  called;  as, 


268 


SYNTAX. - PROTASIS  AND  APODOSIS. 


§261. 


Tantum  mdneo ,  hoc  tempus  si  amiseris,  te  esse  nullum  umquam  magis  idoneum  re- 
perturum,  I  only  warn  you,  that,  if  you  should  lose  this  opportunity,  you  will 
never  find  one  more  convenient.  Cic. 

(2.)  If  no  other  future  is  contained  in  the  sentence,  the  place  of  the  future 
subjunctive  active  is  supplied  by  the  participle  in  rus ,  with  sim  and  essem ;  as, 
Non  dubitat  quin  brevi  Troja  sit  peritura,  He  does  not  doubt  that  Trov  will 
soon  be  destroyed.  Cic.  In  hypothetical  sentences  the  form  with  f  uerim  takes 
the  place  of  a  "pluperfect  subjunctive;  as,  Quis  enim  dubitat ,  quin,  si  Saguntinis 
impigre  tulissemus  dpem ,  totum  in  Hispaniam  aversuri  bellum  fuerimus.  Liv. 
The  form  in  fuissem  occurs  also,  but  more  rarely;  as,  Apparuit ,  quantam  ex¬ 
citatura  molem  vera  fuisset  clades ,  quum ,  etc.  See  Periphrastic  Conjugation , 
$  162,  14. 

(3.)  The  future  subjunctive  passive  is  supplied,  not  by  the  participle  in  dus , 
but  by  f  uturum  sit  or  esset,  with  ut  and  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  sub¬ 
junctive;  as,  Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit,  ut  laudetur ,  I  do  not  doubt  that  he 
will  be  praised. 


PROTASIS  AND  APODOSIS. 

§261.  In  a  sentence  containing  a  condition  and  a  conclu¬ 
sion ,  the  former  is  called  the  protasis ,  the  latter  the  apodosis. 

1.  In  the  protasis  of  conditional  clauses  with  si  and  its  compounds, 
the  imperfect  aud  pluperfect  subjunctive  imply  the  non-existence  of 
the  action  or  state  supposed,  the  imperfect,  as  in  English,  implying 
present  time.  In  the  apodosis  the  same  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  de¬ 
note  what  the  result  would  be,  or  would  have  been,  had  the  suppo¬ 
sition  in  the  protasis  been  a  valid  one ;  as, 

Nisi  te  satis  incitatum  esse  confiderem,  scriberem  plura,  Did  I  not  believe 
that  you  have  been  sufficiently  incited,  I  would  write  more  (Cic.);  which  im¬ 
plies  that  he  does  believe ,  and  therefore  will  not  write.  Si  Neptunus,  quod  Theseo 
promiserat ,  non  fecisset,  Theseus  filio  Hippdlyto  non  esset  orbatus.  Id. 

2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  in  the  protasis ,  imply  the 
real  or  possible  existence  of  the  action  or  state  supposed ;  as, 

Si  velit,  if  he  wishes,  or,  should  wish,  implying  that  he  either  does  wish,  or, 
at  least,  may  wish.  In  the  apodosis  the  present  or  perfect  either  of  the  sub¬ 
junctive  or  of  the  indicative  may  be  used. 

Remark  1.  The  tenses  of  the  indicative  may  also  be  used  in  the  protasis 
of  a  conditional  sentence  with  si,  etc. ;  as,  Si  vales,  bene  est.  Cic.  Si  quis  antea 
mirabatur  quid  esset,  ex  hoc  tempdre  miretur  potius....  Id. — The  conjunction  si 
in  the  protasis  is  often  omitted ;  as,  Libet  agros  emi.  Primum  quaero  quos  agros  f 
'  If  you  will  buy  lands,  I  will  first  ask,  etc.  But  the  protasis  may  be  rendered 
without  if,  and  either  with  or  without  an  interrogation,  as,  You  will  buy  lands, 
or,  Will  you  buy  lands  ?  The  future  perfect  often  occurs  in  the  protasis  of 
such  sentences ;  as,  Casus  medicusve  levarit  aegrum  ex  prcecipiti,  nuiter  delira  ne¬ 
cabit,  (Hor.)  Should  chance  or  the  physician  have  saved  him,  the  silly  mother 
will  destroy  him.  Si  is  in  like  manner  omitted  with  the  imperfect  and  pluper¬ 
fect  subjunctive,  in  supposing  a  case  which  is  known  not  to  be  a  real  one;  as, 
Absque  te  esset,  hddie  numquam  ad  solem  occasum  viverem.  Plaut. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  differ  but  slightly  from  the  in¬ 
dicative,  the  latter  giving  to  a  sentence  the  form  of  reality,  while  the  subjunc¬ 
tive  represents  it  as  a  conception,  which,  however,  may  at  the  same  time  be  a 
reality.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  present  and  perfect  subjunctive 
often  occurs  in  addressing  an  indefinite  person,  where,  if  the  person  were  defi¬ 
nite,  the  indicative  would  be  used;  as,  MZmdria  minuitur,  nisi  eam  exerceas. 
Cic.  When  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  is  required  to  denote  a  past  action, 


§  262.  SYNTAX. — SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES.  269 


the  indicative  must  be  used,  if  its  existence  is  uncertain,  as  those  tenses  in  the 
subjunctive  would  imply  its  non-existence.  In  the  oratio  obliqua ,  when  the 
leading  verb  is  a  present  or  a  future,  the  same  difference  is  observed  between 
the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  as  in  hypothetical  sentences ;  but  when  the  lead¬ 
ing  verb  is  a  preterite  the  difference  between  possibility  and  impossibility  is 
not  expressed. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes  used,  both  in 
the  protasis  and  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  in  the  sense  of  the  imper¬ 
fect  and  pluperfect;  as,  Tu ,  si  hic  sis,  aliter  sentias ,  If  you  were  here,  you 
would  think  otherwise.  Ter.  Quos ,  ni  mea  cura  resistat,  jam  flamma  tulerint. 
Virg. 

Rem.  4.  The  protasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  is  frequently  not  expressed, 
but  implied;  as,  Magno  mercentur  Atrida ,  i.  e.  si  possint.  Virg. ;  or  is  contained 
in  a  participial  clause ;  as,  Agis ,  etsi  a  multitudine  victus,  gloria  tamen  omnes 
vicit.  Just.  So,  also,  when  the  participle  is  in  the  ablative  absolute ;  as,  Dona¬ 
rem  tripddas — dlvlte  me  scilicet  artium ,  quas  aut  Parrhasius  protulit ,  aut  Scdpas. 
Hor.  C.  Mucius  Porsenam  interficere ,  proposita  sibi  morte,  conatus  est.  Cic. 
It  is  only  in  later  writers  that  the  concessive  conjunctions  etsi ,  quamquam ,  and 
quamvis  are  expressed  with  the  participle,  but  tamen  is  often  found  in  the 
apodosis ,  even  in  the  classic  period,  when  a  participial  clause  precedes  as  a 
protasis. 

Rem.  5.  In  hypothetical  sentences  relating  to  past  time,  the  actions  seem 
often  to  be  transferred  ip  a  measure  to  the  present  by  using  the  imperfect, 
either  in  the  protasis  or  the  apodosis,  instead  of  the  pluperfect;  as,  Quod  certe 
non  fecisset ,  si  suum  numerum  (nautarum)  naves  haberent.  Cic.  Cimbri  si  stdtirn 
infesto  agmine  urbem  petissent ,  grande  discrimen  esset.  Flor.  Sometimes  the 
imperfect,  although  the  actions  are  completed,  appears  both  in  the  protasis  and 
the  apodosis. 

Rem.  6.  Nisi,  nisi  vero ,  and  nisi  forte  are  Joined  with  the  indicative,  when 
they  introduce  a  correction.  Nisi  then  signifies  ‘  except  ’ ;  as,  Nescio ;  nisi  hoc 
video.  Cic.  Nisi  vero,  and  nisi  forte ,  ‘  unless  perhaps,’  introduce  an  exception, 
and  imply  its  improbability;  as,  Nemo  fere  saltat  sobrius,  nisi  forte  insanit.  Cic. 
Nisi  forte  in  the  sense  of  ‘  unless  you  suppose,’  is  commonly  used  ironically  to 
introduce  a  case  which  is  in  reality  inadmissible. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES. 

A.  Substantive  Clauses. 

§  262«  A  clause  denoting  the  purpose,  object,  or  result  of 
a  preceding  proposition,  takes  the  subjunctive  after  ut ,  ne ,  quo, 
quin ,  and  quominus  ;  as, 

Ea  non ,  ut  te  instituerem,  scripsi ,  I  did  not  write  that  in  order  to  instruct 
you.  Cic.  Irritant  ad  pugnandum,  quo  fiant  acriores ,  They  stimulate  them  to 
fight,  that  they  may  become  fiercer.  Varr. 

Remark  1.  Ut  or  uti,  signifying  ‘ that/  ‘in  order  that,’  or  simply 
4  to  ’  with  the  infinitive,  relates  either  to  a  purpose  or  to  a  result.  In 
the  latter  case  it  often  refers  to  sic ,  ita ,  adeo ,  tam,  talis,  tantus ,  is, 
ejusmodi ,  etc.,  in  the  preceding  clause ;  as, 

Id  mihi  sic  erit  gratum, ,  ut  gratius  esse  nihil  possit,  That  will  be  so  agreeable 
to  me,  that  nothing  can  be  more  so.  Cic.  Non  sum  Ita  hebes,  ut  istuc  dicam.  Id. 
Neque  tam  eramus  amentes ,  ut  explorata  nobis  esset  victoria.  Id.  Tantum  indulsit 
dolori,  ut  eum  pietas  vinceret.  Nep.  Ita  and  tam  are  sometimes  omitted;  as, 
Epaminondas  fuit  etiam  disertus ,  ut  nemo  Thebanus  ei  par  esset  eldquentid,  instead 
of  tam  disertus.  Id.  Esse  oportet  ut  vivas,  non  vivere  ut  edas.  Auct.  ad  Her. 
Sol  ejjlcit  ut  omnia  floreant.  Cic. 

23* 


270  SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES.  §  262. 


Rem.  2.  Ut ,  signifying  4  even  if  ’  or  4  although/  expresses  a  suppo¬ 
sition  merely  as  a  conception,  and  accordingly  takes  the  subjunctive ; 
as, 

Ut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda  voluntas ,  Though  strength  be  wanting,  yet 
the  will  is  to  be  praised.  Ovid.  Ut ,  in  this  sense,  takes  the  negative  non ;  as, 
Exercitus  si  pacis  nomen  audierit ,  ut  non  referat  pedem  (even  if  it  does  not  with¬ 
draw)  insistet  certe.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Ut,  with  the  subjunctive  denoting  a  result,  is  used  with 
impersonal  verbs  signifying  it  happens ,  it  remains,  it  follows ,  etc. ;  as, 

Qul  fit,  ut  nemo  contentus  vivat  ?  How  does  it  happen  that  no  one  lives  con¬ 
tented  ?  Hor.  Huic  contigit,  ut  patriam  ex  servitute  in  libertatem  vindicaret. 
Nep.  Sequitur  igitur ,  ut  etiam  vitia  sint  parca.  Cic.  Reliquum  est,  ut  egomet 
mihi  consulam.  Nep.  Restat  igitur ,  ut  motus  astrorum  sit  vdluntdrius.  Cic. 
Extremum  illud  est,  ut  te  orem  et  obsecrem.  Id. 

Note  1.  To  this  principle  may  be  referred  the  following  verbs  and  phrases 
signifying  4  it  happens,’  viz.  fit ,  fieri  non  potest ,  accidit ,  incidit ,  contingit ,  evenit , 
usu  venit ,  occurrit  and  est  (it  is  the  case,  or  it  happens,  and  hence  esto ,  be  it 
that):— and  the  following,  signifying  4  it  remains,’  or  4  it  follows,’  viz.  futurum , 
extremum ,  prdpe ,  proximum ,  and  reliquum — es£,  relinquitur ,  sequitur ,  restat ,  and 
superest :  and  sometimes  accedit. 

Note  2.  Contingit  with  the  dative  of  the  person  is  often  joined  with  the 
infinitive,  instead  of  the  subjunctive  with  ut ;  as,  Non  cuivis  homini  contingit 
adire  Cdrinthum.  Hor.  And  with  esse  also  and  other  verbs  of  similar  meaning, 
the  predicate  (as  in  the  case  of  licet)  is  often  found  in  the  dative. — Sequdur  and 
efficitur ,  4  it  follows,’  have  sometimes  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  and 
sometimes  the  subjunctive;  and  nascitur,  in  the  same  sense,  the  subjunctive 
only. 

Note  3.  Mos  or  moris  est ,  consuetudo  or  consuetudinis  est ,  and  natura  or  con- 
suetudo  fert ,  are  often  followed  by  ut  instead  of  the  infinitive. —  Ut  also  occurs 
occasionally  after  many  such  phrases  as  novum  est ,  rarum ,  naturale ,  necesse , 
usitatum ,  mirum ,  singulare — est ,  etc.,  and  after  aequum,  rectum ,  verum,  utile ,  mi- 
simile,  and  integrum — es£. 

For  other  uses  of  ut,  with  the  subjunctive,  see  §  273. 

Rem.  4.  Ut  is  often  omitted  before  the  subjunctive,  after  verbs  de¬ 
noting  willingness  and  permission :  also  after  verbs  of  asking,  advis¬ 
ing,  reminding,  etc.,  and  the  imperatives  die  and  fac  ;  as, 

Quid  vis  fdciam?  What  do  you  wish  (that)  I  should  do?  Ter.  Insani  feriant 
sine  litor  a  fluctus.  Virg.  Tentes  dissimulare  rogat.  Ovid.  Id  sinas  oro.  Id.  Se 
suadere,  dixit,  Pharnabazo  id  negotii  daret.  Nep.  Accedat  oportet  actio  varia . 
Cic.  Fac  cogites.  Sali.  So,  Vide  ex  navi  efferantur,  quae,  etc.  Plaut. 

Verbs  of  willingness,  etc.,  are  vtilo,  malo,  permitto,  concedo ,  patior ,  sino,  licet,  vZto, 
etc.;  those  of  asking,  etc.,  are  rogo,  oro,  queeso,  moneo ,  admbneo,  jubeo,  mando,  peto, 
precor,  censeo ,  suadeo,  oportet,  n&cesse  est,  postulo,  hortor ,  curo,  decerno,  opto,  impZro. 

Rem.  5.  Ne,  ‘  that  not/  4  in  order  that  not/  or  4  lest/  expresses  a 
purpose  negatively ;  as, 

Cura  ne  quid  ei  desit,  Take  care  that  nothing  be  wanting  to  him.  Cic.  Nemo 
prudens  punit,  ut  ait  Plato,  quia  peccatum  est,  sed  ne  peccetur.  Id.  Ut  ne  is  fre¬ 
quently  used  for  ne,  especially  in  solemn  discourse,  and  hence  in  laws ;  as, 
Opera  detur,  ut  judicia  ne  fiant.  Id.  Quo  ne  is  used  in  the  same  manner  in  one 
passage  of  Horace.  Missus  ad  hoc — quo  ne  per  vacuum  Romano  incurreret  hos¬ 
tis. — On  the  other  hand  ut  non  is  used  when  a  simple  result  or  consequence  is 
to  be  expressed,  in  which  case  ita,  sic,  tarn  are  either  expressed  or  understood ; 
as,  Turn  forte  aegrotabam,  ut  ad  nuptias  tuas  venire  non  possem.  In  a  few  cases, 
however,  ut  non  is  used  for  ne. —  Ut  non  is  further  used,  when  the  negation  re- 


§  262.  SYNTAX. — SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES.  271 


fers  to  a  particular  word  or  to  a  part  only  of  the  sentence,  as  in  similar  cases 
si  non  must  be  used,  and  not  nisi;  as,  Confer  te  ad  Manlium ,  ut  a  me  non 
ejectus  ad  alienos ,  sed  invitatus  ad  tuos  isse  videaris.  Cic. 

Rem.  6.  Ne  is  often  omitted  after  cave  ;  as, 

Cuve  putes ,  Take  care  not  to  suppose.  Cic.  Compare  §  267,  R.  3. 

Rem.  7.  After  metuo ,  timeo ,  vereor,  and  other  expressions  denoting 
fear  or  caution,  ne  must  be  rendered  by  that  or  lest,  and  ut  by  that 
not. 

Note  3.  To  the  verbs  metuo,  timeo,  and  vereor  are  to  be  added  the  substan¬ 
tives  expressing  fear,  apprehension  or  danger,  and  the  verbs  terreo ,  conterreo, 
deterreo ,  caveo ,  to  be  on  one’s  guard,  video  and  observo  in  requests  (as,  vide, 
videte  and  videndum  est),  in  the  sense  of  ‘  to  consider  ’ ;  as, 

Milo  metuebat,  ne  a  servis  indicaretur,  Milo  feared  that  he  should  be  betrayed 
by  his  servants.  Cic.  Vereor,  ne,  dum  minuere  velim  laborem,  augeam.  Id. 
Pavor  erat,  ne  castra  hostis  aggrederetur.  Liv.  Illa  duo  vereor ,  ut  tibi  possim 
concedere,  I  fear  that  I  cannot  grant....  Cic.  Cavendum  est  ne  assentatoribus  pat¬ 
efaciamus  aures ,  neu  adulari  nos  sinamus.  Cic.  Vide  ne  hoc  tibi  obsit.  Terruit 
gentes,  grave  ne  rediret  secutum  Pyrrhae.  Multitudinem  deterrent,  ne  frumentum 
conferant.  Cses.  Me  miserum  !  ne  prona  cadas.  Ovid. 

Note  4.  Neve  or  neu  is  used  as  a  continuative  after  Ut  and  ne.  It  is  properly 
equivalent  to  aut  ne,  but  is  also  used  for  et  ne  after  a  preceding  ut ;  as,  on  the 
other  hand,  et  ne  is  used  after  a  negation  instead  of  aut  ne ;  as,  Legem  tulit ,  ne 
quis  ante  actarum  rerum  accusaretur,  neve  multaretur.  Nep.  Caesar  milites  non 
longiore  oratione  cohortatus ,  'quam  uti  suce  pristinae  virtutis  memoriam  retinerent, 
neu  perturbarentur  animo— proelii  committendi  signum  dedit.  Cies.  Neque,  also, 
is  sometimes  used  for  et  ne  after  ut  and  ne ;  as,  Ut  ea  praetermittam,  neque  eos 
appellem.  Cic.  Cur  non  sancitis  ne  vicinus  patricio  sit  plebeius ,  nec  eodem  itinere 
eat.  Liv. — Ne  non  is  sometimes  used  for  ut  after  verbs  of  fearing;  as,  Timeo  ne 
non  impetrem,  I  fear  I  shall  not  obtain  it. 

Rem.  8.  The  proposition  on  which  the  subjunctive  with  ut  and  ne  depends, 
is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Ut  xta  dicam.  Cic.  Ne  singulos  nominem.  Liv. 

Note  5.  Nedum,  like  ne,  takes  the  subjunctive;  as,  Optimis  temporibus  claris¬ 
simi  viri  vim  tribuniciam  sustinere  non  potuerunt:  nedum  his  temporibus  sine 
judiciorum  remediis  salvi  esse  possimus, — still  less,  etc.  Cic.  Ne  is  sometimes 
used  in  the  sense  of  nedum;  as,  Novam  eam  potestatem  (scii,  tribunorum  plebis) 
eripere  patribus  nostris,  ne  nunc  dulcedine  semel  capti  ferant  desiderium.  Liv. — 
Nedum  without  a  verb  has  the  meaning  of  an  adverb,  and  commonly  follows  a 
negative ;  as,  JEgre  inermis  tanta  multitudo ,  nedum  armata,  sustineri  potest.  Liv. 
Ne,  also,  is  used  in  the  same  manner  in  Cic.  Fam.  9,  26. 

Rem.  9.  Quo ,  4  that/  4  in  order  that/  or,  4  that  by  this  means/ 
especially  with  a  comparative ;  non  quo,  or  non  quod,  4  not  that/  4  not 
as  if';  non  quin,  4  not  as  if  not’ ;  which  are  followed  in  the  apodosis 
by  sed  quod ,  sed  quia,  or  sed  alone  ;  and  quominus,  4  that  not/  after 
clauses  denoting  hinderance,  take  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

_  Adjuta  me,  quo  id  fiat  facilius,  Aid  me,  that  that  may  be  done  more  easily. 
Ter.  Non  quo  republica  sit  mihi  quicquam  carius,  sed  desperatis  etiam  Hippocrates 
vetat  adhibere  medicinam.  Cic.  Non  quod  sola  ornent,  sed  quod  excellant.  Id. 
Neque  recusavit,  quo  minus  legis  poenam  subiret.  Nep.  Ego  me  ducem  in  civili 
bello  negavi  esse,  non  quin  rectum  esset ,  sed  quia,  etc.  Cic.  And  instead  of  non 
quin  we  may  say  non  quo  non,  non  quod  non,  or  non  quia  non  ;  and  for  non  quod, 
non  eo  quod,  or  non  ideo  quod. 

Rem.  10.  Quin ,  after  negative  propositions  and  questions  with  quis 
and  quid  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive.  Quin  is  used, 


272  SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES.  §  262. 

1.  For  a  relative  with  won,  after  nemo,  nullus ,  nihil.... est,  reperitur,  invenitur , 
etc. ;  vix  est,  cegre  reperitur,  etc. ;  as,  Messanam  nemo  venit,  quin  viderit,  i.  e. 
qui  non  viderit ,  No  one  came  to  Messana  who  did  not  see.  Cic.  •  Nego  ullam  pic¬ 
turam  fuisse... .cpxm  conqulsierit,  i.  e.  quam  non,  etc.  Id.  Nihil  est,  quin  male 
narrando  possit  depravari.  Ter.  Quis  est ,  quin  cernat,  quanta  vis  sit  in  sensibus  t 
Cic. 

Note  6.  When  quin  is  used  for  the  relative  it  is  commonly  equivalent  to  the 
nominative  qui,  quae,  quod,  but  it  is  sometimes  used  in  prose  instead  of  the 
accusative,  and  sometimes  after  dies  for  quo ,  as  the  ablative  of  time ;  as,  Dies 
fere  nullus  est ,  quin  hic  Satrius  domum  meam  ventitet,  i.  e.  quo — non  ventitet. 
Cic. —  Qui  non  is  often  used  for  quin ;  as,  Quis  enim  erat,  qui  non  sciret.  Id. ; 
and  when  quin  stands  for  qui  non  or  quod  non,  is  and  id  are  sometimes  added 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  as,  Cleanthes  negat  ullum  cibum  esse  tam  gravem,  quin 
is  die  et  nocte  concoquatur.  Cic.  Nihil  est  quod  sensum  habeat ,  quin  id  intereat. 
Id.— So,  also,  the  place  of  quin  is  supplied  by  ut  non;  as,  Augustus  numquam 
filios  suos  pdpulo  commendavit  ut  non  adjiceret  (without  adding)  si  merebuntur. 
Suet.  And  if  no  negation  precedes,  or  if  non  belongs  to  a  particular  word,  and 
not  to  the  verb,  qui  non  and  ut  non  must  of  course  be  used  and  not  quin. 

2.  For  ut  non,  ‘that,  not,’  or  ‘without’  with  a  participle,  especially  after 
facer e  non  possum,  fern  non  potest,  nulla  causa  est,  quid  causae  est?  nihil  causae 
est ;  as,  Facere  non  possum  quin  ad  te  mittam,  i.  e.  ut  non,  etc.  Cic.  Numquam 
tarn  male  est  Siculis,  quin  aliquid  f  deete  et  commdde  dicant.  Cic.  Numquam  ac¬ 
cedo,  quin  abs  te  abeam  doctior, — without  going  from  you  wiser.  Ter. 

Note  7.  Quin  takes  the  subjunctive  also  after  the  negative  expressions  non 
dubito,  non  est  dubium ,  non  ambigo,  I  doubt  not;  non  dbest;  nihil,  paulum,  non 
procul,  haud  multum  dbest ;  non,  vix,  cegre  abstineo  ;  tenere  me,  or  temperare  mihi 
non  possum;  non  impedio,  non  recuso,  nihil  praetermitto,  and  the  like.  In  these 
cases,  however,  the  negation  in  quin  is  superfluous,  and  it  is  generally  trans¬ 
lated  into  English  by  ‘that,’  ‘but  that,’  or  ‘to’  with  an  infinitive;  as,  Non 
dubito  quin  domi  sit,  that  he  is  at  home.  Non  multum  dbest,  quin  misemrimus  sim, 
Not  much  is  wanting  to  make  me  most  wretched.  Cic.  Hence,  as  quin  is  not 
in  such  cases  regarded  as  a  negative,  non  is  superadded  when  a  negative  sense 
is  required;  as,  In  quibus  non  dubito  quin  offensionem  negligentice  vitare  atque 
effugere  non  possum.  Cic.  Dubitandum  non  est  quin  numquam  possit  utilitas  cum 
hdnestate  contendere.  Id. 

Note  8.  In  Nepos,  non  dubito,  in  the  sense  of  ‘  I  do  not  doubt,’  is  always  fol¬ 
lowed  by  the  infinitive  with  the  accusative,  and  the  same  construction  often 
occurs  in  later  writers  but  not  in  Cicero :  in  the  sense  of  to  scruple  or  hesitate, 
when  the  verb  following  has  the  same  subject,  dubito  and  non  dubito  are  gener¬ 
ally  followed  by  the  infinitive ;  as,  Cicero  non  dubitabat  conjuratos  supplicio  af¬ 
ficere. — It  may  be  added  that  ‘  I  doubt  whether  ’  is  expressed  in  Latin  by 
dubito  sitne ,  dubito  utrum — an,  dubito  sitne — an,  or  dubito  num,  numquid ,  for  dubito 
an,  and  dubium  est  an  are  used,  like  nescio  an  with  an  affirmative  meaning. 

Note  9.  Quin  signifies  also  ‘why  not?’  being  compounded  of  the  old  abla¬ 
tive  qui  and  ne,  i.  e.  non,  and  in  this  sense  is  joined  with  the  indicative  in  ques¬ 
tions  implying  an  exhortation ;  as,  Quin  conscendimus  equos  ?  Why  not  mount 
our  horses'?  In  this  sense  it  is  also  joined  with  the  imperative;  as,  Quin  die 
stdtim ,  Well,  tell  me:  or  with  the  first  person  of  the  subjunctive.  Hence  with¬ 
out  being  joined  to  any  verb  it  signifies  ‘  even’  or  ‘rather.’ 

Rem.  11.  The  principal  verbs  of  hinderance,  after  which  quominus  occurs, 
and  after  which  ne,  and,  if  a  negative  precedes,  quin  also  may  be  used,  are  de¬ 
terreo,  impedio,  intercedo,  obsisto,  obsto,  officio,  prohibeo,  recuso ,  and  repugno.  It 
occurs  also  after  stat  or  ft  per  me,  I  am  the  cause,  non  pugno,  nihil  mdror ,  non 
contineo  me,  etc. 

Note.  Impedio ,  deterreo ,  and  recuso  are  sometimes,  and  prdhibeo  frequently 
followed  by  the  infinitive.  Instead  of  quominus,  quo  secius  is  sometimes  used. 


§  263.  SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES. 


273 


§263.  The  particles  specified  in  this  section  always  introduce  a  sentence  con¬ 
taining  only  a  conception  of  the  mind,  and  are  hence  joined  with  the  subjunctive. 

1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  particles  of  wishing,  as  utinam ,  uti , 
0!  and  0!  si;  as, 

Utinam  minus  vitae  cupidi  fuissemus !  0  that  we  had  been  less  attached  to  life ! 
Cic.  0  si  solitae  quicquam  virtutis  adesset!  Virg. 

Remark.  The  present  and  perfect  tenses,  after  these  particles,  are  used  in 
reference  to  those  wishes  which  are  conceived  as  possible ;  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect  are  employed  in  expressing  those  wishes  which  are  conceived  as 
wanting  in  reality.  Cf.  §  261,  1  and  2. — ‘  Would  that  not  ’  is  expressed  in  Latin 
both  by  utinam  ne  and  utinam  non.  Utinam  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Tecum 
ludere  sicut  ipsa  possem  !  Catuli. 

B.  Adverbial  Clauses. 

2.  (1.)  Quamvis,  however ;  licet ,  although;  tamquam ,  tamquam  si, 
quasi ,  ac  si,  ut  si,  velut,  velut  si,  veluti,  sicuti,  and  ceu,  as  if;  modo , 
dum,  and  dummodo,  provided, — take  the  subjunctive;  as, 

Quamvis  ille  felix  sit,  tamen,  etc.  However  happy  he  may  be,  still,  etc.  Cic. 
Veritas  licet  nullum  defensorem  obtineat^  Though  truth  should  obtain  no  de¬ 
fender.  Id.  Tamquam  clausa  sit  Asia,  sic  nihil  perfertur  ad  nos.  Id.  Sed  quid 
ego  his  testibus  utor ,  quasi  res  dubia  aut  obscura  sit?  Id.  Me  omnibus  rebus,  juxta 
ac  si  meus  frater  esset,  sustentavit ,  He  supported  me  in  every  thing,  just  as 
though  he  were  my  brother.  Id.  Similiter  facer e  eos, — ut  si  nautae  certarent, 
uter,  etc.  Id.  Absentis  Ariovisti  crudelitatem,  velut  si  coram  adesset ,  horrerent. 
Caes.  Inque  sinus  caros,  veluti  cognosceret,  ibat.  Ovid.  Sicuti  jurgio  lacessi¬ 
tus  foret,  in  senatum  venit.  Sali.  Hic  vero  ingentem  pugnam,  ceu  cetera  nusquam 
bella  forent.  Virg.  Oderint  dum  metuant.  Att.  in  Cic.  Manent  ingenia  senibus, 
modo  permaneat  studium  et  industria.  Cic.  Omnia  honesta  negligunt  dummodo 
potentiam  consequantur.  They  disregard  every  honorable  principle,  provided 
they  can  obtain  power.  Id. 

Note.  M6do ,  dum,  and  dummddo ,  when  joined  with  a  negation,  become 
mddo  ne,  dum  ne,  and  dummddo  ne. 

(2.)  Quamvis  (although)  is  in  Cicero  joined  with  a  principal  tense  of  the  sub¬ 
junctive;  as,  Quamvis  non  fueris  suasor,  apprdbator  certe  fuisti.  Cic.  In  later 
writers  it  is  often  used  with  the  indicative ;  as,  Felicem  Nidben,  quamvis  tot 
funera  vidit.  Ovid.  So  also  once  in  Cicero,  Quamvis  patrem  suum  numquam 
viderat.  Rab.  Post  2. 

(3.)  Quamvis,  as  a  conjunction,  in  the  sense  of  *  however  much,’  is  joined 
with  the  subjunctive.  So  also  when  its  component  parts  are  separated;  as, 
C.  Gracchus  dixit,  sibi  in  somnis  Ti.  fratrem  visum  esse  dicere,  quam  vellet  cunc¬ 
taretur,  tamen ,  etc. —  Quamvis  ‘  however  much,’  as  an  adverb,  governs  no  par¬ 
ticular  mood. 

(4.)  Etsi,  tametsi,  even  if,  although,  and  quamquam,  although,  commonly  in¬ 
troduce  an  indicative  clause : — etiamsi  is  more  frequently  followed  by  the  sub¬ 
junctive.  In  later  prose  writers,  and  sometimes  in  Cicero  and  Sallust  as  well 
as  in  the  poets,  quamquam  is  joined  with  the  subjunctive;  as,  Quamquam  prae- 
sente  Lucullo  loquar.  Cic.  Vi  regere  patriam  quamquam  possis.  Sail.  Jug.  3. 
Filius  quamquam  Thetidos  marinae  Darddnas  turres  quateret.  Hor. 

Remark.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  with  ac  si,  etc.,  is  used  after  the  pre¬ 
sent,  to  denote  that  in  reality  the  thing  is  not  so,  but'  in  that  case  a  hypotheti¬ 
cal  subjunctive  must  be  supplied;  as,  Egnatii  rem  ut  tuear  e  aeque  a  tepeto,  ac  si 
mea  negotia  essent,  i.  e.  ac  peterem,  si  mea  negotia  essent ,  as  I  would  pray  if, 
etc.  Cic. 


274  SYNTAX. — SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  PARTICLES.  §263. 


3.  After  antequam  and  priusquam ,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect 
tenses  are  usually  in  the  subjunctive;  the  present  and  perfect  may  be 
either  in  the  indicative  or  subjunctive.  The  present  indicative  is 
commonly  used  when  the  action  is  to  be  represented  as  certain,  near 
at  hand,  or  already  begun ;  the  subjunctive  is  used  when  the  thing  is 
still  doubtful,  and  also  in  general  propositions ;  as, 

Ea  causa  ante  mortua  est ,  quam  tu  natus  esses,  That  cause  was  dead  before 
you  were  born.  Cic.  Avertit  equos ,  priusquam  pabula  gustassent  Trojas,  Xan- 
thumque  bibissent.  Virg.  Priusquam  incipias,  consulto  dpus  est ,  Before  you  be¬ 
gin  there  is  need  of  counsel.  Sail. 

4.  (1.)  Bum,  donee ,  and  quoad ,  signifying  until ,  are  followed  by 
the  subjunctive,  if  they  refer  to  the  attainment  of  an  object  ;  as, 

Dum  hic  veniret,  Idcum  relinquere  noluit,  He  was  unwilling  to  leave  the  place 
until  he  (Milo)  should  come.  Cic.  Nihil  puto  tibi  esse  utilius  quam  opperiri  quoad 
scire  possis,  quid  tibi  agendum  sit.  Id.  Cornu  tetendit,  et  duxit  longe,  donec  curva¬ 
ta  coirent  inter  se  capita.  Virg. — In  the  sense  of  ‘  as  long  as,’  these  particles 
take  the  indicative,  but  Tacitus  joins  donee  with  the  subjunctive  even  when  a 
simple  fact  is  to  be  expressed. 

(2.)  Dum ,  while,  is  commonly  used  with  the  indicative  present,  whatever 
may  be  the  tense  of  the  principal  sentence.  Cf.  §  259,  R.  1,  (1.),  (a.) 

5.  Quum  (cum),  when  it  signifies  a  relation  of  time,  takes 
the  indicative;  when  it  denotes  a  connection  of  thought ,  the 
subjunctive ;  as, 

Qui  non  defendit  injuriam,  neque  repulsat  a  suis ,  quum  potest,  injuste  facit. 
Cic.  Quum  recte  navigari  poterit,  tum  naviges.  Id.  Credo  tum ,  quum  Sicilia 
florebat  dpibus  et  copiis,  magna  artificia  fuisse  in  ea  insula.  Id.  Quum  tot  sustin¬ 
eas  et  tanta  negotia ,  peccem,  si  mdrer  tua  tempdra,  Since  you  are  burdened 
with  so  many  and  so  important  affairs,  I  should  do  wrong,  if  I  should  occupy 
your  time.  Hor.  Quum  vita  sine  amicis  metus  plena  sit,  ratio  ipsa  monet  amicit • 
las  comparare.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The  rule  for  the  use  of  quum  may  be  thus  expressed: 
Quum  temporal  takes  the  indicative,  quum  causal  the  subjunctive.  Hence, 
when  quum  is  merely  a  particle  of  time,  with  no  reference  to  cause  and  effect, 
and  not  occurring  in  a  historical  narrative  (see  Rem.  2),  it  may  be  joined  with 
any  tense  of  the  indicative.  But  when  it  is  employed  to  express  the  relation 
of  cause  and  effect,  or  has  the  meaning  of  ‘  though  ’  or  ‘  although,’  it  is  joined 
with  the  subjunctive  ( b .)  Quum,  relating  to  time,  is  commonly  translated 
when,  while,  or  after ;  referring  to  a  train  of  thought,  it  signifies  as,  since,  though 
or  although,  because ;  but  may  often  be  translated  when. 

Rem.  2.  In  narration,  quum,  even  when  it  relates  to  time,  is  joined 
with  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  when  a  historical  per¬ 
fect  stands  in  the  principal  clause ;  as, 

Gracchus ,  quum  rem  illam  in  religionem  populo  venisse  sentiret,  ad  senatum  ret¬ 
ulit.  Cic.  Alexander,  quum  interemisset  Clitum,  vix  manus  a  se  abstinuit.  Id. 

Note.  Quum  temporal,  when  it  expresses  an  action  frequently  repeated, 
may  be  joined  with  the  pluperfect  indicative,  and  the  apodosis.  then  contains 
the  imperfect;  as,  Quum  autem  vir  esse  coeperat,  dabat  se  labori.  Cic.  Quum 
rdsam  viderat,  tum  incipere  ver  arbitrabatur.  Id.  Cf.  §  264,  12. 

Rem.  3.  Quum  in  the  sense  of  1  while  ’  is  joined  with  the  perfect  and  imper¬ 
fect  indicative,  often  with  the  addition,  of  interea  or  interim,  to  express  simulta¬ 
neous  occurrences ;  as,  Catulus  cepit  magnum  suce  virtutis  fructum,  quum  omnes 
prdpe  una  voce,  in  eo  ipso  vos  spem  habituros  esse,  dixistis.  Cic.  Cadebatur  virgis 


§  264. 


SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI. 


275 


in  medio  fdro  Messanae  civis  Romanus,  judices ,  quum  interea  nulla  vox  alia  istius 
miseri  audiebatur,  nisi  haec:  civis  Romanus  sum.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  Quum,  for  the  most  part  preceded  by  an  adverb,  as,  jam,  nondum, 
vix,  aegre,  or  joined  with  repente  or  subito  is  followed  by  the  indicative,  espe¬ 
cially  by  the  present  indicative,  to  express  the  beginning  of  an  action.  In  the 
cases  mentioned  in  this  and  the  preceding  remark,  the  historians  also  use  quum 
with  the  historical  infinitive. 

For  the  subjunctive  after  si  and  its  compounds,  see  §  261. 

C.  Adjective  Clauses. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI . 

§  2641*  Relatives  require  the  subjunctive,  when  the  clauses 
connected  by  them  express  merely  a  conception ;  as,  for  exam¬ 
ple,  a  consequence ,  an  innate  quality ,  a  cause ,  motive ,  or  purpose . 

1.  («.)  When  the  relative  qui,  in  a  clause  denoting  a  result  of  the 
character  or  quality  of  something  specified  in  the  antecedent  clause, 
follows  a  demonstrative,  and  is  equivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or 
demonstrative  pronoun,  it  takes  the  subjunctive. 

Note.  The  demonstratives  after  which  qui  takes  the  subjunctive,  are  tarn  with  an 
adjective,  tantus,  talis,  Sjusmddi,  hujusmSdi,  and  is,  ille,  iste,  and  hie  in  the  sense  of 
tdlis ;  as, 

Quis  est  tam  Lynceus,  qui  in  tantis  tenebris  nihil  offendat?  i.  e.  ut  ille  in  tantis, 
etc.,  Who  is  so  quick-sighted,  that  he  would  not  stumble,  (or,  as  not  to  stum¬ 
ble,)  in  such  darkness.  Cic.  Talem  te  esse  bp&rtet,  qui  ab  impiorum  civium  sdcie- 
tdte  sejungas;  i.  e.  ut  tu,  etc.  Id.  At  eafuit  legatio  Octavii,  in  qua  periculi 
suspicio  non  subesset,  i.  e.  ut  in  ea.  Id.  Nec  tamen  ego  sum  ille  ferreus,  qui  fra¬ 
tris  carissimi  maerore  non  movear,  i.  e.  ut  ego  non  movear.  Id.  Non  sumus  ii, 
quibus  nihil  verum  esse  videatur,  i.  e.  ut  nobis  nihil,  etc.  Id.  Nulla  gens  tarn 
f  era  est,  cujus  mentem  non  imbuerit  debrum  dpinio ,  i.  e.  ut  ejus  mentem,  etc.  Id. 

( [b .)  Sometimes  the  demonstrative  word  is  only  implied ;  as, 

Res  parva  dictu,  sed  quse  studiis  in  magnum  certamen  excesserit,  i.  e.  talis 
quae.... of  such  a  kind  that  it  issued  in  a  violent  contest.  Cic.  Nunc  dicis  aliquid, 
quod  ad  rem  pertineat,  i.  e.  tale  ut  id,  etc.  Id.  So  quis  sum,  for  num  tdlis  sum; 
as,  Quis  sum ,  cujus  aures  laedi  nefas  sit  ?  Sen. — In  like  manner,  also,  a  demon¬ 
strative  denoting  a  character  or  quality,  is  implied  in  the  examples  included  in 
the  following  rule  : — 

2.  When  the  relative  is  equivalent  to  quamquam  is ,  etsi  is,  or  dum¬ 
modo  is,  it  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Laco,  consilii  quamvis  egregii,  quod  non  ipse  afferret,  inimicus,  Laco,  an  oppo¬ 
nent  of  any  measure,  however  excellent,  provided  he  did  not  himself  propose 
it.  Tac.  Tu  aquarn  a  pumice  postulas ,  qui  ipsus  sitiat.  Plaut.  Nihil  mblestum, 
quod  non  desideres,  i.  e.  dummddo  id.  Cic. 

3.  Quod,  in  restrictive  clauses,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quod  sciam,  as  far  as  I  know;  quod  meminerim,  as  far  as  I  recollect;  quod  ego 
intelligam;  quod  intelligi  possit;  quod  conjectura  provideri  possit;  quod  salva  fide 
possim ;  quod  commodo  tuo  fiat,  etc. —  Quidem  is  sometimes  added  to  the  rela¬ 
tive  in  such  sentences.  Quod  sine  mdlestid  tua  fiat,  So  far  as  it  can  be  done 
without  troubling  you.  Cic.  In  the  phrases  quantum  possum ,  quantum  ego  per¬ 
spicio,  on  the  other  hand,  the  indicative  is  used. 


276  SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI.  §264. 

4.  A  relative  clause,  after  the  comparative  followed  by  quam ,  takes 
the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Major  sum,  quam  cui  possit  fortuna  nocere ,  i.  e.  quam  ut  mihi ,  etc.,  I  am  too 
great*  for  fortune  to  be  able  to  injure  me.  Ovid.  Audita  voce  praeconis  majus 
gaudium  fuit ,  quam  quod  universum  homines  caperent,  Upon  the  herald’s  voice 
being  heard,  the  joy  was  too  great  for  the  people  to  contain.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  The  clause  annexed  by  quam  qui  implies  an  inherent  quality,  or 
a  consequence ;  so  that  quam  qui  is  equivalent  to  quam  ut ,  which  also  some¬ 
times  occurs.  Sometimes  the  subjunctive  follows  quam  even  without  a  rela¬ 
tive  pronoun;- as,  In  his  literis  longior  fui ,  quam  aut  vellem,  aut  quam  me  putavi 
fore : — and  so  frequently  with  the  verbs  velle  and  posse . 

5.  A  relative  clause  expressing  a  purpose ,  aim ,  or  motive ,  and 
equivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  takes  the 
subjunctive ;  as, 

Lacedaemonii  legatos  Athenas  miserunt ,  qui  eum  absentem  accusarent :  i.  e.  ut 
illi  eum  accusarent ,  The  Lacedaemonians  sent  ambassadors  to  Athens  to  accuse 
him  in  his  absence.  Nep.  Caesar  equitatum  omnem  praemittit,  qui  videant,  quas  in 
partes  iter  f  aciant.  Caes.  Sunt  autem  multi,  qui  eripiunt  aliis,  quod  aliis  largian¬ 
tur.  Cic.  Assidue  repetant,  quas  perdant,  Belides  undas.  Ovid. 

Rem.  2.  So  also  with  relative  adverbs ;  as,  Lampsacum  ei  ( Themistocli )  rex 
donarat,  unde  vinum  sumeret,  i.  e.  ex  qua  or  ut  inde,  etc.  Nep.  Super  tabernac¬ 
ulum  regis ,  unde  ab  omnibus  conspici  posset,  imago  solis  crystallo  inclusa  fulge¬ 
bat.  Curt. 

6.  A  relative  clause  with  the  subjunctive  after  certain  indefinite 
general  expressions,  specifies  the  circumstances  which  characterize 
the  individual  or  class  indefinitely  referred  to  in  the  leading  clause ; 
as,  . 

Fuerunt  ed  tempestate,  qui  dicerent,  There  were  at  that  time  some  who  said. 
Sali.  Erant,  quibus  appetentior  famae,  videretur,  There  were  those  to  whom 
he  appeared  too  desirous  of  fame.  Tac.  Sunt,  qui  censeant,  una  animum  et 
corpus  occidere.  Cic.  Erunt,  qui  existimari  velint.  Id.  Si  quis  erit,  qui  perpe¬ 
tuam  orationem  desideret,  altera  actione  audiet.  Id.  'Venient  legiones,  quae  neque 
me  inultum  neque  te  impunitum  patiantur.  Tac.  So  after  est  followed  by  quod, 
in  the  sense  of  ‘there  is  reason  why’;  as,  Est  quod  gaudeas,  You  have  cause 
to  rejoice.  Plaut.  Est  quod  visam  domum.  Id.  Si  est  quod  desit,  ne  beatus 
quidem  est.  Cic. 

Note  1.  The  expressions  included  in  the  rule  are  est,  sunt,  adest,  praesto  sunt,  exsis¬ 
tunt,  exoriuntur ,  inveniuntur,  r&pSriuntur,  (scii,  homines );  si  quis  est ,  tempus  fuit,  tem¬ 
pus  veniet,  etc. 

Rem.  3.  The-  same  construction  occurs  with  relative  particles  used  indefi¬ 
nitely;  as,  Est  unde  heee  flant.  Si  est  culpam  ut  Antipho  in  se  admiserit,  If  it 
chance  that,  etc.  Ter.  Est  ubi  id  isto  modo  valeat.  Cic.  So  est  cur  and  estut 
in  the  sense  of  est  cur ;  as,  Ille  erat ,  ut  odisset  defensorem  salutis  raece ,  i.  e.  he 
had  reason  to  hate.  Cic.  Non  esi  igitur  ut  mirandum  sit,  There  is  no  occasion 
for  Avondering.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  above  and  similar  expressions  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
only  when  they  are  indefinite.  Hence,  after  sunt  quidam,  sunt  nonnulli ,  sunt 
multi,  etc.,  when  referring  to  definite  persons,  the  relative  takes  the  indicative; 
as,  Sunt  orationes  quaedam,  quas  Menocrito  dabo.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  The  indicative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  after  sunt  qui , 
even  when  taken  indefinitely,  especially  in  the  poets;  as,  Su?it,  quos  juvat.  Hor. 
Sunt  qui  ita  dicunt.  Sail. 

7.  A  relative  clause  after  a  general  negative,  or  an  interrogative 
expression  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 


§264. 


SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI. 


277 


Nemo  est ,  qui  hand  intelligat,  There  is  no  one  who  does  not  understand.  Cic. 
Nulla  res  est,  quae  perferre  possit  continuum  laborem,  There  is  nothing  which 
can  endure  perpetual  labor.  Quint.  Nulla  pars  est  corpdris,  quae  non  sit  minor. 
Id.  Nihil  est,  quod  tam  miseros  faciat,  quam  impietas  et  scelus.  Cic.  Inforo 
vix  decimus  quisque  est,  qui  ipsus  sese  noscat.  Plaut.  Quis  est,  qui  utilia  fugiat  ? 
Who  is  there  that  shuns  what  is  useful  ?  Cic.  Quce  latebra  est ,  in  quam  non  in- 
tret  metus  mortis  1  Sen.  Quid  dulcius  quam  habere,  quicum  omnia  audeas  sic  lo¬ 
qui  ut  tecum  ?  Cic.  ( See  respecting  this  use  of  the  indefinite  quicum  rather  than 
the  definite  quocum,  §  136,  R.  1.)  An  est  quisquam,  qui  hoc  ignoret?  Is  there 
any  one  who  is  ignorant  of  this?  Id.  Numquid  est  mali,  quod  non  dixeris?  Ter. 

Note  2.  General  negatives  are  nemo,  nullus,  nihil ,  iinus  non,  alius  non,  non  quisquam, 
vix  ullus ,  nec  ul/us,  etc.,  with  est ;  vix  with  an  ordinal  and  quisque ;  ntgo  esse  quemquam , 
etc.  Interrogative  expressions  implying  a  negative,  are  quis,  quid;  qui,  quce,  quod ; 
quantus ,  uter ,  ecquis ,  numquis ,  an  quisquam,  an  aliquis,  quotus  quisque,  quotus,  etc., 
with  est?  quot,  quam  multi,  etc.,  with  sunt? 

Note  3.  The  same  construction  is  used  after  non  est,  nihil  est,  quid  est,  num¬ 
quid  est,  etc.,  followed  by  quod,  cur,  qudre,  or  quamobrem ,  and  denoting  ‘  there 
is  no  reason  why,’  ‘  what  cause  is  there?’  ‘is  there  any  reason?’  as,  Quod 
timeas,  non  est,  There  is  no  reason  why  you  should  fear.  Ovid.  Nihil  est , 
quod  adventum  nostrum  pertimescas.  Cic.  Quid  est,  quod  de  ejus  civitate' dubites  ? 
Id.  Quceris  a  me,  quid  ego  Catilinam  metuam.  Nihil,  et  curavi  ne  quis  metueret. 
Quid  est,  cur  virtus  ipsa  per  se  non  efficiat  beatos  ?  Id. — So  after  non  hdbeo,  or 
nihil  hdbeo ;  as,  Non  hdbeo,  quod  te  accusem.  Cic.  Nil  hdbeo,  quod  agam,  I  have 
nothing  to  do.  Hor.  Nihil  hdbeo,  quod  ad  te  scribam.  Cic.  So  without  a  nega¬ 
tive,  j De  quibus  habeo  ipse,  quid  sentiam.  Id.  Causa  or,  with  quid  and  nihil, 
causce ,  is  sometimes  added;  as,  Non  fuit  causa,  cur  postulares.  Id.  Quid  erat 
causae,  cur  metueret.  Id. 

Note  4.  (a.)  The  relative  clause  takes  the  subjunctive  after  the  expressions 
included  in  this  and  the  last  rule,  only  when  it  expresses  the  character  or 
quality  of  the  subject  of  the  antecedent  clause;  and  the  relative,  as  in  the  pre¬ 
ceding  cases  of  the  relative  with  the  subjunctive,  is  equivalent  to  a  personal  or 
demonstrative  pronoun  with  ut ;  as,  N emo  est,  qui  nesciat,  There  is  no  one  who 
is  ignorant,  i.  e.  no  one  is  ignorant.  Cic.  So,  Sunt ,  qui  hoc  carpant,  There  are 
some  who  blame  this,  i.  e.  some  blame  this.  Veil. 

(6.)  If  the  relative  clause  is  to  be  construed  as  a  part  of  the  logical  subject 
it  does  not  require  the  subjunctive;  as,  Nihil  stabile  est,  quod  infidum  est 
Nothing  which  is  faithless  is  firm.  Cic. 

8.  (1.)  A  relative  clause  expressing  the  reason  of  what  goes  before, 
takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Peccavisse  mihi  videor,  qui  a  te  discesserim,  I  think  I  did  wrong  in  leaving 
you.  Cic.  Inertiam  accusas  adolescentium ,  qui  istam  artem  non  ediscant,  You 
blame  the  idleness  of  the  young  men,  because  they  do  not  learn  that  art.  Id. 
0  fortunate  adolescens,  qui  tuce  virtutis  Homerum  praeconem  inveneris ! — in  hav¬ 
ing  found.  Id.  Caninius  fuit  mirif  ica  vigilantia,  qui  suo  toto  consulatu  somnum 
non  viderit, — since,  etc.  Id. 

(2.)  Sometimes,  instead  of  qui  alone,  ut  qui ,  quippe  qui ,  or  utpote 
qui,  is  used,  generally  with  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Convivia  cum  patre  non  inibat,  quippe  qui  ne  in  oppidum  quidem  nisi  perraro 
venisset.  Cic.  Neque  Antonius  procul  aberat ,  utpote  qui  magno  exercitu  seque¬ 
retur.  Sail.  But  sometimes  with  the  indicative  in  Sallust  and  Livy;  as,  Quippe 
qui  omnia  vicerat.  Sail. 

9.  After  dignus ,  indignus ,  aptus ,  and  idoneus ,  a  relative  clause 
takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

.  Videtur ,  qui  aliquando  imperet,  dignus  esse,  He  seems  to  be  worthy  at  some 
time  to  command.  Cic.  Rustici  nostri  quum  fidem  dlicujus  bonitdtemque  laudant , 
dignum  esse  dicunt ,  quicum  in  tenebris  mices.  Id.  Nulla  videbatur  aptior  per - 


278  SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS.  §  265. 


sbna,  quae  de  celate  loqueretur.  Id.  Pompeius  Idoneus  non  est,  qui  impetret.  Id. 
Et  rem  Idoneam,  de  qua  quaeratur,  et  homines  dignos,  quibuscwm  disseratur,  pu¬ 
tant.  Id. 

Note  5.  If  the  relative  clause  does  not  express  that  of  which  the  person  or 
thing  denoted  by  the  antecedent  is  worthy,  its  construction  is  not  influenced 
by  this  rule.  Thus,  Quis  servus  libertate  dignus  fuit ,  cui  nostra  salus  cara  non 
esset?  The  subjunctive  is  here  used  according  to  No.  7  of  this  section. 

Note  6.  The  infinitive  frequently  follows  these  adjectives  in  poetry,  though 
rarely  in  prose;  as,  Et  puer  ipse  fuit  cantari  dignus.  Virg. : — and  sometimes 
ut ;  as,  Eras  dignus,  ut  haberes  integram  manum.  Quint. 

10.  A  relative  clause,  after  unus ,  solus ,  primus ,  etc.,  restricting 
the  affirmation  to  a  particular  subject,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

//tec  est  una  contentio ,  quae  adhuc  permanserit,  This  is  the  only  dispute  which 
has  remained  till  this  time.  Cic.  Vdluptas  est  sola,  quae  nos  vocet  aa  se,  et  alll- 
ceat  suapte  natura,  Pleasure  is  the  only  thing  that,  by  its  own  nature,  invites 
and  allures  us  to  itself.  Id. 

11.  When  the  relative  refers  to  a  dependent  clause ,  it  often  takes 
the  subjunctive.  See  §  266. 

12.  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  narra¬ 
tion  after  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  when  a  repeated  action  is 
spoken  of ;  as, 

Semper  habiti  sunt  fortissimi ,  qui  summam  imperii  potirentur,  Those  were  al¬ 
ways  accounted  the  bravest,  who  obtained  the  supreme  dominion.  Nep. 
Quemcumque  lictor  jussu  consulis  prehendisset,  tribunus  mitti  jubebat.  Liv. 
Ut  quisque  maxime  laboraret  locus,  aut  ipse  occurrebat,  aut  aliquos  mittebat.  So 
after  si  quis  or  qui ;  as,  Si  qui  rem  malitiosius  gessisset,  dedecus  existimabant. 
Cic.  Qu&tiens  super  tali  negotio  consultaret,  edita  ddmus  parte  utebatur.  Tac. 
Nec  quisquam  Pyrrhum,  qua  tulisset  impetum,  sustinere  valuit. — It  is  sometimes 
found  in  like  manner  after  quum,  ubi,  ut,  and  si  when  used  in  the  sense  of 
quum,  when  repeated  actions  are  spoken  of ;  as,  Id  ubi  dixisset,  hastam  in  fines 
eorum  emittebat.  Liv.  Sin  Numidae  propius  accessissent,  ibi  vero  virtutem  osten¬ 
dere.  Sail.  Sometimes  even  the  present  subjunctive  is  so  used  when  em¬ 
ployed  as  an  aorist  to  express  things  which  have  happened  repeatedly,  and 
still  happen  (see  §  145,  I.  2.);  as,  Ubi  de  magna  virtute  et  gloria  bdnorum  memo- 
res,  quoe  sibi  quisque ,  etc.  Sail. 

Note  7.  This  is  called  the  indefinite  subjunctive ,  or  subjunctive  of  generality ,  inasmuch 
as  the  action  is  not  referred  to  a  distinct,  individual  case.  The  indicative,  however,  is 
used  in  such  cases  more  frequently  than  the  subjunctive. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS. 

§  Dependent  clauses,  containing  an  indirect  question, 

take  the  subjunctive. 

Note  1.  A  question  is  indirect  when  its  substance  is  stated  in  a  dependent 
clause  without  the  interrogative  form.  Indirect  questions  generally  depend 
upon  those  verbs  and  expressions  which  commonly  take  after  them  the  accusa¬ 
tive  with  the  infinitive.  Cf.  §  272.  Thus: — 

Qualis  sit  animus,  ipse  animus  nescit ,  The  mind  itself  knows  not  what  the 
mind  is.  Cic.  Credibile  non  est,  quantum  scribam,  It  is  incredible  how  much  I 
write.  Id.  Quis  ego  sim,  me  rdgitas  ?  Do  you  ask  me  who  I  am?  Plaut.  Ad  te 
quid  scribam  nescio.  Cic.  Nec  quid  scribam  habeo,  Nor  have  I  any  thing  to 
write.  Id.  Pace  me,  ubi  sint  dii,  Inform  me  where  the  gods  are.  Id.  Incertum 
est,  quo  te  loco  mors  exspectet.  Sen.  Ep.  Quam  pridem  sibi  hereditas  venisset, 
docet.  Id.  Nunc  accipe ,  quare  desipiant  omnes.  Hor.  Id  utrum  illi  sentiant,  an 


§  266.  SYNTAX. - SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INSERTED  CLAUSES.  279 


vero  simulent,  tu  intelliges.  Cic.  Qucero,  num  tu  senatui  causam  tuam  permittas. 
Id.  Vides ,  ut  alta  stet  nive  candidum  Soracte.  Hor.  Nescit ,  vitane  fruatur,  an 
sit  apud  manes.  Ovid. 

Note  2.  All  interrogatives  whether  adjectives,  pronouns,  or  par¬ 
ticles,  may  serve  as  connectives  of  clauses  containing  indirect  ques¬ 
tions;  as, 

Quantus,  qualis ,  qudt,  qudtus ,  qubtuplex,  uter  •  quis ,  qui,  cujas  ;  ubi,  quo ,  unde ,  quel, 
quorsum,  quamdiu,  quamdudum,  quampridem ,  qufities,  cur,  quare,  quamobrem ,  quemad- 
mddum ,  quOmodo,  ut ,  quant.,  quanttiptire,  an,  ne,  num ,  utrum ,  anne,  annon. 

Remark  1.  The  indicative  is  frequently  used  in  dependent  questions, 
especially  in  Terence  and  Plautus  and  occasionally  in  later  poets;  as,  Vide 
avaHtia  quid  facit.  Ter.  So  Virg.  Eel.  5,  7.  In  the"  best  prose  writers  the  in¬ 
dicative  generally  indicates  that  the  question  is  direct,  or  that  the  sentence  is 
not  a  question ;  as,  Quaeramus  ubi  maleficium  est,  Let  us  seek  there,  where  the 
crime  actually  is.  Cic.  Nihil  est  admirabilius,  quam  quomddo  ille  mortem  filii 
tulit. 

Rem.  2.  In  double  questions,  ‘  whether — or,v  the  first  may  be  introduced  by 
utrum ,  or  the  enclitic  ne,  or^ without  an  interrogative  particle.  Hence  there  are 
four  forms  of  double  questions, — 1.  utrum  (or  utrum  ne), — an.  2.  utrum ,  — an 

( anne).  3.  -ne, - an.  4.  -ne, -  -ne  ;  as,  Multum  interest ,  utrum  laus 

imminuatur,  an  salus  deseratur.  Cic.  The  interrogative  particle  utrum  is  not 
used  in  a  single  question ;  and  num — an  is  used  only  in  direct  questions.  The 
English  ‘  or  not  ’  in  the  second  part,  which  is  used  without  a  verb,  is  expressed 
in  Latin  by  annon  or  necne ,  either  with  or  without  a  verb ;  but  necne  occurs 
only  in  indirect  questions ;  as,  Dii  utrum  sint,  necne  sint,  quaeritur.  Cic. — Ne — 
ne,  an — an,  or  num — num  scarcely  o&cur  except  in  poetical  or  unclassical  lan¬ 
guage. 

Rem.  3.  Dubito ,  dubium  est ,  or  incertum  est  an,  delibero  or  hcesito  an,  and 
especially  haud  scio  an,  nescio  an,  though  implying  some  doubt,  have  generally 
a  sense  almost  affirmative.  Compare  §  198, 11,  R.  (e.) 

Rem.  4.  Nescio  quis,  used  nearly  in  the  sense  of  aliquis ,  does  not  influence 
the  mood  of  the  following  verb ;  as,  Sed  casu  nescio  quo  in  ea  tempdra  cetas  nos¬ 
tra  incidit.  Cic.  Lucus,  nescio  quo  casu,  nocturno  tempore  incensus  est.  Nep. 
So,  also,  nescio  quomodo ,  ‘  somehow  ’  or  ‘  in  some  way  ’ ;  as,  Sed  nescio  quomo¬ 
do,  inhaeret  in  mentibus  quasi  augurium.  Cic.  In  like  manner  mirum  quam,  mi¬ 
rum  quantum,  nimium  quantum,  and  the  like,  when  united  to  express  only  one 
idea,  do  not  affect  the  mood  of  the  verb;  as,  Sales  in  dicendo  nimium  quantum 
valent, — very  much.  Cic. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INSERTED  CLAUSES. 

§  1.  When  a  dependent  proposition  containing  either 

an  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  a  verb  in  the  subjunctive,  has 
a  clause  connected  with  it,  as  an  essential  part ,  either  by  a  rela¬ 
tive,  a  relative  adverb,  or  a  conjunction,  the  verb  of  the  latter 
clause  is  put  in  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quid  enim  pdtest  esse  tam  perspicuum ,  quam  esse  aliquod  numen,  quo  haec  re¬ 
gantur?  For  what  can  be  so  clear  as,  that  there  is  some  divinity  by  whom 
these  things  are  governed  ?  Cic.  Here  the  thing  which  is  stated  to  be  clear  is, 
not  merely  esse  aliquod  numen,  that  there  is  a  god,  but  also  that  the  world  is 
governed  by  him.  Hence  the  latter  clause,  quo  heee  regantur  is  an  essential  part 
of  the  general  proposition.  Illud  sic  fere  definiri  sblet,  decorum  id  esse,  quod 
consentaneum  sit  hominis  excellentiae.  Id.  Audiam  quid  sit ,  quod  Epicurum  non 
probes,  I  shall  hear  why  it  is  that  you  do  not  approve  of  Epicurus.  Id.  Jussit 
ut,  quae  venissent,  naves  Euboeam  peterent.  Liv. 


280  SYNTAX. — SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INSERTED  CLAUSES.  §  266. 


Remark  1.  Hence  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  general  sentences,  in  which 
the  class  of  things  mentioned  exists  only  as  a  conception  or  idea,  while  the 
individual  thing  has  a  real  existence ;  as,  Est  enim  ulciscendi  et  puniendi  mddus , 
atque  haud  scio  an  satis  sit  eum  qui  lacessierit  injuries  suce  poenitere ,  i.  e.  each 
individual  offender  of  the  class. 

Rem.  2.  When  the  principal  proposition  contains  a  subjunctive  denoting  a 
result,  after,  ita,  tam,  tdlis ,  etc.,  the  inserted  clause  has  the  indicative;  as,  Asia 
vero  tam  dpima  est  et  fertilis ,  ut — multitudine  earum  rerum,  quae  exportantur, 
f  acile  omnibus  terris  antecellat.  Cic.  The  same  is  the  case  in  definitions ;  as, 
Videre  igitur  dportet,  quos  sint  convenientia  cum  ipso  negotio ,  hoc  est,  quae  ab  re 
separare  non  possunt.  Cic. — So  also  explanatory  clauses,  especially  circumlo¬ 
cutions  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun,  are  sometimes  found  with  the  indic¬ 
ative  ;  as,  Itaque  ille  Marius  item  eximie  L.  P lotium  dilexit ,  cujus  ingenio  putabat 
ea,  quae  gesserat,  posse  celebrari.  Cic. 

Note.  To  this  rule  belongs  the  construction  of  the  oratio  obliqua,  ‘indirect 
discourse,’  or  ‘  reported  speech,’  in  which  the  language  of  another  is  presented, 
not  as  it  was  conceived  or  expressed  by  him,  but  in  the  third  person.  Thus, 
Caesar  said,  ‘  I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered,’  is  direct, — Caesar  said,  that  ‘  he  came, 
saw,  and  conquered,’  is  indirect  discourse. 

2.  In  the  drdtio  obliqua ,  the  main  proposition  is  expressed  by 
the  accusative  with  the  infinitive ;  and  dependent  clauses  con¬ 
nected  with  it  by  relatives  and  particles,  take  the  subjunctive. 

Thus,  Cicero  and  Quintilian,  in  quoting  the  language  of  Marcus  Antonius, 
make  use:  the  former  of  the  drdtio  directa,  the  latter  of  the  oratio  obliqua ; — 
Antonius  inquit ,  ‘  Ars  earum  rerum  est,  quae  sciuntur  ’,  Antonius  says,  ‘  Art  be¬ 
longs  to  those  things  which  are  known.’  Cic.  Antonius  inquit,  artem  earum 
rerum  esse,  quae  sciantur,  Antonius  says,  that  ‘art  belongs  to  those  things 
which  are  known.’  Quint. 

So,  Socrates  dicere  sdlebat,  omnes ,  in  eo  quod  scirent,  satis  esse  eldquentes,  So¬ 
crates  was  accustomed  to  say,  that  ‘  all  were  sufficiently  eloquent  in  that  which 
they  understood  ?  Cic.  Cato  mirari  se  aiebat,  quod  non  rideret  haruspex ,  haruspi¬ 
cem  quum  vidisset.  Id.  Negat  jus  esse,  qui  miles  non  sit,  pugnare  cum  hoste.  Id. 
Indignabantur  ibi  esse  imperium,  ubi  non  esset  libertas.  Liv.  Itaque  Athenienses , 
quod  hdnestum  non  esset,  id  ne  utile  quidem  (esse)  putaverunt.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  When  the  subjunctive  would  be  necessary  in  the  drdtio 
directa,  to  denote  liberty,  power,  etc.,  the  same  remains  in  the  drdtio  obliqua , 
and  is  not  changed  into  the  infinitive  with  an  accusative;  as,  Ad  hiec  Ariovistus 
respondit,  quum  vellet,  congrederetur,  To  this  Ariovistus  replied,  that  ‘  he  might 
meet  him  when  he  pleased.’  Caes.  In  the  drdtio  directa,  this  would  be  congre¬ 
diaris. 

(b.)  The  imperative  in  the  drdtio  directa  is,  in  the  drdtio  obliqua ,  changed 
into  the  subjunctive;  as,  hoc  mihi  dicite ,  which  in  the  drdtio  obliqua  is,  hoc  sibi 
dicant ,  or  hoc  sibi  dicerent ,  according  to  the  tense  of  the  leading  verb. 

(c.)  So  also  direct  questions  addressed  to  the  second  person,  when  changed 
from  direct  to  indirect  speech,  become  subjunctives.  Liv.  6,  37. — But  such 
questions  when  not  addressed  to  the  second  person  are  expressed  in  the  drdtio 
obliqua  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as  when  in  direct  speech  we  say, 
Etiamsi  veteris  contumelice  oblivisci  velim ,  num  possum  etiam  recentium  injuriarum 
memdriam  deponere  ?  The  drdtio  obliqua  will  be,  Ccesar  respondit  (histor.  perf.) — 
si  veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci  vellet ,  num  etiam  recentium  injuriarum — memdriam 
deponere  posse?  Caes.  Very  rarely  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  found 
in  a  question  of  the  second  person,  as  in  Liv.  6,  17 :  but  the  subjunctive  in 
questions  of  the  third  person  is  less  uncommon  in  Caesar;  as,  Quis  pditi  posset? 
for  quern  pad  posse  ?  Quis  hoc  sibi  persuaderet  ?  for  quem  sibi  persuasurum  ?  See 
§  273,  3. 

Rem.  2.  A  writer  may  state  his  own  past  words  or  thoughts  in  drdtio  obliqua} 
either  preserving  the  first  person,  or  adopting  the  third. 


§  267, 


SYNTAX. — IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


281 


Rem.  3.  When  the  inserted  clause  contains  the  words  or  sentiments  of  the 
subject  of  the  leading  clause,  all  references  to  him  are  regularly  expressed  by 
the  reflexives  sui  and  suits ;  as,  Ilac  necessitate  coactus  ddmino  navis  qui  sit  a  pent, 
multa  pollicens ,  si  se  conservasset.  Nep.  And  this  is  equally  true  when  the 
word  to  which  the  pronoun  refers  is  not  in  reality  the  grammatical  subject, 
provided  it  may  still  be  conceived  as  such ;  as,  Quum  ei  in  suspicionem  venisset , 
aliquid  in  epistola  de  se  esse  scriptum.  Nep. ;  for  the  words,  quum  ei  in  suspicio¬ 
nem  venisset ,  are  equivalent  to  quum  suspicaretur.  See  §  208,  (1.) 

Rem.  4.  The  tenses  to  be  used  in  changing  the  oratio  directa  into  the  obliqua , 
depend  on  the  tense  of  the  verb  which  introduces  the  quotation,  according  to 
the  rule,  §  258.  But  when  the  future  perfect  would  be  used  in  the  direct,  the 
pluperfect  is  necessary  in  the  oblique  form ;  but  the  perfect  is  used  after  the 
present,  perfect  definite,  or  future. 

Rem.  5.  When  the  connected  clause  contains  merely  a  descriptive  circum¬ 
stance,  or  expresses  what  is  independent  of  the  sentiment  of  the  preceding 
clause,  it  takes  the  indicative ;  as,  Imperavit  Alexander  Lysippo ,  ut  eorum  equi¬ 
tum ,  qui  apud  Granicum  ceciderant,  faceret  statuas ,  Alexander  ordered  Lysip¬ 
pus  to  make  statues  of  those  horsemen  who  had  fallen  at  the  Granicus. 
Sometimes,  in  other  cases,  when  it  is  evident  from  the  sense,  that  the  connect¬ 
ed  clause  is  an  essential  part  of  the  proposition,  the  indicative  is  used,  to  avoid 
giving  the  appearance  of  contingency  to  the  sentence. 

3.  A  clause  connected  to  another  by  a  relative  or  causal  con¬ 
junction,  takes  the  subjunctive,  (whatever  be  the  mood  of  the 
preceding  verb,)  when  it  contains  not  the  sentiment  or  allegation 
of  the  writer,  but  that  of  some  other  person  alluded  to ;  as, 

Socrates  accusatus  est ,  quod  corrumperet  juventutem ,  Socrates  was  accused 
of  corrupting  the  youth,  lit.,  because  {as  was  alleged)  he  corrupted  the  youth. 
Deum  invdcdoant ,  cujus  ad  solenne  venissent,  They  invoked  the  god,  to  whose 
solemnities  they  had  come.  Liv.  Quos  viceris  amicos  tibi  esse  cave  credas ,  Do 
not  believe  that  those  whom  you  have  conquered  are  your  friends.  Here,  in 
the  first  example,  the  charge  of  corrupting  the  youth  is  not  made  by  the 
writer,  but  by  the  accusers  of  Socrates.  So,  in  the  second  example,  the  wor¬ 
shippers  allege  that  they  have  come  to  attend  upon  the  solemnities  of  the  god. 
In  the  last,  it  is  implied  by  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  that  the  belief 
spoken  of  is  that  of  the  person  addressed : — quos  vicisti  would  have  been  merely 
an  addition  of  the  speaker,  by  means  of  which  he  would  have  designated  the 
persons  whose  friendship  he  was  speaking  of ;  and,  in  general,  the  indicative ,  in 
such  sentences,  is  employed  in  those  statements  which  are  independent  of  the 
sentiments  of  the  person,  to  whose  thoughts  or  words  allusion  is  made.  Cf. 
supra,  2,  R.  5. 

Remark.  In  the  preceding  cases,  it  is  not  directly  said  that  the  sentiments 
are  those  of  another  than  the  writer.  In  Cicero,  however,  the  words  dico ,  puto , 
arbitror ,  and  the  like,  are( often  construed  in  a  similar  manner,  although,  pro¬ 
perly  speaking,  not  these  verbs,  but  those  in  the  clauses  dependent  on  them, 
should  be  in  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Quum  enim ,  Hannibalis  permissu ,  exisset  de 
castris,  rediit  paulo  post,  quod  se  oblitum  nescio  quod  diceret, ...because  (as)  he 
said,  he  had  forgotten  something.  Cic.  Ab  Atheniensibus ,  Idcum  sepultures  intra 
urbem  ut  darent ,  impetrare  nonpdtui ,  quod  religione  se  impediri  dicerent.  Id. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

§  267.  The  imperative  mood  is  used  to  express  a  command , 
wish ,  advice ,  or  exhortation  ;  as, 

Nosce  te,  Know  thyself.  Cic.  JEquam  memento  servare  mentem ,  Remember 
to  preserve  an  unruffled  mind.  Hor.  Huc  ades,  Come  hither.  Virg.  Pasce  cd- 
pellas ,  et  potum  pastas  age,  et  inter  agendum  occursare  capro  caveto.  Id. 

24* 


282 


SYNTAX. - INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


§  268. 


(1.)  The  imperative  present  denotes  that  an  action  is  to  be  performed  direct¬ 
ly  or  at  once ;  as,  lege,  read ;  mdrere,  die ;  or  that  a  state  or  condition  is  to  con¬ 
tinue;  as,  vine,  live. 

(2.)  The  imperative  future  denotes  that  something  is  to  be  done,  as  soon  as 
something  else  has  taken  place ;  as,  Quum  valetudini  tuae  consulueris ,  tum  con¬ 
sulito  navigationi.  Cic.  Prius  audite  paucis ;  quod  quum  dixero ,  si  placuerit , 
facitote.  Ter.  The  precedent  event  is  often  to  be  supplied  by  the  mind. 
Sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  the  imperative  present  is  used  for  the  impera¬ 
tive  future,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  scito  and  scitote ,  from  scio ,  are  used  instead 
of  the  imperative  present,  which  is  wanting. 

(3.)  Hence  the  imperative  future  is  properly  used  in  contracts ,  laws ,  and 
wills ;  and  also  in  precepts  and  rules  of  conduct ;  as,  Regio  imperio  duo  sunto, 
iique  consules  appellantor,  militiae  summum  jus  habento,  nemini  parento,  illis 
salus  populi  suprema  lex  esto.  Cic.  Non  satis  est  pulchra  esse  poemata ,  dulcia 
sunto.  Hor.  Ignoscito  scepe  alteri ,  numquam  tibi.  Syr. 

Remark  1.  With  the  imperative,  not  is  expressed  by  ne,  and  nor 
by  neve;  as, 

Ne  tanta  animis  assuescite  bella.  Virg.  Ne  crede  colori.  Id.  Edminem  mor¬ 
tuum  in  urbe  ne  sepelito,  neve  urito.  Cic. 

Note.  Non  and  neque  occur,  though  rarely,  with  the  imperative ;  as,  Vos 
qudque  non  caris  aures  onerate  lapillis ,  nec  prodite  graves  insuto  vestibus  auro. 
Ovid.  But  with  the  subjunctive  used  for  the  imperative  non  and  especially 
neque  are  found  more  frequently.  Cf.  §  260,  R.  6,  (b.) — In  Plautus  and  Terence 
ne  is  of  common  occurrence  both  with  the  imperative  and  with  the  present 
subjunctive,  and  with  no  difference  of  meaning;  but  later  poets  chiefly  use  ne 
with  the  present  subjunctive,  and  ne  with  the  imperative  only  when  they  speak 
emphatically.  In  classical  prose  writers  the  periphrastic  noli  with  the  infinitive 
is  preferred. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  often  used  instead  of  both 
tenses  of  the  imperative,  to  express  a  command  in  a  milder  form,  an  exhorta¬ 
tion,  or  an  entreaty;  as,  Qui  adipisci  veram  gloriam  volet,  justitiae  fungatur 
ojficiis.  Cic.  Quod  dubitas,  ne  feceris.  Plin.  Ep.  See  §  260,  II.,  R.  6.  An  imper¬ 
ative  of  the  perfect  passive  is  very  rarely  found ;  as,  At  vos  admoniti  nostris 
qudque  casibus  este.  Ovid.  Jacta  alea  esto.  Caes.  in  Suet.  But  the  subjunctive 
is  more  common ;  as,  Jacta  sit  alea.  Sometimes  also  the  future  indicative ;  as, 
Sed  valebis,  meaque  negotia  videbis,  meque  diis  juvantibus  ante  brumam  exspec¬ 
tabis,  instead  of  vale,  vide,  exspecta.  Cic.  Ubi  sententiam  meam  vobis  peregero , 
tum  quibus  eadem  placebunt,  in  jclextram  partem  taciti  transibitis,  instead  of 
transitote.  Liv.  With  the  future  the  negative  is  non.  See  §  259,  R.  1,  (4.) 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes,  for  the  simple  affirmative  imperative,  cui'a  or  curato  uf, 
fac  ut,  or  fac  alone  is  used  with  the  subjunctive;  as,  Cura  ut  quamprimum 
venias,  Come  as  soon  as  possible.  Fac  erudias,  Instruet,  or  Take  care  to  in¬ 
struct.  Cic.  For  the  negative  imperative  fac  ne,  cave  ne  or  cave  alone,  with 
the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  is  used;  but  especially  noli  with  the  infini¬ 
tive;  as,  Noli  putare ,  Do  not  suppose.  Cic.  Cave  existimes ,  Do  not  think.  Id. 
Nolite  id  velle  quod  non  fieri  potest,  et  cavete  ne  spe  press  entis  pads  perpetuam 
pacem  omittatis.  Id. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

§  268.  1.  The  infinitive  partakes  of  the  properties  of  the  noun  and 

verb,  just  as  the  participle  combines  the  properties  of  the  adjective  and  verb. 
It  expresses  simply  the  action  or  state  implied  in  the  verb  in  an  abstract  man¬ 
ner,  without  specifying  either  person,  number,  or  time,  and  thus  merely  indi¬ 
cates  whether  an  action  is  in  progress  or  completed. 


§  268, 


SYNTAX. — INFINITIVE  MOOD, 


283 


2.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  respectively  an  action 
as  present,  past,  or  future,  in  reference  to  the  time  of  the  verbs 
with  which  they  are  connected ;  as, 

Hoc  facere  possum,  I  am  able  to  do  this.  Cic.  Vldi  nostros  inimicos  cupere 
bellum ,  I  saw  that  our  enemies  were  desiring  war.  Id.  Nec  gemere  aeria  ces¬ 
sabit  turtur  ab  ulmo ,  Nor  shall  the  turtle  dove  cease  to  coo  from  the  lofty  elm. 
Virg. —  Victorem  victae,  succubuisse  queror,  I  complain  that  the  victor  has 
yielded  to  the  vanquished.  Ovid.  Se  a  senibus  audisse  dicebant,  They  said 
that  they  had  heard  (it)  from  the  old  men.  Cic.  Audiet  elves  acuisse  ferrum 
juventus,  Th£  youth  will  hear  that  the  citizens  have  whetted  the  sword.  Hor. — 
Negat  sese  verbum  esse  facturum,  He  declares  that  he  is  not  about  to  speak. 
Cic.  Postquam  audierat  non  datum  iri  filio  uxorem  suo ,  After  he  had  heard 
that  a  wife  would  not  be  given  to  his  son.  Ter.  Semper  existimabitis  nihil 
horum  vos  visuros  fdre,  You  will  always  suppose  that  you  are  to  see  none  of 
these  things.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The  present  and  perfect  infinitives  are  sometimes  called  re¬ 
spectively  the  infinitives  of  incomplete  and  of  completed  action.  The  present  in¬ 
finitive,  however,  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  a  completed  action.  This  is  the 
usual  construction  with  memini ;  but  in  such  case  the  speaker  transfers  him¬ 
self  to  the  past,  and  the  expression  denotes  rather  a  recollection  of  the  pro¬ 
gress  than  of  the  completion  of  the  action;  as,  Hoc  me  memini  dicere,  I  remem¬ 
ber  my  saying  this.  Cic.  Teucrum  memini  Siddna  venire,  I  remember  Teucer’s 
coming  to  Sidon.  Virg.  So  with  memoria  teneo.  Cic.  Phil.  8,  10.  Scribit  also 
is  construed  like  meminit ;  as,  Cic.  Off.  3,  2 :  and  after  the  same  analogy,  and 
for  the  sake  of  vivid  expression  Cicero  says,  M.  Maximum  accepimus  facile 
celare,  tacere,  dissimulare,  etc.,  though  speaking  of  things  which  he  had  not 
witnessed  himself.  So,  also,  with  recordor ; — Recordor  longe  omnibus  unum  an¬ 
teferre  Demosthenem.  Cic.  When  the  action  is  spoken  of  simply  as  a  fact,  the 
perfect  infinitive  is  used  with  memini ;  as,  Meministis  me  ita  distribuisse  causam. 
Cic. 

(6.)  The  passive  voice  having  no  simple  form  for  expressing  the  completed 
state  of  suffering  makes  use  of  the  combination  of  the  perfect  participle  with 
esse  ;  as,  amatus  esse ,  to  have  been  loved.  When  thus  combined  esse  loses  its 
own  signification  of  a  continued  state,  and  when  this  state  is  to  be  expressed, 
another  infinitive  must  be  chosen;  as,  Constrictam  jam  horum  conscientia  teneri 
conjurationem  tuam  non  vides  ?  Cic.  Sometimes,  however,  when  no  ambiguity 
can  arise,  esse  in  the  usual  combination  retains  its  original  meaning;  as,  Apud 
Platonem  est,  omnem  morem  Lacedaemoniorum  inflammatum  esse  cupiditate  vin¬ 
cendi.  Id.  Here  inflammatum  esse  expresses  a  continued  or  habitual  state. — 
Fuisse  with  the  perfect  participle  denotes  a  state  completed  previous  to  a  certain 
past  time;  as,  Jubet  bono  animo  esse;  sopitum  fuisse  regem  subito  ictu.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  To  express  the  result  of  an  action  rather  than  its  progress,  the  per¬ 
fect  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  present,  especially  after  satis 
habeo ,  satis  mihi  est,  pudet,  contentus  sum,  melius  erit,  volo  or  a  verb  of  equivalent 
meaning;  as,  Bacchatur  vates ,  magnum  si  peetdre  possit  excussisse  deum.  Virg. 
Quum  Siam  nemo  velit  attigisse.  Plin.  The  poets  use  the  infinitive  perfect  where 
we  should  expect  a  present ;  as,  Tendentes  Pelion  imposuisse  Olympo.  Hor. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  infinitive  is  also  sometimes  used  for  the  future,  espe¬ 
cially  when  the  verb  has  no  future ;  as,  Desine  f  dta  deum  flecti  sperare ,  Cease 
to  hope  that  the  fates  of  the  gods  will  be  changed.  Virg.  Progeniem  Trojano 
a  sanguine  duci  audierat.  Id.  Cras  mihi  argentum  dare  dixit ,  i.  e.  se  daturum 
esse.  Ter.  Cato  affirmat  se  vivo  ilium  non  triumphare.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  The  infinitive  future  active  is  formed  by  a  combination  of  the 
participle  future  active  with  esse;  as,  amaturus  esse;  the  infinitive  future  pas¬ 
sive' by  a  combination  of  the  supine  in  um  with  vri;  as,  amatum  Iri.  These 
future  infinitives  denote  an  action  or  state  as  continuing.  The  participle  in 
rus ,  which  properly  expresses  intention  (see  §  162,  14),  takes  also  the  infinitive 
fuisse  to  express  a  past  intention ;  as,  Scio  te  scripturum  fuisse ,  I  know  that 


284 


SYNTAX. - INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


§  269. 


you  have  had  the  intention  to  write,  whence  it  was  an  easy  transition  to  the 
sense,  ‘  you  would  have  written,’  in  conditional  sentences,  when  the  condition 
is  not  fulfilled.  This  infinitive  is  used  especially  in  the  apodosis  of  hypotheti¬ 
cal  sentences,  where  in  direct  speech  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  would  be 
used  (cf.  §  162,  14,  R.  3.);  as,  Etiamsi  obtemperasset  auspiciis,  idem  eventurum 
fuisse  puto.  Cic.  In  like  manner  the  infinitive  future  with  esse  is  used  in  the 
apodosis  of  hypothetical  sentences  instead  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive;  as, 
Libertus ,  nisi  jur asset,  scelus  se  facturum  (esse)  arbitrabatur .  Id. 

( b .)  Instead  of  the  future  infinitive,  in  both  voices,  futurum  esse  or  fdre , 
followed  by  ut  and  the  subjunctive,  is  often  used ;  the  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive,  in  such  cases,  denoting  an  unfinished,  the  perfect  and  pluperfect 
a  finished,  future  action;  as,  Numquam  putavi  fore,  ut  supplex  ad  te  venirem, 
I  never  supposed  (that  it  would  happen)  that  I  should  come  a  suppliant  to  you. 
Cic.  Suspicor  fore,  ut  infringatur  hdminum  imprdbitas.  Id.  Credebam  fore,  ut 
epistolam  scripsisses. — So,  also,  in  the  passive  for  a  continued  state  of  future 
suffering  the  present  and  imperfect  are  used ;  as,  Credo  f  ore,  ut  epistolam  scri¬ 
batur,  and,  Credebam  fore,  ut  epistola  scriberetur.  But  to  express  a  completed 
state  in  future  time  the  perfect  participle  is  employed ;  as,  Quos  spero  brevi 
tempdre  tecum  copulatos  fore.  Cic.  Quod  videret  nomine  pacis  bellum  involutum 
fore.  Id.  This  construction  is  necessarily  used,  when  the  verb  has  either  no 
future  active  participle,  or  no  supine ;  as,  in  such  case,  the  regular  future  infin¬ 
itive  cannot  be  formed;  as,  Spero  f6re  ut  sapias. — Fore  is  found  in  two  pas¬ 
sages  pleonastically  joined  with  the  future  participle  active,  viz.  Te  ad  me 
fore  venturum.  Cic.  Att.  5,  21 :  and  Quum  senatus  censeret — libenter  facturos 
fore.  Liv.  6,  42. 

Rem.  5.  («.)  The  periphrastic  infinitive  formed  by  the  future  active  partici¬ 
ple  with  fuisse ,  denotes  a  future  action  contingent  upon  a  condition  which  was 
not  fulfilled;  and,  in  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  corresponds  to  the 
pluperfect  subjunctive ;  as,  An  censes  me  tantos  labores  suscepturum  fuisse,  si 
iisdem  finibus  gloriam  meam  quibus  vitam  essem  terminaturus  f  Do  you  think 
that  I  should  have  undertaken  so  great  labors  if,  etc.  Cic.  Ut  perspicuum  sit 
omnibus ,  nisi  tanta  acerbitas  injuriae  fuisset ,  numquam  illos  in  eum  Idcum  progres¬ 
suros  fuisse,. ...that  they  never  would  have  come  into  that  place.  Id. 

( b .)  Futurum  fuisse  with  ut  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive  passive,  corres¬ 
ponds  to  the  infinitive  fuisse  with  the  future  participle  active  in  a  conditional 
proposition;  as,  Nisi  nuncii  essent  allati ,  existimabant  plerique  futurum  fuisse, 
ut  oppidum  amitteretur,. ..that  the  town  would  have  been  lost.  Cses. 

(c.)  The  participle  future  passive  cannot  be  used  to  form  an  infinitive  future 
passive,  since  it  always  retains  the  meaning  of  necessity,  and  in  this  sense  has 
three  regular  infinitives,  amandum  esse,  amandum  fuisse ,  and  amandum  f  Ore ; 
as,  Instare  hiemem ,  aut  sub  pellibus  habendos  milites  f  ore ,  aut  diff  erendum 
esse  in  aestatem  bellum.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  In  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  the  perfect  infinitive, 
like  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative,  (see  §  259,  R.  4.),  sometimes  corresponds 
to  the  pluperfect  subjunctive;  as,  (Dixit)  sibi  vitam  filice  sud  cariorem  fuisse, 
si  liberae  ac  pudicae  vivere  licitum  f  uisset ,  (He  said)  that  the  life  of  his  daughter 
had  been  dearer  to  him  than  his  own,  if  it  had  been  permitted....  Liv.  This 
use  of  the  perfect  infinitive  is  necessary,  when  the  verb  has  no  future  partici¬ 
ple;  as ,  Equidem  Platonem  existimo,  si  genus  fdrense  dicendi  tractare  voluisset , 
gravissime  et  copiosissime  potuisse  dicere , — would  have  been  able  to  speak.  Cic. 

§  269.  The  infinitive  may  be  regarded  either  as  a  verb  or  as  an  ab¬ 
stract  noun,  (a.)  As  a  verb  it  is  used  either  indefinitely  (§  143,  4),  or  with  a 
subject  of  its  own,  which  is  put  in  the  accusative,  (§  239).  But  the  infinitive 
passive  of  neuter  and  sometimes  of  active  verbs,  like  the  third  person  singular 
pf  that  voice,  may  be  used  impersonally  or  without  a  subject;  as,  Vides  toto 
properari  litbrt,  ¥ou  see  a  stir  is  made  all  along  the  shore.  Virg.  See  209, 
R.  3,  (20,  and  239,  I£.  4.  The  present  infinitivo  has  sometimes,  in  narration,  a 
subject  in  the  nominative?  §ee  $  209,  R.  5. 


§  269. 


SYNTAX. — INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


285 


( b .)  As  a  noun,  the  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  a  subject-accusative, has 
two  cases,  the  nominative  and  the  accusative,  and  is  accordingly  used  either 
as  the  subject  or  the  object  of  a  verb. 

THE  INFINITIVE  AS  THE  SUBJECT  OF  A  VERB. 

The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  subject-accusative, 
may  be  the  subject  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Ad  rempublicam  pertinet  me  conservari,  It  concerns  the  state  that  I  should 
be  preserved.  Cic.  Numquam  est  utile  peccare,  To  do  wrong  is  never  useful.  Id. 
Majus  dedecus  est  parta  amittere  quam  omnino  non  paravisse.  Sali.  In  the  first 
example  conservari  with  its  subject  accusative  me  is  the  subject  of  pertinet , 
and  is  equivalent  to  ‘my  preservation’:  in  the  second,  peccare  is  the  subject 
of  est  utile.  See  §  202,  2,  and  III.  R.  2. 

Remark  1.  A  general  truth  may  be  expressed  by  the  infinitive  without  a 
subject;  as,  Facinus  est  vincire  civem  Romanum ,  To  bind  a  Roman  citizen,  or, 
that  one  should  bind  a  Roman  citizen,  is  a  crime.  But  in  such  case  the  verb 
esse  and  verbs  denoting  to  appear ,  to  be  considered  or  called  (§  210,  R.  3.),  re¬ 
quire  the  noun  or  adjective  of  the  predicate  to  agree  with  the  implied  subject 
in  the  accusative;  as,  JEquum  est  peccatis  veniam  poscentem  reddere  rursus. 
Hor.  Atticus  maximum  cestimdvit  quaestum,  memorem  gratum  que  cognosci.  Nep. 

Note.  The  indefinite  pronoun  aliquem  or  aliquos  may  in  such  cases  be  sup¬ 
plied,  and  the  same  indefiniteness  may  be  expressed  by  te  or  nos ,  cf.  §  209,  R.  7 ; 
but  it  is  still  more  frequently  expressed  by  the  infinitive  passive.  Hence  the 
sentence  Facinus  est  vincire  civem  Romanum ,  may  also  be  expressed  by  Facinus 
est  vinciri  civem  Romanum.  So,  Quum  viderent  de  eorum  virtute  non  desperari. 
Nep. — The  impersonal  verbs  licet ,  decet ,  oportet,  opus  est,  and  necesse  est,  when 
there  is  no  definite  subject,  are  joined  with  the  infinitive  active  alone;  but 
when  there  is  a  subject-accusative,  they  are  connected  with  the  passive  con¬ 
struction  ;  as,  a  c  t.  licet  hoc  facer  e ;  decet  specimen  capere  ex  hac  re;  pass,  licet 
hoc  fieri ;  decet  specimen  capi. 

Rem.  2.  The  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject  accusative,  is  often  the 
subject  of  a  proposition,  when  the  substantive  verb  with  a  noun,  a  neuter  ad¬ 
jective,  or  an  impersonal  verb  forms  the  predicate.  Of  this  kind  are  justum , 
aequum,  verisimile,  consentaneum,  apertum — est,  erat,  etc.,  necesse  est,  opus  est; — 
apparet,  constat ,  convenit ,  decet,  licet,  oportet ;  intelligitur,  perspicitur,  etc. ;  as, 
Cui  verba  dare  difficile  est.  Ter.  Mendacem  memorem  esse  dportet.  Quint. 
Legem  brevem  esse  dportet.  Sen.  Constat  profecto  ad  salutem  civium  inventas 
esse  leges.  Cic.  Non  enim  me  hoc  jam  dicere  pudebit.  Id.  See  §  209,  R.  3, 
(5.),  (a.) 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  may  itself  be  the  subject  of  an  infinitive;  as,  Audio 
non  licere  cuiquam  in  nave  capillos  deponere.  Ter. 

Rem.  4.  The  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject  accusative,  may  also  be 
the  predicate  nominative ;  as,  Impune  quaelibet  facere  id  est  regem  esse.  Sail. 
In  this  sentence  fdcere  is  the  subject,  and  regem  esse  is  the  predicate;  for  id, 
which  only  represents  by  a  kind  of  apposition  the  clause  impune  quaelibet  fdcere , 
can  be  omitted. 

Rem.  5.  When  the  infinitive  esse,  (or  others  of  similar  meaning,  as,  fieri , 
vivere,  vitam  degere,  cedere,  abire,  etc.),  with  a  predicate  adjective  (or  noun),  is 
joined  with  licet ,  such  predicate  is  put  in  the  accusative,  if  the  subject-accusa¬ 
tive  of  the  infinitive  is  expressed,  and  sometimes,  also,  when  it  is  omitted,  but 
more  frequently,  in  the  latter  case,  the  predicate  adjective  or  noun  is  attracted 
to  the  dative  following  licet;  as,  Ut  eum  Uceat  ante  tempus  consulem  fieri. 
Auct.  ad  Her.  Medios  esse  jam  non  licebit.  Cic.  Si  civi  Romano  licet  esse 
Gaditanum.  Id. — Licuit  enim  esse  otioso  Themistocli.  Id.  Mihi  negllgenti  esse 
non  licet.  Id.  Sibi  vitam  filiae  sud  cariorem  fuisse,  si  liberae  ac  pudicae  vivere 
Ucitum  fuisset  (scii.  ei).  Liv.  So  also  necesse  est  with  the  predicate  in  the 


286 


SYNTAX. - INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


§  270. 


dative.  Vobis  nicesse  est  fortibus  viris  esse.  Liv. — But  licet,  dportet,  and  necesse 
est  are  also  joined  with  the  subjunctive  mood,  and  hence  is  derived  the  con¬ 
struction  of  licet  as  a  conjunction.  See  §  263,  2. 

THE  INFINITIVE  AS  THE  OBJECT  OF  A  VERB. 

§  27©.  The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  subject-ac¬ 
cusative,  may  be  the  object  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Hcec  vitare  cupimus,  We  desire  to  avoid  this.  Cic.  Poetas  omnino  non  conor 
attingere,  I  do  not  at  all  attempt  to  read  the  poets.  Id.  Sententiam  valere 
cupierunt,  They  desired  that  the  opinion  should  prevail.  Id.  Spero  te  valere, 
I  hope  that  you  are  well.  Id. 

Note.  The  infinitive  as  the  object  of  a  verb  supplies  the  place  of  the  accusa¬ 
tive  of  the  thing,  and  hence  many  active  verbs  besides  the  infinitive  fake  in 
the  active  voice  an  accusative  of  the  person,  cf.  §  231,  R.  3,  ( b .),  and  in  tlio 
passive  retain  the  infinitive ;  as,  Consules  jubentur  scribere  exercitum.  Muros 
adire  vetiti  sunt.  Cf.  §  234,  I. 

Remark  1.  The  infinitive  alone  may  also  depend  upon  an  adjec¬ 
tive,  and  sometimes  upon  a  noun. 

(a.)  It  may  depend  upon  relative  adjectives ,  (see  §  213,  R.  1),  which,  by  the 
poets,  are  joined  with  the  infinitive  instead  of  their  usual  construction  with  the 
genitive  of  the  gerund,  etc. ;  as,  Cedere  nescius.  Hor.  Avidi  committere  pug¬ 
nam.  Ovid.  Cupidus  morlri.  Id.  Cantare  periti  Arcades.  Virg.  Callidus  con¬ 
dere  furto.  Hor.  Quidlibet  impotens  sperare.  Id.  Sutrinas  facere  inscius.  Varr. 
Insuetus  vera  audire.  Liv.  Certa  mdri.  Virg.  Felicior  unguere  tela.  Virg. 
So,  Audax  omnia  perpeti,  Resolute  to  endure  every  thing.  Hor.  Sollers  ornare 
Cypassis,  Skilful  to  adorn.  Ovid.  Segnes  solvere  nodum.  Hor.  Indocilis  pau¬ 
periem  pdti.  Id.  Non  lenis  fata  recludere.  Id.  See  §  213,  R.  4,  (1.) 

(6.)  It  may  also  depend  upon  adjectives  signifying  usefulness,  ftness,  e  tc., 
which  are  sometimes  by  the  poets  construed  with  the  infinitive  instead  of  the 
dative ;  as,  ( Tibia)  aspirare  et  adesse  choris  erat  utilis.  Hor.  FEtas  mollis  et 
apta  regi.  Ovid.  Fons  etiam  rivo  dare  nomen  idoneus.  Hor.  Fruges  consumere 
nati.  Id.  And  after  dignus  and  contentus;  as,  Dignus  amari.  Virg.  Cf.  §  244, 
R.  2,  (b.) 

(c.)  Upon  a  noun;  as,  Tempus  est  hujus  libri  facere  finem,  It  is  time  to 
finish  this  book.  Nep.  Iniit  consilia  reges  tollere,  He  devised  a  plan  to  destroy 
the  kings.  Id.  Ea  erat  confessio  caput  rerum  Romam  esse.  Liv.  Cupido  inces¬ 
serat  JEthidpiam  invisere.  Curt.  Quibus  in  otio  vivere  copia  erat.  Sail.  So,  Nec 
mihi  sunt  vires  inimicos  pellere  tectis ,  instead  of  pellendis  inimicis,  or  ad  pellendos 
inimicos.  Ovid. 

(d.)  If  for  the  infinitives  depending  on  nouns  or  adjectives  other  nouns  were 
substituted,  these  last  would  be  put  in  the  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative ;  and 
hence  such  infinitives  may  perhaps  be  properly  regarded  as  exceptions  to  the 
rule,  that  the  infinitive  has  but  two  cases,  the  nominative  and  the  accusative. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  sometimes  stands  uncon¬ 
nected,  especially  in  exclamations  and  indignant  interrogations,  where  credibile 
est?  or  verumne  est ?  maybe  supplied;  as,  Mene  incepto  desistere  victam?  That 
I,  vanquished,  should  desist  from  my  undertaking V  Virg.  Me  miserum!  te  in 
tantas  aerumnas  propter  me  incidisse!  Cic. — But  ut,  also,  with  the  subjunctive, 
either  with  or  without  an  interrogative  particle,  may  be  used  to  express  a 
question  with  indignation;  as,  Fine  (scii,  patri)  $go  ut  adverser?  Liv.  Tu  ut 
•umquam  te  corrigas?  Cic.  Judicio  ut  arator  decumanum  persequatur?  Id.; 
where  fieri  potest  ?  may  be  supplied. 

(6.)  So,  in  the  oratio  obliqua,  the  words  signifying  said,  saying ,  etc.,  are  often 
omitted,  or  implied  in  a  preceding  verb  or  phrase;  as,  Id  facile  ejjici  posse, 
soil,  dixit.  Nep.  Quem  signum  daturum  f  ugientibus  ?  Curt. 


§271 


SYNTAX. - INFINITIVE  MOOD 


287 


Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied;  and  esse  and  fuisse 
with  a  predicate  adjective,  and  also  in  the  compound  forms  of  the  infinitive, 
both  active  and  passive,  are  commonly  omitted,  especially  after  verbs  of  sc ty¬ 
ing,  thinking ,  knowing ,  and  perceiving ;  as,  Vos  cognovi  fortes.  Sail.  Quem  pul- 
sum  memoravi.  Tac.— So,  also,  with  the  infinitive  perfect  passive  when  depend¬ 
ing  on  vdlo,  nolo ,  cupio ,  and  oportet ;  as,  Addlescenh  morem  gestum  oportuit.  Ter. 
Quod  jam  pridem  factum  dportuit.  Cic. — Sometimes  in  a  relative  clause  an  in¬ 
finitive  is  to  be  supplied  from  the  finite  verb  of  the  main  proposition;  as, 
Quos  voluit  omnes  interfecit ,  scii,  interficere.  Ne  illam  quidem  consequuntur , 
quam  putant ,  gratiam ;  i.  e.  quam  se  consecuturos  putant.  Cic. 

THE  INFINITIVE  WITHOUT  A  SUB  JE  CT-ACCUS  ATIVE. 

§  S71.  The  infinitive,  without  a  subject-accusative,  is  used  after 
verbs  denoting  ability ,  obligation ,  intention  or  endeavor ;  after  verbs 
signifying  to  begin ,  continue ,  cease ,  abstain ,  dare ,  fear ,  hesitate ,  or  be 
wont;  and  after  the  passive  of  verbs  of  saying ,  believing ,  reckoning , 
etc. 

Note  1.  To  these  classes  belong  possum,  queo,  ntqueo ,  valeo ,  debeo;  curo ,  cdglto , 
decerno ,  statuo ,  constituo ,  instituo ,  jparo  ;  conor,  nitor ,  tendo,  contendo,  tento ,  maturo , 
prdpSro,  aggrSdior ,  persevero, ; — coepi,  incipio ,  pergo,  dSslno,  desisto,  intermitto ,  parco, 
recuso ;  sSleo,  assuesco,  consuesco,  insuesco ;  audeo,  vSreor ,  metuo,  reformido ,  timeo , 
horreo,  dubito ; — audior,  credor,  existimor,  feror,  negor ,  nuntior,  perhibeor ,  putor ,  trador , 
jubeor,  videor,  and  cogor. 

Note  2.  When  the  preceding  verbs  are  joined  with  esse,  haberi ,  judicari , 
videri,  etc.,  the  predicate  noun  or  adjective  is  put  in  the  nominative;  as,  &)?e£ 
tristis  vie?m ;  aude  sapiens  esse ;  coepit  milii  molestus  esse ;  debes  esse  diligens ; 
pdtest  liber  esse :  and  so  also  meretur ,  sa’£,  didicit  liber  esse. 

Note  3.  The  poets,  in  imitation  of  the  Greeks,  use  the  infinitive  after  %e, 
aufer,  cave ,  parce ,  memento  ;  pdveo,  ref  agio,  quaero,  urgeo,  laboro,  amo,  gaudeo , 
furo,  calleo ,  sumo,  mitto,  remitto ,  patior,  juro,  conjuro ,  pugno ,  natus,  and  some 
other  verbs,  especially  to  denote  a  wish  or  purpose ;  as,  Introiit  videre.  Ter. 
Non  te  frangere  persequor.  Hor.  Non  populare  penates  venimus.  Virg.  In  this 
construction,  the  poets  are  sometimes  imitated  by  the  later  prose  writers. 

Remark  1.  Many  of  the  verbs  above  enumerated,  instead  of  the  infinitive, 
may  be  followed  by  the  subjunctive  with  ut,  ne,  etc. ;  and  with  some  of  them 
this  is  the  regular  construction;  as,  Sententiam  ne  diceret,  recusavit.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  passives  dicor,  trador ,  feror,  narror,  repenor,  existimor,  videor , 
etc.,  may  either  be  used  personally,  with  the  infinitive  alone,  or  impersonally, 
followed  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive.  Thus  we  may  say,  Mater 
Pausaniae  eo  tempdre  vixisse  dicitur,  or,  Dicitur  eo  tempore  matrem  Pausaniae 
vixisse,  The  mother  of  Pausanias  is  said  to  have  been  living.. ..or,  It  is  said 
that  the  mother  of  Pausanias  was  living....  Nep.  The  former  construction  is 
more  common  especially  with  videor,  see  §  272,  R.  6;  but  the  latter  is  frequent 
with  nuntiatur,  and  very  common  with  the  compound  tenses,  traditum  est , 
proditum  est,  etc,.,  and  with  the  participle  future  passive;  as,  credendum  est, 
intelligendum  est,  etc. ;  as,  Quorum  neminem  talem  fuisse  credendum,  etc.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  without  a  subject  is  used  after  a  verb,  only  when  it 
denotes  an  action  or  state  of  the  subject  of  that  verb. 

Rem.  4.  The  verbs  to  wish  or  desire ,  volo,  nolo,  malo ;  cupio,  opto,  studeo ,  have 
a  twofold  construction: — the  infinitive  without  a  subject-accusative  is  used 
after  them,  when  the  subject  remains  the  same;  and  when  followed  by  esse, 
haberi,  etc.,  the  predicate-noun  or  adjective  is  in  the  nominative; — but  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  used  when  the  subject  is  changed,  or  when  a 
reflexive  pronoun  of  the  same  person  follows.  We  say,  therefore,  volo  eruditus 
fieri,  and  on  the  other  hand,  volo  te  eruditum  feri ,  and  vdlo  me  eruditum  feri . 
So,  Vdlo  is  esse ,  quern  tu  me  esse  voluisti.  Cic.  Cupio  me  esse  clementem ,  cupio — 


288 


SYNTAX. — INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


§  272. 


me  non  dissdlutum  videri.  Id. ;  or,  omitting  the  pronoun,  cupio  esse  clemens  nec 
dissolutus  videri. —  Omnis  hdmines  qui  sese  student  praestare  ceteris  animalibus , 
etc.  Sali. 

Note  4.  Volo  is  used  with  the  present  infinitive  passive ;  as,  Me  amdri  vdh , 
I  wish  to  be  beloved ;  hoc  velim  intelligi ,  I  wish  this  to  be  understood ;  and  also 
with  the  infinitive  perfect  passive  to  denote  the  eager  desire  that  something 
should  be  instantly  accomplished;  as,  Legati  quod  erant  appellati  superbius , 
Corinthum  patres  vestri — exstinctum  esse  voluerunt.  Cic. ;  but  it  occurs  most 
frequently  with  the  omission  of  esse ;  as,  hoc  factum  volo ;  nunc  illos  commoni¬ 
tos  velim:  so,  patriam  exstinctam  cupit. 

Note  5.  The  nominative  with  the  infinitive  after  verbs  of  saying,  perceiv¬ 
ing,  etc.  (§  272),  is  rare  even  in  poetry,  and  is  an  imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom, 
which  requires  the  nominative  with  the  infinitive  when  the  same  subject  re¬ 
mains;  as,  Phaselus  ille ,  quem  videtis ,  hospites ,  ait  fuisse  navium  celerrimus. 
Catuli.  Quia  retulit  Ajax  esse  Jovis  nepos,  instead  of  se  esse  Jdvis  nepotem. 
Ovid.  Sensit  medios  delapsus  in  hostes ,  instead  of  se  delapsum  esse.  Virg. 

THE  INFINITIVE  WITH  A  SUB  JE  CT-A  C  CUS  ATI  VE. 

§272.  The  infinitive  with  a  subject-accusative  follows  verbs 
of  saying ,  thinking ,  knowing ,  perceiving,  and  the  like  ;  as, 

Videbat,  id  non  posse  fieri,  He  saw  that  that  could  not  be  done.  Nep.  Sentit 
animus,  se  sud  vi,  non  aliena ,  mdveri.  Cic.  Audivi  te  venire.  Me  in  ejus  potes¬ 
tate  dixi  fibre.  Id.  Affirmant  militum  jacere  animos.  Liv.  Saepe  venit  ad  aures 
meas,  te  istud  nimis  crebro  dicere.  Cic.  Eam  pugnam  ad  Perusiam  pugnatam 
(esse),  quidam  auctSres  sunt.  Liv. 

Note  1.  This  rule  includes  all  such  verbs  and  phrases  as  denote  the  exercise  of  the 
external  senses  and  intellectual  faculties,  or  the  communication  of  thought  to  others ; 
as,  audio ,  video ,  sentio ,  animadverto ,  cognosco ,  intelltgo ,  percipio ,  disco ,  scio ,  nescio , 
censeo,  spero ,  despero ,  cogito ,  judico ,  credo ,  arbitror ,  puto ,  opinor,  duco ,  statuo ,  mSmini, 
recordor ,  obliviscor ,  opinio  est ,  spes  est ,  etc.; — dico ,  trado ,  prodo ,  scribo ,  rgfgro,  narro , 
nuntio ,  confirmo,  nego ,  ostendo ,  indico,  doceo ,  certiorem  facio,  demonstro,  perhibeo, 
promitto ,  polliceor,  spondeo,  etc. ;  but  with  most  of  these  a  different  construction  often 
occurs.  See  §  273. 

Note  2.  The  propositions,  whose  subjects  are  thus  put  in  the  accusative  and  their 
verbs  in  the  infinitive,  are  those  which  are  directly  dependent  on  the  verbs  of  saying 
and  perceiving.  Respecting  the  clauses  inserted  in  such  dependent  propositions,  see 
§  266, 1. 

Note  3.  {a.)  When  a  relative  clause  inserted  in  a  proposition  containing 
the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  has  the  same  verb  as  the  proposition  in 
which  it  is  inserted,  but  such  verb  is  not  repeated,  the  noun  which  is  the  sub¬ 
ject  of  the  relative  clause  is  also  put  by  attraction  in  the  accusative ;  as,  Te 
suspicor  eisdem  rebus,  quibus  me  ipsum,  commoveri.  If  the  verb  is  expressed 
we  must  say,  eisdem  rebus  commdveri,  quibus  (ego)  ipse  commoveor.  So,  also, 
in  inserted  relative  clauses  where  the  verb,  if  expressed,  would  be  in  the  sub¬ 
junctive,  (see  §  266,  2.);  as,  (  Verres)  aiebat  se  tantidem  aestimasse,  quanti  Sacer¬ 
dotem,  for  quanti  Sacerdos  cestimasset.  Cic.  Confitetur  se  in  ea  parte  fuisse  qua 
te,  qua  virum  omni  laude  dignum  patrem  tuum.  Id. 

(b.)  The  same  is  the  case  with  the  particle  quam  after  a  comparative,  see 
§  256,  R.  5,  (a.)  But  sometimes  when  quam  connects  a  clause  to  a  preceding 
proposition  containing  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  the  same  construction 
follows  that  precedes  quam,  even  when  the  verb  of  the  latter  clause  is  express¬ 
ed  ;  as,  Nonne  tibi  affirmavi  quidvis  me  potius  perpessurum,  quam  ex  Italia  ad 
bellum  civile  me  exiturum ;  instead  of  quam  exirem  or  quam  ut  exirem.  Cic. 

(c.)  In  long  speeches  in  the  oratio  obliqua,  relative  clauses,  having  a  verb 
of  their  own  which  should  properly  be  in  the  subjunctive,  are  put  in  the  ac¬ 
cusative  with  the  infinitive,  if  the  relative  clause  is  not  subordinate  to  the  one 
with  the  infinitive,  and  which  is  governed  by  a  verb  of  saying  or  perceiving, 


§  272. 


SYNTAX. — INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


289 


but  is  rather  coordinate  with  it;  in  which  case  the  relative  is  equivalent  to  the 
demonstrative  with  et ;  as,  Nam  illorum  urbem  ut  propugnaculum  oppdsitum  esse 
barbaris ,  apud  quam  jam  bis  classes  regias  fecisse  naufragium ;  for  et  apud  eam 
jam  bis ,  etc. — In  Livy  and  Tacitus  the  same  construction  sometimes  occurs 
even  after  conjunctions;  as  after  quum  in  the  sense  of  4  while,’  see  §  263, 5,  R.  3; 
after  quamquam  on  account  of  its  absolute  signification,  see  §  198,  4,  and  after 
quia. 

Note  4.  The  personal  pronouns,  which,  with  the  other  moods,  are  expressed 
only  when  they  are  emphatic,  must  be  always  expressed  in  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive.  The  verbs  ‘  to  promise  ’  and  ‘  to  hope  ’  are  in  English 
usually  joined  with  the  infinitive  present  without  a  pronoun,  but  in  Latin  not 
only  is  the  pronoun  expressed,  but  the  infinitive  which  follows  is  in  the  future; 
as,  4  He  promised  to  come,’  is  in  Latin,  Promisit  se  venturum  (scil.  esse,  see 
§  270,  R.  3).  But  the  infinitive  present  sometimes  occurs  after  these  verbs; 
as,  Pollicentur  obsides  dare ,  Caes.  B.  G.  4,  21 ;  and  the  pronoun  is  occasionally 
omitted,  see  §  239,  R.  2  and  3. 

Remark  1.  When  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  subject  and  the  object 
of  the  verb  being  both  in  the  accusative,  the  passive  infinitive  is  substituted 
for  the  active,  by  which  means  the  subject  is  put  in  the  ablative,  or  in  the 
accusative  with  per ;  as,  Ne  fando  quidem  auditum  est ,  crocodilum  violatum  esse 
ab  iEgyptio;  instead  of  JSgyptium  crocodilum  violasse.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  After  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  the  conjunction  that  is  omitted 
in  translating  from  English  into  Latin,  and  the  subjectof  the  dependent  clause 
is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  its  verb  in  the  infinitive. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  sometimes  rendered  into  Eng¬ 
lish  by  a  similar  form ;  as,  Si  vis  me  flere,  If  you  wish  me  to  weep.  Hor. ;  but 
the  dependent  clause  is  more  frequently  connected  to  the  verb  of  saying,  etc., 
by  the  conjunction  that,  and  the  infinitive  translated  by  the  indicative  or  po¬ 
tential  mood;  as,  Sentimus  nivem  esse  albam,  We  perceive  that  snow  is  white. 
Cic.  Sometimes  the  dependent  clause  is  annexed  to  the  other  without  the 
conjunction;  as,  Credunt  se  negligi,  They  think  they  are  neglected.  Ter. 

Rem.  4.  A  present  infinitive  corresponds  to  the  imperfect  indicative,  when 
with  an  accusative  it  follows  a  preterite  tense ;  as,  Dixit  Ccesarem  venire,  He 
said  that  Caesar  was  coming.  Caes.  In  like  manner  the  perfect  infinitive  with 
an  accusative  after  a  preterite  tense  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  indicative ; 
as,  Dixit  Ccesarem  venisse,  He  said  that  Caesar  had  come.  See  §  268,  2. 

Rem.  5.  The  present  infinitive,  after  verbs  of  sense,  is  often  equivalent  to 
the  present  participle;  as,  Surgere  videt  lunam ,  He  sees  the  moon  (to  rise) 
rising.  Virg.  Arma  rutilare  vident.  Id.  Videbis  collucere  faces.  Id.  Nec 
Zephyros  audis  spirare?  Do  you  not  hear  the  zephyrs  blowing*?  Id.  Scepe  hoc 
majores  natu  dicere  audivi.  Cic.  The  two  constructions  are  sometimes  united; 
as,  Medium  video  discedere  coelum ,  palantesg'we  pdlo  stellas.  Virg. 

Rem.  6.  The  subject-accusative  after  verbs  of  saying,  showing,  and  believing; 
as,  dico,  nego ,  trado,  fero,  memoro ,  narro ,  nuntio ,  perhibeo,  prodo ,  scribo,  de¬ 
monstro,  ostendo,  arguo,  credo,  puto,  existimo,  and  the  like,  and  also  after  jubeo , 
veto,  and  prohibeo,  is  regarded  also  as  the  accusative  of  the  object  after  these 
verbs ;  and  hence  such  verbs  are  used  also  in  the  passive,  the  accusative  of  the 
active  voice  becoming,  as  usual,  the  nominative  of  the  passive.  This  is  espe¬ 
cially  the  case  when  their  subject  is  indefinite;  as,  Dlcunt  (they  or  people  say) 
me  virum  probum  esse,  or  dicor  vir  probus  esse.  So,  Vetamur  hoc  facere,  instead 
of,  Nos  hoc  facere  vetant.  Instead  also  of  the  impersonal  videtur  (it  appears) 
followed  by  the  infinitive  with  its  subject-accusative,  it  is  common  to  say 
personally,  videor ,  videris ,  etc.,  with  the  infinitive;  as,  videor  errasse ,  it  appears 
that  I  have  erred. 


25. 


290 


SYNTAX. - INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


§273. 


INFINITIVE  AND  SUBJUNCTIVE  CLAUSES. 

§  273.  When  the  particle  that ,  in  English,  introduces  a 
clause  denoting  a  purpose ,  object ,  or  result,  it  is  a  sign  of  the 
subjunctive  in  Latin,  and  is  to  be  expressed  by  ut,  etc. ;  but 
otherwise  it  is  usually  the  sign  of  the  accusative  with  the  infini¬ 
tive.  Cf.  §§  262  and  272. 

1.  (a.)  Verbs  of  endeavoring  and  resolving  take  after  them  the  in¬ 
finitive  and  more  rarely  the  subjunctive,  when  the  subject  remains 
the  same;  but  when  the  subject  is  changed,  they  take  the  subjunc¬ 
tive  only. 

Note  1.  Such  are  statuo,  constituo,  decerno,  tento,  lab&ro,  paro,  meditor,  curo ,  nitor , 
contendo,  consilium  capio ,  animum  or  in  animum  induco.  Cf.  \  271,  N.  1.  After  ope¬ 
ram  do ,  I  exert  myself,  id,  hoc,  or  illud  ago ,  I  endeavor,  nihil  antiquius  habeo  or  duco 
quam,  nothing  is  of  more  importance  to  me,  and  video  for  euro ,  the  subjunctive  is  al¬ 
most  exclusively  used. 

(5.)  Verbs  of  effecting  are  construed  with  ut  or  ne  and  the  sub¬ 
junctive. 

Note  2.  Such  are  facio,  efficio ,  perficio,  evinco,  pervinco,  impetro ,  assZquor,  conse¬ 
quor,  etc.  But  facere  1  to  effect  ’  occurs  in  Cic.  Brut.  38,  in  connection  with  the  accusa¬ 
tive  and  infinitive  passive. 

Note  3.  Facio  with  ut\s  also  used  as  a  periphrasis  for  the  indicative;  as, 
Invitus  quidem  feci,  ut  L.  Flaminium  e  senatu  ejicerem,  for  invitus  ejeci.  Cic. — 
Fac ,  ‘  suppose  ’  or  ‘  granting,’  and  efficere,  ‘  to  prove,’  take  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive;  but  the  passive  efficitur ,  ‘it  follows,’  takes  also  the  subjunctive. 
— Facere,  ‘to  introduce’  or  ‘represent,’  is  joined  with  a  present  or  perfect 
participle;  as,  Lcelium  et  Scipionem  facimus  adrmrantes.  Cic.  In  the  passive 
the  accusative  also  with  the  infinitive  is  found,  there  being  no  present  par¬ 
ticiple;  as,  Isocratem  Plato  laudari  facit  a  Socrate.  Cic. 

2.  Verbs  signifying  to  request,  to  demand,  to  admonish ,  to  advise ,  to 
encourage ,  to  command ,  and  the  like,  both  when  the  subject  remains 
the  same  and  when  it  is  changed,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
with  ut  or  ne,  and  only  rarely  by  the  infinitive. 

Note  4.  (a.)  Such  are  rogo,  dr o,  precor,  peto ;  posco,  postulo,  flagito ;  moneo,  ad- 
mdneo,  commoneo,  hortor,  cohortor ,  exhortor ,  suadeo,  persuadeo,  instituo ,  (I  instruet), 
impello,  cogo,  mando,  prcescrlbo,  edico ,  decerno,  legem  do,  censeo,  perpello,  excito ,  in¬ 
cito ,  impdro,  etc. ;  as,  Te  non  hortor  solum ,  sed  etiam  oro,  ut  tota  mente  in  rempublicam 
incumbas.  Cic. 

( b .)  In  the  poets  and  Hter  prose  writers  the  infinitive  more  frequently  fol¬ 
lows  those  verbs  without  any  difference  of  meaning.  The  poets  even  use  the 
infinitive  to  express  a  purpose;  as,  Proteus  pecus  egit  altos  visere  montes.  Hor. 

(c.)  Nuntio,  scribo,  mitto,  and  even  dlco,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive, 
when  they  imply  an  injunction  or  intention  that  something  should  be  done; 
as ,  Hcec  ut  facias,  scribo.  Cic. 

(d.)  Jubeo  and  veto  commonly  take  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  but 
sometimes  the  subjunctive  with  or  rarely  without  ut.  Sometimes,  with  the 
infinitive,  the  person  to  whom  the  command  is  given  is  omitted,  especially 
when  it  is  either  obvious  from  the  nature  of  the  command  or  indefinite ;  as, 
Castra  munire  jubet,  scii  .milites.  Cies.  Lex  recte  facere  jubet,  scii,  homines. 
Cic.  With  the  subjunctive  the  dative  of  the  person  sometimes  follows  jubeo ; 
as,  Britannico  jussit,  exsurgeret.  Tac. — Impero  is  sometimes,  followed  by  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  passive ;  and  so  also  is  censeo,  I  vote,  or,  I  ordain. 
The  latter  is  often  construed  with  the  participle  in  dus  with  esse  expressed  or 
understood ;  as,  Carthaginem  delendam  censeo. 


§  273. 


SYNTAX. - INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


291 


(e.)  Moneo  and  admtineo,  1 1  remind,’  and  persuadeo,  ‘I  convince,*  take  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive. 

3.  (a.)  In  the  oratio  obliqua ,  the  construction  of  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive,  is  exchanged  for  that  of  the  subjunctive,  to  denote  pos¬ 
sibility,  liberty,  duty,  etc. ;  as, 

Virginius  unum  Ap.  Claudium  legum  expertem  esse  aiebat :  respicerent  tribunal 
homines  castellum  omnium  scelerum.  Liv. 

(b.)  On  the  contrary,  when  the  subjunctive  has  been  used  after  a  verb  of 
requesting,  commanding,  etc.,  the  construction  often  passes  into  that  of  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive;  the  verb  of  saying  being  considered  as  implied 
in  the  verb  of  requesting,  etc. ;  as,  Orabat  ne  se  ut  parricidam  liberum  aversa¬ 
rentur:  sibi  vitam  filice  sua  cariorem  fuisse,  si....  Liv.  Cf.  §  270,  R.  2,  ( b .) 

4.  (a.)  Verbs  which  denote  willingness. ,  unwillingness ,  permission , 
and  necessity,  commonly  take  the  infinitive,  or  the  accusative  with  the 
infinitive,  but  sometimes  the  subjunctive. 

Note  5.  Such  are  vtilo ,  nolo ,  malo,  opto ,  permitto ,  patior,  sino,  concedo,  licet,  prfthi - 
beo,  oportet .  and  nS cesse» est .  Cf.  §  271,  R.  4.  Vdlo  ut  is  used  to  express  a  strong  em¬ 
phasis.  Nolo  is  not  construed  with  the  subjunctive. 

(b.)  An  infinitive  passive  without  a  subject  is  sometimes  used  with  dportet ; 
as,  Non  oportuit  relictas,  scii,  esse  ancillas.  Ter.  Ut  ut  erat,  mansum  tamen 
dportuit ,  scii.  esse.  Id.  Non  putabant  de  tali  viro  suspicionibus  oportere  judicari. 
Nep. 

(c.)  Some  other  verbs  which  regularly  take  the  accusative  with  the  infini¬ 
tive  after  them,  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

5.  Quod ,  1  that/  commonly  with  the  indicative,  introduces  a  sub¬ 
stantive  clause  containing  the  explanation  or  ground  of  the  predicate 
or  of  some  other  word  in  the  principal  clause. 

Remark.  The  subjunctive  follows  quod  in  those  cases  only  in  which  the 
clause  expresses  the  view  or  sentiment  of  some  other  person  than  the  writer 
or  speaker.  Cf.  §  266,  3. 

Quod  is  used : — 

(1.)  After  such  expressions  as  bene,  male,  prudenter  f ado ;  bene,  male  fit ; 
evenit,  accidit,  and  the  like ;  praetereo,  mitto ;  and  generally  adde,  accedit,  etc. ; 
as,  Bene  fdcis,  quod  me  adjuvas. 

(2.)  To  introduce  the  explanation  of  a  noun,  pronoun,  or  pronominal  adverb 
in  the  principal  clause ;  as,  Magnum  beneficium  est  naturae,  quod  necesse  est 
mori. 

(3.)  After  verbs  signifying  an  affection  of  the  mind,  and  the  outward  expres¬ 
sion  of  such  feeling ;  and  also  after  verbs  of  praising ,  censuring ,  accusing,  and 
thanking. 

Note  6.  Such  are  gaudeo ,  delector ,  gratum,  or  jucundum  est  mihi,  angor,  dbleo,  aegre , 
moleste,  ox  graviter  fero,  succenseo,  paenitet,  miror ,  admiror,  glorior,  gratulor ,  gratias 
ago,  queror,  indignor,  and  others  of  similar  meaning;  as,  Scipio  saepe  querebatur,  quod 
omnibus  in  rebus  homines  diligentiores  essent,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Gaudeo  quod  te  inter¬ 
pellavi.  Id.  Quod  spiratis,  quod  vocem  mittitis,  quod  formas  hominum  habStis,  indig¬ 
nantur.  Liv.  Cato  mirari  se  aiebat,  quod  non  rideret  haruspex,  haruspicem  quum  vide¬ 
ret.  Cic. 

Note  7.  After  those  verbs  which  express  the  feeling  of  joy,  grief,  etc. ;  as, 
gaudeo ,  ddleo,  miror,  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  more  commonly 
found,  but  those  which  denote  the  outward  expression  of  such  feeling  are  more 
commonly  construed  with  quod ;  but  sometimes  this  distinction  is  reversed. 
Gratulor  is  commonly  joined  with  quod. 


292 


SYNTAX. - PARTICIPLES. 


§  274. 


Note  8.  A  purely  objective  proposition  is  expressed  by  quod  only  when  it 
depends  upon  addo,  (generally  in  the  imperative  adde ),  or  upon  facio  joined 
with  an  adverb ;  as,  Adde  quod  pubes  tibi  crescit  omnes.  Hor.  Adde  huc  quod 
•mercem  sine  fucis  gestat.  Id.  Fecit  humaniter  Licinius ,  quod  ad  me  vesperi  venit. 
Cic.  In  all  other  cases  the  infinitive  is  employed  in  purely  objective  propo¬ 
sitions. 

6.  By  the  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject-accusative,  a  proposition  is 
expressed  as  a  thought,  so  that  it  resembles  an  abstract  noun ;  by  quod,  with 
the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive,  it  is  represented  simply  as  a  fact.  To  the 
latter  is  frequently  joined  hoc ,  id,  illud ,  istud,  or  huc ,  etc.;  as,  Illud  qudque  nobis 
accedit  incommddum,  quod  M.  Junius  abest.  Cic.  Huc  accedebat ,  quod,  etc.  Sail. 
Quod  generally  refers  to  past  time,  and  hence  it  is  preferable  to  say,  Gratissi¬ 
mum  mihi  est,  quod  ad  me  tua  manu  scripsisti ;  but  with  the  infinitive,  Gratissi¬ 
mum  mihi  est  te  bene  valere. 

(a.)  Quod,  with  the  indicative,  in  the  sense  of  as  to,  or  vnth  regard  to,  is  used 
at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  especially  in  letters,  in  repeating  an  expression 
of  a  person  for  the  purpose  of  answering  it;  as,  Quod  autem  me  Agamemnonem 
cernulari  putas,  falleris.  Nep.  Quod  scribis  te  velle  scire,  qui  sit  reipublicce  status : 
summa  dissensio  est.  Cic.  Sentences  thus  introduced  by  quod  are  in  no  gram¬ 
matical  connection  with  the  verb  that  follows  them.  See  §  206,  (14.) 

(b.)  Quod  is  used  in  explanatory  or  periphrastic  propositions  which  refer  to 
a  preceding  demostrative  pronoun,  as  hoc,  id,  etc.,  unless  such  pronoun  be 
added  pleonastically,  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  to  verbs  governing  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Mihi  quidem  videntur  hdmines  hac  re  maxime 
belluis  praestare,  quod  Idqui  possunt.  Cic. 

Note  9.  The  construction  of  the  infinitive  resembles,  in  the  fol¬ 
lowing  particulars,  that  of  a  noun  in  the  singular  number  and  neuter 
gender : — 

(a.)  Like  a  noun,  it  may  have  an  adjective  or  pronoun  agreeing  with  it;  as, 
Totum  hoc  philosophari  displicet.  Cic.  Quum  vivere  ipsum  turpe  sit  nobis.  Id. 
Me  hoc  ipsum  nihil  agere  delectat.  Id.  Meum  intelligere  nulla  pecunia  vendo. 
Petr.  See  §  205,  R.  8. 

(b.)  It  may  be  followed  by  a  limiting  genitive;  as,  Cujus  non  dimicare  fuii 
vincere.  Yal.  Max. 

(c.)  It  may  be  either  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb.  See  §§  209,  R.  3,  (5,) 
and  229,  R.  5.  It  may  also  be  used  after  neuter  verbs,  like  an  accusative, 
depending  on  a  preposition  understood;  as,  Te  accepisse  meas  literas  gaudeo. 
Ter.  See  §§  232,  (2,)  and  273,  5. 

(d.)  It  is  also  used  like  a  predicate-nominative;  as,  Videre  est  perspicere 
aliquid.  Cic.  See  §  210. 

(e.)  It  may,  like  a  genitive,  limit  the  signification  of  an  adjective  or  noun. 
See  §  270,  R.  1. 

(f.)  It  may,  like  an  accusative,  depend  on  a  preposition ;  as,  Aristo  et  Pyrrho 
inter  optime  valere  et  gravissime  aegrotare,  nihil  prot'sus  dicebant  interesse.  Cic. 
Quod  crimen  dicis  praeter  amasse  meum  ?  Ovid.  Inveniet  nil  sibi  legatum,  praeter 
plorare.  Hor. 

(g.)  It  is  used  also  like  an  ablative;  as,  Audito  regem  in  Siciliam  tendere. 
Sali. 

( h .)  Sometimes,  also,  especially  in  the  poets,  it  denotes  a  purpose,  like  a 
participle  in  dus,  (see  §  274,  R.  7.);  as,  Loricam  donat  habere  viro.  Virg. ;  or 
like  a  dative  of  the  end,  (see  §  227.) 

PARTICIPLES. 

§  S874 :•  1.  Participles  are  followed  by  the  same  cases  and 

constructions  as  their  verbs  ;  as, 


§274 


SYNTAX. - PARTICIPLES 


293 


Quidam ,  poeta  nominatus ,  A  certain  one,  called  a  poet.  Cic.  Catulorum  oblita 
leaena,  The  lioness  forgetful  of  her  whelps.  Virg.  Faventes  rebus  Carthaginien¬ 
sium,  Favoring  the  interests  of  the  Carthaginians.  Liv.  Tendens  ad  sidera  pal¬ 
mas.  Virg.  Accusatus  rei  capitalis.  Cic.  Prima  dide  mihi  summa  dicende  Ca¬ 
mena.  Hor.  Omina  doctus.  Stat.  Casus  abies  visura  marinos.  Id.  Cdrituri  ar¬ 
bore  montes.  Ovid.  Parcendum  est  teneris.  Juv.  Utendum  est  aetate.  Ovid. 
L.  Brutus  arcens  reditu  tyrannum,  in  proelio  concidit.  Cic. 

2.  The  present,  perfect,  and  future  active  participles,  denote  re¬ 
spectively  an  action  which  is  present,  past,  or  future,  in  reference  to 
the  time  of  the  verb  with  which  they  are  connected ;  as, 

Simul  hoc  dicens  attollit  se.  Virg.  Tum  ad  Thraseam  in  hortis  agentem  mis¬ 
sus  esi.  Tac.  Turnum  fugientem  hcec  terra  videbit  ?  Virg.  Qui  missus  ab  Argis 
Itala  consederat  urbe.  Id.  Lamia  munere  aedilitatis  perfunctus,  petit  praeturam. 
Cic.  Jussus  cum  fide  poenas  luam.  Hor.  Juvenis  medios  moriturus  in  hostes 
irruit.  Virg.  Periturus  injecit  sese  in  agmen.  Id.  Illa  tibi  ventura  bella  expe¬ 
diet.  Id. 

Note.  The  participle  expresses  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb,  and  also 
marks  its  complete  or  incomplete  state  or  condition.  Cf.  §  144,  1-3.  Except, 
however,  in  deponent  verbs,  the  Latin  language  has  no  active  participle  de¬ 
noting  a  completed  action,  equivalent  to  the  English  ‘  having  written,’  nor  any 
passive  participle  denoting  a  state  of  suffering  still  going  on,  equivalent  to  the 
English  present  participle  ‘  being  loved.’ 

Remark  1.  The  present  participle,  particularly  that  of  the  verb  eo ,  some¬ 
times  denotes  jfchat  which  is  about  to  be  done ;  as,  Interclusit  hiems ,  et  terruit 
Auster  euntes,  ....  as  they  were  on  the  point  of  going.  Virg.  Nec  nos  via  fallit 
euntes.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  present  participle,  also,  sometimes  denotes  a  purpose;  as, 
Ibant,  orantes  veniam,.... to  sue  for  favor....  Virg.  Eurypylum  scitantem  oracula 
Phoebi  mittimus.  Id.  ( b .)  It  is  also  used  to  express  a  state  or  condition,  where, 
in  English,  a  substantive  is  employed  with  a  preposition ;  as,  ignorans,  from 
ignorance;  metuens,  from  fear;  consulatum  petens,  in  his  suit  for  the  consulship; 
omne  malum  nascens  facile  opprimitur , — in  its  origin. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  perfect  participle  passive,  especially  in  the  poets,  often 
denotes  the  result  of  a  past  action,  and  thus  supplies  the  place  of  a  present 
participle  passive;  as,  Notus  evolat  picea  tectus  caligine.... covered  with  pitchy 
darkness.  Ovid.  Cf.  Virg.  iEn.  1,  480;  2,  277;  4,  72,  589;  5,  113,  708;  6,  335: 
Georg.  1,  204.  It  is  often  to  be  translated  by  a  present  active  participle;  as, 
Mdnu  pectus  percussa  decorum,  fldvgntesque  abscissa  comas,  i.  e.  percutiens ,  ab¬ 
scindens.  Virg.  Tunsae  pectdra  palmis.  Id.  So,  also,  sdlitus,  ausus,  fisus,  and 
the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs;  as,  Longum  cantu  solata  laborem.  Id. 
Vox  auditur  fractos  sdnitus  Imitata  tubarum.  Id.  Divitiacus  Caesarem  complexus, 
obsecrare  coepit.  Caes.  Concretos  sanguine  crines  gerens.  Virg.  Tonsis  in  val¬ 
libus,  i.  e.  quae  tondentur.  Id. 

(b.)  The  perfect  participle  of  a  preceding  verb  is  often  used  in  a  succeeding 
clause,  to  express  the  completion  of  an  action  ;  as,  Exercitum  fundit  fugatque, 
fusum  persequitur.  Liv.  This  idiom  frequently  occurs  in  Ovid. 

Rem.  4.  Habeo,  with  perfect  participles  denoting  knowledge  and  determina¬ 
tion  ;  as,  cognitum ,  perspectum ,  perceptum,  comprehensum ,  exploratum,  statutum, 
constitutum ,  deliberatum,  persuasum  mihi  habeo ,  etc.,  forms  a  periphrasis,  like  the 
passive  verb  in  English,  and  equivalent  to  cognovi ,  perspexi,  percepi,  etc.,  in¬ 
stead  of  the  verb  of  the  participle ;  as,  Clodii  animum  perspectum  or  cognitum 
habeo  ;  for  perspexi ,  etc.,  I  perceive,  know.  Persuasum  mihi  habeo  and  persud- 
sissimum  hdbeo  are  used  only  in  the  neuter  gender  and  with  an  accusative  with 
the  infinitive  in  the  sense  of  mihi  persuasi  or  persuasum  mihi  est .  When  hdbeo 
with  any  other  participle  than  those  above  indicated  is  used,  it  expresses  more 
than  the  ordinary  perfect  active ;  as,  Quod  me  hortaris  ut  absolvam ;  habeo  ab¬ 
solutam  suave  epos  ad  Ccesdrem ;  i.  e.  I  have  it  ready.  Cic.  Do,  reddo ,  curo , 
25* 


294 


SYNTAX. - PARTICIPLES. 


§274. 


teneo ,  possideo ,  and  missum  facio ,  are  sometimes  so  construed  with  participles ; 
as,  Missam  iram  faciet,  for  mittet.  Ter.  Hostes  victos  dare,  for  vincere.  Sail. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  passive  participles  may  supply  the  place  of  a  verbal  noun 
in  io  or  us ,  the  perfect  being  employed  to  represent  an  action  as  completed, 
and  the  future  when  it  is  conceived  as  still  incomplete ;  as,  Ante  Romam  condi¬ 
tam,  Before  the  building  of  Rome.  Cic.  Consilia  urbis  delendae,  Plans  for  the 
destruction  of  the  city.  Id.  See  §  275,  II.  With  the  limitations  about  to  be 
made  in  regard  to  the  nominative,  this  construction  is  used  in  all  the  cases, 
and  even  when  they  are  governed  by  the  prepositions,  ad,  ante ,  ob ,  post ,  prop¬ 
ter;  ab  and  ex;  as,  Hce  liter ce  recitatae  magnum  luctum  fecerunt ,  The  reading 
of  this  letter.  Liv.  Tarentum  captum,  The  taking  of  Tarentum.  Ob  receptum 
Hannibalem ,  On  account  of  the  reception  of  Hannibal.  Sibi  quisque  caesi  regis 
expetebat  decus ,  The  glory  of  killing,  or,  of  having  killed  the  king.  Propter 
Africam  domitam.  Eutrop.  Ante  Epamxnondam  natum.  Nep.  Post  Christum 
natum.  Ab  condita  urbe  ac?  liberatam.  Liv.  The  oblique  cases  only  of  partici¬ 
ples  in  dus  are  used  in  this  manner  as  the  nominative  denotes  necessity,  (see 
Rem.  8,)  and  even  the  perfect  participle  is  not  thus  used  in  the  nominative  by 
Cicero. 

(6.)  The  neuter  of  the  perfect  passive  participle  without  a  noun  is  used  by 
Livy,  as  the  subject  of  a  proposition;  as,  Tentatum  per  dictatorem ,  ut  ambo  par 
tricii  consules  crearentur,  rem  ad  interregnum  perduxit :  i.  e.  the  attempt,  or 
the  fact  of  the  attempt  being  made  by  the  dictator.  Compare  a  similar  use 
of  this  participle  in  the  ablative,  §  257,  R.  9,  (1.)  (c.) 

(c.)  The  English  *  without  ’  with  a  verbal  substantive;  as,  1  without  writing, 
without  having  waited,’  etc.,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  means  of  a  negative 
noun,  adjective  or  particle  connected  with  a  participle;  as,  Ccesar  exercitum 
numquam  per  insidiosa  itinera  duxit ,  nisi  perspeculatus  locorum  situs,  without 
having  examined  the  localities.  This  form  occurs  often  with  the  ablative 
absolute;  as,  Athenienses  non  exspectato  auxilio  adversus  ingentem  Persarum 
exercitum  in  pn'celium  egrediuntur ,  without  waiting  for  assistance.  So,  nulla 
praestituta  die,  Without  fixing  any  time.  Cic.  Miserum  est  nihil  perficientem 
angi.  Id. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  The  participle  in  rus,  especially  with  verbs  of  motion,  often 
denotes  intention  or  purpose;  as,  Ad  Jovem  Ammonem  pergit  consulturus  de 
origine  sud ,  He  goes  to  Jupiter  Ammon,  to  consult  respecting  his  origin.  Just. 

(b.)  It  is  also  used  where  in  English  a  clause  connected  by  since ,  when ,  al¬ 
though,  etc.,  is  employed;  as,  Plura  locuturos  abire  nos  jussit ,  \Vhenor  although 
we  intended  to  say  more.  Herculem  Germani ,  ituri  in  proelium  canunt.  Tac. 
Hence  it  is  sometimes  used,  though  not  by  Cicero,  to  express  the  inference 
from  a  hypothetical  proposition ;  as,  Egreditur  castns  Romanus ,  vallum  invasu¬ 
rus,  ni  copia  pugnee  Jieret.  And  with  the  repetition  of  the  preceding  verb ;  as, 
Dedit  mihi  quantum  maxime  pdtuit ,  daturas  amplius ,  si  potuisset ,  i.  e.  ac  dedisset 
amplius.  Plin.  Ep. 

Rem.  7.  (a.)  The  participle  in  c?ms,  also,  denotes  a  purpose  passively,  when 
joined  with  verbs  signifying  to  give ,  to  deliver ,  to  agree  for ,  to  have ,  to  receive , 
to  undertake ,  etc.  Such  are  do,  trado,  tribuo ,  attribuo ,  mando,  mitto,  permitto, 
concedo ,  redimo ,  conduco,  Ideo,  habeo,  accipio,  suscipio,  relinquo,  curo,  deposco, 
rogo;  as,  Testamentum  tibi  tradit  legendum,  He  delivers  his  will  to  you  to  read. 
Hor.  Attribuit  nos  trucidandos  Cethego.  Cic.  Quod  utendum  acceperis,  reddito. 
Id.  Cdnon  muros  dirutos  a  Lysandro  reficiendos  curavit , — ordered  them  to  be 
restored.  Nep. 

( b .)  But  the  same  meaning  may  be  expressed  actively  by  means  of  ad  and 
the  gerund;  as,  Ccesar  oppidum  ad  diripiendum  militibus  concessit. — The  poets 
sometimes  use  the  infinitive  active  for  the  same  purpose;  as,  Tristitiam  et  me¬ 
tus  tradam  prdtervis  in  mare  Caspium  portare  ventis.  Hor.  In  prose  such  use 
of  the  infinitive  is  of  exceedingly  rare  occurrence ;  as,  Bibere  dare.  Cic. 


§274. 


SYNTAX. — PARTICIPLES. 


295 


Rem.  8.  (a.)  The  participle  in  dus ,  when  agreeing  with  the  subject 
of  a  sentence,  has  the  signification  of  necessity  or  propriety ;  some¬ 
times,  though  rarely,  except  in  later  writers,  that  of  possibility  ;  as, 

Is  venerandus  a  nobis  et  colendus  est ,  He  should  be  worshipped  and  honored 
by  us.  Cic.  Delenda  est  Carthago ,  Carthage  must  be  destroyed.  Cato.  Hcec 
speranda  fuerunt.  Virg.  So  with  est  used  impersonally ;  as,  tJtrum  pace  nobis 
an  bello  esset  utendum.  Cic. 

(6.)  Sometimes,  also,  when  not  agreeing  with  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  it 
has  this  signification;  as,  Facta  narrabas  dissimulanda  tibi ,  You  were  relating 
facts  which  you  should  have  concealed.  Ovid.  A.  L.  Bruto  principe  hujus 
maxime  conservandi  generis  et  nominis.  Cic. 

Rem.  9.  The  participle  in  dus ,  in  its  oblique  cases,  supplies  the  place  of  a 
present  participle  of  the  passive  voice,  to  denote  a  continued  or  incomplete 
action ;  as,  Occupatus  sum  in  literis  scribendis,  in  writing  letters ;  literally,  in 
letters  which  are  being  written.  See  §  275,  II. — So,  also,  in  the  poets  both  in 
the  nominative  and  oblique  cases ;  as,  Triginta  magnos  volvendis  mensibus  orbes 
imperio  explebit.  Yirg.  Volvenda  dies.  Id.  Cf.  Volventibus  annis.  Id. 

Rem.  10.  After  participles  in  dus ,  the  person  by  whom  a  thing  must  be 
done,  is  put  in  the  dative,  but  in  a  few  passages  even  of  Cicero  it  is  found  in 
the  ablative  with  ab.  See  §  225,  III. 

Rem.  11.  The  neuter  of  the  participle  in  dus ,  joined  with  a  tense  of  esse  in 
the  periphrastic  conjugation  (see  §  184,  3,)  retains  the  signification  of  necessity; 
as,  Audendum  est ,  We  must  venture.  In  early  writers  and  sometimes  also  in 
the  poets,  an  accusative  of  the  object  is  joined  with  this  neuter,  if  the  verb 
is  transitive ;  as,  Nunc  pacem  orandum,  nunc — arma  reponendum ,  et  bellum  exi¬ 
tiale  cavendum.  Sil.  But  in  classical  Latin  such  accusative  is  generally  changed 
to  the  nominative,  and  the  participle  is  made  to  agree  with  it  in  gender  and 
number.  Thus,  instead  of  virtutem  laudandum  est,  we  usually  find  virtus  lau¬ 
danda  est.  The  accusative  in  this  connection  is  used  by  Cicero  in  only  two 
passages.  Utendum  est  with  the  ablative  occurs  more  than  once  in  Cicero ;  as, 
Quum  suo  cuique  judicio  sit  utendum . 

Rem.  12.  In  classical  prose  the  participle  in  dus  never  has  the  signification 
of  possibility,  except  when  joined  with  vix ;  as,  Vix  optandum  nobis  videbatur , 
Cic.  Vix  erat  credendum ,  i.  e.  vix  credi  pdterat.  Later  writers  use  it  in  this 
sense  with  negative  particles,  and  at  a  later  period  it  was  used  with  still  more 
frequency  in  the  sense  of  possibility  as  well  as  in  that  of  necessity. 

3.  (a.)  A  participle  is  often  employed,  instead  of  a  verb,  in  a 
conditional,  explanatory,  adversative,  relative,  or  other  dependent 
clause;  as, 

Curio,  ad  fdcum  sedenti  (as  he  was  sitting)  magnum  auri  pondus  Samnites 
attulerunt.  Cic.  Tridui  viam  progressi,  rursus  reverterunt ;  for,  quum  progressi 
essent.  Cies.  Dionysius  tyrannus ,  Syracusis  expulsus,  Corinthi  pueros  docebat. 
Cic.  Dionysius,  cultros  metuens  tonsorios,  candenti  carbone  sibi  adurebat  capillum. 
Id.  Risus  interdum  ita  repente  erumpit,  ut  eum  cupientis  tenere  nequeamus.  Id. 
Ciconiae  abituras  congregantur  in  loco  certo.  Plin. 

Note  1.  If  the  participle  refers  to  a  noun  not  contained  in  the  leading  proposition,  it 
is  put  with  that  noun  in  the  ablative  absolute.  See  §  257,  R.  3. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  English  clauses  most  frequently  expressed  in  Latin  by  means  of  par¬ 
ticiples  are  such  as  are  connected  by  relatives  or  by  as,  when,  after ,  although,  since,  be¬ 
cause,  etc. ;  as.  Nemo  observat  lunam  nisi  labdrantem.  Sen.  Ut  oculus,  sic  animus,  se 
non  videns,  alia  cernit, — though  not  perceiving  itself.  Cic.  Servilius  Ahala  Spurium 
Medium ,  regnum  appetentem,  interemit, — because  he  was  aspiring  to  the  sovereignty. 
Cic. — (b.)  When  a  participle  is  connected  with  a  relative  or  interrogative  it  can  only  be 
translated  by  a  circumlocution;  as,  Non  sunt  ea  bona  dicenda,  quibus  abundantem  licet 
esse  miserrimum, — which  one  may  possess  in  abundance,  and  still  be  very  miserable. 
Cic.  SSndtus  absurdum  esse  dicebat,  ignordre  rigem,  quid  sperans  aut  petens  venSrit , — 
with  what  hope  or  request  he  had  come.  Liv. 


296 


SYNTAX. - GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES. 


§  275. 


( b .)  When  two  verbs  are  in  English  connected  by  and ,  and  the  actions  de¬ 
noted  by  them  are  regarded  as  simultaneous,  one  of  them  may  be  expressed 
in  Latin  by  the  present  participle;  as,  He  sits  and  holds  his  lute,  Ille  {Anon) 
sedens  citharam  tenet.  Ovid.  Simul  hoc  dicens  attollit  in  aegrum  se  femur.  Virg. 
i.  e.  hoc  dicit  et  attollit.  But  if  one  of  the  actions  precede  the  other,  the 
perfect  participle  must  be  used ;  as,  Caesar  attacked  and  defeated  the  enemy, 
Ccesar  hostes  aggressus  fugavit.  Submersas  obrue  puppes ,  i.  e.  Submerge  <et 
obrue.  Virg. — When  the  English  clause  would  be  connected  by  although ,  the 
participle  is  often  followed  by  tdmen.  Later  writers  in  such  case  join  the  par¬ 
ticles  quamquam ,  quamvis ,  etiam  and  vel  with  the  participle  itself ;  as,  Ccesdrem 
milites ,  quamvis  recusantem  ultro  in  Africam  sunt  secuti.  Suet. ;  and  these  are 
sometimes  retained  in  the  ablative  absolute. — It  is  only  in  late  Latin  that  par¬ 
ticiples  are  sometimes  used  in  describing  persons  as  possessing  certain  attri¬ 
butes,  e.  g.  adstantes ,  audientes ,  for  ii  qui  adstant ,  audiunt ,  i.  e.  the  bystanders, 
hearers. 

(c.)  A  participle  is  used  with  verbs  signifying  to  represent  and  perceive, 
especially  to  see  and  hear,  when  the  object  is  described  or  perceived  in  a  parti¬ 
cular  state;  as,  Apelles  pinxit  Alexandrum  Magnum  fulmen  tenentem.  Plin.  In 
English  the  infinitive  is  often  joined  with  verbs  of  seeing  and  hearing;  as, 
Audivi  te  canentem ,  I  heard  you  sing.  Audivi  te  cdnere,  would  be,  I  heard  that 
you  sung.  Videmus  Polyphemum  vasta  se  mole  moventem.  Virg. 

Note  3.  In  many  cases,  for  want  of  a  perfect  participle  active,  and  a  present  participle 
passive,  this  construction  cannot  be  used.  Thus,  quum  amavisset  cannot  be  exchanged 
for  a  participle  corresponding  with  the  English  having  loved.  As  the  perfect  participles 
of  deponent  verbs,  however,  have  an  active  signification,  they  admit  of  the  participial 
construction.  The  want  of  a  perfect  active  participle  may  also  be  supplied  by  the  perfect 
passive  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute.  See  §  257,  R.  5. 


GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES. 

§  S75.  I.  Gerunds  are  governed  like  nouns,  and  are  fol¬ 
lowed  by  the  same  cases  as  their  verbs ;  as, 

Metus  parendi  sibi,  Fear  of  obejfing  him.  Sail.  Parcendo  victis,  By  sparing 
the  vanquished.  Liv.  Efieror  studio  patres  vestros  videndi ,  I  am  transported 
with  a  desire  of  seeing  your  fathers.  Cic.  Petendi  consulatum  gratia.  Sail. 
Venit  ad  recipiendum  pecunias.  Varr. 

Remark  1.  The  gerund  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  oblique  cases  of  the 
neuter  singular  of  participles  in  dus,  but  it  has  the  meaning  of  the  active  voice. 
It  is  sometimes  translated  by  the  present  participle  with  a  preposition,  and 
sometimes  by  a  present  infinitive  active ;  as,  Consilium  Ldcedcemonem  occu¬ 
pandi,  A  design  of  occupying,  or  to  occupy,  Lacedaemon.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  The  gerund  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  in  a  passive  sense ; 
as,  Spes  restituendi  nulla  erat, — of  being  restored.  Nep.  Athenas  erudiendi 
gratia  missus, — for  the  purpose  of  being  instructed.  Just.  Ante  domandum . 
Virg.  Ades  ad  imperandum.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  gerund  is  in  its  nature  a  verbal  noun,  having  only  the  genitive, 
dative,  ablative,  and,  after  a  preposition,  the  accusative.  In  its  signification  it 
corresponds  with  the  English  present  participle  when  used  as  a  verbal  noun. 
Hence,  in  the  oblique  cases,  it  supplies  the  place  of  a  declinable  present  infin¬ 
itive  active;  but  in  the  accusative  there  is  this  difference  between  the  infini¬ 
tive  used  as  an  accusative  and  the  geruud,  that  the  infinitive  lias  simply  the 
power  of  an  abstract  noun,  whereas  the  gerund  expresses  a  real  action;  as, 
Multum  interest  inter  dare  et  accipere.  Sen.  Non  solum  ad  discendum  propensi 
sumus,  sed  etiam  ad  ddcendum.  Cic. 


§  275, 


SYNTAX. — GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES. 


297 


II.  When  the  object  of  an  aetive  verb  is  to  be  expressed,  the 
participle  in  dus  is  commonly  used  in  preference  to  the  gerund ; 
the  object  taking  the  case  in  which  the  gerund,  if  used,  would 
have  been  put,  and  the  participle  agreeing  with  it. 

Thus,  to  express  *  the  design  of  writing  a  letter,’  which,  with  the  aid  of  the 
gerund,  would  be  represented  in  Latin  by  Consilium  scribendi  epistolam ,  the 
participle  in  dus  is  commonly  substituted  for  the  gerund:  and  since,  in  this 
example,  the  gerund,  ( scribendi )  is  in  the  genitive,  the  rule  requires  that,  in 
substituting  the  participle  for  the  gerund,  the  object  of  the  gerund  ( epistolam ) 
should  also  be  put  in  the  genitive,  and  that  the  participle  ( scribendus )  should 
agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case.  Hence  with  the  participle  the  ex¬ 
pression  is,  Consilium  scribendce  epistolce.  Between  the  two  forms  of  construc¬ 
tion  there  is  no  difference  of  signification.  So,  Consilia  urbis  delendae  (Cic.), 
for  urbem  delendi ,  Plans  for  destroying  the  city.  Reparandarum  classium  causa 
(Suet.),  for  reparandi  classes.  Perpetiendo  labori  idoneus.  Colum,  ^defen¬ 
dendam  Romam  ab  oppugnanda  Capua  duces  Romanos  abstrahere .  Liv. 

Remark  1.  The  same  construction  is  used  with  the  future  passive  partici¬ 
ples  of  utor ,  fruor ,  fungor ,  potior ,  and  rarely  of  medeor ,  as  these  verbs  were 
originally  followed  by  the  accusative;  as,  JEtas  ad  hcec  utenda  idonea.  Ter. 
Justitiae,  fruendae  causa .  Cic.  In  munere  fungendo.  Id.  Hostes  in  spem  potiun- 
dorum  castrorum  venerant .  Caes.  Aquae  salubritate  medendis^we  corporibus  nob - 
ties.  Veil. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  participle  is  thus  used  for  a  gerund,  it  is  called  a  gerundive , 
and  is  usually  translated  like  a  gerund.  The  gerundive  cannot  be  substituted 
for  the  gerund,  where  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  gender  not  being  dis¬ 
tinguishable.  It  should  therefore  not  be  used  when  the  object  of  the  gerund 
is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective;  as,  Aliquid  faciendi  ratio  (Cic.),  not  alicujus. 
Artem  et  vera  et  falsa  dijudicandi  (Id.),  not  verorum  dijudicandorum :  because  it 
would  not  be  known  whether  alicujus  and  verorum  were  masculine  or  neuter. 
It  is  to  be  remarked,  also,  that  the  change  of  the  gerund  into  the  gerundive  is 
less  frequent  in  some  writers  than  in  others. 

III.  Examples  of  the  construction  of  gerunds,  in  each  of  their  cases,  have  been  al¬ 
ready  given,  among  other  nouns,  under  the  heads  Genitive ,  Dative ,  Accusative ,  and  Ab¬ 
lative.  The  following  remarks  specify  in  what  connections  they  are  used :  and  when  it 
is  said  that  the  gerundive  is  governed  in  any  of  the  cases  like  the  gerund,  it  will  of  course 
be  understood  of  the  noun  which  is  limited  by  a  gerundive. 

Remark  1.  The  genitive  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  may  follow 
either  nouns  or  relative  adjectives ;  as, 

Amor  habendi.  Cic.  Patriam  spes  videndi.  Virg.  Nam  habet  natura ,  ut  aliarum 
omnium  rerum ,  sic  vivendi  modum.  Cic.  Barbara  consuetudo  hdminum  immd- 
landorum.  Id.  Postremo  Catilina  dissimulandi  causa  aut  sui  expurgandi,  in 
senatum  venit.  Sali.  Inita  sunt  consilia  urbis  delendae,  civium  trucidandorum, 
nominis  Romani  exstinguendi.  Id.  Venandi  studiosi.  Cic.  Certus  eundi.  Virg. 
Insuetus  navigandi.  Caes.  Peritus  civitatis  regendae.  Nep. 

(1.)  The  nouns  after  which  these  genitives  most  frequently  occur  are  amor , 
ars,  causa ,  consilium ,  consuetudo,  copia ,  cupiditas ,  desiderium ,  difficultas ,  finis, 
facultas,  forma,  gratia,  illecebra,  libido,  locus ,  licentia,  modus ,  materia,  mos , 
occasio ,  otium ,  potestas,  ratio,  spatium,  spes,  studium,  tempus,  usus ,  venia,  vis, 
voluntas. 

Note  1.  With  these  and  other  substantives  the  infinitive  also  may  be  used, 
when  with  a  tense  of  sum  they  form  a  periphrasis  for  a  verb  which  is  followed 
by  the  infinitive,  or  supply  the  place  of  an  adjective  of  which  the  infinitive  is 
the  subject;  as,  Quibus  dmnia  honesta  atque  inhdnesta  vendere  mos  erat,  With 
whom  it  was  a  custom,  or,  who  were  accustomed.  Sail.  Tempus  est  abire,  It  is 
time,  i.  e.  tempestivum  est,  it  is  proper  to  go. 


298 


SYNTAX. - GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES. 


§  275. 


(2.)  The  relative  adjectives,  which  most  frequently  take  after  them  these 
genitives,  are  such  as  denote  desire ,  knowledge ,  remembrance ,  and  their  contra¬ 
ries;  as,  avidus ,  cupidus ,  studiosus ,  peritus ,  imperitus ,  insuetus ,  certus ,  conscius, 
ignarus ,  nZcfts,  etc.  See  §  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Note  2.  With  the  relative  adjectives  the  infinitive  is  also  joined  poetically. 

(3.)  Instead  of  an  accusative  after  the  gerund,  or  a  genitive  plural  with  a 
gerundive,  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the.  genitive  plural  is  sometimes  joined  with 
the  gerund ;  as,  Exemplorum  eligendi  pdtestas,  instead  of  exempla  eligendi ,  or, 
exemplorum  eligendorum.  Cic.  Earum  rerum  infitiandi  ratio.  Id.  Facultas  agro¬ 
rum  condonandi.  Cic.  Nominandi  istorum  erit  copia.  Plaut. 

(4.)  The  pronoun  tui  and  also  the  plurals  vestri  and  sui,  even  when  feminine, 
are  joined  with  the  masculine  or  neuter  form  of  the  gerundive  in  di;  as,  Qud- 
niam  tui  videndi  est  copia.  Plaut.  Non  vereor ,  ne  quis  hoc  me  vestri  adhortandi 
causa  magnifice  loqui  existimet.  Liv.  In  castra  venerunt  sui  purgandi  causa. — 
With  the  demonstrative  pronouns,  ejus ,  hujus ,  illius,  the  participle  usually 
agrees,  but  in  two  passages  of  Terence  ejus ,  though  referring  to  a  woman,  has 
the  participle  in  di ,  not  in  dee ;  as,  Ego  ejus  videndi  cupidus  recta  consequor.  Ter. 
Tui  in  the  first  example  and  ejus  in  the  last  are  feminine. 

(5.)  By  a  Greek  idiom  the  gerund  and  gerundive,  after  the  verb  sum ,  are 
sometimes  found  in  the  genitive  denoting  a  tendency  or  purpose ,  with  no  noun 
or  adjective  on  which  they  can  depend;  as,  Regium  imperium  initio  conservandae 
libertatis  fuerat.  Sali.  Sometimes  esse  in  some  form  is  to  be  supplied;  as, 
Quce  postquam  gloriosa  mddo ,  neque  belli  patrandi  cognovit ,  scil.  esse.  Id.  Causa 
or  gratia  may  sometimes  be  supplied.  In  some  other  cases,  also,  the  word  on 
which  the  gerund  in  di  depends  is  not  expressed,  and  the  gerund  seems  to  be 
used  instead  of  the  infinitive ;  as,  Maneat  provincialibus  pdtentiam  suam  tali 
mddo  ostentandi,  scii,  facultas.  Tac.  Quum  haberem  in  dnimo  navigandi,  scil. 
propdsitum .  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  is  used  after  adjec¬ 
tives  which  govern  a  dative  (§  222),  especially  after  those  which  sig¬ 
nify  usefulness  or  fitness ;  and  also  after  certain  verbs  and  phrases, 
to  denote  a  purpose  ;  as, 

Charta  empdretica  est  inutilis  scribendo.  Plin.  Capessendos  reipiiblicce  habilis. 
Tac.  Ut  nec  triumviri  accipiundo,  nec  scribce  ref erundo  sufficerent.  Liv.  Locum 
oppido  condendo  capere.  Id.  Non  fuit  consilium  agrum  colendo  aut  venando 
intentum  cetdtem  agere.  Sali.  Tiberius  quasi  firmandae  valetudini  in  Campaniam 
concessit.  Tac.  Quum  solvendo  cere  alieno  respublica  non  esset.  Liv.  Quum  sol¬ 
vendo  civitates  non  essent , — were  insolvent.  Cic. 

(1.)  The  verbs  and  phrases  upon  which  this  dative  most  frequently  depends 
are,  Studere ,  intentum  esse ,  tempus  impendere ,  tempus  consumere  or  insumere ,  ope¬ 
ram  dare ,  sufficere ,  satis  esse ,  deesse ,  esse ,  signifying  to  seiwe  for ,  to  be  ade¬ 
quate  to ,  and,  in  later  writers,  on  verbs  of  motion. — The  dative  of  the  gerund 
after  sum  is  usually  supposed  to  depend  on  idoneus  understood ;  but  see  §  227, 
R.  3. 

(2.)  The  dative  of  the  gerundive,  denoting  a  purpose,  is  also  used  after 
names  of  office;  as,  Decemviri  legibus  scribendis,  i.  e.  the  ten  commissioners 
for  drawing  up  a  code  of  laws.  Liv.  So,  Cdmitia  creandis  decemviris.  Id. 
Triumviros  agro  dando  creat .  Id. 

(3.)  A  purpose  is  more  commonly  expressed  by  ad  and  the  accusative  of 
the  gerund,  or  by  a  clause  with  ut ,  than  by  the  dative;  as,  Pecus  ad  vescendum 
hominibus  apta.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows  the 
prepositions  ad ,  to,  or  inter ,  during  or  amid,  and  sometimes  ante ,  circa> 
or  oh ;  as, 


§  276. 


SYNTAX. — SUPINES. 


299 


Ad  poenitendum  prdperat,  qui  cito  judicat.  Pub.  Syr.  Inter  bibendum,  While 
drinking.  Just.  Ad  tolerandos  facilius  labores.  Quint.  Ad  castra  facienda.  Cic. 
Ob  absolvendum.  Id. 

Note.  The  construction  of  the  gerundive  instead  of  the  gerund  almost  in¬ 
variably  occurs  here  when  the  object  of  the  gerund  is  to  be  expressed. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows  the  pre¬ 
positions  a ,  (ab ),  de ,  e,  (ex),  or  in;  or  it  is  used  without  a  preposi¬ 
tion,  as  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  or  means ;  as, 

Aristotelem  non  deterruit  a  scribendo.  Cic.  Ex  assentando.  Ter.  Non  videor 
a  defendendis  hominibus  discedere .  Cic.  Crescit  eundo.  Virg.  Rem  quaerunt 
mercaturis  faciendis.  Cic.  Orationem  Latinam  legendis  nostris  efficies  plenio¬ 
rem.  Id. 

Note  1.  This  ablative  also  occurs,  though  rarely,  after  pro  and  cum ;  as, 
Pro  vapulando.  Plaut.  Cum  loquendo.  Quint. 

Note  2.  Generally  with  the  ablative  of  the  means,  and  always  with  the  ab¬ 
lative  after  a  preposition,  the  gerund,  when  its  object  is  to  be  expressed,  is 
changed  to  the  gerundive.  In  a  few  passages  the  ablative  of  the  gerundive  is 
differently  construed;  as ,  Nullum  officium  referenda  gratia  magis  necessarium 
est,  instead  of  relatione  gratiae.  §  256.  Cic.  Nec  jam  possidendis  publicis  agris 
contentos  esse.  §  244.  Liv.  Is  finis  fuit  ulciscenda  Germanici  morte, — in  aveng¬ 
ing  the  death  of  Germanicus.  Tac. ;  where  the  ablative  seems  to  imply  time. 
§  253. 

SUPINES. 

§  276.  Supines,  like  gerunds,  are  verbal  nouns,  having  no  other  cases  except 
the  accusative  and  ablative  singular.  In  certain  connections  they  supply  the  place  of 
the  present  infinitive ;  the  supine  in  um  having  an  active  and  the  supine  in  u  a  passive 
signification.  As  in  the  case  of  gerunds,  we  are  to  regard  their  construction  both  as 
verbs  and  as  nouns.  As  verbs  we  are  to  notice  their  government,  as  nouns,  their  de¬ 
pendence. 

I.  Supines  in  um  are  followed  by  the  same  cases  as  their 
verbs ;  as, 

Non  Graiis  servitum,  matribus  Ibo ,  I  shall  not  go  to  serve  Grecian  matrons. 
Yirg.  Te  id  admonitum  venio.  Plaut. 

II.  Supines  in  um  follow  verbs  of  motion,  and  serve  to  denote 
the  purpose  of  the  motion  ;  as, 

Cubitum  discessimus.  Cic.  Ire  dejectum  monumenta  regis.  Hor.  Legati 
venerunt  questum  injurias ,  et  res  repetitum.  Liv.  Quum  spectatum  ludos  Iret. 
Nep.  So  after  participles ;  as,  Patriam  defensum  revocatus.  Nep.  Spectatum 
admissi.  Hor. 

Note.  The  construction  of  the  supine  in  um,  considered  as  a  noun,  is  analogous  to 
that  of  names  of  places  in  answer  to  the  question  1  whither?  5  (§  237),  the  notion  of  pur¬ 
pose  arising  from  its  verbal  character. 

Remark  1.  Supines  in  um  sometimes  follow  verbs  which  do  not  express 
motion;  as,  Do  filiam  nuptum.  Ter.  Vos  ultum  injurias  hortor.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  The  supine  in  um  with  eo  literally  signifies  ‘  I  go  to  do  a  thing,’  and 
hence  ‘  I  intend,’  or,  ‘  am  going  to.’  Instances  of  this  use  are  found  in  Plautus 
and  Terence  and  in  the  prose  writers  later  than  Cicero;  as,  Mea  Gly cerium, 
quid  dgis?  cur  te  Is  perditum?  Why  are  vou  going  to  destroy  yourself?  Plaut. 
Bonorum  praemia  ereptum  eunt.  Sali.  With  eo  the  supine  in  um  often  forms  a 
periphrasis  equivalent  to  the  same  mood  and  tense  of  the  verb  from  which  the 


300 


SYNTAX. - ADVERBS. 


§  277. 


supine  is  formed;  as,  Ne  bdnos  omnes  perditum  eant  (Sail.),  for  perdant.  Erep¬ 
tum  eunt  (Id.),  for  eripiunt.  Ultum  ivit  (Tac.),  for  ultus  est.  Ultum  ire  injunas 
festinat ,  i.  e.  ulcisci.  Sail. 

Rem.  3.  The  supine  in  um  most  frequently  occurs  with  the  infinitive  iri, 
with  which  it  forms  the  future  infinitive  passive ;  as,  Brutum  visum  iri  a  me 
puto.  Cic.  In  this  construction  the  accusative  properly  depends  upon  the  su¬ 
pine,  and  iri  is  used  impersonally;  ‘  I  suppose  that  I  am  going  to  see  Brutus.’ 
§  184,  2,  (a.)  Its  notion  of  futurity  is  derived  from  the  proper  signification  of 
the  active  voice,  as  perditum  iri ,  to  go  to  destroy,  the  idea  of  intending  passing 
easily  into  that  of  futurity. 

Rem.  4.  But  to  express  a  purpose  Latin  writers  in  general  prefer  using  a 
gerund  or  gerundive  in  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in  the  genitive  with  causa  or 
gratia ,  a  subjunctive  clause  with  ut  or  qui ,  a  present  or  future  active  participle, 
and  sometimes  poetically  an  infinitive.  See  §  275,  R.  1,  2:  §§  262,  264,  274, 
and  271. 

III.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  to  limit  the  meaning  of  adjec¬ 
tives  signifying  wonderful,  agreeable ,  easy  or  difficult ,  worthy  or 
unworthy,  honorable  or  base,  and  a  few  others ;  as, 

Mirabile  dictu!  Wonderful  to  tell,  or  to  be  told!  Virg.  Jucundum  cognitu  at¬ 
que  auditu ,  Pleasant  to  be  known  and  heard.  Cic.  Res  factu  facilis,  A  thing 
easy  to  be  done.  Ter.  Facilia  inventu.  Geli.  Incredibile  memoratu.  Sali.  Tur¬ 
pia  dictu.  Cic.  Optimum  factu.  Id. 

Note.  The  principal  supines  in  v  in  common  use  are  auditu ,  cognitu ,  dictu,  factu,  in¬ 
ventu,  m&noratu  and  natu,  which  occurs  in  the  expressions,  grandis,  major,  minor, 
maximus ,  and  minimus  natu.  In  magno  natu,  of  an  advanced  age,  and  maximo  natu 
flHus,  the  eldest  son,  natu  is  the  ablative  of  a  verbal  substantive,  since  neither  gerunds 
nor  supines  are  joined  with  adjectives. 

Remark  1.  The  principal  adjectives,  after  which  the  supine  in  u  occurs,  are  affabilis , 
arduus,  asper,  bonus ,  deformis,  dignus,  indignus,  dulcis,  durus,  facilis ,  difficilis ,  fccdus, 
gravis,  honestus,  horrendus,  incredibilis,  jucundus ,  injucundus,  magnus,  memorabilis, 
mollis,  proclivis ,  pulcher,  rarus,  turpis,  and  utilis. 

Rem.  2.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  also  after  the  nouns  fas ,  nefas,  and  dpus; 
as,  Hoc  fas  est  dictu.  Cic.  Nefas  dictu.  Ovid.  Dictu  dpus  est.  Ter. — In  the 
following  examples  it  follows  a  verb:  Pudet  dictu.  Tac.  Agr.  32.  Dictu  fastid¬ 
ienda  sunt.  Val.  Max.  9,  13,  2. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  supine  in  u  is  commonly  translated  by  a  passive  form,  it  is  placed  un¬ 
der  the  passive  voice;  but,  in  many  cases,  it  may  with  equal  or  greater  propriety  be 
translated  actively.  As  a  noun, its  construction  may  be  referred  to  the  ablative  of  limi¬ 
tation.  §  250. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  supine  in  u,  an  infinitive,  a  gerund  or  gerun¬ 
dive  with  ad,  or  a  verbal  noun  in  the  ablative,  and  sometimes  in  the  dative  or 
accusative,  may  be  used;  as,  Ardua  imitatu ,  ceterum  cognosci  utilia.  Val.  Max. 
Illud  autem  facile  ad  credendum  est.  Cic.  Opus  proscriptione  dignum.  Plin. 
Aqua  potui  jucunda.  Id.  Facilior  ad  intellectum  atque  imitationem.  Quint. 
With  opus  est  the  perfect  passive  participle  is  often  used  instead  of  the  supine 
in  u  ;  as,  Opus  est  maturato,  There  is  need  of  haste.  Cf.  §  243,  R.  1. 

(b.)  The  construction  with  ad  and  the  gerund;  as,  res  facilis  ad  intelligen- 
dum ;  or  with  sum  and  the  infinitive  active ;  as,  facile  est  invenire ,  is  used  by 
the  best  writers  after  facilis,  difficilis ,  and  jucundus.  The  most  common  con¬ 
struction  of  dignus  is  with  qui  and  the  subjunctive,  (§  264,  9),  but  the  poets 
and  later  prose  writers  have  joined  it  with  the  infinitive  passive. 

ADVERBS. 

§  277.  I.  Adverbs  modify  or  limit  the  meaning  of  verbs, 
adjectives,  and  sometimes  of  other  adverbs ;  as, 


§277. 


SYNTAX. — ADVERBS. 


301 


Bene  mdnes ,  You  advise  well.  Ter.  Fortissime  urgentes,  Most  vigorously- 
pressing  on.  Plin.  Male  narrando.  Ter.  Longe  dissimilis.  Cic.  Valde  bene.  Id. 

Remark  1.  Adverbs  may  also  modify  nouns,  when  they  are  used  as  adjec¬ 
tives  or  participles,  and  accordingly  denote  a  quality,  or  when  a  participle  is 
understood.  They  are  also  joined  to  adjective  pronouns,  when  their  adjective- 
character  predominates;  and  sometimes  limit  the  meaning  of  a  preposition;  as, 
P opulus  late  rex ,  for  late  regnans , — ruling  far  and  wide.  Virg.  Nihil  admodum, 
Nothing  at  all.  Cic.  Homo  plane  noster , — entirely  ours,  that  is,  devoted  to  us. 
Id.  Homerus  plane  orator.  Id.  Admodum  puella.  Liv.  Late  tyrannus.  Hor. 
Gravibus  superne  ictibus  conflictabantur,  i.  e.  superne  accidentibus.  Tac.  Multa¬ 
rum  circa  civitatum,  i.  e.  neighboring  cities.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Most  of  the  modifications  made  by  adverbs  may  also  be  made 
by  means  of  the  various  cases  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  many  modifications 
may  be  made  by  these,  for  expressing  which  no  adverbs  are  in  use.  In  general 
those  limitations  which  are  most  common  can  be  expressed  by  adverbs ;  as, 
sapienter  for  cum  sapientia ;  hic  for  in  hoc  Idco ;  bene  for  in  bdno  mddo ;  nunc  for 
hoc  tempdre. — (b.)  The  following  are  examples  of  other  parts  of  speech  used 
adverbially,  viz.*  Nihil,  1  in  no  way  ’ ;  nonnihil,  1  in  some  measure  ’ ;  quidquam, 
1  at  all  ’ ;  aliquid,  ‘  somewhat  ’ ;  quid  ?  ‘  why  ?  ’ 

Rem.  3.  A  negative  adverb,  modifying  another  negative  word, 
destroys  the  negation;  as, 

Non  parere  noluit ,  He  was  not  unwilling  to  obey.  Nep.  Haud  igndra  mail, 
Not  ignorant  of  evil.  Virg.  Haud  nihil  est ,  It  is  something.  Ter.  Nec  hoc  ille 
non  vidit,  And  this  he  clearly  perceived.  Cic.  So,  nonnulli,  some ;  nonnumquam, 
sometimes.  Non,  before  a  negative  word,  commonly  heightens  the  affirmative 
sense,  while  it  softens  the  expression ;  as,  Homo  non  indoctus,  i.  e.  homo  sane 
doctus.  Non  semel,  i.  e.  scepius ;  non  ignoro,  non  nescio,  non  sum  nescius,  I  know 
very  well.  Qui  mortem  in  malis  ponit ,  non  potest  earn  non  timere, — must  needs 
fear  it.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  When  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a  proposition  are  both 
modified  by  negative  words,  and  also  when  the  predicate  contains 
two  negatives,  the  proposition  is  affirmative ;  as, 

Nemo  non  videt,  Every  one  sees.  Cic.  Neque  haec  non  evenerunt,  And  this 
indeed  took  place.  So,  if  both  the  antecedent  and  the  predicate  of  a  relative 
clause  are  negative,  the  proposition  is  affirmative;  as,  N emo  est,  qui  nesciat, 
Every  body  knows.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  But  in  the  case  of  non  followed  by  ne — quidem ,  the  two  nega¬ 
tives  do  not  destroy  each  other;  as,  Non  fugio  ne  hos  quidem  mores:  and 
when  the  negative  leading  proposition  has  subordinate  subdivisions  with  neque 
—neque,  neve — neve ,  or  non — non,  these  negative  particles  are  equivalent  to  aut 
— aut;  as,  Non  me  carminibus  vincet ,  nec  Orpheus,  nec  Linus.  Virg.  Neminem, 
non  re,  non  verbo,  non  vultu  denique  offendi.  Cic.  Nullius  rei  neque  praes,  ne¬ 
que  manceps  factus  est.  Nep. 

(b.)  In  a  few  passages,  however,  two  negatives  in  Latin,  as  in  Greek, 
strengthen  the  negation,  and  this  exception  appears  to  have  been  derived  from 
the  language  of  common  life ;  as,  Jura  te  non  nocituram  hdmini  nemini.  Plaut. 

(c.)  Nemo ,  nullus,  nihil,  and  numquam  have  a  different  sense  according  as  the 
non  is  placed  before  or  after  them ;  as,  Non  nemo ,  some  one ;  nemo  non,  every 
one ;  non  nulli ,  some ;  nullus  non,  every ;  non  nihil,  something ;  nihil  non,  every 
thing ;  non  numquam,  sometimes ;  numquam  non,  at  all  times.  So,  nusquam  non, 
every  where,  but  instead  of  nonnusquam,  dilicubi  is  used. 

Rem.  6.  (u.)  Non  is  sometimes  omitted  after  non  mddo  or  non  so¬ 
lum,  when  followed,  in  a  subsequent  clause,  by  ne  quidem,  if  both 
clauses  have  the  same  verb,  and  if  the  verb  is  contained  in  the  second 
clause ;  as, 


26 


302 


SYNTAX. - ADVERBS. 


§  277. 


Mihi  non  mddo  irasci,  sed  ne  ddlere  quidem  impune  licet ,  which  is  equivalent  to 
Mild  non  mddo  non  irasci,  sed  ne  ddlere  quidem  impune  licet,  or  Mihi  non  mddo 
zrasci,  sed  ddlere  quidem  impune  non  licet ,  Not  only  am  I  not  permitted  to  be 
angry,  but  not  even  to  grieve  with  impunity.  Cic."  Quum  senatui  non  solum  ju¬ 
vare  rempublicam,  sed  ne  lugere  quidem  liceret.  Id. 

( h .)  Non  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  won  mddo  when  followed  by  sed  or  verum 
with  etiam,  and  also  after  vix ;  as,  Qui  non  mddo  ea  futura  timet,  verum  etiam 
fert,  sustinetque  praesentia,  Who  not  only  does  not  fear....  Cic.  Hcec  genera 
virtutum  non  solum  in  moribus  nostris,  sed  vix  jam  in  libris  reperiuntur,  These 
virtues  are  not  only  not  found  in  life,  but  scarcely  in  books.  Id. 

Rem.  7.  Facile,  in  the  sense  of  undoubtedly,  clearly ,  is  joined  to  superlatives, 
and  words  of  similar  import;  as,  Vir  unus  totius  Grcecice  f  acile  doctissimus.  Cic. 
Homo  regionis  illius  virtute  facile  princeps.  Id. 

Rem.  8.  Sentences  are  often  united  by  means  of  an  adverb  which  is  repeated 
before  each  of  the  connected  clauses;  as,  mddo — mddo,  and  nunc — nunc,  (some¬ 
times — sometimes);  as,  Modo  hoc,  mddo  illud  dicit;  mddo  huc,  mddo  illuc  vdlat. 
Instead  of  the  second  mddo  other  particles  of  time  are  sometimes  used ;  as, 
aliquando,  nonnumquam,  interdum ,  scepius,  tum  or  deinde. — Partim — pariim,  ‘  part¬ 
ly — partly/  is  sometimes  used  with  a  genitive  or  the  preposition  ex,  in  the 
sense  of  alii — alii,  as  a  nominative  in  all  the  genders ;  as,  Quum  partim  e  nobis 
ita  timidi  sunt,  ut,  etc.,  partim  ita  republica  aversi,  utf  etc. — Simul — simul ,  ‘as 
well — as,’  like  nunc — nunc ,  is  not  found  in  Cicero. — Qua — qua  is  equivalent  to 
et — et. —  Turn — turn  is  used  sometimes  like  mddo — mddo,  sometimes  like  partim — 
partim ;  as  Erumpunt  saepe  vitia  amicorum  tum  in  ipsos  amicos,  tum  in  alienos. 
Cic.  Ifcec  ( beneficia )  tum  in  universam  rempublicam,  tum  in  singulos  cives  con¬ 
feruntur.  Id. 

Rem.  9.  Quum — tum  is  equivalent  to  et — et,  except  in  assigning  a  greater 
importance  to  the  second  part:  hence  it  must  be  translated  by  ‘  both — and 
especially,’  ‘  not  only — but  also,’  or  ‘  but  more  particularly.’  Sometimes  ad¬ 
ditional  weight  is  given  to  the  second  part  by  means  of  vero,  certe,  etiam,  qua¬ 
que,  praecipue,  imprimis  or  maxime.  This  use  of  quum — tum  seems  to  have  had 
its  origin  in  the  use  of  quum  with  the  subjunctive  and  often  with  the  indica¬ 
tive  in  the  protasis,  followed  by  turn  in  the  apodosis.  When  quum  followed  by 
turn  serves  to  express  the  opposition  between  single  words  which  have  the 
same  verb,  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  complete  adverb;  as,  Fortuna  quum  in  reli¬ 
quis  rebus,  turn  prazcipue  in  bello  plurimum  potest.  Sometimes  the  verb  stands 
in  the  first  part  of  the  sentence ;  as,  Quum  omnis  arrogantia  odiosa  est,  tum  illa 
ingenii  atque  eldquentice  multo  molestissima.  Tum  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the 
second  part  of  the  sentence;  as,  Quem  pater  mdriens  quum  tutoribus  et  propin¬ 
quis,  tum  legibus,  tum  aequitati  magistratuum,  tum  judiciis  vestris  commendatum 
putavit.  Cic.  Sometimes  the  gradation  is,  quum — tum — tum  vero. 

Rem.  10.  Non  mddo — sed  etiam  (or  non  solum,  or  non  tantum — verum  etiam) 
generally  expresses  the  transition  from  less  important  to  more  important  things, 
like  the  English  ‘not  only — but  (also)’.  The  transition  from  greater  to  smaller 
things  is  expressed  by  non  mddo — sed,  without  the  etiam,  which  we  render  in 
English  by  ‘  I  will  not  say — but  only,’  and  in  Latin,  too,  we  may  say  non  dicam 
or  non  dico — sed ;  as,  Quid  est  enim  minus  non  dico  oratoris ,  sed  hominis. 

Rem.  11.  Tam — quam  expresses  a  comparison  in  degree;  as,  Nemo  tarn 
multa  scripsit,  quam  multa  sunt  nostra.  With  superlatives  they  are  rendered 
into  English  by  ‘  fhe — the  ’  and  comparatives;  as,  Veternosus  quam  plurimum 
bibit,  tam  maxime  sitit ,  The  more  he  drinks,  the  more  he  thirsts.  Cato.  Quam 
quisque  pessime  fecit,  tam  maxime  Udus  est.  Sali. —  Tam — quam  quod  maxime 
signifies,  ‘  as  much  as  possible.’ — Non  tam — quam  signifies,  ‘not  so  much — as,’ 
or  ‘  less — than  ’ ;  as,  Provincia  non  tam  gratiosa  et  illustris,  quam  negotiosa  ac 
molesta.  Cic. 

Rem.  12.  Non  minus — quam  and  non  mdgis — quam  are  equivalent  to  ceque — 
ac,  ‘  as  much  as,’  but  in  non  mdgis — quam  the  greater  weight  is  attached  to  the 
affirmative  clause  beginning  with  quam ;  as,  Alexander  non  ducis  magis  quam 


§277. 


SYNTAX. — PREPOSITIONS. 


303 


militis  munia  exsequebatur ,  Alexander  performed  as  much  the  service  of  a  sol¬ 
dier  as  that  of  a  commander.  In  this  connection  plus  frequently  supplies  the 
place  of  mdgis. 

(a.)  Sic  and  ita  are  demonstrative  adverbs  corresponding  to  the  relative  ut. 
The  restrictive  meaning  of  ita  (see  §  191,  R.  5.),  is  sometimes  made  more  em- 

?hatic  by  the  addition  of  tamen.  Tantus  is  used  in  a  like  restrictive  sense ;  as, 
\ce.sidii  tantum  est ,  ut  ne  murus  quidem  cingi  possit ,  i.  e.  ‘only  so  much.’  Caes. 
(b.)  Ut — ita  or  sic  places  sentences  on  an  equality.  They  may  sometimes 
be  translated  4  although — still,’  or  4  indeed — but.’ — The  adverb  ut, 4  as,’  some¬ 
times  takes  the  signification  of  the  conjunction  quod ,  4  because  ’ ;  as,  Atque  ille , 
ut  semper  fuit  apertissimus ,  non  se  purgavit.  Cic. 

Rem.  13.  In  an  enumeration,  primum ,  deinde ,  tum,  denique  are  commonly 
preferred  to  the  numerals,  primum,  secundo,  (for  secundum  is  not  often  used), 
tertium ,  quartum,  etc.,  unless  the  strict  succession  of  the  numbers  is  required. 
Sometimes  turn  is  used  once  or  twice  instead  of  deinde,  or  the  series  is  extended 
by  accedit ,  huc  adde ,  etc.  Sometimes  denique  is  followed  by  postremo  to  form 
the  conclusion  of  a  series,  but  often  denique  without  the  other  adverbs  con¬ 
cludes  a  series,  and  is  then  equivalent  to  4  in  short  ’or  4  in  fine.’  See  Cic.  Cat. 
1,  5. 

Rem.  14.  Minus  is  often  used  for  non;  as,  Nonnumquam  ea,  quae  praedicta 
sunt ,  minus  eveniunt.  Cic. — So,  si  minus — at,  4  if  not — yet ;  ’  and  sin  minus ,  4  but 
if  not,’  without  a  verb,  after  a  preceding  si;  but  with  si  non  the  verb  is  repeated. 
— The  English  4 how  little’  is  in  Latin  quam  non ;  and  4  so  little,’  ita  non  or 
ddeo  non ;  as,  ddeo  non  curabat ,  quid  hdmines  de  se  Idquerentur. 

Rem.  15.  Nunc  always  expresses  the  time  actually  present,  or  the  time  to 
which  a  narrator  transfers  himself  for  the  purpose  of  making  his  description 
livelier.  Thus  in  speaking  of  the  present  time  we  may  say,  Nunc  primum 
somnia  me  eludunt  or  eluserunt ;  but  in  a  narrative  we  must  say,  Somnia  tunc 
primum  se  dicebat  elusisse.  Compare  the  use  of  hie  and  ille.  See  §  207,  R.  23,  (c.) 

Rem.  16.  The  conjunction  dum, 4  while,’  when  added  to  negatives,  becomes  an 
adverb,  signifying  4 yet’ ;  as,  nondum,  4 not  yet’;  necdum ,  4 and  not  yet’;  nul - 
lusdum ,  4  no  one  yet  ’ ;  nihildum,  4  nothing  yet.’  Hence  vixdum  signifies  4  scarcely 
yet  ’ ;  as,  Vixdum  epistolam  tuam  legeram ,  quum  ad  me  Curtius  venit.  Cic. — 
So,  also,  the  conjunction  nisi ,  by  omitting  its  verb  or  uniting  it  with  the  lead¬ 
ing  verb,  acquires,  after  negatives  and  negative  questions,  the  sense  of  the  ad¬ 
verb  4  except,’  which  is  generally  expressed  by  praeterquam  or  the  preposition 
praeter,  and  must  be  so  expressed  when  no  negative  precedes.  But  the  ex¬ 
pression  4  except  that  ’  may  be  rendered  either  by  nisi  quod  or  praeterquam 
quod. — After  nihil  dliud  we  may  use  either  nisi  or  quam ,  nisi  referring  to  nihil 
and  quam  to  aliud.  Hence  nihil  dliud  nisi  signifies  4  nothing  further,’  or  4  noth¬ 
ing  more,’  and  nihil  dliud  quam,  4  nothing  else,’  or  4  no  other  thing  but  this.’ 

Rem.  17.  Ut,  4  as,’  in  interposed  clauses,  such  as  ut  dpinor,  ut  puto,  ut  censeo, 
ut  credo,  is  frequently  omitted.  Credo,  used  in  this  manner  often  takes  an  ironi¬ 
cal  sense. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

n.  1.  See  respecting  the  construction  of  prepositions  with  the  accusative, 
§  235 ;  and  with  the  ablative,  §  241.  See,  also,  for  the  different  meanings  of 
prepositions,  §  195,  and  for  their  arrangement,  §  279,  10. 

2.  Two  prepositions  must  not  be  joined  in  Latin,  as  they  sometimes  are  in 
English,  with  the  same  noun;  as,  to  speak  for  and  against  a  law;  or,  I  have 
learned  this  with,  and,  to  some  extent,  from  him.  These  sentences  may  be 
thus  expressed  in  Latin;  pro  lege  et  contra  legem  dicere ;  haec  cum  eo,  partim 
etiam  ab  eo  didici.  Those  dissyllabic  prepositions  only,  which  are  sometimes 
used  as  adverbs,  may  follow  another,  without  being  joined  with  a  case;  as, 
Quod  aut  secundum  naturam  esset,  aut  contra.  Cic.  Cis  Padum  ultrdque.  Liv. 
Caesar  reverses  the  order,  Intra  extrdque  munitiones.  B.  Civ.  3,  72. 


304 


SYNTAX. — CONJUNCTIONS. 


§  278. 


3.  When  nouns  mutually  dependent  upon  a  preposition  are  in  ap¬ 
position,  when  they  constitute  an  enumeration  without  a  connective, 
and  when  connected  by  copulative,  disjunctive,  adversative,  or  com¬ 
parative  conjunctions,  the  preposition  is  not  repeated,  unless  such 
nouns  are  to  be  distinguished  from  each  other,  or  are  emphatic ;  as, 

Quid  dicam  de  thesauro  omnium  rerum,  memoria?  Hoc  apparet  in  bestiis, 
volucribus,  nantibus,  agrestibus,  cicuribus,  feris,  ut  se  ipsae,  diligant.  Cic. 
Saepissime  inter  me  et  Scipionem  de  amicitia  disserebatur.  Id.  Quid  faceres  si 
in  aliquam  domum  villamve  venisses  ?  Id.  Nihil  per  iram  aut  cupiditatem 
actum  est.  Id.  Themistocles  non  minus  in  rebus  gerendis  promptus  quam  exco¬ 
gitandis  erat.  Nep. 

4.  The  monosyllabic  prepositions  ab,  ac?,  c?e,  ex ,  and  in  are  often  used  before 
each  of  two  nouns  connected  by  et,  etc.,  especially  if.  the  qualities  denoted  by 
such  nouns  are  to  be  considered  separately.  If  the  nouns  are  separated  by 
et — et ,  nec — wee,  etc.,  the  prepositions  must  be  repeated;  as,  Ut  eorum  et  in 
bellicis  et  in  civilibus  officiis  vigeat  industria.  Cic. — Inter  is  frequently  repeated 
by  Cicero  after  interesse ,  and  other  writers  repeat  it  after  other  verbs  also;  as, 
Quid  intersit  inter  popularem — civem ,  et  inter  constantem ,  severum  et  gravem.  Cic. 
Certatum  inter  Ap.  Claudium  maxime  f  erunt  et  inter  P.  Decium.  Liv. 

5.  (a.)  In  poetry  a  preposition  is  occasionally  omitted  with  the  first  of  two 
nouns,  and  put  with  the  second  only ;  as,  Quce  nem&ra ,  aut  quos  agor  in  specus , 
(Hor.)  for,  in  quce  nemora  aut  in  quos  specus  dgor.  So,  Hor.  Ep.  2,  1,  25. — 
(b.)  An  ellipsis  of  a  preposition  with  the  relative  pronoun  sometimes  occurs, 
together  with  that  of  the  verb  belonging  to  the  preceding  demonstrative ;  as, 
In  eddern  dpinidne  fui ,  qua  reliqui  omnes ,  (Cic.),  properly  in  qua  reliqui  omnes 
fuerunt . 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  278.  Copulative,  disjunctive,  and  other  coordinate  con¬ 
junctions,  connect  similar  constructions. 

Note  1.  Clauses  are  similarly  constructed,  which  are  mutually  independent, 
whose  subjects  and  verbs  are  in  the  same  case  and  mood,  and  which  have 
either  no  dependence  or  a  similar  dependence  on  another  clause. 

Note  2.  (a.)  Words  have  a  similar  construction,  when  they  stand  in  the 
same  relation  to  some  other  word  or  words  in  the  sentence.  Hence, 

(6.)  Conjunctions  connect  the  same  cases  of  nouns  and  pronouns,  depend¬ 
ent,  if  the  cases  are  oblique,  upon  the  same  government;  the  same  number, 
case,  and  gender  of  adjectives,  belonging  to  the  same  noun;  the  same  mood  of 
verbs,  either  independent,  or  alike  dependent;  adverbs  qualifying  the  same 
verbs,  adjectives,  etc.;  and  prepositions  on  which  depends  the  same  noun  or 
pronoun;  as,  Concidunt  venti ,  fugiuntque  nubes ,  The  winds  subside,  and  the 
clouds  disperse.  Hor.  Locum ,  quem  et  non  cdquit  so?,  et  tangit  ros.  Varr.  Ludi 
decem  per  dies ,  facti  sunt ,  neque  res  ulla  praetermissa  est.  Cic.  Vides ,  ut  alta 
stet  nive  candidum  Soracte ,  nec  jam  sustineant  onus  silvee  laborantes ,  geluqoe 
flumina  constiterint  acuto.  Hor.  mtelligilis  et  animum  ei  preesto  f  uisse ,  nec  con¬ 
silium  defuisse.  Cic.  Generi  animantium  omni  est  a  natura  tributum,  ut  se  tueatur , 
declinetque  ea,  quce  ndcitura  videantur.  Id.  Aut  nemo,  aut  Cato  sapiens  fuit.  Id. 
Pulvis  et  umbra  sumus.  Hor.  Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis ,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus.  Cic. 
Aggere  jacto  turribus^we  constitutis.  Caes.  Clarus  et  honoratus  vir,  An  illus¬ 
trious  and  honorable  man.  Id.  Ccesar  Remos  cohortatus,  liber  aliter  que  oratione 
prosecutus.  Caes.  Pater  tuus,  quem  colui  et  dilexi.  Cic.  Belgae  spectant  in 
septentrionem  et  orientem  solem.  Caes.  Navibus  junctis,  ratibus^we  compluri¬ 
bus  factis.  Id.  Lege,  vel  tabellas  redde.  Plaut.  Allobrdges  trans  Rhdddnum  vicos 
possessiones^we  habebant.  Caes.  Quum  triumphum  egeris,  censorque  fueris,  et 
obieris  legatus.  Id.  Quum  ad  oppidum  accessisset,  castraque  ibi  poneret.  Caes. 


§  278. 


SYNTAX. — CONJUNCTIONS. 


305 


Ades  animo,  et  omitte  timorem.  Cic.  Ea  videre  ac  perspicere  pdtestis.  Id. 
Graviter  et  copidse  dixisse  dicitur.  Id.  Cum  fratre  an  sine.  Id.  Cf.  §277,  II.  2. 
Cui  carmina  cordi,  numerosque  intendere  nervis.  Virg.  Nec  census,  nec  clarum 
nomen  avorum,  sed  probitas  magnos  ingenium^e  jacit.  Ovid.  Philosophi  ne¬ 
gant  quemquam  virum  bdnum  esse,  nisi  sapientem.  Cic.  Gloria  virtutem  tam¬ 
quam  umbra  sequitur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  Copulative  conjunctions  may  connect  either  single 
words  and  phrases  or  entire  clauses ;  the  other  conjunctions,  whether 
coordinate  or  subordinate,  connect  clauses  only. 

Rem.  2.  Words  thus  connected  are  sometimes  in  different  cases,  though  in 
the  same  construction-,  as,  Mea  et  reipublicae  interest.  Cic.  (See  §  219.)  Slve 
es  Romae,  sive  in  Epiro.  Id.  (See  §§  221  and  254.  But  see  also  §  221,  Note.)  In 
Mettii  descendat  judicis  aures,  et  patris  et  nostras.  Hor.  See  §  211,  R.  3.  In  like 
manner,  Hannibal  non  aliter  vinci  potuit,  quam  mora. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  subjunctive  is  often  used  for  the  imperative,  they  may  be 
connected  by  coordinate  conjunctions;  as,  Disce  nec  invideas.  Pers. 

Rem.  4.  Where  the  purpose  of  the  writer  requires  it,  coordinate  conjunc¬ 
tions  sometimes  connect  independent  propositions,  whose  verbs  are  in  different 
moods ;  as,  Stuporem  hominis,  vel  dicam  pecudis ,  videte.  Cic.  Nec  satis  scio, 
nec,  si  sciam,  dicere  ausim.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  Et  is  used  after  multi  followed  by  another  adjective,  where  in 
English  ‘and’  is  usually  omitted;  as,  Midtceft  magnce  arbores,  Many  large 
trees.  In  such  cases  et  supplies  the  place  of  et  is,  introducing  a  more  accurate 
description.  See  §  207,  R.  26,  (c.) 

Rem.  6.  The  conjunction  is  often  omitted;  as,  (a.)  When  two  single  words, 
as  comprehending  the  whole  idea,  are  opposed  to  each  other,  as,  velim ,  nolim, 
whether  I  would  or  not;  maxima  minima,  the  greatest  as  well  as  the  least;  > 
prima  postrema ,  from  the  first  to  the  last;  dignos  indignos  adire  ;  ire  redire,  to 
go  to  and  fro.  JEdificiis  omnibus  publicis  privatis,  sacris  profanis  sic  pepercit. 
Cic.  Nam  gloriam,  hdnorem,  imperium  bdnus  ignavus  aeque  sibi  exoptant.  Sali. 

( b .)  Et  is  very  frequently  omitted  between  the  names  of  two  colleagues;  as, 
Consules  declarati  sunt  Cn.  Pompeius  M.  Crassus.  P.  Lentulo  L.  Triario,  quaes¬ 
toribus  urbanis.  Cic.  Sometimes,  also,  when  the  two  persons  are  not  colleagues. 

It  is  also  occasionally  omitted  between  two  words  in  the  oratorical  style ;  as, 
Aderant  amici ,  prdpinqui.  Id. ;  also  with  verbs ;  as,  Adsunt ,  queruntur  Siculi.  Id. 
In  good  prose,  if  three  or  more  substantives  are  joined,  it  is  usual  either  wholly 
to  omit  the  conjunction  or  to  insert  it  between  each.  The  following  may  serve 
as  an  example  of  both  cases :  Qui  non  m6do  Curiis,  Cdtonibus,  Pompeiis ,  antiquis 
illis,  sed  his  recentibus,  Mdriis  et  JDidiis  et  Coeliis  commemorandis  jacebant.  This 
is  also  the  common  practice  with  adjectives  and  verbs,  and  hence  when  et  has 
not  previously  occurred  in  an  enumeration  of  persons  or  things,  we  should  not 
conclude  the  enumeration  with  et  alii,  et  reliqui,  et  cetera,  etc.,  but  should  make 
use  of  the  adjectives  alone,  alii,  reliqui,  cetera,  etc.  But  though  et,  ac  and  at¬ 
que  are  not  used  alone  in  the  third  or  fourth  place,  yet  the  enclitic  que  fre¬ 
quently  occurs  in  this  position ;  as,  Precor  ut  ea  res  vobis  pacem,  tranquillita¬ 
tem,  otium,  concordiamque  afferat.  Cic.  Et  may  be  supplied  also  when  two 
protases  introduced  by  si  are  joined  together;  where  we  say ‘if — and  if,’  or 
‘  if — and.’  See  an  example  in  Cic.  Off.  3,  9. 

(c.)  An  ellipsis  of  is  supposed  when  ne  precedes  and  et,  atque,  or  que  is 
used  to  continue  the  sentence,  those  copulative  conjunctions  in  such  case  ob¬ 
taining  the  meaning  of  the  adversative  sed ;  as,  Mdnere  coepit  Porum ,  ne  ultima 
experiri  perseveraret,  dederetque  se  victori.  Curt. 

Rem.  7.  Copulative  conjunctions  are  often  used,  before  each  of  two  or  more 
connected  words  or  clauses,  in  order  to  mark  the  connection  more  forcibly;  as, 
Et  pecunia  persuadet,  et  gratia,  et  auctoritas  dicentis ,  et  dignitas,  et  postremo 
aspectus.  Quint.  Hoc  et  turpe,  nec  tamen  tutum.  Cic.  Neque  nata  est,  et  aeterna 
est.  Id.  Et  Ubi  et  mihi  vdluptati  fdre.  Id.  Before  clauses  the  disjunctive  con- 
26* 


306 


SYNTAX. - ARRANGEMENT  OF  WORDS. 


§  279. 


junctions  are  used  in  a  similar  manner;  as,  Res  ipsa  aut  invitabit  aut  dehortabi¬ 
tur .  Id.  So,  also,  nunc. ..nunc,  simul.. .simul,  partim...partim ,  qua.. .qua,  turn... 
turn,  quum...tum ,  are  used  before  successive  clauses. 

Rem.  8.  To  connect  different  names  of  the  same  person  or  thing,  slve  or  sew, 
rather  than  aut  or  vel ,  is  employed;  as,  Mars  sive  Mavors.  Cf.  §  198,  2,  (c.) 

Rem.  9.  Instead  of  et  and  ut  with  the  negatives  nemo,  nihil,  nullus,  and  num- 
quam,  neque  (or  wee),  and  we  are  used  with  the  corresponding  affirmative  words 
quisquam ,  ullus,  umquam,  and  usquam.  But  ‘  in  order  that  no  one  ’  is  rendered 
in  Latin  by  we  quis  and  not  by  we  quisquam,  see  §  207,  R.  31,  (a.);  as,  Horce 
quidem  cedunt,  et  dies,  et  menses,  et  anni :  nec  praeteritum  tempus  umquam  re¬ 
vertitur.  Cic.  Senatus  decrevit ,  darent  dperam  consules,  ne  quid  respublica  detri¬ 
menti  caperet .  Caes. 

Rem.  10.  The  conjunctions  igitur,  verum ,  verumtdmen,  sed,  and  sed  tamen,  in¬ 
dicate  a  return  to  the  construction  of  the  leading  clause,  when  it  has  been 
disturbed  by  the  insertion  of  another  clause.  These  conjunctions,  in  such 
connection,  are  usually  rendered  by  ‘ 1  say,’  and  sometimes  in  Latin  inquam  is 
so  used.  Nam  also  is  occasionally  employed  in  this  way  and  very  rarely 
itdque. 

Rem  11.  Vero  and  autem  are  frequently  omitted  in  adversative  clauses, 
especially  in  short  ones;  as,  Vincere  scit  Hannibal,  victoria  uti  nescit.  Liv.  This 
omission  often  occurs  in  describing  a  progress  from  smaller  to  greater  things, 
as  in  Cic.  Cat.  1,  1.  And  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  non  in  the  second  member 
of  such  adversative  sentences  is  used  without  et  or  vero ;  as,  aliena  vitia  videt , 
sua  non  videt.  But  in  unreal  suppositions  or  ironical  sentences,  where  the  second 
member  contains  the  truth,  et  non  or  ac  non  must  be  used,  where  we  may  sup¬ 
ply ‘rather’;  see  §  198,  1,  (c.);  as,  Quasi  nunc  id  dgatur, — ac  non  hoc  quaera¬ 
tur.  Cic. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

Respecting  the  construction  of  interjections  with  the  nominative,  see  §  209, 
R.  13 : — with  the  dative,  §  228,  3 : — with  the  accusative,  §  238,  2 : — and  with 
the  vocative,  §  240. 


ARRANGEMENT. 

I.  OF  THE  WORDS  OF  A  PROPOSITION. 

§279.  1.  In  arranging  the  parts  of  a  proposition  in  English,  after 

connectives,  are  placed,  first,  the  subject  and  the  words  which  modify  or  limit 
it;  next,  the  verb  and  its  modifiers ;  then,  the  object  of  the  verb;  and  finally, 
prepositions  and  the  words  depending  upon  them.  This  is  called  the  logical 
or  natural  order. 

2.  (a.)  In  Latin,  either  of  the  four  principal  parts  of  a  sentence  may  be 

placed  first,  and  there  is  great  freedom  in  the  arrangement  of  the  rest,"  but 
with  this  general  restriction  in  prose,  that  words  which  are  necessary  for  the 
complete  expression  of  a  thought  should  not  be  separated  by  the  intervention  of  other 
words.  In  ordinary  discourse,  especially  in  historical  wTriting,  the  following 
general  rule  for  the  arrangement  of  the  parts  of  a  sentence  is  for  the  most  part 
observed. 

( b.y  In  a  Latin  sentence,  after  connectives ,  are  placed,  first, 
tlie  subject  and  its  modifiers ;  then,  the  oblique  cases  and  other 
words  which  depend  upon  or  modify  the  verb  ;  and  last  of  all, 
the  verb. 


§279. 


SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT  OF  WORDS. 


307 


(c.)  Hence  a  Latin  sentence  regularly  begins  with  the  subject  and  ends 
with  the  principal  verb  of  its  predicate;  as,  Dumnorix  gratia  et  Largitione  apud 
Sequanos  plurimum  poterat.  Caes.  But  the  verb  is  often  not  placed  at  the  end 
of  a  sentence,  especially  if  the  sentence  is  long,  or  if  two  many  verbs  would  be 
thus  brought  together  at  the  end.  In  the  familiar  style,  also,  the  verb  is  often 
placed  earlier  in  the  sentence,  and  in  explanatory  clauses  it  is  sometimes 
placed  at  the  very  beginning  of  the  proposition,  in  which  case  a  conjunction  is 
generally  added. 

(d.)  It  is  also  to  be  remarked,  as  a  further  modification  of  the  general  rule 
of  arrangement,  that,  in  sentences  containing  the  expression  of  emotion,  the 
word  whose  emphasis  characterizes  it  as  especially  affecting  the  feelings,  or  as 
forming  a  contrast,  is  placed  at  the  beginning;  as,  Cito  arescit  lacrima ,  prae¬ 
sertim  in  alienis  malis ,  Quickly  dries  the  tear,  especially  when  shed  for  others’ 
woes.  Cic.  Sua  vitia  insipientes  et  suam  culpam  in  senectutem  conferunt.  Id. 

(e.)  If  there  be  no  emotive  or  pathetic  word  requiring  prominence,  the  place 
at  the  end  of  the  proposition  is  reserved  for  the  significant  word,  that  is,  the 
word  which  is  to  be  most  strongly  impressed  upon  the  understanding  or  mem¬ 
ory  ;  as,  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres.  Caes.  Quod  ante  id  tempus  accide¬ 
rat  numquam.  Id.  Quod  aliud  iter  haberent  nullum.  Id.  Quae  virtus  ex  provi¬ 
dendo  est  appellata  prudentia.  Cic. 

3.  (a.)  Connectives  generally  stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause 
which  they  introduce,  and  with  the  following  this  is  their  only  posi¬ 
tion  ;  viz.  et,  etenim ,  ac ,  at,  atque ,  atqui ,  neque  or  nec ,  aut,  vel,  sive , 
sin,  sed ,  nam ,  verum ,  and  the  relatives  quare ,  quocirca ,  and  quamo- 
brem. 

( b .)  Most  other  connectives  generally  stand  in  the  first  place,  but  when  a 
particular  word  is  peculiarly  emphatic,  this  word  with  all  that  belongs  to  it 
stands  first,  and  the  conjunction  follows  it.  TJt,  even  when  there  is  no  particu¬ 
lar  emphasis,  is  commonly  placed  after  vix,  paene,  and  prope,  and  also  after  the 
negatives  nullus,  nemo ,  nihil ,  and  the  word  tantum.  In  Cicero,  itdque  stands 
first  and  igitur  is  commonly  placed  after  the  first,  and  sometimes  after  several 
words. 

(c.)  Autem,  enim,  and  vero  (but),  are  placed  after  the  first  word  of  the  clause, 
or  after  the  second,  when  the  first  two  belong  together,  or  when  one  of  them 
is  the  auxiliary  verb  sum ;  as,  Ille  enim  revocatus  resistere  coepit.  Caes.  Ego 
vero  vellem,  afuisses.  Cic.  Incredibile  est  enim,  quam  sit,  etc.  Id.  They  rarely 
occur  after  several  words ;  as,  Our  non  de  integro  autem  datum.  Id.  The  encli¬ 
tics  que,  ne,  ve,  are  usually  subjoined  to  the  first  word  in  a  clause;  but  when  a 
monosyllabic  preposition  stands  at  the  beginning,  they  are  often  attached  to  its 
case ;  as,  Romam  Cato  demigravit,  in  foroque  esse  coepit ;  and  this  is  always  the 
case  with  a,  ad  and  ob.  So,  also,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  Apud  quosque.  Cic. 

(d.)  Quidem  and  quoque,  when  belonging  to  single  words,  are  always  sub¬ 
joined  to  the  emphatic  word  in  a  clause;  as,  Verbo  ille  reus  erat ,  re  quidem 
vero  Oppianicus.  Cic.  Me  scilicet  maxime ,  sed  proxime  illum  quoque  fefellis¬ 
sem.  Id.  In  negative  sentences,  ne  precedes,  and  quidem  follows,  the  emphatic 
word ;  as,  Ne  ad  Catonem  quidem  provocabo.  Cic. —  Quidem  is  sometimes  at¬ 
tracted  from  the  word  to  which  it  properly  belongs  to  a  neighboring  pronoun ; 
as,  Tibique  persuade ,  esse  te  quidem  mihi  carissimum,  sed  multo  fore  cariorem , 
si,  etc.,  instead  of,  te  carissimum  quidem  mihi  esse. — Prepositions  and  conjunc¬ 
tions  belonging  to  the  word  on  which  the  emphasis  rests  are  placed  with  it  be¬ 
tween  ne  and  quidem;  as,  Ne  infdnis  quidem.  Cic.  Ne  si  dubitetur  quidem.  Id. 
Ne  quum  in  Sicilia  quidem  fuit.  Id. ;  and  even  Ne  cujus  rei  argueretur  quidem. — 
So,  also,  in  Cicero,  non  nisi ,  ‘  only,’  are  separated ;  and  the  negative  may  even 
be  contained  in  a  verb. 

(e.)  The  preceding  rules  respecting  the  position  of  connectives  are  often 
violated  by  the  poets,  who  place  even  the  prepositive  conjunctions  after  one  or 
more  words  of  a  proposition ;  as,  Et  tu,  pdtes  nam,  etc..  Hor.  Vivos  et  rbderet 


308 


SYNTAX. - ARRANGEMENT  OF  WORDS. 


§279. 


ungues.  Id.  They  even  separate  el  from  the  word  belonging  to  it ;  as,  Audire 
et  videor  pios  errare  per  tucos.  Id.  So,  Auctius  atque  dii  melius  fecere.  Id. 
And  they  sometimes  append  que  and  ve  neither  to  the  first  word,  nor  to  their 
proper  words  in  other  connections ;  as,  Messallam  terra  dum  sequiturque  mari , 
instead  of  terra  mdrique.  Tib.  In  such  arbitrary  positions,  however,  these 
conjunctions  are  almost  invariably  joined  to  verbs  only. 

4.  When  a  word  is  repeated  in  the  same  clause,  so  that  one  is  opposed  to, 
or  distinguished  from,  the  other,  they  must  stand  together;  as,  Homines  homi¬ 
nibus  maxime  utiles  esse  possunt.  Cic.  Equites  alii  alio  dilapsi  sunt.  Liv.  Leqit- 
que  virum  vir.  Virg.  Manus  manum  lavat.  Petr.  So,  also,  the  personal  and 
possessive  pronouns;  as,  Sequere  quo  tua  te  natura  ducit.  Suum  se  negotium 
agere  dicunt. 

5.  Words  used  antithetically  are  also  placed  near  each  other ;  as,  Dum  ta¬ 
cent,  clamant.  Cic.  Fragile  corpus  animus  sempiternus  mdvet.  Id. 

6.  Inquam  and  often  aio ,  introducing  a  quotation,  follow  one  or  more  of  the 
words  quoted;  as,  1  Non  nosti  quid  pater,'  inquit,  ‘ Chrysippus  dicat.'  Hor. 

‘  Quid,'  aio,  1  tua  crimina  prodis  ?  ’  Ovid.  When  a  nominative  is  added  to  inquit, 
it  usually  follows  this  verb ;  as,  Mihi  vero ,  inquit  Cotta,  videtur.  Cic. — Dicit 
and  dixit  are  used  like  inquit  only  by  the  poets. 

7.  (a.)  The  adjective  may  be  placed  before  or  after  its  noun  according  as 
one  or  the  other  is  emphatic,  the  more  emphatic  word  being  placed  before  the 
other.  When  any  thing  is  dependent  on  the  adjective,  it  usually  follows  its 
noun.  When  a  noun  is  limited  by  another  noun,  as  well  as  by  an  adjective, 
the  adjective  usually  precedes  both;  as,  Ulla  officii  praecepta.  Cic.  Tuum  erga 
dignitatem  meam  studium.  Id. 

( b .)  Demonstratives,  and  the  adjectives  primus,  medius,  etc.,  when  signifying 
the  first  part,  the  middle  part,,  etc.,  (see  §  205,  R.  17),  usually  precede  their 
nouns;  as,  Ea  res.  Cass.  His  ipsis  verbis.  Cic.  Media  nox.  Cass.  Reliqua 
AEgyptus.  Cic. 

8.  Monosyllables  are  usually  prefixed  to  longer  words  with  which  they  are 
connected;  as,  Vir  clarissimus.  Cic.  Di  immortales.  Res  innumerabiles.  Vis 
tempestatis.  Cass. 

9.  (a.)  When  nouns  are  put  in  apposition,  the  one  which  explains  or  defines 
the  other  is  generally  put  last,  unless  it  is  to  he  made  emphatic ;  as,  Opes  irri¬ 
tamenta  malorum.  Ovid.  Hence  names  of  honors  or  dignities,  and  every  thing 
of  the  nature  of  a  title,  are  commonly  placed  after  the  proper  name,  as  explan¬ 
atory  additions.  Thus,  especially,  the  names  of  changeable  Roman  dignities ; 
as,  Cicero  consul;  C.  Curioni  tribuno  plebis ;  but  also  permanent  appellations ; 
as,  Ennius  poeta ;  Plato  philosophus ;  Didnysius  tyrannus ;  and  such  epithets  as 
vir  honestissimus ;  homo  doctissimus.  But  the  hereditary  title  rex  is  frequently 

E laced  before  the  name;  as,  rex  Deiotarus;  and  so  the  title  Imperator  after  it 
ecame  permanent. 

( b .)  In  the  arrangement  of  the  Roman  names  of  persons,  the  prcendmen 
stands  first,  next  the  nomen  or  name  of  the  gens ,  third  the  cognomen  or  name 
of  the  familia,  and  last  the  agnomen ;  as,  Publius  Cornelius  Scipio  Af  incanus. 
The  pramomen  is  usually  denoted  by  a  letter.  In  the  imperial  times  the  nomen 
is  often  either  omitted  or  follows  as  something  subordinate. 

10.  (a.)  Oblique  cases  precede  the  words  on  which  they  depend, 
blit  they  follow  prepositions ;  as, 

Popiili  Romani  laus  est.  Cic.  Laudis  avidi ,  pecunia  liberales.  Sali.  Cunctis 
esto  benignus,  nulli  blandus,  paucis  familiaris,  omnibus  cequus.  Sen.  Mdnu- 
mentum  sere  perennius.  Hor.  Hanc  tibi  dono  do.  Ter. — Ad  meridiem  spectans . 
Cic.  Extra  periculum.  Id. 

(b.)  Genitives  depending  upon  neuter  adjectives  are  commonly  placed  last; 
as,  Incerta  fortunes.  Liv.  Nec  tibi  plus  cordis,  sec?  minus  oris  inest.  Ovid. 


§279. 


SYNTAX. - ARRANGEMENT  OF  WORDS. 


309 


Remark.  This  rule,  so  far  especially  as  it  relates  to  genitives,  is  in  a  great 
degree  arbitrary,  as  the  position  of  the  governed  and  governing  words  depends 
on  the  idea  to  be  expressed;  thus,  mors  patris  tui ,  contrasts  the  death  with  the 
preceding  life ;  but,  fratris  tui  mors  distinguishes  this  case  of  death  from  others. 
Hence  we  say,  animi  motus ,  animi  morbus ,  corporis  partes ,  terras  motus . — An  ob¬ 
jective  genitive  usually  follows  the  word  on  which  it  depends;  as,  una  signifi¬ 
catione  llterarum,  by  means  of  a  single  notice  by  letters. — When  several  geni¬ 
tives  are  dependent  on  one  noun,  the  subjective  genitive  commonly  precedes 
and  the  objective  genitive  may  either  precede  or  follow  the  governing  noun. — 
The  genitive  dependent  on  causa  or  gratia ,  ‘  on  account  of,’  regularly  precedes 
these  ablatives ;  as,  glorias  causa  mortem  dblre ;  emolumenti  sui  gratia . 

(c.)  When  a  noun  which  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  is  modified  by  other 
words  which  precede  it,  the  preposition  usually  stands  before  the  words  by 
which  the  noun  is  modified;  as,  A  prlma  luce  ad  sextam  horam .  Liv.  Ad  animi 
mei  laetitiam.  Cic.  Ad  bene  bedteque  vivendum.  Id. 

(d.)  Sometimes,  however,  the  preposition  comes  between  its  noun  and  an 
adjective  or  a  genitive,  by  which  the  noun  is  modified;  as,  Nulla  in  re.  Cic. 
Justis  de  causis.  Id.  Suos  inter  aequales.  Id.  Hanc  ob  causam.  Id.  Magno  cum 
metu.  Id.  Qua  in  urbe.  Id.  Ed  in  re.  Id.  AS  tat  is  suae  cum  prlmis.  Nep. — 
So,  also,  a  conjunction  may  follow  the  preposition;  as,  Post  vero  Sullce  victo¬ 
riam. 

(e.)  Per,  in  adjurations,  is  often  separated  from  its  case  by  other  words;  as, 
Per  ego  te  deos  oro.  Ter. — In  the  poets,  other  prepositions  are  sometimes  sepa¬ 
rated  in  the  same  manner ;  as,  Vulnera ,  quae  circum  plurima  muros  accepit  pa¬ 
trios.  Virg. 

(f.)  Tenus  and  versus ,  and  sometimes  other  prepositions,  (cf.  §  241,  R.  1,) 
follow  their  cases,  especially  when  joined  with  qui  or  hie.  This  occurs  most 
frequently  with  the  prepositions  ante ,  contra ,  inter ,  and  propter ;  more  rarely 
with  circa,  circum ,  penes ,  ultra  and  adversus ;  and  with  still  less  frequency 
with  post ,  per ,  ad,  and  de ;  as,  quam  ante ,  quern  contra,  quos  inter ,  quern  prop¬ 
ter,  quos  aid,  quern  ultra,  hunc  adversus,  hunc  post,  quam  circa. — The  preceding 
prepositions,  and  more  rarely  others  also,  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets 
and  later  prose  writers,  follow  nouns  and  personal  pronouns.  In  such  case,  if 
the  noun  be  modified  by  an  adjective  or  a  genitive,  the  preposition  sometimes 
stands  between  them,  and  sometimes  follows  both;  as,  Postes  sub  ipsos.  Yirg. 
Ripam  apud  Euphratis.  Tac.  Maria  omnia  circum.  Virg.  And  more  rarely 
other  words  intervene ;  as,  His  accensa  super.  Id.  Vitiis  nemo  sine  nascitur. 
Hor. 

11.  Infinitives  precede  the  verbs  on  which  they  depend;  as, 

Jugurtha,  ubi  eos  Africa  decessisse  ratus  est,  neque  propter  loci  naturam  Cir¬ 
tam  armis  expugnare  possit,  moenia  circumdat.  Sali.  Servire  magis  quam  impe¬ 
rare  parati  estis.  Id. 

12.  A  word  which  has  the  same  relation  to  several  words,  either  precedes  or 
follows  them  all ;  as,  Vir  gravis  et  sapiens.  Cic.  Clarus  et  hdnoratus  vir.  Id. 
In  scriptSribus  legendis  et  imitandis ,  or  In  legendis  imitandisque  scriptoribus ; 
but  not  In  legendis  scriptoribus  et  imitandis.  Quum  respondere  neque  vellet  neque 
posset.  Habentur  et  dicuntur  tyranni.  Amicitiam  nec  usu  nec  ratione  habent 
cognitam. 

13.  Relatives  are  commonly  placed  after  their  antecedents,  and 
as  near  to  them  as  possible ;  as, 

Qui  sim,  ex  eo,  quern  ad  te  mlsi,  cognosces.  Sail.  Llteras  ad  te  mlsi,  per  quas 
gratias  tibi  egi.  Cic. 

14.  Quisque  is  generally  placed  after  se,  suus,  qui,  ordinals  and  superlatives; 
as,  Suos  quisque  debet  tueri.  Cic.  Satis  superque  est  sibi  suarum  cuique  rerum 
cura.  Id.  Severitas  animadversionis  infimo  cuique  gratissima.  Id.  Maxime 
decet,  quod  est  cujusque  maxime  suum.  Id.  Quisque  very  rarely  begins  a  propo¬ 
sition. 


310 


SYNTAX. - ARRANGEMENT  OF  CLAUSES. 


§280. 


15.  (a.)  An  adverb  is  usually  placed  immediately  before  the  word  which  it 
qualifies;  but  if  the  same  word  is  modified  by  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun,  the 
latter  commonly  follows  the  adverb;  as,  Male  parta  male  ditabuntur.  Cic. 
Nihil  tam  asperum  neque  tam  difficile  esse ,  quod  non  cupidissime  facturi  essent. 
Sail. — Imperium  facile  iis  artibus  retinetur,  quibus  initio  partum  est .  Id.  Sed 
maxime  adolescentium  familiaritates  appetebat.  Id.  Non  tam  in  bellis  et  in 
proeliis ,  quam  in  promissis  et  fide  firmiorem.  Cic. — ( b .)  When  non  belongs  to  a 
single  word  of  the  proposition,  it  always  stands  immediately  before  it  ;  as,  non 
te  reprehendo ,  sed  for'tunam.  But  if  it  belongs  to  the  proposition  generally,  it 
stands  before  the  verb,  and  particularly  before  the  finite  verb,  if  an  infinitive 
depends  on  it ;  as,  Cur  tantopere  te  angas ,  intelligere  sane  non  possum.  Instead 
of  non  dico,  nego  is  generally  used ;  as,  negavit  eum  adesse. — The  negatives  non , 
neque ,  nemo,  nullus ,  when  joined  to  general  negative  pronouns  or  adverbs,  such  as 
quisquam,  ullus ,  umquam ,  always  precede  them  though  not  always  immediately; 
as,  nemini  quidquam  negavit;  non  memini  me  umquam  te  vidisse.  \  207,  R.  31. 

Note  1.  In  some  phrases,  custom  has  established  a  certain  order,  which  must 
be  observed  and  imitated;  as,  Civis  Romanus,  pdpulus  Romanus,  jus  civile,  ces 
alienum,  terra  marique,  Pontifex  maximus ,  magister  equitum,  tribunus  militum, 
tribuni  militum  consulari  pOtestdte,  Jupiter  optimus  maximus,  via  Appia ;  ne  quid 
respublica  detrimenti  capiat.  Cic.  The  ablatives  Opinione ,  spe,  justo ,  sdlito,  (see 
§  256,  R.  9),  generally  precede  the  comparative. 

Note  2.  Exceptions  to  the  foregoing  principles  are  very  numerous.  These  may  arise 
(a)  from  emphasis;  ( b )  from  poetic  license;  and  (c)  from  regard  to  the  harmony  of  the 
sentence.  The  following  general  rule  sometimes  modifies  nearly  all  the  preceding. 

16.  The  emphatic  word  is  placed  before  the  word  or  words  con¬ 
nected  with  it  which  are  not  emphatic. 

Note  3.  The  last  place  is  often  an  emphatic  one,  except  for  the  verb. 
When  the  verb  is  neither  first  nor  last  in  a  proposition  the  word  before  it  is 
emphatic.  An  adjective,  when  emphatic,  conimonly  precedes  its  substantive; 
when  not  emphatic,  it  commonly  follows  it.  But  with  the  demonstrative  pro¬ 
nouns  the  rule  is  reversed. 

Note  4.  The  principal  poetical  variation  in  the  arrangement  of  words  consists  in  the 
separation  of  the  adjective  from  its  noun,  and  in  putting  together  words  from  different 
parts  of  a  proposition. 

17.  A  sentence  should  not  close  like  a  hexameter  verse,  with  a  dactyl  and 
spondee ;  as,  Esse  videtur ;  nor,  in  general,  with  a  monosyllable. 

18.  Hiatus  should  be  avoided;  that  is,  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  should 
not  follow  a  word  ending  with  a  vowel. 

19.  A  concurrence  of  long  words  or  long  measures, — of  short  words  or  short 
measures, — of  words  beginning  alike  or  ending  alike, — should  be  avoided. 

II.  OF  THE  ARRANGEMENT  OF  CLAUSES. 

§  98®.  A  compound  sentence,  whose  clauses  are  united  as  prot¬ 
asis  and  apodosis,  or  in  which  the  leading  clause  is  divided  by  the 
insertion  of  one  or  more  subordinate  clauses,  is  called  a  period. 

1.  (a.)  In  the  former  kind  of  period  the  protasis  must  precede  the  apodosis; 
as,  Quum  Pausanias  semianimis  de  templo  elatus  esset,  confestim  animam  efflavit, 
When  Pausanias  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple  but  just  alive,  he  imme¬ 
diately  expired.  In  a  period  of  the  latter  kind  the  verb  of  the  principal  propo¬ 
sition  is  placed  at  the  end,  and  the  subordinate  clauses  between  the  parts  of 
the  leading  clause ;  as,  Pausanias,  quum  semianimis  de  templo  elatus  esset,  con¬ 
festim  animam  efflavit,  Pausanias,  when  he  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple 
but  just  alive,  immediately  expired.  Nep. 

(b.)  A  sentence,  such  as  Scipio  exercitum  in  Africam  trajecit,  ut  Hannibalem 
ex  Italia  deduc&r et,  is  not  periodic  in  its  structure,  but  it  becomes  so  when  we 


§  280. 


SYNTAX. - CONNECTION  OF  CLAUSES. 


811 


say,  Scipio ,  ut  Hannibalem  ex  Italia  deduceret,  exercitum  in  Africam  trajecit. 
Periods  in  which  the  subordinate  clause  precedes  with  two  conjunctions;  as, 
Quum  igitur  Romam  venisset ,  stdtirn  imperatorem  adiit ,  are  made  still  more 
strictly  periodic  by  placing  first  the  conjunction  which  belongs  to  the  whole, 
and  then  inserting  the  subordinate  proposition ;  as,  Itaque,  quum  Romam  ve¬ 
nisset,  statim  imperatorem  adiit. 

2.  (a.)  If  the  verbs  of  the  leading  and  dependent  clauses  have  the  same 
subject,  or  the  same  noun  depending  on  them,  they  are  commonly  formed  into 
a  period ;  as,  Antigonus,  quum  adversus  Seleucum  Lysimdchumque  dimicaret,  in 
proelio  occisus  est.  Nep.  Quem,  ut  barbari  incendium  effugisse  eminus  viderunt, 
telis  missis  interfecerunt.  Id. 

{b.)  So,  also,  when  the  noun  which  depends  on  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause 
is  the  subject  of*the  dependent  clause;  as,  L.. Manlio,  quum  dictator  fuisset, 
M.  Pomponius,  tribunus  plebis,  diem  dixit.  Cic. 

3.  When  obscurity  would  arise  from  separating  the  leading  subject  and 
verb  by  dependent  words  or  clauses,  they  are  often  placed  together  at  the  be¬ 
ginning  or  end  of  the  sentence;  as,  Latse  (sunt)  deinde  leges,  non  solum  quce 
regni  suspicione  consulem  absolverent ,  sed  quce  adeo  in  contrarium  verterent ,  ut  p6pu - 
larem  etiam  facerent.  Liv.  The-  position  of  the  leading  verb  is  also  often 
otherwise  varied,  from  regard  to  emphasis,  to  avoid  monotony,  or  to  prevent 
its  meeting  with  the  verb  of  the  last  dependent  clause ;  but  clauses,  when  so 
arranged,  do  not  constitute  a  period. 

4.  When  one  clause  is  interrupted  by  the  introduction  of  another,  the  latter 
should  be  finished  before  the  first  is  resumed. 

5.  Clauses  expressing  a  cause,  a  condition,  a  time,  or  a  comparison,  usually 
precede  the  clauses  to  which  they  relate. 

6.  A  short  clause  usually  stands  before,  rather  than  after,  a  long  one. 


III.  OF  THE  CONNECTION  OF  CLAUSES. 

(1.)  In  connecting  propositions,  relatives,  whether  pronouns,  pronominal  ad¬ 
jectives,  or  adverbs,  are  often  employed  in  order  to  avoid  the  too  frequent  re¬ 
currence  of  et ,  autem,  and  certain  other  conjunctions.  Every  relative  may  be 
used  for  this  purpose  instead  of  its  corresponding  demonstrative  with  et ;  as, 
qui  for  et  is,  qudlis  for  et  tdlis,  quo  for  et  eo ,  etc.  They  are  used  also  before  those 
conjunctions  which  are  joined  with  et  or  autem  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposi¬ 
tion;  as,  si,  nisi,  ut,  quum,  etc.  (see  §  206,  (14.);  as,  quod  quum  audivissem,  quod 
si  fecissem,  quod  quamvis  non  ignorassem ,  for  et  quum  hoc,  et  si  hoc,  et  quamvis 
hoc;  or  quum  autem  hoc ,  etc.;  and,  often,  also,  where  in  English  no  conjunction 
is  used,  and  even  before  other  relatives ;  as,  quod  qui  facit ,  eum  ego  impium 
judico,  i.  e.  et  qui  hoc  facit,  or,  qui  autem  hoc  facit.  In  the  ablative  with  com¬ 
paratives  the  relative  is  often  used  as  a  connective ;  as,  Cato ,  qho  nemo  turn 
erat  prudentior,  i.  e.  Cato,  who  was  more  prudent  than  all  others. 

(2.)  In  propositions  consisting  of  two  members,  the  relative  pronoun  is  joined 
grammatically  either  to  the  apodosis  or  to  the  protasis ;  with  the  former  in, 
Qui,  quum  ex  eo  quaereretur,  cur  tam  diu  vellet  esse  in  vita,  Nihil  habeo,  inquit, 
quod  accusem  senectutem.  Cic.  de  Sen.  6.  But  is  more  frequent  with  the 
protasis  or  secondary  clause ;  as,  A  quo  quum  quaereretur,  quid  maxime  expe¬ 
diret,  respondit.  Cic.  Off.  2,  25.  When  it  is  thus  joined  with  the  protasis,  the 
nominative  of  the  demonstrative  is  supplied  with  the  apodosis  from  another 
case  of  the  relative  in  the  protasis,  as,  in  the  preceding  passage,  from  the  abla¬ 
tive.  But  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  the  demonstrative  may  be  expressed,  and 
frequently,  also,  for  the  sake  of  clearness;  as,  Qui  mos  quum  a  postei'ioribusnon 
esset  retentus ,  Arcesilas  eum  revocavit.  Cic.  de  Fin.  2,  1.  The  accusative  is 
sometimes  to  be  supplied;  as,  Qui  ( Heraclitus )  quoniam  inlelligi  noluit,  omittd - 
mus.  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  14.  When  the  demonstrative  precedes,  and  is  followed  by 
a  proposition  consisting  of  two  members,  the  relative  is  attached  to  the  prota- 


312 


SYNTAX. - ANALYSIS. 


§  281. 


sis,  which  is  placed  first,  and  not  to  the  leading  clause  or  apodosis;  as,  Ea 
suasi  Pompeio ,  quibus  ille  si  paruisset,  Caesar  tantas  opes ,  quantas  nunc  habet , 
non  haberet.  Cic.  Fam.  6,  6.  Noli  adversus  eos  me  velle  ducere ,  cum  quibus  ne 
contra  te  arma  ferrem,  Italiam  reliqui .  Nep.  Att.  4. 

(3.)  Where  in  English  we  use  ‘however’  with  the  relative;  as,  He  promised 
me  many  things,  which,  however,  he  did  not  perform,  the  Latins  made  use 
of  the  demonstrative  with  sed  or  verum ,  or  the  relative  alone  implying  the  ad¬ 
versative  conjunction;  as,  multa  mihi  promisit ,  sed  ea  non  praestitit ,  or,  quae 
non  praestitit ,  but  not  quae  autem  or  quae  vero .  Qui  autem  and  qui  vero  are  used 
however  in  protases,  where  the  relative  retains  its  relative  meaning,  and  there 
is  a  corresponding  demonstrative  in  the  apodosis;  as,  Qui  autem  omnia  bona  a 
se  ipsis  petunt ,  iis  nihil  malum  videri  pdtest ,  quod  naturae  necessitas  afferat.  Cic. 
de  Sen.  2. 

(4.)  In  double  relative  clauses,  especially  where  the  cases  are  different, 
Cicero  frequently  for  the  second  relative  clause  substitutes  the  demonstrative ; 
as,  Sed  ipsius  in  mente  insidebat  species  pulchritudinis  eximia  quaedam ,  quam  in- 
tuens ,  in  eaque  defixus,  ad,  etc.  for  et  in  qua.  Cic.  Orat.  2.  And  sometimes 
even  when  the  cases  are  the  same ;  as,  Quem  Phliuntem  venisse  ferunt ,  eumque 
cum  Leonte  disseruisse  quaedam.  Cic.  Tuse.  5,  3;  where  et  alone  would  have 
been  sufficient. 

(5.)  From  this  tendency  to  connect  sentences  by  relatives  arose  the  use  of 
quod  before  certain  conjunctions  merely  as  a  copulative.  See  §  206,  (14.) 

(6.)  Neque  or  nec  is  much  used  by  Latin  writers  instead  of  et  and  a  nega¬ 
tion,  and  may  be  so  used  in  all  cases  except  when  the  negative  belongs  to  one 
particular  word;  see  §  278,  R.  9.  Neque  or  nec  is  added  to  «,  vero ,  and  Id- 
men,  where  we  cannot  use  ‘  and.’  To  these  negative  expressions  a  second 
negative  is  often  joined,  in  which  case  neque  enim  non  is  equivalent  to  nam ; 
non  vero  non ,  to  atque  etiam ,  a  stronger  et ;  nec  tdmen  non ,  to  attamen. 

ANALYSIS. 

§«81.  I.  l.  The  analysis  of  a  complex  or  a  compound  sen¬ 
tence  consists  in  dividing  it  into  its  several  component  propositions, 
and  pointing  out  their  relation  to  each  other. 

2.  In  resolving  a  sentence  into  its  component  clauses,  the  participial  con¬ 
structions  equivalent  to  clauses  should  be  mentioned,  and  ellipses  be  supplied. 
See  §  203,  4;  §  274,  3;  and  §  257. 

3.  In  a  continued  discourse  the  connection  and  relation  of  the  successive 
sentences  also  should  be  specified. 

Rules  for  the  Analysis  of  Complex  and  Compound  Sentences. 

(1.)  State  whether  the  sentence  is  complex  or  compound.  §  201,  11,  12. 

(2.)  If  complex,  (1)  specify  the  principal  and  subordinate  clauses.  (2)  Speci¬ 
fy  the  class  to  which  the  subordinate  proposition  belongs,  (§  201,  7),  and  (3),  its 
connective,  and  the  class  to  which  such  connective  belongs,  (§  201,  8  and  9.) 

(3.)  If  compound,  specify  the  principal  propositions,  with  their  subordinates, 
if  any  they  have,  as  in  the  case  of  complex  sentences. 

II.  The  analysis  of  a  proposition  or  simple  sentence  consists  in  distinguish¬ 
ing  the  subject  from  the  predicate,  and,  in  case  either  of  them  be  compound, 
in  pointing  out  the  simple  subjects  or  predicates  of  which  it  is  composed,  and, 
if  complex,  in  specifying  the  several  modifiers,  whether  of  the  essential  or  sub¬ 
ordinate  parts. 


§281 


SYNTAX. — ANALYSIS  AND  PARSING, 


313 


Rules  for  the  Analysis  of  a  Simple  Sentence . 

1.  Divide  it  into  two  parts — the  subject  and  the  predicate,  §  201,  1 — 3. 
If  these  are  simple,  the  analysis  is  complete,  but  if  either  is  compound : — 

2.  Specify  the  simple  subjects  or  predicates  of  which  the  compound  con¬ 
sists. — If  either  is  complex: — 

3.  Point  out  the  grammatical  subject,  and  the  words,  phrases ,  etc.  directly 
modifying  it. 

4.  Point  out  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  which  modify  the  direct  modifiers  of 
the  grammatical  subject,  and  those  which  modify  them,  and  so  on  succes¬ 
sively,  until  the  relation  of  each  of  the  words  composing  the  logical  subject  is 
specified. 

5.  Point  out  the  grammatical  predicate,  and  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  directly 
modifying  it. 

6.  Point  out  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  which  modify  the  direct  modifiers  of 
the  grammatical  predicate,  and  those  which  modify  them,  and  so  on  succes¬ 
sively,  until  the  relation  of  each  of  the  words  composing  the  logical  predicate 
is  specified. 

PARSING. 

III.  Parsing  consists  in  resolving  a  proposition  into  the  parts  of 
speech  of  which  it  is  composed,  tracing  the  derivation  of  each  word, 
and  giving  the  rules  of  formation  and  construction  applicable  to  it. 

Rules  for  Parsing . 

1.  Name  the  part  of  speech  to  which  each  word  belongs,  including  the  sub¬ 
division  in  which  it  is  found. 

2.  If  it  is  an  inflected  word : — 

(1.)  Name  its  root  or  crude  form,  and  decline,  compare,  or  conjugate  it. 

(2.)  If  it  is  a  noun  or  pronoun,  tell  its  gender,  number  and  case: — if  in  the 
nominative  or  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  tell  its  verb : — if  in  an  ob¬ 
lique  case  depending  on  some  other  word,  tell  the  word  on  which  its  case 
depends. 

(3.)  If  it  is  an  adjective,  adjective-pronoun,  or  participle,  tell  the  word  which 
it  modifies. 

% 

(4.)  If  it  is  a  finite  verb  or  an  infinitive  with  the  accusative,  tell  its  voice, 
mood,  tense,  number,  person,  and  subject. 

3.  If  it  is  a  conjunction,  tell  its  class  and  what  it  connects. 

4.  If  it  is  a  preposition,  tell  the  words  whose  relation  is  expressed  by  it. 

5.  If  it  is  an  adverb,  tell  its  class  and  what  it  qualifies. 

6.  Prove  the  correctness  of  each  step  of  the  process  by  quoting  the  definition 
or  rule  of  formation  or  construction  on  which  it  depends. 

Note.  The  words  constituting  a  proposition  are  most  conveniently  parsed  in 
that  order  in  which  they  are  arranged  in  analysis. 

Examples  of  Analysis  and  Parsing, 

1.  Equus  currit ,  The  horse  runs. 

Analysis .  This  is  a  simple  sentence:  its  subject  is  equus ,  its  predicate  is 
currit,  both  of  which  are  simple.  See  §  201,  1-3;  \  202,  2;  and  §  203,  2. 

27 


314 


SYNTAX. - ANALYSIS  AND  PARSING. 


§281. 


P ar sin g .  Equus  is  a  common  noun,  §  26,  1  and  3;  of  the  2d  decl.,  §  38; 
masc.  gender,  §  28,  1;  third  person,  §  35,  2;  its  root  is  equ^,  §  40,  10;  decline  it, 
§46;  it  is  in  the  nominative  case,  singular  number,  §  35,  1,  (5.);  the  subject 
of  currit ,  §  209,  (a.) — Currit  is  a  neuter  verb,  §  141,  II.;  of  the  3d  conjugation, 
§  149,  2,  from  curro;  its  principal  parts  are  curro ,  cucurri,  cursum ,  currere , 
§  151,  4 ;  it  is  from  the  first  root  curr- ;  give  the  formations  of  that  root,  §  151, 1 ; 
it  is  in  the  active  voice,  §  142, 1;  indicative  mood,  §  143,  1;  present  tense,  §  145, 

I.  ;  third  person,  §  147 ;  singular  number,  §  146 ;  agreeing  with  its  subject-nomi¬ 
native  equus ,  §  209,  ( b .) 

Note.  The  questions  to  be  asked  in  parsing  equus  are  such  as  these,  Why  is 
equus  a  noun  ?  .  Why  a  common  noun  ?  Why  of  the  second  declension  ?  Why 
masculine  ?  etc. — In  parsing  currit ,  the  questions  are,  Why  is  currit  a  verb  ? 
Why  a  neuter  verb?  Why  of  the  third  conjugation?  Which  are  the  principal 
parts  of  a  verb  ?  Of  what  does  the  first  root  of  a  verb  consist  ?  What  parts 
of  a  verb  are  derived  from  the  first  root  ?  etc.  The  answer  in  each  case  may 
be  found  by  consulting  the  etymological  rules  and  definitions. 

2.  Scevius  vends  agitatur  ingens  pinus ,  The  great  pine  is  more 
violently  shaken  by  the  winds.  Hor. 

Analysis .  This  also  is  a  simple  sentence: — its  subject  is  ingens  pinus,  its 
predicate  scevius  vends  agitatur;  both  of  which  are  complex,  §  201,  10,  §  202,  6, 
and  §  203,  5. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  pinus,  the  pine;  this  is  modified  by  inqens.  great, 
§  201,  2,  §  202,  2,  and  §  202,  6,  (3.) 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  agitatur,  is  shaken ;  this  is  modified  by  two 
independent  modifiers,  scevius,  more  violently,  and  vends,  by  the  winds,  §  203, 

II.  3,  Rem.,  §  203,  I.  1,  (2),  and  (3.) 

P  ar  sin  g .  Pinus  is  a  common  noun,  §  26,  1  and  3;  of  the  2d  and  4th  de¬ 
clensions,  §  88  and  §  99 ;  feminine  gender,  §  29,  2 ;  3d  person,  §  35,  2 ;  from  the 
root  pin-,  §  40,  10;  (decline  it  both  in  the  2d  and  4th  declensions); — it  is  found 
in  the  singular  number,  §  35,  1,  and  the  nominative  case,  the  subject  of  agita¬ 
tur,  §  209,  (a.) 

Ingens  is  a  qualifying  adjective  of  quantity,  §  104,  4,  and  §  205,  N.  1;  of  the 
3d  decl.,  §  105,  1,  and  §  38;  of  one  termination,  §  108,  and  §  111;  from  the  root 
ingent §  40,  10;  (decline  it  like  prcesens,  §  111,  but  with  only  i  in  the  ablative, 
§  113,  Exc.  3,); — it  is  found  in  the  singular  number,  feminine  gender,  §  26,  R.  4; 
and  nominative  case,  agreeing  with  its  noun  pinus,  §  205. 

Agitatur  is  an  active  frequentative  verb,  §  141,  I.,  and  §  187,  II.  1;  of  the 
1st  conjugation,  §  149,  2 ;  from  the  first  root  of  its  primitive  dgo,  §  187,  II.  1,  (b.) ; 
(name  its  principal  parts  in  both  voices,  see  §  151,  4;  and  give  the  conjuga¬ 
tion  of  the  passive  voice,  indicative  mood,  present  tense,  see  §  156,); — it  is 
found  in  the  singular  number,  §146;  third  person,  §  147;  agreeing  with  its 
subject-nominative  pinus,  §  209,  (6.) 

Scevius  is  a  derivative  adverb  of  manner,  §  190,  2-4;  in  the  comparative  de¬ 
gree,  from  the  positive  sceve  or  sceviter,  which  is  derived  from  the  adjective 
scevus,  §  194,  1  and  2,  and  §  192,  II.  1,  and  Exc.  1  and  2;  modifying  the  verb 
agitatur,  by  expressing  its  degree,  §  277. 

Vends  is  a  common  noun,  §  26,  1  and  3 ;  of  the  2d  declension,  §  38 ;  masculine 
gender,  §  46;  from  the  root  vent-,  §  40,  10;  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in  the 
plural  number,  §  35,  1 ;  ablative  case,  modifying  dgitdtur  by  denoting  its  means 
or  instrument,  §  247. 

3.  Mithridates,  duarum  et  viginti  gentium  rex,  totidem  linguis  jura 
dixit ,  Mithridates,  king  of  twenty-two  nations,  pronounced  judicial 
decisions  in  as  many  languages.  Plin. 

Anal y  sis .  This  also  is  a  simple  sentence;  its  subject  is  Mithridates,  dud- 
rum  et  viginti  gentium  rex,  its  predicate  is  totidem  linguis  jura  clixit,  both  of 
which  are  complex,  §  201,  10,  §  202,  6,  and  §  203,  5. 


§281. 


SYNTAX. - ANALYSIS  AND  PARSING. 


315 


The  grammatical  subject  is  Mithridates;  this  is  modified  directly  by  rear, 
§  202,  I.  (1.) 

Rex  is  limited  by  gentium ,  §  202,  I.  1,  (2.) 

Gentium  is  limited’  by  the  compound  addition  dudrum  and  viginti  connected 
coOrdinately  by  et ,  §  202,  III.  3. 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  dixit ;  this  is  limited  by  jura  and  Unguis,  the 
former  a  simple,  the  latter  a  complex  addition,  as  it  is  modified  by  tdtidem , 
§  203,  I.  1,  (2.)  and  TL  1. 

Parsing.  Mithridates  is  a  proper  noun,  §  26,  2;  of  the  third  declension, 
§  38;  masculine  gender,  §  28,  1;  from  the  root  Mithridat-,  §  40,  10;  genitive 
Mithridatis ,  §  73,  1;  (decline  it  in  the  singular  number  only,  §  95,  (a.); — it  is 
found  in  the  nominative  case,  the  subject  of  dixit ,  §  209,  (a.) 

Rex  is  a  common  noun — third  declension,  §  38 ;  masculine  gender,  §28,1; 
from  the  root  reg-,  §  40,  10;  genitive  regis ,  §  78,  2;  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in 
the  singular  number — the  nominative  case,  in  apposition  to  Mithridates ,  §  204. 

Gentium  is  a  common  noun  from  gens — third  declension — feminine  gender, 
§  62;  from  the  root  gent-,  §  56,  I,  R.  1;  genitive  gentis,  §  77,  2  and  (2.);  (de¬ 
cline  it); — it  is  found  in  the  plural  number — genitive  case,  §  83,  II.  3;  limiting 
rex  subjectively,  §  211  and  R.  2. 

Dudrum  is  a  numeral  adjective,  §  104,  5;  of  the  cardinal  kind,  §  117;  from 
duo,  duos,,  duo  ;  from  the  root  du- ;  (decline  it,  §  118,  1,); — it  is  found  in  the 
plural  number,  §  118,  2;  feminine  gender,  genitive  case,  §  26,  R.  4;  agreeing 
with  its  noun  gentium ,  §  205. 

Et  is  a  copulative  conjunction,  §  198, 1,  connecting  dudrum  and  viginti,  §  278. 

Viginti  is  a  numeral  adjective  of  the  cardinal  kind,  indeclinable,  §118,1; 
limiting  gentium,  §  205. 

Dixit  is  an  active  verb,  §  141,  I.;  of  the  third  conjugation,  §  149,  2;  from 
dico,  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the  active  voice,  and  its  first,  second,  and 
third  roots,  §  150,  4,  and  §  171,  1;)  it  is  formed  from  the  second  root  dix-,  (give 
the  formations  of  the  second  root); — it  is  found  in  the  active  voice,  §  141,  1; 
indicative  mood,  §  143,  1 ;  perfect  indefinite  tense,  §  145,  IV.  and  Rem. ;  sin¬ 
gular  number,  third  person,  agreeing  with  Mithridates ,  §  209,  (5.) 

Jura  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  third  declension,  from  jus,  root  jur -,  §  56,  I. 
R.  genitive  juris,  §  76,  Exc.  3;  neuter  gender,  §  66;  (decline  it); — it  is  found 
in  the  plural  number,  accusative  case,  §  40,  8;  the  object  of  dixit,  §  229. 

Linguis  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  first  declension,  feminine  gender,  from 
lingua,  root  lingu-,  (decline  it); — found  in  the  plural  number,  ablative  case, 
after  dixit.  §  247. 

Totidem  is  a  demonstrative  pronominal  adjective,  §  139,  5,  (2.)  and  (3.);  in¬ 
declinable,  §  115,  4;  it  is  in  the  ablative  plural,  feminine  gender,  limiting  Un¬ 
guis,  §  205. 

4.  Pausanias,  quum  semianimis  de  templo  elatus  esset ,  confestim  ani¬ 
mam  efflavit.  Nep.  Paus.  4. 

Analysis .  This  is  a  complex  sentence,  §  201,  11;  consisting  of  two  mem¬ 
bers,  which  are  so  arranged  as  to  constitute  a  period,  §  280,  1. 

The  principal  proposition  is,  Pausanias  confestim  animam  efflavit,  §  201,  5. 
The  subordinate  proposition  is,  quum  (is)  semianimis  de  templo  elatus  esset, 
§  201,  6. 

The  leading  proposition  has  a  simple  subject,  Pausanias,  §  2Q2,  2,  and  a 
complex  predicate,  confestim  animam  efflavit,  §  203,  3 ;  in  which  efflavit  is  the 
grammatical  predicate,  §  203,  2 ;  which  is  modified  by  confestim  and  animum, 
§  203, 1.  1,  (2.)  and  (3.),  and  II.  R.  2.,  and  also  by  the  adverbial  clause  quum 
semianimis,  etc.  §  201,  6  and  7,  and  §  203,  I.  3. 

The  subordinate  proposition,  which  is  connected  to  the  leading  clause  by 
the  subordinate  conjunction  quum,  §  201,  9,  has  a  simple  subject,  viz.  is  under¬ 
stood,  and  a  complex  predicate,  semianimis,  de  templo  elatus  esset,  §  203,  3. — 
The  grammatical  predicate  is  elatus  esset,  §  203,  2 ;  which  is  modified  by  semia¬ 
nimis,  §  203,  I.  1,  (1.),  and  de  templo ,  §  203, 1.  2,  and  II.  Rem.  2. 


316 


SYNTAX. - ANALYSIS  AND  PARSING. 


§281. 


Parsing.  Pausanias ,  a  Greek  proper  noun,  §  26,  2; — 1st  deck,  §§  41  and 
44;  masc.  gender,  §  28,  1;  root  Pausanv-;  found  in  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  the 
subject  of  efflavit,  §  209,  (a.) 

Gonfestim ,  an  adv.  of  time  §  190,  3 ;  limiting  efflavit ,  §  277. 

Animam  is  a  com.  noun  of  1st  deck,  fem.  gender,  §  41 ;  from  anima,  root 
anim-',  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in  the  sing,  num.,  acc.  case,  the  object  of 
efflavit ,  |  229. 

Efflavit ,  an  act.  verb,  1st  conj.,  from  efflo ,  compounded  of  ex  and  flo ,  $  196,  6; 
(give  the  principal  parts  in  the  act.  voice  and  the  three  roots); — it  is  formed 
from  the  second  root ;  (give  the  formations  of  that  root);  in  the  active  voice, 
ind.  mood,  perfect  indefinite  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing  with  Pausa¬ 
nias,  $  209,  (b. ) 

Quum  is  a  temporal  conjunction,  §  198,  10;  connecting  the  dependent  to  the 
principal  clause,  §  278. 

Semianimis  is  a  predicate  adj.,  of  the  3d  deck,  of  two  terminations,  §  109; 
(decline  it); — it  is  in  the  sing,  num.,  masc.  gend.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  is 
understood,  §  210,  R.  1,  (a.) 

De  is  a  preposition,  expressing  the  relation  between  elatus  esset  and  templo , 
§  195. 

Templo  is  a  com.  noun,  2d  deck,  neut.  gend.,  from  templum,  root  tempi-;  (de¬ 
cline  it); — in  the  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  after  de,  §  241. 

Elatus  esset  is  an  irregular  active  verb,  of  the  third  conjugation,  §  179;  from 
effero,  compounded  of  ex  and  fero,  §  196,  6;  (see  fero  and  compounds,  §  172); 
(give  the  principal  parts  in  both  voices,  and  the  1st  and  3d  roots); — it  is  formed 
from  the  third  root,  elat-,  (give  the  formations  of  that  root  in  the  passive  voice); 
in  the  subjunctive  mood,  pluperfect  tense,  §  145,  V. ;  sing,  num.,  third  person, 
agreeing  with  is  understood  referring  to  Pausanias ,  §  209,  ( b .) 

5.  Romana  pubes,  sedato  tandem  pavore ,  postquam  ex  tam  turbido 
die  serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rediit ,  ubi  vacuam  sedem  regiam  vidit ,  etsi 
satis  credebat  patribus,  qui  proximi  steterant ,  sublimem  raptum  pro¬ 
cella  ;  tamen ,  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta ,  incestum  aliquamdiu  silentium 
obtinuit.  Liv.  1,  16. 

Analysis .  This  is  a  complex  sentence,  whose  clauses  constitute  a  period, 
§  280.  It  is  composed  of  the  following  members  or  clauses : — 

1.  Romana  pubes  [tamen]  maestum  aliquamdiu  silentium  obtinuit.  This  is  the 
leading  clause.  The  following  are  dependent  clauses. 

2.  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta, 

3.  sedato  tandem  pavore, 

4.  postquam  ex  tam  turbido  die  serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rediit , 

5.  ubi  vacuam  sedem  regiam  vidit, 

6.  etsi  satis  credebat  patribus, 

7.  qui  proximi  steterant , 

8.  sublimem  raptum  procella. 

Note  1.  In  the  preceding  clauses  the  predicates  are  printed  in  Italics. 

Note  2.  The  connective  of  the  1st  clause,  is  the  adversative  tdmen ,  which 
is  inserted  on  account  of  eisi  intervening  between  the  principal  subject  and 
predicate.  The  connective  of  the  2d  clause  is  velut ,  of  the  4th  postquam,  of  the 
5th  ubi,  of  the  6th  etsi,  followed  by  a  clause  constituting  the  protasis,  and  of 
the  7th  qui.  The  3d  and  8th  clauses  have  no  connectives. 

(1.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  leading  clause  is  pubes,  which  is  limited 
by  Romana. — The  grammatical  predicate  is  obtinuit,  which  is  limited  by  ali¬ 
quamdiu  and  silentium,  and  also  either  directly  or  indirectly  by  all  the  depend¬ 
ent  clauses.  Silentium  is  itself  modified  by  meestum. 

The  second,  third,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  clauses  are  used  adverbially  to 
denote  the  time  and  other  circumstances  modifying  the  principal  predicate 
silentium  obtinuit ,  §  201,  7. 


§281. 


SYNTAX. - ANALYSIS  AND  PARSING. 


817 


(2.)  The  second  is  a  participial  clause,  equivalent  to  velut  ( ea  soil,  puhes) 
orbitatis  metu  icta  esset ,  §  274,  3,  (a.) 

(3.)  The  third  clause  is  also  participial,  and  is  equivalent  to  quum  tandem 
pacor  sedatus  esset,  §  257,  R.  1 ;  and  hence  pavore  represents  the  subject,  and 
sedato  tandem  the  predicate — the  former  being  simple,  the  latter  complex. 

(4.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  4th  clause,  which  is  connected  to  the 
leading  clause  by  postquam ,  §  201,  9,  is  lux ,  which  is  modified  by  serena  and 
tranquilla. — The  grammatical  predicate  is  rediit ,  which  is  modified  by  postquam 
and  ex  tam  turbido  die ,  §  203,  I.  1,  (3.),  and  II.  1. 

(5.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  fifth  clause  is  ea  understood. — The 
grammatical  predicate  is  vidit ,  which  is  modified  by  ubi  and  vacuam  sedem 
regiam ,  §  203,  I.  1,  (3.)  and  II.  1. 

(.6.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  sixth  clause  also  is  ea.  Its  grammati¬ 
cal  predicate  is  credebat ,  which  is  modified  by  satis  and  patribus ,  §  203,  I.  (2.) 
and  (3.),  and  by  the  8th  clause,  II.  3. 

(7.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  seventh  clause  is  qui.  Its  grammatical 
predicate  is  steterant,  which  is  modified  by  proximi,  §  203,  I.  (1.)  It  is  an  ad¬ 
jective  clause,  modifying  patribus,  §  201,  7  and  9. 

(8.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  eighth  clause,  which  has  no  connective, 
§  204,  Rem.,  is  eum,  i.  e.  Romulum ,  understood.  Its  grammatical  predicate  is 
raptum  ( esse),  which  is  modified  by  sublimem  and  procella. 

Parsing.  Romana  is  a  patrial  adjective,  §  104,  10,  derived  from  Roma , 
§  128,  6,  (a.)  and  (e.);  of  the  1st  and  2d  declensions,  §  105,  2;  fern,  gender, 
sing,  number,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes ,  §  205. 

Pubes,  a  collective  noun,  §  26,  4;  3d  dec].,  fern,  gender,  §  62;  from  the  root 
pub-,  §  56,  I.  R.  6;  genitive  pubis,  §  73,  1;  (decline  it); — found  in  the  nom. 
sing.,  the  subject  of  obtinuit,  §  209,  (a.) 

Tamm. ,  an  adversative  conjunction,  §  198,  9,  relating  to  etsi  in  the  6th  clause. 

Mcestum ,  a  qualifying  adj.,  §  205,  N.  1;  of  the  1st  and  2d  declensions,  neut. 
gender,  sing,  num.,  acc.  case,  agreeing  with  silentium. 

Aliquamdiu,  an  adverb  of  time,  §  191,  II. ;  compounded  of  aliquis  and  diu, 
§  193,  6;  and  limiting  obtinuit ,  §  277. 

Silentium ,  a  com.  noun,  2d  decl.,  neut.  gender,  §  46;  sing,  number,  acc.  case, 
the  object  of  obtinuit ,  §  229. 

Obtinuit,  an  active  verb,  of  the  2d  conj.,  §  149,  2;  from  obtineo,  compounded 
of  ob  and  teneo,  see  §  168;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the  act.  voice,  and  the 
formations  of  the  2d  root,  §  157  at  the  end) ; — found  in  the  active  voice,  ind. 
mood,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  person,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  209,  ( b .) 

Velut  for  velut  si,  an  adverb,  compounded  of  vel  and  ut,  §193,  10;  modifying 
icta ,  and  obtinuisset  understood,  (as  they  would  have  done  if,  etc.) 

Orbitatis ,  an  abstract  noun,  §  26,  5;  from  the  primitive  orbus,  §  101,  1  and  2; 
3d  decl.,  fern,  gender,  §  62;  from  the  root  orbitat-,  §  56,  I.,  and  R.  1;  (decline 
it); — found  in  the  sing,  num.,  subjective  gen.  case,  limiting  metu,  §  211. 

Metu,  an  abstract  noun,  4th  decl.,  masc.  gen.,  §  87 ;  sing,  num.,  abl.  case, 
§  247. 

Icta,  a  perf.  part,  pass.,  from  the  active  verb  ico,  of  the  3d  conj.  (give  the 
principal  parts  in  both  voices,  and  decline  the  participle); — found  in  the  fern, 
gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  205. 

Sedato,  a  perfect  pass.  part,  from  the  active  verb  sedo,  of  the  1st  conj.,  §  149, 
2;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  both  voices,  §  151,  4;  and  decline  it,  §  105, 
R.  2.); — found  in  the  masc.  gender,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  agreeing  with  pa¬ 
vore,  §  205. 

Tandem ,  an  adverb  of  time,  §  191,  II. ;  modifying  sedato ,  §  277. 

Pavore,  an  abstract  noun,  §  26,  5,  and  §  102,  1;  (from  pdveo),  3d  decl.,  masc. 
gen.,  §  58;  root  pdvor,  §  56,  II.,  and  §  70,  (decline  it); — found  in  the  sing, 
number,  abl.  case,  absolute  with  sedato,  §  257. 

Postquam,  an  adverb  of  time,  compounded  of  post  and  quam,  §  193,  10;  mod¬ 
ifying  rediit,  and  connecting  the  1st  and  4th  clauses,  §  201,  9. 

Ex,  a  preposition,  §  195,  R.  2. 

Tam ,  an  adverb  of  degree,  §  191,  R.  2;  modifying  turbido ,  §  277. 

27* 


318 


SYNTAX. — ANALYSIS  AND  PARSING. 


§281. 


Turbido ,  an  adjective,  agreeing  with  die. 

Die ,  a  common  noun,  5th  decl.,  masc.  gender,  §  90,  Exc.  1.;  sing,  number, 
abl.  case,  after  the  prep,  ex,  §  241. 

Serena ,  an  adj.,  1st  and  2d  decls.,  fem.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing 
with  lux ,  §  205. 

Et,  a  copulative  conjunction,  §  198,  1;  connecting  serena  and  tranquilla , 
§  278. 

Tranquilla ,  like  serena. 

Lux ,  a  common  noun,  3d  deck,  fem.  gen.,  §  62;  from  the  root  tec-,  §  56,  I., 
and  R.  2;  genitive  lucis ,  §  78,  2. 

Rediit ,  an  irregular  neuter  verb,  of  the  4th  conj.,  §  176 ;  from  redeo,  com¬ 
pounded  of  eo,  §  182,  and  the  inseparable  prep,  red ,  §  196,  (A),  3;  (give  its  prin¬ 
cipal  parts); — found  in-the  ind.  mood.,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers., 
agreeing  with  lux,  §  209,  (5.) 

Ubi,  an  adverb  of  time,  and  like  postquam ,  a  connective,  §  201,  9 ;  and  modi¬ 
fying  vidit,  §  277. 

Vacuam,  an  adj.,  qualifying  sedem. 

Sedem,  a  common  noun,  3d  decl.,  fem.  gen.,  §  62 ;  from  the  root  sed-,  §  56, 1., 
R.  6;  genitive  sedis,  §  73,  1;  (decline  it); — found  in  the  sing,  num.,  acc.  case, 
the  object  of  the  transitive  verb  vidit,  $  229. 

Regiam ,  a  denominative  adj.,  §  128, 1.,  2,  (a.);  from  the  primitive  rex,  agree¬ 
ing  with  sedem. 

Vidit,  an  active  verb,  of  the  2d  conj.,  (give  its  principal  parts  in  the  active 
voice,  and  the  formations  of  the  2d  root) ;  found  in  the  active  voice,  ind.  mood, 
perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing  with  ea,  i.  e.  pubes,  under¬ 
stood. 

Etsi,  a  concessive  conjunction,  §  198,  4 ;  corresponding  to  the  correlative  ad¬ 
versative  conj.  tdmen ,  §  198,  4,  R.  and  9. 

Satis,  an  adverb  of  degree,  §  191,  III.,  and  R.  2;  modifying  credebat,  §  277. 

Credebat,  an  act.  verb,  §  141,1.;  3d  conj.,  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the 
active  voice  and  the  formations  of  the  1st  root) ; — found  in  the  act.  voice,  ind. 
mood,  imperfect  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  person,  agreeing  with  ea,  scil.  pubes , 
understood. 

Patribus,  a  common  noun,  §  26,  3;  3d  decl.,  from  the  root  patr-,  §  56,  II., 
R.  3;  gen.  patris ,  §  71;  masc.  gender,  §  28,  1;  plur.  num.,  dat.  case,  depending 
on  credebat,  §  223,  R.  2. 

Qui,  the  subject  of  the  7th  clause,  is  a  relative  pronoun,  §  136;  masc. 
gender,  plur.  num.,  agreeing  with  its  antecedent  patribus,  §  206,  R.  19,  (a.); 
and  is  nominative  to  steterant,  §  209,  (a.) 

Proximi ,  an  adj.  of  the  superlative  degree,  §  126,  1,  (compare  it);  of  the  1st 
and  2d  decls.,  masc.  gen.,  plur.  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  wTith  qui,  §  205,  §  210, 
R.  1,  (a.)  and  R.  3,  (2.) 

Steterant,  a  neuter  verb,  1st  conj.,  irregular  in  its  2d  root,  §  165;  (give  its 
principal  parts,  and  the  formations  of  the  2d  root) ; — found  in  the  act.  voice, 
ind.  mood,  plup.  tense,  \  145,  V.;  3d  person  plural,  agreeing  with  its  subject 
qui,  §  209,  (6.) 

Sublimem,  an  adj.,  of  the  3d  decl.,  and  two  terminations,  §  109;  masc.  gen., 
sing,  num.,  acc-  case,  agreeing  with  eum,  (i.  e.  Romulum,)  understood,  ana 
modifying  also  raptum  esse,  §  205,  R.  15. 

Raptum  (esse),  an  act.  verb,  3d  conj.;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  both 
voices  and  the  formations  of  the  3d  root  in  the  passive  voice) — found  in  the 
pass,  voice,  inf.  mood,  perf.  tense;  but,  following  the  imperfect,  it  has  the 
meaning  of  a  pluperfect,  §  268,  2,  and  §  145,  V.;  depending  on  credebat,  §  272. 

Prdcella ,  a  com.  noun,  1st  decl.,  fem.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  §  247. 


§  282,  283.  prosody. — quantity — general  rules.  319 


PROSODY. 

§  282.  Prosody  treats  of  the  quantity  of  syllables,  and  the 
laws  of  versification. 

QUANTITY. 

1.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  occupied  in 
pronouncing  it.  Cf.  §  13. 

2.  A  syllable  is  either  short,  long ,  or  common . 

(a.)  The  time  occupied  in  pronouncing  a  short  syllable  is  called  a  mora  or 
time. 

(h.')  A  long  syllable  requires  two  morce  or  double  the  time  occu¬ 
pied  in  pronouncing  a  short  one ;  as,  amare. 

(c.)  A  common  syllable  is  one  which,  in  poetry,  may  be  made 
either  long  or  short ;  as  the  middle  syllable  of  tenebrae . 

3.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  either  natural  or  accidental ; — 
natural,  when  it  depends  on  the  nature  of  its  vowel ;  accidental,  when 
it  depends  on  its  position. 

Thus  the  e  in  resisto  is  short  by  nature ;  while  in  restiti  it  is  long  by  its  posi¬ 
tion,  since  it  is  followed  by  two  consonants :  §  283,  IV.  On  the  contrary,  the 
e  in  deduco  is  naturally  long,  but  in  deerro  it  is  made  short  by  being  placed  be¬ 
fore  a  vowel:  §  283, 1. 

4.  The  quantity  of  syllables  is  determined  either  by  certain  estab¬ 
lished  rules ,  or  by  the  authority  of  the  poets. 

Thus  it  is  poetic  usage  alone  that  determines  the  quantity  of  the  first  sylla¬ 
bles  of  the  following  words,  viz.  mater ,  frater ,  pravus,  dico ,  duco  ;  pater ,  avus, 
cado ,  maneo,  gravis,  etc. ;  and  hence  the  quantity  of  such  syllables  can  be  as¬ 
certained  by  practice  only  or  by  consulting  the  gradus  or  lexicon. 

5.  The  rules  of  quantity  are  either  general  or  special.  The  for¬ 
mer  apply  alike  to  all  the  syllables  of  a  word,  the  latter  to  particular 
syllables. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

§283.  I.  (a.)  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  or  a  diph¬ 
thong,  is  short ;  as,  e  in  meus ,  i  in  patrice .  Thus, 

Conscia  mens  recti  famae  mendacia  ridet.  Ovid.  F.  4,  311. 

Ipse  etiam  ezimice  laudis  succensus  SLmore.  Virg.  A.  7,  496. 

(&.)  So  also  when  h  comes  between  the  vowels,  since  h  is  account¬ 
ed  only  a  breathing;  as,  nihil :  (see  §  2,  6.)  Thus, 

DS  nihtlti  nihil ,  in  nihUum  nil  posse  rSverti.  Pers.  4,  84. 


320  PROSODY. — QUANTITY GENERAL  RULES.  §  283. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  Flo  has  the  i  long,  except  in  fit  and  when  followed 
by  er  ;  as  fiunt ,  flebam.  Thus, 

Omnia  jam  fmnt ,  fieri  quae  posse  negabam.  Ovid.  Tr.  1,  8.  7. 

( b .)  It  is  sometimes  found  long  even  before  er ;  as,  fieret.  Ter.;  fieri.  Plaut: 
and,  on  the  contrary,  Prudentius  has  fid  with  i  short. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  E  is  long  in  the  termination  of  the  genitive  and  da¬ 
tive  of  the  fifth  declension,  when  preceded  and  followed  by  i ;  as, 
faciei.  Thus, 

Non  radii  s5lis,  neque  lucida  tela  diei.  Lucr.  1, 148. 

(A)  In  spei ,  rei,  and  fidei ,  e  is  short. 

Note.  In  Lucretius,  the  e  of  rei  is,  in  a  few  cases,  long,  and  that  of  fidei  is 
lengthened  once  in  Lucretius  and  once  in  a  line  of  Ennius. 

Exc.  3.  (a.)  A  is  long  in  the  penult  of  old  genitives  in  ai  of  the 
first  declension;  as,  aulai ,  pictai.  Cf.  §  43,  1. 

( b .)  A  and  e  are  also  long  in  proper  names  in  aius ,  elus,  or  ei'a ;  as,  Coins , 
Pompeius ,  Aquileia ;  and  in  the  adjectives  Grains  and  Veius.  Thus, 

iEtherium  sensum,  atque  aurai  simplicis  ignem.  Virg.  A.  6,  747. 

Accipe,  Pompei ,  deductum  carmen  ab  illo.  Ovid.  Pont.  4,  1,  1. 

Necnon  cum  Venetis  Aquileia  perfurit  armis.  Sil.  8,  606. 

Exc.  4.  (a.)  I  is  common  in  genitives  in  ius;  as,  unius ,  illius. 
Thus, 

Illius  et  nitido  stillent  unguenta  capillo.  Tibuli ,  1,  7,  51. 

Illius  puro  destillent  tempora  nardo.  Id.  2,  2,  7. 

(b.)  But  i  in  the  genitive  of  alter  is  commonly  short;  and  in  that  of  alius  it  is 
always  long. 

Exc.  5.  The  first  vowel  of  eheu  is  long ;  that  of  Diana ,  Jo,  and  ohe, 
is  common. 

Exc.  6.  Greek  words  retain  their  original  quantities,  and  hence, 
in  many  Greek  words,  a  vowel  is  long,  though  immediately  followed 
by  another  vowel ;  as, 

der ,  Achaia ,  Acheloiis ,  dia ,  eos ,  Laertes ,  and  Greek  words  having  in  the  orig¬ 
inal  a  long  e  or  o  (»  or  a.)  See  also  §  293,  3. 

(1.)  Words  which,  in  Greek,  are  written  with  ei  («)  before  a  vowel,  and  in 
Latin  with  a  single  e  or  i,  have  the  e  or  i  long;  as,  AEneas ,  Alexandria ,  Cassio- 
pea ,  Clio,  Darius ,  eleyia ,  Galatea ,  Medea ,  Mausoleum ,  Peneldpea ,  Thalia ,  Atrides. 

Hence,  most  adjectives  in  ews,  formed  from  Greek  proper  names,  have  the  e 
long ;  as,  Cythereus ,  Peldpeus ;  and  the  e  remains  long  when  ei'  is  restored ;  as, 
Peldpeia. 

Exc.  Academia ,  chorea ,  Malea,  platea,  and  some  patronymics  and  patrials 
in  eis ;  as,  Nereis,  have  the  penult  common. 

(2.)  Greek  genitives  in  eos ,  and  accusatives  in  ea,  from  nominatives  in  eus , 
generally  shorten  the  e ;  as,  Orpheos,  Orphea ; — but  the  e  is  sometimes  length¬ 
ened  by  the  Ionic  dialect;  as,  Cepheos,  Ilionea. 

(3.)  Greek  words  in  ais,  ois,  aius,  eius ,  oius ,  aon,  and  ion,  generally  lengthen 
the  first  vowel ;  as,  Nais,  Minois ,  Grains,  Nereius,  Mininus,  Machaon,  Ixion. 
But  Thebais,  Svndis,  Phaon,  Deucalion,  Pygmalion,  and  many  others,  shorten 
the  former  vowel. 

Note  1.  Greek  words  in  aon  and  ion,  with  o  short  in  the  genitive,  have  the 
penult  long;  but  with  o  long  in  the  genitive,  they  have  it  short;  as,  Amythdony 
-adnis;  Deucalion ,  -onis. 


§  283.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — GENERAL  RULES.  321 

Note  2.  In  Greek  proper  names  in  eus  (gen.  eos),  as  Orpheus ,  the  eu  in  the 
nominative  is  always  a  diphthong  in  the  original,  and,  with  very  few  excep¬ 
tions,  in  the  Latin  poets. 

II.  A  diphthong  is  long ;  as,  aurum ,  farms ,  Euboea ,  Pom¬ 
peius,  Orpheu .  Thus, 

Infernique  lSLcus,  jEaaeque  insula  Circae.  Virg.  A.  8,  386. 

ThSsaiiros  ignotum  argenti  pondus  et  auri.  Id.  A.  1,  359. 

Harpy  iaque  colunt  dlia,  Phineia  postquam.  Id.  A.  3,  212. 

Exc.  1.  Prce,  in  composition,  is  short  before  a  vowel ;  as,  prceustus , 
prceacutus.  Thus, 

Nec  tota  tamen  ille  prior  praeunte  carina.  Virg.  A.  5,  186. 

In  Statius,  and  Sidonius  Apollinaris,  it  is  found  long. 

Exc.  2.  A  diphthong  at  the  end  of  a  word,  when  the  next  word 
begins  with  a  vowel,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

Insula  Ionio  in  magno,  quas  dira  Celaeno.  Virg.  A.  3,  211. 

Exc.  3.  The  diphthongs  consisting  of  u  followed  by  a  vowel  are  either  long 
or  short;  the  two  vowels  thus  combined  being  subject  to  the  same  rules  of 
quantity,  as  their  final  vowel  would  be  if  standing  alone;  as,  qua ,  qui ,  quorum , 
quia,  quibus ,  quatio ,  queror ,  cequdr ,  lingua ,  sanguis. 

III.  A  syllable  formed  by  contraction  is  long ;  as, 

alius  for  aliius;  cogo  for  cdago ;  nil  for  nihil;  junior  for  juvenior .  Thus, 

Tityre  coge  pecus,  tu  post  carecta  latebas.  Virg.  E.  3,  20. 

IV.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  two  consonants,  a  double 
consonant,  or  the  letter  j,  is  long  by  position  ;  as,  arma ,  bellum , 
axis ,  gaza ,  major .  Thus, 

PascZre  oportet  oves  deductum  dicere  carmen.  Virg.  E.  6,  5. 

Nec  myrtus  vincet  corylos  ;  nec  laurea  Phoebi.  Id.  E.  7,  64. 

At  nobis,  Pax  alma,  veni,  spicamque  teneto.  Tibuli.  1,  10,  67. 

Rara  juvant:  primis  sic  major  gratia  pomis.  Mart.  4,  29,  3. 

Note  1.  A  vowel  (other  than  i)  before  j  is  in  reality  lengthened  by  forming 
a  diphthong  with  it,  since  i  and  j  are  in  fact  but  one  letter.  Thus  major  is 
equivalent  to  mai'-or,  which  would  be  pronounced  md'-yor.  See  §  9,  1. 

Exc.  1.  The  compounds  of  jugum  have  i  short  before  j  ;  as,  biju¬ 
gus ,  quadrijugus.  Thus, 

Interea  bijugis  infert  se  Lucagus  albis.  Virg.  A.  10,  575. 

Remark.  The  vowel  is  long  by  position,  when  either  one  or  both 
of  the  consonants  is  in  the  same  word  with  it ;  but  when  both  stand 
at  the  beginning  of  the  following  word,  the  vowel  is  either  long  or 
short ;  as, 

Tolle  moras;  semper  nocuit  differre  paratis.  Lucan.  1,  281. 

Ferte  citi  ferrum;  date  tela;  scandite  muros.  Virg.  A.  9,  37. 

Ne  tamen  ignoret ,  quae  sit  sententia  scripto.  Ovid. 

Note  2.  A  short  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word,  before  an  initial  double  conso¬ 
nant  or  j  in  the  following  word,  is  not  lengthened. 

Note  3.  In  the  comic  poets  a  vowel  frequently  remains  short  though  fol¬ 
lowed  by  two  consonants,  especially  if  only  one  of  them  is  in  the  same  word. 


322 


PROSODY. — QUANTITY - SPECIAL  RULES. 


§284 


Exc.  2.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  a  mute  followed  by  a 
liquid,  is  common ;  as,  agris ,  pharetra ,  volucris ,  poplites,  cochlea . 
Thus, 

Et  primo  similis  vtil&cri,  mox  vera  vdlucris.  Ovid.  M.  13.  607. 

Natum  ante  ora  patris ,  patrem  qui  obtruncat  ad  aras.  Virg.  A.  2,  663. 

Nox  tSnSbras  profert,  Phoebus  fugat  inde  tinS.br as.  Ovid. 

Rem.  1.  If  the  vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid  is  naturally  long,  it  continues 
so ;  as,  salubris ,  ambulacrum. 

Rem.  2.  In  compound  words,  of  which  the  former  part  ends  with  a  mute,  and 
the  latter  begins  with  a  liquid,  a  short  vowel  before  the  mute  is  made  long  by 
position ;  as,  abluo ,  obruo ,  sublevo ,  quamdbrem. 

Rem.  3.  A  mute  and  liquid  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  seldom  lengthen  the 
short  vowel  of  the  preceding  word,  except  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot ;  as, 

Terras^wc  tractusque  m&ris  coelumque  profundum.  Virg.  E.  4,  51. 

Rem.  4.  In  Latin  words,  only  the  liquids  l  and  r  following  a  mute  render 
the  preceding  short  vowel  common ;  but,  in  words  ofw  Greek_  origin,  m  and  n 
after  a  mute  have  the  same  effect,  as  in  Tecmessa ,  Prdcne,  Cgcnus. 


SPECIAL  PULES. 

EIPST  AND  MIDDLE  SYLLABLES. 

I.  DERIVATIVE  WORDS. 

§  284.  Derivative  words  retain  the  quantity  of  their  primi¬ 
tives  ;  as, 

by  conjugation,  amo,  a  mat,  amabat,  amavi,  a  matus,  etc. ;  by  declension,  amor, 
amoris,  amori ,  amoribus,  etc. ;  so,  animal,  animatus,  from  anima ;  gemebundus, 
from  gemere ;  familia,  from  famulus;  maternus,  from  mater  ;  propinquus,  from 
prope. 

Note  1.  Ldr,  par ,  sal ,  and  pes  in  declension  shorten  the  vowel  of  the  nomi¬ 
native  ;  as,  sdlis ,  pedis,  etc. 

Note  2.  The  vowel  of  the  primitive  is  sometimes  lengthened  or  shortened  in 
the  derivative  by  the  addition  or  removal  of  a  consonant. 

Bem.  1.  Derivatives  from  increasing  nouns  of  the  second  or  third 
declension  agree  in  quantity  with  the  increment  of  their  primitives ; 
as, 

pueritia ,  from  pueri;  virgineus ,  from  virginis;  saluber,  from  salutis. 

Bem.  2.  In  verbs,  the  vowels  of  the  derived  tenses  and  of  deriva¬ 
tive  words  agree  in  quantity  with  the  verbal  root  from  which  they 
are  formed ;  as, 

movebam,  movebo,  moveam ,  mo  verem,  move,  movere ,  movens,  movenrfas, 
from  mdv,  the  root  of  the  present,  with  6  short ; — moveram,  moverim ,  movissem. 
mo  vero,  movisse,  from  mdv,  the  root  of  the  perfect,  with  6  long;  moturws  ana 
motws ; — moto,  motio,  mot  or,  and  motws,  -us,  from  mot,  the  root  of  the  supine, 
with  o  also  long. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  Sdlutum  and  volutum  from  solvo  and  volvo  have  the  first  syllable 
short,  as  if  from  sdluo,  vdluo.  So,  from  gigno  come  genui,  genitum,  as  if  from 
gdno;  and  pdtui,  from  pdtis  sum  (possum). 


§  284.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — DERIVATIVE  WORDS.  323 


(b.)  The  a  in  da,  imperative  of  do,  is  long,  though  short  in  other  parts  of  the 
verb.  See  §  294,  2. 

(c.)  The  o  in  pdsui  and  pdsitum  is  short,  though  long  in  pono. 

Exc.  1.  Perfects  and  supines  of  two  syllables  have  the  first 
syllable  long,  even  when  that  of  the  present  is  short ;  as, 

veni,  vldi,  feci,  from  venio,  video,  f  ado ;  casum, ,  motum,  visum,  from  cado, 
moveo,  video. 

Note  3.  Such  perfects  are  supposed  to  have  been  formed  either  by  the  con¬ 
traction  of  reduplicated  syllables,  as  venio,  perf.  veveni ,  by  syncope  veeni,  by 
erasis  veni,  or  by  the  omission  of  a  consonant,  as  video,  perf.  vidsi,  by  syncope 
vidi,  the  vowel  retaining  the  quantity  which  it  had  by  position. 

Note  4.  The  long  vowel  of  dissyllabic  supines  probably  arose  in  like  man¬ 
ner  from  syncope  and  contraction;  as,  video,  vidsum,  by  syncope  visum ;  moveo, 
mdvitum,  by  syncope  mditum ,  by  contraction  motum. 

(1.)  (a.)  These  seven  perfects  have  the  first  syllable  short : — bibi, 
dedi ,  fidi,  (from  findo),  scidi,  steti,  stiti ,  tuli.  So  also  perculi,  from 
percello. 

( b .)  The  first  syllable  is  also  short  before  a  vowel  (§  283,  I.);  as,  rui. 

(2.)  ( a .)  These  ten  supines  have  the  first  syllable  short : — citum, 
(from  cieo),  datum,  itum,  litum,  quitum,  ratum ,  rutum,  satum,  situm, 
and  statum. 

(b.)  So,  also,  had  the  obsolete  futum,  from  fu6,  whence  comes  futurus . 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  Reduplicated  polysyllabic  perfects  have  the  first  two 
syllables  short ;  as, 

cecidi,  cecini,  tetigi,  didici,  from  cado,  cano,  tango,  and  disco. 

(b.)  The  second  syllable  of  reduplicated  perfects  is  sometimes  made  long  by 
position ;  as,  momordi,  tetendi. —  Cecidi  from  ccedo,  and  pepedi  from  pedo,  retain¬ 
ing  the  quantity  of  their  first  root  also  have  the  second  syllable  long. 

Exc.  3.  Desiderative  verbs  in  urio  have  the  u  short,  though,  in  the  third 
root  of  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  formed,  it  is  long;  as,  ccendturio  from 
ccenatu,  the  third  root  of  cceno.  So  parturio,  esurio,  nupturio. 

Exc.  4.  Frequentative  verbs,  formed  from  the  third  root  of  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation,  have  the  i  short;  as,  clamito,  volito.  See  §  187,  II.  1. 

Exc.  5.  A  few  other  derivatives  deviate  from  the  quantity  of  their  primi¬ 
tives. 


1.  Some  have  a  long  vowel  from  a  short  one  in  the  primitive. 
Such  are, 


Deni,  from  decem. 
Fomes  and  )  from 
Fomentum,  }  foveo. 
Humanus,  from  homo. 
Laterna,  from  lateo, 

Lit  era  from  lino. 

Lex  (legis),  from  lego. 

2. 

Such  are, 

DIcax,  from  dico. 

Dux  (ducis),  from  duco. 
Fides,  from  fido. 

Labo,  from  labor,  dep.  v. 
Lucerna,  from  luceo. 


Mobilis,  from  moveo. 
Persona,  from  persono. 
Regula  and  )  from 
Rex  (regis),  j  rego. 
Secius,  from  secus. 
Sedes,  from  sedeo. 
Semen,  from  sero. 


Stipendium,  from  stips 
(stipis). 

Suspicio,  onis,  from  sus¬ 
picor. 

Tegula,  from  tego. 


one  in  the  primitive. 

Sagax,  from  sagio. 

Sopor,  from  sopio. 
Vadum,  from  vado. 

Voco,  from  vox  (vocis.) 


Some  have  a  short  vowel  from  a  long 


Molestus,  from  moles. 
Nato,  from  natu.  sup. 
Noto,  from  notu.  sup. 
odium,  from  odi. 
Quasillus,  from  qualus. 


324 


PHOSODY. — QUANTITY — COMPOUND  WOED8.  §  285. 


Note  1.  Disertus  comes  regularly  (by  syncope)  from  dissertus ,  the  prefix  dis 
being  short,  §  299,  1.  Cf.  dirimo  and  diribeo ,  where  s  is  changed  to  r.  See  §  196, 

(M  2. 

Note  2.  Some  other  words  might,  perhaps,  with  propriety  be  added  to  these 
lists ;  but,  in  regard  to  the  derivation  of  most  of  them,  grammarians  are  not 
entirely  agreed. 

Remark  1.  Some  of  these  irregularities  seem  to  have  arisen  from  the  influ¬ 
ence  of  syncope  and  crasis.  Thus  mobilis  may  have  been  mdvibilis ;  motum , 
mdvitum ,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  Sometimes  the  vowel  in  the  derived  word  being  naturally  short,  is 
restored  to  its  proper  quantity  by  removing  one  of  the  consonants  which,  in 
the  primitive,  made  it  long  by  position;  as,  nux ,  nucis.  So,  when  the  vowel  of 
the  primitive  is  naturally  long,  but  has  been  made  short  before  another  vowel, 
it  is  sometimes  restored  to  its  original  quantity  by  the  insertion  of  a  consonant ; 
as,  hibernus ,  from  hiems. 

Rem.  3.  The  first  syllable  in  liquidus  is  supposed  to  be  common,  as  coming 
either  from  liquor  or  liqueo ;  as, 

Crassaque  conveniant  liquidis ,  et  liquida  crassis.  Lucr.  4, 1255. 


II.  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

§  285.  1.  Compound  words  retain  the  quantity  of  the  words 
which  compose  them ;  as, 

def  ero ,  of  de  and  f  ero ;  ddoro,  of  ad  and  oro.  So  abdrior ,  amoveo,  circumeo , 
cdmedo ,  enitor ,  produco ,  suborno, 

2.  The  change  of  a  vowel  or  a  diphthong  in  forming  the  compound 
does  not  alter  its  quantity  ;  as, 

concido ,  from  cado ;  concido ,  from  ccedo;  erigo ,  from  re  go ;  recludo ,  from  claudo ; 
iniquus ,  from  cequus. 

Exc.  1.  A  long  syllable  in  the  simple  word  becomes  short  in  the  following 
compounds: — agnitus  and  cognitus ,  from  notus;  dejero  and  pejero,  from  juro; 
hddie ,  from  hoc  die :  nihilum  and  nihil,  from  hilum ;  causidicus ,  and  other  com¬ 
pounds  ending  in  dicus ,  from  dico. 

Exc.  2.  Imbecillus ,  from  bacillum ,  has  the  second  syllable  long.  The  partici¬ 
ple  ambitus  has  the  penult  long  from  itum,  but  the  nouns  ambitus  and  ambitio 
follow  the  rule. 

Exc.  3.  Innuba ,  pronuba ,  and  subnuba,  from  nubo,  have  u  short ;  but  in  con- 
nubium ,  it  is  common. 

Exc.  4.  0  final,  in  the  compounds  of  do  and  sto,  is  common,  though  long  in 
the  simple  verbs.  §  294,  (a.) 

Note  1.  Prepositions  of  one  syllable,  which  end  in  a  vowel,  are  long  (§  294, 
( a .);  those  which  end  in  a  single  consonant  are  short  (§  299, 1.) — Tra  from 
trans  is  long;  as,  trado,  traduco. 

Exc.  5.  Pro ,  in  the  following  compounds,  is  short  -.—profanus,  prdfaii , 
prdfecto,  profestus,  proficiscor ,  profiteor,  profugio ,  prdfugus,  procella,  prd- 
fundus,  prdnepos,  prdneptis ,  and  jyrotervus.  It  is  common  in  procuro,  profundo, 
propago,  p'i'opello ,  and  propino. — Respecting  prae  in  composition  before  a  vowel, 
see  §  283,  II.  Exc.  1. 

Rem.  1.  The  Greek  preposition  pro  (before)  is  short;  as,  prdpheta.  In  prol - 
dgus,  propola,  and  propino,  it  is  common. 

Rem.  2.  The  inseparable  prepositions  di  (for  dis)  and  se  are  long ; 

as, 

diduco,  separo.  Respecting  disertus,  see  §  284,  Exc.  5,  2,  N.  1. 


§  286.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS.  325 


Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  inseparable  preposition  re  or  red  is  short ;  as, 

remitto ,  refero ,  redamo .  * 

(A)  Re  is  sometimes  lengthened  in  religio ,  reliquia 3,  reliquus ,  reperit ,  retulit, 
repulit ,  recidit ,  reducere ,  where  some  editors  double  the  consonant  following  re. 
Cf.  §  307,  2.  In  the  impersonal  verb  refert,  re  is  long,  as  coming  from  res. 

Rem.  4.  A  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  long ; 
the  other  vowels  are  short ;  as, 

malo,  quapropter,  trado,  ( trans  do);  nefas,  valedico,  hujuscemddi ;  biceps,  tri¬ 
dens,  omnipotens,  significo ;  hodie,  quandoquidem,  philosdphus  ;  ducenti ,  Idcuples , 
Trojugena ;  Polydoi'us ,  Eurypylus,  Thrasybulus. 

Exc.  1.  A.  A  is  short  in  quasi,  eadem,  when  not  an  ablative,  and  in  some 
Greek  compounds ;  as,  catapulta,  hexameter. 

Exc.  2.  E.  E  is  long  in  credo,  nemo ,  nequam ,  nequaquam,  nequidquam,  ne¬ 
quis,  nequitia;  memet,  mecum,  tecum ,  secum,  sese,  vecors,  vesanus,  veneficus ,  and 
videlicet; — also  in  words  compounded  with  se  for  sex  or  semi ;  as,  sedecim , 
semestris,  semddius ;  but  in  selibra  it  is  found  short  in  Martial. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  first  e  in  videlicet,  as  in  vide,  is  sometimes  made  short. 
See  §  295,  Exc.  3. 

(b.)  E  is  common  in  some  verbs  compounded  with  fdcio;  as,  liquefacio , 
patefacio,  rarefacio,  tabefacio,  tepefacio. 

Exc.  3.  1.  (1.)  /  is  long  in  those  compounds  in  which  the  first  part  is  de¬ 
clined,  (§  296;)  as,  quidam,  quivis,  quilibet,  quantivis,  quanticumque ,  tantidem, 
unicuique,  eidem,  reipublicce,  utrique. 

(2.)  /is  also  long  in  those  compounds  which  may  he  separated  without  al¬ 
tering  the  sense,  (§296;)  as,  ludirnagister,  siquis,  agricultura. 

(3.)  /,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  sometimes  made  long 
by  contraction ;  as,  tibicen  for  tibiicen,  from  tibia  and  cano.  See  §  283,  III. 

(4.)  /is  long  in  bigce,  quadrigae,  ilicet ,  scilicet . 

(5.)  In  idem,  when  masculine,  i  is  long;  but  when  neuter,  it  is  short.  The  t 
of  ubique  and  utrobique ,  the  second  in  ibidem,  and  the  first  in  nimirum,  are  long. 
In  ubicumque,  as  in  ubi ,  i  is  common. 

(6.)  Compounds  of  dies  have  the  final  i  of  the  former  part  long;  as,  biduum , 
triduum,  meridies,  quotidie,  quotidianus ,  pridie,  postridie. 

Note  3.  In  Greek  words,  i,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound,  is  short ; 
as,  Callimachus;  unless  it  comes  from  the  diphthong  ei  («),  or  is  made  long  or 
common  by  position. 

Exc.  4.  O.  (1.)  In  compounds,  the  final  o  of  coniro ,  intro,  retro,  and  quando 
(except  quandoquidem ,)  is  long;  as,  controversia,  introduco,  retrocedo,  quandoque . 
O  is  long  also  in  aUbqui  (-quin),  and  utroque. 

(2.)  O  is  long  in  the  compounds  of  quo  and  eo;  as,  quomddo,  quocumque,  quo¬ 
nam,  quolibet,  quominus,  quocirca,  quovis,  quoque  (i.  e.  et  quo) ;  eodem,  eme  ;  but 
in  the  conjunction  quoque,  it  is  short. 

(3.)  Greek  words  which  are  written  with  an  omega  (a)  have  the  o  long;  as, 
geometra,  Minotaurus ,  lagopus. 

Exc.  5.  U.  //is  long  in  Jupiter  (Jdvts  pater),  and  judico  ( jus  dico). 

III.  INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS. 

§286.  l.  A  noun  is  said  to  increase ,  when,  in  any  of  its  cases, 
it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  nominative  singular;  as,  pax,  pads; 
sermo,  sermonis.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  case  of  a  noun  is 
equal  to  that  of  its  additional  syllables. 

28 


326  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS.  §  287. 


2.  Nouns  in  general  have  but  one  increment  in  the  singular,  but 
iter ,  supellex,  compounds  of  caput  ending  in  ps,  and  sometimes  jecur , 
have  two  increments ;  as, 

iter ,  i-tin-i-ris ;  supellex ,  su-pel-lec-ti-lis  ;  anceps,  an-dp-i-tis ;  jecur ,  je  cin- 
6-ris. 

Remark.  The  double  increase  of  iter,  etc.,  in  the  singular  number  arises 
from  their  coming  from  obsolete  nominatives,  containing  a  syllable  more  than 
those  now  in  use ;  as,  itiner,  etc. 

3.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  the  third  declension  have  one 
increment  more  than  the  genitive  singular ;  as, 

rex,  Gen.  re-gis,  D.  and  Ab.  reg-i-bus. 

sermo,  -  ser-mo-nis , - ser-mon-i-bus. 

iter,  - i-tin-e-ris,  -  it-i-ner-i-bus. 

4.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  never  considered  as  the  incre¬ 
ment.  If  a  word  has  but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ;  if  two,  the 
antepenult  is  called  the  first,  and  the  penult  the  second ;  and  if  three, 
the  syllable  before  the  antepenult  is  called  the  first,  the  antepenult 
the  second,  and  the  penult  the  third  increment ;  as, 

1.  12  12123 

ser-mo,  ser-mo-nis ,  ser-mon-i-bus ;  i-ter,  i-tin-e-ris,  it-i-ner-i-bus. 

5.  In  the  third  declension,  the  quantity  of  the  first  increment  is  the 
same  in  all  the  other  cases  as  in  the  genitive  singular ;  as, 

sermonis,  sermoni,  sermonem,  sermone,  sermones,  sermonum,  sermonibus .  Bobus, 
or  bubus,  from  bos,  bdvis,  is  lengthened  by  contraction  from  bdvibus. 

Note.  As  adjectives  and  participles  are  declined  like  nouns,  the  same  rules 
of  increment  apply  to  all  of  them ;  and  so  also  to  pronouns. 


INCREMENTS  OF  THE  SINGULAR  NUMBER. 

OF  THE  FIRST,  FOURTH,  AND  FIFTH  DECLENSIONS. 

§287.  1.  When  nouns  of  the  first,  fourth,  and  fifth  declensions  in¬ 

crease  in  the  singular  number,  the  increment  consists  of  a  vowel  before  the 
final  vowel,  and  its  quantity  is  determined  by  the  first  general  rule  with  its  ex¬ 
ceptions,  §  283, 1. 

Thus,  aura,  gen.  aurai,  §  283,  I.  Exc.  3,  (a.):  fructus,  dat.  fructui,  §  283,  1, 
(a.):  dies,  gen.  diei,  §  283,  1.  Exc;  2,  (a.) 


INCREMENTS  OF  THE  SECOND  DECLENSION. 

2.  The  increments  of  the  second  declension  in  the  singular 
number  are  short ;  as, 

gener,  generi ;  sdtur,  saturi  ;  tener,  teneri ;  vir,  viri.  Thus, 

Ne,  puSri,  ne  tanta  &nlmis  assuescite  bella.  Virg.  A.  6,  833. 

Monstra  sinunt;  ggnSros  externis  affore  ab  oris.  Id.  A.  7,  270. 

Exc.  The  increment  of  Iber  and  Celtiber  is  long.  For  that  of  genitives  in 
ins ,  see  §  283,  Exc.  4. 


§  287.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS.  327 


INCREMENTS  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

3.  The  increments  of  the  third  declension  and  singular  num¬ 
ber  in  a  and  o  are  long ;  those  in  e ,  i,  u,  and  y,  are  short ;  as, 

animal,  animalis;  audax,  audacis;  sermo ,  sermonis;  ferox,  ferocis;  opus , 
dperis ;  celer ,  celeris ;  miles,  militis ;  supplex,  supplicis  ;  murmur ,  murmuris ; 
dux ,  ducis ;  chlamys ,  chlamydis;  Styx,  Siygis.  Thus, 

PronSLque  cum  spectent  animalia  cetera  terram.  Ovid.  M.  1,  84. 

Haec  tum  multiplici  populos  sermone  replebat.  Virg.  A.  4,  189. 

Incumbent  genSris  lapsi  sarcire  ruinas.  Id.  G.  4,  249. 

Qualem  virgineo  demessum  pollice  florem.  Id.  A.  11,  68. 

Adsplce,  ventosi  ceciderunt  murmuris  aurae.  Id.  E.  9,  58. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

1.  ( a .)  Masculines  in  al  and  ar  (except  Car  and  Nar )  increase 
short ;  as,  Annibal ,  Anmbdlis  ;  Amilcar ,  Amilcdris . 

( b .)  Par  and  its  compounds,  and  the  following — anas,  mas ,  vas  {vadis),  bac¬ 
car ,  hepar,  jubar,  lar,  nectar,  and  sal — also  increase  short. 

2.  A,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it,  is 
short;  as,  daps,  ddpis ;  Arabs ,  Arabis. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  a  and  as  ( adis ,  anis ,  or  atis)  increase  short ;  as, 
lampas,  lampadis  ;  Me  las,  Meldnis;  poema,  poematis. 

4.  The  following  in  ax  increase  short: — abax ,  anthrax ,  Arctophylax ,  Atax, 
Atrax,  climax,  cdlax ,  cdrax,  and  nycticorax,  dropax,  fax,  harpax,  panax,  smilax, 
and  styrax. — The  increment  of  Syphax  is  doubtful. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  O. 

1.  0,  in  the  increment  of  neuter  nouns,  is  short;  as, 

marmor ,  marmdris ;  corpus,  corporis;  ebur,  eboris.  But  os  (the  mouth),  and 
the  neuter  of  comparatives,  like  their  masculine  and  feminine,  increase  long. 
The  increment  of  ador  is  common. 

2.  0  is  short  in  the  increment  of  Greek  nouns  in  o  or  on,  which, 
in  the  oblique  cases,  have  omicron,  but  long  in  those  which  have 
omega;  as, 

Aedon,  Aeddnis;  Agamemnon,  Agamemndnis : — Plato ,  Platonis;  Sinon ,  Sinonis; 
Sicyon,  Sicyonis.  Sidon,  Orion,  and  AEgceon,  have  the  increment  common. 

3.  (a.)  In  the  increment  of  gentile  nouns  in  o  or  on,  whether 
Greek  or  barbaric,  o  is  generally  short ;  as, 

Macedo,  Mdceddnis.  So,  Amazones ,  A6nes,  Myrmiddnes ,  Santdnes,  Saxdnes, 
Senones,  Teutdnes ,  etc. 

( b .)  But  the  following  have  o  long: — Eburones,  Lacbnes ,  Iones ,  Nasamones , 
Suessones  (or  - iones ),  Vettones,  Burgundiones.  Britones  has  the  o  common. 

4.  Greek  nouns  in  or  increase  short ;  as,  Hector,  Hectoris  ;  rhetor, 
rhetoris;  Agenor,  Agenoris. 

5.  Compounds  of  pus,  (Trove),  as  tripus,  polypus,  (Edlpus,  and  also  arbor , 
memor,  bos,  compos,  impos,  and  lepus,  increase  short. 

6.  0,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it,  is 
short;  as, 


328  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS.  §  288. 


scrobs ,  scrtibis ;  inops,  indpis ;  Ddldpes.  But  it  is  long  in  the  increment  of 
cercops ,  Cyclops ,  and  hydrops. 

7.  The  increment  of  Allobrox,  Cappadox ,  and  prascox,  is  also  short. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  Nouns  in  eny  enis  (except  Hymen),  lengthen  their  increment; 
as,  Siren ,  Sirenis .  So,  Anienis ,  Nerienis ,  from  ^4m‘o  and  Nerio,  or 
rather  from  the  obsolete  Anien  and  Nerienes . 

2.  Hares ,  Idcuples ,  mansues ,  merces ,  and  — also  /5er,  rer,  /ea:,  rea:,  d/ec  or 

d/ex  (7id/-)  narthex  and  vervex— plebs  and  seps — increase  long. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  es  and  er  (except  oer  and  cether)  increase  long ; 
as,  magnes ,  magnetis  ;  crater ,  crateris. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  Nouns  and  adjectives  in  increase  long ;  as,  victrix ,  victricis; 
felix ,  felicis. 

Exc.  Oz/tx,  C'zZ/x,  coxendix ,  filix,  fornix ,  hystrix ,  /drix,  mx,  j^ix,  sd/ix,  s/rix, 
and  rarely  sandix  or  sandyx ,  increase  short. 

2.  Fz&ex  and  the  following  nouns  in  is  increase  long : — c/is,  p/is,  /is,  ns,  We¬ 
sts,  Quiris,  and  Samnis.  The  increment  of  Psophis  is  common. 

3.  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  is  in  inis  increase  long ;  as,  deZ- 
delphinis ;  Salamis ,  Salaminis . 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

1.  Genitives  in  wdis,  wm,  and  utis ,  from  nominatives  in  ws,  have 
the  penult  long ;  as, 

palus,  paludis;  tellus ,  telluris;  virtus ,  virtutis.  But  intercus ,  Zfpws  and  p£eus, 
pecudis,  increase  short. 

2.  Twr,  /rwx,  (obs.),  Zmx,  and  Pollux ,  increase  long. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  Y. 

1.  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  is  in  pnis,  increase  long;  as,  7rd- 
chyn,  Trachynis . 

2.  The  increment  of  bombyx ,  Ceyx,  pn/ps,  and  mormyr ,  is  long;  that  of  i?e- 
&n/x  and  sandyx  is  common. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  PLURAL  NUMBER. 

§288.  l.  A  noun  in  the  plural  number  is  said  to  increase, 
when,  in  any  case,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  ablative  singular. 

Remark.  When  the  ablative  singular  is  wanting,  or  its  place  is  supplied  by 
a  form  derived  from  a  different  root,  an  ablative  may,  for  this  purpose,  be  as¬ 
sumed,  by  annexing  the  proper  termination  to  the  root  of  the  plural. 

2.  When  a  noun  increases  in  the  plural  number,  its  penult  is  called  the 
plural  increment;  as,  sa  in  musarum ,  wo  in  ddminorum,  pi  in  rupium  and 
iHpibus. 


§  289,  290.  prosody. — quantity — increment  of  verbs.  329 


3.  In  plural  increments,  a,  e ,  and  o,  are  long,  i  and  u  are  short ; 
as, 

bdnarum ,  animabus ,  rerum ,  rebus,  generorum ,  ambobus;  sermonibus ,  lacubus . 
Thus, 

Appia,  longarum ,  teritur,  regina  viarum.  Stat.  S.  2,  2, 12. 

Sunt  lacrymae  rerum ,  et  mentem  mortalia  tangunt.  Firg%  A.  1,  462. 

Atque  alii,  quorum  cdmoedia  prisca  virorum  est.  lior.  S.  1,  4,  2. 

Portubus  egredior,  ventisque  ferentibus  usus.  Ovid. 


IV.  INCREMENT  OF  VERBS. 


§289.  l.  A  verb  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  of  its  parts, 
it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present 
indicative  active ;  as,  das ,  da-tis ;  doces,  dd-ce-mus. 


2.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  part  of  a  verb  is  equal  to  that 
of  its  additional  syllables.  In  verbs,  as  in  nouns,  the  last  syllable  is 
never  considered  the  increment.  If  a  verb  has  but  one  increment,  it 
is  the  penult ;  and  this  first  increment,  through  all  the  variations  of 
the  verb,  except  in  reduplicated  tenses,  continues  equally  distant 
from  the  first  syllable.  The  remaining  increments  are  numbered 
successively  from  the  first ;  as, 

a-mas,  mo-nes,  au-dis, 


1 

a-ma-mus, 

1  2 

am-a-ba-mus, 
12  3 

am-a-v  e-ra-mus. 


1 

mo-ne-tur, 

1  2 

mon-e-re-tur, 
12  3 

mon-e-bim-I-ni. 


1 

au-dl-tis, 

1  2 

au-di-e-bas, 

12  3  4 
au-di-e-bam-I-ni. 


3.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  may  have  three  increments ;  in  the  passive,  it 
may  have  four. 

4.  In  determining  the  increments  of  deponent  verbs,  an  active 
voice,  formed  from  the  same  root,  may  be  supposed. 

1  12 

Thus  the  increments  of  lce-ta-tur,  lcet-a-ba-tur,  etc.,  are  reckoned  from  the 
supposed  verb  Iceto ,  Icetas. 

§290.  In  the  increments  of  verbs,  a ,  e,  and  o ,  are  long ; 
i  and  u  are  short ;  as, 


dinar  e,  mdnere ,  facitote ,  vdlumus ,  regebamini .  Thus, 

Et  cantare  pares,  et  respondere  pdruti.  Virg.  E.  7,  5. 

Sic  equidem  ducebam  animo,  rebarque  futurum.  Id.  A.  6,  690. 
Cumque  loqui  poterit,  matrem  facitote  salutet.  Ovid,  M.  9,  378. 
Scinditur  ineertum  studia  in  contraria  vulgus.  Virg .  A.  2,  39. 
Nos  numerus  sumus ,  et  fruges  consumere  nati.  Hor.  Ep.  1,  2,  27. 


(a.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 


The  first  increment  of  do  is  short ;  as,  damus ,  dabamus ,  daret ,  da¬ 
turus,  circumdare,  circumdabamus . 

28* 


330  PROSODY. - QUANTITY - INCREMENT  OF  VERBS.  §  290. 


(6.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  E  before  r  is  short  in  the  first  increment  of  all  the  present  and 
imperfect  tenses  of  the  third  conjugation,  and  in  the  second  increment 
in  beris  and  here  ;  as, 

regere  (infin.  and  imperat.),  regeris  or  regere  (pres.  ind.  pass.),  regerem  and 
rSgerer  (imp.  subj.);  amaberis,  amdbere  ;  m&neberis ,  monebere. 

Note  1.  In  velim ,  velis ,  etc.,  from  vdlo,  (second  person,  regularly  v6 lis,  by 
syncope  and  contraction  vis),  e  is  not  an  increment,  but  represents  the  root 
vowel  <5,  and  is  therefore  short;  §  284,  and  $  178,  1. 

2.  E  is  short  before  ram ,  rim ,  ro,  and  the  persons  formed  from 
them;  as, 

amaveram ,  amaverat ,  amaverim ,  m&nuerimus,  rexero ,  audiveritis . 

Note  2.  In  verbs  which  have  been  shortened  by  syncope  or  otherwise,  e  be¬ 
fore  r  retains  its  original  quantity;  as,  fleram ,  for  fleveram. 

For  the  short  e  before  runt ,  in  the  perfect  indicative,  as,  steterunt ,  see  Systole , 
$  307. 

(c.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  I  before  v  or  s,  in  tenses  formed  from  the  second  root,  is  long ; 

as, 

petivi, ''ttydivi,  quaesivit,  divisit,  audivimus,  divisimus,  audiveram . 

2.  I  is  long,  after  the  analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  in  the  final 
syllable  of  the  third  root  of  gaudeo ,  arcesso ,  divido,  facesso ,  lacesso , 
peto,  queer o,  recenseo  and  obliviscor  ;  as, 

gavisus,  arcessitus,  divisus,  facessitus,  lacessitus,  petitus,  quaesitus,  recensitus, 
oblitus;  gavisurus,  etc. 

3.  I  in  the  first  increment  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  except  in 
Xmus  of  the  perfect  indicative,  is  long ;  as, 

audire,  audirem ,  auditus ,  auditurus ,  pres,  venimus,  but  in  the  perfect  venimus . 
So  in  the  ancient  forms  in  ibam ,  ibo ,  of  the  fourth  conjugation;  as,  nutribat, 
lenibunt ;  and  also  in  ibam  and  ibo,  from  eo. 

Note  3.  When  a  vowel  follows,  the  i  is  short,  by  §  283;  as,  audiunt,  audie¬ 
bam. 

4.  /is  long  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  subjunctives  in  sim ,  sis, 
sit,  etc.,  (§  162,  1,);  as,  simus,  sitis,  velimus,  velitis ,  and  their  compounds;  as, 
possimus,  adsimus,  malimus ,  nolimus.  So  also  in  nolito,  nolite,  nolitote,  after  the 
analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

5.  /  in  ris,  rimus  aiyl  ritis,  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect  sub¬ 
junctive,  is  common ;  as, 

videris,  Mart., occideris,  Hor. ;  videritis  (Ovid),  dederitis  (Id.);  fecerimus  (Ca¬ 
tuli.),  egerimus  (Virg.) 

(fi.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

U  is  long  in  the  increment  of  supines,  and  of  participles  formed 
from  the  third  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 

secutus,  sdlutus ,  secuturus,  sdluturus. 


§291 


PROSODY. - QUANTITY - PENULTS. 


331 


RULES  FOR  THE  QUANTITY  OF  PENULTIMATE  AND  ANTEPE¬ 
NULTIMATE  SYLLABLES. 

I.  PENULTS. 

§291.  1.  Words  ending  in  acus,  icus ,  and  icum,  shorten  the 

penult;  as, 

amaracus ,  Aegyptiacus ,  rusticus ,  triticum,  viaticum . 

Except  Dacus,  meracus ,  dpacus;  amicus,  apricus,  ficus,  mendicus,  picus , 
posticus,  pudicus,  spicus,  umbilicus,  vicus. 

2.  Words  ending  in  abrum ,  ubrum ,  acrum ,  and  atrum,  lengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

candelabrum,  delubrum ,  lavacrum ,  veratrum. 

3.  Nouns  in  ca  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

dpdtheca,  cloaca,  lactuca,  lorica,  phoca. 

Except  alica ,  brassica,  dica,  fulica ,  mantica,  pedica,  pertica,  scutica,  phalarica , 
tunica,  vdmica ;  and  also  some  nouns  in  ica  derived  from  adjectives  in  icus ; 
as,  fabrica,  grammatica ,  etc.  So  manicce. 

4.  Patronymics  in  ades  and  ides  shorten  the  penult ;  as,  Atlantiades , 
Priamides. 

Except  those  in  ides  which  are  formed  from  nouns  in  eus  or  es  (#?);  as, 
Atrides,  from  Atreus;  Neoclides ,  from  Neocles ;  except,  also,  Amphiar aides, 
Belides,  Amyclides,  Lycurgides. 

5.  Patronymics  and  similar  words  in  ais ,  eis ,  and  ois ,  lengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

Achais,  Chryseis,  Minois.  Except  Phocais  and  Thebais.  The  penult  of  Ne¬ 
reis  is  common. 

6.  Words  in  do  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

vado,  cedo,  dulcedo,  formido,  rodo,  testudo.  Except  cado,  divido,  edo  (to  eat), 
comedo,  Macedo,  mdao ,  solido,  spado,  trepido.  Rudo  is  common. 

7.  Words  in  idus  shorten  the  penult ;  those  in  udus  lengthen  it; 
as, 

callidus,  herbidus,  limpidus ,  lividus,  perfidus ;  crudus,  ludus,  nudus ,  sudus,  udus. 
Except  Idus,  fidus,  infidus,  nidus,  sidus. 

8.  Nouns  in  ga  and  go  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

saga,  collega ,  auriga,  ruga;  imago,  caligo,  aerugo.  Except  caliga,  ossifraga, 
tdga,  plaga,  (a  region,  or  a  net),  fuga  and  its  compounds,  stega ,  ecloga,  ego, 
harpago,  ligo. 

9.  Words  in  le,  les ,  and  Us,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

crinale,  mantele,  ancile ;  ales,  miles ,  proles  ;  annalis,  crudelis ,  civilis,  curulis. — 
Except  male; — verbals  in  ilis  and  bilis;  as,  agilis ,  amabilis; — adjectives  in 
atilis;  as,  umbratilis ,; — and  also,  inddles,  soboles;  periscelis,  dapsilis,  gracilis , 
humilis ,  parilis,  similis,  sterilis,  mugilis,  strigilis. 

10.  Words  in  eius,  eia ,  elum ,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

phaselus,  querela,  prelum.  Except  gelus,  gelum,  scelus. 

11.  Diminutives  in  olus,  ola ,  olum ,  ulus ,  ula ,  ulum ,  also  words  in 


PROSODY. — QUANTITY — PENULTS. 


332 


§  291. 


ilus,  and  those  in  ulus ,  ula,  and  ulum ,  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

urceolus ,  filidla,  lectulus ,  ratiuncula ,  corculum ,  pabulum ;  rutilus ,  garrulus , 
fabula .  Except  asilus. 

12.  Words  in  ma  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

/ dma,  poema ,  rma,  pluma.  Except  anima ,  cdma,  decuma ,  lacrima ,  victima, 
hama. 

13.  A  vowel  before  final  men  or  mentum  is  Ion** :  as, 

levamen ,  gramen ,  crimen ,  flumen ,  jumentum ,  atramentum.  Except  tamen,  c6- 
lumen,  Hymen,  elementum ,  and  a  few  verbal  nouns  derived  from  verbs  of  the 
second  and  third  conjugations;  as ,  alimentum,  ddcumen  or  ddcumentum ,  emdlu- 
mentum ,  mdnumentum ,  regimen ,  specimen ,  tegimen ,  etc. 

14.  Words  ending  in  imns  shorten  the  penult;  as, 

animus ,  decimus ,  finitimus ,  fortissimus ,  maximus.  Except  bimus,  limus ,  mimus , 
Opimus,  quadrimus ,  simus,  trimus,  and  two  superlatives,  Imus  and  primus. 

Note.  When  an  adjective  ends  in  wraws  for  mws,  the  quantity  remains  the 
same ;  as,  decumus ,  optumus,  maxumus,  for  decimus,  etc. 

15.  A,  e,  o,  and  w,  before  final  mns  and  mi*m,  are  long;  as, 

ramus,  remus ,  extremus,  promus,  dumus,  pomum,  vdlemum.  Except  atomus , 
balsamum,  cinndmum ,  domus ,  glomus,  humus,  postumus ,  thalamus,  tomus ,  calamus, 
nemus. 

16.  (a.)  Words  in  na,  ne,  m,  and  nis,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

arena,  carina ,  matrona,  luna,  mane,  septeni,  octoni,  inanis ,  finis,  immunis. 
Except  advena,  cottana,  ptisana,  mina,  gena,  bene,  sine,  canis,  cinis,  juvenis ;  and 
the  following  in  im, — bucdna ,  domina,  fiscina,  femina,  fuscina,  lamina,  machina , 
pagina,  patina,  sarcina,  tibicina,  trutina :  and  in  plur.  apinae,  minae ,  nundinae. 
So  compounds  of  geno;  as,  indigena. 

(b.)  Verbs  in  ino  and  mor  shorten  the  penult;  as, 

destino,  fascino,  inquino,  sino,  criminor.  Except  festino,  propino ,  sagino,  6pi- 
nor,  and  the  compounds  of  clino ;  as,  inclino,  etc. 

17.  (a.)  Adjectives  in  inus ,  when  they  express  time,  or  indicate  a 
material  or  an  inanimate  substance,  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

crastinus,  diutinus,  pristinus,  perendinus  :  f  aginus,  crdcinus,  hyacinthinus ,  ada¬ 
mantinus ,  crystallinus,  oleaginus,  bombycinus.  Except  matutinus,  repentinus,  ves¬ 
pertinus. 

(5.)  Other  adjectives  and  words  in  inus  and  in  inum  iengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

caninus,  binus,  peregrinus,  mdrinus,  clandestinus,  supinus:  linum.  Except 
dcinus,  asinus,  coccinus,  cominus,  eminus,  cophinus,  ddminus ,  facinus,  f  atidnus , 
protinus,  sinus,  terminus,  geminus,  circinus,  minus,  vaticinus ,  succinum ,  fascinum. 

18.  A,  e ,  o,  and  u ,  before  final  nus  and  num ,  are  long;  as, 

urbanus,  serenus,  patronus,  pronus,  munus,  tribunus,  f  anum,  venenum ,  donum . 
Except  anus,  an  old  woman,  galbanus,  manus ,  Oceanus ,  platanus,  ebenus,  genus , 
limigenus,  penus,  tenus,  Venus,  Onus,  bonus ,  sonus ,  thronus ;  laganum ,  peuceda¬ 
num,  pdpanum ,  tympanum,  abrdionum. 

19.  Words  ending  in  ba,  bo,  pa,  and  po,  shorten  the  penult;  as, 

faba,  juba,  syllaba ;  bibo,  cubo ,  prdbo ;  alapa,  lupa,  scapha  ;  crepo,  partidpo . 
Except  gleba,  scriba,  bubo,  glubo,  libo,  nubo ,  scribo,  sipho,  cepa,  cupa ,  papa,  pupa , 
ripa,  scOpa,  stupa ;  capo,  repo,  stipo. 


§291. 


PROSODY. — QUANTITY - PENULTS. 


333 


20.  Words  in  al,  ar,  are ,  and  am,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

tribunal ,  vectigal :  lupanar ,  pulvinar ;  altare ,  laqueare  ;  naris.  Except  animal , 
capital ,  cubital ,  ftfra/,  jubar ,  salar,  mare ,  bimaris ,  hilaris ,  cantharis ,  capparis , 
Icaris. 

21.  Before  final  ro  or  ror,  a  and  e  are  short ;  i,  o,  and  u,  are  long ; 
as, 

aro,  jraro,  y<?ro,  gero ,  sero,  celero,  tempero,  queror ;  miror,  spiro,  tiro ;  auctoro, 
ignoro ,  oro;  curo,  t/uro,  figuro;  Inror.  Except  declaro ,  jocro,  spero ;  foro ,  md- 
ror,  sOror,  vdro,  furo ,  saturo ;  and  derivatives  from  genitives  increasing  short ; 
as,  auguror,  decOro,  membro,  murmuro ,  etc.;  from  augur,  auguris ;  decus,  decO- 
ris,  etc. 

22.  Before  final  rus,  ra,  rum,  e  is  short ;  the  other  vowels  are 
long;  as, 

merum,  merus,  hedera,  serum,  ceterum;  carus,  mirus,  morus,  murus ,  gyrus ; 
ara,  spira,  ora,  natura ,  lorum . 

Except,  1.  austerus ,  galerus,  plerus,  procerus,  sincerus,  serus ,  severus,  verus, 
cratera ,  cera ,  pera,  panthera,  statera, 

Exc.  2.  barbarus ,  cammarus,  camurus ,  cantharus,  chdrus,  fdrus ,  helleborus, 
nurus,  dpiparus,  oviparus,  phosphdrus,  pirus ,  satyrus,  scarus,  sparus,  tartarus, 
tdrus ,  zephyrus ;  amphdra ,  anedra,  cithara,  hara,  lyra,  mdra,  purpura ,  philyra, 
pyra,  satira  ;  fdrum,  garum,  parum,  supparum. 

23.  Adjectives  in  osus  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

fumosus,  vinosus . 

24.  Nouns  in  etas  and  itas  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

pietas,  civitas,  bdnitas. 

25.  Adverbs  in  tim  lengthen  the  penult,  those  in  iter  and  iius 
shorten  it ;  as, 

statim,  (constantly),  virltim,  tributim;  acriter,  funditus.  Except  statim,  (im¬ 
mediately),  affatim. 

26.  (a.)  Words  in  ates ,  itis,  otis ,  and  in  ata ,  eta ,  ota,  uta ,  lengthen 
the  penult,  as, 

vates,  penates,  vitis,  mitis,  caryotis,  Icariotis ,  pirata,  meta,  poeta,  aluta,  cicuta. 
Except  sitis,  potis,  drapeta,  ndta ,  rdta. 

( b .)  Nouns  in  ita  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

amita,  navita ,  oi'bita,  semita.  Except  pituita. 

27.  Nouns  in  atum ,  itum ,  utum,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

lupatum,  aconitum ,  verutum.  Except  defrutum ,  pulpitum,  petoritum,  lutum 
(mud),  compitum. 

28.  Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  tus  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

barbatus,  gratus,  boletus,  facetus,  crinitus,  peritus,  aegrotus,  totus,  argutus,  hir¬ 
sutus.  Except  catus,  latus,  (-eris),  impetus,  metus,  vegetus,  vetus ;  anhelitus,  digi¬ 
tus,  gratuitus,  halitus ,  hospitus,  servitus,  spiritus;  antidotus,  ndtus,  qudtus ,  tdtus 
('so  great);  arbutus,  putus;  inclytus ;  and  derivatives  from  perfect  participles 
having  a  short  penult ;  as,  exercitus,  habitus. 

29.  A  penultimate  vowel  before  v  is  long ;  as, 

cldva,  dliva ,  dives ,  navis,  civis,  papaver,  pavo,  privo ,  ovum,  pravus ,  (cstivus , 
fugitivus.  Except  avis ,  brevis,  gravis,  levis,  dvis ;  cavo ,  gravo ,  juvo,  lavo ,  levo , 
Ovo ;  avus,  cavus,  favus,  ndvus,  favor,  pavor,  nOvem. 


334  PROSODY. — QUANTITY — ANTEPENULTS.  §  292,  293. 

30.  Words  ending  in  dex ,  dix ,  mex,  nix ,  lex ,  rear,  lengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

codex ,  judex;  lodix,  radix;  cimex ,  pumex;  junix;  ilex;  carex ,  murex. 
Except  ctf/ex,  rumex. 

II.  ANTEPENULTS. 

§  292.  1.  /is  short  in  diminutives  in  iculus  and  icellus  (a,  um), 

whether  nouns  or  adjectives ;  as, 

colliculus ,  dulciculus,  craticula ,  pellicula ,  mollicellus.  Except  words  in  which 
the  preceding  vowel  is  short;  as,  cuticula,  canicula:  or  in  which  i  is  long  in  the 
primitive ;  as,  cornicula ,  from  cornix ,  -zczs. 

2.  Numerals  in  grinta*,  ginta,  eni ,  and  esimus ,  lengthen  the  antepe¬ 
nult;  as, 

viginti,  quadraginta ,  triceni ,  quinquagesimus. 

3.  0  and  w  before  final  lentus  are  short ;  as, 
vindlentus,  fraudulentus ,  pulverulentus ,  truculentus. 

4.  A  vowel  before  final  nea,  neo,  ma,  mb,  mws,  mum,  is  long ;  as, 

aranea,  linea,  caneo ,  munia ,  punio,  Favonius ,  patrimonium.  Except  castanea , 
fiwea,  maneo,  mineo,  mdneo,  seneo,  teneo ,  ignominia,  luscinia,  venia,  lanio,  venio, 
ingenium,  genius,  senio ,  senium ;  words  in  cinium,  as,  lenocinium ;  and  deriva¬ 
tives  in  ombs,  when  o  in  the  root  of  the  primitive  is  short ;  as,  Agamemndnius, 
from  Agamemnon,  -onis. 

5.  Words  ending  in  ara>,  anus,  arium ,  erium1  orius,  orium ,  lengthen 
the  antepenult;  as, 

«reo,  cibarius,  plantarium ,  dicterium,  censorius,  tentorium.  Except  cdreo,  va¬ 
rius,  desiderium,  imperium,  magisterium,  ministerium. 

6.  Adjectives  in  aticus,  atilis ,  lengthen  the  antepenult ;  as, 
aquaticus ,  plumatilis.  Except  some  Greek  words  in  dtfcws ;  as,  grammaticus. 

7.  I  before  final  tudo  is  short ;  as, 
altitudo,  longitudo. 

8.  Verbals  in  bilis  lengthen  a  but  shorten  i  in  the  antepenult;  as, 
amabilis,  mirabilis ;  credibilis,  terribilis.  In  habilis,  b  belongs  to  the  root. 

9.  U  before  v  is  short,  (except  in  Juverna )  ;  as, 
juvenis,  juvenalis,  juvenilitas ,  fuvius,  diluvium . 

III.  PENULT  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 

§  293.  1.  Patrials  and  proper  names  of  more  than  two  sylla¬ 

bles,  found  in  the  poets  with  the  following  terminations,  shorten  the 


penult : — 
ba, 

de, 

0,6 

ges, 

dus,13 

ena,1^ 

arus, 

atus,22 

ca,1 

le,4 

on, 7 

les, 

eus,14 

anes, 

eras,21 

itus,23 

la, 2 

pe,5 

os,8 

lis,io 

gus,is 

enes, 

yrus, 

otus.24 

be, 

re, 

er,9 

bus, 

lus,16 

aris, 

asus, 

ee,3 

die, 

al, 

mas, 

cus,11 

mus,17 

phus,18 

yris> 

asis,20 

osus, 

il» 

ras, 

chus,12 

usus, 

§  293. 


PROSODY. — QUANTITY - PENULTS. 


335 


Exceptions. 

iMarica,  Nasica. — 2Erf phyla,  Messala,  Philomela,  Suadela. — ^Berenice. — 
4Eriphyle,  Neobule,  Perimele. — 5Europe,  Sinope. — 6Carthago,  Cupavo,  Cupido, 
Origo,  Theano. — 7 Alemon,  Anthedon,  Chalcedon,  Iason,  Philemon,  Pblype- 
mon,  Sarpedon,  Thermodon. — 8Cercyros,  Peparethos,  Pharsalos,  Seriphos. — 
9Meleager. — 10Bessalis,  Eumelis,  Juvenalis,  Martialis,  Phaselis,  Stymphalis. — 
J1Benacus,  Caicus,  Granicus,  Numicus,  Trivicus. — 12Ophiuchus. — Abydus. — 
14Caphareus,  Enipeus,  Prometheus,  Phoroneus,  Salmoneus,  Oileus. — ^Cethe¬ 
gus. — ^  Names  in  -cius,  in  -olus  ( except  JSolus,  Naubolus),  in  -bulus,  ( except 
Bibulus)  Eumelus,  Gsetulus,  Iulus,  Massylus,  Orbelus,  Pharsalus,  Sardanapa¬ 
lus,  Stymphalus. — 17 Some  in  -demus  and  -phemus;  as,  Academus,  Polyphe¬ 
mus. — 18Seriphus. — 19 Alcmena,  Athenae,  Camena,  Fidena,  Messena,  Murena, 
Mycenae. — 20Amasis. — 21Homerus,  Iberus. — 22Aratus,  Caeratus,  Torquatus. — 
^Heraclitus,  Hermaphroditus. — 24Buthrotus. 

2.  Proper  names  of  more  than  two  syllables,  found  in  the  poets 
with  the  following  terminations,  lengthen  the  penult : — 


ana,1 

sa, 

num,7 

tas, 

nus,12 

urus, 

etus,16 

ina,2 

ta,4 

turn, 

des,9 

pus,13 

esus,15 

utus, 

ona,3 

tae,5 

or,8 

tes,10 

irus, 

isus, 

ytus,17 

yna, 

ene,6 

nas, 

tis,11 

orus,14 

ysus, 

vus. 

Exceptions. 

1Sequana. — 2Mutina,  Proserpina,  Ruspina,  Sarsina. — 3Axona,  Matrona. — 
4Dalmata,  Prochyta,  Sarmata,  Lapltha. — 5Galatae,  Jaxametae,  Massagetae, 
Macetae,  Sauromat». — 6Clymene,  Heldne,  Melpomene,  Nyctimene. — 7 Arimi¬ 
num,  Drepanum. — 8Numitor. — 9Miltiades,  Pylades,  Sotades,  Thucydides;  pa¬ 
tronymics  m  -des,  (§  291,  4,)  and  plurals  in  -ades. — lu Antiphates,  Chari tes,  Eu- 
rybates,  Ichnobates,  Euergetes,  Massagetes,  and  all  names  in  -crates. — nDer- 
cetis. — 12 Apidanus,  Aponus,  Caranus,  Chrysogonus,  Ciminus,  Clymenus,  Con- 
canus,  Dardanus,  Diadumenus,  Earinus,  Eridanus,  Fucinus,  Helenus,  Libanus, 
Morini,  Myconus,  Nebrophonus,  Olenus,  Periclymenus,  Rhodanus,  San tonus, 
Sequani,  Stephanus,  Telegdnus,  Terminus,  and  names  in  -gonus  and  -xenus. — 
13(Ed!pus. — 14Pacorus,  Bosporus,  and  names  in  -chorus  and  -phorus ;  as,  Stesi¬ 
chorus,  Phosphorus. — 15Ephesus,  Vogesus,  Volesus. — 16Iapetus,  Taygetus, 
Venetus.— 17iEpy tus,  Anytus,  Eurytus,  Hippolytus. 

3.  The  penultimate  vowel  of  the  following  proper  names,  and  ad¬ 
jectives  derived  from  proper  names,  though  followed  by  a  vowel,  is 
long.  See  §  283,  I.  Exc.  6. 

/Eneas,  iEthlon,  Achelous,  Achilleus,  Alcyoneus,  Alexandria,  Aloeus,  Al¬ 
pheus,  Amlneus,  Amphiaraus,  Amphigenla,  Amphion,  Amythaon,  Arion,  An¬ 
chiseus,  Atlanteus,  Antiochia,  Bioneus,  Caesarea,  Calaurea,  Calliopea,  Cassio- 
pea,  Cleantheas,  Cydoneus,  Cymodocea,  Cytherea,  Darius  (-eus),  Deidamia, 
Dldymaon,  Diomedeus,  Dollchaon,  Echion,  Eleus,  Endymioneus,  Enyo,  Edus, 
Erebeus,  Erectheus,  Galatea,  Giganteus,  Heraclea  (-eus),  Hippodamia,  Hype¬ 
rion,  Ilithyia,  Imaon,  Iolaus,  Iphigenia,  Ixion,  Laodamia,  Latous,  Lesbous, 
Lycaon,  Machaon,  Mausoleum,  Medea,  Menelaus,  Methion,  Myrtous,  Ophion, 
Orion,  Orithyia,  Orpheus,  Pallanteum  (-us),  Pandion,  Paphagea,  Peneus,  Pen¬ 
thesilea,  Phoebeus,  Poppea,  Protesilaus,  Pyreneus,  Sardous,  Thalia. 

Note.  Eus  in  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  is  commonly  a  diph¬ 
thong;  as,  Alceus,  Cceneus ,  Orpheus,  Peleus,  Perseus ,  Proteus ,  Theseus,  Tydeus , 
which  are  dissyllables;  Briareus ,  Enipheus,  Macareus ,  Typhoeus,  which  are  tri¬ 
syllables,  Idomeneus ,  etc.  Cf.  §  283,  Exc.  6,  Note  2.  But  in  those  which  in 
Greek  are  written  no;  ( eios ),  eus  forms  two  syllables;  as,  Alpheils.  So  also  in 
adjectives  in  eus,  whether  of  Greek  or  Latin  origin;  as,  Erebeus ,  ErectheUs, 
OrpheUs;  auretis ,  ligneils. 


336  PROSODY. — QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES.  §  294,  295. 

QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

I.  VOWELS. 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

§  394:.  (a.)  All  monosyllables,  except  enclitics,  ending  in  a 

vowel,  are  long ;  as, 

a,  ah ,  da,  std ,  e ,  de ,  me,  te,  se ,  we,  re,  i,  hi,  qui,  ni,  si,  0  or  oh,  do,  prO, 
proh,  quo ,  std ,  tu . 


POLYSYLLABLES. 

A  final, 

1.  A  final,  in  words  declined,  is  short ;  as,  musa ,  templa ,  capi¬ 
ta,  Tydea .  Thus, 

iVftisa  mihi  causas  memora;  quo  numine  laeso....  Virg.  A.  1,  8. 

Exc.  A  final  is  long  in  the  ablative  of  the  first  declension,  and  in 
the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  as  and  es ;  as, 

Musa,  fundd ;  0  JEnea,  0  Palla,  0  Anchisa. 

2.  A  final,  in  words  not  declined,  is  long;  as,  ama ,  frustra , 
anted ,  ergd ,  intrd.  Thus, 

Extra  fortunam  est  quidquid  donatur  amicis.  Mart.  Epig.  5,  42,  7. 

Exc.  A  final  is  short  in  eia ,  ita,  quid,  and  in  puta ,  when  used  adverbially, 
in  the  sense  of  ‘  for  example.’  It  is  sometimes  short  in  the  preposition  contra, 
and  in  numerals  ending  in  ginta ;  as,  triginta,  etc.  In  postea,  it  is  common. 

A  final  is  also  short  in  the  names  of  Greek  letters;  as,  alpha,  beta,  etc.,  and 
in *iardtantdra,  the  imitated  sound  of  the  trumpet. 

E  final. 

§295.  E  final,  in  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  is  short ; 
as,  nate,  patre ,  ipse ,  curre,  regere,  nempe ,  ante.  Thus, 

IncipZ,  parvS  puer,  rlsu  cognosces  matrem.  Virg.  E.  4,  GO. 

Remark.  The  enclitics  -que,  - ne ,  -ve,  - ce ,  -te,  -pte,  etc.,  as  they  are  not  used 
alone,  have  e  short,  according  to  the  rule;  as,  neque ,  hujusce,  suapte.  Cf. 
^  294,  (a.) 

Exc.  1.  E  final  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  first  and  fifth  declensions; 
as, 

Callidpc,  Tydide,  fide.  So  also  in  the  compounds  of  re  and  die ;  as,  quare, 
hodie,  pridie,  postridie ,  quotidie ,  and  in  the  ablative  fame,  originally  of  the  fifth 
declension. 

Exc.  2.  E  final  is  long  in  Greek  vocatives  from  nouns  in  -es,  of  the  third 
declension ;  as,  Achille,  Hippdmene  ;  and  in  Greek  neuters  plural ;  as,  cete,  mele, 
pelage,  Tempe. 

Exc.  3.  In  the  second  conjugation,  e  final  is  long  in  the  second 
person  singular  of  the  imperative  active;  as,  doce ,  mone ; — but  it  is 
sometimes  short  in  cave ,  vale ,  and  vide. 


§  296-298.  prosody. — quantity  of  final  syllables.  337 


Exc.  4.  E  final  is  long  in  adverbs  formed  from  adjectives  of  the 
second  declension ;  as, 

placide ,  pulchre ,  valde  for  valide ,  maxime ;  but  it  is  short  in  bend,  male ,  inferne , 
and  superne . 

Exc.  5.  Fere ,  ferme ,  and  o Ae*  have  the  final  e  long. 

I  final. 

§  396.  / final  is  long ;  as,  domini ,  fili,  classi,  doceri ,  sz. 

Thus, 

Quid  ddminl  facient,  audent  cum  talia  fures.  7irg%  E.  3, 16. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  /final  is  common  in  mihi,  tibi ,  sibi,  ibi,  and  ubi. 

( b .)  In  ubique  and  commonly  in  ibidem  it  is  long,  but  in  ubivis  and  ubinam  it 
is  short. — (c.)  In  nisi,  quasi,  and  cui ,  when  a  dissyllable,  i  final  is  common, 
but  usually  short.  In  utinam  and  utique,  and  rarely,  also,  in  uti,  it  is  short. 

Exc.  2.  I  final  is  short  in  the  dative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  of  the  third  de¬ 
clension,  which  increase  in  the  genitive;  as,  Palladi,  Minoidi,  Tethyi. 

Exc.  3.  /  final  is  short  in  the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  -is ;  as,  Alexi, 
Daphni,  Pari.  But  it  is  long  in  vocatives  from  Greek  nouns  in  -is,  («?)  - entos ; 
as,  Simoi,  Pyroi. 

Exc.  4.  /final  is  short  in  Greek  datives  and  ablatives  plural  in  -si,  or,  be¬ 
fore  a  vowel,  -sin ;  as,  Dryasi,  heroisi ,  Troasin. 

O  final . 

§  297.  0  final,  in  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  is  com¬ 
mon  ;  as,  virgo,  amo,  quando.  Thus, 

Ergd  metu  capita  Scylla  est  inimica  paterno.  Virg.  Cir.  386. 

Ergo  sollicitae  tu  causa,  pecunia,  vitae  es  !  Prop.  3,  5,  1. 

Exc.  1.  0  final  is  long  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singular;  as,  ddmino ,  regno, 
bono,  suo,  illo ,  eo. 

Exc.  2.  O  final  is  long  in  ablatives  used  as  adverbs ;  as,  certo ,  falso,  merito, 
vulgo ,  eo,  quo ;  and  also  in  omnino,  in  ergo,  1  for  the  sake  of,’  and  in  the  inter¬ 
jection  id.  • 

Remark  1.  The  final  o  of  verbs  is  almost  always  long  in  poets  of  the  Augus¬ 
tan  age. 

Rem.  2.  In  poets  subsequent  to  the  Augustan  age,  final  o  in  verbs,  in  ge¬ 
runds,  and  in  the  adverbs  adeo,  ideo,  ergo,  sero ,  vero ,  porro,  retro,  immo ,  idcirco, 
subito,  and  postremo,  is  sometimes  short. 

Exc.  3.  0  final  is  short  in  cito,  illico,  prdfecto,  and  the  compounds  of  mddo ; 
as,  dummodo,  postmodo ,  etc. ;  and  in  ego  and  homo  it  is  more  frequently  short 
than  long. 

Exc.  4.  0  final  in  Greek  nouns  written  with  an  omega  (a)  is  long;  as,  Clio, 
Dido,  Atho,  and  Androgeo,  (gen.) 

U  final. 

§  298.  1.  U final  is  long;  as,  vultu ,  cornu ,  Pantliu,  dictu , 

diu.  Thus, 

Vultu,  quo  coelum  tempestatesque  sSrenat.  Virg.  A.  1,  266. 

29 


338 


PROSODY. - QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES.  §  299. 


Exc.  Indu  and  ninu,  ancient  forms  of  in  and  non,  have  u  short.  U  is  also 
short  in  terminations  in  us  short,  when  s  is  removed  by  elision;  as,  contentu1, 
for  contentus .  See  §  305,  2. 


Y  final . 

2.  Y  final  is  short ;  as,  Moly ,  Tlphy .  Thus, 

Moly  vocant  superi :  nigra  radice  tenetur.  Ovid.  M.  14,  292. 

Exc.  Y  in  the  dative  Tethy ,  being  formed  by  contraction,  is  long.  §  283,  III. 

1 1.  •  CONSONANTS. 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

§  299.  1.  Monosyllabic  substantives  ending  in  a  consonant 

are  long;  all  other  monosyllables  ending  in  a  consonant  are 
short;  * 

sd/,  vir,  f  ur ,  jus,  splen ,  ver,  far ,  /dr,  JVdr,  par,  Nor,  fur,  fas,  mas,  res,  pes , 
Dis,  p/is,  /is,  ris,  flos,  mds ,  ros,  TVos,  os,  (oris),  dos,  grus ,  rus,  tus  ; — nec,  in,  an,  ab , 
ad,  quid,  quis,  quot,  et;  as, 

Ipse  docet  quid  agam.  Fas  est  St  ab  hoste  doceri.  Ovid.  M.  4,  428. 

Ver  adeo  frondi  nemorum,  ver  utile  silvis.  Virg.  G.  2,  323. 

Note.  The  rules  for  the  quantity  of  final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant 
imply  that  the  consonant  is  single,  and  that  it  is  preceded  by  a  single  vowel. 
If  otherwise  the  syllable  will  be  long  by  §  283,  IV.  and  II. 

Exc.  1.  Cor,  fel,  mel ,  pol,  vir ,  ds  (gen.  ossis),  and  probably  vas  (vadis),  are 
short. 

Exc.  2.  En ,  non,  quin,  sin,  eras,  plus,  cur,  and  par,  are  long:  so  also  are 
particles  and  pronouns  ending  in  c,  except  nec,  which  is  short,  and  the  pro¬ 
nouns  hie  and  hoc,  in  the  nominative  and  accusative,  which  are  common. 

Exc.  3.  Monosyllabic  plural  cases  of  pronouns  and  forms  of  verbs  in  as,  es, 
and  is,  are  long ;  as,  has,  quas,  hos,  nos,  vos,  quos,  his,  quis ; — das,  fles,  stes,  is, 
fis,  sis,  vis ;  except  es  from  sum  which  is  short. 

Exc.  4.  The  abridged  imperatives  retain  the  quantity  of  their  root ;  as,  die , 
due ,  from  dico,  duco;  fac,  fer,  from  facio,  fero.  . 


POLYSYLLABLES. 

D,  L,  N,  R,  T,  final. 

2.  Final  syllables  ending  in  d,  l,  n,  r ,  and  t ,  are  short ;  as, 
illud ,  consul,  carmen,  pater ,  caput.  Thus, 

Obstupuit  simul  ipse,  simul  perculsus  Achates.  Virg.  A.  1,  513. 

NomSn  Arlonium  Siculas  implevSrat  urbes.  Ovid.  F.  2,  93. 

Dum  loquor,  horror ,  habet;  parsque  est  meminisse  doloris.  Id.  M.  9,  291. 

Exc.  1.  E  in  lien  is  long. 

Exc.  2.  In  Greek  nouns,  nominatives  in  n  (except  those  in  on, 
written  with  an  omicrori),  masculine  or  feminine  accusatives  in  an  or 
en,  and  genitives  plural  in  on,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 

Titan ,  Orion ,  jEnean ,  Anchisen ,  Callidpen ;  epigrammaton . 


§  300.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY  OP  PINAL  SYLLABLES.  339 


Exc.  3.  Aer ,  cether ,  and  nouns  in  er  which  form  their  genitive  in 
era,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 

crater,  soter.  So  also  Iber ;  but  the  compound  Celtiber  has  sometimes  in 
Martial  its  last  syllable  short. 

Remark.  A  final  syllable  ending  in  t,  may  be  rendered  long  by  a  diphthong, 
by  contraction,  by  syncopation,  or  by  position;  as,  aut,  dbit  for  dbiit,  f  umdt, 
for  fumavit ,  dmdnt.  See  §  283,  II.  III.  IV.,  and  §  162,  7,  (d.) 

M  final . 

Note.  Final  m  with  the  preceding  vowel  is  almost  always  cut  off,  when 
the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel.  See  Ecthlipsis ,  §  305,  2. 

3.  Final  syllables  ending  in  m ,  when  it  is  not  cut  off,  are  short ; 
as, 

Quam  laudas,  pluma?  cocto  num  SLdest  honor  Idem.  Hor.  S.  2,  2,  28. 

Remark.  Hence  in  composition  the  final  syllables  of  cum  and  circum  are 
short;  as,  cdmedo ,  circumago. 

C  final. 

4.  Final  syllables  ending  in  c  are  long ;  as,  alec,  illic,  istac, 
illuc.  Thus, 

IUic  indocto  primum  se  exercuit  arcu.  Tib.  2, 1,  69. 

Exc.  The  final  syllable  of  donec  is  short ;  as, 

J )ontc  eris  felix,  multos  numerabis  amicos.  Ovid.  Trist.  1,  9,  5. 


AS,  ES,  and  OS,  final. 

§  300*  Final  syllables  in  as,  es,  and  os,  are  long ;  as, 

rnusas,  pietas,  amas ,  JEneds,  quies,  sermones,  dies ,  Penelopes ,  ducenties ,  mdnes , 
hdnos ,  viros,  dominos.  Thus, 

Has  autem  terras ,  Itallque  hanc  lltoris  oram.  Virg.  A.  3,  396. 

Si  modo  des  illis  cultus,  simt/esque  paratus.  Ovid.  M.  6,  454. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  AS.  As  is  short  in  anas,  in  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  ends 
in  adis  or  ados;  as,  Areas,  Pallas;  and  in  Greek  accusatives  plural  of  the  third 
declension ;  as,  her  das,  lampadas. 

(b.)  As  is  short  also  in  Latin  nouns  in  as,  ados ,  formed  like  Greek  patronym¬ 
ics  ;  as,  Appias. 

Exc.  2.  ES.  (a.)  Final  es  is  short  in  nouns  and  adjectives  of  the 
third  declension  which  increase  short  in  the  genitive;  as,  hospes , 
limes ,  hebes  ;  gen.  hospitis ,  etc. 

(5.)  But  it  is  long  in  abies,  dries ,  paries ,  Ceres ,  and  pes,  with  its  compounds 
cornipes ,  sonipes,  etc. 

(c.)  Es,  in  the  present  tense  of  sum  and  its  compounds,  and  in  the  preposi¬ 
tion  penes,  is  short. 

{d.)  Es  is  short  in  Greek  neuters  in  es;  as,  cacoethes,  and  in  Greek  nomina¬ 
tives  and  vocatives  plural  from  nouns  of  the  third  declension,  which  increase 
in  the  genitive ;  as,  Arcades,  Troes,  Amazdnes ;  from  Arcas,  Arcadis,  etc. 

Exc.  3.  OS.  (a.)  Os  is  short  in  compds ,  impds ,  and  ds  (ossis),  with  its  com¬ 
pound  exds. 


340  PROSODY. - QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES.  §  301 


(5.)  Os  is  short  in  Greek  nouns  and  cases  written  in  the  original  with  omi- 
cron;  as(l)  in  all  neuters;  as,  chads ,  epds,  Argds;  (2)  in  all  nouns  of  the  second 
declension ;  as,  Ilids,  Tyrds ,  Delds ;  except  those  whose  genitive  is  in  o,  ( Greek 
a);  as,  Athos ,  gen.  Atho ;  (3)  in  genitives  singular  of  the  third  declension;  as, 
Pallddds,  Tethyds ,  from  Pallas  and  Tethys. 


IS,  US,  and  YS,  final. 

§  301*  Final  syllables  in  is,  us ,  and  ys,  are  short ;  as, 

turrfs,  militis,  mitts ,  amatis ,  amabis ,  magis ;  pectus ,  bdnus,  ejus ,  amamus,  rursus , 
Unus;  Cdpys,  ltys.  Thus, 

Non  dpis  inde  tiilit  collectos  sedula  flSres.  Ovid.  M.  13,  928. 

Serius  aut  cititfs  sedem  prdpdrdmus  ad  unam.  Id.  M.  10,  33. 

At  Cdpys ,  et  quorum  melior.sententia  menti.  Virg.  A.  2,  35. 

Exc.  1.  IS.  (a.)  Is  is  long  in  plural  cases;  as, 

musts,  nobis;  omnis,  urbis,  (for  omnes,  urbes);  quis,  (for  queis  or  quibus).  So 
also  in  the  adverbs  aratis ,  ingratis ,  and  fdris ,  which  are  in  reality  datives  or 
ablatives  plural. 

Et  liquidi  slmul  ignis;  ut  his  exordia  primis.  Virg.  A.  6,  33. 

Quis  ante  ora  patrum  Trojae  sub  moenibus  altis.  Id.  A.  1,  95. 

Non  omnis  arbusta  juvant,  humllesque  myricae.  Id.  E.  4,  2. 

Adde  tot  egregias  urbis ,  operumque  laborem.  Id.  G.  2,  155. 

(b.)  Is  is  long  in  the  nominative  of  nouns  whose  genitive  ends  in  itis,  inis,  or 
entis;  as,  Samnis ,  Salamis ,  Simois. 

(c.)  Is  is  long  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present  indica¬ 
tive  active  of  the  fourth  conjugation ;  as, 

audis,  nescis.  So  also  in  the  second  persons,  fis,  is,  sis,  vis,  velis,  and  their 
compounds ;  as,  adsis ,  possis,  quamvis,  malis ,  nolis ,  etc.  Cf.  §  299,  1,  Exc.  3. 

(d.)  Pis,  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect  subjunctive,  is  common;  as, 
videris. 

Exc.  2.  US.  (a.)  Us  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension  which 
increase  long,  and  in  the  genitive  singular,  and  the  nominative,  ac¬ 
cusative,  and  vocative  plural  of  the  fourth  declension,  (§  89,  Rem., 
and  §  283,  III.)  ;  as, 

tellus,  virtus ,  incus ;— fructus.  But  palus,  with  the  us  short,  occurs  in  Horace, 
Art.  Poet.  65. 

(b.)  Us  is  long  in  Greek  nouns  written  in  the  original  with  the  diphthong  out 
(ov;) whether  in  the  nominative  or  genitive;  as,  nom.  Amathus,  Opus,  (Ediqms , 
tripus,  Panthus ;  gen.  Didus,  Sapphus.  But  compounds  of  pus  (ttov;),  when  of 
the  second  declension,  have  us  short;  as , polypus. 

Note.  The  last  syllable  of  every  verse,  (except  the  anapaestic  and 
the  Ionic  a  mixiore),  may  be  either  long  or  short  at  the  option  of  the 
poet. 

Remark.  By  this  is  meant,  that,  although  the  measure  require  a  long  syl¬ 
lable,  a  short  one  may  be  used  in  its  stead ;  and  a  long  syllable  may  be  used 
where  a  short  one  is  required ;  as  in  the  following  verses,  where  the  short  syl¬ 
lable  ma  stands  instead  of  a  long  one,  and  the  long  syllable  cu  instead  oi  a 
short  one : — 

Sangulneaque  mSLnu  crepitantia  concutit  nrmS.  Ovid.  M.  1,  143. 

Non  eget  Mauri  jiculls,  nec  arcu.  Hor.  Od.  1,  22,  2. 


§302, 


PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION — FEET, 


341 


VERSIFICATION. 

FEET. 

§  303«  A  foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  syllables  of 
a  certain  quantity. 

Feet  are  either  simple  or  compound.  Simple  feet  consist  of  two 
or  three  syllables ;  compound  feet  of  four. 


I.  SIMPLE  FEET. 
1.  Of  two  Syllables. 


Spondee , . 

Pyrrhic , . 

'flrochee,  or  choree , 
Iambus , . 


.two  long, - ;  as, . fundunt . 

two  short,  w  as, . Deus. 

.a  long  and  a  short,  —  as, . arma. 

.a  short  and  a  long,  ^  — ;  as, . erant. 


2.  Of  three  Syllables. 

Dactyl . . a  long  and  two  short,  —  w  as, . corpdra. 

Anapaest , . two  short  and  a  long,  w  ^  — ;  as, . ddmini. 

Tribrach , . three  short,  ^  ^  as, . facere. 

Molossus , . three  long, - ;  as, . contendunt. 

Amphibrach , . a  short,  a  long,  and  a  short,  ^  as,,  .amare. 

Amphimacrus ,  or  Cretic ,  a  long,  a  short,  and  a  long,  —  ^  — ;  as,  . .  castitas. 

Bacchius, . a  short  and  two  long,  ^ - ;  as, . Catones . 

Antibacchius , . two  long  and  a  short, - ^ ;  as, . Romanus. 

II.  COMPOUND  FEET. 


Dispondee , . 

P  roc  e  leusmatic , , 

Ditrochee , . 

Diiambus , . 

Greater  Ionic,.. 
Smaller  Ionic,.. 
Choriambus,. . . 

Antispast, . 

First  epitrit , . . . 
Second  epitrit,. . 
Third  epitrit, . . 
Fourth  epitrit,.. 
First  paeon, 
Second  paeon ,  . . 
Third  paeon,. . . 
Fourth  paeon,.. . 


a  double  spondee, - ;  as, . conflixerunt. 

.a  double  Pyrrhic,  ^  w.  ^  as, . hominibus. 

,a  double  trochee,  —  ^  as, . cdmprdbdvit . 

.a  double  iambus,  ^  —  v_.  — ;  as, . amaverant. 

.a  spondee  and  a  Pyrrhic, - ^  as,. .  .correximus. 

.a  Pyrrhic  and  a  spondee,  ^ - ;  as, . .  .properabant. 

.a  choree  and  an  iambus,  —  ^  — ;  as, . .  .terrificant. 

.an  iambus  and  a  choree,  •w - as, . .  .adhaesisse. 

,an  iambus  and  a  spondee,  - - ;  as,. .  .amaverunt. 

.a  trochee  and  a  spondee,  —  ^ - ;  as, . .  .conditores. 

a  spondee  and  an  iambus, - w  — ;  as, . . . discordias . 

a  spondee  and  a  trochee, - ;  as, . .  .adduxistis. 

a  trochee  and  a  Pyrrhic,  —  ^  w ;  as,. .  .temponbus. 
an  iambus  and  a  Pyrrhic,  ^  w  ;  as, . .  .pdtentia. 
a  Pyrrhic  and  a  trochee,  —  —  w ;  as, . .  .animatus. 

a  Pyrrhic  and  an  iambus,  ^  w  w  — ;  as,. .  .celentas. 


Remark.  Those  feet  are  called  isochronous,  which  consist  of  equal  times; 
as  the  spondee,  the  dactyl,  the  anapaest,  and  the  proceleusmatic,  one  long  time 
being  considered  equal  to  two  short. 

29* 


342  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — METRE — VERSES.  §  303,  304. 

METRE. 

§  303.  1.  Metre  is  an  arrangement  of  syllables  and  feet 

according  to  certain  rules. 

2.  In  this  general  sense,  it  comprehends  either  an  entire  verse,  a  part  of  a 
verse,  or  any  number  of  verses. 

3.  Metre  is  divided  into  dactylic,  anapaestic,  iambic,  trochaic,  chori - 
ambic ,  and  Ionic .  These  names  are  derived  from  the  original  or 
fundamental  foot  employed  in  each. 

4.  A  metre  or  measure ,  in  a  specific  sense,  is  either  a  single  foot, 
or  a  combination  of  two  feet.  In  the  dactylic,  choriambic,  and  Ionic 
metres,  a  measure  consists  of  one  foot ;  in  the  other  metres,  of  two 
feet.  Two  feet  constituting  a  measure  are  sometimes  called  a  syzygy . 

VERSES. 

§304.  A  verse  is  a  certain  number  of  feet,  arranged  in  a 
regular  order,  and  constituting  a  line  of  poetry. 

1.  Two  verses  are  called  a  distich;  a  half  verse,  a  hemistich. 

2.  Verses  are  of  different  kinds,  denominated  sometimes,  like  the 
different  species  of  metre,  from  the  foot  which  chiefly  predominates 
in  them  ;  as,  dactylic ,  iambic,  etc. ; — sometimes  from  the  number  of 
feet  or  metres  which  they  contain  ;  as,  senarius ,  consisting  of  six  feet ; 
octonarius,  of  eight  feet ;  monometer,  consisting  of  one  measure  ;  dime¬ 
ter,  of  two  ;  trimeter,  tetrameter,  pentameter ,  hexameter  ; — sometimes 
from  a  celebrated  author  who  used  a  particular  species ;  as,  Sapphic , 
Anacreontic,  Alcaic ,  Asclepiadic ,  Glyconie,  Phalcecian ,  Sotadic ,  Archi - 
lochian,  Alcmanian,  Pherecratie ,  Aristophanic,  etc.,  from  Sappho ,  Ana¬ 
creon,  Alcaeus,  Asclepiades,  Glycon,  Phalaecus,  Sotades ,  Archilochus , 
Aleman,  Pherecrates,  Aristophanes,  etc. — and  sometimes  from  the 
particular  uses  to  which  they  were  applied ;  as,  the  prosodiae ,  from 
its  use  in  solemn  processions,  the  paraemiac,  from  its  frequent  use  in 
proverbs. 

3.  A  verse,  with  respect  to  the  metres  which  it  contains,  may  be 
complete,  deficient,  or  redundant. 

(1.)  A  verse  which  is  complete  is  called  acatalectic . 

(2.)  A  verse  which  is  deficient,  if  it  wants  one  syllable  at  the  end, 
is  called  catalectic ;  if  it  wants  a  whole  foot  or  half  a  metre,  it  is 
called  br  achy  catalectic. 

(3.)  A  verse  which  wants  a  syllable  at  the  beginning,  is  called 
acephalous. 

(4.)  A  verse  which  lias  a  redundant  syllable  or  foot,  is  called 
hyper  catalectic  or  hypermeter. 

4.  Hence,  the  complete  name  of  every  verse  consists  of  three 
terms — the  first  referring  to  the  species,  the  second  to  the  number  of 
metres,  and  the  third  to  the  ending  ;  as,  the  dactylic  trimeter  catalectic. 


§  305, 


PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION — FIGURES 


343 


5.  A  verse  or  portion  of  a  verse  of  any  kind  (measured  from  tlie 
beginning)  which  contains  three  half  feet,  or  a  foot  and  a  half,  is 
called  a  trihemimeris  ;  if  it  contains  five  half  feet,  or  two  feet  and  a 
half,  it  is  called  a  penthemimeris  ;  if  seven  half  feet,  or  three  feet  and 
a  half,  a  hepthemimeris ;  if  nine  half  feet,  or  four  feet  and  a  half,  an 
ennehemimeris.  A  portion  of  a  verse  consisting  of  one  whole  metre 
and  a  half,  is  called  a  hemiolius ,  as  being  the  half  of  a  trimeter . 

Note.  The  respective  situation  of  each  foot  in  a  verse  is  called  its  place. 

6.  Scanning  is  the  dividing  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  of  which  it  is 
composed. 

Remark.  In  order  to  scan  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  quantity 
of  each  syllable,  and  also  to  understand  the  following  poetic  usages,  which  are 
sometimes  called 

FIGURES  OF  PROSODY. 

SYNALCEPHA. 

§  305.  1.  Synalcepha  is  the  elision  of  a  final  vowel  or 

diphthong  in  scanning,  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a 
vowel. 

Thus,  terra  antiqua  is  read  terr'  antiqua;  Darddnidce  infensi ,  Dardanid?  in¬ 
fensi  ;  vento  huc ,  vent ’  huc.  So, 

Quidve  moror?  si  omnes  uno  ordine  h&betis  Achivos.  Virg.  A.  2, 102. 

Which  is  scanned  thus — 

Quidve  moror?  s’  omnes  un’  ordln’  habetis  Achivos. 

(1.)  The  interjections  <9,  heu ,  ah ,  proh)  vce ,  vah ,  are  not  elided; 
as, 

O  et  de  Lati&,  O  et  de  gente  S&blna.  Ovid.  M.  14,  832. 

Remark.  But  0,  though  not  elided,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

Te  Corydon  O  Alexi ;  trahit  sua  quemque  voluptas.  Virg.  E.  2,  65. 

(2.)  Other  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  sometimes  remain  unelided,  in  which 
case,  when  in  the  thesis  of  a  foot,  they  are  commonly  made  short;  as, 

Victor  apud  rapidum  SImoenta  sub  IliS  alto.  Virg.  A.  5,  261. 

Anni  tempore  eo  qui  Etc  sice  esse  feruntur.  Lucr.  6,  717. 

Ter  sunt  conati  imponere  Pelid  Ossam.  Virg.  G.  1,  281. 

Glauco  et  Pdndpece ,  et  Inoo  Melicertae.  Id.  G.  1,  436. 

(3.)  Rarely  a  short  vowel,  also,  remains  without  elision;  as, 

Et  vera  incessu  patuit de&.  Ille  ubi  matrem....  Virg.  A.  1,  405. 

(4.)  Synaloepha  in  a  monosyllable  occasionally  occurs ;  as, 

Si  ad  vitulam  spectas,  nihil  est,  quod  pocula  laudes.  Virg.  E.  3,  48. 

For  synaloepha  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia ,  §  307,  3. 

E  CTHLIP  SIS. 

2.  Ecthlipsis  is  the  elision  of  a  final  m  with  the  preceding 
vowel,  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a  vowel.  Thus, 

O  curas  hfimlnwm,  O  quantum  est  in  rSbus  Inane!  Pers.  1, 1. 


344 


PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION - FIGURES. 


§306, 


Which  is  thus  scanned — 

0  curas  homin’  0  quant’  est  in  rebus  inane. 

Monstrum  horrendum,  informe,  ingens,  cui  lumen  SLdemptum.  Virg.  A.  3,  668. 

(1.)  This  elision  was  sometimes  omitted  by  the  early  poets;  as, 

Corp&rum  officium  est  quoniam  premere  omnia  deorsum.  Lucr.  1,  363. 

See  §  299,  2. 

(2.)  Final  s,  also,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  sometimes  elided  by  the 
early  poets  before  a  vowel,  and  sometimes  s  alone  before  a  consonant;  as,  cow- 
tenV  atque  (Enn.),  for  contentus  atque ;  omnibu'  rebus.  {Lucr.)  So, 

Turn  latSrdW  dolor,  certiss'imu ’  nunciu ’  mortis.  LucU. 

Remark.  This  elision  took  place  principally  in  short  syllables. 

For  ecthlipsis  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia ,  §  307,  3. 

S  YNiE  RE  SIS. 

§  306«  1.  Synaeresis  is  the  contraction  into  one  syllable 

of  two  vowels  which  are  usually  pronounced  separately.  Thus, 

Aured.  percussum  virga,  versumque  venenis.  Virg.  A.  7,  190. 

Eosdem  habuit  secum,  quibus  est  elata,  capillos.  Prop.  4,  7,  7. 

Tityre,  pascentes  a  flumine  reice  capellas.  Virg.  E.  3,  96. 

Remark  1.  So  Phaethon  is  pronounced  Phcethon ;  alveo ,  alvo ;  Orphea , 
Orpha;  deorsum ,  dorsum. 

(1.)  Synaeresis  is  frequent  in  ii ,  iidem ,  iisdem ,  dii ,  diis ,  dein,  deinceps ,  deinde , 
deest ,  deerat ,  deero ,  deerit,  deesse;  as, 

Praecipitatur  aquis,  et  aquis  nox  surgit  ab  'isdem.  Ovid.  M.  4,  92. 

Sint  Maecenates ;  non  deerunt ,  Flacce,  Mardnes.  Mart.  8,  56,  5. 

Rem.  2.  Oui  and  huic  are  usually  monosyllables. 

(2.)  When  two  vowels  in  compound  words  are  read  as  one  syllable,  the 
former  may  rather  be  considered  as  elided  than  as  united  with  the  latter ;  as, 
e  in  anteambulo ,  anteire ,  antehac ,  dehinc ,  mehercule ,  etc.,  and  a  in  contraire. 

(3.)  The  syllable  formed  by  the  union  of  i  or  u  followed  by  another  vowel 
retains  the  quantity  of  the  latter  vowel,  whether  long  or  short ;  as,  abiete,  ariete , 
abiegnas,  parietibus,  consilium,  fortuitus,  Nasidienus,  vindemiator,  omnia ;  genua , 
tenuis,  pituita,  fluviorum,  etc.  In  such  examples,  the  i  and  u  are  pronounced 
like  initial  y  and  w ;  as,  dbyete,  pdryetlbus,  consilyum,  fortwitus,  N  dsidyenus, 
omn-ya,  tenwis,  pitwita,  etc. ;  and,  like  consonants,  they  have,  with  another 
consonant,  the  power  of  lengthening  a  preceding  short  vowel,  as  in  the  above 
examples. 

Note.  In  Statius,  the  word  tenuiore  occurs  as  a  trisyllable,  in  which  the 
three  vowels,  uio,  are  united  in  pronunciation ;  thus,  ten-wio-re. 

(4.)  Sometimes,  after  a  synaloepha  or  echthlipsis,  two  vowels  suffer  synsere- 
sis ;  as,  stellio  et,  pronounced  stell~yet :  consilium  et, — consil-yet • 

(5.)  If  only  one  of  the  vowels  is  written,  the  contraction  is  called  crasis ;  as, 
di,  consili,  for  dii,  consilii. 


DIURESIS. 

2.  Diceresis  is  the  division  of  one  syllable  into  two ;  as, 

aulaX,  Trdia ,  silua,  suadent ;  for  aulae,  Troia  or  Troja,  silva,  suadent.  So, 
suesco  for  suesco ;  reliquus  for  reliquus;  ecquis  for  ecquis;  miluus  for  milvus ,  etc., 
as, 


§307. 


PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION - FIGURES. 


345 


JEthereum  sensum,  atque  aurai  simplicis  ignem.  Virg.  A.  6.  747. 

Atque  alios  alii  irrident,  Veneremque  suadent.  Lucr.  4,  1153. 

Grammatici  certant ;  et  adhuc  sub  indice  lis  est.  Hor.  A.  P.  78. 

Aurarum  et  siluce  metu.  Id.  0.  1,  23,  4. 

(1.)  So  in  Greek  words  originally  written  with  a  diphthong  («or»?);  as, 
dlegeia  for  elegia,  Baccheia  for  Bacchea ,  Rhoeteius  for  Rhoeteus ,  Pleias  for  Plias: 
and  also  in  words  of  Latin  origin ;  as,  V eius  for  Veius ,  Aquileid  for  Aquileid. 

Remark.  This  figure  is  sometimes- called  dialysis . 

SYSTOLE. 

§  307.  1.  Systole  is  the  shortening  of  a  syllable  which  is 

long  by  nature  or  by  position  ;  as, 

vide'n  for  videsne ,  in  which  e  is  naturally  long;  satVn  for  sdtisne ,  in  which  i  is 
long  by  position ; — hddie  for  hoc  die ;  multimddis  for  multis  mddis.  So, 

Ducere  multimodis  voces,  et  flectere  cantus.  Lucr.  5, 1405. 

(1.)  By  the  omission  of  j  after  db,  ad,  ob,  sub,  and  re,  in  compound  words, 
those  prepositions  retain  their  naturally  short  quantity,  whidh  would  otherwise 
be  made  long  by  position ;  as,  dbici,  aaicit ,  obicis ,  etc.  Thus, 

Si  quid  nostra  tuis  adicit  vexatio  rebus.  Mart.  10,  82, 1. 

Remark.  In  some  compounds  the  short  quantity  of  ad  and  db  is  preserved 
before  a  consonant  by  the  elision  of  the  d  or  b  of  the  preposition,  as  in  dperio , 
dperio,  dmitto ,  etc. 

(2.)  The  penult  of  the  third  person  plural  of  certain  perfects  is  said  by 
some  to  be  shortened  by  systole ;  as,  steterunt,  tulerunt ,  etc. ;  but  others  ascribe 
these  irregularities  to  the  errors  of  transcribers,  or  the  carelessness  of  writers. 

DIASTOLE. 

2.  Diastole  is  the  lengthening  of  a  syllable  which  is  naturally 
short. 

(1.)  It  occurs  most  frequently  in  proper  names  and  in  compounds  of  re;  as, 
Priamides,  religio ,  etc.  Thus, 

Hanc  tibi  Priamides  mitto,  Ledaea,  salutem.  Ovid.  H  16,  1. 

Religione  patrum  multos  servata  per  annos.  Virg.  A.  2,  715. 

(2.)  Some  editors  double  the  consonant  after  the  lengthened  re;  as,  relligio. 

(3.)  Diastole  is  sometimes  called  ectasis . 

S  YNAPHEIA. 

3.  Synapheia  is  such  a  connection  of  two  consecutive  verses, 
that  the  first  syllable  of  the  latter  verse  has  an  influence  on  the 
final  syllable  of  that  which  precedes,  either  by  position,  synaloe- 
plia,  or  ecthlipsis.  See  §§  283  and  305. 

(1.)  This  figure  is  most  frequent  in  anapaestic  verse,  and  in  the  Ionic  a 
minor  e. 

The  following  lines  will  illustrate  its  effect : — 

Praeceps  silvas  montesque  fugit 
Citus  Actaeon.  Sen. 

Here  the  i  in  the  final  syllable  of  fugit,  which  is  naturally  short,  is  made  long 
by  position  before  the  following  consonants,  tc . 


346  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — ARSIS  AND  THESIS.  §  308. 


Omnia  Mercurio  similis,  vocem  que  coloremywe 
Et  crines  flavos....  Virg.  A.  4,  558. 

Dissidens  plebi  numero  beatonwi 
Eximit  virtus.  Hor.  0.  2,  2,  18. 

In  the  former  of  these  examples,  synapheia  and  synalcepha  are  combined,  que 
being  elided  before  et  in  the  following  line ;  in  the  latter  there  is  a  similar 
combination  of  synapheia  and  ecthlipsis. 

(2.)  By  synapheia,  the  parts  of  a  compound  word  are  sometimes  divided  be¬ 
tween  two  verses ;  as, 

....  si  non  offenderet  unum - 

Quemque  poetarum  limae  labor  et  mSra...  Hor.  A.  P.  290. 

(3.)  In  hexameter  verse  a  redundant  syllable  at  the  end  of  a  line  elided  be¬ 
fore  a  vowel  at  the  beginning  of  the  next  line,  by  causing  the  accent  to  fall  on 
the  second  syllable  of  the  concluding  spondee,  and  connecting  the  two  verse3 
by  synapheia,  excites  the  expectation  of  something  which  is  to  follow,  and 
often  tends  to  magnify  the  object;  as, 

Qu5s  super-  |  -atra  si-  |  -lex,  jam- I  -jam  lap-  J  -surSL  ca-  |  -denti-  j  -que 
Imminet  assimilis.  Virg.  A.  6,  602. 

Remark.  The  poets  often  make  use  of  other  figures,  also,  which,  however, 
are  not  peculiar  to  them.  Such  are  prosthesis ,  aphaeresis ,  syncdpe ,  epenthesis , 
apocdpe ,  paragoge ,  tmesis ,  antithesis ,  and  metathesis .  See  §  322. 


ARSIS  AND  THESIS. 

§  308.  (1.)  Rhythm  is  the  alternate  elevating  and  depress¬ 

ing  of  the  voice  at  regular  intervals  in  pronouncing  the  syllables 
of  verse. 

(2.)  The  elevation  of  the  voice  is  called  arsis ,  its  depression  thesis . 
These  terms  designate,  also,  the  parts  of  a  foot  on  which  the  eleva¬ 
tion  or  depression  falls. 

1.  The  natural  arsis  is  on  the  long  syllable  of  a  foot;  and  hence, 
in  a  foot  composed  wholly  of  long,  or  wholly  of  short  syllables,  when 
considered  in  itself,  the  place  of  the  arsis  is  undetermined  ;  but  when 
such  foot  is  substituted  for  the  fundamental  foot  of  a  metre,  its  arsis  is 
determined  by  that  of  the  latter. 

Remark.  Hence,  a  spondee,  in  trochaic  or  dactylic  metre,  has  the  arsis  on 
the  first  syllable ;  but  in  iambic  or  anapaestic  metre,  it  has  it  on  the  last. 

2.  The  arsis  is  either  equal  in  duration  to  the  thesis,  or  twice  as 
long. 

Thus,  in  the  dactyl,  —  ^  and  anapaest,  ^  w  — ,  it  is  equal ;  in  the  tro¬ 
chee,  —  w,  and  iambus,  ^  — ,  it  is  twice  as  long.  This  difference  in  the  pro¬ 
portionate  duration  of  the  arsis  and  thesis  constitutes  the  difference  of  rhythm. 
A  foot  is  said  to  have  the  descending  rhythm,  when  its  arsis  is  at  the  beginning, 
and  the  ascending ,  when  the  thesis  is  at  the  beginning. 

3.  The  stress  of  voice  which  falls  upon  the  arsis  of  a  foot,  is  called 
the  ictus .  When  a  long  syllable  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot  is  resolved  into 
two  short  ones,  the  ictus  falls  upon  the  former. 

Note  1.  Some  suppose  that  the  terms  arsis  and  thesis,  as  used  by  the  an¬ 
cients,  denoted  respectively  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  hand  in  beating  time, 
and  that  the  place  of  the  thesis  was  the  syllable  which  received  the  ictus. 


§  309,  310.  PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION - DACTYLIC  METRE.  347 


Note  2.  As  the  ancient  pronunciation  of  Latin  is  not  now  understood, 
writers  differ  in  regard  to  the  mode  of  reading  verse.  According  to  some,  the 
accent  of  each  word  should  always  be  preserved ;  while  others  direct  that  the 
stress  of  voice  should  be  laid  on  the  arsis  of  the  foot,  and  that  no  regard  should 
be  paid  to  the  accent. 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  final  letters  elided  by  synalcepha  and  ecth- 
lipsis,  though  omitted  in  scanning,  were  pronounced  in  reading  verse. 

CJESURA. 

§  309.  Ccesura  is  the  separation,  by  the  ending  of  a  word, 
of  syllables  rhythmically  or  metrically  connected. 

Caesura  is  of  three  kinds: — 1,  of  the  foot;  2,  of  the  rhythm ;  and  3, 
of  the  verse . 

1.  Caesura  of  the  foot  occurs  when  a  word  ends  before  a  foot  is 
completed;  as, 

Silves-  |  -trem  tenu-  J  -i  Mu-  J  -sam  medi-  |  -taris  a-  j  -venA  Virg.  E.  1,  2. 

2.  Caesura  of  the  rhythm  is  the  separation  of  the  arsis  from  the 
thesis  by  the  ending  of  a  word,  as  in  the  second,  third,  and  fourth 
feet  of  the  preceding  verse. 

Rem  1.  It  hence  appears  that  the  caesura  of  the  rhythm  is  always  a  caesura 
of  the  foot,  as  e.  g.  in  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th  feet  of  the  preceding  verse ;  but,  on 
the  contrary,  that  the  caesura  of  the  foot  is  not  always  a  caesura  of  the  rhythm, 
as  e.  g.  in  the  fifth  foot  of  the  same  verse. 

(1.)  Caesura  of  the  rhythm  allows  a  final  syllable  naturally  short, 
to  stand  in  the  arsis  of  the  foot  instead  of  a  long  one,  it  being  length¬ 
ened  by  the  ictus ;  as, 

Pectori-  |  -bus  Inhl-  |  -ans  spl-  |  -rantla  |  consulit  |  exta.  Virg.  A.  4,  64. 

This  occurs  chiefly  in  hexameter  verse. 

Rem.  2.  Caesura  of  the  foot  and  of  the  verse  do  not  of  themselves  lengthen  a 
short  syllable,  but  they  often  coincide  with  that  of  the  rhythm. 

3.  Caesura  of  the  verse  is  such  a  division  of  a  line  into  two  parts, 
as  affords  to  the  voice  a  convenient  pause  or  rest,  without  injury  to 
the  sense  or  harmony. 

Rem.  3.  The  caesura  of  the  verse  is  often  called  the  ccesural  pause.  In  sev¬ 
eral  kinds  of  verse,  its  place  is  fixed ;  in  others,  it  may  fall  in  more  than  one 
place,  and  the  choice  is  left  to  the  poet.  Of  the  former  kind  is  the  pentameter, 
of  the  latter  the  hexameter. 

The  proper  place  of  the  csesural  pause  will  be  treated  of,  so  far  as  shall  be  necessary, 
under  each  species  of  verse. 

Rem.  4.  The  effect  of  the  caesura  is  to  connect  the  different  words  har- 
monic^sly  together,  and  thus  to  give  smoothness,  grace,  and  sweetness,  to  the 
verse. 

DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  METRE. 

DACTYLIC  METRE. 

§  310.  I.  A  hexameter  or  heroic  verse  consists  of  six  feet. 
Of  these  the  fifth  is  a  dactyl,  the  sixth  a  spondee,  and  each  of 
the  other  four  either  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee  ;  as, 


348  PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION - DACTYLIC  METRE.  §  310. 


At  tubS  |  t'rribi-  |  -lem  son!-  |  -tum  procul  |  sere  ca-  |  -nor5.  Virg.  A.  9,  503. 

Inton-  |  -Si  crl-  |  -nGs  Ion-  |  -ga  cGr-  |  -vice  flu-  |  ebant.  Tib, ill.  3,  4,  27. 

Ludere  |  quSe  vel-  |  -lem  calS-  |  -mo  per-  |  -mlslt  S-  |  -grestl.  Virg.  E.  1,  10. 

1.  The  fifth  foot  is  sometimes  a  spondee,  and  the  verse  in  such 
case  is  called  spondaic ;  as, 

CarS  de-  |  -um  sobS-  |  -les  mag-  |  -num  Jovls  |  Incre-  |  -mentum.  Virg.  E.  4,  49. 

Remark  1.  In  such  verses,  the  fourth  foot  is  commonly  a  dactyl,  and  the 
fifth  should  not  close  with  the  end  of  a  word.  Spondaic  lines  are  thought  to 
be  especially  adapted  to  the  expression  of  grave  and  solemn  subjects. 

2.  A  light  and  rapid  movement  is  produced  by  the  frequent  recur¬ 
rence  of  dactyls ;  a  slow  and  heavy  one  by  that  of  spondees ;  as, 

Quadrupe-  |  -dante  pu-  |  -trem  soni-  |  -tu  quSLtit  |  ungulSL  |  campum.  Virg.  A.  8,  696. 

Illi  In-  |  -ter  se-  |  -se  mag-  |  -na  vi  |  brachia  tollunt.  Id.  A.  8,  452. 

Rem.  2.  Variety  in  the  use  of  dactyls  and  spondees  in  successive  lines,  has 
an  agreeable  effect.  Hexameter  verse  commonly  ends  in  a  word  of  two  or 
three  syllables,  and  a  monosyllable  at  the  end  of  a  line  is  generally  ungraceful, 
but  sometimes  produces  a  good  effect;  as, 

Sternitur,  |  ex&nl-  |  -mlsque,  tre-  |  -mens  pro-  |  -cumbit  hu-  |  -ml  bos.  Virg.  A.  5,  481. 
Parturi-  |  -unt  m5n-  |  -tes :  nas-  j  -cetur  |  rldlcu-  j  -lus  mus.  Hor.  A.  P.  139. 

3.  The  beauty  and  harmony  of  hexameter  verse  depend  much  en  due  at¬ 
tention  to  the  ccesura.  (See  §  309.)  A  line  in  which  it  is  neglected  is  destitute 
of  poetic  beauty,  and  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  prose ;  as, 

RSmse  |  moenIS.  |  terruit  |  Impiger  |  Hannibal  |  armls.  Enn. 

4.  The  csesural  pause  most  approved  in  heroic  poetry  is  that  which 
occurs  after  the  penthemimeris,  i.  e.  after  the  arsis  in  the  third  foot. 
This  is  particularly  distinguished  as  the  heroic  ccesura.  Thus, 

At  doflius  |  Interi-  |  -or  ||  re-  |  -gall  |  splendida  |  luxu.  Virg.  A.  1,  637. 

5.  Instead  of  the  preceding,  a  caesura  in  the  thesis  of  the  third 
foot,  or  after  the  arsis  of  the  fourth,  was  also  approved  as  heroic ;  as, 

Infan-  |  -dum  re-  |  -glnS.  ||  ju-J  -bes  reno-  |  -vare  do-  |  -lorem.  Virg.  A.  2,  3. 

Inde  to-  |  -ro  pater  |  JEne-  j  -as  ||  sic  |  orsus  ab  |  alto.  Id.  A.  2,  2. 

Rem.  3.  When  the  csesural  pause  occurs,  as  in  the  latter  example,  after  the 
hephthemimeris ,  i.  e.  after  the  arsis  of  the  fourth  foot,  another  but  slighter  one  is 
often  found  in  the  second  foot ;  as, 

Prlma  te-  |  -net,  ||  plau-  |  -suque  vo-  |  -lat  ||  fremi-  |  -tuque  se-  |  -cundo.  Virg.  A.  5,  338. 

6.  The  caesura  after  the  third  foot,  dividing  the  verse  into  exactly 
equal  parts,  was  least  approved ;  as, 

Cul  non  |  dictus  Hy-  |  -las  puer  ||  et  La-  |  -tonlS.  |  Delos.  Virg.  G.  3,  6. 

Rem.  4.  The  csesural  pause  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  feet  was  considered 
as  peculiarly  adapted  to  pastoral  poetry,  particularly  when  the  fourth  foot  was 
a  dactyl,  and  was  hence  termed  the  bucolic  csesnra;  as, 

Stant  vltu-  |  -li  et  tene-  |  -rls  mu-  |  -gltlbus  ||  aera  |  complent.  Nemes.  • 

Note  1.  The  caesura  after  the  arsis  is  sometimes  called  the  masculine  or 
syllabic  csesura ;  that  in  the  thesis,  the  feminine  or  trochaic ,  as  a  trochee  imme¬ 
diately  precedes.  When  a  csesura  occurs  in  the  fifth  foot  it  is  usually  the 
trochaic  csesura,  unless  the  foot  is  a  spondee ;  "as. 

Fraxinus  |  In  sll-  |  -vis  pul-  |  -cherrlm£,  |  plnus  in  |  hortis.  Virg.  E.  7,  65. 

(a.)  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  two  successive  trochaic  caesuras  in  the  second 
and  third  feet  are,  in  general,  to  be  avoided,  but  they  are  sometimes  employed 
to  express  irregular  or  impetuous  motion ;  as, 


§311.  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — DACTYLIC  METRE.  349 


tJna  Eu-  |  -rusquZ  No-  j  - tusquS  ru-  |  -unt  ere-  |  -bSrquS  pro-  |  -cellis.  Virg.  A.  1,  85. 

( b .)  Successive  trochaic  caesuras  are,  in  like  manner,  to  be  avoided  in  the  third 
and  fourth  feet,  but  are  approved  in  the  first  and  second,  in  the  fourth  and 
fifth ,  and  in  the  firsts  third  and  fifth.  See  Virg.  A.  6,  651:  1,  94:  and  6,  522. 

Note  2.  In  the  principal  caesura  of  the  verse  poets  frequently  introduce  a 
pause  in  the  sense,  which  must  be  attended  to  in  order  to  determine  the  place 
of  the  caesural  pause.  For  in  the  common  place  for  the  caesura  in  the  third 
foot  there  is  often  a  caesura  of  the  foot ;  while,  in  the  fourth  foot,  a  still  more 
marked  division  occurs.  In  this  case,  the  latter  is  to  be  considered  as  the 
principal  caesura,  and  distinguished  accordingly;  as, 

Belli  |  ferra-  |  -tos  pos-  |  -tes,  ||  por-  |  -tasque  re-  |  -fregit.  Hor.  S.  1,  4,  61. 

II.  The  Priapean  is  usually  accounted  a  species  of  hexameter.  It 
is  so  constructed  as  to  be  divisible  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each, 
having  generally  a  trochee  in  the  first  and  fourth  place,  but  often  a 
spondee  and  rarely  a  dactyl ;  in  the  second,  usually  a  dactyl ;  and 
an  amphimacer  and  more  rarely  a  dactyl  in  the  third ;  as, 

O  co-  j  -Ionia  |  quae  cupis  ||  ponte  |  ludere  |  longo.  Catuli .  17, 1. 

It  is,  however,  more  properly  considered  as  choriambic  metre,  consisting  of 
alternate  Glyconics  and  Pherecratios.  See  §  316,  IV.  V.  Thus, 

0  co-  |  -lonlSL,  quae  |  cupis 
PontS  |  ludere  Ion-  J  -go. 

Note.  A  regular  hexameter  verse  is  termed  Priapean ,  when  it  is  so  con¬ 
structed  as  to  be  divisable  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each ;  as, 

TertlSl  |  pars  pa-  J  -trl  dat3L  ||  pars  data  |  tertia  |  matri.  Catull .  62,  64- 

See  above,  6. 

§  311.  III.  A  pentameter  verse  consists  of  five  feet. 

Remark  1.  It  is  generally,  however,  divided,  in  scanning,  into 
two  hemistichs,  the  first  consisting  of  two  feet,  either  dactyls  or  spon¬ 
dees,  followed  by  a  long  syllable ;  the  last,  of  two  dactyls,  also  fol¬ 
lowed  by  a  long  syllable ;  as, 

Natu-  [  -raj  sequl-  |  -tur  ||  semlnS.  |  quisque  sii-  [-S5.  Prop.  3,  7,  20. 

Carmini-  j  -bus  vl-  j  -yes  H  tempus  In  |  omne  me-  J  -Is.  Ovid. 

1.  According  to  the  more  ancient  and  correct  mode  of  scanning 
pentameter  verse,  it  consists  of  five  feet,  of  which  the  first  and  second 
may  each  be  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee ;  the  third  is  always  a  spondee  ; 
and  the  fourth  and  fifth  are  anapaests ;  as, 

Natu-  |  -rig  sequi-  |  -tur  ||  sem-  |  -InS.  quls-  |  -que  suae. 

Carmini-  |  -bus  vl-  |  -yes  ||  tern-  |  -pus  In  om-  |  -ne  mels. 

2.  The  caesura,  in  pentameter  verse,  always  occurs  after  the  pen¬ 
themimeris,  i.  e.  at  the  close  of  the  first  hemistich.  It  very  rarely 
lengthens  a  short  syllable. 

3.  The  pentameter  rarely  ends  with  a  word  of  three  syllables.  In  Ovid,  it 
usually  ends  with  a  dissyllable. 

Rem.  2.  This  species  of  verse  is  seldom  used,  except  in  connection  with 
hexameter,  a  line  of  each  recurring  alternately.  This  combination  is  called 
elegiac  verse.  Thus, 

Flebilis  Indignos,  Elegelft,  solve  cSpIllos. 

Ah  nlmls  ex  ver5  nunc  tlbl  nom$n  £rit!  Ovid.  Am.  3,  9,  3. 

30 


350  PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION - ANAPA: STIC  METRE.  §  313. 


§  313.  IV.  The  tetrameter  a  priore ,  or  Alcmanian  dactylic  te¬ 
trameter ,  consists  of  the  first  four  feet  of  a  hexameter,  of  which  the 
fourth  is  always  a  dactyl ;  as, 

GarrulSl  |  per  ra-  |  -m5s,  ivls  |  obstrSpit.  Sen.  CEd.  454. 

V.  The  tetrameter  a  posteriore ,  or  spondaic  tetrameter ,  consists  of 
the  last  four  feet  of  a  hexameter ;  as, 

Ibimus,  |  0  soci-  |  -I,  comi-  |  -tesque.  Hor.  Od.  1,  7,  26. 

Remark.  The  penultimate  foot  in  this,  as  in  hexameter  verse,  may  be  a 
spondee,  but  in  this  case  the  preceding  foot  should  be  a  dactyl ;  as, 

MSnso-  |  -rem  cohi-  |  -bent  Ar-  |  -chyti.  Hor.  Od.  1,  28,  2. 

VI.  The  dactylic  trimeter  consists  of  the  last  three  feet  of  a  hexa¬ 
meter;  as, 

Grato  |  Pyrrha  sub  |  antro.  Hor.  Od.  1,  5,  3. 

Remark.  But  this  kind  of  verse  is  more  properly  included  in  choriambic 
metre.  See  §  316,  V. 

VII.  The  trimeter  catalectic  ArcJiilochian  consists  of  the  first  five 
half  feet  of  a  hexameter,  but  the  first  and  second  feet  are  commonly 
dactyls;  as, 

Pulvis  et  |  umbri  su-  j  -mus.  Hor.  Od.  4,  7,  16. 

VIII.  The  dactylic  dimeter ,  or  Adonic ,  consists  of  two  feet,  a  dac¬ 
tyl  and  a  spondee ;  as, 

Risit  A-  I  -polio.  Hor.  Od.  1,  10, 12. 

IX.  The  AEolic  pentameter  consists  of  four  dactyls  preceded  by  a 
spondee,  a  trochee,  or  an  iambus.  Thus 


X.  The  Phalcecian  pentameter  consists  of  a  dactylic  penthimimeris 
and  a  dactylic  dimeter ;  as, 

Vise-  j  -bat  geli-  |  -dai  H  sideri  |  brumae.  Boethius. 

Remark.  A  trochee  is  sometimes  found  in  the  first  place  and  an  iambus  in 
the  first  and  second  places. 

XI.  The  Tetrameter  Meiurus ,  or  Faliscan  consists  of  the  last  four 
feet  of  a  hexameter,  except  that  the  last  foot  is  an  iambus  instead  of 
a  spondee ;  as, 

TJt  nova  |  fruge  gr&-  |  -vis  Ceres  |  eat.  BoVthius. 

XII.  The  Tetrameter  Catalectic  consists  of  the  tetrameter  a  priore 
wanting  the  latter  half  of  the  concluding  dactyl ;  as, 

Omne  homl-  j  -num  genus  |  In  ter- 1  -rls.  Boethius. 


ANAPAESTIC  METRE. 

§313.  I.  The  anapaestic  monometer  consists  of  two  ana¬ 
paests;  as, 


Ululas-  j  -sS  c&n§s  Sen. 


§  314.  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — IAMBIC  METRE.  351 


II.  The  anapcestic  dimeter  consists  of  two  measures,  or  four 
anapaests;  as, 

Pharetras-  |  -que  graves  |  d&te  sas-  |  -v'a  fero....  Sen. 

Remark  1.  The  first  foot  in  each  measure  of  anapaestic  metre  was  very 
often  changed  to  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee,  and  the  second  foot  often  to  a  spondee, 
and,  in  a  few  instances,  to  a  dactyl. 

Rem.  2.  Anapaestic  verses  are  generally  so  constructed  that  each  measure 
ends  with  a  word,  so  that  they  may  be  written  and  read  in  lines  of  one,  two, 
or  more  measures. 


IAMBIC  METRE. 


§314.  I.  1.  The  iambic  trimeter ,  or  senarius ,  consists  of 
three  iambic  measures,  or  six  iambic  feet ;  as, 

Phase-  |  -lus  11-  |  -le,  ||  quern.  |  vide-  |  -tls  hos-  |  -pites....  Catull.  4.  1. 

2.  The  caesura  commonly  occurs  in  the  third  but  sometimes  in  the 
fourth  foot. 

3.  The  pure  iambic  measure  was  seldom  used  by  the  Latin  poets, 
but  to  vary  the  rhythm  spondees  were  introduced  into  the  first,  third, 
and  fifth  places.  In  every  foot,  also,  except  the  last,  which  was  al¬ 
ways  an  iambus,  a  long  syllable  was  often  changed  into  two  short 
ones,  so  that  an  anapaest  or  a  dactyl  was  used  for  a  spondee,  and  a 
tribrach  for  an  iambus,  but  the  use  of  the  dactyl  in  the  fifth  place 
was  very  rare ;  as, 

Quo,  quo  |  sceles-  |  -tl  rui-  J  -tis?  aut  |  cur  dex-  |  -teris....  Hor.  Epod.  7, 1. 

Alltl-  |  -bus  at-  |  -que  cam-  |  -bus  homl-  |  -cldam  Hec-  |  -torem....  Id.  Epod.  17, 12. 

4.  Sometimes,  also,  a  proceleusmatic,  or  double  pyrrhic,  was  used  in  the 
first  place  for  a  spondee.  The  writers  of  comedy,  satire,  and  fable,  admitted 
the  spondee  and  its  equivalents  (the  dactyl  and  anapaest)  into  the  second  and 
fourth  places,  as  well  as  the  first,  third,  and  fifth. 

5.  The  following,  therefore,  is  the  scale  of  the  Iambic  Trimeter: — 


6.  In  the  construction  of  the  Iambic  Trimeter  an  accent  should  fall  on  the 
second  syllable  of  either  the  third  foot  or  both  the  second  and  fourth  feet ;  as, 
Ibis  |  Lxbur-  |  -nls  in-  |  ter  al-  |  -ta  na-  |  -vium  |  . 

Utrum-  |  -ne  jus-  |  -si  per-  |  -s equS'-  |  -mur  o-  j  -tium.  | 

II.  The  scazon ,  or  choliambus  (lame  iambic),  is  the  iambic  trime¬ 
ter,  with  a  spondee  in  the  sixth  foot,  and  generally  an  iambus  in  the 
fifth;  as, 

Cur  In  |  thea-  |  -trum,  Cato  |  seve-  f  -re,  ve-  |  -nlstl? 

An  xde-  |  o  tan-  |  -turn  yen-  |  -eras,  |  fit  ex-  |  -Ires?  Mart.  Ep.  1,  1,  3. 


This  species  of  verse  is  also  called  Eipponactic  trimeter,  from  its  inventor, 
Hipponax. 


352  PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION - IAMBIC  METRE.  §  314 


HI.  The  iambic  tetrameter  or  quadratus,  called  also  from  the  num¬ 
ber  of  its  feet  octonarius ,  a  measure  used  by  the  comic  poets,  consists 
of  four  iambic  measures,  subject  to  the  same  variations  as  the  iambic 
trimeter  (I.) ;  as, 

Nunc  hie  |  dies  |  SLlIim  |  vitam  af-  ||  -fert,  SLIT-  |  -os  mo- 1  -res  pos-  |  -tulat.  Ter.  A.  1,2, 18. 

Remark.  The  caesura  regularly  follows  the  second  measure. 

IV.  The  iambic  tetrameter  catalectic  or  Hipponactic,  is  the  iambic 
tetrameter,  wanting  the  last  syllable,  and  having  always  an  iambus 
in  the  seventh  place,  but  admitting  in  the  other  places  the  same  va¬ 
riations  as  the  trimeter  and  tetrameter ;  as, 

Depren-  |  -sa  na-  |  -vis  In  |  marl,  |  vesa-  |  -men-  |  -te  yen-  |  -to.  Catull.  25, 13. 

V.  The  iambic  trimeter  catalectic  or  Archilochian,  is  the  iambic  tri¬ 
meter  (L),  wanting  the  final  syllable.  Like  the  common  iambic  tri¬ 
meter,  it  admits  a  spondee  into  the  first  and  third  places,  but  not  into 
the  fifth ;  as, 

Voca-  j  -tus  at-  |  -que  non  \  yoca-  |  -tus  an-  |  -dit.  Hor.  Od.  2,  18,  40. 

Trahunt-  |  -que  sic-  j  -cas  mach-  J  -inae  |carl-  J  -nas.  Id.  Od.  1,  4,  2. 

VI.  The  iambic  dimeter  consists  of  two  iambic  measures,  with  the 
same  variations  as  the  iambic  trimeter  (I.)  ;  as, 

Fort!  |  seque-  |  -mur  pSc-  |  -tore.  Hor.  Epod.  1,  14. 

Canidi-  |  -5.  trac-  J  -tavlt  |  d&pes.  Id.  Epod.  3,  8. 

Vide-  |  -re  propg-  j  -rantes  j  dSmum.  Id.  Epod.  3,  62. 

Remark.  The  iambic  dimeter  is  also  called  the  Archilochian  dimeter . 


The  following  is  its  scale : — 


VII.  The  iambic  dimeter  Tiypermeter ,  called  also  Archilochian ,  is 
the  iambic  dimeter,  with  an  additional  syllable  at  the  end ;  as, 


Rede-  |  -git  In  |  ver5s  |  tim5-  |  -res.  Hor.  Od.  1,  37, 15. 
Remark.  Horace  always  makes  the  third  foot  a  spondee. 


Vm.  The  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  is  the  iambic  dimeter,  want¬ 
ing  the  first  syllable  ;  as, 

Non  |  ebur  |  neque  au-  J  -rSum....  Hor.  Od.  2, 18, 1. 


Remark.  This  kind  of  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  catalectic  trochaic 
dimeter.  See  §  315,  IV. 

IX.  The  iambic  dimeter  catalectic ,  or  Anacreontic ,  is  the  iambic 
dimeter,  wanting  the  final  syllable,  and  having  always  an  iambus  in 
the  third  foot ;  as, 

Ut  tl-  |  gris  or- 1  -b&  gna-  |  -tls.  Sen.  Med.  863. 


X.  The  Galliambus  consists  of  two  iambic  dimeters  catalectic,  the 
last  of  which  wants  the  final  syllable. 

Remark  1.  It  was  so  denominated  from  the  Galli  or  priests  of  Cybele,  by 
whom  it  was  used. 


§  315.  PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION — TROCHAIC  METRE.  353 


Rem.  2.  In  the  first  foot  of  each  dimeter  the  anapaest  was  generally  pre¬ 
ferred  to  the  spondee.  The  catalectic  syllable  at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter 
is  long,  and  the  second  foot  of  the  second  dimeter  is  commonly  a  tribrach ;  as, 

Super  51-  |  -ta  vec-  |  -tus  A-  |  -tys  ||  celeri  |  r5te  ma-  |  -ria.  Catull ,  63,  1. 

Hem.  3.  The  caesura  uniformly  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter. 

TROCHAIC  METRE. 

§  315.  1.  Trochaic  verses  bear  a  near  affinity  to  iambics.  The  addi¬ 

tion  or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  beginning  of  a  pure  iambic  verse,  ren¬ 
ders  it  pure  trochaic,  and  the  addition  or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  be¬ 
ginning  of  a  pure  trochaic  line,  renders  it  pure  iambic,  with  the  deficiency  or 
redundancy  of  a  syllable  in  each  case  at  the  end  of  the  verse. 

I.  The  trochaic  tetrameter  catalectic  consists  of  seven  feet,  fol¬ 
lowed  by  a  catalectic  syllable.  In  the  first  five  places  and  very 
rarely  in  the  sixth,  it  admits  a  tribrach,  but  in  the  seventh  a 
trochee  only.  In  the  even  places,  besides  the  tribrach,  it  admits 
also  a  spondee,  a  dactyl,  an  anapaest,  and  sometimes  a  proceleus- 
matic ;  as, 

Jussus  |  est  in  |  ermls  |  Ire :  ||  pQrus  |  Ire  |  jussus  |  est.  Auct.  P.  V2n. 

Romu  I  laeas  |  IpsS.  |  fecit  ||  cum  Sa-  |  -binis  |  nuptl-  |  -as.  Id. 

Dan&I  j  des,  co-  |  -Ite ;  |  vestras  ||  hie  dl-  |  -es  quse-  |  -rlt  m£-  |  -nils.  Sen. 

The  following  is  its  scale : — 


2 

CO 

4 

6 

6 

7 

—  —  — 

w  ^  w 

N— ✓  — 

—  — 

— 

> 

i 

Remark  1.  The  pure  trochaic  verse  was  rarely  used,  and  the  dactyl  very 
rarely  occurs  in  the  fourth  place.  The  caesural  pause  uniformly  occurs  after 
the  fourth  foot,  thus  dividing  the  verse  into  a  complete  dimeter  and  a  catalec¬ 
tic  dimeter.  The  comic  writers  introduced  the  spondee  and  its  equivalent  feet 
into  the  odd  places. 

Rem.  2.  The  complete  trochaic  tetrameter  or  octonarius  properly  consists  of 
eight  feet,  all  trochees,  subject,  however,  to  the  same  variations  as  the  catalec¬ 
tic  tetrameter;  as, 

Ipse  |  summis  |  saxis  |  fixus  |  aspe-  |  -rls,  e-  j  -visce-  |  -ratus.  JEnn. 

II.  The  Sapphic  verse,  invented  by  the  poetess  Sappho,  consists 
of  five  feet — the  first  a  trochee,  the  second  a  spondee,  the  third  a 
dactyl,  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  trochees ;  as, 

Inte-  |  -ger  vl-  |  -tae,  ||  scele-  |  -risque  |  purus.  Hor.  Od.  1,  22,  1. 

1.  Sappho,  and,  after  her  example,  Catullus,  sometimes  made  the  second 
foot  a  trochee. 

2.  Those  Sapphics  are  most  harmonious  which  have  the  caesura  after  the 
fifth  semi-foot. 

Note  1.  In  the  composition  of  the  Sapphic  stanza,  a  word  is  sometimes 
divided  between  the  end  of  the  third  Sapphic,  and  the  beginning  of  the  Adonic 
which  follows ;  as, 

Labi-  |  -tur  rl-  |  -pa  Jove  |  non  pro-  |  -bante  ux- 
5rius  |  amnis.  Hor.  Od.  1,  2, 19. 

30* 


354  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — CHORIAMBIC  METRE.  §  316. 


It  has  been  thought  by  some  that  such  lines  should  be  considered  as  one 
Sapphic  verse  of  seven  feet,  the  fifth  foot  being  either  a  spondee  or  a  trochee. 

Note  2.  This  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  epichoriambic,  having  an  epi¬ 
trite  in  the  first  place,  a  choriambus  in  the  second,  and  ending  with  an  iambic 
sizygy  catalectic;  thus, 

Integer  vi-  |  -tae,  sceleris-  |  -que  puriis. 

HI.  The  Phalcecian  verse  consists  of  five  feet — a  spondee,  a  dac¬ 
tyl,  and  three  trochees ;  as, 

Non  est  |  vlverS,  |  sed  v3L-  |  -lere  |  vlt&.  Mart. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  a  spondee  as  the  first  foot,  Catullus  sometimes  uses  a 
trochee  or  an  iambus.  This  writer  also  sometimes  uses  a  spondee  in  the 
second  place. 

Rem.  2.  The  Phalcecian  verse  is  sometimes  called  hendecasyllabic ,  as  con¬ 
sisting  of  eleven  syllables ;  but  that  name  does  not  belong  to  it  exclusively. 

IY.  The  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic  consists  of  three  feet,  properly 
all  trochees,  and  a  catalectic  syllable,  but  admitting  also  in  the  second 
place  a  spondee  or  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Non  e  |  -bur  ne-  |  -que  aure-  |  -um.  Hor.  Od.  2,  18, 1. 

Lents  |  ac  modi-  |  -cum  flu-  |  -ens 

Aura,  |  nec  ver-  |  -gens  la-  |  -tus.  Sen.  (Ed.  887. 

Note.  This  measure  is  the  same  as  the  acephalous  iambic  dimeter  (see 
§  314,  VIII.),  and  it  is  not  important  whether  it  be  regarded  as  iambic  or 
trochaic. 


CHORIAMBIC  METRE. 

§316.  (a.)  In  a  pure  choriambic  verse  each  metre  except 

the  last  is  a  choriambus,  and  the  last  an  Iambic  syzygy. 

Note.  A  spondee  and  iambus,  i.  e.  a  third  epitrite,  are  sometimes  used  in 
place  of  the  Iambic  syzygy. 

( h .)  An  epichoriambic  verse  is  composed  of  one  or  more 
choriambi  with  some  other  foot,  especially  a  ditrochee  or  a 
second  epitrite,  joined  with  it. 

1.  The  choriambic  pentameter  consists  of  a  spondee,  three  chori¬ 
ambi,  and  an  iambus ;  as, 

Tu  ne  |  quaesieris,  |  scire  nefas,  |  quem  mihi,  quem  tibl.  Her.  Od.  1,  11, 1. 

II.  The  choriambic  tetrameter  consists  of  three  choriambi,  or  feet 
of  equal  length,  and  a  Bacchius ;  as, 

Omne  nemus  |  cum  fluviis,  |  omne  c&nat  J  profundum.  Claud. 

2.  In  this  verse  Horace  substituted  a  spondee  for  the  iambus  con¬ 
tained  in  the  first  choriambus ;  as, 

Te  deos  o-  |  -ro,  Sybarln  |  cur  properes  |  Smando.  Hor.  Od.  1,  8.  2. 

3.  Some  scan  this  verse  as  an  epichoriambic  tetrameter  catalectic,  begin¬ 
ning  with  the  second  epitrite. 

III.  1.  The  Asclepiadic  tetrameter  (invented  by  the  poet  Ascle¬ 
piades)  consists  of  a  spondee,  two  choriambi,  and  an  iambus ;  as, 

Msecs- 1  -nas,  8-tavls  U  edite  rSg-  |  -Ibus.  Hor.  Od.  1, 1, 1. 


§  317.  PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION — IONIC  METRE. 


355 


2.  This  form  is  invariably  observed  by  Horace ;  but  other  poets  sometimes, 
though  rarely,  make  the  first  foot  a  dactyl. 

3.  The  caesural  pause  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  choriambus. 

4.  This  measure  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  dactylic  pentameter  catalectic. 
See  §  311,  III.  Thus, 

Msece-  |  -nas,  ata-  |  Yls  j|  edite  |  regibus. 

IV.  1.  The  choriambic  trimeter,  or  Glyconie  (invented  by  the  poet 
Glyco),  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  an  iambus;  as, 

Sic  te  |  dlyS.  potens  |  Cypri...  Hor.  Od.  1,  3, 1. 

2.  The  first  foot  is  sometimes  an  iambus  or  a  trochee. 

3.  When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  the  verse  might  be  scanned  as  a  dactylic 
trimeter.  Thus, 

Sic  te  |  dlya  po-  |  -tens  Cypri. 

V.  1.  The  choriambic  trimeter  catalectic ,  or  Pherecratie  (so  called 
from  the  poet  Pherecrates),  is  the  Glyconie  deprived  of  its  final  syl¬ 
lable,  and  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  a  catalectic  sylla¬ 
ble;  as, 

Gr&to,  |  PyrrM,  sub  an-  |  -tro.  Hor .  Od.  1,  5,  3. 

2.  The  first  foot  was  sometimes  a  trochee  or  an  anapest,  rarely  an  iambus. 

3.  When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  this  measure  might  be  scanned  as  a 
dactylic  trimeter.  See  §  312,  VI. 

4.  The  Pherecratie  subjoined  to  the  Glyconie  produces  the  Priapean  verse. 
See  §  310,  II. 

VI.  1.  The  choriambic  dimeter  consists  of  a  choriambus  and  a 
Bacchius;  as, 

LydISL  die  |  per  omnes.  Hor.  Od.  1,  8, 1. 

2.  This  verse  is  by  some  called  the  choriambic  dimeter  catalectic.  Cf.  §  316, 
(a.) 


IONIC  METRE. 

§317.  I.  The  Ionic  a  majore ,  or  Sotadic ,  (from  the  poet  So¬ 
tades),  consists  of  three  greater  Ionics  and  a  spondee. 

1.  The  Ionic  feet,  however,  are  often  changed  into  ditrochees,  and  either  of 
the  two  long  syllables  in  those  feet  into  two  short  ones ;  as, 

Has,  cum  gemi-  |  -na  cSmpede,  |  dedicat  c3L-  |  -tenas, 

Saturne,  tl-  |  -bl  Zoilus,  |  annulos  prl-  |  -ores.  Mart. 

2.  Hence  the  following  is  its  scale: — 


*  Note.  The  final  syllable,  by  §  301,  note,  may  be  short. 

II.  1.  The  Ionic  a  minore  consists  generally  of  verses  of  three  or 
four  feet,  which  are  all  smaller  Ionics ;  as, 

Puer  ales,  |  tibi  telas,  |  oj^erosaj-  |  -que  Mlnervm...  Hor.  Od.  3, 12,  4. 

2.  In  this  verse,  as  in  the  anapaestic,  no  place  is  assigned  to  the  pause ;  be¬ 
cause,  since  the  metres,  if  rightly  constructed,  end  with  a  word,  the  effect  of  a 
pause  will  be  produced  at  the  end  of  each  metre. 


356  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — COMPOUND  METRES.  §  318. 

COMPOUND  METRES. 

§  318«  Compound  metre  is  the  union  of  two  species  of 
metre  in  the  same  verse. 

I.  The  dactylic  o-iambic  metre  or  Elegiambus  consists  of  a  dactylic 
penthemimeris  (  312,  vii.),  followed  by  an  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
Vi.);  as, 

ScrlberS  |  verslcu-  |  -los  ||  &mo-  |  -re  per-  |  -culsum  |  gr&vl.  Hor.  Epod.  11,  2. 

II.  The  iambico-dactylic  metre  or  lambelegus  consists  of  the  same 
members  as  the  preceding,  but  in  a  reversed  order ;  as, 

NIves-  |  -que  de-  |  -ducunt  |  Jovem :  ||  nunc  m&re,  |  nunc  silu-  |  -ae.  Hor.  Epod.  13,  2. 

Note.  The  members  composing  this  and  the  preceding  species  of  verse  are 
often  written  in  separate  verses. 

III.  The  greater  Alcaic  consists  of  an  iambic  penthemimeris,  i.  e. 
of  two  iambic  feet  and  a  long  catalectic  syllable,  followed  by  a  chor¬ 
iambus,  an  d  an  iambus ;  as, 

Vides  |  ut  al-  |  -ta  ||  stet  nive  can-  J  -didum.  Hor.  Od.  1,  9,  1. 

Remark  1.  The  first  foot  is  often  a  spondee. 

Rem.  2.  The  caesura  uniformly  occurs  after  the  catalectic  syllable. 

Rem.  3.  This  verse  is  sometimes  so  scanned  as  to  make  the  last  two  feet 
dactyls. 

TV.  The  dactylico-trochaic  or  ArchilocJiian  heptameter,  consists  of 
the  dactylic  tetrameter  a  priore  (§  312),  followed  by  three  trochees ; 
as, 

Solvitur  |  acris  hi-  |  -ems  gra-  |  -ta  vice  J|  veris  J  et  Fa-  |  -vont.  Hor.  Od.  1,  4,  1. 

Remark.  The  caesura  occurs  between  the  two  members. 

Y.  The  dactylico-trochaic  tetrameter  or  lesser  Alcaic,  consists  of  two 
dactyls,  followed  by  two  trochees,  i.  e.  of  a  dactylic  dimeter  followed 
by  a  trochaic  monometer  ;  as, 

Levia  |  personu-  ||  -ere  [  saxa.  Hor.  Od.  1,  17,  12. 


COMBINATION  OF  VERSES  IN  POEMS. 

§319.  1.  A  poem  may  consist  either  of  one  kind  of  verse 

only  or  of  a  combination  of  two  or  more  kinds. 

2.  A  poem  in  which  only  one  kind  of  verse  is  employed,  is  called 
carmen  monocolon ;  that  which  has  two  kinds,  dicolon ;  that  which 
has  three  kinds,  tricolon. 

3.  When  the  poem  returns,  after  the  second  line,  to  the  same 
verse  with  which  it  began,  it  is  called  distrophon ;  when  after  the 
third  line,  tristrophon ;  and  when  after  the  fourth,  tetrastrophon. 

4.  The  several  verses  which  occur  before  the  poem  returns  to  the 
kind  of  verse  with  which  it  began,  constitute  a  stanza  or  strophe. 

5.  A  poem  consisting  of  two  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains  two 
verses,  is  called  dicolon  distrdphon ,  (see  §  320,  3) ;  when  it  contains  three,  dico- 


§  320.  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — HORATIAN  METRES.  857 


Ion  tristrdphon ,  (Auson.  Profess.  21);  when  four,  dicolon  tetrastrophon,  (§320,  2); 
and  when  five,  dicolon  pentastrdphon. 

6.  A  poem  consisting  of  three  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains  three 
verses,  is  called  tricolm  tristrdphon ,  (§  320,  15);  when  four,  tricolon  tetrastrd- 
phon ,  (§  320,  1). 

HORATIAN  METRES. 

§  330.  The  different  species  of  metre  used  by  Horace  in 
his  lyric  compositions  are  twenty.  The  various  forms  in  which 
he  has  employed  them,  either  separate  or  in  conjunction,  are 
nineteen,  arranged,  according  to  the  order  of  preference  given 
to  them  by  the  poet,  in  the  following 

SYNOPSIS. 

1.  Two  greater  Alcaics  (§  318,  m.),  one  Archilochian  iambic 
dimeter,  hypermeter  (§  314,  vii.),  and  one  lesser  Alcaic  (§  318,  v.)  ; 
as, 

Vides,  ut  alta  stet  nive  candidum 

Soracte,  nec  jam  sustineant  onus 
Sllv®  laborantes,  geluquS 
FluminS.  constiterint  acuto.  (Lib.  1,  9.) 

Remark.  This  is  called  the  Horatian  stanza,  because  it  seems  to  have  been 
a  favorite  with  Horace,  being  used  in  thirty-seven  of  his  odes. 

2.  Three  Sapphics  (§315,  n.)  and  one  Adonic  (§312,  vm.) ;  as, 

Jam  satis  terris  nivis  atque  dirae 

Grandinis  misit  pater,  et,  rubente 

Dextera  sacras  jaculatus  arces, 

Terruit  urbem.  ( Lib .  1,  2.) 

3.  One  Glyconie  (§  316,  iv.)  and  one  Asclepiadic  (§  316,  iii.) ;  as, 

Sic  te  Div5.  potens  Cypri, 

Sic  fratres  Helena;,  lucIdSL  sidera...  ( Lib .  1,  3.) 

4.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.)  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
Vi.) ;  as, 

Ibis  Liburnis  Inter  altS.  navium, 

Amice,  propugnacula.  ( Epod .  1.) 

5.  Three  Asclepiadics  (§  316,  m.)  and  one  Glyconie  (§316,  iv.) ; 
as, 

Scriberis  Vario  fortis,  et  hostium 
Victor,  Mae5nii  carminis  aliti, 

Quam  rem  cumque  ferox  navibus  aut  equis 

Miles,  te  duce,  gesserit.  (Lib.  1,  6.) 

6.  Two  Asclepiadics  (§  316,  m.),  one  Pherecratie  (§  316,  v.),  and 
one  Glyconie  (§  316,  iv.)  ;  as, 

Dianam,  tenera;,  dicite  virgines: 

Intonsum,  pueri,  dicite  Cynthium, 

Latonamque  supremo 

Dilectam  penitus  Jovi.  (Lib.  1,  21.) 

7.  The  Asclepiadic  (§316,  m.)  alone;  as, 

Maecenas  5,t&vls  edit5  r€glbus. 


(Lib.  1, 1.) 


358  PROSODY. - VERSIFICATION - HORATIAN  METRES.  §  320. 


8.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  dactylic  tetrameter 
a  posteriore  (§  312,  v.)  ;  as, 

Laudabant  illi  claram  Rhodon,  aut  Mitylenen, 

Aut  Ephesum,  blmirisvS  Corinthi...  ( Lib .  1,  7.) 

9.  The  choriambic  pentameter  (§  316,  i.)  alone;  as, 

Tu  ne  quaesieris,  scIrS  nSfas,  quem  mihi,  quem  tibi...  ( Lib .  1,  11.) 

10.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  iambic  dimeter 

(§  314,  vi.)  ;  as,  i 

Nox  erat,  et  coelo  fulgebat  luni  sereno 
Inter  minori  sldSra.  ( Epod .  15.) 

11.  The  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.)  containing  spondees;  as, 

Jam,  jam  efficaci  do  minus  scientiae.  {Epod.  17.) 

12.  One  choriambic  dimeter  (§  316,  vi.)  and  one  choriambic  tetra¬ 
meter  (§  316,  ii.)  with  a  variation ;  as, 

Lydli,  die,  per  omnes 

Te  Deos  oro,  Sybarln  cur  properas  imando...  {Lib.  1,  8.) 

13.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  iambic  trimeter 
without  spondees  (§  314,  i.) ;  as, 

Alteri  jam  teritur  bellis  civilibus  aetas ; 

Suis  et  Ipsi  Romi  viribus  ruit.  {Ep5d.  16.) 

14.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  dactylic  penthe¬ 
mimeris  (§  312,  vii.)  ;  as, 

Dlff  ugere  nives :  redeunt  jam  gramini  campis, 

Arboribusque  corn®.  {Lib.  4,  7.) 

15.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.),  one  dactylic  trimeter  catalec- 
tic  (§  312,  vii.),  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314,  vi.) ;  as, 

Petti,  nihil  me,  sicut  antea,  juvat 
Scribere  versiculos, 

Amore  perculsum  grivi.  {Epoa.  11.) 

Note.  The  second  and  third  lines  are  often  written  as  one  verse.  See 
§  318,  1. 

16.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§310,  I.),  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
Vi.),  and  one  dactylic  penthemimeris  (§  312,  vii.)  ;  as, 

Horridi  tempestas  coelum  contraxit;  et  Imbres 
NIvesque  deducunt  Jovem : 

Nunc  mare,  nunc  siluae...  {Epod.  13.) 


Note.  The  second  and  third  lines  of  this  stanza,  also,  are  often  written  as 
one  verse.  See  §  318,  ii. 

17.  One  Archilocliian  heptameter  (§  318,  iv.)  and  one  iambic  tri¬ 
meter  catalectic  (§  314,  v.) ;  as, 

Solvitur  acris  hlems  grata  vice  verls  et  Fivoni, 

Trahuntque  siccas  machinae  cirlnas.  {Lib.  1,  4.) 

18.  One  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  (§  314,  vm.)  and.  one  iambic 
trimeter  catalectic  (§  314,  v.) ;  as, 

Non  ebur  n8que  aureum 

Mea  rSnldet  In  domo  licunar.  {Lib.  2, 18.) 

19.  The  Ionic  a  minore  (§  317,  n.)  alone;  as, 

Miserarum  est  n€que  imorl  dire  ludum,  n€qu$  dulcl... 


{Lib.  3, 12.) 


§  321.  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — HORATIAN  METRES.  359 


§  321.  A  METRICAL  KEY  TO  THE  ODES  OF  HORACE. 

Containing ,  in  alphabetic  order ,  the  first  words  of  each ,  with  a  refer¬ 
ence  to  the  numbers  in  the  preceding  Synopsis ,  where  the  metre  is 
explained . 


iEli,  vetusto . No.  1 

iEquam  memento .  1 

Albi,  ne  doleas .  5 

Altera  jam  teritur . 13 

Angustam,  amice .  1 

At,  0  deorum .  4 

Audivere,  Lyce .  6 

Bacchum  in  remotis .  1 

Beatus  ille .  4 

Coelo  supinas .  1 

Coelo  tonantem .  1 

Cur  me  querelis .  1 

Delicta  majorum .  1 

Descende  coelo .  1 

Dianam,  tenerae .  6 

Diffugere  nives . 14 

Dive,  qnem  proles .  2 

Divis  orte  bonis .  5 

Donarem  pateras .  7 

Donec  gratus  eram  tibi .  3 

Eheu !  fugaces .  1 

Est  mihi  nonum .  2 

Et  ture  et  fidibus .  3 

Exegi  monumentum .  7 

Extremum  Tanaim .  5 

Faune,  nympharum .  2 

Festo  quid  potius  die .  3 

Herculis  ritu .  2 

Horrida  tempestas . 16 

Ibis  Liburnis . 4 

Icci,  beatis .  1 

Ille  et  nefasto .  1 

Impios  parrae .  2 

Inclusam  Danaen .  5 

Intactis  opulentior .  3 

Integer  vitae .  2 

Intermissa,  Venus,  diu .  3 

Jam  jam  efficaci . 11 

Jam  pauca  aratro .  1 

Jam  satis  terris .  2 

Jam  veris  comites .  5 

Justum  et  tenacem .  1 

Laudabunt  alii .  8 

Lupis  et  agnis .  4 

Lydia,  dic,  per  omnes . 12 

Maecenas  atavis .  7 

Mala  soluta .  4 

Martiis  caelebs .  2 

Mater  saeva  Cupidinum .  3 

Mercuri,  facunde .  2 

Mercuri,  nam  te .  2 

Miserarum  est . 19 


Mollis  inertia . No.10 

Montium  custos .  2 

Motum  ex  Metello .  1 

Musis  amicus .  1 

Natis  in  usum .  1 

Ne  forte  credas .  1 

Ne  sit  ancillae . • .  2 

Nolis  longa  ferae .  5 

Nondum  subacta .  1 

Non  ebur  neque  aureum . 18 

Non  semper  imbres .  1 

Non  usitata .  1 

Non  vides,  quanto .  2 

Nox  erat . 10 

Nullam,  Vare,  sacra .  9 

Nullus  argento . .**, .  2 

Nunc  est  bibendum .  1 

0  crudelis  adhuc .  9 

0  diva,  gratum .  1 

0  fons  Bandusiae .  6 

0  matre  pulchra .  1 

0  nata  mecum .  1 

0  navis,  ref  erent .  6 

0  saepe  mecum .  1 

0  Venus,  regina .  2 

Odi  profanum .  1 

Otium  Divos .  2 

Parcius  junctas .  2 

Parcus  Deorum .  1 

Parentis  olim .  4 

Pastor  quum  traheret .  5 

Percicos  odi,  puer .  2 

Petti,  nihil  me . 15 

Phoebe,  silvarumque .  2 

Phoebus  volentem .  1 

Pindarum  quisquis .  2 

Poscimur:  si  quid .  2 

Quae  cura  Patrum .  1 

Qualem  ministrum .  1 

Quando  repostum .  4 

Quantum  distet  ab  Inacho .  3 

Quem  tu,  Melpomene .  3 

Quem  virum  aut  heroa .  2 

Quid  bellicosus .  1 

Quid  dedicatum .  1 

Quid  fles,  Asterie .  6 

Quid  immerentes .  4 

Quid  obseratis . 11 

Quid  tibi  vis .  8 

Quis  desiderio .  5 

Quis  multa  gracilis .  6 

Quo  me,  Bacche .  3 


360  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — HORATIAN  METRES.  §  321 


Quo,  quo,  scelesti  ruitis . No.  4 

Quum  tu,  Lydia .  3 

Rectius  vives .  2 

Rogare  longo .  4 

Scriberis  Vario .  5 

Septimi,  Gades . 2 

Sic  te  Diva  potens .  3 

Solvitur  acris  hiems . 17 

Te  maris  et  terrae .  8 


The  following  are  the  single  m 
compositions,  viz : — 

1.  Dactylic  Hexameter. 

2.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a  posteriori. 

3.  Dactylic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

4.  Adonic. 

5.  Trimeter  Iambic. 

6.  Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

7.  Iambic  Dimeter. 

8.  Archilochian  Iambic  Dimeter  Hy¬ 

permeter. 

9.  Iambic  Dimeter  Acephalous. 

10.  Sapphic. 


Tu  ne  quaesieris . No.  9 

Tyrrhena  regum .  1 

Ulla  si  juris .  2 

Uxor  pauperis  Ibyci .  3 

Velox  amoenum .  1 

Vides,  ut  alta .  1 

Vile  potabis .  2 

Vitas  hinnuleo .  6 

Vixi  puellis .  1 


used  by  Horaee  in  his  lyric 


11.  Choriambic  Pentameter. 

12.  Choriambic  Tetrameter. 

13.  Asclepiadic  Tetrameter. 

14.  Glyconie. 

15.  Pherecratie. 

16.  Choriambic  Dimeter. 

17.  Ionic  a  minore. 

18.  Greater  Alcaic. 

19.  Archilochian  Heptameter. 

20.  Lesser  Alcaic. 


§  322,  323.  APPENDIX. — GRAMMATICAL  FIGURES. 


361 


APPENDIX. 


GRAMMATICAL  FIGURES. 

§  322.  Certain  deviations  from  the  regular  form  and  con¬ 
struction  of  words,  are  called  grammatical  figures .  These  may 
relate  either  to  Orthography  and  Etymology,  or  to  Syntax. 

I.  FIGURES  OF  ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ETYMOLOGY. 

These  are  distinguished  by  the  general  name  of  metaplasm . 

1.  Prosthesis  is  the  prefixing  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  a  word;  as,  gnatus,  for 
ndtus ;  tetuli ,  for  tuli.  These,  however,  are  rather  the  ancient  customary  forms, 
from  which  those  now  in  use  were  formed  by  aphseresis. 

2.  Aphaeresis  is  the  taking  of  a  letter  or  syllable  from  the  beginning  -of  a 
word ;  as,  'st,  for  est ;  rabonem ,  for  arrabonem . 

3.  Epenthesis  is  the  insertion  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word; 
as,  alituum ,  for  alitum ;  Mavors ,  for  Mars . 

4.  Syncdpe  is  the  omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word ;  as, 
deiim,  for  dedrum ;  mehm  factum,  for  meorum  factorum;  saecla,  for  saecula ;  festi , 
for  flevisti ;  repostus ,  for  repositus ;  aspris ,  for  asperis. 

5.  Crasis  is  the  contraction  of  two  vowels  into  one ;  as,  cdgo ,  for  cdago ;  nil , 
for  nihil. 

6.  Paragoge  is  the  addition  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  the  end  of  a  word ;  as, 
med,  for  me ;  claudier,  for  claudi. 

7.  Apocope  is  the  omission  of  the  final  letter  or  syllable  of  a  word;  as,  men', 
for  mene ;  Antoni ,  for  Antonii. 

8.  Antithesis  is  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another;  as,  olli ,  for  illi; 
optumus,  for  optimus ;  afficio ,  for  adficio.  0  is  often  thus  used  for  u,  especially 
after  v ;  as,  voltus ,  for  vultus ;  servom ,  for  servum.  So  after  qu ;  as,  aequom,  for 
aequum. 

9.  Metathesis  is  the  changing  of  the  order  of  letters  in  a  word ;  as,  pistris , 
for  pristis. 

II.  FIGURES  OF  SYNTAX. 

323.  The  figures  of  Syntax  are  ellipsis ,  pleonasm ,  enal¬ 
lage ,  and  hyperbaton . 

1.  (a.)  Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  some  word  or  words  in  a  sen¬ 
tence  ;  as, 

Aiunt,  scil.  homines.  Darius  Hystaspis ,  scii,  filius.  Cano ,  scil.  ego.  Quid 
multa  ?  scil.  dicam.  Ex  quo ,  scil.  tempdre.  Ferina ,  scil.  caro. 

( b .)  Ellipsis  includes  asyndeton ,  zeugma ,  syllepsis,  and  prolepsis. 

(1.)  Asyndeton  is  the  omission  of  the  copulative  conjunction;  as,  abiit,  ex¬ 
cessit,  evasit,  erupit  scil.  et.  Cic.  This  is  called  in  pure  Latin  dissolutio . 

31 


362 


ArPENDIX. - FIGURES  OF  SYNTAX. 


§323 


(2.)  (gj.)  Zeugma  is  the  uniting  of  two  nouns  or  two  infinitives  to  a  verb, 
which,  as  to  its  meaning,  is  applicable  to  only  one  of  them;  as,  Pacem  an  bel¬ 
lum  gerens:  (Sail.)  where  gerens  is  applicable  to  bellum  only,  while  pacem  re¬ 
quires  agere.  Semperne  in  sanguine,  ferro,  fuga  versabimur  ?  (Id.)  where  the 
Yerb  does  not  properly  apply  to  ferro. 

(5.)  NZgo  is  often  thus  used  with  two  propositions,  one  of  which  is  affirma¬ 
tive  ;  as,  Negant  Caesarem  mansurum ,  postuldtaque  interpdsita  esse ,  for  dicuntque 
postulata...  Cic.  See  §  209,  Note  4. 

(c.)  When  an  adjective  or  verb,  referring  to  two  or  more  nouns,  agrees  with 
one,  and  is  understood  with  the  rest,  the  construction  is  also  sometimes  called 
zeugma,  but  more  commonly  syllepsis ;  as,  Et  genus ,  et  virtus ,  nisi  cum  re,  vilior 
alga  est.  Hor.  Caper  tibi  salvus  et  hcedi.  Virg.  Quamvis  ille  niger ,  quamvis  tu 
candida  esses.  Id. 

(3.)  Syllepsis  is  when  an  adjective  or  verb,  belonging  to  two  or  more  nouns 
of  different  genders,  persons,  or  numbers,  agrees  with  one  rather  than  another; 
as,  Attoniti  ndritate  pavent  Baucis,  timidusque  Philemon.  Ovid.  Procumbit 
uterque  pronus  humi,  i.  e.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha.  Id.  Sustulimus  manus  et  ego 
et  Balbus.  Cic.  So,  Ipse  cum  fratre  adesse  jussi  sumus.  Id.  Projectisque  ami¬ 
culo  et  literis.  Curt.  See  §§  205,  R.  2,  and  209,  R.  12,  (3.)  and  (7.) 

(4.)  Prdlepsis  is  when  the  parts,  differing  in  number  or  person  from  the 
whole,  are  placed  after  it,  the  verb  or  adjective  not  being  repeated;  as,  Prin¬ 
cipes  utrinque  pugnam  ciebant,  ab  Sabinis  Mettius  Curtius,  ab  Romanis  Hostus 
Hostilius.  Liv.  Boni  quoniam  convenimus  ambo,  tu  calamos  inflare ,  ego  dicere 
versus.  Virg. 

2.  (a.)  Pleonasm  is  using  a  greater  number  of  words  than  is  neces¬ 
sary  to  express  the  meaning ;  as, 

Sic  ore  Idcuta  est.  Virg.  Qui  magis  vere  vincere  quam  diu  imperare  malit.  Liv. 
Nemo  unus.  Cic.  Forte  fortuna.  Id.  Prudens  sciens.  Ter. 

(b.)  Under  pleonasm  are  included  parelcon ,  polysyndeton ,  hendi¬ 
adys,  and  periphrasis. 

(1.)  Parelcon  is  the  addition  of  an  unnecessary  syllable  or  particle  to  pro¬ 
nouns,  verbs,  or  adverbs;  as,  egomet,  agedum,  fortassean.  Such  additions, 
however,  usually  modify  the  meaning  in  some  degree. 

(2.)  Polysyndeton  is  a  redundancy  of  conjunctions;  as,  Una  Eurusqne  Notus- 
que  ruunt  crebercpxe  prdcellis  Africus.  Virg. 

(3.)  Hendiadys  is  the  expression  of  an  idea  by  two  nouns  connected  by  et, 
-que,  or  atque,  instead  of  a  noun  and  a  limiting  adjective  or  genitive;  as,  Pate¬ 
ris  libamus  et  auro,  for  aureis  pateris.  Virg.  Libro  et  silvestri  subere  clausam , 
for  libro  suberis.  Id.  Cristis  et  auro.  Ovid.  Met.  3,  32. 

( 4. )  Periphrasis  or  circumlocutio  is  a  circuitous  mode  of  expression ;  as,  7!r- 
neri  foetus  ovium ,  i.  e.  agni.  Virg. 

3.  (a.)  Enallage  is  a  change  of  words,  or  a  substitution  of  o^e  gen¬ 
der,  number,  case,  person,  tense,  mood,  or  voice  of  the  same  word  for 
another. 

(b.)  Enallage  includes  antimeria,  heterosis,  antiptosis ,  synesis ,  and 
anacoluthon. 

(1.)  Antimeria  is  the  use  of  one  part  of  speech  for  another,  or  the  abstract 
for  the  concrete ;  as,  Nostrum  istud  vivere  triste,  for  nostra  vita.  Pers.  Aliud 
cras.  Id.  Conjugium  videbit?  for  conjugem.  Virg. 

(2.)  Heterosis  is  the  use  of  one  form  of  noun,  pronoun:  verb,  etc.,  for  another; 
as,  Ego  qudque  una  pereo ,  quod  mihi  est  carius,  for  qui  mihi  sum  cdrior.  Ter. 


§  324.  APPENDIX. — TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.  363 


Romanus  proelio  victor,  for  Romani  victores.  Liv.  Many  words  are  used  by  the 
poets  in  the  plural  instead  of  the  singular;  as,  colla,  corda,  ora,  etc.  See  §  98. 
Me  truncus  illapsus  cerebro  sustulerat,  for  sustulisset.  Hor.  See  §  259,  R.  4. 

(3.)  Antiptdsis  is  the  use  of  one  case  for  another;  as,  Cui  nunc  cognomen 
Iulo,  for  lulus.  Virg.  $  204,  R.  8.  Uxor  invicti  Jovis  esse  nescis ,  for  te  esse  uxo¬ 
rem.  Hor.  §  210,  R.  6. 

(4.)  Synesis,  or  synthesis ,  is  adapting  the  construction  to  the  sense  of  a  word, 
rather  than  to  its  gender  or  number;  as,  Siibeunt  Tegeea  juventus  auxilio  tardi. 
Stat.  Concursus  populi  mirantium  quid  rei  est.  Liv.  Pars  in  crucem  acti.  Sali. 
Ubi  illic  est  scelus,  qui  me  perdidit  ?  Ter.  Id  mea  minime  refert ,  qui  sum  natu 
maximus.  Id.  See  §  205,  R.  3,  (1.)  and  (3.),  and  §  206,  (12.) 

(5.)  Anacoluthon  is  a  disagreement  in  construction  between  the  latter  and 
4 former  part  of  a  sentence;  as,  Nam  nos  omnes,  quibus  est  alicunde  aliquis  objectus 
labos ,  omne  quod  est  interea  tempus ,  priusquam  id  rescitum  est ,  lucro  est.  Ter. 
In  this  example,  the  writer  began  as  if  he  intended  to  say  lucro  habemus,  and 
ended  as  if  he  had  said  nobis  omnibus ,  leaving  nos  omnes  without  its  verb. 

4.  (a.)  Hyperbaton  is  a  transgression  of  the  usual  order  of  words 
or  clauses. 

(6.)  Hyperbaton  includes  anastrophe ,  hysteron  proteron ,  hypallage , 
synchysis,  tmesis ,  and  parenthesis. 

(1.)  Anastrdphe  is  an  inversion  of  the  order  of  two  words;  as,  Transtra  per 
et  remos,  for  per  transtra.  Virg.  Collo  dare  brachia  circum,  for  circumdare.  Id. 
Nox  erit  una  super,  for  supererit.  Ovid.  Et  facit  are,  for  arefacit.  Lucr. 

(2.)  Hysteron  prdteron  is  reversing  the  natural  order  of  the  sense;  as,  Mdria- 
mur,  et  in  media  arma  ruamus.  Virg.  Valet  atque  vivit.  Ter. 

(3.)  Hypallage  is  an  interchange  of  constructions;  as,  In  ndva fert  animus 
mutatas  dicere  formas  corpdra,  for  corpora  mutdta  in  ndvas  formas.  Ovid.  Dare 
classibus  Austros,  for  dare  classes  Austris.  Virg. 

(4.)  Synchysis  is  a  confused  position  of  words;  as,  Saxa  vdcant  Itali,  mediis 
quee  in  fluctibus,  aras,  for  quee  saxa  in  mediis  fluctibus ,  Itali  vdcant  aras.  Virg. 

(5.)  Tmesis  or  diaedpe  is  the  separation  of  the  parts  of  a  compound  word ; 
as,  Septem  subj ecta  trioni  gens,  for  septentrioni.  Virg.  Quee  me  cumque  vdcant 
terree.  Id.  Per  mihi ,  per,  inquam,  gratum  feceris.  Cic. 

(6.)  Parenthesis  or  dialysis  is  the  insertion  of  a  word  or  words  in  a  sentence 
interrupting  the  natural  connection;  as,  Tityre  dum  redeo,  (brevis  est  via,) 
pasce  capellas.  Virg. 

Remark.  To  the  above  may  be  added  archaism  and  Hellenism, 
which  belong  both  to  the  figures  of  etymology  and  to  those  of  syntax. 

(1.)  Archaism  is  the  use  of  ancient  forms  or  constructions;  as,  auldi ,  for 
aulce ;  sendti ,  for  senatus ;  fuat,  for  sit ;  prohibesso,  for  prdhibuero  ;  impetrassere, 
for  impetraturum  esse ;  f  drier,  for  f  ari ;  nenu,  for  non ;  endo,  for  in; — Operam 
abutitur,  for  opera.  Ter.  Quid  tibi  hanc  curatio  est  rem  f  Plaut. 

(2.)  Hellenism  is  the  use  of  Greek  forms  or  constructions;  as,  Helene,  for 
Helena;  Antiphon,  for  Antipho;  aui'as  (gen.),  for  auree ;  Pallados,  Palldda,  for 
Palladis ,  Palladem ;  Trodsin,  Troddas,  for  Troadibus,  Troades  ; — Abstineto  Ira¬ 
rum.  Hor.  Tempus  desistere  pugnee.  Virg. 


§  324.  (1.)  To  the  grammatical  figures  may  not  improperly  be  subjoined  cer¬ 

tain  others,  which  are  often  referred  to  in  philological  works,  and  which  are  called 


TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC. 

(2.)  A  rhetorical  figure  is  a  mode  of  expression  different  from  the  direct  and 
6imple  way  of  expressing  the  same  sense.  The  turning  of  a  word  from  its 
original  and  customary  meaning,  is  called  a  trope. 


364  APPENDIX. — TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.  §  324. 


1.  {a.)  A  metaphor  is  the  transferring  of  a  word  from  the  object  to  which  it 
properly  belongs,  and  applying  it  to  another,  to  which  that  object  has  some 
analogy;  as,  Ridet  dger ,  The  field  smiles.  Virg.  FEtas  aurea,  The  golden  age. 
Ovid.  Naufragia  fortuna ,  The  wreck  of  fortune.  Cic.  Mentis  oculi,  The  eyes 
of  the  mind.  Id.  Virtus  animum  glories  stimulis  concitat.  The  harshness  or  a 
metaphor  is  often  softened  by  means  of  quasi ,  tamquam ,  quidam ,  or  ut  ita  dicam ; 
as,  Jn  una  phildsdphia  quasi  tabernaculum  vitee  suce  colldcdrunt.  Id.  Opimum 
quoddam  et  tamquam  adipatae  dictionis  genus .  Id. 

(b.)  Catachresis  or  abusio  is  a  bold  or  harsh  metaphor;  as,  Vir  gregis  ipse 
caper.  Virg.  Eurus  per  Siculas  equitavit  undas.  Hor. 

2.  Metonymy  is  substituting  the  name  of  an  object  for  that  of  another  to 
which  it  has  a  certain  relation;  as  the  cause  for  the  effect,  the  container  for 
what  is  contained,  the  property  for  the  substance,  the  sign  for  the  thing  signi¬ 
fied,  and  their  contraries ;  the  parts  of  the  body  for  certain  affections ;  the  pos¬ 
sessor  for  the  thing  possessed;  place  and  time  for  the  persons  or  things  which 
they  comprise,  etc. ;  as,  Mortales ,  for  homines.  Virg.  Amor  duri  Martis,  i.  e. 
belli.  Id.  Fruges  Cererem  appellamus ,  vinum  autem  Liberum.  Cic.  Cupio  vigi¬ 
liam  meam  tibi  tradere ,  i.  e.  meam  curam.  Id.  Pallida  moi's.  Hor.  Hausit  pa¬ 
teram,  i.  e.  vinum.  Virg.  Vina  coronant ,  i.  e.  pateram.  Id.  Necte  ternos  colores, 
i.  e.  tria  fila  diversi  coloris.  Id.  Cedant  arma  togae,  i.  e.  bellum  paci.  Cic. 
Saecula  mitescent ,  i.  e.  homines  in  saeculis.  Virg.  Vivat  Pacuvius  vel  Nestora 
totum.  Juv.  Doctrina  Graecia  nos  superabat ,  for  Grceci  superabant.  Cic.  Pagi 
centum  Suevorum  ad  ripas  Rheni  consederant ,  for  pagorum  incdlce.  Caes.  Tempora 
amicorum ,  for  res  adversae.  Cic.  Claudius  lege  praediatoria  venalis  pependit , 
for  Claudii  praedium.  Suet.  Vici  ad  Janum  medium  sedentes ,  for  Jani  vi¬ 
cum.  Cic. 

8.  Synecdoche  is  putting  a  whole  for  a  part,  a  genus  for  a  species,  a  singular 
for  a  plural,  and  their  contraries;  also  the  material  for  the  thing  made  of  it; 
a  definite  for  an  indefinite  number,  etc.;  as,  Fontem  ferebant.  Id.  Tectum ,  for 
ddmus.  Id.  Armato  milite  complent ,  for  armatis  militibus.  Id.  Ferrum ,  for  gla¬ 
dius.  Id.  Qui  Cdrinthiis  operibus  abundant ,  i.  e.  vasis.  Cic.  Urbem,  urbem,  mi 
Rufe ,  cdle,  i.  e.  Romam.  Cic.  Centum  puer  artium ,  i.  e.  multarum. 

4.  Irony  is  the  intentional  use  of  words  which  express  a  sense  contrary  to 
that  which  the  writer  or  speaker  means  to  convey;  as,  Salve  bone  vir,  curasti 
probe.  Ter.  .  Egregiam  vero  laudem,  et  spolia  ampla  refertis ,  tuque ,  puerque 
tuus.  Virg. 

5.  Hyperbdle  is  the  magnifying  or  diminishing  of  a  thing  beyond  the  truth; 
as,  Ipse  arduus ,  altaque  pulsat  sidera.  Virg.  Ocior  Euro.  Id. 

6.  Metalepsis  is  the  including  of  several  tropes  in  one  word;  as,  Post  aliquot 
aristas.  Virg.  Here  aristas  is  put  for  messes ,  and  this  for  annos. 

7.  (a.)  Allegory  is  a  consistent  series  of  metaphors,  designed  to  illustrate  one 
subject  by  another;  as,  0  navis ,  referent  in  mare  te  novi  fluctus.  Hor. 

(b.)  An  obscure  allegory  or  riddle  is  called  an  cenigma  ;  as,  Dic,  quibus  in 
terris  tres  pateat  coeli  spatium  non  amplius  ulnas.  Virg. 

8.  Antdndmasia  is  using  a  proper  noun  for  a  common  one,  and  the  contrary; 
as,  Irus  et  est  subito ,  qui  modo  Croesus  erat ,  for  pauper  and  dives.  Ovid.  So,  by 
periphrasis,  potor  Rhddani ,  for  Gallus.  Hor.  Eversor  Carthaginis ,  for  Scipio. 
Quint.  Eldquentice  princeps ,  for  Cicero.  Id.  Tydides,  for  Diomedes.  \  irg. 

9.  Lltdtes  is  a  mode  of  expressing  something  by  denying  the  contrary ;  as, 
Non  laudo ,  I  blame.  Ter.  Non  innoxia  verba.  Virg. 

10.  Antiphrasis  is  using  a  word  in  a  sense  opposite  to  its  proper  meaning ; 
as,  Auri  sacra  fames.  Virg. 

11.  Euphemism  is  the  use  of  softened  language  to  express  what  is  offensive 
or  distressing;  as,  Si  quid  accidisset  Caesari ,  i.  e.  si  mortuus  esset.  Veli. 

12.  Antanacldsis  or  punning  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  in  different  senses  ; 
as,  Quis  neget  FEnece  natum  de  stirpe  Neronem  ?  Sustulit  hic  matrem ,  sustulit 
ille  patrem.  Epigr.  Amari  jucundum  esi ,  si  curetur  ne  quid  insit  amari.  Cic. 


§  324.  APPENDIX. — TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.  365 


13.  Anaphdra  or  epandphdra  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning  of 
successive  clauses;  as,  Nihibie  te  nocturnum  presidium  palatii ,  nihil  urbis  vigi¬ 
lia*,  nihil  timor  populi ,  etc.  Cic.  Te,  dulcis  conjux ,  te,  solo  in  litore  secum ,  te, 
veniente  die ,  te,  decedente ,  canebat .  Virg. 

14.  Epistrophe  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  end  of  successive  clauses; 
as,  Poenos  populus  Romanus  justitia  vicit,  armis  vicit,  liber  alitate  vicit.  Cic.  In 
pure  Latin  this  figure  is  called  conversio. 

15.  Sympldce  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning,  and  of  another  at 
the  end,  of  successive  clauses,  and  hence  it  includes  the  anaphora  and  the 
epistrophe;  as,  Quis  legem  tulit  ?  Rullus:  Quis  majorem  populi  partem  suffra¬ 
giis  privavit?  Rullus:  Quis  comitiis  praefuit?  Idem  Rullus.  Cic. 

16.  Epandlepsis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  or  sentence  after  interven¬ 
ing  words  or  clauses.  See  Virg.  Geor.  II.  4 — 7. 

17.  Anadiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  at  the  end  of  one  clause,  and  the 
beginning  of  another;  as,  Sequitur  pulcherrimus  Astur,  Astur  equo  fidens.  Virg. 
A.  10,  180.  Nunc  etiam  audes  in  horum  conspectum  venire,  venire  audes  in  horum 
conspectum  ?  Cic.  This  is  sometimes  called  epdnastrdphe. 

18.  Epanddiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  both  at  the  beginning  and  end 
of  a  sentence ;  as,  Crescit  amor  nummi ,  quantum  ipsa  pecunia  crescit.  Juv. 

19.  Epdnddos  or  regressio  is  the  repetition  of  the  same  words  in  an  inverted 
order;  as,  Crudelis  mater  rnagis,  an  puer  improbus  ille?  Improbus  ille  puer,  cru¬ 
delis  tu  qudque ,  mater.  Virg. 

20.  Epizeuxis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  as, 
Excitate,  excitate  eum  ab  inferis.  Cic.  Ah  Coiydon,  Corydon,  quae  te  dementia 
cepit?  Virg.  Ibimus,  ibimus,  utcumque  praecedes.  Hor. 

21.  Climax  is  a  gradual  amplification  by  means  of  a  continued  anadiplosis, 
each  successive  clause  beginning  with  the  conclusion  of  that  which  precedes 
it ;  as,  Quae  reliqua  spes  manet  libertatis ,  si  illis  et  quod  libet ,  licet ;  et  quod  licet , 
possunt ;  et  quod  possunt ,  audent ;  et  quod  audent ,  vobis  molestum  non  est  V  Cic. 
This,  in  pure  Latin,  is  called  gradatio. 

22.  Incrementum  is  an  amplification  without  a  striet  climax ;  as,  Facinus  est , 
vinciri  civem  Romanum  ;  scelus,  verberari ;  prope  parricidium ,  necari  ;  quid  di¬ 
cam  in  crucem  tolli  ?  Cic. 

23.  Polyptoton  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  in  different  cases,  genders,  num¬ 
bers,  tenses,  etc. ;  as,  Jam  clipeus  clipeis ,  umbone  repellitur  umbo;  ense  minax 
ensis,  pede  pes,  et  cuspide  cuspis.  Stat. 

24.  Paregmenon  is  the  use  of  several  words  of  the  same  origin,  in  one  sen¬ 
tence;  as,  Abesse  non  potest,  quin  ejusdem  hominis  sit ,  qui  improbos  probet,  pro¬ 
bos  improbare.  Cic.  Istam  pugnam  pugnabo.  Plaut. 

25.  Pdrondmasia  is  the  use  of  words  which  resemble  each  other  in  sound; 
as,  Amor  et  meile  et  felle  est  fecundissimus.  Plaut.  Civem  bonarum  artium, 
bdndrum  partium.  Cic.  Amantes  sunt  amentes.  Ter.  This  figure  is  sometimes 
called  agnominatio. 

26.  Hdmceoprdpheron  or  alliteration  is  the  use  in  the  same  sentence  of  sev¬ 
eral  words  beginning  with  the  same  letter;  as,  0  Tite ,  tute  Tati,  tibi  tanta , 
tyranne ,  tulisti.  Enn.  Neu  patrice  validas  in  viscera  vertite  vires.  Virg. 

27.  Antithesis  is  the  placing  of  different  or  opposite  words  or  sentiments  in 
contrast;  as,  Hujus  orationis  difficilius  est  exitum  quam  principium  invenire. 
Cic.  Cassar  beneficiis  ac  munificentia  magnus  habebatur;  integritate  vitae 
Cato.  Sali. 

28.  Oxymoron  unites  words  of  contrary  significations,  thus  producing  a  seem¬ 
ing  contradiction ;  as,  Concordia  discors.  Hor.  Quum  tacent ,  clamant.  Cic. 

29.  Synonymia  is  the  use  of  different  words  or  expressions  having  the  same 
Import;  as,  Non  feram,  non  pdtiar,  non  sinam .  Cic.  Promitto ,  recipio ,  spon- 
leo.  Id. 


81* 


366  APPENDIX. - TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.  §  325. 


30.  Pdrabdla  or  Simile  is  the  comparison  of  one  thing  with  another ;  as,  R$- 
pente  te,  tamquam  serpens  e  latibulis ,  oculis  eminentibus ,  inflato  collo ,  tumidis  cer¬ 
vicibus,  intulisti .  Cic. 

31.  Erotesis  is  an  earnest  question,  and  often  implies  a  strong  affirmation  of 
the  contrary;  as,  Creditis  avectos  hostes ?  Virg.  Heu!  quce,  me  aequora  possunt 
accipere?  Id. 

32.  Epdnorihdsis  or  Coirectio  is  the  recalling  of  a  word,  in  order  to  place  a 
stronger  or  more  significant  one  in  its  stead ;  as,  Filium  unicum  dddlescentulum 
habeo:  ah!  quid  dixi?  me  habere?  Imo  habui.  Ter. 

33.  Aposiopesis,  Reticentia ,  or  Interruptio ,  is  leaving  a  sentence  unfinished 
in  consequence  of  some  emotion  of  the  mind ;  as,  Quos  ego — sed  motos  vrcestat 
componere  fluctus.  Virg. 

34.  Prdsdpdpceia  or  personification  represents  inanimate  things  as  acting  or 
speaking,  and  persons  dead  or  absent  as  alive  and  present ;  as,  Quce  {patria) 
tecum ,  Catilina ,  sic  agit.  Cic.  Virtus  sumit  aut  ponit  secures.  Hor. 

35.  Apostrdphe  is  a  turning  off  from  the  regular  course  of  the  subject,  to  ad¬ 
dress  some  person  or  thing ;  as,  Vi  pdlitur ;  quid  non  mortalia  pectora  cogis , 
auri  sacra  fames !  Virg. 

36.  Pdraleipsis  is  a  pretended  omission  of  something,  in  order  to  render  it 
more  observed.  See  Cic.  Cat.  1,  6,  14. 

37.  Epiphonema  or  Acclamatio  is  an  exclamation  or  grave  reflection  on  some¬ 
thing  said  before;  as,  Tantce  molis  erat  Romanam  condere  gentem.  Virg. 

38.  Ecphonesis  or  Exclamatio  shows  some  violent  emotion  of  the  mind;  as, 
0  tempora  !  0  mores  ! 

39.  Apdria ,  Didporesis ,  or  Dubitatio ,  expresses  a  doubt  in  regard  to  what  is 
to  be  said  or  done ;  as,  Quos  accedam ,  aut  quos  appellem  ?  Sali. 

40.  Prolepsis  is  the  anticipation  of  an  objection  before  it  is  made,  or  of  an 
event  before  it  occurs;  as,  Verum  anceps  pugme  fuerat  fortuna.  Fuisset: 
Quem  metui  moritura?  Virg. 

§  3 25.  To  the  figures  of  rhetoric  may  be  subjoined  the  follow¬ 

ing  terms,  used  to  designate  defects  or  blemishes  in  style : — 

1.  Barbarism  is  either  the  use  of  a  foreign  word,  or  a  violation  of  the  rules 
of  orthography,  etymology,  or  prosody ;  as,  rigorosus ,  for  rigidus  or  severus ; 
domminus ,  for  dominus ;  davi ,  for  dedi. 

2.  Solecism  is  a  violation  of  the  rules  of  syntax;  as,  Venus  pulcher  ;  vos  invi¬ 
demus. 

3.  Neoterism  is  the  use  of  words  or  phrases  introduced  by  authors  living 
subsequently  to  the  best  ages  of  Latinity;  as,  murdrum ,  a  murder;  constabuld - 
rius ,  a  constable. 

4.  Tautology  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  meaning  in  different  words ;  as,  Jam 
vos  aciem,  et  proelia,  et  hostem  poscitis.  Sil. 

5.  Amphibolia  is  the  use  of  equivocal  words  or  constructions ;  as,  Gallus ,  a 
Gaul,  or  a  cock.  Aio  te,  AEacida ,  Romanos  vincere  posse.  Quint. 

6.  Idiotism  is  a  construction  peculiar  to  one  or  more  languages :  thus,  the 
ablative  after  comparatives  is  a  Latinism.  When  a  peculiarity  of  one  language 
is  imitated  in  another,  this  is  also  called  idiotism.  Thus,  Mitte  mihi  verbum , 
instead  of  Fac  me  certiorem ,  is  an  Anglicism. 


§  326.  APPENDIX. — ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING - TIME.  367 


ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING. 

I.  OF  TIME. 

# 

1.  The  Roman  Day. 

§  336.  (1.)  With  the  Romans,  as  with  us,  the  day  was  either 

civil  or  natural.  Their  civil  day,  like  ours,  extended  from  midnight 
to  midnight.  The  natural  day  continued  from  sunrise  to  sunset,  as, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  night  extended  from  sunset  to  sunrise.  The 
natural  day  and  night  were  each  divided  into  twelve  equal  parts  or 
hours ,  which  were  consequently  of  different  length,  according  to  the 
varying  length  of  the  days  and  nights  in  the  successive  seasons  of  the 
year.  It  was  only  at  the  equinox  that  the  diurnal  and  nocturnal 
hours  of  the  Romans  were  equal  to  each  other,  as  each  was  then 
equal  to  the  twenty-fourth  part  of  the  civil  day. 

(2.)  In  the  Roman  camp  the  night  was  further  divided  into  four 
watches  ( vigilice ),  consisting  each  of  three  Roman  hours,  the  second 
and  fourth  watches  ending  respectively  at  midnight  and  at  sunrise. 

2.  The  Roman  Month  and  Year. 

(1.)  The  calendar  of  the  Romans,  as  rectified  by  Julius  Caesar, 
agreed  with  our  own  in  the  number  of  months,  and  of  the  days  in 
each,  according  to  the  following  table : — 

Januarius  .  31  days.  Maius  .  .  31  days.  September  30  days. 

Februarius  28  or  29.  Junius.  .  30  “  Octbber  .  .  31  “ 

Martius.  .  .  31  days.  Quintilis  31  “  November  30  “ 

Aprilis  ...  30  “  Sextilis  .  31  “  December  31  11 

In  early  times  the  Roman  year  began  with  March,  and  the  names 
Quintilis ,  Sextilis ,  September ,  etc.,  indicated  the  distance  of  those 
months  from  the  commencement  of  the  year.  Quintilis  and  Sextilis 
were  afterwards  called  Julius  and  Augustus  in  honor  of  the  first  two 
emperors.  The  Romans,  instead  of  reckoning  in  an  uninterrupted 
series  from  the  first  to  the  last  day  of  a  month,  had  in  each  month 
three  points  or  periods  from  which  their  days  were  counted — the 
Calends ,  the  Nones ,  and  the  Ides.  The  Calends  ( Cdlendce ),  were  al¬ 
ways  the  first  day  of  the  month.  The  Nones  (Nonce),  were  the  fifth , 
and  the  Ides  ( Idus ),  the  thirteenth;  except  in  March,  May,  July,  and 
October,  when  the  Nones  occurred  on  the  seventh  day,  and  the  Ides 
on  the  fifteenth. 

(2.)  They  always  counted  forward,  from  the  day  whose  date  was 
to  be  determined,  to  the  next  Calends,  Nones,  or  Ides,  and  desig¬ 
nated  the  day  by  its  distance  before  such  point.  After  the  first  day 
of  the  month,  therefore,  they  began  to  reckon  so  many  days  before 
the  Nones ;  after  the  Nones,  so  many  days  before  the  Ides ;  and  after 
the  Ides,  so  many  before  the  Calends,  of  the  next  month. 

Thus,  the  second  of  January  was  denoted  by  quarto  Nonas  Januarias,  or 
Januarii,  scil.  die  ante:  the  third,  tertio  Nonas;  the  fourth,  pridie  Nonas; 
and  the  fifth,  Nonis.  The  sixth  was  denoted  by  octavo  Idus ;  the  seventh, 


368  APPENDIX. - ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING — TIME.  §  326. 

septimo  Idus ;  and  so  on  to  the  thirteenth,  on  which  the  Ides  fell.  The  four¬ 
teenth  was  denoted  by  undevigesimo  Calendas  Februarias ,  or  Februarii ;  and  so 
on  to  the  end  of  the  month. 

(3.)  The  day  preceding  the  Calends,  Nones,  and  Ides,  was  termed 
pridie  Calendas,  etc.,  scil.  ante :  in  designating  the  other  days,  both 
the  day  of  the  Calends,  etc.,  and  that  whose  date  was  to  be  deter¬ 
mined,  were  reckoned ;  hence  the  second  day  before  the  Calends, 
etc.,  was  called  tertio ,  the  third  quarto ,  etc. 

(4.)  To  reduce  the  Roman  calendar  to  our  own,  therefore,  when 
the  day  is  between  the  Calends  and  the  Nones  or  between  the  Nones 
and  the  Ides,  it  is  necessary  to  take  one  from  the  number  denoting 
the  distance  of  the  given  day  from  the  Nones  or  the  Ides,  and  to  sub¬ 
tract  the  remainder  from  the  number  of  the  day  on  which  the  Nones 
or  Ides  fell  in  the  given  month. 

Thus,  to  determine  the  day  equivalent  to  IV.  Nonas  Januamas,  we  take 
1  from  4,  and  subtract  the  remainder,  3,  from  5,  the  day  on  which  the  Nones 
of  January  fell  (i.  e.  4 — 1=3,  and  5 — 3=2):  this  gives  2,  or  the  second  of  Jan¬ 
uary,  for  the  day  in  question.  So  VI.  Idus  AprUis :  the  Ides  of  April  falling 
upon  the  13th,  we  take  (6 — 1,  i.  e.)  5  from  13,  which  leaves  8  (i.  e.  6 — 1=5, 
and  13 — 5=8):  the  expression,  therefore,  denotes  the  8th  of  April. 

(a.)  In  reckoning  the  days  before  the  Calends,  as  they  are  not  the 
last  day  of  the  current  month,  but  the  first  of  the  following,  it  is 
necessary  to  subtract  two  from  the  number  denoting  the  distance  of 
the  given  day  from  the  Calends  of  the  following  month,  and  to  take 
the  remainder  from  the  number  of  days  in  the  month. 

Thus,  XV.  Cal.  Quintiles  is  15 — 2=13,  and  30 — 13=17,  i.  e.  the  Roman  date 
XV.  Cal.  Quint,  is  equivalent  to  the  17th  of  June. 

(b.)  To  reduce  our  calendar  to  the  Roman,  the  preceding  method 
is  to  be  reversed.  Thus  when  the  given  day  is  between  the  Calends 
and  the  Nones  or  between  the  Nones  and  the  Ides,  (unless  it  be  the 
day  before  the  Nones  or  the  Ides),  we  are  to  add  one  to  the  number 
denoting  the  day  of  the  month,  according  to  our  reckoning,  on  which 
the  Nones  or  Ides  fell.  But  if  the  day  is  after  the  Ides,  (unless  it  be 
the  last  day  of  the  month),  we  must  add  two  to  the  number  of  days 
in  the  month,  and  then  subtract  the  number  denoting  the  day  of  the 
month  as  expressed  in  our  reckoning.  The  remainder  will  be  the 
day  before  the  Nones,  Ides  or  Calends. 

Thus  to  find  the  Roman  date  corresponding  to  the  third  of  April,  we  have 
6+1 — 3=3;  the  required  date,  therefore,  is  III.  Non.  Apr. — To  find  the  proper 
Roman  expression  for  our  tenth  of  December  we  have  13+1 — 10=4;  the  date, 
therefore,  is  IV.  Id.  Dec. — The  Roman  expression  for  the  22d  of  August,  in 
pursuance  of  the  above  rule,  is  found  thus,  31+2 — 22=11,  and  the  date  is  XI. 
Cal.  Sept. 

(5.)  In  leap  year,  both  the  24th  and  25th  of  February  were  called 
the  sixth  before  the  Calends  of  March.  The  24th  was  called  dies 
bisextus ,  and  the  year  itself  annus  bisextus ,  bissextile  or  leap  year. 

(a.)  The  day  after  the  Calends,  etc.,  was  sometimes  called  postridie  calen¬ 
das ,  etc. 

(b.)  The  names  of  the  months  are  properly  adjectives,  though  often  used  as 
nouns,  mensis  being  understood. 


§  326.  APPENDIX. — ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING - TIME.  369 

(6.)  The  correspondence  of  our  calendar  with  that  of  the  Romans 
is  exhibited  in  the  following 


TABLE. 


Days  of 
our  months. 

Mar. 

Jul. 

Mai. 

Oct. 

Jan.  Aug. 
Dec. 

Apr. 

Sept. 

Jun. 

Nov. 

Febr. 

1 

Calendae. 

Calendae. 

Calendae. 

Calendae. 

2 

VI.  Nonas. 

IV.  Nonas. 

IV.  Nonas. 

IV.  Nonas. 

3 

V. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

4 

IV. 

u 

Pridie 

cc 

Pridie 

cc 

Pridie 

cc 

5 

III. 

cc 

Nonae. 

Nonae. 

Nonae. 

6 

Pridie  Non. 

VIII.  Idus. 

VIII. 

Idus. 

VIII.  : 

Idus. 

7 

Nonae. 

VII. 

cc 

VII. 

cc 

VII. 

cc 

8 

VIII.  Idus. 

VI. 

cc 

VI. 

cc 

VI. 

cc 

9 

VIL 

cc 

V. 

cc 

V. 

cc 

V. 

cc 

10 

vir 

u 

IV. 

cc 

IV. 

cc 

IV. 

cc 

11 

V. 

u 

III. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

12 

IV. 

cc 

Pridie 

cc 

Pridie 

cc 

Pridie 

cc 

13 

III. 

cc 

Idus. 

Idus. 

Idus. 

14 

Pridie  Id. 

XIX. 

Cal. 

XVIII.  Cal. 

XVI. 

Cal. 

15 

Idus. 

XVIII. 

cc 

XVII. 

cc 

XV. 

i( 

16 

XVII.  Cal. 

XVII. 

cc 

XVI. 

cc 

XIV. 

cc 

17 

XVI. 

cc 

XVI. 

cc 

XV. 

cc 

XIII. 

cc 

18 

XV. 

cc 

XV. 

cc 

XIV. 

cc 

XII. 

cc 

19 

XIV. 

a 

XIV. 

cc 

XIII. 

cc 

XI. 

cc 

20 

XIII. 

Cl 

XIII. 

cc 

XII. 

cc 

X. 

cc 

21 

XII. 

u 

XII. 

cc 

XI. 

cc 

IX. 

cc 

22 

XI. 

Cl 

XI. 

cc 

X. 

cc 

VIII. 

cc 

23 

X. 

cc 

X. 

cc 

IX. 

cc 

VII. 

cc 

24 

IX. 

cc 

IX. 

cc 

VIII. 

cc 

VI. 

cc 

25 

VIII. 

Cl 

VIII. 

cc 

VII. 

u 

V. 

cc 

26 

VII. 

cc 

VII. 

cc 

VI. 

cc 

IV. 

cc 

27 

VI. 

Cl 

VI. 

cc 

V. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

28 

V. 

cc 

V. 

cc 

IV. 

cc 

Pridie 

“  Mar 

29 

IV. 

u 

IV. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

30 

III. 

cc 

III. 

cc 

Pridie  Cal. 

31 

Pridie  Cal. 

Pridie  Cal. 

(7.)  In  leap-year  the  last  seven  days  of  February  were  reckoned  thus: — 


23. 

VII.  Calendas  Martias . 

27. 

IV.  Cal.  Mart. 

24. 

bisexto  Cal.  Mart . 

28. 

III.  “  “ 

25. 

VI.  Cal.  Mart. 

29. 

pridie  Cal.  Mart. 

26. 

V.  “  “ 

(a.)  Hence  in  reducing  a  date  of  February  in  leap-year  to  the  Roman  date, 
for  the  first  23  days  we  proceed  according  to  the  preceding  rule  in  4,  (6.),  as  if 
the  month  had  only  28  days.  The  24th  is  marked  as  bisexto  Cal.  Mart.,  and  to 
obtain  the  proper  expression  for  the  remaining  five  days  we  regard  the  month 
as  having  29  days.  Thus  the  27th  of  February  in  leap-year  is  29-f-2 — 27=4, 
and  the  proper  Roman  expression  is  IV.  Cal.  Mart. 

(b.)  On  the  other  hand,  to  reduce  a  Roman  date  of  February  in  leap-year  to 
our  date  we  reverse  the  above  process,  and  during  the  Nones  and  Ides  and 
until  the  VI 1.  Calendas  Martias  we  reckon  the  month  to  have  only  28  days : — 
bisexto  Cul.  Mart,  is  set  down  as  the  24th,  and  for  the  remaining  days  desig¬ 
nated  as  VI.  V.  IV.  III.  and  pridie  Cal.  Mart,  we  reckon  the  month  to  have 
29  days.  Thus  III.  Cal.  Mart,  is  3—2=1,  and  29—1=28,  and  the  given  day  is 
equivalent  to  the  28th  of  February. 


370  APPENDIX. — ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING - MONET.  §  327. 


(8.)  The  Latins  not  only  said  tertio,  pridie,  etc.,  Calendas,  etc.,  but  also  ante 
diem  tertium,  etc.,  Cedendas,  etc. ;  and  the  latter  form  in  Cicero  and  Livy  is 
far  more  common  than  the  former,  and  is  usually  written  thus,  a.  d.  III. 
Cal.,  etc. 

(9.)  The  expression  ante  diem  was  used  as  an  indeclinable  noun,  and  is 
joined  with  in  and  ex;  as,  Consul  Latinas  ferias  in  ante  diem  tertium  Idus  Sex¬ 
tilis  edixit ,  The  consul  appointed  the  Latin  festival  for  the  third  day  before  the 
Ides  of  August.  Liv.  Supplicatio  indicta  est  ex  ante  diem  quintum  Idus  Octobres. 
Id.  So,  Ad  pridie  Nonas  Maias.  Cic. 

(10.)  The  week  of  seven  days  ( hebdbmas ),  was  not  in  use  among  the  Romans 
under  the  republic,  but  was  introduced  under  the  emperors.  The  days  of  the 
week  were  then  named  from  the  planets;  dies  Solis,  Sunday;  dies  Llnce,  Mon¬ 
day;  dies  Martis,  Tuesday;  dies  Mercurii,  Wednesday;  dies  Jdvis,  Thursday; 
dies  Veneris,  Friday;  dies  Saturni,  Saturday. 

(11.)  The  term  nundinae  (from  ndvem — dies )  denotes  the  regular  market  day 
at  Rome  when  the  country  people  came  into  the  city;  but  it  is  not  used  for  the 
purpose  of  denoting  the  period  of  eight  days  intervening  between  two  succes¬ 
sive  market  days. 

(12.)  The  year  at  Rome  was  designated  by  the  names  of  the  consuls  for 
that  year.  Thus  Virgil  was  born,  M.  Licinio  Crasso  et  Cn.  Pompeio  Magno 
considibus,  i.  e.  in  the  year  of  the  consulship  of  Crassus  and  Pompey.  But"  in 
Roman  authors  events  are  often  dated  from  the  year  in  which  "Rome  was 
founded,  which,  according  to  Varro,  was  in  the  753d  year  before  the  birth 
of  Christ.  This  period  was  designated  as  anno  urbis  conduce,  and  by  ab¬ 
breviation,  a.  u.  c .,  or  simply  u.  c.,  and  sometimes  by  a.  alone,  before  the 
numerals. 

Thus  the  birth  of  Virgil  was  a.  u.  c.  684.  To  reduce  such  dates  to  our  reckoning,  if 
the  given  number  is  less  than  754,  we  subtract  it  from  the  latter  number,  and  the  dif¬ 
ference  is  the  required  year  before  Christ.  The  birth  of  Virgil  therefore  is  754 — 684=70 
before  Christ. — But  if  the  number  of  the  Roman  year  exceeds  753,  we  deduct  753  from 
the  given  number,  and  the  remainder  is  the  year  after  Christ.  For  example,  the  em¬ 
peror  Augustus  died  a.  u.  c.  767,  and  the  corresponding  year  of  our  era  is  767 — 753=14. 


n.  TABLES  OF  MONEY,  WEIGHT,  AND  MEASURE. 


Of  the  As. 


§  327.  The  Romans  used  this  word  (As)  to  denote,  I.  The  copper  coin, 
whose  value  (in  the  time  of  Cicero)  was  about  one  cent  and  a  half  of  our 
money.  II.  The  unit  of  weight  (libra),  or  of  measure  (jugerum).  III.  Any 
unit  or  integer  considered  as  divisible ;  as,  of  inheritances,  interest,  houses,  etc. ; 
whence  ex  asse  heres ,  one  who  inherits  the  whole.  The  multiples  of  the  As  are, 
Dupondius  (duo  pondo ;  for  the  As  originally  weighed  a  pound),  i.  e.  2  Asses; 
Sestertius  ( sesqui  tertius),  i.  e.  2£  Asses;  Tressis,  i.  e.  3  Asses;  Quatrussis ,  i.  e. 
4  Asses;  and  so  on  to  Centussis,  i.  e.  100  Asses.  The  As,  whatever  unit  it  re¬ 
presented,  was  divided  into  twelve  parts  or  uncice,  and  the  different  fractions 
received  different  names,  as  follows : 


Uncia. 


As .  12 

Deunx .  11 

Dextans .  10 

Dodrans .  9 

Bes .  8 

Septunx .  7 

Semis .  6 


Uncia 


Quincunx .  5 

Triens .  4 

Quadrans,  or  Teruncius .  3 

Sextans .  2 

Uncia .  1 


Sescuncia .  II 


§  327.  APPENDIX. - TABLES  OF  MONET,  WEIGHT,  ETC. 


371 


The  Uncia  was  divided  in  the  following  manner : — 

1  Uncia  contained  2  Semunciae. 


it 

it 

3  Duellae. 

it 

u 

4  Sicilici. 

it 

it 

6  Sextulae. 

it 

ii 

8  Drachmae. 

It 

it 

24  Scrupula. 

it 

ii 

48  Oboli. 

Roman  Coins. 

These  were  the  Teruncius,  Sembella,  and  As  or  Libella,  of  copper;  the  Ses¬ 
tertius,  Quinarius  (or  Victoriatus ),  and  Denarius ,  of  silver;  and  the  Aureus, 
of  gold. 


The  Teruncius. .  0  0  3.9 

2  Teruncii  make  1  Sembella .  0  0  7.8 

2  Sembellae  “  1  As  or  Libella .  0  1  5.6 

2£  Asses*  “  1  Sestertius .  0  3  9 

2  Sestertii  “  1  Quinarius .  0  7  8 

2  Quinarii  “  1  Denarius .  0  15  6 

25  Denarii  “  1  Aureus .  3  90  0 


*  Sometimes  also  (in  copper)  the  triens,  sextans,  uncia,  sextula,  and  dupondius. 


Roman  Computation  of  Money. 
Sestertii  Nummi. 


$  Cts.  M. 

Sestertius  (or  nummus) .  0  3  9 

Decern  sestertii .. . .  0  39  0 

Centum  sestertii . , . . .  3  90  0 

Mille  sestertii  (equal  to  a  sestertium) . V .  39  0  0 

Sestertia. 

Sestertium  (equal  to  mille  sestertii) .  39  0  0 

Decem  sestertia .  390  0  0 

Centum,  centum  sestertia,  or  centum  millia  sestertium .  3900  0  0 

Decies  sestertium,  or  decies  centena  millia  nummum .  39000  0  0 

Centies,  or  centies  h.  s .  390000  0  0 

Millies  h.  s . 3900000  0  0 

Millies  centies  h.  s .  4290000  0  0 


N.  B. — The  marks  denoting  a  Sestertius  nummus  are  nS.,  LLS.,  HS.,  which  are  pro¬ 
perly  abbreviations  for  2  1-2  asses.  Observe,  also,  that  when  a  line  is  placed  over  the 
numbers,  centena  millia  is  understood,  as  in  the  case  of  the  numeral  adverbs ;  thus,  H.  S. 

MC.  is  millies  centies  HS. ;  whereas  HS.  MC.  is  only  1100  Sestertii. 


Roman  Calculation  of  Interest. 

The  Romans  received  interest  on  their  loans  monthly,  their  highest  rate  be¬ 
ing  one  per  cent.  ( centesima ),  a  month,  i.  e.  12  per  cent  a  year.  As  this  was 
the  highest  rate,  it  was  reckoned  as  the  as  or  unit  in  reference  to  the  lower 
rates,  which  were  denominated,  according  to  the  usual  division  of  the  as,  semis¬ 
ses,  trientes ,  quadrantes,  etc.,  i.  e.  the  half,  third,  fourth,  etc.,  of  the  as  or  of 
12  per  cent,  according  to  the  following  table : — 


372  APPENDIX. — TABLES  OP  MONEY,  WEIGHT,  ETC.  §  327. 


Per  cent,  a  year. 

Asses  usurae  or  centesimae . .  12 

Semisses  usurae .  6 

Trientes  usurae .  4 

Quadrantes  usurae .  3 

Sextantes  usurae . i .  2 

Unciae  usurae .  1 

Quincunces  usurae .  5 

Septunces  usurae .  7 

Besses  usurae .  8 

Dodrantes  usurae .  9 

Dextantes  usurae .  10 

Deunces  usurae .  11 

Roman  Weights. 

Oz.  Dwts.  Gr. 

Siliqua .  0  0  3.03G 

3  Siliquae  make  1  Obolus .  0  0  9.107 

2  Oboli  “  1  Scrupulum. ...  0  0  18.214 

3  Scrupula  “  1  Drachma .  0  2  6.643 

1}  Drachma  “  1  Sextula .  0  3  0.857 

1£  Sextula  “  1  Sicilicus .  0  4  13.286 

1*  Sicilicus  “  1  Duella .  0  6  1.714 

3  Duellae  “  1  Uncia .  0  18  5.143 

12  Unciae  “  1  Libra*  (As)  ...  10  18  13.714 


*The  Libra  was  also  divided,  according  to  the  fractions  of  the  As,  into  Deunx,  etc. 
Roman  Measures  for  Things  Dry. 

English  Corn  Measure. 


Peck. 

Gal. 

Pint. 

Sol.  in. 

Ligula. . . . 

0 

0 

0  1-48 

0.01 

4  Ligulae  make  1  Cyathus . 

0 

0 

0  1-12 

0.04 

1£  Cyathus 

“  1  Acetabulum.. . 

0 

0 

0  1-8 

0.06 

4  Acetabula 

“  1  Hemina . 

0 

0 

0  1-2 

0.24 

2  Heminae 

“  1  Sextarius . 

0 

0 

1 

0.48 

16  Sextarii 

“  1  Modius . 

1 

0 

0 

7.68 

Roman  Measures  for 

Things  Liquid. 

English  Wine 

Measure. 

Galls. 

Pints. 

Sol.  in. 

Ligula . 

0 

0  1-48 

0.117 

4 

Ligulae  make 

1  Cyathus . 

0 

0  1-12 

0.469 

It 

Cyathus  “ 

1  Acetabulum . 

0 

0  1-8 

0.704 

2 

Acetabula  “ 

1  Quartarius . 

0 

0  1-4 

1.409 

2 

Quartarii  “ 

1  Hemina . , 

0 

0  1-2 

2.876 

2 

Heminae  u 

1  Sextarius* . 

0 

1 

5.636 

6 

Sextarii  u 

1  Congius . 

0 

7 

4.942 

4 

Congii  “ 

1  Urna . 

3 

4  1-2 

5.33 

2 

Urnae  “ 

1  Amphora  (or  Quadrantal). 

7 

1 

10.66 

20 

Amphorae  lt 

1  Culeus . 

143 

3 

11.095 

*  The  Sextarius  was  also  divided  into  twelve  equal  parts,  called  cy&thi,  and  therefore 
the  calices  were  denominated  sextantes ,  quadrantes ,  trientes ,  according  to  the  number  of 
cyathi  which  they  contained. 

N.  B. —  Cadus ,  congiarius ,  and  dolium ,  are  the  names  of  certain  vessels ,  not  measures , 
of  capacity. 


§  327.  APPENDIX. - TABLES  OF  MONET,  WEIGHT,  ETC.  373 


Roman  Measures  of  Length. 


Digitus  transversus . 

English 

paces. 

0 

Feet. 

0 

Inch.  Dec. 
0.725  1-4 

1 1-5  Digitus  make 

1  Uncia. . . . 

0 

0 

0.967 

3  Uncise  “ 

1  Palmus  minor. . . . 

0 

0 

2.901 

4  Palmi  minores  “ 

1  Pes . 

0 

0 

11.604 

1  1-4  Pes  “ 

1  Palmipes. 

0 

1 

2.505 

1  1-5  Palmipes 

1  Cubitus.. 

0 

1 

5.406 

1  2-3  Cubitus  “ 

1  Gradus ... 

0 

2 

6.01 

2  Gradus  “ 

1  Passus. . . 

0 

4 

10.02 

125  Passus 

1  Stadium  . 

120 

4 

4.5 

8  Stadia  “ 

r  '  ■ 

1  Milliarium . 

967 

0 

0 

Roman  Square  Measures. 

/ 

Jugerum  (As)  .... 

Roman 
sq.  feet. 

.  28,800 

English 

rods. 

2 

Sq.  pis. 

18 

Sq.  feet. 
250.05 

Deunx . 

26,400 

2 

10 

183.85 

Dextans . 

24,000 

2 

02 

117.64 

Dodrans . 

21,600 

1 

34 

51.42 

Bes . 

.  19,200 

1 

25 

257.46 

Septunx . 

.  16,800 

1 

17 

191.25 

Semis . 

.  14,400 

1 

09 

125.03 

Quincunx . 

.  12,000 

1 

01 

58.82 

Triens . 

9,600 

0 

32 

264.85 

Quadrans . 

7,200 

0 

24 

198.64 

Sextans . 

.  4,800 

0 

16 

132.43 

Uncia . 

2,400 

0 

08 

66.21 

Remark  1.  The  Romans  reckoned  their  copper  money  by  asses , 
their  silver  money  by  sestertii ,  and  their  gold  money  by  aurei  and 
sometimes  by  Attic  talents . 

Rem.  2.  The  as,  as  the  unit  of  money,  was  originally  a  pound  of  copper, 
but  its  weight  was  gradually  diminished,  until,  in  the  later  days  of  the  repub¬ 
lic,  it  amounted  to  only  l-24th  of  a  pound. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  denarius  was  a  silver  coin,  originally  equal  in  value  to  ten 
asses,  whence  its  name ;  but,  after  the  weight  of  the  as  was  reduced,  the  dena¬ 
rius  was  equal  to  eighteen  asses. 

( b .)  The  sestertius ,  or  sesterce,  was  one  fourth  of  the  denarius ,  or  two  asses 
and  a  half  ( semistertius ).  The  sestertius  was  called  emphatically  nummus ,  as  in 
it  all  large  sums  were  reckoned  after  the  coining  of  silver  money. 

(c.)  The  aureus  (a  gold  coin),  in  the  time  of  the  emperors,  was  equal  to  25 
denarii ,  or  100  sesterces. 

Rem.  4.  In  reckoning  money,  the  Romans  called  any  sum  under  2000  ses¬ 
terces  so  many  sestertii ;  as,  decern  sestertii ,  ten  sesterces ;  centum  sestertii ,  a 
hundred  sesterces. 

Rem.  5.  Sums  from  2000  sesterces  (inclusive)  to  1,000,000,  they  denoted 
either  by  mille,  millia,  with  sestertium  (gen.  plur.),  or  by  the  plural  of  the 
neuter  noun  sestertium,  which  itself  signified  a  thousand  sesterces.  Thus  they 
said  quadraginta  millia  sestertium,  or  quadraginta  sestertia ,  to  denote  40,000 
sesterces.  With  the  genitive  sestertium,  millia  was  sometimes  omitted;  as, 
sestertium  centum,  scii,  millia ,  100,000  sesterces. 

Rem.  6..  To  denote  a  million,  or  more,  they  used  a  combination;  thus,  decies 
centena  millia  sestertium,  1,000,000  sesterces.  The  words  centena  millia ,  how¬ 
ever,  were  generally  omitted ;  thus,  decies  sestertium,  and  sometimes  merely 
decies.  See  §  118,  5.  So,  centies ,  10  millions ;  millies ,  100  millions. 

32 


374 


APPENDIX. - ABBREVIATIONS 


§  328,  329 


Rem.  7.  Some  suppose  that  sestertium,  when  thus  joined  with  the  numeral  adverbs,  is 
always  the  neuter  noun  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  singular.  The  genitive  and  ab¬ 
lative  of  that  noun  are  thus  used;  as,  Decies  sestertii  dote ,  With  a  dowry  of  1,000,000 
sesterces.  Tac.  Quinquagies  sestertio ,  6,000,000  sesterces.  Id.  But  this  usage  does  not 
occur  in  Cicero. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

§328.  The  following  are  the  most  common  abbreviations  of 
Latin  words : — 


A.,  Aulus. 

C. ,  Caius ,  or  Gains. 
Cn.,  Cneils. 

D. ,  Decimus. 

L. ,  Lucius. 

M. ,  Marcus . 


A.  d.,  ante  diem. 

A.  U.  C.,  anno  urbis  con¬ 
duce. 

Cal.,  or  Kal.,  Calendos. 

Cos.,  Consul. 

Coss.,  Consules. 

D.,  Divus. 

D.  D.,  dono  dedit. 

D.  D.  D.,  dat,  dicat ,  dedi¬ 
cat,  or  dono  dicat ,  de¬ 
dicat. 

Des.,  designatus. 

D.  M.,  diis  manibus . 

Eq.  Rom.,  eques  Romanus. 


M.  T.  C.,  Marcus  Tullius 
Cicero. 

M. ,  Manius. 

Mam.,  Mamercus . 

N. ,  Numerius. 

P.,  Publius. 


F.,  Filius ;  as,  M.  F., 
Marci  filius. 

Ictus,  jurisconsultus. 

Id.,  Idus. 

Imp.,  imperator. 

J.  O.  M.,  Jovi,  optimo 
maximo. 

N.,  nepos. 

Non.,  Nonce. 

P.  C.,  patres  conscripti. 
Pl.,  plebis. 

Pop.,  populus. 

P.  R.,  populus  Romanus. 


Q .,  or  Qu.j  Quintus. 
Ser.,  Servius. 

S .,  or  Sex.,  Sextus. 
Sp.,  Spurius . 

T  Titus 

Til,  or  Tib.,  Tiberius. 


Pont.  Max.,  pontifex 
maximus. 

Pr.,  praetor. 

Proc.,  proconsul. 

Resp.,  respublica. 

S.,  salutem ,  sacrum ,  or 
senatus. 

S.  D.  P.,  salutem  dicit 
plurimam. 

S.  P.  Q.  R.,  Senatus pdpu- 
lusque  Romanus. 

S.  C.,  senat&s  consultum. 

Tr.,  tribunus. 


To  these  may  be  added  terms  of  reference;  as,  c.,  caput,  chapter;  cf. ,  confer , 
compare;  l.  c .,  loco  citato;  l .  1.,  loco  laudato,  in  the  place  quoted;  v.,  versus , 
verse. 


DIFFERENT  AGES  OF  ROMAN  LITERATURE. 

§  329.  1.  Of  the  Roman  literature  for  the  first  five  centuries  after  the 

foundation  of  the  city,  but  few  vestiges  remain.  The  writers  of  the  succeed¬ 
ing  centuries  have  been  arranged  in  four  ages,  in  reference  to  the  purity  of 
the  language  in  the  period  in  which  they  flourished.  These  are  called  the 
golden ,  silver,  brazen ,  and  iron  ages. 

2.  The  golden  age  is  reckoned  from  the  time  of  Livius  Andronicus,  about 
A.  U.  C.  514,  to  the  dpath  of  Augustus,  A.  U.  C.  767,  or  A.  D.  14,  a  period 
of  a  little  more  than  250  years.  The  writers  of  the  early  part  of  this  age  are 
valued  rather  on  account  of  their  antiquity,  and  in  connection  with  the  his¬ 
tory  of  the  language,  than  as  models  of  style.  It  was  not  till  the  age  of 
Cicero,  that  Roman  literature  reached  its  highest  elevation.  The  era  com¬ 
prehending  the  generation  immediately  preceding,  and  that  immediately  suc¬ 
ceeding,  that  of  Cicero,  as  well  as  his  own,  is  the  period  in  which  the  most 
distinguished  writers  of  Rome  flourished;  and  their  works  are  the  standard  of 
purity  in  the  Latin  language. 


§  329.  APPENDIX. - WRITERS  IN  DIFFERENT  AGES. 


375 


3.  The  silver  age  extended  from  the  death  of  Augustus  to  the  death  of 
Trajan,  A.  D.  118,  a  period  of  104  years.  The  writers  of  this  age  were  inferior 
to  those  who  had  preceded  them;  yet  several  of  them  are  worthy  of  com¬ 
mendation. 

4.  The  brazen  age  comprised  the  interval  from  the  death  of  Trajan  to  the 
time  when  Rome  was  taken  by  the  Goths,  A.  D.  410.  From  the  latter  epoch 
commenced  the  iron  age,  during  which  the  Latin  language  was  much  adulter¬ 
ated  with  foreign  words,  and  its  style  and  spirit  essentially  injured. 

5.  The  body  of  Latin  writings  has  been  otherwise  arranged  by  Dr.  Freund, 
so  as  to  be  comprised  in  three  main  periods, — the  Ante-classical ,  Classical ,  and 
Post-classical.  The  ante-classical  extends  from  the  oldest  fragments  of  the 
language  to  Lucretius  and  Yarro;  the  classical  from  Cicero  and  Caesar  to 
Tacitus,  Suetonius,  and  the  younger  Pliny  inclusive;  the  post-classical  from 
that  time  to  the  fifth  century  of  our  era.  The  classical  Latinity  is  subdivided 
into  (a.)  Ciceronian ,  (6.)  Augustan ,  (c.)  post- Augustan,  and  to  the  language  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  centuries  he  has  given  the  title  of  late  Latin. 


LATIN  WRITERS  IN  THE  DIFFERENT  AGES. 

(From,  the  Lexicon  of  Facciolatus.) 


WRITERS  OF  THE  GOLDEN  AGE. 


Livius  Andronicus, 
Laevius. 

C.  Naevius. 

Statius  Caecilius. 
Q.  Ennius. 

M.  Pacuvius. 

L.  Accius. 

C.  Lucilius. 

Sex.  Turpilius. 

L.  Afranius. 


L.  Cornelius  Sisenna. 
P.  Nigidius  Figulus. 

C.  Decius  Laberius. 

M.  Verrius  Flaccus. 
Varro  Attaclnus. 
Titinius. 

L.  Pomponius. 

C.  Sempronius  Asellio. 
Cn.  Matius. 


Q.  Novius. 

C.  Q.  Atta. 

L.  Cassius  Hemina. 
Fenestella. 

Q.  Claud.  Quadrigarius, 
Coelius  Antipater. 
Fabius  Pictor. 

Cn.  Gellius. 

L.  Piso,  and  others. 


Of  the  works  of  the  preceding  writers,  only  a  few  fragments  remain. 


M.  Porcius  Cato. 

M.  Accius  Plautus. 
M.  Terentius  Afer. 

T.  Lucretius  Carus. 
C.  Valerius  Catullus. 
P.  Syrus. 

C.  Julius  Caesar. 

C.  Cornelius  Nepos. 
M.  Tullius  Cicero. 


Sex.  Aurelius  Propertius. 
C.  Sallustius  Crispus. 

M.  Terentius  Varro. 

Albius  Tibullus. 

P.  Virgilius  Maro. 

T.  Livius. 

M.  Manilius. 

M.  Vitruvius. 


P.  Ovidius  Naso. 

Q.  Horatius  Flaccus. 
C.  Pedo  Albinovanus. 

Gratius  Faliscus. 
Phaedrus. 

C.  Cornificius. 

A.  Hurtius,  or  Oppius. 
P.  Cornelius  Severus. 


To  these  may  be  added  the  following  names  of  lawyers,  whose  opinions  are 
found  in  the  digests: — 

Q.  Mutius  Scaevola.  M.  Antistius  Labeo.  Masurius  Sabinus. 
Alfenus  Varus. 


Of  the  writers  of  the  golden  age,  the  most  distinguished  are  Terence,  Catul¬ 
lus,  Caesar,  Nepos,  Cicero,  Virgil,  Horace,  Ovid,  T.  Livy,  and  Sallust. 


376 


APPENDIX. - WRITERS  IN  DIFFERENT  AGES.  §329 


WRITERS  OF  THE  SILVER  AGE. 


A.  Cornelius  Celsus. 

P.  Velleius  Paterculus. 

L.  Junius  Moderatus 

Colamella. 
Pomponius  Mela. 

A.  Persius  Flaccus. 

Q.  Asconius  Pedianus. 

M.  Annaeus  Seneca. 

L.  Annaeus  Seneca. 


M.  Annaeus  Lucanus. 
T.  Petronius  Arbiter. 
C.  Plinius  Secundus. 
C.  Silius  Italicus. 

C.  Valerius  Flaccus. 

C.  Julius  Sollnus. 

D.  Junius  Juvenalis. 
P.  Papinius  Statius. 
M.  Valerius  Martialis. 


M.  Fabius  Quintilianus. 
Sex.  Julius  Frontinus. 

C.  Cornelius  Tacitus. 

C.  Plinius  Caecilius  Se¬ 
cundus. 

L.  Annaeus  Florus. 

C.  Suetonius  Tranquil¬ 
lus. 


The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  should  be  assigned  is  somewhat  un¬ 
certain  : — 


Q.  Curtius  Rufus.  Scribonius  Largus.  L.  Fenestella. 

Valerius  Probus.  Sulpitia.  •  Atteius  Capito. 


Of  the  writers  of  the  silver  age,  the  most  distinguished  are  Celsus,  Velleius, 
Columella,  the  Senecas,  the  Plinies,  Juvenal,  Quintilian,  Tacitus,  Suetonius, 
and  Curtius. 


WRITERS  OF  THE  BRAZEN  AGE. 


A.  Gellius. 

L.  Apuleius. 

Q.  Septimius  Tertullia¬ 
nus. 

Q.  Serenus  Sammoni- 
cus. 

Censorinus. 

Thascius  Caecilius 
Cyprianus. 

T.  Julius  Calpurnius. 

M.  Aurelius  Nemesianus. 
iElius  Spartianus. 
Julius  Capitolinus. 
iElius  Lampridius. 


Vulcatius  Gallicanus. 
Trebellius  Pollio. 
Flavius  Vopiscus. 
Coelius  Aurelianus. 
Flavius  Eutropius. 
Rhemnius  Fannius. 
Arnobius  Afer. 

L.  Coelius  Lactantius. 

iElius  Donatus. 

C.  Vettus  Juvencus. 

Julius  Firmicus. 

Fab.  Marius  Victorinus. 
Sex.  Rufus,  or  Rufus 
Festus. 


Ammianus  Marcel- 
llnus. 

Vegetius  Renatus. 

Aurei.  Theodorus  Macro¬ 
bius. 

Q.  Aurelius  Symmachus. 

D.  Magnus  Ausonius. 

Paullnus  Nolanus. 

Sex.  Aurelius  Victor. 

Aurei.  Prudentius  Cle¬ 
mens. 

Cl.  Claudianus. 

Marcellus  Empiricus. 

Falconia  Proba. 


Of  an  Age  not  entirely  certain . 

Valerius  Maximus.  Terentianus  Maurus.  Sosipater  Charisius. 

Justinus.  Minutius  Felix.  Flavius  Avianus. 


The  opinions  of  the  following  lawyers  are  found  in  the  digests: — 


Licinius  Proculus. 
Neratius  Priscus. 

P.  Juventius  Celsus. 
Priscus  Jabolenus. 
Domitius  Ulpianus. 


Herennius  Modestinus. 
Salvius  Julianus. 
Caius. 

Callistratus. 
iEmilius  Papinianus. 


Julius  Paulus. 

Sex.  Pomponius. 
Venuleius  Saturninus. 
iElius  Marcianus. 
iElius  Gallus,  and  others. 


Of  the  writers  of  the  brazen  age,  Justin,  Terentianus,  Victor,  Lactantius, 
and  Claudian,  are  most  distinguished. 


The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  belong  is  uncertain.  The  style  of 
some  of  them  would  entitle  them  to  be  ranked  with  the  writers  of  the  preced¬ 
ing  ages,  while  that  of  others  would  place  them  even  below  those  of  the  iron 
age. 


§  329.  APPENDIX. - WRITERS  IN  DIFFERENT  AGES. 


377 


Palladius  Rutilius  Tau¬ 
rus  M  mil  i  anus. 
JSmilius  Macer. 

Messala  Corvinus. 

Vibius  Sequester. 

Julius  Obsequens. 

L.  Ampelius. 

Apicius  Coelius. 

Sex.  Pompeius  Festus. 
Probus  (auctor  Nota¬ 
rum.) 

Fulgentius  Planciades. 
Hyginus. 

C.  Caesar  Germanicus. 

P.  Victor. 

P.  Vegetius. 


Auctores  Priape  idrum. 

Catalecta  Virgilii  et 
Ovidii. 

Auctor  orationis  Sallustii 
in  Cic.  et  Ciceronis  in 
Sali.;  item  illius  Ante¬ 
quam  iret  in  exsilium. 

Auctor  Epistolae  ad  Oc¬ 
tavium. 

Auctor  Panegyrici  ad 
Pisonem. 

Declamationes  quae  tri¬ 
buuntur  Quintiliano, 
Porcio  Latroni,  Calpur¬ 
nio  Flacco. 


Interpres  Daretis  Phry¬ 
gii,  et  Dictyos  Cre¬ 
tensis. 

Scholiastae  Veteres. 

Grammatici  Antiqui. 

Rhetores  Antiqui. 

Medici  Antiqui. 

Catalecta  Petroniana. 

Pervigilium  Veneris. 

Poematia  et  Epigramma¬ 
ta  vetera  a  Pithaeo  col¬ 
lecta. 

Monumentum  Ancyra¬ 
num. 

Fasti  Consulares. 

Inscriptiones  Veteres. 


WRITERS  OF  THE  IRON  AGE. 


Cl.  Rutilius  Numatianus. 
Servius  Honoratus. 

D.  Hieronjhnus. 

D.  Augustinus. 

Sulpicius  Severus. 
Paulus  Orosius. 

Coelius  Sedulius. 

Codex  Theodosianus. 
Martianus  Capella. 
Claudianus  Mamertus. 
Sidonius  Apollinaris. 


Latinus  Pacatus. 

Claudius  Mamertinus,  et 
alii,  quorum  sunt  Pan¬ 
egyrici  veteres. 

Alclmus  Avitus. 

Mani.  Severinus  Boe¬ 
thius. 

Priscianus. 

Nonius  Marcellus. 

Justiniani  Institutiones 
et  Codex. 


Ruf.  Festus  Avienus. 
Arator. 

M.  Aurelius  Cassidorus. 
FI.  Cresconius  Corippus. 
Venantius  Fortunatus. 
Isidorus  Hispalensis. 
Anonymus  Ravennas. 
Aldhelmus  or  Althelmus. 
Paulus  Diaconus. 


82* 


INDEX. 


The  figures  in  the  following  Index  designate  the  Sections  and  their  divisions :  b.  stands 
for  remark ,  N.  for  note ,  e.  for  exception ,  w.  for  with,  and  pr.  for  prosody . 


A,  sound  of,  7  and  8^  nouns  in,  of  1st 
decl.,  41;  gender  of,  41;  of  3d  decl.  gender 
of,  66;  genitive  of,  68,  2;  in  acc.  sing,  of 
masc.  and  fem.  Greek  nouns,  79  and  80 ; 
in  nom.  acc.  and  voc.  plur.  of  all  neuter 
nouns,  adjectives  and  participles,  40,  8; 
83,  i. ;  85 ;  87 ;  105,  2 ;  verbals  in,  102,  6,  (c.) ; 
change  of  in  compd.  verbs,  189;  increment 
in,  3d  decl.,  287,  3;  in  plur.,  288;  of  verbs, 
290;  ending  the  first  part  of  compds.,  285, 
B.  4 ;  final,  quantity  of,  294. 

A ,  ab ,  abs ,  how  used,  195,  R.  2,  and  10; 
in  composition,  196,  I.,  1;  before  the  abl. 
of  distance,  236,  R.  6;  ab ,  de ,  or  ex,  with 
abl.  of  depriving,  etc.,  251,  R.  1. 

Abbreviations,  328. 

Abdico,  constr.  of,  251,  R.  2. 

Abest  mihi,  226,  R.  2 ;  non  multum  abest 
quin,  262,  n.  7. 

Abhinc,  253,  R.  2. 

Ablative,  37:  sing.  3d  decl.,  82;  of  adjs. 
of  3d  decl.,  113 ;  plur.  1st  decl.,  40,  r.  6, 
and  43;  2d  decl.,  40,  R.  6;  3d  decl.,  84;  4th 
decl.,  89,5;  used  adverbially,  192,  i.,  n. ; 
of  character,  quality,  etc.,  211,  r.  6;  after 
prepositions,  241 ;  after  compd.  verbs,  242 ; 
after  opus  and  us  us,  243;  after  dignus,  etc. 
244;  after  utor ,  etc.,  245,  I.;  after  nitor , 
etc.,  245,  ii.;  after  parts,  denoting  origin, 
246;  of  cause,  etc.,  247;  of  means  and 
agent,  248 ;  of  means,  249,  i. ;  of  accord¬ 
ance,  249,  H. ;  of  accompaniment,  249,  in. ; 
denoting  in  what  respect,  250 ;  after  adjec¬ 
tives  of  plenty  or  want,  250,  2,  (1.);  after 
verbs  of  abounding,  etc.,  250,  2,  (2.);  after 
facio  and  sum,  250,  R.  3;  after  verbs  of  de¬ 
priving,  etc.,  251;  of  price,  252;  of  time 
when,  253;  of  place  where,  254;  of  place 
whence,  255,  1;  of  place  by  or  through 
which,  255,  2 ;  after  comparatives,  256 ;  of 
degree  of  difference,  256,  r.  16 ;  abl.  abso¬ 
lute,  257;  how  translated,  257,  n.  1;  equiv¬ 
alent  to  what,  257,  R.  1;  only  with  pres, 
and  perf.  parts.,  257,  R.  2;  without  a  parti¬ 
ciple,  257,  R.  7 ;  with  a  clause,  257,  r.  8  ; 
how  it  marks  the  time  of  an  action,  256, 
B.  4 ;  noun  wanting,  256,  R.  9. 

Abounding  and  wanting,  verbs  of,  with 
abl.  250;  with  gen.  220,  i3.) 


“About  to  do,”  how  expressed,  162,  14; 
“about  to  be  done,”  how  expressed,  162, 
14,  r.  4. 

Abstineo ,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. ;  viz  or  cegre  ab¬ 
stineo,  quin ,  262,  N.  7. 

Abstract  nouns,  26 ;  formation  from  adjs., 
101;  their  terminations,  101,  1  and  2,  (3.); 
from  verbs,  102. 

Abundo,  250,  (2.)  r.  1. 

- abus ,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  in,  43. 

Ac  or  atque ,  198,  1,  r.  ( b .)  and  2,  r.  ;  in¬ 
stead  of  quam,  256,  R.  15;  ac  si  with  6ubj. 
263,  2,  and  r. 

Acatalectic  verse,  304,  3,  (1.) 

Accent  in  English,  16 ;  place  of  secondary 
accent,  16,  1  and  2 ;  in  Latin,  14  and  15 ; 
of  dissyllables,  14,  4;  of  polysyllables,  14, 
4,  and  15 — written  accents,  5,  2,  and  14,  2. 

Accentuation,  14 — 16. 

Accidents  of  nouns,  26,  7 ;  of  verbs,  141. 

Accipio,  w.  part,  in  dus,  274,  r.  7. 

Accompaniment,  abl.  of,  249,  in. 

Accordance,  abl.  of,  249,  n. 

Achivom  for  Achivorum ,  53. 

-acis,  genitives  in,  78,  2,  (1.) 

Accusative,  37 ;  sing.,  terminal  letter  of 
in  masculines  and  feminines,  40,  2;  plural, 
terminal  letter  of  in  do.,  40,  7;  of  3d  decl., 
79;  of  Greek  nouns,  80;  plur.  3d  decl.,  85; 
do.  of  adjs.  of  3d  decl.,  114;  neuter  in  all 
declensions,  sing  and  plur.,  40,  8;  in  m 
and  im,  79;  of  Greek  nouns  in  im ,  in,  or  a, 
79,  ( b .)  and  80;  in  idem,  80,  e.  1;  in  ym  or 
yn,  80,  H. ;  in  ea,  80,  in. ;  in  etem,  eta,  cm, 
or  en ,  80,  rv. ;  neuter  used  adverbially.  192, 
n.,  4,  and  205,  R.  10;  acc.  after  verbs,  229 — 
234 ;  omitted,  229,  r.  4 ;  inf.  or  a  clause  in¬ 
stead  of,  229,  r.  5;  of  a  person  after  miseret, 
etc.,  229,  r.  6;  after  jurat,  etc.,  229,  r.  7; 
after  neuter  verbs,  232;  after  compound 
verbs,  233 ;  after  verbal  nouns  and  verbal 
adjs.,  233,  n.  ;  of  part  affected,  234,  n. ;  a 
limiting  acc.  instead  of  the  abl.  in  partim , 
vicem,  cetera,  etc.,  234,  n.,  r.  3;  after  pre¬ 
positions,  235;  of  time  and  space,  236;  of 
place,  237;  after  adverbs  and  interjections, 
238;  acc.  as  subject,  239;  acc.  of  the  thing 
supplied  by  the  inf.,  270,  N.,  acc.  w.  inf., 
272;  do.  exchanged  for  the  subjunctive, 


INDEX. 


379 


273.  3. — two  accusatives  after  certain  verbs, 
230  and  231;  acc.  of  thing  retained  in  pas¬ 
sive  voice,  234;  places  supplied  by  infini¬ 
tives,  229,  N.  2;  pred.  acc.  how  supplied, 
ib.  n.  4. 

Accusing  and  acquitting,  verbs  of,  constr., 
217,  and  R.  4. 

Accuso ,  constr.,  217,  and  r.  2 — 5. 

Acephalous  verse,  304,  3,  (3.) 

Acer,  declined,  108,  i. 

Achilles ,  declined,  86. 

Acquiesco ,  245,  n.,  3. 

Acute  accent,  5,  2,  and  14,  2  ;  when  used, 
14,  3. 

Active  voice,  141. 

Active  verb,  141 ;  used  impersonally,  184, 
2  ;  object  of  act.  verb,  229 ;  two  cases  after, 
229,  r.  1 ;  verb  omitted,  229,  r.  3. 

Ad,  how  used,  195,  r.  5  ;  in  composition, 
196,  i.2;  construction  of  verbs  compound¬ 
ed  with,  224 ;  ad  used  for  in,  224,  r.  4. 

Adde  quod ,  273,  n.  8. 

Additions  to  simple  subject,  202,  6,  ete. ; 
to  simple  predicate,  203,  5,  etc. 

Adeo ,  adv.,  191,  r.  5 ;  adeo  non ,  277,  R. 
14. — verb,  constr.,  233,  3,  and  n. 

-ades,  patronymics  in,  100,  1,  (a.) 

Adest ,  qui ,  with  subj.,  264,  6. 

Adhuc  locorum ,  212,  r.  4,  n.  4. 

Adipiscor ,  w.  gen.,  220,  4  jin. 

Adjectives,  104 — 131 ;  classes  of,  104,  1 — 
15  ;  declension  of,  105  ;  of  1st  and  2d  decls. 
105—107 ;  of  3d  declension,  108—114 ;  of 
three  terminations,  108 ;  of  two  termina¬ 
tions,  109,  110  ;  of  one  termination,  111 ; 
their  gen.  sing.,  112  ;  their  abl.  sing.  113  ; 
their  nom.,  acc.,  and  gen.  plur.,  114  ;  irreg¬ 
ular,  115 — 116  ;  defective,  115  ;  redundant, 
116  ;  numeral,  117 — 121 ;  cardinal,  117, 118  ; 
ordinal,  119,  120 ;  multiplicative,  121,  1  ; 
proportional,  121,  2  ;  temporal,  121,  3  ;  in¬ 
terrogative,  121,  5 ;  comparison  of,  122 — 
127  ;  irregular  comparison,  125  ;  defective 
comparison,  126 ;  derivation  of,  128 — 130  ; 
composition  of,  131 ;  amplificative,  128,  4  ; 
patrial,  128,  6 ;  verbal,  129 ;  participial, 
130  ;  composition  of  131 ; — how  modified, 
202,  ii.,  1,  (2.)  ;  agreement  of,  205;  quali¬ 
fying  and  limiting,  205,  n.  1 ;  modifiers  or 
predicates,  205,  n.  2 ;  with  two  or  more 
nouns,  205,  R.  2 ;  with  a  collective  noun, 
205,  r.  3;  sing,  with  a  plur.  noun,  205, 
r.  4 ;  dat.  of,  for  acc.  in  the  predicate  of 
acc.  with  the  inf.,  205,  R.  6  ;  without  a 
noun,  205,  r.  7 ;  with  infinitive,  a  clause, 
etc.,  205,  r.  8  ;  in  the  neuter  with  gen.  of 
their  noun,  205,  R.  9,  and  212,  r.  3  ;  neuter 
adjs.  used  adverbially,  205,  r.  10 ;  gender 
of,  when  used  partitively,  205,  R.  12;  in 
genitive  with  possessive  adj.  or  pronoun, 
205,  R.  13;  agreeing  with  the  governing 
noun  instead  of  the  genitive,  205,  r.  14  ; 
two  or  more  with  one  noun,  205,  r.  16; 
instead  of  an  adverb,  205,  r.  15  ;  first,  last, 
etc.  part  expressed  by  the  adj.  alone,  205, 
R.  17  ;  agreeing  with  relative  instead  of  its 
antecedent,  206,  (7.);  with  gen.  213;  w. 
gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5  ;  w.  dat.,  222  ;  w. 
gen.  or  dat.,  213,  r.  6,  and  222,  r.  2;  of 


plenty  or  want  with  abl.,  250  ;  w.  inf.  270, 
r.  1  ;  place  of,  279,  7. 

Adjective  pronouns,  134 — 139 ;  nature  of, 
132,  5;  classes,  134;  agreement,  205. 

Adjective  clauses,  201,  7 ;  how  connect¬ 
ed,  201,  9. 

Adjunctive  pronoun,  135,  R.  1. 

Adjuvo  and  adjuto ,  constr.,  223,  r.  2,  (2.) 

Admonishing,  verbs  of,  w.  gen.  218 ;  other 
constructions,  218,  R.  1  and  2;  273,  n.  4. 

Adolescens ,  its  gender,  30;  as  adj.  how 
compared,  126, 4. 

Adorning,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249. 

Adonic  verse,  312. 

Adulari,  constr.,  223,  R.  2,  (b),  and  (1),  (a.) 

Adverbial  correlatives,  191,  r.  1 ; — clauses, 
201,  7,  9. 

Adverbs,  190,  2 — 194;  primitive,  191;  of 
place  and  order,  191,  t.  ;  correlative,  191, 
r.  1 ;  of  time,  191,  n.  ;  of  manner,  quality, 
degree,  191,  in.  ;  division  of,  191,  r.  2; — 
derivation  of,  192;  numeral,  192,  ii . ,  3, 
and  119  ;  diminutive,  192,  iv.,  r.  ;  compo¬ 
sition  of,  193 ;  signification  of  some  adverbs 
of  time  and  manner,  193 ; — comparison  of, 
194; — how  modified,  277,  r. ;  used  as  adjec¬ 
tives,  205,  r.  11;  w.  gen..  212,  r.  4;  w. 
dat.,  228,  (1.);  w.  acc.,  238;  use  of,  277; 
two  negatives,  force  of,  277,  R.  3 — 5;  equiv¬ 
alent  to  phrases,  277,  R.  8;  of  likeness,  as 
connectives,  278,  r.  1;  place  of  279,  15. 

Adversative  conjunctions,  198,  9. 

Adversus,  how  used,  195,  R.  7- 

JE,  how  pronounced,  9. 

jEqualis ,  construction  of,  222,  r.  2. 

JEque  with  abl.,  241,  R.  2;  oeque  ac.,  198, 
3,  R. 

JEqui  boni  facio  or  consulo,  214,  n.  1. 

JEquo  and  adaquo,  construction  of,  214; 
cequo,  adj.  w.  comparatives,  256,  r.  9. 

Aer,  acc.  of,  80,  r.  ;  pr.  299,  e.  3. 

iEolic  pentameter,  312,  ix. 

gender  of,  61,  2;  gen.  of,  73,  e.  2. 

JEstimo,  constr.,  214. 

JEther,  acc.,  80,  r.  ;  pr.  299,  e.  3. 

-(bus,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (h.) 

JEquum  est ,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  2 ;  csquum 
erat ,  indie,  instead  of  subj.,  259,  r.  3; 
oequum  est ,  with  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Affatim ,  w.  genitive,  212,  r.  4. 

Affluo ,  constr.,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Afficio ,  constr.,  249,  r.  1. 

Affinis,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Ager,  declined,  46. 

Agent,  verbal  nouns  denoting,  102,  6; 
dative  of,  225,  hi.,  R.  1;  248,  r.  1;  abl. 
of,  248. 

Ages  of  Roman  literature,  329. 

Agnitus,  pr.  285,  1,  e.  1. 

Agnominatio,  324,  25. 

Ago  w.  gen.  of  the  crime,  217,  R.  1; — 
age  w.  plur.  subject,  183,  10 ; — id  agere  ut , 
273,  n.  1. 

Agreement  defined,  203,  m.,  6;  of  adjs., 
etc.,  205;  of  relatives,  206. 

Ai,  how  pronounced,  9,  1. — ai,  old  gen. 
in,  43;  quantity  of  the  a  in  do.,  283,  e.  3. 

Aio,  conjugated,  183,  4;  ain>  for  aisne ; 
ait,  elipsis  of,  209,  r.  4;  its  place  in  a  sen¬ 
tence,  279,  6. 


380 


INDEX, 


-al,  abl.  of  nouns  in,  82;  increment  of, 
287,  e.  (a.)  1. 

Alcaic  verse,  304,2; — greater,  318,  in.; 
lesser,  318,  iv. 

Alcmanian  verse,  304,  2; — dactylic  tetra¬ 
meter,  312. 

Alec ,  gender  of,  66 ;  genitive,  70. 

Ales,  gender  of,  30  and  61,  2;  genitive 
sing.,  73,  2;  gen.  plur.,  83,  n.,  R.  2. 

Alex ,  gender  of,  65,  2. 

Alieno ,  and  abalieno ,  constr.,  251,  R.  3, 
and  n. 

Alienus ,  constr!,  222,  r.  1  and  6. 

Aliquanto ,  127,  2;  256,  R.  16,  (2.) 

Aliquantum ,  256,  r.  16,  N. 

Aliquis ,  declined,  133 ;  how  used,  138,  2 ; 
207,  r.  30. 

Aliquo ,  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2. 

Aliquot ,  indeclinable,  115,  4;  correlative, 
121,  5. 

Aliquoties ,  correlative  of  quoties ,  121,  5. 

-aZts,  adjs.  in,  128,  2;  how  compared,  126, 
4;  aZr's,  old  adj.,  for  a&ws,  192,  n.,  2. 

Aliter ,  from  aZu  for  aZiws,  192,  ii.,  2. 

Alius,  how  declined,  107 ;  how  used,  207, 
r.  32 ;  alius — alium ,  with  plur.  verb,  209, 
r.  11,  4;  refers  to  more  than  two,  212,  r.  2, 
N.  1,  (6.);  w.  abl.,  256,  r.  14;  pr.  283,  1, 

E.  4. 

Allegory,  324,  7. 

Alliteration,  324,  26. 

Alphabet,  2,  1. 

Alter ,  how  declined,  105, 3 :  107,  and  r.  2 ; 
gen.  alterius ,  quantity  of  283,  I.,  e.  4,  (6.); 
used  for  secundus ,  120,  1 ;  answers  to  wZer, 
139,  5,  (1.),  ( b .) — aZiero  tanto,  w.  compara¬ 
tives,  258,  r.  16. 

Alteruter ,  107;  139,  5,  (1.),  (6.) — alteru- 
terque ,  107. 

Aftws  and  aZzo,  w.  acc.  of  space,  236,  and 
N.  2. 

Ambi,  amb ,  am,  or  aw,  197,  (6.) 

Ambio ,  how  conjugated,  182,  r.  3. — ambi¬ 
tus ,  pr.  285,  2,  e.  2. 

Ambo ,  how  declined,  118,  R.  1. 

Amicus ,  constr.,  222,  r.  2.  (c.) 

Amo,  conjugated,  155,  156. 

Amphibolia,  325,  5. 

Amplificatives.  nouns,  100,  4,  (a.);  adjec¬ 
tives,  104, 12;  128,  4. 

Amplius ,  with  or  without  quam ,  256,  R.  6. 

Aw,  198,  11;  use  of,  198,  11,  R.  (<*.),  (e.); 
265,  r.  2  and  3;  an — aw,  265,  R.  2. 

Anabasis,  324,  22. 

Anacoluthon,  323,  3,  (5.) 

Anacreontic  verse,  304,  2 ; — iambic  dime¬ 
ter,  314,  ix. 

Anadiplosis,  324, 17. 

Analysis  of  sentences,  281. 

Anapaestic  metre,  313;  303; — monometer, 
313,  i. ; — dimeter,  313. 

Anaphora,  324,  13. 

Anastrophe,  324,  4,  (1.) 

Awas,  gen.  of,  72,  e.  1;  pr.  300,  E.  1. 

Anceps ,  gen.  of,  112,  2 ;  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3. 

Ancile ,  93,  2. 

Androgeos ,  declined,  54, 1. 

- aneus ,  adjs.  in,  128,  8. 

Angor ,  constr.,  273,  5,  N.  6. 

Animal ,  declined,  57. 


Awtmaw.t,  gender  of;  64. 

Animo,  250. — animi  for  animo „  220, 1: 
213,  r.  1,  (a.) 

Awto,  genitive  of,  69,  e.  2. 

Anne,  in  double  questions,  265,  r.  2 ;— < 
annon,  ib. 

Annus,  compds.  of,  121,  3. 

Antanaclasis,  324,  12. 

Ante,  w.  superlatives,  127,6;  in  compo¬ 
sition,  196,  i.,  3;  construction  of  verbs 
compounded  with,  224;  with  titles,  235,  R. 
3;  with  comparatives,  256,,  r.  13,  ( b .); — 
ante  and  post  w.  acc.  and  abl.  of  time,  253, 
r.  1;  w.  quam  and  a  verb,  253,  n.  3;  for 
abhinc,  253,  r.  2. 

Antecedent,  136;  ellipsis  of,  206,  (3.),  (4.); 
its  place  supplied  by  a  demonstrative,  206, 
3,  (a.) ;  in  the  case  of  the  relative,  206,  (6.), 
(&.);  implied  in  a  poseessive  pronoun,  206, 
(12);  may  be  a  proposition,  206,  (13.) 

Antecedo  and  antecello ,  constr.,  256,  R. 
16,  (3.) 

Antepenult,  13 ;  quantity  of,  292. 

Antequam,  constr.,  263,  3. 

Antimeria,  323,  3,  (1.) 

Antiphrasis,  324,  10. 

Antiptosis,  323,  3,  (3.) 

Antithesis,  322 ;  324,  27. 

Antonomasia,  324,  8. 

-anus,  adjs.  in,  128,  6. 

Aorist  tense,  145,  iv.,  R. 

Apage ,  183,  10. 

Apertum  est ,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  B.  2. 

Aphaeresis,  322. 

Apiscor  and  adipiscor,  w.  gen.,  220. 

Aplustre,  nom.  plur.  of,  83  and  94,  4. 

Apocope,  322. — Apodosis,  261. 

Apollo,  gen.  of,  69,  e.  2. 

Aposiopesis,  324,  33. 

Apostrophe,  324,  35. 

Apparet,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  R.  2. 

Appellative  nouns,  26,  3. 

Appello,  constr.,  230,  n.  1. 

Appetens,  w.  gen..  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Appendix,  322 — 329. 

Apposition,  204 ;  to  two  or  more  nouns, 
204,  r.  5;  to  nouns  connected  by  cum,  204, 
r.  5,  (1.);  to  proper  names  of  different  gen¬ 
ders,  204,  R.  5,  (2.);  genitive  instead  of, 
204,  r.  6;  211,  R.  2,  n.;  abl.  with  gen.,  204, 
r.  7;  of  a  proper  name  with  nomen ,  etc., 
204,  r.  8 ;  of  a  clause,  204,  R.  9 ;  of  parts 
with  a  whole,  204,  r.  10;  212,  r.  2,  n.  5; 
place  of  nouns  in  apposition,  279,  9. 

Apprime,  127,  2 ;  193. 

Ap totes,  94. 

Aptus,  constr..  222,  R.  1  and  4,  (1.) ;  aptus 
qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  9;  w.  gerund,  275,  R.  2 
and  3. 

Apud,  195,  R.  6. 

-ar,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66,  67 ;  genitive 
of,  70,  71;  abl.  of,  82;  increment  of,  287, 
e.  (a.)  1. 

Arbitrer,  in  imperf.  subj.,  260,  R.  2. 

Arbor  (-os),  gender  of,  61. 

Arceo,  w.  abl.,  251,  R.  2. 

Arcesso,  constr.,  217,  R.  1. 

Archaism,  323,  R.,  (1.) 

Archilochian  verse,  304,  2; — penthemi¬ 
meris,  312;— iambic  trimeter,  314,  Y. ;  do. 


INDEX. 


381 


dimeter,  314,  vn. heptameter,  318,  iv. 

Arenoe,  as  gen.  of  place,  221,  R.  3,  (4.) 

Argo,  genitive  of,  69,  E.  3. 

Argos  (- gi ),  92,  4. 

Arguo ,  constr.,  217,  R.  1. 

Aristophanic  verse,  304,  2. 

-arium  and  - avius ,  nouns  and  adjs.  in, 
100,8;  128,3;  121,4. 

Arrangement  of  words,  279 ;  poetical,  279, 
N.  4;  of  clauses,  280. 

Ars ,  declined,  57. 

Arsis  and  thesis,  308. 

Article,  wanting  in  Latin,  41,  N. 

-as,  genitives  in,  43;  nouns  in  of  3ddecl., 
gender  of,  62 ;  genitive  of,  72 ;  gen.  plur.  of, 
83,  ii.,  4;  in  acc.  plur.  of  Greek  nouns  of 

3d  decl.,  85,  e.  2. - as  and  - anus ,  adjs.  in, 

128,  6;  -as  final,  quantity  of,  300. 

As ,  value  of,  327 ;  how  divided,  327 ; — 
gender  of,  62,  e.  1 ;  72,  E.  1 ;  gender  of  parts 
ending  in  ns,  64,  2 ;  assis  non  habere ,  214, 

R.  1. 

Asclepiadic  verse,  304,  2; — tetrameter, 
316,  hi. 

Asking,  verbs  of,  with  two  accs.,  231; 
constr.  in  the  pass.,  234,  I. 

Aspergo,  249,  i.  and  R.  1  and  3. 

Aspirate,  3,  1. 

Assequor ,  ut,  273,  N.  2. 

- asso  for  -avero,  162,  9. 

assuesco  and  assuefacio ,  w.  abl.,  245,  II. ; 
vr.  dat.,  245,  ir R.  1. 

Asyndeton,  323,  1,  (1.) 

-at,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  II.,  R.  5. 

At,  conj.,  198,  9;  at  enim,  atqui ,  198, 
9,  ( b .) 

- atim ,  adverbs  in,  192,  i.,  1. 

Atque,  composition  and  meaning,  198, 1, 
K.  ( b .)  See  ac. 

Attraction,  206,  (6.);  209,  n.  6  and  R.  8; 
210,  r.  6;  272,  n.  3. 

Attribuo ,  w.  participle  in  dus ,  274,  R.  7. 

-atus,  adjs.  in,  128,  7. 

Au,  how  pronounced,  9,  2  and  r.  2. 

Audeo ,  how  conjugated,  142,  r.  2. 

Audio,  conjugated,  160;  used  like  appel¬ 
lor,  210,  n.  2;  constr.,  272,  n.  1;  audes  for 
audies ,  183,  R.  3; — audiens,  constr.,  222, 
B.  1. 

-aus,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62;  genitive 
of,  76,  e.  4. 

Ausculto ,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (6.),  and  (1.), 

(a.) 

Ausim,  183,  r.  1. 

Aut  and  vel,  198,  2,  R.  (a.);  aut  and  ve , 
198,  2,  r.  (rf.);  aut — aut ,  198,  2,  r.  (e.); 
aut  with  the  singular,  209.  r.  12,  (5.) 

Autem,  198,  9;  its  position,  279,  3,  (c.) ; 
ellipsis  of,  278,  r.  11. 

Authority,  in  prosody,  282,  4. 

Auxiliary  verb,  153. 

-av  and  -atu  in  the  2d  and  3d  roots  of 
verbs,  164. 

Avarus,  with  gen.,  213,  R.  1. 

Ave ,  183,  8. 

Avidus ,  with  gen.  213,  r.  1;  w.  gen.  of 
gerund,  275,  (2.);  w.  inf.  poetically,  270, 
r.  1. 

-ax,  nouns  in,  gen.  of,  78,  2,  (1.);  adjs. 
in,  129,  6;  verbals  in  with  gen.,  213,  r.  1. 


B. 

B,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  56,  I. ; 
changed  to  p.,  171,  2. 

Balneum ,  plur.  -ea  or  -eae,  92,  6. 

Barbarism,  325,  1. 

Barbiton,  declined,  54,  1. 

Belle,  bellissime,  192,  iv.  r. 

Belli,  construed  like  names  of  towns,  221, 
R.  3 ;  bello,  253. 

Bene,  derivation,  192,  n.,  1;  constr.  of 
its  compounds,  225,  I.;  bene  est,  w.  dat., 
228,  1;  bene,  w.  acc.,  239,  r.  2;  with  verbs 
of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

-ber,  names  of  months  in,  how  declined, 
71  and  108. 

Bes,  gen.  of,  73,  e.  2. 

Bibi,  pr.,  284,  e.,  (1.) 

Bicorpor,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2;  115,  1,  (a.) 

Biduum ,  triduum ,  etc.,  biennium,  etc., 
121,  2. 

-bilis,  adjs.  in,  129,  4;  how  compared, 
126,  4 ;  with  dative,  222,  R.  1. 

Bimestris,  113,  e.  1. 

Bipes,  genitive  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113, 
e.  2;  115,  1,  {a.) 

Bonus ,  declined,  105,  2;  compared,  125, 
5;  boni  consulo,  214,  n.  1. 

Bos,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  84,  e.  1;  286, 
5;  gender  of,  30;  genitive  of,  75,  e.  1;  gen. 
plur.,  83,  n.,  r.  1. 

-br,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  II.,  R.  3. 

Brachycatalectic  verse,  304,  3,  (2.) 

Brazen  age  of  Roman  literature,  329,  4. 

-brum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Bucolic  caesura,  310,  6,  R.  4. 

-bulum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

-bundus,  adjs.  in,  129, 1;  comparison  of, 
126,  5 ;  with  acc.,  233,  n. 

C. 

C,  sound  of,  10;  before  s  in  roots  of 
nouns,  56,  i.,  r.  2 ;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171, 1 ; 
gender  of  nouns  in,  66;  genitive  of,  70; 
c  final,  quantity  of,  299,  4 ;  C.  for  Caius, 

1.  q.  Gaius,  328. 

Ccelebs,  112,  2 ;  in  abl.  sing.,  113,  e.  2; 
115,  1,  (a.) 

Caesura,  309 ;  kinds  of,  309 ;  in  hexameter 
verse,  310,  3;  caesural  pause,  309,  3;  in 
hexameter  verse,  4 — 6;  in  pentameter  verse, 
311,  2 ;  in  iambic  verse,  314,  i.  and  x. ;  in 
trochaic  verse,  315,  i ;  in  choriambic  verse, 
316,  in. 

Calco,  change  of  a  to  u  in  its  compds., 
189,  n.  3. 

Calendar,  Roman,  326,  6. 

Calends,  326. 

Callidus ,  270,  R.  1 ;  213,  R.  1. 

Canalis,  abl.  of,  82,  5,  (c.) 

Cano  receptui,  227,  R.  2. 

Capax ,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1.  (1.),  and 
R.  5,  (1.) 

Capio,  conjugated,  159;  adjs.  compound¬ 
ed  of,  112,  2. 

Capital  letters,  how  used  by  the  Romans, 

2,  2 ;  as  numerals,  118,  7. 

Caput  declined,  57;  capitis  and  capite, 
damnare ,  accusare,  etc.,  217,  R.  3. 


382 


INDEX. 


Carbasus ,  plur.  -i  and  -a,  92,  3. 

Cardinal  numbers,  117  and  118. 

Careo ,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Carmen ,  declined,  57. 

Caro ,  gender  of,  59,  3;  gen.  of,  69,  e.  2; 
gen.  plur.,  83,  n .,  5. 

Carthagini ,  in  abl.  of  the  place  where,  82, 
E.  5,  (c.) 

Case-endings,  table  of,  39. 

Cases  of  nouns,  36  and  37. 

Casus  recti  and  obliqui ,  37,  R. 

Causa ,  gratia ,  etc.  with  wiea,  etc.,  247, 
R.  2 ;  their  place  with  genitive,  279,  R. 

Causal  conjunctions,  198,  7. 

Cause,  abl.  of,  247;  after  active  verbs, 
247,  r.  2;  acc.  of  with  prepositions,  247, 

R.  1. 

Causo ,  change  of  au  in  its  compounds, 
189,  n.  3. 

Cave  or  cave  ne ,  w.  subj.,  267,  R.  3;  262, 
N.  3. 

- ce  and  - cine ,  enclitic,  134,  R.  4. 

Cetfo,  constr.,  223,  r.  2,  (1),  (rf.) 

Cedo ,  imperative,  183,  11. 

CWer,  how  declined,  108;  gen.  plur.,  114, 
E.  2. 

CWo,  with  two  accs.,  231;  w.  de ,  231,  R.  3. 

Censeo ,  273,  n.  4. 

Centena  millia,  ellipsis  of,  118,  5. 

-ceps,  nouns  in,  gen.  of,  77,  R ;  adjs.  in, 
gender  of,  112, 2;  abl.  of,  ll3,  e.  2,  and  e.  3. 

Ceres ,  genitive,  of,  73,  e.  2. 

Certe  and  certo ,  192,  n.  1. 

Certus ,  213,  r.  1;  275,  hi.,  (2.);  270,  R.l. 

Cetera  and  reliqua  for  ceteris ,  234,  n.,  R.3. 

Ceterum ,  198,  8,  R.,  (6.) 

Clew,  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

CA,  sound  of,  10,  1 ;  when  silent,  12,  R. ; 
in  syllabication,  18,  2. 

Character  or  quality,  gen.  of,  211,  R.  6. 

Chaos ,  61,  e.  3. 

Chelys ,  declined,  86. 

Choliambus,  314,  n. 

Choriambic  metre,  316;  303; — pentame¬ 
ter,  316,  i. ; — tetrameter,  316,  n. ; — trime¬ 
ter,  316,  rv. ; — trimeter  catalectic,  316,  V. ; — 
dimeter,  316,  vr. 

Cicur ,  gen.  plur.  of,  114,  e.  2. 

Circum ,  in  composition,  196,  4. 

Circumdo  and  circumfundo ,  249,  R.  3. 

Circumflex  accent,  15,  2,  and  14;  how 
used,  14,  3. 

Cis  and  citra,  constr.,  235,  R.  1. 

Citerior ,  compared,  126,  1. 

Citum ,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

Clam ,  constr.,  235,  (5.) 

Clanculum ,  192,  iv.,  r.  ;  235,  (5.);  126,1. 

Claudo ,  its  compounds,  189,  n.  3. 

Clause ,  201,  13;  as  the  subject  of  a  pro¬ 
position,  202,  nr.,  r.  2;  as  an  addition  to 
the  predicate,  203,  n.,  3;  its  gender,  34,  4; 
as  the  object  of  a  verb,  229,  r.  5 ;  in  abl. 
absolute,  256,  R.  8 ;  connection  of  clauses, 
198,  i.  and  n. ;  278,  r.  1;  280,  ni. ;  arrange¬ 
ment  of,  280 ;  similar  clauses,  278,  N.  1. 

Climax ,  324,  21. 

Clothing,  verbs  of,  249,  I. 

Coelestis ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  1;  gen.  plur.  of, 
114,  e.  3. 

Caelum ,  plur.  cceli,  92,  4. 


Coeno ,  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  n.  1,  (6.) 

Ccepi  and  coeptus  sum ,  183,  2. 

Cognate  object,  232 ;— subject,  234,  in. 

Cognitus ,  pr.,  285,  2,  e.  1. 

Cognomen  follows  the  gentile  name,  279, 
9,  (6.)  * 

Cognominis ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  1. 

Cogo ,  273,  n.  4. 

-cola,  compounds  in,  gen.  plur.  of,  43,  2. 

Collective  nouns,  26,  4 ;  number  of  their 
verbs,  209,  r.  11. 

Com  for  cum  in  composition,  196,  5: 
197,  5. 

Comitiis ,  as  abl.  of  time,  253,  n.  1. 

Common,  nouns,  26,  3; — gender,  30; — 
syllables,  282,  2;  283,  iv.,  e.  2. 

Commoneo  and  commonefacio ,  constr.. 
218;  273,  n.  4. 

Communis ,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.)  and  R. 
6,  (a.) 

Commuto ,  constr.,  252,  r.  5. 

Compar.,  gen.  plur.  of,  114,  e.  2. 

Comparo ,  constr.,  224,  n.  1,  3. 

Comparative  conjunctions,  198,  3. 

Comparative  degree,  122,  5 ;  uses  of,  122, 
R.  1,  2,  3;  formation  of,  124;  by  magis , 
127,  1. — comparatives  declined,  110;  abl. 
sing,  of,  113,  2;  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  2,;  denotes 
one  of  two,  212,  r.  2.,  n.  1;  w.  abl.,  256; 
used  pleonastically,  256.  r.  12,  13. 

Comparison,  25;  of  adjs.,  122 — 127;  de¬ 
grees  of,  122,  3;  terminal,  124; — irregular, 
125 ;  defective,  126 ;  by  magis  and  maxime , 
127 ; — of  adverbs,  194. 

Complex  subject,  202,  1,  3,  6;  complex 
predicate,  203,  1,3,  5;  complex  sentence, 
201,  11. 

Complures ,  how  declined,  110. 

Compono ,  constr.,  224,  n.  1,  3,  and  r.  4. 

Compos  and  impos ,  gen.  of,  112,  2 ;  abl. 
of,  113,  e.  2;  115,  1,  (a.);  pr.  300,  e.  3. 

Composition  of  nouns,  103; — of  adjs., 
131; — of  verbs,  183; — of  adverbs,  193. 

Compound  verbs,  how  conjugated,  163, 
4; — subject,  202,  4; — predicate,  203,  4; — 
sentence,  201,  12 ; — metres,  318 ; — words,  in 
syllabication,  23; — nouns,  declension  of, 
91 ;  how  formed,  103 ;  quantity  of  compd. 
words,  285. 

Con ,  adjs.  compd.  with,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1; 
verbs  compd.  with,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  cum, 
224,  r.  4. 

Concedo ,  constr.,  273,  n.  5;  274,  R.  7. 

Concessive  conjunctions,  198,  4. 

Concors ,  and  discors ,  gen.  of,  112,  2;  abl. 
of,  113,  e.  2. 

Concrete,  nouns,  26,  r.  2. ; — adjs.,  101, 
R. ;  used  for  abstracts,  in  expressions  of 
time,  253,  r.  6. 

Conditio ,  in  abl.,  249,  n. 

Conditional  conjunctions,  198,  5. 

Conduco ,  with  part,  in  dus,  274,  R.  7. 

Condemning,  verbs  of,  w.  gen.,  217. 

Confero ,  w.  dat,  224,  N.  1,  3. 

Confido ,  w.  abl.,  245,  n. ;  w.  dat.,  245,  R.  1. 

Confit ,  183,  12;  180,  n. 

Confinis ,  222,  R.  1. 

Congruo ,  224,  N.  1,  3,  and  r.  4. 

Conjugation,  25;  149;  first,  155,  156; 
second,  157;  third,  158,  159;  fourth,  160; 


INDEX. 


383 


of  deponent  verbs,  161 ;  periphrastic,  162 ; 
general  rules  of,  163;  of  irregular  verbs, 
178 — 182 ;  of  defective  verbs,  183 ;  of  imper¬ 
sonal  verbs,  184;  regular  and  irregular 
verbs  in  the  four  conjugations,  164 — 177. — 
conjugation»,  how  characterized,  149;  re¬ 
marks  on,  162. 

Conjunctions,  198 ;  classes  of.  198 ;  coor¬ 
dinate,  198,  i. ;  subordinate,  198,  n. ;  encli¬ 
tics,  198,  n.  1;  copulative  and  disjunctive, 
their  use,  278 ;  use  of  coordinate  and  sub¬ 
ordinate  conjs.,  198,  R.  1;  repeated,  278, 
R.  7;  when  omitted  between  adjs.,  205,  R. 
16 ; — between  words  opposed,  278,  R.  6. 

Conjungo ,  224,  N.  1,  3,  and  R.  4. 

Conjunctus ,  222,  r.  6. 

Conjux ,  gender  of,  30;  gen.  of,  78,  2,  (5.) 

Connecting  vowel,  150,  6;  omitted  in  2d 
root,  163,  2;  in  verbal  nouns,  102,  5,(6.); 
in  verbal  adjs.,  129,  1  and  4,  (6.);  in  compd. 
nouns  and  adjs.,  103,  R.  1. ;  131,  n. 

Connection  of  tenses,  258; — of  words  by 
conjunctions,  278; — of  clauses  by  do.,  278, 
r.  3. 

Connectives,  201,  8,  9;  place  of,  279,  3. 

Conor ,  271,  n.  1. 

Conscius ,  213,  R.  1;  275,  in.,  (2.) 

Consentaneus ,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  w.  abl., 
222,  r.  6;  consentaneum  erat ,  the  indic,  in¬ 
stead  of  the  subj.,  259,  r.  3,  (a.);  with  inf. 
as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Consentio ,  w.  dat.,  224,  N.  1,  3. 

Consequor ,  ut,  273,  N.  2. 

Consido ,  241,  r.  5. 

Consonants,  3, 1;  division  of,  ib. ;  double, 
3, 1,  2;  sounds  of,  10 — 12. 

Consors ,  213,  r.  1. 

Constat ,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Constituo ,  272,  n.  1. 

Consto ,  w.  abl.,  245,  it.,  5. 

Consuetudo  es£yconstr.,  262,  r.  3,  N.  2. 

Consuesco ,  245,  n.,  3. 

Contendo ,  273,  n.  1. 

Contentus ,  w.  abl.,  244;  w.  perf.  inf.,  268, 
R.  2. 

Conterminus ,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (a.) 

Continens ,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  4,  (a.) 

Continental  pronunciation  of  Latin,  6. 

Contingit ,  conjugation,  184;  w.  ut,  262, 
r.  3  ;  w.  dat.  and  inf.,  262,  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Continuo ,  193,  n.,  1. 

Contra ,  how  used,  195,  R.  7. 

Contracted  syllables,  quantity  of,  283,  in. 

Contractions  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  162,  7. 

Convenio ,  233,  n. 

Convenit ,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259, 
r.  3;  w.  inf.,  269,  r.  2. 

Convinco ,  217,  R.  1. 

Copia  est ,  w.  inf.,  270,  R.  1,  (c.) 

Copula,  140,  4. 

Copulative  conjs.,  198,1;  repeated,  198, 
R.  (e.) 

Cor,  gender  of,  61;  genitive  of,  71,  e.  2; 
compds.  of,  112,  2. 

Correlative  adjs,,  139,  (2.),  (3.);  104, 14 ; — 
adverbs,  191,  r.  1. 

Cornu ,  declined,  87. 

Crasis,  306,  (5.)  and  322. 

Crater ,  genitive  of,  71. 

Credo ,  272,  and  a.  6; — crederes ,  in  the 


sense  of  a  pluperfect,  260,  n.,  R.  2; — cre¬ 
dendum  est,  271,  R.  2. 

Creo,  nascor,  etc.,  246,  R.  1. 

Crime,  in  genitive  after  verbs,  217. 
Crimine ,  without  a  preposition,  217,  R. 
2,  (6.) 

Crude  form  or  root,  40,  10. 

- crum ,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Ct,  initial,  12,  3. 

Cui  and  huic,  how  pronounced,  9,5;  pr. 
306,  r.  2. 

Cujas ,  how  declined,  139,  4,  (6.) 

Cujus,  how  declined,  137,  5 ;  cujusmodi , 
etc.,  134,  r.  5. 

-culum,  verbals  in,  102,  5 ;  contracted  to 
-clum,  102,  5,  (6.) 

- cuius ,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3,  and 
b.,  1,2;'  128,  5. 

Cum,  prep.,  affixed  to  abl.,  241,  r.  1; 
133,  r.  4;  136,  r.  1;  how  used,  195,  r.  11; 
w.  abl.  of  manner,  247,  2 ;  in  composition, 
196,  5. 

Cum  or  quum,  mood  of  the  verb  following 
it,  263,  5. 

Cum,  ‘while,’  263,  5,  R.  4. 

-cumque%  used  to  form  general  indefinites, 
191,  R.  1,  (6.);  139,  5,  R.;  composition  and 
meaning,  139,  5,  n.  1;  sometimes  separated 
from  qui,  etc.,  323,  4,  (5.) 

Cumprimis,  its  meaning,  193,  n.,  2. 
Cuncti  and  omnes,  w.  gen.  plur.  212, 
r.2,  n.  6. 

-cundus,  adjs.  in,  129, 1. 

Cupido,  gender  of,  59,  r.  2. 

Cupidus,  constr.,  213,  r.  1;  275,  (2.); 
270,  r.  1. 

Cupio ,  271,  R.  4;  cupiens,  213,  r.  1,  (2.) 
Curo,  273,  n.  1;  274,  R.  7;  curaut ,  267, 
r.  3. 

Curritur,  conjugated,  184,  2,  (6.) 

Custos ,  gender  of,  30;  61,  3;  genitive,  75, 

E.  1. 


D. 

D  final  in  prosody,  299,  2;  before  s  in 
roots  of  nouns,  56,  r.  1 ;  in  roots  of  verbs, 
171,  3,  and  e.  5. 

Da,  pr.,  284,  R.  2,  (6.) 

Dactylic  metre,  310  and  303; — trimeter, 
312,  vi.; — dimeter,  312,  vii.; — hexameter, 
310,  I.  Dactylico-iambic  meter,  318,  I. ;  dac- 
tylico-trochaic  heptameter,  318,  iv. ; — tetra¬ 
meter,  318,  v. 

Dama,  gender  of,  42,  2. 

Damni  infecti  satisdo,  etc.,  217,  R.  3. 

Dative,  37;  sing,  of  3d  decl.,  79;  plur. 
always  like  abl.,  40,  6;  exceptions  in  do. 
1st  decl.,  43;  of  3d  decl.,  84;  of  4th  decl., 
89,  5;  used  for  predicate  nom.?  210,  n.  3; 
for  gen.,  211,  r.  5;  commodi  et  incommodi , 
222,  land  2;  dative  of  the  end,  227;  dat. 
of  the  object,  after  adjs.,  222 ;  different  con¬ 
structions  instead  of,  222,  r.  4  and  6 ;  after 
idem,  222,  r.  7 ;  after  verbs,  223 — 227 ;  after 
verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  etc.,  224; 
with  ab ,  ex,  de,  .circum  and  contra,  224,  r.  1 
and  2;  with  dis,  224,  r.  3;  with  satis ,  bene 
and  male ,  225,  i. ;  dat.  of  the  agent,  225,  n. 


384 


INDEX. 


and  in.;  of  the  possessor  after  est ,  226 
after  particles,  228;  dat.  with  the  acc.,  223, 
(1.);  two  datives  after  sum,  etc.,  227 ;  want¬ 
ing,  225,  ill.,  r.  ;  dativus  ethicus ,  228,  n, 

Datum ,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

De,  195,  r.  12;  with  abl.  instead  of  acc., 
229,  r.  5,  (6.);  231,  r.  3. 

Dm,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  43. 

Debebat ,  indic,  instead  of  subj.,  269,  R.  3. 

Decedo ,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Decerno ,  273,  n.  1  and  4. 

Decet ,  conjugated,  184 ;  its  construction, 
229,  r.  7;  223,  r.  2 ,(&.);  indie,  for  subj., 
259,  r.  3. 

Declarative  sentences,  200,  3. 

Declaro ,  230,  is*.  1. 

Declension,  38 ;  parts  of  speech  declined, 
25,  3;  of  nouns,  38 — 40;  rules  of,  40;  first, 
41 — 45;  exceptions  in  do.,  43;  paradigms 
of,  41; — second,  46 — 54;  paradigms  of,  46; 
exceptions  in  do.,  52;  third,  55— 86;  para¬ 
digms  of,  57;  exceptions  in  do.,  68 — 85; 
fourth,  87 — 89;  paradigms  of,  87;  excep¬ 
tions  in  do.,  89;  formed  by  contraction,  89; 
fifth,  90;  paradigms,  90;  exceptions  in,  90; 
—of  adjs.,  1st  and  2d,  105—107 ;  third,  108— 
111 ;— declensions,  how  distinguished,  38; 
tabular  view  of,  39. 

Dedi ,  pr.,  284,  2,  e.  1. 

Deest  mihi ,  226,  R.  2;  pr.,  306,  1,  R.  1,  (1.) 

Defective  nouns,  94—96; — adjs.,  115; — 
verbs,  183. 

Defendo ,  251,  R.  2. 

Defero ,  w.  gen.  of  the  crime,  217,  R.  1. 

Deficior ,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  k.  1. 

Deft ,  183,  13,  and  180,  N. ;  226,  R.  2. 

Deflecto ,  229,  r.  4. 

Defungor ,  245,  i. 

Degree,  acc.  of,  231,  R.  5;  232,  (3.) 

Degrees  of  comparison,  122  and  123 ;  in¬ 
ferior  degrees,  123,  1 ;  equal  degrees,  123,  3; 
a  small  degree,  123,  2 ;  superior  degrees  va¬ 
riously  expressed,  127,  2,  3,  4. 

Dejero ,  189,  n.  3;  pr.,  285,  2,  e.  1. 

Dein,  deinceps ,  deinde ,  pr.,  306,  1,  R. 

Delectat ,  conjugated,  184;  its' construc¬ 
tion,  229,  r.  7 ;  223,  r.  2. 

Delector ,  w.  quod ,  273,  n.  6. 

Deligo ,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  n.  1. 

-dem,  enclitic,  134,  r.  6. 

Demonstrative  adjs.,  104,  15;  139,  5,  R.; 
— pronouns,  134 ;  constr.  of,  207 ;  in  appo¬ 
sition  to  a  clause,  207,  R.  22;  206,  (3.);  used 
when  the  reference  is  not  to  the  subject, 
208,  (6.);  place  of,  279,  7;  ellipsis  of  de¬ 
monstratives  before  their  relatives,  206,  (3.), 
(a.);  constr.  of  dem.  adjs.,  206,  (16.);  dem. 
ad  vs.  for  dem.  pronouns,  206,  (20.);  dem. 
pronouns  is,  etc.,  used  for  the  oblique  cases 
him,  her,  etc.,  207,  R.  20;  redundant,  207, 
R.  21;  dem.  prons.  and  advs.  announcing  a 
proposition,  207,  R.  22. 

Demoveo ,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Denarius ,  value  of,  327,  R.  3;  divisions 
of.  ib. 

Denique,  its  use,  277,  I.,  r.  13. 

Denominatives,  adjs.,  128; — verbs,  187,  I. 

Dens,  gender  of,  64, 1 ;  compds.  of,  64,  1. 

Depello ,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 


Dependence,  defined,  203,  hi.,  8:  of 
tenses,  258. 

Dependent  or  subordinate  propositions* 

201,6.  * 

Deponent  verbs,  142,  r.  4;  conjugated, 
161;  participles  of,  162,  17;  lists  of  in  lsfc 
conj.,  166;  2d  conj.,  170;  3d  conj.,  174; 
4th  conj.,  177 ;  increment  of,  289,  3. 

Deposco,  274,  R.  7. 

Depriving,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Derivation  of  nouns,  100; — of  adjs.,  128; 
— of  verbs,  187 ;— of  advs.,  192. 

Derivative  words,  quantity  of,  284. 

Deses,  gen.  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113,  E.  2; 
defective,  115,  2 ;  compared,  126,  4. 

Desiderative  verbs,  187,  n.,  3;  176,  N.; 
quantity  of  the  u  in,  284,  e.  3. 

Designo,  with  two  accs.,  230,  N.  1. 

Despero,  constr.,  224,  r.  1. 

Desuper  and  insuper,  235.  R.  8. 

Deterior,  compared,  126, 1. 

Deterreo ,  quin,  ne,  or  quominus ,  262, 
R.  11;  w.  inf.  ib.  n. 

Deturbo,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Dexter,  how  declined,  106;  how  com¬ 
pared,  125,  4. 

Deus,  declined,  53 ;  deum  for  deorum,  53. 

Di  or  dii,  53 ;  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7. 

~di  or  -dis,  see  -dis. 

Diaeresis,  306,  2 ;  mark  of,  5,  2. 

Dialysis,  306,  r. 

Diana,  pr.  282,  i.,  e.  5. 

Diastole,  307,  2. 

Dico,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  n.  1;  ellipsis  of, 
229,  r.  3,  2;  209,  r.  4;  270,  r.  2,  (6.);  w.  inf. 
and  acc.,  272,  n.  1;  w.  ut,  273,  2,  (c. ) ; 
dicunt,  ‘  they  say,’  209,  r.  2,  (2.);  dicor ,  w. 
predicate  nominative,  210,  r.  3,  (3.),  (a.) 
and  n.  1,  cf.  271,  R.  2;  272,  r.  6;  die,  im¬ 
perative,  162,  4. 

Dicolon,  319,  2. 

Dicto  audiens,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  dicto, 
w.  comparative,  256,  r.  9. 

-dicus,  words  ending  in,  pr.,  284,  2,  e.  1. 

Dido,  declined,  86;  genitive  of,  69,  e.  3. 

Dies,  declined,  90;  its  gender,  90,  e.  1; 
compds.  of  with  numerals,  121,  3;  quantity 
of,  285,  R.  4,  e.  3,  (6.) 

Difference,  degree  of,  how  expressed,  256, 
R.  10. 

Differo ,  constr.,  251,  R.  3,  N. ;  229,  R.  4, 1. 

Differing,  verbs  of,  251,  r.  3. 

Difficile  est,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259, 
R.  4,  (2.);  with  an  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2; 
with  supine  in  u,  276,  m.,  r.  1;  w.  ad  and 
a  gerund,  276,  m.,  R.  4. 

Digne,  w.  abl.,  244,  R.  1. 

Dignor,  w.  abl.,  244,  r.  1;  w.  acc.  of  the 
person,  ib. ;  w.  inf.,  ib. ;  w.  two  accs.,  ib. 

Dignus,  w.  abl.  of  the  thing,  244 ;  w.  gen. 
244,  r.  2,  (a.);  w.  acc.  of  neut.  pron.  or 
adj.,  244,  r.  2,  (a.);  w.  inf.  or  a  subj. 
clause,  244,  R.  2,  (b.);  with  relative  and 
subj.,  264,  9 ;  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  in.,  R.  1. 

Dimeter,  304,  2. 

Diminutive  nouns,  100,  3 ; — adjs.,  104, 11 ; 
128,5; — verbs,  187,  ii.,  4; — adverbs,  192,  r. 

Diphthongs,  4;  sounds  of,  9;  quantity 
of,  13,  4;  283,  ii. 

Diptotes,  94. 


INDEX. 


385 


Dir  for  dis,  196,  (&.),  2. 

Dis  or  di,  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (&.),  2; 
construction  of  some  verbs  compounded 
with?  251,  r.  3,  n.  ;  pr.,  285,  2,  r.  2. 

-dis,  genitives  in,  77,  ®.  1;  dis,  adj.,  gen. 
plur.  of,  114,  e.  3. 

Discerno ,  251,  R.  3,  N. ;  in  imperf.  subj. 
for  pluperf.,  260,  it.,  r.  2. 

Discolor ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2. 

Discordo  and  discrepo ,  251,  R.  3,  and  n. 

Disertus ,  pr.,  284,  e.  5,  2,  n.  1. 

Disjunctive  conjs.,  198,  2. 

Dissideo ,  constr.,  251,  R.  3,  and  if. 

Dissimilis ,  222,  r.  1,  and  R.  2. 

Distich,  304. 

Distinguo  and  disto,  251,  R.  3,  and  N. 

Distributive  numbers,  119, 120 ;  gen.  plur. 
of,  105,  R.  4;  used  for  cardinal  numbers, 
120.  4; — for  multiplicatives,  120,  4,  (b.) 

Distrophon,  319,  3. 

Diu,  compared,  104,  6. 

Dives,  gen.  sing.,  112, 1;  gen. plur.,  114, 
E.  2;  115,  1,  (a.) 

Division  of'words  into  syllables,  17 — 23. 

Do,  149,  e.  ;  w.  perf.  participles,  274, 
R.  4;  w.  participles  in  dus ,  274,  R.  7 ;  incre¬ 
ment  of,  290,  e.  ;  284,  e.  4. 

-do,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,2;  genitive 
of,  69,  e.  1. 

Doceo,  231,  r.  1 ;  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  if.  1. 

Doleo ,  w.  quod ,  etc.,  273,  N.  7. 

Dominus ,  declined,  46. 

Domus,  declined,  89;  different  use  of 
domus  and  domi,  89,  (a.);  constr.  of  gen., 
221,  r.  3;  of  acc.,  237,  r.  4;  of  abl.,  255, 
r.  1;  254,  r.  2. 

Donee ,  w.  subj.,  263,  4;  pr.,  299,  4,  e. 

Dono ,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  r.  1;  w.  two  da¬ 
tives,  227,  R.  1. 

Dos,  gen.  of,  61,  3;  doti  dicare ,  227,  R.  2. 

Double  consonants,  3,  1. 

Doubtful  gender,  30. 

Dubito  and  non  dubito ,  262,  N.  7  and  8; 
dubito  an,  198,  11,  (e.);  dubito  sit  ne ,  etc., 
262,  n.  8. 

Duco ,  constr.,  214;  227,  R.  1;  230,  n.  1; 
innumero ,  or  in  loco ,  230,  n.  4;  duc,  im¬ 
perat.,  162,  4. 

Dudum  and  jamdudum ,  191,  R.  6. 

Duim,  duis,  etc.,  162,  1. 

Dum ,  w.  subj.,  263,  4;  durhne  and  dum¬ 
modo  ne,  263,  2,  n.;  dum.  ‘until,’  263,  4, 
(1.); — ‘while,’  263.  4,  (2.) — compounded 
with  a  negative,  277,  R.  16. 

Duntaxat,  193,  it.,  3. 

Duo ,  declined,  118;  duum  for  duorum, 
118,  r.  1. 

-dus,  participle  in,  how  declined,  103, 
r.  2 ;  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  161 ;  with 
sum,  162,  15;  neuter  in  -dum  with  est,  274, 
r.  11;  w.  dat.  of  person,  162,  15,  R.  5;  225, 
hi.;  of  dep.  verbs,  162,  17,  (&.);'  w.  acc., 
234,  r.  2 ;  its  signification,  274,  2,  R.  7  and 
8;  used  for  a  gerund,  275,  II. 

E. 

E ,  sound  of,  7  and  8 ;  2  changed  to  u  or  i, 
66,  r.  4  and  5 ;  nom.  in  8  in  3d  decl.,  56,  i, 
R.  1,  7 ;  gender  of  nouns  in  e  of  3d  decl., 

33 


66;  genitive  of,  68;  abl.  of,  82;  old  dat.  in, 
79;  acc.  plur.  in,  54,  5;  nom.  plur.  in,  83, 
I.,  1;  voc.  in,  81,  R. ;  in  gen.  and  dat.  sing. 
5th  decl.,  90,  e.  2;  cf  40,  11;  advs.  in,  192, 
ii.;  syncope  of  in  imperf.  of  4th  conj.,  162, 
2;  increment  in  e  of  3d  decl.,  287,  3;  plur., 
288 ;  of  verbs,  290 ;  e  ending  the  first  part 
of  a  compound  word,  285,  R.  4;  e  final, 
quantity  of,  295. — e  or  ex,  prep.,  see  ex. 

- ea ,  Greek  acc.  sing,  ending  in,  54,  5,  and 
80,  m. 

Eapse,  etc.,  135,  R.  3. 

Ecce,  compounded  with  demonstrative 
pronouns,  134,  r.  2;  w.  nom.,  209,  r.  13; 
w.  acc.,  238,  2. 

Eccum,  eccillum ,  eccistam ,  etc.,  134,  r.  2: 
238,  2. 

-ecis,  gen.  in,  78,  (2.) 

Ecquis  and  ecqui,  how  declined,  137,  3, 
and  r.  3;  ecquoe,  and  ecqua ,  137,  3,  r.  4; 
ecquis  est  qui,  264,  7,  N.  2;  ecquid ,  interrog. 
particle?  198,  11,  and  r.  a  and  b. 

Ecquisnam ,  137,  4. 

Ectasis,  307,  2,  (3.) 

Ecthlipsis,  305,  2. 

Edepol,  199,  r.  3. 

Edico ,  273,  n.  4. 

Edim ,  edis,  etc.,  162, 1. 

-edis,  gen.  in,  73,  e.  land  112, 1. 

Editus,  w.  abl.,  246. 

Edo,  ‘  to  eat,’  conjugated,  181;  compds. 
of,  181,  it. 

-edo,  abstracts  in,  101, 1. 

Edoceo ,  w.  two  accs.,  231,  r.  1. 

Efficio,  273,  n.  2; — efficiens,  w.  gen.,  213, 
R.  1,  (2.); — efficitur,  w.  ut,  or  the  acc.  with 
the  inf.,  262,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

Effugio ,  w.  acc.,  233,  R.  1. 

Egeo  and  indigeo ,  250,  2,  r.  1;  220,  3. 
-egis,  genitives  in,  78,  2. 

Ego,  declined,  133. 

Ekeu,  pr.,  283,  i.,  e.  5. 

Ei,  how  pronounced,  9, 1,  and  r.  1 ;  gen¬ 
itive  in,  73,  r.  ;  pr.,  283,  i.,  e.  6,  (1.) 

- eia ,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

-eis,  fern,  patronymics  in,  100,  1,  (&.)-- 
acc.  plur.  in,  85,  e.  1,  and  114,  2. 

-eius,  pr.,  283,  i.,  e.  6,  (3.) 

Ejus,  use  of,  208,  (6.) 

Ejusmodi  and  ejusdemmodi,  139,  5,  If.  2, 
-ela,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

Elegiac  verse,  311,  R.  2. 

Ellipsis,  323;  of  pronoun  in  case  of  appo¬ 
sition,  204,  r.  4;  of  the  noun  of  an  adj., 
205,  r.  7 ;  252,  r.  3 ;  of  the  antecedent,  206, 
(3.)  and  (4.);  of  meus ,  etc.,  207,  r.  38;  of 
nom.,  209,  r.  2  and  3;  of  verb,  209,  r.  4; 
229,  r.  3 ;  of  a  noun  limited  by  a  genitive, 

211,  r.  8;  of  gen.,  211,  r.  9;  of  a  partitive, 

212,  r.  1,  n.  3;  of  subject  acc.,  239  ;  269, 
R.  1;  of  acc.  after  transitive  verb,  229,  r.  4; 
of  prep.,  232,  (2.);  235,  r.  5;  241,  r.  4;  248, 
R.  3  ;  of  voc.,  240;  of  quam,  256;  of  partici¬ 
ple,  in  abl.  absol.,  257,  R.  7;  of  ut  w.  subj., 
262,  r.  4 ;  of  ne  after  cave,  262,  r.  6 ;  of  non 
after  non  modo,  etc.,  277,  R.  6;  of  conjunc¬ 
tions,  278,  r.  6;  of  j  in  composition,  307; 
of  centena  millia,  327,  R.  6. 

-ellus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3, 


386 


INDEX. 


- em  and  -en,  accs.  in,  45, 1 ;  80,  iy.  ;  -em 
in  acc.  sing.  3ddecl.,  79,  80. 

Emo,  252,  r.  1. 

Emphatic  word,  its  place  in  a  sentence, 
279,  2  and  16. 

En ,  interrogative  particle,  198,  11,  and  R. 
(a.);  137,  R.  3;  en,  interjection,  199;  w. 
nom.,  209,  r.  13;  w.  acc.  238,  2;  -en,  acc. 
in,  45,  1;  80,  iv. 

Enallage,  323,  3. 

Enclitics,  in  accentuation,  15,  3; — con¬ 
junctions,  198,  is.  1. 

Endeavoring,  verbs  of,  273,  1,  (a.) 

-endus  and  - undus ,  163,  20. 

English  pronunciation  of  Latin,  6. 

Enim  and  nam,  198,  7,  and  R. ;  279,  3, 
(a.)  and  (c.) 

Enimvero ,  198,  9,  R.  (a.) 

Ennehemimeris,  304,  6. 

Ens ,  participle,  154,  R.  1. 

- ensis ,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (a.) 

- entissimus ,  superlatives  in,  126,  3 
-enus,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (c.) 

Eo,  conjugated,  182;  compds.  of,  182, 
r.  3;  w.  supine  in  urn,  276,  n.,  r.  2;  w.  two 
datives,  227,  r.  1. 

-eo,  verbs  in  of  1st  conj.,  165,  R.  3. 

Eo,  pron.  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  16. 
As  adverb  of  place,  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4.,  n.2, 
(b.) — of  degree,  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4.  n.  3-  As 
an  illative  conj.,  198,  6. 

Eodem ,  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4.  N.  3. 

-eos,  Greek  gen.  in,  <6,  e.  7  ;  54  5;  pr., 
283,  i.,  e.  6,  (2.) 

Epanadiplosis,  324,  18. 

Epanados,  324,  19. 

Epanalepsis,  324,  16. 

Epanaphora,  324,  13. 

Epanastrophe,  324,  17. 

Epanorthosis,  324,  32. 

Epenthesis,  322,  3. 

Epicene  nouns,  33. 

Epistrophe,  324,  14. 

Epizeuxis,  324,  20. 

Epulor ,  with  abl.,  245,  n.,  4. 

Epulum ,  92,  6. 

Equality,  how  denoted,  123,  3. 

Eques ,  gender  of,  31,  2 ;  used  collectively, 
209.  r.  11,  (1.),  (6.) 

Equidem ,  its  composition  and  use,  191, 
R.  4. 

-er,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  46 — syncopated, 
48,  1;  of  3d  decl.,  gender  of,  58  and  60; 
genitive  of,  70  and  71;  syncopated,  71; — 
adjectives  in,  superlative  of,  125;  annexed 
to  pres,  infin.  pass.,  162,  6. 

Erga ,  how  used,  195,  R.  7. 

-ere,  in  3d  pers.  plur.  of  perL  indie,  ac¬ 
tive,  162,  8. 

-em,  genitives  in,  76;  73,  e.  2;  74,  e.  1; 
and  112,  1  and  2. 

Ergo ,  w.  gen.,  147,  R.  2,  (a.) 

Erotesis,  324,  31. 

- errimus ,  superlatives  in,  125, 1. 

-e.s,  proper  names  in,  44,  1 ;  -es  and  -e  in 
Greek  nouns  changed  to  a,  45,  3;  nouns  in 
of  3d  decl.  increasing  in  genitive,  gender  of, 
68:  61;  genitive  of,  73;  genitive  of  adjs.  in, 
112 ;  not  increasing,  gender  of,  62 ;  genitive 
of,  73;  in  nom.,  acc.,  and  voc.  plur.  of 


masc.  and  fem.  nouns  of  3d  decl.,  83,  i. ;  86 ; 
final,  sound  of,  8,  k.  2;  quantity  of,  300. 

Escit,  154,  r.  4. 

Esse  and  fuisse ,  ellipsis  of,  270,  r.  3. 

-«550,  -isso  or  -50,  intensives  in,  187,  n.,  6. 

Est ,  w.  dat.  of  a  possessor,  226;  est,  qui , 
with  subj.,  264,  6;  so  est ,  unde,  ubi,  cur.  or 
ut ,  264,  6,  R.  3. 

Et  and  que,  198,  1,  R.  (a.);  et  ipse ,  207, 
r.  27,  (6.);  ellipsis  of  et.  298,  r.  6,  (6.);  et  is, 
et  id ,  et  is  quidim ,  20(,  R.  26,  (c.);  et — et , 
et — que,  et — neque  or  nec,  198,  1,  R.  («.); 
et  non ,  198,  1,  (c.) 

Etenim ,  198,  7,  R.  (a.) 

Etiam.  198,  1,  r.  (<2.);  with  comparatives, 
256,  r.  9,  (6.);  127,  3;  etiamnum ,  etiam 
tum ,  191,  r.  7. 

-etis,  genitive  in,  73;  112,  1. 

Etsi  and  etiamsi ,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

-etum,  derivative  nouns  in,  100,  7. 

Etymology,  24 — 199. 

Eu ,  the  diphthong,  10,  3;  when  not  a 
diphthong,  10,  3,  r.  3;  in  voc.  sing,  of 
Greek  nouns  in  eus ,  81. 

Euphemism,  324,  11. 

Eus ,  nouns  in  of  2d  decl.,  54,  5; — adjs. 
in,  128,  1  and  2;  Greek  proper  names  in, 
283,  n.  2;  gen.  of,  76,  e.  7 ;  acc.  of,  180,  in. 

-ev  and  -etu,  in  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs, 
167. 

Evado ,  constr.,  251,  N. 

Evenit ,  conjugated,  184;  evenit  ut,  262, 
R.  3, 

Ex  and  e ,  prep.,  how  used,  196,  R.  2  and 
13; — used  with  partitives  instead  of  the 
genitive,  212,  n.  4;  sometimes  omitted,  261, 
and  r.  1;  ex  quo ,  scil.  tempore ,  253,  N.  4. 

-ex,  gender  of  nouns  in,  65,  2. 

Exadversus ,  w.  acc.,  195,  r.  3. 

Excedo,  w.  acc.,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Excello,  constr.,  256,  r.  16,  (3.) 

Excito,  w.  ut,  273,  n.  4. 

Excludo,  constr.,  251,  n. 

Exeo,  constr.,  251,  n. 

Existimo,  w.  gen.,  214;  w.  two  accs., 
230,  n.  1;  existimor,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

Exlex,  112,  2;  196,  i.,  6. 

Exos,  genitive  of,  112.  2. 

Exosus,  183,  1,  n. 

Exsistunt  qui ,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Exter,  105,  3,  and  n.;  comparison  of, 
125,  4. 

Expedio ,  251,  N. ;  expedit ,  w.  dat.,  223, 
r.  2,  (6.) 

Experior  si,  198,  11,  («.) 

Expers,  w.  gen.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.),  and 
r.  5,  (2.) 

Extemplo,  193,  ii.,  1. 

Extera,  how  compared,  125,  4;  extremus , 
how  used,  205,  R.  17 ;  extremum  est ,  ut, 
262,  r.  3. 

Exuo ,  constr.,  225,  R.  2;  exuor ,  234, 1., 
r.  1. 

F. 

Fabida,  ellipsis  of.  29,  2. 

Fac ,  imperative,  162,  4;  fac  ut  or  ne,  267, 
r.  3 ;  fac,  4  suppose  or  granting,’  w.  acc.  and 
inf.,  273,  n.  3;  pr.,  299,  e.  4. 


INDEX. 


387 


Facile ,  adv.,  192,  4,  [b.) ;  w.  superlatives, 
etc.,  277,  r.  7. 

Facilis ,  constr.,  276,  m.,  r.  4 ;  222,  r.  l,(a.) 

Facio  and  compds.,  passive  of,  180  and  n.  ; 
changes  of  in  the  compds.,  189,  n.  1;  w. 
gen.  of  value,  214,  r.  2;  w.  two  accs.,  230, 
n.  1;  w.  abl.,  250,  r.  3;  w.  ut  and  subj., 
273,  1,  y.  2  and  3;  w.  participle,  273,  1; 
w.  de ,  etc.,  250,  r.  3;  facere  non  possum 
quin ,  262,  2;  facere  quod ,  273,  n.  8;  ellipsis 
of,  209,  r.  4;  facere  certiorem ,  230,  N.  3. 

Faiiscan  verse,  312,  xi. 

Fallit  me,  229,  a.  7. 

Familia  with  pater,  etc.,  gen.  of,  43,  2. 

Familiaris ,  w.  dat.,  222,  k.  1,  (a.);  with 
gen.,  222,  r.  1,  (c.) 

Far,  its  root,  56,  ii.,  r.  6;  gen.  of,  71, 
k.  2;  abl.,  82,  e.  1,  (6.);  94  and  95. 

Fas ,  gender  of,  62,  e.  2;  94 ;  fas  erat , 
the  indie,  instead  of  the  subj.,  259,  r.  3; 
fas  est ,  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  in.,  r.  2. 

Faxo ,  faxim  and  faxem ,  162,  9,  and  183, 

R.  1. 

Faux,  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (5.);  but  cf.  94, 
p.  50;  gen.  plur.,  83,  n.,  3. 

Favetur ,  conjugated,  184,  2,  ( b .)  constr., 
223. 

Fearing,  verbs  of,  w.  ut  and  ne,  262,  r.  7. 

Febris,  ellipsis  of,  205,  r.  7,  (1.) 

Fecundus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Feet,  in  poetry,  302;  isochronous,  302,  r. 

Fel,  its  root,  56,  n.,  R.  6;  its  genitive, 

70  e  *  94 

Felix ,  declined,  111;  213,  R.  4,  (1.) 

Femina ,  added  to  epicene  nouns,  133,  n. 

Feminine  nouns,  of  1st  decl.,  41 ;  of  2d 
decl.,  49—51 ;  of  3d  decl.,  62:  exceptions  in, 
62 — 65. 

Femur,  genitive  of,  71,  3. 

Fer,  162,  4;  quantity  of,  299,  e.  4. 

Fero,  conjugated,  179;  its  compds.,  172, 
(p.  134);  fertur,  constr.  of,  271,  R.  2. 

-ficus,  comparison  of  adjs.  in,  125,  3,  (a.) 

Fido,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2;  w.  abl., 
245,  ti.  ;  w.  dat.,  245,  n.,  r.  1;  223,  r.  2. 

Fidi,  (from  findo),  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (1.) 

Figures  of  prosody,  305 — 307 ;  of  orthog¬ 
raphy  and  etymology,  322;  of  syntax,  323; 
of  rhetoric,  324. 

Filia,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  43. 

Filius,  voc.  sing.,  52. 

Filling,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249,  i. ;  w.  gen., 
220,  3. 

Final  syllables,  quantity  of,  294 — 301; — 
conjunctions,  198,  8. 

Finitimus,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (a.) 

Fio,  conjugated,  180;  w.  gen.  of  value, 
214,  r.  2 ;  w.  two  datives,  227,  r.  1 ;  fit  and 
fieri  non  potest  ut,  262,  R.  3;  fit  per  me, 
262,  r.  11;  quantity  of  i  in  fio,  283,  e.  1. 

Flagito ,  w.  two  accs.,  231,  R.  1;  w.  ut, 
273,  n.  4. 

Flecto ,  used  reflexively,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Flocci  habere ,  etc.,  214,  r.  1. 

Fluo  and  struo ,  2d  and  3d  roots  of,  171,  N. 

Follow,  in  what  sense  used,  203,  9. 

Fons,  gender  of,  64,  1. 

Foras  and  for  is,  237,  R.  5,  (c.) 

Forem,  fore,  etc.,  154,  r.  3;  162, 12,  (1.); 
w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1. 


Fractional  expressions,  121,  6. 

Freeing,  verbs  of,  251. 

Frenum,  plur.  freni  and  frena ,  92,  5. 

Frequens,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  3,  (3.); 
cf.  r.  4,  (1.) 

Frequentative  verbs,  187,  Ii . ,  1;  quantity 
of  i  in,  284,  e.  4. 

Fretus ,  w.  abl.,  244;  w.  dat.,  222,  R.  6; 
w.  inf.,  244,  r.  2,  (b.) 

Fructus ,  declined,  87. 

Frugi ,  115,  4;  comparison  of,  125,  5. 

Fruor ,  w.  abl.,  245,  I. ;  w.  acc.,  245,  I.,  R. 

Frux,  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (5.);  94. 

Fugio ,  constr.,  225,  iv. ;  210,  r.  3,  (2.); 
fuge,  poetically,  w.  inf.,  271.  n.  3;  fugit  me, 
229,  r.  7. 

Fui,  etc.,  in  compound  tenses,  162,  12, 
(1.):  fuisse,  w.  perf.  pass,  participles,  268, 
R.  1,  ( b .) 

Fungor,  w.  abl.,  245,  i. ;  w.  acc.,  245,  r.  ; 
275,  n.,  r.  1. 

Fuo,  root  of  fui,  154,  R.  2  and  3;  futum, 
pr.,  284,  e.  1,  ('2.) 

Furo ,  183,  r.  2. 

Furor,  w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  r.*2. 

Future  tense,  145,  in.;  how  supplied  in 
the  subj.,  260,  r.  7;  future  perfect  tense, 
145,  vi.;  old  form  in  so,  162,  9  and  10; 
future  indie,  for  imperative,  267,  R.  2;  259, 
r.  1,  (4.);  fut.  imperative,  267,  (2.),  (3.); 
future  pass.  part.  w.  acc.,  234,  i.,  r.  2; 
fut.  perf.  for  fut.,  259,  r.  1,  (5.) 

Futurum  esse  or  fore,  ut,  w.  subj.,  268, 
r.  4,  (5.);  futurum  fuisse,  ut,  268,  R.  5. 

a. 

G,  sound  of,  10;  before  s  in  roots  of 
nouns,  56,  r.  2 ;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171,  1, 
and  e.  5. 

Galliambus,  314,  x. 

Gaudeo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2;  with 
abl.,  247,  1,  (2.);  w.  acc.,  232,  n.  1;  with 
quod,  etc.,  273,  n.  6. 

Gemo,  w.  acc.,  232,  n.  1. 

Gems,  gender  of  names  of,  29. 

-gena,  compounds  in,  43,  2. 

Gener,  declined,  46. 

General  relatives,  139,  5,  R.;  how  used, 
207,  r.  29. 

General  indefinites,  139.  5,  R. 

Gender,  26,  7  and  27;  its  divisions,  27; 
general  rules  of,  27 — 34 ;  natural  and  gram¬ 
matical,  27;  masc.  from  signification,  28; 
fem.  from  do.,  29;  common  and  doubtful, 
30 ;  epicene,  33 ;  neuter  appellatives  of  per¬ 
sons,  32,  2 ;  of  Greek  nouns,  34,  r.  1 ;  neu¬ 
ter,  34;  of  1st  decl.,  41;  exes  in  1st  decl., 
42;  of  2d  decl.,  46;  exes,  in  2d  decl.,  49; 
of  3d  decl.,  58,  62,  and  66;  exes,  in  3d  decl., 
59 — 67 ;  of  4th  decl.,  87 ;  exes,  in  4th  decl., 
88;  of  5th  decl.,  90;  exes,  in  5th  decl.,  90 ; 
gender  of  adjs.,  205. 

Genero,  w.  abl.,  246,  r.  1;  generatus ,  w. 
abl.,  246. 

Genitive,  37 ;  sing..  1st  decl.,  exes,  in,  43; 
of  3d  decl.,  68;  of  adjectives,  3d  decl.,  112; 
plur.,  1st  decl.,  contracted,  43;  2d  decl., 
do.,  53;  3d  decl.,  83;  terminal  letters  in  all 
the  declensions,  40,  5;  of  adjectives,  3d 


388 


INDEX. 


decl.,  112  and  114;  after  nouns,  211;  its 
place,  279,  r.  ;  what  relations  it  denotes, 
211,  r.  1 ;  subjective  and  objective,  211,  r.  2 ; 
of  substantive  pronouns  objective,  211,  r. 
3;  possessive  adjective  used  for,  211,  r.  4; 
dative  used  for,  211,  r.  5 ;  of  character  or 
quality,  211,  r.  6;  of  measure,  211,  R.  6, 
and  (3. )  and  (6. ) ;  noun  limited  by,  omitted, 

211,  R.  7;  wanting,  in  the  predicate  after 
sum,  211,  r.  8;  in  other  cases,  211,  r.  8,(4.); 
omitted,  211,  r.  9;  two  genitives,  211,  r.  10; 
gen.  after  opus  and  wsus,  211,  11;  how 
translated,  211,  R.  12;  after  partitives,  212; 
after  a  neuter  adjective  or  adj.  pronoun, 

212,  r.  3 ;  its  place,  279,  10 ;  after  adverbs, 
212,  r.  4 ;  after  adjectives,  213 ;  of  cause  or 
source ,  213,  r.  2;  different  constructions 
instead  of,  213,  r.  4;  after  dignus  and  in¬ 
dignus,  244,  r.  2;  after  verbs,  214 — 220; 
after  sum ,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  214;  of 
crime,  217 ;  after  verbs  of  admonishing,  218 ; 
after  verbs  denoting  an  affection  of  the 
mind,  220;  instead  of  abl.  after  verbs  of 
abounding,  etc.,  220,  3;  instead  of  predicate 
acc.,  230,  n.  4;  of  place,  221:  after  parti¬ 
cles,  221,  ii.,  hi.  ;  of  gerunds,  275,  in.,  r.  1 ; 
plur.  depending  on  a  gerund,  275,  r.  1, 
(3.);  place  of,  after  neuter  adjectives,  279, 

Genitives,  two,  limiting  the  same  noun, 
211,  r.  10. 

Genitus ,  w.  abl.,  246. 

Genius ,  voc.  sing.,  52. 

Gentium ,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2. 

Genus ,  in  acc.  instead  of  the  gen.  or  abl., 
as,  id  genus,  omne  genus,  etc.,  234,  n.,  r. 
2,  Jin. ;  209,  r.  7,  (4.);  231,  r.  6;  used  with 
the  genit,  instead  of  an  apposition,  211, 
r.  2,  N. 

Georgicon ,  54,  4. 

Gero  and  fero,  compounds  of,  in  nouns 
of  2d  decl.,  47 ;  in  adjs.  of  1st  and  2d  decls., 
105,  3;  not  compared.  127,  7. 

Gerundives,  defined,  275,  r.  2;  how  used, 
275,  ii. 

Gerunds,  25,  and  148,  2 ;  by  what  cases 
followed,  274;  and  gerundives,  genitive  of, 
275,  ni.,  R.  1;  nouns  which  they  follow,  ib. 
(1.);  adjectives,  ib.  (2.);  after  sum  denoting 
tendency,  275,  (5.);  instead  of  a  noun  in 
apposition,  211,  r.  2,  n.;  dat.  of,  275,  r.  2; 
acc.  of,  275,  r.  3;  abl.  of,  275,  R.  4;  infin. 
for,  after  adj.,  270,  r.  1,  (a.) 

Gigno,  pr.,  284,  r.  3. 

Gl,  tl,  and  thl,  in  syllabication,  18,  3. 

Glorior ,  with  abl.,  247,  1,(2.);  w.  acc., 
232,  n.  1,  and  (3.) 

Glyconie  verse,  304,  2  ;  316,  iv. 

Gn,  initial,  12,  r. 

Gnarus ,  w.  gen.,  213,  r.  1;  cf.  R.  4,  (1.) 

-go,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,2;  genitive 
of,  69,  e.  1. 

Golden  age,  of  Roman  literature,  329,  2. 

Government  defined,  203,  7. 

Grammatical  subject,  202,  2;  cases  of, 
202,  r.  4;  predicate,  203,  2;  figures,  322. 

Gratia .  w.  gen.,  247,  R.  2;  its  place,  279, 
r.  ;  gratias  ago ,  constr.,  273,  n.  6. 

Gratum  mihi  est,  quod,  273,  n.  6. 

Gratulor,  constr.,  273,  n.  7. 


Grave  accent,  5,  2,  and  14,  2 ;  15,  R.  8. 

Gravtdus  and  gravis,  w.  gen.  or  abl., 
213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

Greek  nouns,  gender  of,  34,  r.  1 ;  termi¬ 
nations  of  in  1st  decl.,  44;  in  2d  decl.,  54; 
terminations  of  in  3d  decl.,  55,  R. ;  acc.  of 
in  3d  decl.,  80;  declension  of,  in  do.,  86. 

Greek  or  limiting  acc.,  234,  r.  2. 

Grex,  gender  of,  65,  2;  genitive  of,  78, 

2,  (2.) 

Grus,  gender  of,  30;  genitive  of,  76,  e.  3. 

Guilt  and  innocence,  adjectives  of,  with 
gen.,  217,  R.  1. 


H. 

H ,  its  nature,  2,  6;  its  place  in  syllabi¬ 
cation,  18,  1;  before  5  in  verbal  roots,  171, 
1;  in  prosody,  283,  i.,  ( b .) 

Habeo ,  with  two  accs.,  230,  N.  1;  habere 
in  numero  or  in  loco ,  230,  n.  4;  w.  gen.  of 
value,  214,  r.  2 ;  w.  abl.  of  price.  252.  r.  1 ; 
w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1;  w.  participle  perf. 
pass.,  274,  r.  4;  w.  participle  in  dus,  274, 
r.  7,  (a.);  habeo,  non  habeo,  or  nihil  habeo, 
quod ,  w.  subj.,  264,  n.  3;  haberi ,  w.  predi¬ 
cate  nom.,  210,  r.  3,(3.),  (c.);  271,  n.  2, 
and  r.  4. 

Habito ,  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  n.  1;  w. 
abl.  of,  price,  252,  r.  1. 

Hac  in  answer  to  qua  ?  191,  R.  1.  (c.) 

Hactenus,  adv.  of  place  and  time,  191, 

R.  I?  (g-) 

Hadria ,  gender  of,  42,  2. 

Hoec ,  for  hoe,  134,  r.  1. 

Haud ,  signification  and  use,  191,  r.  3; 
haud  multum  abest  quin ,  262,  n.  7 ;  haud 
scio  an,  198,  11,  R-  (e.) 

Hebes,  gen.  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3; 
defective,  115,  2. 

Hei  mihi,  228,  3. 

Hellenism,  323,  r.  (2.) 

Hem,  w.  dat.,  228,  3;  w.  acc.,  238,  2;  w. 
voc.,  2 40,  r.  1. 

Hemistich,  304. 

Hemiolius.  304,  5. 

Hendiadys,  323,  2,  (3.) 

Htpar,  genit,  of,  71;  abl.  of,  82,  E.  1,  (6.) 

Hephthemimeris,  304,  5. 

Heres,  gender  of.  31,  2 ;  genitive,  73,  E.  1. 

Heroic  caesura,  310,  4  and  5. 

Heros,  genitive,  75,  2;  acc.,  80,  R.;  dat. 
plur.,  84;  acc.  plur.,  85,  e.  2;  declined, 86. 

Heteroclite  nouns,  93. 

Heterogeneous  nouns,  34,  R.  2 ;  92. 

Heterosis,  323,  3,  (2.) ' 

Hexameter  verse,  310;  Priapean,  310,  ii. 

Hiatus,  279,  18. 

Hibernus,  pr.,  284,  e.  5,  R.  2. 

Hie,  pron.,  declined.  134;  distinguished 
from  ille,  207,  R.  23:  hie— hie.  for  hie— ille, 
207,  r.  23,  t&.);  related  in  time  like  nunc 
and  tunc. 

Hie,  adv.  of  place,  hic,  hinc,  hue,  etc., 
referring  to  the  place  of  the  speaker,  191, 
r.  1,  (e.j;  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  (6.); 
adv.  of  time,  191,  r.  1,  (g.) 

Him,  her,  etc.,  how  expressed  in  Latin, 
207,  r.  20. 


INDEX, 


389 


Hipponactic  trimeter,  314,  ir. :  tetrameter, 
814, iv. 

Historical  present,  145,  i.,  3:  perfect, 
145,  iv.,  r.  ;  for  the  pluperfect,  259,  r.  1, 
(d.)',  infinitive,  209,  r.  5;  tenses,  258. 

Hoc ,  pleonastic,  207,  R.  21  and  22;  hoc 
w.  partitive  gen.,  212,  r.  3,  N.  1;  hoc  with 
comparitives,  256,  R.  16. 

Hodie ,  pr.,  285,  2,  e.  1. 

Homo ,  gender  of,  31, 2 ;  genitive,  69,  e.  2  ; 
homo,  homines,  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  2,(2.); 
205,  R.  7,  (l.)i  229,  R.  4. 

Homoeopropheron,  324,  26. 

Honor ,  (-os),  declined,  57. 

Horaee,  key  to  the  odes  of,  321. 

Horatian  metres,  320. 

Horreo ,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Hortor ,  w.  ad,  225,  R.  1;  w.  ut,  ne,  etc., 
273,  2 ;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Hospes ,  gender  of,  30;  formation  of  nom. 
sing.,  56,  i.,  r.  3;  genitive,  73,  2;  abl.,113, 
E.  2;  as  an  adj.,  129,  8. 

Hostis,  w.  gen.  or  dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (c.) 

‘  However  ’  w.  a  relative,  how  expressed 
in  Latin,  280,  hi.,  (3.) 

Hue,  w.  genitive,  212,  R.  4,  N.  3,  (6.); 
huccine  rerum,  212,  r.  4,  N.  3. 

Humi,  constr.,  221,  r.  3;  humo ,  254,  r.  2; 
255,  r.  1. 

Huic ,  pronunciation  of,  9,  5;  pr.,  306, 
r.  2. 


Hujus  non  facio,  214,  R.  1. 

Hujusmodi ,  134,  r.  6;  w.  qui  and  the 
subj.,  264, 1,  if. 

Hypallage,  323,  4,  (3.) 

Hyperbaton,  323,  4. 

Hyperbole,  324,  5. 

Hypercatalectic  or  hypermeter  verse,  304, 
3,  (4.) 

Hypothetical  sentences,  259,  r.  3,  (c.), 
(d.),  and  r.  4;  260,  n. ;  in  the  inf.,  268,  r.  4 
— r.  6. 


Hysteron  proteron,  323,  4,  (2.) 


I. 


J,  its  sound,  7  and  8 ;  i  and  j  but  one 
character,  2,  3;  i  for  ii  in  gen.  of  2d  decl., 
52;  i  changed  to  e  in  forming  certain 
noms.,  56,  i.,  r.  3;  nouns  in  i,  gender  of, 
66 ;  genitive  of,  68 ;  genitive  of  Greek  nouns 
in,  73,  R. ;  dat.  of  3d  decl.  in,  79;  abl.  sing, 
in,  82;  113;  in  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  of  5th 
decl.,  90,  e.  2;  i  ending  the  former  part  of 
a  compound  noun  or  adj.,  103,  R.  1;  131, 
N. ;  i  in  dat.  sing,  of  nine  adjs.  in  us  and  er, 
107;  in  1st  person  sing,  of  the  perf.  act., 
147,  3;  i.  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the 
4th  conj.,  149,  2 ;  cf.  150,  5;  i  or  e  for  the 
Greek  «,  283,  e.  6,  (1.);  increment  in,  3d 
decl.,  287,  3;  plur.,  288;  of  verbs,  290; 
i  final,  quantity  of,  285,  r.  4. ;  296. 

- ia ,  abstracts  in,  101,  3;  in  nom.,  acc. 
and  voc.  plur.,  83;  85. 

-iacus,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (d.) 

Iambic  metre,  314;  303;  tetrameter,  314, 
in.;  trimeter,  314,  i. ;  catalectic,  314,  iv. ; 
dimeter,  314,  vi.;  hypermeter,  314,  vn.; 
acephalous,  314,  vm. ;  catalectic,  314,  ix.  ; 
iambico-dactylic  metre,  318,  n. 

33* 


-ianus,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (/.) 

-ias,  fern,  patronymics  in,  100,  1,  (b.) 

Jbi,  ellipsis  of  before  ubi,  206,  (3.),  (a.) 
-ids,  genitives  in,  78,  2,  (2.)  and  (3.) 
74,  e.  2. 

-icius,  adjs.  in,  128,  2;  -icius  or  - itms . 
verbal  adjs.  in,  129,  5. 

Ictus,  308,  3. 

- iculus,a,um ,  diminutives  in,  100,3.  R.  1. 
- icus ,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (d.),  and  2,  («.), 
and  6,  i.) 

Id,  before  a  relative  pron.,  206,  (13.); 
w.  gen.,  212,  r.  3;  id  temporis ,  at  at  is,  id 
genus.,  etc.,  234,  n .,  r.  3;  253,  r.  3;  id  ago, 
constr.,  273,  n.  1;  207,  R.  22;  id  quod  in¬ 
stead  of  quod ,  206,  (13.),  (6.);  as  acc.  of  de¬ 
gree,  etc.,  232,  (3.) 

Idem,  declined,  134,  r.  6;  how  used,  207, 
r.  27 ;  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  3 ;  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  7 ; 
207,  R.  27,  (rf.);  supplying  the  place  of 
item,  etiam,  or  tamen,  207,  R.  27 ;  idem 
qui,  ac ,  atque ,  ut,  cum,  etc.,  207,  R.  27,  (a.); 
222,  r.  7 ;  idem — idem,  1  at  once,’  207,  R.  27, 
(c.) ;  as  acc.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Ides,  326,  2. 

-ides,  and  - iades ,  patronymics  in,  100,  1, 
(a.);  pr.,  291,  4. 

Idiotism,  325,  6. 

- idis ,  genitives  in,  73,  E.  1;  74,  e.  2. 
Idoneus ,  qui,  264,  9;  270,  R.  1. 

-idus,  adjs.  in,  129,  2. 

-iei,  in  5th  decl.,  quantity  of  the  e,  283, 
i.,  e.  2. 

-ies,  advs.  in,  192.,  n.,  3. 

Igitur ,  198,  6;  its  place,  279,  3,  (b.)\ 
equivalent  to  *  I  say,’  278,  r.  10. 

Ignarus ,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1;  275,  hi., 
r.  1,  (2.) 

-ii  in  genitive  contracted,  52;  how  ac¬ 
cented,  14,  E. 

-ile,  derivative  nouns  in,  100,  9. 

-ilis,  adjs.  in,  129,  4;  128,  4. 

Iliac ,  in  answer  to  qua  ?  191,  r.  1,  (d.) 
Illacrimo,  w.  dat.,  224,  n.  1,  4. 

Illative  conjunctions,  198,  6. 

Ille,  declined,  134;  its  uses,  207,  R.  20 — 
26;  w.  quidem ,  redundant,  207,  R.  21; 
its  relation  to  time,  207,  R.  23,  (c.);  as  % 
pron.  of  the  3d  pers.,  207,  R.  20;  relation 
of  hie  and  ille ,  207,  R.  23;  ille,  qui,  w.  subj., 
264,  1,  n. 

lllic ,  pron.,  ho.w  declined,  134,  r.  3; 
illic,  illuc ,  illinc,  advs.,  their  reference,  191, 
R.  1,  (e.) 

-illimus,  superlatives  in,  125,  2. 
Illiusmodi ,  134,  5. 

-illo,  verbs  in,  187,  n.,  4. 

Illud,  w.  genitive,  212,  R.  3,  N.  1,  (a.); 
pleonastic,  207,  R.  22;  as  acc.  of  degree, 
232,  (3.) 

Illudo,  w.  dat.,  224,  4. 

-illus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3,  a.  3. 
-im.  in  acc.  sing.  3d  decl.,  79;  80;  im  for 
eum,  134,  R.  1;  -im,  is,  etc.,  in  pres,  subj., 
162,  1;  adverbs  in,  192,  i.  and  n. 

Imbecillus ,  pr.,  284,  2,  e.  2. 

Imbuo ,  constr.,  231,  r.  4. 

Imitative  verbs,  187,  3. 

Immemor ,  gen.  of,  112,  2;  abl.,113,  E.  3 ; 
gen.  plur.,  114,  e.  2. 


390 


INDEX. 


Immo,  191,  r.  3. 

Immodicus ,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Immunis ,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 
cf.  251,  n. 

- imonium ,  deriv.  nouns  in,  100,  6; — and 
-imonia,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

Impatiens ,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Impavidus ,  w.  genit.,  213,  k.  1,  (3.) 

Impedio ,  w.  quin,  262,  n.  7 ;  w.  quomi¬ 
nus ,  262,  r.  11;  w.  inf.,  262,  r.  11,  N. 

Impello ,  273,  n.  4. 

Imperative,  143, .3;  its  tenses,  145,  R.  3; 
how  used,  267,  (1.),  (2.);  irregular,  162,  4 
and  5;  subj.  for  imperative  267,  R.  2;  sing, 
for  plur.,  209,  n.  2;  used  as  a  noun,  205, 
r.  8. 

Imperfect  tense,  145,  n. ;  w.  oportet ,  etc., 
259,  r.  3;  the  imperf.  indie,  forplup.  subj., 
259,  r.  4. 

Imperitus ,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.);  of 
gerund,  275,  m.,  r.  1,  (2.) 

Impero ,  constr.,  273,  n.  4;  262,  R.  4;  w. 
dat.  and  acc.,  223,  r.  2,  (1.) 

Impersonal  verbs,  184;  subject  of,  184,  2; 
list  of  in  2d  conj.,  169;  184,  r.  1;  in  1st, 
3d,  and  4th  conj.,  184,  r.  1;  constr.  w.  gen., 
215,  1;  219;  w.  dat.,  223,  r.  2,  N.  (6.);  w. 
acc.,  229,  r.  6  and  7. 

Impertio ,  249,  i.,  and  R.  3;  225,  R.  1,  (6.) 

Impetro ,  ut,  273,  N.  2. 

Impleo ,  249,  r.  1 ;  220,  3. 

Impono ,  241,  r.  5. 

Impos  and  impotens ,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1, 

(3.) 

Imprimis ,  193,  n.,  2. 

Imprudens ,  improvidus ,  w.  genit.,  213, 
R.  1. 

Impubes ,  genitive,  112,  1;  abl.,  113,  e.  2; 
115,  1,  (a.) 

Impulsus ,  w.  abl.  of  cause,  247,  R.  2.  (6.) 

-in,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  n.,  R.  1  and  2; 
in  acc.  sing.,  79. 

7/i,  prep.,  constr.,  235,  (2.);  signification 
and  use,  195,  r.14;  in  composition,  196,  7; 
in  with  abl.  instead  of  predicate  acc.,  230, 
N.  4;  constr.  of  verbs  compd.  with,  224; 
w.  abl.  after  verbs  of  placing,  holding,  re¬ 
garding,  assembling,  etc.,  241,  R.  5;  ellipsis 
of  with  some  ablatives  of  place,  254  and  rs.  ; 
with  ablatives  of  time,  253,  n.  1,  and  r.  5; 
with  names  of  towns,  254,  r.  2  and  r.  3. 

Inanis ,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Incassum,  193,  n.,  4. 

Incedo,  233,  (3.),  n.;  210,  r.  3,  (2.) 

Inceptive  verbs,  187,  ii.,  2;  list  of,  173. 

Incertus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1;  incertum 
est  an,  198,  11,  r.  (e.);  265,  R.  3. 

Inchoatives,  see  iuceptive  verbs. 

Incidit  ut,  262,  r.  3. 

Incito,  constr.,  225,  r.  1 ;  incitatus,  w.  abl. 
of  cause,  247,  R.  2,  ( b .) 

Incipio,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Inclino,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1;  225,  tv. 

Incommodo ,  w.  dat.,  223,  r.  2,  n.  (b.) 

Increment  of  nouns,  286;  sing,  num., 
287 ;  plur.  num.,  288 ;  of  verbs,  289. 

Incrementum,  324,  22. 

Increpo  and  increpi'o ,  w.  gen.,  217,  R.  1. 

Incumbo ,  w.  dat.,  224,  4 ;  w.  ad,  224,  r.  4. 

Incuso,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1. 


Inde,  ellipsis  of  before  unde,  206,  (3.),  (a.); 
inde  loci,  212,  r.  4,  n.  4. 

Indeclinable  nouns,  34;  94; — adjectives, 
115,  4. 

Indefinite  adjectives,  104 :  139,  5,  R. ; — 
pronouns,  138; — adverbs,  191,  r.  4. 

Indicative  mood,  143,  1 ;  its  tenses,  145 ; 
how  used,  259 ;  tenses  used  one  for  another, 
259,  r.  1—4;  indie,  of  the  preterites  with 
oportet,  etc.,  259,  r.  3;  in  inserted  clauses, 
266,  2,  r.  3  and  5;  266,  1,  R.  1. 

Indico ,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Indigeo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.);  w.  genit., 
220,  3. 

Indignor ,  constr.,  273,  5,  N.  6. 

Indignus,  w.  abl.,  244;  w.  genit.,  244, 
r.  2;  indignus  qui, "w.  subj.,  264,  9;  w.  su¬ 
pine  in  u,  276,  in.,  R.  1. 

Indigus ,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (2.) 

Indirect  questions,  subj.  in,  265: — indi¬ 
rect  reference,  266,  3 : — indirect  discourse, 
266,  1,  n.  and  2. 

Induco,  id  animum  inducere ,  233,  (1.); 
pass.  w.  acc.,  234,  r.  1;  inductus,  w.  abl., 
of  cause,  247,  r.  2,  (6.) 

Indulgeo,  constr.,  223.  (1.),  (a.) 

Induo ,  w.  dat.  and  acc..  224,  4;  w.  abl. 
and  acc.,  249,  i.,  r.  1;  cf.  224,  r.  1,  ( b .); 
induo  and  exuo ,  constr.  in  pass.,  234,  R.  1. 
-ineor  -ione,  fern,  patronymics  in,  100, 1.(6.) 

Ineo,  183,  r.  3;  inire  consilia ,  w.  inf., 
270,  r.  1,  (c.);  134,  in. 

Iners ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  3,  and  r.  1. 

Inexpertus,  w.  genit..  213,  R.  1. 

Infamo ,  w.  genit,  of  crime,  217,  R.  1. 

Infero ,  224,  4,  and  r.  4. 

Inferus,  comparison  of,  125,  4; — inferior , 
w.  dat.,  abl.,  or  quam,  256,  R.  10;  infimus 
and  imus,  205,  r.  17. 

Infinitive,  143,  4:  as  a  noun,  26,  r.  ;  269; 
its  gender,  34,  4;  205,  r.  8;  its  cases,  269, 
(6.);  as  an  acc.,  229,  r.  5;  270;  as  a  verb, 
269,  (a.);  its  tenses,  145,  r.  4;  old  inf.  pres, 
pass,  in  - er ,  162,  6  ; — inf.  as  logical  subj., 
202,  r.  2;  269;  how  modified,  203,  rr ..  5 ; 
with  subject  nom.,  209.  r.  5;  for  the  geni¬ 
tive,  213,  r.  4;  rts  subject,  239;  w.  dat.  in¬ 
stead  of  acc.,  227,  n. ;  construction  and 
meaning  of  its  tenses,  268,  inf.  as  subject 
of  inf.,  269,  r.  3;  as  predicate  nom.,  269, 
r.  4;  esse,  etc.,  with  licet  and  a  predicate 
noun  or  adj.,  case  of  such  predicate,  269, 
r.  5;  poetically  after  what  verbs,  271,  R.  3; 
depending  on  a  verb,  270 ;  229,  r.  5 :  on  an 
adj.  or  noun,  270,  R.  1;  275,  it.,  r.  1,  N.  1; 
absolute,  270,  R.  2;  ellipsis  of,  270,  r.  3; 
inf.  without  a  subject  after  what  verbs 
used,  271 ;  with  a  subject,  after  what  verbs, 
272  ;  273;  how  translated,  272,  r.  3:  used 
like  a  noun,  273,  n.  9;  its  place,  279,  11; 
inf.  pres,  for  inf.  perfect,  268,  r.  1:  inf. 
perf.  for  present,  268,  r.2;  pres,  for  future, 
268,  r.  3;  poet,  to  denote  a  purpose,  274, 
r.  7,  (b.) 

Infinitum  est,  the  indie,  for  the  subj., 
259,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Infirmus ,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

Infit,  183,  14;  180,  n. 

Inflection,  25 ;  parts  of  speech  inflected, 
24,  4. 


« 


index- 


391 


Ingens ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  3. 

Inimicus,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  w.  genit., 
222,  r.  2,  (e.) 

- inis ,  genitives  in,  69,  e.  1  and  2. 

Initio ,  “at  first,”  253,  N. 

Innitor ,  224,  r.  4.  See  also  nitor. 

Innocens  and  innoxius ,  w.  genit.,  213, 
R.  1. 

Insatiabilis ,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (1.) 

Inscius ,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (3.) 

Inscribo ,  insculpo ,  and  insero ,  constr., 
241,  r.  5. 

Insimulo ,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1. 

Insolens  and  insolitus ,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1. 

Inops,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  3;  115,  1,  (a.);  w. 
genit.,  213,  r.  1;  cf.  r.  4,  (1.);  w.  abl.,  250, 
2,  (1.) 

Inquam ,  183,  5;  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  4;  its 
position,  279,  6. 

Inserted  clauses,  266. 

Insinuo „  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Insons ,  genit,  plur.  of,  114,  E.  3;  115,  1, 
(a.);  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1. 

Inspergo ,  249,  i.,  r.  1  and  r.  3. 

Instar ,  a  dip  tote,  94. 

Instituo ,  273,  n.  4;  230,  n.  1;  231,  r.  4; 
w.  inf.,  27l,  n.  1. 

Instrument,  abl.  of,  247,  and  r.  5;  w. 
verbs  of  teaching,  231,  R.  3,  (c.) 

Instruo ,  231,  R.  4. 


Insumere  tempus ,  275,  R.  2. 


thing, 


Insuesco ,  w.  dat.  or  abl.  of  the 
245,  n.,  3;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Insuetus,  213,  r.  1,  (3.);  222,  r.  2,  (a.); 
275,  in.,  (2.);  270,  r.  1;  275,  m.,  r.  1,  (2.) 

Insuper ,  w.  acc.  or  abl.,  235,  R.  8. 

Integer ,  w.  genit.,  213;  integrum  est  ut, 
262,  r.  3,  n.  3. 

Intelligo ,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  N.  1;  w.  acc. 
and  inf.,  272,  n.  1;  intelligitur ,  w.  inf.  as 
subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Intention  denoted  by  participle  in  rus 
with  sum,  162,  14;  274,  r.  6. 

Intentus.,  w.  acc.  nihil,  232,  (3.);  intentum 
esse ,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  in.,  r.  2,  (1.) 

Inter,  use  of,  235,  1,  R.  2;  in  composition, 
196,  i.,  8; — w.  se  or  ipse,  208,  (5.);  w.  ge¬ 
runds,  275,  in.,  r.  3;  instead  of  partitive 
gen.,  212,  r.  3,  n.  4;  construction  of  its 
compds.,  224;  repeated  by  Cicero  after  in¬ 
ter  esse,  277,  ii.,  4. 

Intercedo ,  w.  quin ,  ne,  or  quominus ,  262, 

R.  11. 

Intercludo  and  interdico,  251,  *N.  and  r.  2. 

Interdico ,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Interdiu  or  die,  253,  N.  1. 

Interea  loci,  212,  r.  4,  N.  4. 

Interest,  Roman  computation  of,  327. 

Interest,  w.  genit.,  219;  w.  mea,  etc.,  219, 
r.  1 ;  subject  of,  219,  r.  4 ;  degree  of  interest 
how  expressed,  219,  r.  5. 

Interior ,  comparison  of,  126,  1 ;  intimus , 
205,  R.  17. 

Inteijections,  199;  w.  nom.,  209,  r.  13; 
w.  dat.,  223,  (3.);  w.  acc.,  238,  2;  w.  voc., 
240;  O,  heu,  etc.,  not  elided,  305. 

Intermitto,  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Interpres,  gender  of,  30;  61,  2;  genit,  of, 
73,  3. 

Interritus ,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1  and  2. 


Interrogative  particles,  198,  11; — adjs., 
104,  14;  121,  5;  139,  5,  3; — pronouns,  137; 
in  indirect  questions,  137,  N. ;  265,  N.  2; — 
sentences,  200,  3. 

Interrogo,  w.  two  accs.,  231,  r.  1;  constr. 
in  pass.,  234,  i.;  w.  genit,  of  the  ciime, 
217,  r.  1. 

Intersum,  w.  dat.,  224,  5. 

Intus ,  w.  acc.,  338,  1,  (b.) 

Intra,  how  used,  195,  R.  8;  253,  R.  4,  (6.) 

Intransitive  verb,  141,  ii.;  used  imper¬ 
sonally  in  pass.  w.  dat.,  223,  n.  1,  (c.) 

-inus,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  2,  and  6. 

Invado ,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Invariable  adjs.,  122;  specified,  127,  7. 

Invenio,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  n.  1;  inveni¬ 
untur ,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Invideo,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (c.);  220,  1; 
invidetur  mihi ,  223,  R.  2,  n.  (c.) 

Invitus,  w.  dat.  of  the  person,  226,  R.  3 ; 
invita  Minerva,  257,  R.  7. 

Involuntary  agent  of  pass,  verb,  248,  ii., 
and  n. 

-io,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,  1;  personal 
appellatives  in,  100,  4,  (b.);  verbals  in,  102, 
7 ;  verbs  in  of  3d  conj.,  159. 

Ionic  metre,  317 ;  303; — a  majore,  317, 1. ; 
— a  minore,  317,  ii. 

-ior,  -ius,  in  terminational  comparatives, 
124,  1. 

Ipse,  declined,  135;  how  used,  135,  R.  1; 
207,  R.  28;  used  reflexively,  208,  (4.);  207, 
r.  28,  (c.);  w.  inter,  208,  (5.);  et  ipse,  207, 
r.27,  (&.);  ipse,  with  the  inf.,  273,  n.  9,  (a.); 
nunc  ipsum  and  turn  ipeum,  191,  r.  7. 

Ipsus  and  ipsissimus,  135,  R.  2. 

Irascor ,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  n.,  ( b .) 

Iri,  w.  supine  in  um,  276,  n.,  r.  3. 

Iron  age  of  Roman  literature,  329,  4. 

Irony,  324,  4. 

Irregular  nouns,  92; — adjs.,  115; — verbs, 
178—182. 

-is,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62;  63;  genitive 
of,  74 ;  -is  or  -eis  instead  of  -cs  in  acc.  plur. 
of  3d  decl.,  85,  e.  1 ;  abl.  of  adjs.  in  is  used 
as  nouns,  82,  e.  4; — used  as  proper  names, 
82,  e.  4,  (6.);  -is  for  -us  in  genitive  of  4th 
decl.,  89,  2;  fern,  patronymics  in,  100,  1, 
(b.) ;  ellipsis  of  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  162,  7,  (c  ) 

Is,  pron.,  declined,  134;  how  used,  207, 
r.  26;  referring  to  a  clause,  206,  (13.);  is 
and  ille  with  quidem  used  pleonastically, 
207,  R.  21 ;  is  for  talis ,  207,  r.  26,  (&.) ;  264, 
1,  n.;  et  is,  atque  is,  isque,  et  is  quidem , 
207,  r.  26,  (c.) ;  ellipsis  of  is,  207,  R.  26,  {d.)\ 
is-qui,  264,  1,  n. 

Islands,  gender  of,  29 ;  constr.  of  names 
of,  237,  R.  5,  (6.) 

-issimus,  a,  um,  the  terminational  super¬ 
lative,  124,  2. 

-isso,  verbs  in,  187,  ii.,  5. 

Iste,  how  declined,  134 ;  how  used,  207, 
r.  23,  25;  iste  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  1,  n. 

Istic ,  pron.,  declined,  134,  R.  3. 

Istic,  adv.,  istinc ,  istuc,  their  reference, 
191,  r.  1,  (e.) 

Istiusmodi ,  134,  R.  5. 

-it,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  it.,  r.  5;  in  3d 
root  of  4th  conj.,  175;  of  certain  verbs  of 
3d  conj.,  171,  e.  7. 


392 


INDEX, 


Ita ,  191,  E.  5;  277,  e.  12,  (a.);  ita  non , 
277,  r.  14. 

Itaque ,  its  meaning,  198,  6,  R. ;  its  place, 
279,  3,  ( b .) 

Iter ,  declined,  57;  71,  2;  with  and 
acc.  of  place,  237,  R.  1 ;  increments  of, 
286,  2. 

-iter  and  -ter,  advs.  in,  192,  n.  and  iv. 
-itas,  -ia,  - itia ,  -ities,  - itudo ,  and  -itus, 
abstracts  in,  101,  1. 

-itis,  genitive  in,  73;  78,  1;  112,  1. 

-ito,  frequentativ.es  in,  187,  n.,  1. 

-itius  or  - icius ,  adjs.  in,  129,  5. 

Itum,  sup.,  in  prosody,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 
-itus,  advs.  in,  192,  i.  and  ii.  ;  adjs.  in, 
128,  7. 

-ium,  verbals  in,  102,  2;  -dum  or  -itium, 
nouns  in,  100,  5. 

-ius,  genitives  in,  place  of  English  accent, 
15;  in  what  adjs.,  107;  quantity  of  the  i, 
283,  i.,  e.  4: — adjs.  in,  128,  1,  2,  and  5; 
voc.  sing,  of  patrials  and  possessives  in,  52. 
•iv,  in  2d  roots  of  verbs,  175 ;  171,  e.  3. 

- ivus ,  adjs.  in,  129,  7. 


J. 

J ,  vowel  before,  in  prosody,  283,  iv.,  n.  1. 

Jaceo,  210,  r.  3,  (2.);  233,  (3.),  n. 

Jam,  with  a  negative,  191,  r.  6;  jamdu- 
dum,  ib. 

Jecur,  genitive  of,  71,  3;  increments  of, 
286,  2. 

Jejunus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

Jesus,  decl.  of,  53. 

Jocus ,  plur.  joci  and  joca ,  92,  2. 

Jubar,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  1,  (5.) 

Jubeo ,  constr.,  223,  (2.);  273,  2,  ( </.);  272, 
E.  6 ;  262,  r.  4 ;  ellipsis  of  jubeo  valere,  238, 
E.  2;  jubeor ,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Jucundus ,  constr.,  276,  ni.,  r.  1  and  4; 
jucundum  est,  w.  quod,  273,  5,  n.  6. 

Judico,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  n.  1;  w.  acc. 
and  inf.,  272,  n.  1;  in  pass.,  210,  r.  3,  (3.), 
(c.);  judicari  w.  predicate  nominative,  271, 
N.  2. 

Jugerum,  93, 1 ;  94. 

Jugum,  quantity  of  its  compds.,  283,  iv., 

E.  1. 

Jungo,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Junctus  and  conjunctus,  constr.,  222, 
E.  6,  (c.) 

Jupiter ,  genitive  of,  71;  declined,  85. 

Jure  aliquid  facere,  without  cum,  247,  2. 

Juro,  its  compds.,  189,  n.  Z'.— juratus, 
with  active  meaning,  163,  16:— juro,  poet, 
w.  inf.,  271,  n.  3. 

Jusjurandum,  declined,  91. 

Justum  erat,  indic,  for  subj.,  259,  r.  3; 
justum  est  with  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2 ; 
justo  after  comparatives,  256,  r.  9;  its 
place,  279,  n.  1. 

Juvat ,  w.  acc.,  229,  r.  7. 

Juvenalis,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  4,  (5.) 

Juvenis ,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  4,  (6.);  113,  e.  2; 
comparison  of,  126,  4;  115,  1,  (a.);  for  in 
juventute,  253,  R.  6, 

Juxta  as  an  adv,,  195*  4;  juxta  ac  or 

atque,  198,  3,  E. 


K. 

K,  its  use,  2,  4. 

Key  to  the  Odes  of  Horace,  321. 

Knowing,  verbs  of,  their  construction,  272. 

L. 

L,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  n. ;  gender  of 
nouns  in,  66;  genitive  of,  70; — final,  quan¬ 
tity  of,  299,  2. 

Laboro,  constr.,  273,  N.  1;  poet.  w.  inf., 
271,  n.  3. 

Labials,  3, 1. 

Lac ,  gender  of,  66,  e.  ;  genitive  of,  70. 

Lacesso,  constr.,  225,  r.  1. 

Lcetor,  w.  abl.,  247,  1,  (2.);  acc.,  232,  (3.) 

Lcetus,  w.  abl.  or  gen.,  213,  r.  6,  (4.); 
cf.  r.  4,  (1.) 

Lampas,  declined,  86. 

Lapis,  declined,  57. 

Lar,  pr.,  284,  n.  1. 

Largus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  6,(3.); 
cf.  r.  4,  (1.) 

Lars,  genitive  of,  71. 

Lassus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  2. 

Lateo ,  w.  dat.  or  acc.,  223,  R.  2,  n.,  (6.), 
and  (1.),  (a.) 

Latin  grammar,  its  divisions,  1. 

Latinis ,  for  ludis  Latinis,  253.  n.  1. 

Latus,  altus,  and  longus ,  w.  acc.  of  space, 
236. 

Lavo  and  laxo,  scii,  se,  229,  r.  4,  1 ;  lavo , 
w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1. 

Laxo ,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Leading  clause,  subject,  and  verb,  201. 13. 

Lego  {ere),  its  form  in  the  compds.,  189, 
n.  2;  constr.,  230,  n.  1. 

Lenio ,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

-lentus,  adjs.  in,  128,  4. 

Letters,  2;  division  of,  3;  sounds  of,  7; 
numeral,  118,  7 ;  capital,  2,  2 ;  silent,  12,  r.  ; 
terminal  in  3d  decl.,  55. 

Levo,  w.  abl.,  251,  n.;  w.  gen.  poet., 
220,  2. 

Lex,  gender,  65,  2;  genitive,  78,  2,  (2.): — 
legem  dare,  constr.,  273,  2,  n.  4; — lege,  abl. 
of  manner,  247,  2. 

Liber,  w.  abl.  or  gen.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.);  cf. 
220,2;  and 251,  n.;  w. genit.,  213,  k.5,  ;4.); 
cf.  r.  4,  (1.) 

Libero,  w.  abl.,  251,  n.;  poetically,  w. 
genit.,  220,  2. 

Liberalis,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (1.) 

Libram  and  libras,  236,  R.  7. 

Libro,  abl.  w.  adj.  without  prep.,  254, 
r.  2. 

Licentia ,  w.  genit,  of  gerund,  275,  in., 
*.1,(1.) 

Liceo ,  w.  genit,  of  price,  214,  r.  3;  w. 
abl.,  252,  r.  1. 

Licet .  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2;  w.  subj.,  the  acc. 
with  the  inf.,  or  the  inf.  alone,  273,  4:  262, 
r.  4;  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2;  case  of 
the  predicate  after  licet  esse,  etc.,  269,  r.  5; 
w.  indicative  instead  of  subj.,  259,  r.  3,  (a.) 
— licet ,  conj.  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

Limiting  acc.,  234,  n. ; — abl.,  250  and  R. 

-limus,  superlatives  in,  125,  2. 

Linguals  and  liquids,  3, 1. 


INDEX. 


393 


Liquidus ,  pr.,  284,  E.  5.,  r.  3. 

- lis ,  adjs.  in,  comparison,  125,  2. 

Liter  as  dare ,  scribere  or  mittere ,  225,  m., 
r.  4;  ellipsis  of,  229,  r.  4,  2;  literas  or  lite¬ 
ris,  after  verbs  of  teaching,  231,  r.  3,  (c.) 

Litotes ,  324,  9. 

Litum ,  pr.,  284,  E.  1,  (2.) 

Loading,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249,  i. 

Locuples ,  genitive  of,  112,  1;  abl.,  113, 
e.  2;  gen.  plur.,  114,  e.  3;  115,  1,  (a.);  w. 
abl.  or  gen.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.) 

Locus ,  plur.  foci  and  foca,  92,  i.,  2;  foco 
and  focis,  abl.  of  place  without  a  preposi¬ 
tion,  254,  r.  2;  foco,  w.  gen.  for  predicate 
nom.,  210,  n.  3;  for  predicate  acc.,  230,  n. 
4;  loci  and  locorum ,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2  and  n. 
4 ;  locus  in  apposition  to  names  of  towns, 
237,  r.  2;  foco,  w.  gen.  of  price,  241,  r.  5; 
w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1;  w.  participles  in 
dus.  274,  r.  7 ;  w.  genitive  of  gerunds,  275, 
m-,  R-  1,  (1-) 

Logical  subject,  202,  3 ; — predicate,  203, 3. 

Long  syllable,  282,  2. 

Longe ,  w.  comparatives  and  superlatives, 
127,  3;  256,  n.;  w.  acc.  of  space,  236,  n.  1; 
longe  gentium ,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  (6.);  longius 
Without  quam ,  256,  r.  6. 

Longitudine ,  w.  genit,  of  measure,  211, 
r.  6,  (6.) 

Longus ,  w.  acc.  of  space,  236;  longum 
est ,  the  indicative  instead  of  the  subjunc¬ 
tive,  259,  r.  4,  (2.) 

-fo,  genitive  of  nouns  in,  77,  2,  (2.) 

Ludis ,  for  m  tempore  ludorum ,  253,  N.  1 ; 
257,  r.  9,  (2.) 

l/wo,  w.  abl.,  252,  r.  1. 

M. 

M,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  56,  I. ;  be¬ 
fore  d  changed  to  n,  134,  n.  1;  dropped  in 
the  3d  root  of  certain  verbs,  171,  e.  6;  final, 
quantity  of,  299,  3;  elided,  305,  2. 

•fflfl,  Greek  nouns  in,  genitive  plur.  of, 
84,  e.  2. 

Mactus ,  115,  5;  macte ,  w.  abl.,  247,  1, 
N.  2;  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.) 

Magis  and  maxime,^ use  of  in  forming 
comparatives  and  superlatives,  127,  1;  ple¬ 
onastic  with  malle ,  etc.,  256,  r.  13. 

Magnus ,  compared,  125,  5 ;  w.  supine  in 
u,  276.  m..  r.  1;  magnam  partem,  234,  n., 
r.  3;  magni,  parvi,  etc.,  w.  verbs  of  valu¬ 
ing,  214,  r.  1 ;  magno,  parvo ,  etc.,  w.  verbs 
of  buying,  etc.,  252,  r.  3. 

Male,  constr.  of  its  compounds  malefacio, 
maledico,  etc.,  225,  i. ;  male,  instead  of  abl. 
of  price,  252,  r.  3;  male,  bene ,  or  prudenter 
facio ;  male  or  bene  fit,  w.  quod,  273,  5,(1.) 

Malo,  conjugated,  178,  3;  constr.,  273,  4; 
262,  r.  4 ;  mallem,  meaning  of,  260,  n,  r.  2 ; 
coustr.  w.  abl.  like  a  comparative,  256,  k. 
16,(3.) 

Malus,  compared,  125,  5. 

Mando,  constr.,  223,  r.  2.  and  (1.),  (6.); 
273,  n.  4;  274,  r.  7,  (a.);  262,  r.  4. 

Mane ,  94;  192,  3. 

Maneo,  210,  r.  3,(2.);  compds.  of,  233, 
(3.),  n. 

Manifestus,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1. 


Manner,  ad  vs.  of,  191,  hi.,  abl.  of,  247; 
with  cum,  247,  2;  w.  de  or  ex,  247,  r.  3. 

Manus,  gender  of,  88 ;  ellipsis  of,  205,  r. 
7 ;  manum  injicere ,  233,  (1.) 

Mare,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  1,  (&.);  ellipsis  of, 
205,  r.  7. 

Mas,  gender  of,  62,  e.  1;  genitive.  72, 
e.  1;  genit,  plur.,  83,  ir.,  3,  e.  ;  used  to 
distinguish  the  sex  of  epicenes,  33,  n. 

Masculine  nouns  of  3d  decl.,  58;  excep¬ 
tions  in,  59 — 61; — masculine  csesura,  310, 
n.  1. 

Mater  familias,  declined,  91. 

Materia ,  w.  genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  III., 

R.  1.,  (1.) 

Material  nouns,  26,  6; — adjs.,  104,  8. 

Maturo,  scil.  se ,  229,  R.  4,  1;  w.  inf.,  271, 

N.  1. 

Me  and  mi  for  mihi,  133,  r.  1. 

Mea,  tua,  etc.,  w.  refert  and  interest, 219, 
r.  1  and  2. 

Means,  abl.  of,  247;  when  a  person,  247, 
R.  4 ;  w.  passive  verbs,  248. 

Measure  or  metre,  303 ;  Roman  measures 
of  length,  etc.,  327. 

Medeor,  w.  dat.,  223,  N.  (5.);  its  gerun¬ 
dive,  275,  ii.,  R.  1. 

Medicor,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Meditor ,  constr.,  273,  n.  1. 

Medius,  how  translated,  205,  r.  17 ;  w. 
genit.,  213;  w.  inter,  212,  r.4,  (2.);  w.  abl., 
213,  r.  4,  (5.);  its  place,  279,  7,  ( b .) 

Mel ,  genitive  of,  70,  e.  ;  56,  n.,  r.  6;  abl., 
82,  e.  5,  (6.);  94. 

Melas,  genitive  of,  72,  E.  2. 

Melius  fuit  and  erat  instead  of  subj.,  259, 
r.  3;  melius  est,  w.  dat.,  228,  1;  melius 
erit,  w.  perf.  inf.,  268,  *R.  2. 

Melos,  nom.  plur.  of,  83,  1;  94. 

Meme  and  mepte,  intensive,  133,  R.  2. 

Memini,  183,  3;  constr.,  216;  w.  present 
inf.,  268,  R.  1;  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1; 
memento,  poet.  w.  inf.,  271,  Jf.  3. 

Memor ,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (3.) ;  w.  subj., 
213,  r.  4. 

Memoro,  constr.,  272,  R.  6. 

-men,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  61,  4,  and  66; 
genitive,  71,  1;  -men  or  - mentum ,  verbals 
in,  102,  4. 

Mens;  in  mentem,  venit ,  constr.,  216, 
r.  3. 

Mercor ,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r. 

-met,  enclitic,  133,  r.  2 ;  139,  r.  1. 

Metalepsis,  324,  6. 

Metaphor,  324,  1. 

Metaplasm,  322,  1. 

Metathesis,  322,  9. 

Meto,  171,  e.  2. 

Metonymy,  324,  2. 

Metre,  303 ;  how  divided,  303,  3 ;  different 
kinds,  310 — 317. 

Metres,  compound,  318 ;  Horatian,  320. 

-metros,  Greek  nouns  in.  49,  2. 

Metuo ,  w.  ut  or  ne,  262,  r.  7;  w.  inf.,  271, 

N.  1. 

Meus,  voc.  sing,  masc.,  105,  R.  3;  139,  1; 
used  reflexively,  139,  r.  2;  how  declined, 
139;  meum  est,  211,  R.  8,  (3.),  (a.) 

Mi,  for  mihi,  133,  R.  1. 

Middle  voice  in  Greek,  248,  r.  1,  (2.) 


394 


INDEX, 


Mile,  Roman,  327. 

Miles ,  declined,  57;  gender,  30:  61,  2; 
genitive,  73,  2 ;  used  collectively,  209,  r.  11, 
(1.),  (6.);  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7. 

Military  expressions  without  cum,  249, 

III.,  R. 

Militia ,  construed  like  names  of  towns, 
221,  r.  3. 

Mille ,  how  used,  118,  6;  ellipsis  of,  327, 
r.  5. 


Million,  how  expressed,  118,  5,  (a.);  a 
million  sesterces,  327,  R.  6. 

Mm’  for  mikine ,  133,  R.  1. 

- mino ,  in  old  imperatives,  162,  5. 

Minor  and  compds,  w.  acc.  and  dat.,  223, 
(1.),  ( b .) 

Ministro ,  w.  dat.,  223,  r.  2;  and  (1.),  ( ft .) 

Minus  and  minimum ,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3, 
i*.  1;  minus ,  for  non ,  277,  i.,  r.  14;  minus 
without  quam ,  256,  r.  6. 

Miror ,  conjugated,  161 ;  w.  genit,  poet., 
220,  1;  constr.,  273,  n.  6. 

Mirum  est  ut ,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3;  mirum, 
quam ,  quantum ,  etc.,  264,  r.  4. 

Misceo ,  how  construed,  245,  ii.,  2,  andR. 
1;  224,  r.  3. 

Misereor ,  miseresco ,  miseret ,  miseritum 
est ,  and  miserescit ,  w.  gen.  of  the  thing,  215 ; 
miseret ,  etc.,  w.  acc.  of  the  person,  215,  n. 
3;  229,  r.  6;  and  w.  acc.  of  the  thing,  215, 
N.  2 ;  w.  acc.  of  degree,  215,  n.  3. 

Mitis,  declined,  109. 

Mitto ,  w.  ad  or  m,  225 ;  w.  two  dats., 227 ; 
273,  2,  (c.);  w.  participle  in  dws,  274,  r.  7; 
w.  inf.,  271,  n.  3;  w.  gwod,  273;  missum 
facio ,  274,  r.  4. 

ikfri,  initial,  12,  2,  r. 

Mobilis ,  pr.,  284,  e.  5,  R.  1. 

Moderor,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Modi  annexed  to  pronouns,  134,  R.  5; 
its  use,  211,  r.  6,  (5.) 

Modicus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (1.) 

Modified  subject,  202,  6;  itself  modified, 
202,  m.,  r.  1 predicate,  203,  5. 

Modify  or  limit,  in  what  sense  used,  202, 
4,  R. 

Modo  as  abl.  of  manner,  247,  2. 

Modo,  conditional  conj.,  198,  5;  w.  subj., 
263,2;  modo,  adv.,  193,  n.,  3;  modo  ne, 
263,  2,  n.  1;  modo — modo,  277,  R.  8. 

Modus,  w.  genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  ill., 
r.  1,  (1.) 

Mollio ,  229,  r.  4, 1. 

Moleste ,  cegre  or  graviter  fero ,  w.  quod , 
273,  n.  6. 

Moneo .  conjugated,  157;  constr.,  218, 
and  r.  1,  2 ;  273,  n .  4 ;  without  ut,  262,  r .  4 ; 
w.  acc.  and  inf.,  273,  n.  4,  (e.):  in  pass., 
234,  i. 

Money,  Homan,  327,  pp.  370 — 372. 

Monocolon,  319,  2. 

Monometer,  304,  2  ;  313,  i. 

Monoptotes,  94. 

Monosyllables,  quantity  of,  294,  (a.); 
299,  1;  their  place,  279,  8. 

Mons ,  gender  of,  64,  1. 

Months,  Roman,  326,  2;  names  of,  326; 
division  of,  326,  1 ;  gender  of  names  of,  28 ; 
115,  3;  abl.  of  names  in  er  and  is.  82,  e.  2, 
(a.) 


Moods,  143. 

Mora,  in  prosody,  282,  2. 

Mos  or  moris  est ,  constr.,  262,  n.  2;  w. 
genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  m.,  r.  1,  (1.);  more 
as  abl.  of  manner  without  cum,  247,  2. 

Motion  or  tendency,  verbs  of,  constr.. 
225,  lv. ;  237,  r.  3. 

Motum,  pr.,  284,  e.  5,  r.  1. 

Mountains,  gender  of  names  of,  28,  3. 

Moveo,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1;  251,  n.; 
motus ,  w.  abl.  of  cause,  247,  r.  2,  (ft.) 

mis,  nouns  in,  genitive  of,  77,  2,  (1.) 

Multiplicatives,  121,  1. 

Multo,  {are),  constr.,  217,  R.  5. 

Multus,  compared,  125,  5  ;  multi  et.  how 
used,  278,  r.  5;  multo ,  w.  comparatives, 
etc.,  127,  3;  256,  r.  16;  so  multum,  ib.,  n.; 
multum ,  w.  genitive,  212,  r.  3.  n.  1 ;  as 
ace.  of  degree,  212,  (2.);  multus  instead  of  an 
adverb,  205,  R.  15. 

Mus,  gender  of,  30;  67,  4;  genitive,  76, 
E.  3;  genit,  plur.,  83,  n.,  3. 

Munificus,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  5,  (1.) 

Mutes,  division  of,  3,  1;  a  mute  and 
a  liquid  in  prosody,  283,  iv.,  e.  2 

Mutilus,  w.  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (5.) 

Muto ,  constr.,  252,  r.  5;  229,  r.  4, 1. 

N. 


N,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  n. ;  nouns  in, 
gender  of,  58;  61;  genitive  of,  70;  71; 
final,  quantity  of,  299,  e.  ;  dropped  in  the 
3d  root  of  certain  verbs,  171,  e.  6. 

-nactis,  genitive  of  Greek  names  in,  78, 
2,  (1.) 

Nam  and  enim,  198,  7,  R.,  (a.);  place  of, 
279,  3,  (a.)  and  (c.) 

Names  of  persons,  their  order,  279, 9,  (6.) ; 
of  nations  instead  of  those  of  countries.  255, 
r.  3;  237,  r.  5. 

Narro,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1,  and  r. 
6;  narror,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

Nascor,  w.  abl.,  246,  R.  1;  nascitur ,  w. 
subj.,  262,  r.  3,  n.  2. 

Nato,  232,  (2.),  n.  1;  constr.  of  compds., 
2&3,  (3.),  n. 

Natura  fert,  constr.,  262,  r.  3.,  n.  2. 

Naturale  est ,  w.  ut  and  the  subj.,  262, 
R.  3,  N.  3. 


Natus,  w.  abl.,  246;  natus,  1  old,’  w.  acc., 
236,  n.  3;  poet.  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  3. 

Natu,  94 ;  250,  1;  126,  4. 

Nauci  habere ,  214,  r.  1. 

-n$,  enclitic  conjunction,  198,  11 ;  quan¬ 
tity  of,  295,  R.;  as  an  interrogative  parti¬ 
cle,  198,  11,  R.,  (c.);  its  place,  279,  3,  (r.) 

Ne,  adv.,  the  primitive  negative  particle, 
191,  hi.,  r.  3,  p.  158;  w.  quidem,  ib.;  279, 
3,  (</.);  w.  subjunctives  used  as  impera¬ 
tives,  ib. ;  in  wishes,  asseverations  and  con¬ 
cessions,  ib. ;  260,  R.  6,  (ft.)  with  the  imper¬ 
ative,  267,  R.  1 ;  ne  multa ,  ne  plura ,  etc., 
229,  r.  3,  2; — in  intentional  clauses,  262, 
r.  5;  ne  non,  for  ut,  262,  N.  4;  ellipsis  of, 
262,  r.  6;  ne,  for  nedum,  262,  n.  5. 

Nec  or  neque,  198,  1 ;  nec  non  or  neque 
non.  ib. ;  nec — nec.  with  the  singular,  209, 
R.  12,  (5.),  (a.);  neque ,  for  et  ne.  after  ut 
and  ne,  262,  R.  6,  N.  4; — nec  ipse,  207,  R.  27, 


INDEX. 


395 


(&.);  nec  is,  207,  R.  26,  (c.);  necne  or  annon, 
265,  r.  2;  necdum,  277,  i.,  R.  16;  its  place, 
279,  3,  (a.) 

Necesse,  defective  adj.,  115,  5;  necesse  est 
«i,  etc.,  262,  r.  3,  n.  2;  without  ut,  262, 
N.  4;  necesse  fuit ,  the  indic,  for  the  subj., 
259,  r.  3;  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2;  w. 
predicate  dat., 269,  r.  5;  273,  4. 

Necessity,  how  expressed,  162,  15. 

Necessario,  after  comparatives,  256,  R.  9. 

Nedum,  w.  subj.,  262,  n.  5;  without  a 
verb,  ib. 

Nefas,  gender  of.  62,  e.  2:  94:  w.  supine 
in  u ,  276,  ni.,  r.  2. 

Negatives,  two,  their  force,  277,  R.  3 — 5; 
negative  joined  to  the  conjunction,  as,  nec 
quisquam,  nec  ullus,  etc.,  instead  of  et  nemo, 
et  nullus ,  etc.,  278,  r.  9. 

Negligens ,  constr.,  213,  R.  4,  (2.) 

Nego,  instead  of  non  dico,  279,  15,  (6.); 
w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1,  and  r.  6;  negor, 
w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Negotium,  ellipsis  of,  211,  R.  8,  N. 

Nemo,  94  and  95;  for  nullus,  207,  R.  31; 
nemo  est  qui,  264,  7,  N.  2;  nemo  non, 
‘  every  one,’  277,  r.  5,  (c.) 

Nempe,  191,  r.  4;  198,  7,  R.,  (a.) 

Neoterism,  325,  3. 

Nequa  and  nequce ,  138,  2. 

Nequam,  indeclinable,  115,4;  compared, 
125.  5. 

Neque,  see  nec ;  for  et  non,  198,  1,  (c.); 
neque — neque,  or  nec — nec,  neque — nec,  nec 
— neque,  198,  1,  («.);  neque — et,  ib.;  neque 
w.  general  negatives,  279,  15,  (6.);  neque 
non,  277,  R.  3:  neque  quisquam .  ullus,  urn- 
quam,  etc.,  278,  r.  9. 

Nequeo,  how  conjugated,  182,  n.  ;  w.  inf., 
271,  n.  4. 

Ne  quis  or  nequis,  how  declined,  138,  2 ; 
ne  quis,  instead  of  ne  quisquam,  207,  R.  31; 
278,  r.  9. 

Nerio,  genitive  of,  69,  e.  2. 

Nescio  an ,  198,  11,  r.,  (e.);  265,  R.  3; 
nescio  quis,  265,  r.  4;  nescio  quomodo,  ib. ; 
w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272.  n.  1. 

Nescius ,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (3.) 

-neus  and  -nus,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (6.) 

Neuter,  nouns,  34;  not  found  in  1st  and 
5th  decls.,  40,  9;  of  2d  decl.,  46;  54;  of  3d 
decl.,  66 ;  exes,  in,  66;  67 ;  adjs.  used  adverb¬ 
ially,  205,  r.  10;  adjs.  and  adj.  prons,  w. 
genit.,  212,  r.  3;  acc.  of  denoting  degree  w. 
another  acc.  after  transitive  verbs,  231,  R.  5 ; 
verbs,  141 ;  form  of,  142,  1 ;  neuter  passives, 
142,  2;  neuter  verbs  with  cognate,  etc., 
subjects,  234,  hi.  ;  w.  cognate  acc.,  232,  (1.) ; 
w.  acc.  of  degree,  etc.,  232,  (3.);  w.  abl.  of 
agent,  248,  r.  2;  used  impersonally,  184,2; 
in  the  passive  voice,  142,  r.  2 ;  participles 
of,  162,  18 ;  neuters  of  possessive  pronouns 
and  adjs.  instead  of  the  genitive  of  their 
personal  pronouns,  or  of  a  corresponding 
noun,  211,  r.  8,  (3.),  (a.)  and  (6.) 

Neutral  passive  verbs,  142,  3. 

Neve  or  neu,  198,  8;  after  ut  and  ne,  262, 
N.  4. 

Ni  or  nisi ,  198,  5,  R.,  (&.);  nisi,  4  except,’ 
261,  r.  6;  277,  r.  16;  nisi  quod ,  ib.;  nisi 
vero ,  and  nisi  forte,  4  unless  perhaps,’  ib. 


Nihil,  nihilum,  94;  w.  genitive,  212 ,r.  1; 
instead  of  non,  277,  R.  2,  (6.);  232,  (3.); 
nihil  aliud  quam  or  nisi,  277,  r.  16;  nihil, 
acc.  w.  cestimo  and  moror,  214,  n.  2  nihili 
w. facio,  214;  as  acc.  of  degree,  215,  n.  3: 
232,  (3.);  nihil  est  quod,  etc.,  264,  7,  n.  2; 
nihil  abest ,  quin,  262,  n.  7;  nihil  antiquius 
habeo  or  duco  quam ,  w.  subj.,  273,  N.  1; 
nihildum,  277,  t.,  R.  16. 

Nimius,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

Nimio,  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  16;  as 
abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

-nis,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  63,  1. 

Nitor,  w.  abl.,  245,  ii.  ;  w.  in  or  ad,  245, 
ir.,  r.  2;  w.  inf.  or  subj.,  273,  1,  n.  1. 

Nix,  56,  r.  2;  genit,  sing.,  78,  (3.);  genit, 
plur.,  83,  ii.,  3. 

No,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Noctu  or  nocte ,  253,  n.  1. 

Nolo,  conjugated,  178,  2;  constr.,  273,  4; 
noli  w.  inf.,  paraphrasing  the  imperative, 
267,  n.  and  r.  3;  nollem ,  meaning  of,  260, 
II.,  r.  2. 

Nomen  est,  constr.,  226,  R.  1;  211,  r.  2, 
N.;  nomine ,  without  a  prep,  before  the 
genitive  following  verbs  of  accusing,  217, 
r.  2,  ( b .);  its  place,  279,  9,  (b.) 

Nominative,  37;  construction  of,  209; 
210;  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  land  2;  wanting, 
209,  r.  3;  w.  inf.,  209,  r.  5;  after  interjec¬ 
tions,  209,  r.  13;  formation  in  3d  decl.  from 
the  root,  56;  plural,  3d  decl.,  83;  of  adjs. 
of  3d  decl.,  114.  See  Subject-nominative 
and  Predicate-nominative. 

Nomino,  230;  pass.,  210,  r.  3,  (3.) 

Non,  191,  r.  3;  ellipsis  of,  after  non  modo, 
etc.,  followed  by  ne  quidem .  277,  R.  6;  non 
quo,  non  quod,  non  quin,  262,  r.  9;  non  est 
quod,  cur,  quare,  or  quamobrem ,  w.  subj., 
264,  7,  n.  3;  non  before  a  negative  word, 
277,  R.  3; — before  ne  quidem ,  277,  r.  6; 
position  of,  279,  15,  (&.);  non,  rare  with  the 
imperative,  267,  R.  1;  difference  between 
non  and  haud,  191,  r.  3;  non  nemoy  non 
nulli,  non  nihil,  non  numquam ,  different 
from  nemo  non,  etc.,  277,  R.  5,  (c.);  non 
nihil,  to  some  extent,  232,  (3.)  ;  nonne,  198, 
11,  r.,  (c.) ;  non  modo — sed  etiam ,  and  non 
modo — sed,  equivalent  to  non  dicam — sed, 
277,  R.  10;  non  dubito,  non  est  dubium, 
non  ambigo ,  non  procul ,  non  abest,  quin, 
262,  2,  n.  7;  non  quo  non,  non  quod  non, 
or  non  quia  non ,  instead  of  non  quin  ;  non 
eo  quod ,  non  ideo  quod,  for  non  quod ,  262, 
r.  9;  non  priusquam,  non  nisi,  w.  abl.  ab¬ 
solute,  257,  n.  4;  nondum,  277,  i.,  R.  16; 
non  in  the  second  member  of  adversative 
sentences  without  et  or  vero,  278,  R.  11; 
non  nisi,  separated,  279,  3,  (d.) 

Nonce,  4  the  Nones,’  326,  2. 

Nonnullus,  pronominal  adj.,  139,  5,  (1.) 

Nos,  for  ego,  r.  7. 

Nosco,  171,  e.  6. 

Noster,  how  declined,  139,  3. 

Nostras ,  how  declined,  139,  4,  ( b .) 

Nostrum,  how  formed,  133,  3;  different 
use  of  nostrum  and  nostri,  212,  R.  2,  n.  2. 

4  Not  ’  and  4  nor,’  how  expressed  with  the 
imperative,  267,  R.  1;  with  subj.,  260,  r.  6, 
(6.) 


396 


INDEX. 


Nouns,  26 — 103;  proper,  common,  ab¬ 
stract,  collective,  and  material,  26;  gender 
of,  27 — 34 ;  number  of,  35 ;  cases  of,  36,  37 ; 
declension  of,  38—40;  nouns  of  3d  decl., 
mode  of  declining,  55 ;  compound,  declen¬ 
sion  of.  91 ;  irregular,  92 ;  variable,  92 ;  de¬ 
fective,  in  case,  94;  in  number,  95,  96; 
sing,  and  plur.  having  different  meanings, 
97;  redundant,  99;  verbal,  102;  derivation 
of,  100 — 102;  composition  of,  103;  how 
modified,  201,  in.,  R.  1;  used  as  adjs.,  205, 
E.  11;  extent  given  to  the  term  noun,  24, 
E. 

Novum  est  ut ,  262,  r.  3,  n.  2. 

Nox ,  declined,  57 ;  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (4.); 
genit,  plur.,  83,  ii. ,  3. 

Noxius ,  w.  genit,  of  the  crime,  213,  r.  1, 
(3.);  217,  R.  1,  (a.);  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (a.) 

-ns,  participles  in,  abl.  of,  113,  2;  w’hen 
used  as  nouns,  82,  e.  4;  nouns  in,  genit, 
plur.  of,  83,  n.,  4;  genit,  sing,  of,  77,  2,  (2.) 
and  e.  1;  participials  and  participles  in, 
construction  of,  213,  R.  1  and  3. 

Nubilo ,  scil.  ccelo,  257,  9,  (1.) 

Nubo,  w.  dat.,  223;  quantity  of  u  in 
compds.  of,  285,  2,  e.  3. 

Nudo ,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Nudus ,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  r.5,  (4.); 
250,  R,(l.);  w.acc.,213,  r.4,  (3.) 

Nullus ,  how  declined,  107 ;  a  pronominal 
adj.,  139,  5,  (1.);  for  non,  205,  u.  15;  refers 
to  more  than  two,  212,  r.  2,  n.,  (b.)  nullus 
est ,  qui ,  w.  subj.,  264,  7,  n.  2;  nullus  non , 
277,  R.  5,  (c.) ;  nullius  and  nullo ,  instead  of 
neminis  and  nemine ,  207,  R.  31,  (c.);  nul- 
lusdum ,  277,  i.,  R.  16. 

Num ,  with  its  compounds,  meaning  of, 
198,  11,  R.,  (6.);  num — an,  used  only  in 
direct  questions,  265,  R.  2. 

Number,  26,  7 ;  of  nouns,  35 ;  of  verbs, 
146 ;  of  the  verb  when  belonging  to  two  or 
more  subjects,  209,  r.  12;  when  belonging 
to  a  collective  noun,  209,  k.  11. 

Numbers,  cardinal,  117,  118;  ordinal, 
119,  120;  distributive,  119,  120;  w.  genit, 
plur.,  212,  r.  2,  (4.) 

Numerals,  adjs.,  104,105;  classes  of,  117; 
placed  in  the  relative  clause,  206,  (7.),  (&.); 
w.  genit,  plur.,  212,  r.  2,  (4.);  letters,  118, 
7;  adverbs,  119;  192,  3;  multiplicative,  121; 
proportional,  temporal,  and  interrogative, 
121. 

Nummus ,  327,  R.  3,  (b.) 

Numquam  non ,  and  non  numquam,  277, 
R.  4,  (c.) 

Numguis ,  num  quis ,  or  numqui ,  etc., 
how  declined,  137,  3 ;  numquis  est  qui ,  264, 
7,  n.  2;  numqua  and  numquae ,  137,  R.  4; 
numquid ,  as  an  interrogative  particle,  198, 

11. 

Numquisnam ,  137,  4. 

Nunc,  use  of.  277,  r.15;  nunc — nunc,  277, 
r.  8;  nunc  and  etiamnvnc ,  w.  imperfect 
and  perfect,  259,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Nuncupo ,  w.  two  aecs.,  230.  n.  1;  nuncu¬ 
por,  210,  r.  3,  (3.) 

Nundinae,  326,  2,  (11.) 

Nuntio ,  273,  2,  ic.);  272,  n.  1;  pass.  w. 
inf.,  271,  n.  1;  nuntiatur,  constr.,  271,  r.  2. 

Nuper ,  modo  and  mox ,  191,  r.  6. 


Nusquam,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  (b.) 

Nux,  pr.,284,8,  5,  R.  2. 

- nx ,  nouns  in,  genitive  of,  65,  6,  7. 

0. 

O,  sound  of,  7,  8 ;  changed  to  u  in  form¬ 
ing  certain  nominatives  from  the  root,  56, 
I.,  r.  4,  and  n.,  r.  4;  nouns  in,  gender  of, 
58,  59;  genitive  of,  69;  Greek  nouns  in, 
gender  of,  59,  e.  3;  genitive  of,  69,  e.  3; 
amplificatives  in,  100,  4,  (a.);  verbals  in, 
102,  6,  (c.);  adverbs  in,  192;  increment  in, 
of  3d  decl.,  287,  3;  of  plur.,  288;  of  verbs, 
290;  final,  quantity  of,  285,  R.  4;  297; 
sometimes  used  for  u  after  v,  322,  8;  53; 
178, 1,  n. 

O,  interj.  w.  nom.,  209,  r.  15;  w.  acc., 
238,2;  w.  voc.,  240,  r.  1;  O  si,  w.  subj., 
263,  1. 

Ob,  government  of,  195,  4;  275.  hi.,  r.  3; 
in  composition,  196,  i.,  9;  construction  of 
verbs  compounded  with,  224;  of  adjs.,  222, 
r.  1,  (b.) 

Obedio ,  how  formed,  189,  n.  3. 

Obequito ,  constr.,  233,  (3.) 

Obeo,  constr.,  233,  (3.),  n.  ;  pass.,  234,  iit. 

Object,  of  an  active  verb,  229;  the  dative 
of  the  remote  object,  223,  n. 

Objective  genitive,  211,  r.  2;  after  adjs., 
213;  dat.  for  objective  genitive,  211,  r.  5; 
— propositions  after  what,  273,  n.  8. 

Oblique  cases,  37 ;  their  place,  279,  10 
and  2. 

Obliviscor,  w.  genitive  or  acc.,  216;  w. 
acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Obnoxius,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (b.) 

Obruo,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  r.  1. 

Obsecro,  w.  two  accs.,  231,  R.  1. 

Obsequor,  obtempero,  and  obtrecto,  w.  dat., 
223,  r.  2. 

Observo,  w.  ut  or  ne,  262.  n.  3. 

Obses,  gender  of,  30 ;  genitive  of,  73,  e.  1. 

Obsonor,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1. 

Obsto ,  and  obsisto ,  quominus ,  etc.,  262, 
r.  11. 

Obtemperatio ,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  8. 

Obtrector,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Obvius,  w.  dat.,  222,  b.  1,  ( b .) 

Obviam ,  w.  dat.,  228,  1. 

Occasio ,  w.  genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  ni., 

R.  1,  (1. ) 

Occumbo,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  acc.,  224  r.  5. 

Occurro,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  acc.,  233,  (3.)j 
occurrit  ut,  262.  b.  3,  n.  1. 

Ocior ,  comparison  of,  126,  1. 

- ocis ,  genitive  in,  78,  (4.) :  112,  2. 

Octonarius,  304,  2; — iambic,  314,  m. 

Odi,  183,  1. 

- odis ,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  5;  75,  e.  1. 

- odus ,  Greek  nouns  in,  49,  2. 

(E,  how  pronounced,  9';  in  nom.  plur.  2d 
decl.,  54,  2. 

CEdipus ,  genitive  of,  76,  E.  5. 

(Eta,  gender  of,  42. 

Officio,  w.  quominus,  etc.,  262,  R.  11. 

Ohe,  pr.,  283,  i.,  e.  5;  295,  e.  5. 

Oi,  how  pronounced,  9,  1. 

- ois ,  genitives  in,  75,  e.  2;  wolds  in,  pr., 
283,  i.,  E.  6,  (3.) 


INDEX. 


397 


Old,  how  expressed  in  Latin,  236,  N.  3. 

Oleo  and  redoleo ,  w.  acc.,  232,  (2.) 

Ollus ,  for  ille,  whence  olli ,  masc.  plur.  for 
illi,  134,  r.  1. 

- olus ,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3,  A.  2. 

-om,  for  -wm,  53. 

Omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable,  see  syn¬ 
cope — of  a  word,  see  ellipsis. 

Omnes ,  w.  genitive  plur.,  212,  R.  2,  n.  6; 
omnium ,  w.  superlatives,  127,  4,  n.  2; 
omnia ,  acc.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

-on,  Greek  nouns  in,  54,  1;  for  -orum, 
54,  4;  -on,  roots  in,  of  3d  decl.,  56,  ir.,  R.l; 
nouns  in,  of  3d  decl.,  58  and  61,  5 ;  genit, 
plur.  in,  of  Greek  nouns,  83,  n.,  6;  -os  and 
-on,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  changed  to  -us 
and  -um,  54,  1. 

Onustus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.) 

Operam  dare ,  w.  ut ,  273,  n.  1;  w.  dat.  of 
gerund,  275,  m.,  r.  2,  (1.);  w.  acc.  id,  232, 
(3.); — opera  mecL,  equivalent  to  per  me,  247, 
R.  4. 

Opinio  est,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  r.  1; 
opinione  after  comparatives,  256,  R.  9  j  its 
place,  279,  n.  1. 

Opinor,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Oportet,  w.  inf.  as  its  subject,  269,  r.  2 ; 
w.  inf.,  acc.  with  the  inf.,  or  the  subj.,  273, 
N.  5;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Oportebat,  oportuit,  the  indic,  instead  of 
the  subj.,  259,  r.  3,  (a.) 

Oppido,  w.  adjs.,  127,  2. 

Oppidum ,  in  apposition  to  names  of 
towns,  237,  R.  2,  (6.) 

Oppleo,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  R.  1. 

Optabilius  erat ,  the  indic,  instead  of  the 
subj.,  259,  r.  3. 

Optime ,  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

Opto,  271,  r.  4;  273,4;  opto,  w.  subj., 
without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Opulentus,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Opus,  work,  declined,  57 ;  opus,  need, 
w.  genit,  and  acc.,  211,  r.  11;  w.  abl.  of 
the  thing,  243 ;  as  subject  or  predicate  of 
est,  243,  r.  2;  210,  r.  5;  w.  perfect  par¬ 
ticiple,  243,  r.  1;  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  nr., 
r.  2;  opus  est .  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

-or,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  58;  61;  genit, 
of,  70;  71;  verbals  in,  102, 1;  102  6. 

Oratio  obliqua,  266,  1,  N.,  and‘2;  273,  3; 
tenses  in,  266,  r.  4. 

Orbo,  w.  abl.,  251.  N. 

Orbus,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (1.);  or  genit.,  213, 
R.  5,  (4.) 

Order,  advs.  of,  191.  1. 

Ordinal  numbers,  119, 120 ;  in  expressions 
of  time,  236,  r.  2. 

Origin,  participles  denoting,  w.  abl.,  246; 
from  a  country  expressed  by  a  patrial,  246, 
R.  3. 

-Qris,  genitives  in,  76;  112,2;  -oris,  genit, 
in,  75. 

-orium,  verbals  in,  102,  8. 

Oriundus,  constr.,  246. 

Oro,  w.  twoaccs.,  231,  r.  1;  w.  ut,  ne,  or 
inf.,  273,  2,  n.  4;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Orthoepy,  6 — 23. 

Orthography,  2 — 5 ;  figures  of,  322. 

Ortus ,  w.  abl.,  246. 

-os,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  54,  1;  of  3d 
34 


decl.,  gender  of,  58  and  61,  3;  genit,  of,  75; 
Greek  genitives  in,  68,  1;  final  in  plural 
aces.,  sound  of,  8,  e.  3;  quantity  of,  300. 

Os,  {oris),  gender  of,  61,  3;  genit,  of,  75; 
wants  genit,  plur.,  94. 

Os,  {ossis),  gender  of,  61,  3;  genit,  of,  75, 
e.  1. 

Ossa,  gender  of,  42,  1. 

Ostendo,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

- osus ,  adjs.  in,  128,  4. 

-otis,  genit,  in,  75 ;  112,  2. 

‘  Ought  ’  or  ‘  should,’  expressed  by  indie, 
of  debeo,  259,  R.  4,  (2.) 

-ox,  nouns  in,  genit,  of,  78,  2,  (4.) 

Oxymoron,  324,  26. 

P. 

P,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  56,  i. ;  when 
inserted  after  m  in  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs, 
171,  3. 

Pace  or  in  pace,  253,  N.  1;  257,  R.  9,  (2.) 

Palatals,  3,  1. 

Palleo,  w.  acc.,  232,  N.  1. 

Pan,  acc.  of,  80,  r. 

Panthus ,  voc.  of,  54,  5. 

%  Par,  abl.  of.  82,  e.  1,  (6.);  113,  e.  3;  su¬ 
perlative  of,  126,  2;  w.  dat.  or  genit.,  222, 
r.  2,  (a.);  w.  cum  and  the  abl.,  222,  r.  6; 
par  erat,  indie,  instead  of  subj.,  269,  r.  3, 
(a.);  pr.,  284,  n.  1 ;  par  ac ,  198,  3. 

Parabola,  324,  30. 

Paradigms,  of  nouns,  1st  decl.,  41;  2d 
decl.,  46;  3d  decl.,  57;  4th  decl.,  87;  5th 
decl.,  90:— of  adjs.  of  1st  and  2d  decl.,  105 
— 107;  3d  decl.,  108 — 111; — of  verbs,  sum, 
153;  1st  conj.,  155,  156;  2d  conj.,  157;  3d 
con  j.,  158,  159;  4th  conj.,  160;  deponent, 
161;  periphrastic,  conj.,  162;  defective,  183; 
impersonal,  184. 

Paragoge,  322,  6. 

Paratus ,  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Parco,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  n.,  (a.);  parci¬ 
tur  mihi,  ib.,  (c.);  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  3. 

Parcus ,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  2l3,  r.  5,  (2.); 
w.  in,  213,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Paregmenon,  324,  24. 

Parelcon,  323,  2,  (1.) 

Parenthesis,  324,  4,  (6.) 

Pariter  ac,  198,  3. 

Paro,  constr.,  273,  N.  1 ;  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Paroemiac  verse,  304,  2. 

Paronomasia,  324,  25. 

Pario ,  compds.  of,  163,  E.  4. 

Parsing,  281,  ill. 

Pars,  acc.  of,  79,  4;  abl.  of,  82,  e.  5,  (a.); 
ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7;  its  use  in  fractional 
expressions,  l2l,  6;  magnam  and  maxi- 
mam  partem ,  234,  n.,  R.  3;  multis  partibus , 
256,  r.  16,  (3.) 

Part,  acc.  of,  234,  ir. 

Particeps ,  genit,  of,  112,2;  genit,  plur. 
of,  114,  e.  2;  115,  1,  (a.) — w.  genit.,  213, 
R.  1,  (3.) 

Participial  adjs.,  130; — of  perfect  tense, 
meaning  of,  with  tenses  of  sum,  162, 12,  (2.) ; 
w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (2.) 

Participles,  25  and  148,  1 ;  in  us,  how  de¬ 
clined,  105.  r.  2;  in  ns,  do.,  Ill;  abl.  sing, 
of,  113, 2 ;  participles  of  active  verbs,  148, 


398 


INDEX, 


1,  (2.) ;  of  neuter  verbs,  148, 1,  (3.) ;  162, 16  ; 
of  deponent  verbs,  162,  17;  of  neuter  pas¬ 
sive  verbs,  162,  18;  in  - rus ,  genit,  plur.  of, 
162,19;  pres,  and  perf.  compounded  with 
in ,  162,  21;  when  they  become  adjs.  or 
nouns,  162,  22;  cases  of  in  compd.  tenses, 
162,  12,  13;  sometimes  with  esse  indeclina¬ 
ble,  162,  13,  (1.);  in  -rus  with  sum ,  force  of, 
162,  14;  how  modified,  202,  if.,  (3.);  agree¬ 
ment  of,  205;  agreement  with  a  predicate 
nom.  instead  of  the  subject,  205,  r.  5; 
gender  when  used  impersonally,  205,  R.  18; 
perfect  denoting  origin,  with  abl.,  246;  in 

abl.  absolute,  256; — passive  of  naming,  etc., 
with  predicate  abl.,  257,  r.  11;  their  gov¬ 
ernment,  274;  their  time  how  determined, 
274,  2,  and  3;  perfect  in  circumlocution, 
for  abl.  of  cause,  247,  1,  r.  2,  (b.);  with 
habeo ,  etc.,  274,  2,  r.  4;  for  a  verbal  noun, 
274,  2,  r.  5;  for  clauses,  274,  3. 

Participo ,  poetically,  w.  genit.,  220,  2. 

Particles ,  190,  1. 

Partim,  79,  4;  partim ,  w.  genit.,  212, 
r.  4;  partim — partim ,  w.  genit,  or  ex,  277, 
r.  8. 

Partitive  nouns,  212,  r.  1 ; — adjs.,  104,  9; 
— partitives  with  plur.  verbs,  209,  r.  11; 

211,  r.  1;  w.  genit,  plur.,  212;  ellipsis  of, 

212,  r.  2,  n.  3;  w.  acc.  or  abl.,  212,  r.  2, 
i*.  4;  genit,  sing,  after  neuter  adjs.  and 
pronouns,  212,  r.  3. 

Parts  of  speech,  24,  2  and  3. 

Parum ,  its  meaning,  191,  hi.  ;  compared, 
194,  4;  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  4. 

Parumper ,  its  meaning,  191,  ii. 

Parvus ,  compared,  125,  5;  parvi ,  w. 
verbs  of  valuing,  214,  r.  1,  (a.\  (1.) ; 
parvo,  with  comparatives,  256,  r.  16;  after 
cpstino ,  214,  r.  2,  n.  2;  as  abl.  of  price, 
252,  r.  3. 

Pasco,  171,  E.  6- 

Passive  voice,  141,  2;  construction  of, 
234 ;  passive  voice  with  a  reflexive  pronoun 
understood  as  the  agent  equivalent  to  the 
middle  voice  in  Greek,  248,  r.  1,  (2.);  with 

acc.  of  the  thing  234,  i. 

Pateo ,  w.  two  dats.,  227,  R.  1. 

Pater ,  declined,  57. 

Pater-familias,  etc.,  how  declined,  43,  2. 

Pathetic  or  emotive  word,  279,  2,  (e.) 

Patior,  273,  4;  262,  r.  4;  patiens ,  w.gen., 

213,  R.  1,  (2.);  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  3. 

Patrial  nouns.  100,2;  in  o,  genitive  of, 
69.  k.  ; — adjs.,  104,  10;  128,  6,  (a.);  ellipsis 
cf  their  substantive,  205,  r.  7i  pronouns, 
139,  4. 

Patrocinor ,  w.  dat.,  223,  r.  2. 

Patronymics,  100,  1 ;  in  -es,  genit,  plur. 
in  um  instead  of  - arum ,  43,  2;  in  as  and  is 
used  aa  adjs.,  205.  r.  11;  quantity  of  their 
penult,  291,  4  and  5. 

Pauca ,  acc.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Paulisper ,  its  meaning,  191,  ii. 

Paulo ,  w.  comparatives,  256,  r.  16;  pau¬ 
lum  abest  quin ,  272,  n.  7. 

Pauper,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2;  defective,  115, 
1,  (a.);  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (2.) 

Pavidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1. 

Pavor  estne,  etc.,  262,  n.  3. 

Pecus ,  (- udis ),  genit,  of,  67,  e.  3. 


Peculiaris,  222,  R.  2,  (a.) 

Pedes,  gender  of,  31,  2;  genit,  of,  73,  2; 
for  pedites,  209,  r.  11,  (1.)  (6.) 

Pejero ,  pr.,  285,  2,  e.  1. 

Pelagus,  gender  of,  51;  acc.  plur.  of,  54, 

1  Pello,  171,  E.  1,  ( b .);  251,  N. 

Pendo ,  w.  genit,  of  value,  214;  w.  abl.  of 
price,  252,  r.  1. 

Pensi  and  pili  habere,  214,  R.  1. 

Pentameter  verse,  304,  2  ;  311;  312,  ix.,  X. 

Penthemimeris,  304,  5. 

Peuult,  13 ;  quantity  of,  291 ;  of  proper 
names,  293. 

Per,  its  uses,  195,  R.  9;  247,  1,  R.  1;  w. 
the  means  when  a  person,  24^  3,  r.  4;  in 
adjurations,  279,  10,  ( e .);  in  composition, 
196,1.,  10;  per  compounded  with  adjectives 
strengthens  their  meaning,  127,  2. 

Perceiving,  verbs  of,  their  construction, 

272. 

Percipio,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1;  per - 
ceptum  habeo,  instead  of  percepi ,  274,  R.  4. 

Percontor ,  w.  two  accs.,  231,  R.  1. 

Perennis ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  1. 

Perdo,  w.  capitis ,  217,  R.  3;  perditum  ire, 
for  perdere,  276,  ir.,  r.2. 

Perduim,  for  perdam,  162,  1. 

Perfect  tense,  145,  iv. ;  definite  and  in¬ 
definite,  145,  iv.,  R.;  old  form  in  sim,  162, 
9;  quantity  of  dissyllabic  perfects,  284,  e.  1. 
perfect  participles  translated  actively,  162, 
16;  both  actively  and  passively,  162,  17, 
(a.); — of  neuter  verbs.  162,  18;  of  imper¬ 
sonal  verbs,  184,  r.  2;  the  perf.  subj.,  260, 
n.,  r.  1,  (3.);  in  the  connection  of  tenses, 
258;  signification  of  perf.  definite,  259,  r.  1, 
(2.),  (a.);  of  perf.  indefinite,  ib.,  (&.)— (tf.J; 
perf.  subj.,  signification  of,  260,  n.,  r.  1, 
(3.),  and  r.  4  and  6;  in  the  protasis,  261,  2 
and  r.  2  and  3;  263,  R. ;  perf.  subj.  for  im¬ 
perative,  267,  R.  2;  perf.  inf.,  how  used, 
268,  r.  1,  (a.);  perf.  participle,  274,  2  and 
n.;  supplies  the  place  of  a  pres.  pass,  par¬ 
ticiple,  274,  r.  3,  (a.);  perf.  part,  of  a  pre¬ 
ceding  verb  used  to  express  the  completion 
of  an  action,  ib.,  (6.);  w.  habeo,  274,  r.  4; 
w .do,  reddo ,  curo,  etc.,  ib.;  supplies  the 
place  of  a  verbal  noun,  274,  r.  5;  used  in 
circumlocution  for  abl.  of  cause,  247,  R.  2, 
(6.);  neuter  perf.  pass,  participle  used  as 
the  subject  of  a  verb,  274,  r.  5,  (6.) 

Perficio  ut ,  273,  n.  2. 

Pergo,  constr.,  225,  iv.;  w.  inf.,  271, N.l. 

Perhibeo ,  230,  N .  1;  272,  n.  1,  and  r.  6; 
perhibeor ,  210,  r.  3,  (3.);  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Periclitor ,  capitis  or  capite ,  217,  R.  3. 

Period,  280. 

Perinde,  191,  hi.  ; — ac  or  atque,  198,  3,  R. 

Periphrasis,  323,  2,  (4.) 

Periphrastic  conjugations,  162,  14  and  15. 

Peritus,  213,  R.  1,  and  r.  4;  275,  (2.); 
270,  r.  1;  w.  ad,  213,  r.  4,  (2.);  225,  in., 
r.  1,  (2.) 

Permisceo ,  245,  n.,  2,  and  r.  1  and  2. 

Permitto,  73,4;  w.  part.  fut.  pass.,  274, 
r.  7 ;  w.  subj.  without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Permuto,  252,  r.  5. 

Pernox,  genit,  of,  112,  2. 

Perosus ,  183, 1,  n. 


INDEX.  399 


Perpello ,  273,  n.  4. 

Perpes,  in  genit,  sing.,  112,  1;  115,  2. 

Persevero ,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Personal  pronouns,  132,  4;  ellipsis  of  as 
subject-nominatives,  209,  r.  1;  expressed 
with  infinitive,  272,  n.  4;—  personal  termi¬ 
nations  of  verbs,  147,  3. 

Personification,  324,  34. 

Person  of  a  noun  or  pronoun,  35,  2;  132, 
4;  of  a  verb,  147;  used  in  the  imperative, 
147,  2 ;  1st  and  2d  persons  used  indefinitely, 
209,  r.  7 ;  of  verbs  with  nominatives  of  dif¬ 
ferent  persons,  209,  r.  12. 

Perspectum,  habeo,  instead  of  perspexi, 
274,  r.  4. 

Persuadeo ?  w.  dat.,  223,  n.,  (6.);  hoc  per¬ 
suadetur  mihi,  223,  N.,  (c.)-,— persuasum 
mihi  habeo,  274,  R.  4. 

Pertcesum  est,  constr.,  229,  R.  6;  215,  (1.) 
and  n.  2. 

Pertineo,  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  4. 

Peto ,  constr.,  230,  r.  2;  231,  r.  4;  peto 
ut,  273,  n.  4;  262,  r.  4. 

Pes  and  compds.,  genit,  of,  73,  e.  1 ;  112, 
1;  abi.  of,  113,  e.  2;  pr.,  284,  n.I;  300, 
E.  2,  (b.) 

Ph,  in  syllabication,  18,  2 ;  when  silent, 
12,  r. 

Phalecian  verse,  304,  2;  pentameter, 
312,  x. 

Piger,  declined,  106 ;  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Piget,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  acc.,  229,  r.  6; 
participle  and  gerund  of,  184,  R.  3. 

Pili  habere ,  etc.,  214,  R.  1. 

Place,  advs.  of,  191,  i. ;  192,  m. ;  genit, 
of,  221;  acc.  of,  237;  dat.  of,  237,  R.  3; 
place  where,  abi.  of,  254; — whence,  abi.  of, 
255;  through  which,  255,  2;  place  of  a  foot 
in  verse,  309,  n. 

Plants,  gender  of  their  names,  29. 

Plaudo,  change  of  au  in  its  compds.,  189, 
N.  3. 

Plenty  or  want,  adjs.  of,  w.  abl.,  250. 

Plenus,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.); 
250,  2,  (1.) 

Pleonasm,  323,  2. 

- plex ,  adjs.  in,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3;  how  de¬ 
clined,  121,  1. 

Plerique,  w.  genit,  plur.,  212,  r.  2,  (1.) 

Pluperfect  tense,  145,  v. ;  old  form  in 
sem,  162,  9;  for  the  historical  perfect,  259, 
R.  1,  (3.) 

Plural  number,  35,  1 ;  when  wanting,  95 ; 
nouns  only  plur.,  96;  plur.  of  Greek  nouns 
of  1st  decl,,  45,  2;  do.  of  2d  decl.,  54,  2; — 
nouns  used  for  singular,  98;  nos  for  ego, 
209,  r.  7,  {b.) ;  of  verbs  with  collective  nouns, 
209,.  r.  11 ;  the  plur.  of  abstract  nouns,  95, 
r.  ;  plur.  nouns  in  apposition  to  two  or 
more  nouns  in  the  singular,  204,  r.  5. 

Plurimum,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3;  plurimi 
and  plurimo  after  verbs  of  buying,  etc., 
214,  r.  1,  (1.),  and  r.  3,  N.  2;  plurimo,  abl. 
of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

Plus ,  declined,  110;  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3, 
N.  1,  (a.);  with  numerals,  etc,,  with  or 
without  quam ,  256,  R.  6;  plus  for  magis, 
277,  R.  12;  plure,  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

Potima,  declined,  57. 

Poems,  gender  of  names  of,  29.  | 


Pcenitet ,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  subj.,  215,  r.  ; 
w.  acc.,  229,  r.  6;  participles  of,  184,  r.  3: 
w.  quad,  273,  n.  6. 

Poesis,  declined,  86. 

Poetical  arrangement  of  words,  279,  3, 
(e.);  16,  n.  4. 

-politanus,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  [g.) 

Pollens .  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (4.); 
cf.  r.  4,  (1.) 

Polliceor ,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Polyptoton,  324,  23. 

Polysyndeton,  323,  2,  (2.) 

Pondo ,  indeclinable,  94;  pondo  libram  or 
libras,  211,  r.  6,  (4.);  236,  r.  7. 

Pono,  171,  e.  2;  230,  r.  2;  241,  R.  5;  pr., 
284,  r.  2,  (c.) ;  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Posco,  w.  twoaccs.,  231 ;  230.  r.  2;  w.  ut , 
etc.,  273,  n.  4;  in  pass.,  234,  i. 

Position  in  prosody,  283,  iv. 

Positive  degree,  122,  4. 

Possessive,  adjs.,  104;  pronouns,  139;  to 
what  equivalent,  132,  6;  how  used,  207, 
R.  36;  211,  r.  3;  ellipsis  of  when  reflexive, 
207,  R.  36 ;  used  for  subjective  and  posses¬ 
sive  genit.,  211,  r.  3,  (&.),  and  r.  8,  (3.),  (a.) ; 
for  objective  genit.,  211,  r.  3,  (c.);  so  pos¬ 
sessive  adjectives,  211.  r.  4,  and  r.  8,  (3.), 
(b.) ;  mea,  tua,  etc.,  after  refert  and  interest , 
219,  r.  1. 

Possideo,  w.  perf.  pass,  part.,  274,  r.  4. 

Possum ,  conjugated,  154,  r.  7;  with  su¬ 
perlatives,  127,  4;  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1;  pote¬ 
rat,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259,  r.  3;  pos¬ 
sum  for  possem,  259,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Post,  postquam,  etc.,  how  pronounced, 
8,  e.  4;  post,  its  case,  195,  4;  post  in  com¬ 
position,  196,  11 ;  197,  14 ;  constr.  of  verbs 
compounded  with,  224;  with  concrete  offi¬ 
cial  titles,  233,  r.  3;  w.  acc.  and  abl.  of 
time,  233,  r.  1;  ellipsis  of,  235,  n.  3;  w.  abl. 
like  a  comparative,  256,  r.  16,  (3.) 

Postea  loci,  212,  r.  4,  n.  4. 

Postera,  defective,  115,  5 ;  compared,  125, 
4;  derivation,  130,  v. 

Posterior  and  postremus,  instead  of  pos¬ 
terius  and  postremum,  205,  r.  15. 

Postquam  and  posteaquam ,  w.  historical 
perfect  instead  of  pluperfect,  259,  r.  1,  (2.), 
(d.) 

Postulo,  w.  twoaccs.,  231,  r.  1;  w.  acc. 
and  genit.,  217,  R.  1;  w.  de  or  the  simple 
abl.,  217,  R.  2;  w.  subj.,  without  ut,  262, 
r.  4. 

Potens ,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (3.);  w.  in  or 
ad  and  acc.,  212,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Potior ,  w.  abl.,  245,  i. ;  w.  acc.,  245.  i., 
r.  ;  w.  genit.,  220,  (4.);  potiundus,  162,  20: 
273,  n.,  E.  1. 

Potis ,  defective,  115,  5. 

Potius ,  compared,  194,  4;  used  pleonasti- 
cally,  256,  r.  13. 

Potus ,  translated  actively,  162,  16. 

Prop, ,  in  composition  w.  adjs.,  127,  2;  w. 
verbs,  197;  before  adjs.,  127,  6;  constr.  of 
verbs  compounded  with,  224;  pree,  with 
comparatives,  127,  6;  256,  R.  13,  (6.) 

Prcebeo,  vr.  two  aces.,  230,  n.  1. 

Prezcedo,  constr.,  233,(3.),  and  n.;  224, 
r.  5. 

Prcecello ,  prceeo,  etc.,  224,  8,  and  R.  6. 


400 


INDEX, 


Praeceps,  abl.  of,  113,  a.  2,  and  e.  1. 

Praecipio,  constr.,  223.  (1.),  (6.) 

Praecipito ,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Praecipue,  praesertim ,  etc.,  193,  ir.,  2. 

Praecurro ,  constr.,  224,  8,  and  a.  5. 

Praedium ,  ellipsis  of,  255,  r.  3. 

Praeditus ,  w.  abl.,  244. 

Praeneste ,  gender  of,  66.  E.,  and  29,  E. 

Praenomen ,  its  place,  279,  9.  (6.) 

Praepes ,  genit,  sing,  of,  112,  1;  genit, 
plur.,  114,  e.  2. 

Praescribo ,  w.  wt,  etc.,  273,  2,  if.  4. 

Praesens ,  declined,  111;  abl.  of,  113,  r.2. 

Praeses ,  gender  of,  30;  61,  2;  genit,  of, 
73,  e.  1. 

Praesto ,  233,  (3.),  and  N. ;  230.  n.  1;  224, 
8,  and  r.  5;  256,  r.  16.  (3.); — praesto ,  adv., 
w.  dat.,  228,  1 ; — praesto  sunt ,  gui,  w.  subj., 
264,  6,  n.  1. 

Praestolor ,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  if.;  w.  acc., 

223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Praeter .  w.  adjs.,  127,  6;  w.  comparatives, 
256,  r.  13,  (6.);  as  an  adverb.  191,  hi. 

Praetereo ,  w.  <7Moef,  273,  5,  (1.) 

Praeterit ,  constr.  of.  229,  r.  7. 

Praeterquam  quod .  277,  R.  16. 

Prceterveho ,  233,  (2.) 

Praevertor ,  w.  dat.,  224,  8  and  r.  5. 

Precor ,  w.  two  accs.,  231 ;  w.  wf,  273,  N.  4; 
«£  omitted,  262,  r.  4. 

Predicate,  201;  203; — predicate-nomina¬ 
tive,  210;  differing  in  number  from  the 
rubject-nominative,  210,  r.  2;  instead  of 
dat.  of  the  end.  227,  R.  4;  after  what  verbs, 
210,  r.  3  and  4;  pred.  adjs.,  210,  r.  1;  after 
esse ,  haberi ,  judicari ,  videri ,  etc.,  271,  n.  2; 
— predicate-accusative,  210,  (5.);  dative, 
210,  (c.);  abl.,  210,  (rf.);^257,  r.  11. 

Prepositions,  195 — 197 ;  in  composition, 
196;  with  nouns,  103;  with  adjs.,  131,  11 — 
13;  with  verbs,  196;  change  of  in  composi¬ 
tion,  103,  R.  2;  131,  R. ;  196,  (a.);  insepara¬ 
ble,  196,  (5.);  w.  acc.,  195,  4;  235;  w.  abl., 
195,  5;  241;  w.  acc.  and  abl.,  195,  6;  235, 
(2.) — (5.);  used  as  adverbs,  195,  r.  4;  how 
modified,  202,  n.,  r.2;  verbs  compounded 
with,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  acc.,  233;  w.  abl., 
242;  compds.  of  ad ,  con ,  and  in,  with  acc.. 

224,  r.  4;  repeated  after  compds.,  224,  r.  4; 
233,  r.  2;  how  interchanged,  ib. ;  compds. 
of  ad,  ante,  etc.,  with  neuter  verbs  of  mo¬ 
tion,  224,  r.  5;  233,  r.  1;  repetition  of 
prepositions,  233,  R.  2;  277,  u.,  3  and  4; 
prepositions  of  one  syllable,  pr.,  285,  2,  n.  1, 
and  e.  5;  ellipsis  of,  232,  (2.);  235,  r.  11. ; 
ellipsis  of  their  case,  235,  r.  10;  their  place, 
279,  10 ;  quantity  of  di,  se  and  red,  285,  R. 
2  and  3;  put  after  their  case,  279,  10,  R., 
(/.);  repeated,  277,  ii.,  4. 

Present  tense,  145,  i.;  a  principal  tense, 

258,  A. ;  indicative  pres,  for  historical  perf., 

259,  r.  1,  (a.);  for  the  fut.,  259,  r.  1,  (6.); 
for  imperf.  or  perf.  w.  dum,  259,  r.  1,  (c.); 
eubj.  pres.,  use  of,  260,  n.,  r.  1,  (1.);  used 
to  soften  an  assertion,  260,  n.,  r.  4;  to  ex¬ 
press  a  wish,  command,  etc.,  260,  r.  6;  267, 
r.2;  imperative  pres.,  how  used,  145,  r.  3; 
267,  (1.);  infinitive  pres.,  how  used.  268, 
r.  1,  (a.),  and  r.  3. ;  272,  r.  4  and  5;  par¬ 
ticiple  pres.,  how  declined,  111,  r.  j  what  it 


denotes,  274,  2  and  if. ;  denoting  something 
about  to  be  done,  274,  r.  1 ;  also  a  purpose, 
274,  r.  2,  (a.);  and  a  state  or  condition, 
274,  r.  2,  (6.);  present  pass,  participle, 
how  supplied,  274,  r.  9. 

Preterites.  145,  n.  2;  258,  b.;  preterites 
of  the  indicative  used  for  the  pluperfect 
subjunctive,  259,  r.  4,  (1.) 

Preteritive  verbs,  183,  i. 

Pretii  and  pretio ,  214,  R.  2.  n.  3;  ellipsis 
of,  252,  r.  3. 

Priapean  verse,  310,  tt. 

Price,  ablative  of,  252 ;  genitive  of  tanti , 
etc.,  214,  r.  1. 

Pridie ,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  4,  n.  6;w.  acc., 
238,1. 

Primus ,  medius,  etc.,  how  translated, 
205,  R.  17;  their  place,  279,  7;  pnor,  pri¬ 
mus,  for  prius,  primum,  205.  r.  15. 

Princeps ,  genit,  of,  112.2;  abl.  of,  113, 
e.  2;  115,  1,  (a.);  used  instead  of  an  adverb 
of  time,  205,  R.  15. 

Principal  parts  of  a  verb,  151,  4: — propo¬ 
sitions.  201,  5; — parts  of  a  proposition,  202, 
5;  tenses,  255,  a. 

Principio,  abl.  of  time,  253,  it. 

Priusquam,  with  what  mood,  263,  3. 

Privo,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Pro,  .constr.  of  verbs  compounded  with, 
224;  w.  abl.  for  predicate  nom.,  210,  n.  3; 
for  predicate  acc.,  230,  n.  4;  in  composition, 
quantity  of,  285,  e.  5,  and  r.  7 ;  pro  nihilo 
duco,  etc.,  214,  r.  2,  n.  2;  pro  eo  and  pro¬ 
inde  ac,  198,  3,  R. 

Proclivis,  222,  R.  4,  (2.) ;  276,  in.,  r.  1. 

Procid,  w.  abl.,  195,  R.  3;  241,  r.  2. 

Prodigus,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (2.); 
w.  in,  213,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Prodo ,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1,  and 
r.  6. 

Proditur,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

Proficiscor,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1. 

Prohibeo,  251,  R.2;  w.  quominus,  262,  r. 
11 ;  273, 4 ;  w.  genit.,  220,  2 ;  w.  abl.,  251,  n.  ; 
w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  r.  2;  w.  acc.  and  inf., 
272.  r.  6. 

Proinde,  adv.,  191,  III.;  proinde  ac,  198, 
3,  r. 

Prolepsis,  323,  1,  (5.)  and  (4.) 

Promitto,  constr.,  272,  n.4;  217,  r.  3,  (c.) 

Pronouns,  132 — 139;  simple,  132,  2; 
neuter  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Pronominal  adjs.,  139,  5. 

Pronunciation  of  Latin,  6. 

Pronus ,  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Prope  est,  w.  ut  and  the  subj.,  262,  r.  3, 

N.  1. 

Proper  nouns,  26,  2 ;  found  only  in  1st, 
2d,  and  3d  decls.,  40,  9. 

Propero,  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Propinquo,  225,  R.  2. 

Propinquus ,  w.  the  dat.  or  genit.,  222, 
R.  2,  (a.) 

Propior ,  how  compared,  126,  1 ;  propior 
and  proximus,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  w.  acc., 
222,  r.  5;  238,1;  instead  of  propius,  prox¬ 
ime,  205,  R.  15;  proximum  est,  w.  ut  and 
the  subj.,  262.  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Propius  and  proxime ,  constr.,  228,  1, 
and  r. 


INDEX. 


401 


Proportional,  adjs.,  121,  2. 

Proposition,  201,  1;  analysis  of,  281. 

Proprius ,  constr.,  222,  R.  2,  (a.) 

Prorumpo ,  constr.,  226,  R.  4,  1. 

Prosodiae  verse,  304,  2. 

Prosody,  282—321 ;  figures  of,  305 — 307. 

Prosopopoeia,  324,  34. 

Prosper' and  prosperus ,  105,  N. ;  w.  genit, 
or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (2.) 

Prosthesis,  322,  1. 

Prosto ,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  R.  1. 

Prosum ,  154,  r.  6. 

Provideo,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Protasis  and  apodosis,  261 ;  import  of  the 
different  tenses  in  the  protasis  and  apodo- 
sis,  261,  1  and  2. 

Providus ,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Prudens ,  w.  genit.,  223,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Ps,  initial,  12,  r.  ps,  nouns  in,  genit, 
of,  77,  2,  (1.) 

- pse ,  enclitic,  135,  R.  3. 

Pt ,  initial,  12,  r. 

-pte,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2;  139. 

Pwfos  and  impubes ,  genit,  of,  112,  1;  abl. 
of,  113,  e.  2;  115,  1,  (a.) 

Pudet ,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  inf.,  215;  w. 
acc.,  229,  r.  6;  w.  perf.  inf.,  268,  R.  2;  w. 
sup.  in  u,  276,  hi.,  k.  2;  participle  in  dus , 
and  gerund  of,  184,  r.  3. 

Paer,  instead  of  in  pueritia ,  253,  r.  6. 

Pueritia ,  how  used  in  the  abl.,  253,  N.  1. 

Pugna ,  for  in  pugna,  253,  N.  1;  pugnam 
pugnare ,  232,  (1.) 

Pugnatur ,  conjugated,  184,  2.  (5.) 

Pulchre ,  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  R.  3. 

Punctuation,  5. 

Punio ,  constr.,  217,  R.  5. 

Punishment,  constr.  of  words  denoting, 
217,  r.  3. 

Purgo,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1;  220,  2;  w. 
abl.,  251,  n. 

Purpose,  denoted  by  w*,  etc.,  with  the 
subj.,  262;  by  participles,  274,  2,  r.  2,  6 
and  7;  by  inf.,  271;  273,  n.  4,  (6.);  by 
gerund,  275,  hi.,  r.  2,  and  (1.),  (2.);  by 
supine  in  -um,  276,  ii. 

Purus,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.); 
cf.  251,  n. 

-pus,  Greek  nouns  in,  genit,  of,  76,  e.  5. 

Puto,  w.  genit,  of  value,  214;  w.  abl.  of 
price,  252,  r.  1;  w.  two  accs.,  230,  n.  1, 
and  n.  4;  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272.  n.  1;  puta¬ 
res,  260,  if.,  r.  2;  putor,  210,  r.  3,(3.),  (c.); 
w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Q. 

Qu  before  s  in  verbal  roots,  171,  1 

Qua,  adverbial  correlative,  191,  r.  1. 

Qua — qua,  for  et — et,  277,  R.  8. 

Queer o,  constr.,  231,  r.  4;  poet.  w.  inf., 
271,  n.  3. 

Quceso,  183,  7;  constr.,  262,  r.  4. 

Qualis,  139,  5,(3.);  w.  comparatives,  256, 
R.  10,  (b.) 

Qualisqualis  or  qualiscumque ,  139,  5; 
207,  k.  29. 

ualis — talis ,  206,  (16.) 
uam,  w.  comparatives,  256;  w.  the  su¬ 
perlative,  with  or  without  possum ,  127,  4  ; 

34* 


ellipsis  of  after  plus,  minus,  amplius,  etc., 
256,  r.  6  and  7;  quam  qui  and  superlative 
after  tarn,  206,  (21.);  quam  pro,  w.  compar¬ 
atives,  256,  r.  11;  quam  non,  277,  k.  14; 
quam  and  a  verb  after  ante  and  post ,  253, 
r.  1,  n.  3;  quam  qui ,  w.  comparatives  and 
the  subjunctive,  264,  4. 

Quamquam ,  peculiar  use  of,  198,  4,  r.; 
constr.,  263,  2,  (4.);  used  to  connect  an 
abl.  absolute,  257,  R.  10. 

Quamvis,  constr.,  263,  2,  and  (2.),  (3.) 

Quando,  quando-quidem,  198,  7,  R-,  ( b .) 

Quantity,  adjs.  of,  104,  4;  w.  genit.,  212, 
r.  3,  n.  1;  after  sum  and  verbs  of  valuing, 
214;  adverbs  of,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  4. 

Quantity,  in  prosody,  13,  1;  marks  of, 
5,  1 ;  general  rules  of,  13 ;  283 ;  special  rules 
of,  284;  of  penults,  291;  of  antepenults, 
292;  of  penults  of  proper  names,  293;  of 
final  syllables,  294—301;  of  final  vowels, 
294 — 298;  of  final  consonants,  299;  of  de¬ 
rivative  words,  284;  of  compound  words, 
285;  of  increments,  286 — 290;  of  Greek 
words,  283,  e.  6. 

Quantus,  pronom.  adj.,  139,  5,  (3.); 
quantus  for  quam,  with  posse  and  superla¬ 
tives,  127,  n.  1;  constr.,  206,  (16.);  quanto , 
w.  comparatives,  256,  r.  16;  quantum,  w. 
genit.,  212,  r.  3,  n.  1;  in  acc.  of  degree, 

231,  r.  5;  232,  (3.);  266,  r.  16,  n.;  quan¬ 
tum  possum,  w.  indicative,  264,  3  Jin.] 
quantus — tantus,  206,  (16.) 

Quant  us  cum  que,  quantusquantus ,  quail- 
tuluscumque,  139,  5,  (3.);  w.  indicative,  259, 
R.  4,  (3.);  quanti  cumque ,  207,  R.  29. 

Quasi,  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

Quatio,  constr.,  229,  r.  4, 1 ;  how  changed 
in  its  compds.,  189,  n.  3. 

-que,  its  use,  198,1,  r.,  (a.);  que — et,  et 
— que,  que — que ,  198,  r.,  («.);  its  place, 
2<9,  3,  (c.) 

Que  is  and  quis,  for  quibus,  136,  r.  2. 

Queo,  how  conjugated.  182,  n.;  w.  inf., 
271,  n.  3. 

Queror,  w.  acc.,  232,  n.  1;  w.  quod ,  273, 
n.  6. 

Qui,  declined,  136;  qui  in  abl.,  136,  r.  1; 
137,  R.  2 ;  interrogative,  137 ;  difference  be¬ 
tween  qui  and  quis,  137,  1;  person  of  qui, 
209,  r.  6;  w.  subj.,  264;  when  translated 
like  a  demonstrative,  206,(17.);  with  sum 
instead  of  pro,  206,  (18.);  quicum ,  when 
used,  136,  R.  1  Jin. ;  qui  vero,  qui  autem , 
280,  m.,  (3.);  ex  quo ,  for  postquam,  253, 
N.  4. 

Quia,  quod,  and  quoniam ,  198,  7,  r.,  (b.) 

Quicque  and  quicquam,  138,  3,  (a.) 

Quicquid,  136,  R.  4;  acc.  of  degree, 

232,  (3.) 

Qmcumque,  how  declined,  136,  3;  how 
used,  207,  r.  29;  w.  indie.,  259,  r.  4,  (3.); 
for  omnis,  quivis ,  or  quilibet,  207,  R.  29. 

Quid,  137;  w.  genit.,  212,  k.  3,  N.  1, 
(a.);  acc.  of  degree,  231,  r.  5,  (a.);  232, 
(3.) ;  quid  ?  why  ?  235,  r.  11 ;  quid  sibi  vult  ? 
228,  n.,  (6.);  quid  est  quod?  w.  subj.,  264, 
7,  n.  2;  quid  est  cur  ?  etc.,  264,  7,  n.  3;  quid 
aliud  quam?  209,  r.  4;  quid?  quid  vero? 
quid  igitur  ?  quid  ergo  ?  quid  enim  ?  quid 
multa?  quid  plura?  229,  r.  3,  2. 


402 


INDEX. 


Quidam ,  how  declined,  138, 5 ;  how  used, 
207,  a.  33. 

Quidem ,  its  meaning,  191,  r.  4 ;  its  place, 
279,  3,  (d.) 

Quilibet ,  how  declined,  138,  5  j  how  used, 
207,  R.  34. 

Quies  and  compds.,  gender,  61, 1;  genit., 
73,  4;  96. 

Quin ,  198,  8;  w.  subj.,  262,  r.  10;  for  a 
relative  with  non,  ib.,  1  and  n.  6;  for  ut 
nop, ,  ib.,  2;  after  non  dubito ,  etc.,  quin ? 
why  not?  w.  indie.,  ib.,  n.  9. 

Quippe ,  198,  7,  RM  (6.);  quippe  qui ,  w. 
subj.,  264,  8,  (2.) 

Quippiam .,  138,  3,  (a.) 

Quiqui ,  136,  R.  4. 

Quiris ,  genit,  sing.,  74,  e.4;  genit,  plur., 
83,  ii.,  5. 

Qnw,  declined,  137;  difference  of  91m 
and  gnt,  137,  1 ;  between  gut's  and  uter,  212, 
R.  2,  n.  1 ;  quisest  qui?  w.  subj.,  264,  8,  (2.); 
between  quis  and  aliquis ,  207,  R.  30,  ib.) 

Quisnam ,  quinam ,  how  declined,  137,  2. 

Quispiam ,  how  declined,  138,  3;  how 
used,  207,  r.  30;  quippiam ,  w.  genit.,  212, 
r.  3,  n.  1. 

Quisquam ,  how  declined,  138,  3;  how 
used,  207,  r.  31;  quicquam  and  quidquam , 
w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3;  acc.  of  degree,  231, 
R.  5,  (a.);  232,  (3.) 

Quisque,  how  declined,  138,  3;  how  used, 
207,  r.  35;  with  plur.  verb,  209,  r.  11,  (4.) ; 
its  place,  279,  14;  w.  a  superlative,  207,  R. 
35,  (6.);  in  apposition,  204,  r.  10. 

Quisquis,  declined,  136,  4 ;  its  use,  207, 
r.  29 ;  difference  between  quisquis  and  qui- 
cumque ,  207,  R.  29;  w.  indie,  259,  r.  4,  (3.) 

Quivis,  how  declined,  138,  5 ;  how  used, 
207,  R.  34. 

Quo,  the  correlative  adv.,  191,  r.  1;  quo, 
w.  a  comparative,  256,  r.  16,  (2.);  for  ut  eo, 
w.  subj..  262,  r.  9;  as  adv.  of  place,  w.  gen¬ 
itive,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  (&.);  quo  mihi  hanc 
rem,  209,  r.  4;  228,  r.  5;  quo  secius ,  262, 
r.  11,  n.  ;  guo  ne ,  262,  r.  5. 

Quoad,  w.  subj.,  263,  4;  w.  ejus,  212,  r. 
4,  n.  5. 

Quocum,  quacum,  etc.,  instead  of  cum 
quo ,  etc.,  241,  r.  1. 

Quod,  causal  conj.,  198,  7;  construction 
of,  273,  5;  refers  to  past  time,  273,  (6.); 
w.  subj.  of  dico ,  puto,  etc.,  266,  3,  r.  ;  quod 
sciam ,  etc.,  264,  3;  quod,  referring  to  a 
preceding  statement,  206,  (14);  273,  6,  (a.); 
w.  genit.,  212,  k.  3;  before  si,  nisi,  etc., 
206,  (14);  as  acc.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Quojus  and  quoi,  for  cujus  and  cui,  136, 
r.  2. 

Quoque  and  etiam,  difference  between, 
198,  1,  r.,  {d.);  place  of  quoque,  279,  3,  (d.) 

Quot ,  indecl.,  115,  4;  interrogative,  121, 
6;  139,  5,  (3.);  constr.,  206,  (16);  quot  sunt, 
qui?  264,  7,  N.  2;  quotquot ,  w.  indie.,  259, 
r.  4,  (3.) 

Quoteni  and  quotus ,  interrogative,  121,  5. 

Quoties,  interrog.  adv.,  121,  5. 

Quotus-quisque.  its  meaning,  207,  h .  35, (a. ) 

Quum,  correlative  of  turn,  191,  r.  7;  in¬ 
stead  of  postquam,  253,  n.  4;  —  conj.,  198, 
10;  constr.,  263,  5,  and  r.  1—4. 


R. 

R,  before  s  in  roots  of  nouns,  56,  a.  1; 
nouns  in  r,  genitive  of,  70,  71 ;  changed  to 
5  before  s  and  t,  171,  3;  r  final,  quantity 
of,  299,  2. 

Rapio ,  w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  r.  2. 

Rarum  est,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3. 

Rastrum,  plur.  rastri  or  rastra ,  92,  5. 

Ratio,  w.  genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  m. ,  r.  1, 
(1.);  ratione ,  as  abl.  of  manner,  without 
cum,  247,  2. 

Ratum  est,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  2;  ratum , 
pr.,  284,  E.l,  (2.) 

-re  in  2d  person  sing,  of  passive  voice, 
162,  3. 

Re  or  red ,  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (6.); 
197,  18;  quantity  of,  285,  r.  3,  (a.) 

Reapse,  135,  r.  3. 

Recens ,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3  and  r.  1 ;  also 
adverb,  192,  4,  (6.) 

Receptio,  constr.,  233,  r.  2,  n. 

Recingor ,  w.  acc.,  234,  R.  1. 

Recordor,  w.  genit,  or  acc.,  216:  w.  pres, 
inf.,  268,  a.  1;  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Recte ,  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

Reckoning,  Roman  mode  of,  326,  327. 

Rectum  est ,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3. 

Recuso  quin ,  and  quominus,  262,  n.  7  and 
r.  11;  w.  ne,  271,  r.  1;  w.  inf.,  ib.,  n.,  and 
271,  n.  1. 

Reddo,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  N.  1;  pass.  210, 
a.  3,  (3),  (6.);  w.  perf.  pass,  part.,  274,  r.  4. 

Redoleo,  w.  acc.,  232,  (2.) 

Redundant  nouns,  99 ;  adjs.,  116;  109,  n.; 
Ill,  n.  ;  verbs,  185. 

Redundo ,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.) 

Reduplication,  163,  r.  ;  of  compound 
verbs,  163,  e.  1;  of  verbs  of  1st  conj.,  165, 
r.  2;  of  2d  conj.,  168,  n.  2;  of  3d  coDj., 
171,  e.  1,  (6.);  quantity  of,  284,  e.  2. 

Refero,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Refert  and  interest ,  w.  genit.,  214 ;  219; 
w.  the  adj.  pronouns  mea,  etc.,  219,  r.1; 
w.  ad,  etc.,  219,  r.  3;  refert ,  pr.,  285,  R.  3. 

Refertus,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213.  r.  5,  (3.) 

Reflexive  pronouns,  132.  4;  139,  r.  2; 
how  used,  208;  for  demonstratives,  208, 
(6.);  ellipsis  of,  229,  r.  4;  in  oratio  obliqua, 
266,  r.  3. 

Reformido ,  w.  inf..  271,  N.  1. 

Regno,  w.  genit.,  220,  4. 

Regnum,  declined,  46. 

Rego,  conjugated.  158. 

Relative  adjs.,  104,  13;  139,  r.;  govern¬ 
ment  of,  213,  r.  1 ;  222, 3;  adverbs,  w.  subj., 
expressing  a  purpose,  264,  5,  R.  2 ;  used  in¬ 
definitely,  w.  subj.,  264,  r.  3. 

Relative  pronouns,  136 ;  agreement  of, 
206,  r.  19;  ellipsis  of,  206,  (5.) ;  in  the  case 
of  the  antecedent,  206,  (6.),  (a.);  referring 
to  nouns  of  different  genders,  206,  (9.) ; — to 
a  proposition,  206,  (13.);  agreeing  with  a 
noun  implied,  206,  (11);  number  and  gen¬ 
der  of,  when  referring  to  two  or  more 
nouns.  206,  (15); — relative  clauses  used  as 
circumlocutions  and  to  express  the  English 
‘so  called,’  206,  (19).;  relative  adverbs  for 
relative  pronouns,  206,  (20);  the  relative 
adjs.  quot,  quantus,  etc.,  construction  of. 


INDEX. 


403 


206,  (16) ;  qui  with  sum,  instead  of  pro , 
206,  (18) ;  person  of,  209,  r.  6;  206,  R.  19; — 
w.  subj.,  264;  their  place,  279, 13;  280,  hi., 
(2.);  relatives  as  connectives,  280,  hi.,  (1.); 
198,  ti. 

Resolving,  verbs  of,  273,  1,  (a.) 

Relinquo ,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1 ;  w. 
part,  in  dus,  274,  r.  7;  relinquitur ,  w.  ut 
and  the  subj.,  262,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

Reliqua ,  acc.,  234,  Ii.,  R.  3;  reliquum  est 
ut,  262,  r.  3. 

Reminiscor ,  constr.,  216. 

Remitto ,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Removing,  verbs  of,  w.  abi.,  251. 

Remuneror ,  w.  abi.,  249,  i.,  r.  1. 

Renuncio,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  n.  1;  pass., 
210,  r.  3,  (3.),  (5.) 

Repeated  words,  their  place,  279,  4. 

Repens ,  abi.  of,  113,  e.  3. 

Reperio ,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  N.  1; — repe¬ 
rtor,  210,  R.  3,  (3.),  (c.) ;  271,  r.  2; — reperi- 
untur,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Repo,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Repono,  241,  R.  5. 

Reposco ,  w.  two  accs.,  231,  r.  1. 

Repugno ,  with  quominus  or  ne,  262,  R.  11. 

Res,  declined,  90;  use  of,  205,  R.  7,  (2.), 

N.  1. 

Reses,  genit,  sing,  of,  112,  1 ;  defective, 
115,  2. 

Resipio,  w.  acc.,  232,  (2.) 

Responsives,  case  of,  204,  r.  11. 

Respublica ,  declined,  91. 

Restat ,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

Rete,  abi.  of,  82,  e.  1,  (6.) 

Retracto ,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Reus,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (3.);  reum  agere 
or  facere ,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1. 

Rhetoric,  figures  of,  324. 

Rhus ,  genit,  of,  76,  e.  3;  acc.  of,  80,  ii. 

Rhythm,  308,  (1.) 

Rideo,  w.  acc.,  232,  n.  1. 

- rimus ,  -ritis,  quantity  of,  290,  e.,  (1.),  4. 

-rimus,  superlatives  in,  125,  1. 

Ritu,  as  abi.  of  manner  without  cum, 
247.  2. 

Rivers,  gender  of  names  of,  28. 

-rix,  verbals  in,  102,  6,  (a.)  See  tor  and 
trix. 

Rogo ,  w.  two  accs.,  231,  r.  1;  w.  ut,  273, 
n.  4;  274,  r.  7;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4; 
constr.  in  pass.,  234,  i. 

Roman  day,  326,  1 ; — hour,  ib. ; — month, 
326,  2; — names  of  the  months,  326,  2,  (1); 

• — calendar  table  of,  326,  2,  (6),  p.  369; — 
week,  326,  2,  (10) ;  names  of  the  days  of  the 
week,  ib. ; — year,  how  designated,  326,  2, 
(11) ;— money ,  weights  and  measures,  327 ; — 
tables  of  weights,  etc.,  327,  pp.  370 — 373; — 
coins,  327,  p.  371; — interest,  how  comput¬ 
ed,  ib. 

Root  or  crude  form  of  words  inflected, 
what  and  how  found,  40,  10 ;  formation  of 
nominative  sing,  from  in  3d  decl.,  56,  i. 
and  ii. 

Roots  of  verbs,  150;  general,  150,  1; 
special,  150,  2;  second  and  third,  how 
formed,  150,  3  and  4;  third,  how  determin¬ 
ed  when  there  is  no  supine,  151,  n.;  first, 
its  derivatives,  151,  1;  irregularities  in 


tenses  formed  from,  162,  1 — 6;  second,  do., 
151,  2 ;  irregularities  in  tenses  formed  from, 
162,  7 — 10;  third,  do.,  151,  3;  second  and 
third,  formation  of,  1st  conj.,  164 — 166;  2d 
conj.,  167 — 170;  3d  conj.,  171 — 174;  4th 
conj.,  175 — 177 ;  second  and  third  irregu¬ 
lar,  1st  conj.,  165;  2d  conj.,  168;  4th  conj., 
176. 

-rs,  nouns  in,  genitive  sing,  of,  77,  2,  (2.) ; 
genit,  plur.  of,  83,  ii.,  4. 

Rudis,  213,  R.  1,  and  r.  4,  (2.);  275,  III., 
r.  1,  (2.) 

Rupes,  declined,  57. 

Rus,  construed  like  names  of  towns,  in 
acc.,  237,  r.  4;  in  abl.,  254;  255;  cf.  82, 
e.  5,  (6.);  rure,  not  ruri  with  an  adj.,  255, 
r.  1. 

-rus,  participle  in,  how  declined,  105, 
r.  2;  its  signification,  162,  14;  274,  2,  r.  6; 
with  sim  and  essem  serving  as  future  sub¬ 
junctives,  162,  r.  3;  with  esse  and  fuisse, 
162,  14,  r.  3;  268,  r.  4;  genitive  plur.  of, 
162,  19;  denotes  intention,  274,  r.  6;  used 
for  an  English  clause  connected  by  ‘  since, 
when,’  etc.,  ib. ;  as  an  apodosis,  ib. 

Rutum,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

S. 

S,  sound  of,  11 ;  added  to  some  roots  of 
nouns  of  3d  decl.,  56,  i. ;  added  to  roots  of 
verbs  ending  in  a  consonant,  171 ;  used  in¬ 
stead  of  t  in  the  3d  root  of  some  verbs.  171, 
e.  5;  inserted  in  some  verbals,  102,  5,  (5.); 
5  preceded  by  a  consonant,  nouns  in,  gen¬ 
der  of,  62;  64;  genit,  of,  77;  final,  elided, 
305,  2. 

Sacer,  w.  genit,  or  dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Sacerdos ,  gender  of,  30 ;  61,  3. 

Scepe,  comparison  of,  194,  5. 

Sal,  82,  e.  1,  (6.),  and  66,  e.  ;  96,9;  pr., 
284,  n.  1. 

Salio,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Saltern,  193,  n.,  3. 

Saluto,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  N.  1;  salutor, 
w.  two  nominatives,  210,  r.  3,  (3.) 

Salve,  183,  9. 

Samnis,  genit,  sing.,  74,  e.  4;  genit, 
plur.,  83,  ii.,  5. 

Sapio ,  w.  acc.,  232,  (2.) 

Sapphic  verse,  304,  2  ;  315,  II. 

Sat,  indecl.,  115,  4;  satis ,  w.  genit.,  212, 
r.  4;  satis  esse,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  in., 
r.  2,  (1);  satis  habeo,  and  satis  mihi  estt 
w.  perf.  infin.,  268,  r.  2;  satis  erat,  indie, 
instead  of  subj.,  259,  r.  3;  degrees  of  com¬ 
parison,  126,  4. 

Satago ,  w.  genit.,  215,  (2.) 

Satelles,  gender  of,  30;  61,  2. 

Satiatus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Satisdo,  w.  damni  infecti,  217,  R.  3,  (c.); 
w.  dat.,  225,  i. 

Satisfacio,  w.  dat.,  225,  i. 

Satum,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  2. 

Saturnalibus,  for  ludis  Saturnalibus ,  253, 
N.  1. 

Satur,  how  declined,  105,  R.  1 ;  w.  genit, 
or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

Saturo,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  R.  1;  w.  genit, 
poet.,  220,  3. 


404 


INDEX, 


Satus ,  w.  abi.,  246. 

Saying,  verbs  of,  constr.,  272;  ellipsis  of, 
270,  r.  2,  (6.)  and  3;  implied,  273,  3,  (6.); 
used  in  the  passive,  272,  r.  6. 

Scando ,  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Scanning,  304,  6. 

Scateo ,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.),  r.  1;  with 
genit,  poet.,  220,  3. 

Scazon,  314,  ir. 

Scidi,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (1.) 

Scilicet,  198,  7,  R.,  (a.) 

Scio ,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  w.  1;  scito , 
162,4.  ' 

Scitor  and  sciscitor ,  constr.,  231,  R.  4. 

-sco,  verbs  in,  187,  n.,  2;  drop  sc  in  2d 
and  3d  root  before  t,  171,  e.  6. 

Scribo,  273,  2,  (c.);  w.  two  accs.,  230,  N. 
1;  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1,  and  r.  6;  in 
pass.  w.  predicate  nominative,  210,  k.  3, 
(3);  scribit,  w.  pres.  inf.  instead  of  perf., 
268,  r.  1,  (a.) 

Se,  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (6.) 

Se,  w.  inter,  208,  5.  See  sui. 

Secerno,  251,  N.,  and  r.  2,  n. 

Secus ,  for  sexus ,  88,  1;  94;  211,  r.  6,  (4.); 
230,  r.  6;  adv.,  191,  hi.  ;  w.  acc.,  195,  r.  3. 

Sed,  198,  9,  r. ,  (a. ) ;  its  place,  279,  3,  (a. ) ; 
sed,  sed  quod ,  sed  quia,  262,  r.  9;  sed,  sed 
tamen,  278,  r.  10;  sed  et,  198,  1,  ( d .) 

Sedeo,  210,  R.  3,  (2.);  compds.  of,  233, 
(3),  N. 

Sedile,  declined,  57. 

Sedo,  constr.,  229,  R.  4,  1. 

-sem,  old  termination  of  plup.  indie,  ac¬ 
tive,  162,  9. 

Semi-deponent  verbs,  142,  2. 

Senarius ,  304,  2;  Iambic,  314. 

Senex ,  its  degrees  of  comparison,  126,  4; 
gender  of,  65,  2;  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (2); 
abl.  of,  113,  e.  2;  115,  1;  for  in  senectute, 
253,  r.  6. 

Sentences,  200 ;  analysis  of,  281. 

Sentiments  of  another,  in  dependent 
clauses,  266,  3. 

Sentio,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Separating,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Separo ,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Sequitur,  constr.  262,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

-sere,  future  infin.  in,  162,  10. 

Sereno,  scil.  ccelo,  257,  r.  9,  (2.) 

Sermo,  declined,  57. 

Serpens,  gender  of,  64,  3. 

Sese,  intensive.  133,  r.  2. 

Servitutem  servire,  232,  (1.) 

Sestertius,  its  value,  327,  R.  2,  (6.);  how 
denoted,  ib. ;  mode  of  reckoning,  ib. ;  ses¬ 
tertium,  ib. ,  r.  5 — 7. 

Seu,  or  sive,  198,  2,  r.,  (c.) 

Ships,  gender  of  their  names,  29. 

Short  syllable,  282,  2. 

Showing,  verbs  of,  constr.,  272,  r.  6. 

Si,  how  pronounced,  11,  e.  1. 

-si  or  -sin,  Greek  datives  in,  84. 

Si,  conj.,  198,  5;  si  for  num,  198,  11,  R., 
(g.) ;  si  minus ,  sin  minus  or  sin  aliter,  198, 
5,  r.,  (6.);  277,  R.  14;  ellipsis  of  in  the 
protasis,  261,  r.  1;  .st  with  the  imperfect 
subj.,  instead  of  the  pluperfect,  261,  r.  5; 
si  nihil  aliud ,  209,  r.  4;  si  quisquam  and  si 
ullus ,  207,  r.  30,  (5.) ;  si  non ,  262,  r.  5. 


Sibi  suo,  228,  n.,  (a.) 

Sic ,  191,  r.  5;  277,  r.  12,  (a.);  pleonas- 
tically,  207,  R.  22. 

Sicuti,  w.  subj.,  263,  2,  (1.) 

Significant  word,  in  a  proposition,  279, 
2,  (e.) 

Siem,  sies,  etc.j  154,  R.  4. 

Silentio  praeterire  or  facere  aliquid ,  with¬ 
out  cum,  247,  2. 

Sileo,  w.  acc.,  232,  n.  1;  pres.,  234,  in. 

Silver  age  of  Roman  literature,  329,  3. 

-sim,  old  termination  of  perfect  indie, 
active,  162,  9. 

Similar  constructions,  278,  n.  1  and  2. 

Simile,  324,  30. 

Similis,  w.  genit,  or  dat.,  222,  R.  2,  (a.); 
w.  dat.  in  imitation  of  the  Greek,  222,  r.  7 ; 
similes ,  w.  inter.,  222,  r.  4,  (4.);  w.  ac  and 
atque ,  222,  R.  7,  fin. 

Simple,  subject,  202,  2 ; — predicate,  203, 
2; — sentences,  201,  10.  • 

Simul,  w.  abl.,  195,  r.  3;  241,  r.  2; 
simul — simul ,  277,  R.  8. 

Sin,  198,  5;  its  place,  279,  3,  (a.);  sin 
minus ,  277,  R.  14. 

Singular  number,  35,  1;  sing,  for  plur., 
209,  r.  11,  1,  (b.) 

Singulare  est  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3. 

Singuli ,  119. 

Sino,  273,  4 ;  262,  r.  4. 

Siquidem,  198,  7,  R.,  (6.) 

Siquis,  how  declined,  138.  2;  siquis  and 
siquid,  how  used,  138,  2,  (a.)  and  (b.);  207, 
r.  29;  si  quis  est,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Sis  for  si  vis,  183.  r.  3. 

Sisto,  constr.,  229,  r.  4, 1. 

Situm ,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

Sive  or  seu,  198,  2,  r.  ;  278,  r.  8 ;  its  place, 
279,  3,  (a.) ;  sive — sive,  w.  verb  in  the  indic., 
259,  r.  4,  (3.) 

-so,  -sim,  - sem ,  old  verbal  terminations, 
162,  9. 

Socius,  w.  genit,  or  dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Sodes ,  for  si  audes,  183,  R.  3. 

Solecism,  325,  2. 

Soleo ,  how  conjugated,  142,  r.  2;  w.  inf., 
271,  n.  1. 

Solitus ,  274,  r.  3;  solito ,  after  compara¬ 
tives,  256,  R.  9;  its  place,  279,  n.  1. 

Solum,  solummodo,  193,  n.,  3. 

Solus ,  how  declined,  107 ;  w.  relative  and 
subj.,  264,  10;  for  solum,  205,  e.  15. 

Solutus ,  w.  genit.,  213;  w.  abl.,  251,  N.; 
solutum ,  pr.,  284,  r.  3. 

Solvo,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Sons ,  genit,  plur.  of,  114,  e.  3 ;  115, 1,  (a.) 

Sospes,  genit,  of,  112,  1 ;  abl.  of,  113,  E.  2 ; 
115,  1,  (a.);  126,5,  (b.) 

Sotadic  verse,  304,  2 ;  317,  i. 

Sounds  of  the  letters,  7 — 12;  of  the 
vowels,  7  and  8;  of  the  diphthongs,  9;  of 
the  consonants,  10 — 12. 

Space,  acc.  and  abl.  of.  236 ;  ellipsis  of, 
236,  r.  3. 

Spatium,  w.  genit,  of  gerund.  275,  nr., 
r.  1,  (1);  spatio  as  abl.  of  space,  236,  R.  4. 

Specto ,  constr.,  225,  R.  1. 

Specus,  88,  1. 

Spero,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Spes  est,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1; 


INDEX, 


405 


spes ,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  it.,  r.  1, 
(1.);  spe ,  after  comparatives,  256,  r.  9;  its 
place,  279,  n.  1. 

Spolio ,  w.  abi..  251,  N. 

Spondaic  verse,  310 ;  tetrameter,  312. 
Spondeo,  163,  r.;  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272, 
N.  1. 

Stanza,  319,  4. 

Statim ,  193,  ii.,  1. 

Statuo ,  241,  r.  5;  278,  n.  1;  271,  n.  3; 

272,  n.  1;  statutum  habeo ,  274,  r.  4. 
Statum ,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

Sterilis ,  w.  genit,  or  abi.,  213,  R.  5,  (2); 
w.  ad ,  213,  r.  4,  (2.) 

SfeJi  and  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (1.) 

4  Stili,’  w.  comparatives,  how  expressed  in 
Latin,  256,  R.  9,  (6.) 

Stipulor ,  217,  R.  3,  (c.) 

Sto,  163,  r.  ;  w.  genit,  of  price,  214,  r.  3; 
w.  pred.  nom.,  210,  R.  3,  (2.);  w.  abl.,  245, 
n.,  5,  and  r.  2;  stat  per  me,  construction 
of,  262,  r.  11;  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  n. 
Strophe,  319,  4. 

Studeo ,  w.  dat.,  223,  r.  2;  with  gerund, 
275,  hi.,  r.  2,  (1.);  with  the  inf.  with  or 
without  an  accusative,  271,  R.  4;  w.  ut , 

273,  4,  (a.);  w.  acc.  id ,  232,  (3.) 

Studiosus ,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1;  275,  in., 

R.l,  (2.) 

Studium ,  w.  genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  II., 
R.  1, (1.) 

Styx ,  gender  of,  28.  E. 

Suadeo ,  constr.,  273,  n.  4;  262,  r.  4. 

Sub ,  in  composition,  force  of,  122 ;  gov¬ 
ernment  of,  235,  (2);  constr.  of  verbs 
compounded  with,  224;  of  adjs.,  222,  r. 


1,(6.) 

Subject  of  a  verb,  140 ;  of  a  proposition, 
201;  202;  simple,  complex,  and  compound, 
202 ;  its  place  in  a  sentence,  279, 2 ;  subject 
of  a  dependent  clause  made  the  object  of 
the  leading  verb,  229,  r.  5,  (a.) 

Subject-nominative,  209 ;  ellipsis  of,  209, 
r.  1  and  2;  when  wanting,  209,  R.  3;  w. 
inf.,  209,  r.  5;  239,  n.  1;  two  or  more  in 
the  singular  with  a  plural  verb,  209,  r.  12  ; 
(2.) 

Subject-accusative,  239;  ellipsis  of,  239, 
r  .  1 — 3 ;  considered  also  as  the  accusative 
of  the  object  after  verbs  of  saying,  showing, 
and  believing,  272,  r.  6. 

Subjective  genitive,  211,  r.  2;  possessive 
pronoun  used  instead  of,  211,  r.  3. 

Subjectus ,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (6.) 


Subjunctive,  143,  2 ;  its  tenses,  145,  R.  2 ; 
how  used,  260 — 266,  and  273 ;  various  use 
of  its  tenses,  260;  how  translated,  260,  I. 
and  ir.,  r.  1;  for  imperative,  260,  r.  6;  in 
impersonal  verbs,  184,  r.  2 ;  in  conditional 
clauses,  261 ;  after  particles,  262  and  263 ; 
after  qui,  264 ;  after  relative  advs.,  264,  r.  2 ; 
indefinite  subj.,  264,  12  and  n.  ;  in  indirect 
questions,  265;  in  inserted  clauses,  266;  in 
oratio  obliqua,  266,  1  and  2;  after  what 
verbs  used,  273;  after  adjectives,  213,  R.  4; 
exchanged  for  acc.  w.  inf.,  273,  3,  (&.); 
subjunctive  in  doubtful  questions,  260,  r.  5 ; 
in  repeated  actions  after  relative  pronouns 
and  adverbs,  264,  12 


Subito ,  193,  n.,  1. 

Subordinate  conjunctions,  198,  ii.  ; — pro¬ 
positions,  201,  6  and  7. 

Substantive,  26 — 103;  substantive  pro¬ 
nouns,  132,  138 ;  their  gender,  132,  8 ;  de¬ 
clined,  133 ;  as  subject  nominative,  ellipsis 
of,  209,  r.  1;  dat.  of,  redundant,  228,  n.; 
substantive  verb,  153 ;  substantive  clauses, 
201,  7 and  8;  229,  r.  5;  231,  r.  2,  (b.);  sub¬ 
stantive  clause  instead  of  the  abl.  after  opus 
est ,  243,  R.  1 ;  and  after  dignus  and  indig¬ 
nus ,  244,  r.  2,  (6.) 

Subter ,  constr.,  235,  (4.) 

Subtractive  expressions  in  numerals,  118, 
4;  120,  2,  3,  and  5. 

Succenseo ,  223,  R.  2;  w.  quod ,  273,  N.  6. 

Sufficio,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  hi., 
r.  2,  (1.) 

Sui,  signification  of,  132, 4 ;  declined.,  133 ; 
use  of,  208;  266,  r.  3;  275,  n.,  r.  1,  (4.) 

Sultis  for  si  vidtis ,  183,  r.  3. 

Sum ,  why  called  an  auxiliary,  153;  why 
substantive,  ib. ;  why  the  copula,  140,  4; 
conjugated,  153;  compds.  of,  154,  r.  5 — r.  7 ; 
w.  a  genit,  of  quality,  211,  r.  6,  (7);  in 
expressions  denoting  part,  property,  duty, 
etc.,  211,  r.  8,  (3);  275,  r.  1,  (5);  denot¬ 
ing  degree  of  estimation,  214;  w.  dat.,  226; 
with  two  datives,  227 ;  how  translated,  227, 
r.  3;  w.  abl.  denoting  in  regard  to,  250, 
r.  3;  w.  an  abl.  of  place,  manner,  etc.,  in 
the  predicate,  210,  r.  3,  (1);  w.  dat.  of  ge¬ 
rund,  275,  R.  2,  (1);  w.  abl.  of  price,  252, 
r.  1;  w.  genit,  of  value,  214;  sunt  qui,  w. 
subj.,  264,  6;  sunt  quidam,  nonnulli ,  etc.. 
264,  6,  r.  4;  ellipsis  of  as  copula,  209,  r.  4 
jin. ;  of  esse  and  fuisse ,  270,  r.  3;  sum  w. 
predicate  nom.,  etc.,  210,  r.  3,  (1);  esse  w. 
predicate  nom.,  271,  N.  2,  and  r.  4. 

Sumo,  w.  two  accs.,  230,  r.  2;  poet.  w. 
inf.,  271,  n.  3. 

Supellex,  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (2) ;  abl.  of, 
82,  e.  5,  (a.) 

Super ,  constr.,  235,  (3);  of  verbs  com¬ 
pounded  with,  224;  of  adjs.,  222,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Superfluo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2),  r.  1. 

Superjacio,  constr.,  233,  (1.) 

Superlative  degree,  122,  6 ;  particular  use 
of,  122,  r.  4 ;  formation  of,  124 ;  by  maxime, 
127,  1;  superlative  with  quisque,  207,  R.  35; 
w.  partitive  genit.,  212,  r.  2,  and  r.  4,  n.  7 ; 
place  of,  296,  (7),  (6.) 

Supero,  w.  abl.,  256,  R.  16,  (3.) 

Supersedeo,  w.  abl.,  242. 

Superstes ,  genit,  of,  112,  2;  abl.  of,  113, 
e.  2;  115, 1,  (a.);  126,  5,  (5.);  w.  genit,  or 
dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Supersum,  w.  dat.,  224,  11;  superest  ut, 
etc.,  262,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

Superus,  its  degrees  of  comparison,  125, 
4 ;  supremus  or  summus,  205,  R.  17 ;  sum- 
mum  used  adverbially,  205,  R.  10;  234,  n., 
R.  3. 

Supines,  25  and  143,  3 ;  few  in  number, 
162,  11;  in  um,  by  what  cases  followed, 
276,  i.;  on  what  verbs  dependent,  276,  ii., 
w.  eo,  276,  ii.,  r.  2  and  3;  supines  in  u, 
after  what  adjs.,  276,  hi.,  and  r.  1;  after 
fas,  nefas,  and  opus ,  276,  in..  R.  2;  of  two 
syllables,  quantity  of,  284,  e.  1. 


406 


INDEX. 


Supra ,  w.  acc.,  195,  4;  w.  adjs.,  127,  6; 
256,  r.  13,  (5.) 

Suppedito ,  w.  two  dats.,  227,  R.  1;  229, 
r.  4,  1;  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Supplex ,  genit,  plur.  of,  114,  e.  2;  115, 
1,  (a.);  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Supposition  or  concession  denoted  by  the 
tenses  of  the  subj.,  260,  r.  3. 

Surripio ,  w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  r.  2. 

Sus ,  gender  of,  30;  67,  e.  4;  genit,  of, 
76,  e.  3;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  84,  e.  1. 

Suscipio ,  w.  participle  in  dus ,  274,  r.  7. 

Suspensus  and  suspectus ,  w.  genit.,  213, 
r.  1. 

Suus,  use  of,  139,  r.  2;  208;  referring  to 
a  word  in  the  predicate,  208,  (7) ;  for  hujus 
when  a  noun  is  omitted,  208,  (7.);  when 
two  nouns  are  united  by  cum,  208,  (7), 
(c. ) ;  denoting  fit,  etc.,  208,  (8.) 

Syllabic  caesura,  310,  n.  1. 

Sjdlabication,  17 — 23. 

Syllables,  number  of,  in  Latin  words,  17 ; 
pure  and  impure,  80;  quantity  of  first  and 
middle,  284 ;  of  penultimate,  291 ;  of  ante¬ 
penultimate,  292;  of  final,  294. 

Syllepsis,  323,  1,  (6.)  and  (3.) 

Symploce,  324,  15. 

Synaeresis,  306,  1. 

Synaloepha,  305,  1 

Synapheia,  307,  3. 

Synchysis,  324,  4. 

Syncope,  322,  4 ;  in  genit,  plur.  of  1st 
decl.,  43,  2;  of  2d  decl.,  53;  in  cases  of  bos 
and  sus,  83^  R.  1  and  84,  e.  1;  of  e  in  ob¬ 
lique  cases  of  nouns  in  er  of  2d  decl.,  48; 
of  3d  decl.,  71,  e.  1;  in  perfect,  etc.,  of 
verbs,  162,  7 ;  see  Omission. 

Synecdoche,  234,  n. ;  323,1,  (5.);  324,3. 

Synesis  or  synthesis,  323,  3,  (4.) 

Synonymia,  324,  29. 

Synopsis  of  Horatian  metres,  320. 

Syntax,  1 ;  200 — 281. 

Systole,  307,  1. 

Syzygy,  303,  4. 


T. 

T,  sound  of,  12;  before  s  in  roots  of 
nouns,  56,  r.  1;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171,  3, 
and  e.  5 ;  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66 ;  genit,  of, 
78 ;  .final,  quantity  of,  299,  2. 

Taceo ,  w.  acc.,  232,  n.  1. 

Tatdet ,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  acc.  229,  r.  6. 

Tactio  w  acc.,  233,  r.  2,  n. 

Talma ,  gender  of,  42,  2. 

Talis ,  demonstr.  adj.,  139,  5,  (3.);  talis 
followed  by  qui  and  the  subj.,  264,  1,  n.; 
ellipsis  of,  264,  1,  (6.);  206,  (3)f  (a.);  and 
(16) ;  talis  ac,  198,  3,  r.  ;  talis — qualis , 
206,  (16.) 

Tam ,  191,  r.  5, ;  tam — quam ,  277,  R.  11 ; 
tam  with  an  adj.  before  qui  and  the  subj., 
264,  1,  n. 

Tamen ,  how  used,  198,  4,  r. 

Tametsi ,  198,  4;  constr.,  263,  2,  (4.) 

Tamquam ,  w.  subj.,  263,  2;  used  like 
quidam ,  207,  r.  33,  (b.)  Jin. ;  w.  abl.  abso¬ 
lute,  257,  n.  4. 

Tandem ,  191,  r.  6. 


Tantum ,  adv.,  193,  ir.,  3. 

Tantus ,  demonstrative,  139,  5,(3.);  fol¬ 
lowed  by  qui  and  the  subj.,  264,  1,  n  • 
ellipsis  of,  264,  1,  (5.);  206,  (3.),  (a.);  and 6; 
tantus — quantus ,  206,  (16);  tanti ,  quanti , 
etc.,  w.  verbs  of  valuing,  214,  r.  1,  (1.); 
tantum ,  w.  genit,  plur.  and  plur.  verb,  209, 
r.  11,  (3),;  tantum.,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3,  n. 
1;  tanti  after  refert  and  in terest,  219,  r.  5; 
tantum,  acc.  of  degree,  231,  r.  5;  232,  (3.); 
256,  r.  16,  n.;  tanto,  w.  comparatives,  256, 
r.  16,  (2.) 

Tantopere ,  191,  r.  5. 

Tardo ,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Tautology,  325,  4. 

Taxo ,  constr.,  217,  r.  5;  w.  abl.  of  price. 
252,  r.  1. 

-te,  enclitic,  133,. r.  2. 

Tempe,  83,  1,  and  94. 

Tempero,  223,  R.  2,  and  (1),  (a.);  tempe¬ 
rare  mihi  non  possum,  quin,  262,  n .  7. 

Temporal  adjs.,  104,  6;  classes  of,  121,  3; — 
conjunctions,  198, 10. 

Tempus,  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7 ;  tempus  est , 
w.  inf.,  270,  R.  1;  tempus  impendere,  275 ,  iit., 
r.  2;  tempus  consumere,  ib.;  temporis  after 
tum  and  tunc,  212,  r.  4,  n.  4;  w.  id,  hoc , 
or  idem,  234,  n.,  r.  3;  tempore  or  in  tem¬ 
pore,  253,  n.  1;  w.  genit,  of  gerunds,  275, 
III.,  r.  1,  (1.) 

Tenax,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1,  (1.) 

Tendo,  constr.,  225,  iv. ;  229,  r.  4,  1;  w. 
inf.,  271,  R.  1. 

Teneo,  w.  perf.  pass,  participle,  274,  r.  4 
Jin.;  teneri,  perf.  pass,  part.,  268,  R.  1.  ( b .) 

Tenses,  144;  division  of,  114,  2  and  3;  of 
the  subj.,  145,  r.  2;  of  the  imperative,  145, 
r.  3;  of  the  infinitive,  145,  R.  4;  connection 
of,  258;  principal  and  historical,  258,  a. 
and  B. ;  of  indie,  mood,  used  one  for  another, 
259;  future  for  imperative,  259,  r.  1,  (4); 
the  preterites  of  the  indie,  for  the  pluperfect 
subj.  in  the  apodosisof  a  conditional  clause, 
259,  r.  4;  of  subj.  mood,  their  use,  260,  i., 
r.  1,  and  ii.,  R.  1;  in  protasis  and  apodo- 
sis,  261;  of  inf.  mood,  use  of,  268;  tenses 
used  in  epistolary  style,  145,  n. ,  3;  259,  r. 
1,  (2.),  (c.) 

Tento ,  constr.,  273,  n.  1;  w.  inf.,  271, 
n.  1. 

Tenus,  w.  genit.,  221,  hi.  ;  w.  abl.,  241, 
r.  1;  place  of,  279,  10;  241,  r.  1. 

-ter,  nouns  in,  48,  1;  71. 

Teres,  in  genit,  sing.,  112,  1;  defective, 
115,  2 ;  its  degrees,  126,  4. 

Terminational  comparative,  and  superla¬ 
tive,  124;  adjs.  without  such  comparison, 
126,  5. 

Terminations  of  inflected  words,  40;  of 
nouns,  table  of,  39;  of  1st  decl.,  41  and  44 
of  2d  decl.,  46;  of  3d  decl.,  55  ;  of  4th  decl. 
87;  of  5th  decl.,  90;  masculine  and  femi 
nine  affixed  to  the  same  root,  32,  3 ;  of  de 
grees  of  comparison  in,  adjs.,  124,  125;  ii 
adverbs,  194,  2;  personal,  of  verbs,  147,  3 
verbal,  150;  table  of  verbal,  152. 

Terra.,  as  genit,  of  place,  221,  R.  3,  (4) 
terra  marique ,  254,  R.  2;  terrarum ,  212,  R.  4, 
N.  2. 

Terreo ,  w.  ut  or  ne ,  262,  n.  3. 


INDEX, 


407 


Teruncius,  327,  p.  371;  teruncii  habere , 
214,  r.  1. 

Tete ,  intensive,  133,  R.  2. 

Tetrameter,  304,  2;  a  priore ,  312,  iv. ; 
a  posteriore ,  312,  v. ;  meiurus,  312,  xi. ; 
catalectic,  312,  xu. 

Te  trap  totes,  94. 

Tetrastrophon,  319,  3. 

2%,  in  syllabication,  18,  2. 

‘  That.’  sign  of  what  moods,  273;  instead 
of  a  repeated  subst. ,  how  expressed  in  Latin, 
207,  r.  26,  (e.) 

Thesis,  in  prosody,  308. 

Thinking,  verbs  of,  their  constr.,  272. 

Thousands,  how  expressed  in  Latin,  118, 
6,  (a.) 

Ti,  how  pronounced,  12. 

Tiaras ,  45,  3. 

Tibi ,  its  pronunciation,  7,  R.  1 ;  19,  e. 

Tigris,  genit,  of,  75,  2;  acc.  of,  80,  e.  2; 

abl.  of,  82,  e.  2,  (6.) 

Time,  advs.  of,  191,  it.;  conjs.,  198,  10 ; 

acc.  of,  236;  abl.  of,  253;  with  de  or  sub , 
253,  r.  4 ;  with  intra  ib. ;  with  in,  253,  R.  5 ; 
expressed  by  id  with  a  genit.,  253,  r.  3; 
by  the  abl.  absolute,  257 ;  the  concrete  noun 
instead  of  the  abstract  title,  257,  r.  7 ;  mode 
of  reckoning,  326 ;  table  of,  326,  6. 

Timeo,  223,  r.  2,  (1.);  w.  ut  or  ne,  262, 
r.  7;  w.  inf.,  271,  s.  1. 

Timidus ,  w.  geuit.,  213.  R.  1. 

Tiryns ,  genit,  of,  77,  e.  2. 

-tis,  genit,  in,  77,  2;  71,  2. 

Titles,  place  of,  279,  9,  (a.) 

‘Too’  or  ‘rather,’  how  expressed  in 
Latin.  122,  r.  3;  256,  r.  9. 

-tor  and  -trix,  verbals  in,  102,  6 ;  used  as 
adjs.,  129,  8. 

Tot ,  indecl.,  115,  4;  correlative  of  quot, 
121,  5;  206,  (16);  syncope  of,  before  quot, 
206,  (16.) 

Totidem ,  indecl.,  115,  4. 

Toties,  correlative  of  quoties ,  121,  5. 

Totus ,  how  declined,  107;  toto,  tota ,  abl. 
without  in,  254,  r.  2;  totus,  instead  of  an 
adverb,  205,  r.  15. 

Towns,  gender  of  names  of,  29,  2 ;  constr. ; 
see  Place. 

- tr ,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  n.,  r.  3. 

Traditio ,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  8. 

Trado,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1,  and 
r.  6;  w.  part.  fut.  pass.,  274,  r.  7 ,  (a.); 
traditur,  constr.,  271,  R.  2;  trador,  constr., 
271,  r.  2. 

Tranquillo ,  scii,  mari ,  257,  r.  9,  (1.) 

Trans,  constr.  of  verbs  compounded  with, 
233,  1;  in  passive,  234,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Trajicio ,  constr.,  229,  r.  4,  1;  233,  (1.) 

Transitive  verbs,  141 ;  w.  acc.,  229-  ellip¬ 
sis  of,  229,  r.  2. 

Trees,  gender  of  names  of,  29. 

Tres,  how  declined,  109. 

Trepidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

Tribuo,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1 ;  w.  two 
accs.,  230,  r.  2;  w.  part.  perf.  pass.,  274, 
R.  7,  (a.) 

Tricolon,  319,  2 ;  tricolon  tristrophon  and 
tetrastrophon,  319,  6. 

Tricorpor ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2;  115,  1. 

Tricuspis ,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2. 


Trihemimeris,  304,  5. 

Trimeter,  304,  2 ;  catalectic,  312,  vii. 

Tripes,  genit,  ol,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113, 
e.  2. 

Triptotes,  94. 

Tristrophon,  319,  3. 

Trochaic  or  feminine  caesura,  310,  n.  1; — 
metre,  315  and  303;  tetrameter  catalectic, 
315,  i.;  dimeter  catalectic,  315,  iv. ;  tro¬ 
chaic  pentameter  or  Phalecian,  315,  in. 

Tropes,  324. 

- trum ,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Truncus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  k.  5,  (4.) 

Tu,  declined,  133;  in  nom.  with  adj.  in 
voc.,  205,  r.  15,  (c.) ;  used  indefinitely.  209, 
r.  7 ;  when  expressed,  209,  r.  1;  tux,  femi¬ 
nine,  with  masc.  or  neuter  gerundive,  275, 
in.,  r.  1,  (4.) 

Turn  and  quum,  191,  R.  7;  turn — turn , 
277,  R.  8;  turn  and  tunc ,  difference  between, 
ib. ;  tum  maxime,  ib. ;  tum  temporis,  212, 
r.  4,  jj.  4. 

Tumultu,  as  abl.  of  time,  253,  n.  1. 

Tunc  and  nunc,  191,  r.  7 ;  tunc  temporis , 
212,  r.  4,  n.  4. 

Tumidus  and  turgidus,  w.  abl.,  213,  r. 
5,  (5.) 

Turris ,  declined,  57. 

-tus,  adjs.  in,  128,  7;  nouns  in,  of  3d 
decl.,  76,  e.  2;  102,  7. 

Thus,  how  declined,  139 ;  used  reflexive- 
ly,  139  r.  1 ;  tua  after  refert  and  interest . 
219,  r.  1. 

U. 

IT,  sound  of,  7  and  8 ;  u  and  v,  2,  3 ;  u  in 
genit,  and  voc.  of  Greek  nouns.  54;  roots 
of  nouns  of  3d  decl.  ending  in,  56,  I. ;  dat. 
in,  89;  neuters  of  4th  deck  in,  87;  dat.  in 
of  4th  deck,  89,  3;  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  167, 
and  171,  e.  2;  increment  in,  3d  deck,  287, 
3;  plur.,  288;  of  verbs,  290;  final,  quanti¬ 
ty  of,  298;  285,  R.  4;  u  and  itu  in  3d  roots 
of  verbs,  167. 

Ua,  ue,  etc.,  pronunciation  of,  9,  4  and 
5;  quantity  of,  283,  ti.,  e.  3. 

Uber,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (3.) 

-ubus,  in  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  89,  5. 

Ubi,  genit.,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2;  w.  indie, 
perf.  instead  of  pluperf.,  259,  r.  1,  (ek); 
ubiubi ,  191,  r.  1. 

- ucis ,  genitives  in,  78,  (5);  112,  2. 

-udis,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  1. 

-uis,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  3. 

-uleus,  a,  um ,  diminutives  in,  100,  3, 
c.  1. 

Ullus,  pronom.  adj.,  139,  5,  (1),  (a.); 
how  declined,  107;  how  used,  207r.  31. 

Ulterior,  its  degrees,  126,  1;  ultimus  for 
ultimum ,  205,  r.  15;  how  translated,  205, 
r.  17. 

Ultrix,  gender  of,  125,  1,  (6.) 

Ultra,  prep.,  195,  4;  adv.,  191,  r. 

Tfltum  ire  for  ulcisci ,  276,  n.,  R.  2. 

-ulurn,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

-ulus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3; 
128,  5. 

-um,  geuit.  plur.  in  instead  of  arum ,  43; 
instead  of  orum,  53;  nounsending  in,  46; 


408 


INDEX, 


In  genit,  plur.  3d  decl.,  83;  114; — adys.  in, 
192.  ii.,  4.  (b.) 

Uncia ,  327,  p.  372. 

- undus ,  participles  in,  162,  20. 

Unde  domo,  255,  r.  1. 

Umquam,  1§1,  n . ;  umquam,  usquam,  us¬ 
que,  uspiam ,  191,  r.  6! 

- untis ,  in  genit,  of  Greek  nouns,  76,  e.  6. 

Unus ,  declined,  107 ;  when  used  in  plur., 
118,  r.  2;  added  to  superlatives.  127,  n.  2; 
unus  et  alter ,  with  verbs  singular,  209, 
r.  12;  w.  relative  and  subj.,  264,  10;  for 
solum ,  tantum ,  etc.,  205,  r.  15,  (6.);  unum , 
as  acc.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Unusquisque ,  how  declined,  138,  4. 

-wr,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66,  67 ;  genit, 
of,  70,  71. 

-ura,  verbals  in,  102,  7,  R.  2. 

Z7r5s,  in  apposition  to  names  of  towns, 
237,  k.  2,  ( b .) 

- urio ,  verbs  in,  187,  II.,  3. 

-wn's’  genitives  in,  76,  e.  3. 

-us,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  46;  exceptions 
In,  49 — 51;  voc.  sing,  of,  46,  n.  and  52; 
of  3d  decl.,  gender  of,  66;  67;  genitive  of, 
76;  Greek  genit,  in,  69,  e.  3;  nouns  in  of 
4th  decl.,  87 — 89;  participles  in,  how  de¬ 
clined,  105,  R.  2;  verbals  in,  102,  7;  final, 
quantity  of,  301. 

Usitatum  est ,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3. 

Uspiam ,  usquam ,  usque ,  191,  r.  6;  us¬ 
quam ,  w.  genit.,  212,  p..  4,  N.  2;  usque,  w. 
acc.,  195,  r.  3;  235,  r.  9. 

Usus,  w.  abi.,  243;  usu  venit,  ut,  262, 
R.  3,  n.  1;  w.  genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  in., 
R.  1,(1.) 

Ut  or  uti,  a  conj.,  198,  8;  ut  non  and  ut 
ne,  ib.;  w.  subj.,  262;  its  correlatives,  262, 
r.  1;  ellipsis  of,  262,  R.  4;  its  meaning 
after  metuo,  etc.,  262,  r.  7;  ut  non ,  262, 
r.  5,  and  r.  6,  2;  ut — ita  or  sic,  277,  r.  12, 
(6.);  .w*,. ‘as,’  ellipsis  of,  277,  r.  17;  ut, 
*  even  if,’  and  ut  non ,  w.  subj.,  262,  r.  2; 
ut  with  certain  impersonal  verbs  and  subj., 
262,  r.  3;  in  questions  expressing  indigna¬ 
tion,  270,  r.  2,  (a.);  ut,  ut  primum,  etc., 
with  the  historical  perf.,  indie.,  instead  of 
the  pluperf.,  259,  r.  1,  (</.);  its  place,  279, 
3,  (6.);  ut  after  est  with  a  predicate  adj., 
262,  r.  3,  N.  4;  ut  credo,  ut  puto,  etc.,  in 
interposed  clauses,  277,  r.,  r.  17;  ut,  ‘be¬ 
cause,’  277,  I.,  r.  12,  (6.);  ut  qui,  264,  8,  2; 
ut  si,  w.  subj.,  263,  2;  ut  ita  dicam,  207, 
r.  33,  (6.)  Jin. ;  ut,  ;  as  if,’  w.  abl.  absolute, 
257,  n.  4;  utut .  w.  indie.,  259,  r.  4,  (3); 
ellipsis  of  ut  when  ne  precedes  and  et,  etc., 
follow,  278,  r.  6,  (c.) 

Utcumque,  w.  indie.,  259,  r.  4,  (3.) 

Uter,  how  declined,  107 ;  w.  dual  genit., 
212,  b.  2,  n.  1. 

Utercumque,  how  declined,  107. 

Uterlibet,  uterque,  and  ut  ervis ,  their  mean¬ 
ing  and  declension,  107;  139,  5,  (1),  (b.); 
uterque ,  use  of,  207,  R.  32;  uterque,  w.  plur. 
verb,  209,  r.  11,  (4.) 

Utilis ,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  275,  m.,  r.  2; 
vr.  ad,  222,  r.  4,  (1.);  utile  est  ut,  262,  r.  3, 
N.  3;  utilis,  w.  inf.  poetically,  270,  r.  1,  (&.); 
275,  k,2;  utilius  fuit,  indie,  instead  of  subj., 
259,  r.  8;  w.  supine  in  u ,  276,  m.,  a.  1. 


Utinam  and  uti,  w.  subj.,  263, 1. 

-utis,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  2;  112,  2. 

Utor,  w.  abl.,  245;  w.  acc.,  245,  I.,  r.  ; 
w.  two  ablatives,  245,  N. ;  utor,fruor,  etc., 
their  gerundives,  275,  n.,  r.  1. 

Utpote  qui ,  w.  subj.,  264,  8,  (2.) 

Utrique,  how  used,  107,  R.  32,  (c.) 

Utrum  and  utrumne,  198,  11. 

-utus,  adjectives  in,  128,  7. 

-uus,  adjectives  in,  129,  3. 

-war,  nouns  in,  genit,  of,  78,  2,  (5.) 

Uxor ,  ellipsis  of,  211,  r.  7. 

y. 

V,  changed  to  u,  163,  2 ;  sometimes  drop¬ 
ped  in  forming  the  2d  root  of  verbs  of  the 
3d  conj.,  171,  e.  4. 

Vaco,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Vacuus,  w.  genit,  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.); 
cf.  251,  n. 

Vado,  constr.,  225,  IV. ;  232.  it.  1;  233, 
(3),  N.l. 

Va,  w.  dat.,  228,  3;  w.  acc.,  238,  2. 

Valde,  127,  2. 

Valeo ,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  r.  1;  252;  w.  acc., 
252,  r.  4;  valere  or  vale  dico,  w.  dat.,  225, 
I.,  n.  ;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Validus ,  213,  R.  5,  (4.) 

Valuing,  verbs  of,  214,  R.  2;  w.  genit., 
214;  w.  abl.,  252,  r.  1. 

Vapulo ,  142,  r.  3. 

Variable  nouns,  92;  adjs.,  122. 

Vas,  genit,  of,  72,  e.  1;  gender  of,  62, 
e.  1,  and  e.  2;  93,  2. 

-ve,  198,  2,  and  n.  1,  p.  76;  place  of,  279, 
3,  (c.) 

Vehor,  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Vel,  198,  2;  difference  between  vel  and 
aut,  198,  r.;  vel  w.  superlative  degree,  127, 
4;  w.  comparatives,  256,  r.  9,  ( b .) 

Velim,  w.  subj.  without  ut,  260,  R.  4; 
262,  r.  4. 

Vellem ,  how  used,  260,  R.  2. 

Velox,  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Velut ,  velut  si,  veluti,  w.  subj.,  263,  2; 
velut,  ‘as  if,’  w.  abl.  absolute,  257,  N.  4. 

Venalis ,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252. 

Vendo,  w.  abl.,  252;  w.  genifc.,  214,  r.  3, 

N  1. 

Veneo ,  142,  r.  3;  252;  214,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

Venio ,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1 ;  w.  ad 
or  in,  225,  iv. ;  w.  dat.,  225.  r.  2:  venit 
mihi  in  mentem,  constr.,  211,  r.  8,  (5): 
216,  r.  3. 

Venitur,  conjugated,  184,  2,  ( b .) 

Verbal  terminations,  152;  nouns,  102; 
w.  acc.,  233,  r.  2,  n.;  of  place,  237.  r  1; 
w.  dat.,  222,  r.  8;  w.  abl.  of  place,  255; 
w.  genit,  of  personal  pronouns,  211,  r.  3, 
(a.);  verbal  adjs.,  129. 

Verbs,  140 — 189;  subject  of,  140,  1; 
active  or  transitive,  141,  i.;  neuter  or  in¬ 
transitive,  141,  n. ;  neuter  passive,  142,  2; 
neutral  passive,  142,  3;  deponent,  142,  4; 
common,  142,  4,  (6.),*  principal  parts  of, 
151,  4;  neuter,  participles  of,  162,  16;  in¬ 
ceptive,  173;  desiderative,  187,  n. ,  3;  176, 
n.;  irregular,  178—182;  defective,  183;  re- 


INDEX. 


409 


dundant,  185;  verbs  spelled  alike,  or 
having  the  same  perfect  or  supine,  186; 
derivation  of,  187;  imitative,  187,  3;  fre¬ 
quentative,  187,  ii.,  1;  inceptive,  187,  ii., 
2;  desiderative,  187,  ii.,  3;  diminutive, 
187,  ii.,  4;  intensive,  187.  ir..  5;  187,  ii , , 

1,  (e.);  composition  of,  188;  changes  in 
composition,  189;  compounds  from  simples 
notin  use,  189,  n.  4;  agreement  of,  209, 
(6.);  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  4;  person  of  with 
qui,  209,  r.  6;  agreeing  with  predicate 
nominative,  209,  r.  9 ;  with  collective 
nouns,  209,  r.  11;  plural  with  two  or  more 
nominatives,  209,  r.  12;  after  uterque ,  etc., 
209,  r.  11,  (4);  after  a  nominative  with 
cum  and  the  abl.,  209,  r.  12,  (61 ;  after  nomi¬ 
natives  connected  by  aut ,  209,  r.  12,  (5); 
their  place  in  a  sentence,  279,  2;  in  a 
period,  280. 

Vere  and  vero ,  192,  4,  N.  1. 

Vereor ,  w.  genit,  poet.,  220,  1;  w.  ut  or 
ne ,  262,  r.  7;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Verisimile  est  ut,  262,  r.  3,  n.  3^  w.  inf. 
as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Veritum  est ,  w.  acc.,  229,  r.  6. 

Vero ,  use  of  in  answers,  192,  4,  N.  1;  198, 
9.  r.,  (a  );  ellipsis  of,  278,  R.  11;  its  place, 
279,  3,  (c.) 

Verses,  304;  combinations  of  in  poems, 
319. 

Versification,  302. 

Versus,  w.  acc.,  195,  R.  3;  235,  r.  9;  place 
of,  279,  10,  (/) 

Verto ,  constr.,  225,  iv. ;  w.  two  datives, 
227,  R.  1;  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Verum  est,  ut ,  262,  r.  3,  n.  3;  w.  inf.  as 
subject,  269,  r.  2;  verum ,  conj.,  192,  9;  its 
place,  279,  3;  verum  and  verum-tamen , 
‘  I  say,’  278,  r.  10 ;  verum  enimvero ,  198, 
9,  r..  (a.);  vero  after  comparatives,  256, 
r.  9. 

Vescor ,  with  abl.,  245,  i.;  with  acc.,  245, 

i.,  R. 

Vespere,  or  -r/,  253,  n.  1. 

Vester ,  how  declined,  139,  1;  vestrbm , 
133,  3;  used  after  partitives, 212,  r.  2,  n.  2. 

Vestio ,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Veto ,  273,  2.  ( d.)\  262,  r.  4;  w.  acc.  and 
inf.,  272,  r.  6. 

Vetus,  declension  of,  112,2;  its  superla¬ 
tive,  125,  1;  126,  3. 

Via ,  abl.  of  place  without  in,  254,  R.  3. 

Vicem  for  vice,  247.  1,  n.  3. 

Vicinice,  genit,  of  place,  221,  R.  3,(4.); 
212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  ( b .) 

Vicinus,  w.  dat.  or  genit.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Victrix ,  115,  1,  (5.);  how  declined  as  an 
adj.,  129,  8. 

Videlicet  and  scilicet ,  198,  7,  R.,  (a.); 
pr.,  285,  r.  4,  n.  2. 

Video,  w.  acc.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1;  w.  ut 
or  ne,  262,  n.  3;  videres,  260,  r.  2;  video 
for  euro,  w.  ut,  273,  N.  1;  videor ,  constr., 
271,  R.  2;  272,  r.  6. 

Viduus,  constr.,  213,  r.  5,  (4);  250, 

2,  (1.) 

Vigeo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Vigil,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  3;  genit,  plur.  of, 
114,  e.  2;  115,  1,  (a.) 

Vigilice,  326, 1,  (2.) 

85 


Vigilias ,  vigilare ,  232. 

Vilis,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252. 

Vir,  how  declined,  48,  2. 

Virgilius,  voc.  of,  52;  accent  of,  14,  e. 

Virgo,  declined,  57. 

Virus ,  gender  of,  51. 

Vis,  declined,  85;  acc.  sing,  of,  79,  2; 
abl.  sing.,  82,  e.  2;  genit,  plur.,  83.  i r . ,  3; 
94;  vi  and  per  vim ,  difference  between, 
247,  3,  r.  4;  w. genit,  of  gerunds,  275,  in., 
r.  1,  (1.) 

Vitabundus ,  w.  acc.,  233,  R.  2,  n. 

Vitam  vivere ,  232,  (1.) 

Vitio  creati  magistratus,  247,  2. 

Vivo,  w.  abl..  245,  n.,  4;  w.  pred.  nom., 
210.  R.  3,  (2);  tertia  vivitur  ce.tas.  234,  m. 

Vix,  with  part.  fut.  pass.,  274,  r.  12; 
vixdum,  277,  i.,  r.  16. 

Vocative,  37 ;  sing.,  its  form,  40,  3;  plur., 
40,  4;  ellipsis  of,  240,  r.  2. 

Voco,  constr.,  225,  r.  1;  230,  n.  1;  pass., 
210,  r.  3,  i3.) 

Voices,  141. 

Volucer,  in  genit,  plur.,  108,  r.  2. 

Volo,  {are),  compds.  of,  233,  (3),  n. 

Volo,  conjugated,  178,  1;  w.  perf.  inf., 
268,  r.  2;  w.  perf.  part.,  and  ellipsis  of 
esse,  269,  k.  3;  its  construction,  271,  R.  4, 
and  n.  4;  273,  4;  262,  r.  4;  volens,  w.  dat. 
of  person,  226,  R.  3;  volo  bene  and  male 
alicui,  225,  i.,  n.;  volo,  w.  reflexive  pron., 
228,  n .,  (6.) 

Voluntary  agent  of  pass,  verbs.  248,  T.; 
ellipsis  of,  141,  r.  2;  248,  i.,  r.  1;  when 
expressed  by  per  and  acc.,  247,  r.  4;  of 
neuter  verbs,  248,  r.  2;  dative  of  voluntary 
agent,  225,  ii.  and  hi. 

Volutum,  pr.,  284,  r.  3. 

Vos,  see  tu,  133. 

Voti  and  votorum  damnati,  217,  R.  3. 

Vowels,  3,  1;  sounds  of,  7  and  8;  vowel, 
before  a  mute  and  liquid,  its  quantity,  13, 
6,  and  283,  iv.,  e.  2;  before  another  vowel, 
quantity  of,  13,  3,  and  283,  i.;  in  Greek 
words,  283,  e.  6;  before  two  consonants, 
13.  5,  and  283,  iv. ;  ending  first  part  of  a 
compound,  quantity  of,  285,  R.  4. 

Vulgus,  gender  of,  51 ;  95. 

Vultur,  gender  of,  67. 


W. 

W,  not  used  in  Latin,  2,  4. 

Weight,  acc.  of,  236,  r.  7 ;  weights,  Ro¬ 
man.  327. 

Willingness,  verbs  of,  constr.,  273,  4. 
Winds,  gender  of  names  of,  28. 

Wishing,  verbs  of,  constr.,  271,  r.  4. 
Words,  division  of,  17 — 23;  arrangement 
of,  279 ;  gender  of  as  mere  words,  34,  3. 
Writers  in  different  ages,  329. 


X 

X,  sound  of,  12;  its  equivalents,  3,  2;  56, 
r.  2;  171,  1;  in  syllabication,  18,  4;  nouns 
in,  gender  of,  62  and  65;  genitive  of, 
78,  2. 


410 


INDEX, 


Y. 

Y,  found  only  in  Greek  words,  2,  5; 
sound  of,  7,  r.  2;  8.  e.  5;  nouns  in,  gender 
of,  62;  genitive  of,  69;  increment  in,  3d 
decl.,  287,  3;  final,  quantity  of,  298;  285, 
r.  4. 

- ychis ,  in  genitive,  78,  2,  (6.) 

-yds,  genitives  in,  78,  2,  (6.) 

-■ ydis ,  genitives  in,  77,  1. 

Yt,  how  pronounced,  9,  1;  abl.  in,  82, 

a.  6. 


•ygis,  genitives  in,  178,  2,  (6.) 

- ynos ,  Greek  genitive  in,  71,  2. 

-ys,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62;  63,  e.  ;  geni¬ 
tive  of,  77;  acc.  of,  80,  n.j  abl.  of,  82,  e.  6; 
final,  quantity  of,  301. 

yx ,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  65,  6. 

Z. 

Z,  found  only  in  words  derived  from  the 
Greek,  2,  5;  its  equivalents.  3.  2. 

Zeugma,  323,  1,  (6.)  and  (2.) 


* 


' 


112  062 


62042 


